The URL can be used to link to this page

IP #995 contractsRequest for Action March 25, 2019 Approved by: Kirk McDonald, City Manager Originating Department: Parks & Recreation By: Susan Rader, Director & Kirk McDonald, City Manager Agenda Section Development & Planning Item Number 8.4 Agenda Title Resolution approving a contract for construction of an outdoor pool facility with Donlar Construction Company for $11,350,275 (Improvement Project No. 995) Requested Action Staff requests that the City Council approve the resolution awarding the pool contract to the lowest responsible bid, Donlar Construction Company, in the amount of $11,350,275.00. The base project includes the construction of the 50-meter pool, current channel, shallow water area, body slides, bathhouse, mechanical building and surrounding area at $10,826,775.00. Alternates to be included in the project will be the vortex pool, drop slide, water walk, basketball hoops, Wibit play feature, additional shade umbrellas, shade rental areas, the shallow water play feature alternative and CCTV cameras for the pool and park. The alternates will be $523,500.00, bringing the total project cost to $11,350,275.00. These bids were reviewed with the City Council at the work session on March 18, 2019. Staff was directed to place the contracts on the agenda for the March 25, 2019 council meeting for formal approval. The city engineer will be in attendance to respond to any questions. P-olicy;;^ast ?ractice The City Council is presented with bids for their review and approval as part of a city project. Background The city began discussing the police department and city hall space needs issue in 2013. Following citizen task force reports, the City Council approved a contract for design and construction services with Wold Architects and Engineers in January 2017. On December 11, 2017, the Council awarded a contract for the construction of a new police station/city hall facility on the site of the 50-year old outdoor pool. In conjunction with the police station/city hall project, it was necessary to have master planning completed for the Civic Center Park and a new outdoor pool. In January 2017, Council approved an agreement with Stantec Engineering and two resident committees were formed to assist and guide the planning process. Throughout 2017, committee planning meetings were held, including an open house and a listening session for the pool. In December 201.7, the Council discussed the resident committee recommendations and expressed a preferred pool option if additional funding of $2 million could be received in state bond funding to expand the pool from 25-yards to 50-meters. I:\RPA\P&R\Pool and Civic Center Pk Projects\2019\Pool - Blue Project\Q - Award pool project contract.docx Request for Action, Page 2 In May 2018, notice was received that $2 million in funding from the State was approved. In June, the Council approved an agreement with Stantec for the engineering and planning of the city hall landscaping, parking lots, pool and Civic Center Park improvements. The majority of the planning and design took place through the summer and fall. On December 10, 2018, the City Council approved the plans and specifications and authorized the advertisement of bids for each of the projects: Demolition; City Hall Landscaping, Parking Lots, Trails, Stormwater, and Park Landscaping; Theater; Skatepark; and Pool. Two bids were received for the pool project, which were opened on March 15, 2019. The low base bid was received by Donlar Construction Company for $10,826,775.00. The bid also included thirteen alternates. The Council reviewed the bids and staff recommendations at the March work session. Base Bid En ineer"s Estimate $10,800,000.00 Donlar Construction Com a-m $10,826,775.00 Bradbury Stamm Construction Winkelman LLC $11,323,456.00 Recommendation It is the recommendation of staff and the city engineer that the City Council award the low base bid of $10,826,775.00, plus $523,500.00 in alternates, including the vortex pool, drop slide, water walk, basketball hoops, Wibit play feature, additional shade umbrellas, shade rental areas, the shallow water play feature alternative and CCTV cameras for the pool and park., for improvement project no. 995 to Donlar Construction Company. The base bid plus the recommended alternates will total $11,350,275.00. The project will start in April, with an expected opening of June 2020. The contractor has a large portfolio, but some past projects have included the Monticello Community Center and the Maple Grove Government Center. They are currently working on the Metro Transit Police Facility. Funding The majority of the pool facility will be paid for with the park/pool bonds issued in December 2018 with additional bonds to be issued in June 2019. Funding will also include a $2 million grant from the State of Minnesota, a $40,000 grant from Minnesota Swimming, Inc. and a possible $257,750 Hennepin Youth Sports Facility Grant. RESOLUTION NO. 19-40 RESOLUTION APPROVING CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION OF OUTDOOR POOL COMPLEX, BATHHOUSE, MECHANICAL BUILDING AND SURROUNDING SITE WORK WITH DONLAR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (Improvement Project No. 995) BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council of the City of New Hope as follows: WHEREAS, the construction of an outdoor pool complex, bathhouse, mechanical building and surrounding site work is necessary ("Pool Project") is included as a part of the redevelopment of Civic Center Park; WHEREAS, City Staff duly advertised for sealed bids for a contractor to perform the Pool Project, with sealed bids opened on March 15, 2019; WHEREAS, two bids were received by the City and the responsible low bid was submitted by Donlar Construction Company, with a base bid of $10,826,775; WHEREAS, it is necessary for the City to formally select Donlar Construction Company as the contractor to handle the Pool Project and to enter into a contract with Donlar Construction Company for the purpose of performing the work relating to the Pool Project; WHEREAS, City staff is hereby seeking approval from the City of the selection of Donlar Construction Company as the duly qualified contractor to perform the Pool Project and authorize a contract to be prepared for said Pool Project; WHEREAS, certain bid alternates are being recommended by City Staff and include a vortex pool, drop slide, water walk, basketball hoops, Wibit play feature, additional shade umbrellas, shade rental areas, shallow water play feature alternative and CCTV cameras for the pool complex and park ("Alternates 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 and 12") with a collective low bid of $523,500 received from Donlar Construction Company; WHEREAS, the total contract project cost for the Pool Project with Alternates 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 and 12 is $11,350,275, with the funding source to be from Park/Pool bonds; WHEREAS, City staff and City Attorney have reviewed the proposed terms of the proposed Pool Project Contract and are agreeable with the terms, believing them to be in the best interest of the City to accept the proposal from Donlar Construction Company to handle the Pool Project; WHEREAS, the language in the Request for Action dated March 18, 2019, is incorporated herein; and WHEREAS, the City Council hereby approves the selection of Donlar Construction Company as the contractor to handle the Pool Project, it being in the best interest of the City to engage the services of Donlar Construction Company. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED by the City Council in and for the City of New Hope as follows: 1. That the above recitals are incorporated herein by reference. 2. Donlar Construction Company is hereby selected as the contractor for the Pool Project including Alternates 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 and 12. 3. That a proposed contract with Donlar Construction Company shall be prepared and is subject to the review and approval by City Staff and the City Attorney of the final language and exhibits and final negotiation regarding the terms. 4. The Mayor, City Manager and New Hope City staff are authorized and directed to sign the proposed contract and all other appropriate documents, and to take whatever additional actions are necessary or desirable, to complete the proposed contract and engage the services of Donlar Construction Company. Dated the 25 h day of March, 2019. 6�1"L athi htwlwfi, Mayor Attest: Valerie Leone, City Clerk P:\Attomcy\SAS11 Client Filesl2 City of New Hope\99-21828 Pool, Theater Site Plan\Resolution approving Donlar Construction Company- Pool -3-19-19.docx The cost breakdown of the project: Pool Project: Low Bid Indirect Costs Project Total (incl. indirect) Engineers Estimate (incl. indirect) Difference Base Bid $10,826,775.00 $1,438,672.57 $12,265,447.57 $12,250,000.00 $15,447.57 Alt 1: Vortex Pool $177,000.00 $177,000.00 $172,000.00 $5,000.00 Alt 2: Drop Slide $101,000.00 $101,000.00 $111,000.00 -$10,000.00 Alt 3: Climbing Wall Not recommendin Alt 4: Water Walk $56,000.00 $56,000.00 $60,000.00 -$4,000.00 Alt 5: Basketball Hoops $8,000.00 $8,000.00 $11,000.00 -$3,000.00 Alt 6: 50-meter Play Feature (Wibit) $20,000.00 $20,000.00 $21,000.00 -$1,000.00 Alt 7: Addt. Shade Umbrellas (3 $34,000.00 $34,000.00 $50,000.00 -$16,000.00 Alt 8: Fabric Shade Structures (2) $21,000.00 $21,000.00 $44,000.00 -$23,000.00 Alt 9: Shotcrete alternate Not recommending Alt 10: Shallow Water Play Feature alternate $71,000.00 $71,000.00 $50,000.00 $21,000.00 Alt 11: CCTV Cameras on Bathhouse $19,000.00 $19,000.00 $35,000.00 -$16,000.00 Alt 12: CCTV Cameras in Park $16,500.00 $16,500.00 $15,000.00 $1,500.00 Alt 13: Alt Water Slide Not recommending TOTAL $11,305,275.00 $12,788,947.57 $12,819,000.00 -$30,052.43 Other costs that have been identified include a contract completion incentive of $50,000, if the project is completed on schedule and approximately $150,000 in items to be purchased directly by the City. Items will include lifeguard chairs, signage, lane lines and other pool related equipment. Attachments ■ Resolution • Letter from Chris Long, City Engineer ■ Bid Tabulation ■ Civic Center Park Plan ■ Pool Concept 2A ■ Cost Summary Table ■ Master Schedule I:\RFA\P&R\Pool and Civic Center Pk Projects\ 2019\ Pool -Blue Project\Q -Award pool project contract.docx ® Stantec Stantec Consulting Services Inc. 733 Marquette Avenue, Suite 1000 Minneapolis MN 55402 March 15, 2019 Honorable Mayor and City Council City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Re: New Hope Outdoor Pool City Project No. 995 Stantec Project No. 193804337 Bid Results Dear Honorable Mayor and City Council: Bids were opened for the New Hope Outdoor Pool Project on March 15, 2019. Transmitted herewith is a copy of the Bid Tabulation for your information and file. Copies will also be distributed to each Bidder once the Project has been awarded. There was a total of 2 Bids. The following summarizes the results of the Bids received: Contractor Total Base Bid Alt No. 1 Alt No. 2 Alt No. 3 Alt No. 4 Low Donlar Construction $10,826,775.00 $177,000.00 $101,000.00 $59,000.00 $56,000.00 Company #2 Bradbury Stamm $11,323,397.26 $176,000.00 $88,000.00 $59,000.00 $56,000.00 Construction Winkelman LLC Alt No. 5 Alt No. 6 Alt No. 7 Alt No.8 Donlar Construction $8,000.00 $20,000.00 $34,000.00 $21,000.00 Company Bradbury Stamm $8,000.00 $20,000.00 $34,000.00 $28,000.00 Construction Winkelman LLC Alt No. 9 Alt No. 10 Alt No. 11 Alt No.12 Donlar Construction $26,000.00 $71,000.00 $19,000.00 $16,500.00 Com an Bradbury Stamm (25,000.00) $61,000.00 $19,000.00 $16,000.00 Construction Winkelman LLC Alt No. 13 Donlar Construction No Bid Company Bradbury Stamm No Bid Construction Winkelman LLC Transmitted herewith is a copy of the Bid Tabulation for your information and file. Copies will also be distributed to each Bidder once the Project has been awarded. The low Bidder on the Project was Donlar Construction Company with a Total Base Bid Amount of $10,826,775.00. This compares to the Engineer's Opinion of Probable Costs of $10,800,000. ({o March 15, 2019 Page 2 of 2 The City Council has the option to consider awarding any combination of Alternates with the Base Bid. Donlar Construction Company. is the low Bidder regardless of which Alternate is awarded or not awarded. Should you have any questions, please feel free to contact me. Sincerely, STANTEC CONSULTING SERVICES INC. Chris Long, P.E. Enclosure Design with community In mind a stagy hereby certify that this is an exact Project Name: New Hope Outdoor Pool rei-voduction of bids received. City Project No.: 995 Bid Opening: Friday, March 15, 2019 at 10 A.M., CDT Project No.: 193804337 Owner: City of New Hope, MN Christopher W. Long, PE License No. 47106 Item Num BID TABULATION Item Units Qty Bidder No. 1 Donlar Construction Company Unit Price Total Bidder No. 2 Bradbury Stamm Construction Winkelman, LLC Unit Price Total PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT FUNDING RELATED ELEMENTS 1-1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE LS 1 $1,963,000.00 $1,963,000.00 $2,571,180.00 $2,571,180.00 SCOPE OF WORK DEFINED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND IN THE PROJECT MANUAL 1-2. HELICAL PILES (30-ft. base length) EA 653 $795.00 $519,135.00 $805.80 $526,187.40 1-3. HELICAL PILE EXTENSIONS LF 2000 $3350 $67.000.00 $20.40 $40,800A0 1-4. HELICAL PILE LOAD TESTS (3-COMPRESSION/1- EA 4 $6,910.00 $27.640.00 $3,570.00 $14.280.00 TENSION) TOTAL PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE V,576.775.00 $3.152,447.40 GRANT RELATED ELEMENTS PART 2 - BASE BID: POOL, BUILDINGS AND FENCE 2-1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE LS $7 171 813f $7.171,813.00 $7,032,816.00 $7,032,816,OD SCOPE OF WORK DEFINED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND IN THE PROJECT MANUAL TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS $7,171,813.00 $7,032,816.00 AND FENCE PART 3 - BASE BID: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS 3-1. STREET SWEEPER WITH PICKUP BROOM HR 40 $150.00 $6.000,00 $155.50 $6,220,00 3-2. REMOVE STORM SEWER STRUCTURE EA 3 $890.00 $2,670,00 $920.00 $2,760A0 3-3. REMOVE STORM SEWER PIPE LF 410 $22.00 $91020.00 $22.32 $9,151.20 3-4. INLET PROTECTION EA 17 $250.00 $4,250,00 $414.12 $7.040.D4 3-5. SILT FENCE, TYPE MACHINE SLICED LF 2500 $5.00 $12,500.00 $1.81 $4.525-00 3-6. ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE TN 30 $84.00 $2.520.00 $86.33 $2.599.90 3-7- EROSION CONTROL BLANKET, CAL 3 SY 300 $1.75 $525.00 $2.10 $630.00 3-8. SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE EA 2 $4,531.00 $9A62.00 $4,690.00 $9.380.00 3-9. 6' PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE LF 114 $38.00 $4,332.00 $38.60 $4.400.40 3-10. 8" PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE LF 219 $38.00 $8,322.00 $38.81 $8,49939 3-11. 6" PVC SCHED 40 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE PIPE LF 53 $43.00 $2,279.00 $43.96 $2,329.88 3-12. 6" X 6" SERVICE WYE EA 1 $158.00 $158.00 $170.00 $170:00 3-13. 8" X 6" SERVICE WYE EA 1 $249.00 1249.00 $260.00 $260,00 3-14. CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY SEWER PIPE EA 1 $1,137.00 $1,137.00 $1,180.00 $1,180.00 3-15. 6" PVC WATERMAIN LF 230 $46.00 $1OS80.00 $46.74 $10,750,20 3-16. 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX EA 1 $1,326.00 $1,326,00 $1,380.00 $1,380.00 3-17. DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS LB 133 $15.00 $1,995,00 $15.79 $2,10D.D7 3-18. HYDRANT, INCL 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX EA 1 $6,800.00 $6.800.00 $7,040,00 $7A40.00 193804337 BidTab.xlsm BT-1 Item Num BID TABULATION Item Units Qty Bidder No. 1 Donlar Construction Company Unit Price Total Bidder No. 2 Bradbury Stamm Construction Winkelman, LLC Unit Price Total 3-19. CONNECT TO EXISTING WATERMAIN EA 1 $2.500.00 $2.500.00 $2,590,00 $2,590.00 3-20. 4' DIA. STORM SEWER CBMH WITH 3' SUMP EA 1 $5,632.00 $5.632,00 $5,830.00 $5,830.00 3-21. 12" RCP, CL. 5 STORM SEWER PIPE LF 93 $66.00 $6,138-OD $67.74 $6,299-82 3-22. 4' PERFORATED DRAIN TILE, WITH SOCK LF 370 $24.00 $SAW-00 $24.30 $8,991.00 3-23. 4" PIPE DRAIN LF 370 $13.00 $4,810,00 $0.00 $O,00 3-24. 4" DRAIN TILE CLEANOUT EA 9 $287.00 $2.583.00 $297.78 $2680.02 3-25. BULKHEAD STORM SEWER PIPE EA 2 $269.00 $538.00 $280.00 $560.00 3-26. CONNECT TO EXISTING STORM SEWER STRUCTURE EA 1 $1,000.00 $1.000.00 $1,040.00 $1,040.00 3-27. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SF 1725 $21.80 $37,605.00 $34.68 $59.823.00 3-28. COMMON EXCAVATION (PARKING LOT) (P) CY 1370 $20.00 $27.40040 $20.87 $28,591.90 3-29. SUBGRADE EXCAVATION (CV) CY 50 $20.16 $1,DD8.OD $21.00 $1,050.00 3-30. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 675 $3.00 $2,025A0 $2.64 $1,782AO 3-31. SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TN 800 $25.14 $20,112IJ0 $26.03 $20,824,00 3-32. AGGREGATE BASE, CLASS 5 TN 380 $32.00 $12,160DO $32.63 $12,399,40 3-33. BITUMINOUS MATERIAL FOR TACK COAT GAL 30 $5.00 $150.00 $5.33 $159.90 3-34. MASTIC ON LIP OF CURB LF 600 $2.00 $1,200.00 $2.43 $1.458.OD 3-35. TYPE SP 12.5 NON -WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 55 $130.00 $7,150.00 $139.27 $7,659,85 3-36. TYPE SP 9.5 WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 65 $139.00 $9,035.00 $112.00 $7,200.00 3-37. 7" CONCRETE PAVEMENT SY 27 $71.00 $1,917,00 $121.11 $3,269.97 3-38. B612 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER LF 600 $21.00 $12.600.00 $22.27 $13,362.00 3-39. 4' CONCRETE WALK SF 610 $5.00 $3A50.00 $10.36 $6,319.60 3-40. 4' SOLID WHITE LINE, PAINT LF 25 $2.00 $50-00 $20.80 $520.00 3-41. TOPSOIL BORROW, MNDOT 3877.2B (LV) CY 115 $46.00 $5,290.00 $47.74 $5,490.10 3-42. SOD SY 600 $4.00 $2,400.00 $3.12 $1,872.00 3-43. DECIDUOUS AND EVERGREEN TREE EA 73 $175.00 $12,775.00 $155.34 $11,339.82 3-44. WOOD MULCH CY 50 $45.00 $2.250.00 $83.00 $4,150.00 3-45. LANDSCAPE STEEL EDGER LF 25 $9.00 $225.00 $6.40 $160.00 3-46. TRASH ENCLOSURE LS 1 $32,000.00 $32A00A0 $41,950.00 $41.950.00 3-47. POOL COMMON EXCAVATION (ONSITE OR TO CY 6040 $4.20 $25.368.00 $4.35 $26,774AD 3-48. POOL COMMON EXCAVATION (OFFSITE) CY 11140 $19.00 $211.660-00 $19.76 $220,126R0 3-49. POOL GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 6700 $1.76 $11,792.aO $1.82 $12,194AO 3-50. POOL INSULATION (4" THICK) SY 1330 $22.00 $29160.00 $23.30 $30.989.00 3-51. POOL SUBGRADE ROCK (1.5" CLEAN ROCK) TON 1400 $44.00 $61,600.00 $45.24 $63,336.00 3-52. PLACE POOL GENERAL FILL FROM SURCHARGE AREA CY 4500 $5.95 $26.775AO $6.16 $27.720,00 3-53. POOL SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TON 19600 $20.69 $45,524-00 $21.41 $419.636A0 TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES $1.078,187.DD $1,138.133.86 TOTAL PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE $2,576.775.00 $3,152,447.40 TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS $7,171,813.00 $7,032,816.00 TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES $1,078,18740 1.138,133-86 TOTAL BASE BID: PARTS 1,2,3 TOTAL $10,826,775.00 $11,323,397.26 193804337 Bid-Fab.xlsm BT-2 Item Num BID TABULATION Item Bidder No. 1 Donlar Construction Company Units Qty Unit Price Total Bidder No. 2 Bradbury Stamm Construction Winkelman, LLC Unit Price Total PART 4 - ALTERNATES: 4-1, LS $177,000.0 9.177AW.{i11-1 $176,000.00 $176A00.00 ALTERNATE 1: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 1 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT THE VORTEX POOL AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 4-2. LS $101,000.00 $101.000.06 $88,000.00 $88M.OD ALTERNATE NO. 2: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 2 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A DROP SLIDE AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-3. $59,000.00 UMOA0 $59,000.00 $59.000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 3: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO.3 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CLIMBING WALL AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-4. LS $56,000.00 ;5WAO = $56,000.00 $56,000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 4: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 4 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A WATER WALK AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-5. LS $8,000.00 $81000 O $B4OOO.0 $8=0.00 ALTERNATE NO. 5: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO.5 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL BASKETBALL ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-6. LS R90 w 1120.000 U0 $20,000.00 $20.0D0.00 ALTERNATE NO. 6: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 6 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL COMPETITION POOL WATER PLAY FEATURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-7. LS $34,000.00 $34,000.00 $34,OOO.00 $34,000.00 ALTERNATE NO.7: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO.7 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 3 ADDITIONAL SHADE UMBRELLA STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-8. LS $21,000.00 $21,000.00 $28,000.00 $28,000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 8: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO.8 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 2 ADDITIONAL FABRIC PICNIC/RENTAL STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 193804337 BidTab.xlsm 4 B17-3 Bidder No. 1 Bidder No. 2 BID TABULATION Donlar Construction Company Bradbury Stamm Construction Winkelman, LLC Item Num Item Units Qty Unit Price Total Unit Price Total 4-9. LS-$25,000AD C::: $26.000.00 425.000.00 ALTERNATE NO.9: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO.9 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO CONSTRUCT THE POOL WITH SHOTCRETE AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-10. LS 1 $71,000.00 $71-000-00 $61,000.00 $61,000-00 ALTERNATE NO. 10: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 10 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL A TYPE "3" WATER PLAY FEATURE IN THE RECREATION POOL IN PLACE OF THE TYPE "2" WATER PLAY FEATURE. 4-11. LS $19,000.00 $1Q.00b-60 $19,000.00 $19.000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 11: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 11 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV SYSTEM CAMERAS IN OR ON THE BATHHOUSE BUILDING AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-12. LS $16,500.00 $1&-%6-00 $16,000 $16-000.0 ALTERNATE NO. 12: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 12 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV CAMERAS ON EXTERIOR POLES IN THE PARK AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-13. LS $0.00 j.' co $0.00 ALTERNATE NO. 13: ALTERNATE WATERSLIDE MANUFACTURER - IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 13 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO USE AN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER OTHER THAN THE PRE -APPROVED MANUFACTURERS, FOR THE DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND THE DROP SLIDE. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER BELOW. ADD / DEDUCT (CIRCLE ONE) ALTERNATE 4-13 - MANUFACTURER DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND DROP SLIDE N/A No Bid Contractor Name and Address: Donlan Construction Company Bradbury Stamm Construction Wlnkelmon. LLC 550 Shoreview Park Road 340 Highway 10 South Shoreview, MN 55126 St. Cloud, MN 56304 Phane: (651) 227-0631 {320) 253-2411 Email- L vocieInbradbuastamm.com Jay Vogel Signed By: Jan Kainz Title: %agdenl Sr. Vice President Bid SeCurity: Bid Bond Bid Bond Addenda Acknowledged: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 193804337 BidTabxlsm 6T-4 _F I T T' 1 4 1 ! I 1 1 f IEALAND AVE ~� - 1 1 r - -�I II WEST MEMO PAP.KINC, - � E1(ISTING BASKETBALL! VOLLEYBALL - I COURTS J EXISTING TENNIS COURTSURTS T_ SECURE PAR KWG T r — k [ 1 ! , — i- tivihrs A-=�Y POLICE DEPAP-TMENT owl,. f PT n+tE:TR& PESf_1I1, II ,•' I - J CRY r ,. - ; HALL ". 1 1 �ri�r �y'L7►. ti -- XYLON AVE I i �- I. 1 1 1 'FLETVRE I I / SHELTER LZ PLAY AREA I Z. E - I UBLI� PhRKfN u 10 5FA R ITIV J I I_ I� f' , K-RATED BOLLARDS TYPICAL 13}7?`7PA1 jr PICNIC AREA PARKING LOT LIGHTING TYPIC A ICONCESSIONS WINDOW ENTRY MONUMENT PARK ENTRY WAI K .. a ..4 " I HYVCE y t■ +i ._ 3 PARKING New Hope, MN Civic Center Park Master Plan — r HE:A.TFR- I - s � .. 1 EXISTING J SLEDDING HILL J i i j 1 1WMFR1 -aril F I i; PEDESTRIAN - i r LIGHTING k -=I j • SKATE' � f r�` �1� FUFURE 1 I I I - _ - PLAZA �. i.i I I LOOPED TRAR ' PUTT i : {0.401•nifesj, III 96�r�"•I IY. -•1� - - � r -- x . 61KF RACKS iki I I it a - f BATH HOUSE FUTURE i WITH RESTRd iS PARK r TRAILS - - rfr I r RAIN L "GiRT'yEN 15 1 ��.�J BERM AREAS.. TYP- - FARKSIGN t�l POOL MECH A N V--, At� BUILDING .I FUTURE ^ PUELI'_ - ASSUMPTION �. ^h PePK.N�; CEMETERYI7 SIAJ i _ - _ STREET PARKING L_ 4 - �� 11 STALLS )Q@PN AVE - _ TOTAL PARKING: 198 STALLS Ivy FUTURE PARKING: 12 STALLS 0 50 100f1 TOTAL STREET PARKING: 11 STALLS November 2018 ,� Stantec Shallow Water Play Features : : L Outdoor Shower Towers Shallow Water Recreation Pool Current Channel w/ Vortex Iliki ADA Stairs Concessions Deck Slow and Fast Body Slides Sun Turf �A Water Walk Tot Play Area Chaise Lounge Seating Current Channel Alternate Vortex Pool and Basketball Hoops 50-Meter 8-Lane Competition Pool ADA Access Ramp _ Bike Parking Group Rental ADA StairsI Z . TTTTTi LI ■MON Bathho R I Ill F f �r Alternate Water Walk Slow and Fast Body Slides Water Play Features Basketball Hoops Tot Slide Concessions Deck Shade Structures Floatable Water Play 1M & 3M Diving Boards w/ Drop Slide Alternate Climbing Wall 't 50-Meter 8-Lane Pool Deep Water Diving Well aTx •'* with 1M & 3M Diving ` Boards and Alternate Drop Sun Turf Slide =- Zero Depth Edge Cemetery Tot Slide Q x Tot Ground Jets Pool'Mechanical 'A r Pool Schematic New Hope, MN Zero Depth Edge Floatable Water Play Climbing Wall 1 1 Chaise Lounge Seating and Sun Turf Area Stantec Summary of Estimated Costs for City Hall Bid Pack #2, Civic Center Park & Pool Improvements Estimates include Total Project Costs, including Construction & Indirect Costs 3/18/2019 City Hall Bid Pack #2 - City Hall Fund Bid Pack #2 Items Engineer's Estimate Low Bid Estimate (incl.indirect) Difference (Low Bid less Eng. Est.) Recommended Award Base Bid - Parking Lot (incl. underground storm system, lighting), Landscaping, Contingency S1.275,000.00 S1,275.000.00 50.00 S1.275.000.00 Alt. 3 - Restoration Alternative -55,000.00 -$7,400.00 -$2,400.00 Building Demolition $225,000.00 $218,540.76 -$6,459.24 $218,540.76 Totals 1 $1,495,000.00 $1,486,140.76 -$8,859.24j $1,493,540.76 Civic Center Park Improvements -Park Fund Park Improvement Items Engineer's Estimate Low Bid Estimate (incl.indirect) Difference (Low Bid less Eng. Est.) Recommended Award (Demolition - Theater, Site, Shelter, Hockey Boards $70,000.00 $65,604.05 -$4,395.95 $65,604.05 Base Bid -Storm Water, Pool Parking Area, Pool Parking (Lot & Lighting, Water Main, Trails, Civic Park Landscaping $1,035,000.00 $1,722,877.13 $687,877.13 $1,722,877.13 Alt. 1-Pedestrian Lights - 19 Trail Lihts 9159,000.00 S138,790.49 -S20,209.51 $138,790_49 .Alt. 2 - Trail Loop - Northwest Trail Loop Segment w/3 Trail (Lights S104,000.00 571,813.06 -S32,186.94 $71,813.06 Alt. 3 - Restoration Alternative -543.S00.00 -$64,380.00 -S20,880.00 Alt. 4-CCTV Conduit for Park $9,000.00 $11,088.00 $2,088.00 $11,088.00 Totals $1.333,500.00 $1,945,792.731 $612,292,73 0,010,172.73 Pool Improvements - Park Fund Item Engineer's Estimate ate ) Difference (Low Bid less Eng. Est.) Recommended Award Base Bid - Pool Improvements $12 2501000,00.57 i$59,OOiOOO $15,447.57 $12,26S,447.57 Alt.I - Vortex Pool $172,000.00.00 $5,000.00 $177,000.DD Alt. 2-Drop Slide $111,000.00.00 -S10,000.00 S101,000.00 Alt. 3-Climbin Wall $21,000.000.00 $38,000.00 Alt. 4-Water Walk $60,000.00 $56.000.00 44,000.00 S56,000.00 .Alt. 5 - Basketball Hoo s $11,000.00 $8,000.00 -$3,000.00 S8,000.00 .Alt. 6- 50-Meter Pool Play Feature JWibit s2l.000,00 S20.000.00 41,000.00 $20,000.00 Alt. 7 -Additional Shade Umbrellas 3 $50000.00 $34,000.00 -$16,000.00 S34.000.00 Alt, 8- Additional Fabric Shade Picnic/Rental 2) $44,000.00 S21,000.00 -$23,000.00 $21,000.00 Alt. 9 - Shotcrete Alternative for Pool Shell -525,000.00 S26.000.00 S51,000.00 Alt. 10 - Shallow Water Play Feature Alternative $50,000.00 $71,000.00 $21,000.00 $71,000.00 Alt. 11- CCTV System Cameras on Bathhouse Building $35,000.00 $19,000.00 416,000.00 S39,000.00 Alt. 12 - CCTV System Cameras in Park $15,000.00 $26,500.00 $1,500.00 S161500.00 ,Alt. 13 - Alternate Water Slide Manufacturer •$5006.00 $0.00 $50,000.00 'rotals S12,765,000.00 $12,873,947.57 S308,947.57 $12,788.947.57 Theater - Park Fund (Item Engineer's Estimate Low Bid Estimate (inclAndirect) Difference (Low Bid less Eng. Est.) 'Recommended Award (Base Bid - Outdoor Theater $795 870.00 51,302,297.41 $506,427.41 $1,302,297.41 Alt. 1-Picnic Shelter-0 en Airw/Electric $175,000.00 $229,731.96 $53,731.96 $228,731.96 ,Alt. 2 - Pivot Doors $22,000.00 517 782.77 -$4 217.23 $1529.63 ,Alt. 3 - Back Stage Storage Room Face Brick Veneer Alt. S12.000.00 S33,606.00 $21606.00 $800.00 ,Alt. 4-Additional Dressing Room Space $57,024.001 $11%489.00 $54,465.001 S111,489.00 ,Alt. 5 - Dressing Room Face Brick Veneer Alternative $6,000.001 $34,461.00 $28,461.00 $400_IIo Alt. 6-Theatrical Lighting Receptacles and Conduits $6,000.001 1 $17,326.80 $11,326.801 $17,326.80 'Totals $1,073,894.00 $1,745 694.94 S671,800.94 S3.662.674.80 'Gray box items under Recommended Award include only Design Indirect Fees, as these are not recommeded to award. Skatepark Improvements - Park Fund Skatepark Items Engineer's Estimate Low Bid Estimate inclAndirect) Difference (Low Bid less Eng. Est.) Recommended Award Base Bid - Skatepark ,.Ia) $258,379.42 $83 379.92 $258,379.92 Alt. 1- Grind Ledge wTith Angled Edge $13,000.00 $20,000.00 $7,000.00 $20,000.00 Totals $188,000.00 $278,379.92 $90,379.92 $278,379.92 Funding Summary Engineer's Estimate Low Bid Estimate (incl.indirect) Difference (Low Bid less Eng. Est.) Recommended Award City Hall Improvements - CityHallFund $1,495,000.00 $1,486,140.76 -$8,859.24 $1,493,540.76 (Park, Pool, and Theater Improvements- Park Fund $15,360,394.00 $16,943,815.16 $1,483,421.16 $16.74D,175.02 Other Considerations: -City Pool Direct Purchase Items (estimated $150,000) -Incentives ($78,000 Total All Projects) -Contingencies ID .%Complete iTask Name ixtqitiOn $qrt IF{Nsh j Half 2, 2018 Half 1, 2019 A F Half 2, 2019 Half 1, 2020F M A M J J A I N D J 32 A2% Pool 509 days Toe 6/26/18 Fri 6/5/20 33 190% Design 195 days Tue 6/26/18 Mon 3125114 I 34 Design 173 days Tue 6/26/18 Thu 2/21/19 35 100°b Pool Schematic - Council Work 0 days Mon 8/20/18 Mon 8/20118 ♦ 8/20 Session 36 100% Pool Schematic Revised layout- 0 days Mon Mon 10/15 Council Work Session 10/15/18 10/15/18 37 100% Pool Building Schematic -Council 0 days Mon Mon ♦ 11/19 Work Session 11/19/18 11/19/18 38 1084' Approve Plans & Specs - Council 0 days Mon Mon ♦ 12/10 Meeting 12/10/18 12/10/18 39 100% Operational Costs - Council Work 0 days Mon 1/21/19 Mon 1/21119 ♦ 2/21 Session 40 Bid Opening 0 days Fri 3/15/19 Fri 3/15/19 t 3/15 41 10% Pool Bid/Award 0 days Mon 3/25/19 Mon 3/25119 + 3/25 42 i0% Construction 310 days Mon 4/1/19 Fri 6/5/20 43 10% Construction - Phase 1 (Soil 310 days Mon 4/1/19 Fri 5/5/20 Correction, Building, SOM) 44 10% Construction - Phase 2 210 days Mon 8/19/19 Fri 5/5/20 45 66% Theater 509 days Tue 6/26/18 Fri 6/5/20 46 99% Design 195 days Tue 6/26/18 Mon 3/25/19 47 100% Design 171 days Tue 6/26/18 Tue 2/19/19 48 100% ScopingDiscussion - Council 0days Mon Mon 10/15 Work Session 10/15/18 10/15/18 49 100% ScopingDiscussion - Council 0days Mon Mon ♦ 11/19 Work Session 11/19/18 11/19/18 50 100% Approve Plans & Specs - Council 0 days Mon Mon ♦ 12/10 Meeting 12/10/18 12/10/18 51 110095 Bid Opening 0 days Tue 2/19/19 Tue 2/19/19 • 52 0% Construction Bid Award - Council 0 days Mon 3/25/19 Mon 3/25/19 3/25 Meeting 53 056 Construction 90 days Mon 6/17/19 Fri 10/18/19 54 0% Construction 90 days Mon 6/17/19 Fri 10/18/19 55 63% Skatepark 509 days Tue 6/26/18 Fri 6/5/20 56 95% Design 195 days Tue 6/26/18 Mon 3125ill 1 57 95% Design 181 days Tue 6/26/18 Tue 3/5/19 58 100% Bid Opening 0 days Tue 3/5/19 Tue 3/5/19 59 0°F Construction Bid Award - Council 0 days Mon 3/25/19 Mon 3/25/19 i♦ 3/25 Meeting 6o 0% Construction 90 days Mon 6/17/19 Fri 10/18/19 61 0% Construction 90 days Mon 6/17/19 Fri 10/18/19 Task Project Summary Manual Task Start -only C Deadline + Project: Master Schedule Split ............u.•••u.n• Inactive Task Duation-only Finish -only 7 Progress City Hall/Park/Pool Date: Wed 3/20/19 Mllestone ♦ Inactive Milestone Manual Summary Rollup Extemal Tasks — Manual Progress Summary Inactive Summary G 6 Manual Summary External Milestone Page 2 10 ;%Complete Task Name jDuration I Start Fnhh _ Half 2, 261a I Halfl, 19 I IHalf 2, 1' Half 1, 2070 ra D I 1 10{:r.4 Master Park and Pool Planning 381 days Mon 1/9/17 Mon 61W29 4 173% Bid Pack 1: City Hall/Police Building 426 days Mon 11/13/1Mon 7/1/19 i 5 1009E Building Construction - Bid/Award 51 days Mon 11/13/1Mon 2/2213A 7 N% Building Construction 350 days Tue 1/9/18 Mon SI131 8 101E Furniture/Equipment Install 21 days Mon 5/13/19 Mon 6/10/1'i 9 0% New Police/City Hall Occupancy 1 day Mon 7/1/19 Mon 7/1/19 ♦ 7/1 10 #K Bid Pack 2A & 2B: City Hall 509 days Tue 6/26/18 Fri 6/5/20 Landscaping, Streetscaping, Parking; Civic Park Amenities & Parking 11 :99% Design 195 days Tue 6/26/18 Mon 3125/19 12 i10O% Design 168 days Tue 6/26/18 Thu 2/14/19 13 11009E City Hall 0 days Mon Mon ♦ 10/15 Landscaping/Streetscaping 10/15/18 10/15/18 Schematic -Council Work Session 14 �200% City Hall 0 days Mon Mon ♦ 11/19 Landscaping/Streetscaping/Maste 11/19/18 11/19/18 Park -Council Work Session 15 10D% Approve Plans & Specs - Council 0 days Mon Mon ♦ 12/10 Meeting 12/10/18 12/10/18 16 100% Bid Opening 0 days Thu 2/14/19 Thu 2/14/19 ♦ 4 17 0% Construction Bid Award - Council 0 days Mon 3/25/19 Mon 3/25/19 3/25 Meeting 18 C94 Construction 310 days Mon 4/1/19 Fri 6/5/20 19 0% City Hall Landscaping 120 days Mon 4/1/19 Fri 9/13/19 20 .0% Public Parking Lot 245 days Mon 7/1/19 Fri 6/5/20 21 m Pool Parking Lot, Trails, Site Work 200 days Mon 9/2/19 Fri 6/5/20 22 79% Ex. City Hall, Theater, Shelter 299 days Tue 6/26/18 Fri 8/16/19 Demolition 23 [M Design 195 days Tue 6/26/18 Mon 3/25/1 24 1100% Design 163 days Tue 6/26/18 Thu 2/7/19 25 I=% Approve Plans & Specs - Council 0 days Mon Mon ♦ 12/10 Meeting 12/10/18 12/10/18 26 100% Pre -Bid Meeting 0 days Thu 1/24/19 Thu 1/24/19 ♦ 1/24 27 100% Bid Opening 0 days Thu 2/7/19 Thu 2/7/19 ♦ 2/7 28 IO% Construction Bid Award - Council 0 days Mon 3/25/19 Mon 3/25/19 3/25 Meeting 29 fll Construction - Demolition 100 days Mon 4/1/19 Fri 8/16/19 30 10% Theater & Shelter Demolition 10 days Mon 4/1/19 Fri 4/12/19 31 [0% Ex. City Hall Demolition 35 days Mon 7/1/19 Fri 8/16/19 Task r Project Summary'"t Manual Task Start -only is Deadline i Project: Master Schedule Split •••,•,.,,,,....... InaRive Task Duration -only Finish -only Progress City Hall/Park/Pool Date: Wed 3/20/19 Milestone ♦ Inactive Milestone Manual Summary Rollup External Tasks — Manual Progress Summary Inactive Summary C Manual Summary —i External Milestone Page 1 City Hall Funds Park and Pool Funds $218,540.76 $1,275,000.00 $65,604.05 $343,935.63 $1,600,633.05 $1, 662, 674.80 $278,379.92 $12,788,947.57 $150,000.00 $2,000.00 $20,000.00 $6,000.00 $50,000.00 $329,574.98 Demo: City Hall Demo: Theater, shelter, rink Landscaping, etc: City Hall Landscaping, etc: Park Theater/Shelter SkatePark Projected Pool w/alternates Owner purchased pool items Incentives: Demolition Incentives: Landscaping, etc Incentives: Theater Incentives: Pool Contingency $1,493,540.76 $17,297,750.00 Sub Total -$2,000,000.00 State Funding -$257,750.00 Hennepin Youth Sports Grant -$40,000.00 MN Swimming Grant $15,000,000.00 -$9,500,000.00 December 2018 Bonds $5,500,000.00 $284,144.81 $3, 219, 568.68 $1,662,674.80 $278,379.92 $12,788,947.57 City of New Hope, Minnesota Estimated Tax Impact March 19, 2019 $5.5114 Projects BOND ISSUANCE INFORMATION Bond Issue Am ou pit $5,745,000 Number of Years 15 Average Interest Rate 2. Estlmated Bond Rating S&P AA PROPERTY TAX INFORMATION Actual Net Tax Capacity - Payable 2019 $18.%2,717 Debt Levy @ 105 % - Average 501,571 Estlmated Tax Capacity Rate: Payable-2019 Without Proposed Bonds 66.598 Payable - 2019 With Proposed Bonds 69.2439'a Estimated Tax Rate Increase 2.0451I TAX IMPACT ANALYSIS Estimated Market Value Taxable Net Tax Current Proposed Proposed Tax Increase is for Dubt So Only' Tya of Pr9porly. Market Value Exclusion Market Vstue Capacity CI Tax Tax Increase' GI Tax Annual M2U!!tL Ralf $ 100.000 $ 28,240 $ 71,760 $ 718 $ 477.91 $ 18.98 $ 496.89 $18.98 $1.58 S0.05 75.000 30.000 45,000 450 299.69 11.90 311.59 11.90 0,99 0.03 Residential 196.000 19,600 176,400 1,764 1,174.79 48.66 1,221.45 4e!.* 3.a9 0.1 Homestead 244,000 15.280 228,720 2,287 1,523.23 60.50 1,583.73 60.60 5.04 0.17 300,000 10,240 289,760 2,898 1,929,74 76.64 2,006.39 76.64 6.39 0.21 400,000 1.240 398.760 3,988 2,655.66 105.47 2.761.141 105,47 8.79 029 $ 100,000 $ - $ 100,000 $ 964 $ 642.14 $ 25.50 $ 667.65 $25.50 $2.13 $0,07 200,000 200,000 2,089 1,391.31 55.26 1,446.57 $55.28 $4.60 $0,1 Commercial/Industrial 300.000 - 300,000 3,375 2,247.50 89.26 2,336.77 $6926 57A4 $0.24 400,000 - 400,000 4,660 3,103.70 123.27 3,226.96 4123.27 $f0.27 $0.34 500,000 - 500,000 5,946 3,959.89 157.27 4,117.16 157,27 13.11 0,4 1,000,000 1.000,000 12 374 8.240.85 327.30 8.568.14 327.30 27.27 0.90 " The figures in the table are based on taxes for new bonded debt only, and do not include tax levies for other purposes. Tax increases shown above are gross increases, not including the impact of the state Property Tax Refund ("Circuit Breaker') program Many owners of homestead property will qualify for a refund, based on their income and total property taxes. This will decrease the net tax effect of the bond issue for many property owners, Prepared by Ehlers ► EHLERS 3/19/2019 111111LEAD- N Puouc: inHncE City of New Hope, Minnesota Estimated Tax Impact March 19, 2019 Combined Levy - Final Series 2016A and Proposed 2019A $5.5M projects BOND ISSUANCE WFORMATiON. Bond issue Amount 615,265,000 Number of Years 16 Average Interest Rate 316 Estimated Bond Rating S&P AA PROPERTY TAX INFORMATION Actual Net Tax Capacity - Payable 2019 $18,962.717 Debt Levy @ 105% - Average 1,366,417 Estimated Tax Capacity Rate: Payable - 2019 Without Proposed Bonds ".590%. Payable - 2019 With Proposed Bonds 73,8041 Estimated Tax Rafe Increase 7.208°I Alt I AC I Estimated Market Value I Taxable Net Tax Current Proposed Proposed Tax Increase 18 Tor Debt Servlce Only-' Annual Mon1h1 D;91 Typq of pro Market Value Exclusion I Market Value Ca act CI Tax Tax Increase CI • Fax $ 100,000 $ 28,240 $ 71,760 $ 718 $ 477.91 $ 51.71 $ 529.62 $51.71 $4.31 $0.14 75.000 30,000 45,000 450 29969 32.43 332.12 32.43 2.70 0.09 Residential 196.000 19,600 176,400 1,764 1,174.79 127.11 1,301.90 127.11 10.59 0.35 Homestead 244,000 15,280 228,720 2,287 1,523.23 164.81 1,688.04 164.81 1373 045 300,000 10,240 289,760 2,898 1,929.74 208.80 2,138.54 208.80 17.40 0.57 400.000 1,240 398,760 3,988 2.655.66 287.34 2.943.00 287.34 23.94 0.79 $ 100,000 $ - $ 100.000 $ 964 $ 642.14 $ 69.48 $ 711.62 $69.411 $5.79 $0.19 200.000 - 200,000 2,089 1,391,31 150.54 1,541.85 $150.541 $12.54 $0.41 Commercial/Industrial 300,000 - 300,000 3,375 2,247.50 243.18 2.490.68 $243.18 $20.26 $0.67 400,000 400,000 4,660 3,103.70 335.82 3,439.51 $33582 $27.98 $0.92 500.000 - 500,000 5.946 3,959.89 428.45 4.388.34 428.45 35.70 1.17 1.000,000 1 000 000 12 374 8,240,85 891.65 9,132.49 891.65 74.30 2.44 The figures in the table are based on taxes for new bonded debt only, and do not include lax levies for other purposes. Tax increases shown above are gross increases, not including the impact of the state Property Tax Refund ("Circuit Breaker') program, Many owners of homestead property will qualify for a refund, based on their income and total property taxes This will decrease the net tax effect of the bond issue for many property owners. Prepared by Ehlers ` E H L ERS 3/19/2019 ■ Lc,.-- ,.:;»,, , GOR60N L. JENSEN' MELANIE P. PERSELLIN2., STEVEN A.SONDRALL STAcvA. WOODS' 'Real Property Law Specialist Certified By The Minnesota State Bar Association Licensed in Illinois/Colorado 3Qualified Neutral Mediator under Rule 114 JENSENSONDRALL PERSELLIN&WOODS P.A., ATTORNEYS AT LAW April 5, 2019 Valerie Leone City Clerk City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Re: New Hope Outdoor Pool City Project No. 995 Our File No.: 99.11433 Dear Val: 8525 EDINBROOK CROSSING, STE. 201 BROOKLYN PARK, MINNESOTA55443-1968 TELEPHONE (763) 424-8811 a TELEFAx (763) 493-5193 www.jspWaw.com Writer's Direct Dial No.: (763) 201-0265 e-mail saw@jspwlaw.com personal delivery Enclosed please find four copies of the contract with Donlar Construction Company, a Minnesota corporation relating to the New Hope outdoor pool project. Also enclosed are the bid, performance and payment bonds for the referenced project, as well as the Certificates of Insurance. All are in order from a legal standpoint. Please call me if you have any questions. Sincerely, C tacy A. Wood , Assistant City Attorney, City of New k ope Enclosures cc: Steven A. Sondrall, City Attorney Bernie Weber, Director of Public Works Susan Rader, Director of Parks and Recreation Chris Long, City Engineer P:\Attomey\SAS\l Client Files\2 City of New Hope\99-11433 Pool and Civic Center Park Contracts\Leone ltr - New Hope Outdoor Pool - Project No. 995.docx DONLAR CONSTRUCTION TWIN CITIES 550 SHOREVIEW PARK ROAD SHOREVIEW, MN 55126 (651)227-0631 FAX• (651) 227-0132 ST. CLOUD 601 28TH AVENUE SOUTH WAITE PARK, MN 56387 (320) 253-3354 FAX: (320) 253-3795 LETTER OF TRANSMITTAL DATE: April 3, 2019 IJOB NO: 637 ATTN: Steve Sondrall RE: New Hope Outdoor Pool New Hope, N fN City Project # 995 Stantec Project # 193804337 Email: TO: Jensen Sondrall Persellin & Woods, P.A. Total No. Pages Including This Page: 8525 Edinbrook Crossing, Suite 201 Brooklyn Park, MN 55443-1968 WE ARE ❑ VIA E-MAIL 0 ATTACHED SENDING: ❑ Under Separate Cover via: ❑ Shop Drawings ❑ Prints ❑ Plans ❑ Copy of Letter ❑ Change Order Q OTHER: ❑ Samples ❑ Specification COPIES DATE DESCRIPTION 4 Contract Documents — Volume 1 (Including Contract and Payment/Performance Bonds) 4 Contract Documents — Volume 2 4 Certificate of Liability Insurance THESE ARE TRANSMITTED: ❑ For Approval ❑ No Exceptions Taken ❑ R1 For Your Use ❑ Make Any Corrections Noted ❑ 0 As Requested ❑ Revise & Resubmit ❑ ❑ For Review & Comment ❑ Rejected ❑ ❑ For Bids ❑ Submit Specified Item ❑ REMARKS: Resubmit Copies for Approval Submit Copies for Distribution Return Corrected Prints Prints Returned After Loan to Us Please provide Donlar Construction Company with a fully executed contract at your earliest convenience. COPY TO: pvault SIGNED: L l Stephan ePre� Ofii�nager/Contract Ad'min If enclosures are not as noted, kindly notify us at once. April 5, 2019 Ms. Stephanie Preston Donlar Construction 550 Shoreville Park Road Shoreview, MN 55126 SUBJECT: New Hope Outdoor Pool - Project no. 995 At its meeting of March 25, 2019, the New Hope City Council approved this contract with your company for $11,350,275 for the total base bid plus alternates 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11 and 12. Enclosed are two fully executed contracts. Please submit one to your bonding company. Also enclosed is a Withholding Affidavit for Contractors/IC-134 form (we cannot make final payment to contractors until this is approved by the Minnesota Department of Revenue and submitted to our office per Minnesota Statute 290.97). Please contact Chris Long with Stantec at 651-604-4808 if you have any questions regarding the project. Sincerely, Valerie Leone City Clerk, CMC . Enclosures — Contract, IC-134 cc: Chris Long, city engineer Susan Rader, parks and recreation director CITY OF. NEW HOPE 4401 Xylon Avenue North • New Hope, Minnesota 55428-4898 • www. ci.new-hope.mn.us City Hall: 763-531-5100 • Police (non -emergency): 763-531-5170 • Public Works: 763-592-6777 City Hall Fax: 763-531-5136 • Police Fax: 763-531-5174 • Public Works Fax: 763-592-6776 ® Stantec Stantec Consulting Services Inc. 733 Marquette Avenue, Suite 1000, Minneapolis, MN 55402 March 26, 2019 Mr. Jon Kainz Donlar Construction Company 550 Shoreview Park Road Shoreview, MN 55126 Re: City of New Hope, Minnesota New Hope Outdoor Pool City Project Nos. 995 Stantec Project No. 193804337 Notice of Award/Contract Documents Dear Mr. Kainz: You are notified that your Bid dated March 15, 2019 for the above -referenced Project has been considered. You are the successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for the amount of $11,376,275.00 for the Total Base Bid plus Alternate 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12. Enclosed are four Contract Documents between you and the City of New Hope covering the above -referenced Project. Please complete Specification Document 00 52 10 Agreement Form, Document 00 61 13.13 Performance Bond, and Document 00 61 13.16 Payment Bond. The insurance and indemnity requirements shall be provided. After the bonding company has completed the Contract Documents, forward them to the attorney listed below who will review them for the City of New Hope: Steve Sondrall Jensen Sondrall Persellin & Woods, P.A. 8525 Edinbrook Crossing, Ste 201 Brooklyn Park, MN 55443-1968 After the necessary officials have signed the Contracts, the City will distribute the Contracts as follows: 2 copies Donlar Construction Company (1 - your file, 1 - your bond company) 1 copy City of New Hope, Attention: Valerie Leone 1 copy Stantec, Attention: Chris Long Upon receipt of a signed Contract and a filed Certificate of Insurance, approved by the City of New Hope's attorney, a pre -construction conference will be scheduled with you and the City of New Hope to review the Project. Sincerely, STANTEC CONSULTING SERVICES INC. Christopher W. Long,, P.E. Enclosures: Four Contract Documents cc: Valerie Leone, City of New Hope Steve Sondrall, City Attorney Design with community in mind 4 Stantec I hereby certify that this is an exact Project Name: New Hope Outdoor Pool reproduction of bids received - City Project No.: 995 Project No Bid Opening: Friday, March 15, 2019 at 10 A.M., CDT 193804337 Owner: City of New Hope, MN Christopher W. Long, PE License No. 47106 Item Num BID TABULATION Item Units Qty Bidder No. 1 Donlar Construction Company Unit Price Total Bidder No. 2 Bradbury Stamm ConstructionWinkelman, LLC Unit Price Total PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT FUNDING RELATED ELEMENTS 1-1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE LS $1,963,000.00 $1,963,000.00 $2,571,180.00 $2,571,180.00 SCOPE OF WORK DEFINED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND IN THE PROJECT MANUAL 1-2. HELICAL PILES (30-ff. base length) EA 653 $795.00 $519,135.00 $805.80 $526,187-40 1-3. HELICAL PILE EXTENSIONS LF 2000 $33.50 $67.00,00 $20.40 $C18DO.00 1-4. HELICAL PILE LOAD TESTS (3-COMPRESSION/1- EA 4 $6,910.00 $27.640,00 $3,570 00 $14.280.00 TENSION) TOTAL PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE $$576,775.00 $3,152,447.40 GRANT RELATED ELEMENTS PART 2 - BASE BID: POOL, BUILDINGS AND FENCE 2-1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE LS 1 $7,171,813-00 $7,171,813-00 $7,032,816 00 $7,032,816.00 SCOPE OF WORK DEFINED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND IN THE PROJECT MANUAL TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS $7,171,813,06 57,032,816.00 AND FENCE PART 3 - BASE BID: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS 3-1. STREET SWEEPER WITH PICKUP BROOM HR 40 $150.00 $6,000,00 $155.50 $6.220.00 3-2. REMOVE STORM SEWER STRUCTURE EA 3 $890-00 $2,670,00 $920.00 $2.760,00 3-3. REMOVE STORM SEWER PIPE LF 410 $22.00 $9,020,00 $2232 $9,151,20 3-4. INLET PROTECTION EA 17 $250.00 $4.250.00 $414.12 $7.040.04 3-5. SILT FENCE, TYPE MACHINE SLICED LF 2500 $5.00 $12,500.00 $1.81 $4,525.00 3-6. ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE TN 30 $84.00 $2,520.00 $86.33 $2,589-90 3-7. EROSION CONTROL BLANKET, CAT. 3 SY 300 $1.75 $525.00 $2 10 $630.00 3-8. SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE EA 2 $4,531.00 $9,062.00 $4,690.00 $9,3801M 3-9. 6' PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE LF 114 $38.00 $4,332-00 $38.60 $4,400.40 3-10. 8" PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE LF 219 $38.00 $8,322.00 $38.81 $8,499.39 3-11. 6" PVC SCHED 40 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE PIPE LF 53 $4300 $2,279.00 $43,96 $2,329.88 3-12. 6" X 6" SERVICE WYE EA 1 $158.00 $158.00 $170.00 $170-00 3-13. 8" X 6' SERVICE WYE EA 1 $249.00 $249,00 $260,00 $260.00 3-14. CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY SEWER PIPE EA 1 $1,137.00 $1,137,00 $1,180.00 $1.180.00 3-15- 6" PVC WATERMAIN LF 230 $46.00 $10.580.00 $46,74 $10,750.20 3-16- 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX EA 1 $1,326.00 $1,326.00 $1,380.00 $1,380.00 3-17. DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS LB 133 $15.00 $1,995.00 $15.79 $2,100-07 3-18. HYDRANT, INCL 6' GATE VALVE AND BOX EA 1 $6,800.00 $6,800.00 $7,040.00 $7,040.00 193804337 BidTab.xlsm 13T-1 BID TABULATION Item Num Item Units Qty Bidder No. 1 Donlar Construction Company Unit Price Total Bidder No. 2 Bradbury Stamm ConstructionWinkelman, LLC Unit Price Total 3-19. CONNECT TO EXISTING WATERMAIN EA 1 $2,500.00 $2,500.00 $2.590.00 $2,590.00 3-20. 4' DIA. STORM SEWER CBMH WITH 3' SUMP EA 1 $5,632.00 $5,632,00 $5,830.00 $5.830.00 3-21, 12" RCP, CL. 5 STORM SEWER PIPE LF 93 $66.00 $6,138.00 $67.74 $6.299,82 3-22. 4" PERFORATED DRAIN TILE, WITH SOCK LF 370 $24.00 $8,880.00 $24.30 $8,991 AO 3-23. 4" PIPE DRAIN LF 370 $13.00 $4,810,00 $0.00 S0.00 3-24. 4" DRAIN TILE CLEANOUT EA 9 $287.00 $2,583.00 $297.78 $2.680.02 3-25. BULKHEAD STORM SEWER PIPE EA 2 $269.00 $538.00 $280.00 $560.00 3-26. CONNECT TO EXISTING STORM SEWER STRUCTURE EA 1 $1,000.00 $1,000.00 $1,040.00 $1,040.00 3-27. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SF 1725 $21.80 $37.605.00 $34.68 $59,823.00 3-28. COMMON EXCAVATION (PARKING LOT) (P) CY 1370 $20.00 $27.400.00 $20.87 $28,591.90 3-29. SUBGRADE EXCAVATION (CV) CY 50 $20.16 $1.008,00 $21.00 $1,050.00 3-30. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 675 $3.00 $2,425.00 $2.64 $1.782.00 3-31. SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TN 800 $25.14 $20,112.00 $26.03 $20,824.00 3-32. AGGREGATE BASE, CLASS 5 TN 380 $32.00 $12,160.00 $32,63 $12,399.40 3-33. BITUMINOUS MATERIAL FOR TACK COAT GAL 30 $5.00 $150.00 $5.33 $159.90 3-34. MASTIC ON LIP OF CURB LF 600 $2.00 $1,200.00 $2A3 $1,458.00 3-35. TYPE SP 12.5 NON -WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 55 $130.00 $7,150,00 $139.27 $7,659A5 3-36. TYPE SP 9.5 WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 65 $139 00 $9,035.00 $112.00 $7.280.00 3-37, 7" CONCRETE PAVEMENT SY 27 $71.00 $1,917.00 $121.11 $3,269.97 3-38. B612 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER LF 600 $21.00 $12,600.00 $22.27 $13,362.00 3-39. 4" CONCRETE WALK SF 610 $5.00 $3.0sa.06 $10.36 $6,319.60 3-40. 4" SOLID WHITE LINE, PAINT LF 25 $2.00 $50.00 $20.80 $570.00 3-41. TOPSOIL BORROW, MNDOT 3877.213 (LV) CY 115 $46.00 $5290.00 $47.74 $5,490.10 3-42, SOD SY 600 $4.00 $2.400.00 $3.12 $1,872.00 3-43, DECIDUOUS AND EVERGREEN TREE EA 73 $175.00 $12,775.00 $155.34 $11,339.82 3-44, WOOD MULCH CY 50 $45.00 $2,250.00 $83.00 $4,150.00 3-45. LANDSCAPE STEEL EDGER LF 25 $9.00 $225-00 $6.40 $160.00 3-46. TRASH ENCLOSURE LS 1 $32,000.00 $32,000.00 $41,950.00 $41.950.00 3-47. POOL COMMON EXCAVATION (ONSITE OR TO CY 6040 $4.20 $25,368.00 $4.35 $26,274,00 3-48. POOL COMMON EXCAVATION (OFFSITE) CY 11140 $19.00 $211,660.00 $19.76 $220,126.40 3-49. POOL GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 6700 $1.76 $11.792.00 $1.82 $12,194.00 3-50. POOL INSULATION (4" THICK) SY 1330 $22.00 $29.260.00 $23.30 $30,989.00 3-51. POOL SUBGRADE ROCK (1.5" CLEAN ROCK) TON 1400 $44.00 $61,600.00 $45.24 $63,336.00 3-52. PLACE POOL GENERAL FILL FROM SURCHARGE AREA CY 4500 $5.95 $26,775.00 $6,16 $27,720.00 3-53. POOL SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TON 19600 $20.69 $405,524.00 $21.41 $419.636,00 TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES $1,078,187.00 $1,138,133.66 TOTAL PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE $2,576,775.00 $3,152,447.40 TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS $7,171,813.00 $7,032,816,00 TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES $1.078.187.00 Ei.138,133,86 TOTAL BASE BID: PARTS 1,2,3 TOTAL $10,826,775.00 $11,323,397.26 193804337 BidTab.xlsm BT-2 Item Num BID TABULATION Item Bidder No. 1 Donlar Construction Company Units Qty Unit Price Total Bidder No. 2 Bradbury Stamm Construction Winkelman, LLC Unit Price Total PART 4 • ALTERNATES: 4-1• LS 1 $177,000.00 $177 L:;::;: $176,000 00 ALTERNATE l: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 1 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT THE VORTEX POOL AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. 4-2• LS 1 $101,000.00 $101,00000 $88,00000 $88,000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 2: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 2 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A DROP SLIDE AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-3. LS 1 $59,000.00 --'v.G:;i::r'.) $59,000.00 $59,000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 3: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO, 3 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CLIMBING WALL AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-4. LS 1 $56,000.00 MODGM $56,000.00 r ALTERNATE NO. 4: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 4 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A WATER WALK AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-5, LS i $8,000.00 j&ODD.tiD $8,000 00 $8,000 00 ALTERNATE NO. 5: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO.5 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL BASKETBALL ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-6. LS 1 $20,000.00 $1O,01XI.00 $20,000.00 $20.000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 6: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 6 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL COMPETITION POOL WATER PLAY FEATURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-7. LS 1 $34,000.00 $34,000.00 $34,000.00 $34,000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 7: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 7 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 3 ADDITIONAL SHADE UMBRELLA STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-8. LS 1 $21,000.00 UIX00.00 $28,000.00 $2MDAD ALTERNATE NO. 8: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO.8 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 2 ADDITIONAL FABRIC PICNIC/RENTAL STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 193804337 13i fTab.xIsrn BT-3 Bidder No. 1 Bidder No. 2 BID TABULATION Donlar Construction Stamm Constructionuctlon Company Winkelman, LLC Item Num Hem Units Qty Unit Price Total Unit Price Total 4-9_ ALTERNATE NO. 9: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS LS I $26,000 00 S26,004.00 -$25,000.00-$25.000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 9 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO CONSTRUCT THE POOL WITH SHOTCRETE AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-10. LS 1 $71,000.00 $71,000.00 $61,000.00 $61,000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 10: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 10 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL A TYPE "3" WATER PLAY FEATURE IN THE RECREATION POOL IN PLACE OF THE TYPE"2" WATER PLAY FEATURE. 4-11- LS 1 $19,000.00 $191000.00 $19,000.00 $19,000.00 ALTERNATE NO. 11: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO, 11 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV SYSTEM CAMERAS IN OR ON THE BATHHOUSE BUILDING AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-12. LS 1 $16,500-00 $16,500.00 $16,000.00 $16,000:DO ALTERNATE NO. 12: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 12 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV CAMERAS ON EXTERIOR POLES IN THE PARK AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. 4-13. LS 1 $0-00 $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 ALTERNATE NO. 13: ALTERNATE WATERSLIDE MANUFACTURER - IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 13 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO USE AN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER OTHER THAN THE PRE -APPROVED MANUFACTURERS, FOR THE DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND THE DROP SLIDE, PROVIDE MANUFACTURER BELOW. ADD / DEDUCT (CIRCLE ONE) ALTERNATE 4.13 - MANUFACTURER DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND DROP SLIDE N/A No Bid Contractor Name and Address: Donlar Construction Company Bradbury Stamm Construction Winkelman, LLC M Shoreview Park Road 340 Highway 10 South Shoreview, MN 55126 SI. Cloud, MN 56304 Phone: (6511 227-0631 (320) 253-2411 Email: 0Vq e1 f)radbu 5tai'fTm-com Jay Vogel Signed By: J*rn Kainz Title: President Sr. Vice President Bid Security: Bid Bond aid Bond Addenda Acknowledged: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 193804337 BidTab.xlsm BT-4 Stantec Stantec Consulting Services Inc. 733 Marquette Avenue, Suite 1000 Minneapolis MN 55402 March 28, 2019 Honorable Mayor and City Council City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Re: New Hope Outdoor Pool City Project No. 995 Stantec Project No. 193804337 Bid Return Dear Honorable Mayor and City Council Enclosed are all of the original Bids and Bid Securities that were received on the above - referenced Project. Please retain these original bids as information for your auditors. We have retained a copy of all bids for our files. Sincerely, STANTEC CONSULTING SERVICES INC. Shirley Lovell Administrative Assistant and OSEC Enclosures Design with community in mind Stantec BIDDER: Donlar Construction Company DOCUMENT 00 41 ]OR REVISED BID FORM NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL PROJECT NO. 193804337 CITY PROJECT NO, 995 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 2019 THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: City of New Hope City Hall 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid Security. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid Opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner. 3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: AAr demium Ng, One Four Two Five Addendum Dote (1) - 2/21/19 (4) - 3/08/19 2 - 2/28/19 - 3/1 1 . (3) - 3/06/19 B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at, or contiguous to, the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at, or contiguous to, the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in SC-4.02, and (2) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified in SC-4.06. E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or accepts the consequences for not doing so) all additional or supplementary examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at, or contiguous to, the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F. Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) Bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 •00 41 1OR - 1 REVISED BID FORM G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents. I. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. J. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted. K. Bidder will submit written evidence of its authority to do business in the state where the Project is located not later than the date of its execution of the Agreement. 4.01 Bidder further represents that: A, The prices in this Bid have been arrived at independently, without consultation, communication, or agreement as to any matters relating to such prices with any other Bidder or with any competitor for the purpose of restricting competition. B. The prices in this Bid have not or will not be knowingly disclosed to any other Bidder or competitor prior to opening of the Bids. C. No attempt has been made or will be made by the Bidder to induce any other person or firm to submit or not to submit a Bid for the purpose of restricting competition. 4.02 Bidder understands that the law may require the Owner, or Engineer at the Owner's direction, to undertake an investigation and submit an evaluation concerning Bidder's responsiveness, responsibility, and qualifications before awarding a contract. Bidder hereby waives any and all claims, of whatever nature, against Owner, Engineer and their employees and agents, which arise out of or relate to such investigation and evaluation, and statements made as a result thereof, except for statements that can be shown by clear and convincing evidence to be intentionally false and made with actual malice. Nothing in this paragraph is intended to restrict Bidder's rights to challenge a contract pursuant to law. 5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s): Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with Sectio 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on actual quantities provided, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. No. Item Units Qty Unit Price Total Price PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT FUNDING RELATED ELEMENTS 1.1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE SCOPE OF WORK DEFINED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND �rO¢ IN THE PROJECT MANUAL LS 1 $ b $ 1-2HELICAL PILES (30-ft. base length) EA 653 $ $ ``S'�q 1-3 HELICAL PILE EXTENSIONS LF 2000 $ �� $ L.D7 j �0 1-4 HELICAL PILE LOAD TESTS (3-COMPRESSION/l-TENSION) EA 4 $0110,6 p $ pt I q Q TOTAL PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT RELATED ELEMENTS $ ' 17 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 ]OR - 2 REVISED BID FORM No. Item Units Qty Unit Price Total Prlce PART 2 - BASE BID: POOL, BUILDINGS AND FENCE 2-1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE SCOPE j l IN THEORK DEFINED IN THE PROJECT MANUAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND LS 1 $ F713 y J $ 1 I '3 TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS AND FENCE $ /J 13 PART 3 - BASE BID: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS 3-1. STREET SWEEPER WITH PICKUP BROOM 3-2. REMOVE STORM SEWER STRUCTURE 3-3. REMOVE STORM SEWER PIPE 3-4. INLET PROTECTION 3-5. SILT FENCE, TYPE MACHINE SLICED 3-6. ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE 3-7. EROSION CONTROL BLANKET, CAT. 3 3-8. SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE 3-9. 6" PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE 3-10. 8" PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE 3-11. 6" PVC SCHED 40 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE PIPE 3-12. 6" X 6" SERVICE WYE 3-13. 8" X 6" SERVICE WYE 3-14. CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY SEWER PIPE 3-15. 6" PVC WATERMAIN 3.16. 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX 3-17. DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS 3-18. HYDRANT, INCL 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX 3-19. CONNECT TO EXISTING WATERMAIN 3-20. 4' DIA. STORM SEWER CBMH WITH 3SUMP 3.21. 12" RCP, CL. 5 STORM SEWER PIPE 3-22. 4" PERFORATED DRAIN TILE, WITH SOCK 3-23. 4" PIPE DRAIN 3-24. 4" DRAIN TILE CLEANOUT 3-25. BULKHEAD STORM SEWER PIPE 3.26. CONNECT TO EXISTING STORM SEWER STRUCTURE HR 40 $/.'5--0_ $ (0615 EA 3 $ $ ),(p'14 LF 410 $� $ b ap EA 17 $ $ 4 �L'o LF 2500 $ _ $ 1- TN 30 $y L $ 0 SY 300 $ r )9 $ -�-r EA 2 $ $ LF 114 $ 3 $ LF 219 $ 3$ $ g3 al LF 53 $ It 3 $,a��r EA 1 $ / S-y $-- 629 EA 1 $ a I $ a g EA 1 $ _ $ IL Q LF 230 $ 4(0 $ f 01 M-) EA 1 $ 1 �� $ +�� LB 133 $ $E- EA 1 $ $ (0206 EA 1 $ -';S-00 EA 1 $3a $ S'(o 3d� LF 93 $ to L $ ( � 3 6 LF 370 $ jLL f $ 8 19 8 0 LF 370 $� $ (4? [6 EA 9 $ $ �' g3 EA 2 $ y $ S EA 1 $ i✓ 0(5O $ 60 p © 2019 Stantec 11938OA337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 1 OR - 3 REVISED BID FORM No. Item Units Qty Unit Price Total Price 3-27. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SF 1725 $ $ [�p� 3-28. COMMON EXCAVATION (PARKING LOT) (P) CY 1370 00 3-29. SUBGRADE EXCAVATION (CV) CY 50 $ ku $ 1,003 3-30. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 675 $ $ 3-31. SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TN 800 $ Sq $ [ I a 3-32. AGGREGATE BASE, CLASS 5 TN 380 $)L $ 1 6 b 3-33. BITUMINOUS MATERIAL FOR TACK COAT GAL 30 $ $ (S-0 3-34, MASTIC ON LIP OF CURB LF 600 $ QQ $ 0.00 3-35. TYPE SP 12.5 NON -WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 55 $ r 36 $ z t s'a 3-36. TYPE SP 9.5 WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 65 $� $03-� 3-37. 7" CONCRETE PAVEMENT SY 27 $ ` J $ �� r 3-38. B612 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER LF 600 $ . 1 ems- $� (QO 3-39. 4" CONCRETE WALK SF 610 $ $ 3-40. 4" SOLID WHITE LINE, PAINT LF 25 $ ;- $ 3-41. TOPSOIL BORROW, MNDOT 3877.213 (LV) CY 115 $ qG $ � 3-42. SOD SY 600 $ 1 $ C50 3-43. DECIDUOUS AND EVERGREEN TREE EA 73 $ -7 g r $ 0� 3-44, WOOD MULCH CY 50 $ y g $ �S�® 3-45. LANDSCAPE STEEL EDGER LF 25 $ 9 $ 3-46. TRASH ENCLOSURE LS 1 $ ,� UOO $ 000 3.47. O COMMON EXCAVATION (ONSITE OR TO SURCHARGE CY 6040 AREA) $L4,, $ 3.48. POOL COMMON EXCAVATION (OFFSITE) CY 11140 $cl $ 3-49. POOL GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 6700 $ (p $ jq 3-50. POOL INSULATION (4" THICK) SY 1330 $ �_ $ D, 9 3-51. POOL SUBGRADE ROCK (1.5" CLEAN ROCK) TON 1400 $ 144 ly1Ly0 $ 3-52. PLACE POOL GENERAL FILL FROM SURCHARGE AREA (CV) CY 4500 $GIs- $ ) 6 1 3-53. POOL SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TON 19600 $ )LO, (09 $ TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS $ 6-71 9-7 TOTAL PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT RELATED ELEMENTS $ %� LS�� 11-1- TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS AND FENCE $ - 1 '� 1 D 13 TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS $ 0-7 R)-f81 TOTAL BASE BID: PARTS 1,2,3 $ 10J Z .)-� J��S © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 1OR - 4 REVISED BID FORM No. Item Units Qty Un1f Price Total Price PART 4 - ALTERNATES: 4-1. ALTERNATE 1: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 1 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT THE VORTEX POOL AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. LS l 1 $ 1 0®o $ oV 4.2. ALTERNATE NO. 2: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 2 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A DROP SLIDE AS ii O d U b 1 Ot 0 0 INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ t $ _( t 4-3. ALTERNATE NO. 3: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 3 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CLIMBING WALL AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS .91 boo $�Od 0 4.4. ALTERNATE NO. 4: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 4 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A WATER WALK AS S(o 600 INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ ] $ 4-5. ALTERNATE NO. 5: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO, 5 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL BASKETBALL ACCESSORIES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ 8T �� $ B d0 4-6. ALTERNATE NO. 6: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 6 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL COMPETITION POOL WATER �-b� 00 [� PLAY FEATURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS } $ $ 4-7. ALTERNATE NO. 7: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 7 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 3 ADDITIONAL SHADE UMBRELLA 3 �� L)0 0 STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ $ 4-8. ALTERNATE NO. 8: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 8 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 2 ADDITIONAL FABRIC PICNIC/RENTAL STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ i , QOO $� d0 4-9. ALTERNATE NO. 9: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 9 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO CONSTRUCT THE POOL WITH SHOTCRETE AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. ADD/DEDUCT (CIRCLE ONE) LS fP 1 $ 600 $ 000 4.10. ALTERNATE NO. 10: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 10 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL A TYPE "3" WATER PLAY FEATURE IN THE RECREATION POOL IN PLACE OF THE TYPE "2" WATER PLAY FEATURE. LS I $ 600 $ (� 60 a 4.11. ALTERNATE NO. 11: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 1 1 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV SYSTEM CAMERAS IN OR ON THE BATHHOUSE BUILDING AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS $ I o00 $ 1 ` 4-12. ALTERNATE NO. 12: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 12 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV CAMERAS ON ` EXTERIOR POLES IN THE PARK AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 1 OR - 5 REVISED BID FORM No. Item Units Qty Unit Price Total Price 4-13. ALTERNATE NO. 13: ALTERNATE WATERSLIDE MANUFACTURER - IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO, 13 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO USE AN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER OTHER THAN THE PRE -APPROVED MANUFACTURERS, FOR THE DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND THE DROP SLIDE. PROVIDE MANUFACTURER BELOW. ADD / DEDUCT (CIRCLE ONE) LS ALTERNATE 4-13 - MANUFACTURER DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND DROP SLIDE ! A 0 2019 Stantec 1193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 lOR - 6 REVISED BID FORM 6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be Substantially Completed and completed and ready for Final Payment in accordance with Article 9.10 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement. 6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified above, which shall be stated in the Agreement. 7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: A. Required Bid Security in the form of 5 percent. B. Bid Form Attachment A - Responsible Contractor Verification and Certification of Compliance. C. Prevailing Wage Certificate - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements D. E-Verification - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements E. Jobs Reporting - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements F. Minority and Women owned Businesses Reporting - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements 8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. If Bidder Is: A Corporation SUBMITTED on March 15 2019. Corporation Name: Donlar Construction Company _(SEAL) State of Incorporation: Minnesota Type (General Bi,c�s. Professional, Service, Limited Liability): General Business By: Name (typed or printed): _-jS20iiainZ Title: President (Signature) Attest `l "' (CORPORATE SEAL) ( ignature of Corporate Secretory) Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): 550 Shoreview Park Road, Shoreview, MN 55126 Phone No.: 651-227-0631 Email.: 651-227-0132 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 1 OR - 7 REVISED BID FORM An Individual Name (typed or printed): By: (Individual's signature) Doing business as: Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): Phone No.: Email.:. A Porinershin Partnership Name: By: (Signature of general partner) Name (typed or printed): Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): Phone No.: Email.: (SEAL) 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 1 OR - 8 REVISED BID FORM Joint Venture Joint Venture Name: By: Name (typed or printed): Title: Business address: Phone No.. Joint Venturer Name: By: (Signature) Name (typed or printed): Title: (SEAL) (Signature of joint venture partner) Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): Phone No.: Fax No.: (SEAL) Phone and Fax Number, and Address for receipt of official communications: (Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above). END OF DOCUMENT 02019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 0041 1 OR - 9 REVISED BID FORM SECTION 00 41 13 BID FORM ATTACHMENT A RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE PROJECT TITLE: New Hope Outdoor fool Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 7, IMPLEMENTATION.... any prime contractor or subcontractor that does not meet the minimum criteria in subdivision 3 or fails to verify that it meets those criteria is not a responsible contractor and is not eligible to be awarded a construction contract for the project or to perform work on the project... Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 3. RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR, MINNIMUM CRITERIA. "Responsible contractor" means a contractor that conforms to the responsibility requirements in the solicitation document for its portion of the work on the project and verifies that it meets the following minimum criteria: (1) The Contractor: (i) is in compliance with workers' compensation and unemployment insurance requirements; (ii) is currently registered with the Department of Revenue and the Department of Employment and Economic Development if it has employees; (iii) has a valid federal tax identification number or a valid Social Security number if an individual; and (iv) has filed a certificate of authority to transact business in Minnesota with the Secretary of State if a foreign corporation or cooperative. (2) The contractor or related entity is in compliance with and, during the three-year period before submitting the veri fication, has not violated section 177.24, 177.25, 177.41 to 177.44, 181.13, 181.14, or 181.722, and has not violated United States Code, title 29, sections 201 to 219, or United States Code, title 40, sections 3141 to 3148. For purposes of this clause, a violation occurs when a contractor or related entity: (i) repeatedly fails to pay statutorily required wages or penalties on one or more separate projects for a total underpayment of $25,000 or more within the three-year period: (ii) has been issued an order to comply by the commissioner of Labor and Industry that has become final; (iii) has been issued at least two determination letters within the three-year period by the Department of Transportation finding an underpayment by the contractor or related entity to its own employees; (iv) has been found by the commissioner of Labor and Industry to have repeatedly or willfully violated any of the sections referenced in this clause pursuant to section 177.27; (v) has been issued a ruling or findings of underpayment by the administrator of the Wage and Hour Division of the United States Department of Labor that have become final or have been upheld by an administrative law judge or the Administrative Review Board; or (vi) has been found liable for underpayment of wages or penalties or misrepresenting a construction worker as an independent contractor in an action brought in a court having jurisdiction. Provided that, if the contractor or related entity contests a determination of underpayment by the Department of Transportation in a contested case proceeding, a violation does not occur until the contested case proceeding has concluded with a determination that the contractor or related entity underpaid wages or penalties;* BID FORM ATTACHMENT A 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0041 13 - 1 (3) The contractor or related entity is in compliance with and, during the three-year period before submitting the verification, has not violated section 181.723 or chapter 32613. For purposes of this clause, a violation occurs when a contractor or related entity has been issued a final administrative or licensing order;* (4) The contractor or related entity has not, more than twice during the three-year period before submitting the verification, had a certificate of compliance under section 363A.36 revoked or suspended based on the provisions of section 363A.36, with the revocation or suspension becoming final because it was upheld by the Office of Administrative Hearings or was not appealed to the office;* (5) The contractor or related entity has not received a final determination assessing a monetary sanction from the Department of Administration or Transportation for failure to meet targeted group business, disadvantaged business enterprise, or veteran -owned business goals, due to a lack of good faith effort, more than once during the three-year period before submitting the verification;* * Any violations, suspensions, revocations, or sanctions, as defined in clauses (2) to (5), occurring prior to July 1, 2014, shall not be considered in determining whether a contractor or related entity meets the minimum criteria. (6) The contractor or related entity is not currently suspended or debarred by the federal government or the state of Minnesota or any of its departments, commissions, agencies, or political subdivisions; and (7) All subcontractors that the contractor intends to use to perform project work have verified to the contractor through a signed statement under oath by an owner or officer that they meet the minimum criteria listed in clauses (1) to (6). Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 5. SUBCONTRACTOR VERIFICATION. A prime contractor or subcontractor shall include in its verification of compliance under subdivision 4 a list of all of its first -tier subcontractors that it intends to retain for work on the project. If a prime contractor or any subcontractor retains additional subcontractors on the project after submitting its verification of compliance, the prime contractor or subcontractor shall obtain verifications of compliance from each additional subcontractor with which it has a direct contractual relationship and shall submit a supplemental verification confirming compliance with subdivision 3, clause (7), within 14 days of retaining the additional subcontractors. A prime contractor shall submit to the contracting authority upon request copies of the signed verifications of compliance from all subcontractors of any tier pursuant to subdivision 3, clause (7). A prime contractor and subcontractors shall not be responsible for the false statements of any subcontractor with which they do not have a direct contractual relationship. A prime contractor and subcontractors shall be responsible for false statements by their first -tier subcontractors with which they have a direct contractual relationship only if they accept the verification of compliance with actual knowledge that it contains a false statement. BID FORM ATTACHMENT A 02019 Stantec 1 193804337 0041 13 - 2 Minn. Stat, § 16C.285, Subd. 4. VERIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE. A contractor responding to a solicitation document of a contacting authority shall submit to the contracting authority a signed statement under oath by an owner or officer verifying compliance with each of the minimum criteria in subdivision 3 at the time that it responds to the solicitation document. A contracting authority may accept a sworn statement as sufficient to demonstrate that a contractor is a responsible contractor and shall not be held liable for awarding a contract in reasonable reliance on that statement. Failure to verify compliance with any one of the minimum criteria or a false statement under oath in a verification of compliance shall render the prime contractor or subcontractor that makes the false statement ineligible to be awarded a construction contract on the project for which the verification was submitted. A false statement under oath verifying compliance with any of the minimum criteria may result in termination of a construction contract that has already been awarded to a prime contractor or subcontractor that submits a false statement. A contracting authority shall not be liable for declining to award a contract or terminating a contract based on a reasonable determination that the contractor failed to verify compliance with the minimum criteria or falsely stated that it meets the minimum criteria. CERTIFICATION By signing this document, I certify that I am an owner or officer of the company, and I swear under oath that: 1) My company meets each of the Minimum Criteria to be a responsible contractor as defined herein and is in compliance with Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, 2) 1 have included Attachment A-1 with my company's solicitation response, and 3) if my company is awarded a contract, I will also submit Attachment A-2 as required. Authoriz d signature of Owner or Officer: Printed Name: Jon Kainz Title: Date: President March 15, 2019 Company Name: Donlar Construction Company Sworn to and subscribed before me this 15 day of March 2019. Notary Public My Commission Expires: January 31, 2020 --------------- --------------------------------- -- i S xensrr r.�ur c.no r^ .B, ,i>t[a��@ runt i Notary Public -Minnesota P.1Viy Commission Expires Jan 31, 2020. �--- - -- —•-------•..........................s NOTE: Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 2, (c) If only one prime contractor responds to a solicitation document, a contracting authority may award a construction contract to the responding prime contractor even if the minimum criteria in subdivision 3 are not met. BID FORM ATTACHMENT A 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0041 13 - 3 ATTACHMENT A -I FIRST -TIER SUBCONTRACTORS LIST SUBMIT WITH PRIME CONTRACTOR RESPONSE PROJECTTITLE: Ne_►4'_Hope_Qutcloorftol Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 5. A prime contractor or subcontractor shall include in its verification of compliance under subdivision 4 a list of all of its first -tier subcontractors that it intends to retain for work on the project. Submit this form with the Bid Form. FIRST TIER SUBCONTRACTOR NAMES (Legal name of company as registered with the Secretary of State) Name of city where company home office is located L o � G12aV_ 6-AIo bq\ CX%.^ /U BID FORM ATTACHMENT A 9) 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0041 13 - 4 PREVAILING WAGE CERTIFICATE CONTRACTOR: SUBMIT THIS FORM WITH THE ORIGINAL COPY OF YOUR BID Laborers and Mechanics shall be paid according to the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction, in accordance with Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43, and the minimum wage rates and fringe benefits paid to the various classes shall be as determined by the Secretary of Labor of the United States for work in the City of New Hope. In addition to the certificates and other evidences of compliance which are required under these Specifications and under Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43, it shall be required that the person or company representative submitting a bid for this contract shall certify in writing that both she/he/it and their Subcontractors shall comply with the wage and labor standards provisions of the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction. Failure to comply with these requirements shall mean the City of New Hope may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate his/her right to proceed with the work and the Contractor and his/her Sureties shall be liable to the City of New Hope for any excess cost occasioned to the City of New Hope for the completion of the work. By submitting this bid, it is understood and agreed that if it is accepted, in whole or in part, by the City of New Hope that any work done by the Contractor or by the Contractor's agents or Subcontractors under a contract with the City of New Hope shall be in conformity with provisions of the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction, in accordance with Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43. (72�� Jon Kainz Signalu Donlar Construction Company Company Name RETURN THIS FORM WITH YOUR BID Appendix To 00 73 46 - 1 Prevailing Wage Certificate MINNESOTA STATUTES 2018 16C.075 16C.075 E-VERIFY. A contract for services valued in excess of $50,000 must require certification from the vendor and any subcontractors that, as of the date services on behalf of the state of Minnesota will be performed, the vendor and all subcontractors have implemented or are in the process of implementing the federal E-Verify program for all newly hired employees in the United States who will perform work on behalf of the state of Minnesota. This section does not apply to contracts entered into by the: (1) State Board of Investment; or (2) the Office of Higher Education for contracts related to credit reporting services if the office certifies that those services cannot be reasonably obtained if this section applies. History: 1,Sp2011 c 10 art 3 s 29; 2015 c 69 art 2 s 2 Copyright C 2018 by the Revisor of Statutes, State of Minnesota. All Rights Reserved. This Page Leff Blank Intentionally — Attachment V to Grant Agreement — -- - GRANT APPLICATION Not unnlica6le _ -- - Attachment VI to Grant Agreement JOBS REPORTING (a) Pursuant to M.S. Sec. 16A.633, subd. 4, the Council is required to report to Minnesota Management and Budget the number of jobs created or retained by the Project. To enable the Council to comply with M.S. Sec. 16A.633, subd. 4, the Grantee is required to report the number of jobs created or retained by the Project to the Council as set forth below. (b) The Grantee shall require all of its contractors to report the information below to the Grantee. The G r a nt e e shall then report to the Council. Information m u s t be recorded by the G r ante a in an Excel document that can be downloaded into the report by Minnesota Management and Budget. Each report must contain the following: (1) The name of the Project. (2) The Council grant or contract number, if applicable. (3) Reporting period. The appropriate biennium is to be selected. (4) The Agency Number. This will complete the next column with Agency Name. (5) Legal Citation for the Authorization depicted in Recital C of this grant agreement (6) Department 1D responsible for the Project. (7) The Appropriation for the Project. (8) The Appropriation Amount. (9) Project Start Date. (10) Project Completion Date. (11) The County where the Project is located or, if it is located in more than one county, where it is primarily located. (12) Funding Source for Project. The selection will be Trunk Highway Bonds, General Obligation Bonds or General Fund. (13) Job Type. Jobs should be classified as either (i) engineering/professional, (ii) construction, or (iii) other. Manager and supervisor jobs shall be classified as category (i), (ii) or (iii) based on the nature of the work those individuals spent the majority of their time overseeing. (14) Hourly Wages. Jobs should be classified according to the hourly pay ranges below. Overhead or indirect costs or the value of pensions or other benefits should not be included in wages. (i) less than $10.00, (ii) $10.01 to $15,00, (iii) $15.01 to $20.00, (iv) $20.01 to $25.00, (v) $25.01 to $30.00, (vi) $30.01 to $35.00, (vii) $35.01 to $40.00, or (viii) more than $40.00. (15) Jobs. 41 a, Jobs should be classified as either (i) jobs created or (ii) jobs retained; they will not be counted as both. A "job created" is a new position created and filled, or an existing unfilled position that is filled, because of the Project. A "job retained" means a job at a specific wage level that existed prior to beginning the Project that would have been lost but for the Project. Only jobs in Minnesota should be counted. b. Jobs should be expressed in "full-time equivalents" (FTE). In calculating an FTE, the number of hours worked during the Reporting Period should be divided by the number of hours representing a full work schedule in a Reporting Period, i.e.1,040 for a six-month period or 2,080 for a period of a year. Jobs should be reported regardless of when the Project or an individual's employment began or ended. Jobs are to be calculated based on hours worked in the current Reporting Period only, so that reporting is not cumulative. c. Jobs should not be separated into full-time, part-time, temporary, seasonal, etc. Instead, all hours should be totaled and converted into .FTEs as indicated above. (c) Each contractor will report its workforce and the workforce of its subcontractors active during the Reporting Period. This includes employees actively engaged in the Project who work on the jobsite, in the Project office, in the home office or telecommute from home or other alternative office location. This includes, but is not limited to, any engineering personnel, inspectors, sampling and testing technicians, and lab technicians performing work directly in support of the Project. This does not include material suppliers such as steel, culverts, guardrail and tool suppliers. Only hours that relate to time spent on the Project should be reported. (d) The Grantee must incorporate these reporting requirements into its contracts with its contractors (in part so that contractors can add the requirements to their contracts with subcontractors and impose deadlines on reporting by subcontractors). (e) To distinguish the jobs reported by comz-actors that were funded by the Grant, the Grantee must multiply the job numbers reported by each contractor in each category above by the percentage of total Project costs funded by the Grant (e.g., if the Grant was 40% of total Project costs, the Grantee should multiply the jobs numbers given in each category by 40% to arrive at the number of jobs fimded by the Grant) and it is those numbers that should be reported to the Council. 42 _ Attachment V11 Minority and Women owned Businesses Reporting Please complete this form at the end of every 12-month period during the project. Submit the form to: Metropolitan Council Director, Office of Equal Opportunity 390 N. Robert Street St. Paul, MN 55101 Annual Report No. _ (Number 1, end of first 12 months, 2 ends of second 12 months, etc.) Grantee Agency Name: Grantee Agency Contact Persona Email address: Telephone Number: Annual Report Period: mnlyear to rrrolyear Date Report Filed: Grant Am—eement Number: Grant Amount: Grant Project Description: (insert the project description from Attachment IV of the grant agreement here) Were other funds used to finance this project? Yes No —.- If ycs, please list other fund sources and amounts from Attachment III of the grant agreement and amounts on table below. Fund Source -- _ - — - 3. Amount Metro Council 43 Please list all companies hired to carry out work for this project and amount paid with Metro Council grant funds only during the reporting period. Pro -rate funds provided by Metro Council grant if other funding sources also paid to companies. For example, if the Metro Council grant funded 40% of project, then multiply payments to that company by 40% for the reporting period. --Company Company Ad€lress Work Performed 7 Women/Amount Cumulative Name (Street, City, State, I (Landscape Minority Paid with Amount ZIP) ' Design/Architectural/ Owned Metro Paid from Engineering Services, Business? Council MC Grant Construction, Legal (Ye.RINo) Grant Funds All Services, Other Fends Reports Services —please During (Add Reporting amounts describe) Period paid to that business from previous reports plus this report) Please describe the demographics of companies listed above Company Name Company Address (Street, City, State. ZIP) Number of Employees Number of Women Employees Number of Employees who are People of Color 44 Please answer the following questions: 1. Were any pro -active steps taken to insure the hiring of women/minority owned businesses to perform work on this project? If so, please describe those steps. 2. How did you select businesses to perform work for this project? 3. Did you place a goal to hire women/minority owned businesses in your contracts to carry out work for this project? If so, what is that goal? 4. How did you insure your goal for hiring women/minority owned businesses was met? 45 I �, =ll' IA Document A31 o TM - 2010 CONTRACTOR: (Name, legal status and address) Donlar Construction Company 550 Shoreview Park Road Shoreview, MN 55126 OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN SURETY: (Name, legal status and principal place of business) Travelers Casualty and Surety One Tower Square, 2SHS Hartford, CT 06183 BONIUAMOUNT: Five Percent of Amount Bid (5%) PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) New Hope Outdoor Pool, New Hope, MN. Company of America This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. Any singular reference to Contractor, Surety, Owner or other party shall be considered plural where applicable. The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for an extension beyond sixty (60) days. If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. Signed and sealed us 15th day of March, 2019 (Witness) toe [ Wrtrtess) (Iitle)Patricia M. Rowan Attorney -in -fact CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA Contract Document, on which this text appears in RED. An original assures that changes will not be obscured. Init. A]A Dooumenl A310TM — 2010. Copyright 01963. 1970 and 2010 byThe American Inslitule of Architects. All rights reserved. WAR N1NG: This Ale Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproducllon or distribution of this Ale Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. l Purchasers are permitted to reproduce ten (10) copies of this document when completed. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects' legal counsel, cQoyrlphtgala.oro. 061110 CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF COUNTY OF7 On the day ofbefore me personally appeared, to me, who being duly sworn, did depose and say: that s/he resides in nel<.a cyu that s/he is the�-Zzz�e of the Donlar Construct on Company the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing instrument; that s/he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the board of directors of said corporation; and that s/he signed her/his name thereto by like order. sM}Fr-: , n r (SEAL) STEF'�6FNIE M. F�RE�TQN �ewe Notary Pubdo-Minnesota My Commission kxpirns Jan 31, `Zft ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF CORPORATE SURETY STATE OF MINNESOTA COUNTY OF Dakota On the 15th day of March 2019 before me personally appeared, pa_t r iris M _ Rowan to me known, who being duly sworn, did say: that s/he resides in Minnesota that s/he is the aforesaid officer or attorney in fact of Travelers Casualty and Suretv Companv of America a corporation, that the seal affixed to the foregoing instrument is the corporate seal of said corporation; and that said instrument as signed and sealed on behalf of said corporation by the aforesaid officer, by authority of its board of directors; and the aforesaid officer acknowledged said instrument to be the free act and deed of said corporation. (SEAL) wosa y rc LORI ANN ZARBOK Notary Public Minnesota My Cormission E)pires Jan, 31, 2024 LTRAVELERS-f- Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Travelers Casualty and Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Patricia M. Rowan of Mendota Heights , their true and lawful Attorney -in -Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed, and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 3rd day of February, 2017. HA a 6� j COW amen F S State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. By: Robert L. Raney, Seftror Vice President On this the 3rd day of February, 2017, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2021 06.Yrr ,� m� C- � * ��o�* Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public Ecsf' This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 15th day of March 2019 . yci@ L'OIW. VA Kevin E. Hughes, Assistant Secretary To verify the authenticity of this Power ofAttorney, please call us at 1-800-421-3880. Please refer to the above -named Attorney -in -Fact and the details of the bond to which the power is attached, Request for Action May 23, 2022 Approved by: Kirk McDonald, City Manager Originating Department: Parks & Recreation By: Kirk McDonald, City Manager Agenda Section Consent Item Number 6.10 and Susan Rader, Director of Parks & Recreation Agenda Title Sln&" , Pa -Se 2 Resolution approving Addendum #4 to the engineering services agreement with Stantec Consulting Services Inc. for the additional construction management services for the Civic Center Park improvements (Improvement Project No. 941) and pool (Improvement Project No. 995) Requested Action Staff recommends that the City Council approve the attached resolution approving Addendum #4 to the engineering services agreement for the Civic Center Park improvements (Improvement Project No. 941) and pool (Improvement Project No. 995) with Stantec Consulting Services. This addendum for $44,935.08, is for additional engineering construction management and administration services for the pool and park projects. Additional construction management and administration has been necessary on the pool, Civic Center Park and city hall landscaping projects. When Addendum #3 was approved in May 2020, it was felt that the time identified to finish the projects was adequate. However, since May 2020, several unforeseen issues have caused the completion of a couple of the projects to be delayed, and Stantec staff reached the maximum for their budget mid -summer last year. Since then, they have not been charging the city. Addendum #4 includes the additional costs to date, as well as the estimated time for closeout of the two remaining projects. Staff discussed this with the City Council at the May 16, 2022 Work Session. The city engineer will be in attendance at the meeting and available to answer questions. Policy/Past Practice Stantec engineering has been appointed annually as the city engineer for many years and is familiar with the city's infrastructure. The firm performs special projects for the city on a council -approved basis. Background In order to finalize plans for the pool and Civic Center Park projects, a Scope of Services was approved on June 25, 2018 with Stantec Consulting that included full engineering services for the design and construction of the contracts for the demolition of the park buildings and current city hall, city hall landscaping, city hall and pool parking lots, Civic Center Park amenities, pool, outdoor theater and skatepark. Stantec's services included preliminary survey/field investigation, schematic design, design - construction documents, bidding, construction survey, construction management and administration, construction materials testing, record plan/base map and Infraseek update, and necessary progress meetings. On December 10, 2018, the City Council approved Addendum #1 for the additional design costs which were due to higher than estimated construction costs for the pool and theatre, the inclusion of "future" amenities that were bid as alternates and additional theatre components that were also bid as alternates. Addendum #1 was approved with the understanding that an additional addendum addressing the construction management services would need to be completed, once the project alternates had been decided. I:\RFA\P&R\Pool and Civic Center Pk Projects\ 2022\ Stan tec Addendum\May CM\Q&R- Stantec Addendum #4.docx ' Request for Action, Page 2 Addendum #2 was approved at the May 13, 2019 Council Meeting to cover several additional services including the additional time required to design and construct the pool due to the necessary soil corrections, including pilings, excavation of poor soils, and importing of good soil material; the increased base costs for the theatre (from the original $500,000 amount to approximately $800,000); the addition of the "future' park amenities that were bid as alternates and approved (picnic shelter, trail lighting and a north west loop of trail with lighting); the theater alternates that were approved (expanding the storage area by three feet, increasing the door width to the storage areas and the addition of dressing room space); and conduit for the park cameras and additional receptacles and conduit for theater lighting. Addendum #3 was approved May 26, 2020 for additional engineering services necessary on the projects including restaking for the park/parking lot contractor, coordination with and field staking for Xcel, deck pour analysis, delay claim/winter construction analysis/CenterPoint permit items, and the design and construction administration for the storm water chamber. Some of these additional services ($46,126.50), including restaking and deck pour analysis, were reimbursed to the City by contractors. Addendum #4 is for additional construction management and administration that has been necessary on the pool, Civic Center Park and city hall landscaping projects, plus an estimated amount to complete the two remaining projects. Since May 2020, several unforeseen issues have caused the completion of a couple of the projects to be delayed. Due to Covid-19, the opening of the aquatic park was delayed from June 2020 until June 2021. As the facility was not used until 2021, there were several items that were addressed during and after the first season of operations in addition to several punchlist items. In addition, extra effort continued in 2021 and 2022 related to coordination with contractors working in the park, meeting with contractors as they updated their schedules, dealing with some of the weather issues last year that delayed grass growth, and continuing to work with the contractor on ongoing project items and punchlist items. Date of Agreement Amount June 25, 2018 Scope of Services $1,737,839.23 December 10, 2018 Addendum #1 $180,991.97 Ma 13, 2019 Addendum #2 $179,067.13 May 26, 2020 Addendum #3 $214,774.03 Total to date $2,312,672.36 Ma 2022 Addendum #4 $44,935.08 TOTAL $2,357,607.44 At the May 16, 2022 Council work session, the City Council directed staff to place Addendum #4 on the council agenda for formal approval. Funding The original Scope of Services listed a not to exceed amount of $1,737,839.23, which was based upon the estimated construction costs and schedule. In addition to the park and pool projects, this amount included the Bid Pack 2A items that were identified as part of the city hall project and will be paid for as part of the bond that was issued for the police department/city hall improvements. Request for Action, Page 3 The additional park and pool design costs that were added with Addendum #1 on December 2018 listed a not to exceed amount of $180,991.97. Addendum #2 on May 2019 listed a not to exceed amount of $179,067.13. And Addendum #3 listed a not to exceed amount of $214,774.03. With the addition of Addendum #4, the total engineering costs are expected to total $2,357,607.44 for the five projects. The Addendum #4 for additional construction management and administration services for the park and pool projects would be funded with the park and pool bond proceeds. Attachments • Resolution ■ Letter of proposed amendment from Stantec for Addendum #4 City of New Hope Resolution No. 2022- 67 Resolution approving Addendum #4 to the engineering services agreement with Stantec Consulting Services Inc. for the additional construction management services for the Civic Center Park improvements (Improvement Project No. 941) and pool (Improvement Project No. 995) WHEREAS, on June 25, 2018 the City Council approved a proposal with Stantec Engineering Services Inc. engineering and design services which included the city hall landscaping, streetscaping, parking lots Civic Center Park amenities and pool; and, WHEREAS, on December 10, 2018 the City Council approved Addendum #1 for the additional engineering time needed beyond the original scopes of service; and, WHEREAS, on May 13, 2019 the City Council approved Addendum #2 for the additional construction management services covered several additional services including the additional time required to design and construct the pool due to the necessary soil corrections; due to the increased base costs for the theatre; the addition of the "future' park amenities that were bid as alternates and approved; the theater alternates that were approved; conduit for the park cameras; and additional receptacles and conduit for theater lighting; and, WHEREAS, on May 26, 2020 the City Council approved Addendum #3 for additional engineering services necessary on the projects including restaking, deck pour analysis, delay claim/winter construction, as well as the effects of project delays, completion dates, additional testing, and actual construction administration and observations of the various project contractors; and, WHEREAS, Addendum #4 is for additional construction management and administration that has been necessary on the pool, Civic Center Park and city hall landscaping projects, plus an estimated amount to complete the two remaining projects; and, WHEREAS, staff recommends that the City Council approve Addendum #4 with Stantec Consulting Services Inc. for the additional construction management services; and, WHEREAS, the funding sources for the addendum are the 2018A and 2019 park and pool bond proceeds. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED the City Council of the city of New Hope, Minnesota approves entering into Addendum #4 for additional construction management services for $44,935.08 with Stantec Consulting Services Inc. Adopted by the City Council of the city of New Hope, Hennepin County, Minnesota, this 23rd day of May, 2022. Mayor Attest: City Clerk Stantec Consulting Services Inc. 733 Marquette Avenue, Suite 1000 Stantec Minneapolis, MN 55402 May 10, 2022 File: 193804335, 193804336, 193804337, 193804338, 193804646 Attention: Kirk McDonald City Manager City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Reference: Addendum #4 - Additional Engineering Construction Management Services for City Hall Landscaping, Streetscaping, Parking Lots, Pool, and the Civic Center Park Improvements Dear Kirk, The construction management and administration on the pool, Civic Center Park, and city hall landscaping projects have continued beyond the time frame for completion anticipated in Addendum #3 that was processed in May 2020. At that time, we were anticipating completion of work in 2020. Work on the above referenced projects lingered into 2021 and is nearing completion and closeout in 2022. Additional Costs to Date The additional costs as of May 6, 2022 that went beyond those costs identified in Addendum #3 are related to construction management and administration services that include construction survey, construction observation, construction administration, and record plan/base map work. The total of these costs for the projects are shown below: Table 1 - Additional Costs to Date Project Amount 193804335 - City Hall Landscaping, $21,300.58 Streetscaping, Parking Lots, and Civic Center Park Improvements 193804337 - Outdoor Pool $15,134.50 Total Additional Costs to Date $36,435.08 Estimated Remaining Costs for Closeout The pool project is planned to be closed out in May 2022. The landscaping, streetscaping, parking lots, and Civic Center Park Improvements is working toward closeout this summer, with remaining punch list work being scheduled at this time and anticipated to be completed in June. We have estimated our remaining costs for closeout of the two projects as follows: Design with community in mind S, May 10, 2022 Mr. Kirk McDonald Page 2 of 2 Reference: Addendum #4 - Additional Engineering Construction Management Services for City Hall Landscaping, Streetscaping, Parking Lots, Pool, and the Civic Center Park Improvements Table 2 - Estimated Remaining Costs 193804335 - City Hall Landscaping, Streetscaping, Parking Lots, and Civic Center Park Improvements 193804337 - Outdoor Pool Total Estimated Remainina Costs Amount $7,000.00 $1,500.00 $8,500.00 Addendum #4 Addendum #4 is a summary of Table 1 and Table 2 as shown below: Table 3 - Addendum #4 193804335 - City Hall Landscaping, Streetscaping, Parking Lots, and Civic Center Park Improvements 193804337 - Outdoor Pool Total - Addendum #4 Amount $28,300.58 $16,634.50 $44,935.08 If you have any questions or require further information, please call me at (612) 712-2021. Sincerely, STANTEC�CjONSULTING SERVICES INC. Dan D. Boyum, P.E. The undersigned hereby consents to the Addendum #4 Contract as noted above and attached to Stantec Consulting Services Inc. City of New Hope CC: Jeff Sargent, Susan Rader, Bernie Weber, Valorie Leone - New Hope; Stacy Woods - City Attorney. Design with community in mind -b C 7 Co T � T r-,'LA Project Manual For New Hope Outdoor Pool VOLUME I OF 2 Prepared for: City of New Hope, Minnesota City Project No. 995 5 Stantec February 2019 Stantec Project No. 193804337 DOCUMENT 00 91 13 ADDENDUM 5 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL CITY PROJECT NO.995 PROJECT NO. 193804337 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA March 11, 2019 Number of Pages: 7 (includes this sheet) To: All Planholders of Record From: Stantec 733 Marquette Ave. Suite 1000 Minneapolis, MN 55402 (612) 712-2000 - General Office (612) 712-2108 - Bruce Paulson, Project Manager The following changes, additions, and deletions are hereby made a part of the Bidding Documents. Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in rejection of the Bid. ADDENDUM 5 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 1 PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES SECTION 26 24 13 - SWITCHBOARDS 1. Page 26 24 13-1, Remove and replace paragraph 2.01.13 with the following: C. Amperage: 600 Amp. SECTION 31 63 16 - HELICAL PILES 1. Page 31 63 16-3, Revise paragraph 2.01.A to add Techno Metal Post of Iowa to the approved manufacturers. DRAWING CHANGES SHEET E101 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Add general note 2 with the following: 2. Midspan switches shall be located on the existing light pole shown on the drawings where the CCTV cameras are located. 2. Add note pointed at the handhole located just to the West of the parking lot between the two CCTV cameras to read as follows: a. Existing handhole to remain. 3. Change note for two conduits between the mechanical building and the bathhouse to read as follows: a. 4"C-ONE(1)-l" INNERDUCT-(1)12STRAND FIBER OPTIC CABLE -TWO(2)-l" INNERDUCT-EMPTY d. C_'hnnge note- for twn conduit,; hetween the mechanical huilding and the existing handhole to read as follows: a. 4"C-ONE(1)-1 " INNERDUCT-(1)12 STRAND FIBER OPTIC CABLE -TWO(2)-1 " INNERDUCT-EMPTY 5. Add general note 3 with the following: 3. Provide handholes as required for site conduits as required for pull requirements. SHEET E601 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Detail D - Exhaust Fan EF1 Control Schematic note for 208VAC, 3 Phase shall be changed to the following: a. 208VAC, 1 Phase ADDENDUM 5 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 2 2. Detail B - 50M Pool Recirculation Pumps Control Schematic shall be changed to the following: a. 50M Pool Recirculation Pump Control Schematic 3. Detail B - 50M Pool recirculation Pump control schematic timing relay on the VFD enable line shall be changed to a normally closed time delay to open type relay. 4. Detail B - 50M Pool Recirculation Pump Control Schematic timing relay to the alarm dialer shall be changed to a normally open time delay to close type relay. 5. Detail C - Recreation Pool Recirculation Pumps Control Schematic shall be changed to the following: a. Recreation Pool Recirculation Pump Control Schematic 6. Detail C - Recreation Pool Recirculation Pump Control Schematic: Timing relay on the VFD enable line shall be changed to a normally closed time delay to open type relay. 7. Detail B - 50M Pool Recirculation Pump Control Schematic: Timing relay to the alarm dialer shall be changed to a normally open time delay to close type relay. SHEET E602 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Detail D - Motion Jet Pump No. 1 Control Schematic: Delete DVDT filter. 2. Detail E - Motion Jet Pumps No. 2, 3, and Vortex Motion Control Schematic add red alarm light and relay #8 contact to turn on the red alarm light if the E-Stop is pressed. SHEET E701 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Detail A -Line Diagram: Panelboard LPB2A is shown fed from Panelboard LPB1 B. The detail shall be changed to show Panelboard LPB2A fed from Panelboard SEB1A. SHEET E801 (ISSUED): 1. Revise Fixture Schedule as indicated in the attached. SHEET E802 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Panelboard schedule LPB1 B: Panelboard shall be fed from SED1 B (VIA T1). 2. Panelboard schedule SED1 B: Circuit 14, 16, and 18 description shall be changed to RPFP3. 3. Panelboard schedule SEDI B: Circuit 20, 22, and 24 description shall be changed to RPVP. 4. Panelboard schedule SEB I A: Total connected load Phase A = 16644, total connected load Phase B = 15087, total connected load Phase C = 11788, total connected load Phase A,B,C = 53519. ADDENDUM 5 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 3 SHEET EA201 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Fixture type BG2 in room Al 01 with a question mark for the circuit number shall be fed from circuit 1. 2. Fixture type FA3 in room in room A101 A shall be changed to fixture type FA4. 3. Fixture type ZFX in room in room Al 1 1 with a question mark for the circuit number shall be fed from circuit 2. 4. Fixture type ZFX in room in room A 115 shown fed from circuit number 3 shall be fed from circuit 4. 5. Fixture type HC6 in room in room A 116 with a question mark for the circuit number shall be fed from circuit 3. 6. Add general note 4 to read as follows: 4. Exterior lighting shown fed from circuit 2 shall be fed from panelboard LPBI A SHEET EA301 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Lighting control panel shall be located in room Al 14. Verify exact location during construction. SHEET EA401 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Fire alarm annunciator control panel shall be located in room A106 near door at grid line B. Verify exact location during construction. 2. Access Control Panel shall be fed from LPB1 A in lieu of SEB1 A. 3. Intrusion Detection Control Panel shall be fed from l PBl A in lieu of SEB 1 A. 4. Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be fed from LPB 1 A in lieu of SEB 1 A. SHEET EB301 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Detail A -Power Plan: Note pointing to Rec. Pool Flume Slide Pump (RPRP) shall be changed to Rec. Pool Recirculation Pump (RPRP). 2. Detail A - Power Plan: Change the grounding electrode connection to the water service and jumper over the water meter from 1 "C-1 # 1 /OG to SED1 B to 1 "C-1 #2/OG to SED1 B. 3. Detail B Electrical Room B102 Large Scale Plan: Change the note to referring to the combination starer to VFD starter for the following starters: RPCCMP3, RPFP3, RPCCMP2, RPVP, RPCCMPI, RPFSP, RPRP. 4. Detail B - Electrical Room B102 Large Scale Plan: Provide grounding electrode connection to concrete encased electrode and provide 1 "C-1 #4G to SED1 B. 5. Detail B - Electrical Room B102 Large Scale Plan: Provide grounding electrode connection to ground rod and provide ground rod and provide 1 "C-1 #6G to SED1 B. ADDENDUM 5 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 4 6. Detail B - Electrical Room B102 Large Scale Plan: The control panel in the North East corner of the room is the fire alarm control panel. SHEET EB401 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Fire alarm annunciator control panel shall be located in room B101 just to the right of the door at grid line 1. Verify exact location during construction. LIST OF ATTACHMENTS 1. Sheet E801 END OF DOCUMENT ADDENDUM 5 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally DOCUMENT 00 91 13 ADDENDUM 4 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL CITY PROJECT NO. 995 PROJECT NO. 193804337 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA March 8, 2019 Number of Pages: 1 1 (includes this sheet) To: All Planholders of Record From: Stantec 733 Marquette Ave. Suite 1000 Minneapolis, MN 55402 (612) 712-2000 - General Office (612) 712-2108 - Bruce Paulson, Project Manager The following changes, additions, and deletions are hereby made a part of the Bidding Documents. Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in rejection of the Bid. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 1 PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES SECTION 00 73 05 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS Page 00 73 05-1, Remove and replace paragraph ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR, C, with the following: C. Delete Subparagraph 3.7.1 in its entirety and replace with the following Subparagraph 3.7.1: Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure the Building Permit and shall secure and pay for the Electrical Permit, Mechanical Permit, as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the tine bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall waive the fee for the Building Permit, plan review fees, and inspection fees. The Contractor shall make arrangements for required inspections. The Contractor shall obtain the Certificate of Occupancy for the Project. The Contractor shall arrange for installation of sewer, electrical, gas, water, and other utilities required, except as otherwise indicated. The Owner shall pay sewer and water access charges (SAC and WAC) and park dedication fees, if any. SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT 1. Delete Section in its entirety and add new Section as attached to this Addendum. Clarifications are provided for private utility fees being paid by Owner, surveying responsibility, and construction observation. DOCUMENT 22 51 16 - POOL PUMPS 1. Page 22 51 16-2, Add following to subparagraph 2.02.C: a) Provide 3M Scotchkote 134 fusion bonded coating to the interior of the casing. 2. Page 22 51 16-3, Add following to subparagraph 2.02.F: a) Provide 3M Scotchkote 134 fusion bonded coating to the interior of the stuffing box. 3. Page 22 51 16-3, Add following to subparagraph 2.02.J: a) Provide 3M Scotchkote 134 fusion bonded coating to the entire base, interior and exterior. DRAWING CHANGES SHEET G102 (ISSUED): 1. Sheet Index updated to include new Drawings issued in Addendum 2 and 3. SHEET Q107 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Note that 50M gutter return piping running close to pool walls shall be installed with pipe supports as shown on Sheet S101 included in Addendum 3. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 2 LIST OF ATTACHMENTS 1. Section 01 31 00 -Project Management 2. Sheet G 102 END OF DOCUMENT ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally DOCUMENT 00 91 13 ADDENDUM 3 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL CITY PROJECT NO. 995 PROJECT NO. 193804337 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA March 6, 2019 Number of Pages: 125 (includes this sheet) To: All Planholders of Record From Stantec 733 Marquette Ave. Suite 1000 Minneapolis, MN 55402 (612) 712-2000 - General Office (612) 712-2108 - Bruce Paulson, Project Manager The following changes, additions, and deletions are hereby made a part of the Bidding Documents. Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in rejection of the Bid. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 1 CLARIFICATION 1. Builder's Risk Insurance is not required for this project. PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES DOCUMENT 00 41 1 OR - REVISED BID FORM 1. Delete Bid Form in its entirety and add Revised Bid Form as attached to this Addendum. Bidders: Please coordinate the Revised Bid Form with the revised information on Sheet C003 as attached to this Addendum. SECTION O1 20 00 - PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 1. Delete Section in its entirety and add new Section as attached to this Addendum. SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 1. Page 03 20 00-1, Revise paragraph 1.03.0 to read, American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 2. A775 - Standard Specification for Epoxy -Coated Steel Reinforcing Bars. 2. Page 03 20 00-2, Revise paragraph 2.01 to read, A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Epoxy Coated Reinforcing Bars: When specified in the contract documents, epoxy - coated reinforcing bars shall conform to ASTM A775. C. Welded Wire Fabric: Steel wire spot welded at intersections conforming to ASTM A185. Use flat sheets only. 3. Page 03 20 00-3, Add paragraph 3.01.K to read, K. When required, damaged epoxy coating shall be repaired with patching material conforming to ASTM A775. Repair shall be done in accordaric:e with the patching material manufacturer's recommendations. SECTION O6 15 00 - WOOD DECKING 1. Page 06 15 00-2, Revise paragraph 2.01.A to read, "Deck size shall be 2 x 6 Nominal, (1 1 /2 inch x 5 inch Net Douglas Fir/Larch or Eastern Spruce, 1 1 /2 inch x 5 inch Net Southern Yellow Pine)." SECTION 07 61 13 - SHEET METAL ROOFING 1. Page 07 61 13-2, Add paragraph 2.01.0 as follows: C. Metal Sales Manufacturing Corp: Vertical Seam panels. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 2 SECTION 13 31 00 - FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 1. Page 13 31 00-2, Delete paragraph 2.01.13. and replace with the following: B. Approved shade assemblies 1. Full Cantilever Hip - Single, 12 feet wide x 24 feet long, 8 foot entry height. a. Qty: - 5 b. Color - To be selected c. Footing - Buried pier mount 2. ALTERNATE - Full Cantilever Hip - Single, 12' wide x 24' long, 8' entry height. a. Qty. - 3 b. Color - To be selected c. Footing - Buried pier mount 3. ALTERNATE - Fabric Picnic Canopy - 4-post hip rectangular canopy, 10 feet wide x 20 feet long, 8 foot entry height, concrete pad. a. Qty. - 2 b. Color - to be selected c. Footing - Buried pier mount SECTION 22 34 00 - FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 1. Page 22 35 00-2, Add paragraph 2.01.A.6: 6. Rheem SECTION 31 00 00 - EARTHWORK 1. Delete Section in its entirety and add new Section as attached to this Addendum. SECTION 31 32 19 - GEOSYNTHETIC SOIL STABILIZATION AND LAYER SEPARATION 1. Page 31 32 19-1, Add paragraph 1.02.A.1: A Bid Item as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, has been provided for Pool Geotextile Fabric, Type 5. Measurement will be based on units of square yards of actual surface area covered by Geotextile Fabric. Payment at the Bid Unit Price shall include all materials, installation, and protection of installed Geotextile Fabric as specified. The required overlap joint or joint sewing shall be incidental to this fabric item with no direct payment being made. SECTION 31 63 16 - HELICAL PILES 1. Page 31 63 13-3, Revise paragraph 1.07.A: A. "All work of this section, including designing, furnishing and installing Helical Piles shall be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid for the Project. Measurement shall be Plan Quantity, based upon number of piles shown, furnished and installed to 30-foot (total) depth. Lump Sum Base Bid will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Section, including, but not limited to design, furnishing and installing helical piles and accessories, including a starter section and top -of -pile adaptors." ADDENDUM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13-3 2. Page 31 63 16-3, Revise paragraph 1.078: B. "A Unit Price Bid Item has been provided on the Bid Form for "Helical Pile Extensions". Measurement shall be based upon Units of Linear Feet (LF) of ADDITIONAL pile extensions furnished and installed. Unit Price will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Item, including, but not limited to furnishing and installing helical pile shaft extensions beyond the total base length of 30-feet, as necessary to achieve design capacity soil depth. The actual length quantity, beyond 30-feet, installed, multiplied by the appropriate Unit Price, will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Item. 3. Page 31 63 16-3, Revise paragraph 1.07C: C. "Four Helical Pile Load Tests (three compression and one tensile) shall be included as a line item in the bid form and will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Item, including, but not limited to setup of test assembly, reaction pile installation and production of load versus deflection curves for the load test. 4. Page 31 63 16-4, Add paragraph 2.02.D: D. "Pile cap assembly shall consist of a minimum of a steel plate welded to a steel tube section and securely fastened to the pile shaft. Assembly shall be suitable for transmitting bending, 30-kip minimum compression (service level) and 30-kip minimum tensile (service level) forces from the concrete foundation to the helical pile." 5. Page 31 63 16-5, Revise paragraph 3.04.A: A. "The Contractor shall perform four production pile load tests, minimum, (one compression test at the Bath House, two compression tests and one tensile test at the 50M Pool), as selected by the Owner. Piles shall be compression load tested in accordance to ASTM D1143 to two times the Design Compression Service Load (2.0*DL). Piles shall be tensile load tested in accordance to ASTM D3689 to one and a half times the Design Compression Service Load (1.5*DL)." SECTION 32 90 00 - IRRIGATION SYSTEMS 1. Page 32 90 00-1, Delete paragraph 1.02.A.1 and replace with the following: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be included in the Part 2 - Base Bid: Pool, Buildings and Fence bid item. SECTION 32 93 00 - PLANTS 1. Delete Section in its entirety and add new Section as attached to this Addendum. SECTION 33 05 05 - TRENCHING AND BACKFILL 1. Page 32 90 00-1, Delete paragraph 1.01.A.1 and replace with the following: 1. Trenching requirements for underground piping and appurtenances for the installation of water utilities, sanitary sewer piping, and service area parking lot storm sewer, including requirements for excavation, backfill, and compaction. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 4 SECTION 33 46 00 - SUBDRAINAGE 1. Delete Section in its entirety and add new Section as attached to this Addendum. DRAWING CHANGES SHEET G102 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Sheet Index: Add new sheets C701, C702, C703, C704, AB801, 5001, S002, S 101, S 102, S 103, SB 102, SB201, SB202, SB301, Q503A, E603, E603, and E802. 2. Sheet Index: Delete sheets SA001 and SA002. SHEET C001 (ISSUED): l . Pool Access locations adjusted to allow for existing police department to utilize access until July 1, 2019. 2. Additional notes concerning primary and secondary pool access locations. 3. Revision of phasing lines within city hall parking lot for Park Amenities, Parking Lot and Landscape Contract located south of pool improvements. SHEET C003 (ISSUED): 1. Additional notes added describing measurement and payment between Bid Form Parts 1, 2, and 3. SHEET C103 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C103 in its entirety and add new Sheet C103 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET C302 (ISSUED): 1. Additional notes added describing surcharge related items. 2. Approximate Surcharge area noted. SHEET C304 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C304 in its entirety and add new Sheet C304 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET C401 (ISSUED): 1. Added water service lines to the shower towers. SHEET C403 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C403 in its entirety and add new Sheet C403 as attached to this Addendum. 2. Text Call -outs revised and others added. 3. Added soil boring locations. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 5 SHEET C404 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C404 in its entirety and add new Sheet C404 as attached to this Addendum. 2. Text Call -outs for storm network added/revised for sizing, slope and structure rim/invert information SHEET C405 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C405 in its entirety and add new Sheet C405 as attached to this Addendum. 2. Added drain the elevations. 3. Added soil boring locations. SHEET C406 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C406 in its entirety and add new Sheet C406 as attached to this Addendum. 2. Added drain the elevations. 3. Added soil boring locations. SHEET C501 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C501 in its entirety and add new Sheet C501 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET C504 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Note, deck thicknesses shown shall be thicker in areas, (i.e. structural slabs at helical piers) identified elsewhere in this addendum. SHEET C505 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet C505 in its entirety and add new Sheet C505 as attached to this Addendum.. SHEET C701 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet C/O I as attached to this Addendum. SHEET C702 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet C702 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET C703 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet C703 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET C704 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet C704 as attached to this Addendum. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 6 SHEET L201 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet L201 in its entirety and add new Sheet L201 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET L202 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet L202 in its entirety and add new Sheet L202 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET L301 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet L301 in its entirety and add new Sheet L301 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET L302 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet L302 in its entirety and add new Sheet L302 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET L303 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet L303 in its entirety and add new Sheet L303 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET L801 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet L801 in its entirety and add new Sheet L801 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET L802 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet L802 in its entirety and add new Sheet L802 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET AB301 (ISSUED): 1. Section 1: Add notes to clarify extent of WP-1 at below grade concrete walls. 2. Section 3: Add notes to clarify extent of WP-1 at below grade concrete walls. SHEET AB801 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet AB801 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET S001 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA001 in its entirety and add new Sheet S001 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET S002 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA002 in its entirety and add new Sheet S002 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET S101 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet S101 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET S102 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet S102 as attached to this Addendum. ADDENDUM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 7 SHEET S103 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet S 103 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA101 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA101 in its entirety and add new Sheet SA101 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA102 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA 102 in its entirety and add new Sheet SA 102 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA201 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA201 in its entirety and add new Sheet SA201 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA301 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA301 in its entirety and add new Sheet SA301 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA501 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA501 in its entirety and add new Sheet SA501 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA502 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SA502 in its entirety and add new Sheet SA502 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SB101 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SB101 in its entirety and add new Sheet S13101 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SB102 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet SB102 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SB201 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet SB201 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SB202 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet SB202 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SB301 (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet SB301 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SB501 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet SB501 in its entirety and add new Sheet SB501 as attached to this Addendum. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 8 SHEET Q102 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q102 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q102 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q103 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Section bubble thru wall of plunge pool that is not labelled should refer to Detail B/Q509. 2. Section bubble thru pool wall just south of east end of the zero -edge trench that is not labelled should refer to Detail C/Q510. SHEET Q106 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q106 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q106 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q107 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q107 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q107 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q108 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q108 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q108 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET QB101 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Change elevations of the play feature piping leaving the building from 907.63 to 911.88. SHEET QB102 (NOT ISSUED): l . Change elevation of 12 inch supply to 50M pool from 912.13 to 910.13. 2. Provide grout in the bottom of the surge tanks up to invert of the tank drain piping (approximately 3 inches) and provide approximately 2 inches of slope from the for end of the tanks to the drain pipe to allow tanks to completely drain. 3. For clarification, the extension stems for the 6 inch tank drain valves and for the 12 inch BV on the 50M Pool recirculation suction piping shall be installed similar to the 12 inch BV on the Recreation Pool recirculation suction piping as called out on Detail A Sheet Q13301. 4. The Contractor shall adjust the elevations of the piping into and out of the surge tanks as required to avoid conflicts with piping, both interior and exterior. Depending on how the Contractor chooses to route piping, this may vary. Contractor shall review with Engineer prior to construction. SHEET QB302 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Same comments as indicated for sheet QB102 in this addendum shall apply to this drawing. SHEET Q301 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q301 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q301 as attached to this Addendum. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 9 SHEET Q502 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q502 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q502 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q503 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q503 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q503 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q503A (ISSUED): 1. Add new Sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q504 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q504 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q504 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q505 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q505 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q505 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q506 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet Q506 in its entirety and add new Sheet Q506 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q511 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this addendum. SHEET Q514 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Delete reference to Detail A. No detail is provided with the project documents. SHEET PA503 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet PA503 in its entirety and add new Sheet PA503 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET PA504 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet PA504 in its entirety and add new Sheet PA504 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET PA505 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet PA505 in its entirety and add new Sheet PA505 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET PA506 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet PA506 in its entirety and add new Sheet PA506 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET PA507 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet PA507 in its entirety and add new Sheet PA507 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET PA508 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet PA508 in its entirety and add new Sheet PA508 as attached to this Addendum, ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 10 SHEET PA509 (ISSUED): 1. Delete Sheet PA509 in its entirety and add new Sheet PA509 as attached to this Addendum. SHEET MA502 (ISSUED): 1. Revised title for Detail 2. 2. Revised text for Detail 6. 3. Added Detail 7. 4. Added Detail 8. 5. Added Detail 9. SHEET E101 (ISSUED): 1. Electrical Site Plan 1: Revise as indicated. SHEET E102 (ISSUED): 1. Electrical Site Plan - Equipotential Bonding: Revise as indicated. SHEET E601 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET E602 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET E603 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET E701 (ISSUED): 1. Line Diagram 1: Revise as indicated. SHEET E802 (ISSUED): 1. Panelboard SED1 B: Revise panelboard schedule as indicated. 2. Panelboard LPB1 B: Revise panelboard schedule as indicated. 3. Panelboard SEBI A: Revise panelboard schedule as indicated. 4. Panelboard LPB2B: Add panelboard schedule as indicated. SHEET EA301 (ISSUED): 1. Power Plan A: Revise as indicated. ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 11 2. Room Al 14 Large Scale Power Plan: Revise as indicated. SHEET EB301 (ISSUED): 1. Electrical Room B102 Large Scale Plan: Revise as indicated. LIST OF ATTACHMENTS l . Document 00 41 1 OR - Revised Bid Form 2. Section 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures 3. Section 31 00 00 - Earthwork 4. Section 32 93 00 - Plants 5. Section 33 46 00 - Subdrainage 6. Sheet COO 7. Sheet C003 8. Sheet C 103 9. Sheet C302 10. Sheet C304 11. Sheet C401 12. Sheet C403 13. Sheet C404 14. Sheet C405 15. Sheet C406 16. Sheet C501 17. Sheet C505 18. Sheet C701 19. Sheet C702 20. Sheet C703 21. Sheet C704 22. Sheet L201 23. Sheet L202 24. Sheet L301 25. Sheet L302 26. Sheet L303 27. Sheet L801 28. Sheet L802 29. Sheet AB301 30. Sheet AB801 31. Sheet S001 32. Sheet S002 33. Sheet S101 34. Sheet S102 35. Sheet S 103 36. Sheet SA101 37. Sheet SA102 38. Sheet SA201 39. Sheet SA301 40. Sheet SA501 41. Sheet SA502 42. Sheet SB101 43. Sheet SB102 44. Sheet SB201 45. Sheet SB202 46. Sheet SB301 ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 12 47. Sheet SB501 48. Sheet Q102 49. Sheet Q 106 50. Sheet Q107 51. Sheet Q108 52. Sheet Q301 53. Sheet Q502 54. Sheet Q503 55. Sheet Q503A 56. Sheet Q504 57. Sheet Q505 58. Sheet Q506 59. Sheet Q511 60. Sheet PA503 61. Sheet PA504 62. Sheet PA505 63. Sheet PA506 64. Sheet PA507 65. Sheet PA508 66. Sheet PA509 67. Sheet MA502 68. Sheet E101 69. Sheet E102 70. Sheet E601 71. Sheet E602 72. Sheet E603 73. Sheet E701 74. Sheet E802 75. Sheet EA301 76. Sheet EB301 END OF DOCUMENT ADDENDUM 3 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 13 This Page Left Blank Intentionally DOCUMENT 00 91 13 ADDENDUM 2 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL CITY PROJECT NO. 995 PROJECT NO. 193804337 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA February 28, 2019 Number of Pages: 69 (includes this sheet) To: All Planholders of Record From: Stantec 733 Marquette Ave. Suite 1000 Minneapolis, MN 55402 (612) 712-2000 - General Office (612) 712-2108 - Bruce Paulson, Project Manager The following changes, additions, and deletions are hereby made a part of the Bidding Documents. Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in rejection of the Bid. ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 1 PROJECT MANUAL CHANGES SECTION 01 41 00 - STRUCTURAL TESTS AND SPECIAL INSPECTIONS 1. Add new section. SECTION 01 42 00 - WATERTIGHTNESS TESTING 1. Add new section. SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 1. Add new paragraph 2.03.G as follows: G. PVC Waterstop: Waterstops shall be serrated (ribbed) PVC type with center bulb. Waterstops shall be manufactured of Specification Grade Virgin Polyvinyl Chloride materials by Greenstreak Plastic Products Company, or equal. Sizes and styles shall be as follows: 1. 4-inches wide, 3/ 16-inch thick with 3/8 inch O.D. center bulb. Greenstreak Style 701. To be used only at locations where the below 6-inch waterstop would conflict with reinforcing steel. 2. 6-inches wide, 3/8-inch thick with 11 /16-inch O.C. center bulb. Greenstreak Style 705." 2. Add new paragraph 2.03.H as follows: H. Hydrophilic Waterstop: Provide hydrophilic rubber waterstop as supplied by Greenstreak, HYDROTITE, or approved equal. 1. The waterstop shall be a combination of chloroprene rubber and chloroprene rubber modified to impart hydrophilic properties. 2. The waterstop shall have a delay coating to inhibit initial expansion due to moisture present in fresh concrete. 3. Provide Greenstreak LEAKMASTER single component hydrophilic sealant or equal to secure waterstop to rough, dry concrete. 4. Provide LEAKMASTER, or equal in addition to cyanacrylate (super glue) adhesive at all splices." SECTION 03 45 00 - ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE 1. Revise paragraph 2.02.A.I to read, "4,000 psi" In lieu of "400 psi". SECTION 04 21 13 - BRICK MASONRY 1. Revise paragraph 2.01.A.l .a.2) to read, "Yankee Hill Brick" in lieu of "Interstate Brick SECTION 06 10 00 - ROUGH CARPENTRY 1. Add paragraph 2.01.D as follows: "D. Sheathing: Roof and wall sheathing shall be 19/32 Performance Rated Category APA Rated Sheathing, 24/16, Exposure I, min." ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 2 SECTION 06 17 30 - SHOP FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES Revise paragraph 2.01.0 to read, "Design for the following minimum design loads indicated below, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. In no case shall loadings be less than those stated in the Minnesota State Building Code (MSBC). Top chord applied uniform dead load = 10 psf Top chord applied uniform (balanced) snow load = 38.5 psf Top chord applied uniform (unbalanced) snow load = 62 psf / 12 psf Top chord/overhang applied concentrated moving live load = 250 lbs. Bottom chord applied uniform dead load = 10 psf Bottom chord applied uniform live load = 0 psf Net Uplift Minimum = 10 psf Snow drift loads = Per ASCE7-10 or as shown on Drawings". SECTION 10 67 00 - STORAGE SHELVING Revise paragraph 2.01.A to read as follows: A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Eagle Group, 100 Industrial Blvd., Clayton, DE. 2. Technibilt Shelving Systems, 700 East P Street, Newton, NC. SECTION 13 14 13 - WATER SLIDES 1. Delete subparagraph 2.03.A.6. SECTION 22 05 00 - COMMON WORK RESULT FOR PLUMBING 1. Delete paragraph 2.03.A. 2. Replace with: A. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, service weight, bell and spigot ends: 1. Fittings: Cast iron, ASTM A74. 2. Joints: Hub -and -spigot, compression type with ASTM C564 neoprene gaskets. B. Hubless Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301. 2. Couplings: ASTM C1540 heavy duty, shielded. 3. Add row to 3.11 HANGER SCHEDULE: PIPE MATERIAL: Cast Iron (All Sizes), buried within 5 feet of building MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING FEET: 4 HANGER ROD DIAMTER, INCHES: 5/8 SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES 1. Add to paragraph 2.02.C: "Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc." ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13-3 2. Add to paragraph 2.03.C: "Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc." 3. Add to paragraph 2.04.0 'Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc." 4. Add to paragraph 2.06.13 "Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc." 5. Add to paragraph 2.07.D.5 "Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc." 6. Add to paragraph 2.08.D.5 "Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc." 7. Add to paragraph 2.13.C.6 "Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc. Basis of Design: Bradley "Touchtime" " 8. Add to paragraph 2.14.C.6 "Provide all connections from power supply to sensors including cables, y-adapters, leaders, extension cable, etc. Basis of Design: Bradley "Touchtime" " SECTION 33 40 00 - STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 1. Delete paragraph 2.03, Decorative Catch Basin Grate and Frame, in its entirety. 2. Add paragraph 2.07: 2.07 AREA DRAINS A. Shall be 6 inch by 6 inch low profile adapters for 4 inch sewer pipe and structural foam polyethylene removable grate with UV inhibitor and stainless steel screws. Units shall be manufactured by National Diversified Sales, Inc., equivalent by Neptune Benson/Evoqua Water Technologies or approved equal. Color to be selected by the Engineer trom the manufacturer's standard colors. Each grate shall be fastened to frame adapter with minimum 2 screws. 3. Add paragraph 2.08: 2.08 TRENCH DRAINS A. Shall be PVC Channel Drains with honeycombed, reinforced wall, UV inhibitors, bottom flange, and Structural Foam Polyethylene Grating secured with stainless steel screws. Units shall be Standard "SPEE-D" Channel as manufactured by National Diversified Sales, Inc., equivalent by Neptune Benson/Evoqua Water Technologies or approved equal. Drain color to be selected by the Engineer from the manufacturer's standard colors. Strainer at pipe dropouts shall be removed to prevent blockage in the drain. ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 4 DRAWING CHANGES SHEET G102 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Add Sheets AC 101, SA002, SA 103 and Q 103A to Sheet Index. SHEET C003 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Note that Drop Slide in 50M Pool is an alternate bid item. SHEET C401 (ISSUED): 1. Replace issued sheet with attached. 2. Additional Storm Crossings added to Sanitary Profile. 3. Noted work to be done by others. 4. Changed 6" x 6" wye to 8" x 6" wye. 5. Added Top Nut Hydrant elevation. 6. Pipes other than sanitary and water main have been shaded to be lighter when printed for visibility/clarity. SHEET C402 (ISSUED): 1. Replace issued sheet with attached. 2. Additional Text Call -outs for Service Area Drain tile. 3. Pipes other than Service Area Storm sewer have been shaded to be lighter when printed for visibility/clarity. SHEET C505 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Change the following on Detail C: a. "Shower Heads Mounted Two at 26 inches to "Shower Head Mounted One at 50 inches. b. "Valves Six at 48 inches to "Push Button, Self -Closing Valves Five at 48 inches. 2. Add the following for Detail C: Shower Towers shall conform to the following specification: a. Provide two (2). Shower tower shall be as manufactured by Shower Tower, Inc., Sanford, Florida, (800) 330-9073 or approved equal. Each shower tower shall have 5 shower heads and controls at heights as indicated. Color to be selected by Owner. SHEET AA101 (ISSUED): 1. Floor Plan 1: Revise shower layout in Employee Restroom A 108, Family Restroom A 116, and Family Restroom Al 17 as indicated. ADDENDUM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 5 2. Floor Plan 1: Revise layout of entry gates at Main Passage A113 as indicated. 3. Floor Plan 1: Revise door locations at doors A114, Al 18, A120-2, and A124-2 as indicated. 4. Floor Plan 1: Revise toilet compartment layout in Mens Restroom A121 and Womens Restroom A125 as indicated. SHEET AA201 (ISSUED): 1. South Elevation 3: Revise size and location of Louver L2 as indicated. 2. North Elevation 4: Revise size and location of Louver L2 as indicated. SHEET AA202 (ISSUED): 1. Al 13 Main Passage South Elevation 2: Add Louver L2 as indicated. SHEET AA301 (ISSUED): 1. Section 2: Revise size and location of Louver L2 as indicated. 2. Section 3: Add Louver L2 as indicated. SHEET AA401 (ISSUED): 1. Enlarged Floor Plan South 1: Revise shower layout in Employee Restroom as indicated. 2. Enlarged Floor Plan South 1: Revise layout of entry gates at Main Passage A 113 as indicated. SHEET AA402 (ISSUED): 1. Enlarged Floor Plan North 1: Revise shower layout in Family Restroom A116 and Family Restroom A 117 as indicated. 2. Enlarged Floor Plan North 1: Revise door locations at doors A 114, A 118, A 120-2, and A 124-2 as indicated. 3. Enlarged Floor Plan North l: Revise toilet compartment layout in Mens Restroom A121 and Womens Restroom A] 25 as indicated. SHEET AA404 (ISSUED): 1. Revise elevations 7, 8, 9, 13, 14, and 15 as indicated. SHEET AA405 (ISSUED): 1. Revise elevations 3, 4, 6, 7, and 8 as indicated. SHEET AA503 (ISSUED): 1. Wall Base Detail 3: Revise as indicated. ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13-6 SHEET AA504 (ISSUED): 1. Delete this sheet in its entirety and add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET AA601 (ISSUED): 1. Room Finish Schedule: Revise ceiling material, height, finish and detail at Al 14 Janitor/Mech as indicated. 2. Revise size of Louver L2 as indicated. 3. Window and Louver Schedule: Revise size of Louver L2 as indicated. SHEET AA701 (ISSUED): 1. Reflected Ceiling Plan 1: Revise as indicated. SHEET AB101 (ISSUED): 1. Main Level 1: Add surge tank hatches as indicated. SHEET AB201 (ISSUED): 1. West Elevation 2: Add surge tank hatches as indicated. 2. North Elevation 3: Add exhausts and intakes through wall as indicated. 3. North Elevation 3: Add surge tank hatch as indicated. 4. East Elevation 4: Add exhausts and intakes through wall as indicated. SHEET AB301 (ISSUED): 1. Section Thru Stairs 4: Revise as indicated. SHEET AC101 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA001 (ISSUED): 1. Revise notes and Required Special Inspections as indicated. SHEET SA002 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA201 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. ADDENDUM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 7 SHEET SA301 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA501 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SA502 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET SB501 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q103A (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET Q106 (NOT ISSUED): 1. Regarding note 2. Contractors shall lay all underground amenities to avoid conflicts. This shall apply to all underground piping, conduits, sleeves, etc. required by the project, not just pool piping. SHEET Q107 (NOT ISSUED): 1. 4 Inch PVC force maid shall exil oul of the Diuiriage Lift Station to the north rather than the east and then 45 over to the route shown to match the alignment used on Detail B/C501. SHEET Q108 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET QB101 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET QB102 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET QB301 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET QB302 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 8 SHEET FA101 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET PA100 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET PA101 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET PB100 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET PB101 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET MA101 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET MB101 (ISSUED): 1. Replace the original issued sheet with the new sheet attached to this Addendum. SHEET E101 (ISSUED): 1. Electrical Site Plan 1: Revise as indicated. SHEET E102 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET E701 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET E801 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET E802 (ISSUED): 1. Add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. SHEET EA301 (ISSUED): 1. Delete this sheet in its entirety and add new sheet as attached to this Addendum. ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 9 SHEET EA401 (ISSUED): 1. Systems Plan 1: Revise as indicated. SHEET EA401 (ISSUED): 1. Power Plan A: Revise as indicated. 2. Electrical Room B102 Large Scale Plan B: Revise as indicated. SHEET EB401 (ISSUED): 1. Systems Plan A: Revise as indicated. LIST OF ATTACHMENTS 1. Section 01 41 00 - Structural Tests and Special Inspections 2. Section 01 42 00 -Watertightness Testing 3. Sheet C401 4. Sheet C402 5. Sheet AA 101 6. Sheet AA201 7. Sheet AA202 8. Sheet AA301 9. Sheet AA401 10. Sheet AA402 11. Sheet AA404 12. Sheet AA405 13. Sheet AA503 14. Sheet AA504 15. Sheet AA601 16. Sheet AA701 17. Sheet AB 101 18. Sheet AB201 19. Sheet AB301 20. Sheet AC 101 21. Sheet SA001 22. Sheet SA002 23. Sheet SA201 24. Sheet SA301 25. Sheet SA501 26. Sheet SA502 27. Sheet SB501 28. Sheet Q103A 29. Sheet Q108 30. Sheet QB 101 31. Sheet QB102 32. Sheet QB301 33. Sheet QB302 34. Sheet FA 101 35. Sheet PA 100 36. Sheet PA 101 37. Sheet PB 100 ADDENDUM 2 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 10 38. Sheet PB101 39. Sheet MA101 40. Sheet MB101 41. Sheet E101 42. Sheet E102 43. Sheet E701 44. Sheet E801 45. Sheet E802 46. Sheet EA301 47. Sheet EA401 48. Sheet EB301 49. Sheet EB401 END OF DOCUMENT ADDENDUM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13 - 11 This Page Left Blank Intentionally DOCUMENT 00 91 13 ADDENDUM 1 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL CITY PROJECT NO. 995 PROJECT NO. 193804337 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA February 21, 2019 Number of Pages: 2 (includes this sheet) To: All Planholders of Record From: Stantec 733 Marquette Ave. Suite 1000 Minneapolis, MN 55402 (612) 712-2000 - General Office (612) 712-2108 - Bruce Paulson, Project Manager The following changes, additions, and deletions are hereby made a part of the Bidding Documents. Bidder shall acknowledge receipt of this Addendum on the Bid Form. Failure to do so may result in rejection of the Bid. ADDENDUM 1 © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 0091 13 - 1 DOCUMENT 00 11 13 - ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS 1. In the first sentence, change the Bid Opening to 10 A.M., CDT, Friday, March 15, 2019. LIST OF ATTACHMENTS 1. None. END OF DOCUMENT ADDENDUM l 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0091 13. 2 SECTION 00 01 05 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. David A. Ahrens, P.E. Date: February 14, 2019 License # 21711 ARCHITECT I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Architect under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Responsible for Divisions 06 through 10 of the Specifications. �W f t*-1 Bruce P. Paulson, A.I.A. Date: February 14, 2019 License # 20910 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Responsible for Section 01 41 00 and Divisions 03, 04, 05, and Section 06 17 30 of the Specifications. B" �' - " � /-. Brian G. Bellemare, PE Date: February 14, 2019 License # 50378 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Responsible for Divisions 26, and 28, of the Specifications. Date: February 14, 2019 License # 53078 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Responsible for Divisions 21, 22. and 23 of the Specifications. Date: February 14, 2019 License # 53856 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Responsible for Division 13 and Sections 225113, 225116, 225119 and 334510 of the Specifications. 4U&4t'--- AfAfJ. Ehleringer, PE Date: February 14, 2019 License # 23136 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 0001 05-1 LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Landscape Architect under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Responsible for Sections - 32 11 23, 32 14 00, 32 33 00, 32 84 00 and 32 93 00 of the Specifications. Todd R. Wichman Date: February 14, 2019 License # 19524 PROFESSIONAL ENGINEER I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under the laws of the State of Minnesota. Christopher W. Long, P.E. Date: February 14, 2019 License #47106 END OF SECTION 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PROFESSIONAL CERTIFICATIONS 0001 05-2 SECTION 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS GROUP Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements Introductory Information 0001 05 Certifications Page 0001 10 Table of Contents Procurement Requirements 0011 13 Advertisement for Bids 00 20 00 Instructions to Bidders - AIA Document A701-2018 0021 13 Supplementary Instructions 0031 00 Available Project Information Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review, Municipal Facility, 4401 Xylon Avenue North, New Hope, Minnesota, Dated June 22, 2016 as prepared by American Engineering Testing, Inc., Report No. 01-06773 Report of Geotechnical Exploration, Swimming Pool Construction, Municipal Complex, New Hope, Minnesota, Dated November 13, 2018, as prepared by American Engineering Testing, Inc., Report No. 01-20159 Civic Center Park Master Plan, November 2018 Civic Center Park Existing City Hall Demolition, City Project No. 941 and 994, Stantec Project No. 193804336, dated January 10, 2019 0041 10 Bid Form Base Bid Part 1 Attachments: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements E-Verification Jobs Reporting Minority and Women owned Businesses Reporting 0041 13 Bid Form Attachment A 00 43 00 Bid Bond - AIA Document A310-2010 Contracting Requirements 00 52 00 Agreement Form - AIA Document A 10 1 -2017 0061 13 Performance Bond - AIA Document A312-2010 0061 15 Payment Bond - AIA Document A312-1010 00 72 00 General Conditions - AIA Document A201-2017 00 73 05 Supplementary Conditions 00 73 46 Commercial Prevailing Wage Rates Wage Rate Provisions Prevailing Wage Certificate State Projects and State Highway Construction A Guide to Minnesota's Prevailing Wage Prevailing Wage Division Rules and Regulations 00 82 00 Fair Employment Practice SPECIFICATIONS GROUP GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUBGROUP Division 01 - General Requirements 01 1000 Summary 01 2000 Price and Payment Procedures TABLE OF CONTENTS L© 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0001 10 - 1 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination 01 3300 Submittal Procedures 01 4000 Quality Requirements 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 01 57 13 Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control 01 6000 Product Requirements 01 7000 Execution Requirements 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Manuals 01 7836 Warranties Division 02 - Existing Conditions 0241 13 Selective Site Demolition Division 03 - Concrete 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 03 40 00 Hollowcore Precast Concrete Plank 03 45 00 Architectural Precast Concrete 03 60 00 Grout Division 04 - Masonry 0405 13 Mortar 0405 19 Masonry Accessories 04 05 31 Cavity Wall Flashing Drainage System 0421 13 Brick Masonry 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry 0471 16 Manufactured Masonry Units Division 05 - Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel 0531 00 Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications Division 06 - Woods, Plastics, and Composites 06 1000 Rough Carpentry 06 1500 Wood Decking 06 1730 Shop -Fabricated Wood trusses 06 1800 Glue -Laminated Wood Construction 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry 0661 16 Solid Surface Fabrications Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 1300 Membrane Waterproofing 0721 00 Insulation 07 42 13 Sheet Metal Soffit Panels 0742 16 Sheet Metal Ceiling Panels 07 42 19 Sheet Metal Wall Panels 0761 13 Sheet Metal Roofing 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim TABLE OF CONTENTS © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 0001 10 - 2 07 72 53 Ice and Snow Guards 07 84 00 Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants Division 08 - Openings 0811 00 Metal Doors and Frames 0831 00 Access Panels 08 33 23 Insulated Rolling Service Door 0851 13 Aluminum Windows 08 52 13 Aluminum Sliding Service Windows 08 62 13 Unit Skylights 08 62 23 Tubular Daylighting Devices 08 70 00 Finish Hardware 0881 00 Glazing 0891 19 Metal Wall Louvers Division 09 - Finishes 09 29 00 Gypsum Drywall 0931 13 Ceramic Tile 0951 00 Acoustical Treatment 0968 13 Carpet Tile 09 77 20 Decorative FRP Panels 09 88 13 Concrete Floor Sealer 0991 00 Painting 09 97 27 Concrete Epoxy Floor Coating 09 97 29 Decorative Quartz Floor Coating Division 10 - Specialties 10 14 00 Signs 1021 16 Solid Plastic Toilet Compartments 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 1051 13 Metal Lockers 1051 26 Heavy Duty Plastic Lockers 10 67 00 Storage Shelving Division 11 and 12 - Not Used Division 13 - Special Construction 13 1 1 13 Pool General 13 11 14 Pool Shell and Structures 13 1 1 14.1 Pool Cast -In -Place Concrete 13 11 15 Pool and Deck Equipment 13 11 16 Pool Recreation Equipment 13 11 17 Pool Surface Treatments 13 11 43 Pool Recirculation System 13 11 46 Pool Miscellaneous 13 14 13 Water Slides 1331 23 Fabric Shade Structures Division 14 through 20 - Not Used © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-3 Division 21 - Fire Suppression 21 0500 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression 21 1316 Dry -Pipe Sprinkler Systems Division 22 - Plumbing 22 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing 22 07 00 Plumbing Insulation 2211 00 Facility Water Distribution 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage 22 33 00 Electric Domestic Water Heaters 22 34 00 Fuel -Fired Domestic Water Heaters 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures 2251 13 Pool Piping, Valves, Fittings, and Specialties 2251 16 Pool Pumps 2251 19 Pool Controls and Water Treatment Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 23 05 00 Common Work Results for HVAC 23 05 93 HVAC Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning for HVAC 23 09 00 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 23 09 93 Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls 23 11 23 Facility Natural -Gas Piping 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping 2331 00 HVAC Ducts and Casings 23 33 00 Air Duct Accessories 23 34 00 HVAC Fans 23 37 00 Air Outlets and Inlets 2351 23 Gas Vents 23 54 00 Furnaces 2381 26 Split system Air Conditioners 23 83 33 Electric Radiant Heaters Division 24 to 25 - Not Used Division 26 - Electric 26 05 05 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 2605 10 Motors 2605 19 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems 26 22 00 Low Voltage Transformers 2624 13 Switchboards 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 24 19 Motor Control 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 2628 19 Disconnects 26 50 00 Lighting Division 27 - Communications © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-4 27 10 00 Network Cabling 2711 00 Communication Equipment Room Fittings Division 28 - Safety and Security 28 13 00 Access Control 28 16 11 Intrusion Detection System 28 23 00 CCTV System 2831 00 Fire Detection and Alarm SITE AND INFRASTRUCTURE SUBGROUP Division 31 - Earthwork 31 0000 Earthwork 31 2300 Excavation and Fill 31 23 13 Subgrade Preparation 31 32 19 Geosynthetic Soil Stabilization and Layer Separation 31 63 16 Helical Piles Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 3211 23 Aggregate Base Courses 32 12 01 Flexible Paving for Municipal Projects 3213 13 Concrete Paving 3213 14 Concrete Walks, Medians and Driveways 3216 13 Curbs and Gutters 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 3231 13 Chain Link Fences and Gates 3231 29 Rope/Net/Post Barriers 32 32 23 Segmental Retaining Wall 32 90 00 Irrigation Systems 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 32 93 00 Plants Division 33 - Utilities 33 05 05 Trenching and Backfilling 3305 17 Adjust Miscellaneous Structures 33 08 30 Commissioning of Sanitary Sewer Utilities 33 1000 Water Utilities 3331 00 Sanitary Utility Sewer Piping 3331 14 Sanitary Sewer Services 33 39 00 Sanitary Utility Sewer Structures 33 40 00 Storm Drainage Utilities 3345 10 Pool Drain Manhole Lift Station 33 46 00 Subdrainage Division 34 - Not Used END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TABLE OF CONTENTS 0001 10-5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed Bids will be received by the City of New Hope, Minnesota, in the City Hall at 4401 Xylon Avenue North, until 10 A.M., CST, Thursday, March 7, 2019, at which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud for the furnishing of all labor, materials, and all else necessary for the following: New Hope Outdoor Pool - City Project No. 995 In general, Work consists of the construction of a pool bathhouse, pool mechanical building, recreational pool, 50-meter swimming pool, water slides, and site improvements. Complete digital Bidding Documents are available at www.guestcdn.com for $20 by inputting QuestCDN eBidDoc #6134470 on the website's Project Search page. Paper Bidding Documents may also be viewed at the City of New Hope and at Stantec, 733 Marquette Avenue South, Suite 1000, Minneapolis, MN 55402 (612) 712-2000. Direct inquiries to Engineer's Project Manager, Bruce Paulson, at (612) 712-2108. An Optional Pre -Bid Conference will be held at 10:00 A.M CST, on February 21, 2019 at New Hope City Hall located at 4401 Xylon Avenue North, New Hope, Minnesota. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to discuss the Project. Bidders may attend and participate in the conference. Engineer will transmit to all prospective Bidders of record such Addendum as Engineer considers necessary in response to questions arising at the conference. Oral statements may not be relied upon and will not be binding or legally effective. Bid Security in the amount of 5 percent of the amount of the Bid must accompany each Bid in accordance with the Instructions to Bidders. The Owner reserves the right to retain the deposits of the 3 lowest Bidders for a period not to exceed 60 days after the date and time set for the Opening of Bids. No Bids may be withdrawn for a period of 60 days after the date and time set for the Opening of Bids. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, to waive irregularities and informalities therein, and further reserves the right to award the Contract to the best interests of the Owner. Kirk McDonald, City Manager City of New Hope, Minnesota Error! Reference source not found. ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS © 2019 Stantec I Error! Reference source not found. SECTION 00 11 13 00 11 13- 1 This Page Left Blank Intentionally � TMAIADocument A7`01 - 2018 Instructions to Bidders for the following Project: (Name, location, and detailed description) New Hope Outdoor Pool ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: 4401 Xylon Avenue North The author of this document has New Hope, Minnesota 55428 added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original THE OWNER: AIA standard form. An Additions and (Name, legal status, address, and other infoi7nalion) Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available City of New Hope from the author and should be 4401 Xylon Avenue North reviewed. A vertical line in the left New Hope, MN 55428-4898 margin of this document indicates Telephone Number: 763-531-5100 where the author has added Fax Number: 763-531-5136 necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted THE ARCHITECT: from the original AIA text. (Name, legal status, address, and other information) This document has important legal Stantec Consulting Services Inc. consequences. Consultation with an Marquette Avenue South attorney is encouraged with respect Suite 1000 Sui to its completion or modification. Minneapolis, MN 55402 FEDERAL, STATE, AND LOCAL Telephone Number: (612) 712-2000 LAWS MAY IMPOSE REQUIREMENTS ON PUBLIC PROCUREMENT CONTRACTS. CONSULT LOCAL AUTHORITIES TABLE OF ARTICLES OR AN ATTORNEY TO VERIFY REQUIREMENTS APPLICABLE TO 1 DEFINITIONS THIS PROCUREMENT BEFORE COMPLETING THIS FORM. 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS It is intended that AIA Document 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS G612Tm-2017, Owner's Instructions to the Architect, Parts A and B will be completed prior to using this 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES document. 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST -BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AIA Document A701 TM — 2018. Copyright V 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5C) ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the Proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, supplementary instructions to bidders, the bid form, and any other bidding forms. The Proposed Contract Documents consist of the unexecuted form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor and that Agreement's Exhibits, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, all Addenda, and all other documents enumerated in Article 8 of these Instructions. § 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, or in other Proposed Contract Documents apply to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect, which, by additions, deletions, clarifications, or corrections, modify or interpret the Bidding Documents. § 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents, to which Work may be added or deleted by sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from, or that does not change, the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment, or services, or a portion of the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents. § 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 A Sub -bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment, or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 By submitting a Bid, the Bidder represents that: .1 the Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents; .2 the Bidder understands how the Bidding Documents relate to other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction; .3 the Bid complies with the Bidding Documents; .4 the Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and has correlated the Bidder's observations with the requirements of the Proposed Contract Documents; .5 the Bid is based upon the materials, equipment, and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception; and .6 the Bidder has read and understands the provisions for liquidated damages, if any, set forth in the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 Distribution § 3.1.1 Bidders shall obtain complete Bidding Documents, as indicated below, from the issuing office designated in the advertisement or invitation to bid, for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall obtain Bidding Documents.) AIA Document A701 TM — 2018. Copyright ®1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, 2 or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penallles, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (MADMC) § 3.1.2 Any required deposit shall be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the paper Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost to replace missing or damaged paper documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the paper Bidding Documents, and the Bidder's deposit will be refunded. § 3.1.3 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub -bidders unless specifically offered in the advertisement or invitation to bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. § 3.1.4 Bidders shall use complete Bidding Documents in preparing Bids. Neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete Bidding Documents. § 3.1.5 The Bidding Documents will be available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by distribution of the Bidding Documents. § 3.2 Modification or Interpretation of Bidding Documents § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study the Bidding Documents, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall notify the Architect of errors, inconsistencies, or ambiguities discovered and request clarification or interpretation pursuant to Section 3.2.2. § 3.2.2 Requests for clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall be submitted by the Bidder in writing and shall be received by the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper- copy, or other method Bidders shall submit requests far clarification and inteipretaliort.) § 3.2.3 Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents shall be made by Addendum. Modifications and interpretations of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner shall not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 3.3 Substitutions § 3.3.1 The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 Substitution Process § 3.3.2.1 Written requests for substitutions shall be received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Requests shall be submitted in the same manner as that established for submitting clarifications and interpretations in Section 3.2.2. § 3.3.2.2 Bidders shall submit substitution requests on a Substitution Request Form if one is provided in the Bidding Documents. § 3.3.2.3 If a Substitution Request Foam is not provided, requests shall include (1) the name of the material or equipment specified in the Bidding Documents; (2) the reason for the requested substitution; (3) a complete description of the proposed substitution including the name of the material or equipment proposed as the substitute, performance and test data, and relevant drawings; and (4) any other information necessary for an evaluation. The request shall include a statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment, or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts or the impact on any Project Certifications (such as LEED), that will result from incorporation of the proposed substitution. § 3.3.3 The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect's decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. § 3.3.4 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval shall be set forth in an Addendum. Approvals made in any other manner shall not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. AIA Document A701 "' — 2018. Copyright 01970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA1' Document, 3 or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5C) § 3.3.5 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. § 3.4 Addenda § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to Bidders known by the issuing office to have received complete Bidding Documents. (Indicate how, such as by email, website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Addenda will be transmitted.) § 3.4.2 Addenda will be available where Bidding Documents are on file. § 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids, except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.4.4 Prior to submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall ascertain that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid. ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 Preparation of Bids § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with or identified in the Bidding Documents. § 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed. Paper bid forms shall be executed in a non -erasable medium. § 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and numbers, unless noted otherwise on the bid form. In case of discrepancy, the amount entered in words shall govern. § 4.1.4 Edits to entries made on paper bid forms must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change" or as required by the bid form. § 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder's refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall neither make additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name and legal status of the Bidder. As part of the documentation submitted with the Bid, the Bidder shall provide evidence of its legal authority to perform the Work in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. Each copy of the Bid shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shalt further name the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached, certifying the agent's authority to bind the Bidder. § 4.1.8 A Bidder shall incur all costs associated with the preparation of its Bid. § 4.2 Bid Security § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by the following bid security: (Insert the form and amount of bid security.) Bid security in the amount of 5 percent of the amount of the Bid. § 4.2.2 The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and shall, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to eater into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount AIA Document A701 n' — 2018. Copyright ©1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, 4 or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12/31 /2018 under Order No, 4966188737 which expires on 02/0512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5C) of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. In the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2, the amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner. § 4.2.3 If a surety bond is required as bid security, it shall be written on AIA Document A310TM, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents. The attorney -in -fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of an acceptable power of attorney. The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 4.2.4 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished; (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn; or (c) all Bids have been rejected. However, if no Contract has been awarded or a Bidder has not been notified of the acceptance of its Bid, a Bidder may, beginning days after the opening of Bids, withdraw its Bid and request the return of its bid security. § 4.3 Submission of Bids § 4.3.1 A Bidder shall submit its Bid as indicated below: (Indicate how, such as by website, host site/platform, paper copy, or other method Bidders shall submit their Bid.) § 4.3.2 Paper copies of the Bid, the bid security, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder's name and address, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. § 4.3.3 Bids shall be submitted by the date and time and at the place indicated in the invitation to bid. Bids submitted after the date and time for receipt of Bids, or at an incorrect place, will not be accepted. § 4.3.4 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. § 4.3.5 A Bid submitted by any method other than as provided in this Section 4.3 will not be accepted. § 4.4 Modification or Withdrawal of Bid § 4.4.1 Prior to the date and time designated for receipt of Bids, a Bidder may submit a new Bid to replace a Bid previously submitted, or withdraw its Bid entirely, by notice to the party designated to receive the Bids. Such notice shall be received and duly recorded by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. The receiving party shall verify that replaced or withdrawn Bids are removed from the other submitted Bids and not considered. Notice of submission of a replacement Bid or withdrawal of a Bid shall be worded so as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. § 4.4.2 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids in the same format as that established in Section 4.3, provided they fully conform with these Instructions to Bidders. Bid security shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. § 4.4.3 After the date and time designated for receipt of Bids, a Bidder who discovers that it made a clerical error in its Bid shall notify the Architect of such error within two days, or pursuant to a timeframe specified by the law of the jurisdiction where the Project is located, requesting withdrawal of its Bid. Upon providing evidence of such error to the reasonable satisfaction of the Architect, the Bid shall be withdrawn and not resubmitted. If a Bid is withdrawn pursuant to this Section 4.4.3, the bid security will be attended to as follows: (State the terms and conditions, such as Bid rank, for returning or retaining the bid security.) AIA Document A7011"' — 2018. Copyright m 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Doc:cimrnt Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIR"' Document, 5 or any portion of it, nay result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wlI1 be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5C) ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 Opening of Bids If stipulated in an advertisement or invitation to bid, or when otherwise required by law, Bids properly identified and received within the specified time limits will be publicly opened and read aloud. A summary of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. § 5.2 Rejection of Bids Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. § 5.3 Acceptance of Bid (Award) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder, provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents. Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's best interests. § 5.3.2 Unless otherwise prohibited by law, the Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the lowest responsive and responsible Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST -BID INFORMATION § 6.1 Contractor's Qualification Statement Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request and within the timeframe specified by the Architect, a properly executed AIA Document A305rm, Contractor's Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted for this Bid. § 6.2 Owner's Financial Capability A Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration may request in writing, fourteen days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, that the Owner furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. The Owner shall then furnish such reasonable evidence to the Bidder no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished within the allotted time, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 6.3 Submittals § 6.3.1 After notification of selection for the award of the Contract, the Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, submit in writing to the Owner through the Architect: .1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder's own forces; .2 names of the principal products and systems proposed for the Work and the manufacturers and suppliers of each; and .3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work. § 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to famish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents. § 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder's option, withdraw the Bid or submit an acceptable substitute person or entity. The Bidder may also submit any required adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to account for the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. AIA Document A701 w — 2018. Copyright ©1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, 6 or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/0512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA5C) ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 7.1 Bond Requirements § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. § 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. § 7.1.3 The Bidder shall provide surety bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 7.1.4 Unless otherwise indicated below, the Penal Sum of the Payment and Performance Bonds shall be the amount of the Contract Sum. (If Payment or Performance Bonds are to be in an amount other than 100% of the Contract Sum, indicate the dollar amount or percentage of the Contract Sum) § 7.2 Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds § 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to commence sooner in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney -in -fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 ENUMERATION OF THE PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 8.1 Copies of the proposed Contract Documents have been made available to the Bidder and consist of the following documents: ,1 AIA Document A 1 O1 TW-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title) .2 AIA Document AlO1TM-2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title) .3 AIA Document A201T"�-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, unless otherwise stated below. (Insert the complete AIA Document number, including year, and Document title) .4 AIA Document E203T" -2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013) AIA Document A701 TM — 2018. Copyright ©1970. 1974, 1978, 1987. 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA1 Document, 7 or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5C) .5 Drawings Number Title Date .6 Specifications Section Title Date .7 Addenda: Number Date Pages Pages .8 Other Exhibits: (Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.) [ ] AIA Document E2047"t 2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E204-2017.) [ ] The Sustainability Plan: Title Date Pages [ ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract: Document Title Date Pages .9 Other documents listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Proposed Contract Documents.) AIA Document A701 TM — 201e. Copyright® 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987, 1997 and 2018 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, 8 or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 12:56:50 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA5C) DOCUMENT 00 21 13 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS The Supplementary Instructions to Bidders modify, delete, and/or add to the Instructions to Bidders. Where any article, paragraph, or subparagraph in the Instructions to Bidders is supplemented by one of the following articles, paragraphs, or subparagraphs, the provisions of such article, paragraph, or subparagraph shall remain in effect and the supplemental provisions shall be considered as added thereto. Where any article, paragraph, or subparagraph in the Instructions to Bidders is not supplemented, amended, voided, or superseded by any of the following articles, paragraphs, or subparagraphs, the provisions of such article, paragraph, or subparagraph not so amended, voided, or superseded shall remain in effect. ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS A. Delete Subparagraph 3.1.1 in its entirety, and substitute the following: 3.1.1 Bidders and Sub -bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents in the number and for the non-refundable sum stated in the Invitation for Bids from the Issuing Office identified in the Advertisement for Bids. Delete Subparagraph 3.1.2 in its entirety. C. Delete Paragraph 3.3 in its entirety, and substitute the following: 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS 3.3.1 Materials, products, systems, and equipment shown and described in the Contract Documents establish a standard of design, function, and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. 3.3.2 When a single manufacturer of material, product, system, or equipment is specifically named and specified, no substitution will be allowed. 3.3.3 When more than 1 manufacturer of material, product, system, or equipment is listed under the same heading, choice of those listed shall be the Bidder's option. One manufacturer may be identified and specified as reference to establish a standard of design, function, and quality; and when another is considered, the Bidder before purchase or use shall be expected to submit such data as may be necessary to prove equivalency to that specified. Consideration for equivalency is subject to approval of the Architect as accepting minor and normal variations from that specified. Should any part of associated construction be changed because of substitute acceptance, such changes shall be outlined by the proposer and the cost of such changes shall be included as part of the work of accepted substitute. 3.3.4 Optional products, systems, and equipment will be considered in accordance with Section 01 60 00, Paragraph 3.01. SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0021 13 - 1 ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURE A. Delete Paragraph 4.2.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 4.2.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by a Bid Security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5 percent of the Bidder's maximum Bid Price and in the form of a certified or bank check or a Bid Bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. The Bid Security of the successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Contract Documents, furnished the required Contract Security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract Documents and furnish the required Contract Security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Owner may annul the Notice of Award and the Bid Security of that Bidder will be forfeited. C. Delete Paragraph 4.4.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: 4.4.2 Bids may be withdrawn after Bid Opening only in accordance with the law. ARTICLE 6 - POST -BID INFORMATION A. Add the following to Paragraph 6.1: If the Architect requests the submission of a Contractor's Qualification Staterrlerll, AIA Duc:umuiil A305, said document shall be submitted within 10 days of request. ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BOND A. Delete Paragraph 7.1.2 in its entirety and substitute the following: 7.1.2 The cost of bonds and insurance shall be included in the Bid. B. Delete Paragraph 7.2.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner when the Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to the Owner. END OF DOCUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0021 13 - 2 SECTION 00 31 00 AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Technical Data. 1.02 TECHNICAL DATA A. The Technical Data is identified in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidders are responsible for their own interpretation, verification, and use of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings consistent with the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Reports, drawings, and other information regarding the Project may be available for Bidder's review at Engineer's office. Schedule a viewing time with the Project Manager. Portions of reports and drawings used by the Engineer in the preparation of Bidding Documents are attached to this Section. A list of attachments to this Section include: l . Report dated June 22, 2016, prepared by American Engineering Testing, Inc., St, Paul, MN entitled: "Report of Geatechnical Ex loration and Review Municipal Facilify, 4401 Xylon Avenue North, New Hope Minnesota". 2. Report dated November 13, 2018, prepared by American Engineering Testing, Inc., St. Paul, MN, entitled: "Report of Geotechnical Exploration, Swimming Pool Construction, Municipal Complex, New Hope. Minnesota". 3. Civic Center Park Master Plan, November 2018. 4. Civic Center Park Existing City Hall Demolition, City Project No. 941 and 994, Stantec Project No. 193804336, dated January 10, 2019. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION L © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 L AVAILABLE PROJECT INFORMATION 0031 00-1 This Page Left Blank Intentionally AMERICAN ENGINFRRIAG TESTING, INC. CONSULTANTS • ENVIRONMENTAL • GCT�GHNIOAL • MATERIALS • FORENSICS www.amengtest.com REPORT OF GE©TECHNICAL EXPLORATION AND REVIEW Municipal Facility 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota Report No. 01-06773 Date: June 22, 2016 Prepared for: City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, NIN 55428 ANIERICkN ENGINEERING TFS`I'1NG, INC. June 22, 2016 City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Attn: Mr. Kirk McDonald RE: Geotechnical Exploration and Review Municipal Facility 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota Report No. 01-06773 Dear Mr. McDonald: CONSULTANTS ENVIRONMENTAL GEOTEGHNICAL MATERIALS FORENSICS American Engineering Testing, Inc. (AET) is pleased to present the results of our subsurface exploration program and geotechnical engineering review for the proposed municipal project involving a new municipal building and police station located at 4401 Xylon Avenue North in New Elope, Minnesota.. These services were perforined according to our proposal to you. dated March 1, 2016, and subsequent amendments. We are providing you a digital copy of the report. Additional copies are being sent on your behalf as noted below. Please contact nee if you have any questions about the report. I can also be contacted for arranging construction observation and testing services. Sincerely, American Engineering Testing, Inc. Loren W. Braun, PE Principal Engineer Phone: (651) 789-4689 lbraun@amengtest.com c: Mr. Jeremy Hauser, Stantee, Inc. 550 Cleveland Avenue North I St. Paul, MN 55114 Phone 651-659-9001 f Toll Free 600-972.6364 Fax 651-659-13791 www.amengtost.com I AA/EEO This dmument shall not he ropraduced, except in full, wlthaut wnttetn apin.-val frurn Americrin EngmeorIncg Telling, Inc. Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hail Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No, 01-06773 TESTING, INC. SIGNATURE PAGE Prepared for. - City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Attn: Mr. Kirk McDonald Authored by: Loren W. Braun, PE Principal Engineer I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under Minnesota Statute Section 326.02 to 326.15 Name: Loren W. Braun Date: June 22, 2016 License # 014969 Copyright 2016 American Engineering Testing, Inc, All Rights Reserved Prepared by: American Engineering "Testing, Inc. 550 Cleveland Avenue North St. Paul, Minnesota 55114 (651) 659-9001/www.amengtest.com Reviewed by: Robert J. Wahlstrom, PE, PG Principal Engineer/Geologist Unauthorized use or copying of this document is strictly prohibited by anyone other than the clientfor the specoc project, Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION ....... .................................................... .... ......... ...,........................................ 1 2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES....................................................................................I...........:........... 1 3.0 PROJECT INFORMATION..................................................................................................... 2 3.1 Proposed Construction........................................................................................................... 2 3.2 Site Gradine........................................................................................................................... 4 3.3 Building................................................................................................................................. 4 3.4 Pavement Design................................................................................................................... 4 3.5 Updated Information..........................................................................................................I... 4 3.6 Definitions.............................................................................................................................. 5 4.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND TESTING................................................................ 5 4.1 Field Exploration Program.................................................................................................... 5 4.2 Laboratory Testing................................................................................................................ 5 5.0 SITE CONDITIONS ... ............... :.............................................................................................. 5 5.1 Surface Observations............................................................................................................. 5 5.2 Subsurface Soils/Geology...................................................................................................... 6 5.3 Groundwater..................................................:....................................................................... 7 6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS.......................................................................................................... 8 6.1 Design and Constniction Considerations.............................................................................. 8 6.2 Building Pad Grading............................................................................................................ 8 6.3 Settlement Plates.................................................................................................................. 12 6.4 Foundation Design............................................................................................................... 12 6.5 Floor Slab Design.....................................................................................................I...........14 6.6 Basement Walls/Retaining Walls......................................................................................... 14 6.7 Exterior Building BaclXilling........................................... :.......................... I ........ ,............ ...16 6.8 Bituminous Pavements........................................................................................................ 17 6.9 Concrete Pavements............................................................................................................ 19 6.10 Swimming Pools................................................................................................................ 20 7.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS.............................................................................. 22 7.1 Potential Difficulties............................................................................................................ 22 7.2 Observation and Testing...................................................................................................... 22 8.0 LIMITATIONS....................................................................................................................... 23 Page i Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No. 01-06773 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. APPENDIX A — Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Boring Log Notes Unified Soil Classification System Boring Locations Subsurface Boring Logs APPENDIX B — Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Page ii This Page Left Blank Intentionally Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMLRiCAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. 1.0 INTRODUCTION The city of New Hope is proposing to construct a new municipal facility at the location of the current city hall, located at 4401 Xylon Avenue North in New Hope, Minnesota. The project location is shown in Figure 1, Figure 1: Project Location To assist with planning and design, the City has authorized American Engineering Testing, Inc. (AET) to conduct a subsurface exploration program at the site, conduct soil laboratory testing, and perform a geotechnical engineering review for the project. This report presents the results of our exploration and testing services, and provides our engineering recommendations based on this data. 2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES AET's services were performed according to our proposal to you dated March 1, 2016, which was authorized by the City on March 7, 2016. The authorized scope consists of the following: ■ Drill 3 l standard penetration test borings, 20 to a depth of 25 feet and 11 to a depth of 10 feet, • Perform soil laboratory testing. ■ Perform a geotechnical engineering review based on the obtained data, and prepare this report. Page 1 of 23 Report of Geolechnieal Exploration and Review City Fall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN Juno 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. These services are intended for geotechnical purposes. The scope is not intended to explore for the presence or extent of environmental contamination. Seven additional soil borings were subsequently authorized in order to address the potential option of placing the new buildings at the location of the existing swimming pool. 3.0 PROJECT IINFORMATION 3.1 Proposed Construction 'I'lic proposed project will involve construction of new buildings including u police depiutment building with underground parking, and a ground -supported city hall and lobby area. Other improvements will include relocation of a theater, pavement areas, and field construction. A s"rimzziing pool may also be constructed with one of the options. Three site configurations are being considered at this time. The three options are shown in Figures 2 to 4. Figure 2: Option 1 p A , r .04 t,la ti ssEE '�' F— '� rr I.��•�� Ftt��'{I N I. Pad,:: 2 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No, 01-06773 TESTING, INC. Figure 3: Option 2 nrrrsnx�p e slnu.�wne n� � SAY pts rim Figure 4: Option 3 Wage 3 of 23 This Page Leff Blank Intentionally Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. 3.2 Site Grading Based on the existing surface elevation of the borings, we anticipate that required cut and fill depths will typically be less than 5 feet. The exception will be the police building which will have underground parking and thus require a deeper excavation. 3.3 Building The police/city hall building will likely have a 40,000 square foot footprint with half of the building constructed as a single story, slab -on -grade. The other half of the building will include a below grade garage and storage facility with police offices above. The buildings will likely be brick and block composite exterior wall construction with a steel frame structure and precast concrete plank floor framing. We estimated that bearing wall loads will range from 3 to 8 kips per linear foot and column loads will range from 60 to 300 kips per column. We assumed that floor loads will not exceed 150 pounds per square foot. Our foundation design assumptions include a minimum factor of safety of 3 with respect to localized shear or base failure of the foundations. We assume the structure will be able to tolerate a total settlement of up to 1 inch, and differential settlements over a 30 foot distance of up to 1/2 inch. 3.4 Pavement Design We assume that the pavement areas will have a bituminous section. We assume that the pavement areas will be subject primarily to automobiles and light trucks. Consequently, the pavements will deteriorate more due to environmental conditions and the effect of wheel loads on the bituminous surface than from structural failure. We have based our pavement thickness design on five equivalent 18,000 pound axle loads (ESALs) per day. 3.5 Updated Information The above stated information represents our understanding of the proposed construction. This information is an integral part of our engineering review. It is important that you contact us if there are changes from that described so that we can evaluate whether modifications to our recommendations are appropriate. Page 4 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. 3.6 Definitions Definitions used in this report are defined below: MnDOT: Minnesota Department of Transportation. MnDOT Specification: MnDOT Material Lab Supplemental Supplications for Construction. Structural Fill: Fill material suitable for support of foundations, slabs and pavements. Material is placed as controlled compacted fill. Uncontrolled Fill: Fill that was placed without regard to compaction effort or consistency. Test Roll: Testing of the pavement subgrade by rolling over it with heavy rubber -tired construction equipment such as a loaded dump truck under the observation of the geotechnical engineer. 4.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND TESTING 4.1 Field Exploration Program The subsurface exploration program conducted for the project consisted of 31 standard penetration test borings. The logs of the borings and details of the drilling methods used appear in Appendix A. The logs contain information concerning soil layering, soil classification, geologic description, and moisture condition. Relative density or consistency is also noted for the natural soils, which is based on the standard penetration resistance (N-value). The boring locations are shown on Figure A-1 in Appendix A. The borings were staked by Stantec, whom also provided surface elevations at the boring locations. 4.2 Laboratory Testing The laboratory test program included moisture content tests on cohesive soils. The test results appear in Appendix A on the individual boring logs adjacent to the samples upon which they were performed. 5.0 SITE CONDITIONS 5.1 Surface Observations The site is currently developed with a single building serving as both the city hall and police Page 5 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No. 01-06773 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. station. An outdoor theater area is located to the west of the building. Bituminous parking areas are located to the south of the building and to the east of the police department. The remaining area is mostly grass -covered turf. The swimming pool is currently located in the southern portion of the property. In Option 3, the pool will be relocated. 5.2 Subsurface Soils/Geology The site geology generally consisted of fill (encountered in all of the borings), swamp deposits and/or alluvial deposits (encountered in several of the borings) and till, encountered in all but two borings. A drawing is included in Appendix A showing the boring locations. A more detailed description is provided below. The respective boring logs are also included in Appendix A. 5.2.1 Fill The fill varied in thickness from 2 to 11 Meet and averaged about 6 feet thick. The fill consisted mostly of silty sand, clayey sand and lean clay. In some cases it was not possible to definitively determine if the bottom portion of the fill was natural soil or fill. The consistency of the upper fill in two of the borings was not recorded due to hydrovac excavation of the soil in order to avoid hitting utilities. 5.2.2 Swamp Deposits Swamp deposits consisting of peat and organic clay were encountered in fourteen of the soil borings and varied in thickness from 1 to 121/2 feet, with an average thickness of about 6 feet. The swamp deposits were generally located to the west and southwest of the existing city hall. 5.2.3 Alluvial Deposits Alluvial deposits were encountered in nineteen of the soil borings, varying in thickness from 1 to 11 Meet, with an average thickness of about 4 feet. The alluvial soils generally consisted of lean clay and clayey sand with lesser amounts of silt. 5.2.4 Till Till was encountered in all but two of the soil borings; with the two soil borings terminated at relatively shallow depth. The till was encountered beneath the organic deposits and alluvial soils and extended to the boring termination depths. The till soils consisted primarily of clayey sands and sandy lean clays. Page 6 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. 5.3 Groundwater Groundwater observations are provided in 'fable 1. While drilling groundwater was observed in fourteen of the soil borings at elevations varying from 880.4 to 913.6. Water level measurements taken 1 or 2 days after drilling indicated groundwater elevations varying from 911.7 to 916.4. Table 1: Groundwater Observations Boring Number Groundwater Elevation at Time of Drilling Groundwater Elevation (Days alter Drilling) 1 904.2 2 911.9 916.4 (1) 3 912.2 916.2(1) 4 N/O(') 5 908.2 6 N/Q 911.9 (z) 7 980.4 8 907.7 9 N/0 10 905.0 11 N/0 12 904.5 - 13 N/G 901.8 --- 14 15 16 905.1 902.5 911.7 (i) 17 913.6 18 N/U 19 N/Q 913.8 (1) 20 N/O 32 N/U 33 N/G 34 N/O 35 N/G 913.5 (l) 36 913.5 Page 7 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New hope, Minnesota AivIFRICAN Jame 22, 2016 ENGINEERINC1 Report No. 01-06773 '1513STINCi, INC. Boring Number Groundwater Elevation Groundwater Elevation at Time of Drilling (Days after Drilling) 37 N/0 38 902,5 (1) ,V U-not observed' - Because the soils on the site are slow draining, it may take an extended period of time to obtain an accurate groundwater level measurement. Installation ofpieonneters would be required, which is beyond the scope of our work. Groundwater levels fluctuate due to varying seasonal and annual rainfall and snow melt amounts, as well as other factors. 6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS 6.1 Design and Construction Considerations ilnsuitable soils are present below a portion of the site consisting of uncontrolled fill, and in some areas, organic deposits and soft soils. Consequently deep excavation will be required in some areas. Required excavation depths may be as deep as 28 feet: The area of the soft soils is located primarily west of the existing city hall building. Excavation to this depth would likely be very d fficult to accomplish. Consequently, consideration should be given to the use of deep forrndations and a structural slab, or soil improvement through the use of aggregate piers in areas with deeper excavation requirements. 6.2 Building Fad Grading 6.2.1 Demolition Demolition requirements for the proposed building pad should include areas for potentially relocated Sport courts, swimming pool, and theater, also. We recommend removing all existing foundations, slabs, utilities, pavements, vegetation, topsoil and any other deleterious materials. Excavations created by the removal should be backlilled with properly compacted structural. backlill. Removal should be completed beyond the edge of the proposed buildings a minimum distance of 5 feet. In proposed pavement areas for parking, we recommend removing all utility and conduits larger than 6 inches in diameter to a minitnum depth of 3 feet below proposed pavement subgrade elevation. Below a depth of 3 feet, abandon utilities may be left in place if they do not conflict Page 8 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No, 0 1 -06773 TESTING, INC. with future utility placement and are properly filled with grout to prevent future collapse. 6.2.2 E'xcavadon To prepare the building area for foundation and slab support, we recommend complete excavation of the fill, topsoil, organic deposits and underlying soft. soils. This would result in excavation depths at the boring locations as shown in Table 2. The recommended excavation depths at each of the boring locations assumes that a building will be placed at that boring location. Table 2: recommended Minimum Excavation Depths for Buildings Boring Number 1 2 Applicable Option(s) Surface Elevation (ft) Excavation Depth (ft) (t► Approximate Excavation Elevation (ft) tt> 924.4 6% 612 918 922.4 916 3 1 918 19 899 4 918.3 6/2 912 5 1 915.8 915.1 --- 19 897 6 1 11% 903% 7 914.1 24 890 8 919.3 12% 907 9 1,2 916.6 11'/2 905 10 .1,2 914.2 19 895 11 2 913.5 25 888'/2 12 921.2 18 903 13 1,2 919.3 6'/2 913'/2 ---14 1,2 916.5 9 907'/z 15 2 915.8 9 907 16 914.5 28 886'/2 17 2 921.6 921.5 11'/z 910'/2 18 6'/2 915 %Z 19 2 917.1 4'/2 913 20 2 918.5 2 915 %z 32 3 929.2--1 4 925 Page 9 of 23 Report of Ceotechnical Exploration and Review City [call Building, New Hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No, 01-06773 AM ERIC.AN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Number Applicable Option(s) Surface Elevation (i�t) Excavation Depth ).E (ft)lit Approximate .Excavation Elevation iUt llr 33 3 9292 2 927 34 3 921.9 19t21 903 35 3 9.3.4 9 914'/2 36 3 922.7 18 904% 37 3 923.8 2 922 38 923.0 12'/7 9 l U% (1) 1tounaea to nearest %a Joot. (2) Deeper excm)ation nury be required based on observations during construction. The depths/elevations indicated in Table 2 are based on the soil conditions at the specific boring locations. Since conditions will vary away from the boring location, we recommend that AFT geotechnical personnel observe and confirm the competency of the soils in the entire excavation bottom prior to new mill or footing placement. Where the excavation extends below foundation grade, the excavation bottom and resultant engineered fill system must be oversized laterally beyond the planned outside edges of the foundations to properly support the lateral loads exerted by that foundation, This excavation/engineered fill lateral extension should ut least be equal to the vertical depth of fill needed to attain foundation grade at that location (i.e., 1:1 lateral oversize). Increased oversizing may be necessary where highly organic soils are present. Since soil conditions can vary, recommended excavation depths between and beyond the borings locations should be evaluated by the geotechnical engineer, if groundwater is present, the excavation should be dcwatered to avoid the risk of unobservable poor soils being left in place and reducing the softening of soils by the water. If the soils become disturbed due to construction traffic, groundwater, or by other means, the unsuitable soil should be subeut to the underlying undisturbed soils. 6.2.3 Filllblaterial Structural bill should consist of the nonorganic excavated materials that can be properly placed and compacted. Nonorganic material consist of soil containing less than 2 percent organic material by weight. The fill should be free of deleterious material. We recoraniend that additional required Page. 10 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New slope, Minnesota AMIRICAN .June 22, 2016 ENCY[NILERING Report No. 0 l 06773-rESTING, INC. import material consists of a coarse -grained material consisting of sand or silty sand with less than. 20 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve, Frozen soil should not be used as Jill and till soil should not be placed on frozen soils. 0.2.4 fill Placement and Compaction Reconmiendations for minimum compaction levels, moisture content ranges and loose fill thicknesses are provided in fable 3. Table 3: Compaction Recommendations Location Relative Compaction: ASTM D 69$: standard Proctor % Moisture Content Variance from Optimum, (percentage points) Loose Lift Thickness (Inches)1') Below structures and exterior f7atworlc areas 95 Coarse Grained +/- 3(2) 12 Dine Grained -I to +3 8 Below landscaped areas 90 +/- 4 12 (1) Reduce lift thickness 1jy approxinialely one half if hand -Field egr.ripinenl is used fbr cornlpaelion (2) Coarse-Arained soils .should consist of soils with symbols of S'P, SP-SMand STI or similar ,Travels If there are areas where fill is placed on slopes, we recommend benching the sloped surface (benches cut parallel to the slope contour) prior to placing the fill. Benching is recon-itmended where slopes are steeper than 4:1 (II: V). 6.2. S Weather Considerations The clayey sand and lean clay soils are Moisture sensitive. The soils will exhibit high strength when they are in a dry condition but will lose strength when they become. wel. If possible, thc.� site preparation should be completed during the summer months when the opportunity for drying the soil is better. The ground surface should be properly sloped during site grading and construction to maximize the potential for surface runoff away from the construction area. Vehicle traffic should be avoided on exposed wet soils. To limit the potential for disturbance/softening of the subgrades at the bottoms of the excavations we recommend (1) performing the excavations with a backhoe fitted with a smooth -ended bucket, (2) not allowing construction equipment to operate directly over the subgrades if they are in a wet condition, and (3) placing the first lift of backfill materials over the excavation bottom by back - Page I of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No. 01-06773 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. casting with the backhoe or placing them with a wide tracked dozer. Any soils that are disturbed or weakened below the building area should also be removed. Haul roads should be provided to protect the subgrade soils that will receive vehicle traffic during wet weather conditions. We recommend using 3 inch minus rock for stabilization. Smaller size rock can be used, although more will be required. Depending on the amount of anticipated construction traffic and size as a rock, 6 to 12 inches of rock is generally required. To the extent possible, any existing bituminous pavement should be left in place as long as possible to facilitate construction on a firm subgrade. Subgrade soils should be covered as soon as possible to avoid precipitation infiltration. Vehicle traffic should also be avoided directly on the wet subgrade soils. Haul roads should be constructed to avoid disturbance of the subgrade soils. Six to 12 inches of rock should be placed over the subgrade, depending on the amount and weight of the vehicles. We recommend using 3 inch minus rock for stabilization. Smaller size rock can be used, although more will be required. A geotextile separation fabric should also be provided to protect the rock from being contaminated by the underlying subgrade soils. The separation fabric should meet the requirements of the MnDOT Specification, Table 3733-1, Type 5 geotextile fabric. Use of frozen material should be avoided since proper compaction of it is not possible. For work during freezing weather, areas to be filled should be stripped frozen soil, snow and ice prior to new fill placement. In addition, structural fill should not be allowed to freeze during or after placement.. 6.3 Settlement Plates We recommend settlement plates be installed in areas where the excavation depth exceeds 20 feet; after the surface removals are performed, and prior to grades being raised. The installation of the settlement plates should be performed or directed by an AET engineer. The settlement plates should be surveyed at the time of their installation, when half of the fill is placed, on the date at which the grade raise is completed (day 0), and at days 1, 2, 4, 7, 10, 14, then weekly after day 14. The survey data should be provided to the AET geotechnical engineer to evaluate when an acceptable amount of settlement is expected to remain. 6.4 Foundation Design Aggregate piers should be considered in areas where required excavation depths exceed about 12 to 15 feet. With this option, conventional sales spread footings can be placed over the aggregate Page 12 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING ReportNo. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. piers. Recommendations for both spread footings and aggregate piers are provided below. 6.4.1 Spread Footings The structures can be supported on conventional spread foundations placed on competent natural soils or structural fill. We recommend perimeter foundations for heated building spaces be placed such that the bottoms are a minimum of 42 inches below exterior grade. Interior footings should be placed a minimum depth of 12 inches below finished subgrade. We recommend that perimeter foundations have a minimum dimension of 16 inches, and column footings a minimum dimension of 24 inches. We recommend foundations for unheated building space (such as remote exterior foundations) be extended to a minimum of 60 inches below exterior grade. Based on the conditions encountered, it is our opinion the building foundations can be designed based on a net maximum allowable soil bearing pressure of up to 3,000 pounds per square foot (psf). It is our judgment this design pressure will have a factor of safety of at least 3 against localized shear or base failure. We judge that total settlements under this loading should not exceed 1 inch. We also judge that differential settlements of conditions depicted by the borings should not exceed 1/2 inch between footings. 6.4.2 Aggregate Piers Based on the soil conditions encountered, it is our opinion that areas requiring deeper excavations for soil correction could alternately be supported utilizing aggregate piers. Aggregate piers are an intermediate foundation system consisting of densely compacted aggregate piers composed of well graded aggregate, such as roadway aggregate base. The piers are constructed by drilling a 24- or 30-inch diameter vertical shaft, densifying and pre -stressing the soil at the base of the hole with a proprietary high-energy impact beveled tamper and then backfilling the hole with 12-inch lifts of aggregate creating bulbs of soil/aggregate within the excavation. Temporary casings may be used when the soils are not stable. Tamping densifies the aggregate vertically while also forcing the aggregate laterally into the sidewalls of the pier. The combination of this vertical and lateral compaction process stiffens and stabilizes the entire surrounding soil mass. The result of stiffening the soils is increasing the soils' bearing capacity allowing for a more economical footing design. Page 13 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC, Conventional spread footings and ground supported floor slabs can then be constructed over the aggregate piers. Typical allowable bearing pressures of 4000 to 6000 psf are obtained with the aggregate piers. We anticipate aggregate pier depths of between 20 and 30 feet. Aggregate pier spacing typically ranges from 6 to 8 feet on center below strip footings and floor slabs. Multiple piers are typically used at column pad locations. The actual depths and layout of the piers would be dependent upon the structural loading, allowable settlement, and pier geometry. Since aggregate piers are a proprietary system, the pier design should be completed by a licensed designibuild contractor. We can provide contractors contact information to complete the work. 6.5 Floor Slab Design 6.5.1 Modulus of Subgrade Reaction For concrete slab design, we estimate the subgrade soils below the slab should provide a modulus of subgrade reaction (k-value) of at least 150 pounds per square inch per inch of deflection (pci). If the subgrade has been disturbed by previous traffic or excavations, it should be surface compacted to a competent, firm condition prior to placement of additional fill or the granular layer. 6.5.2 Vapor Retarder If a vapor membrane is required because of moisture sensitive floor coverings, it should meet the requirements of ASTM International Standard Specification D 1745, Type A. We recommend a minimum thickness of 10 mils. 6.5.3 Granular Layer We recommend placing a minimum of 4 inches of granular material such as aggregate base, or crusher fines created by crushing of limestone rock for aggregate, beneath the concrete pavement. Additional granular material can be placed in order to increase subgrade stability during concrete placement. 6.6 Basement Walls/Retaining Walls 6.6.1 Drainage Below grade walls should include a perimeter backfill drainage system placed on the exterior side of the below grade walls around the building. The drainage system should consist of perforated or slotted PVC drainage pipe located at the bottom of the backfill trench; lower than the interior floor Page 14 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. grade. The drainpipe should be surrounded by properly graded filter rock. A suitable filter fabric should then envelope the filter rock. The drainpipe should be connected to a suitable means of disposable that drains the water well away from the structure. For freestanding retaining walls, weep holes at the base of the wall could be substituted for the drainpipe. 6.6.2 Wall Backfill Prior to backfilling, we recommend damp proofing or waterproofing the perimeter below grade walls. The backfill material will exert lateral loadings. In order to reduce this loading, we recommending using free draining sand for backfill. The zone of sand backfill should extend outward from the wall at least 2 feet at bottom of footing elevation, and then upward and outward from the wall at a 30 degree angle from vertical. The sand should have no more than 5 percent of the particles by weight passing a 4200 sieve and no more than 40 percent of the particles, by weight, passing a #40 sieve. The sand should be placed in maximum 6-inch loose lifts and be compacted with hand-held compaction equipment to the specified density provided above. If pavement material is not used adjacent to the wall, we recommend capping the sand backfill with a layer of clay soil to minimize surface water infiltration. We recommend a minimum 2 percent slope away from the building be maintained. If proper capping cannot be provided, a more permeable soils should be used such as fine filter for coarse filter aggregate as defined by MnDOT Specification 3149. If materials are not properly compacted, settlement may occur, potentially causing water to pond adjacent to the building. 6.6.3 Lateral Pressures Lateral earth pressures on below grade walls and retaining walla will vary, depending on the backfill soil classification, backfill compaction and slope of the backfill surface. Static or dynamic surcharge loads near the wall will also increase lateral wall pressure. Recommendations for lateral earth pressure values (given in the equivalent fluid force values) for a drained soil compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of standard Proctor density and a level ground surface are provided in Table 4. Values for equivalent passive fluid force and coefficient of sliding friction are also provided. Page 15 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota A1vI>JRICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No, 01-06773 TESTING, INC. Table 4: Equivalent Fluid Forces and Coefficients of Sliding Friction ldackfill/ Wet Unit Coefficient Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent Bearing Soil Weight of Sliding Fluid Force, Fluid Fluid Force, (pef) Friction Active Case Force, At- Passive Case (pcf) Rest Case (pcf)ti) (pcf) Sand 120 0.5 35 55 400 Clay 128 0,35 - - 300 (1) The passive lateral earth pressure should be reduced by one-half if rased in confunction with the coefficient of'sliding friction, 6.7 Exterior Building Bacltfilling Sidewalks and exterior slabs will be underlain mostly with lean clay and clayey sand, which are considered moderately frost susceptible. If lenses of high silt material are present, ice lenses may form that could cause problematic frost heaving, This could contribute to ponding surface water and tripping hazards. Providing impervious surfacing and a minimum 2 percent slope will reduce the potential for water infiltration into the ground. Downspouts should also be diverted directly to the storm sewer system or provided with other means to discharge the water that may collect in the sand fill. Nevertheless, ice lenses may still farm clue to migration of groundwater by vapor transmission or soil wicking. One method to limit the potential for heaving to occur is to remove the frost - susceptible soil from below the slab area. Typically, removal to a depth of about 42 inches will provide adequate protection from frost heaving. The excavated soil should be replaced with non - frost susceptible (NFS) backfill consisting of sand having less than 10 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve, A drain tile should be placed at the bottom of the sand in order to avoid water from ponding within the sand layer. The drain tile should be diverted to the storm sewer. In order to reduce the potential for differential frost heave, a transition should be provided between the non -frost susceptible sand and untreated areas. We recommend a minimum transition slope of at least three horizontal to one vertical (3H:1 V). Page 16 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN .1nne 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 I,FSTINO, INC. For fire egress doors and other noncritical doors, stoops should be placed a minimum of 3 inches below the bottom of the door to accommodate continued door operation if some frost heaving does occur. 6.8 Bituminous Pavements 6.8.1 Subgrade Preparation Subgrade preparation orproposed pavement areas should consist of stripping sufficient vegetation, organic soils, soft or disturbed clayey soils where they are exposed within the tipper 3 feet from within proposed pavement areas. The excavation should be completed in a manner that does not disturb the underlying soils. Structural fill should then be placed to established subgrade elevations. In order to prevent contamination of aggregate base by the underlying subgrade soils, a geotextile separation fabric can be placed. The geotextile fabric should be placed on the finished subgrade after completion or fill placement and test rolling. They separation fabric should meet the requirements or MnDOT Materials Lab Supplemental Specifications for Construction, Table 3733-1, Type 5 geotextile fabric. 6.8.2 Backfill and Fill Material Excavated mineral materials from other portions of the site may be used as structural fill within proposed pavement areas. The structural fill should not have an organic content exceeding 2 percent by weight. Recommendations for iiil placement and uornpact on are provided i« T able `. Table 5: Compaction requirements for Pavements Location Below pavements, within 3 feet of subgrade elevations Below pavements, more than 3 feet below subgrade elevations Relative Compaction: ASSTM O 698: standard Proctor (%) IN 95 1'age 17 n{= 73 Moisture Content - — Loose l(aitt Variance from Thickness Optimum, (percentage (inches)(') points) Coarse Grained +/- 3 (1) 12 Fine Grained -2 to d-1 8 Coarse Grained +/- 3 12 17 ine Grained -1 to +3 8 Report of Geoteel►nical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. (1) Coarse -grained soils should consist of'soils with syn?bols gf'SP, SP-SM and SM or similar gravels 6.8.3 Test Roll The final pavement subgradc should be evaluated by completing a test rolling. Soils which rut or deflect (pump) 1 inch or more under the test roll should be corrected by either subcuttin,g and replacement, or scarification., drying and recompaction. 6.8.4 Section Thicknesses Laboratory tests to determine an R-value for pavement design were not included in the scope of this project. Based on correlations provided in the MnDOT Pavement Manual, Table 5-3.2(a), however, an R-value of 12 would be appropriate for the soils encountered on the site. We are presenting pavement designs based on two potential tra Hic situations (light and heavy duty) and two potential subgrade approaches (with and without a sand subbase). The light duty design refers to parking areas which are intended only for automobiles and light trucks. The heavy duty design is intended for pavements which will experience heavier truck traffic. Recommended pavement sections are provided in Table 6. Table 6- pavement 'Thickness Designs Material Bituminous Wear Section Thickness Light Daty Leavy Duty 1 1/2 " 1 ,/z Bituminous Non -Wear 1 % " 211 Class 5 Aggregate Base without Sand Subbase 11" 14" Class 5 Aggregate Base with Sand Subbase 511 5" Sand Subbase 1211 1811 6.8.5 Pavement Materials Recommended bituminous pavement materials are provided in 'Table 7. Page 18 of 23 Report of Geolechnical Exploration and Review City ]tall Building, New hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No. 01-06773 Table 7: Bituminous Pavement Materials AMEKICAN ENGINEERING TFSTING, INC. Pavement Section Layer Material Specification Heavy Duty Bituminous Wear Course SPWEA440F Bituminous Binder Course SPWEB440F Bituminous Base Course SPNWB340B Aggregate Base Class 5 or 6 Sand Subbase Select Granular Borrow Light Duty Bituminous Wear Course SPWEA340F Biturnitlous Binder Course SPWEB340F' Aggregate Iate Base re Tb Class 5 or 6 Sand Subbase Select Granular Borrow (1) MnL7OT Specijications 6.9 Concrete Pavements 6.9.1 Subgracle Preparation Subgrade preparation, baekfill and till material, and test rolling for concrete pavement areas should be similar to the preparation for bituminous pavement as specified previously. To the extent possible, the finished subgrade in proposed concrete pavement areas should consist of a uniform tnuterial to reduce the potential for differential frost heaving. 6. 9.? Pav--me :t Section We recommend that at least 4 inches of aggregate base he placed over the subgrade to provide More Uniform support for the concrete, and to provide a more stable working platform for construction. We recommend a rninirnurn 5-inch thick concrete slab in light -duty areas and a minimum 6-inch thick concrete slab in heavy-duty areas. These designs are based on a modulus of subgrade reaction (lc) of 75 pci, a minimum compressive: strength of 4000 psi, and utilizing aggregate interlock for support at_joints. 6.9.3 Pavement Drainage We recommend installing perforated drainpipes throughout pavement areas at low points and around catch basins. The drainpipes should be placed in small trenches extended at least 8 inches below the aggregate base or below the sand subbase if present. It should be noted that drain tile should not be used if the aggregate base consist of recycled concrete. `Phis material will tend to Page 19 of23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. plug the drain tile over time. If either of these materials is used, weep holes should be provided within catch basins to allow accumulated water to seep into the catch basin manhole. Perimeter drain tile should also be used if the adjacent area is higher than the pavement area. This will intercept seepage from the adjacent slope. If sufficient slope is present (greater than 2 percent), subsurface drainage may be limited to finger drains at catch basin locations. The finger drains should be installed parallel to the slope to intercept water flowing down the slope. 6.10 Swimming Pools If Option 3 is selected, relocation of the swimming pool will be required. Swimming pools tend to be highly sensitive to settlement since even a small amount of settlement will cause water to pond in drainage areas. Furthermore, frost movement of the pool deck would likely cause potential tripping hazards. Required sub excavation for the swimming pool will vary from approximately 2 to 9 feet below existing grade. Recommendations for excavation and backfill should be similar to those provided for building pad preparation. In order to reduce the potential for frost heave of the deck, we recommend sub excavation to a depth of 48 inches and backfilling with NFS soils as previously specified in Section 6.8. Utilities 6.10.1 Excavation We anticipate that utilities can be installed per manufacturer bedding requirements. In order to minimize disturbance of the underlying soils, the excavaton should be completed with a backhoe equipped with a smooth edged bucket. The sands, organic soils and soft soils soils are Type C Soil under OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Construction Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR, part 1926, subpart P, guidelines. Unsupported excavations in the coarse - grained soils should, therefore, be maintained at a gradient no steeper than 11/z:1 (horizontal:vertical). The stiffer clays are Type B Soil and should be maintained at a gradient no steeper than 1:1. Even with the required OSHA sloping, water seepage or surface runoff can potentially induce sideslope erosion or running which could require slope maintenance. Page 20 of 23 L., Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. Trenches 5 feet deep or greater require a protective system. Trenches 20 feet deep or greater require that the prospective system be designed by a registered professional engineer or be based on tabulated data prepared and/or approved by a registered professional engineer in accordance with 1926.652 (b) and (c). 6.10.2 Dewatering Utility excavations may encounter wet to saturated soils. Within the upper 1 foot of saturated soils, sumps and pumps will likely be suitable to remove water from the excavations. If excavations extend more than 1 foot below saturated soils, sand points or dewatering wells will likely be required to adequately remove water from the excavation. We recommend consulting with a dewatering contractor prior to beginning excavations to develop a dewatering plan for utilities. 6.10.3 Bedding A minimum of 4 inches of coarse -grained bedding material should be provided if the excavations cannot be shaped to provide uniform support for the proposed utility and the pipe is less than 54 inches in diameter. For up to 72-inch pipe, 6 inches of bedding should be used. Larger pipe should have a bedding thickness equal to the outside diameter of the pipe divided by 12. The bedding material should consist of relatively clean sand with less than 10 percent of the particles, by weight, passing a #200 sieve or material meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specification 3149.2f. The bedding material should be placed up to at least the spring line of the utility or for plastic and other softer materials, up to the top of the pipe. 6.10.4 Foundation Fill If soft soil conditions are encountered at proposed invert elevation, additional stability may be accomplished by deeper excavation and placement of additional bedding material. IIowcvcr, in more significantly unstable areas, particularly where groundwater is present, coarser materials may be needed to provide a stronger foundation. The coarser materials can also be a favorable media from which to dewater. Additional foundation fill may consist of Fine Filter Aggregate meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specification 3149.2J or Coarse Filter aggregate meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specification 3149.214. When using a coarser material which include significant void space, we recommend enveloping the entire layer with a geotextile separation fabric. The gravel material includes void spaces, and the fabric acts as a separator which minimizes the intrusion of fines into the voice spaces. If Page 21 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No. 01-06773 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. additional granular bedding is used above the foundation gravel, the fabric also prevents downward infiltration of bedding sand into the rock void spaces. 6.10.5 Selection, Placement and Compaction of Backfill We recommend compacting bacicfill to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density, except it should be compacted to 100 percent in the upper 3 feet of the subgrade below pavement areas. Note that some of the soils exhumed from the utility trenches will likely be wet to saturated and will require significant drying to achieve adequate compaction. 7.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 7.1 Potential Difficulties 7.1.1 Runoff Water in Excavation Water can be expected to collect in the excavation bottom during times of inclement weather or snow melt. To allow observation of the excavation bottom, to reduce the potential for soil disturbance, and to facilitate filling operations, we recommend water be removed from within the excavation during construction. Based on the soils encountered, we anticipate the ground water can be handled with conventional sump pumping. 7.1.2 Disturbance of Soils The on -site soils can become disturbed under construction traffic, especially if the soils are wet. If soils become disturbed, they should be subcut to the underlying undisturbed soils. The subcut soils can then be dried and recompacted back into place, or they should be removed and replaced with drier imported fill. 7.1.3 Cobbles and Boulders The soils at this site can include cobbles and boulders. This may make excavating procedures somewhat more difficult than normal if they are encountered. 7.2 Observation and Testing The recommendations in this report are based on the subsurface conditions found at our test boring locations. Since the soil conditions can be expected to vary away from the soil boring locations, we recommend on -site observation by a geotechnical engineer during construction to evaluate these potential changes. Page 22 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No. 01-06773 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Soil density testing should also be performed on new fill placed in order to document that project specifications for compaction have been satisfied. We recommend at least one density test for every 100 cubic yards of fill placed beneath the building with at least one test for every 2 feet of fill placed. Similar requirements should be followed for pavement areas except that there should be one density tests for every 200 cubic yards of material placed. At least one density test should be taken for every 100 feet of utility trenches at vertical intervals not exceeding 2 feet. 8.0 LIMITATIONS Within the limitations of scope, budget, and schedule, our services have been conducted according to generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices at this time and location. Other than this, no warranty, either expressed or implied, is intended. Important information regarding risk management and proper use of this report is given in Appendix B entitled "Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use". Page 23 of 23 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN June 22, 2016 ENGINEERING Report No. 01-06773 TESTING, INC. Appendix A Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Boring Log Notes Unified Soil Classification System Figure 1 — Boring Locations Subsurface Boring Logs Sieve Analysis Tests Appendix A Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Report No. 01-06773 A.1 FIELD EXPLORATION The subsurface conditions at the site were explored by drilling and sampling 31 standard penetration test borings. The locations of the borings appear on Figure 1, preceding the Subsurface Boring Logs in this appendix, A.2 SAMPLING METHODS A.2.1 Split -Spoon Samples (SS) - Calibrated to N60 Values Standard penetration (split -spoon) samples were collected in general accordance with ASTM: D1586 with one primary modification. The ASTM test method consists of driving a 2-inch O.D. split -barrel sampler into the in -situ soil with a 140-pound hammer dropped from a height of 30 inches, The sampler is driven a total of 18 inches into the soil. After an initial set of 6 inches, the number of hammer blows to drive the sampler the final 12 inches is known as the standard penetration resistance or N-value. Our method uses a modified hammer weight, which is determined by measuring the system energy using a Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA) and an instrumented rod. In the past, standard penetration N-value tests were performed using a rope and cathead for the lift and drop system. The energy transferred to the split -spoon sampler was typically limited to about 60% of its potential energy due to the friction inherent in this system. This converted energy then provides what is known as an NO blow count. The most recent drill rigs incorporate an automatic hammer lift and drop system, which has higher energy efficiency and subsequently results in lower N-values than the traditional N60 values. By using the PDA energy measurement equipment, we are able to determine actual energy generated by the drop hammer. With the various hammer systems available, we have found highly variable energies ranging from 55% to over 100%. Therefore, the intent of AEI's hammer calibrations is to vary the hammer weight such that hammer energies lie within about 60% to 65% of the theoretical energy of a 140-pound weight falling 30 inches. The current ASTM procedure acknowledges the wide variation in N-values, stating that N-values of 100% or more have been observed. Although we have not yet determined the statistical measurement uncertainty of our calibrated method to date, we can state that the accuracy deviation of the N-values using this method is significantly better than the standard ASTM Method. A.2.2 Disturbed Samples (DS)/Spin-up Samples (SU) Sample types described as "DS" or "SU" on the boring logs are disturbed samples, which are taken from the flights of the auger. Because the auger disturbs the samples, possible soil layering and contact depths should be considered approximate. A.2.3 Sampling Limitations Unless actually observed in a sample, contacts between soil layers are estimated based on the spacing of samples and the action of drilling tools. Cobbles, boulders, and other large objects generally cannot be recovered from test borings, and they may be present in the ground even if they are not noted on the boring logs. Determining the thickness of "topsoil" layers is usually limited, due to variations in topsoil definition, sample recovery, and other factors. Visual -manual description often relies on color for detennitiation, and transitioning changes can account for significant variation in thickness judgment. Accordingly, the topsoil thickness presented on the logs should not be the sole basis for calculating topsoil stripping depths and volumes. If more accurate information is needed relating to thickness and topsoil quality definition, alternate methods of sample retrieval and testing should be employed. A.3 CLASSIFICATION METHODS Soil descriptions shown on the boring logs are based on the Unified Soil Classification (USC) system. The USC system is described in ASTM: D2487 and D2488. Where laboratory classification tests (sieve analysis or Atterberg Limits) have been performed, accurate classifications per ASTM: D2487 are possible. Otherwise, soil descriptions shown on the boring logs are visual -manual judgments. Charts are attached which provide information on the USC system, the descriptive terminology, and the symbols used on the boring logs. Visual -manual judgment of the AASHTO Soil Group is also noted as a part of the soil description. A chart presenting details of the AASHTO Soil Classification System is also attached. Appendix A - Page 1 of 2 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Appendix A Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Report No. 01-06773 The boring logs include descriptions of apparent geology. The geologic depositional origin of each soil layer is interpreted prhnarily by observation of the soil samples, which can be limited. Observations of the surrounding topography, vegetation, and development can sometimes aid this judgment. AA WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS The ground water level measurements are shown at the bottom of the boring logs. The following information appears under "Water Level Measurements" on the logs: 4 Date and Time of measurement • Sampled Depth: lowest depth of soil sampling at the time of measurement 4 Casing Depth: depth to bottom of casing or hollow -stem auger at time of measurement 4 Cave-in Depth: depth at which measuring tape stops in the borehole 4 Water Level: depth in the borehole where free water is encountered 0 Drilling Fluid Level: same as Water Level, except that the liquid in the borehole is drilling fluid The true location of the water table at the boring locations may be different than the water levels measured in the boreholes. This is possible because there are several factors that can affect the water level measurements in the borehole. Some of these factors include: permeability of each soil layer in profile, presence of perched water, amount of time between water level readings, presence of drilling fluid, weather conditions, and use of borehole casing. A.5 LABORATORY TEST METHODS A.5.1 Water Content Tests Conducted per AET Procedure 01-LAB-010, which is performed in general accordance with ASTM: D2216 and AASHTO: T265, A.5.2 Atterberg Limits Tests Conducted per AET Procedure 01-LAB-030, which is performed in general accordance with ASTM: D4318 and AASHTO: T89, T90, A.5.3 Sieve Analysis of Soils (thru #200 Sieve) Conducted per AET Procedure 01-LAB-040, which is performed in general conformance with ASTM: D6913, Method A. A.5.4 Particle Size Analysis of Soils (with hydrometer) Conducted per AET Procedure 01-LAB-050, which is performed in general accordance with ASTM: D422 and AASHTO: T88. A.5.5 Unconfined Compressive Strength of Cohesive Soil Conducted per AET Procedure 01-LAB-080, which is performed in general accordance with ASTM: D2166 and AASHTO: T208. A.5.6 Laboratory Soil Resistivity using the Wenner Four -Electrode Method Conducted per AFT Procedure 01-LAB-090, which is performed using Soil Box apparatus in the laboratory in general accordance with ASTM: G57 A.6 TEST STANDARD LIMITATIONS Field and laboratory testing is done in general conformance with the described procedures. Compliance with any other standards referenced within the specified standard is neither inferred nor implied. A.7 SAMPLE STORAGE Unless notified to do otherwise, we routinely retain representative samples of the soils recovered from the borings for a period of 30 days. Appendix A - Page 2 of 2 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. This Page Left Blank Intentionally 32 33 4 �.__ � _ tea• . � � AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. PROJECT City Hall Complex New Hope, Minnesota SUBJECT Soil Boring Locations SCALE None Drawn by LWB New Hope City Hall Complex ;3❑�31� � -_ - AET NO. 01-06773 DATE 06120/2016 This Page Left Blank Intentionally AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 1 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN D INTI, Surface Elevation 924.4 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL .-#201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN, 2.25" Bituminous pavement FILL M 1 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty 20 M SS 8 10 2 sand, t1'ace roots, dark grayish brown and brown FILL, mostly silty sand, a lithe gravel and clayey 12 M SS 16 15 3 and, grayish brown FILL, mostly clayey sand, a litlte gravel and silty 4 sand, trace roots, gray and brown, a little light 5 u brown 6 M SS 12 17 6 7 SLIGHTLY ORGANIC LEAN CLAY WITH FINE SAND, a little gravel, trace roots, black, firm ALLUVIUM g M SS 14 29 8 (CL) 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray mottled, TILL 10 firm, laminations of silt (SC) 8 M SS 16 21 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray and brown mottled, firm to stiff, laminations of silty sand 8 M SS 16 17 13 (SC) 14 15 12 M SS 18 16 16 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray 19 mottled, very stiff, laminations of sandy silt (SC) 20 23 SS 18 17 21 22 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 23 very stiff (CL) 20 M SS 18 17 24 END OF BORING s r F DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO L .^ 0-23' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED T 3/21/16 2:38 24.5 23.0 24A 23.0 SHEETS FOR AN ? 3/21/16 2:48 24.5 23.0 24.5 20.2 EXPLANATION OF BORING TERMINOLOGY ON 7 COMPLETED: 3/21/16 THIS LOG DR: SS LG: JMMRig: 1C 03/2011 u 1-1MK-u6u ANI ERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 2 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEPTHIN 922.4 Surface Elevation GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL o-1L24 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION L, mostly clayey trace FILL 19 l �salnud,�Ilittllecavel, Trots,dark brown 13 M SS 16 13 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty 2 sand, trace roots, dark brown and brown 12 M SS 14 13 3 4 FILL, mostly sandy lead clay, a little gravel and 5 sandy silt, dark brown, a little brown 10 SS 16 20 6 7 _ CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, light grayish TILL brown and brown mottled, firm to stiff, 6 M SS 18 20 8 laminations of sandy silt and silty sand (SC) 9 10 — 8 M SS 16 16 11 12 14 M SS 18 13 13 l4 15 SILT, light brownish gray, moist, medium dense, FINE 11 M SS 18 13 25 16 lenses and laminations of lean clay (ML) ALLUVIUM 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray, TILL 19 a little brown, very stiff, laminations of sandy 20 silt (SC) 20 M/W SS 16 11 21 22 23 24 11 M SS 18 15 END OF BORING 0 c� J J 1 a DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO a DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 2 0-23.4' 3.25" HSA 3/21/16 9:30 21.0 19.5 21.0 20.9 SHEETS FOR AN 3/21/16 10:05 24.9 23.4 24.0 15.3 EXPLANATION OF 3/21/16 10:30 24.9 None 21.0 10.5 TERMINOLOGY ON U i { )MP1.r'.TED; 3/21/16 SC 68C 3/22/16 8:15 - None 14.0 6.0 THIS LOG DR: JM LG: i�i ; 01-DHR-06C 03/2011 . AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN Log of Boring No, 3 (p. 1 of 1 DEPTH Surface Elevation 918.0 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL K.4201 IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 19 1 roots, black 10 SS 20 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty _ J 12 sand, trace roots, dark brown and brown 13 M SS 14 9 3 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces 4 of bituminous,:grayish brown and dark brown, a little brown 5 FILL, mostly lean clay, a little gravel, trace 5 M SS 12 21 6 roots, dark gray, a little brown ORGANIC CLAY, a little gravel, trace roots, SWAMP black, soft (OH) DEPOSIT 3 M SS 16 48 8 -� 9 71 M TW 18 WE M SS 16 18 10 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, very MIXED 11 soft, lenses and laminations of silty sand (SC) ALLUVIUM 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, trace roots, dark gray, a little gray, very soft, lenses and I M SS 18 16 13 laminations of silty sand and sand (SC) 14 M TW 18 15 CLAYEY SAND, trace roots, gray, soft, lenses 3 M SS 18 25 16 and laminations of sandy silt and silty sand (SC/SM) 17 18 M TW 24 19 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, soft to TILL 20 stiff (SC) 4 M SS 18 16 21 22 23 24 9 M SS 16 15 END OF BORING 0 a z 5 u DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED = DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL 0-23.4' 3.25" HSA 3/21/16 11:30 11.5 10.0 10.0 9.6 SHEETS FOR AN s 3/21/16 12:25 24.9 23.4 24.6 None EXPLANATION OF BOMPLEIEL3: 3/21116 3/21/16 1:00 24.5 None 19.8 5.8 TERMINOLOGY ON DR: JM LG: SC Rig: 68C 3/22/16 8:15 - None 8.0 l g THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DBR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 4 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, NIN FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEIPTH Surface Elevation 918.3 GEOLOGY N MC STY EE RIENC W DEN LL PL #20 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly pieces of wood, brown and dark FILL 1 brown 6 M SS 10 16 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and — 2 sand, grayish brown, a little brown and light 8 M SS 10 3 brown 4 FILL, mostly silty sand, a little gravel, pieces of bitum'snaus, a Little clayey sand, grayish brown FINE ALLUVIUM 5— LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, a little gravel, OR FILL 7 M SS 6 47 6 gray mottled, firm, laminations of sandy silt and silt (CL} FINE 7 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, gray ALLUVIUM 6 M SS 8 18 8 mottled, firm, laminations of sandy silt and silt (CL) 9 CLAYEY SAND, a lithe gravel, brown and gray TILL 10 mottled, firm, laminations of sandy silt and silty 8 M SS 12 18 11 sand (SC) 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown and brownish gray mottled, stiff to very stiff, 11 M SS 18 17 13 laminations of sandy silt (SC) 14 15 22 M SS 18 18 16 17 - 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff (CL) 20 14 M SS 18 18 21 22 23 12 M SS 16 18 24 END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER THE ATTACHED LEVEL r 0-231 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 9:30 24.5 23.0 24.5 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON UBUKINU COMPLETED: 3/22/16 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: JMM Rig: 1 C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 5 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 915.8 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE �' WC DEN LL PL 46420q FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty FILL 25 1 sand, trace roots, dark grayish brown 6 M SS 12 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces ' 12 of bituminous and silty sand, trace roots, grayish g M SS 16 13 3 brown and brown 4 FILL, mostly lean clay, trace roots, dark gray, a 5 little black 5 M SS 8 40 6 7 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, a little gravel, SWAMP trace roots, black, soft (CL) DEPOSIT 3 SS 16 42 8 9 M TW 22 10 11 SILTY SAND WITH ORGANIC FINES, a little COARSE WH W SS 18 gravel, fine to medium grained, dark brownish ALLWIUM id 84 12 gray, waterbearing, very loose, lenses and F1NL' 13 laminations of clayey sand and sandy silt SM) 6LLUVIU1N J 2 W SS 18 96 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, trace roots, dark a SWAMP 14 grayish brown, a little gray and black, very soft, DEPOSIT W TW 24 15 lenses of organic clay and lean clay (CL) MACL ORGANIC CLAY, a little gravel, trace shells - 16 and roots, dark brown and gray mottled, soft, 3 W SS 18 77 17 lenses of sapric peat (OH) INE Fe,IL>�II�I NIC CLAY, trace roots, dark gray, a little 5 W SS 18 31 18 Lbsoft,lenses and laminations of lean clay 19 TILL 20 SANDY LEAN CLAY, gray, firm (CL) 6 W SS 18 17 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to 21 stiff (CL) 22 6 W SS 12 17 23 24 5 W SS 17 16 25 26 27 28 29 30 14 W SS 18 15 31 END OF BORING f ' DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL 0-29%x' 3,25" HSA 3/22/16 10:10 12.0 10.5 10.7 7.6 SHEETS FOR AN n s EXPLANATION OF 3/22/16 11:05 31.0 29.5 29.7 28.3 KL o cc BORJN(33/22/16 COMPLETED: 3/22/16 11:15 31.0 29.5 29.1 28.3 TERMINOLOGY ON "i THIS LOG a DR: DS LG: JMMRi : 1C 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN L ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 6 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEPTHSurface Elevation 915.1 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE TYPREC WC DEN LL PL a•924 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 31 1 roots, dark brawn, a little grayish brown 5 M SS 16 20 silty FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel�is 2 sand and sandy silt, trace roots, grrown 14SS 15 13 3 and dark brown — 4 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and sand, brown, a little light brown SWAMP DEPOSIT 5 SAPRIC PEAT, black (1 — 7 M SS 6 77 7 LEAN CLAY, trace roots, dark gray, soft, INE lanunations of sand (CL) ALLUVIUM ALL 2 M SS 15 38 8 9 SANDY SILT, a little gravel, trace roots, gray, a 10 little dark gray, moist, very loose, lens of clayey 3 M SS 8 27 sand, laminawns of lean clay (ML) 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to TILL stiff (SC) 5 M SS 10 16 13 14 15 7 M SS 16 16 16 — 17 18 19 20 5 M SS 18 16 21 22 23 24 — 25 15 M SS 2 17 26 END OF BORING 4 (7 J J ;' DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO a DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-24`/2' 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 3:20 11.0 9.5 10.9 Wet SHEETS FOR AN 4 3/24/16 12:05 11.0 9.5 9.0 3.2 EXPLANATION OF a 3/24/16 12:45 26.0 24.5 25.3 23.3 TERMINOLOGY ON cis COMPLETED: 3/22/16 THIS LOG J a DR: JM LG; SG Rig: 68C O1-DHR-0 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN Log of Boring No. 7 (1). 1 of 2) DEPTHSurface Elevation 914.1 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL o #20r FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE' IN FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty FILL 1 sand, trace roots, dark brown and brown 10 M SS 17 16 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty 3 sand, grayish brown 9 M SS 9 12 4 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) SWAMP 5 - DEPOSIT 4 M X SS 7 135 6 7 HEMIC PEAT, black, a little dark brown (PT) WH M SS 17 312 8 z�= 9 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, black to dark 10 brown, very soft (OH) WH M SS 18 109 11 -- 12 - =- 13 M TW 24 14 15 WH M SS 18 440 16 e 17 — LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, trace roots, dark FINE brownish gray, very soft (CL) ALLUVIUM WH M SS 18 75 18 19 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, very TILL 20 soft to firm (SC) 1 M SS 18 17 21 22 23 - 24 25 8 M X SS 17 15 26 27 28 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, r 29 stiff (CL) a 30 11 M SS 14 19 u 31 F f DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL T ATTACHED 0-34%z' 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 2:11 36.0 34.5 35.7 34.8 SHEETS FOR AN 3/22/16 2:23 36.0 34.5 35.6 33.7 EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON 5 COMP],ETED: 3122l16 THIS LOG DR: JM LG: SG Rig: 68C 03/2011 U i-I)MR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. 03/2011 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 8 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complexi New Hope, MN _ DEPTH Surface Elevation 919.3 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN, WC DEN LL PL "-#201 4.5" Bituminous pavement FILL IR ! 5.5" Crushed limestone, light brown 15 M SS 12 15 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty sand, gray, a little brown 18 M SS 16 11 3 4 5 6 M SS 14 18 6 7 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, black, firm (OH) SWAMP DEPOSIT 6 M SS 10 82 8- 9 LEAN CLAY WITH SAND, slightly organic, a a FINE 10 little gravel, trace roots, black, soft (CL) ALLUVIUM 3 M SS 16 38 11 TW 18 12 13 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, a little TILL g W SS 16 16 brown, stiff, laminations of sandy silt (SC) 14 15 10 W SS 18 15 16 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff 19 (SC) 20 9 W SS 16 16 21 22 23 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, gray, stiff 12 W SS 18 18 24 (CL) END OF BORING a 0 c� J J r + DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE; REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-23' 3.25" HSA m r 3/21/16 1:05 14.0 12.5 14.0 12.1 SHEETS FOR AN 4 s 3/21/16 1:15 14.0 12.5 14.0 11.6 EXPLANATION OF a COMPLETED: 3121116 3/21/16 1:30 24.5 23.0 24.5 None TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG a DR; SS LG: JMMRi : 1C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 9 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope Ci Hall Complex New Ho e, MN FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS D Surface Elevation 916.6 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC TYPE IN WC DEN LL PL #F20 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel, silty FILL 1 sand, trace roots, grayish brown and brown to 6 M SS 18 18 dark grayish brown, a little brown 2 _ 15 M SS 16 22 3 4tandgray y sand with silt, a little gravel, clayey 5ty sand, grayish brown, a little brown 8 M SS 12 221 SWAMP 6 AT, black {P'f} DFCPOSI r 7 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, trace roots, FINE ALLUVIUM 2 M SS 12 18 g gray, soft (SC) 9 M TW 24 10 11rLEAN AND, a little gravel, dark gray and 14 M SS 18 14 ed, stiff, laminations of sandy silt 12 10 M SS 18 16 13Y WITH SAND, a little gravel, light gray and brownish gray, stiff, 14 lenses and laminations of silty sand and sandy TILL 15 silt 9CL) 13 M SS 16 13 CLAYEY SAND, a littic gravel, dark gray, stiff 16 to firm (SC) 17 18 19 20 10 M SS 18 14 21 22 23 8 M SS 18 14 24 _ ,,,� END OF BORING r a L7 .3 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DETHCASING DEPTHCDEPTH FLUID LEVEL LEVEL WATER THE ATTACHED 0-23' 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 12:30 24.5 23.0 24.4 None SHEETS FOR AN 3/22/16 12:40 24.5 23.0 24.3 None EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON a u BOKINU COMPLETED: 3/22/16 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: JMM Rig: IC 01-DI IR-061 03/2011 AM ERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 10 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 914.2 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL o fl20 FILL, mostly clayey sand, slightly organic, a FILL 32 1 little gravel, trace roots, dark grayish brown, a 9 M SS 18 little brown 12 2 FILL, mostly Clayey sand, a little gravel, trace 14 M SS 12 3 roots, brown and gray 4 FILL, mostly sand with silt, a Little gravel and sand, grayish brown, a little gray SW AMPclayey 5 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) DEPOSIT 5 M SS 12 254 6 7 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, soft (OH) 2 M SS 12 97 8 — - 9 W TW 24 10 11 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft TILL WH W SS 18 19 to firm (SC) 12 WH W SS 16 16 13 14 — M TW 24 15 16 5 M SS 18 16 17 6 M SS 16 16 18 19 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff 20 (SC) 13 M SS 16 16 21 22 23 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 12 M SS 18 17 24 stiff (CL) END OF BORING J J F- DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO w a DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-23' 3.25" HSA m 3/22/16 2:40 10.5 8.5 9.7 9.2 SHEETS FOR AN s 3/22/16 3:10 26.0 24.5 25.8 None EXPLANATION OF BORINU TERMINOLOGY ON g COMPLETED: 3/22/16 THIS LOG FJ Uj DR: DS LG: JMMRig: 1C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 ANMRICAN >! ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 11 (p. 1 of 2) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Ho e, MN FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS D Surface Elevation 913.5 GEOLOGY SAMPLE N MCIN REC IN WC DEN LL PL #2f3 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces FILL 26 1 of wood, a little silty sand, trace roots, dark 11 Fm SS 14 12 brawn 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace 10 SS 15 13 3 roots, grayish brown and brown 4 FILL, mostly sand with silt, a Tittle gravel, 5 grayish brown 18 M SS 16 6 7 _ SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) SWAMP DEPOSIT 2 M SS 17 327 8 9 10 - 1 M SS 18 184 11 ORGANIC CLAY, trace shells. and roots, black, _ 12 very soft (OH) 1 M SS 18 162 13 A 4� 14 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) 15 2 M SS 18 308 16 17 - TW 18 19 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, black, a little 20 brown, soft (OH) _ 2 M SS 18 268 148 21 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, a little TILL 22 light gray, very soft to soft (SC) WH M SS 18 16 91 24 25 2 M SS 18 17 26 27 M TW 18 28 29 8 30 8 M SS 18 17 .J 31 Y DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO r DATE TIME EX��LEDASITT,G H CAVE IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-39'/z' 3.25" HSA SHEETS FOR AN 3/22/16 9:57 11.0 9.5 10.7 Wet 3/22/16 10:27 23.5 22.0 22.3 one EXPLANATION OF s 130KIPLE'l'ED: 3/22/16 11:14 41.0 39.5 41.0 None TERMINOLOGY ON a 3/22/16 U 3/22/16 11:28 41.0 39.5 41.0 None THIS LOG DR: JM LG: SG Rig:68C 01 -DHR-061 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 11 (p. 2 of 2) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, NIN DEPTH TH GEOLOGY SALE REC N MC MP FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS E FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE ' WC DEN LL PL �-420 TILL 33 (condinued) CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff 34 to very stiff (SC) 35 14 M SS 18 14 36 37 38 — 39 40 - 16 M SS 18 16 41 END OF BORING 1 a 0 c7 a U' ro 0 n. a b L] a 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICANIN END OF BORING ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG �I�Es�I�rlvtT, INC. AET No; O1-06773 Log of Boring No. 12 (p.1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 921.2FIELD GEOLOGY N IINC &LABORATORY TESTS #2( FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION WC DEN LL PL 5" Bituminous pavement FILL JSA I 8.5" Crushed limestone, light brown 8 12 16 2FILL,mostly sandy iean clay, a little gravel, rrayish brown, a Tittlelight brown 32 16 15 3 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, silty san /I 4 dand sandy silt, trace roots, dark gray and gray 5 FILL, mostly silty sand with gravel, grayish 23 M SS 12 12 bl'OWII 6 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty 7 sand, gray, a little brown 9 M SS 14 16 8 9 FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel and to clayey sand, trace roots, dark brownish gray and 5 M SS l4 25 brown mottled, a little brown 11 12 ORGANIC CLAY, a little gravel, trace roots, SWANIP DEPOSIT black, firm (OH) 6 M SS l4 64 ]3 14 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, a little gravel, FINE 15 trace roots, black, soft, laminations of sand (CL) ALLUVIUM 3 M SS 16 36 16 W TW 24 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to TILL 5 SS i8 16 19 soft, firm (SC) 20 4 W SS 18 16 21 22 W TW 24 23 5 W SS 18 18 a a a a DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD r a_ 0-23' 3.25" HSA co 4 0 CDMPLETED: 3121/16 U DR: SS LG: JMMRi ; 1C 03/2011 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO TIME SAMPLED D PE TH DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL LEVEL T ATTACHED 11:25 19.5 18.0 18.1 17.9 SHEETS FOR AN q3/21/16 11:35 19.5 18.0 18.0 16.7 EXPLANATION OF 12:05 24.5 23.0 23.0 209 TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-06( AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 13 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEPTH Surface Elevation 919.3 GEOLOGY N WC DEN LL PL o 4201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE ' FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 24 1 roots, dark brown 8 M SS 18 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty 12 sand, trace roots, brown and brownish gray to 14 M SS 18 12 3 light grayish brown 4 5 9 M SS 16 15 6 7 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, light grayish TILL brown, a little brown,s tiff, laminations of sandy 14 M SS 16 13 8 silt (SC) 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray 10 mottled, very stiff, laminations of sandy silt and 16 M SS 18 14 silty sand (SC) 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, very stiff (SC) 18 M SS 18 15 13 14 15 16 M SS 18 17 16 17 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff to very stiff (CL) 20 14 M SS 18 16 21 22 23 16 M SS 18 16 24 END OF BORING a J J DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO a DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL T ATTACHED 0-23' 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 1:43 24.5 23.0 24.4 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF EL BOMPLFTED: TERMINOLOGY ON p 3/22/16 THIS LOG a DR: DS LG: JMMRig: 1C 03/2011 01-DBR-060 ANMRICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 14 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope Ci all Com lex• New Hope, MN FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEPTH Surface Elevation 916.5 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC IN TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL r#2fl FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION i- 2- 3- 4- 5- 6 7- 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel, a FILLX 28 8 M SS 18 little silty sand, trace roots, dark brown 14 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and sand, trace roots, brownish gray, brown and light 5 M SS 12 19 brown FILL, mostly lean clay with sand, a little gravel, silt, sandy silt and clayey sand, trace roots, brownish gray and dark brown, a little brown 20 4 M SS 12 and light brown 22 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, grayish brown and brown, a little dark brown 3 M X SS 12 17 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace roots, gray, a little brownish gray andAstiff, brown TILL CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, bro 8 M SS 16 16 and brown mottled, a little brown, fr laminations of sandy silt (SC) CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, a little brown, stiff, laminations of sandy silt (SC) SANDY LEAN CLAY, dark gray, stiff CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, very stiff (SC) END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD 0-23' 3.25" HSA 4 0 w DR: DS LG: ,JMM Rig: IC 03/2011 1 13 M SS 18 15 T 13 W SS 18 16 13 I W IXI SS I 18 I 18 WATER LEVEL DATE TIME SEPTHD MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED DEPTH DCASING PTH FLUID LEVEL LEVEL 3/23/16 9:45 16.0 14.5 15.7 15.2 SHEETS FOR AN 3/23/16 9:55 16.0 14.5 15.3 14,7 EXPLANATION OF 3/23/16 10:15 24.5 23.0 24.0 21.1 TERNIINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-06C AN ERiCAN ENG EERING Mml TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 15 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 915.8 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL o-#201 IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE 1N• FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 27 1 roots, dark brown 8 M SS 20 15 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty sand, trace roots, brown, a little dark brown and 8 M SS 14 15 3 grayish brown 4 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) SWAMP 5.- DEPOSIT 5 M SS 12 79 6 7 LEAN CLAY, trace roots, gray, soft, FINE laminations of sand (CL) ALLUVIUM 3 M SS 14 26 8— 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, a TILL 10 lithe gray, firm, lens of silty sand (SC) 7 SS 14 15 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, firm to stiff, laminations of sand (SC) 8 W SS 14 14 13 14 15 10 M SS 6 15 16 17 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff (CL) 20 12 M SS 18 18 21 22 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark brownish 23 gray, very stiff (SC) 17 M SS 18 13 24 END OF BORING s Y 7 J J u F } DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE; REFER TO r DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED L 0-23' 3,25" HSA 2 3/23/16 11:20 13.5 120.0 12.7 12.3 SHEETS FOR AN 5 3/23/16 11:30 13.5 12.0 120.0 10.7 EXPLANATION OF BORINQ COMPLETED-. 3/23/16 3/23/16 11:47 24.5 23.0 23.0 None TERMINOLOGY ON '+ t�l THIS LOG DR: DS LG: JMMRi : IC 03/2011 01-DtiR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 16 (p.1 of 2) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 914.5 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS IN TYPE IN. FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION WC DEN LL PL 42C FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 32 1 roots, dark brown 9 M SS 18 13 z FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, silty brown brown, a sand and sandy silt, and grayish 9 SS 14 15 3 little dark brown 4 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces 5 of wood, a little silty sand, trace roots, gray, a 6 M SS 12 17 little brown and dark brown 6 7 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) SWW DEPOSIT 2 M SS 18 306 8 9 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, black to dark 10 brown, a little black, very soft (OH) 1 M SS 18 103 11 12 --- 13 M TW 24 14 15 WH M SS 18 403 16 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft TILL M , TW 22 19 to stiff (SC) 20 - WH M SS 16 16 21 - 22 23 - 24 1 M SS 18 17 25 26 27 - 28 29 30 - 13 M SS 18 15 31 0 03/2011 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NC 0-23.4' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUM LEVEL WATER LEVEL T17 3/21/16 1:40 14.0 12.0 13.9 12.0 SP 3/21/16 2:33 36.0 34.5 35.9 None EXI COMPLETED: 312111d 3/21/16 2:50 36.0 34.5 35.9 34.9 TEB DR: JM LG: SC Rig, 68C 3/22/16 8,15 - None 31.6 2.8 TE: REFER TO E ATTACHED EETS FOR AN 'LANATION OF MINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 16 (p. 2 of 2) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS I FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL 7920 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft TILL 33 - to stiff (SC) (continued) (continued) 34 - 35 18 M SS 16 17 36 END OF BORING 0 i7 F U N Q 0. CM7 Fp L� 0 0. O L,] I w 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING. INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 17 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Co m lex• New Ha a MN FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS REC DEPTH Surface Elevation 921.6 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE IN. IN TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL 6-02[ FEET I MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 4.75" Bituminous pavement 1 6.5" Crushed limestone, light brown 2 FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel, pieces of bituminous, a little silty sand, gray, a 3 Little brown 4 5 6 7LORGANIC mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel, of bituminous, a little silty sand, gray, a 8own 9 CLAY, trace roots, black, firm (OH) 10 11 12—CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm (SC) 13 — 14 15 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray, 16 a little brown, stiff, laminations of sandy silt 17 (SC) 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff (CL) 20 21 22 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff 2'3 (SC) 24 END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD 0-23' 3.25" HSA GOIvIi'] 1;TED: 3/21/16 DR: SS LG-. JMM Ri . IC 03/2011 14 M SS 14 10 16 M SS 16 12 18 M SS 18 13 M L, IIII =aE DEPOSIT 8 M N SS 12 45 TILL 4 M SS 18 22 M TW 18 10 W SS 18 20 11 1 W JXJ SS 1 18 ` 20 =©V'4®=n WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING CAVE-IN DEPTH DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE, ATTACHED 3/21/16 9:48 16.5 14.5 16.5 12.0 SHEETS FOR AN 8.0 EXPLANATION OF 3/21/16 9:58 16.5 14.5 16.5 3/21/16 10;14 24.5 23.0 23.0 20.2 TERMINOLOGY ON 3/22/16 8:15 - None 31.6 7 8 THIS LOG ` O1-DHR-06L AWRICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 18 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 921.5 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL o-920 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL i roots, dark brown 7 M SS 14 25 2 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray, TILL OR 16 M SS 16 10 3 a little brown, very stiff to stiff, lairtitxations of FILL silty sand and sandy silt (SC) (possible fill) 4 5 14 M SS 16 13 6 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown TILL to dark grayish brown, stiff to very stiff (SC) 14 M SS 18 13 8 9 10 16 M SS 16 12 t1 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, a little brown, stiff (SC) 14 M SS 18 x 14 13 - 14 15 14 M SS 18 15 16 17 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff to very stiff (CL) 20 13 M SS 18 18 21 22 23 L16 M SS 18 17 24 END OF BORING s- a DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED a M 0-23' 3.25" HSA 3/23/16 12:55 24.5 23.0 24.5 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF a TERMINOLOGY ON o COMPLETIMD 3/23/16 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: JMMRi : 1C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 19 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 917.1 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL W120[ 6" Bituminous pavement FILL 1 FILL, mostly silty sand, a little gravel, pieces of 11 M SS 16 14 2 concrete, bituminous and plastic, dark brown FILL, most lean clay, a little gravel, silty sand 10 SS 12 3 and sandy silt, gray and brown, a little light — 4 brownish gray TILL OR FILL, mostly silty sand, a little gravel aiid clayey FILL 5 sand, tight brownish gray, a little brown 9 M SS 16 15 6 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, light brownish gray, a little brown, stiff, lenses and laminations 7 of silty sand and sandy silt (SC) (possible fill) 12 M SS 16 16 8 9t CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, a little TILL 10 grayish brown, stiff, laminations of sandy silt 14 M SS 18 13 11SC) 12 — CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark brownish gray, a little brown, very stiff, laminations of 20 M SS 18 14 13 sandy silt (SC) 14 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark brownish 15 gray, a little brown, very stiff, laminations of 22 M SS 18 14 sandy silt (SC) 16 17 1s CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark grayish 19 brown and dark gray mottled, very stiff (SC) 20 95 M X SS 18 13 21 22 23 30 M SS 18 13 24 END OF BORING IT 0 WyJ } DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 4C DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING CAVE-IN DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH DRILLING E'LUID LEVEL WATER THE ATTACHED LEVEL I co 0-23' 3.25" H5A 3/23/16 2:14 24.5 23.0 24.0 None 5HEET5 FOR AN 4 0 3/24/16 8:35 24.5 23.0 23.5 3.3 EXPLANATION OF a TERMINOLOGY ON o COMPLETED: 3123/16 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: JMMRig: 1C 03/2011 O1-DHR-06C AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG *� 'TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 20 Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN (p. 1 of 1) DEPTH Surface Elevation 918.5 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL o-fR2q 3.5" Bituminous pavement FILL 1 14.5" Crushed limestone, light brown 12 M SS 12 11 2 FTLL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces of bitumliious, brownish gray, a little light brown TILL. 8 M SS 14 13 3 and dark brown 4 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown, a little brownish gray, firm to stiff, laminations 5 of sand (SC) 11 M SS 16 15 6 7 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff 15 M SS 18 15 8(SC) 9 10 14 M SS 18 14 11 12 15 M SS 18 x 18 13 — 14 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 15 stiff (CL) 14 M SS 18 15 16 17 18 19 20 14 M SS 18 15 21 22 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, very 23 stiff (SC) 17 M SS 18 x 14 24 — END OF BORING n DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED a 0-23` 3.25" HSA rz 3/24/16 10:30 24.5 23.0 24.4 None SHEETS FOR AN S EXPLANATION OF a TERMINOLOGY ON K BOR � COMPLEMD: 3/24/16 THIS LOG a DR: DS LG: JMMRig: 1C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMER ICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No: Project: DEPTH IN FEET a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 01-06773 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG Log of Boring No. 21 (p. 1 of 1 New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN Surface Elevation 921.6 GEOLOGY IELD &LABORATORY TESTS RFC N MC �W�CDEN MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPSEE LL PL w#2C FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace F1LLX 30 roots, dark brown 6 M SS 12 18 FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel and silty sand, trace roots, grayish brown and dark MIXED 11 M SS 14 14 hxawn, a little brown ALLUVIUM OR FILL CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown and brown mottled, a little brown and dark : COARSE .ALLUVIUM n, stiff, laminations of sandy silt and silty 15 M SS 14 Lsand(SC)(possible fill) SILTY SAND, a little gravel, fine grained, TILL brownish gray, a little brown and dark brown, g M SS 16 14 moist, medium dense, laminations of sandy silt CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray and brown mottled, stiff to firm, laminations of sandy silt and silty sand (SC) END OF BORING 6 I M I X I SS I 14 117 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS DATE TIME S DEPTH DEPTH DEPTH FLUID LEVEL LEVEL 0-9%' 3.25" HSA 3/25/16 11:45 11.0 9.5 11.0 None COMPi:1~TEv: 31z5116 DR: SG LG: TPM Rig: 68C 03/2011 NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 22 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 923.8 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS F ET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION APE IN- WC DEN LL PL o-#201I FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel, FILL 25 1 trace roots, dark brown, a little light brown 6 M SS 10 16 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace roots, grayish brown, a little light brown r TILL 11 M X SS 12 15 3 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown, 4 a little brown and light brown, stiff to very stiff, laminations of sand and sandy silt (SC) 5 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, brownish 16 M SS 12 18 6 gray, a little brown and dark brown, very stiff, laminations of sandy silt (CL) 17 M SS 12 19 8 9 10 22 M SS 12 16 t 1 END OF BORING A J r ;' DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO L. DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 4-9%a' 3.25" HSA 3/25/16 8:50 11.0 9.5 11.0 None SHEETS FOR AN o EXPLANATION OF a TERMINOLOGY ON U COMPL%TED: 3/25/16 THIS LOG DR: SG LG: TPM Rig: 68C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. 03/2011 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG ,AMERICAN 1 ENGINEER NG SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 24 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Ho e, MN DEIPTH Surface Elevation 918.2 GEOLOGY N MCFSA�OLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION IN.LL WC DEN PL w#20 FILL, mostly lean clay with sand, a little gravel, F[LL 1 trace roots, dark brown 5 M SS 5 23 Z FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, silty 7 M SS 12 16 3 sand and sandy lean clay, trace roots, grayish brown, a little brown and brownish gray 4 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty 5 sand, trace roots, grayish brown, a little brown 25 M SS 10 15 6 LENA CLAY WITH SAND, avel, sand and clayey sand, dark gray, a lnish '7 M SS 10 18 8 gray, darlt brown and light grawn FINE 58 g LEAN CLAY, trace roots, darlittle ALLUVIUM black, firm, lenses and laminatapric peat TILL10 jasand (CL) 5 M SS 14 21 11 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravroots,brown and gray mottled, firm,ons of silty sand (SC) END OF BORING 0 J IysJ 7 Y DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER THE ATTACHED LEVEL 3/25/16 11:05 11.0 9.5 9.8 None SHEETS FOR AN 4 EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON o COMPLETGD: 3/25/16 THIS LOG " DR: SG LG: TPM Rig: 68C O1-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN 1 E� ENC3IN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG �a�Nr._ rr TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 25 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, NIN DEPTH Surface Elevation 917.2 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS F ET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL 0420 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 1 roots, grayish brown and brownish gray 5 M SS 16 15 2 25 M SS 10 11 3 4 FILL, mostly sand with silt, a little gravel, 5 brownish gray, lenses and laminations of clayey 13 W SS 12 sand and silty sand G SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) SWAMP mAX DEPOSIT 8 M SS 8 158 8 249 9 Im ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, black, soft (OH) 10 2 M SS 18 69 11 END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NC DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL TI 0-9'/z' 3.25" HSA 3/24/16 2:00 8.5 7.0 8.2 5.8 SI 3/24/16 2:15 11.0 9.5 10.3 10.2 EX] BORIN COMP ETED: 3/24116 3/25/16 8:00 9.5 9.9 3.8 TER DR: DS LG: J1MM Ri : 1C )3/2011 TE: REFER TO E ATTACHED EETS FOR AN 'LANATION OF MINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG w� TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 26 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 917.6 GEOLOGY N MC S EC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPEE WC DEN LL PL a #20 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, silty FILL I sand and lean clay, trace roots, grayish brown, a 8 M SS 16 10 little gray and dark brown 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, silty 8 M SS 12 12 3 sand and lean clay, trace roots, brown, a little brownish gray and grayish brown 4 FILL, mixture of clayey sand and sandy lean 17 5 clay, a little gravel and silty sand, grayish brown, 4 M SS 10 6 a little dark brawn, brown and brownish gray FINE 45 LEAN CLAY, trace roots, grayish brown, a little ALLUVIUM 7 brownish gray, soft, laminations of sand (CL) OR FILL 17 g (possible fill) TILL OR [;ILL 5 M S S 10 17 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, tract roots, TILL 9 brown, a little dark brown and gray, firm (SC) 10 (possible fill) 6 M SS 14 17 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm (SC) 11 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray mottled, firm (SC) END OF BORING a 0 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TrMF. SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER THE ATTACHED LEVEL 0. 0-9�/a' 3.25" HSA 3/25/16 10:30 11.0 9.5 10.9 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON vBORING COMPLETED: 3/25/16 THIS LOG " DR: SG LG: TPM Rig: 68C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AWRICAN 1 ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. 03/2011 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 28 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 915.3 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN, WC DEN LL PL 42C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and FILL sandy lean clay, trace roots, grayish brown, a 6 M SS 16 15 little dark brown FILL, mostly Clayey sand, a little gravel, sand g M SS 14 12 and silty sand, grayish brown -T x FILL, mostly sand with silt, a little gravel and sapric peat, brownish gray, a little black 3 W SS 10 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, dart gray, stiff, laminations of sand (CL) CLAYEY SAND WITH ORGANIC FINES, a little gravel, dark brownish gray, very soft, lenses and laminations of silty sand (SC) LEND OF BORING ALLUVIUM I i I M IY1 SS 1 12 149 MIXED ALLUVIUM1 M P SS f 5 1 33 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL 0-9�/2' 3.25" HSA 3/25/16 12:44 6.0 4.5 4.8 4.3 3/25/16 12:55 11.0 9.5 9.7 9.0 BORING COMPLETED: 3/25/16 DR: SG LG: TPM Rid: 68C 03/2011 NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 ANIERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 29 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEPTH 913.4 Surface Elevation GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC WC DEN LL PL a i12a FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 22 t roots, brown and dark brown 5 M SS 14 14 FILL, mostly clayey Sand, a little gravel and silty Z sand, trace roots, grayish brown, a little brown 4 M SS 12 104 3 and light brown 4 FILL, mostly organic Clay, a little gravel and sand, black, a little light brown FINE ALLUVIUM M SS 14 31 5 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, black, a little 3 6 dark gray, soft, laminations of silty sand (CL) LEAN CLAY, trace roots, slightly organic, black, a little brownish gray, very soft, WH M SS 16 57 S laminations of sand (CL.) 9 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, pieces of wood, 10 trace roots, dark grayish brown, soft (CL) 2 M SS 16 60 11 END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER THE ATTACHED LEVEL a Q-9y,' 3.25" HSA 3/25/16 1:20 11.0 9.5 9.5 7.5 SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF 4 TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED.- 3/25/16 THI5 LOG LU a DR: SG LG: TPM Rig: 68C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 ANIERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 30 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 917.0 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLTREC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPEWC DEN LL PL 20 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces FILL 1 of wood, trace roots, dark grayish brown 7 M SS 14 14 2 FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a lithe gravel, 6 M SS 10 20 3 trace roots, grayish brown and dark brown 4 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown and TILL 5 brownish gray inottled, stiff, laminations of 10 M SS 14 14 sandy silt and silt (SC) 6 7 14 M SS 14 14 8 9 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, brownish 10 gray and grayish brown mottled, a little brown, 14 M X SS 12 18 stiff, laminations of sandy silt (CL) 11 END OF BORING a a yDEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED " 0-9`/z' 3.25" HSA 3/25/16 1:55 11.0 9.5 11.0 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF a TERMINOLOGY ON o BORING COMPLETED: 3125/16 THIS LOG a DR: SG LG: TPM Rig: 68C 01-DHR-06( 03/201 l AMERICAN L ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG Log of Boring No. 31 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS DEPTH Surface Elevation 916.0 GEOLOGY N MC SAYPEMPLE E EC WC DEN LL PL #�{ FEIN ET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 1 roots, dark brown 4 M SS 14 21 Z 3 M SS 12 22 FILL, mostly lean clay with sand, trace roots, 3 brown, a tittle dark brown 4 SILTY SAND, fine grained, gray, a little brown COARSE 5 and grayish brown, moist, loose, lenses and ALLUVIUMg MSS 12 laminations of sandy silt (SM) 6 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray and brownTILL mottled, firm, laminations of silty sand and io 6 M SS 16 13 8 sandy silt (SC) 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown and 10 brownish gray mottled, firm (SC) 8 M SS 16 15 11 END OF BORING E yDEPTH: DRILLING METHOD DATE TIME WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS SAMPLED5ESH DEPTH AVE-IN EPTH NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL 2 0-9°/1, 3„25" HSA None SHEETS FOR AN 3/25/16 2:20 11.09.5 rz EXPLANATION OF 9 TERMINOLOGY ON a oBURINU COMPLETED: 3/25/16 THIS LOG I s DR: SG LG: TPM Rig: 68C I I I01-DHR-061 03/2011 AVIERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. _ 32 (1). 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 929.2 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE �' WC DEN LL PL 4201 FILL, mostly clayey sand, slightly organic, a FILL t little gravel, dark brown and gray 16 M SS 18 17 2 FILL, mostly crushed limestone, a little silty sand, light brown and brown 12 M SS 17 17 3 FILL, a mixture of clayey sand and silty sand, a 4 little gravel, pieces of bituminous, dark brown and brown FINE 5 LEAN CLAY, dark brown to brown, stiff (CL) ALLUVIUM10 MX SS 13 23 6 7 SILT, grayish brown, moist, loose (ML) 7 M SS 15 27 8 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown and TILL t0 grayish brown mottled, iron oxide staining, firm 8 M SS 18 16 (SC) 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, a little gray, stiff (SC) 9 M SS 18 15 13 14 15 II M SS 18 15 16 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a Iittle gravel, dark gray, stiff 19 to very stiff (SC) 20 14 M SS 18 18 21 22 23 16 M SS 18 17 24 END OF BORING r 0 J DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO a DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED IL 0-23' 3.25" HSA 4/22/16 12:00 24.5 23.0 24.4 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON BORING COMPLETED, 4l22116 U THIS LOG a DR: DS LG: DB Rig: 1C 03/2011 O1-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 33 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Com lex; New Hoe MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 929.2 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET IN MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL -02C FILL, mostly clayey sand, slightly organic, trace FILL 1 roots, dark brown 15 M SS 24 24 2 FILL, mixture of silty sand and clayey sand, a little gravel, dark brown and brown TILL 10 M SS 13 16 3 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, stiff, 4 lenses and laminations of silty sand (SC) 5 12 M SS 17 15 6 7 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, brown, a little iron oxide staining, stiff to very stiff 15 M SS 5 17 8 (CL/SC) 9 to 16 M SS 16 19 11 12 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, grayish brown, a little dark brown mottling, stiff (CL) 15 M SS 17 19 13 14 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown, 15 stiff (SC) 12 M SS 17 21 16 17 18 19 20 12 M SS 18 22 21 22 SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, sti CLAYEYstiff 23 _ (aCiCL) 15 M SS 18 22 24 END OF BORING Boring offset TN DEPTII: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASIJREMENTS NC DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL T1 0-23' 3.25" HSA '- 4/22/16 11:00 24.5 23.0 24.4 None Sr EX] TER COMPLETED: 4/22/16 DR: DS LG: DB Rig: 1C 03/2011 TE: REFER TO E ATTACHED EETS FOR AN 'LANATION OF MINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DBR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe NIN Log of Boring No. 34 (p. 1 of DEPTH Surface Elevation 921.9 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL .4201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. No samples taken - Used Hydrovac Excavation 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, brown FILL 8 and dark brown 4 M SS 12 18 9 10 M SS 12 17 63 10 ORGANIC SILT, trace roots, black, stiff (OL) SWAMP 11 DEPOSIT 12 CLAYEY SAND, trace roots, dark brown, soft MIXED (SC) ALLUVIUM 3 W SS 18 30 13 14 SILTY CLAY, trace shells, gray and brown, iron FINE 15 oxide staining, soft (CL-ML) ALLUVIUM 3 W SS 16 28 16 17 2 W SS 18 32 18 19 SILT, trace roots, dark brown and gray, wet, 20 very loose (ML) 3 W SS 18 47 21 22 SANDY SILT, trace roots, gray, 'wet, very loose (ML) 4 W X SS 10 29 23 24 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray soil: to TILL 25 firm, lens of wet silty sand at 25' (SC) 4 W SS 18 18 26 27 28 0 a 29 - A d 30 6 M SS 18 18 31 END OF BORING +' DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-29'/z' 3.25" HSA 4/22/16 1:43 31.0 29.5 31.0 None SHEETS FOR AN 0 EXPLANATION OF a 0 s TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 4122/16 DR: DS LG: DB Rig: 1C THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN A ENGINEERING SUBS U R FACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. - AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 35 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Ho a City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 923.4 GEOLOGY N MC S MPLETYPE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION WC DEN LL PL 6420 No samples taken - Used Hydrovac Excavation t 2- 3- 4 5 6 7 FILL, mostly Silty sand, a little sandy lean clay FILL 10 M SS 12 16 8 and gravel, brown 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown and gray TILL T 10 mottled, a little iron oxide staining, stiff (SC) 10 101 SS 18 19 1t 12 11 M SS 18 18 13 14 15 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown, 13 M SS 18 19 stiff, laminations of silty sand (SC) 16 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff t9 (SC) 20 11 M X SS 18 19 21 22 23 15 M SS 18 16 24 END OF BORING r DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO r- a SAMPLED CASING DATE TIMEDEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTHFLUID LEVEL WATER THE ATTACHED � 0-23 11 3.25 USA 4/21/16 1:50 24.5 23 0 24.g None SHEETS FOR AN 0 4/22/16 8:25 24.5 23.0 24.4 9.9 EXPLANATION OF d TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 4/21/16 THIS LOG DR; DS LG: DB Rig: 1C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 36 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 922.7 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE ]N. WC DEN LL PL o-#201 4" Bituminous pavement FILL 1 FILL, mostly crushed [imestone, light br2n2L___,r 16 M SS 14 14 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces of bituminous, gray and brown 30 M SS 16 11 3 FILL, mostly silty sand, a tittle gravel, pieces of 4 bituminous, brown 5 FILL, mostly clayey sand, grayish brown and brown 19 M SS 18 6 7 FILL, mostly clayey sand, slightly organic, trace roots, dark brown and grayish brown 9 M SS 10 35 8 9 FILL, mostly silty sand, a little gravel, gray 10 13 M SS 13 11 12 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, black, firm (CL) FINE ALLUVIUM 8 M SS 16 27 13 — 14 15 CLAYEY SAND, grayish brown, soft, lense of MIXED 3 W SS 18 21 silty sand (SC) ALLUVIUM 16 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, grayish brown, a little brown, TILL 19 firm (SC) 20 — 8 M X SS 16 18 21 22 23 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm (SC) 6 M SS 13 17 24 END OF BORING 1 r a. y DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED a 0-23' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL 4/21/16 10:35 16.0 14.5 15.5 13.0 SHEETS FOR AN Q 4/21/16 10:46 16.0 14.5 14.5 9.2 EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON CBORING OMPLETED: 4/21116 4/21/16 11:00 26.0 24.5 24.0 19.9 01 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: DB Rig: 1C 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 37 (p. I of 1) Project: _New Hope Ci Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPNTH Surface Elevation 923.8 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION WC DEN LL PL 1,420 6" Concrete with rebar FILL SCl 1 FILL, mostly sand with silt and gravel, brown 28 M SS 13 2- 3 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, a little TILL 13 M SS 14 13 iron oxide staining, stiff (SC) 4 5 14 M SS 18 19 6 7 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, stiff 14 M SS 17 19 8(SC) 9- to 11 M SS 18 20 11 12 11 M SS 18 18 13 14 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown, 15 a little dark brown mottling, very stiff (SC) 16 M SS 18 17 16 17 18 19 20 — 20 M SS 18 14 22 CLAYEY SAND, a Tittle gravel, brown, very ,.. 23 _..err in� st lc.nC) rx"I" 20 M SS 18 13 24- END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD 0-23' 3.25" HSA DR: DS LG: DB ft:.1C 03/2011 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 3 DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH DEPTH FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL PHE ATI'ACHED 4/22/16 9:40 24.5 23.0 24.5 None SIMETS FOR AN LXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 SUBS URF ACE BORING LOG Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN Log of Boring No. 38 (p. 1 of 1) DEPTH Surface Elevation 923.0 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL "-#201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. 5" Bituminous pavement FILL 19 M SS 15 1 FILL, mostly crushed limestone, light brown__f 2 FILL, mostly sand with silt and gravel, brown 16 M SS 7 3 4 5 10 M SS 7 6 7 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, gray, brown and brown 25 M SS 18 12 8dark 9 FILL, mixture of clayey sand and lean clay, trace 10roots, grayish brown, black and gray 13 M SS 18 12 42 11 LEAN CLAY, trace roots, black, a little gray, FINE 12 soft (CL) ALLUVIUM 4 M SS 17 23 13 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, light gray, soft TILL (SC) 19 14 15 10 M SS 18 16 16 17 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, a little brown mottled, stiff (SC) 19 20 13 T SS 18 13 21 22 CLAYEY SAND, a Tittle gravel, dark gray, stiff 23 (SC) 9 M SS 18 15 24 END OF BORING 0 3 S 9 J ysJ T 4 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED 0-23 3.25�� HSA DATE TIME � STHD CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN FLDU�ID LEVEL LLING ATER LEVEL 4/21/16 12:00 24.5 23.0 24.5 None SHEETS FOR AN s 4/21/16 12:20 24.5 23.0 24.2 20.5 EXPLANATION OF CL rz BORING TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 4/21/16 i DR: DS LG: DB Rig: 1C THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DBR-060 Report of Geotechnical Exploration and Review City Hall Building, New Hope, Minnesota June 22, 2016 Report No. 01-06773 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Appendix B. Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Appendix B Geotcchnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Report No. 01-06773 B.1 REFERENCE This appendix provides information to help you manage your risks relating to subsurface problems which are caused by construction delays, cost overruns, claims, and disputes. This information was developed and provided by ASFE', of which, we are a member firm. B.2 RISK MANAGEMENT INFORMATION B.2.1 Geotechnical Services are Performed for Specific Purposes, Persons, and Projects Gcotechnical engineers structure their services to rtteet the specific needs of their clients, A geotechnical engineering study conducted for a civil engineer may not fulfill the needs of a construction contractor or even another civil engineer, Because each geotechnical engineering study is unique, each geotechnical engineering report is unique, prepared solely for the client. No one except you should rely on your geotechnical engineering report without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer who prepared it. And no one, not even you, should apply the report for any purpose or project except the one originally contemplated. B.2,2 Read the Full Report Serious problems have occurred because those relying oft a geotechnical engineering report did not read it all. Do not rely on an executive summary. Do not read selected elements only. B.2,3 A Ceoteehnical Engineering Report is Based on A Unique Set of Project -Specific Factors Gcotechnical engineers consider a number of unique, project -specific factors wheri establishing the scope of a study. Typically factors include: the client's goals, objectives, and risk management preferences; the general nature of the structure involved, its size, and configuration; the- location of the structure on the site; and other planned or existing site improvements, such as access roads, parking lots, and underground utilities. Unless the geotechnical engineer who conducted the study specifically indicates otherwise, do not rely oil a geotcehnical engineering report that was: 0 not prepared for you, • not prepared for your project, 6 not prepared for the specific site explored, or • completed before important project changes were made. Typical changes that can erode the reliability of an existing geotechnical engineering report include those that: affect: the function of the proposed structure, as when it's changed from a parking garage to an office building, or from a light industrial plant to a rcfi igerated warehouse, elevation, configuration, location, orientation, or weight of the proposed structure, 4 composition of the design team, or project ownership. As a general rule, always inform your geotechnical engincer of project changes, even minor ones, and request an assessment of their impact. Geoteclutical engineers cannot accept responsibility or liability for problems that occur because their reports do not consider developments of which they were not informed, B.2.4 Subsurface Conditions Can Change A geotechnical engineering report is based on conditions that existed at the time the study was performed. Do not rely on a geotechnical engineering report whose adequacy may have been affected by: the passage of time; by Winn -made events, such as construction on or adjacent to the site; or by natural events, such as floods, earthqua]<es, or groundwater fluctuations, Always contact the geotechnical engineer before applying the report to determine If it is still reliable. A minor amount of additional testing or analys]s could prevent major problems. I 115PP, 8811 COIeSVilIC Rond/SLIk G106, Silver Spring, MD 20910 Telephone: 301/565-2733: im:wjiA_Q.ort Appendix B — Page I oft AMLAICAN ENGINI',hRING TESTING, INC: Appendix B Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Report No. 01-06773 B.2.5 Most Geotechnical Findings Are Professional Opinions Site exploration identified subsurface conditions only at those points where subsurface tests are conducted or samples are taken. Geotechnical engineers review field and laboratory data and then apply their professional judgment to render an opinion about subsurface conditions throughout the site. Actual subsurface conditions may differ, sometimes significantly, from those indicated in your report. Retaining the geotechnical engineer who developed your report to provide construction observation is the most effective method of managing the risks associated with unanticipated conditions. B.2.6 A Report's Recommendations Are Not Final Do not over rely on the construction recommendations included in your report. Those recommendations are not final, because geotechnical engineers develop them principally from judgment and opinion. Geotechnical engineers can finalize their recommendations only by observing actual subsurface conditions revealed during construction. The geotechnical engineer who developed your report cannot assume responsibility or liability for the report's recommendations if that engineer does not perform construction observation. B.2.7 A Geotechnical Engineering Report Is Subject to Misinterpretation Other design team members' misinterpretation of geotechnical engineering reports has resulted in costly problems. Lower that risk by having your geotechnical engineer confer with appropriate members of the design team after submitting the report. Also retain your geotechnical engineer to review pertinent elements of the ,design team's plans and specifications. Contractors can also misinterpret a geotechnical engineering report. Reduce that risk by having your geotechnical engineer participate in prebid and preconstruction conferences, and by providing construction observation. B.2.8 Do Not Redraw the Engineer's Logs Geotechnical engineers prepare final boring and testing logs based upon their interpretation of field logs and laboratory data. To prevent errors or omissions, the logs included in a geotechnical engineering report should never be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings. Only photographic or electronic reproduction is acceptable, but recognizes that separating logs from the report can elevate risk. B.2.9 Give Contractors a Complete Report and Guidance Some owners and design professionals mistakenly believe they can make contractors liable for unanticipated subsurface conditions by limiting what they provide for bid preparation. To help prevent costly problems, give contractors the complete geotechnical engineering report, but preface it with a clearly written letter of transmittal. In the letter, advise contractors that the report was not prepared for purposes of bid development and that the report's accuracy is limited; encourage them to confer with the geotechnical engineer who prepared the report (a modest fee may be required) and/or to conduct additional study to obtain the specific types of information they need or prefer. A prebid conference can also be valuable. Be sure contractors have sufficient time to perform additional study. Only then might you be in a position to give contractors the best information available to you, while requiring them to at least share some of the financial responsibilities stemming from unanticipated conditions. B.2.10 Read Responsibility Provisions Closely Some clients, design professionals, and contractors do not recognize that geotechnical engineering is far less exact than other engineering disciplines. This lack of understanding has created unrealistic expectations that have led to disappointments, claims, and disputes. To help reduce the risk of such outcomes, geotechnical engineers commonly include a variety of explanatory provisions in their report. Sometimes labeled "limitations" many of these provisions indicate where geotechnical engineers' responsibilities begin and end, to help others recognize their own responsibilities and risks. Read these provisions closely. Ask questions. Your geotechnical engineer should respond fully and frankly. B.2.11 Geoenviron mental Concerns Are Not Covered The equipment, techniques, and personnel used to perform a geoenvironmental study differ significantly from those used to perform a geotechnical study. For that reason, a geotechnical engineering report does not usually relate any geoenvirommental findings, conclusions, or recommendations; e.g., about the likelihood of encountering underground storage tanks or regulated contaminants. Unanticipated environmental problems have led to numerous project failures. If you have not yet obtained your own geoenvironmental information, ask your geotechnical consultant for risk management guidance. Do not rely on an environmental report prepared for someone else. Appendix B — Page 2 of 2 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC ill`el'.f ION' I'a- 1'11l he :055a_7ANT3 • czc�r;.�uv�c� • n_�_ti�ies www,amengtost.com REPORT OF GEOTECHNICAL EXPLORATION Swimming pool Construction Municipal Complex New Hope, Minnesota Date: November 13, 2018 Prepared for: City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 AET Report No. 01-20159 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. November 13, 2018 City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Attn: Mr. Kirk McDonald, City Manager RE: Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction Municipal Complex New Hope, Minnesota AET Report No. 01-20159 Dear Mr. McDonald: CONSULTANTS • ENVIRONMENTAL • GEOTECHNICAL • MATERIALS • FORENSICS American Engineering Testing, Inc. (AET) is pleased to present the results of our subsurface exploration program for the swimming pools construction project located at the municipal complex in New Hope, Minnesota. Our services were performed according to our proposal to you dated August 9, 2018. We are submitting a digital copy of the report to you. Additional copies are being sent as noted below. Please contact me if you have questions about the report. I can also be contacted fox arranging construction observation and testing services. Sincerely, American Engineering Testing, Inc. Loren W. Braun, PE Principal Engineer Phone: (651) 789-4689 lbraun amen test.coni c. Jim Maland Stantec Jim.Maland9.stantec.com 550 Cleveland Avenue North I St. Paul, MN 55114 Phone 651-659-9001 1 Toll Free 600-972-6364 Fax 651-659-1379 1 www.amengtest.com I AA/EEO 4 # This document sh�sll not be reproduced, except in full, without written approval from American Engineering testing, Inc, too' Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, Municipal Complex, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. SI.GNATURE PAGE Prepared for: City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Attn: Mr. Kirk McDonald Authored by: Loren W. Braun, PE Principal Engineer I hereby certify that this plan, specification, or report was prepared by me or under my direct supervision and that I am a duly Licensed Professional Engineer under Minnesota Statute Section 326.02 to 326.15 Name: Loren W. Braun Date: November 13, 2018 License # 014969 Copyright 2018 American Engineering Testing, Inc. All Rights Reserved Prepared by: American Engineering Testing, Inc. 550 Cleveland Avenue North St. Paul, Minnesota 55114 651.659.9001/www.amengtest.com Reviewed by: 01/L Jay P. Brekke, PE Senior Engineer Unauthorized use or copying of this document is strictly prohibited by anyone other than the client for the specific project. Page ii Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, Municipal Complex, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 INTRODUCTION..................................................................................................................... 1 2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES............................................................................................................ 1 3.0 PROJECT INFORMATION..................................................................................................... 2 3.1 Proposed Construction.. .............................. I ................................ I ........................................ - 2 3.2 Site Grading........................................................................................................................... 3 3.3 Bathhouse, Pool/Mechanical Buildings and Theater Structure ............................................. 3 3.4 Pavement Design................................................................................................................... 3 3.5 Updated Information.............................................................................................................. 3 3.6 Definitions............................................................................................................................. 4 4.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND TESTING................................................................ 4 4.1 Field Exploration Program.,..................................................................:................................ 4 4.2 Laboratory Testing................................................................................................................ 4 5.0 SITE CONDITIONS................................................................................................................. 5 5.1 Surface Observations ............................ .:......................... ...................... ................................ 5 5.2 Soils....................................................................................................................................... 5 5.3 Groundwater.......................................................................................................................... 5 6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS.......................................................................................................... 6 6.1 Design and Construction Considerations...........................................,.................................. 6 6.2 Building Pads, Shallow Pool and Theater Grading............................................................... 6 6.2.1 Demolition....................................................................................................................... 6 6.2.2 Soil Correction Areas,..................................................................................................... 6 6.2.3 Fill Material..................................................................................................................... 7 6.2.4 Fill Placement and Compaction...................................................................................... 8 6.2.5 Shrinkage........................................................................................................................ 8 6,2.6 Weather Considerations.................................................................................................. 8 6.3 Foundation Design -Spread Footings..................................................................................... 9 6.3.1 Minimum Footing Depths and Dimensions.................................................................... 9 6.3.2 Bearing Capacity............................................................................................................. 9 6.3.3 Settlement........................................................................................................................ 9 6.3.4 Sliding Resistance......................................................................................................... 10 6.4 Floor Slab Design................................................................................................................ 10 6.5 Below Grade Walls for Pools and Pool Mechanical Building ............................................ 10 6.5.1 Drainage........................................................................................................................10 6.5.2 Wall Backfill................................................................................................................. 10 6.5.3 Lateral Pressures........................................................................................................... 11 6.6 Swimming Pools and Pool Decks........................................................................................ 11 6.7 Retaining Wall Parameters................................................................................................. , 12 Page iii Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, Municipal Complex, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AETReport No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. 6.8 Deep Foundation Support Structures................................................................................... 13 6.8.1 Helical Piers.................................................................................................................. 13 6.9 Bituminous Pavements........................................................................................................ 14 6.9.1 Surcharging................................................................................................. .......... 14 6.9.2 Subgrade Preparation.................................................................................................... 14 6.9.3 Backfill and Fill Material.............................................................................................. 14 6.9.4 Test Rolling................................................................................................................... 15 6.9.5 Separation Fabric........................................................................................................... 15 6.9.6 Section Thicknesses and Placement.............................................................................. 15 6.9.7 Pavement Materials....................................................................................................... 16 6.10 Pavement Drainage............................................................................................................ 16 6.11 Utilities.............................................................................................................................. 17 6.11.1 Surcharge Area............................................................................................................ 17 6.11.2 Excavation.................................................................................................................... 17 6.11.3 Dewatering................................................................................................................... 17 6.11.4 Bedding.......................................................................................................................17 6.11.5 Foundation Fill............................................................................................................ 18 6.11.6 Selection, Placement and Compaction of Backfill...................................................... 18 6.12 Infiltration.......................................................................................................................... 18 7.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS.............................................................................. 19 7.1 Potential Difficulties............................................................................................................ 19 7.1.1 Water in Excavations.................................................................................................... 19 7.1.2 Disturbance of Soils......................................................................................................19 7.1.3 Cobbles and Boulders................................................................................................... 19 7.2 Observation and Testing...................................................................................................... 19 8.0 LIMITATIONS....................................................................................................................... 20 APPENDIX A — Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Boring Log Notes Unified Soil Classification System Figure A-1— Soil Boring Locations Subsurface Boring Logs APPENDIX B — Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Page iii This Page Left Blank Intentionally Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. 1.0 INTRODUCTION The city of New Hope is proposing to construct swimming pools and other improvements at their municipal complex located at in New Hope, Minnesota. The project location is shown in Figure 1. Figure 1: Project Location The city of New Hope has authorized American Engineering Testing, Inc. (AFT) to conduct a subsurface exploration program at the site, complete soil laboratory testing, and perform a geotechnical engineering analysis to assist with planning and design for the project. This report presents the results of our exploration and testing services and provides our engineering recommendations based on this data. 2.0 SCOPE OF SERVICES AET's services were performed in accordance with our proposal to the city dated August 9, 2018, Page 1 of 20 This Page Lett Blank Intentionally Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No, 01-20159 TESTING, INC. which they authorized on August 21, 2018. Our scope of services was intended to characterize the site subsurface conditions and provide geotechnical recommendations for design and construction of the project. The authorized scope consists of the following: ■ Drilling 13 standard penetration test borings to depths of about 30 feet; • Performing soil laboratory testing; and ■ Preparing a geotechnical engineering report based on the soil borings and laboratory testing. These services are intended for geotechnical purposes. The scope is not intended to explore for the presence or extent of environmental contamination. 3.0 PROJECT INFORMATION 3.1 Proposed Construction The proposed construction will include several features. An 8-lane 50-meter pool will be constructed. The pool will be about 3 1/2 feet in the shallow (west) end and slope down to about 5 feet deep 60 feet from the edge and then slope down at an approximately 3 to 1 slope to a depth of about 12 1/2feet for the last 40 feet of the pool. A shallow pool will be constructed to the southwest of the lap pool, closer to the existing city hall location. The pool will include a zero -edge entry, circular area and waterslide features. An approximately 150-foot by 40-foot slab on grade bathhouse will be constructed in the pool area. A new parking lot will also be constructed and underground infiltration/storage will also be utilized. A heated pool mechanical building that will likely incorporate a deeper recessed level pump room and below grade surge tanks will be constructed. The building is also envisioned to support a stair tower for the nearby proposed waterslides. A two-tier high retaining wall with approximately total height of 7 feet is proposed around the cemetery. Also, an outdoor theater structure is planned at a location west of the proposed new parking lot Page 2 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No, 01-20159 TESTING, INC. and the proposed bath house in and around the existing hockey rink. 3.2 Site Grading Based on the existing surface elevations of the borings, we anticipate that required cut and fill depths will typically be less than 5 feet to obtain the pool deck elevation and finished floor elevations of the proposed structures. Up to about 9 feet of will be required to remove a mound area in the proposed parking lot. 3.3 Bathhouse, Pool/Mechanical Buildings and Theater Structure We assume the proposed structures will utilize masonry block or precast panel perimeter walls above grade that are supported on grade beams for the bathhouse and spread footing for the other structures. The bathhouse will have a structural floor slab. We assume that bearing wall loads will range from 3 to 6 kips per linear foot and column loads if any, will range from 60 to 100 kips per column. We assume that the floor loading will not exceed 100 pounds per square foot. Our foundation design assumptions include a minimum factor of safety of 3 with respect to the ultimate bearing capacity of the soils. We have assumed the structure will be able to tolerate total settlements up to 1 inch, and differential settlements over a 30-foot distance up to 1/2 inch. 3.4 Pavement Design We assume that the pavement areas will have a bituminous section. We assume that the pavement areas will be subject primarily to automobiles and light passenger trucks. Consequently, the pavements will deteriorate more due to environmental conditions than from the effect of wheel loads on the bituminous surface. We have based our light -duty pavement thickness design on five equivalent 18,000-pound single axle loads (ESALs) per day. 3.5 Updated Information The above stated information represents our understanding of the proposed construction. This information is an integral part of our engineering analysis. It is important that we be contacted if there are changes fiom that described so that we can evaluate whether modifications to our recommendations are appropriate. Page 3 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swirmning Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No, 01-20159 TESTING, INC. 3.6 Definitions Definitions used in this report are defined below: MnDOT. Minnesota Department of Transportation. MnDOT Specification: MnDOT Standard Specifications for Construction, 2018. ASTM. ASTM International. Subgrade Elevation: The grade located at the interface between the subgrade soils and the bottom of the slab or pavement base material. Structural Fill: Fill material suitable for support of foundations, slabs and pavements. Material is placed as controlled compacted fill. Possible Fill: Soil that has the appearance of being natural based on composition but due to the small sample of soil obtained by our boring, we were not able to determine if it was naturally - deposited or fill. Test Roll: Testing of the pavement subgrade by rolling over it with heavy rubber -tired construction equipment such as a loaded dump truck under the observation of the geotechnical engineer. 4.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION AND TESTING 4.1 Field Exploration Program The subsurface exploration program conducted for the project consisted of 13 standard penetration test borings. The number and locations of the soil borings were selected by Stantec. The logs of the borings and details of the methods used appear in Appendix A. The logs contain information concerning soil layering, soil classification, geologic description, and moisture condition. Relative density or consistency is also noted for the natural soils, based on the standard penetration resistance (N-value). The boring locations are shown on Figure A-1 in Appendix A. The borings were located by using GPS coordinates obtained from a drawing provided by Stantec. The accuracy of the GPS locations is within about 3 feet. Surface elevations were also obtained by using GPS. 4.2 Laboratory Testing The laboratory test program included moisture content tests on cohesive soils. The test results appear in Appendix A on the boring logs adjacent to the samples upon which they were performed. Page 4 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. 5.0 SITE CONDITIONS 5.1 Surface Observations The proposed development is currently covered by the existing city hall structure, bituminous pavement, lawn area and concrete flatwork. 5.2 Soils The recently completed soil borings were sequentially numbered 39 through 51, continuing the numbering from the previous soil borings completed for the proposed city hall construction. 11 of the previous borings were also included in our analysis, Numbers 5, 6, 7, 10, 11, 13, 14, 15, 18, 19, and 20. The remainder of the first 38 borings are also provided in the appendix for reference material. Fill was encountered in each of the borings extending to depths varying from 2 to 7 feet and consisted mostly of silty sand, clayey sand and lesser amounts of sandy lean clay. Organic deposits were encountered beneath the fill in 17 of the 24 borings with thicknesses varying from about 2 1/2 to 15 1/2 feet. The organic deposits consisted of organic clays and peat. The underlying soils consisted mostly of clayey sand and sandy lean clay till. A few the borings, a layer of fine alluvial lean clay was sandwiched between the organic deposits/fill or the till soils. gnme of the lavers indicated on the boring logs are designated as "Possible Fill". This desiiznation is used because although the soil appeared to be natural in that it is consistent in composition, we were unable to determine the aPnloair. oriaa� of this soil from the Small sample of Soil obtained by - a-�-�a-- r our boring. 5.3 Groundwater During both the previous and current exploration, highly variable groundwater elevations were observed in some of the borings and no observed groundwater in the other borings. To better determine groundwater levels at the site, temporary piezometers were installed in Borings 42, 44 and 50. Longer -term water levels were observed in the piezometers at depths of 4.6 to 7.0 feet. This corresponded to elevations varying from 908.7 to 910.2 Groundwater levels fluctuate due to varying seasonal and annual rainfall and snow melt amounts Page 5 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. and infiltration. We estimate that annual high ground water elevation will be approximately 911 %. 6.0 RECOMMENDATIONS 6.1 Design and Construction Considerations Significant depths of uncontrolled fill and organic deposits are present in portions of the site. Due to the depth of the unsuitable materials and required oversizing, the design team determined that excavating the unsuitable soils and replacing them with structural fill would not be a viable option. Consequently, we are basing our design on utilizing helical piers for the lap pool and bathhouse. Based on the borings, excavation of fill and organic deposits should be feasible for the proposed shallow water pool and other structures. 6.2 Building Pads, Shallow Pool and Theater Grading 6.2.1 Demolition We recommend removing all existing foundations, slabs, utilities, pavements, vegetation, topsoil and any other deleterious materials. Excavations created by the removal should be bacicfilled with properly compacted structural backfill as defined in Section 6.2.3. Fill placed in areas that will be structurally supported by deep foundations will require lesser_ amounts of compaction effort. Removal for earth supported improvements should be completed beyond the edge of the proposed improvement a minimum distance of 5 feet. In proposed pavement areas, we recommend removing all utilities and conduits larger than 6 inches in diameter to a minimum depth of 3 feet below proposed pavement subgrade elevation. Below a depth of 3 feet, abandoned utilities may be left in place if they do not conflict with future utilities placement and are filled with grout to prevent future collapse. Foundations and other improvements may also be left in place below a depth of 3 feet. 6.2.2 Soil Correction Areas Soil correction should be feasible for the proposed shallow pool, theater and mechanical building. To prepare the pool and building areas for foundation and slab support, we recommend complete excavation of the fill, topsoil, organic deposits and any soft soils, thereby exposing the underlying competent soils. This would result in excavation depths at the boring locations as shown in Table 1. Page 6 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. Table 1: Recommended Minimum Excavation Depths Improvement Boring Location Surface Elevation Minimum Excavation Depth, feet Approximate Minimum Excavation Elevation Shallow Pool 13 919.3 5 912 Shallow Pool 14 916.5 9 907'/2 Shallow Pool 15 915.8 6'/2 909 Shallow Pool 18 921.5 2 919'/2 Shallow Pool 19 917.1 5 912 Shallow Pool 20 918.5 2 916'/2 Theater 40 917.4 7'/2 910 Theater 41 917.2 2 915 Mechanical Building 51 917.2 2 915 The depths/elevations indicated in Table 1 are based on the soil conditions at the specific boring locations. Since the subsurface conditions vary between the boring locations, we recommend that a geotechnical engineer observe and confirm the competency of the exposed soils in the entire excavation bottom prior to placement of structural fill or the proposed improvement. Where the excavations extend below foundation grade, the excavation bottom and resultant structural fill system must be oversized laterally beyond the planned outside edges of the r___ -1-1: .. �.. ..1 .. «I- +L .. 1r.+r. _1 1... 4- __+_A 1.� A-+ T_ V1 AY +4 111- WunUaLlUns LV plopelly JuppV1L Ui1, laLGlal lUaUJ k.,A%,1LL.0 uy L11aL luunuaLivii. 11110 excavation/engineered fill lateral extension should at least be equal to the vertical depth of fill needed to attain found" grade at MUD lucatioll �l.e., 1. laWral uVU16MU). 1JUWMU1111b May uc required below approximately elevation 910. 6.2.3 Fill Material Structural fill should consist of the nonorganic excavated materials that can be properly placed and compacted. Nonorganic material should consist of soil containing less than 2 percent organic material by weight. The fill should be free of deleterious material such as metal scraps or wood. We recommend that additional required imported material consists of a coarse -grained mineral soil with less than 20 percent of the particles by weight passing a 4200 sieve. Frozen soil should not be used as fill and fill soil should not be placed on frozen soils. Page 7 of 20 I ' Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 6.2.4 Fill Placement and Compaction AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Recommendations for minimum compaction levels, moisture content ranges and loose fill lift thicknesses are provided in Table 2. Table 2: Compaction Recommendations Relative Compaction: ASTM Moisture Content Loose Lift Location D 698: standard i Variance from Optimum Thickness, Proctor (percentage points) InchesM Below structures and exterior 95 Coarse Grained +/- 3(2) 12 flatwork areas Fine Grained -1 to +3 8 Below landscaped areas 90 +/- 4 12 (1) Reduce l ft thickness by approximately one half if manual equipment is used for compaction (2) Coarse -grained soils should consist of sands with symbols of SP, SP-SM and SMor similar gravels If there are areas where fill is placed on slopes, we recommend benching the sloped surface (benches cut parallel to the slope contour) prior to placing the fill. Benching is recommended where slopes are steeper than 4:1 (H: V). 6.2.5 Shrinkage For the onsite soils, we estimate volumetric shrinkage from in -place material to compacted structural fill of 15 to 25 percent for the clay soils, 15 to 20 percent for the clayey sand and 10 to 12 percent for the silty sand soils. The lower values applys to soils with higher N-values and the higher values to soils with lower N-values. 6.2.6 Weather Considerations The silty sands on the site are highly moisture sensitive and the clayey sand and lean clay soils are moderately moisture sensitive. The soils will exhibit high strength when they are in a dry condition but will lose significant strength when they become wet. If possible, the site preparation should be completed during the summer months when the opportunity for drying the soil is better. The ground surface should be properly sloped during site grading and construction to maximize the potential for surface runoff away from the construction area. Vehicle traffic should be avoided on exposed wet soils. Page 8 of 20 Report of Geotechbical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. To limit the potential for disturbance/softening of the subgrades at the bottoms of the excavations we recommend (1) performing the excavations with a backhoe fitted with a smooth -ended bucket, (2) not allowing construction equipment to operate directly over the subgrades if they are in a wet condition, and (3) placing the first lift of backfill materials over the excavation bottom by back - casting with the backhoe or with a wide tracked dozer. Any soils that are disturbed or weakened below the building area should also be removed. Use of frozen material should be avoided since proper compaction of it is not possible. For work during freezing weather, areas to be filled should be stripped of frozen soil, snow and ice prior to new fill placement. In addition, structural fill should not be allowed to freeze during or after placement. Earthwork operations should be completed in small areas so that final grade can quickly be attained instead of large areas where more frost ripping would be required. 6.3 Foundation Design -Spread Footings 6.3.1 Minimum Footing Depths and Dimensions The pool mechanical building and theater can be supported on conventional spread foundations. We recommend perimeter foundations bear at least 42 inches below exterior grade. We recommend foundations for unheated areas such as slide foundations and the theater, bear at least 60 inches below exterior grade. We recommend a minimum footing width of 16 inches for continuous footings, and 24 inches for isolated column footings. 6.3.2 Bearing Capacity Based on the conditions encountered, it is our opinion the building foundations can be designed based on a maximum net allowable soil bearing pressure of 3,000 pounds per square foot (psf). It is our judgment this design pressure will have a factor of safety of at least 3 against ultimate bearing capacity failure. 6.3.3 Settlement We estimate that total settlements under this loading should not exceed 1 inch. We also estimate that differential settlements of conditions depicted by the borings should not exceed '/2 inch between footings. Page 9 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swinvning Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 6.3.4 Sliding Resistance AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. For the soils bearing on clayey sand, silty sand or sand subgrade, we recommend a coefficient of sliding friction of 0.40. A factor of safety of 1.5 should be used in the design calculations. 6.4 Floor Slab Design For concrete slab design, we estimate the silty sand or clayey sand subgrade soils below the slab should provide a modulus of subgrade reaction (k-value) of at least 150 pounds per square inch per inch of deflection (pci). If a vapor membrane is required because of moisture sensitive floor coverings such as vinyl tile or carpeting, it should meet the requirements of ASTM International Standard Specification E 1745, Type A. We recommend a minimum thickness of 10 mils and that the membrane be taped at the seams, joints, and penetrations. Typically, flooring manufacturer warranty requires that the vapor membrane be placed directly below the concrete slab rather than beneath the base material. We recommend placing a minimum of 6 inches of granular material such as aggregate base or crusher fines, fines created by crushing of limestone rock for aggregate, below the floor slab. 6.5 Below Grade Walls for Pools and Pool Mechanical Building 6.5.1 Drainage Below grade walls should include a perimeter backfill drainage system placed on the exterior side of the wall. The drainage system should consist of perforated or slotted PVC drainage pipe located at the bottom of the backfill trench; lower than the interior floor grade. The drainpipe should be surrounded by properly graded filter rock. A suitable filter fabric should then envelope the filter rock. The drainpipe should be connected to a suitable means of disposable that drains the water away from the structure. The pools should be designed for to resist buoyancy uplift based on a high water level of 912. 6.5.2 Wall Backfill We recommend damp proofing or waterproofing the perimeter below grade walls of the building. lThe backfill material will exert lateral loadings. To reduce this loading, we recommend using flee Page 10 of 20 W Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swira ping Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No, 01-20159 TESTING, INC, draining sand for backfill. The zone of sand backfill should extend outward from the wall at least 2 feet and then upward and outward from the wall at a 30 degree or greater angle from vertical. The sand should have no more than 5 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve and no more than 40 percent of the particles by weight passing a #40 sieve. The sand should be placed in maximum 6-inch loose lifts and be compacted with manual compaction equipment to the specified density provided above. The ground surface should be capped to minimize surface water infiltration adjacent to the wall. We recommend a minimum 2 percent slope away from the building be maintained. If backfill materials are not properly compacted, settlement may occur, allowing water to pond adjacent to the building. 6.5.3 Lateral Pressures Lateral earth pressures on below grade walls will vary, depending on the backfill soil classification, backfill compaction and slope of the backfill surface. Static or dynamic surcharge loads near the wall will also increase lateral wall pressure. Recommendations for lateral earth pressure values (given in the equivalent fluid force values) for a drained soil compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of standard Proctor density and a level ground surface are provided in Table 3. Values for equivalent passive fluid force and coefficient of sliding friction are also provided. Table 3: Eauivalent Fluid Forces and Coefficient of Sliding Friction Backf ll/ Wet Unit Coefficient of Equivalent Equivalent Equivalent Bearing Weight Sliding Fluid Force, Fluid Force, Fluid Force, Soil (pef) Friction Active At -Rest Passive (psf/ft) (PsPTO (Psfift) Sand 120 0.4 35 50 450 Silty Sand 130 0.4 40 65 400 Clayey Sand 128 0.4 45 65 370 Since some mobilization is required to develop the full passive fluid pressure, we recommend reducing the passive pressure by one half if used in combination with the coefficient of sliding friction. 6.6 Swimming Pools and Pool Decks Swimming pools and pool decks are more sensitive to vertical movement than sidewalks and other Page 11 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. flatwork. The site soil's vary from medium to very highly frost susceptible. In addition, a relatively high ground water level is present. Consequently, the site is highly susceptible to frost movement. We recommend excavating the soil to a minimum depth of 3 feet below the pool deck and replacing with non-fiost susceptible (NFS) soils. NFS soils consist of sands or gravels with less than 7 percent of the particles by weight passing a number 200 sieve. Excavation to this depth will significantly reduce but not eliminate the potential for frost heave. Complete elimination of frost heave potential would likely require a removal depth of 5 feet. Drain tile should be provided at the base of the NFS soil to avoid ponding of water. Consideration should be given to removing frost susceptible soils in other flatwork areas also. 6.7 Retaining Wall Parameters A two-tier retaining wall is proposed around the cemetery. The wall height will be approximately 7 feet. The retaining wall should be founded on competent naturally deposited soils or on structural fill. It may be feasible to support the retaining wall within the existing fill soils. The excavation for the retaining wall should be observed by a geotechnical engineer to verify the competence of the existing soils. If unsuitable soils are encountered, some additional subexcavation may be required and replacement with competent structural fill. Global stability of the wall should be provided by the wall designer. Recommendations for design parameters and assumed soils are provided in Table 4. Table 4: Recommended .oil Parameter. fnr Retninin❑ Wall.c Soil Location Phi Angle (Degrees) Moist Unit Weight c Retained Soil SM/SC 28 128 Reinforced Soil SP/SP-SM 32 125 Foundation Soil SM/SC) 28 128 Draina e Soil SP 32 125 The parameters assume the grade at the top of the wall is level and that no vehicle or other loading is present on top of the wall. Revised parameters would be required if this is not the case. The drainage soil should be capped with a minimum of 1 foot of clay soil to reduce infiltration into the drainage layer. Compaction within 2 feet of the wall should be completed with manual equipment. Page 12 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 6.8 Deep Foundation Support Structures AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Due to the depth of organic and other soft soils, a deep foundation system will be required for the lap pool and the bathhouse. Consequently, the pool and pool deck will be supported by grade beams and helical piers. The bathhouse will also be supported by helical piers and will require a structural floor slab. 6.8.1 Helical Piers Helical piers consist of hollow tubes or solid square steel shafts, typically 1 % to 3 I/2 inches in diameter, to which one or a series of steel plates (helixes) are attached. Because the shafts are structurally slender, helical piers derive most of their capacity through plate bearing. Once the number, size and spacing of the plates has been determined based on loading requirements, the piers are screwed into the ground until a specified torque and minimum depth are met. The torque is correlated to pile capacity based on calibrations conducted prior to the start of the project. Several options are available for the type of the helical piers to be used. For this project, we estimated ultimate and working capacities for 2.875-inch diameter hollow round shafts. An exception is at Boring 16, where a 3.5-inch diameter hollow round shaft will likely be required to resist buckling. Stantee indicated a service capacity of 30 kips (60 kips ultimate) is desired for design of the lap pool. Based on experience on the site, this capacity should be achievable, although all the borings were not extended deep enough to confirm this. The soil profile in the pool area was highly variable. We estimate the desired capacity will be reached between about 30 and 40 feet. A lesser capacity will be required for the bathhouse. As a result, smaller/less helixes will be required and/or less embedment depth. The installer should review the boring logs and verify the pier capacities. The geotechnical engineer should observe load testing and pier installation. The installation of the helical piers by the torque method is a "proof test". At the start of the helical pile installation, we recommend at least one test pile be installed and subjected to static load tests in accordance with ASTM: D1143, Standard Test Methods for Deep Foundations Under Static Axial Compressive Load, to verify the depth and capacity estimates, and to which the remaining production piles should be installed. The use of the "quick" static load test method (ASTM: D 1143) will be acceptable. The piles should be loaded to at least 200 percent of the design working Page 13 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. load capacity. The installation and load testing of the test pile should be performed in the presence of a geotechnical engineer. The soils being penetrated are likely at least moderately corrosive. The helical pier elements, including the central steel shaft, helix bearing plates, bolts and couplings should be hot dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM: Al53, Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Hardware after fabrication. The installer should demonstrate that the corrosion protection provides for a 50-year minimum life span using industry evaluation methods. Testing for corrosion was not completed, but we recommend the corrosion protection design be based on an electrical resistivity of 1,500 ohm -cm. Electrical continuity should be maintained along the entire length of the pier. 6.9 Bituminous Pavements 6.9.1 Surcharging Most of the proposed pavement areas underlain by significant depths of organic deposits including peat. The organic deposits or highly compressible and will continue to settle over time. The settlement will increase if additional fill is placed beneath the pavement areas. To reduce the amount of long-term settlement, we recommend placing the surcharge in the proposed pavement area. We recommend a minimum of 5-foot high surcharge for a minimum period of 4 months. Additional pre -consolidation and thus reduction of long-term settlement can be accomplished by increasing the thickness of the surcharge and/or the duration of the surcharge. 6.9.2 Subgrade Preparation Subgrade preparation in proposed pavement areas should consist of stripping surficial vegetation and organic soils where they are exposed within the upper 3 feet of proposed pavement areas. The excavation should be completed in a manner that does not disturb the underlying soils. 6.9.3 Backfill and Fill Material Excavated mineral materials from other portions of the site may be used as structural fill within proposed pavement areas. The structural fill should not have an organic content exceeding 2 percent by weight. Recommendations for fill placement and compaction are provided in Table 5. Page 14 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No, 01-20159 TESTING, INC. Table 5: Compaction Requirements for Pavements Relative Compaction: Moisture Content Loose Lift Location ASTM D 698: from Variance from Variance Thickness standard Proctor O (percentage Optimum, g p (Inches)(') points) Coarse Grained +/- 3 ) 12 Below pavements, within 3 feet 100 Fine Grained -1 to +2 8 of subgrade elevations Below pavements, more than 3 95 Coarse Grained +/- 3 12 Fine Grained 4 to +3 8 feet below subgrade elevations (1) Reduce lift thickness by approximately one half if manual equipment is used for compaction (2) Coarse -grained soils should consist of soils with symbols of SP, SP-SMand SMor similar gravels 6.9.4 Test Rolling The final pavement subgrade should be evaluated by completing a test rolling. Soils which rut or deflect (pump) 1 inch or more under the test roll should be corrected by either subcutting and replacement, or scarification, drying and recompaction. 6.9. S Separation Fabric To prevent contamination of aggregate base by the underlying subgrade soils, a geotextile separation fabric_ can he placed. The aeotextile fabric should be placed on the finished subgrade after completion of fill placement and test rolling. The separation fabric should meet the rarniiramanta of NAnnOT Cnenifinntinns Tah1P 1711-1- Tyne .5- aeotextile fabric. 6.9.6 Section Thicknesses and Placement Laboratory tests to determine an R-value for pavement design were not included in the scope of our work. Based on correlations provided in the MnDOT Pavement Manual, Table 5-3.2(a), an R- value of 15 would be appropriate for the soils encountered on the site. We are presenting pavement designs based on light- and heavy-duty pavement sections. The light duty design refers to parking areas which are intended only for automobiles and light trucks such as pickups and vans. The heavy-duty design is intended for pavements which will experience heavy truck traffic. Recommended pavement sections are provided in Table 6. Page 15 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 Table 6: Pavement Thickness Designs Pavement Section Light Duty (Inches) Bituminous Wear 1 V2 Bituminous Non -Wear 1 V2 Class 5 Gushed Aggregate Base 8 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. The bituminous mixture should meet the MnDOT Specification 2360 (Plant -Mixed Asphalt Pavement: Combined 2360/2360 Gyratory/Marshall Design Specification) requirements. Compaction of all bituminous mixtures should be by the "Maximum Density Method." 6.9.7 Pavement Materials Recommended bituminous pavement materials are provided in Table 7, Table 7: Bituminous Pavement Materials Pavement Section Layer Material Specification(') Bituminous Wear Course SPWEA24052) Light Duty Bituminous Binder Course SPWEB230F Crushed Aggregate Base Class 5 or 6 (i) mnUVL )peciyleattons Jections 2-16U and .9l.itf (2) The new MnDOT criteria specifies "F" oil as PG 58V-34. 6.10 Pavement Drainage We recommend installing perforated drainpipes throughout pavement areas at low points and around catch basins. The drainpipes should be placed in small trenches extended at least 8 inches below the aggregate base. It should be noted that drain tile should not be used if the aggregate base consists of recycled concrete. This material will tend to plug the drain tile over time. If either of these materials is used, weep holes should be provided within catch basins to allow accumulated water to seep into the catch basin manhole. Perimeter drain tile should also be used if the adjacent area is higher than the pavement area. This will intercept seepage from the adjacent slope. Page 16 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swinnning Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. If sufficient slope is present (greater than 2 percent), subsurface drainage may be limited to finger drains at catch basin locations. The finger drains should be installed parallel to the slope to intercept water flowing down the slope. 6.11 Utilities 6.11.1 Surcharge Area Utilities in pool areas should be installed after removal of the surcharge. 6.11.2 Excavation We anticipate that utilities can be installed per manufacturer's bedding requirements. To reduce disturbance of the underlying soils, the trenches should be excavated with a backhoe equipped with a smooth -edged bucket. The non -cohesive soils are Type C Soil under OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) Construction Standards for Excavations, 29 CFR, part 1926, subpart P, guidelines. Unsupported excavations in the coarse -grained soils that are deeper than 4 feet should be maintained at a gradient no steeper than 11/z:l (horizontal:vertical). Even with the required OSHA sloping, water seepage or surface runoff can potentially induce side slope erosion or running which could require slope maintenance. The cohesive soils are Type B Soil and should be maintained at a gradient no steeper than 1:1. Trenches deeper than 4 feet must have a retention system to protect the workers or be properly sloped. 'Trenches 20 feet deep or greater require that the retention system be designed by a registered professional engineer or be based on tabulated data prepared and/or approved by a registered professional engineer in accordance with 1926.652 (b) and (c). 6.11.3 Dewatering Based on the piezometer readings, it is our opinion that the groundwater is about 8 feet below the ground surface. Excavations extending more than 8 feet below the ground surface will likely encounter groundwater during construction. 6.11.4 Bedding A minimum of 4 inches of coarse -grained bedding material should be provided if the excavations cannot be shaped to provide uniform support for the proposed utilities and the pipe is less than 54 inches in diameter. The bedding material should consist of relatively clean sand with less than 5 Page 17 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No. 01-20159 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve or material meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specifications 3149.2£ The bedding material should be placed up to at least the spring line of the utility. If the pipe is made of plastic and other softer materials the sand fill should be placed and compacted up to the top of the pipe. 6.11.5 Foundation Fill If soft or organic soil conditions are encountered at proposed invert elevation, additional stability may be accomplished by placement of additional bedding material. However, in more significantly unstable areas, particularly where groundwater is present, coarser materials may be needed to provide a stronger foundation. The coarser materials can also be a favorable media from which to dewater. Additional foundation fill may consist of Fine Filter Aggregate meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specifications 3149.2J or Coarse Filter aggregate meeting the requirements of MnDOT Specifications 3149.2H. When using a coarser material, which include significant void space, we recommend enveloping the entire layer with a geotextile separation fabric. The gravel material includes void spaces, and the fabric acts as a separator which minimizes the intrusion of fines into the voice spaces. If additional granular bedding is used above the foundation gravel, the fabric also prevents downward infiltration of bedding sand into the rock void spaces. 6.11.E Selection, Placement and Compaction of Backfill We recommend compacting backfill to a minimum of 95 percent of its standard Proctor maximum dry density, except it should be compacted to 100 percent in the upper 3 feet of the subgrade within pavement areas. Note that some of the soils excavated from the utility trenches below a depth of about 8 feet will likely be wet to saturated and will require drying to achieve adequate compaction. 6.12 Infiltration The soils encountered on the site consist of clays sands which are Hydrologic Soil Group D based on the revised Design Infiltration Rates published by the Minnesota Pollution Control Agency. This soil has a design infiltration rate of 0.06 inches/hour. As a result, minimal infiltration is anticipated. Page 18 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AET Report No, 01-20159 7.0 CONSTRUCTION CONSIDERATIONS 7.1 Potential Difficulties 7.1.1 Water in Excavations AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Water may collect in excavation bottoms during times of inclement weather, snow melt or by seepage. To allow observation of the excavation bottom, reduce the potential for soil disturbance, and to facilitate filling operations, we recommmend removing water from the excavation. Based on the soils encountered, we anticipate that water in the excavations can be handled with conventional sump pumping. Dewatering will be required for excavation extending below approximate elevation 910. The pools should be designed to reset buoyancy uplift based on a groundwater elevation of 912. 7.1.2 Disturbance of Soils The on -site soils may become disturbed by construction traffic, especially if the soils are wet. If the soils become disturbed, they should be subcut to the underlying undisturbed soils. The subcut soils can then be dried and recompacted back into place, or they should be removed and replaced with drier imported fill. Use of haul roads constructed with base rock or larger rock would also help to reduce the amount. and extent of disturbance. 7.1.3 Cobbles and Boulders Although not encountered in our borings, the till soils at this site may contain cobbles and boulders. Removal of the cobbles and boulders would likely make excavation more difficult and require subexcavation to remove the cobbles and boulders. 7.2 Observation and Testing The recommendations in this report are based on the subsurface conditions found at our test boring locations. Since the soil conditions vary between the soil boring locations, we recommend on -site observation by a geotechnical engineer during construction to evaluate these changes. Field density testing should also be performed on new fill placed to document that project specifications for compaction have been satisfied. We recommend at least one density test for every 100 cubic yards of fill placed beneath the building with at least one test for every 2 feet of fill placed. Similar requirements should be followed for pavement areas except that there should Page 19 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. be one density tests for every 200 cubic yards of material placed. At least one density test should be taken for every 100 feet of utility trenches at vertical intervals not exceeding 2 feet. 8.0 LIMITATIONS Within the limitations of scope, budget, and schedule, our services have been conducted according to generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices at this time and location. Other than this, no warranty, either express or implied, is intended. Important information regarding risk management and proper use of this report is given in Appendix B entitled "Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use." Page 20 of 20 Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota AMERICAN November 13, 2018 ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. Appendix A Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Boring Log Notes Unified Soil Classification System Figure A-1 — Soil Boring Locations Subsurface Boring Logs Appendix A Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Report No. 01-20159 A.1 FIELD EXPLORATION The subsurface conditions at the site were explored by drilling and sampling standard penetration test borings. The locations of the borings appear on Figure A-1, preceding the Subsurface Boring Logs in this appendix. A.2 SAMPLING METHODS A.2.1 Split -Spoon Samples (SS) - Calibrated to N60 Values Standard penetration (split -spoon) samples were collected in general accordance with ASTM: D 1586 with one primary modification. The ASTM test method consists of driving a 2-inch O.D. split -barrel sampler into the in -situ soil with a 140-pound hammer dropped from a height of 30 inches. The sampler is driven a total of 18 inches into the soil. After an initial set of 6 inches, the number of hammer blows to drive the sampler the final 12 inches is known as the standard penetration resistance or N-value. Our method uses a modified hammer weight, which is determined by measuring the system energy using a Pile Driving Analyzer (PDA) and an instrumented rod. In the past, standard penetration N-value tests were performed using a rope and cathead for the lift and drop system. The energy transferred to the split -spoon sampler was typically limited to about 60% of its potential energy due to the fi-iction inherent in this system. This converted energy then provides what is known as an N6o blow count. The most recent drill rigs incorporate an automatic hammer lift and drop system, which has higher energy efficiency and subsequently results in lower N-values than the traditional N60 values. By using the PDA energy measurement equipment, we are able to determine actual energy generated by the drop hammer. With the various hammer systems available, we have found highly variable energies ranging from 55% to over 100%. Therefore, the intent of AET's hammer calibrations is to vary the hammer weight such that hammer energies lie within about 60% to 65% of the theoretical energy of a 140-pound weight falling 30 inches. The current ASTM procedure acknowledges the wide variation in N-values, stating that N-values of 100% or more have been observed. Although we have not yet determined the statistical measurement uncertainty of our calibrated method to date, we can state that the accuracy deviation of the N-values using this method is significantly better than the standard ASTM Method. A.2.2 Disturbed Samples (DS)/Spin-up Samples (SU) Sample types described as "DS" or "SU" on the boring logs are disturbed samples, which are taken from the flights of the auger. Because the auger disturbs the samples, possible soil layering and contact depths should be considered approximate. A.2.3 Sampling Limitations Unless actually observed in a sample, contacts between soil layers are estimated based on the spacing of samples and the action of drilling tools. Cobbles, boulders, and other large objects generally cannot be recovered from test borings, and they may be present in the ground even if they are not noted on the boring logs. Determining the thickness of "topsoil" layers is usually limited, due to variations in topsoil definition, sample recovery, and other factors. Visual -manual description often relies on color for determination, and transitioning changes can account for significant variation in thickness judgment. Accordingly, the topsoil thickness presented on the logs should not be the sole basis for calculating topsoil stripping depths and volumes. If more accurate information is needed relating to thickness and topsoil quality definition, alternate methods of sample retrieval and testing should be employed. A.3 CLASSIFICATION METHODS Soil descriptions shown on the boring logs are based on the Unified Soil Classification (USC) system. The USC system is described in ASTM: D2487 and D2488. Where laboratory classification tests (sieve analysis or Atterberg Limits) have been performed, accurate classifications per ASTM: D2487 are possible, Otherwise, soil descriptions shown on the boring logs are visual -manual judgments. Charts are attached which provide information on the USC system, the descriptive terminology, and the symbols used on the boring logs, The boring logs include descriptions of apparent geology. The geologic depositional origin of each soil layer is interpreted primarily by observation of the soil samples, which can be limited. Observations of the surrounding topography, vegetation, and development can sometimes aid this judgment. Appendix A - Page 1 of 2 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. Appendix A Geotechnical Field Exploration and Testing Report No. 01-20159 A.4 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS The groundwater level measurements are shown at the bottom of the boring logs. The following information appears under "Water Level Measurements" on the logs: 4 Date and Time of measurement 0 Sampled Depth: lowest depth of soil sampling at the time of measurement Casing Depth: depth to bottom of casing or hollow -stem auger at time of measurement 4 Cave-in Depth: depth at which measuring tape stops in the borehole 4 Water Level: depth in the borehole where free water is encountered 4 Drilling Fluid Level: same as Water Level, except that the liquid in the borehole is drilling fluid The true location of the water table at the boring locations may be different than the water levels measured in the boreholes. This is possible because there are several factors that can affect the water level measurements in the borehole. Some of these factors include: permeability of each soil layer in profile, presence of perched water, amount of time between water level readings, presence of drilling fluid, weather conditions, and use of borehole casing. A.5 LABORATORY TEST METHODS A.5.1 Water Content Tests Conducted per AET Procedure 01-LAB-010, which is performed in general accordance with ASTM: D2216 and AASHTO: T265. A.6 TEST STANDARD LIMITATIONS Field and laboratory testing is done in general conformance with the described procedures. Compliance with any other standards referenced within the specified standard is neither inferred nor implied. A.7 SAMPLE STORAGE Unless notified to do otherwise, we routinely retain representative samples of the soils recovered from the borings for a period of 30 days. Appendix A - Page 2 of 2 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. BORING LOG NOTES DRILLING AND SAMPLING SYMBOLS Symbol Definition AR: Sample of material obtained from cuttings blown out the top of the borehole during air rotary procedure. B, H, N: Size of flush joint casing CAS: Pipe casing, number indicates nominal diameter in inches COT: Clean -out tube DC: Drive casing; number indicates diameter in inches DM: Drilling mud or bentonite slurry DR: Driller (initials) DS: Disturbed sample from auger flights DP: Direct push drilling; a 2.125 inch OD outer casing with an inner 1'/2 inch ID plastic tube is driven continuously into the ground. FA: Flight auger; number indicates outside diameter in inches HA: Hand auger; number indicates outside diameter HSA: Hollow stein auger; number indicates inside diameter in inches LG: Field logger (initials) MC: Column used to describe moisture condition of samples and for the ground water level symbols N (BPF): Standard penetration resistance (N-value) in blows per foot (see notes) NQ: NQ wireline core barrel PQ: PQ wireline core barrel RDA: Rotary drilling with compressed air and roller or drag bit. RDF: Rotary drilling with drilling fluid and roller or drag bit REC: In split -spoon (see notes), direct push and thin -walled tube sampling, the recovered length (in -inches) of sample. In rock coring, the length of core recovered (expressed as percent of the total core run). Zero indicates no sample recovered. SS: Standard split -spoon sampler (steel; 1.5" is inside diameter; 2" outside diameter); unless indicated otherwise SU Spin -up sample from hollow stem auger TW: Thin -walled tube; number indicates inside diameter in inches WASH: Sample of material obtained by screening returning rotary drilling fluid or by which has collected inside the borehole after "falling" through drilling fluid WH: Sampler advanced by static weight of drill rod and hammer WR: Sampler advanced by static weight of drill rod 94mm: 94 millimeter wireline core barrel V :: Water level directly measured in boring V: Estimated water level based solely on sample appearance TEST SYMBOLS Symbol Definition CONS: One-dimensional consolidation test DEN: Dry density, pcf DST: Direct shear test E: Pressuremeter Modulus, tsf HYD: Hydrometer analysis LL: Liquid Lunit, % LP: Pressuremeter Li nit Pressure, tsf OC: Organic Content, % PERM: Coefficient of permeability (IC) test; F - Field; L - Laboratory PL: Plastic Limit, % qp: Pocket Penetrometer strength, tsf (approximate) q�: Static cone bearing pressure, tsf q,,: Unconfined compressive strength, psf R: Electrical Resistivity, ohm-cros RQD: Rock Quality Designation of Rock Core, in percent (aggregate length of core pieces 4" or more in length as a percent of total core run) SA: Sieve analysis TRX: Triaxial compression test VSR: Vane shear strength, remolded (field), psf VSU: Vane shear strength, undisturbed (field), psf WC: Water content, as percent of dry weight %-200: Percent of material finer than #200 sieve STANDARD PENETRATION TEST NOTES (Calibrated Hammer Weight) The standard penetration test consists of driving a split -spoon sampler with a drop hammer (calibrated weight varies to provide N60 values) and counting the number of blows applied in each of three 6" increments of penetration. If the sampler is driven less than 18" (usually in highly resistant material), permitted in ASTM: D 1586, the blows for each complete 6" increment and for each partial increment is on the boring log. For partial increments, the number of blows is shown to the nearest 0. P below the slash. The length of sample recovered, as shown on the "REC" column, may be greater than the distance indicated in the N column. The disparity is because the N-value is recorded below the initial 6" set (unless partial penetration defined in ASTM: D1586 is encountered) whereas the length of sample recovered is for the entire sampler drive (which may even extend more than 18"). 01REP052C (7/11) AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM ASTM Designations: D 2487, D2488 Criteria for Assigning Group Symbols and Group Names Using Laboratory Tests A. Soils More than 50% coarse Less than 5% than50% fraction, retained fines Cu<4 and/or 1>Cr,3 retained on on No. 4 sieve No. 200 sieve Gravels with Hers classify as ME orMH Fines more than 12% fines c Fines classify as CL 70y CH Sands 50% or Clean Sands Ci�>6 and 1�Cc4 more of coarse Less than 5% fractionpasses finesD Cu<6 and/or 1>C0> No. 4 sieve Sands with lbes classify as ML or MH Fines more than 12%fines D Fines oiasssify as CL or CH Fine -Grained Silts and Clays . inorganic PD7 and plots on or above Soils 50% or Liquid limit less W liner more passes than 50 Pr<4 or ols below tha No. 200 "A °° ljp sieve organic Ltuuid — Xen dried 10.75 (see Plasticity Liquid limit —not dried Chart below) Silts and Clays inorganic PI plots on or.above "A" line Liquid limit 50 " or more PI-Dlots below "A' line urgamc rid � --o dried <D.75 Liquid limit— not dried Highly organic Primarily organic matter, d soil in color, and organic in odor sIEVEANA-YsIS � 13ueHi oyWNi�}�j--- QI=ve lJw�.'y� n PARTICLE S17E IN MILUMEFFRS '� !Tn 'AA7s=aW G'AIx Pn AC4 --a ADDITIONAL a 7 .4 .0 GW GP GM GC SW N M Organic silt Mo -Fat cla Organic silt f. ■ OWN ■ llltltltll,��■�■ MEMNON UQUIDUMIT(LL) •Y a ry iw Plasticity Chart )TES USED BY AW F'OR801L IDENT IF1CATION 7N AMERICAN ENGMERING TESTING, INC. ABased on the mat rialpassing the 3-in '�75-mm) siam, If iisid saurple contained cobbles or boulders, or both, add `witli cobbles or boulders, or both" to group aeons. %.dla with 5 to 12% fines require dual symbols: GW-GM well -graded gravel with silt GW-GC well -graded gravel with clay GP -GM poorly graded gravel with gilt GP -GC poorly gxedad gravel vrrth ckay nSands with 5 to M% fmes raquim dual symbols: SW-SM well -graded sand with silt SW -SC well -graded sand with clay SP-SM poorly graded sand with silt SP-SC poorly graded sand with clay (Dso)' ECu=D60/Dlo, Cc Drox D6o PIf soil contains >15% sand, add "with sand" to group name. off fiats classify as CL-ML, use dual spmObol GC -GM, or sC-sU. If flues are oro ni r,, add "with organic fines" to group name. 'If soil contains>15%gravel, add "with frsvel" to group nama. If Alterbe%limils plot is hatched area, soil is a CI.-UL stUty clay. xIf soil contains 15 to 29%plus No. 200 add `ith sand" or `with gravel", wbichevar is predominant. Llf soil contains ?3O%plus No, 200, predominantly sand, add "sandy" to group name. ifsoil contains>_30%plus No. 200, predominantly gravel, add "gravelly" to group Dame. "P>4 and plots oa or above "A' line. dP1-4 or Plata Txlow "A" lim pPl pl nis rtn nr nhnvo "� lira, �Pl:plots below "A" Eno. aFiber Corrteni dtscription shown below. "e m Patitf3a 517e Term bercent Tai N Value- BFF Ter 1 1 Val -q. $PF Boulders Over 12" A Little Gravel 3% -14Q/Q Very Soft less than 2 VeryLoose 0-4 Cobbles 3" to 12" With Gravel 15%- 29% Soft 2-4 Loose 5 -10 Gravel 44 sieve to 3" Gravelly 30% - 50% Firm 5-8 Medium Densa 11- 30 Sand #200 to #4 sieve-- Stiff 9 -15 Dense 31- 50 Fines (silt & clay) Pass *200 sieve Very Stiff 16 - 30 VeryDense Greater than 50 Hard Greaterthan30 Moistumrost Cmdifia Notes ZMLI]Oscription Orpstti[ Descriolioa of nD Iah festal (MC Column) I Soils are described as 1Yemtic- if soil is not peat D (Dzy): Absence of moisture, dusty, dry to Laminations: Layers less than Fiber'Content and is judged to have sufficient organic fines M (Moist): touch. Damp, although free water not /: thick of Term [Vieuallstimetol. content to influence the Liquid Limit properties. 59Yg�yrd ortQretJ: used for borderline cases. visible. Soil may still have a hi Y high dirbaing material Root Inclusin o water content (over "optimum"). or color. Fibric Peat: o Greater than 67 /o With toots: Judged to have sufficient quantity Wet/ Waterbearing): Free water visible, intended to describe non-plasticsoils, Pockets or layers Heroic Peat: Sapric Peat: Q 33 — 67 /a Less than 33% is influence the soil of rootsLenses: properties. properties, Waterbearingusually relates to g y r �� greater than /a thick of differing Trace roots: Small roots presenf,.butnot judged sands and sand with silt, material or color. to be in sufficient quantity to F (Frozen): Soilfrozen significantly affect soil properties. A B C D E F G H I 3 K L NEW HOPE POOL SOIL BORING LOCATIONS CITY OF NEW HOPE NEW HOPE POOL REPLACEMENT l AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. PROJECT SUBJECT SCALE None DATE 10/161201B 1'-_—^._.- 1 ` r 1 S S •SSil T7 q' •�_:� sY Y ice. JI L I i i pislilt 'i. i7FT err i s T i lid-. r: - r ., ` ➢�( .` �1- r LEGEND i. @WL6AET SAIL "�_ � " � 1't-• I—'. -��- � 1 ,_I 9 BORIHGIACATION$ p».IETER LYS t - I w T7 6— L �I I fy sn9-12 'l ^• f lI yI I 1 •i I ^_ L'a Ir It 1 -r — —I— —I� 1 1!— 14 ,�• r�� N O P Q R s T U v IN ® starter- PROJ, NO: 193834337 ,� + Swimming Pool Construction New Hope, Minnesota Soil Boring Locations Drawn by LWB .I Source: Stantec AET NO. 01-20159 DATE November 13, 2018 AM ERICAN ENGINEERIN G SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 5 (p.1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEPTH Surface Elevation 915.8 GEOLOGY N MC SAIYPEEC WC DEN LL PL20 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty FILL 25 1 sand, trace roots, dark grayish brown 6 M SS 12 12 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces 2 of bituminous and silty sand, trace roots, grayish 8 M SS 16 13 3 brown and brown 4 FILL, mostly lean clay, trace roots, dark gray, a 5 little black 5 M SS 8 40 6 7 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, a little gravel, SWAMP Tr trace roots, black, soft (CL) DEPOSIT 3 SS 16 42 8 9 M TW 22 10 1 trianmin-ations AND WITH ORGANIC FINES, a little ' ' : CC3AItSE '' ALLWIUM WH W SS 18 84 ine to medium grained, dark brownish 12terbearing, very loose, lenses and FINE 2 W S5 18 96 ons of clayey sand and sandysilt (SALLUVIUM 13 slightly organic, trace roots,DEPOSIT SWAMP 14LAY, soft, ish brown, a caly lean andlay W TW 24 15graf o ganc and (CL)y IC CLAY, a little gravel, trace shells16s, W SS 18 77 dark brown and gray mottled, soft, 3 17 lenses of sapric peat (OH) FINE 5 W SS 18 31 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, dark gray, a little ALLUVIUM l8 black, soft, lenses and laminations of lean clay 19 (OH} 'PILL 20 SANDY LEAN CLAY, gray, firm (CL) 6 W SS 18 17 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to 21 t: cr irlr N .1 Lill `VLJ 22 6 w ss lz 17 23 24 5 W SS 17 16 25 26 27 — 28 — 29 30 14 W Ss 18 15 31 END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME S DEPTH DEPTTH DEPTH FLUID LEVEL LEVEL T� ATTACHED a 0-29W 3.25" HSA SHEETS FOR AN 3/22/16 10:10 12:0 1015 10.7 7.6 3/22/16 11:05 31.0 29.5 29.7 28.3 EXPLANATION OF a 3/22/16 11:15 31.0 29.5 29.1 28.3 TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 3122116 THIS LOG DR. DS LG: JMMRig: 1C 011-060 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 6 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 915.1 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE ' WC DEN LL PL 420 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 31 1 roots, dark brawn, a little grayish brown 5 M SS 16 2 mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, silty FILL�dalk 20 sy silt, trace roots, grayish brown 14 SS 15 13 3 an — 4 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a lit#le gravel and NK sand, brown, a little light brawn SWAMP DEPOSIT 5 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) 7 M SS 6 77 6 LEAN CLAY, trace roots, dark gray, soft, FINE laminations of sand (CL) ALLUVIUM 2 M SS 15 38 8 9 SANDY SILT, a little gravel, trace roots, gray, a 10 little dark gray, moist, very loose, lens of clayey 3 M SS 8 27 sand, laminations of lean clay (ML) 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to TILL stiff (SC) 5 M SS 10 16 13 14 15 7 M SS 16 16 16 17 18 19 20 5 M SS 18 16 21 22 23 24 25 15 M SS 2 17 26 END OF BORYNG r 0 c� a DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTHDEPTH CASING CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUIDLEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-2A'I:' 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 3:20 11.0 9.5 10.9 wet SHEETS FOR AN 4 s 3/24/16 12:05 11.0 9.5 9.0 3.2 EXPLANATION OF a3/24/16 COMPLETED: 3/22/16 12:45 26.0 24.5 25.3 23.3 TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG DR: JM LG: SG Rig: 68C 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGI1tilEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No; 01-06773 Log of Boring No, 7 (p. 1 of 2) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN TH DEPTH Surface Elevation 914.1 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE E ZINC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS - FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION T WC DEN LL PL 20 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty FILL 1 sand, trace roots, dark brown and brown 10F SS 17 16 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty 9 SS xi 9 ] 2 3 sand, grayish brown 4— SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT} SWAMP 5 DEPOSIT 4 M SS 7 135 6 7 HEMIC PEAT, black, a little dark brown (PT) Wa M SS 17 312 8 9 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, black to dark 10 brown, very soft (OH) WH M SS 18 109 11 12 13 M TW 24 14 15 WH M SS 18 440 16 LEAN CLAY, slightly organic, trace roots, dark, FINE 17 brownish gray, very soft (CL) ALLUVIUM WII M SS 18 75 18 19 CLAYEY SAND, a little Pavel, dark gray, very TILL 20 soft to firm (SC) 1 M SS 18 17 21 22 23 24 25 8 M X SS 17 15 26 27 28 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 5 29 stiff (CL) 30 11 M SS 14 19 n31 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO SAMPLED CAggING DATE TIME DEPTH DipTli CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-34%z' 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 2:11 36.0 34.5 35.7 34,5 SHEETS FOR AN 3/22/16 2:23 36.0 34.5 35.6 33.7 EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED; 3/22/16 THIS LOG DR; JM LG; SG Rig: 68C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG 03/2011 V 1-wlu.-VuJ ANERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 10 (p. 1 of 1) Project; New Tln a Ci Hall Cam lex• New Hoe MN TESTS n 914.2 SuVbrown GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE IINC a #2{ TERIAL DESCRIPTION W&ORATOPRLY %fittle ILLey sand, slightly organic, a FILL SS 18 ttleroots, dark grayish brown, a 9 M FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace 14 M SS 12 3roots, brown and gray 4 FILL, mostly sand with silt, a little gravel and SWAMP Clayey sand, grayish brown, a little gray DEPOSIT 5 M SS 12 254 5 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) 6 7 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, soft (OH) 2 M SS 12 97 8 � 9 W TW 24 10 11 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft TML WH W SS 18 19 to firm (SC) 12 WH W SS 16 16 13 14 M TW 24 15 16 5 M SS 18 16 17 6 M SS 16 16 18 19 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff 20 (SC) 13 M SS 16 16 2l 22 23 12 M SS 18 17 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 24 stiff (CL) 9 H-ttt RNO OF BORING , DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD HSA i DR: DS LG: JMMRig: 1C 03/2011 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE; REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH DEPTH FLUID EVEL Lr1VEL THE ATTACHED 3/22/16 2: 40 10.5 8.5 9.7 9 2 SHEETS FOR AN 3122/16 3:10 26.0 24.5 25.8 None EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 11 (p. 1 of 2) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEEP�TH Surface Elevation 913.5 GEOLOGY N MCTYPSSE )C FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION WC DEN LL PL o 424 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces FILL 26 1 of wood, �t�l lty sand, trace roots, dark 11 M SS 14 12 2 brown FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace 10 M SS 15 13 3 - roots, grayish brown and brown 4 FILL, mostly sand with silt, a little gravel, 5 grayish brown 18 M SS 16 6 7 SAPRiC PEAT, black (PT) SWAMP ZM DEPOSIT 2 M SS 17 327 8 9 10 1 M SS 18 184 it 12 ORGANIC CLAY, trace shells and roots, black, very soft (OH) 1 M SS 18 162 13 14 SAP IC PEAT, black (PT) 15 2 M SS 18 308 16 17 18 TW 19 8 ORGANIC CLAY, trace roots, black, a little 20 brown, soft (OH) ) 2 M SS 18 14 8 21 22 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, a little TILL light gray, very soft to soft (SC) WH M SS 18 16 23 24 25 2 M SS 18 17 26 27 28 M TW 18 29 30 8 M SS 18 17 31 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE CASING TIME DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-39Y21 3.25" HSA 3/22/16 9:57 11.0 9.5 10.7 Bret SHEETS FOR AN 3/22/16 10:27 23.5 22.0 22.3 None EXPLANATION OF 3/22/16 11:14 41.0 39.5 41.0 None TERMINOLOGY ON C' LETED: 3122/16 THIS LOG DR: JM LG: SG Rig; 68C 3/22/16 11:28 41.0 39.5 41.0 None O1-DER-060 03/2011 AMEitICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. 03/2011 ANIERICAN ENGTNEERTNG SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TES-ONG, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No, 13 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex-, New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 919.3 GEO�YN MC S TYPEE RE FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION WC DEN LL PL o 920 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 24 1 roots, dark brown 8 M SS 18 12 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty sand, trace roots, brown and brownish gray to 14 M SS 18 12 3 light grayish brown 4 5 9 M SS 16 15 6 7 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, light grayish TILL brown, a little brown,s tiff, laminations of sandy 14 M SS 16 13 8 silt (SC) 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray 10 mottled, very stiff, laminations of sandy silt and 16 M SS 18 14 silty sand (SC) 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, very stiff (SC) is M SS 18 15 13 14 — 15 — 16 M X SS 18 17 16 17 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff to very stiff (CL) 20 14 M SS 18 16 21 22 23 16 M SS 18 16 24 ---- Ei ND OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO TIME SAMPLED CASING DEPTH DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING DEPTH FLUIDLEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 0-23' 3.25" HSA E3/22/161.43 24.5 23.0 24.4 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF BOR TERMINOLOGY ON a COMPLETED: 3122/16 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: JMMRIs: 1C 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 14 (p.1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPPITH Surface Elevation 916.5 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC TYPE IN. FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION WC DEN LL PL2t FILL, mostly sandy lean clay, a little gravel, a FILL 28 1 little silty sand, trace roots, [lark brown 8 M SS 18 14 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and 2 sand, trans roots, brownish gray, brown and light 5 M SS 12 19 3 brown 4 FILL, mostly lean clay with sand, a little gravel, silt, sandy silt and clayey sand, trace roots, 20 5 wnish gray and dark brown, a little brown 4 M SS 12 22 6 Landlight brown FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, grayish 7 brown and brown, a little dark brown 3 M SS 12 17 6 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace roots, gray, a little brownish gray and dark 9 brown TILL 10 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray 8 M SS 16 16 and brown mottled, a little brown, frim to stiff, 11 laminations of sandy silt (SC) 12 13 M SS 18 15 13 14 �_ CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, a 15 little brown, stiff, laminations of sandy silt (SC) 13 W SS 18 16 16 17 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, dark gray, stiff (CL) 19 20 13 W SS 18 18 21 22 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark brown, 20 W SS 18 13 24 — CND OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD 0-23' �J DR: DS LG: J MMRig: 1C 03/2011 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SEPTHD DEPTTH DEPTH FLUID LEVEL LEVEL T� ATTACHED 3/23/16 9:45 16.0 14.5 15.7 15.2 SHEETS FOR AN 3/23/16 9:55 16.0 14.5 15.3 14.7 EXPLANAT1oN OF 3/23/16 10:15 24.5 23.0 24.0 21.1 TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DBR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 15 (p.1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 915.8 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL 442C FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL 27 1 roots, dark brown 8 M SS 20 15 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel and silty sand, trace roots, brown, a little dark brown and 8 M SS 14 15 3 grayish brown 4 SAPRIC PEAT, black (M SWAMP 5 DEPOSIT WW 5 M SS 12 79 7 LEAN CLAY, trace roots, gray, soft, FINE laminations of sand (CL) 'ALLUVIUM 3 M SS 14 26 8 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, a TILL 10 little gray, firm, lens of silty sand (SC) 7 SS 14 15 ll 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, firm to stiff, laminations of sand (SC) 8 W SS 14 14 13 14 15 10 M SS 6 15 16 17 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff (CL) 20 12 M SS 18 18 21 22 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark brownish 23 gray, very stiff (SC) 17 M SS N 18 13 24— END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS 0-23' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL 3/23/16 11:20 13.5 120.0 12.7 12.3 BORING COMPLETED: 3/23/16 3/23/16 3/23/16 11:30 11:47 13.5 24.5 12.0 23.0 120.0 23.0 10.7 None DR: DS LG: MMRs : 1C 03/2011 NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 AM ERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 18 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Conn lex• New Ho a MN FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS D �� Surface Elevation 921.5 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE IBC WC DEN LL PL 42I FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL M SS 14 25 1 roots, dark brown 7 2 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brownish gray, TILL OR 16 M S5 16 10 3 a little brown, very stiff to stiff, laminations of FILL silty sand and sandy silt (SC) (possible fill) 4 5 14 M SS 16 13 6 7 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown TILL to dark grayish brown, stiff to very stiff (SC) 14 M SS 18 13 8- 9 10 16 M SS 16 12 tl 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, a 14 little brown, stiff (SC) 14 M SS 18 13 14 15 14 M SS 18 15 16 17 18 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 19 stiff to very stiff (CL) 20 13 M SS 18 18 21 - 22 — 23 16 M SS is 17 24 — END OF BORING DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD 0-23' 3.25" s CQ1VfP1..ETED: 3/23/16 DR: DS LG; JMMRig: 1C 03/2011 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED PHDEPTTH DEPTH FLUN) LEVEL LEVER THEATTACHED 3/23/16 12:55 24.5 23.0 24.5 None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON THIS LOG 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No; 01-06773 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hoe MN Log of Boring No. 19 (p. 1 of 1) DEPTH Surface Elevation 917.1 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL 420i FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. 6" Bituminous pavement FILL 1 FILL, mostly silty sand, a little gravel, pieces of I M SS 16 14 2 concrete, bituminous and plastic, dark brown FILL, mostly lean clay, a little gravel, silty sand 3 10 SS 12 and sandy silt, gray and brown, a little light _ 4 brownish gray t TILL OR FILL L, mostly silty sand,,a little gravel and clayey 5 Cd, light brownish gray, a little brown 9 M SS 16 15 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, light brownish 6 gray, a little brown, stiff, lenses and laminations sand and sandy silt (SC) (possible fill) 12 M SS 16 16 8ofsilty 9 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, a little TILL to grayish brown, stiff, laminations of sandy silt 14 M SS 18 13 (SC) 11 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark brownish gray, a little brown, very stiff, laminations of 20 M SS 18 14 13 sandy silt (SC) 14 CLAYEY SAND, a lit#le gravel, dark brownish 15 gray, a little brown, very stiff, laminations of 22 M X SS 18 14 sandy silt (SC) 16 17 1s CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark grayish 19 brown and dark gray mottled, very stiff (SC) 20 25 M SS 18 13 21 22 23 24 30 M SS 18 13 END OF BORING 3 r 7 4 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 0-23' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED '- 3/23/16 2:14 24.5 23.0 24.0 None SHEETS FOR AN 5 3/24/16 8:35 24.5 23.0 23.5 3.3 EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLE'i'ED: 3/23116 L DR: DS LG: JMMRig: 1C x THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-06773 Log of Boring No. 20 (p. 1 of 1) Project: New Hope City Hall Complex; New Hope, MN FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS DEPTH IN 918.5 Surface Elevation GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC TYPE IN, WC DEN LL PL a#2( FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION 3.5" Bitununous pavement FILL 12 M SS 12 11 1 14.5" Crushed limestone, light brown 2 FILL, most clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces TILL of bihuninous, brownish gray, a little light brown 8 M SS 14 13 3 and dark brown 4 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, grayish brown, a little brownish gray, firm to stiff, laminations 11 M X SS 16 15 5 of sand (SC) 6 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, stiff (SC) 15 M SS 18 15 8 9 10 14 M SS 18 14 11 12 15 M SS 18 18 13- 14 SANDY LEAN CLAY, a little gravel, dark gray, 15 stiff (CL) 14 M SS 18 15 16 17 18 19 20 14 M SS 18 15 2i 22 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, dark gray, very 23 stiff (J—) 17 M SS 18 14 24 END OF BORING DEPTH; DRILLING METHOD 0-23' 3.25" HSA s� o dGL COMPLETED; 3/24/16 OL DR; DS LG. JMM Ri . 1C 03/2011 WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE; REFER TO DATE TIME S DEPTH DEPINTI I CAVE-IN FLUID LEMNOne D 3/24/16 10:30 24.5 23.0 24.4 N OF ON 01-DHR-060 M AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 39 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 919.2 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL w#20 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN' FILL, mostly silty sand, organic lines, trace FILL roots, dark brown, a little brown 40 1 22 M SS 10 FILL, mostly clayey sand with gravel, brown 8 2 FILL, mixture of silty sand and clayey sand, a little gravel, pieces of bituminous pavement, 3 brown 12 M SS 10 11 4— FILL, mixture of clayey sand with organic fines 5_ and clayey sand, a little gravel, black, a little 37 brown 7 M SS 12 SWAMI' 6 DEPOSIT 42 ORGANIC CLAY, black, firm (OL/OH) 7- 23 8 7 M SS 10 CLAYEY SAND, with organic fines, black, SWAMP brown mottled, firm (SC) DEPOSIT/ 25 9 TILL CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, stiff to TILL 10 very stiff (SC) 7 M SS 18 17 11 12 — 13 — 11 M SS 20 16 14 — 15 — 21 M SS 18 18 16 — 17 — 18 — 19- 20 10 M SS 3 20 j 21— DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 0-24�/2' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH I DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL T ATTACHED >. 8/28/18 11:30 14.5 14.5 16.5 16.2 SHEETS FOR AN 8/28/18 12:00 16.5 14.5 16.5 16.2 EXPLANATION OF BORING COMPLETED: 8/28/18 8/28/18 12:20 26.0 24.5 26.0 24.0 TERMINOLOGY ON � THIS LOG DR: TA LG: CD Rig: 70 ` ' 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 39 (p. 2 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS IN. WC DEN LL PL Y6420f IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, stiff to TILL very stiff (SC) (continued) (continued) 23 24 25 14 M SS 14 18 26END OF BORING s 3 i i i 0 J ] C 01-DHR-060 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 40 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 917.4 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL K.42M FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN, FILL, mostly clayey sand with organic fines, FILL trace roots, dark brown 34 1 7 M SS 10 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, brown 13 2 FILL, mixture of clayey sand and silty sand, a little gravel, brown to gray 14 3 — 18 M SS 16 12 4— ORGANIC CLAY, gray, firm (OL/OH) SWAMP 5 — DEPOSIT 30 7 M SS 16 6 192 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) 7 ORGANIC CLAY, black, very soft, laminations of sand (OL/OH) 35 TILL 8_ 3 M SS 16 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, soft to firm, laminations of sand (SC) 20 9— 10— 11 — 7 M SS 16 21 12 CLAYEY SAND a little l rave g , gray, firm ( SC ) 13 — 7 M SS 20 20 14 — CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, stiff, 15 — lenses and laminations of sand (SC) 10 M/W SS 18 19 16 — 17 — 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, stiff (SC) 19 — 20 10 M SS 16 13 21 — DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF " 0-24/� 3.25 HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CAVE-IN LING FLUID LEVEL R LEVEL 8/28/18 2:00 26.0 24.5 26.0 None 8/29/18 9:00 26.0 24.5 24.9 22.7 BORMG COMPLETED: 8/29/18 TERMINOLOGY ON DR: TA LG: CD Rig: 70 THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. 03/2011 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 41 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN Surface Elevation _ 917.2 DENTH GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL 64201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE' IN FILL, mixture of silty sand with organic fines, FILL clayey sand, a little gravel, trace roots, dark 1 — brown to brown 12 M SS 16 43 2 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown to gray, TILL stiff to hard (SC) 3 — 17 M SS 16 16 4- 5- 17 M SS 20 17 6- 7- 8— 20 M SS 18 18 9— to — 11- 18 M SS 2 17 12— 13 — 15 M SS 22 18 14 — 15 15 M SS 16 15 16 — 17- 18- 19 — 20 23 M SS 18 13 21 — DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 1 " 0-24 /: 3.25 HSA DATE TIME S DEPTHD DEPTIH CD DEPTH FLUID DRILLING VEL LEVEL T� ATTACHED SHEETS FOR AN 8/29/18 26.0 24.5 None EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 8/29/18 1 1 1 1 1 i DR: DS LG: RG Rig: 70 THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. 03/2011 SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 42 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Surface Elevation 914.8 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL o-#201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace FILL roots, dark brown 28 1 7 M SS 10 19 2 FILL, mixture of clayey sand, silty sand, organic clay, brown, black 3 — 8 M SS 18 15 4— ORGANIC SILT, gray, loose (OL) SWAMP 5 — SAPRIC PEAT, black, laminations of clay (PT) DEPOSIT 5 M SS 14 29 6 _ 169 7 SAPRIC PEAT, black (PT) 8 — WH M SS 20 76 9- 10 — 3 M SS 24 87 se= 11 — 12 13 — 1 M SS 22 221 14 — SILT, gray, moist, very loose (ML) FINE 15 — ALLUVIUM 4 M SS 18 113 16 — 17 — 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, stiff (SC) TILL 19 — 20 — 6 M SS 16 28 21 — i DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO I i 0-24V2' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL T ATTACHED None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF BORING TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 8/27/18 THIS LOG i DR: TA LG: CD Rig: 70 a_ 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. 03/2011 V 1-'mil U. vvJ AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 43 (p. I of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MIN DEPTH Surface Elevation 923.4 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL o-#201 IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. FILL, mostly silty sand with organic fines, trace FILL concrete and roots, brown 1 - 18 M SS 16 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, brown 3 - 28 M SS 16 4 5- 25 M SS 16 10 6 7 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, very TILL OR stiff (SC) (possible fill) FILL 8 — 28 M SS 18 10 9- 10 — 18 M SS 18 12 11 - SILTY SAND, a little gravel, fine to medium ',: COARSE grained, gray, moist, very stiff (SM) (possible 12 - fill) OR FIALLULL ORGANIC CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, SWAMP 13 - black to gray, stiff, laminations of sand (OL/OH) DEPOSIT 12 M SS 18 34 14 - T- 17 SILTY SAND, a little gravel, fine to medium -[j; COARSE - is - grained, gray, waterbearing, loose, Iaminations ALLUVIUM of clayey sand (SM) 5 W/M SS 18 TILL 16 - CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, Firm to very stiff (SC) 17- 18 — 19 — 20 21 M SS 14 16 21 — i DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO THE ATTACHED SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON ! 1 ,� 0-24 /Z 3.25 HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH FLUIDSING LLEVEL LEVEL 8/29/18 11:45 16.5 14.5 15.5 14.5 8/29/18 12:00 26.0 24.5 24.5 None BORING COMPLETED: 8/29/18 8/29/18 12:25 26.0 24.5 24.6 None THIS LOG DR: DS LG: RG Rig: 70 03/2011 01-DHR-060 1 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC - SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 43 (p. 2 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH GEOLOGY SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS N MC IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL 4.420 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to TILL very stiff (SC) (continued) (continued) 23 24 25 13 M SS 6 19 26 END OF BORING 0 [7 a c9 0 N 0 A LK u 03/2011 01-DHR-06( AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 44 (p.1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hoe MN DEPTH IN FEET Surface Elevation 916.3 MATERIAL DESCRIPTION GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE TYPE REC IN. FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL .420 FILL, mostly silty sand with organic fines, trace FILL 17 1 _ roots, dark brown 9 SS 16 16 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, brown, 2- a little gray 3- 17 M SS 16 12 4- it 5- 6_ 17 M SS 14 18 SILTY SAND, a little gravel, fine to medium grained, gray, moist, medium dense (SM) :COARSE ALLUVIUM 7- 8- 5 M SS 8 226 SAPRIC PEAT, black, moist (PT) =' SWAMP DEPOSIT 9- - 10 -- _�= ll - 3 M SS 16 151 -- -_ - 12 - 13 - 2 M SS 24 131 _ 14 - 15 - -- -3 c 3 M SS 22 129 __& 16 - 17 SAPRIC PEAT, brown, gray, lens of organic 18 - clay, trace wood (PT) 3 � ep 1 M SS 24 158 19- 20 - ORGANIC SILT, gray moist, loose SWAMP DEPOSIT/ FINE 6 M SS 20 30 I 21 - ALLUVIUM DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 0-29Yx' 5'/4" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 8/27/18 12:40 11.5 9.5 9.7 9.8 SHEETS FOR AN ' EXPLANATION OF } COMPLETED: 8/27/18 TERMINOLOGY ON DR: DS LG: CD Rig: 70 THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 44 (p. 2 of 2) Project; Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN' WC DEN LL PL ,#20 ORGANIC SILT, gray moist, loose (continued) 23 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, soft to TILL stiff (SC) 24 — 25 4 M SS 16 15 26 27 - 28 29 30 11 M SS 14 31 END OF BORING W m m ±7 CM1 Q 'a c� of 0 N O a U i 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 45 (p. 1 of 2) d Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MIN _ DEPTH Surface Elevation 916.4 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL o-#201: FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE' IN FILL, mixture of silty sand with organic fines, FILL clayey sand, trace roots, brown 1 — g M SS 14 19 2 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, stiff to TILL OR very stiff (SC) (possible fill) FILL 3 - 13 M SS 14 11 4- 5 - -22 19 M SS 18 6 12 SILTY SAND, a little gravel, fine to medium '. COARSE grained, gray, moist, medium dense, lens and ALLUVIUM 7 — laminations of clayey sand (SM) (possible E! OR FILL SAPRIC PEAT, black, moist (PT) SWAMP 8 - DEPOSIT 6 M SS 7 263 9 - --- 10 - - 6 M SS 8 86 11 - -_ - 12 - 13 - 2 M SS 22 118 14- SILT, gray, wet, loose (ML) FINE 15 — ALLUVIUM 6 M SS 18 16 — 17 — 18 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to TILL stiff (SC) 19 - 20 6 M SS 14 16 21 - DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 0-24'V2' 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL T ATTACHED 8/29/18 1:25 16.5 14.5 14.5 11.7 SHEETS FOR AN 8/29/18 1:40 26.0 24.5 24.5 23.8 EXPLANATION OF TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 8/29/18 DR: DS LG: RG Rig: 70 - THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No, 45 (p. 2 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hoe MN DEPTH GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL a #201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN, CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, firm to TILL stiff (SC) (continued) (continued) 23 24 25 13 M SS 18 15 26 END OF BORING s i a 3 7 i e� 03/2011 01-DBR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 46 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 914.4 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL .4201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. FILL, mostly silty sand, trace organics, trace FILL mots, dark brown 34 1 _ 8 M SS 10 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, brown 13 2 FILL, mixture of silty sand, clayey sand with organic fines, a little gravel, gray 3 — 13 M SS 12 4- SAPRIC PEAT, black, moist (PT) SWAMP 5 - DEPOSIT 3 M SS 10 206 6- 7— CLAYEY SAND, gray, very soft (SC) TILL 8 — WH M SS '/z 18 9- ORGANIC CLAY, gray, very soft (OL/OH) SWAMP 10 - DEPOSIT 42 WH M SS 20 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft TILL 11 — to very stiff (SC) 16 12 - M/W 13 — 1 SS 18 18 14 - 15 - 7 M SS 18 18 16 — 17 — 18 19 - 20 12 M SS 18 18 21 - i DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO i „ 0-24 /Z 3.25 HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED EPTiH CAVE-IN FLUIDLEVELLEVEL THE ATTACHED 8/30/18 9:40 14.0 12.0 12.4 12.6 SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF BORING TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 8/30/18 1 THIS LOG ! DR: DS LG: CD Rig: 70 03/2011 01-llHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 47 (p. I of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN _ DEIIPTH Surface Elevation 914.7 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL 442011 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. FILL, mostly silty sand with organic fines, trace FILL roots, dark brown 7 M SS 14 25 1 _ FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace roots, brown 16 M SS 14 ] 6 15 2 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel,b brown 3 — FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, brown 4— SAPRIC PEAT, black, moist (PT) SWAMP 5 la-_- DEPOSIT -=- 5 M SS 12 180 6- 7— CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft TILL to very stiff (SC) 8 — 2 M SS 18 18 9- 10 — 1] — 1 M SS 12 20 12 — 13 — 8 M SS 16 17 6 M SS 18 16 18 — 19— 20 — 9 M SS 18 20 21 — DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS' NOTE: REFER TO �� 0-24/Z 3.25 HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED D CASING DEPTH FLUID LEVEL LLING EVEL THE ATTACHED SHEETS FOR AN 8/30/18 11:05 26.0 24.5 26.0 None EXPLANATION OF BORINU TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLF,TkiD: 8130118 I DR: DS LG: CD Rig: 70 THIS LOG L- 03/2011 01-llHR-060 ANMRICAN l ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, NIN SUBSURFACE BORING LOG Log of Boring No. 47 (p. 2 of 2) DEPTH FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN.WC DEN LL PL 0420 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft TILL to very stiff (SC) (continued) (continued) 23 24 25 23 M SS 18 15 26 END OF BORING m rn a L7 J 'a t7 of N O N O R Q U� 03/2011 01-DH'R-06( AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 48 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN D INS Surface Elevation 915.1 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE WC DEN LL PL o-#201 FILL, mixture of clayey sand with organic fines, FILL clayey sand, a little gravel, trace roots, brown 1 3 M SS 10 31 2 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, stiff (SC) TILL OR (possible fill) FILL 3 - 9 M SS 14 14 4- SILTY SAND, a little gravel, gray, dark brown, ; COARSE _ 5 loose, laminations of clayey sand, lens of silty ' r ALLUVIUM sand with organic fines (SM) (possible fill) . OR FILL 9 M SS 18 13 6- 7 SAPRIC PEAT, dark brown (PT) SWAMP SAL DEPOSIT 8 — - 5 M SS 18 260 Zia- 10 - -s = e= it - =s= 4 M SS 18 227 MEL 12 - 13 — 3 M SS 20 190 14 - $6 15 - - MAL 3 M SS 20 257 16 - 17 SILT, gray, moist, very loose to loose (ML) FINE ALLUVIUM 18 — 3 M SS 20 19 20 8 M SS 16 21 - _ DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH ING CDEPTH LEVEL THE ATTACHED " 0-29/2' 3.25 HSA FLUID LEVEL 8/29/18 2:35 31.0 29.5 31.0 None SHEETS FOR AN 8/30/18 8:30 31.0 29.5 27.0 26.6 EXPLANATION OF WRING TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 8/30/18 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: RG Rig: 70 03/2011 01-DER-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 48 (p. 2 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH GEOLOGY FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS N MC SAMPLE REC . FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE �' WC DEN LL PL v #20 SILT, gray, moist, very loose to loose (ML) FINE (continued) ALLUVIUM 23 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very soft (con;i►zusd} to stiff (SC) TILL 24 - 25 0 M SS 20 15 26 27 28 29 30 13 M SS 18 13 31 END OF BORING a rn rn f7 WSJ F U Fw+- Q a C7 of 0 N 0 a P U wF 4 01-DHR-06( 03/2011 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 49 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH Surface Elevation 916.3 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL ,#201 IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. FILL, mostly silty sand with organic fines, trace FILL roots, dark grown 26 1 _ 15 M SS 18 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, trace roots, dark brown 7 2- 3 - 12 M SS 10 12 4- 5- 11 M SS 10 11 6- 7- CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown, gray TILL mottled, soft, laminations of sand (SC) 8 - 4 M SS 20 18 9- 10 - 11 - 13 M SS 22 15 12 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very stiff to stiff (SC) 13 - 17 M SS 20 17 14- 15 - 15 M SS 12 20 16- 17- 18- 19 - 20 20 M SS 18 16 21 - DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO 1 " 0-24 /: 3.25 HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH ASING CDEPTH FLUIDLLING LEVEL WATER T� ATTACHED 8/30/18 1:30 9.0 7.0 9.0 7.0 SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF BORING TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED; 8/30/18 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: CD Rig: 70 03/2011 01-L)HR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 49 (p. 2 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN DEPTH GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD &LABORATORY TESTS IN FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE IN. WC DEN LL PL a-420 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, very stiff to stiff (SC) (continued) 23 24 25 21 M SS 14 12 26 END OF BORING A 7 J H U Q a f7 m 0 N O 0. V i 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No, 50 (p. 1 of 2) 0 N 0 a Project: Pool Construction, New Hope, MN _ D INTH Surface Elevation 915.7 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL #20i FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE FILL, mostly silty sand with organic fines, a FILL little gravel, trace moots, dark brown 23 1 _ 12 M SS 12 16 FILL, mostly clayey sand, a little gravel, brown 2- 3- 9 M SS 14 11 33 FILL, mixture, clayey sand, silty sand, trace 4 organics, a little gravel, brown FILL, mixture of clayey sand, clayey sand with 5 organic fines, trace roots, gray, black 6 M SS 3 34 6- CLAYEY SAND, with organic fines, dark gray, SWAMP very soft, laminations of sand (SC) DEPOSIT T 8 - 2 SS 14 23 9- SAND, a little gravel, fine to medium grain, COARSE 10 - gray, waterbearing, very loose to loose (SP) ALLUVIUM 1] - 4 W SS 16 12 - 13 5 W SS 14 14 - SILTY SAND, a little gravel, fine to medium COARSE 15 - grained, gray, waterbearing, very loose, lens of ALLUVIUM/ sapric peat, trace wood, black (SM) =' SWAMP 3 W SS 14 194 16 _ DEPOSIT 17 SILT, gray, moist to wet, very loose (ML) FINE ALLUVIUM 18 - 4 W SS 18 34 19 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, gray, soft to TILL 20 stiff (SC) 4 M SS 18 19 : 21 DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO { 0-24'V21 3.25" HSA DATE TIME SAMPLED DEPTH CASING DEPTH CAVE-IN DEPTH DRILLING FLUID LEVEL WATER LEVEL THE ATTACHED 8/27/18 11:18 11.0 9.5 10.4 8.0 SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF BORINQ TERMINOLOGY ON COMPLETED: 8/27/18 THIS LOG DR: DS LG: CD Rig: 70 01-DHR-060 G - 03/2011 ANIERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG 03/2011 ANIERI CA.N ENGINEERING SUBSURFACE BORING LOG TESTING, INC. AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 51 (p. 1 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hope, MN D IPNTH Surface Elevation 917.2 GEOLOGY N MC SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL o-#201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION TYPE m' 3.5" Bituminous pavement FILL 8.5" Crushed limestone 1 _ 12 M SS 6 FILL, mixture of clayey sand, silty sand, a little gravel, brown 2 CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown to gray, TILL firm to very stiff (SC) 3 — 6 M SS 12 13 4- 5- 16 M SS 16 14 6- 7- 8— 19 M SS 14 16 9- 10 — 11 — 16 M SS 24 18 12 — It 13 — 10 M SS 24 17 14 — 15 12 M SS 18 19 16 — 17 — 18 — 19— 20 14 M SS 16 17 21 — I El DEPTH: DRILLING METHOD WATER LEVEL MEASUREMENTS NOTE: REFER TO DATE T� SDEPTHD DEPTH CAVE-IN DRILLING WATE THE ATTACHED " 0-24 /z 3.25 HSA DEPTH FLUID LEVEL LEVEL None SHEETS FOR AN EXPLANATION OF BORING COMPLETED: 8/27/18 TERMINOLOGY ON DR: DS LG: CD Rig: 70 THIS LOG 03/2011 01-DHR-060 AMERICAN 1 ENGINEERING TESTING, I`NC. SUBSURFACE BORING LOG AET No: 01-20159 Log of Boring No. 51 (p. 2 of 2) Project: Pool Construction; New Hoe MN DEPTH GEOLOGY SAMPLE REC FIELD & LABORATORY TESTS WC DEN LL PL 'a4201 FEET MATERIAL DESCRIPTION N MC TYPE IN, CLAYEY SAND, a little gravel, brown to gray, TILL firm to very stiff (SC) (continued) (continued) 23 24 25 17 M SS 18 14 26 END OF BORING 5 f J L C 7 3 u1 03/2011 v i-Lrux-vvV Report of Geotechnical Exploration Swimming Pools Construction, New Hope, Minnesota November 13, 2018 AMERICAN ENGINEERING AET Report No. 01-20159 TESTING, INC. Appendix B Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Appendix B Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Report No. 01-20159 BA REFERENCE This appendix provides information to help you manage your risks relating to subsurface problems which are caused by construction delays, cost overruns, claims, and disputes. This information was developed and provided by GBA1, of which, we are a member firm. B.2 RISK MANAGEMENT INFORMATION B.2.1 Geotechnical Services are Performed for Specific Purposes, Persons, and Projects Geotechnical engineers structure then services to meet the specific needs of their clients. A geotechnical engineering study conducted for a civil engineer may not fulfill the needs of a construction contractor or even another civil engineer. Because each geotechnical engineering study is unique, each geotechnical engineering report is unique, prepared solely for the client. No one except you should rely on your geotechnical engineering report without first conferring with the geotechnical engineer who prepared it, And no one, not even you, should apply the report for any purpose or project except the one originally contemplated. B.2.2 Read the Full Report Serious problems have occurred because those relying on a geotechnical engineering report did not read it all. Do not rely on an executive summary. Do not read selected elements only. B.2.3 A Geotechnical Engineering Report is Based on A Unique Set of Project -Specific Factors Geotechnical engineers consider a number of unique, project -specific factors when establishing the scope of a study. Typically factors include: the client's goals, objectives, and risk management preferences; the general nature of the structure involved, its size, and configuration; the location of the structure on the site; and other planned or existing site improvements, such as access roads, parking lots, and underground utilities. Unless the geotechnical engineer who conducted the study specifically indicates otherwise, do not rely on a geotechnical engineering report that was: not prepared for you, not prepared for your project, 0 not prepared for the specific site explored, or completed before important project changes were made. Typical changes that can erode the reliability of an existing geotechnical engineering report include those that affect: the function of the proposed structure, as when it's changed from a parking garage to an office building, or from a light industrial plant to a refrigerated warehouse, elevation, configuration, location, orientation, or weight of the proposed structure, composition of the design team or project ownership. As a general rule, always inform your geotechnical engineer of project changes, even minor ones, and request an assessment of their impact. Geotechnical engineers cannot accept responsibility or liability for problems that occur because then reports do not consider developments of which they were not informed. B.2.4 Subsurface Conditions Can Change A geotechnical engineering report is based on conditions that existed at the time the study was performed. Do not rely on a geotechnical engineering report whose adequacy may have been affected by: the passage of time; by man-made events, such as construction on or adjacent to the site; or by natural events, such as floods, earthquakes, or groundwater fluctuations. Always contact the geotechnical engineer before applying the report to determine if it is still reliable. A minor amount of additional testing or analysis could prevent major problems. 1 Geoprofessional Business Association, 1300 Piccard Drive, LL14, Rockville, MD 20850 Telephone:301/565-2733: www.geoprofessional.org Appendix B — Page 1 of 2 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC Appendix B Geotechnical Report Limitations and Guidelines for Use Report No. 01-20159 13.2.5 Most Geotechnical Findings Are Professional Opinions Site exploration identified subsurface conditions only at those points where subsurface tests are conducted or samples are taken. Geotechnical engineers review field and laboratory data and then apply their professional judgment to render an opinion about subsurface conditions throughout the site. Actual subsurface conditions may differ, sometimes significantly, from those indicated in your report. Retaining the geotechnical engineer who developed your report to provide construction observation is the most effective method of managing the risks associated with unanticipated conditions. B.2.6 A Report's Recommendations Are Not Final Do not over rely on the construction recommendations included in your report. Those recommnendations are not final, because geotechnical engineers develop them principally from judgment and opinion. Geotechnical engineers can finalize their recommendations only by observing actual subsurface conditions revealed during construction. The geotechnical engineer who developed your report cannot assume responsibility or liability for the report's recommendations if that engineer does not perform construction observation. B.2.7 A Geotechnical Engineering Report Is Subject to Misinterpretation Other design team members' misinterpretation of geotechnical engineering reports has resulted in costly problems. Lower that risk by having your geotechnical engineer confer with appropriate members of the design team after submitting the report. Also retain your geotechnical engineer to review pertinent elements of the design team's plans and specifications. Contractors can also misinterpret a geotechnical engineering report. Reduce that risk by having your geotechnical engineer participate in prebid and preconstruction conferences, and by providing construction observation. B.2.8 Do Not Redraw the Engineer's Logs Geotechnical engineers prepare final boring and testing logs based upon their interpretation of field logs and laboratory data. To prevent errors or omissions, the logs included in a geotechnical engineering report should never be redrawn for inclusion in architectural or other design drawings. Only photographic or electronic reproduction is acceptable, but recognizes that separating logs fi-om the report can elevate risk. B.2.9 Give Contractors a Complete Report and Guidance Some owner's and design professionals mistakenly believe they can make contractors liable for unanticipated subsurface conditions by limiting what they provide for bid preparation, To help prevent costly problems, give contractors the complete geotechnical engineering report, but preface it with a clearly written letter of transmittal, In the letter, advise contractors that the report was riot prepared for purposes of bid development and that the report's accuracy is Iimited; encourage them to confer with the geotechnical engineer who prepared the report (a modest fee may be required) and/or to conduct additional study to obtain the specific types of information they need or prefer. A prebid conference can also be valuable. Be sure contractors have sufficient time to perform additional study. Only then aright you be in a position to give contractors the best information available to you, while requiring them to at Ieast share some of the financial responsibilities stemming from unanticipated conditions. B.2.10 Read Responsibility Provisions Closely Some clients, design professionals, and contractors do not recognize that geotechnical engineering is far less exact than other engineering disciplines. This lack of understanding has created unrealistic expectations that have led to disappointments, claims, and disputes. To help reduce the risk of such outcomes, geotechnical engineers commonly include a variety of explanatory provisions in their report. Sometimes labeled "limitations" many of these provisions indicate where geotechnical engineers' responsibilities begin and end, to help others recognize their own responsibilities and risks. Read these provisions closely. Ask questions. Your geotechnical engineer should respond fully and G'ankly, B.2.11 Geoenvironmental Concerns Are Not Covered The equipment, techniques, and personnel used to perform a geoenvironmenta€ study differ significantly from those used to perform a geotechnical study. For that reason, a geotechnical engineering report does not usua€Iy relate any geoenvironmental findings, conclusions, or recommendations; e.g., about the likelihood of encountering underground storage tanks or regulated contaminants. Unanticipated environmental problems have led to nurnerous project failures. If you have not yet obtained your own geoenvironmental information, ask your geotechnical consultant for risk management guidance. Do not rely on an environmental report prepared for someone else. Appendix B — Page 2 of 2 AMERICAN ENGINEERING TESTING, INC f L This Page Left Blank Intentionally . r�._ ^ ��.��* � �'' •�. ` L - �� U URE �; ► - I _ ' EXISTING PICNIC , —` -- - - - - THEATER _ -'" SWINGS AREA SHELTER _ -- - y - -�' - — - • - - - '- _ __ Q_ y. ; . Imo_ a --- 8.. r.n ZEALANDF. t .} AVE .—-__-----� tip .=`yy r4+ _� i� = �' • � - �, .� f EXISTING �► t I:. 4 w '�' z` - EXISTING \ f ` I- • BASKETBALL/ =�° � � \ , VOLLEYBALL s, ri r ' SLEDDING HILL G} '' COURTS r� (WINTER) ."'; FUTURE PEDESTRIAN f f x f EXISTING K : �r - l� r_ v r.:' i 4 LIGHTING + TYPICAL! t^; TENNIS r ^EXISTING . i I i x, =hl N ' COURTS SKATE" - FUTURE A PLAZA <<�� II � LOOPED TRAIL - 1 � ..,, 4. (0.40 miles) I _ - SECURE PARKING 'w' r I $ $ $ _.__......, � �� ' �- BIKE RACKS - . I i I W I POLICE'_ 1 DEPARTMENT I f I? � r I�� ►� `f BATH HOUSE I i '' ` ` WITH RESTROOMS WEST METRO, j _ FIJTU_Ri=_- l r 1 0. PARKING b - IOC Y RIN l 1 T` I. ARK WEST METRO �o f y r.. m. I`.r CfTY k' °+ t '`+� I � TRAILS +., FIRE & RESCUE �f . I. 3 ly�� yw_.�1 . -- I 1-- ,: _ POOL -� - ':mpnrwnnuuuunuue _ �_=J �. • u i t CITY � ''+' f � � '��- i 'F - � �----�• HALL IPA RAW, FUTURE ; RAIN',,o ,r : ASSUMPTIONS - E PUBLIC PARKING GARDEN n CEMETERY y` , f XYLON AVE 12 STALLS ¢_ s r- _-LZI _ STREET PARKING K.RATED BOLLARDS TYPICAL (3) #v ��PICNIC AREA ' I 1 1 STALLS + f - - PARKING LOT LIGHTING TYPICAL PARK CONCESSIONS WINDOW I y i ENTRY MONUMENT BERM AREAS, TYPE PARK ENTRY WALK PARK SIGN - +► i , + XYLON AVE �' HYVEE '. I POOL MECHANICAL - I '14PARKING r +' BUILDING ;1 r _=� A I-.: New Hope, MN TOTAL PARKING: 198 STALLS f FUTURE PARKING: 12 STALLS t 0 50 100ft Civic Center Park Master Plan TOTAL STREET PARKING: 11 STALLS November 2018 �3 trantec 6 ,o „Sa 0 o;ow .ono PUBLIC WORKS PROJECT LOCA CITY 62ND AVENUE NORTH N VICINITY MAP Scale in Feet V a) ry�ws + T • � m E 0 � u z d CITY OF NEW HOPE CIVIC CENTER PARK °0_ EXISTING CITY HALL DEMOLITION G- af 20 CITY PROJECT NO. 941 AND 994 =o= G ma3 -M w STANTEC PROJECT NO. 193804336 mp p =aw z. a _3a� u - 2019 SHEET INDEX G0.01 TITLE SHEET G0.02 LEGEND AND ABBREVIATIONS G0.03 PROJECT LOCATION AND PHASING PLAN C0.01 - C0.02 SUBSURFACE REMOVALS PLAN C0.03 - C0.04 SURFACE REMOVALS PLAN C2.101 - C2A2 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PLAN C2.03 - C2.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN C8.01 SITE DETAILS 14 - SHEETS TOTAL KATHI HEMKEN MAYOR JOHN ELDER COUNCILMEMBER ANDY HOFFE COUNCILMEMBER CEDRICK FRAZIER COUNCILMEMBER JONATHAN LONDON COUNCILMEMBER KIRK McDONALD CITY MANAGER BERNIE WEBER DIRECTOR OF PUBLIC WORKS STEVE SONDRALL CITY ATTORNEY Q O N Lu Z Z_ C L L1J a- O Lu 2 LL O V' z O �v J � Oo z Lu Q V � J= QzO = H J } u H � W � Uo 0 z� N U X W DATE SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS APPROVED CL PROJ. NO. 193604336 G0.01 Jr 1 0 Ngo z� �3ta,o ouo„ �ooa o ow� �o om¢ ooza r Fzp po°. >oo° Boa° o> a�< u 3:u EXISTING TOPOGRAPHIC SYMBOLS STORM SEWER APRON POLE -COMMUNICATIONS $ BASKETBALL POST fJG POLE -GUY BARRICADE PERMANENT POLE -LIGHT uEON BENCH POLE -POWER ® BOOSTER STATION POLE -UTILITY • LO BUILDING LOWEST OPENING )S5' POLE -UTILITY SERVICE ® BURIAL CONTROL MONUMENT • POST O BUSH DECIDUOUS PROPANE TANK ® CATCH BASIN BEEHIVE PICNIC TABLE • CURB BOX SAMPLING WELL CATCH BASIN aoocK ROCK O COLUMN ® RR SIGNAL CONTROL BOX ® CONTROL BOX SIGNAL RR CROSSING GATE ® CLEAN OUT (SEWER) lv� RR SIGNAL • CL`R CULVERT END G-REG REGULATION STATION GAS gj DRINKING FOUNTAIN SATELLITE DISH E- ENERGY DISSIPATER sEP SEPTIC TANK FL&G FLAG POLE s c SEPTIC VENT u' FUEL PUMP sExc SEPTIC DRAIN FIELD C_ GUY WIRE SIGN GRILL 0 GRILL SOIL BORING HANDICAP SPACE • G-PIPE STAND PIPE GAS O HANDHOLE SPIGOT WATER FIRE HYDRANT saw0KLEa SPRINKLER HEAD ® HYDRANT PVMNT MARKER (REFLECTOR) Lml SPRINKLER VALVE BOX x HYDRANT VALVE R STUMP V INLET (SMALL DIA.) • G-SER SERVICE -GAS POINT ON LINE GP LIFT STATION CONTROL PANEL • S-SER SERVICE -SANITARY SEWER POINT ON LINE Vw_-1 LIFT STATION DRY WELL • ST-SER SERVICE -STORM SEWER POINT ON LINE O LIFT STATION WET WELL 4 W-SER SERVICE -WATER POINT ON LINE E LIGHT YARD ® TELEPHONE BOOTH vm LOOP DETECTOR To' TRANSMISSION TOWER ELECTRIC J(IL MAIL BOX FEO TEST PIT LOC ITmi [7 MAIL RELAY BOX TR TRACER WIRE BOX ® MANHOLE -AIR RELEASE [RA] TRANSFORMER POWER ® MANHOLE -HEAT TREE DEAD © MANHOLE -GAS TREE -CONIFEROUS 0 MANHOLE -POWER TREE -DECIDUOUS © MANHOLE -SANITARY SEWER TREE -FRUIT MANHOLE -STORM SEWER TRASH CAN © MANHOLE -COMMUNICATIONS TRAFFIC SIGNAL Q MANHOLE -UNKNOWN GASVALVE GAS MANHOLE -WATER VALVE Q METER POWER •G-VENT VENT GAS •G-METER METER GAS WATER REDUCER O11m ORDINARY HIGH WATER MARK y WETLAND CONTROL ® OUTLET CONTROL STRUCTURE µr�x (�] WELL -MONITORING L2� PARKING METER p` WELL -WATER %D PEDESTRIAN PUSH BUTTON O PEDESTAL POWER O PEDESTAL CAN © PEDESTAL COMMUNICATIONS PIV O POST INDICATOR VALVE SURVEY SYMBOLS AIR mNraoL AERIAL CONTROL POINT lKi BACKSIGHT CONTROL POINT m GPS CONTROL POINT 0 JUDICIAL LAND MONUMENT I] MONUMENT COMPUTED • MONUMENT IRON FOUND O MONUMENT IRON SET ® RESECTED POINT m ROW MONUMENT POSWT ROW MARKER POST SECTION CORNER TRAVERSE CONTROL POINT BENCH MARK LOCATION PROPOSED TOPOGRAPHIC SYMBOLS O BOLLARD • SANITARY CLEANOUT MANHOLE SANITARY OR STORM LIFT STATION ® STORM SEWER BEEHIVE CATCH BASIN ■ STORM SEWER CATCH BASIN /-- STORM SEWER FLARED END SECTION STORM SEWER OUTLET STRUCTURE ® STORM SEWER OVERFLOW STRUCTURE • CURB BOX FIRE HYDRANT ► WATER REDUCER N VALVE o RIP RAP m-► DRAINAGE FLOW Q PEDESTRIAN RAMP EXISTING PRIVATE UTILITY LINES CTV-D rn-D CTV-D CABLE TV QUALITY LEVEL D C v-c CTV-c av-c — CABLE TV QUALITY LEVEL C C V-B CTV-B CTV-B CABLE TV QUALITY LEVEL B CTV-A CTV-A CTV-A CABLE TV QUALITY LEVEL A FO-D FO-D FO-D FIBER OPTIC QUALITY LEVEL D — FO-c FO-C FO-C FIBER OPTIC QUALITY LEVEL C FO-B FO-B Fo-B FIBER OPTIC QUALITY LEVEL B FO-A FO-A FO-A — FIBER OPTIC QUALITY LEVEL A E-D E-D E-D POWER QUALITY LEVEL D E-C E-c E-c POWER QUALITY LEVEL C E-B E-B E-B POWER QUALITY LEVEL B E-A E-A E-A POWER QUALITY LEVEL A G-D G-D G-D GAS QUALITY LEVEL D G-c G-C G-c GAS QUALITY LEVEL C G-B G-B G-B GAS QUALITY LEVEL B G-A G-q G-A GAS QUALITY LEVEL A C-D C-D c-O COMMUNICATION QUALITY LEVEL D c-C C-c C-c COMMUNICATION QUALITY LEVEL C c-e C-B C-B — COMMUNICATION QUALITY LEVEL B c-A c-A c-A COMMUNICATION QUALITY LEVEL A OHP OHP OHP — OVERHEAD POWER — OHC OHC OHC OVERHEAD COMMUNICATION OHu OHu OHU OVERHEAD UTILITIES EXISTING TOPOGRAPHIC LINES RETAINING WALL — x x x x FENCE -BARBED WIRE 0 o FENCE - CHAIN LINK FENCE - DECORATIVE ° FENCE -STOCKADE FENCE - WOOD FENCE - ELECTRIC GUARD RAIL TREE LINE — - '- — - WETLAND SURVEY LINES BOUNDARY CENTERLINE - ---------- EXISTING EASEMENT LINE - -- -- -- - - PROPOSED EASEMENT LINE = FLOOD PLAIN BOUNDARY - - - - - - - - - EXISTING LOT LINE PROPOSED LOT LINE EXISTING RIGHT-OF-WAY PROPOSED RIGHT-OF-WAY SETBACK LINE SECTION LINE QUARTER SECTION LINE SIXTEENTH SECTION LINE EXISTING UTILITY LINES FM FM FM FORCE MAIN SANITARY SEWER —> ' '>—>>>>- SANITARY SERVICE STORM SEWER I WATER MAIN WATER SERVICE PROPOSED UTILITY LINES FM FM FM FORCE MAIN > > > > — SANITARY SEWER SANITARY SERVICE ^------- - - - STORM SEWER DRAINTILE STORM SEWER WATER MAIN WATER SERVICE > PIPE CASING FUTURE UTILITY LINES — FORCE MAIN - > — SANITARY SEWER ->—>—>—>—>—>—>—>—>- SANITARY SERVICE -----------.-- -- STORM SEWER DRAINTILE STORM SEWER —III—i— WATER MAIN -1--i�•�-•—r—r—, WATER SERVICE ,y — PIPE CASING CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER EXISTING PROPOSED FUTURE GRADING INFORMATION _ 95L' - - EXISTING CONTOUR MINOR __ 950� -� EXISTING CONTOUR MAJOR 952 — PROPOSED CONTOUR MINOR ~~�•`�950 --- — PROPOSED CONTOUR MAJOR • • • • • • • • - - - • - • • • PROPOSED GRADING LIMITS / SLOPE LIMITS i4.95 x STA:5+67.19 PROPOSED SPOT ELEVATION 98087 1:4 RISE:RUN (SLOPE) ABBREVIATIONS BV BUTTERFLY VALVE TL CENTER LINE CL. CLASS CMP CORRUGATED METAL PIPE DIP DUCTILE IRON PIPE EL/ELEV ELEVATION EX EXISTING FES FLARED END SECTION F/F FACE TO FACE FM FORCE MAIN GV GATE VALVE HWL HIGH WATER LEVEL INV INVERT MH MANHOLE (SANITARY) NIC NOT IN CONTRACT NTS NOT TO SCALE R PROPERTY LINE PPVC PERFORATED POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE PVC POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE R RADIUS RCP REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE R/W RIGHT-OF-WAY SS STORM SEWER STRUCTURE TCE TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION EASEMENT TNH TOP NUT HYDRANT TYP TYPICAL WM WATER MAIN 0oz - onn i�w ouzel <Goo 0 LL��w Oooi u ziQ m00 a3 — �a z` p3 zz a o Q 0 N LLJ Z CZ LLJ IL 00 LLJ LL 0 UI Z 0 J P Z Oo O Z P= w Q g w J 0' J °O Q O Q w Q 0 UoZ U d w 2: BUJ 1n X w SURVEY PR DRAWN VOL DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS APPROVED CL PROJ. NO. 1939043M SHEETNUMBER G0.02 a�oo .oho CONSTRUCTION OF PARKING LOTS, THEATER, AND SKATE PARK (BY OTHERS) TO OCCUR FOLLOWING COMPLETION OF PHASE 1 DEMOLITION WORK. L �[�1 7� - @10 t� SEE SHEET C0.02 y� ' REMOVE EXISTING BALL FIELD FENCING 77 `. 77 a ° % ------------ -- I L •1 } SKATE PARK PROJECT } i I SEE SHEET DO '01 REMOVE EXISTING ALL FIELD FENCING 1� .----------- ' � + [SEE SHEET C0.01 DEMOLISH EXISTING lk 1. HOCKEY RINK ry I _ SEE SHEETi0.f11 ----------- - 5W1MMI ISPOOL PROTECT DEMOLISH EXISTING I 1 1 i I OUTDOOR THEATER Ai - A: PARK AMEN MES,, PARKING LOT, 0 LANDSCAPING PROJECT,. 1 A ' I I I UTDOOR THFATE i _ JECT i ------------- I ]I' t I I I {C C { SEE SHEET C0.01 1 / - DEMOLISH ELTER » SHELTER H I — - PARK SHELTER -- z - RK AMENTFIE PARKING LOT AND LANDSCAPI 4G PROJECT 1� I s'- .B \ CITY HALL ° — (UNDER CONSTRUCTION) I I I I tll � 1 r- I 4 Q a 1 C 111— II T— _ - l • �, r° pit L -ate I_ h-�{�-�• �-�;- � j � J ti II q i ffl1 GENERAL NOTES: 1 ;1 1• NO ADDITIONAL COMPENSATION WILL BE MADE FOR DELAYS DUE TO OTHER 1 1 PUBLIC OR PRIVATE WORK IN THE AREA. II tl II 2. HAUL ROUTES MAY NOT INCLUDE RESIDENTIAL/NEIGHBORHOOD STREETS. ± ONLY XYLON AVENUE NORTH AND 45TH AVENUE NORTH MAY BE USED TO ACCESS jyyyy THE SITE. 3. NO CONTRACTOR PARKING IS ALLOWED ON ZEALAND AVE OR XYLON AVE. �1 4. CONTRACTOR MAY USE UP TO FOUR (4) PARKING STALLS IN THE CITY HALL I PARKING LOT DURING CONSTRUCTION. _ -J It 5. STREET SWEEP AS DIRECTED BY THE ENGINEER. 6. OWNER TO REMOVE ALL TREES SHOWN FOR REMOVAL PRIOR TO DEMOLITION START. CONTRACTOR SHALL GRUB ALL STUMPS AS IDENTIFIED AS TREES I t 1 WITH DARK SYMBOLS ON SHEETS CO.03-CO.04. I II I MILESTONES: 1 1. CONTRACTOR TO COMPLETE DEMOLITION IN ORDER - PHASE 1 AND THEN PHASE 2. F1 ( 2. PHASE 1 START DATE: FOLLOWING CONTRACT AWARD (ANTICIPATED I Ik CONTRACT AWARD DATE OF MARCH 11, 2019• 3. PHASE 1 COMPLETION DATE: DEMOLITION OF THE EXISTING THEATER, 1 I SHELTER, HOCKEY RINK BOARDS AND LIGHTS, AND ASSOCIATED PAVEMENT z 1 i v I AND SUBSURFACE REMOVALS - APRIL 12, 2019. II <' 4, PHASE 2 START DATE: JULY 1, 2019. k I 5. PHASE 2 AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE: AUGUST 18, 2019. 1 Ij x I 6. FINAL COMPLETION: SEPTEMBER 20, 2019. I ifjl� I COMPLETION INCENTIVE. 45th AVE N IN THE EVENT THAT ALL WORK AS IDENTIFIED IN THE DRAWINGS AND PROJECT MANUAL UNDER MILESTONES AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION IS _ -- _ =I - y COMPLETED BY AUGUST 18, 2019, PAYMENT OTHERWISE DUE IN THE CONTRACT WILL BE ADJUSTED WITH A LUMP SUM INCENTIVE PAYMENT OF $2,000 VIA CHANGE ORDER. PAYMENT OF THE INCENTIVE WILL BE MADE } WITHIN 30 CALENDAR DAYS AFTER THE ABOVE MENTIONED SUBSTANTIAL • COMPLETION DATE. SEE SHEET 00.01 r REMOVE EXISTING PAVEMENT ABSOLUTELY NO ADJUSTMENTS IN THE COMPLETION DATE OR COMPLETION / REQUIREMENTS WILL BE MADE FOR ANY REASON IN DETERMINING ELIGIBILITY OF INCENTIVE PAYMENT. 50•METEFI POOL AND BATH HOUSE CONSTRUCTION TO START (BY OTHERS) FOLLOWING PHASE 1 DEMOLITION COMPLETION. PROTECT NEW POOL CONSTRUCTION DURING EXISTING CITY HALL DEMOLTIION DURING PHASE 2. SEE SHEET 00.01 DEMOLISH EXISTING CITY HALL BUILDING SEE SHEET C0.01 DEMOLISH EXISTING SIDEWALK AND TRAIL u 4J 3 m z pp O Lu Z 5Z L LL fi O 3 Lu L.L O H=- U Z Z O J� O O 0 N Z LEJ Q = i) - QO Q = Z Z t �u - LU Q Uoo (�O J Z�U NU ui O X D' Lu IL DATE N SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS o so' , 20' APPROVED CL PROJ.NO. 193804336 SHEET NUMBER G0.03 0 o 'sa �¢po 1 �yQ= oo2= <o�o � 000& 030� • .a?o ti SEE SKEET 00.42A I f n I z y � �� ^ L �` 1 v i mow.- i AI .[ �� f?:r �• �• �� _ • � ^' o Irj _y x y IT �* ryn y �u7 I [ Y f+�+ I �Mt - I 06 PLUG PIPE OPEN iS �'`-i,/ Fpi . 1`•rI <�� a AT MANHOLE 6 &M j I i n BRICK AND MOR ro. Q B a Q •~r \ rip i�j ` I M+ R r J1. i3oo u a .4 ) *LS•II [ "n! 1I 1( `S] II .ItI IaI >aII +rI 'II _On PVC AN Q RGTOF ' 't - AY LINE AND PILL F PLUG PIPE . ` TION:IL INCIDENTAL TO TF.REMQAL LIS — — — r�0 THE SUBSURFACE UTILITY INFORMATION ON THIS PLAN IS SHOWN I , TO UTILITY QUALITY LEVEL D @ C IN ACCORDANCE WITH LEGEND PROVIDED. THIS QUALITY LEVEL WAS DETERMINED ACCORDING TO \ - - - - - I 4 REMOVE 6" PVC WM TO RIGHT OF THE GUIDELINES OF CIIASCE 38-02, ENTITLED STANDARD WAY LINE AND PLUG. PLUG PIPE \ I ;? °fir J r 'GUIDELINES FOR III E COLLECTION AND DEPICTION OF EXISTING IS INCIDENTAL TO PIPE REMOVAL. I ` SUBSURFACE UTILITY DATA, UTILITY DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN 4" PVC I :" ON DRAWING Ga.02. ar rl c 1 k 1 5 k o UTILITY QUALIFY LEVELS' Q IZ• S t I I I— m I `f �! _ ' - - REMOVE 4" PVC WM TO RIGHT OF �} ). " r I Li 91 I I ! I r r - ^ WAY LINE AND PLUG. PLUG PIPE r I' JI R �ORDS•INFORMA3ION1 CANES SOLELY FROM E7DSTING i1T1LfFY 0 1 ! I ! IS INCIDENTAL TO PIPE REMOVAL. ti 1, r w a R -Nj q , 0 I r_ t I 1% c 3 !M �' } r r LEVEL C SURVEYING ABOVE GROUND UTUITY FACILITIES, SUCH AS ' y r MANHOLES, VALVE BOXES, ETC; AND CORRELATING iHLS Z SI SG-fJ INFORMATION WITH EXISTING UTILITY RECORDS. Z_ "AIN TII£ LEVEL B - TFiT USE OF SURFACE GEOPHYSICAL TECHNIQUES TO r f QU `; • J`.kip Q Q ^ Q =T i l 1 1 � y =_ «� "+ DETERMINE THE EXISTENCE AND HORIZONTAL POSITION OF L Jr ly g + * 1 S Pj1�C y` UNDERGROUND UTILME L LEVEL A - THE USE OF NONDESTRUCTIVE DIGGING EQUIPMENT AT W I t51 1 S I HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL P05MON Of UNDERGROUND DRAIN r!1 E � i 1 r r¢ o �� 1 UTILITIES, AS WELL AS THE TYPE, SITE, CONDITION, MATERIAL AN O + OTHER CHARACTERISTICS. _ I{ � , 1 t l r ld' I I-!` I I !, s 1 fl I IL r -:1:- ESQ I `� I'� ! ,� 1 6 N �•rH'„ k • - r[) - r I I .r r �' • p 1 r _ � Cf, a 1 � � �f r � •• I � . 1 � J I � I + .. {I PRIVATE UTILITIES ARE SHOWN IN THE LOCATIONS PROVIDED BY ?_ 7C y ' y ?=�r�' yl . t `,1 j:i . iIj W plan u "t }Czy py I C a _ _ THE 6WNER PRIOR T[} t]DNSTRUCTIO_N. {. �.'. I + - PLUG PIPE AND ABIAHDON WATER A- �� ~ . _ r —' I • ' - SERVICE. NO SAND REQUIRED FOR PIPE r ABANDONMENT. PLUG PIPE INCIDENTAL D I y �' i _ - _ ° _ _ _ ' _ _ l = ' I I �I I, ^ �. 1 REMOVALS LEGEND 0 I I TO BUILDING DEMOLIITON. ! jr • I ] 1 ti PLUG PIPE AND ABANDON SANITARY - ` ~ `y STORM SEWER PIP )ETA SEWER SERVICE. PLUG PIPE IS INCF IT0 BUILDINGDEMO. NO SAND REQUIRED N SANITARY SERVICE e i WATER SERVICEFOR PIP"BANDONMENT. ,a nr of or DRAIN TILE �;-A U r i a L ' rrf` v c I Ir I 4 - F. I It CATCH BASIN 'i 9 1 f tl n, i i_ STORM SEWER MANHOLE A El CN I} I I T 7 CLEAN OUT (INCIDENTAL TO PIPE REMOVAL) PLAYGROUND a� X 1 I ,y} C ! I I, N REVr. N16 ' 1 �« 1 I` SANITARY MANHOLE 1 I 1 SW1NG$ p+P'�' � , k y, � i .I .. r_ { L y; •, £n 3 rj `6 q a- q i a ' n IT A LJ NOTES: j T. O L I I� 1. ALL UTILITY TRENCHES SHALL BE FILLED TO MATCH ADJACENT GRADES r,II - v AND TEMPORARY SEED AND MULCH PLACED. �n Z. NO CONTRACTOR PARKING ALLOWED ON ZEAiAND AVENUE OR XYLON v z } _ :. I � �� •� I S'i � �� `I •'� $ II .� AVENUE ry i 4 - ` j1i �: 3. CONTRACTOR MAY USE UP TO FOUR (4) PARKING STALLS 1N THE CITY � Ic� ��^c� t`--c—K--c—K� -•-- fff.��-- -*= r r y .� r --• — .a M r ��rA jI �' kyI ` c_ r—'. k ,[�f l 1 I� I 11 1-1 -�I --I�--q•1 90 6Go� �� —flID 17 ffl.p — pdt3= EE? - d:s iY ----------------- 1, I .N I n I J I HALL PARKING LOT. Jill —r 11 ^II II y Orn Z P Q OQ J wZ IL Q J Ov> J rn O J Q 0 W W ~w¢ Go? I N Z� m N U X w DATE SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS APPROVED CL PROJ NO, 193900336 OmD� EA�w �oN� >oo° Hoag aDa o3ow r oho I I I I I I I I I I 1 I 1 I I ----- _' - - �- -- O � f— J O ❑ —' I 1 C) `F gENEH �— C, 1 l PLUG PIPE OPENINGS 1 I AT MANHOLE WITH I BRICK AND MORTAR. } N I , In f� v ►� 18" RCP 1 .a t1'J 401, C0 0 j w u U cV ■ '� � 1 — — — — --�^---1--------- -- \ PLUG PIPE OPENINGS AT MANHOLE WITH BRICK AND MORTAR. I I I I I to I 4 j SEE SHEET III I 1' III I II III I I! III I II III I II Ip I II III I II III r I! I II I 11 III I II IU I I! IU ! II IU 1 II III k II III ! II III I II III I II III I II 111 I I I IV I II III I II III I II Ip 1 II IIII 1 f I 1� �f 1 I � II I j �L ll l v— SUBSURFACE UTILITY INFORMATION: THE SUBSURFACE UTILITY INFORMATION ON THIS PLAN IS SHOWN TO UTILITY QUALITY LEVEL D & C IN ACCORDANCE WITH LEGEND PROVIDED. THIS QUALITY LEVEL WAS DETERMINED ACCORDING TO THE GUIDELINES OF Cl/ASCE 38-02, ENTITLED STANDARD GUIDELINES FOR THE COLLECTION AND DEPICTION OF EXISTING SUBSURFACE UTILITY DATA. UTILITY DESIGNATIONS ARE SHOWN ON DRAWING G0.02. UTILITY QUALITY LEVELS: LEVEL D - INFORMATION COMES SOLELY FROM EXISTING UTILITY RECORDS. LEVEL C - SURVEYING ABOVE GROUND UTILITY FACILITIES, SUCH AS MANHOLES, VALVE BOXES, ETC; AND CORRELATING THIS INFORMATION WITH EXISTING UTILITY RECORDS. LEVEL B - THE USE OF SURFACE GEOPHYSICAL TECHNIQUES TO DETERMINE THE EXISTENCE AND HORIZONTAL POSITION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. LEVEL A - THE USE OF NONDESTRUCTIVE DIGGING EQUIPMENT AT HORIZONTAL AND VERTICAL POSITION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES, AS WELL AS THE TYPE, SIZE, CONDITION, MATERIAL AND OTHER CHARACTERISTICS. PRIVATE UTILITIES ARE SHOWN IN THE LOCATIONS PROVIDED BY THE OWNER PRIOR TO CONSTRUCTION. REMOVALS LEGEND STORM SEWER PIPE ►��—��•�� SANITARYSERVICE I I I WATER SERVICE Dr Dr DIE — DRAIN TILE O CATCH BASIN STORM SEWER MANHOLE CLEANOUT (INCIDENTAL TO PIPE REMO% 0 SANITARY MANHOLE NOTES: I. ALL UTILITY TRENCHES SHALL BE FILLED TO MATCH ADJACENT GRADES AND TEMPORARY SEED AND MULCH PLACED. 2. NO CONTRACTOR PARKING ALLOWED ON ZEALAND AVENUE OR XYLON AVENUE. 3. CONTRACTOR MAY USE UP TO FOUR (4) PARKING STALLS IN THE CITY HALL PARKING LOT. 0 30' 60' u `ya) T 4J 3 n E Z o z JD' Z ar 3 rn� o 2 � y r �OT owo ,0 LLpDE d w°o? � u ao <o»w w c�?3 -a9 2 �z a Z o Q O Lu z— CZ L W CL O w 2 LL O i f' z O tz J o` Z ol O Q d Z w Q J Ov> _j O J Q O W _ � a F- W Uo¢ LL LL � Z I= m N U X w DATE SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS APPROVED CL PROJ.NO. 193W4336 SHEET NUMBER COOL L 0 s a I SEE SHEET C0.04 1 wj/Y �•'__`--------`—ti__ -� o�w< P pO I REMOVE FENCING �- I oQ=a I "'-�REMOVESEOS co ge o>r> rKf�,- REMOVEa ti �. �\REMOVE HOCKEY r ^s 1 DASHER BOARDS, '\L� mlFENCING AND (4)\LES AND WIRING BACIGHTS, HAND OKTO \7 -4 SOURCE. SOURCE. IYJZ/1A_"'\ I r t (3) REMOVE AMPHITHFATEEf- . 1 I 1 11 tl 1)GHTING STRUCTURr, FOOTINGS, WIRING TO SOURCE. ~ 1 ) 1 o r Il j (2) REMOVE Q \ I f /� � AMPHITHEATER SEATS. OVE f p `I 11 CHAIN LINK 1 I FENCE 4f ^t p ,-------1 IV \ ��\�� A 1 / `- ti��y (2) REMOV�RALSED p I LANDSCAPE BEDS I \ \ \ \ p N REMOVE SIGN AND FdOTINGS it I • 0 1 _ _ I u \ \ 1 tik. le ott�r r Q_ \PICNIC SHELTER a) I 1 ice~ \ ,� 1 \� ,\� 1 , ,LI I I I I 1 I �~ 1 \ \ I L A t)p I II to II 1 I � � I m •� I it \ 11 \ rr Di v m / P Li RE04K CHAIN LINK r I FENCE I 1 ��PAOViE MODULAR LXk'RETAININGWALL 1 I -ry 17 l 1 ^� Y•y M I �. — / •� 1 p z z p / O,Y \\�------ II 11 0 O o n 1 zz 00 c \ N R y I j 16 r V e a j L I II—p ill I I �_ —__.�-- ^ o I I SEE SHEET CO.O4 j I y�- I x L-r --- L ---- O----------- I r � o r' I� Il 1 • 7 11 ! r 1 1 I �Q) N d 1 i -Al � Ir REMOVE: / Ifl 7 f MONUMET SIG AND FOUNDATION / LIGHTS 0 y11 NG TO SOURCE REMOVALS LEGEND RETAINING WALL -_____---___ - CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER 0 10 oil +I/ Il O CHAIN LINK FENCE CONIFEROUS TREE (GRUB ONLY) III ! ll 111 I N � 00 II III N _ I oil O ill I O ', DECIDUOUS TREE (GRUB ONLY) p p CL p LIGHT POLE � SIGN BITUMINOUS FLAG POLE AND FOUNDATION II1 III I I Y� CONCRETE MONUMENT SIGN AND FOUNDATION 1 Ib I I LIGHTS AND WIRING TO SOURCE - II --/-\ 1 _ - �/ �•_, III 1 I I BUILDIN 1 1 II I G i I�11 kj !s: LANDSCAPING 1 I I13 f I I }J ❑ NOTES: 1. ITEMS TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS INCLUDE: BENCHES, TRASH p - , RECEPTACLES, SKATE PARK RAMPS, PICNIC TABLES, AND TWO [0 I II 1 Il T I (2) SMALL BLEACHERS. N O 1 I R III 6 2. ELECTRIC WIRING SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE. ANY N Q I I I i WIRING IN CONDUIT CAN BE REMOVED AND CONDUIT 1 II 1 ABANDONED IN PLACE. I I r ~ 3. FILL ALL TRENCHES RESULTING FROM FOOTING REMOVALS AND T �, INSTALL TEMPORARY SEED AND MULCH. 4. SLOPE BUILDING BASEMENT EXCAVATIONS AT 3H:1V OR 1I I EI II FLATTER SLOPE. 1 S• NO CONTRACTOR PARKING ALLOWED ON ZEALAND AVENUE OR Q = I XYLON AVENUE. 6. CONTRACTOR MAY USE UP TO FOUR (4) PARKING STALLS IN THE I ,N CITY HALL PARKING LOT. 7. OWNER TO REMOVE TREES. CONTRACTOR TO GRUB ALL STUMPS. °O N m I M +I II g ,Ilk, II jY — • — — I ` II r R 30' 60' F- O Lu z <z_ L Lu CL O Lu LL O 1- i O� J a 00Q Z Q 0_ w_J a Q J O, J 0 = O ww Uo< z�N NU X w DATE SURVEY PR DRAWN OA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS uv�OvW a PROJ-NO, 193004336 C0.03 1 1 I ! I I I I I ! I I I I I I t I I I II I I _ O CC) O r_ REMOVE SEATS ❑ P� _ r ro m T m / 1 1 1 RE MOVE SEATS I f i Ln I I I I REMOVE FENCING N� a � 1 / I 1 + r I r O I I I REMOVE SEATS I I I f I l I 1 I 1 I 1 1 \� I � r 00 In I � 1 k❑71 �i q m m -` - --------------- —_ —"-- —i� — — -----'—_~' ocrrrvdcruernllTnly E i Ito i I 1 I � I I 1 I I SEE SHEET .Oa ry x REMOVALS LEGEND RETAINING WALL -----+------- CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER e CHAIN LINK FENCE CONIFEROUS TREE (GRUB ONLY) f~x- o y DECIDUOUS TREE (GRUB ONLY) E �( LIGHT POLE SIGN BITUMINOUS CONCRETE ® BUILDING LANDSCAPING NOTES: I. ITEMS TO BE REMOVED BY OTHERS INCLUDE: BENCHES, TRASH RECEPTACLES, SKATE PARK RAMPS, PICNIC TABLES, AND TWO (2) SMALL BLEACHERS. 2. ELECTRIC WIRING SHALL BE REMOVED BACK TO SOURCE. ANY WIRING IN CONDUIT CAN BE REMOVED AND CONDUIT ABANDONED IN PLACE. 3. FILL ALL TRENCHES RESULTING FROM FOOTING REMOVALS AND INSTALL TEMPORARY SEED AND MULCH. 4. SLOPE BUILDING BASEMENT EXCAVATIONS AT 3H:1V OR FLATTER SLOPE. 5. NO CONTRACTOR PARKING ALLOWED ON ZEALAND AVENUE OR XYLON AVENUE. 6. CONTRACTOR MAY USE UP TO FOUR (4) PARKING STALLS IN THE CITY HALL PARKING LOT. 7. OWNER TO REMOVE TREES. CONTRACTOR TO GRUB ALL STUMPS. V W 4J fG 4j �i E h U j z U Z v n:E o � � 3 Q 0 N W Z <Z W CL 0 w LL 0 F-- A u Z 0 ~ P 0 0 Q Z J Q w N O` > O Q 2 w UUJ � w w us U �rLEke Z 4n NU X w SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS o ao' so' APPROVED CL 11--C1-0. 193eU433604 o a o oo� BDam o ♦ \\ '1 1 '1 ti l l I 1 • 1 1 1 I I 1 y r I{ I V i If I l i -., I illy I. •_-�� / r----� �■ 1 I ++r,t�+}%++ ;4 + r+ 'r +« ` I! I I J I! I I I 1 5!i lll. 1 1 / r ► +'' +++ --♦ ,-� r J -�--J• r llI - I I! r�r.-r.� I Fll1 i! -It11 'l111 I IpII �I�1` .--1 -}IIII .��I1f- -`-IyII -I1 -II ! 11I{ + rI-j �------ r 1!I Il1I IIlI � Il\r llI r- C}. � r !1 ' + l+ * + + +r+` k 14 1 l �1+ [ I■ _ r r�__�.- m++I lfII ll 11 r_r— y�-j%j , I_y- }_ "i J1 + +y+ _1� u+ r+ r£ i t 1 1 r t 1 11 r l 4 N l l £. I r 1 r i° 4 1 I r r °I 1 I I I I Irr Jr l Am � L� � ' �*I"tylt + k,%, s- I i I I r I 1 1 L 1 ! 7 j ■` I r�L f I I� I + + r % !' Ir r 1 1 I. 114 n I I ! III I 1 + I / r 1 r 1 ! r ■ y, 7 f +s + +++++ L'YY /� C �3 g2Q1■r L-Y 1 1. 1/if\'� ��►+ + 1 [L OI 5 f ♦ 11^. ■ I + r , I f ' r r 1 IJ rr ; �. \♦ ■ 1 y e 1 I 1 y �I + ++ \+++++ I \! / r +, ++ L r vs c- I rl / 1 } a I r r l 11 1 I I J ,-[ -2Y �` I r J £'� ++ 1 - q^. A I ♦♦ y l k l 1 1 I r I _. 1 , T i• Ipli� I ++ I I r I♦ . ' yr ' +r N ■] F ♦ ♦ ♦1+ r + r . M5 1 ■ J i I ■ 1 1 1 III 1 i 1 r r 1 1 \, 1 1 L f I r J 1 7/ 1 r, ♦.+ +++ ♦ 11 1 1 I I I f 1 r i ++ ++ vO t .Jrr till I 11 \ I f f f J r L ♦ 11 II ► 1 f / 11 I \ I l 1 1 1 r 1 I I ^ +++ +++ J t _�� ry +++ I + q ♦ \ 11 , / r 1 / I 1 1 I 1 { } f I 1 1 1 + + + + + +\ + + + 11 ,♦ 1 r 1 r! +/ 1 1 r I 1 I f 1 I? 1 11 1 1 ' * +-+�+ +++ t rl L i ■ I I r I f j r r{1 I 1 4. 11 1 1 +++++++++*+* / + + + £+ + + r ri ■ t1l'i, r ++ ,+ + + K O ♦.+ - #1 + + � �63 1 + a + + + + + + + + ,fI I a�1 1++�+Si + +l Ir + + + + + ++�IK 1 Lk3 1 1 1 ++-- 1+++ r + ` terrr 1 1 TY� T �-`r e titD t",++c.r+++r +++++++++ +++++++++I I r1f11 I r t+ -r► +' k + + + + p + + rl++ �+I + + + + + + ++++ I 1 + 4 + + /+ + + r + + ++ + + + + T + + + + + + +1. �"I+++ +++ 4:++ r c++++ ►} +}il £ I J / y + + + t +\ + +r ♦ + + + + + + + +a +�++ +++++++++ r++++la�O++++++++++++++++ f ! £ j 1 I r J 1 r J ■ / J I ' + + r + +1++ t Ir ► + + + + + + + +�+ + + + + + + + 1 I I r ! I 1 ■ ■ III 1 + * + + ■ + + + • +\+ .rn +I + + + + + + + + + + + r + + + ♦ ► + I 1 1 f r / 1 1 ■ I I I I + + 1 ► + . + + + ► + + - r4 IH ♦ + + + + + + + + + ♦ + + + + + + + I + f r + + + + + + + + + +++ + + + + + + + Trt'-i^+� + t + n r l I f 1 h I I / 1 k i + + + T + + T _ ♦ + t + +m+ + + + + + + + + 4 + + + FT+ + + + . + + • + + + + + + ++ +� +I + + + + + + + +++ 1 +1 +a++++++++ + + +} + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + `r + + ^ + + + + + r r 1 I I + I .!r r .I `n •♦ " - I . +++ ♦+++++++ +++ + +f++++I+++ +++++++++ ++*+F ++ + + + ♦ + + + r ++�� «;++J++++.z« l rl I i� IIr ■\\ I 1 -��J �. ++ + + + + + +— + iGf►kn++4++ +++++++++ ♦ ++++►++�+ i'F++++ «++♦1 1 1 I + + + + + + + + + +a•'1,"♦+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 1 1 /* I 1 I rl i J£ 4 r + + + + T + +■ r ry + ; + + + + + +. + + +•. + �+ + + +4. l �� rti•' L� +r i+ ++++++++++ ++# + + +1 +{ �T+ +r ter+ t-v-+.r + T r 1 1 I I f \ p + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 1 1 I I / 1 1 11 I I I ■ + t + + + + + a t + + + t + + + + + + + + + + 4- +4}+ ++ + 1 I r 1 `j i1�1 I 1 'j`r♦i` ,� 1 t + + ++++ +++ + �+ gip. + + a } + + + + + + + + + + #► +. + ■+ ++/+ 1 1 QJ 1 1 � Iasi -41s_ _ 11 C ,1+ 11 1 1 1 1/ r 1 4L, . if 1 1 SC 1 r I I r 1 ! f 1 I I L 1 "t —�-r I •F�I + ++r ++++++++ + + ++++Y ++++++++++++++++++++ Vrt+ +++ + f I/ r, ++ + + t + + + + } + + I + + + + + + t + + + r + + +. 1 1/ J / r I I I 1 r� T ■ti + + + + ♦ + a + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +t + + + + + ... + + + + ++ + « ,1 -•.`�'k�,,l f 1 1 / / rr� • ■ 1 1 J �`- + + +-+ ++'�♦ R; + + + + + + + + a + + + + + + + 4. I ra'1 I`1 1G '-'� 1 / / \ 1 1 1 r I * + +' + + + J + + + + + + +.+ + + + + + + + + + /'l 2• li 1 \I ' 1 n 4 �4 + + + ++++++++►++ +♦ + h ++ ++++++++++++++++++++++++++ I. 1 r r 1 1 �- l r J■ r /// 1 /� I 1 I D 1 1 1 1 s�� m ■ r ` OI■ ■ l _ + + + ►r+ + t + + + + + + + + • + + + + 1 / ■a { I 1 ■ J ■ + + + + + + y + + + + + + + + + + + + + + I + ] �r r 1 1 r ■ ' I I , ■ ♦ 1 `, r-'G� 1 I rr ++ r+++ +++ + +/+++++t �+ + H + + +++++++++++++++++++++++T++ I }_ # !1 1 + I 4 L�,L`;� ~♦♦ I 11 ♦��yyy 1 1°' J _�_--_�----I +. + �+ + + + + I++I+ + + + + + + + + } + } + + + + + r ►I r'� i 3' 11 } I i.♦ pq4■1 ! .�■ \ , �r� a� r 1 { hI$ ++ *++++++++ k -t + + + + + + + + T + + + + � {1 �1 ,•rFr I ■ 1 I I �^�� tr ♦ r tyf -}'� I m I + + + + + + + + + + + + £ + + + r + + + + + + + + + Yr1+ ►1 r� I + + + + + + + + + + a + + + + + + + + + + + + + I \ NI r f 1 4, I f (,� • ■ 1 1 l �� ' r{]'-CL �■ IJ rtiy I I I '.It Itr i + + + + .4. + + + + + .i + + + + + + + + + + + + + I + ! I ly ■ \1 1 1 /. r1i . 1 I I sV r } -+�+ +'y+ + + ♦� + +' + + + + + + + + + + + + + I ! I l ■. I I 1 1 ` Ir ! r�4-- + + ++ 1++ + ♦+ + +r*+ + + 1 1 ■ 1 1 .`r1 N. 1 11 1 I t++++ i ++ + -f ++++ k ++{ +� ! + + + + + � ! ! 1 ! 1 1 1 r r1. l ♦. L ! a � -2' � I -t + + +- -+ �+ � � • l \\ I a. ► I J + +1.+ + + + v + + • + ilk. + p + + + + V r{ I } ! 9 I ■ r I - I % ` + -.+ _ + f + + + �t + �.ri + + + + + + I 1! QI \ ■ L G ��7 \�fr LI}-_'♦ 1` _` I 6i • �� ' + TV + + + + + +Y �r + fl11 ly Y' ■■ i �} \.,)1 11 lr1 Vi�-��.�-r 11 }I 1. ♦ 1 1 1■ Im 9r� [16 ^�ram'■�\ ry�+`+ +}.+/il► 1Ilk IJ {1 I� L 1■■ ■\11 ■-g 1 �I TI 1 J y m I _.•�. II I 1 \ 1■ L 1 IB_ 11 r �_-�_� �� k rr r� a 1 11 1 1 ■ ■ ■ , 1 K ,,/ tl Q\ 1 ■ ■■ p 1 y. a r f '1 ¢+ k r' ■' ��+=° ,__-------- I J f 1 11 I 1 till IT IM _-- I i/ stpp I t 14 ly r 1� RRTH LAKE - IMPAII�E] r" m � p f' ' ' r D I P N 1 I L } 1 ■}I 1 I ENT UTRQPHiCATiON [3, yt) a xQ r r$ O ■ " 1 I _ / r I II till � ■ _ __-_ \\ol\ `�\ � -- , 1 l 11 V 1 i+� ♦ ♦� ♦♦ ■ r BASSETT CREEK . - 922 f + - V I m \♦ ~.� ��- \ I♦♦ .� k I % Jr (7,9%FT) + \\ `. �� =�_� _----±A♦ �h ` J � �1 �� •`-_,_ � � .� ----_-�-� ••—«�°—'��.—.,� 1 S } Itl {I I■ y� r I � � I M1 L1 I � �-"-- — — � — ,=.' � r � ` � —. — d� - 1 I�J. 1 r fj# _ _ - I lfl I I I14 II II i` ■ I Eh; IIr yy ' I a r , • 1 WON AND SEDIMENT CONTROL NOTES: ALL PERrMMEES, CONTRACTORS, AND SUBCONTRACTORS INVOLVED WITH STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION SHALL 013TAIN A COPY OF THE STORM WATER POLLUTION PLAN AND THE STATE OF MINNESOTA NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE: ELIMINATION SYSTEM (NFDES PHASE II PERMC) AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THEIR CONTENTS AND IS RESPONSIBLE TO COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS STATED WITHIN, THE BMP'S SHOWN ON THE PLANS ARE THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ANTICIPATED SITE CONDITIONS, AS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESSES, THE PERM ITTEEICONTRACrOR SHALL ANTICIPATE THAT ADDITIONAL BMP'S MAY BE REQUIRED AS SITE CONDITIONS CHANGE AND SHALL PROVIDE ADDITIONAL BMPS TO MEET APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS. 'ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED ACCORDING TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND SWPPP. ANY DEVIATION FROM THE APPROVED PLANS SHALL REQUIRE WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE OWNER. RESTORE ALL PERVIOUS. AREAS AS SHOWN. AREAS TO BE LANDSCAPED BY OTHERS SHALL BE TEMPORARILY RESTORED UNDER CONTRACT. EROSION CONTROL LEGEND Ms MACHINE SLICED SILT FENCE BR BIOROLL ® INLET PROTECTION + + + + TEMPORARY + + + + MULCH AND SEED CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE / EXIT 0 ° O-Zz o„?a LLwDD o ao�w z a� Q u� - aQ s3 a� a o Q C) LLJ Z CZ L W CL 0 W LL- O A J d Z 0 O F- v Z =a0 Oou Z LLI Q w —J O 0 J lL Q OZ O L Ewa z U 0 0 Z0 >-� NUS w 0 w IN�`VEWSION DATE 1 SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS PROJ.NO. 193804336 (� 30 � C2.01 / L SHE/EETT�NHMBER C - .O 1 1 O y0 NSw SiD '^3--D oub' u aoo� omD' oo�a a `yE�w >oo° Hoag baba z t;io 030? oxo I I I i i I 1 I I I I I Ip--ram 1 ! I 1 _- - - - - - - - - - - L _ r__T� _ _-- h --`Y -_ - -- r lam/ _ �.- ■ 1 o -----_-"--�� _=��`` -� - �-�`�'�-' ��'~ _ -� ` \- ■ 1 0 11 20 I I I 9�1 Y (h 00 \ i $ I f ! y / m . * + + + + + *+*+*+* + + *+*► \S +++r al + \ \! +++r+r*++ V i 1 ■ I I + + + • + 1 11 1 I V I *+'+*+*+* r yll I I 1 \ i I l I I I Nv + +++ ++ ---T III I �� / � r 11. \ hl, I I I I / ' *+*++Jr�#• �""-----•-----�� ^(> EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL NOTES: V 1, ALL PERMITTEES, CONTRACTORS, AND SUBCONTRACTORS INVOLVED WITH STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION A SHALL OBTAIN A COPY OF THE STORM WATER POLLUTION PLAN AND THE STATE OF MINNESOTA NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM (NPDES PHASE II PERMIT) AND BECOME FAMILIAR WITH THEIR W CONTENTS AND IS RESPONSIBLE TO COMPLY WITH ALL REQUIREMENTS STATED WITHIN. 2. THE BMP'S SHOWN ON THE PLANS ARE THE MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS FOR THE ANTICIPATED SITE CONDITIONS. AS CONSTRUCTION PROGRESSES, THE PERMITTEE/CONTRACTOR SHALL ANTICIPATE THAT ADDITIONAL BMP'S MAY BE ✓� REQUIRED AS SITE CONDITIONS CHANGE AND SHALL PROVIDE ADDITIONAL BMP'S TO MEET APPLICABLE REQUIREMENTS. + 3. ALL WORK AND MATERIALS SHALL BE CONSTRUCTED ACCORDING TO THE APPROVED PLANS AND SWPPP. ANY [^ DEVIATION FROM THE APPROVED PLANS SHALL REQUIRE WRITTEN APPROVAL FROM THE OWNER. + 3 ED 4. RESTORE ALL PERVIOUS AREAS AS SHOWN. AREAS TO BE LANDSCAPED BY OTHERS SHALL BE TEMPORARILY RESTORED _ UNDERCONTRACT. ° z rn a i a I 111 � y III 1 I I \\ � ,�■ 1 IJ I II 1 I I I I I Ir I L ■ 1 1 1} I I r �' §■ lilyil I I 1 11 I! I I 1 I I I it 1 I n _ _ _, , 1 i -a., •y' , III 4 i 17, II \\�I�f o N (" I �\ \ \ 1 1 1 11 I N ■ I \ ■ s \ I I \ 1 _ i 1 9 � I 915 i-------- ~• mot- �� 1 G I I d f f 1■ � } y I ■ I I 1 I I 1 I l 1 I} I I I 1 1 I t I ,II 1 l 111 I 1 I j ly III i I I I y�ll\ 1 I I1III l l I I I T%■yI� 1 / 1 I SEE SHEETI� �oi If I 11 0 E II I{ o»<d ry If I �I <GGD o 6oo LLSRw z Zz It I I; � p � II I II 6It w I 3 % 0 o <z If !I ! If I II I I, yl 1 III EROSION CONTROL LEGEND � II ws MACHINE SLICED SILT FENCE I IF Q z II BR BIOROLL F- J I INLET PROTECTION O z JO I 1L W O I I Z TEMPORARY ~ v Z MULCH II + + + + AND SEED Z J o U C 0 I II < Lu Lu Q w I� CONSTRUCTION LLJ Q v Ir ENTRANCE / EXIT J o- 0 LU II I O r z 0 w �} 3 U 0 0 W rzN Z �I L.L U I; O x < j� w 0 z !{ II U w !+ ~ w IS II 0 IE ■� X I� It I v I v 00 RFViSIOR DATE , oa N SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS APAROVM CL 0 30' 60' PROJ.NO. 193804336 SHE/ET C'/NUMBER//� L,OL o r0 o2=a i3N0 2 tj wu } 2H= op° om a3a '62' poufts >o�O u u :ado L J STORK! WATER POLLUMN PREVENTION PLAN SWPPP NARRATIVE PROJECT DESCRIPTION/LOCATION THE CITY OF NEW HOPE EXISTING CITY HALL DEMOLITION PROJECT IS LOCATED AT 4401 XYLON AVENUE N, NEW HOPE, MN, 55428, HENNEPIN COUNTY. THE PLANNED SCOPE OF THE PROJECT INCLUDES: 1. DEMOLITION OF EXISTING CITY HALL, AMPHITHEATER, AND PICNIC SHELTER 2. REMOVAL OF CONCRETE SLABS, PAVEMENTS, SIDEWALKS AND BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT 3. REMOVAL OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES. SPECIAL AND IMPAIRED WATERS THESE SPECIAL AND IMPAIRED WATERS ARE LOCATED WITHIN ONE MILE (AERIAL RADIUS) OF THE PROJECT LIMITS AND RECEIVE RUNOFF FROM THE PROJECT SITE. DUE TO THE PROXIMITY OF THESE SPECIAL AND IMPAIRED WATERS, THE BMPS DESCRIBED IN APPENDIX A OF THE NPDES PERMIT WILL APPLY TO ALL AREAS OF THE SITE. AREAS OF ENVIRONMENTAL SENSITIVITY (AES) AND INFESTED WATERS THERE ARE NO WETLANDS WITHIN AND NEAR THE PROJECT BOUNDARY. THE FOLLOWING WATER BODIES HAVE BEEN LISTED BY THE DNR AS BEING INFESTED BY INVASIVE SPECIES: NONE. SOIL TYPES SOIL TYPES TYPICALLY FOUND ON THIS PROJECT ARE URBAN LAND-UDORTHENTS (FILL). LONG TERM MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION CITY OF NEW HOPE IS RESPONSIBLE FOR THE LONG TERM MAINTENANCE AND OPERATION OF THE PERMANENT STORMWATER SYSTEM. PROJECT PERSONNEL AND TRAINING THIS SWPPP WAS PREPARED BY PERSONNEL THAT ARE CERTIFIED IN THE DESIGN OF CONSTRUCTION SWPPPS. COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATIONS ARE ON FILE WITH THEPROJECT ENGINEER AND ARE AVAILABLE UPON REQUEST. PROVIDE A CERTIFIED EROSION CONTROL SUPERVISOR IN GOOD STANDING WHO IS KNOWLEDGEABLE AND EXPERIENCED IN THE APPLICATION OF EROSION PREVENTION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES. THE EROSION CONTROL SUPERVISOR WILL WORK WITH THE OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE TO OVERSEE THE IMPLEMENTATION OF THE SWPPP AND THE INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE OF THE EROSION PREVENTION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BMPS BEFORE, DURING AND AFTER CONSTRUCTION UNTIL THE NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT) HAS BEEN FILET] WITH THE MPCA. PROVIDE PROOF OF CERTIFICATION AT THE PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING, WORK WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO COMMENCE UNTIL PROOF OF CERTIFICATION HAS BEEN PROVIDED TO THE OWNER. PROVIDE AT LEAST ONE CERTIFIED INSTALLER FOR EACH CONTRACTOR OR SUBCONTRACTOR THAT INSTALLS THE PRODUCTS LISTED IN SPECIFICATION SECTION 0157 13. PROVIDE PROOF OF CERTIFICATION AT THE PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING. WORK WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO COMMENCE UNTIL PROOF OF CERTIFICATION HAS BEEN PROVIDED TO THE OWNER. CHAIN OF RESPONSIBILITY CITY OF NEW HOPE AND THE CONTRACTOR ARE COPERMITEES FOR THE NATIONAL POLLUTANT DISCHARGE ELIMINATION SYSTEM (NPDES) CONSTRUCTION PERMIT. THE CONTRACTOR 15 RESPONSIBLE TO COMPLY WITH ALL ASPECTS OF THE NPDES CONSTRUCTION PERMIT AT ALL TIMES UNTIL THE NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT) HAS BEEN FILED WITH THE MPCA. THE CONTRACTOR WILL DEVELOP A CHAIN OF COMMAND WITH ALL OPERATORS ON THE SITE TO ENSURE THAT THE SWPPP WILL BE IMPLEMENTED AND STAY IN EFFECT UNTIL THE CONSTRUCTION PROJECT I5 COMPLETE, THE ENTIRE SITE HAS UNDERGONE FINAL STABILIZATION, AND NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT) HAS BEEN SUBMITTED TO THE MPCA. PROJECT CONTACTS THE PROJECT ENGINEER AND CONTRACTOR ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR IMPLEMENTATION OF THE SWPPP AND INSTALLATION, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE OF THE EROSION PREVENTION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BMPS BEFORE, DURING AND AFTER CONSTRUCTION UNTIL THE NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT) HAS BEEN FILED. ORGANIZATION CONTACT NAME PHONE CITY ENGINEER CHRIS LONG 612-712-2081 PROJECT ENGINEER DAVID AHRENS 612-712-2001 CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE LUCAS MILLER 612-712-2093 MPCA DUTY OFFICER 24 HOUR EMERGENCY NOTIFICATION: 651-649-5451 OR 800-422-0798 LOCATION OF SWPPP REQUIREMENTS THE REQUIRED SWPPP ELEMENTS MAY BE LOCATED IN MANY PLACES WITHIN THE PLAN SET AS WELL AS THE SPECIFICATIONS. THE NOTES AND TABLE BELOW ARE INTENDED TO BE A QUICK REFERENCE FOR THE CONTRACTOR AND CAR TO USE IN THE FIELD. THERE MAY BE ADDITIONAL REQUIRED SWPPP ELEMENTS INCLUDED ON THE PROJECT THAT ARE NOT LISTED ON THIS SHEET. LOCATION OF SWPPP REQUIREMENTS IN PROJECT PLAN DESCRIPTION LOCATION TEMPORARY EROSION CONTROL MEASURES SHEETS NO. C2.01 TO C2.02 PERMANENT EROSION CONTROL MEASURES SHEETS NO. C2.01 TO C2.02 DIRECTION OF FLOW SHEETS NO. C2.01 TO C2.02 FINAL STABILIZATION PROJECT 193804335 - PARK AMENITIES, PARKING LOT AND LANDSCAPING DRAINAGE STRUCTURES PROJECT 193804335 - PARK AMENITIES, PARKING LOT AND LANDSCAPING STORM SEWER PROFILE SHEETS PROJECT 193804335 - PARK AMENITIES, PARKING LOT AND LANDSCAPING EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DETAILS SHEETS NO, CB.01 REMOVALS PLAN SHEETS NO. 00.01 TO 00.04 STORMWATER CALCULATIONS AND ADDITIONAL HYDRAULIC DESIGN INFORMATION IS STORED AT THE PROJECT ENGINEER'S OFFICE. OOQ owz Oy Q <w 000 O S S =}� A goo 330 o Q O z W Q a Z Ja 0 C Oo z L W Q w LL0� � P W Q O 00 0 =z }U F— w 0 3 U0 ° W 0� 0 a w Z� Q LL � U � w 0 DATE SURVEY p} DRAWN �y DESIGNED CHECKED . ♦— PROJ.NO. 193804336 SHEET NUMBER C2.03 I i E u ss o0= z3„o Owpu 000tj Dao o =¢ o o > >oo° Boa° o�D6 oypi aua z�>o 030j a:o STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN SWPPP NARRATIVE CONTINUED SITE INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE INSPECT THE ENTIRE CONSTRUCTION SITE A MINIMUM OF ONCE EVERY SEVEN DAYS DURING ACTIVE CONSTRUCTION AND WITHIN 24 HOURS AMR A RAINFALL EVENT GREATER THAN 0.5 INCHES 1N 24 HOURS. INSPECT ALL TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT, EROSION PREVENTION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BMPS UNTIL THE SITE HAS UNDERGONE FINAL STABILIZATION AND THE NOT HAS BEEN SUBMITTED. INSPECT SURFACE WATER INCLUDING DRAINAGE DITCHES FOR SIGNS OF EROSION AND SEDIMENT DEPOSITION. INSPECT CONSTRUCTON SITE VEHICLE EXIT LOCATIONS FOR EVIDENCE OF TRACKING ONTO PAVED SURFACES. INSPECT SURROUNDING PROPERTIES FOR EVIDENCE OF OFF SITE SEDIMENT ACCUMULATION. INSPECT INFILTRATION AREAS FOR SIGNS OF SEDIMENT DEPOSITION AND COMPACTION (TO ENSURE THAT EQUIPMENT 1S NOT BEING DRIVEN ACROSS THE AREA). RECORD ALL INSPECTIONS AND MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES IN WRITING WITHIN 24 HOURS. SUBMIT INSPECTION REPORTS IN A FORMAT THAT IS ACCEPTABLE TO THE PROJECT ENGINEER. INCLUDE THE FOLLOWING IN THE RECORDS OF EACH INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE ACTIVITY: A. DATE AND TIME OF INSPECTIONS B. NAME OF PERSONS CONDUCTING INSPECTIONS C. FINDINGS OF INSPECTIONS, INCLUDING RECOMMENDATIONS FOR CORRECTIVE ACTIONS D. CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN, INCLUDING DATES, TIMES, AND PARTY COMPLETING MAINTENANCE ACTIVITIES E. DATE AND AMOUNT OF ALL RAINFALL EVENTS GREATER THAN 0.5 INCH IN 24 HOURS F. DOCUMENTS AND CHANGES MADE TO THE SWPPP REPLACE, REPAIR OR SUPPLEMENT ALL NONFUNCTIONAL BMPS BY THE END OF THE NEXT BUSINESS DAY FOLLOWING DISCOVERY UNLESS LISTED DIFFERENTLY BELOW: A. REPAIR, REPLACE, OR SUPPLEMENT PERIMETER CONTROL DEVICES WHEN IT BECOMES NONFUNCTIONAL OR SEDIMENT REACHES 1/2 THE HEIGHT OF THE DEVICE. COMPLETE REPAIRS BY THE END OF THE NEXT BUSINESS DAY FOLLOWING DISCOVERY. B. REPAIR OR REPLACE INLET PROTECTION DEVICES WHEN THEY BECOME NONFUNCTIONAL OR SEDIMENT REACHES 1/2 THE HEIGHT AND/OR DEPTH OF THE DEVICE. C. DRAIN AND REMOVE SEDIMENT FROM TEMPORARY AND PERMANENT SEDIMENT BASINS ONCE THE SEDIMENT HAS REACHED 1/2 THE STORAGE VOLUME. COMPLETE WORK WITHIN 72 HOURS OF DISCOVERY. D. REMOVE ALL DELTAS AND SEDIMENT DEPOSITED IN SURFACE WATERS INCLUDING DRAINAGE WAYS, CATCH BASINS, AND OTHER DRAINAGE SYSTEMS. RESTABILIZE ANY AREAS THAT ARE DISTURBED BY SEDIMENT REMOVAL OPERATIONS. SEDIMENT REMOVAL AND STABILIZATION MUST BE COMPLETED WITHIN 7 DAYS OF DISCOVERY. PREPARE AND SUBMIT A SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR WORKING IN SURFACE WATERS. CONTACT ALL APPROPRIATE AUTHORITIES PRIOR TO WORKING IN SURFACE WATERS. E. REMOVE TRACKED SEDIMENT FROM PAVED SURFACES BOTH ON AND OFF SITE WITHIN 24 HOURS OF DISCOVERY. STREET SWEEPING MAY HAVE TO OCCUR MORE OFTEN TO MINIMIZE OFF SITE IMPACTS. LIGHTLY WET THE PAVEMENT PRIOR TO SWEEPING. F. MAINTAIN ALL BMPS UNTIL WORK HAS BEEN COMPLETED, SITE HAS GONE UNDER FINAL STABILIZATION, AND THE NOTICE OF TERMINATION (NOT) HAS BEEN SUBMITTED TO THE MPCA. ENVIRONMENTAL REVIEW THIS PROJECT IS NOT LOCATED IN A WELL HEAD PROTECTION AREA. THIS PROJECT IS NOT LOCATED IN A DRINKING WATER SUPPLY MANAGEMENT AREA (DWSMA) LAND FEATURE CHANGES TOTAL DISTURBED AREA 4.0 ACRES TOTAL EXISTING IMPERVIOUS SURFACE AREA 1.2 ACRES TOTAL PROPOSED IMPERVIOUS SURFACE AREA 0.0 ACRES TOTAL PROPOSED NET CHANGE IN IMPERVIOUS SURFACE AREA -1.2 ACRES STABILIZATION TIME FRAMES AREA TIME FRAME NOTES LAST 200 LINEAL FEET OF DRAINAGE DITCH OR SWALE WITHIN 24 HOURS OF CONNECTION TO SURFACE WATER OR PROPERTY EDGE REMAINING PORTIONS OF DRAINAGE DITCH OR SWALE 7 DAYS L 3 PIPE AND CULVERT OUTLETS 24 HOURS EXPOSED SOILS AND STOCKPILES 7 DAYS 1 1. INITIATE STABILIZATION IMMEDIATELY WHEN CONSTRUCTION HAS TEMPORARILY OR PERMANENTLY CEASED ON ANY PORTION OF THE SITE. COMPLETE STABILIZATION WTTKIN THE TIME FRAME LISTED. IN MANY INSTANCES THIS WILL REQUIRE STABILIZATION TO OCCUR MORE THAN ONCE DURING THE COURSE OF THE PROJECT. TEMPORARY SOIL STOCKPILES WITHOUT SIGNIFICANT CLAY OR SILT AND STOCKPILED CONSTRUCTED ROAD BASE ARE EXEMPT FROM THE STABILIZATION REQUIREMENT. 2. APPLICATION OF MULCH, HYDROMULCH, TACKIFIER AND POLYACRYLAMIDE ARE NOT ACCEPTABLE STABILIZATION METHODS IN THESE AREAS. 3. STABILIZE ALL AREAS OF THE SITE PRIOR TO THE ONSET OF WINTER. ANY WORK STILL BEING PERFORMED WILL BE SNOW MULCHED, SEEDED, AND BLANKETED WITHIN THE TIME FRAMES IN THE NPDES PERMIT. 4. TOPSOIL BERMS MUST BE STABILIZED IN ORDER TO BE CONSIDERED PERIMETER CONTROL BMPS. USE RAPID STABILIZATION METHOD 2, 3, OR 4 AS DIRECTED BY THE CAR. THE SEED MIX USED IN THE RAPID STABILIZATION MAY BE SUBSTITUTED AS FOLLOWS: A. SINGLE YEAR CONSTRUCTION BETWEEN MAY 1 - AUGUST 1, SEED WITH SEED MIXTURE 21-111 B. SINGLE YEAR CONSTRUCTION BETWEEN AUGUST 1 AND OCTOBER 31, SEED WITH SEED MIXTURE 21-112 C. MULTI YEAR CONSTRUCTION 22-111 5. KEEP DITCHES AND EXPOSED SOILS IN AN EVEN ROUGH GRADED CONDITION IN ORDER TO BE ABLE TO APPLY EROSION CONTROL MULCHES, HYDROMULCHES AND BLANKETS. ooz 0' o „'aQ u2Qo 0 ¢a�-0 =oy� a � - y'oo 0a �oa3 �aa T3 z a 6 o Q F�- 0 N LL Z CZ L LLI d 0 2 3 LL LL 0 F- F- L� DATE [DESIGNED RVEYAWN DA DA ECKED KS PROJ. NO. 193W4336 SHEEP NUMBER C2.04 0 a •o =2- Wt V oo ono° STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN SWPPP NARRATIVE CONTINUED 4.i 22 0.Gaa GENERAL SWPPP NOTES FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY 0 0 0 1. AMEND THE SWPPP AND DOCUMENT ANY AND ALL CHANGES TO THE SWPPP AND ASSOCIATED PLAN SHEETS IN A TIMELY MANNER. STORE THE SWPPP AND ALL AMENDMENTS ON SITE AT ALL TIMES. w e P 2. PREPARE AND SUBMIT A SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN FOR THE OWNER'S ACCEPTANCE FOR CONCRETE MANAGEMENT 114CLUOING CONCRETE WASH CUT AREA, CONCRETE SLURRY APPLICATION AREAS, WORK IN AND NEAR AREAS OF ENVIRONMENTAL SENSITIVITY, AREAS IDENTIFIED IN THE PLANS AS "SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN AREA, ANY WORK �4J N o THAT WILL REQUIRE DEWATERING, AND AS REQUESTED BY THE OWNER. SUBMIT ALL SITE MANAGEMENT Y PLANS TO THE OWNER IN WRITING. ALLOW A MINIMUM OF 7 DAYS FOR CITY ENGINEER TO REVIEW AND ACCEPT SITE MANAGEMENT PLAN SUBMITTALS. WORK WILL NOT BE ALLOWED TO COMMENCE IF A SITE MANAGEMENT a PLAN IS REQUIRED UNTIL ACCEPTANCE HAS BEEN GRANTED BY THE OWNER. THERE WILL BE NO EXTRA TIME ADDED TO THE CONTRACT DUE TO THE UNTIMELY SUBMITTAL. a°�. 3. BURNING OF ANY MATERIAL IS NOT ALLOWED WITHIN PROJECT BOUNDARY. owpz0 <6>a `&o a 4. DO NOT DISTURB AREAS OUTSIDE OF THE CONSTRUCTION LIMITS. DELINEATE AREAS NOT TO BE DISTURBED PRIOR TO STARTING GROUND DISTURBING ACTIVITIES. IF IT BECOMES NECESSARY TO DISTURB AREAS OUTSIDE cV z OF THE CONSTRUCTION LIMITS OBTAIN WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM THE CAR PRIOR TO PROCEEDING. PRESERVE ALL NATURAL BUFFERS SHOWN ON THE PLANS. o 5. ROUTE STORMWATER AROUND UNSTABILIZED AREAS OF THE SITE WHENEVER FEASIBLE. PROVIDE EROSION CONTROL AND VELOCITY DISSIPATION DEVICES AS NEEDED TO KEEP CHANNELS FROM ERODING AND TO PREVENT 0z� _ w ° - NUISANCE CONDITIONS AT THE OUTLET. o p i 6. DIRECT DISCHARGES FROM BMPS TO VEGETATED AREAS WHENEVER FEASIBLE. PROVIDE VELOCITY DISSIPATION DEVICES AS NEEDED TO PREVENT EROSION. o `a `uo 0 d LLp„W u 7. THE EROSION PREVENTION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL BMPS SHAl,1, BE PLACED A5 NECESSARY TO MINIMIZE EROSION FROM DISTURBED SURFACES AND TO CAPTURE SEDIMENT ON SITE. ALL EROSION CONTROL MEASURES wsLLz HALL BE IN PLACE PRIOR TO COMMENCEMENT OF ANY REMOVAL WORK AND/OR GROUND DISTURBING ACTIVITIES. 00 a 8. ESTABLISH SEDIMENT CONTROL DEVICES ON ALL DOWN GRADIENT PERIMETERS AND UPGRADIENT OF ANY BUFFER ZONES BEFORE ANY UP GRADIENT LAND DISTURBING ACTIVITIES BEGIN. MAINTAIN SEDIMENT CONTROL DEVICES UNTIL CONSTRUCTION IS COMPLETE AND THE SITE IS STABILIZED. A 9. LOCATE PERIMETER CONTROL ON THE CONTOUR TO CAPTURE OVERLAND, LOW- VELOCITY SHEET FLOWS DOWN GRADIENT OF ALL EXPOSED SOILS AND PRIOR TO DISCHARGING TO SURFACE WATERS. PLACE )-HOOKS AT A I MAXIMUM OF 100 FOOT INTERVALS. 10. PROVIDE PERIMETER CONTROL AROUND ALL STOCKPILES. PLACE BMP A MINIMUM 5 FEET FROM THE TOE OF SLOPE WHERE FEASIBLE. DO NOT PLACE STOCKPILES IN NATURAL BUFFER AREAS, SURFACE WATERS OR 3 STORMWATER CONVEYANCES. 11. DITCH CHECKS WILL BE PLACED AS INDICATED ON THE PLANS DURING ALL PHASES OF CONSTRUCTION. 12. PROTECT STORM SEWER INLETS AT ALL TIMES WITH THE APPROPRIATE INLET PROTECTION FOR EACH SPECIFIC PHASE OF CONSTRUCTION. PROVWE INLET PROTECTION DEVICES WITH EMERGENCY OVERFLOW CAPA81L1TIES. SILT FENCE PLACED IN THE INLET GRATE IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE INLET PROTECTION BMP FOR GRADING OPERATIONS. SILT FENCE PLACED IN THE GRATE IS ONLY ALLOWED FOR SHORT INTERVALS DURING MILLING OR PAVING OPERATIONS. INLET PROTECTION DEVICES MAY NEED TO BE PLACED MULTIPLE TIMES IN THE SAME LOCATION OVER THE LIFE OF THE CONTRACT. KEEP ALL STORM SEWER INLET PROTECTION DEVICES IN GOOF] FUNCTIONAL CONDITION AT ALL TIMES. REPLACE INLET PROTECTION DEVICE WITH A SUITABLE ALTERNATIVE IF THE CAR DEEMS AN INLET PROTECTION DEVICE TO BE NONFUNCTIONAL, IN POOR CONDITION, INEFFECTIVE, OR NOT APPROPRIATE FOR THE CURRENT CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES. THERE WILL BE NO COST TO METRO TRANSIT FOR REPLACEMENT OF INLET PROTECTION DEVICES. 13. PLACE CONSTRUCTION EXITS, AS NECESSARY, TO PREVENT TRACKING OF SEDIMENT ONTO PAVED SURFACES BOTH ON AND OFF THE PROJECT SITE. PROVIDE CONSTRUCTION EXITS OF SUFFICIENT SIZE TO PREVENT TRACK OUT. MAINTAIN CONSTRUCTION EXITS WHEN EVIDENCE OF TRACKING IS DISCOVERED. REGULAR STREET SWEEPING IS NOT AN ACCEPTABLE ALTERNATIVE TO PROPER CONSTRUCTION EXIT INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE. 0 Z Q 14. DISCHARGE TURBID OR SEDIMENT LADEN WATER TO TEMPORARY SEDIMENT BASINS WHENEVER FEASIBLE. IN THE EVENT THAT IT IS NOT FEASIBLE TO DISCHARGE THE SEDIMENT LADEN WATER TO A TEMPORARY SEDIMENT W Q a BASIN, THE WATER MUST BE TREATED SO THAT IT DOES NOT CAUSE A NUISANCE CONDITION IN THE RECEIVING WATERS OR TO DOWNSTREAM LANDOWNERS. CLEAN OUT ALL PERMANENT STORMWATER BASINS REGARDLESS OF Z rn O WHETHER USED AS TEMPORARY SEDIMENT BASINS OR TEMPORARY SEDIMENT TRAPS TO THE DESIGN CAPACITY AFTER ALL UPGRADIENT LAND DISTURBING ACTIVITY IS COMPLETED. 00 Z 15. PROVIDE SCOUR PROTECTION AT ANY OUTFALL OF DEWATERING ACTIVITIES. C < �E Z w LLJ Q w 0 v 16. PROVIDE STABILIZATION IN ANY TRENCHES CUT FOR DEWATERING OR SITE DRAINING PURPOSES. W o_ t1 J O ZO QZ� p POLLUTION PREVENTION = > rw� U p 1. PROVIDE A SPILL KIT AT EACH WORK LOCATION ON THE SITE. W = C00- L w 2. STORE ALL BUILDING MATERIALS THAT HAVE THE POTENTIAL TO LEACH POLLUTANTS, PESTICIDES, HERBICIDES, INSECTICIDES, FERTILIZERS, TREATMENT CHEMICALS, AND LANDSCAPE MATERIALS UNDER COVER AND WITH SECONDARY Z� Q CONTAINMf NT. LL � U 3. PROVIDE A SECURE STORAGE AREA WITH RESTRICTED ACCESS FOR ALL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND TOXIC WASTE. RETURN ALL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND TOXIC WASTE TO THE DESIGNATED STORAGE AREA AT THE Ox O N END OF THE BUSINESS DAY UNLESS INFEASIBLE. STORE ALL HAZARDOUS MATERIALS AND TOXIC WASTE (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO OIL, DIESEL FUEL, GASOLINE, HYDRAULIC FLUIDS, PAINT, PETROLEUM BASED PRODUCTS, WOOD PRESERVATIVES ADDITIVES, CURING COMPOUNDS, AND ACIDS) IN SEALED CONTAINERS WITH SECONDARY CONTAINMENT. CLEAN UP SPILLS IMMEDIATELY. 4. STORE, COLLECT AND DISPOSE OF ALL SOLID WASTE. 5. POSITION ALL PORTABLE TOILETS SO THAT THEY ARE SECURE AND CANNOT BE TIPPED OR KNOCKED OVER. PROPERLY DISPOSE OF ALL SANITARY WASTE. 6. FUEL AND MAINTAIN VEHICLES IN A DESIGNATED CONTAINED AREA WHENEVER FEASIBLE. USE DRIP PANS OR ABSORBENT MATERIALS TO PREVENT SPILLS OR LEAKED CHEMICALS FROM DISCHARGING TO SURFACE WATER OR STORMWATER CONVEYANCES. PROVIDE A SPILL KIT AT EACH LOCATION THAT VEHICLES AND EQUIPMENT ARE FUELED OR MAINTAINED. 7. LIMIT VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT WASHING TO A DEFINED AREA OF THE SITE. CONTAIN RUNOFF FROM THE WASHING AREA TO A TEMPORARY SEDIMENT BASIN OR OTHER EFFECTIVE CONTROL. PROPERLY DISPOSE OF ALL WASTE GENERATED BY VEHICLE AND EQUIPMENT WASHING. ENGINE DEGREASING IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE SITE. 8. PROVIDE EFFECTIVE CONTAINMENT FOR ALL LIQUID AND SOLID WASTES GENERATED BY WASHOUT OF CONCRETE, STUCCO, PAINT, FORM RELEASE OILS, CURING COMPOUNDS AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS. LIQUID AND SOLID WASHOUT WASTES MUST NOT CONTACT THE GROUND. DESIGN THE CONTAINMENT SO THAT IT DOES NOT RESULT IN RUNOFF FROM THE WASHOUT OPERATIONS OR CONTAINMENT AREA. 9. CREATE AND FOLLOW A WRITTEN DISPOSAL PLAN FOR ALL WASTE MATERIALS. INCLUDE IN THE PLAN HOW THE MATERIAL WILL BE DISPOSED OF AND THE LOCATION OF THE DISPOSAL SITE. SUBMIT PLAN TO THE ENGINEER. 10. USE METHODS AND OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES THAT PREVENT DISCHARGE OR PLACEMENT OF BITUMINOUS GRINDINGS, CUTTINGS, MILLINGS, AND OTHER BITUMINOUS WASTES FROM AREAS OF EXISTING OR FUTURE VEGETATED SOILS AND FROM ALL WATER CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS, INCLUDING INLETS, DITCHES AND CURB FLOW LINES. It. USE METHODS AND OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES THAT PREVENT CONCRETE DUST, PARTICLES, CONCRETE WASH OUT, AND OTHER CONCRETE WASTES FROM LEAVING THE PROJECT SITE, DEPOSITING IN EXISTING OR FUTURE VEGETATED AREAS, AND FROM ENTERING STORMWATER CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS, INCLUDING INLETS, DITCHES AND CURB FLOW LINES. USE METHODS AND OPERATIONAL PROCEDURES THAT PREVENT SAW CUT SLURRY AND PLANING WASTE FROM LEAVING THE PROJECT SITE AND FROM ENTERING STORMWATER CONVEYANCE SYSTEMS INCLUDING DITCHES AND CULVERTS. DATE SURVEY PR DRAWN DA DESIGNED DA CHECKED KS PROJ•NO. )93W4336 SHEET NUMBER C2.05 §;o \j\\ y J O Ngu 3 o EXISTING CURB 0 OVERFLOW IS OF _ ED WOODEN LATH SHALL BE NAILED SECURELY THE CURB BOX HEIGHT p ` KEY ROTES TO THE POST MEMBER TO SECURE FILTER FABRIC. _ 1. T-post length, 5 R. min, at 6' Tr1aX. spacing. _ 2. Geotexdle shall meet MnDOT Spec. 3886. /,rX 4" HORIZONTAL MEMBERS CONTINUOUS 3. 6" X 6" fabric anchorage trench and backhll with tamped natural soil. AROUND TOP, FASTENED TO EACH POST USING4. Plas[ic zip tles (3 minimum w/ 501b tensile) located On top B", 2-20D COMMON NAILS m W D 5. Machine s11[e V'- 12" de a w � = pth (plus 6" flap). 2" X 9' X S' LONG WOOD SILT (GEOTEXTILE) FENCE, 6. Silt fence to wrap around post at least 1801. POSTS, 8 REQ'D. AS SPECIFIED. BOTTOM i p r 6" OF FABRIC TO BE BURIED TO PREVENT 0 0 < unoERwAs atc PLAN a U WIMCO ROAD DRAIN CG-3067• HIGH FLOW INLET PROTECTION CURB h DEFLECTOR PLATE > o o OR CITY APPROVED EQUAL. GUTTER MODEL ROCK-6" MINIMUM DEPTH a WOODCHIPS-18" MINIMUM DEPTH o aq i OVERFLOW IS P� OF Ija THE CURB BOX HEIGHT 0 0 O OVERFLOW AT TOP U OF FILTER ASSEMBLY Y DIRECTION OF DIRECTION OF ,@ 2"3" WASHED ROCK oA il(! o: o RUNOFF FLOW RUNOFF FLOW '�@' BURY CURB WOODCHIPS PER gSILT FENCE SPECIFICATIONS J o Y E 24" MINIMUM CUT OFF BERM TO MINIMIZE RUNOFF FROM SITE NN ❑ ❑ FVN co 6 POST JOINING 314" CLEAR ROCK NOTES: 1' DEEP X V WIDE 1. FILTER FABRIC SHALL BE PLACED UNDER ROCK TO STOP MUD MIGRATION THROUGH ROCK, MANUAL INSTALLATION FILTER ASSEMBLY FILTER FABRIC IS NOT REQUIRED UNDER WOODCHIPS. STANDARD & HIGH -FLOW MACHINE SLICED DIAMETER, 2, 80%OF WOODCHIPS USED FOR CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCES MUST BE BETWEEN 2INCHES AND 5 STANDARD &HIGH -FLOW NOTES 6" ON -GRADE INCHES, NO CHIPPED -UP MANUFACTURED WOOD AND/OR CHEMICALLY TREATED WOOD IS + THE BASIN D TO SET POSTS AND FABRIC AROUND 10" AT LOW POINT ALLOWED. r ! THE BASIN DURING THE BACKFILONG OPERATION. SIZE AND SHAPE OF THE BARRIER SHALL BE 3. ENTRANCE MUST BE MAINTAINED REGULARLY TO PREVENT SEDIMENTATION ON PUBLIC MODIFIED TO FIT STRUCTURE, SILT FENCE TO BE PLACED HIGH -FLOW FABRIC ROADWAYS. FUGITIVE ROCK OR WOODCHIPS WILL BE REMOVED FROM ADJACENT ROADWAYS AROUND ENTIRE PERIMETER. TOP OF SILT FENCE TO HAVE • FOR THE NEW R-32W.V8 STANDARD CASTING, DAILY OR MORE FREQUENTLY AS NECESSARY. 12" MIN. CLEARENCE TO EXISTING GRADE. MTALL WIMCO ROAD OWN CG-3M OR CITY APPROVED EQUAL. wrREASION. vsrREwslaN: INLET PROTECTION vsr REVISION: vsT RensIDN: SILT FENCE INSTALLATION AUG 2017 EROSION CONTROL AROUND Jan. zoos Stantec Stantec CATCH BASIN [� Stantec CATCH BA IN INS RT Jan. zoos Stantec ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE Janzo15 PIAJE NO - PIATE NO PLATE NO CITY OF NEW HOPE, MN ERO-1 CITY OF NEW HOPE, MN ERO-4A CITY OF NEW HOPE, MN ERO-4C CITY OF NEW HOPE, MN ERON7 OO? o»zd LL;0 d WaLLi z � ci O— �pa� u� rma3 ❑ d� a .. s3a� a ,00 a Q 0 LU Z 5Z L LU CL O LU 2 L L_ 0 U Z 0 J P 0<0 L Z LU Q � J J a Q JU - LLJ Q Z 0 rU� �LUU5 UO Ole 0 Z� NU X LU DATE 1 SURVEY I� DRAWN OA DESIGNED DA CHECKED es AfPAfy✓6p Ct 'RDJ. NO, 193B04336 • r Stant@G BIDDER: Donlar Construction Company DOCUMENT 00 41 1 OR REVISED BID FORM NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL PROJECT NO. 193804337 CITY PROJECT NO, 995 NEW HOPE, MINNESOTA 2019 THIS BID IS SUBMITTED TO: j City of New Hope City Hall 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 1.01 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 2.01 Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid Security. The Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid Opening, or for such longer period of time that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner. 3.01 In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents that: ! A. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, the other related data identified in the Bidding ! Documents, and the following Addenda, receipt of all which is hereby acknowledged: &dd_endum N9. Addendum Date One Four (1) - 2/21/19 (4) - 3/08/19 Two Five 2 - 2/28/19 (5) - 3/11/19 r (31 - 3/nl?/19 l{ B. Bidder has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. Bidder is familiar with and is satisfied as to all federal, state, and local Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. Bidder has carefully studied all: (1) reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at, or contiguous to, the Site and all drawings of physical conditions in or relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at, or contiguous to, the Site (except Underground Facilities) which have been identified in SC-4.02, and (2) reports and drawings of Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified in SC-4.06. E. Bidder has obtained and carefully studied (or accepts the consequences for not doing so) all additional or supplementary l examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data concerning conditions (surface, subsurface, and Underground Facilities) at, or contiguous to, the Site which may affect cost, progress, or performance of the work or which relate to any aspect of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Bidder, including applying the specific means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction expressly required by the Bidding Documents to be employed by Bidder, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. F_ Bidder does not consider that any further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the determination of this Bid for performance of the Work at the price(s) Bid and within the times and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents. 1 L_ © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 00 41 1OR- T - —"" - - — - -- --—REV1SEab[D-PORM L G. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents. H. Bidder has correlated the information known to Bidder, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Bidding Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Bidding Documents. 1, Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all -conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and the written resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Bidder. J, The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for the performance of the Work for which this Bid is submitted. K- Bidder will submit written evidence of its authority to do business in the state where the Project is located not later than the date of its execution of the Agreement. 4.01 Bidder further represents that: A. The prices in this Bid have been arrived at independently, without consultation, communication, or agreement as to any matters relating to such prices with any other Bidder or with any competitor for the purpose of restricting competition. B. The prices in this Bid have not or will not be knowingly disclosed to any other Bidder or competitor prior to opening of the Bids. C. No attempt has been made or will be made by the Bidder to induce any other person or firm to submit or not to submit a Bid for the purpose of restricting competition. 4.02 Bidder understands that the law may require the Owner, or Engineer at the Owner's direction, to undertake an investigation and submit an evaluation concerning Bidder's responsiveness, responsibility, and qualifications before awarding a contract. Bidder hereby waives any and all claims, of whatever nature, against Owner, Engineer and their employees and agents, which arise out of or relate to such investigation and evaluation, and statements made as a result thereof, except for statements that can be shown by clear and convincing evidence to be intentionally false and made with actual malice. Nothing in this paragraph is intended to restrict Bidder's rights to challenge a contract pursuant to law. 5.01 Bidder will complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the following price(s): Unit Prices have been computed in accordance with Sectio 01 20 00 - Price and Payment Procedures. Bidder acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Bid items will be based on actual quantities provided, delerrnined as provided in the ContracT Documents. No. Item Units Qty Unit Price Total Price PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT FUNDING RELATED ELEMENTS 1-1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE SCOPE OF WORK DEFINED IN THE CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND �aD IN THE PROJECT MANUAL LS 1 $ $ 1-2 HELICAL PILES (30-ft. base length) EA 653 $ 1-3 HELICAL PILE EXTENSIONS LF 2000 $ ��v $ (o7 J (204 1-4 HELICAL PILE LOAD TESTS (3-COMPRESSION/1-TENSI0N) EA 4 $ 0-,6 $ ?n 10 TOTAL PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT RELATED ELEMENTS $ © 2019 Stantec 119J8U433/ _ REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 T Z]631-f01�-� ---REVISE6BIo-F6RM-- No. Item Units Qty Unit Price Total Price PART 2 - BASE BID: POOL, BUILDINGS AND FENCE 2-1. MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO COMPLETE THE SCOPE OMANUAL CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS AND IN THEPROJECT NUAL LS I $�, r i, �13 $ �� '13 TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS AND FENCE $��J PART 3 - BASE BID: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS 3-1. STREET SWEEPER WITH PICKUP BROOM HR 40 $ I.S-Q $ (obit o 3-2. REMOVE STORM SEWER STRUCTURE EA 3 $ �`" O $ d 3-3. REMOVE STORM SEWER PIPE LF 410 $ I $ a akp 3-4. INLET PROTECTION EA 17 $ $ L4 )S-o 3-5. SILT FENCE, TYPE MACHINE SLICED LF 2500 $ — 3.6. ROCK CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE TN 30 $� $ 0 3-7. EROSION CONTROL BLANKET, CAT. 3 SY 300 $ $ 3-8. SANITARY SEWER MANHOLE EA 2 $ Lf, 9-3 1 $ G sA 3.9. 6" PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE LF 114 $ 3 0V $3 3-10. 8" PVC SANITARY SEWER PIPE LF 219 $ 3,7 $ 3-11. 6" PVC SCHED 40 SANITARY SEWER SERVICE PIPE LF 53 $ L f 3 $ 3-12. 6" X 6" SERVICE WYE EA 1 $ J $ 3-13. 8" X 6" SERVICE WYE EA 1 $ 1 $� 3-14. CONNECT TO EXISTING SANITARY SEWER PIPE EA 1 $� $ j �f 3.15. 6" PVC WATERMAIN LF 230 $ Wo $(pr}- 3-16. 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX EA 1 $ �p $ 3-17. DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS LB 133 $ $ fliqS- 3-18. HYDRANT, INCL 6" GATE VALVE AND BOX EA 1 $ (0200 $ (g 00 3-19. CONNECT TO EXISTING WATERMAIN EA 1 $ a, �6 $ I.SOO 3-20. 4' DIA. STORM SEWER CBMH WITH 3SUMP EA 1 $ff $ SID D 3-21. 12" RCP, CL. 5 STORM SEWER PIPE LF 93 $ l0 $ (o t � g 3-22. 4" PERFORATED DRAIN TILE, WITH SOCK LF 370 $ � f $ 8 3 Q 3.23. 4" PIPE DRAIN LF 370 $ 13 $ L � � 6 3-24, 4" DRAIN TILE CLEANOUT EA 9 $ �� $ °)�`9S 3-25. BULKHEAD STORM SEWER PIPE EA 2 $� $ -S-3 3-26. CONNECT TO EXISTING STORM SEWER STRUCTURE EA 1 $ 1 D0 ❑ $ 10500 I © 2019 Stantec j 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3-00-4Tf0R - - - - -REVISED-BaFORM- No. Item Units vty Unit Price Total 3-27. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SF 1725 $ 'L I , So() $ -� {pDs 3.28. COMMON EXCAVATION (PARKING LOT) (P) CY 1370 $ $ q00 3.29. SUBGRADE EXCAVATION (CV) CY 50 $t U $ —L❑d 3-30. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 675 $ $ 'a0 ').� 3-31, SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TN 800 $ $ 3.32. AGGREGATE BASE, CLASS 5 TN 380 $_ $ 3-33. BITUMINOUS MATERIAL FOR TACK COAT GAL 30 $ $ fs-d 3-34. MASTIC ON LIP OF CURB LF 600 $ $ ().00 3-35. TYPE SP 12.5 NON -WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 55 $ f 36 $ t.5-0 3-36. TYPE SP 9.5 WEARING COURSE MIXTURE (2,C) TN 65 $ $ 0 3-37. 7" CONCRETE PAVEMENT SY 27 $ ( $ 1� 3.38. B612 CONCRETE CURB AND GUTTER LF 600 $ I $ 11601, 3-39. 4" CONCRETE WALK SF 610 $� $ 3 CS o 3-40. 4" SOLID WHITE LINE, PAINT LF 25 $ a $ :S�'p 3.41. TOPSOIL BORROW, MNDOT 3877.28 (LV) CY 115 $ 4G $ 3-42. SOD SY 600 $ 1 $ VZ (5 3-43. DECIDUOUS AND EVERGREEN TREE EA 73 $1 -7 S_ $ -"I !'S' 3-44, WOOD MULCH CY 50 $ —1 g $ �0 3.45. LANDSCAPE STEEL EDGER LF 25 $ $ IS 3-46. TRASH ENCLOSURE LS 1 $ [J�D $ 311<500 3-47. POOL COMMON EXCAVATION (ONSITE OR TO SURCHARGE CY 6040 �� g 301' 3-48. AREA) POOL COMMON EXCAVATION (OFFSITE) CY 1 1 140 $ C1 $ 3-49. POOL GEOTEXTILE FABRIC, TYPE 5 SY 6700 $ ! �Z ( $UL 3-50, POOL INSULATION (4" THICK) SY 1330 $ 21 $ X(- Go 3-51, POOL SUBGRADE ROCK (1.5" CLEAN ROCK) TON 1400 $ �— f7 jj $ lD t 1660 3.52, PLACE POOL GENERAL FILL FROM SURCHARGE AREA (CV) CY 4500 $ li $ ) 6 -7 -7's- 3-53. POOL SELECT GRANULAR BORROW (MODIFIED) TON 19600 $ ')p.' ('09 $ (j:�; �} TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS $ dZ 13-7 BID: POOL STATE GRANT RELATED ELEMENTS $� I„� TOTAL PART 1 - BASE 50-METER FENCE 1 `3 TOTAL PART 2 - BASE BID TOTAL: POOL, BUILDINGS AND $ TOTAL PART 3 - BASE BID TOTAL: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS 1 $ 1 Q� g-7 TOTAL BASE BID: PARTS 1,2,3 $ a-U/-7 -7-Y- _9_j019 Stantec I IY38U4,33/ _ REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 50 41 1 OR - 4 REVISED BID FORM No. Item Units Qly Unit Price Total Price PART 4 - ALTERNATES: 4.1. ALTERNATE 1: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 1 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT THE VORTEX POOL AS INDICATED ON THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ F 7 1 16ob $ Z �d 0 4-2. ALTERNATE NO. 2: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 2 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A DROP SLIDE AS o6 J t 0 b0 O INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ ! $ I 4-3. ALTERNATE NO. 3: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 3 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL A CLIMBING WALL AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ 4-4. ALTERNATE NO. 4: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 4 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO CONSTRUCT A WATER WALK AS �y 400 3 6 INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ J �1 $ 4.5, ALTERNATE NO. 5: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 5 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL BASKETBALL ACCESSORIES AS B] �0 ® Q O� INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS $ _ $ il 1 4-6. ALTERNATE NO. 6: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 6 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL COMPETITION POOL WATER PLAY FEATURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS ^� 4-7. ALTERNATE NO. 7: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 7 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 3 ADDITIONAL SHADE UMBRELLA STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $I 4-8. ALTERNATE NO. 8: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 8 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL 2 ADDITIONAL FABRIC PICNIC/RENTAL STRUCTURES AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ $ �-� O d0 4-9. ALTERNATE NO. 9: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 9 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO CONSTRUCT THE POOL WITH SHOTCRETE AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. ADD/DEDUCT (CIRCLE ONE) LS 1 $ OC�Z� $ �Oa 4-10. ALTERNATE NO. 10: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 10 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH AND INSTALL A TYPE "3" WATER PLAY FEATURE IN THE RECREATION POOL IN PLACE OF THE TYPE "2" WATER PLAY FEATURE. LS 1 $ O Q Q $ 160 1) 4.11. ALTERNATE NO, 11: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 1 1 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV SYSTEM CAMERAS IN OR ON THE BATHHOUSE BUILDING AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ `Q(� 4.12. ALTERNATE NO. 12: IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 12 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO INSTALL CCTV CAMERAS ON , , to EXTERIOR POLES IN THE PARK AS INDICATED IN THE DRAWINGS. LS 1 $ t L 'fir 2019 Staniae,i i�98Q �337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 OO 7T TOR - 5 -- - -REVISED -BID-FORM — -- - No. Item Unlis Qty Unit Price Total Pflce 4.13, ALTERNATE NO. 13: ALTERNATE WATERSLIDE MANUFACTURER - IN GENERAL, THE WORK OF THIS ALTERNATE NO. 13 CONSISTS OF ALL COSTS TO FURNISH THE MATERIALS AND LABOR NECESSARY TO USE AN ALTERNATE MANUFACTURER OTHER THAN THE PRE -APPROVED MANUFACTURERS, FOR THE DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND THE DROP SLIDE. PROVIDE t� MANUFACTURER BELOW. ADD / DEDUCT (CIRCLE ONE) LS 1 $ No SIA $ ALTERNATE 4-13 - MANUFACTURER DOUBLE FLUME SLIDE COMPLEX AND DROP SLIDE N 1A a0 2019 Stan tec L93@04337 — VISE --RED-90-` JRtar REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 M 41701- b 6.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be Substantially Completed and completed and ready for Final Payment in accordance with Article 9.10 of the General Conditions on or before the dates or within the number of calendar days indicated in the Agreement. 6.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages in the event of failure to complete the Work within the times specified above, which shall be stated in the Agreement. 7.01 The following documents are attached to and made a condition of this Bid: A. Required Bid Security in the form of 5 percent. B. Bid Form Attachment A - Responsible Contractor Verification and Certification of Compliance. C. Prevailing Wage Certificate - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements D. E-Verification - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements E. .Jobs Reporting - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements F. Minority and Women owned Businesses Reporting - For Bid Part 1: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements 8.01 The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions. If Bidder Is: A Corporation SUBMITTED on March 15 , 2019,. Corporation Name: ❑pnlar Construction Company . (SEAL) State of Incorporation: Minnesota Type (General Bu i ss, Professional, Service, Limited Liability); General B.u!�i.nQss_ By: (Signature) Name (typed or printed); Title: President 1 Attest L (CORPORATE SEAL) I(ignature of Corporate Sereta.ry) Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): L550 Shoreview Park Road, Shoreview, MN 55126 Phone No.: 651-227-0631 Email.: 651-227-0132 L© 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 00 41 T0( -T REVISED-Bip FE) An Individa�i A Partrtersb Name (typed or printed): By: _ (Individual's signature) Doing business as: Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): Phone No.:, - Email.: (SEAL) Partnership Name: _ —(SEAM By: (Signature of general partner) Name (typed or printed): Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): Phone No.:. Email.: 0201Y Switec j I93..W4337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 00 4141 1M - 8 REVISED BID FORM A Joint Venture Joint Venture Name: By: - — Dame (typed or printed): , Title: Business address: Phone No.: Joint Venturer Name: By: (Signature) Name (typed or printed): Title: Business Street Address (No P.O. Box #'s): Phone No,: (SEAL) (Signature of joint venture partner) Fax No.: (SEAL) Phone and Fax Number, and Address for receipt of official communications: (Each joint venturer must sign. The manner of signing for each individual, partnership, and corporation that is a party to the joint venture should be in the manner indicated above). END OF DOCUMENT L, 02019 Stantec 1 193804337 REVISED BY ADDENDUM 3 L ----—REVISED-BID-FORM--- - - -- -- SECTION 00 41 13 BID FORM ATTACHMENT A RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR VERIFICATION AND CERTIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE PROJECT TITLE: New Hope Outdoor Pool Minn. Stat. § 16C,285, Subd. 7. IMPLEMENTATION.... any prime contractor or subcontractor that does not meet the minimum criteria in subdivision 3 or fails to verify that it meets those criteria is not a responsible contractor and is not eligible to be awarded a construction contract for the project or to perform work on the project... Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 3. RESPONSIBLE CONTRACTOR, MINNIMUM CRITERIA. "Responsible contractor" means a contractor that conforms to the iesponsibility requirements in the solicitation document for its portion of the work on the project and verifies that it meets the following minimum criteria: (1) 1 The Contractor: (i) is in compliance with workers' compensation and unemployment insurance requirements; (ii) is currently registered with the Department of Revenue and the Department of Employment and Economic Development if it has employees; (iii) has a valid federal tax identification number or a valid Social Security number if au individual; and (iv) has filed a certificate of authority to transact business in Minnesota with the Secretary of State if a foreign corporation or cooperative. (2) The contractor or related entity is in compliance with and, during the three-year period before submitting the verification, has not violated section 177.24, 177.25, 177.41 to 177.44, 181.13, 181.14, or 181.722, and has not violated United States Code, title 29, sections 201 to 219, or United States Code, title 40, sections 3141 to 3148. For purposes of this clause, a violation occurs when a contractor or related entity: .:� ..cpc-,atcd11y fails, to p stat„torily renij;rPrl xarnapQ nr nennhie- on one or more separate projects for a total underpayment of $25,000 or more within the three-year period; (ii) has been issued an order to comply by the commissioner of Labor and Industry that has become final; (iii) has been issued at least hvo determination letters within the three-year period by the Department of Transportation finding an underpayment by the contractor or related entity to its own employees; (iv) has been found by the commissioner of Labor and Industry to have repeatedly or willfully violated any of the sections referenced in this clause pursuant to section 177.27; (v) has been issued a ruling or findings of underpayment by the administrator of the Wage and flour Division of the United States Department of Labor that have become final or have been upheld by an administrative law judge or the Administrative Review Board; or (vi) has been found liable for underpayment of wages or penalties or misrepresenting a construction worker as an independent contractor in an action brought in a court having jurisdiction. Provided that, if the contractor or related entity contests a determination of underpayment by the Department of Transportation in a contested case proceeding, a violation does not occur until the contested case proceeding has concluded with a determination that the contractor or related entity underpaid wages or penalties;* BID FORM ATTA(,HMFNT A © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 Y r 00 41 13 1 (3) The contractor or related entity is in compliance with and, during the three-year period before submitting the verification, has not violated section 181.723 or chapter 32613. For purposes of this clause, a violation occurs when a contractor or related entity has been issued a final administrative or licensing order;* (4) The contractor or related entity has not, more than twice during the three-year period before submitting the verification, had a certificate of compliance under section 363A.36 revoked or suspended based on the provisions of section 363A.36, with the revocation or suspension becoming final because it was upheld by the Office of Administrative Hearings or was not appealed to the office;* (5) The contractor or related entity has not received a final determination assessing a monetary sanction from the Department of Administration or Transportation for failure to meet targeted group business, disadvantaged business enterprise, or veteran -owned business goals, due to a lack of good faith effort, more than once during the three-year period before submitting the verification;* * Any violations, suspensions, revocations, or sanctions, as defined in clauses (2) to (5), occurring prior to July 1, 2014, shall not be considered in determining whether a contractor or related entity meets the minimum criteria. (6) The contractor or related entity is not currently suspended or debarred by the federal government or the state of Minnesota or any of its departments, commissions, agencies, or political subdivisions; and (7) All subcontractors that the contractor intends to use to perform project work have verified to the contractor through a signed statement under oath by an owner or officer that they meet the minimum criteria listed in clauses (1) to (6). Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 5. SUBCONTRACTOR VERIFICATION. A prime contractor or subcontractor shall include in its verification of compliance under subdivision 4 a list of all of its first -tier subcontractors that it intends to retain for work on the project. If a prime contractor or any subcontractor retains additional subcontractors on the project after submitting its verification of compliance, the prime contractor or subcontractor shall obtain verifications of compliance from each additional subcontractor with which it has a direct contractual relationship and shall submit a supplemental verification confirming compliance with subdivision 3, clause (7), within 14 days of retaining the additional subcontractors. A prime contractor shall submit to the contracting authority upon request copies of the signed verifications of compliance from all subcontractors of any tier pursuant to subdivision 3, clause (7). A prime contractor and subcontractors shall not be responsible for the false statements of any subcontractor with which they do not have a direct contractual relationship. A prime contractor and subcontractors shall be responsible for false statements by their first -tier subcontractors with which they have a direct contractual relationship only if they accept the verification of compliance with actual knowledge that it contains a false statement. i BID FORM ATTACHMENT A © 2019 Stantec 193804337 0041 13 - 2 Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 4. VERIFICATION OF COMPLIANCE. A contractor responding to a solicitation document of a contracting authority shall submit to the contracting authority a signed statement under oath by an owner or officer verifying compliance with each of the minimum criteria in subdivision 3 at the time that it responds to the solicitation document. A contracting authority may accept a sworn statement as sufficient to demonstrate that a contractor is a responsible contractor and shall not be held liable for awarding a contract in reasonable reliance on that statement. Failure to verify compliance with any one of the minimum criteria or a false statement under oath in a verification of compliance shall render the prime contractor or subcontractor that makes the false statement ineligible to be awarded a construction contract on the project for which the verification was submitted. A False statement under oath verifying compliance with any of the minimum criteria may result in tennination of a construction contract that has already been awarded to a prime contractor or subcontractor that submits a False Statement. A contracting authority shall not be liable For declining to award a contract or terminating a contract based on a reasonable determination that the contractor failed to verify compliance with the minimum criteria or falsely stated that it meets the minimum criteria. CERTIFICATION By signing this document, I certify that I am an owner or officer of the company, and I swear under oath that: 1) My company meets each of the Minimum Criteria to be a responsible contractor as defined herein and is in compliance with Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, 2) I have included Attachment A-1 with my company's solicitation response, and 3) if my company is awarded a contract, I will also submit Attachment A-2 as required. Authorix , l Signature of Owner or Officer: Title:/ President Company Name: Donlar Construction Company Sworn to and subscribed before me this 15 clay of March , 2019. Notary Public My Commission Expires: January 31, 2020 Printed Name: Jon Kainz Date: March 15, 2019 ---------------------------------------------------- i p Notary Public -Minnesota My Cununlasion Expirer Jan 31, 2020 -------------------------------------------------- NOTE: Minn. Stat. § 16C.285. Subd. 2, (c) If only one prime contractor responds to a solicitation document, a contracting authority may award a construction contract to the responding prime contractor even if the minimum criteria in subdivision 3 are not met. Rln FORM ATTACHMENT A 00 4T-?3-3 0 2019 Stantec 143804337 - ATTACHMENT A-1 FIRST -TIER SUBCONTRACTORS LIST SUBMIT WITH PRIME CONTRACTOR RESPONSE PROJECT TITLE: New Hope Outdoor Pool Minn. Stat. § 16C.285, Subd. 5. A prime contractor or subcontractor shall include in its verification of compliance under subdivision 4 a list of all of its first -tier subcontractors that it intends to retain for work on the project. Submit this form with the Bid Form, FIRST TIER SUBCONTRACTOR NAMES (Legal name of company as registered with the Secretary of State) Name of city where company home office is located Co ��y Rye rs ,fi1 Lo y tt IF 7'(:iA- ,A V-vke_ Gi ear AA N CAI 1 O ba 1 c�.� u ., �,-►.�cJr-c BID FORM ATTACHMENT A © 2019 Stantec T I-n8-NMT 0041 13 - 4 PREVAILING WAGE CERTIFICATE CONTRACTOR: SUBMIT THIS FORM WITH THE ORIGINAL COPY OF YOUR BID Laborers and Mechanics shall be paid according to the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction, in accordance with Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43, and the minimum wage rates and fringe benefits paid to the various classes shall be as determined by the Secretary of Labor of the United States for work in the City of New Hope. In addition to the certificates and other evidences of compliance which are required under these Specifications and under Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43, it shall be required that the person or company representative submitting a bid for this contract shall certify in writing that both she/he/it and their Subcontractors shall comply with the wage and labor standards provisions of the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction. Failure to comply with these requirements shall mean the Cily of New Hope may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate his/her right to proceed with the work and the Contractor and his/her Sureties shall be liable to the City of New Hope for any excess cost occasioned to the City of New Hope for the completion of the work. By submitting this bid, it is understood and agreed that if it is accepted, in whole or in part, by the City of New Hope that any work done by the Contractor or by the Contractor's agents or Subcontractors under a contract with the City of New Hope shall be in conformity with provisions of the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction, in accordance with Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43. Jon Kainz Signatur Donlar Construction Company Company Name RETURN THIS FORM WITH YOUR BID Appendix To 00 73 46 - 1 Prevailing Wage Cerfificafe MINNESOTA STATUTES 2018 16C.075 16C.075 E-VERIFY. A contract for services valued in excess of $50,000 must require certification from the vendor and any subcontractors that, as of the date services on behalf of the state of Minnesota will be performed, the vendor and all subcontractors have implemented or are in the process of implementing the federal E-Verify program for all newly hired employees in the United States who will perform work on behalf of the state of Minnesota. This section does not apply to contracts entered into by the: (1) State Board of Investment; or (2) the Office of Higher Education for contracts related to credit reporting services if the office certifies that those services cannot be reasonably obtained if this section applies. History: 1Sp2011 c 10 art 3 s 29; 2015 c 69 art 2 s 2 Copyright ©2018 by the Revisor of Sfalnlcs. State of Mi.nnesnta A-1t K, ghts Reserved. _ 4 This Page Leff Blank |nhenhono|ly _ Attachment V to Grant Agreement GRANT APPLICATION Not ggplicable Attachment VT to Grant Agreement _ - JOBS REPORTING (a) Pursuant to M.S. Sec. 16A.633, subd. 4, the Council is required to report to Minnesota Management and Budget the number of jobs created or retained by the Project. To enable the Council to comply with M.S. Sec. 16A.633, subd. 4, the Grantee is required to report the number of jobs created or retained by the Project to the Council as set forth below. (b) The Grantee shall require all of its contractors to report the information below to the Grantee. The G r a nt e e shall then report to the Council. Information m u s t be recorded by the G r a n t e e in an Excel document that can be downloaded .into the report by Minnesota Management and Budget. Each report must contain the following: (1) The name of the Project. (2,) The Council grant or contract number, if applicable. (3) Reporting period, The appropriate biennium is to be selected. (4) The Agency Number. This will complete the next column with Agency Name. (5) Legal Citation for the Auchmization depicted in Recital C of this grant agreement (6) Department ID responsible for the Project. (7) The Appropriation for the Project. (8) The Appropriation Amount. (9) Project Start Date, (10) Project Completion Date. (11) The County where the Project is located or, if it is located in more than one county, where it is primarily located. (12) Funding Source for Project, The selection will be Trunk Highway Bonds, General Obligation Bonds or General Fund. (13) Job Type. Jobs should be classified as either (i) engineering/professional, (ii) construction, or (iii) other. Manager and supervisor jobs shall be classified as category (i), (ii) or (iii) based on the nature of the work those individuals spent the majority of their time overseeing. (14) Hourly Wages. Jobs should be classified according to the hourly pay ranges below. Overhead or indirect costs or the value of pensions or other benefits should not be included in wages. (i) less than $10.00, (ii) $10.01 to $15.00, (iii) $15.01 to $20,00, (iv) $20.01 to $25,00, (v) $25.01 to $30.00, (vi) $30.01 to $35.00., (vii) $35.01 to $40.00, or (viii) more than $40.00. (15) Jobs. 41 a. Jobs should be classified as either (i) jobs created or (ii) jobs retained; they will not be counted as both.. A "job created" is a new position created and filled, or an existing unfilled position that is filled, because of the Project. A "job retained" means a job at a specific wage level that existed prior to beginning the Project that would have been lost but for the Project. Only jobs in Minnesota should be counted. b. Jobs should be expressed in "full-time equivalents" (FTE). In calculating an FTE, the number of hours worked during the Reporting Period should be divided by the number of hours representing a full work schedule in a Reporting Period, i.e.1;040 for a six-month period or 2,080 for a period of a year. Jobs should be reported regardless of when the Project or an individual's employment began or ended. Jobs are to be calculated based on hours worked in the current Reporting Period only, so that reporting is not cumulative. c. Jobs should not be separated into full-time, part-time, temporary, seasonal, etc. Instead, all hours should be totaled and converted into FTEs as indicated above. (c) Each contractor will report its workforce and the workforce of its subcontractors active during the Reporting Period. This includes employees actively engaged in the Project who work on the jobsite, in the Project office, in the honte office or telecommute from home or other alternative office location. This includes, but is not limited to, any engineering personnel, inspectors, sampling and testing technicians, and lab technicians performing work directly in support of the Project. This does not include material suppliers such as steel, culverts, guardrail and tool suppliers. Only hours that relate to time spent on the Project should be reported. (d) The Grantee must incorporate these reporting requirements into its contracts with its contractors (in part so that contractors can add the requirements to their contracts with subcontractors and impose deadlines on reporting by subcontractors). (e) To distinguish the jobs reported by contractors that were funded by the Grant, the 7.._7_ _ aL _ _L Y.�« « ... _A lm. _1, .�f—f— in aor}i Pataanry ahnvP by the Gr'G1niuc it wii 111U1UFly ULV JVV 1UW1VviJ IVVW1W4 vy .�.�w.. vva ..•... .... .._moo_-" . _ _w --- percentage of total Project costs funded by the Grant (e.g., if the Grant was 40% of total Project costs, the Grantee should multiply the jobs numbers given in each category by 40% to arrive at the number of jobs funded by the Grant) and it is those numbers that should be reported to the Council. Eya Attachment VII Minority and Women owned Businesses Reporting Please complete this form at the end of every 12-month period during the project. Submit the form to: Metropolitan Council Director, Office of Equal Opportunity 390 N. Robert Street St. Paul, MN 55101 Annual Report No. r (Number 1, end of first 12 months, 2 ends of second 12 months, etc.) Grantee Agency Name: _ Grantee Agency Contact Person: Email address: _-- - - Telephone Number: Annual Report Period: mo ear to mol yeai Date Report Filed: Grant Agreement Number: Y Y Grant Amount: Grant Project Description: (insert the project description from Attachment Iv of the grant a."'re-ement here) Were other funds used to finance this project? Yes No If yes, please list other fund sources and amounts from Attachment III of the grant agreement and amounts on table below. Fund Source Amount - Metro Council grmt Total All Sources 43 Company Name Please list afl companies hired to carry out work for this project and amount paid with Metro Council grant funds only during the reporting period. Pro -rate funds provided by Metro Council grant if other funding sources also paid to companies. For example, if the Metro Council grant funded 40% of project, then multiply payments to that company by 40% for the reporting period. Company Address (Street, City, State, ZIP) Work Performed (Landscape Design/Architectural/ Engineering Services, Construction, Legal Services, Other Services —please describe) Women) Minority Owned Business? (YeslNo) l�_L_U _L �__.. Please describe the demographics of comps nics UA-Ed avufc Amount Paid with Metro Council Grant ]Funds During Reporting Period Company Name 3 Company Address (Street, City, State, ZIP) Number of Employees — Number of Women Employees Number of Employees who are People of Color — C+1 f Cumulative Amount Paid from MC Grant Funds All Reports (Add amounts paid to that business from previous reports plus this report) Please answer the following questions: 1. Were any pro -active steps taken to insure the hiring of women/minority owned businesses to perform work on this project? If so, please describe those steps. 2. How did you select businesses to perform work for this project? 1 Did you place a goal to Lire women/minority owned businesses in your contracts to carry out work for this ptojeet? if so, what is that goal? 4.. How did you insure your goal for hiring women/minority owned businesses was met? 45 Document A31 oT"" - 2010 CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Name, legal status and principal place Doniar construct ion Company of business) 550 Shoreview Park Road Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of .America One Tower Square, 2 SHS This document has important legal Shoreview, WIN 55126 Hartford, CT 06183 cons"tiences. Consultation with OWNER: an attorney is encouraged with (Name, legal status and address) respect to its completion or City of New Hope modification. 4401 Xylon Avenue North Any singular reference to New Hope, MN Contractor, Surety, Owner or BONDAMOUNT: Five Percent of Amount Bid (5%) other party shall bvconsidered plural where applicable. PROJECT: (Name, location or address, and Project number, if any) New Hope Outdoor Pool, New Hope, MN. The Contractor and Surety are bound to the Owner in the amount set forth above, for the payment of which the Contractor and Surety bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, as provided herein. The conditions of this Bond are such that if the Owner accepts the bid of the Contractor within the time specified in the bid documents, or within such time period as may be agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, and the Contractor either (1) enters into a contract with the Owner in accordance with the terms of such bid, and gives such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents, with a surety admitted in the jurisdiction of the Project and otherwise acceptable to the Owner, for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof; or (2) pays to the Owner the difference, not to exceed the amount of this Bond, between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Owner may in good faith contract with another party to perform the work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. The Surety hereby waives any notice of an agreement between the Owner and Contractor to extend the time in which the Owner may accept the bid. Waiver of notice by the Surety shall not apply to any extension exceeding sixty (60) days in the aggregate beyond the time for acceptance of bids specified in the bid documents, and the Owner and Contractor shall obtain the Surety's consent for ail iriwusiva wyvu.. wv� ....y... If this Bond is issued in connection with a subcontractor's bid to a Contractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location of the Project, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. Signed and sealed this 15th day of March, 2019 (Witness) ,� (Wrtness} (Title) Patricia M. Rowan Attorney -in -fact CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA Contract Document, on which this text appears in RED. An original assures that changes will not be obscured. AIA Document A3101- 2010. Copyright 1963, 1970 and 2010 by The American Instilute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA" Init. Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Internaltonal Trealles. Unauthorized reproduction or dlsirlbution of this AIA° Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe olvll and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the low. / Purchasers are parmined-lo foproduoe ten (i0)-copies of lhisdocumenI when completed, I o report Copyright vlolattons of ALA Cuntracl Dut.'urnurrls, e•irrail The American Institute of Architects' legal counsel, ceoyrtaht@aia.oia. 00110 CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF COUNTY OF? Y7 On the f day ofA! CY7�� before me personally appeared, _1 &1 H(7z-,(70 to me, who being duly sworn, did depose and say: that s/he resides in jneRa 77--zqthat s/he is the of the Donlar Construe on Company the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing instrument; that s/he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the board of directors of said corporation; and that s/he signed her/his name thereto by like order. (SEAL) STEP9�;` NIE Mi . PRES T ON > !Votary Pubic -Minnesota ~s My Commission Expires Jan 31, P$W ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF CORPORATE SURETY STATE OF MINNESOTA COUNTY OF Dakota On the 15th day of March . 2019 before me personally appeared, to me known, who being duly sworn, did say: that s/he resides in Minnesota that s/he is the aforesaid officer or attorney in fact of Travelers Casualty and surety Company of America a corporation, that the seal affixed to the foregoing instrument is the corporate seal of said corporation; and that said instrument as signed and sealed on behalf of said corporation by the aforesaid officer, by authority of its board of directors; and the aforesaid officer acknowledged said instrument to be the free act and deed of said corporation. (SEAL) N0fft y V is LORI ANN ZARBOK Notary Public Minnesota My Commission Dores Jan. 31, 2024 TRAVELERSJW Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America Travelers Casualty and Surety Company St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the "Companlee ), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Patricia M. Rowan Of Mendota Heights , their true and lawful Attorney -in -Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed, and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 3rd day of February, 2017. Y+�rrr err Min p0M tt 5rxwowi State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. By: Robert Kaney, Se or Vice Prcoldont On this the 3rd day of February, 2017, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. pYlf My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2021�' * *� * Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attom eys- in- Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizancss, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it Is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attomey or to any certificate relating thereto. appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys-in•Fact for purposes only Of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory In the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney a certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 15th day of March , 2019 0;D1 �� r Thor`� Kevin F. Hughes, Assi tant Secretary ro verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, please calf us at 1-800-411-3880. Please refer to the above -named Attorney -In -Fact and the details of -the bond -to -which -the -power is attache � amiAlA Document Al01TM — 2017 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum AGREEMENT made as of the Twenty-sixth day of March in the year 2019 (In words, indicate day, month and year) ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has BETWEEN the Owner: added information needed for Its (Name, legal status, address and other information) completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original City of New Hope AIA standard form, An Additions and 4401 Xylon Avenue North Deletions Report that notes added New Hope, MN 55428-4898 information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available and the Contractor: from the author and should be (Name, legal status, address and other information) reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates Donlar Construction Company where the author has added 550 Shoreview Park Road necessary information and where Shoreview MN 55126 the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text, This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect For the following Project, to its completion or modification. (Name, location and detailed description) The parties should complete New Hope Outdoor Pool A101 TM-2017, Exhibit A, Insurance 4401 Xylon Avenue North and Bends, contemporaneously with New Hope, Minnesota 55428 this Agreement. AIA Document TM-2017, A201 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, is adopted In this document by The Archltect: reference. Do not use with other (Name, legal status, address and other Information) general conditions unless this document is modified. Stantec Consulting Services Inc. 733 Marquette Avenue South Suite 1000 Minneapolis, MN 55402 The Owner and Contractor agree as follows. Intt, AIA tocument A101 TM —2017. Copyright* 1916, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958. 1961, 1963. 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved, WARNING: This AIAn Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Internattonal Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be i prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No, 7179749022 which expires on 02/0512020, and Is not for. resale, Uesr Notes: (399ADA64) TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 4 CONTRACT SUM 5 PAYMENTS 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS EXHIBIT A INSURANCE AND BONDS ARTICLE 1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents consist of this Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of this Agreement, other documents listed in this Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of this Agreement, all of which form the Contract, and are as fully a part of the Contract as if attached to this Agreement or repeated herein. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. An enumeration of the Contract Documents, other than a Modification, appears in Article 9. ARTICLE 2 THE WORK OF THIS CONTRACT The Contractor shall fully execute the Work described in the Contract Documents, except as specifically indicated in the Contract Documents to be the responsibility of others. ARTICLE 3 DATE OF COMMENCEMENT AND SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 3.1 The date of commencement of the Work shall be: (Check one of the following boxes.) [ ] The date of this Agreement. [ ] A date set forth in a notice to proceed issued by the Owner. [ X ] Established as follows: (Insert a date or a means to determine the date of commencement of the Work.) April 1, 2019 - Pool construction area outside of existing City Hall June 7, 2019 - Complete excavation of material from 50-meter pool excavation to surcharge pool parking lot August 19, 2019 - Pool construction area following existing City Hall demolition If a date of commencement of the Work is not selected, then the date of commencement shall be the date of this Agreement. § 3.2 The Contract Time shall be measured from the date of commencement of the Work. § 3.3 Substantial Completion § 3.3.1 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the entire Work: [nit. AIA Document A101 n" — 2017. Copyright C 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 2 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No. 7179749022 which expires on 02/05/2020, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA54) (Check one of the following boxes and complete the necessary information.) [ ] Not later than ( ) calendar days from the date of commencement of the Work. [ ] By the following date: § 3.3.2 Subject to adjustments of the Contract Time as provided in the Contract Documents, if portions of the Work are to be completed prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, the Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of such portions by the following dates: Portion of Work Entire Work Final Completion Substantial Completion Date June 5, 2020 August 28, 2020 § 3.3.3 If the Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion as provided in this Section 3.3, liquidated damages, if any, shall be assessed as set forth in Section 4.5. ARTICLE 4 CONTRACT SUM § 41 The Owner shall pay the Contractor the Contract Sum in current funds for the Contractor's performance of the Contract. The Contract Sum shall be Eleven Million Three Hundred Fifty Thousand Two Hundred Seventy Five Dollars and Zero Cents ($11,350,275.00 ), subject to additions and deductions as provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2 Alternates § 4.2.1 Alternates, if any, included in the Contract Sum: Item Prlc Alternates 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 10, 11, 12 $523,500.00 4.2.2 Subject to the conditions noted below, the following alternates may be accepted by the Owner following execution of this Agreement. Upon acceptance, the Owner shall issue a Modification to this Agreement. (Insert below each alternate and the conditions that must be met for the Owner to accept the alternate.) Item § 4.3 Allowances, if any, included in the Contract Sum: (Identify each allowance.) Item Price § 4.4 Unit prices, if any: Contractper attached Bid Form with items and unitprices. (Table Deleted) 4.5 Liquidated damages, if any: (Insert terms and conditions for liquidated damages, if any.) Price Conditions for Acceptance Contractor shall pay the Owner $1,000.00 for each day that expires after the time specified in Article 3.3.2 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining work within the Contract Time or any proper extension thereof granted by the Owner, the Contractor shall pay the Owner $1,000,00 for each day that expires after the time in Article 3.3.2 for Final Completion and readiness for Final Payment until the Work is completed and ready for Final Payment. Init. AIA Document A101 ^" — 2017. Copyright ©1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No. 7179749022 which expires on 02/06/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA54) § 4.6 Other: (Insert provisions for bonus or other incentives, if any, that might result in a change to the Contract Sum.) Incentives: In the event that all Work as identified in the Drawings and Project Manual is completed by the specified Substantial Completion date of June 5, 2020, payment otherwise due in the Contract shall be adjusted with a lump sum incentives payment of $50,000.00 via Change Order. Payment of the incentives will be made within 30 calendar days after the above -mentioned completion date. Absolutely no adjustments in the completion date or completion requirements will be made for any reason in determining eligibility of incentives payment. ARTICLE 5 PAYMENTS § 5.1 Progress Payments § 5.1.1 Based upon Applications for Payment submitted to the Architect by the Contractor and Certificates for Payment issued by the Architect, the Owner shall make progress payments on account of the Contract Sum to the Contractor as provided below and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 5.1.2 The period covered by each Application for Payment shall be one calendar month ending on the last day of the month, or as follows: § 5.1.3 Provided that an Application for Payment is received by the Architect not later than the last day of a month, the Owner shall make payment of the amount certified to the Contractor not later than the last day of the following month. If an Application for Payment is received by the Architect after the application date fixed above, payment of the amount certified shall be made by the Owner not later than thirty (30 ) days after the Architect receives the Application for Payment. (Federal, state or local laws may require payment within a certain period of time.) § 5.1.4 Each Application for Payment shall be based on the most recent schedule of values submitted by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents. The schedule of values shall allocate the entire Contract Sum among the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in such form, and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy, as the Architect may require. This schedule of values shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. § 5.1.5 Applications for Payment shall show the percentage of completion of each portion of the Work as of the end of the period covered by the Application for Payment. § 5.1.6 In accordance with AIA Document A201 TM-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, and subject to other provisions of the Contract Documents, the amount of each progress payment shall be computed as follows: § 5.1.6.1 The amount of each progress payment shall first include: .1 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to completed Work; .2 That portion of the Contract Sum properly allocable to materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the completed construction, or, if approved in advance by the Owner, suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing; and .3 That portion of Construction Change Directives that the Architect determines, in the Architect's professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. § 5.1.6.2 The amount of each progress payment shall then be reduced by: .1 The aggregate of any amounts previously paid by the Owner; .2 The amount, if any, for Work that remains uncorrected and for which the Architect has previously withheld a Certificate for Payment as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201-2017; .3 Any amount for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless the Work has been performed by others the Contractor intends to pay; Init. AIA Document A1011 — 2017. Copyright ©1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No. 7179749022 which expires on 02/0512020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (369ADA54) .4 For Work performed or defects discovered since the last payment application, any amount for which the Architect may withhold payment, or nullify a Certificate of Payment in whole or in part, as provided in Article 9 of AIA Document A201-2017; and .5 Retainage withheld pursuant to Section 5.1.7. § 5.1.7 Retainage § 5.1.7.1 For each progress payment made prior to Substantial Completion of the Work, the Owner may withhold the following amount, as retainage, from the payment otherwise due: (Insert a percentage or amount to be withheld as retainage from each Application for Payment The amount of retainage may be limited by governing law.) 5% § 5.1.7.1.1 The following items are not subject to retainage: (Insert any items not subject to the withholding of retainage, such as general conditions, insurance, etc.) § 5.1.7.2 Reduction or limitation of retainage, if any, shall be as follows: (If the retainage established in Section 5.1.7.1 is to be modified prior to Substantial Completion of the entire Work, including modifications for Substantial Completion of portions of the Work as provided in Section 3.3.2, insert provisions for such modifications.) § 5.1.7.3 Except as set forth in this Section 5.1.7.3, upon Substantial Completion of the Work, the Contractor may submit an Application for Payment that includes the retainage withheld from prior Applications for Payment pursuant to this Section 5.1.7 The Application for Payment submitted at Substantial Completion shall not include retainage as follows: (Insert any other conditions for release of retainage upon Substantial Completion.) Less such amounts as the Engineer shall determine in accordance with Article 9.5 of the AIA A201-2017 General Conditions and less 200 percent of the Engineer's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown in the tentative list of items to be completed or corrected attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 5.1.8 If final completion of the Work is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor, the Owner shall pay the Contractor any additional amounts in accordance with Article 9 of AIA Document A201-2017. § 5.1.9 Except with the Owner's prior approval, the Contractor shall not make advance payments to suppliers for materials or equipment which have not been delivered and stored at the site. § 5.2 Final Payment § 5.2.1 Final payment, constituting the entire unpaid balance of the Contract Sum, shall be made by the Owner to the Contractor when .1 the Contractor has fully performed the Contract except for the Contractor's responsibility to correct Work as provided in Article 12 of AIA Document A201-2017, and to satisfy other requirements, if any, which extend beyond final payment; and .2 a final Certificate for Payment has been issued by the Architect. § 5.2.2 The Owner's final payment to the Contractor shall be made no later than 30 days after the issuance of the Architect's final Certificate for Payment, or as follows: § 5.3 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate stated below, or in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. Init. AIA Document A1011m — 2017. Copyright ©1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987. 1991, 1997. 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No. 7179749022 which expires on 02/05/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA54) (Insert rate of interest agreed upon, if any.) ARTICLE 6 DISPUTE RESOLUTION § 6.1 Initial Decision Maker The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201-2017, unless the parties appoint below another individual, not a party to this Agreement, to serve as the Initial Decision Maker. (If the parties mutually agree, insert the name, address and other contact information of the Initial Decision Maker, if other than the Architect.) § 6.2 Binding Dispute Resolution For any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation pursuant to Article 15 of AIA Document A201-2017, the method of binding dispute resolution shall be as follows: (Check the appropriate box.) [ ] Arbitration pursuant to Section 15.4 of AIA Document A201-2017 [X ] Litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction [ ] Other (Specify) If the Owner and Contractor do not select a method of binding dispute resolution, or do not subsequently agree in writing to a binding dispute resolution method other than litigation, Claims will be resolved by litigation in a court of competent jurisdiction. ARTICLE 7 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION § 7.1 The Contract may be terminated by the Owner or the Contractor as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-2017. § 7.1.1 If the Contract is terminated for the Owner's convenience in accordance with Article 14 of AIA Document A201-2017, then the Owner shall pay the Contractor a termination fee as follows: (Insert the amount of, or method for determining, the fee, if any, payable to the Contractor following a termination for the Owner's convenience.) § 7.2 The Work may be suspended by the Owner as provided in Article 14 of AIA Document A201-2017 ARTICLE 8 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 8.1 Where reference is made in this Agreement to a provision of AIA Document A201-2017 or another Contract Document, the reference refers to that provision as amended or supplemented by other provisions of the Contract Documents. § 8.2 The Owner's representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information) Kirk McDonald, City Manager 4401 Xylon Ave N Ncw Hope, MN 55428 Init. AIA Document A101 Tm — 2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958. 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987,1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 6 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No. 7179749022 which expires on 02/05/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA54) Valerie From: Valerie Leone Sent: Friday, April 19, 2019 9:51 AM To; Kirk McDonald; Susan Rader Cc: j '' Long, Chris Subject: I Builders risk insur - Donlar Kirk, P . Chris will be stopping in to see you this a.m. about builders risk insurance far the pool project. Donlar did not include it in their bid. Chris says the city would have paid for the expense one way or another (in the original bid) or now as a change order. i Steve Holmqui9t (city insur agent of Ray Smith Insurance) and 1 both examined the contract document. It calls out general liability coverage requirements but does not specify builders risk insurance. Exhibit A (of AIA Document A101) is mentioned but was not attached. That was likely the document that should have spelled out who was responsible for the builders risk insurance. i Sounds like most contractors assume "builders risk insur" is their responsibility but in this instance Donlar asked Stantec about insurance and Stantec rep said they thought it wasn't necessary. A bit of miscommunication. We could possibly encounter the same issue with American Liberty Construction for the theatre contract. Chris is going to ask them if t ey have their insurance in order and see what their response is. 4 I talked to our insurance agent (Steve Holmquist) and he said the city could get the coverage if we'd want. It would be a Policy with Travelers (not LMCIT) as we could then have a $5K deductible instead of $25K deductible. He said for 14 months it'd Oe Close to $8,200 (but I didn't get an actual quote). Chris would prefer that Donlar get the insurance coverage so it's a clear line of responsibility. Donlar will be getting a quote. j Valerie Leone City of New Hope I City Clerk 4401 Xylun Ave N I New Hope, MN 55428 Office:763-531-5117 i Fax:763-531-5136 vleon new u mn. ❑� Ac�12o� CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE(MM/DD/YYYY) 03/29/2019 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must have ADDITIONAL INSURED provisions or be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER CONTACT Becky Perron North Risk Partners - Bearence PHONE: (651)379-7800 651)379.7801 A/C No. a EMt • A,,,,,: 2010 Centre Pointe Blvd a -MAIL b erron bearence.com ADDRESS: p INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC ✓R Mendota Heights MN 55120 INSURERA: Phoenix Insurance Co. 25623 INSURED INSURER B : Travelers Indemnity Co. 25658 Donlar Construction Company INSURER C : Travelers Indemnity Co of IL 25674 550 Shoreview Park Road INSURER D : Travelers Casualty Ins. Co. ofAmerica 19046 INSURER-E: Shoreview MN 55126 INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: CL1862770960 REVISION N1IMRIPR- THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACTOR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER MMIDD/YYYY MMIDD/YYYY LIMITS X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS -MADE 7 OCCUR Ind Broad Form Prop Dmg EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 PREMISES Ea occurrence $ 300,000 MED EXP (Any oneperson) $ 5,000 X Subcntrs Contingent Liab PERSONAL&ADV INJURY $ 2,000,000 A DT-CO-3H586885-PHX-18 07/01/2018 07/01/2019 GEN'LAGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: POLICY [g j�T El LOC GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 4,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMP/OPAGG $ 2,000,000 $ OTHER: AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY COMBazcINED SINGLE LIMIT a +denl $ 1,000,000 BODILY INJURY(Per person) $ ANYAUTO BOWNED IX SCHEDULED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS HIRED x NON -OWNED AUTOS ONLY AUTOS ONLY BA-3H586885-IND-18 07/01/2018 07/01/2019 BODILY INJURY(Per accident) $ PROPERTY 9AMAGE Per a11111d $ >< UMBRELLA LIAB x, OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ 10,000.000 C EXCESS LIAB CLAIMS -MADE CUP-3H586885-18-26 07/01/2018 07/01/2019 AGGREGATE $ 10,000,000 DED X RETENTION $ 10.000 $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY YIN ANY PROPRIETOR/PARTNER/EXECUTIVE ❑ OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory in NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below NIA UB-7K523702-18-26—G 07/01/2018 07/01/2019 X STATUTE ER EL.EACHACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E L DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000.000 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS / LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, may be attached If more space is required) Project: New Hope Outdoor Pool Certificate holder and others required by the subcontract are included as additional Insureds in regard to the General Liability & Umbrella/Excess Liability where required by written contract on a primary and non contributory basis including ongoing and completed operations. Blanket Additional Insured applies to the Auto Liability policy when required by written contract. Blanket Waiver of Subrogation applies to the General Liability, Auto Liability, Work Comp and Umbrella policies when required by written contract. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN City of New Hope ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. 4401 Xylon Ave N AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE New Hope MN 55428-4898 ©1988-2015 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. ACORD 25 (2016/03) The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. § 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. § 11.2 Owner's Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub -Subcontractors in the Work. When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub -subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. § 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub -subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. Init. AIA Document A2011-- 2017. Copyright 1911, 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1916. 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA'� Document ie protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will bo prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13,00:55 ET on 12131120i8 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (31219ADA51) M M § 11.3 Waivers of SubrogatiaR § 11.3A The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect's consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect's consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub -subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (15 even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. '§ 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by stich policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3. 1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. § 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruptlon, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner's property, due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12A Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 1f a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. if such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to Init. AIA Document A2017m -2017. Copyright 01911, 1915. 1918, 1925. 1937. 1951. 1958, 1961, 19tt3, 1966, t970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Inslitute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAe Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAd° nocumant, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent posslble under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00.55 ET on 1713v2o1a under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and Is not for resale. (3B9A0A51 ) User Notes: ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add a New Clause 10.2.4.1 to Subparagraph 10.2.4: When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials, substances, equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice. B. Regarding Paragraph 10.3.3, delete the last 2 lines and insert the following: "of property (other than the work itself) and limited to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is not due to the contributory negligence of a party seeking indemnity." ARTICLE 11 -INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Add a new Subparagraph 1 1.1.2.1: The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by law and regulations: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance Coverage A - Statutory Coverage B - $500,000 Each Accident $500,000 Disease - Policy Limit $500,000 Disease - Each Employee 2. Commercial General Liability $3,000,000 General Aggregate $3,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Personal Injury Products/Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of at least 1 year after either 90 days following Substantial Completion or Final Payment, whichever is earlier. 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit - Bodily injury and property damage. All owned, non -owned, and hired vehicles. 4. Umbrella Excess Liability $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Aggregate Umbrella excess liability shall be a combined single limit which shall provide excess liability insurance over Commercial General Liability, Comprehensive Automobile Liability, and Employers Liability. Add Subparagraph 11.1.2.2: The following persons or entities shall be included as additional insured on the Commercial Liability, Comprehensive Automobile Liability, and Umbrella Excess Liability. This coverage shall be primary and noncontributory: OWNER: City of New Hope ARCHITECT: Stantec Consulting Services Inc. Oth SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 05 - 3 § 8.3 The Contractor's representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information) Kevin Bohrer Donlar Construction Company 550 Shoreview Park Road Shoreview MN 55126 8.4 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days' prior notice to the other party, § 8.5 Insurance and Bonds § 8.5.1 The Owner and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document Al01 TM-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document Al01 Tm-2017 Exhibit A, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 8.6 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201-2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203TM-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below: (If other than in accordance with AIA Document E203-2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission.) § 8.7 Other provisions: ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 This Agreement is comprised of the following documents: .1 AIA Document A101 TM-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor .2 AIA Document A101 TM-2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds .3 AIA Document A201 TM-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction .4 AIA Document E203TA°-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013 incorporated into this Agreement.) .5 Drawings Number G102 .6 Specifications Section 0001 10 Title Sheet Index Title Table of Contents Date February 14, 2019 Date Pages February 14, See attached 2019 project manual Init. AIA Document A101 TM — 2017. Copyright m 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1 §58, 1961. 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be 7 r prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No. 7179749022 which expires on 02/05/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA54) t C. Add a New Clause 11.1.3.1 to Subparagraph 11.1.3: The Contractor shall furnish 1 copy each of Certificates of Insurance for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage's required. The farm of Certificate shall be ACORD 25-2, Certificate of Insurance and AIA Document G715, Supplemental Attachment for ACORD 25- 2 Certificate of Insurance. D. In Subparagraph 11.2.1, replace with word "Owner" with the word "Contractor". E. Delete Subparagraphs 11.2.2 and 11.2.3 in their entirety. ARTICLE 15 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Add the Following to Subparagraph 15.1.6.2: Data substantiating abnormal weather conditions shall include at a minimum local IJS Weather Bureau Climatological Reports for the period involved plus a report indicating the average precipitation and temperature for the past 10 years from the nearest US Weather Bureau Reporting Station. END OF DOCUMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 00 73 05 - 4 Document G715'm - 2017 Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25 PROJECT: (name and address) OWNER: (name and address) CONTRACT INFORMATION Contract For: Date: ARCHITECT: (name and address) CERTIFICATE INFORMATION: Producer: Insured: Date: CONTRACTOR: (name and address) A. General Liability Yes No NIA 1. Does this policy include coverage for: a Damages because of bodily injury, sickness, or disease, including occupational ❑ ❑ ❑ sickness or disease, and death of any person? b Personal injury and advertising injury? ❑ ❑ ❑ c Damages because of physical damage to or destruction of tangible property, ❑ ❑ ❑ including the loss of use of such property? d Bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations? ❑ ❑ ❑ e The Contractor's indemnity obligations included in the Contract Documents? ❑ ❑ ❑ 2. Does this policy contain an exclusion or restriction of coverage for: a Claims by one insured against another insured, where the exclusion or ❑ ❑ ❑ restrictions is based solely on the fact that the claimant is an insured, and there would otherwise be coverage for the claim? b Claims for property damage to the Contractor's Work arising out of the ❑ ❑ ❑ products -completed operations hazard where the damaged Work or the Work out of which the damage arises was performed by a Subcontractor? c Claims for bodily injury other than to employees of the insured? ❑ ❑ ❑ d Claims for the Contractor's indemnity obligations included in the Contract ❑ ❑ ❑ Documents arising out of injury to employees of the insured? e Claims for loss excluded under a prior work endorsement or other similar ❑ ❑ ❑ exclusionary language? f Claims or loss due to physical damage under a prior injury endorsement or ❑ ❑ ❑ similar exclusionary language? g Claims related to residential, multi -family, or other habitational projects? ❑ ❑ ❑ h Claims related to roofing? ❑ ❑ ❑ i Claims related to exterior insulation finish systems, synthetic stucco, or similar ❑ ❑ ❑ exterior coatings or surfaces? j Claims related to earth subsistence or movement? ❑ ❑ ❑ k Claims related to explosion, collapse, and underground hazards? ❑ ❑ ❑ B. Other Insurance Coverage Yes No NIA 1. Indicate whether the Contractor has the following insurance coverages and, if so, indicate the coverage limits for each. a Professional liability insurance ❑ ❑ ❑ Coverage limits: b Pollution liability insurance ❑ ❑ ❑ Coverage limits: c Insurance for maritime liability risks associated with the operation of a vessel ❑ ❑ ❑ AIA Document G715TM — 2017, Copyright ®1901 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this Ale Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to tho maximum extent possible under the law. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architecis' legal counsel, copyright@aia.org. Coverage limits: d Insurance for the use or operation of manned or unmanned aircraft ❑ ❑ ❑ Coverage limits: e Property insurance ❑ ❑ ❑ Coverage limits: f Railroad protective liability insurance ❑ ❑ [] Coverage limits: g Asbestos abatement liability insurance ❑ ❑ ❑ Coverage limits: h Insurance for physical damage to property while it is in storage and in transit to 0 ❑ ❑ the construction site Coverage limits: i Other: [] ❑ ❑ (Authorized Representative) (Date of Issue) AIA Document G715TM — 2017. Copyright 01991 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorlxed reproduction or distribution of this AIAr' Document, or any 2 portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. To report copyright violations of AIA Contract Documents, e-mail The American Institute of Architects' legal counsel, copyright@aia.org. § 8.3 The Contractor's representative: (Name, address, email address, and other information) Kevin Bohrer Donlar Construction Company 550 Shoreview Park Road Shoreview NM 55126 8.4 Neither the Owner's nor the Contractor's representative shall be changed without ten days' prior notice to the other party. § 8.5 Insurance and Bonds § 8.5.1 The Owner and the Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance as set forth in AIA Document Al01 TM-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, § 8.5.2 The Contractor shall provide bonds as set forth in AIA Document All 01 Im-2017 Exhibit A, and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 8.6 Notice in electronic format, pursuant to Article 1 of AIA Document A201-2017, may be given in accordance with AIA Document E203TA°-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, if completed, or as otherwise set forth below: (If other than in accordance with AIA Document E203-2013, insert requirements for delivering notice in electronic format such as name, title, and email address of the recipient and whether and how the system will be required to generate a read receipt for the transmission,) § 8.7 Other provisions: ARTICLE 9 ENUMERATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 9.1 This Agreement is comprised of the following documents: .1 AIA Document A101 TM-2017, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor .2 AIA Document Al01 Tm-2017, Exhibit A, Insurance and Bonds .3 AIA Document A201 TM-2017, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction .4 AIA Document E203T11-2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E203-2013 incorporated into this Agreement.) .5 Drawings Number G 102 .6 Specifications Section 0001 10 Title Sheet Index Title Table of Contents Date February 14, 2019 Date Pages February 14, See attached 2019 project manual Init. AIA DocumentA101TM —2017. Copyright 01915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1950. 1961. 1963, 1967. 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997. 2007 and 20 77 by The American Institute or Architects, All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document 1s protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International iraitfes. 7 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA' Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be j prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 E T an 0312W2019 under Order No. 7179749022 whfch expires on 02/0512020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA54) 7 Addenda, if any: Number Date Pages Addendum 1 February 21, 2019 2 pgs Addendum 2 February 28, 2019 69 pgs Addendum 3 March 6, 2019 125 pgs Addendum 4 March 8, 2019 11 pgs Addendum 5 March 11, 2019 7 pgs Portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements are not part of the Contract Documents unless the bidding or proposal requirements are also enumerated in this Article 9. .8 Other Exhibits: (Check all boxes that apply and include appropriate information identifying the exhibit where required.) [ ] AIA Document E204TM-2017, Sustainable Projects Exhibit, dated as indicated below: (Insert the date of the E204-2017 incorporated into this Agreement.) [ ] The Sustainability Plan: Title Date Pages [ ] Supplementary and other Conditions of the Contract: Document Title Date Pages 00 73 05 Supplementary February 14, 4 Conditions 2019 .9 Other documents, if any, listed below: (List here any additional documents that are intended to form part of the Contract Documents. AIA Document A201TM-2017 provides that the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, the Contractor's bid or proposal, portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements, and other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, are not part of the Contract Documents unless enumerated in this Agreement. Any such documents should be listed here only if intended to be part of the Contract Documents.) This Agreement entered into as of the day and year first written above. OWNIHSlgnature] ald, CON CTOR (Signature 1� 1 c on City Manager So" � r-4to (Printed name and title) (Printed name and title) Init. AIA Document A101 Tm — 2017. Copyright© 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1967, 1974, 1977, 1987, 1991, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 08:21:38 ET on 03/28/2019 under Order No. 7179749022 which expires on 02/05/2020, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA54) t� Document A312TM -2010 Performance Bond Bond No. 106990235 CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (Name, legal status and address) (Nance, legal status and principal place Donlar Construction Company of business) 550 Shoreview Park Road Travelers Casualty and Surety CFh�spAUNnenn&asTmpokanhegal Shoreview, MN S5126 One Tower Square, 2SHS consequences. Consultation with OWNER: Hartford, CT 06183 an attorney Is encouraged with (Nance, legal status and address) respect to its completion or modification. City of New Hope Any singular reference to 4401 Xylon Avenue North Contractor, Surety, Owner or New Hope, MN other party shall be considered CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT plural where applicable. Dale: March 26, 2 019 AIA Document A312-2010 combines two separate bonds, a Amount: Eleven Million Three Hundred Fifty Thousand Two Hundred Seventy- fiv Performancent Bond, intond one farm. And No/100 ($11, 350, 275.00) This Is not a single combined Description: (•Fame and location) Performance and Payment Bond. New Hope Outdoor Pool, New Hope, MN. BOND Date: March 28, 2019 (Not earlier than Construction Contract Date) A1110tInt:Eleven Million Three Hundred Fifty Thousand Two Hundred Seventy-five And No/100 ($11,350,275.00) Modifications to this Bond: ® None ❑ See Section 16 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Donlar Const - Cc Travelers Caafialty and Surety Company f'America Signature: r: Signature: Name —! p _i�R'Z, Name Nicole oty and Title: ��e and Title: Attorney -in -Fact (Any additional signartrr .. a r on the last page of this Performance Bond.) (FOR INFORWATION ONLY— A'nrne, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: North Risk Partners (Architect, Engineer or other party) 2010 Centre Pointe Blvd. Mendota Heights, MN 55120 (651) 379-7800 Init. AIA Document A3121" - 2010. The American Institute of Architects. § 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference. § 2 If the Contractor performs the Construction Contract, the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Section 3. § 3 If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety's obligation under this Bond shall arise after .1 the Owner first provides notice to the Contractor and the Surety that the Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such notice shall indicate whether the Owner is requesting a conference among the Owner, Contractor and Surety to discuss the Contractor's performance. If the Owner does not request a conference, the Surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt of the Owner's notice, request such a conference. if the Surely timely requests a conference, the Owner shall attend. Unless the Owner agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Section 3.1 shall be held within ten (10) business days of the Surety's receipt of the Owner's notice. If the Owner, the Contractor and the Surety agree, the Contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement shall not waive the Owner's right, if any, subsequently to declare a Contractor Default; .2 the Owner declares a Contractor Default, terrninates the Construction Contract and notifics the Surety; and ,3 the Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to the Surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract. § 4 Failure on the part of the Owner to comply with the notice requirement in Section 3.1 shall not constitute a failure to comply with a condition precedent to the Surety's obligations, or release the Surety from its obligations, except to the extent the Surety demonstrates actual prejudice. § 5 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions of Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take one of the following actions: § 5.1 Arrange for the Contractor, with the consent of the Owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract; § 5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors; § 5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to the Owner for a contract for performance and completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by the Owner and a contractor selected with the Owner's concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to the Owner the amount of damages as described in Section 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by the Owner as a result of the Contractor Default; or § 5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor and with reasonable promptness under the circumstances: .1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to the Owner and, as soon as practicable after the amount is determined, make payment to the Owner; or .2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify the Owner, citing the reasons for denial. § 6 If the Surety does not proceed as provided in Section 5 with reasonable promptness, the Surety shall be deemed to be in default on this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from the Owner to the Surety demanding that the Surety perform its obligations under this Bond, and the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. If the Surety proceeds as provided in Section 5.4, and the Owner refuses the payment or the Surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further notice the Owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to the Owner. Init. AIA Document A3121" — 2010. The American Institute of Architects. § 7 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.2 or 5.3, then the responsibilities of the Surety to the Owner shall not be greater than those of the Contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of the Owner to the Surety shall not be greater than those of the Owner under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by the Owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, the Surety is obligated, without duplication, for 11 the responsibilities of the Contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract; .2 additional legal, design professional and delay costs resulting from the Contractor's Default, and resulting from the actions or failure to act of the Surety under Section 5; and .3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by delayed performance or non-performance of the Contractor. § 8 If the Surety elects to act under Section 5.1, 5.3 or 5A, the Surety's liability is limited to the amount of this Bond. § 9 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and the Balance of the Contract Price shall not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations, No right of action shall accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than the Owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. § 10'file Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. § 11 Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond may be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in which the work or part of the work is located and shall be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Default or within two years after the Contractor ceased working or within two years after the Surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. § 12 Notice to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. § 13 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall he deemed deleted herefront and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. § 14 Definitions § 14.1 Balance of the Contract Price. The total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract after all proper adjustments have been made, including allowance to the Contractor of any amounts received or to be received by the Owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which the Contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and proper payments made to or on behal f of the Contractor under the Construction Contract. § 14.2 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. § 14.3 Contractor Default. Failure of the Contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the Construction Contract. § 14.4 Owner Default. Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. § 14.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 15 If this Bond is issued fix an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. Init. AIA Document A31210 — 2010. The American Institute of Archilects. Init. § 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: N/A Signature: Name and Title: Name and Title: Address Address CAUTION: You should sign an original AIA Contract Document, on which this text appears In RED. An oririnsl assure$ the, changes will not be obscured. AIA Document A912TM — 20% The American Institute of Architects. 4 "'AIA Document A312TM —2010 Bond No. 106990235 Payment Bond CONTRACTOR: SURETY: (A'ame, legal stales and address) (Name, legal status and principal place Donlar Construction Company of business) sso Shoreview Park Road Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America This any has important legal Shoreview, MN 55126 One Tower Square, 2SHS consequences. Consultation with OWNER: Hartford, CT 06183 an attomey is encouraged with (Nlegal status and address) respect to Its completion orame, modification. City of New Hope Any singular reference to 4401 Xylon Avenue North Contractor, Surety, Owner or New Hope, MN other party shall be considered CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT plural where applicable. Dale: March 26, 2019 AIA Document A312-20 10 combines two separate bonds, a Performance Bond and a .A1110Un[:Eleven Million Three Hundred Fifty Thousand Two Hundred Seventy-fiv Payment Bond, into one form. And No/100 ($11, 350, 275.00) Description: This is not a single combined (Name and location) Performance and Payment Bond. New Hope Outdoor Pool, New Hope, MN. BOND Date: March 2 8, 2 019 (;Vat earlier than Construction Contract Date) Amount:Eleven Million Three Hundred Fifty Thousand Two Hundred Seventy-five And No/100 ($11,350,275.00) Modifications to this Bond: ® None ❑ See Section 18 CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Donlar Constr Compa Travelers Ca a lty and Surety Company o rica Signature: Signature: Name ::To i2 Name Nicole M. Coty and Tit le�i,� and Title: Attorney -in -Fact (Any adclitronal signaler s ear on the last page of this Payment Bond.) (FOR INFO&VU T10A' OA'LY — ,fame, address and telephone) AGENT or BROKER: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: North Risk Partners (Architect, Engineer or other party:) 2010 Centre Pointe Blvd. Mendota Heights, MN SS120 (651) 379-7800 Init. AIA DocumentA3121" - 2010. The American Institute of Architects. 061110 A § 1 The Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns to the Owner to pay for labor, materials and equipment furnished for use in the performance ofthc Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms. § 2 If the Contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies and holds harmless the Owner from claims, demands, liens or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, then the Surety and the Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond. § 3 if there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, the Surety's obligation to the Owner under this Bond shall arise after the Owner has promptly notified the Contractor and the Surety (at the address described in Section 13) of claims, demands, liens or suits against the Owner or the Owner's properly by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials or equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract and tendered defense ol'such claims, demands, liens or suits to the Contractor and the Surety. § 4 When the Owner has satisfied the conditions in Section 3, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien or suit. § 5 The Surety's obligations to a Claimant under this Bond shall arise after the tollowing: § 5.1 Claimants, who do not have a direct contract with the Contractor, .1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to the Contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last perlormed labor or last furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and .2 have sent a Claim to the Surety (at the address described in Section 13). § 5.2 Claimants, who are employed by or have a direct contract with the Contractor, have sent a Claim to the Surety (at Elie address described in Section 13). § 6 If a notice of non-payment required by Section 5.1.1 is given by the Owner to the Contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant's obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Section 5.1.1. § 7 When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Sections 5.I or 5.2, whichever is applicable, the Surety shall promptly and at the Surety's expense take the following actions: § 7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to the Owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and § 7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts. § 7.3 The Surety's failure to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2 shall not be deemed to constitute a waiver of defenses the Surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which the Surety and Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, the Surety fails to discharge its obligations under Section 7.1 or Section 7.2, the Surety shall indemnity the Claimant I'or the reasonable attorney's fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found to be due and owing to the Claimant. § 8 The Surety's total obligation shall not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney's fees provided under Section 7.3, and the amount of this Bond shall be credited for any payments made in good faith by the Surety. § 9 Amounts owed by the Owner to the Contractor under the Construction Contract shall be used for the performance of the Construction Contract and to satisfy claims, Warty, under any construction performance bond. By the Contractor furnishing and the Owner accepting this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by the Contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to satisfy obligations of the Contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to the Owner's priority to use the funds for the completion of the work. Init. AIA Document A9121" — 2010. The Amencan Institute of Architects. 6 § 10 The Surety shall not be liable to the Owner, Claimants or others for obligations of the Contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract. 'The Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses orally Claimant under (his Bond, and shall have under this Bond no obligation to make payments to, or give notice on behalf of, Claimants or otherwise have any obligations to Claimants under this Bond. § 11 The Surely hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts, purchase orders and other obligations. § 12 No suit or action shall be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the state in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date ( I ) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to the Surety pursuant to Section 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever of (I ) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this Paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitation available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit shall be applicable. § 13 Notice and Claims to the Surety, the Owner or the Contractor shall be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, shall be sufficient compliance as of the date received. § 14 When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement shall be deemed deleted herefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement shall be deemed incorporated herein. When so furnished, the intent is that this Bond shall be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond. § 15 Upon request by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, the Contractor and Owner shall promptly furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made. § 16 Definitions § 16.1 Claim. A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum: .1 the name of the Claimant; .2 the name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished; .3 a copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials or equipment was furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; .4 a brief description of the labor, materials or equipment furnished; .5 the date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract; .6 the total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim; .7 the total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and .8 the total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim. § 16.2 Claimant, An individual or entity having a direct contract with the Contractor or with a subcontractor of the Contractor to furnish labor, materials or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic's lien or similar statute against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond shall be to include without limitation in the terms "labor, materials or equipment" that part of water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service or rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of the work of the Contractor and the Contractor's subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic's lien may be asserted in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials or equipment were furnished. § 16.3 Construction Contract. The agreement between the Owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents. Init. AIA Document A31214 — 2010. The American Institute of Architects. § 16.4 Owner Default Failure of the Owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay the Contractor as required under the Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract. § 16.5 Contract Documents. All the documents that comprise the agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 171f this Bond is issued for an agreement between a Contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond shall be deemed to be Subcontractor and the term Owner shall be deemed to be Contractor. § 16 Modifications to this bond are as follows: (Space is provided below for additional signatures of added parties, other than those appearing on the cover page.) CONTRACTOR AS PRINCIPAL SURETY Company: (Corporate Seal) Company: (Corporate Seal) Signature: N/ _ Signature: N/A Name and Title: Name and Title: Address Address CAUTION: You should sign an orlglnsl AIA Contract Document, on which this text appears In RED. An orlglnal assures that changes will not be obscured. Inn. AIA Document AM211' — 2010. The American Institute of Archftects. CORPORATE ACKNOWLEDGMENT STATE OF _MfLVln,0rr�0.- COUNTY OF On the �_ day of YJA rCh � I , before me personally appeared, ❑r) jC0j-#h:Z. to me, who being duly sworn, did depose and say: that s/he resides in 0*\Qk Col&j Z44 that s/he is the of the Donlar Construction Company the corporation described in and which executed the foregoing instrument; that s/he knows the seal of said corporation; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by order of the board of directors of said corporation; and that s/he signed her/his name thereto by like order. (SEAL) STEPHANIE K PRESTON :i Uotary Public; i' iino'sda Noinry Public " My Commisslon Expires Jan 31, 2020 WJY4� �irYJLMA�IaJVV ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF CORPORATE SURETY STATE OF MINNESOTA COUNTY OF Dakota On the 28th day of March 2019 before me personally appeared, Nicole M. Coty to me known, who being duly sworn, did say: that s/he resides in Minnesota that s/he is the aforesaid officer or attorney in fact of Travelers Casualty and Surety CompanV of America a corporation, that the seal affixed to the foregoing instrument is the corporate seal of said corporation; and that said instrument as signed and sealed on behalf of said corporation by the aforesaid officer, by authority of its board of dj:� tors; and the aforesaid officer acknowledged said instrument to be the free act ridee o.- f said corporati (SEAL) 'I. r� Notary Public ANqP:ATRI 020 = Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America ►d1► Travelers Casualty and Surety Company i TRAVELERS ] St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut (herein collectively called the "Companies"), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Nicole M. Coty Of Mendota Heights Min i sot their true and lawful Attorney -in -Fact to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, con tonal undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed, and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this 3rd day of February, 2017. ��04 W$& ),,IV A&, ®ro!, ►FURTFM a RVff-CM. 00 ,�yCOW, � � • State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. By: Robert L. Raney, Se or Vice President On this the 3rd day of February, 2017, before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2021 Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary of Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, and St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which remains in full force and effect. Dated this 28th day of March 2019 R SIX 107 i� NARiPORD, LL'wOM1'1 1 e0 s• coHR ifs* e, Kevi�hes, Assi� retary To verify the authenticity of this Power ofAttorney, please call us at 1-800-421-3880. Please refer to the above -named Attorney -in -Fact and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. i1 Document A201- 2017 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address) New Hope Outdoor Pool ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: 4401 Xylon Avenue North The author of this document has New Hope, Minnesota 55428 added Information needed for its completion. The author may also THE OWNER: have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Addilions and (Name, legal status and address) Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to City of New Hope the standard form text is available 4401 Xylon Avenue North from the author and should be New Hope, MN 55428 4898 reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates THE ARCHITECT: where the author has added (Name, legal status and address) necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted Stantec Consulting Services Inc. from the original AIA text. 733 Marquette Avenue South This document has important legal Suite 1000 consequences. Consultation with an Minneapolis, MN 55402 attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification. TABLE OF ARTICLES For guidance in modifying this 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS document to include supplementary conditions, see AIA Document 2 OWNER A503Tm, Guide for Supplementary Conditions. 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS AIA Document A2017m —2017. Copyright 01911, 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. .� Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/3112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires an 02105/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES AIA Document A201 TM —2017. Copyright ®1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved, WARNING: This AIAe Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET an 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are Section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.3.2, 14.1, 15.1.2, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.6 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.5.4, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9. 10 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.3.1, 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10.1, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.4.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.5, 3.12.7,4.1.2,4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.4, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.4, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12,4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6.4, 15.1.4, 15.2 Architect's Additional Services and Expenses 2.5, 12.2.1, 13.4.2, 13.4.3,14.2.4 Architect's Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 3.7.4, 15.2,9.4.1,9.5 Architect's Approvals 2.5, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7 Architect's Authority to Reject Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect's Copyright 1.1.7, 1.5 Architect's Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2,14, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.4.2, 15.2 Architect's Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Architect's Instructions 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.4.2 Architect's Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect's Project Representative 4.2.10 Architect's Relationship with Contractor 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3,12, 3,16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.3.2, 13.4, 15.2 Architect's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3 Architect's Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect's Site Visits 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys' Fees 3.18.1, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2 Basic Definitions 1.1 Bidding Requirements 1.1.1 Binding Dispute Resolution 8.3.1, 9.7, 11.5, 13.1, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.3.3, 15.4.1 Bonds, Lien 7.3.4.4, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.5 Building Information Models Use and Reliance 1.8 Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.4 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.4.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2 Change Orders 1.1.1,3.4.2,3.7.4,3.8.2.3,3.11,3.12.8,4.2.8,5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3. 1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.2, 11.5, 12.1.2 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.2,3.11,4.2.8,7,7.2.1,7.3.1,7.4,8.3.1,9.3.1.1, 11.5 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 Claims, Notice of 1.6.2, 15.1.3 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 7.3.9, 9.5.2, 10.2.5, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 9.5.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.6 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3,18, 9.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 11.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work; Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.2, 15.1.5 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9. 1, 9.10, 12.2, 14.1.2, 15.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9 Completion, Substantial 3.10.1, 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9. 1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Compliance with Laws 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions 3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract 1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4 Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 15.4.4.2 Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of 7.3.1 Construction Change Directives 1. 1. 1, 3.4.2, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1 Construction Schedules, Contractor's 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts 5.4, 14.2.2.2 Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.4 Contract, Definition of 1. „2 CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 5.4.2, 11.5, 14 Contract Administration 3.1.3,4,9.4,9.5 Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1 Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.3.6, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1 Contract Sum 2.2.2. 2.2.4. 3.7.4. 3.7.5, 3.8. 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.2, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.1.2, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1 Contract Time 1.1.4, 2.2.1, 2.2.2, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 6.1.5, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.3.6, 7, 7, 7.3.10, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 12.1.2, 14.3.2, 15.1.4.2, 15.1.6.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1 CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 4.2.3, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Contractor's Employees AU1 Document A201 "" — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1916, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966. 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 4 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2. 1.1 Contractor's Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor's Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner's Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3, 12.2.4 Contractor's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 2.2.4, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 4.2.4, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7,9.10.2,11.2,11.3,11.4 Contractor's Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 2.3.3, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5.1, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3, 12, 13.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Contractor's Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor's Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor's Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor's Right to Stop the Work 2.2.2, 9.7 Contractor's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1 Contractor's Submittals 3.10,3.11,3.12,4.2.7,5.2.1,5.2.3,9.2,9.3,9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Contractor's Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor's Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.6, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.5, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2, 12.3, 15.1.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.4 Costs 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.2,12.1.2,12.2.1,12.2.4,13.4,14 Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors 3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work 3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2,10.2.5,10.4,12.2.4 Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.3.2, 11.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Damages for Delay 6.2.3, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2, 14.3.2 Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of 8.1.3 Day, Definition of 8.1.4 Decisions of the Architect 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 6.3, 7.3.4, 7.3.9,8.1.3,8.3.1,9.2,9.4,9.5.1,9.8.4,9.9.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2 Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.3, 9.5.1, 9.5.3, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Definitions 1.1,2.1.1,3.1.1,3.5,3.12.1,3.12.2,3.12.3,4.1.1,5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1, 15.1.1 Delays and Extensions of Time 3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 Digital Data Use and Transmission 1.7 Disputes 6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site 3.11 Drawings, Definition of 1.1.5 Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2 Emergencies 10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.5 Employees, Contractor's 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Equipment, Labor, or Materials 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2,10.2.1,10.2.4,14.2.1.1,14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.3.4, 2.3.6, 3.1, 3.3,1, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.6, 9.2,9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.1, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.4 Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.6, 15.2.5 AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ®1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 5 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 49661 BB737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, l 3.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner's 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials and Substances 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 11.3 Infonnation and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10.1, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.4,15.1.4.2,15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15,2.4, 15.2.5 Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.4,15.1.4.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.2,15.2.3, 15.2.4,15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.4 Instructions to Bidders 111 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.4.2 Instruments of Service, Definition of 1.1.7 Insurance 6.1.1, 7.3.4, 8.2.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.2.5, 11 Insurance, Notice of Cancellation or Expiration 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Insurance, Contractor's Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of 8.2.2, 14.4.2 Insurance, Owner's Liability 11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.2, 11.4, 11.5 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11 Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy 9.9.1 Insured loss, Adjustment and Settlement of 11.5 Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13 Interest 13.5 Interpretation 1.1.8, 1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment 1. 1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15. 1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Labor Disputes 8.3.1 Laws and Regulations 1 c 23 n 'f n 9 c '] '7 33.1121.110, I 1 �1 1 n 33.113, 7 9 A 1.3, /-3.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.6, 3. /, J.1G.110, J.13, 9.6.Y, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of 12.2.5, 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.12.10.1, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 9.6.8, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.3, 12.2.5, 13.3.1 Limitations of Time 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.5, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1. 9.5. 9.6. 9.7. 9.8. 9.9. 9.10, 12.2. 13.4, 14, 15, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5 Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.4, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic's Lien 2.1.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.6.8, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 15.1.3.2, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1, 15.4.1.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1. 1. 1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 AIA Document A2011m —2017. Copyright* 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958. 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 6 Unauthorized reproductlon or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 2.5, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1,9.7, 10.3.2 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2 Notice 1.6, 1.6.1, 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 2.2.2., 2.2.3, 2.2.4, 2.5, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 7.4, 8.2.2 9.6.8, 9.7, 9.10.1, 10.2.8, 10.3.2, 11.5, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1, 14.2.2, 14.4.2, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.4.1 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Insurance 11.1.4, 11.2.3 Notice of Claims 1.6.2, 2.1.2, 3.7.4, 9.6.8, 10.2.8, 15.1.3, 15.1.5, 15.1.6, 15.2.8, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.4.1, 13.4.2 Observations, Contractor's 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.3.1, 9.6.6, 9.8 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.5, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1 Owner, Evidence of Financial Arrangements 2.2, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Owner, Information and Services Required of the 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Owner's Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3.32.4, 2.5, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.4, 11.5, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7 Owner's Insurance 11.2 Owner's Relationship with Subcontractors 1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner's Right to Cant' Out the Work 2.5, 14.2.2 Owner's Right to Clean Up 6.3 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts 6.1 Owner's Right to Stop the Work 2.4 Owner's Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner's Right to Terminate the Contract 14.2, 14.4 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.3.6, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3,17, 4.2.12, 5.3 Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9 Patching, Cutting and 3.14, 6.2.5 Patents 3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.1 0.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9. 10. 1, 9.10.3,14.1,1.3,14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.5, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Payment, Final 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.10, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment Bond, Performance Bond and 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Payments, Progress 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9 Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2 PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.4.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.1.2 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.3.1, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.4.4, 10.2.2 PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3,12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.4 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 14.2.3, 15.1.4 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1916, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1967, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) Init. 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.2 Proposal Requirements 1.1.1 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 2.3.2, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 9.6.4, 9.9. 1, 10.2.2, 13.1, 13.3, 13.4.1, 13.4.2, 13.5, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.3.1, 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9. 10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.10, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6,2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor's Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3,12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12 Rights and Remedies 1. 1.2, 2.4, 2.5, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3 . 15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6. 1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.1, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights 3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration 15.4.1 Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4 Safety Precautions and Programs 3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4 Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values 9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.6.2 Separate Contracts and Contractors 1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2 Separate Contractors, Definition of 6.1.1 Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections 3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.9.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Site Visits, Architect's 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.4 Special Inspections and Testing 4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.4 Specifications, Definition of 1.1.6 Specifications 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 15.1.2, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work 2.2.2, 2.4, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials 6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1 SUBCONTRACTORS 5 Subcontractors, Work by 1.2.2,3.3.2,3.12.1,3.18,4.2.3,5.2.3,5.3,5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7 Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1 Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.4, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation. Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3 Substances, Hazardous 10.3 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 15.1.2 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 2.3.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub -subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ® 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2015 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale, User Notes: (3B9ADA51) l 3.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.4, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.4 Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.4, 9.6, 9.10.5, 14.2.1 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.6.8, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.2, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.1 0.3 Surveys 1.1.7, 2.3.4 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 3.7.5, 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.4.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.7 Termination by the Owner for Convenience 14.4 Termination of the Architect 2.3.3 Termination of the Contractor Employment 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14 Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 12.2.1, 13.4 TIME 8 Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.6, l 5.2.5 Time Limits 2.1.2,2.2,2.5,3.2.2,3.10,3.11,3.12.5,3.15.1,4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 12.2, 13.4, 14, 15.1.2, 15.1.3, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.1.3 Title to Work 9.3.2, 9.3.3 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12 Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown 3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices 7.3.3.2, 9.1.2 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1. 5, 2.3.6, 3.12.6, 5.3 Use of Site 3,13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of 9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.3.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor 9.10.5, 13.3.2, 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims by the Owner 9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.3.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.7 Waiver of Liens 9.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation 6.1.1, 11.3 Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 15.1.2 Weather Delays 8.3, 15.1.6.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3 Written Consent 1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.10.3, 13.2, 13.3.2, 15.4.4.2 Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.4.2, 14.3.1 AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ©1911. 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961. 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987. 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA11 Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 9 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 Basic Definitions § 1.1.1 The Contract Documents The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement, and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive, or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor's bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding or proposal requirements. § 1.1.2 The Contract The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect's consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub -subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect's consultants, or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect's duties. § 1.1.3 The Work The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fu1G11 the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 The Project The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by Separate Contractors. § 1.1.5 The Drawings The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules, and diagrams. § 1.1.6 The Specifications The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 Instruments of Service Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect's consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2. The Initial Decision Maker shall not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and shall not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 1.2 Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent AIA Document A201TM —2017. Copyright m 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1967, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 1213112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results. § 1.2.1.1 The invalidity of any provision of the Contract Documents shall not invalidate the Contract or its remaining provisions. If it is determined that any provision of the Contract Documents violates any law, or is otherwise invalid or unenforceable, then that provision shall be revised to the extent necessary to make that provision legal and enforceable. In such case the Contract Documents shall be construed, to the fullest extent permitted by law, to give effect to the parties' intentions and purposes in executing the Contract. § 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 Capitalization Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles, or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 Interpretation In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications, and Other Instruments of Service § 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect's consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and retain all common law, statutory, and other reserved rights in their Instruments of Service, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub - subcontractors, and suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with the Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect's or Architect's consultants' reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, and suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them, subject to any protocols established pursuant to Sections 1.7 and 1.8, solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub -subcontractors, and suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to the Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect, and the Architect's consultants. § 1.6 Notice § 1.6.1 Except as otherwise provided in Section 1.6.2, where the Contract Documents require one party to notify or give notice to the other party, such notice shall be provided in writing to the designated representative of the patty to whom the notice is addressed and shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person, by mail, by courier, or by electronic transmission if a method for electronic transmission is set forth in the Agreement. § 1.6.2 Notice of Claims as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be provided in writing and shall be deemed to have been duly served only if delivered to the designated representative of the party to whom the notice is addressed by certified or registered mail, or by courier providing proof of delivery. § 1.7 Digital Data Use and Transmission The parties shall agree upon protocols governing the transmission and use of Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form. The parties will use AIA Document E203Tm 2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, to establish the protocols for the development, use, transmission, and exchange of digital data. ALA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAs Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 11 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIAs Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 1.8 Building Information Models Use and Reliance Any use of, or reliance on, all or a portion of a building information model without agreement to protocols governing the use of, and reliance on, the information contained in the model and without having those protocols set forth in AIA Document E203TIO2013, Building Information Modeling and Digital Data Exhibit, and the requisite AIA Document G202TM 2013, Project Building Information Modeling Protocol Form, shall be at the using or relying party's sole risk and without liability to the other party and its contractors or consultants, the authors of, or contributors to, the building information model, and each of their agents and employees. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 General § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor, within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of, or enforce mechanic's lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner's interest therein. § 2.2 Evidence of the Owner's Financial Arrangements § 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract. The Contractor shall have no obligation to commence the Work until the Owner provides such evidence. If commencement of the Work is delayed under this Section 2.2.1, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately. § 2.2.2 Following commencement of the Work and upon written request by the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract only if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner's ability to make payment when due; or (3) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum. if the Owner fails to provide such evidence, as required, within fourteen days of the Contractor's request, the Contractor may immediately stop the Work and, in that event, shall notify the Owner that the Work has stopped. However, if the request is made because a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum under (3) above, the Contractor may immediately stop only that portion of the Work affected by the change until reasonable evidence is provided. If the Work is stopped under this Section 2.2.2, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided in the Contract Documents. § 2.2.3 After the Owner furnishes evidence of financial arrangements under this Section 2.2, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.4 Where the Owner has designated information furnished under this Section 2.2 as "confidential," the Contractor shall keep the information confidential and shall not disclose it to any other person. However, the Contractor may disclose "confidential" information, after seven (7) days' notice to the Owner, where disclosure is required by law, including a subpoena or other form of compulsory legal process issued by a court or governmental entity, or by court or arbitrator(s) order. The Contractor may also disclose "confidential" information to its employees, consultants, sureties, Subcontractors and their employees, Sub -subcontractors, and others who need to know the content of such information solely and exclusively for the Project and who agree to maintain the confidentiality of such information. § 2.3 Information and Services Required of the Owner 12.31 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, AIA Document A201"" —2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 12 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities. § 2.3.2 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture, or an entity lawfully practicing architecture, in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 2.3.3 If the employment of the Architect terminates, the Owner shall employ a successor to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 2.3.4 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.3.5 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents with reasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner's control and relevant to the Contractor's performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor's written request for such information or services. § 2.3.6 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.4 Owner's Right to Stop the Work If the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to cant' out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.5 Owner's Right to Carry Out the Work If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such default or neglect. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect and the Architect may, pursuant to Section 9.5.1, withhold or nullify a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to reimburse the Owner for the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner's expenses and compensation for the Architect's additional services made necessary by such default, neglect, or failure. If current and future payments are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. If the Contractor disagrees with the actions of the Owner or the Architect, or the amounts claimed as costs to the Owner, the Contractor may file a Claim pursuant to Article 15. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 General § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of its obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor. AIA Document A201"" —2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 13 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 3.2 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed, and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.4, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor's review is made in the Contractor's capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor's notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall submit Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contlactui fails to pet futin the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner, subject to Section 15.1.7, as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 Supervision and Construction Procedures § 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor's best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jnhsite safety thereof and shall he solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Owner and Architect, and shall propose alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect shall evaluate the proposed alternative solely for conformance with the design intent for the completed construction. Unless the Architect objects to the Contractor's proposed alternative, the Contractor shall perform the Work using its alternative means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor's employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 Labor and Materials § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. Init. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA`= Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and Internation:d Treaties. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this ASAti Document, or ar)y portion of It, inay result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and wlll be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 1213112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/0512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA51) § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work approved by the Architect in accordance with Section 3.12.8 or ordered by the Architect in accordance with Section 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor's employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 Warranty § 3.5.1 The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements maybe considered defective. The Contractor's warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.5.2 All material, equipment, or other special warranties required by the Contract Documents shall be issued in the name of the Owner, or shall be transferable to the Owner, and shall commence in accordance with Section 9.8.4. § 3.6 Taxes The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws § VA Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 14 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor's cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend that an equitable adjustment be made in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect's determination or recommendation, that party may submit a Claim as provided in Article 15, AIA Document A201 ^" — 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. is Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 Allowances § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, .1 allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts; .2 Contractor's costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and .3 whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor's costs under Section 3.8.2.2. § 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 Superintendent § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor, stating whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner's consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 Contractor's Construction and Submittal Schedules § 3.10,1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a Contractor's construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall contain detail appropriate for the Project, including (1) the date of commencement of the Work, interim schedule milestone dates, and the date of Substantial Completion; (2) an apportionment of the Work by construction activity; and (3) the time required for completion of each portion of the Work. The schedule shall provide for the orderly progression of the Work to completion and shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents. The schedule shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project. § 3.10.2 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, shall submit a submittal schedule for the Architect's approval. The Architect's approval shall not be unreasonably delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor's construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, or fails to provide submittals in accordance with the approved submittal schedule, the AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ©1911. 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent passible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/0512019, and is not for resale. User Notes; (3B9ADA51) Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect. § 3.11 Documents and Samples at the Site The Contractor shall make available, at the Project site, the Contract Documents, including Change Orders, Construction Change Directives, and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and the approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar required submittals. These shall be in electronic form or paper copy, available to the Architect and Owner, and delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. § 3.12 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules, and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub -subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier, or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams, and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment, or workmanship, and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate how the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve, and submit to the Architect, Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents, in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of Separate Contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so, and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect's approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, unless the Contractor has specifically notified the Architect of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, by the Architect's approval thereof. AIA Document A201 T" — 2017, Copyright© 1911. 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 17 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/3112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (31219ADA51) § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such notice, the Architect's approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. § 3.12.10.1 If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the performance and design criteria provided in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by an appropriately licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings, and other submittals related to the Work, designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional's written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy and accuracy of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review and approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. § 3.12.10.2 If the Contract Documents require the Contractor's design professional to certify that the Work has been performed in accordance with the design criteria, the Contractor shall furnish such certifications to the Architect at the time and in the form specified by the Architect. § 3.13 Use of Site The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, lawful orders of public authorities, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 Cutting and Patching § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting, or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting, or patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting, or patching, finless otherwise. regijired by the Cnntract Dncuments. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or Separate Contractors by cutting, patching, or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter construction by the Owner or a Separate Contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of the Separate Contractor. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold, from the Owner or a Separate Contractor, its consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 Cleaning Up § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials and rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor's tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and the Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright p 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET an 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 3.16 Access to Work The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect with access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for defense or loss when a particular design, process, or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications, or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if an infringement of a copyright or patent is discovered by, or made known to, the Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for the loss unless the information is promptly furnished to the Architect. § 3.18 Indemnification § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss, or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them, or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 General § 4.1.1 The Architect is the person or entity retained by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.3.2 and identified as such in the Agreement. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities, and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified, or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.2 Administration of the Contract § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner's representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor's rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and promptly report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the AIA Document A201 "" — 2017. Copyright © 1911. 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 19 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:D0:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) Contract Documents, (2) known deviations from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (3) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of, and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of, the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.4 Communications The Owner and Contractor shall include the Architect in all communications that relate to or affect the Architect's services or professional responsibilities. The Owner shall promptly notify the Architect of the substance of any direct communications between the Owner and the Contractor otherwise relating to the Project. Communications by and with the Architect's consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with Separate Contractors shall be through the Owner. The Contract Documents may specify other communication protocols. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect's evaluations of the Contractor's Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.4.2 and 13.4.3, whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor's submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect's action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect's professional judgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect's review of the Contractor's submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5, and 3.12. The Architect's review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures. The Architect's approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and C'nnctniction Change Directives, and may order minor changes in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner's review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more Project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect's responsibilities at the site. The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any change in the duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Project representatives. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations AIA Document A2011" —2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/3112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (31319ADA51) and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either, and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect's decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect's response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 Definitions § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a Separate Contractor or the subcontractors of a Separate Contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub -subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub -subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub -subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub - subcontractor. § 5.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work § 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall notify the Owner and Architect of the persons or entities proposed for each principal portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design. Within 14 days of receipt of the information, the Architect may notify the Contractor whether the Owner or the Architect (1) has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) requires additional time for review. Failure of the Architect to provide notice within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor's Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person, or entity for one previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 Subcontractual Relations By appropriate written agreement, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor's Work that the Contractor, by these Contract Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies, and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub -subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 21 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIMS Document, or any porllon of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub - subcontractors. § 5.4 Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts § 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that .1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor; and .2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract. When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor's rights and obligations under the subcontract. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor's compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor's obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 Owner's Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts § 6.1.1 The term "Separate Contractor(s)" shall mean other contractors retained by the Owner under separate agreements. The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces, and with Separate Contractors retained under Conditions of the Contract substantially similar to those of this Contract, including those provisions of the Conditions of the Contract related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner -Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner's own forces and of each Separate Contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with any Separate Contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to its construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner's own forces or with Separate Contractors, the Owner or its Separate Contractors shall have the same obligations and rights that the Contractor has under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6, and Articles 10, 11, and 12. § 6.2 Mutual Responsibility § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and Separate Contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor's construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor's Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a Separate Contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, ARA DacumentA2011-2017. Copyright 01911, 19i5, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1%3, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997. 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Arch!tecls. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyrlght Law and International Treaties. 22 Unauthorized repro duetton or distribution of this AIAH Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civiIs nd criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under tba law. This document was produced byAIA sollware at 13:00:55 ET on 1213112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA51) Init. promptly notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that would render it unsuitable for proper execution and results of the Contractor's Work. Failure of the Contractor to notify the Architect of apparent discrepancies or defects prior to proceeding with the Work shall constitute an acknowledgment that the Owner's or Separate Contractor's completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall not be responsible for discrepancies or defects in the construction or operations by the Owner or Separate Contractor that are not apparent. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a Separate Contractor because of the Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a Separate Contractor's delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction. § 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage that the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or Separate Contractor as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each Separate Contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 Owner's Right to Clean Up If a dispute arises among the Contractor, Separate Contractors, and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 General § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor, and Architect. A Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor. An order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall proceed promptly with changes in the Work, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 Change Orders § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor, and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following: .1 The change in the Work; .2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and .3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 Construction Change Directives § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions, or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods: AIA Document A201'" — 2017. Copyright m 1911, 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961. 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA11 Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) 23 .1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation; .2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon; .3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or .4 As provided in Section 7.3.4. § 7.3.4 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.4 shall be limited to the following: .1 Costs of labor, including applicable payroll taxes, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, workers' compensation insurance, and other employee costs approved by the Architect; .2 Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed; .3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others; .4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use, or similar taxes, directly related to the change; and .5 Costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.5 If the Contractor disagrees with the adjustment in the Contract Time, the Contractor may make a Claim in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 7.3.6 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.7 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor's agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum steal] be acttlal not costas ermfirmed by the Architect_ When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect's professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect's interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 Minor Changes in the Work The Architect may order minor changes in the Work that are consistent with the intent of the Contract Documents and do not involve an adjustment in the Contract Sum or an extension of the Contract Time. The Architect's order for minor changes shall be in writing. If the Contractor believes that the proposed minor change in the Work will AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright m 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init, American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 1213112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which explres on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor shall notify the Architect and shall not proceed to implement the change in the Work. If the Contractor performs the Work set forth in the Architect's order for a minor change without prior notice to the Architect that such change will affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time, the Contractor waives any adjustment to the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time. ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 Definitions § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 Progress and Completion § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement, the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, commence the Work prior to the effective date of insurance required to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 Delays and Extensions of Time § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by (1) an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, of an employee of either, or of a Separate Contractor; (2) by changes ordered in the Work; (3) by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties, adverse weather conditions documented in accordance with Section 15.1.6.2, or other causes beyond the Contractor's control; (4) by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and binding dispute resolution; or (5) by other causes that the Contractor asserts, and the Architect determines, justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 Contract Sum § 9.1.1 The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.1.2 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed so that application of such unit prices to the actual quantities causes substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 9.2 Schedule of Values Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit a schedule of values to the Architect before the first Application for Payment, allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work. The schedule of values shall be prepared in the form, and supported by the data to substantiate its accuracy, required by the Architect. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's Applications for Payment. Any changes to the schedule of values shall be submitted to the Architect and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require, and AIA Document A201 m — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963. 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 25 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 1213112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA51) unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor's subsequent Applications for Payment. § 9.3 Applications for Payment § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. The application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by all data substantiating the Contractor's right to payment that the Owner or Architect require, such as copies of requisitions, and releases and waivers of liens from Subcontractors and suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay. § 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner's title to such materials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner's interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage, and transportation to the site, for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information, and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances, in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, suppliers, or other persons or entities that provided labor, materials, and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 Certificates for Payment § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, either (1) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment in the full amount of the Application for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor; or (2) issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reasons for withholding certification in part as provided in Section 9.5.1; or (3) withhold certification of the entire Application for Payment, and notify the Contractor and Owner of the Architect's reason for withholding certification in whole as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect's evaluation of the Work and the data in the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated, the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion, and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on -site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work; (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures; (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor's right to payment; or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright m 1911. 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961. 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1967, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 9.5 Decisions to Withhold Certification § 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect's opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect's opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of .1 defective Work not remedied; .2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims, unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor; .3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or suppliers for labor, materials or equipment; .4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum; .5 damage to the Owner or a Separate Contractor; .6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or .7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When either party disputes the Architect's decision regarding a Certificate for Payment under Section 9.5.1, in whole or in part, that party may submit a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 9.5.3 When the reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.4 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or supplier to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Contractor shall reflect such payment on its next Application for Payment. § 9.6 Progress Payments § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner, the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor's portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub -subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors and suppliers to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay, or to see to the payment of money to, a Subcontractor or supplier, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 The Contractor's payments to suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to that provided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976,1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAO Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 27 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors or provided by suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust, or entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.6.8 Provided the Owner has fulfilled its payment obligations under the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall defend and indemnify the Owner from all loss, liability, damage or expense, including reasonable attorney's fees and litigation expenses, arising out of any lien claim or other claim for payment by any Subcontractor or supplier of any tier. Upon receipt of notice of a lien claim or other claim for payment, the Owner shall notify the Contractor. If approved by the applicable court, when required, the Contractor may substitute a surety bond for the property against which the lien or other claim for payment has been asserted. § 9.7 Failure of Payment If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor's Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents, the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shalt be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable costs of shutdown, delay and start- up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 Substantial Completion § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor's list, the Architect will make nn inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect's inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor's list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion; establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance; and fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in the Certificate. Upon such acceptance, and consent of surety if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to the Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. AtA Document A20110' —2017, Copyright ® 1911, 1915, 1918. 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961. 1953, 1966,1970, 1976. 1987. 1997. 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAe' Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and In tornatlaRai Treall es. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this A[A1l oocumont, or any portion of it, may result In Severe cirri! and criminal penalties, and will be prose cutod to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced try At software at 13:00:55 €T on 12i31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 9.9 Partial Occupancy or Use § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor, and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.10 Final Completion and Final Payment § 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection. When the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect's knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect's on -site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect's final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor's being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment, (5) documentation of any special warranties, such as manufacturers' warranties or specific Subcontractor warranties, and (6) if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts and releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance. If a lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging the lien, claim, security interest, or encumbrance, including all costs and reasonable attorneys' fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed, corrected, and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of the surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of Claims. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987. 1997. 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIAe Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 29 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/3112018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from A liens, Claims, security interests, or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled; .2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; .3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents; or .4 audits performed by the Owner, if permitted by the Contract Documents, after final payment. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a supplier, shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY § 10.1 Safety Precautions and Programs The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 Safety of Persons and Property § 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to .1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby; .2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody, or control of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, or a Sub -subcontractor; and .3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, and utilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. § 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with, and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities, bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury, or loss. § 10.2.3 The Contractor shall implement, erect, and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards; promulgating safety regulations; and notifying the owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities of the safeguards. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub -subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3. The Contractor may make a Claim for the cost to remedy the damage or loss to the extent such damage or loss is attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor's organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor's superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937. 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970. 1976. 1987. 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/3112016 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA51) § 10.2.8 Injury or Damage to Person or Property If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, notice of the injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 Hazardous Materials and Substances § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials or substances. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and notify the Owner and Architect of the condition, § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor's notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of the material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of the material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor's reasonable additional costs of shutdown, delay, and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect's consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss, or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for hazardous materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor's fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of hazardous materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner's fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 Emergencies In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor's discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury, or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. [nit. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925. 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 31 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 Contractor's Insurance and Bonds § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Owner, Architect, and Architect's consultants shall be named as additional insureds under the Contractor's commercial general liability policy or as otherwise described in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.2 The Contractor shall provide surety bonds of the types, for such penal sums, and subject to such terms and conditions as required by the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall purchase and maintain the required bonds from a company or companies lawfully authorized to issue surety bonds in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.1.3 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. § 11.1.4 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Contractor's Required Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Contractor becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide notice to the Owner of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Upon receipt of notice from the Contractor, the Owner shall, unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Owner, have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by the Contractor. The furnishing of notice by the Contractor shall not relieve the Contractor of any contractual obligation to provide any required coverage. § 11.2 Owner's Insurance § 11.2.1 The Owner shall purchase and maintain insurance of the types and limits of liability, containing the endorsements, and subject to the terms and conditions, as described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents. The Owner shall purchase and maintain the required insurance from an insurance company or insurance companies lawfully authorized to issue insurance in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. § 11.2.2 Failure to Purchase Required Property Insurance. If the Owner fails to purchase and maintain the required property insurance, with all of the coverages and in the amounts described in the Agreement or elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. Upon receipt of notice from the Owner, the Contractor may delay commencement of the Work and may obtain insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub -Subcontractors in the Work, When the failure to provide coverage has been cured or resolved, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be equitably adjusted. In the event the Owner fails to procure coverage, the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub -subcontractors to the extent the loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance to have been procured by the Owner. The cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by a Change Order. If the Owner does not provide written notice, and the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain the required insurance, the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for all reasonable costs and damages attributable thereto. § 11.2.3 Notice of Cancellation or Expiration of Owner's Required Property Insurance. Within three (3) business days of the date the Owner becomes aware of an impending or actual cancellation or expiration of any property insurance required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall provide notice to the Contractor of such impending or actual cancellation or expiration. Unless the lapse in coverage arises from an act or omission of the Contractor: (1) the Contractor, upon receipt of notice from the Owner, shall have the right to stop the Work until the lapse in coverage has been cured by the procurement of replacement coverage by either the Owner or the Contractor; (2) the Contract Time and Contract Sum shall be equitably adjusted; and (3) the Owner waives all rights against the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub -subcontractors to the extent any loss to the Owner would have been covered by the insurance had it not expired or been cancelled. If the Contractor purchases replacement coverage, the cost of the insurance shall be charged to the Owner by an appropriate Change Order. The furnishing of notice by the Owner shall not relieve the Owner of any contractual obligation to provide required insurance. AU1 Document A201 "' — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12131/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02I05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) § 11.3 Waivers of Subrogation § 11.3.1 The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub - subcontractors, agents, and employees, each of the other; (2) the Architect and Architect's consultants; and (3) Separate Contractors, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub -subcontractors, agents, and employees, for damages caused by fire, or other causes of loss, to the extent those losses are covered by property insurance required by the Agreement or other property insurance applicable to the Project, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require similar written waivers in favor of the individuals and entities identified above from the Architect, Architect's consultants, Separate Contractors, subcontractors, and sub -subcontractors. The policies of insurance purchased and maintained by each person or entity agreeing to waive claims pursuant to this section 11.3.1 shall not prohibit this waiver of subrogation. This waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity (1) even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, (2) even though that person or entity did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, or (3) whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the damaged property. § 11.3.2 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, to the extent permissible by such policies, the Owner waives all rights in accordance with the terms of Section I t.3.1 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. § 11.4 Loss of Use, Business Interruption, and Delay in Completion Insurance The Owner, at the Owner's option, may purchase and maintain insurance that will protect the Owner against loss of use of the Owner's property, or the inability to conduct normal operations, due to fire or other causes of loss. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor and Architect for loss of use of the Owner's property, due to fire or other hazards however caused. §11.5 Adjustment and Settlement of Insured Loss § 11.5.1 A loss insured under the property insurance required by the Agreement shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.5.2. The Owner shall pay the Architect and Contractor their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Owner, and by appropriate agreements the Architect and Contractor shall make payments to their consultants and Subcontractors in similar manner. § 11.5.2 Prior to settlement of an insured loss, the Owner shall notify the Contractor of the terms of the proposed settlement as well as the proposed allocation of the insurance proceeds. The Contractor shall have 14 days from receipt of notice to object to the proposed settlement or allocation of the proceeds. If the Contractor does not object, the Owner shall settle the loss and the Contractor shall be bound by the settlement and allocation. Upon receipt, the Owner shall deposit the insurance proceeds in a separate account and make the appropriate distributions. Thereafter, if no other agreement is made or the Owner does not terminate the Contract for convenience, the Owner and Contractor shall execute a Change Order for reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work in the amount allocated for that purpose. If the Contractor timely objects to either the terms of the proposed settlement or the allocation of the proceeds, the Owner may proceed to settle the insured loss, and any dispute between the Owner and Contractor arising out of the settlement or allocation of the proceeds shall be resolved pursuant to Article 15. Pending resolution of any dispute, the Owner may issue a Construction Change Directive for the reconstruction of the damaged or destroyed Work. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.1 Uncovering of Work § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect's request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect's examination and be replaced at the Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment to AU1 Document A201"' —2017. Copyright @ 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1907, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 33 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) the Contract Sum and Contract Time as may be appropriate. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, the costs of uncovering the Work, and the cost of correction, shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 12.2 Correction of Work § 12.2.1 Before Substantial Completion The Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, discovered before Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 12.2.2 After Substantial Completion § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor's obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of any applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of notice from the Owner to do so, unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.5. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged constriction of the Owner or Separate Contractors, whether completed or partially completed, caused by the Contractor's correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor's liability with respect to the Contractor's obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 Acceptance of Nonconforming Work If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 Governing Law The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located, excluding that jurisdiction's choice of law rules. If the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. AIA Document A201"" —2017. Copyright® 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties, 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be / prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 49661 B8737 which expires on 02/0512019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA51) § 13.2 Successors and Assigns § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns, and legal representatives to covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner's rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate the assignment. § 13.3 Rights and Remedies § 13.3.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereunder shall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. § 13.3.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect, or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach thereunder, except as may be specifically agreed upon in writing. § 13.4 Tests and Inspections § 13.4.1 Tests, inspections, and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules, and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections, and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections, and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of tests, inspections, or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded. The Owner shall directly arrange and pay for tests, inspections, or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations so require. § 13.4.2 If the Architect, Owner, or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection, or approval not included under Section 13.4.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection, or approval, by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.4.3, shall be at the Owner's expense. § 13.4.3 If procedures for testing, inspection, or approval under Sections 13.4.1 and 13.4.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure, including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect's services and expenses, shall be at the Contractor's expense. § 13.4.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection, or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.4.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections, or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.4.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.5 Interest Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at the rate the parties agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright p 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961. 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 35 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/311201 B under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 0210512019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 Termination by the Contractor § 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub -subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, for any of the following reasons: .1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped; .2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency, that requires all Work to be stopped; .3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or .4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2. § 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub -subcontractor, their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work, repeated suspensions, delays, or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3, constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days' notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, as well as reasonable overhead and profit on Work not executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub -subcontractor, or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days' notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 Termination by the Owner for Cause § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor .1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials; .2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors or suppliers in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors or suppliers; .3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or .4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the reasons described in Section 14.2.1 exist, and upon certification by the Architect that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, the Owner may, without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor's surety, if any, seven days' notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety: .1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor; .2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and .3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work. § 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect's services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright© 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951. 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract. § 14.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work, in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay, or interruption under Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent .1 that performance is, was, or would have been, so suspended, delayed, or interrupted, by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or .2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 Termination by the Owner for Convenience § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner's convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Contractor shall .1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice; .2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and .3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders. § 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner's convenience, the Owner shall pay the Contractor for Work properly executed; costs incurred by reason of the termination, including costs attributable to termination of Subcontracts; and the termination fee, if any, set forth in the Agreement. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 Claims § 15.1.1 Definition A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, a change in the Contract Time, or other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. This Section 15.1.1 does not require the Owner to file a Claim in order to impose liquidated damages in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.2 Time Limits on Claims The Owner and Contractor shall commence all Claims and causes of action against the other and arising out of or related to the Contract, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, in accordance with the requirements of the binding dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement and within the period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all Claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 15.1.2. § 15.1.3 Notice of Claims § 15.1.3.1 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered prior to expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party under this Section 15.1.3.1 shall be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. AIA Document A2017" — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. Amrrican Institute of Archrtcrls. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA' Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 3% Unatrthorrzed reproduction or distribution of this AIA" Document, or any portion of it, may result in sovere civil and criminal penaltces, and will be 1 prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02105/2019, and Is not for resale. User Notes: (3139ADA51) Init. § 15.1.3.2 Claims by either the Owner or Contractor, where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2, shall be initiated by notice to the other party. In such event, no decision by the Initial Decision Maker is required. § 15.1A Continuing Contract Performance § 15.1.4.1 Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 15.1.4.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted in accordance with the Initial Decision Maker's decision, subject to the right of either party to proceed in accordance with this Article 15. The Architect will issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decision of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.5 Claims for Additional Cost If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given before proceeding to execute the portion of the Work that is the subject of the Claim. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.6 Claims for Additional Time § 15.1.6.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, notice as provided in Section 15.1.3 shall be given. The Contractor's Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary. § 15.1.6.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated, and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.7 Waiver of Claims for Consequential Damages The Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes .1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and .2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit, except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work. This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation to all nomerinential damages due to either party's termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.7 shall be deemed to preclude assessment of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 Initial Decision § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those where the condition giving rise to the Claim is first discovered after expiration of the period for correction of the Work set forth in Section 12.2.2 or arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, and 11.5, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim. If an initial decision has not been rendered within 30 days after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker, the party asserting the Claim may demand mediation and binding dispute resolution without a decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the AIA Document A201 TM — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This MAO, Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/20IB under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (369ADA51) 38 Init. Initial Decision Maker's sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner's expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of the request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished, or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Upon receipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1. § 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of receipt of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within 30 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor's default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety's assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic's lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 Mediation § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract, except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.7, shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. § 15.3.3 Either party may, within 30 days from the date that mediation has been concluded without resolution of the dispute or 60 days after mediation has been demanded without resolution of the dispute, demand in writing that the other party file for binding dispute resolution. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for binding dispute resolution within 60 days after receipt thereof, then both parties waive their rights to binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. AIA Document A201 "' —2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915. 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05/2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) 39 § 15.3.4 The parties shall share the mediator's fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4 Arbitration § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. The Arbitration shall be conducted in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4,1,1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request for mediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based oil the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement, shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 Consolidation or Joinder § 15.4,4.1 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4A.2 Subject to the rules of the American Arbitration Association or other applicable arbitration rules, either party may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to he accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder_ Consent to arbitratinn invnlving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as those of the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement. AIA Document A201" — 2017. Copyright ©1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997, 2007 and 2017 by The Init. American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document Is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of It, may result In severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 13:00:55 ET on 12/31/2018 under Order No. 4966188737 which expires on 02/05f2019, and is not for resale. User Notes: (3B9ADA51) DOCUMENT 00 73 05 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction (AIA Document A201-2017) and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions which are not so amended or supplemented remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions will have the meanings indicated in the General Conditions. ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR A. Add a New Subparagraph 3.2.5 to Paragraph 3.2: The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect for the Architect to evaluate and respond to the Contractor's request for information, where such information was available to the Contractor from a careful study and comparison of the Contract Documents, field conditions, other Owner provided information, Contractor -prepared coordination drawings, or prior Project correspondence or documentation. B. Add a New Subparagraph 3.4.4 to Paragraph 3.4: The Owner shall be entitled to deduct from the Contract Sum amounts paid to the Architect to evaluate Contractor's proposed substitutions and to make agree -upon substitutions and to make agreed -upon changes in the Drawings and Specifications made necessary by the Owner's acceptance of such substitutions. C. Add the Following to Subparagraph 3.7.1: The Contractor shall secure and pay for the Electrical Permit and other required Mechanical Permits. The Owner shall secure and pay for a Building Permit. The Contractor shall make arrangements for required inspections. The Contractor shall obtain the Certificate of Occupancy for the Project. The Contractor shall pay plan review fees and inspection fees. The Contractor shall arrange for installation of sewer, electrical, gas, water, and other utilities required, except as otherwise indicated. The Owner shall pay sewer and water access charges (SAC and WAC) and park dedication fees, if any. D. Regarding 3.10.1, delete the first sentence and insert the following: "The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner's and Architect's information a detailed Contractor's construction schedule for the work in form and substance acceptable to the Owner." Add the Following to Subparagraph 3.10.3: 3. Substantial Completion - June 5, 2020. 4. Final Completion - August 28, 2020. ARTICLE 4.2 - ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT A. Add a New Clause 4.2.2.1 to Subparagraph 4.2.2: The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for compensation paid to the Architect for additional Site visits made necessary by the fault, neglect, or request of the Contractor. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 05 - 1 ARTICLE 5 - SUBCONTRACTORS A. Add a New Subparagraph 5.2.5: Acceptance of any supplier or subcontractor shall not mean nor imply acceptance of any material or product not specified in The Contract Documents. ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Add a New Subparagraph 7.1.4: Costs related to a change shall be direct costs. All indirect costs shall be included in the Contractor's overhead and profit. No allowance for overhead and profit shall be allowed if the change results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum. The combined overhead and profit included in the total cost to the Owner of a change in the work shall be based on the following schedule: 1. For the Contractor, for work performed by the Contractor's own forces, 10-percent of the cost. 2. For the Contractor, for work performed by the Contractor's subcontractors, 10-percent of the amount due the subcontractors. 3. For each subcontractor involved, for work performed by that subcontractor's own forces, 10-percent of the cost. 4 For each subcontractor involved, for work performed by the subcontractor's subcontractors, 10-percent of the amount due the sub -subcontractor. 5. Cost to which overhead and profit is to be applied shall be determined in accordance with Subparagraph 7.3.6. 6. In order to facilitate checking of quotations for extras or credits, all Bid Forms shall be accompanied by a complete itemization of costs, including labor, materials, and subcontracts. Labor and materials shall be organized and itemized in the manner prescribed above. Where major cost items are subcontracts, they shall be itemized also. B. Regarding 7.3.3, at the end of the introductory sentence, add the following phrase: "which must be described in the Construction Change Directive." C. Regarding Paragraph 7.3.6, delete the first sentence urid insert Ilre following: "If the Contractor disagrees in writing within 10 days of the date of the Construction Change Directive with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and adjustment shall be determined as a claim." ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION A. Add a New Clause 9.6.2.1 to Subparagraph 9.6.2: Pursuant to Minnesota Statute, Contractor shall be fully responsible to pay subcontractors, suppliers, and other entities within 10 days of the Contractor's receipt of payment for undisputed services provided by the subcontractor, supplier, or other entity. Contractor shall pay interest of 1.5-percent per month or any part of a month to the subcontractor, supplier, or other entity on any amount not paid on time to the subcontractor, supplier, or other entity. The minimum monthly interest penalty payment for an unpaid balance of $100 or more is $10. For an unpaid balance of less than $100, the Contractor shall pay the actual penalty due to the subcontractor, supplier, or other entity. A subcontractor, supplier, or other entity who prevails in a civil action to collect interest penalties from a Contractor must be awarded its costs and disbursements, including attorney's fees, included in bringing the action. SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 05 - 2 ARTICLE 10 - PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY A. Add a New Clause 10.2.4.1 to Subparagraph 10.2.4: When the use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials, substances, equipment, or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the work, the Contractor shall give the Owner reasonable advance notice. B. Regarding Paragraph 10.3.3, delete the last 2 lines and insert the following: "of property (other than the work itself) and limited to the extent that such damage, loss, or expense is not due to the contributory negligence of a party seeking indemnity." ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS A. Add a new Subparagraph 1 ] .1.2.1: The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by law and regulations: 1. Worker's Compensation Insurance Coverage A - Statutory Coverage B - $500,000 Each Accident $500,000 Disease - Policy Limit $500,000 Disease - Each Employee 2. Commercial General Liability $3,000,000 General Aggregate $3,000,000 Products/Completed Operations Aggregate $2,000,000 Each Occurrence $2,000,000 Personal Injury Products/Completed Operations insurance shall be maintained for a minimum period of at least 1 year after either 90 days following Substantial Completion or Final Payment, whichever is earlier. 3. Comprehensive Automobile Liability $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit - Bodily injury and property damage. All owned, non -owned, and hired vehicles. 4. Umbrella Excess Liability $1,000,000 Each Occurrence $1,000,000 Aggregate Umbrella excess liability shall be a combined single limit which shall provide excess liability insurance over Commercial General Liability, Comprehensive Automobile Liability, and Employers Liability. Add Subparagraph 1 1.1.2.2: The following persons or entities shall be included as additional insured on the Commercial Liability, Comprehensive Automobile Liability, and Umbrella Excess Liability. This coverage shall be primary and noncontributory: OWNER: City of New Hope ARCHITECT: Stantec Consulting Services Inc. X SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 05 - 3 C. Add a New Clause 11.1.3.1 to Subparagraph 11.1.3: The Contractor shall furnish 1 copy each of Certificates of Insurance for each copy of the Agreement which shall specifically set forth evidence of all coverage's required. The form of Certificate shall be ACORD 25-2, Certificate of Insurance and AIA Document G715, Supplemental Attachment for ACORD 25- 2 Certificate of Insurance. D. In Subparagraph 11.2.1, replace with word "Owner" with the word "Contractor". E. Delete Subparagraphs 11.2.2 and 11.2.3 in their entirety. ARTICLE 15 - CLAIMS AND DISPUTES A. Add the Following to Subparagraph 15.1.6.2: Data substantiating abnormal weather conditions shall include at a minimum local US Weather Bureau Climatological Reports for the period involved plus a report indicating the average precipitation and terrlperalure for the past 10 years from the nearest US Weather Bureau Reporting Station. END OF DOCUMENT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 00 73 05 - 4 SECTION 00 73 46 COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRY PREVAILING WAGES FOR STATE FUNDED CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS '-"" THIS NOTICE MUST BE POSTED ON THE JOBSITE IN A CONSPICUOUS PLACE Construction Type: Commercial County Number: 27 County Name: HENNEPIN Effective:2018-12-17 Revised:2019-01-28 This project is covered by Minnesota prevailing wage statutes. Wage rates listed below are the minimum hourly rates to be paid on this project. All hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day or forty (40) hours per week shall be paid at a rate of one and one half (1 1/2) times the basic hourly rate. Violations should be reported to: Department of Labor and Industry Prevailing Wage Section 443 Lafayette Road N St Paul, MN 55155 (651) 284-5091 DLI.PrevWage@state.mn.us * Indicates that adjacent county rates were used for the labor class listed. County: HENNEPIN (27) LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT BASIC FRINGE TOTAL DATE RATE RATE RATE LABORERS (101 - 112) (SPECIAL CRAFTS 701 - 730) 101 LABORER, COMMON (GENERAL LABOR WORK) 102 LABORER, SKILLED (ASSISTING SKILLED CRAFT JOURNEYMAN) 103 LABORER, LANDSCAPING (GARDENER, SOD LAYER AND NURSERY OPERATOR) 104 FLAG PERSON 2018-12-17 34.11 19.64 53.75 2018-12-17 34.11 19.64 53.75 2018-12-17 23.02 15.99 39.01 2019-05-01 24.00 16.96 40.96 2018-12-17 34.11 19.64 53.75 COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 46 - 1 LABOR CODE AND CLASS 105* WATCH PERSON 106* BLASTER 107 PIPELAYER (WATER, SEWER AND GAS) 108 TUNNEL MINER 109 UNDERGROUND AND OPEN DITCH LABORER (EIGHT FEET BELOW STARTING GRADE LEVEL) 110 SURVEY FIELD TECHNICIAN (OPERATE TOTAL STATION, GPS RECEIVER, LEVEL, ROD OR RANGE POLES, STEEL TAPE MEASUREMENT; MARK AND DRIVE STAKES; HAND OR POWER DIGGING FOR AND IDENTIFICATION OF MARKERS OR MONUMENTS; PERFORM AND CHECK CALCULATIONS; REVIEW AND UNDERSTAND CONSTRUCTION PLANS AND LAND SURVEY MATERIALS). THIS CLASSIFICATION DOES NOT APPLY TO THE WORK PERFORMED ON A PREVAILING WAGE PROJECT BY A LAND SURVEYOR WHO IS LICENSED PURSUANT TO MINNESOTA STATUTES, SECTIONS 326.02 TO 326 15. 111* TRAFFIC CONTROL PERSON (TEMPORARY SIGNAGE) SPECIAL EQUIPMENT (201 - 204) 201* ARTICULATED HAULER 202 BOOM TRUCK 2U3 LANDSCAPING EQUIPMENT, INCLUDES HYDRO SEEDER OR MULCHER, GOD ROLLER, FARM TRACTOR WITH ATTACHMENT SPECIFICALLY SEEDING, SODDING, OR PLANT, AND TWO -FRAMED FORKLIFT (EXCLUDING FRONT, POSIT -TRACK, AND SKID STEER LOADERS), NO EARTHWORK OR GRADING FOR ELEVATIONS 204* OFF -ROAD TRUCK 205 PAVEMENT MARKING OR MARKING REMOVAL EQUIPMENT (ONE OR TWO PERSON OPERATORS); SELF-PROPELLED TRUCK OR TRAILER MOUNTED UNITS. HIGHWAYIHEAVY POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR EFFECT BASIC FRINGE TOTAL DATE RATE RATE RATE 2018-12-17 30.48 19.29 49.77 2018-12-17 35.11 19.64 54.75 2018-12-17 34.15 1964 53.79 2019-05-01 35.30 20.44 55.74 2018-12-17 32.35 19.64 5199 2019-05-01 33.50 20.44 53.94 2018-12-17 32.35 19.64 51.99 2019-05-01 33.50 20.44 53.94 2018-12-17 34.11 19.64 53.75 2018-12-17 34.11 19.64 53.75 2018-12-17 38.13 2030 58.43 2018-12-17 38.13 20.30 58.43 2018-12-17 2302 15.99 39.01 2019-05-01 24.00 16.96 4096 2018-12-17 37.83 18.65 56.48 2018-12-17 37.05 19.39 56.44 GROUP 2 2018-12-17 35.54 19.70 55.24 306 GRADER OR MOTOR PATROL 308 TUGBOAT 100 H.P. AND OVER WHEN LICENSE REQUIRED (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 46 - 2 LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT BASIC FRINGE TOTAL DATE RATE RATE RATE GROUP 3' 2018-12-17 3634 20.30 56.64 2019-05-01 38.09 20.50 58.59 309 ASPHALT BITUMINOUS STABILIZER PLANT 310 CABLEWAY 312 DERRICK (GUY OR STIFFLEG)(POWER)(SKIDS OR STATIONARY) (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) 314 DREDGE OR ENGINEERS, DREDGE (POWER) AND ENGINEER 316 LOCOMOTIVE CRANE OPERATOR 320 TANDEM SCRAPER 322 TUGBOAT 100 H.P AND OVER (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) GROUP 4 2018-12-17 3604 20.30 56.34 2019-05-01 37.79 20.50 58.29 323 AIR TRACK ROCK DRILL 324 AUTOMATIC ROAD MACHINE (CMI OR SIMILAR) (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) 325 BACKFILLER OPERATOR 327 BITUMINOUS ROLLERS, RUBBER TIRED OR STEEL DRUMMED (EIGHT TONS AND OVER) 328 BITUMINOUS SPREADER AND FINISHING MACHINES (POWER), INCLUDING PAVERS, MACRO SURFACING AND MICRO SURFACING, OR SIMILAR TYPES (OPERATOR AND SCREED PERSON) 329 BROKK OR R.T.C. REMOTE CONTROL OR SIMILAR TYPE WITH ALL ATTACHMENTS 330 CAT CHALLENGER TRACTORS OR SIMILAR TYPES PULLING ROCK WAGONS, BULLDOZERS AND SCRAPERS 331 CHIP HARVESTER AND TREE CUTTER 332 CONCRETE DISTRIBUTOR AND SPREADER FINISHING MACHINE, LONGITUDINAL FLOAT, JOINT MACHINE, AND SPRAY MACHINE 334 CONCRETE MOBIL (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) 335 CRUSHING PLANT (GRAVEL AND STONE) OR GRAVEL WASHING, CRUSHING AND SCREENING PLANT 336 CURB MACHINE 337 DIRECTIONAL BORING MACHINE 338 DOPE MACHINE (PIPELINE) 340 DUAL TRACTOR 341 ELEVATING GRADER 345 GPS REMOTE OPERATING OF EQUIPMENT 347 HYDRAULIC TREE PLANTER 348 LAUNCHER PERSON (TANKER PERSON OR PILOT LICENSE) 349 LOCOMOTIVE (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) 350 MILLING, GRINDING, PLANNING, FINE GRADE, OR TRIMMER MACHINE 352 PAVEMENT BREAKER OR TAMPING MACHINE (POWER DRIVEN) MIGHTY MITE OR SIMILAR TYPE 354 PIPELINE WRAPPING, CLEANING OR BENDING MACHINE 356 POWER ACTUATED HORIZONTAL BORING MACHINE, OVER SIX INCHES 357 PUGMILL 359 RUBBER -TIRED FARM TRACTOR WITH BACKHOE INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) 360 SCRAPER 361 SELF-PROPELLED SOIL STABILIZER 362 SLIP FORM (POWER DRIVEN) (PAVING) 363 TIE TAMPER AND BALLAST MACHINE 365 TRACTOR, WHEEL TYPE, OVER 50 H.P. WITH PTO UNRELATED TO LANDSCAPING (HIGHWAY AND HEAVY ONLY) 367 TUB GRINDER, MORBARK, OR SIMILAR TYPE GROUP 5 2018-12-17 31.65 19.70 51.35 370 BITUMINOUS ROLLER (UNDER EIGHT TONS) 371 CONCRETE SAW (MULTIPLE BLADE) (POWER OPERATED) 372 FORM TRENCH DIGGER (POWER) COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 46 - 3 LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT BASIC FRINGE DATE RATE RATE 375 HYDRAULIC LOG SPUTTER 376 LOADER (BARBER GREENE OR SIMILAR TYPE) 377 POST HOLE DRIVING MACHINE/POST HOLE AUGER 379 POWER ACTUATED JACK 381 SELF-PROPELLED CHIP SPREADER (FLAHERTY OR SIMILAR) 382 SHEEP FOOT COMPACTOR WITH BLADE 200 H P. AND OVER 383 SHOULDERING MACHINE (POWER) APSCO OR SIMILAR TYPE INCLUDING SELF-PROPELLED SAND AND CHIP SPREADER 384 STUMP CHIPPER AND TREE CHIPPER 385 TREE FARMER (MACHINE) GROUP 6 * 2018-12-17 20.95 6.76 387 CAT, CHALLENGER, OR SIMILAR TYPE OF TRACTORS, WHEN PULLING DISK OR ROLLER 389 DREDGE DECK HAND 391 GRAVEL SCREENING PLANT (PORTABLE NOT CRUSHING OR WASHING) 393 LEVER PERSON 395 POWER SWEEPER 396 SHEEP FOOT ROLLER AND ROLLERS ON GRAVEL COMPACTION, INCLUDING VIBRATING ROLLERS 397 TRACTOR, WHEEL TYPE, OVER 50 H.P , UNRELATED TO LANDSCAPING COMMERCIAL POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR TOTAL RATE 27.71 GROUP 1 2018-12-17 41.14 20.30 61.44 501 HELICOPTER PILOT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 502 TOWER CRANE 250 FEET AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 503 TRUCK CRAWLER CRANE WITH 200 FEET OF BOOM AND OVER, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) GROUP 2 2018-12-17 40.80 20.30 61.10 504 CONCRETE PUMP WITH 50 METERS/164 FEET OF BOOM AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 505 PILE DRIVING WHEN THREE DRUMS IN USE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 506 TOWER CRANE 200 FEET AND OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 507 TRUCK OR CRAWLER CRANE WITH 150 FEET OF BOOM UP TO AND NOT INCLUDING 200 FEET, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) GROUP 3 2018-12-17 39.39 20.30 59.69 508 ALL -TERRAIN VEHICLE CRANES (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 509 CONCRETE PUMP 32-49 METERS/102-164 FEET (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 510 DERRICK (GUY & STIFFLEG) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 511 STATIONARY TOWER CRANE UP TO 200 FEET 512 SELF -ERECTING TOWER CRANE 100 FEET AND OVER MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 513 TRAVELING TOWER CRANE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 514 TRUCK OR CRAWLER CRANE UP TO AND NOT INCLUDING 150 FEET OF BOOM, INCLUDING JIB (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) GROUP 4 2018-12-17 39.05 2030 59.35 515 CRAWLER BACKHOE INCLUDING ATTACHMENTS (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 516 FIREPERSON, CHIEF BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 517 HOIST ENGINEER (THREE DRUMS OR MORE) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 518 LOCOMOTIVE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 519 OVERHEAD CRANE ( INSIDE BUILDING PERIMETER) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 520 TRACTOR. BOOM TYPE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 73 46 - 4 LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT BASIC FRINGE TOTAL DATE RATE RATE RATE GROUPS 2018-12-17 38.13 20.30 58.42 521 AIR COMPRESSOR 450 CFM OR OVER (TWO OR MORE MACHINES) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 522 CONCRETE MIXER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 523 CONCRETE PUMP UP TO 31 METERS/101 FEET OF BOOM 524 DRILL RIGS, HEAVY ROTARY OR CHURN OR CABLE DRILL WHEN USED FOR CAISSON FOR ELEVATOR OR BUILDING CONSTRUCTION (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 525 FORKLIFT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 526 FRONT END, SKID STEER 1 C YD AND OVER 527 HOIST ENGINEER ( ONE OR TWO DRUMS) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 528 MECHANIC -WELDER (ON POWER EQUIPMENT) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 529 POWER PLANT (100 KW AND OVER OR MULTIPLES EQUAL TO 10OKW AND OVER) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 530 PUMP OPERATOR AND/OR CONVEYOR (TWO OR MORE MACHINES) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 531 SELF -ERECTING TOWER CRANE UNDER 100 FEET MEASURED FROM BOOM FOOT PIN (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 532 STRADDLE CARRIER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 533 TRACTOR OVER D2 (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 534 WELL POINT PUMP (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) GROUPS 2018-12-17 36.62 20.30 56.92 535 CONCRETE BATCH PLANT (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 536 FIREPERSON, FIRST CLASS BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 537 FRONT END, SKID STEER UP TO 1 C YD 538 GUNITE MACHINE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 539 TRACTOR OPERATOR D2 OR SIMILAR SIZE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 540 TRENCHING MACHINE (SEWER, WATER, GAS) EXCLUDES WALK BEHIND TRENCHER GROUP 7 2018-12-17 35.50 20.30 55.80 541 AIR COMPRESSOR 600 CFM OR OVER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 542 BRAKEPERSON (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 543 CONCRETE PUMP/PUMPCRETE OR COMPLACO TYPE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 544 FIREPERSON, TEMPORARY HEAT SECOND CLASS BOILER LICENSE (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 545 OILER (POWER SHOVEL, CRANE, TRUCK CRANE, DRAGLINE, CRUSHERS AND MILLING MACHINES, OR OTHER SIMILAR POWER EQUIPMENT) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 546 PICK UP SWEEPER (ONE CUBIC YARD HOPPER CAPACITY) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 547 PUMP AND/OR CONVEYOR (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) GROUP 8 2018-12-17 33.49 20.30 53.79 548 ELEVATOR OPERATOR (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 549 GREASER (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) 550 MECHANICAL SPACE HEATER (TEMPORARY HEAT NO BOILER LICENSE REQUIRED) (COMMERCIAL CONSTRUCTION ONLY) TRUCK DRIVERS GROUP 1 * 2018-12-17 25.65 676 32.41 601 MECHANIC. WELDER 602 TRACTOR TRAILER DRIVER 603 TRUCK DRIVER (HAULING MACHINERY INCLUDING OPERATION OF HAND AND POWER OPERATED WINCHES) GROUP 2 * 2018-12-17 21.10 6.76 27.86 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES 007346-5 LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT BASIC FRINGE TOTAL DATE RATE RATE RATE 604 FOUR OR MORE AXLE UNIT, STRAIGHT BODY TRUCK GROUP 3 * 2018-12-17 25.80 6.10 31.90 605 BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR DRIVER 606 BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR (ONE PERSON OPERATION) 607 THREE AXLE UNITS GROUP 4 2018-12-17 3582 818 44.00 608 BITUMINOUS DISTRIBUTOR SPRAY OPERATOR (REAR AND OILER) 609 DUMP PERSON 610 GREASER 611 PILOT CAR DRIVER 612 RUBBER -TIRED, SELF-PROPELLED PACKER UNDER 8 TONS 613 TWO AXLE UNIT 614 SLURRY OPERATOR 615 TANK TRUCK HELPER (GAS, OIL, ROAD OIL, AND WATER) 616 TRACTOR OPERATOR, UNDER 50 H.P. SPECIAL CRAFTS 701 HEATING AND FROST INSULATORS 2018-12-17 44.60 24.40 69.00 2019-06-01 47.10 24.40 71.50 702 BOILERMAKERS 2018-12-17 37.22 2714 6436 2019-01-01 38.33 27.43 65.76 703 BRICKLAYERS 2018-12-17 3876 20.87 59.63 704 CARPENTERS 2018-12-17 37.18 21.45 58.63 705 CARPET LAYERS (LINOLEUM) 2018-12-17 37.84 1919 57.03 706 CEMENT MASONS 2018-12-17 38.41 19.67 58.08 707 ELECTRICIANS 2018-12-17 41.56 2979 71.35 2019-05-01 44.51 29.79 74.30 708 ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTORS 2018-12-17 48.36 32.65 81.01 2019-01-01 49.91 39.24 89.15 709 GLAZIERS 2018-12-17 41.19 18.54 59.73 710 LATHERS 2018-12-17 38.47 20.18 58.65 712 IRONWORKERS 2018-12-17 37.10 27.85 64.95 714 MILLWRIGHT 2018-12-17 35.13 2498 60.11 715 PAINTERS (INCLUDING HAND BRUSHED, HAND SPRAYED, 2018-12-17 36.75 21.24 57.99 AND THE TAPING OF PAVEMENT MARKINGS) 716 PILEDRIVER (INCLUDING VIBRATORY DRIVER OR 2018-12-17 38,01 21.08 59.09 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES 007346-6 LABOR CODE AND CLASS EFFECT DATE EXTRACTOR FOR PILING AND SHEETING OPERATIONS) 717 PIPEFITTERS . STEAMFITTERS 718 PLASTERERS 719 PLUMBERS 720 ROOFER 721 SHEET METALWORKERS 722 SPRINKLER FITTERS 723 TERRAZZO WORKERS 724 TILE SETTERS 725 TILE FINISHERS 726 DRYWALL TAPER 727 WIRING SYSTEM TECHNICIAN 728 WIRING SYSTEMS INSTALLER 729 ASBESTOS ABATEMENT WORKER 730" SIGN ERECTOR 2019-05-01 2018-12-17 2018-12-17 2018-12-17 2019-05-01 2018-12-17 2018-12-17 2019-05-01 2018-12-17 2019-01-01 2019-06-01 2018-12-17 2018-12-17 2018-12-17 2018-12-17 2018-12-17 2019-07-01 2018-12-17 2019-07-01 2018-12-17 2019-01-01 2018-12-17 2019-06-01 END OF SECTION BASIC FRINGE TOTAL RATE RATE RATE 39.96 21.08 61.04 45.82 27.37 73.19 38.96 19.45 58.41 46.91 23.79 70.70 49.66 23.79 73.45 36.26 17.46 5372 43.31 27.72 71.03 45.91 27.72 73.63 45.28 26.55 71.83 45.08 26.75 71.83 47.93 26.75 74.68 38.91 19.40 58.31 33.55 24.44 57.99 28.23 19.12 47.35 34.51 22.28 56.79 38.97 17.14 56.11 40.17 17.14 57.31 27.30 14.31 41.61 28.14 14.31 42.45 31.68 18.71 50.39 32.68 19.66 52.34 2880 14.92 43.72 30.45 14.92 45.37 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMERCIAL PREVAILING WAGE RATES 007346-7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally WAGE RATE PROVISIONS 1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1_1 Prevailing Wage Required. All contracts entered into where, pursuant to ordinance or statute, a formal written contract or performance bond is required to which the City of New Hope is party, for the construction, alteration and/or repair of buildings, and which required or involves the employment of mechanics and/or laborers shall contain a provision stating that all federal labor standards and prevailing wage provisions applicable to federal contracts in accordance with the federal wage provisions applicable to federal contracts in accordance with the federal Davis Bacon and related acts are applicable to this contract as if fully set forth herein and all contractors and subcontractors shall fully comply with such provisions regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor or subcontractor and their respective employees. 1_2 Submission of Statements and Payroll Records. Upon the request of the appropriate contract compliance officer, each contractor or subcontractor engaged in work under the contract shall furnish to the appropriate contract compliance officer within five working days, a copy of payrolls showing wages paid, and a wage compliance statement with respect to wages paid each of its mechanics and laborers employed on the site of the contract work. In the event the contractor fails to supply such statements or if such statements disclose that the required prevailing wage is not being paid, the contract compliance officer shall promptly notify the City of New Hope and who shall forthwith withhold payments to the contractor for such periods of noncompliance. During the course of and upon completion of the contract work, the contract compliance officer shall have the right to require an appropriate audit of the contractor's and subcontractor's books to determine compliance or non-compliance with the provisions of this ordinance. Each contractor and subcontractor shall retain the relevant weekly payrolls for a period of not less than one year after the completion of the work. 1_3 Failure to Pay Prevailing Wage. Every contract shall contain the further provision that in the event it is found by the City of New Hope that any laborer, mechanic or employee employed by the contractor or any subcontractor directly on the site of the work covered by the contract has been or is being, paid a rate of wages and fringe benefits or their cash equivalent less than rates required by this Section and by the contract, the contract compliance officer may place the contractor on a suspended or disbarment list and by written notice to the contractors, terminate the right to proceed with the work or such part of the work as to which there has been a failure to pay said required wages and to prosecute the work to completion by contract or otherwise, and the contractor and sureties shall be liable to the City of New Hope for damages sustained thereby. The City of New Hope reserves the right to withhold contract payments to the extent of the underpayment of required wages. Any contractor objecting to being placed on a suspended or disbarment list by the contract compliance officer shall have the right to appeal in writing to the City of New Hope for review of the contract compliance officer's actions. 1_4 Failure to Comply Bars Future Contracts. The contract compliance officer shall prepare and maintain a list of all persons or firms who are in default under any of the provisions of this Section in regard to obligations to their employees, and no further contracts shall be awarded or entered into with such persons or firms for so long as they are in default. A current copy of such list shall be provided to the purchasing department. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 1 Wage Rate Provisions This Page Left Blank Intentionally Appendix To 00 73 46 - 2 Wage Rate Provisions PREVAILING WAGE CERTIFICATE CONTRACTOR: SUBMIT THIS FORM WITH THE ORIGINAL COPY OF YOUR BID Laborers and Mechanics shall be paid according to the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction, in accordance with Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43, and the minimum wage rates and fringe benefits paid to the various classes shall be as determined by the Secretary of Labor of the United States for work in the City of New Hope. In addition to the certificates and other evidences of compliance which are required under these Specifications and under Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43, it shall be required that the person or company representative submitting a bid for this contract shall certify in writing that both she/he/it and their Subcontractors shall comply with the wage and labor standards provisions of the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction. Failure to comply with these requirements shall mean the City of New Hope may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate his/her right to proceed with the work and the Contractor and his/her Sureties shall be liable to the City of New Hope for any excess cost occasioned to the City of New Hope for the completion of the work. By submitting this bid, it is understood and agreed that if it is accepted, in whole or in part, by the City of New Hope that any work done by the Contractor or by the Contractor's agents or Subcontractors under a contract with the City of New Hope shall be in conformity with provisions of the State Prevailing Wage Rates for Commercial Construction, in accordance with Minnesota Statutes 177.41 through 177.43. Signature Company Name RETURN THIS FORM WITH YOUR BID Appendix To 00 73 46 - 1 Prevailing Wage Certificate This Page Lett Blank Intentionally Appendix To 00 73 46 - 2 Prevailing Wage Certificate STATE PROJECTS AND STATE HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION 177.41 STATE PROJECTS AND STATE HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION; PUBLIC POLICY. It is in the public interest that public buildings and other public works be constructed and maintained by the best means and highest quality of labor reasonably available and that persons working on public works be compensated according to the real value of the services they perform. It is therefore the policy of this state that wages of laborers, workers, and mechanics on projects financed in whole or part by state funds should be comparable to wages paid for similar work in the community as a whole. History: 1973 c 734 s 1; 1975 c 191 s 1: 1984 c 628 art 4 s 1 177.42 DEFINITIONS. Subdivision 1. As used in Sections 177.41 to 177.44 the terms defined in this section have the meanings given them except where the context indicates otherwise. Subd.2. "Project" means erection, construction, remodeling, or repairing of a public building or other public work financed in whole or part by state funds. Subd.3. "Area" means the county or other locality from which labor for any project is normally secured. Subd.4. "Prevailing hours of labor" means the hours of labor per day and perweek worked within the area by a larger number of workers of the same class than are employed within the area for any other number of hours per day and per week. The prevailing hours of labor may not be more than eight hours per day or more than 40 hours per week. Subd.5. "Hourly basic rate" means the hourly wage paid to any employee. Subd.6. "Prevailing wage rate" means the hourly basic rate of pay plus the contribution for health and welfare benefits, vacation benefits, pension benefits, and any other economic benefit paid to the largest number of workers engaged in the same class of labor within the area and includes, for the purposes of Section 177.44, rental rates for truck hire paid to those who own and operate the truck. The prevailing wage rate may not be less than a reasonable and living wage. History: 1973 c 724 s 2: 1975 c 191 s 2: 1984 c 628 art 4 s I 177.43 CONTRACTS FOR STATE PROJECTS; PENALTY. Subdivision 1. Hours of labor. Any contract which provides for a project must state that: (1) no laborer or mechanic employed directly on the project work site by the contractor or any subcontractor, agent, or other person doing or contracting to do all or a part of the work of the project, is permitted or required to work more hours than the prevailing hours of labor unless paid for all hours in excess of the prevailing hours at a rate of at least 1 1/2 times the hourly basic rate of pay; and Appendix To 00 73 46 - 1 State Projects and State Highway Construction STATE PROJECTS AND STATE HIGHWAY CONSTRUCTION (2) a laborer or mechanic may not be paid a lesser rate of wages than the prevailing wage rate in the same or most similar trade or occupation in the area. Subd.3. Exceptions. This section does not apply to wage rates and hours of employment of laborers or mechanics who process or manufacture materials or products or to the delivery of materials or products by or for commercial establishments which have a fixed place of business from which they regularly supply processed or manufactured materials or products. This section applies to laborers or mechanics who deliver mineral aggregate such as sand gravel, or stone which is incorporated into the work under the contract by depositing the material substantially in place, directly or through spreaders, from the transporting vehicle. Subd.3. Contract requirements. The contract must specifically state the prevailing wage rates, prevailing hours of labor, and hourly basic rates of pay. Subd.4. Determination by commissioner. The prevailing wage rates, prevailing hours of labor and hourly basic rates of pay for all trades and occupations required in any project must be ascertained before the state asks for bids. The commissioner of labor and industry shall investigate as necessary to ascertain the information. The commissioner shall keep the information posted on the project in at least one conspicuous place for the information of the employees working on the project. A person aggrieved by a final decision of the commissioner may petition the commissioner for reconsideration. A person aggrieved by a decision of the commissioner after reconsideration may, within 20 days after the decision, petition the commissioner for a public hearing in the manner of a contested case under Sections 14.57 to 14.61. Subd.5. Penalty. It is a misdemeanor for an office or employee of the state to execute a contract for a project without complying with this section, or for a contractor, subcontractor, or agent to pay any laborer, worker, or mechanic employed directly on the project site a lesser wage for work done under the contract than the prevailing wage rate as stated in the contract. This misdemeanor is punishahle by a fine of not more than $700, or imprisonment for not more than 00 days, or both. Each agent or subcontractor shall furnish to the contractor evidence of compliance with this section. Each day a violation of this section continues is a separate offense. Subd.6. Examination of records. The department of labor and industry shall enforce this section. The department may demand, and the contractor and subcontractor shall furnish to the department, copies of any or all payrolls. The department may examine all records relating to wages paid laborers or mechanics on work to which sections 177.41 to 177.44 apply. Subd.7. Applicability. This section does not apply to a contract or work under a contract, under which: (1) the estimated total cost of completing the project is less than $2,500 and only one trade or occupation is required to complete it, or (2) the estimated total cost of completing the project is less than $25,000 and more than one trade or occupation is required to complete it. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 2 State Projects and State Highway Construction continued from inside pane/ (n 4 3 If there is an equal number of workers with differing rt w = hourly wage rates, the rules state that the highest rate 0) r- rn paid becomes the prevailing wage rate. For example, if o C: Q, Ln one worker receives $14.90 an hour, another is paid '3" < QJ $16.75 an hour and yet another earns $15.35 an hour, z M the prevailing wage rate is $16.75 an hour. To obtain the necessary database, the Department QJ _ p —1 of Labor and Industry mails surveys to all segments U1 a r- of the construction industry. The department z rD recognizes 148 separate job classes common to the r-r construction industry; these classifications are divided o into four categories: laborers, truck drivers, heavy equipment operators and the skilled crafts. In 1999, a) more than 6,000 requests for wage rates were mailed o to public and private employers throughout the state. The schedule of prevailing wages, as certified by �- the Department of Labor and Industry, is required by law to be posted in at least one conspicuous place on each state construction project site. Ln rrt i7t Idfirxnesota Qe;p�arXnicpnf i:11 U40yr ¢. Itndustrr Where do I go with questions? Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry Labor Standards 443 Lafayette Road N. St. Paul, MN 55155-4307 Toll -free: 1-800-DIAL-DLI (1-800-342-5354) Phone: (651)296-2282 Fax: (651) 215-0104 Please visit our Web site: www. doll. state. mn. us/laborlaw.html This document can be provided in different forms, such as large print, Braille or audiotape, by calling (651) 296-1096 or (651) 297-4198/TTY. A guide to Minnesota's Prevailing wage t� Wrnesota Dcpardrn"cnt LA'hPrMI•ndunil t Labor Standards 443 Lafayette Road N. St. Paul, MN 55155 Note: This pamphlet is a brief summary of the Minnesota prevailing wage law and is intended as a guide. It is not to be considered a substitute for Minnesota Statutes §177.41-177.44. 2000 Prevailing wage ... what is it? Minnesota's prevailing wage law requires that employees working on state -funded construction projects or other projects covered by law be paid wage rates comparable to wages paid for similar work in the area where the project is located. Why is it required? A little history: The first prevailing wage law governing minimum payments to laborers and mechanics on construction projects was passed in Kansas in 1891. Debate on the federal level began in 1898 and continued in 1927, 1928 and 1930. Representative Robert Bacon, R-N.Y., first introduced a prevailing wage bill in 1927, but it did not pass until 1931. The U.S. Senate author was newly elected Senator James Davis, R-Penn., who had previously served as Secretary of Labor for nearly a decade. The Davis -Bacon Act was enacted to prevent local wage standards from being undercut on federal construction projects by low bidders who imported cheap labor as a cost-cutting technique. Amended in 1935, it required the payment of not less than the wages found by the Secretary of Labor to be "prevailing for the corresponding classes of laborers and mechanics employed on projects of a character similar to the contract work in the city, town, village or other civil subdivision of the state in which the work is to be performed." Similar state laws are often referred to as "little" Davis -Bacon Acts. Minnesota's law, patterned after federal and Wisconsin law, was enacted in 1973 after an incident where out-of-state workers, who earned much less than local workers, were hired for a University of Minnesota farm project. How is prevailing wage enforced? Authority to investigate complaints of violations has been assigned to two separate state agencies. The Department of Transportation is the primary enforcing agency on all projects let out to bid for highway - related construction. All other investigations are conducted by the Department of Labor and Industry or individual contract officers representing project owners. The Department of Labor and Industry is authorized to review payroll documents to determine compliance with prevailing wage rate provisions on all state construction projects, including highway construction. The Department of Labor and Industry administers prevailing wage laws through the investigation of noncompliance complaints filed in one of four ways: 1) the Labor Standards unit's phone number is printed on prevailing wage notifications posted at job sites; 2) an architect or project engineer may refer a worker to the department; 3) a union representative may advise a worker to contact the department; 4) a union representative or other outside source may file a complaint on behalf of a worker. Minnesota Statutes §177.44 also states that anyone who forces an employee by any kind of threat to accept lower wages may be fined up to $1,000 and/or imprisoned for up to one year. It further provides that any employee who knowingly allows the contractor or subcontractor to pay less than the prevailing wage or who gives up any pay due may be fined up to $40, jailed not more than 30 days, or both. Each day that a violation continues is a separate offense. The Department of Transportation is authorized to request and examine copies of payroll forms from contractors and subcontractors. The penalty for nonpayment by contractors and subcontractors is a misdemeanor punishable by a fine of not more than $300, imprisonment of not more than 90 (Jays, or both. Each day that a violation continues is a separate offense. Contract officers who administer contracts without prevailing wage compliance, and contractors, subcontractors or agents who knowingly pay workers below prevailing wage, are subject to misdemeanor penalties. Repetitive violations are considered a separate offense punishable by a maximum fine of $700, imprisonment for no more than 90 days or both. Both departments have developed processes within their statutory authority to maximize compliance by all involved parties. While most contractors comply with agency orders to pay back -wages, project funds may be withheld by the letting agency until compliance is achieved. How does prevailing wage work? The original Minnesota law required all state agencies to establish prevailing wage rates for their own building projects. The Department of Labor and Industry was given the power to investigate complaints, collect survey data, define classes of labor for highway construction and determine state prevailing wage rates. The Department of Highways was selected to enforce the wage rates on highway construction projects. An amendment was passed in 1975 that authorized the Department of Labor and Industry to set the rates for all building and road construction and increased the penalties for noncompliance. Wage rates paid for comparable work are certified by the Department of Labor and Industry as the prevailing rates after the department conducts a survey of contractors, labor organizations and interested parties statewide. This information is then furnished to entities covered by prevailing wage that are letting contracts for inclusion in their bid specifications. A notice is also published in the State Register, annually, indicating where copies of the certified rates may be obtained. Wage rates are established for two types of construction: highway/heavy — construction and maintenance of highways, streets, airport runways, bridges, power plants, dams and utilities; commercial construction — building projects exclusive of residential construction. Separate wage certifications are issued for each area. How are rates set? State law requires that each wage rate be based on the actual wage rates paid to the largest number of workers within eacn labor classification reported in the statewide survey. An administrative law judge agreed that the calculation to be used is the mode or most frequently occurring wage rate. For example, if the survey data shows that two bricklayers in a county earned $19.40 an hour, another earned $17.25 an hour and another earned $22.67 an hour, the prevailing hourly wage rate would be $19.40. continued on back panel MINNESOTA DEPARTMENT OF LABOR AND INDUSTRY PREVAILING WAGE DIVISION RULES AND REGULATIONS MINNESOTA RULES, PARTS 5200.1000 TO 5200.1120 Including Amendments Adopted April 16, 1984 Appendix To 00 73 46 - 1 Rules and Regulations PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATIONS 5200.1000 STATUTORY AUTHORITY AND PURPOSE. Parts 5200.1000 to 5200.1120 are promulgated pursuant to the authority provided to the Minnesota Department of Labor and Industry by the provisions of Minnesota Statutes, section 175.111, subdivision 2 and the requisites of Minnesota Statutes, section 14.06. Their purpose is to provide procedures for prevailing wage determinations. MS #175.1711 5200.1010 DEFINITIONS. Subpart1. Scope. For purposes of all wage rate determinations, the following definitions shall apply. Subp.2. Commercial construction. "Commercial construction" means all building construction projects exclusive of residential construction. Subp.3. Highway and heavy construction. "Highway and heavy construction" means all construction projects which are similar in nature to those projects based upon bids as provided under Minnesota Statutes, section 161.32, for the construction or maintenance of highways or other public works and includes roads, highways, streets, airport runways, bridges, power plants, dams, and utilities. Subp.4. Project. As utilized in parts 5200.1000 to 5200.1120 the term "project" means the erection, construction, remodeling or repairing of commercial, residential, or public buildings or any highway and heavy construction. Subp.5. Residential construction or agricultural construction. "Residential construction or agricultural construction" means all construction, remodeling, or repairing of single ortwo family homes and structures appurtenant thereto including agricultural or farming buildings appurtenant to private farm residences when utilized to carry on primary farming operations. Subp.6. State project. "State project" means those projects which are subject to the requirements of Minnesota Statutes, sections 177.41 to 177.44. MS # 175.171 5200.1020 PREVAILING WAGE DETERMINATIONS. Subpart 1. Highway and heavy construction. The department shall, at least once each calendar year, determine and certify prevailing wage rates applicable to state projects which are similar in nature to highway and heavy construction projects. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 2 Rules and Regulations Subp.2. Commercial type construction. The department shall, upon the request of any state agency that is contemplating the advertisement for bids on a state project which is similar in nature to commercial construction projects, determine and certify prevailing wage rates applicable to said state project if a certification has not be made within the 6-month period prior to the request. Subp.3. Information required for certification request. Minnesota Statutes, section 177.43, subdivision 4, provides that the prevailing wage rates, prevailing hours of labor, and hourly basic rates of pay for all trades and occupations required in any contemplated project shall be ascertained before the state asks for bids. A request to establish prevailing wage rates, prevailing hours or labor, and hourly basic rates of pay for all trades and occupations required in the contemplated project must be sent to the department and shall include the: A. Popular or descriptive name of project. B. Project Number C. Exact location of project by county and city, village, or township. D. Estimated costs of the total construction contracts to be awarded. E. Anticipated date for soliciting or advertising for bids. F. Anticipated date for awarding of contracts. G. Proposed date for commencement of work on projects. H. Estimated date of completion of project. General description of the type of facility and facilities which will constitute the completed contracts. For example, two-story brick and concrete building about 200 feet by 400 feet with concrete floor, wood roof deck on wood laminated beams, and includes plumbing, heating, and electrical work. Outside work includes excavating, blacktopping, grading, sidewalks, fencing, driveways, parking areas, and miscellaneous areas. J. Desired date of receipt of prevailing wage rate schedule. K. Statement as to whether the federal government or any of its agencies will furnish by loan or grant any part of the funds used in this contract or prescribe a schedule of prevailing wage rates. The department must be notified about ensuing projects as far in advance as possible a request to determine or ascertain prevailing wage rates, prevailing hours of labor, and hourly basic rates of pay for all trades and occupations required on any contemplated project must be made not less than 60 days before soliciting bids. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 3 Rules and Regulations Subp.4. Residential type construction. Prevailing wage rates applicable to state projects which are similar in nature to residential construction projects will be made upon request of a governmental official involved in the bidding process for a state project who desires such rates for insertion in a specific contract proposal. Subp.5. Survey data; recent. Each wage survey shall be based upon work performed in the 12 months preceding the date the survey is commenced and the resulting wage determinations will be certified following the close of the survey. Subp.6. Survey procedure. Except as provided in subpart 7, all prevailing wage determinations shall be based upon the survey procedures contained in these parts. Supb.7. Public hearing. The department shall, pursuant to Minnesota Statutes, sections 177.43, subdivision 4, and 177.44, subdivision 3, conduct public hearings when necessary to determine county wage rate determinations. Such hearings shall be conducted within the county for which wage rates are being determined and shall be conducted as contested cases by a hearing examiner from the Office of Administrative Hearings. MS # 175.171 8 SR 2274 5200.1030 BASIS FOR EACH DETERMINATION. Subpart 1. County and labor class basis. Individual prevailing wage rates shall be made on a county by county basis and each prevailing wage rate shall be based upon work performed solely within the applicable class of labor. Subp.2. Labor classes. For each county surveyed, the department shall issue wage determinations for: A. highway and heavy construction projects for all classes of labor commonly or customarily used in those construction projects; and B. state projects other than highway and heavy construction for all classes of labor expected to be used in the contemplated project for which the prevailing wage rate is being determined. Subp.2a. Projects to be surveyed, criteria. From information on file and submitted by interested persons, the department shall select projects of a character similar to the project for which the prevailing wage rate is being determined. The selections shall be made from projects on which construction work was done in the 12 months preceding the survey and which are located in the county in which the contemplated project is located, or, if necessary, from adjacent counties. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 4 Rules and Regulations A. If two or more projects of a character similar to the project contemplated have been performed in the county in which the project is to be located, and if this group of projects provides wage rate data forthe major classes of laborto be used in the project for which the prevailing wage is being determined, the wage determination for those classes of labor shall be based solely upon that work. B. Where classes of labor expected to be utilized in the contemplated project for which the prevailing wage determination is being made are not all represented in the projects in item A, but work was performed in those classes of labor in two or more projects in any county physically adjacent to the county being surveyed, the department shall establish the wage determination forthose classes of labor based solely upon those adjacent county projects. C. Where no work was performed in a class of labor either in the county being surveyed or in any adjacent Minnesota county, no wage rate will be determined for that class of labor. D. In determining a wage rate for a class of labor based upon work performed in adjacent counties, all workers in a class of labor in all adjacent counties shall be totaled and the wage rates shall be based upon the wage rate paid to the largest number as determined in accordance with parts 5200.1020 to 5200.1060. Subp.3. Frequency of determination. Following certification of wage rates for a county, no wage rates for additional classifications of labor shall be made forthat county until such time that a subsequent survey of the county is required pursuant to Minnesota Statutes, section 177.43, subdivision 4 or 177.44, subdivision 4. MS # 175.171 8SR2274 5200.1040 CLASSES OF LABOR. Each class of labor shall be based upon the particular nature of the work performed with consideration given in those trades, occupations, skills, or work generally considered within the construction industry as constituting distinct classes of labor. Wage determinations will be issued for those separate classes of labor which fall under the following general classes: A. Laborers. B. Power equipment operators. C. Truck drivers. D. Special crafts. The following crafts shall constitute separate classes of labor: bricklayers, carpenters, cement masons, linemen, electricians, iron workers, painters, pipefitters, plumbers, plasterers, roofers, and sheet metal workers, and Appendix To 00 73 46 - 5 Rules and Regulations other labor or work which is customarily considered as an individual trade or craft based upon its character and skills required. Workers reported as helpers shall be considered to be skilled laborers when asking determinations. E. In determining particular classes of labor, the department shall consider work classifications contained in collective bargaining agreements, apprenticeship agreements on file with the department, and customs and usage applicable to the construction industry. F. Primary responsibility for classifying individual workers shall be upon the contractor. G. Where a worker performs work in more than one class of labor, he/she shall be counted only once and be placed only once in the class in which he/she worked the greatest number of hours. H. The contractor reporting shall have the responsibility to determine the class in which the worker has worked the greatest number of hours on each project reported. Workers employed within a class of labor as apprentices or trainees at reduced wage rates will not be included or counted within that class of labor. MS #175.171 5200.1050 SURVEY PROCEDURES. Subpart 1. Scope. The purpose of each county survey is to develop a data base upon which to determine prevailing wage rates for those classes of labor expected to be used on contemplated state projects based upon wage rates paid to the same classes of labor on similar projects in the area. In establishing the data, the procedural steps in subparts 2 to 4 shall be taken. Subp.2. Wage reports. The department shall regularly request from contractors, contractor organizations, labor organizations, and any other interested person, on forms available from or approved by the department, reports of construction wage rates paid by contractors on various types of projects. The reports must be kept on file by the department according to the county in which the project for which the report is received was performed. The reports must list the name and address of the contractor, the name of the project, the location of the project, a description of the project, the names of employees who worked on the project, together with the class of labor for each employee, the wage rate paid each employee on the project, and the hourly cost of fringe benefits for health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship or training, and any other economic benefits paid for each employee. The forms shall be signed and dated by the organization or individual providing the information attesting that the information provided is true and correct. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 6 Rules and Regulations Subp.2a. Union wage reports. The department shall also keep local union wage and employment reports, on forms provided or approved by the department. The reports must set forth the classes of labor, trade, occupation covered, the effective date of the contract, wage and fringe benefits paid under the contract, the duration of the contract, the dates of all adjustments to wages and fringe benefits together with the amount of the adjustments on each date, the geographic area where the contract is effective, the number of members employed within the geographic area covered by the contract, the type projects covered by the contract, and a list of all contractors or employer associations signatory to the contract. The local union wage reports are to be signed and dated by a representative from the local union attesting that the information provided is true and correct. Subp.2b. Mailing lists. The department shall also keep and maintain a mailing list of governmental officials, district, county, and city engineers, city clerks, administrators, and zoning officials for each county. The department shall also keep and maintain a mailing list of contractors, contractor associations, labor organizations, and other individuals who have requested to be on a mailing list to be notified when any county survey is about to be taken. Subp.2c. Notification of survey. Upon initiation of a wage survey, the department must notify the county engineer and all city engineers, city clerks, administrators, and zoning officials in the county to be surveyed. The notice will request local officials to submit reports of construction in the county in the preceding 12 months. The report shall include the names of the contractors and their addresses. The department must also notify all contractors, contractor associations, labor organizations, and other individuals who have requested to be notified when a survey for any county is about to be taken. That notice will request that interested individuals submit reports on forms available from or approved by the department concerning construction performed in the county must be returned to the department no later than 33 days following the date upon which the notice of the survey is mailed by the department. Information not timely received by the department shall not be used in establishing the prevailing wage rate for any class of labor. Any unsigned or incomplete forms received priorto the final date for receipt of the forms shall be returned to the individual, contractor, or labor organization, to the extent the individual, contractor, or labor organization can be identified, with a request that the form be properly completed. The department may use incomplete reports where the entity completing the form has provided all the information it has. If that form is not received by the department within 15 days from the date it is returned by mail to the individual, contractor or labor organization, it shall be excluded from the survey. In no event shall information on unsigned reports of construction in the county be utilized in making wage determinations. All reports must be signed and dated by the organization or individual making the report attesting that the information provided is true and correct. Subp.3. [Repealed by amendment, 8 SR 22741. Subp.3a. Reports attestations. Reports of construction wage rates and local union wage and employment reports shall specify that the individual signing the report attests that the information on the report is true and correct. The form shall specify that willful falsification of any information on the report may result in civil or criminal prosecution. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 7 Rules and Regulations Subp.3b. On -site visits. In addition to receiving and compiling the information described in subparts 2 to 4, the departments shall make on -site visits to the offices of contractors or governmental representatives forthe purposes of collecting project data and for auditing payrolls when necessary for determination of prevailing wage rates. Subp.4. County abstract. The number of workers in each class of labor and their respective wage rates shall be determined and reflected on a county abstract. MS # 175.171 8 SR 2274 5200.1060 DETERMINING LARGEST NUMBER OF WORKERS AND PREVAILING WAGE RATE. Subpart 1. Policy. Each wage rate determination shall be based upon the actual wage rates paid to the largest number of workers within each labor classification reported in the survey. Subp.2. Procedure. For purposes of determining the largest number of workers, each worker within a class of labor and his/her total hourly rate paid shall be tabulated. A. Total hourly rate includes the hourly rate plus the hourly contribution for all wage and fringe benefits. B. The largest number of workers with identical rates of pay within each classification shall determine the specific prevailing wage rate. C. When determining the prevailing wage rate and there is an equal number of workers (which represent the greatest number of workers) with differing hourly wage rates, the prevailing wage rate shall be the highest wage rate paid to those workers. Example: Four workers at $7 per hour; for workers at $8 per hour, two workers at $8.50 per hour. The prevailing wage rate will be determined as $8 per hour. D. Where a worker performs work on more than one project within the county, he/she shall be counted only once in the class of labor and at the wage rate paid on the most recent project within the time period of the survey. Subp.3. Collectively bargained rate. If the prevailing wage rate determined for any given class of labor represents a collectively bargained rate, then the comparable current collectively bargained rate for the class of labor in the county where the project covered by the prevailing wage determination is located shall be the prevailing wage rate. Subp.4. Non -collectively bargained rate. If the prevailing wage rate determined represents a rate other than a collectively bargained rate for any given class of labor, the rate so determined shall be the prevailing wage rate. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 8 Rules and Regulations Subp.5. Change in rate due to contractual changes. If the prevailing wage rate for any given class of labor represents a collectively bargained rate, and the collectively bargained rate for that class of labor will change during the 12 months immediately following the date upon which the wage rate is determined according to the terms of the collective bargaining contract by which the rate is established, the department shall certify that the rate for that class of labor shall also change accordingly on the effective date of the change pursuantto the collective bargaining contract. MS # 175.171 8 SR 2274 5200.1070 APPRENTICES. Subpart 1. Establishment of wag rates. Apprentices working on state projects are not subject to the prevailing wage rate determinations, except as they may be affected by registered apprenticeship agreements. The hourly rates of pay for such workers are established by the particular program to which the apprentice or trainee is subject. Subp.2. Definition. The term "apprentice" means: A. a person employed and registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor or with a state apprenticeship agency; and B. a person in his/her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice who is not registered in the program but who has been certified by the U.S. Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a state apprenticeship agency or council to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. Subp.3. Exceptions to definition. Any employee listed on a payroll for a state project who does not fall within the term "apprentice" contained in subpart 2 shall be paid the prevailing wage rate for the classification of work performed. MS #175.171 5200.1080 NOTICE OF WAGE DETERMINATIONS. Upon certification of wage rates for a given county, the department shall publish notice of such certification in the State Register but need not publish the individual rates so certified. The certification date shall coincide with the date published in the State Register. The notice published in the State Register shall indicate where copies of the determined rates may be obtained upon request. The department shall maintain a list of all persons who request that copies of wage rate determinations be sent to them. Appendix To 00 73 46 - 9 Rules and Regulations Copies of wage rate determinations shall be mailed within five days of their certification to those persons who have requested such notice and whose names appear on the list maintained by the department. The department may charge a reasonable fee for the copying and mailing of these notices as allowed under Minnesota Statutes, section 15.17, subdivision 4. MS # 175.171 5200.1090 PETITION FOR RECONSIDERATION OF PREVAILING WAGE RATES. Subpart 1. Right to reconsideration. Any person including contractor associations or labor organizations aggrieved by a final determination of a prevailing wage rate may petition the commissioner for reconsideration of that wage rate within 30 days following its certification. The petitioner shall indicate the county and class(es) of labor contested, the reason the petitioner believes the rate to be inaccurate, and the rates the petitioner believes to be correct. Subp.2. Informal conference. Within ten days following receipt of a petition for reconsideration, the department shall informally meet with the petitioner and any other interested person, associations, or labor organizations, to review the contested wage determination(s). The petitioner shall be prepared to support his/her contentions with any documents or data he/she deems necessary. The department shall be prepared to produce and review the data, summary sheets, and other documents upon which its determinations were based, and shall produce for the petitioner's inspection all such documents. Subp.3. Final decision. Following the informal conference, the department shall, within ten days, notify the petitioner of any decision modifying, changing, or reaffirming the contested wage rate or indicate to the petitioner that a survey will be necessary to resolve the contested wage rate(s). Where the department determines that a new survey is necessary, such survey shall be conducted within 30 days. Thereafter, the department shall inform the petitioner by certified mail of its final decision based on that survey. Subp.4. Pending the procedures. No prevailing wage rate will be deemed to be vacated or suspended pending the resolution of a petition for reconsideration nor will the department request any state agency contemplating a state projectto suspend, delay, or otherwise change its contract and bidding schedules due to any pending procedures resulting from a petition for reconsideration. Subp.5. Public hearing. Any person aggrieved by a final decision following reconsideration of a prevailing wage rate may, within 20 days after the decision, petition the commissioner for a public hearing in the manner of a contested case under the Administrative Procedure Act, Minnesota Statues, sections 14.57 to 14.61. Upon receipt of a petition for a public hearing, the commissioner shall order the initiation of a contested case in accordance with Appendix To 00 73 46 - 10 Rules and Regulations Minnesota Statutes, section 14.48 to 14.56. All contested case hearings initiated herein shall be conducted in accordance with the rules of operation of the Office of Administrative Hearings. MS # 175.171 5200.1100 MASTER JOB CLASSIFICATIONS. Subpart 1. Requirement. For purposes of parts 5200.1000 to 5200.1120, contractors must use the following codes and classifications in documenting classes of labor. CODE NO. POSITION TITLE 101 Laborer, common (general labor work) 102 Laborer, skilled (assisting skilled craft journeyman) 103 Laborer, Landscaping (gardener, sod layer and nurseryman) 104 Flagperson 105 Watchperson 106 Powderman 107 Pipelayer (water, sewer and gas) 108 Tunnel miner 109 Underground and open ditch laborer (eight et below starting grade level) Subp.3. Power equipment operators. CODE NO. POSITION TITLE 201 Air compressor operator 202 Asphalt, bituminous stabilizer plant operator 203 Dragline and/or other similar equipment with shovel type controls 204 Bituminous spreader and finishing operator 205 Bituminous spreader and bituminous finishing machine operator (helper) 206 Conveyer operator 207 Concrete distributor and spreader operator, finishing machine, longitudinal float operator, joint machine or spray operator 208 Concrete saw operator (multiple blade) (power operator) 209 Crushing plant operator (gravel and stone) or gravel washing, crushing, and screening plant operators 210 Curb machine 211 Front end loader operator up to and including one cubic yard 212 Fine grade operator 213 Fork lift operator 214 Front end loader operator 215 Helicopter pilot 216 Fireman or tank car heater operator 217 Grader or motor patrol, finishing, earthwork and bituminous 218 Grader operator (motor patrol) 219 Greaser (truck and tractor) Appendix To 00 73 46 - 11 Rules and Regulations 220 Hoist engineer 221 Self propelled chip spreader 222 Mechanic or welder 223 Oilers (power shovel, crane, dragline) 224 Pick up sweeper 225 Pugmill operator 226 Roller operator, self propelled roller for compaction 227 Roller operator, up to and including six tons for bituminous finishing and/or wearing courses 228 Roller operator, over six tons for bituminous finishing and/or wearing courses 229 Scraper, 32 cubic yards and over 230 Self propelled vibrating packing operator (pad type) 231 Rubber tired tractor, back hoe attachment 232 Shouldering machine operator (power) (apsco or similar type) 233 Slip form (power -driven) (paving) 234 Turnapull operator (or similar type) 235 Tractor operator, D2, TD6 or similar h.p. with power take -off 236 Tractor operator, over D2, TD6 or similar h.p. with power take -off 237 Power Actuated augers and boring machine 238 Truck crane oiler Subp.4. Truck drivers. CODE NO. POSITION TITLE 301 Bituminous distributor driver 302 Dumpman 303 Greaser and truck serviceman 304 Self propelled packer operator 305 Truck driver (hauling machinery for contractors own use including operation of hand or power operator winches 306 Single axle or two axle unit 307 Four axle unit 308 Five axle unit Subp.5. Special crafts. CODE NO. POSITION TITLE 401 Asbestos workers 402 Boilermakers 403 Bricklayers 404 Carpenters 405 Carpet layers (linoleum) 406 Cement masons 407 Electricians Appendix To 00 73 46 - 12 Rules and Regulations 408 Elevator constructors 409 Graziers 410 Lathers 411 Groundman 412 Ironworkers 413 Lineman 414 Millwright 415 Painters 416 Piledriverman 417 Pipefitters-steamfitter 418 Plasterers 419 Plumbers 420 Roofer 421 Sheet metal workers 422 Sprinkler fitters 423 Terrazzo workers 424 Tile setters Wage determinations shall be made for other classifications not listed if such other classifications are in general use in the area being surveyed. MS # 175.171 5200.1110 POSTING OF WAGE RATES. Each contractor and subcontractor performing work on a public project shall post on the project with applicable prevailing wage rates and hourly basic rates of pay for the county or area within which the project is being performed, including the effective date of any changes thereof, in at least one conspicuous place for the information of the employees working on the project. (Minnesota Statutes 1974, sections 177.43, subdivision 4 and 177.44, subdivision 5.) The information so posted shall include a breakdown of contributions for health and welfare benefits, vacation benefits, pension benefits, and any other economic benefit required to be paid. MS # 175.171 5200.1120 EFFECTIVE DATE OF WAGE RATE DETERMINATIONS. Wage rate determinations previously certified by the department shall, subject to the review procedures contained in part 5200.1090, remain in effect until such time that new wage rates are determined in accordance with the provisions of parts 5200.1000 to 5200.1120 as amended. MS # 175.171 Appendix To 00 73 46 - 13 Rules and Regulations This Page Left Blank Intentionally Appendix To 00 73 46 - 14 Rules and Regulations DOCUMENT 00 82 00 FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The City of New Hope encourages fair employment practice. Discriminatory practices in employment and in labor unions based upon race, color, religious creed, national origin, or ancestry are discouraged. The Contractor and every subcontractor in relation to the subject Contract is encouraged to not discriminate against any employee of or applicant for employment with the Contractor performing work for the City of New Hope. The words "discriminate" and "discrimination" as used herein are hereby defined and declared to mean and include discriminations or segregation on the ground or because of race, religion, creed, color, national origin, or ancestry. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF DOCUMENT FAIR EMPLOYMENT PRACTICE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 00 82 00 - 1 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 01 10 00 SUMMARY PART] GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Basic description of the Project and Work restrictions. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUMMARY OF WORK A. Project Name: New Hope Outdoor Pool for the City of New Hope, Minnesota, City Project No. 995. B. Description of Work: Project consists of the construction of new Bath House, Pool Mechanical Building, recreation pool, 50-meter pool and associated site improvements. 1.04 PROJECT MILESTONE/COMPLETION DATES A. Pool construction area commences outside of existing City Hall: April 1, 2019. B. Complete excavation of material from 50-meter pool excavation to surcharge pool parking lot: June 7, 2019. C. Pool construction commences following completion of existing City Hall demolition: August 19, 2019. D. Substantial Completion: June 5, 2020. E. Final Completion: August 28, 2020. 1.05 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, are set forth in the Agreement. 1.06 WORK RESTRICTIONS A. Use of Site l . Location of construction facilities, staging areas, product stockpiles, material storage, and temporary construction shall be completed within the project area construction limits and right of way. 2. Pavement removals shall be minimized in an effort to avoid long segments of roadway being rough or gravel for long periods of time. SUMMARY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 10 00 - 1 3. Contractor responsible for snow removal and disposal from the Owner's property if necessary, to maintain access and working space during construction. 4. Keep existing driveways and entrances clear and available to the public and to the Owner. 5. If additional space is needed, obtain and pay for such space off Site. B. Access to Site 1. Residents shall have access to all side streets and driveways between 7 P.M. to 7 A.M. 2. Working Hours: The contractor shall work only between 7 A.M. and 8 P.M., Monday through Friday, and between 9 A.M. and 6 P.M. on Saturday, unless given written permission by the City to perform work outside of these hours. 3. Haul routes may not include residential/neighborhood streets. Only Xylon Avenue North and 45t" Avenue North may be used to access the site. 1.07 OTHER WORK AT SITE A. New City Hall: Construction of a new City Hall and Police Department Building. Project is underway and anticipated to be complete by May 31, 2019. Existing City Hall Demolition: Includes the demolition of the existing City Hall Building, Amphitheater Building, Park Shelter Building, underground utilities, and surface features at Civic Center Park. The project is anticipated to start in March of 2019. 1. Phase 1: Demolition of existing theater, shelter, hockey rink boards and lights, and associated pavement and subsurface removals. a. Start Date: After March 11, 2019. b. Completion Date: April 12, 2019. 2. Phase 2: Demolition of existing city hall and associated pavement and subsurface removals. a. Start Date: July 1, 2019. b. Completion Date: August 18, 2019. C. Park Amenities, Parking Lot and Landscaping: Project consists of the construction of parking lots, site grading, water main, storm sewer, landscaping, and park amenities at Civic Center Park. 1. Start Date: April 2019 a. Milestones: 1) May 10, 2019 - Complete storm sewer installation on west and north side of amphitheater. 2) June 7, 2019 - Complete excavation of future hockey rink area, placement of surcharge material at north pool parking lot area, construct access/trail between Xylon Avenue and skatepark, site grading work within 6" of final grade at amphitheater, and site grading work at skatepark to subgrade elevation as identified on the Drawings. 3) October 25, 2019 - Complete base course pavement and concrete curb for all parking lots. 2. Completion Date: June 5, 2020 D. Outdoor Theater: Construction of a new outdoor theater. 1. Start Date: June 17, 2019. 2. Milestone Date: September 20, 2019. a. Final restoration completion. 3. Completion Date: October 18, 2019. SUMMARY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 10 00 - 2 L E. Skatepark: Construction of a new skatepark. 1. Start Date: June 17, 2019. 2. Completion Date: October 18, 2019. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION SUMMARY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 10 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 01 20 00 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for Part 1 - Base Bid: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements, Alternates, pricing of Work, and request for payment procedures. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work identified in the Drawings and in Section 00 41 10 as Part 1 - Base Bid: 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements, shall be paid as Lump Sum. 2. All Work identified in the Drawings and in Section 00 41 10 as Part 2 - Base Bid: Pool, Buildings, and Fence, shall be paid as Lump Sum. 3. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 PART 1 - BASE BID: 50-METER POOL STATE GRANT FUNDING RELATED ELEMENTS A. This article identifies Part 1 of the Base Bid for the 50-Meter Pool State Grant Funding Related Elements as shown in the Drawings and in Section 00 41 10. B. The City of New Hope received State Grant funds in the amount of $2,000,000.00 for the construction of an outdoor 50-meter swimming pool. C. All construction related to these elements of Part 1 of the Base Bid as shown in the Drawings and described in Section 00 41 10 must comply with the following provisions: 1. Prevailing Wage Requirements a. Per Chapter 177 of the Minnesota Statutes, and specifically those provisions contained in Minn. Statutes 177.41 through 177.435. 2. E-Verification a. Per Minn. Statute 16C.075. 3. Jobs Reporting Requirements - Attachment V to Grant Agreement; per Minn. Statute 16A.633, Subdivision 4. a. Attachment VI - Jobs Reporting b. Attachment VII - Minority and Women owned Businesses Reporting 4. All the above provisions are not required for the following parts of the Base Bid and Drawings as described in Section 00 41 10: a. Part 2 - Base Bid: Pool, Buildings, and Fence b. Part 3 - Base Bid: Civil Site Utilities and Parking Lot Improvements 1.04 ALTERNATES A. This article identifies each Alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work as part of that Alternate. Refer also to the Specifications and Drawings for further information. The descriptions of the work involved in each Alternate © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 1 Item are given as a guide only and are not intended to include every trade or item of work involved in each Alternate. B. Alternates maybe accepted by the Owner in any order and maybe used to determine the award of Contract consistent with the Instructions to Bidders. C. Alternate No. 1: Vortex Pool: l . In general, the work of this Alternate No. 1 consists of the addition of the Vortex Pool, including the Vortex Pool Motion Pump, supply and return piping, adjustments to current channel recirculation supply piping and inlets, additional floor inlets and piping, modification in landscaping and modified rope and post barrier locations in the area where the vortex pool is located and other miscellaneous modifications. Note that the drawings generally reflect the inclusion of the Vortex Pool. Drawing Q103A provides a layout of the area without the Vortex Pool. D. Alternate No. 2: Drop Slide: l . In general, the work of this Alternate No. 2 consists of furnishing and installing a drop slide as identified on the Drawings, including slide, tower, footings, supply and return piping and associated appurtenances. Note that if this alternate is not taken, Contractor shall install drain line and valve into the drain lift station from the 50M pool recirculation suction line rather than from the 6" drop slide suction line. Alternate No. 3: Climbing Wall: l . In general, the work of this Alternate No. 3 consists of furnishing and installing a climbing wall to the north side of the deep well as shown on the Drawings. Regardless of whether the Alternate is selected provisions for grounding/bonding of the wall shall be provided to allow the Climbing Wall to be potentially be added by the Owner in the future. Alternate No. 4: Water Walk: In general, the work of this Alternate No. 4 consists of furnishing and installing water walk as shown on the Drawings and described in Section 13 11 16 - Pool Recreation Equipment. Water walk shall include water walk floatables, tether anchors and cover plates, concrete posts and footings, cargo net, wall pads, etc. to provide complete functioning water walk. G. Alternate No. 5: Basketball Accessories: 1. In general, the work of this Alternate No. 5 consists of furnishing and installing basketball accessories. Refer to Section 13 11 15. H. Alternate No. 6: 50M Pool Floatable Play Structure: 1. In general, the work of this Alternate No. 6 consists of furnishing and installing a floatable play structure, anchors and related accessories as shown on the Drawings and described in Section 13 11 16. Alternate No. 7: Additional Shade Structures (3): 1. In general, the work of this Alternate No. 7 consists of furnishing and installing three (3) additional shade structures and footings. Drawings show locations and types of shade structures to be provided as part of the base bid as well as the additional shade structures covered by this alternate. Refer to Section 13 31 00. 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 2 Alternate No. 8: Additional Fabric Picnic/Rental Structures (2): 1. In general, the work of this Alternate No. 8 consists of furnishing and installing two (2) fabric picnic/rental shade structures and footings. Drawings show locations and types of shade structures covered by this alternate. Refer to Section 13 31 00. K. Alternate No. 9: Shotcrete Construction of the Pools: l . In general, the work of this Alternate No. 9 consists of all work associated with constructing the pools with shotcrete construction in lieu of the base bid cast -in -place concrete construction. Shotcreting needs to meet the requirements called out for pool construction in the Drawings and specifications. Refer to Section 13 11 14 regarding requirements if this alternate is accepted. Note on the Bid Proposal whether this alternate is an add, deduct or no cost change to the base bid. L. Alternate No. 10: Recreation Pool Water Play Feature: 1. In general, the work of this Alternate No. 10 consists of all costs to furnish and install a type "3" Water Play Feature in the Recreational Pool in place of the type "2" Water Play Feature included in the base bid. In addition to the change in the feature itself, this alternate shall include modifying piping locations, piping sizes, pump sizes associated with the change as indicated on the drawings and in Sections 13 11 16 and 22 51 16. M. Alternate No. 11: CCTV System Cameras in or on the Bathhouse Building: 1. In general, the work of this Alternate No. 11 consists of all costs to furnish the materials and labor necessary to install the CCTV system cameras in or on the Bathhouse building and related wiring as indicated on the Drawings. N. Alternate No. 12: CCTV System Cameras Exterior Pole Mounted in Park: 1. In general, the work of this Alternate No. 12 consists of all costs to furnish the materials and labor necessary to install the exterior pole mounted CCTV system cameras and related wiring as indicated on the Drawings. 1.05 BID UNIT PRICES A. Provide access and assist Engineer in determining actual quantities of Bid Unit Price work. B. Provide documentation to substantiate Bid Unit Price work. C. If the Contractor delivers and places more of any material that is paid for on a Bid Unit Price basis than is required to perform the Work and thereby causes the materials to be wasted, the quantity wasted will be deducted from the final measurement for that Bid Item. 1.06 APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS A. Payment Period: Submit at intervals stipulated in the Agreement. B. Present required information in typewritten form. C. Form: Submit in format acceptable to the Owner per the Agreement. D. Execute certification by signature of authorized officer. E. List each authorized Change Order as a separate line item, listing Change Order number and dollar amount as for an original item of work. PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 20 00 - 3 F. Submit 1 copy of each Application for Payment to the Architect for review prior to submitting to the Owner for payment. G. Include the following with the application: H. Affidavits attesting to off -site stored products. When Architect requires substantiating information, submit data justifying dollar amounts in question. Provide 1 copy of data with cover letter for each copy of submittal. Show application number and date, and line item by number and description. 1.07 APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT A. Prepare Application for Final Payment as specified for progress payments, identifying Total Adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and surd rernaining due. Application for Final Payment will not be considered until the following have been accomplished: 1. All closeout procedures specified in Sections 01 70 00. 2. Written Notification of Substantial Completion. 3. Executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. Written Notification of Final Completion, 5. Spare Parts, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, instructions, schedules, warranties, guarantees, bonds, certificates, certificates of inspection, and other documents. b. Final Application for Payment, including accompanying documentation. 7. Remove temporary protection devices and facilities. 8. Submit final releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products and completed operations where required. 9. Submit a copy of the Architect Final Punch -List of itemized work to be completed or corrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 10. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 1 1. Submit Final fit@ICI reading fur utilities and similar data either as of the Date of Substantial Completion or the date when the Owner took possession of and responsibility for corresponding elements of the work. 12. Submit proof satisfactory to Owner that taxes, fees, and similar obligations of Contractor have been paid. 13. Change over door locks and other Contractor's access provisions to Owner's property. 14. Submit lien waivers from Contractor, subcontractors, and material suppliers in the full amount of the Contract. 15. Submit Project Record Documents to Architect per 01 78 39 - Project Record Documents. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 20 00 - 4 SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. General requirements for overall Project coordination. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 UTILITIES A. Notify Gopher State One Call before starting construction in a given area requesting utility locates in the Site. Project Utility Sources: Coordinate Work with the following utility owners. The following utilities are known to be on the Site and are shown on the Drawings in a general way: 1. Water: Owner. 2. Sanitary Sewer: Owner. 3. Storm Sewer: Owner. 4. Electric: Xcel Energy. 5. Traffic Signal: Hennepin County. 6. Gas: Centerpoint Energy. 7. Telephone/Cable/Fiber: Comcast, Spring, CenturyLink, Access Communications, Arvig, Rogers Communications, AT&T, Zayo, Others. C. Owner requires a 48-hour notice for all utility interruptions. 1.04 PERMITS A. Comply with the stipulations of the following permits, which have been applied for and will be furnished by the Owner: 1. Hennepin County. 2. Minnesota Department of Health - Water Main. 3. Minnesota Pollution Control Agency -Sanitary Sewer. B. Apply for, obtain, and comply with the provisions of the following permits: 1. MPCA Stormwater Discharges Associated with Construction Activities NPDES General Permit. a. Owner will provide Contractor with necessary information required for application upon request. b. Contractor will pay permit application fee. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 31 00 - 1 C. Apply for, obtain, and comply with the provisions of the following permits, which the Owner will waive the permit application fee: 1. City Building Permit. D. Apply for, obtain, and comply with other permits, licenses, and approvals which may be required for the Project. 1.05 SURVEYING AND CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION A. Provide Engineer a minimum of 48-hour notice in advance of the need for establishing lines, grades, measurements, grade checks, and observation of Work. B. Engineer will furnish a Resident Project Representative consistent with Paragraph 9.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. 1.06 PROJECT MEETINGS A. Administrative Requirements l . Project Superintendent or persons designated by the Contractor to attend and participate in the Project meetings shall have all required authority to commit the Contractor to solutions agreed upon in the Project meetings. 2. Engineer will set the time, sites, and prepare the agenda for the meetings. 3. Engineer will prepare meeting minutes and distribute 1 copy to Contractor. Notify Engineer of inaccuracies or discrepancies in the meeting minutes within 5 calendar days of receipt of the minutes. 4. The attendance and cooperation of subcontractors and suppliers may be required. B. Preconstruction Conference 1. Provisions for the Preconstruction Conference are set forth in the General Conditions. 2. Requirements for preconstruction submittals are set forth in the General Conditions. Submittal procedures shall be consistent with Section 01 33 00. C. Progress Meeting Procedures 1. Engineer will schedule construction progress meetings throughout the duration of the Project to assess the progress of the Work, identify and discuss Project related issues, and discuss near -term construction activities. 1.07 SPECIAL PROCEDURES A. All construction staging is shown in the Drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 31 00 - 2 SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. General procedures and requirements for submittals during the course of construction. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Lump Sum Base Bid. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule submittals consistent with the Contractor's schedule of shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Submit preliminary schedule and progress schedule consistent with the General Conditions. Prepare schedules on 11 inch by 17 inch sheets showing overall sequence of construction. Organize the schedule by work activity. Identify separate stages of each work activity: 1. List work items in chronological sequence. Show beginning and completion dates of each activity. Include all activities with an estimated duration of 3 days or longer. 2. Format schedule as a horizontal bar chart. Provide separate bars for each activity or trade. 3. Provide space for revisions and notations. 4. Identify interrelations between activities. 5. Include estimated times for preparation of submittals by Contractor, processing and review of submittals by Engineer, fabrication, delivery, installation, testing, start-up, instruction of Owner, and clean-up. C. As Work progresses, revise, update, and resubmit schedule as requested by Engineer. At a minimum, update schedule with each Application for Payment. Show all activities started or finished since previous schedule was submitted and show percentage of completion for each activity. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 1 3.02 EMERGENCY CONTACT LIST A. Before any Work at the Site is started, submit a typed list on 8.5 inch by 11 inch paper outlining 24-hour on -call contacts for the Project. This list shall include the Contractor's safety representative, key representatives from the Contractor, subcontractors, and suppliers. Include the following information for each contact: 1. Company name. 2. Contact person(s). 3. Local and mobile phone numbers. 4. Fax number. 3.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND MANUFACTURERS' INFORMATION A. Conform to the requirements of the General Conditions, except as modified herein. B. The minimum sheet size shall be 8.5 inches by 1 1 inches. Non -legible copies will not be reviewed. C. Submit shop drawings in electronic PDF format to the Engineer's Project Manager. Each submittal shall contain the following information: 1. Date of submission and date of any previous submittals. 2. Project Title. 3. Names of: Contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer. 4. Identification of product and Specification Section number. 5. Identification of revisions from previous submittals. D. Engineer's review will be in conformance with the requirements of the General Conditions, except as modified herein. Engineer will stamp shop drawings and indicate requirements for Contractor's review or resubmittal as follows: 1. "Reviewed" - Appears that items covered by the submittal will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the Contract Documents and appears to be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as ii iuicuicu by the Contract uci vvcui i i@i pia. 2. "Reviewed as Noted" - Appears that items covered by the submittal will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the Contract Documents and appears to be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents, except as noted by Engineer. 3. "Revise and Resubmit" - Appears that items covered by the submittal will not, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the Contract Documents and will not be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. Work cannot proceed until the submittal is revised and resubmitted conforming to the resubmittal procedures described in the General Conditions. F. Engineer will return reviewed submittals to Contractor via email. Reviewed submittals will be in electronic PDF format. O 2019 StnntPc 1 193804337 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 33 00 - 2 3.04 TEST REPORTS A. Submit electronic copies in PDF.format of all inspections, tests, and approvals required in the Specification. 3.05 MATERIAL AND SAFETY DATA SHEETS A. Furnish Owner with current copies of Material Safety Data Sheets for all chemicals and products on Site. 3.06 WELDING CERTIFICATES A. Submit welding certificates for each person by name assigned to do field welding of materials installed under this Contract. Certificates shall indicate that each person has passed tests specified by AWS and shall be submitted prior to execution of any welding. END OF SECTION SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 33 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Information required for conformance to regulatory requirements. 2. Quality assurance. 3. Procedures to measure and report the quality and performance of the Work. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Whenever reference is made to the Minnesota Department of Transportation Specifications, such reference shall mean "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) and all subsequent revisions and supplements. The word "Engineer" is understood to refer to the Engineer for the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name for various specified tests for approval by Engineer. B. Laboratory test results or analysis. C. Manufacturer's certificates of quality control or performance. 1.05 WORKMANSHIP A. Comply with industry standards of the region, except where more restrictive tolerances or specified requirements indicate more rigid standards or more precise workmanship. 1.06 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Conform to the requirements of the General Conditions, except as modified herein. B. Notify Engineer 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring tests and inspections. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to obtain and handle samples at Site or source, transport samples to laboratory, and facilitate tests and inspections for storing and curing of test samples. QUALITY REQUIREMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 014 00 - 1 1.07 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, submit 3 copies of Laboratory Report to Engineer. B. Include: Date issued, Project title and number, name of inspector, date and time of sampling or inspection, identification of product and Specifications Section, location in the Project, type of inspection or test, date of test, results of tests, and conformance with Contract Documents. 1.08 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Test samples and perform field tests. B. Provide qualified personnel. Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of services. C. Ascertain compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. D. When requested by Engineer, provide interpretation of test results. 1.09 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop Work. 1.10 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. If requested by Engineer, submit manufacturer's certificate with shop drawings certifying that products meet or exceed specified requirements executed by responsible officer. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 40 00 - 2 SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Arrange for and provide temporary facilities and controls. Pay all costs until final acceptance of the Work. 2. Make all temporary connections to utilities and services in locations acceptable to the Engineer and local authorities having jurisdiction. Furnish all necessary labor and materials. Maintain connections and remove the temporary installation and connections when no longer required. 3. Temporary construction sign. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.). B. The Minnesota Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MMUTCD), including the Field Manual on Temporary Traffic Control Zone Layouts - Latest edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. If traffic management and control beyond that shown on the Drawings and specified is proposed, submit a Traffic Management and Control Plan consistent with Section 01 33 00. Plan shall include the following information: 1. Haul and access routes. 2. Traffic control measures. 3. Permits or applications required by local authorities. 4. Temporary facilities required. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOBILIZATION A. Move personnel, equipment, materials, and all other items required to complete the Work at the Site. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 50 00 - 1 B. Establish Contractor offices, building, or other facilities necessary for Work on the Project. C. Temporarily hold or relocate utilities and any miscellaneous structures, such as signs, power poles, guy wires, and mailboxes disturbed. 3.02 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide and maintain all temporary facilities, utilities, and controls as long as needed for the safe and proper completion of the work. Remove all temporary facilities, utilities, and controls as rapidly as progress will permit or as directed by Engineer. B. Temporary Water for Construction 1. Contractor may obtain water from Owner at a hydrant attached to the potable water line as approved by the Owner. There is no charge for water use during construction. C. Temporary Electricity 1. Contractor may use permanent electric service at outlets as approved by the Owner. Owner will pay for electricity. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES A. Sanitary Facilities 1. Comply with all governing regulations, including safety and health codes, for sanitary fixtures and facilities. 2. Provide self-contained toilet units, or water and sewer connected temporary toilet facilities consistent with governing regulations. Contractor may not use Owner's toilet facilities. 3. Provide and maintain adequate supply of toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials appropriate for each facility. Provide appropriate covered waste containers for used material. 3.04 TRAFFIC CONTROL A. Provide and maintain all traffic control devices needed to guide, warn, control, and protect traffic throughout the Site. All traffic control devices and other protective measures shall conform to MMUTCD. B. Remove traffic control devices at the conclusion of the Work. C. Flaggers are required to protect construction vehicles during unloading or construction materials. Conform to the requirements of the MMUTCD, the Flagging Handbook included in the Field Manual for Temporary Traffic Control Zone Layouts, and the following: while on duty flaggers shall wear hard hats and reflectorized florescent orange rests; and flaggers shall be fully clothed when on duty with shirt or blouse, slacks or trousers, and sturdy shoes. D. Field Quality Control 1. Daily inspect and insure that all traffic control devices required by the construction are in accordance with the MMUTCD. Any discrepancy between the actual devices in use and the required devices shall be immediately rectified. 2. Furnish names, addresses, and phone numbers of at least 3 individuals responsible for the placement and maintenance of traffic control devices. At least 1 of these individuals shall be "on call" 24 hours per day, 7 days per week during the time any traffic control devices furnished and installed by the Contractor are in place. TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 50 00 - 2 3. Provide access for emergency vehicles and busses to all residences at all times. 4. Respond to any request from the Engineer to improve or correct the usage of traffic control devices on or related to this Project within 1 hour of the time of notification. 5. Keep all traffic control signs and devices in a legible condition. This shall include but not be limited to removing grime and dust deposited on any device by traffic, natural causes, or when requested by Engineer. 3.05 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES A. Temporary Barriers 1. Provide temporary covers, enclosures, markers, and barriers as necessary to protect Work. 2. Damage to the Site caused by removal of temporary fencing, including portholes, shall be promptly repaired by Contractor. During removal at no time shall the work remain unattended if a dangerous condition exists because of incomplete removal or site repairing. 3.06 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION SIGN A. Provide temporary construction sign in compliance with attached sign diagram. Verify all lettering prior to fabrication. B. Sign location shall be verified with Owner. 3.07 CONTRACTOR'S OFFICE A. Provide and maintain an office at the Site for the duration of the Project. B. The office shall be of sufficient size and have adequate furnishings to provide a comfortable work environment for the Contractor and provide a 10-foot by 24-foot space with table and chairs for construction progress meetings and other use. C. Keep 1 complete set of Contract Documents, 1 copy of all approved shop drawings, and 1 complete set of up-to-date Record Drawings in the field office for use by the Engineer and Owner. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000-3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 01 57 13 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Managing storm water runoff and other Project related water discharges to minimize sediment pollution during construction. Related Sections 1. Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Fill. 2. Section 32 92 00 - Turf and Grasses. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment l . Bid Items as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, have been provided for temporary measures to control soil erosion and sedimentation. Payment at the Bid Unit Price will be considered compensation in full for all Work necessary to complete the Bid Item in full, including installation, maintenance, sediment removal, repairs, and removals. 2. Measurement will be based upon the units as listed below for Bid Items removed, abandoned, or salvaged complete as specified. No measurement will be made of any removals that are not required. The actual quantity installed multiplied by the appropriate Bid Unit Price will be compensation in full for all Work and costs of the following Bid Items. 80-percent partial payment will be made upon installation and 20- percent payment will be made upon removal and restoration. a. Silt Fence: Payment will be by type. Measurement will be in linear feet along the base of the fence, from outside to outside of the end posts for each section of fence. b. Inlet Protection: Measurement will be by each. Includes in -street and non -paved catch basin inlet protection. Each catch basin will receive payment for only one time during the Project Work, regardless of the protection prior to or after paving. c. Erosion Control Blanket: Payment will be by type installed. Measurement will by square yard. d. Rock Construction Entrance: Measurement will be by weight in tons of material required to construct the entrance as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The use of onsite existing aggregate base or reclaim material shall be utilized for temporary access during construction and shall be incidental to the Project. This Bid Item shall only be used during extreme wet conditions where the larger rock is required. 3. No Bid Item has been provided for Water for Dust Control. Water used for the construction of the pool, buildings, and parking lots will be considered incidental to the Project. 4. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 57 13 - 1 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2130 - Application of Water for Dust Control. 2. 2573 - Storm Water Management. 3. 2575 - Establishing Turf and Controlling Erosion. B. MPCA's NPDES General Stormwater Permit for Construction Activity. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Completed application form for the MPCA's NPDES General Stormwater Permit for Construction Activity (MN R100001) conforming to Section 01 31 00. 1. NPDES permit inspection log resulting from weekly Site inspections. 2. Amendments to the Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) for the Project. 3. Completed form for MPCA's Notice of Termination. B. Contractor Prepared Schedules and Plans 1. Erosion Control Schedule: Conforming to MnDOT Spec. 1717.2C and submitted each week that construction is active. C. Certification and Sampling 1. Furnish a manufacturer's certification stating that the material supplied conforms to the requirements of this Section. The certification shall include or have attached typical results of tests for the specified properties, representative of the materials supplied. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erosion Control Supervisor: Provide an Erosion Control Supervisor to direct the erosion control operations and insure compliance with Federal, State, and Local ordinances and regulations. B. Certified Installers: Provide a certified installer to install or direct installation of erosion or sediment control practices. Certification shall be obtained through the University of Minnesota Erosion Control Inspector/Installer Certification program, or approved equal. 1.06 PERMITS A. Project disturbs 1 or more acres of total land area. Co -submittal with the Owner of a completed NPDES application form for the MPCA's General Stormwater Permit for Construction Activity and the appropriate fees to the MPCA is required. Contractor to Submit Permit application online and Submit a copy of the completed, signed, and dated application Corm to Owner. B. Permit coverage will become effective 7 days after the Submittal date of the completed application. Or Permit coverage is anticipated to become effective 30 days after the postmarked date of a completed application form and SWPPP submittal to the MPCA. n 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 57 13 - 2 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install sediment control measures prior to grading activities. Schedule and coordinate the Work so that permanent erosion and sediment control BMPs, such as basin construction, rip rap placement, and permanent seeding, are directly incorporated into the supplement permanent erosion and sediment control BMPs with temporary BMPs. Place temporary BMPs when permanent erosion control cannot be achieved. Coordinate construction operations so that erosion and sediment control measures (permanent or temporary) are installed and maintained concurrently with the rest of the Work of the Project. C. Coordinate and schedule the Work of subcontractors such that erosion and sediment control measures are fully executed for each operation and in a timely manner over the duration of the Project. Develop a chain of responsibility for all subcontractors and operators on the Project to ensure that permit provisions are adhered to. D. Infiltration areas and constructed infiltration systems should not be constructed until the contributing drainage area and/or adjacent construction has been completely stabilized. When this timing of construction is not possible, the Contractor shall insure sediment from exposed soil areas of the Project does not enter into the infiltration area or system. E. Stabilization timeframes shall conform to the NPDES General Stormwater Permit for Construction Activity. F. Prior to Project shutdown for the winter or other periods of a week or more, the Site shall be adequately protected from erosion and off Site damage by covering exposed soils with mulch and establishing perimeter controls. G. If the Contractor fails to install erosion or sediment measures, the Engineer may withhold payment from related work until the control measures are undertaken by the Contractor. 1. When the Contractor fails to conduct the quality control program, does not conduct the inspection required in the NPDES permit, or fails to take action ordered by the Engineer to remedy erosion or sediment control problems, the Engineer shall issue a Written Order to the Contractor. 2. The Contractor shall respond within 24 hours with sufficient personnel, equipment, materials, and conduct the required Work or be subject to a $2,000 per calendar day deduction for noncompliance. H. Establish permanent turf in accordance with Section 32 92 00 to prevent excessive soil erosion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SILT FENCE: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3886. A. Machine sliced (MS). TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 57 13 - 3 2.02 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION ENTRANCE A. Rock Construction Entrance: Conform to the Drawings and the following: 2 inches minimum washed rock. 2. Underlying Geotextile: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3733, Type 4. 3. Minimum Thickness of Rock Placed: 6 inches. 2.03 MULCH: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3882. A. Type 1, clean grain straw only. Project specific. Refer to MnDOT Spec. for options. B. Hydraulic soil stabilizer may be used in lieu of mulch with the approval of the Engineer. 2.04 HYDRAULIC EROSION CONTROL PRODUCTS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3884. B. Type Hydraulic Mulch C. Type Bonded Fiber Matric (BFM), 100-percent wood fiber mulch. 2.05 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3885. 2.06 STORM DRAIN INLET PROTECTION A. Inlet protection for paved streets with concrete curb and gutter: The following methods are acceptable: l . Conform to the details on the Drawings. 2. Catch Basin Inserts: a. Road Drain by Wimco, LLC (www.roaddrain.com). b. Lange Industries (www.langeindustries.com), or approved equal. c. Filter bag insert conforming to MnDOT Spec. 2573 subject to Site and approved by the Engineer. 3. Rock Log: a. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3897.2.G. b. Rock 3/4 to 1-1 /2 inches crushed or natural rounded aggregate. B. Inlet protection for non -paved surfaces without curb or areas where vegetation will be established. The following methods are acceptable: 1. Conform to the details on the Drawings. 2. Silt fence ring, or approved equal: a. Place wire mesh cage in a circular or square confirmation to form a minimum 5 foot diameter zone of protection. b. Geotextile shall be monofilament/monofilament meeting the requirements of MnDOT Spec. Heavy Duty. c. Loose aggregate or a rock log(s) around perimeter of ring to anchor geotextile. 3. Sediment control inlet hat conforming to MnDOT Spec. 2573: a. InfraSafe Sediment Control Barrier by Royal Enterprises (http://www.royalenterprises.net/). 4. Rock filter as shown on the Drawings. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 57 13 - 4 2.07 SEDIMENT CONTROL LOGS: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3897. A. Straw or wood fiber biorolls, 6 to 7 inches in diameter. B. Compost or rock logs, 6 to 8 inches in diameter. f ll.3Im lwelf7H"m A. Water clear and free from suspended fine sediment. B. The Owner may elect to have the Contractor apply a chloride solution for dust control. 1. Calcium Chloride: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3911. 2. Magnesium Chloride Solution: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3912. 2.09 TEMPORARY SEED A. Conform to Section 32 92 00. B. General - Sizing, configuration, capacity, and selection of dewatering sediment capture techniques shall be based on Site and flow conditions. The Contractor shall submit the means and methods for review by the Engineer. Sizing of the sediment capture systems will have to be adjusted such that the ultimate discharge water is not visibly different from the receiving water. 2.10 FLOCCULANTS: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3898. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Comply with all applicable laws, ordinances, regulations, permit requirements, orders and decrees pertaining to erosion/sediment control and stormwater discharge during the conduct of the Work. B. Take necessary precautions against damage to the Project by action of the elements. C. Implement the Project's NPDES Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and take necessary actions to prevent off Site damage resulting from Work conducted on the Project or Project related stormwater runoff. D. Minimize the amount of disturbed land that is susceptible to erosion at any time. Delineate areas not to be disturbed. 1. Exclude vehicles and construction equipment from area not to be disturbed to preserve natural vegetation. 2. Maintain and preserve riparian and naturally vegetated buffer strips (10 feet minimum distance) along water courses. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install temporary stormwater management and sediment control devices in conformance with the details, typical sections, and elevations shown on the Drawings. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 57 13 - 5 B. The location of temporary stormwater and sediment control devices may be adjusted from that shown on the Drawings to accommodate actual field conditions and increase the effectiveness of the installation. C. Silt Fence: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2573.3.13 1. Install in the locations shown on the Drawings using the machine sliced installation method, unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. 2. Use additional measures, such as rock aggregate, placed along the base of the silt fence where the silt fence geotextile cannot be trenched in, i.e. tree roots, frost, bedrock. 3. Use short sections of silt fence placed in J-hook patterns to a. Supplement the perimeter silt fence at corner locations and areas where sediment deposition will occur. No more than 100 feet of silt fence shall be installed per 1 /4 acre of drainage. b. Break up flow path along silt fence running across contours to be no more than 100 feet between hooks or as directed by the Engineer. 4. Silt fence longer than 600 feet shall be constructed in separate independent units with each unit having a length less than 600 feet. Avoid splices whenever possible. If necessary, make splices at an opposing fence post and according to the manufacturer's specifications. D. Temporary Construction Entrance l . Install at locations shown on the Drawings. 2. Construct construction entrance before grading begins on the Site. 3. Inspect construction ontranco daily for mud accumulation to minimize vehicle tracking of sediment onto public roadways. Remove fugitive rock or wood mulch from adjacent roadways daily. E. Mulch l . For seeded Sites, apply at a rate of 2 tons per acre (4,500 kg/ha). 2. For unseeded Sites, apply at a rate of 2 to 3 tons per acre (4,500 to 6,700 kg/ha), covering the entire soil surface. 3. Distribute mulch evenly by hand or machine and cover the exposed area to a uniform depth. 4. Disk anchor in coniurnionce Io Mi00T Seel. 2575.3.D. 5. Anchor mulch immediately to minimize loss by wind or water. Hydraulic Erosion Control Products l . Apply in conformance with MnDOT Spec. 2575.3.E. 2. Raking or harrowing of soil/seed and slope (cat) tracking shall be done before installation of hydromulch. 3. Apply hydromulch in at least 2 opposing directions so that a shadowing effect leaving the back side of a soil clod unprotected is minimized. 4. Type Hydraulic Mulch a. Application Rate for Slopes greater than 1:4: 2,800 Ibs per acre. 2 applications may be necessary. All other slopes apply at a rate of 2,100 Ibs per acre. 5. Type Bonded Fiber Matrix (BFM) a. Application Rate for Slopes less than 1:3: 3,000 Ibs per acre. b. Application Rate for Slopes between 1:3 and 1:2: 3,500 Ibs per acre. 2 applications shall be necessary. c. Application Rate for Slopes greater than 1:2: 4,500 Ibs per acre. 2 applications shall be necessary. TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 57 13 - 6 G. Slope (Cat) Tracking 1. Slope tracking consists of operating a dozer up and down slopes so that the cleats of the tracks create grooves perpendicular to the slope. By operating the dozer up and down, the soil surface is firmed and miniature interceptor checks are created. 2. Required on all slopes equal to or steeper than 3:1 (H:V). H. Erosion Control Blanket l . Install immediately following seeding in accordance with MnDOT Spec. 2575.3.G, and as modified below. 2. Install as shown on Drawings. 3. Raking or harrowing of soil/seed shall be done before installation of erosion control blanket. 4. Install blanket parallel to the direction of flow. 5. If permanent seeding is not available at the time of blanket installation, this material will have to be removed, re -seeded, and installed again as a permanent erosion control measure. If permanent seeding is available at the time of initial installation, a one-time proper installation is acceptable. Storm Drain Inlet Protection l . Provide effective storm drain inlet protection over the life of the Project until all sources with potential for discharging to inlets have been paved or stabilized. 2. Place devices so that driving hazards or obstructions are not created. The devices must be cleaned out regularly and all devices must have an emergency overflow to reduce flooding potential. 3.03 MAINTENANCE A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2573.3M, NPDES permit, and as follows: l . Inspect, maintain, and repair any washouts or accumulations of sediment that occur as a result of the grading or construction. Restoration consists of grade repair, turf re- establishment, and street sweeping of mud and debris tracked from the Site. 2. Inspection of all erosion and sediment control items will take place immediately after each runoff event and at least daily during prolonged rainfall. Any required repairs shall be made immediately. 3. The Contractor shall maintain the temporary sediment control devices until they are no longer necessary and are removed: a. Maintenance consists of keeping the devices functioning properly. b. The Contractor shall repair or replace plugged, torn, displaced, damaged, or non- functioning devices. 4. Upon final acceptance of the Project and establishment of permanent erosion control measures, the Contractor shall remove all temporary erosion control measures. 5. Temporary mulching and temporary seeding/mulching are very effective at controlling erosion. However, these are considered temporary measures. These measures may need to be re-established several times throughout the duration of the Work. B. Maintenance: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2573.3.K 1. If an erosion control device has been reduced in capacity by 30 percent or more, the Contractor shall restore such features to their original condition. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713-7 C. Control dust blowing and movement on Site and roads as directed by Engineer to prevent exposure of soil surfaces, to reduce on and off Site damage, to prevent health hazards, and to improve traffic safety. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL 01 5713-8 SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Basic requirements for products used in the Work. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following items consistent with Instructions to Bidders: 1. Written request for approval with supporting documentation. B. Submit the following items consistent with Section 01 33 00 and General Conditions Article 6.05: 1. Shop drawings for named products and "or -equal" products. 2. Written application for substitute items, including supporting documentation. 1.04 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS AND "OR -EQUAL" PROCEDURES A. Procedures During Bidding 1. Conform to the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders. Procedures During Construction l . Scheduling of Submittals: Conform to the Contractor's Schedule of Submittals. 2. Submittal Procedures: Conform to the requirements of Section 01 33 00. 3. Items not approved as "or -equal" may be resubmitted as a Substitute Item. 4. Engineer will review Substitute Item requests that conform to General Conditions Article 6.05.A2d and the following additional supporting documentation: a. Drawings and Specifications. b. Installation lists. c. Performance data, including equipment capacity, strengths, weights, and dimensions. d. Catalog cut -sheets. e. Lists of deviations from and exceptions to the Specifications. f. Detailed information for all buy-out items, including motors and drives. g. Lists of materials of construction. h. Maintenance schedules of equipment, including buy-out items. i. Other information deemed necessary at the discretion of Engineer. 5. Incomplete submittals will be returned to Contractor without review. 6. Contract times will not be modified due to substitute and "or -equal" review process. 7. Engineer shall not have to prove that an item is not an "or -equal." PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 60 00 - 1 8. Owner does not have to accept proposed Substitute Items. 1.05 SUBSTITUTE ITEMS A. Procedures During Bidding 1. Conform to the requirements of the Instructions to Bidders. B. Procedures During Construction 1. Alternate material or equipment items accepted by the Owner and included in the award of Contract become named materials or equipment. 2. Submit shop drawings and material certifications consistent with Section 01 33 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DELIVERY A. Transport and handle products in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Handle and lift products only at designated lift points and by methods to avoid soiling, disfigurement, bending, overstressing, and damage. C. Store products on shelves, in bins, or in neat groups of like items with seals and labels intact and legible, and in a manner to provide access for maintenance and inspection. D. Store loose granular materials on clean, solid, flat surfaces, and prevent mixing with foreign matter. Store fabricated products supported above the ground on skids or blocking. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. E. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration with impervious sheet covering and protect products from soiling and staining. F. Store and protect products which are subject to damage by the elements in weathertight, climate controlled enclosures, and according to the manufacturer's instructions. Maintain temperature, ventilation, and humidity within ranges stated in the manufacturer's instructions. G. Attach applicable manufacturer's service instructions labeled "STORAGE SERVICE INSTRUCTIONS ENCLOSED" to exterior of each stored product. H. Inspect, maintain, and service stored products on a regularly scheduled basis, consistent with the manufacturer's instructions. Record inspection, maintenance, services performed, and keep log available for review. J. Traffic control required for all deliveries to and from the Site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. All flagmen, barricades, flares, and safety measures are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 60 00 - 2 3.02 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect from damage all materials and equipment to be used in the completed facility. Provide temporary Site security fencing around storage areas and as indicated on the Drawings. C. The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Engineer with keys or combinations to any locks that may be used to secure fencing gates. D. Storage areas and hazardous areas shall be protected by use of chain link fence around the perimeter of the area. This fencing is in addition to any other fencing required for Site containment. 3.03 OWNER SUPPLIED PRODUCTS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for removal, protection, storage, delivery, and installation of all Owner furnished equipment or materials, unless otherwise specified. B. The Contractor shall be required to make all modifications to structures, equipment, and power to provide a complete and working installation of the Owner furnished products. C. The Contractor shall provide any materials or equipment required for the installation of the Owner supplied products, including but not limited to electric wire and conduit, pipes, anchors, and supports. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of any existing Owner furnished products to verify characteristics prior to Bidding. E. Install Owner furnished equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as specified in other Sections. F. All costs associated with the complete installation of Owner furnished equipment shall be considered incidental to the Project, unless otherwise specified. END OF SECTION PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 60 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 01 70 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Requirements for overall execution of the Work and closeout of the Contract for Final Payment. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. A Bid Item as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, has been provided for Street Sweeper (With Pickup Broom). Measurement will be by the units of hours that sweeper is operating to remove sediment and other deposits from adjacent streets. Street sweeping shall only be at the direction of the Engineer on Site. No payment shall be made for street sweeping required due to lack of sediment and erosion control of the site. a. Contractor should anticipate multiple mobilizations to perform this work. 2. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following items consistent with the Conditions of the Contract and Division 01 Sections: 1. Record Documents. 2. Written Notification of Substantial Completion. 3. Executed Certificate of Substantial Completion. 4. Written Notification of Final Completion. 5. Spare Parts, Operation and Maintenance Manuals, instructions, schedules, warranties, guarantees, Bonds, certificates, certificates of inspection, and other documents. 6. Final Application for Payment, including accompanying documentation. 7. IC-134 Form. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Acceptance of Conditions: By commencing Work, Contractor construes acceptance of the adjacent work as satisfactory to receive subsequent work. 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 70 00 - 1 B. Existing Conditions: Before commencing Work, inspect work completed by others that is adjacent to Work. If adjacent conditions prevent completion of Work, Contractor will not commence Work until the conditions are corrected. C. Inspect each product immediately prior to installation. Remove damaged products from Site. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions for installation of manufactured products to the extent that these instructions are applicable and more explicit or more stringent than requirements indicated in the Contract Documents. B. Secure Work true to line and level, within recognized industry tolerances. C. Install each element of work during weather conditions and Project status to ensure coordination of the Work. Isolate each element of work from incompatible work as necessary to prevent deterioration. D. Record installation details and prepare Record Documents consistent with the General Conditions. 3.03 SITE MAINTENANCE A. Maintain stockpiles, excavations, access roads, and all other work areas free from dust. Employ dust abatement techniques whenever a dust nuisance or hazard occurs, or as directed by Engineer. Comply with local ordinances. B. Protect hazardous work areas and hazardous material storage areas. C. Protect trees, unless specifically indicated on Drawings. D. Clean access roads and haul routes with mechanical street sweeper. E. If Contractor fails to maintain Site, Engineer will provide Written Notice of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor will be given 12 hours from the Notice to clean Site. After the 12-hour period, Owner may correct the defective Work consistent with Article 13.09 of the Conditions of the Contract. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean and protect Work in progress and adjoining Work during handling and installation. Apply protective covering on installed Work where it is required to ensure freedom from damage or deterioration. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Complete all cutting, fitting, and patching as necessary to join the new Work to existing conditions. B. Remove or cut existing work only as necessary to join the new work to the existing construction or as required by the Contract Documents. C. Patch defective and incomplete surfaces caused or exposed by Work of the Project. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01 7000-2 D. Repair any damage to existing conditions and patch to match. E. Existing construction designated by the Contract Documents to remain that is loosened, cracked, or otherwise damaged or defaced beyond repair as a result of Work by the Contractor will be considered unsuitable for the use intended and shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor. 3.06 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE WITH MINNESOTA STATUTES 290.92 AND 290.97 A. Upon completion of the Project and prior to Final Payment, the Contractor and all subcontractors shall complete Minnesota Department of Revenue Revised Form IC-134. This form, Affidavit for Obtaining Final Settlement of Contract with the State of Minnesota and any of its Political or Governmental Subdivisions, is to be signed by a Department of Revenue representative and forwarded to the Owner. Copies of this form can be obtained by writing to the Minnesota Department of Revenue, 600 North Robert Street, St. Paul, MN 55101 or by calling 651-282-9999 or 1-800-657-3594. They are also available on their website: www.revenue.state.rlin.us, or via email at witkiholding,taxL�state.mn.us. END OF SECTION EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 70 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. General procedures and requirements for Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Schedule submittals consistent with Contractor's schedule of submittals. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals must be approved before placing equipment into operation. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Submit 1 preliminary set of Operation and Maintenance Manuals for review by the Engineer. Engineer will review and return to the Contractor this set marked "Reviewed," "Reviewed as Noted," or "Revise and Resubmit" consistent with Section 01 33 00. After the Operation and Maintenance Manuals have been corrected, submit 3 final sets. B. Submit 3 approved and final sets of detailed equipment drawings and explicit instructions on the operation and maintenance of each piece of equipment furnished on the Project. 3.02 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Manuals are required for all equipment, accessories, devices, etc. that require adjustment, maintenance, operation, or repairs by the Owner's personnel, including driver, motors, controls, etc. All information shall be supplied by the appropriate equipment manufacturers, neatly bound in rigid cover ring type binders by the Contractor, and properly indexed. Manuals shall include record shop drawings and copies of factory certified tests. Each manual shall contain the following information where applicable: 1. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be clearly identified as operation and maintenance submittal. 2. All performance and design characteristics and unit identification, such as model and serial numbers. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 78 23 - 1 3. All accessories or options furnished with unit. 4. Complete instruction on lubrication, testing, balancing, etc. 5. List of recommended lubricants. 6. Step-by-step instructions for repair or overhaul. 7. Long-term and Short-term storage instructions. 8. Parts list and parts diagram. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Copy of approved/revised shop drawings. 11. Listing of spare parts the Owner should keep on hand as recommended by the manufacturer. 12. Name and phone number of supplier where repair parts or additional information can be obtained. 13. Original Warranty per Section 01 78 36. 14. Any manufacturer's Technical Memo or Technical Instruction Sheet referred to in the instructions shall be provided in the O&M Manual. 15. Provide additional information deemed necessary by Engineer. B. Each manual shall be specifically for the items actually installed. Where manuals show a number of models or options, the manual shall be clearly marked to indicate what was furnished and which instructions apply to the furnished unit. C. Superfluous information pertaining to other models, options, etc. not furnished shall be clearly crossed out or otherwise eliminated. Failure to meet this Section of the Specifications will result in payment reduction. END OF SECTION OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 78 23 - 2 SECTION 01 78 36 WARRANTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Warranties for the Work of this Project. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measure and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Bind in commercial quality, 8.5 inches by 1 1 inches, 3-ring side binders with hardback, cleanable, plastic covers. B. Table of Contents: Provide neatly typed, Table of Contents matching that of the Project Specifications with each item identified with the number and title of the Specification Section in which specified and the name of the product or work item. C. Label cover of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES with title of Project; name, address, and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible principal. D. Separate each warranty keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. 1.04 PREPARATION OF WARRANTIES A. Obtain warranties executed in duplicate by responsible subcontractors and suppliers within 10 days of completion of the application item or Work. Leave date of beginning of time of warranty blank until the Date of Substantial Completion is determined. B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. C. Co -execute submittals when required. D. Retain warranties until delivery time indicated below. 1.05 DELIVERY A. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction with Owner's permission, submit documents within 10 days after acceptance. WARRANTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 78 36 - 1 B. Within 10-days after Engineer's declared and written confirmation of the Date of Substantial Completion. C. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10-days after acceptance, listing the date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period. 1.06 LENGTH OF WARRANTY A. Minimum length of all equipment warranties shall extend through the Correction Period. B. Length of Warranties: Conform to the requirements of the Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION WARRANTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 01 78 36 - 2 SECTION 02 41 13 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Complete or partial removal and disposal or salvage of at grade, above grade, and below grade structures and miscellaneous items. B. Related Sections 1. Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Fill. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Bid Items have been provided for removal items. Payment at the Bid Unit Price will be considered compensation in full for all Work necessary to complete the Bid Item in full, including removal, salvage, storage, disposal, and reinstallation. 2. Measurement will be based upon the units as listed below for items removed, abandoned, or salvaged complete as specified. No measurement will be made of any removals that are not required. The actual quantity removed multiplied by the appropriate Bid Unit Price will be compensation in full for all Work and costs of the following Bid Items: a. Remove Storm Sewer MH or Catch Basin: Per each, regardless of size or depth. b. Remove Pipe: Per lineal foot of the type specified, measured from center of junction fittings, catch basins, or manholes, and will include the length of any aprons and fittings. 3. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2104 - Removing Pavement and Miscellaneous Structures. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: To take away or eliminate from the Site by any method selected by the Contractor, including disposal of material. B. Salvage: To dismantle, disassemble, or remove carefully without damage so the item can be re -assembled, replaced, or reused in a workable condition equal to that existing before removal. C. Abandon: To fill, bulkhead, or close off pipes and structures so that no settlement or flow can occur. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 0241 13 - 1 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2104.3, with the following modifications: 1. Dispose of all materials designated for removal outside the Site at locations selected by Contractor. 2. Stockpile or temporarily store materials designated for salvage at locations provided by Contractor. 1.06 SCHEDULING A. Prior to starting Work, submit for review by the Engineer and approval by the Owner, a schedule showing the commencement, order, and completion dates of the various parts of this Work. B. Fill holes or depressions resulting from removal or salvage immediately. C. Provide temporary surface restoration for traffic continuity where removal or salvage operations are completed within streets, driveways, or parking lots. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Dispose of all items removed, except for those items identified to be salvaged or recycled. Said disposal shall be in accordance with all laws, regulations, statutes, etc. B. Perform removal work without damage to adjacent retained work. Where such Work is damaged, the Contractor shall patch, repair, or otherwise restore same to its original condition at no expense to the Owner. C. Remove debris from the work area as often as necessary, but not less than at least once at the end of each workday. Debris shall be placed in approved containers to prevent the spread of dust and dirt. D. Execute the Work in a careful and orderly manner with the least possible disturbance to the public and occupants of buildings. E. Fill holes resulting from removals consistent with Section 31 23 00. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Meet with owners of signs to determine requirements for salvage, storage, and replacement. B. Develop plan acceptable to Engineer and postal service for maintaining mail service. SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0241 13 - 2 3.03 PROTECTION A. Take all necessary precautions to adequately protect personnel and public and private property in the areas of Work. All Site fencing shall be in place prior to the start of any removal work. B. All street signs, traffic control signs, guy wires, mailboxes, posts, wood fence, etc. which may interfere with construction shall be removed, stored safely, and replaced. C. Approved barriers or warning signs shall be provided as necessary. D. Provide and maintain temporary protection of existing structures designated to remain where removal work is being done, connections made, materials handled, or equipment moved. E. Do not close or obstruct walkways or roadways. Do not store or place materials in passageways or other means of egress. Conduct operations with minimum traffic interference. F. Take reasonable precautions to limit damage to existing turf. G. Holes or depressions created by removals shall not be left open for more than 1 day. Any hole within 10 feet of sidewalks shall be filled, suitably marked, or covered immediately. H. Avoid disturbance to any material beyond the limits required for new construction. 3.04 REMOVE MANHOLES AND CATCHBASINS A. Remove structure in its entirety, including casting, rings, cone section, barrel sections, and base slab. 3.05 REMOVE SECTIONS OF EXISTING PIPE A. Pipes to be removed shall be removed in its entirety and bulkheaded with brick, non -shrink concrete grout, or concrete block masonry 8-inches thick at the downstream end that connects to catch basin or manhole. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Salvaged items to be reinstalled shall be of the same shape, dimension, location, and quality of the original item prior to construction. B. Items damaged during removal or salvaging operations shall be replaced with new material of equal type and quality of the damaged item when it was new. 3.07 DISPOSING OF MATERIAL A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2104.3.D. B. Dispose of all materials outside of the Site at disposal location selected by Contractor in compliance with state and local regulations. Burying of material and debris is not allowed within the Site. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION 0241 13-3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install formwork for cast -in -place concrete. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. 347 - Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit product data for form ties. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The design, engineering, and proper construction of all formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. Design formwork in accordance with ACI 347. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not store forms or equipment on finished slabs. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIAL A. Form facing material shall be smooth faced, undamaged plywood or other panel type material approved by the Engineer. B. The form facing material shall produce a smooth, hard, uniform texture on the concrete. C. The arrangement of the facing material shall be orderly and symmetrical with the number of seams kept to a minimum. CONCRETE FORMWORK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 10 00 - 1 D. Facing material with raised grain, torn surfaces, worn edges, patches, dents, or other defects which will impair the texture of the concrete surface shall not be used. E. Circular column forms shall consist of a continuous laminated fiber tube with exterior moisture protection and non -adhering interior surface similar to "A -Coated Sonotube" as manufactured by Sonoco Products, or approved equal. F. Void Forms: Void forms shall be Slab Void System as manufactured by Sure Void Products, Inc., Englewood, Colorado (800) 458-5444, or approved equal. 2.02 FORM TIES A. Form ties shall be factory fabricated, adjustable length, removable or snap -off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling concrete surfaces upon removal. B. The portion of the tie remaining in the concrete after removal of the tie shall be at least 1 inch from the surface of the concrete. C. Provide waterseals on all wall ties used in water containment structures and exterior walls. 2.03 FORM COATINGS A. Form coatings or release agents shall be commercially formulated chemical release agents containing no lubrication oil, conventional form oil, fuel oil, or kerosene. B. The form coating shall not penetrate, stain, or leave a residual film on the concrete surface and shall not attract dirt or other deleterious material. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Chamfer strips shall be 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch wood or plastic strips. B. Provide all anchorages, braces, and special forms required to construct cast -in -place concrete components shown on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Establish a benchmark in an accessible location and use as a reference point for various construction levels. B. Verify lines, levels, and centers before proceeding with formwork. C. Insure that dimensions agree with the Drawings. Report any discrepancies to the Engineer before proceeding with Work. 3.02 FORMWORK DESIGN A. The design, engineering, and construction of the formwork shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE FORMWORK 031000-2 B. Formwork shall be designed in accordance with ACI 347. C. Formwork shall be designed, erected, supported, braced, and maintained to safely support all vertical and lateral loads that might be applied until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. D. Formwork shall be cambered to compensate for anticipated deflections in the formwork prior to hardening of the concrete. E. Positive means of adjustment of shores and struts shall be provided and all settlement shall be taken up during concrete placing operations. Forms shall be securely braced against lateral deflections. 3.03 FORMWORK CONSTRUCTION A. Provide forms for all concrete work. Earth cuts shall not be used as forms for vertical surfaces. B. Construct forms to conform to slopes, lines, and dimensions shown on the Drawings. C. Forms shall be sufficiently tight to prevent loss of mortar from the concrete. D. Place chamfer strips at all exposed corners. E. Install all required openings, frames, pipe sleeves, cavities, slots, and other embedded items. F. Cut all holes in forms required for installation or embedment of concrete reinforcement bars and ties. G. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for installation of void forms. Verify proper preparation of base materials prior to installation of void forms. H. Provide sharp clean corners at intersecting planes without visible edges or offsets. Back joints with extra studs or girts to maintain true, square corners. I. Temporary openings shall be provided at the base of column forms and wall forms to facilitate cleaning and observation immediately before concrete is placed. Construct closures to ensure a tight fit flush with the adjoining surfaces. J. Provide runways for moving equipment. Runways shall be provided with struts or legs and shall be supported directly on the formwork. Runways shall not rest on the reinforcing steel. K. Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris before concrete is placed. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork so that concrete surfaces will conform with the following tolerances: 1. Variation from plumb In any 10 feet of length 1 /4 inch. Maximum for entire length 1 /2 inch. CONCRETE FORMWORK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 10 00 - 3 2. Variation from the level or specified grade In any 10 feet of length 1 /4 inch. Maximum for entire length 1 /2 inch. 3. Variation of the linear building lines from established position in plan and related position of columns, walls, and partitions In any 20 feet of length 1 /2 inch. Maximum for entire length 1 inch. 4. Variation in the sizes and locations of sleeves, floor openings, and wall openings: ± 1 /4 inch. 5. Variation in cross -sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in the thickness of slabs and walls Minus 1 /4 inch. Plus 1 /2 inch. 6. Footings (tolerances apply to concrete dimensions only, not to positioning of reinforcing steel): a. Variations in dimensions in plan Minus 1 /2 inch. Plus 1 inch. b. Misplacement 1 inch. c. Thickness Decrease in thickness 1 /2 inch. Increase in thickness No limit 7. Variations in steps a. In flight of stairs Rise ± 1 /8 inch. Tread ± 1 /4 inch. b. In consecutive steps Rise ± 1 /16 inch. Tread ± 1 /8 inch. 3.05 FORM SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces of forms and embedded material of all accumulated mortar or grout from previous concreting and of all other foreign material before concrete is placed. B. Before placing the reinforcing steel or the concrete, the surfaces of the forms shall be covered with an acceptable coating material that will effectively prevent absorption of moisture, prevent bond with the concrete, and not stain the concrete surfaces. C. Excess form coating material shall not stand in puddles in the forms. D. Form coating material shall not come in contact with hardened concrete against which fresh concrete is to be placed. E. Spray form coating on all concrete form surfaces, including wood forms for wall openings, keyway strips, and chamfer strips. 3.06 RE -USE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be re -used. B. Do not use split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material. CONCRETE FORMWORK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 10 00 - 4 3.07 FORM REMOVAL A. Formwork for columns, walls, sides of beams, and other parts not supporting the weight of the concrete may be removed as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to resist damage from removal operations, but not less than 24 hours after completing concrete placement and finishing. B. Forms and shoring used to support the weight of concrete in beams, slabs, and other structural members shall not be removed in less than 10 days and not until the concrete has attained 3,500 psi minimum compressive strength. Compressive strength shall be determined by field -cured specimens. C. Once forms and shoring supporting beams, slabs, and other structural members have been removed, concrete structural members at each level shall be reshored the same day such that all superimposed loads are uniformly distributed and transferred directly to the foundation through temporary supports. No construction or other live loads shall be permitted on the members, unless sufficient support is in place or concrete has attained full design strength and loads do not exceed the design maximum, as approved by the Engineer. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage resulting from removal of forms or premature overloading of structural members. E. Wood forms for wall openings shall be loosened as soon as possible without damage to the concrete. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FORMWORK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 10 00 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install concrete reinforcement, supports, and accessories. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 301 -Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. 117 -Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 3. 315 - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement. B. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) 1. Manual of Standard Practice. C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A615 - Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon -Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit complete shop drawings and bar lists of all material to be furnished and installed under this Section. Show bar sizes, spacings, locations, and quantities of reinforcing and bending details. C. Make shop drawings in accordance with ACI 315 and the CRSI Manual of Standard Practice. Drawings shall show in detail the location, size, spacing, bends, and quantities of each and all reinforcing bars to be placed in the structure. Bars shall have unique identifying labels or marks for each size, length, bend configuration, etc. D. Submit product data on threaded dowel inserts. E. Submit mill certifications for concrete reinforcement at time of delivery. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ACI 301, except as modified in this Section. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 03 20 00 - 1 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver reinforcement to the Site bundled, tagged, and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement drawings. B. Store reinforcement at the Site in a manner to prevent damage from drainage and accumulation of dirt and excessive rust. C. Do not store reinforcement, supports, or equipment on finished slabs. D. Store metal bar supports in a weather-proof shelter. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed billet steel bars conforming to ASTM A615, Grade 60. B. Welded Wire Fabric: Steel wire spot welded at intersections conforming to ASTM A185. Use flat sheets only. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports for Elevated Slabs, Walls, Columns, and Beams: All bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcement in place shall be plastic protected, conforming to CRSI Class 1 protection for bar supports. B. Ground Supported Reinforcing: All ground supported reinforcement shall be supported by precast concrete blocks. Precast concrete blocks shall have a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi. C. Tie Wire: Shall be black annealed wire, 16 gauge or heavier. D. Threaded Dowel Inserts: Threaded dowel inserts shall be manufactured of minimum Grade 60 steel and shall be capable of achieving 125 percent of specified yield strength of reinforcement steel for the bar size indicated. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Shop fabricate reinforcing steel to required shapes and dimensions. B. Do not rebend or straighten reinforcing steel. C. Fabricate bars in accordance with the fabricating tolerances given in ACI 315. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACING A. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with ACI 1 17, the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and as specified herein. Notify Engineer of any discrepancies or conflicts as soon as they are discovered. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 032000-2 B. Reinforcing steel shall have the following concrete cover, unless specifically noted differently on the Drawings: 1. Concrete cast against earth 3 inches. 2. All other concrete 2 inches. C. Properly position reinforcing steel and wire it together at intersections and supports to ensure against displacement during concrete placing. All reinforcing steel shall be tied to wall forms. D. Reinforcing steel for slabs on grade shall be supported by placing precast concrete blocks at all locations where chairs are to be located. Chairs or standees shall be placed over concrete blocks. E. Dowels shall be wired in place before placing concrete. F. All reinforcing steel must be placed and tied before concrete is placed. G. Reinforcing steel embedded in hardened or partially hardened concrete shall not be bent after placing. H. Wall chairs shall be placed at the top and bottom of all walls and not greater than 6 feet on center horizontally. I. All reinforcement at the time concrete is placed shall be free of mud, oil, or other materials that may adversely affect or reduce the bond. J. Chairs and bolsters shall support the reinforcing steel closest to the formed surface. Beam stirrups and column ties shall be supported by chairs. 3.02 SPLICES A. Provide reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tying. Provide lap splice lengths as shown on the Drawings. B. Splices shall be made only as shown on the Drawings or as authorized by the Engineer. C. Threaded or other approved mechanical bar splices shall be used where shown on the Drawings and may be used elsewhere for the convenience of the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner if specifically requested of and approved by the Engineer. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Bars shall be placed to the tolerances indicated in ACI 117, END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT 032000-3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 03 30 00 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 911M u�1PTiNKLM01 A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install all cast -in -place concrete and accessories. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. 4. 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): l . C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. C94 - Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete. 5. C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic -Cement Concrete. 6. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 7. C231 - Standard Test Method for Air content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 8. C260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete 9. C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 10. C618 - Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit manufacturer's data for concrete admixtures, liquid curing material, floor joint filler, finishing compounds, and bonding agents. C. Submit concrete aggregate test reports and concrete mix designs at least 14 days prior to placement of concrete. D. Submit results of concrete strength tests. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 30 00 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ACI 301, except as modified in this Section. B. The Contractor shall hire an independent testing laboratory approved by the Engineer to perform the work listed below. All costs for this testing shall be paid by the Contractor 1. Test proposed aggregate. 2. Design concrete mixes for each type of concrete specified. 3. Cast concrete cylinders for strength tests. 4. Test concrete cylinders. C. Aggregate Tests 1. Test aggregates for compliance with ASTM C33. D. Concrete Mix Design 1. Prepare mix designs for each type of concrete specified. 2. Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 301. E. Concrete Strength Tests 1. Mold and cure three 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Any deviations from the requirements of ASTM C31 shall be recorded in the test report. 2. Alternatively, if the maximum coarse aggregate size for the concrete mix used does not exceed 1-1 /4 inches, 4 test specimens 4-inch diameter by 8-inch high may be cast. 3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two 6-inch diameter or three 4-inch diameter specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and 1 shall be tested at 7 days for information. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the specimens tested at 28 days. 4. Make at least 1 strength test for each 100 cu.yds. or fraction thereof of each mixture design of concrete placed in any 1 day. 5. A copy of the test results shall be furnished to the Engineer as soon as available. 6. All costs of concrete cylinder testing shall be paid by the Contractor. 7. Mold and field cure additional specimens as required in Section 03 10 00 for early form removal. Concrete Slump Tests 1. The Owner will determine slump of concrete from each truck in accordance with ASTM C 143, 2. If slump does not meet Specifications, remove batch from work and dispose of off Site. 3. All costs of slump testing will be paid by the Owner. G. Concrete Air Content Tests l . The Owner will determine air content of concrete from each truck in accordance with ASTM C231. 2. If air content does not meet Specifications, remove batch from work and dispose of off Site. 3. Air content will be tested prior to and after adding superplasticizer. 4. All costs of air content testing will be paid by the Owner. H. Concrete Temperature 1. The Owner will determine temperature of concrete from each truck. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 30 00 - 2 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not store forms, shores, reinforcing, equipment, or other material on finished slab surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I. Provide cement from 1 source of supply. B. Aggregate: Conform to ASTM C33. Provide aggregate from 1 source of supply. C. Water: Clean potable and free from deleterious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, or other foreign matter. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. B. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A. C. High Range Water -Reducing Admixtures (Superplasticizer): Conform to ASTM C494, Type F and contain no chlorides. D. Fly Ash: Conform to ASTM C618, Class C or F. Loss on ignition shall be limited to 3-percent maximum. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Burlap -Polyethylene Sheet: Burlap polyethylene sheeting shall consist of burlap weighing not less than 10 oz./linear yard, 40-inches wide impregnated on 1 side with white opaque polyethylene 0.006 inch thick. Sheeting shall conform to ASTM C171. B. Liquid Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1-D, Class B clear or translucent with fugitive dye. Not to be applied to floor slabs. C. Expansion Joint Material: Closed cell polyethylene foam type conforming to ASTM D1751. D. Interior Joint Filler: 1-part, self -leveling, polymer reinforced joint filler, Everjoint manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., or approved equal. E. Exterior Joint Sealant: 1-part, self -leveling, polyurethane sealant, Sonolastic SL1 manufactured by Sonneborn, or approved equal. Color: Limestone. F. Adhesive Anchor: Adhesive for anchoring steel reinforcement dowels and threaded rods in concrete shall be a 2-component injected epoxy structural adhesive. Approved products include Hilti RE-500 V3 Adhesive as manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems, Epoxy -Tie Adhesive as manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie, or Epogel as manufactured by Sonneborn. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 L. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 033000-3 2.04 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONS A. Structural Concrete: Concrete for footings and foundations: Coarse aggregate size ASTM C33 Size No. 67 Minimum compressive strength at 28 days 4,000 psi Maximum water -cement + pozzolan ratio 0.45 Minimum cement + pozzolan content 564 Ib/cu.yd. Maximum pozzolan content 25 percent of cement content Slump 4 inches ± 1 inch Entrained air content 6 percent + 1-1 /2 percent B. Structural Concrete: Concrete for walls, slab -on grade, grade beams, slabs, beams, columns, bases, pads, and all other concrete not included in Paragraph A shall conform to the following minimum requirements: Coarse aggregate size ASTM C33 Size No. 67 Minimum compressive strength at 28 days 4,000 psi Maximum water -cement + pozzolan ratio 0.42 Minimum cement + pozzolan content 564 Ib/cu.yd. Maximum pozzolan content 25 percent of cement content Slump before adding superplasticizers 2 inches ± 1 inch Slump after adding superplasticizer 6 inches ± 1 inch Entrained air content 6 percent ± 1-1 /2 percent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE PRODUCTION A. Ready -mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete which has set shall be discarded and shall not be retempered. C. Discharge concrete from truck within 60 minutes after cement is added to the mix. D. Do not add water at the Site without the permission of the Engineer. E. Add superplasticizer to the concrete at the Site. Add superplasticizer and mix concrete in accordance with manufacturer's specification. 3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior to placing concrete. B. All embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 - 4 C. Voids in sleeves, inserts and other voided embedments shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids. 3.03 PREPARATION BEFORE PLACING A. Formwork shall be completed and all reinforcement and embedded items shall be secured in place. B. All snow, ice, and mud shall be removed prior to placing concrete. C. Do not place concrete on frozen ground. D. Do not place concrete on ground with standing water or when upper 2 inches of ground is saturated. E. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow. 3.04 CONCRETE CONVEYING A. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods, which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. 3.05 CONCRETE DEPOSITING A. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. B. Place concrete at such a rate that the concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. C. Concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by hardened materials shall not be deposited. D. Remove rejected concrete from the Site. E. Deposit concrete as neatly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to handling or flowing. F. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed 5-feet. Use chutes equipped with hopper heads for placing where a drop of more than 5-feet is required. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE SLABS A. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation. B. Consolidate concrete placed in slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straight edge and then strike off. Use bullfloats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from bumps and hollows. C. Do not leave screed stakes in concrete. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 30 00 - 5 D. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to start of finishing operations. 3.07 COLD WEATHER PLACING A. Do not place concrete when the air temperature is less than 40 degrees F without the specific approval of the Engineer. B. Cold weather concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 306.1, except as modified by the requirements of these Contract Documents. C. Concrete shall not be placed against any frozen substrate, including subgrade soils and surfaces of formwork. D. Concrete shall not be placed around any embedment, including reinforcing steel that is at a temperature below freezing. E. The temperature of the concrete delivered at the Site shall conform to the following limitations: Air Temperature Above 30 degrees F 0 to 30 degrees F Below 0 degrees F Minimum Concrete Temperature < 12 Inches Thick 60 degrees F 65 degrees F 70 degrees F 12 to 36 Inches Thick 55 degrees F 60 degrees F 65 degrees F F. If water or aggregate is heated above 100 degrees F, the water shall be combined with the aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Cement shall not be mixed with water or with mixtures of water and aggregate having a temperature greater than 100 degrees F. G. When the mean daily temperature is less than 40 degrees F, the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 50 and 70 degrees F for the required curing period. H. Arrangements for heating, covering, insulation, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the reqUired temperature without injury due to concentration of cold or heat. Protection shall remain in place for a minimum of 3 days. I. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hours, unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases. J. Once the cold weather concrete protection is removed, concrete curing must be continued for the remainder of the 10-day curing period. 3.08 HOT WEATHER PLACING A. Comply with ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. B. Maintain concrete temperature cat time of placement below 90 degrees F. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 30 00 - 6 C. When the temperature of the steel is greater than 120 degrees F, steel forms and reinforcement shall be sprayed with water prior to placing concrete. D. Keep all surfaces protected from rapid drying. Provide windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering in advance of placement. 3.09 CONSOLIDATION A. Consolidate all concrete in accordance with provisions of ACI 309, B. Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing by use of internal concrete vibrators. Maintain a frequency of not less than 8,000 vibrations per minute for each internal vibrator. C. Provide adequate number of units and power source at all times. Use a minimum of 2 vibrators for all Work and maintain spare units to ensure adequacy. D. Insert the vibrator so as to penetrate the lift immediately below the 1 being placed. Do not insert the vibrator into lower courses which have begun to set. E. Spacing between insertions of the vibrator shall generally be from 12-inches to 18-inches and shall not exceed twice the radius of action as shown in ACI 309 or 18-inches. F. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms. G. Vibration shall be adequate and properly carried out to minimize entrapped air and surface voids on formed surfaces. 3.10 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHING A. Float Finish 1. Apply float finish to all slab surfaces. 2. After placing and screeding concrete slabs, do not work the surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared and when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of a power -driven float. 3. Consolidate the surface with power -driven float or by handfloating if the area is small or inaccessible to power units. 4. Check and level the surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1/4-inch in 10-feet when tested with a 10-foot straight -edge placed on the surface at not less than 2 different angles. 5. Immediately after leveling refloat the surfaces to a smooth, uniform, granular texture. Trowel Finish 1. Apply steel trowel finish to all interior floor slabs, topping, and stair treads. 2. Apply float finish to slabs as described above in Part 3.10.A. 3. After floating, begin the first trowel finish operation using a power -driven trowel. Begin final troweling when the surface produces a ringing sound as the trowel is moved over the surface. 4. Consolidate the concrete surface by the final hand troweling operation, free from trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with a surface plane tolerance not exceeding 1/8-inch in 10-feet when tested with a 10-foot straight -edge. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 30 00 - 7 C. Broom Finish 1. Apply non -slip broom finish to all exterior slabs, sidewalks and aprons. 2. Apply float to slabs as described above in Part 3.10.A. 3. Immediately after floating, slightly roughen the concrete surface by brooming in the direction perpendicular to the main traffic route. Use a fiber -bristle broom. 3.11 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth Form Finish: Provide a smooth formed surface to all formed surfaces not exposed to view, unless otherwise noted in Paragraph B. Smooth formed finish shall consist of the following: 1. Construct formwork in accordance with Section 03 10 00. 2. Patch all tie holes and defects larger than 1/8-inch in diameter and/or 1/8-inch deep. 3. Remove all fins, seams and concrete "buttons" protruding more than 1/1 6-inch. Special Form Finish: Provide a special form finish to all formed surfaces exposed to view: 1. Provide a smooth form finish in accordance wilh Paragraph 3.11.A. 2. Thoroughly clean concrete surface and remove all dirt, loose mortar particles, paint, films, protective coatings, efflorescence, and other foreign material. 3. Dampen surface with clean water just prior to application of finishing compound. 4. Mix 1-part bonding agent to 3-parts clean water for mixing liquid. 5. Mix concrete finish compound with mixing liquid as specified by the manufacturer. 6. Apply first coat to concrete with brush at 2 lbs. per square yard after the first coat has set. 7. Apply second coat to concrete with brush at 2 lbs. per square yard after the first coat has set. 8. When the second coat has set, float it to a uniform texture with a sponge float. 9. Prepare 3 test samples of various textures for approval by the Engineer. Each sample shall be approximately 6-feet by 6-feet in size and located on an unexposed wall surface as directed by the Engineer. 3.12 CURING A. Immediately after placement, all concrete shall be damp cured for a minimum of 7 days. B, All slabs shall be covered with approved burlap -polyethylene film and kept in place throughout the curing period. C. Walls, beams, columns, and other formed surfaces shall be covered with burlap - polyethylene film or sprayed with an approved curing compound. D. All burlap -polyethylene film shall be adequately anchored at the edges to prevent moisture loss. E. Rewet all slab surfaces at least once a day during the curing period. 3.13 PATCHING A. Repair honeycomb and other defective areas, fill surface voids, and fill form tie holes and similar defects in accordance with ACI 301. B. Reinforce or replace deficient work as directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 30 00 - 8 3.14 CLEAN UP AND DISPOSAL A. Upon completion and prior to any painting, all exposed or painted concrete surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all concrete spatters, form oil, or other foreign material detrimental to appearance or painting. B. All excess concrete debris remaining after completion of placement and form removal shall be removed from the Site and disposed of in a proper and legal manner. END OF SECTION CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 30 00 - 9 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 03 40 00 HOLLOW CORE PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Furnish and install structural precast concrete components and accessories. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 1. 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete. B. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. D1.1 - American Welding Code - Steel. C. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction" 2016 Edition (MnDOT Spec) 1. 3741 - Elastomeric Bearing Pads. D. Prestressed Concrete Institute "PCI Design Handbook, Precast and Prestressed Concrete" (PCI). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00, B. Shop drawings shall indicate complete information for fabrication and installation of units. Include the following: 1. Plans and elevations locating and defining all material furnished by manufacturers. 2. Sections and details showing connections, cast -in items, field installed lifting hooks, capacities, all openings greater than 10 inches in diameter, and their relation to the structure. 3. All dead, live, and other applicable loads used in the design. C. Submit design calculations for all members and connections provided. D. Submit certification report for precast concrete plank fabrication and erection. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design, fabrication, delivery, and erection of precast units shall be by an organization specializing in providing precast concrete products similar to units required for this Project- © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 HOLLOW CORE PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK 034000-1 B. Design, fabrication, delivery, and erection shall conform to ACI 318. C. Perform all welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. D. Provide report certifying that the quality assurance requirements were completed as required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1 or Type III. B. Aggregate For Concrete: ASTM C33. C. Water Used In Mixing Concrete: Clean, potable, and free from deleterious amounts of oils, acids, alkalies, or organic materials. D. Deformed Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. E. Prestressing Tendons: Uncoated, low relaxation, 7-wire strands, ASTM A416, Grade 270. F. Admixtures 1. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. 2. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494. G. Bearing Pads: Elastomeric bearing pads conforming to MnDOT Spec. 3741. H. Joint Grout: 1-part Portland cement and 3-parts clean fine sand by volume. Use minimum water for placement and hydration. 2.02 FABRICATION AND MANUFACTURE A. Fabricate precast members in plastic lined or metal forms which are true to line and plane. Form openings 10 inches or larger in diameter. B. Accurately place prestressing strands, reinforcing steel, sleeves, inserts, weld plates, anchor plates, and embedded items before concrete is placed. C. Identification: Provide permanent markings to identify pick-up points and orientation in structure, complying with markings indicated on final shop drawings. Imprint date of casting on each precast unit on a surface which will not show in finished structure. D. Provide Finishes for Precast Concrete Planks as Follows: 1. Standard Formed Finish: Normal plant run finish produced in forms that impart a smooth finish to concrete. Small surface holes caused by air bubbles, normal form joint marks, and minor chips and spalls will be tolerated, but no major or unsightly imperfections, honeycomb, or structural defects will be permitted. 2. Standard Top Finish: Normal finish as a result of vibrating screed and additional hand finishing at projections. In areas with composite topping, provide a rough broom finish. Normal color variations, minor indentations, minor chips, and spalls shall be permitted. No major imperfections, honeycomb, or defects shall be permitted. HOLLOW CORE PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 40 00 - 2 2.03 FABRICATION TOLERANCES A. Fabricate precast concrete plank to conform to PCI Design Handbook tolerances, and as follows: 1. Variation in plank length ± 1 /2 inch. 2. Variation in plank width ± 1 /4 inch. 3. Variation in plank depth + 1 /4 inch, - 1 /8 inch. 2.04 DESIGN A. Design calculations shall be prepared by a professional Engineer registered in the State of Minnesota and experienced in precast concrete design. B. Design shall be in accordance with ACI 318, C. Design members and connections for all applicable loads, including the following: 1. Initial handling and erection stresses. 2. All applied dead loads (including concrete block walls), live loads, and wind loads as specified on the Structural Drawings. 3. Applied equipment loads, such as overhead hoists and lifting hooks. D. Steel hangers shall be installed to support plank wherever holes of more than 1 /2 the width of the plank are cut. Hangers shall be shop painted in accordance with Section 09 91 00. E. Live load deflections shall not exceed 1 /360th of the span. 2.05 FIRE RATING A. All precast members and connections shall have a 1-hour fire rating, unless otherwise specified. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRANSPORTATION A. Transport precast units by rail or truck in a manner to avoid excessive stress or strain on units. B. Support units during hauling and stockpiling with sufficient hardwood shores to prevent cracking and spalling. Secure units in place to prevent shifting or undesired movements. Location of temporary supports shall be as directed by precast manufacturer. 3.02 ERECTION A. Provide proper bearing surfaces to receive the precast units. B. Handle precast units with inserts or other devices which permit units to be lifted without incurring cracking or spalling. C. Remove lifting hooks and handling inserts after placement. D. Grout joints between planks as follows: 1. Seal underside of plank joints to prevent grout leakage. HOLLOW CORE PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 40 00 - 3 2. Fill grout keys full and strike flush with top surface. 3. Remove grout that seeps through to ceiling below before grout hardens. 4. Strike back grout 1 /2 inch on the underside of the plank for caulking. E. Paint all exposed weld plates and welds with zinc chromate type rust inhibitive primer. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Erect precast concrete plank to conform to PCI Design Handbook tolerances, except as follows: 1. Variation in joint width ± 1 /4 inch. 2. Maximum difference between bottom surfaces of adjacent plank 1 /4 inch. END OF SECTION HOLLOW CORE PRECAST CONCRETE PLANK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 40 00 - 4 SECTION 03 45 00 ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all precast concrete window sill units. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit shop drawings showing product dimensions and connection details. C. Submit two 12-inch by 12-inch samples of each type of finish required showing proposed color and finish for units. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cement: ASTM C150, Type 1, white color. Provide cement from 1 source of supply. B. Aggregate: ASTM C33, 3/8-inch maximum size, white colored. Provide aggregate from 1 source of supply. C. Water: Clean, potable, and free from deleterious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, or other foreign matter. D. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. E. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. F. Fly Ash: ASTM A618. G. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60. H. Cast -In Anchors: Stainless steel, ASTM A276, Type 304. I. Color: Concrete pigment as approved by Architect. ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 45 00 - 1 2.02 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONS A. Concrete used for windowsills shall conform to the following minimum requirements: 1. Minimum compressive strength at 28 days 400 psi. 2. Entrained air content 6 percent ± 1-1 /2 percent. 2.03 FABRICATION OF PRECAST CONCRETE UNITS A. Fabricate units to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings. B. Accurately place reinforcing units, inserts, anchor plates, and embedded items before concrete is placed. C. Finishes: 1. Provide smooth cast finish using smooth, non -porous molds. D. Color/Finish: Match Stoneworks Indiana Limestone #2477, light sand blast. E. Cure precast units until 2,000 psi minimum compressive strength has developed before removing the units from the forms, unless greater strength is required for stripping. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING A. Transport units in a manner to avoid excessive stress and prevent cracking or chipping of units. B. Support units during handling and stockpiling with sufficient hardwood shores to prevent cracking and spalling. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install any units that are cracked or chipped. B. Installation of units is included under Section 04 22 00. END OF SECTION ARCHITECTURAL PRECAST CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 03 45 00 - 2 SECTION 03 60 00 GROUT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section covers sand -cement grout, non -shrink nonmetallic grout, epoxy grout, epoxy bonding agent and applications. Grouting is required for the following, but is not necessarily limited to the items listed. 1. Column baseplates. 2. Motor control center bases. 3. Other miscellaneous baseplates. 4. Anchor bolts. 5. Reinforcing bars in existing hardened concrete. 6. Other grout uses as shown or called for on Drawings. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 2. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit complete Shop Drawings on premixed grout products in accordance with Section 01 33 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS A. Grout, Sand -Cement: 2 inches or more in thickness 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type IIA. 2. Fine aggregate: ASTM C33, clean, well -graded natural sand. 3. Coarse aggregate: ASTM C33, 90 percent passing 1 /2 inch sieve, 90 percent retained on a No. 3 sieve. 4. Ratio of fine and coarse aggregate: 50 percent of each by volume. 5. Water: clean and free from deleterious substances. B. Grout, Sand -Cement: less than 2 inches in thickness 1. Portland cement: ASTM C150, Type IIA. 2. Fine aggregate: ASTM C33, clean, well -graded natural sand. 3. Water: clean and free from deleterious substances. C. Grout, Nonshrink-Non metallic 1. Compounds must conform to CRD-C-621. 2. Furnish products factory premixed and requiring only the addition of water. 3. Master Builders, "Masterflow 713 Grout". 4. Sika Corp., Sikagrout 212. GROUT © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 03 60 00-1 5. L&M Construction Chemicals "Crystex". 6. Sonneborn-Contech, "Sonogrout. 7. Water: clean and free from deleterious substances. D. Epoxy Grout 1. Sika Chemical Corporation, Sikadur 32, HiMod. 2. The Euclid Chemical Company, designed specifically for this purpose. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals "Epogrout". E. Adhesive Anchor 1. Hilti RE-500 V3. 2. Simpson SET -HP. 3, Sika AnchorFix-3001 . F. Epoxy Bonding Agent 1. Sika Chemical Corporation, Sikadur 32; Hi -Mod. 2. The Euclid Chemical Company, designed specifically for this purpose. 3. L&M Construction Chemicals "Epobond". PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Grout, Sand -Cement: 2 inches or more in thickness 1. Mix: One part Portland cement, 2 1 /2 parts of aggregate (50 percent fine and 50 percent coarse) by volume, with sufficient water for placement and hydration. 2. Mix grout in a mechanical mixer. 3. Use as little water as possible for steep grout fillets. 4. Saturate concrete to receive grout with clean water for 24 hours prior to grouting. Grout, Sand -Cement: less than 2 inches in thickness 1. Mix: One part Portland cement, 2 1 /2 parts of fine aggregate by volume, with sufficient water for placement and hydration. 2. Mix grout in a mechanical mixer. 3. Use no more water than is necessary to produce a flowable grout. 4. Saturate concrete to receive grout with clean water for 24 hours prior to grouting. C. Grout, Nonshrink-Nonmetallic 1. Mix and place in strict accordance with directions and instructions of manufacturer. 2. Fill spaces and cavities below top of baseplates, bedplates, column baseplates, and other areas requiring grouting. 3. Leave no voids. 4. Provide forms where structural components of baseplates or bedplates will not confine grout. D. Grout, Epoxy and Bonding Agent, Epoxy. 1. Mix and place in strict accordance with recommendations and instructions of manufacturer. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 GROUT 03 60 00-2 3.02 APPLICATIONS A. Where type of grout is not designated on Drawings, the following schedule will apply. l . Grout, Sand -Cement as listed in 2.01.A or 2.01.13. a. Openings in cast -in place or precast concrete sections when short cast -in - place walls or curbs are constructed around openings. b. Similar fillets before, after or within certain equipment pieces. c. Motor control center bases if not poured prior to motor control centers being in final position. d. Other grout locations called for on Drawings and where nonshrink-nonmetallic or epoxy grout is not necessary. 2. Grout, Nonshrink-Nonmetallic. a. Equipment baseplates, pedestals or bedplates. b. Anchor bolts. c. Patching of spalled concrete, floors and walls. d. Pipe penetrations. e. Column baseplates. B. Other items or areas requiring nonshrink, nonmetallic grout. 1. Grout, Epoxy a. Use when setting reinforcing rods into existing hardened concrete. 2. Bonding Agent, Epoxy. a. Use when pouring fresh concrete against existing hardened concrete. 3.03 FINISHING AND CURING A. Edge Finishing 3. Finish smooth edges exposed to view after grout has reached initial set. 4. Cut edges flush at baseplate, bedplate, or piece of equipment, except where shown to be finished on a slope. C. Curing 1. Protect against rapid loss of moisture by covering with rags kept wet or polyethylene sheets. 2. Wet cure for at least 7 days after edge finishing is completed. 3. Coat with manufacturer recommended curing agent. D. Follow manufacturer's recommendations where applicable. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 GROUT 03 60 00-3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 04 05 13 MORTAR PART 1 GENERAL I1R1 uu�:l A. Work under this Section includes mortar for unit masonry. B. Mortar Is Installed Under: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference: 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): a. C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar. b. C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement. c. C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes. d. C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 1.04 TESTING AGENCY A. Employ the service of an independent testing laboratory approved by the Architect or Engineer for testing of mortar specified herein. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit information copies in duplicate of all test reports to the Architect, Owner, Local Building Official, and SER. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type 1 or Type 2. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce required mortar color. B. Masonry Cement: Not allowed. C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S. D. Aggregates: ASTM C144. MORTAR © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 05 13 - 1 Water shall be clean, potable, and fee of deleterious amounts of acids, alkalis, or organic materials. Colored Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes. 1. Use only pigments with record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortars. 2. Colors: a. At Architectural Precast Concrete: As approved by the Architect. b. At Face Brick: As approved by the Architect. c. At Concrete Unit Masonry: As approved by the Architect. d. At Manufactured Masonry Units: As approved by the Architect. 3. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Centurion: Centurion Pigments. b. Rockwood Industries, Davis Colors: True Tone Mortar Colors. c. Solomon Grind -Chem Services, Inc.: SGS Mortar Colors. d. Prism Pigments: Mortar Colors. e. Or approved equal. 2.02 MEASURING AND MIXING A. The method of measuring materials for the mortar used shall be by their volume or weight, and such that the specified proportions of the mortar can be controlled and accurately maintained. Measurement of sand by shovel shall not be permitted. B. Cementitious material and aggregate shall be mixed for at least 3 minutes and not more than 5 minutes in a mechanical batch mixer with the maximum amount of water to produce a workable consistency. C. Mix mortar as required for immediate use only and discard any mixed for a period exceeding 2-1/2 hours. Mortar may be re -tempered as required to restore proper consistency. D. Mortar Proportions by Volume Parts by Volume of Parts by Volume of Aggregate Measured in a Type Portland Cement Hydrated Lime Damp, Loose Condition M 1 1 /4 Not less than 2-1/4 times and not more than 3 times S 1 Over 1 /4 to 1 /2 the sum of the volumes of IN 1 Over 1 /2 to 1-1 /4 cement and lime used E. Putty made from 92-percent hydrated lime may be used immediately after mixing. MORTAR © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0405 13 - 2 2.03 MORTAR PROPERTIES A. Mortar shall conform to the property specifications of ASTM C270 and the following: 1. Compressive Strength: The average compressive strength of three 2-inch cubes of mortar shall not be less than the strength given in the following table for the mortar type specified: Mortar Type Average Compressive Strength at 28 Days (psi) M 2,500 S 1,800 N 750 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 REFERENCE MASONRY A. Reference Unit Masonry Sections for mortar types, color, installation and protection requirements. END OF SECTION MORTAR © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 05 13 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 04 05 19 MASONRY ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Accessories related to masonry work as specified herein. 2. Masonry accessories are installed under Sections: a. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Shall be manufacturers' printed data sheets on each product and application. C. Shop Drawings: Provide graphic details of layout and installation. D. Samples: Provide samples upon request. E. Manufacturers' installation instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturers' original sealed packaging. B. Store products away from direct sunlight, heat sources, and open flame. Replace damaged material before start of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCEMENT, ANCHORS AND TIES A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Reinforcement, Anchors, and Ties: l . AA Wire Products Company. 2. Dur-O-WaI, a Hohmann & Barnard Company. 3. Heckman Building Products, Inc. 4. Masonry Reinforcing Corporation of America. 5. National Ty-WaI Masonry Products, Subsidiary of National Wire Products Industries, Inc. 6. Or approved equal. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MASONRY ACCESSORIES 04 05 19- 1 B. Deformed Reinforcing Bars for Wall Reinforcing: Provide under this Section to comply with requirements specified under Section 03 20 00. C. Horizontal Reinforcement for Single Wythe Concrete Masonry Unit Walls: Ladder -type reinforcing with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches on center, complete with prefabricated corners and tees. 1. Wire Type and Gauge a. Side Rods: Smooth No. 9 cross wires. b. Cross Rods: Smooth No. 9 cross wires. 2. Size: Width to position side wires over masonry unit face shells. 3. Finish a. At interior walls use hot -dipped galvanized, ASTM Al 53, Class B-2, 1.50 ounce per square foot zinc coating. 4. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product a. Dur-O-WaI, a Hohmann & Barnard Company: DA3200 Single Wythe Ladur. b. Comparable product of other specified manufacturers. D. Horizontal Reinforcing for Cavity Walls with Concrete Masonry Unit Back -Up: Ladder -type reinforcing with perpendicular cross rods spaced not more than 16 inches on center with eye and adjustable pintle design, complete with prefabricated corners and tees. 1. Wire type and gauge: a. Side Rods: Standard 9 gauge. b. Cross Rods: Standard 9 gauge. 2. Size: Width to position side wires over masonry unit face shells. 3. Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized, ASTM Al 53, Class B-2, 1.50 ounce per square foot zinc coating. 4. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. Dur-O-WaI, a Hohmann & Barnard Company: DA3600 Ladur-Eye. b. Comparable product from other specified manufacturers. Wire Mesh Ties: 1/2-inch square mesh of 16-gauge steel wire, 3-inch wide strip by length as indicated or required to provide not less than 2 inches of embedment in mortar joint. l . Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized, ASTM Al 53, Class B-2, 1.50 ounce per square foot zinc coating. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Product: a. AA Wire Products Company: AA216. b. Dur-O-WaI, a Hohmann & Barnard Company: DA960 - Wire Mesh Ties and Rolls. c. Comparable product of other specified manufacturers. F. Expansion Ties at Concrete, Concrete Block, or Steel: Adjustable tie. 1. Finish: Hot -dipped galvanized, ASTM Al 53, Class B-2, 1.50 ounce per square foot zinc coating. 2. Acceptable manufacturer and product: a. Dur-O-WaI, a Hohmann & Barnard Company: DA2200 Joint Stabilizing Anchor. b. Comparable product of other specified manufacturers. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Backer Rods and Sealants: Provided. B. Control Joint: As per detail. MASONRY ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0405 19- 2 C. Horizontal Joint Grout Barrier: 1. Corrosion proof and biologically inert grout barrier which maintains positive bond in mortar joint. 2. Acceptable manufacturer and product: a. Dur-O-Wal, a Hohmann & Barnard Company: DA1018 Dur-O-Stop. b. Comparable product of other specified manufacturer. 2.03 GROUTS AND CONCRETE FILL A. Grout: ASTM C476, except masonry cement not permitted for vertically reinforced masonry. Compressive strength 3,000 pounds per square inch in 28 days, unless otherwise indicated. Not less than 9-inch slump at mixing and not more than 10-inch slump at placement. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ACCESSORIES IN MASONRY A. Wall Reinforcing: Insert wall reinforcing at courses specified in Section 04 22 00. Overlap reinforcing 6 inches, install prefabricated corner reinforcing, and extend into intersecting walls. Bend and overlap wires at wall ends, vertical control joints, or jambs. 3.02 CONTROL JOINTS A. Control Joints: Provide constant width joint as detailed. B. Interrupt wall reinforcing at control joints. 3.03 ANCHORAGE OF INTERSECTING WALLS OR PARTITIONS A. Partitions Intersecting Bearing Walls and Exterior Walls: Use expansion ties every second course as detailed. B. Partition intersection, other than that noted in Paragraph A, use pre -fabricated corners or tees. END OF SECTION MASONRY ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 05 19- 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 04 05 31 CAVITY WALL FLASHING/DRAINAGE SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. An all-inclusive flashing/drainage system. Section includes Flashing, Cavity Wall Drainage, Drip Edge, Termination Bar and Weeps. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Industry Standards: 1. ASTM. 2. BIA. 3. MCAA. 4. BIA Tech Note: Brick Construction - #7 Water Penetration Resistance - Design and Detail. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Terms: 1. Cavity Wall Flashing. 2. Foundation Sill Flashing. 3. Through Wall Flashing. 4. Termination Bar. 5. Adhesive/Sealant for Flashing. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Provide in accordance with Section 01 33 00. 1. Product data and installation instructions. 2. 2 sections demonstrating lap joint: Each 18-inch by 14-inch (457 mm by 356 mm) . 3. Adhered flashing samples available. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Mortar Net Solutions, 326 Melton Road, Burns Harbor, IN 46304, Ph: 800-664-6638, www.morfarnet.com. (Standard of quality). B. Or Approved Equal. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CAVITY WALL FLASHING/DRAINAGE SYSTEM 04 05 31 -1 2.02 PRODUCTS A. Mortar Net's "TotalFlash" system. Provide custom configurations for headers and door openings. TotalFlash system consists of: 45-mil membrane of EPDM rubber (ethylene propylene diene monomer rubber; recycled polyester 1/4-inch x 10-inch Mortar Net Solutions drainage mat; and 28-gauge 304 stainless steel drip edge; high strength corrosion and UV resistant plastic termination bar; and integral no -clog weep tabs. Self -tapping grommeted hex head screws are # 14 x 2-inch for metal or wood stud, cast in place concrete or concrete masonry units. 1. TotalFlash System: a. Panel Sizes: The TotalFlash system is available in the following anei sizes: 12-inch by 5-1/2 feet 18-inch by 5-1 /2 feet 24-inch by 5-1/2 feet (305 mm by 1,676 mm) (457 mm by 1,676 (610 mm by 1,676 mm) mm 2. Mortar Collection Device/Weep Tabs: a. Recycled polyester material impregnated with UV protection, biocide to resist mold and flame retardant. Woven mesh designed to allow moisture to migrate to the integrated weep tabs; product adhered to the Hyload Flashing. 1) Thickness: 1/4-inch (6.35 mm). 2) Height: 10-inch (254 mm). 3) Length: 5 feet (1,524 mm). 3. Drip Edge: a. 304 Stainless Steel Drip Edge pre -attached to the Hyload Flashing and designed to divert moisture away from the masonry wall. 1) 28 gauge (0.014) 304 Stainless Steel with formed drip edge. 2) Length: 5 feet (1,524 mm). 3) Width: 3.0-inch (76 mm). 4. Adhesive: a. Provided with system for lapping TotalFlash sections: 1) Multi-Purpose/Structural Sealant/No Slump/Moisture Cure (Exceeds ASTM C920-94). 2) NO VOC. 3) 1 part. 4) 10.3-ounce tubes. 5. Termination Bar: a. Pre -attached termination bar is designed to fasten flashing system to the substrate. 1) Termination bar manufactured from high -strength corrosion resistance plastic with pre -drilled holes for attachment. 2) Length: 5 feet (1,524 mm). 3) Hole spacing: 6 inches (152 mm). 6. Screws: a. Provided self -tapping hex head screws designed to allow attachment to Masonry, Concrete, Wood or Steel Stud. 1) # 14 by 2 inches. 2) Quantity per box 100 (10 screws per 5 foot section). CAVITY WALL FLASHING/DRAINAGE SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 05 31 -2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install Flashing/Drainage System in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install system as required by detailed Project Drawings for cavity wall drainage. END OF SECTION CAVITY WALL FLASHING/DRAINAGE SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 05 31 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 04 21 13 BRICK MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the complete erection of the face brick and related materials in accordance with the Drawings and these Specifications. 2. Complete masonry work as shown and detailed on the Drawings and otherwise as required, including but not limited to the following: a. Mortar materials. b. Brick and other masonry unit materials. c. Masonry reinforcing materials. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 45 00 - Architectural Precast Concrete. 2. Section 04 05 13 - Mortar. 3. Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Accessories. 4. Section 04 05 31 - Cavity Wall Flashing/Drainage System. 5. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units. 6. Section 04 71 16 - Manufactured Masonry Units. 7. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 8. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. C216 - Standard Specification for Facing Brick. 2. C652 - Specification for Hollow Brick. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 33 00, B. Test Reports: Submit test reports in duplicate indicating compliance with applicable Specifications for compressive strength, absorption, weight, moisture content, and dimensions for each type of clay masonry unit. C. Samples: 5 samples of each type of clay masonry units showing extreme variations in color and texture shall be furnished to the Architect for approval prior to delivery and installation. BRICK MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0421 13 - 1 1.05 HANDLING, DELIVERY, AND STORAGE A. Handle, transport, and store at the Site in a manner that will avoid damage. B. Clay masonry units shall be protected from wetting prior to use. The units shall be cubed on pallets at the time of manufacture and shall be delivered to the Site with waterproof coverings. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that the units remain covered on the Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FACE BRICK A. Clay masonry units shall be of modular dimensions and shall conform to the ASTM C652, Grade SW, Type FBS. Variations in color and texture shall not exceed those of samples approved. 1. Brick Sizes and Colors: a. FBR-1: Brick shall be utility (3-5/8 inch by 3-5/8 inch by 11-5/8 inch). 1) Acceptable Manufacturers: a) Acme -Ochs Brick and Stone. b) Minnesota Brick and Tile. c) Metro Brick, Inc. d) Tiger Stone & Brick LLC. e) Or approved equal. 2) Color: Monterey L-4 Matte (50 percent M-60 Velour, 50 percent M-30 Velour) as manufactured by Interstate Brick. Other acceptable suppliers must submit samples for approval prior to bid due date. 2. Brick shall berated as "no efflorescence" when tested in accordance with ASTM C67. 2.02 MORTAR A. Mortar proportioning and mixing is specified in Section 04 05 13. B. Tempering: The consislency of rnortar may be adjusted to the satisfaction of the mason. 1. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. C. Lay masonry in mortar of the type specified below, unless otherwise noted: Kind of Masonry Masonry I yge Load -bearing masonry in contact with the ground M Load -bearing construction and exterior single-wythe masonry S Exterior veneer masonry (Brick, stone, etc.) S Masonry other than above N D. Mortar Color: As selected by the Architect. 2.03 GRAFFITI CONTROL A. Clear, water -based Defacer Eraser Sacrificial Coating SC-1 as manufactured by PROSOCO, Inc., or equal. Product shall conform to all limiting regulations for Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC's). Surface preparation and application shall conform to manufacturer's instructions. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 BRICK MASONRY 0421 13-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 LAYING BRICK A. Install brick unit masonry to comply with BIA recommendations as modified herein: l . Install units plumb, true to line, and with level courses. 2. Install face brick with full mortar joints at end, bed, and head joints with 3/8-inch thick mortar joints, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Make masonry courses uniform in height. 4. Make vertical and horizontal joints of equal thickness. 5. Do not install cracked, broken, or chipped bricks. 6. Verify the steel relief angles are in place where indicated on the Drawings. Installation of Brick Ties: l . Anchor face veneer to backup system using individual ties as follows: a. Maximum Horizontal Spacing: 24 inches on center. b. Maximum Vertical Spacing: 16 inches on center. c. Provide not less than 1 tie for each 2 square feet of wall area. d. Space ties not more than 4 inches from end of panel, edge of opening, or other joints. C. Mortar Joints in Brick: Tool joints when mortar is thumb -print hard using jointing tools of proper shape and size. 1. Tool joints to a smooth, dense, concave surface. 2. At Concealed Locations: Flush cut joints, unless otherwise indicated. D. Bond Pattern for Brick: Lay brickwork in 1 /3 running bond, unless otherwise indicated. E. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint widths and for accurate locating of openings, movement type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid use of less than half sized units at corners, jambs, and where possible elsewhere. 1. Provide cuts on exposed masonry units which are straight and true. 2. Use special shapes and fractional units to keep cuts to a minimum. 3. Cut masonry units to fit neatly around conduit or piping, outlet boxes, and similar items. 4. Fully bond external and internal corners and intersections, unless otherwise detailed. 5. Install face brick from exposed side. Do not shift or tap masonry after mortar has taken initial set. Where adjustment must be made, remove mortar and install fresh mortar. 1. Rock closures into place with head joints thrown against 2 adjacent bricks in place. Do not pound corners or jambs to fit stretcher units after setting in place. Where adjustments to corners or jambs must be made after mortar has started to set, remove mortar and install fresh mortar. G. Keep face of brick clean and free of mortar droppings and smears. H. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop horizontal runs by racking back in each course; toothing is not permitted. When joining fresh masonry to set or partially set masonry, remove loose units and remove mortar interfering with fresh mortar bed. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 BRICK MASONRY 0421 13-3 3.02 CAVITY WALL CONSTRUCTION A. Anchors shall be placed not greater than 24 inches on center horizontally and not greater than 16 inches on center vertically. B. Provide additional ties spaced 16 inches on center around all openings. C. Provide through -wall flashing and cavity weep system at the bottom of all cavity walls, above all windows, doors and openings, and under all window sills, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified in Section 04 05 31. D. At Cavity Wall Construction: Lay brick from exposed side with concave joints as described in BIA Technical Note No. 21. E. Keep cavity clean as described in BIA Technical Note No. 21 C. 3.03 CONTROL JOINTS A. Install vertical control joints at locations indicated, but not less than specified below. Do not form a continuous span through movement joints, unless provisions are made to prevent in -place restraint of wall or partition movement. 1. Within 5 feet of each corner. 2. At mass changes in elevation. 3. Not over 16 feet on center. 4. Verify control joint locations with Architect. B. Do not bridge control joints in masonry work with horizontal reinforcing or mortar. C. Control joints shall be 3/8 inch wide with 1 /2 inch expanded polystyrene foam backer rod and caulk color to match brick. 3.04 TOOLING, CLEANING, POINTING A. Tool joints in covered brick and brick below grade. B. Tool joints in exposed interior and exterior face brick. 1. Unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings, all exposed brick joints shall have concave joints made by tooling with a round jointer, slightly larger than the width of joint for weather tightness and appearance. C. After mortar has cured thoroughly, clean exposed masonry. If stiff brushes and water do not suffice, clean masonry with cleaning materials and methods approved by the masonry manufacturer. Cleaning shall not result in discoloration of masonry. D. At completion of work, point holes or defective mortar joints, and where necessary, cut out and re -point defective joints. 3.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection of Work: 1. Wall Covering: a. During erection cover top of wall with strong non -staining waterproof membrane at end of each day or shutdown. BRICK MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0421 13 - 4 b. Cover partially completed walls when work is not in progress. c. Extend cover minimum of 24 inches down both sides. d. Hold cover securely in place. B. Staining: 1. Prevent grout or mortar from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. a. Remove immediately grout or mortar in contact with face of such masonry. b. Protect all sills, ledges, and projections from droppings of mortar, protect door jambs and corners from damage during construction. C. Cold Weather Protection: 1. Preparation: a. If ice or snow has formed on masonry bed, remove by carefully applying heat until top surface is dry to the touch. b. Remove all masonry deemed frozen or damaged. 2. Products: a. When brick suction exceeds recommendations of Article 1.3.A of this Section, sprinkle with heated water. 1) When units are above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 70 degrees F (21 degrees C). 2) When units are below 32 degrees F (0 degrees C), heat water above 130 degrees F (54 degrees C). b. Use dry masonry units. c. Do not use wet or frozen units. 3. Construction requirements while work is progressing: a. Air temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F, (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). b. Air temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain temperatures of mortar on boards above freezing. c. Air temperature 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C): 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 2) Maintain temperatures of mortar on boards above freezing. 3) Use salamanders or other heat sources on both sides of walls under construction. 4) Use windbreaks when wind is in excess of 15 mph. d. Air temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Heat sand or mixing water to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) and 120 degrees F (49 degrees C). 2) Provide enclosures and auxiliary heat to maintain air temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C). 3) Minimum temperature of units when laid: 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C). 4. Protection requirements for completed masonry and masonry not being worked on: a. Mean daily temperature 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) to 32 degrees F (0 degrees C): 1) Protect masonry from rain or snow for 24 hours by covering with weather - resistive membrane. b. Mean daily temperature 32 degrees F (0 degrees C) to 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C): © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 BRICK MASONRY 0421 13-5 1) Completely cover masonry with weather -resistive membrane. c. Mean daily temperature 25 degrees F (-4 degrees C) to 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C): 1) Completely cover masonry with insulating blankets or equal protection for 24 hours. d. Mean daily temperature 20 degrees F (-7 degrees C) and below: 1) Maintain masonry temperature above 32 degrees F (0 degrees C.) for 24 hours by: a) Enclosure and supplementary heat. b) Other approved methods. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests: Provide field quality control tests and inspections to comply with Section 01 40 00: 1. Initial Rate of Absorption Test: Verify initial absorption rate of brick is within acceptable limits. If excessive, reduce initial absorption rate of face brick with 0.025 ounce per squrare irich per rninule by thoroughly wetting bricks with clean water 24 hours before installing. 2. Bond Strength Field Testing: Tests of bond strength to comply with ASTM C1072 between mortar and face brick for exterior walls at various times during progress of work. Construct 1 set of two 7-brick prisms for every 10,000 brick laid. Test prisms at 7 days and 28 days. B. Random Field Brick Test: After first major delivery is made to the Site, Architect shall randomly select 6 samples of each type for testing. 1. Test to comply with ASTM C216 or C652 and previously submitted data. 2. Random field brick test is provided under Section 01 40 00. 3. If brick fails to comply with requirements above, manufacturer/supplier shall pay all costs involved with replacement of brick already shipped. Retesting as directed by the Architect. 3.07 GRAFFITI CONTROL APPLICATION A. Apply graffiti control to all exposed masonry surfaces. Test application on mock-up and review results with Architect before applying to building. 3.08 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Provide to the City for replacement or repair stock a minimum of 100 brick units covering the full color range of the approved blends. END OF SECTION BRICK MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0421 13 - 6 SECTION 04 22 00 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work under this Section includes providing labor, materials, and equipment necessary for the complete erection of the concrete block and related materials in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. Complete masonry Work as shown and detailed on the Drawings and otherwise as required, including but not limited to the following: l . Mortar materials. 2. Block and other masonry unit materials. 3. Masonry reinforcing materials. 4. Miscellaneous bond beams and lintels. 5. Grout for reinforced masonry walls. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 45 00 - Architectural Precast Concrete. 2. Section 04 05 13 - Mortar. 3. Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Accessories. 4. Section 04 05 31 - Cavity Wall Flashing/Drainage System. 5. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 6. Section 04 71 16 - Manufactured Masonry Units. 7. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 8. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The following specifications and standards are incorporated by reference: 1. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): a. C33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. b. C90 Standard Specification for Load -bearing Concrete Masonry Units. c. C140 Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units. d. C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry. e. C1314 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry Prisms. f. ACI 530.1 Specification for Masonry Structures © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 M CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 04 22 00 - 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Masonry Unit Test: 1. Compressive strength of masonry shall meet requirements of Unit Strength Method in ACI 530.1. 2. Unit Strength Method shall be default test requirement for masonry compressive strength unless otherwise requested by SEOR. Prism Testing of Concrete Masonry Units (If requested by SEOR): 1. Test 3 concrete blocks of each type used in construction prior to starting masonry construction. 2. Test concrete block for conformance to ASTM C90 in accordance with testing methods outlined in ASTM C140 and C426. 3. No masonry construction will be allowed until CMU testing has been completed and accepted by SEOR. 4. All costs of testing shall be paid by the Contractor. C. Testing of Concrete Block Prisms: 1. Construct and test masonry prisms in accordance with ASTM C1314. 2. Construct and test concrete block prisms as defined in 1.04.A.1 prior to masonry construction. All prisms shall be ungrouted. 3. Each prism shall consist of a minimum of 2 concrete masonry units laid in stack bond with full mortar beds. Units shall be representative of the units to be used in the construction and be either 8 inches or 12 inches wide by 16-inches long by 8 inches high. 4. The acceptance test result shall be the average of each set of prisms tested 28 days after construction. 5. Masonry prisms shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of 2,000 psi. 6. Contractor shall construct masonry prisms in the field, and store them undisturbed for 48 to 96 hours in a moisture -tight bag above 50 degrees F. The prisms shall then be transported undisturbed to the laboratory. 7. No masonry construction will be allowed until concrete block prism testing has been completed and accepted by SEOR. 8. All costs of preconstruction testing shall be paid by the Contractor. 9. If prism tests fail to meet specified strength requirements, Contractor shall cut prisms from the finished masonry as directed by the Engineer. If prism tests fail to meet structural requirements, promptly remove and replace or reinforce as directed by the Engineer. Testing and remedial work shall be at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports: Submit test reports in electronic pdf format indicating compliance with applicable Specifications for compressive strength, absorption, weight, moisture content, and dimensions for each type of masonry unit. B. Prisms: Submit masonry prism test results in conformance with Section 01 40 00. C. Water Proofers and Highlighting Sealers: Furnished and installed as specified in Section 0991 00. D. Block Certificates: Submit manufacturer's Block Certificates as required for each type and size of block used on the Project. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 22 00 - 2 1.06 HANDLING, DELIVERY, AND STORAGE A. Handle, transport, and store at the Site in a manner that will avoid damage. B. Concrete masonry units shall be protected from wetting prior to use. The units shall be cubed on pallets at the time of manufacture and shall be delivered to the Site with waterproof coverings. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to see that the units remain covered on the Project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MASONRY UNITS A. Concrete masonry units shall be of modular dimensions; shall conform to the ASTM Specifications, and the modifying and additional requirements as indicated below: 1. Hollow Load Bearing Units: C90. 2. Minimum compressive strength of 2,000 psi. 3. Unless otherwise noted, all units shall be normal weight aggregate (ASTM C33). 4. Bullnose block units shall be furnished and installed at jambs and where indicated on the Drawings. 5. All CMU shall be Open Core ("H" block) style units. Special Units: 1. Standard Concrete Block (CMU): Shall be 8 inches high, normal weight, and conforming to the requirements specified above. Provide bullnose edges at all outside corners. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Amcon Block and Precast, Inc. 2) Anchor Block Company. 3) County Materials Corporation. 4) Or approved equal. C. Burnished Concrete Block (CMU-1): Face size shall be 8-inches high by 16-inches wide, normal weight and conforming to the requirements specified above. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Amcon Block and Precast, Inc. b. Anchor Block Company. c. County Materials Corporation. d. Or approved equal. 2. Colors: Colors as selected by Architect from manufacturers' full range of colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MORTAR A. Mortar proportioning and mixing is specified in Section 04 05 13, B. Tempering: The consistency of mortar may be adjusted to the satisfaction of the mason 1. Use mortar within 2-1/2 hours after mixing. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 iW CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200-3 C. Lay masonry in mortar of the type specified below, unless otherwise noted: Kind of Masonry Masonry Type Load -bearing masonry in contact with the ground M Load -bearing construction and exterior single-wythe S masonry Exterior veneer masonry (Brick, stone, etc.) N Masonry other than above N D. Mortar Color: As selected by the Architect. 3.02 LAYING UNIT MASONRY A. Lay masonry in straight, uniform courses, plumb and true to line and plane, unless otherwise specified or indicated on the Drawings: 1. Use face shell bedding with full coverage of face shells of hollow units, full bed for solid units. Build in property anchors, ties, plates, beams, lintels, flashings, inserts, etc. which come in contact with masonry work: 1. Consult other trades in advance and make provisions for installation of their work in order to build in Work specified under other Sections of these Specifications as the Work progresses. 2. No cutting or drilling shall be done without the permission and instruction of the General Contractor. C. Reinforce concrete block masonry work with wall reinforcing, starting at second course at every second course in bearing walls and every second course in non -bearing walls: 1. Bond facing units to backing with reinforcing and metal ties as specified. 2. Corners and ends shall be formed by cutting and bending to fit by use of prefabricated corner units. Place reinforcing in the first and second bed joints abovc and below opening or recesses where possible. 3. Terminate reinforcing on each side of control joints. D. Fill Solid with Concrete or Grout: 1. The entire core under bearing plates. 2. Top course of bearing walls and around openings as shown on Drawings. E. Masonry units shall be cut with saws and shall be free from broken or chipped corners. Shells and cross webs of hollow masonry units shall be loaded with mortar. Units shall be shoved in place so that joints are completely filled without pointing. Facing material shall be free from mortar smears. F. Wetting of concrete units before laying is not permitted. G. Construct bond beams as detailed. H. Pattern: CMU courses shall be laid in running bond, unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 22 00 - 4 Control and Expansion Joint: 1. Install control and expansion joints at the following maximum spacings, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings: a. Exterior Walls: 20 feet on center and within 24 inches on 1 side of each interior and exterior corner. b. Interior Walls: 30 feet on center. c. At changes in wall height. 2. Do not continue horizontal joint reinforcement through control and expansion joints. 3.03 JOINTS A. Where new mortar joints join masonry that is partially set or totally set, the exposed surface of the set masonry shall be cleaned so as to obtain the best possible bond with the new work. B. If it becomes necessary to stop a continuous horizontal run of masonry, step back a minimum of 1 /2 unit length in each course. Toothing will not be permitted, except upon written approval of the Architect or Engineer. C. Where cutting of exposed units is necessary, the cuts shall be made with a motor -driven masonry saw. D. Exposed mortar head and bed joints in block walls shall have a thickness equal to the difference between the actual dimension and nominal dimensions of the unit, either in height or in width. 3.04 TOOLING, CLEANING, POINTING A. Tool all unit masonry joints, including block covered by finishes and block below grade. Tool joints in exposed interior and exterior concrete block. 1. Unless shown on the Drawings, joints shall be tooled concave and smooth with a 5/8- inch round bar tool for weather tightness and appearance. C. After mortar has cured thoroughly, clean exposed masonry. If stiff brushes and water are not adequate, clean masonry with cleaning materials and methods approved by the masonry manufacturer. Cleaning shall not result in discoloration of masonry. D. At completion of Work, point holes or defective mortar joints and where necessary cutout and re -point defective joints. 3.05 PROTECTION OF WORK A. Protect Facing Material, Sills, and Ledges Against Staining: 1. Keep top of wall covered with non -staining waterproof coverings at end of day and when Work is not in progress at the wall. 2. Anchor coverings securely, overhang at least 2 feet on each side of wall. 3. When Work is resumed, clean off all loose mortar from top surface. B. Lay no masonry when the temperature of the outside air is below 40 degrees F or is anticipated to fall below 40 degrees F, unless suitable means are provided to heat the masonry materials and maintain the completed work at a temperature of 40 degrees F. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 22 00 - 5 i . Mortar ingredients should be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. Every effort should be made to produce consecutive batches of mortar with the same temperatures falling within this range. The mortar temperature after mixing and before use should be above 40 degrees F, maintainable either by auxiliary heaters under the mortar board or by more frequent mixing of mortar batches. Heated mortar should not become excessively hot (greater than 120 degrees F). 2. Cold Weather Requirements While Work is Progressing: a. Use dry masonry units with a surface temperature of not less than 40 degrees F. wet or frozen masonry units shall not be laid. b. Air Temperature 40 Degrees F to 32 Degrees F: Sand or mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. c. Air Temperature 32 Degrees F to 25 Degrees F: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. Maintain temperatures of mortar on boards above freezing. d. Air Temperature 25 Degrees F to 20 Degrees F: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. Maintain temperatures of mortar on boards above freezing. Salamanders or other sources of heat shall be used on both sides of walls under construction. Windbreaks shall be employed when wind is in excess of 15 mph. e. Air Temperature 20 Degrees F and Below: Sand and mixing water shall be heated to produce mortar temperatures between 40 degrees F and 120 degrees F. Enclosure and auxiliary heat shall be provided to maintain temperature above 32 degrees F. Temperature of units when laid shall be not less than 20 degrees F. 3. Concrete block walls indicated to receive vertical reinforcing shall be maintained at a temperature of not less than 40 degrees F for a period of not less than 48 hours after the vertical reinforcing has been grouted. Contractor shall verify and document surface temperatures of the concrete block units prior to placement of grout at vertical reinforcing locations. 4. In order to avoid "thermal shock" in concrete block walls, the heat (either temporary or permanent) shall be turned on or off at a rate not to exceed 20 degrees per hour or approximately 50 degrees F per 24 hours. 3.06 GROUTING MASONRY A. Grouting shall be placed by pouring in lifts not exceeding 5 feet in height. It shall be consolidated by vibrating during placement and reconsolidated after excess moisture has been absorbed but before plasticity is lost. B. Special care shall be given to holding reinforcing steel in the proper position during the grouting operation. Utilize rebar positioners when necessary. C. Install a horizontal joint grout barrier when flow-thru bond beam blocks are utilized. Do not use roofing felt or other materials that will inhibit bonding between the bond beam and the masonry below. D. Stop grout placement 1-1 /2 inches below bed joints to create a shear key between successive grout pours. Stop grout placement 1 /2 inch below the top of masonry at bond beams. CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 22 00 - 6 3.07 TESTING A. Prism tests on all widths and types of CMU shall be provided in accordance with Division 01. Copies of tests shall be distributed to the Architect/Engineer, the Owner, and the Local Building Inspector. END OF SECTION CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 04 22 00 - 7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 04 71 16 MANUFACTURED MASONRY UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Calcium silicate masonry units. 2. Mortar for unit masonry. 3. Reinforcement, anchorages, and accessories. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 45 00 - Architectural Precast Concrete. 2. Section 04 05 13 - Mortar. 3. Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Accessories. 4. Section 04 05 31 - Cavity Wall Flashing/Drainage System. 5. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 6. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units. 7. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 8. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): l . C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady -State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded -Hot -Plate Apparatus. 2. C192 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory. 3. C270 - Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry. 4. D226 - Standard Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 5. E2556 / E2556M - Standard Specification for Vapor Permeable Flexible Sheet Water Resistive Barriers Intended for Mechanical Attachment. C. Building Materials Evaluation Commission- D. International Code Council (ICC): 1. ES Report. E. Masonry Standards Joint Committee (MSJC) of The Masonry Society. F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): 1. Classification File Number. MANUFACTURED MASONRY UNITS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0471 16 - 1 2. UL 723, Standard for Safety for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures; submit the following items: l . Product Data: Manufactured masonry and application materials including mortar color charts, and water resistive barrier. 2. Samples: Panel containing full-size samples of specified manufactured masonry showing full range of colors and textures complete with specified mortar. a. Actual size of masonry sample approximately 12 by 12 inches (300 by 300 mm). 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Qualifications: 1) Proof of manufacturer qualifications. 2) Proof of installer qualifications. b. Certificates: ICC-ES Report. c. Test Reports for physical properties. d. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions. B. Closeout Submittals: Reference Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: submit the following items: 1. Maintenance Instructions. 2. Special Warranties. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: a. Minimum five years' experience in producing manufactured masonry. b. Member of following organizations: 1) MSJC. 2) ACI. 3) ASTM. 2. Installer Qualifications: Company with documented experience in installation of manufactured masonry including minimum 5 projects within 400-mile radius of this Project. B. Certifications: l . Current ICC-ES Report. 2. UL: Classification File Number. 3. Building Materials Evaluation Commission. 4. HUD: Material Release Number. 5. Texas Department of Insurance Product Evaluation. 6. Florida Product Approval Number. C. Field Samples: Provide in a location selected by Architect showing representative sample of installed product including penetration and termination details, corner detail, and mortar color and tooling. 1. Reference Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 2. Minimum Size: 4 by 4 feet (1200 by 1200 mm) Approved field samples may remain as part of completed Work. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Follow manufacturer's instructions- © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MANUFACTURED MASONRY UNITS 0471 16-2 B. Store moisture -sensitive materials in weather protected enclosures. 1.07 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain materials and ambient temperature in area of installation at minimum 40 degrees F (4 degrees C) prior to, during, and for 48 hours following installation. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Provide manufacturer's standard limited warranty against defects in manufacturing for a period of 50 years following date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Furnish extra manufactured stone material in a variety of shapes and sizes in quantity equal to three percent of the installed stone. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers of calcium silicate masonry units having Products considered acceptable for use: 1. Standard of Quality: Arriscraft International; Renaissance@ Masonry Units, Old Country Building Stone. 2. Other manufacturers will be considered provided samples are submitted 14 days minimum prior to Bid Due Date for review and approval. a. Alba Stone Products. b. Lee Masonry Products c. Plasticrete d. Or approved equal. B. Substitutions: Other manufacturers must submit data showing their products complies with the minimum quality standards contained herein no later than 10 days prior to bid due date for review and consideration. 2.02 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Mortar proportioning and mixing is specified in Section 04 05 13. 2.03 MANUFACTURED MASONRY MATERIALS A. Calcium Silicate Masonry Units (CSMU-1): to ASTM C73, Grade SW; solid units having been pressure formed and autoclaved; 3-13/16 inch bed depth; modular sizes as indicated below, rugged chiseled finish on exposed faces and ends, with mitered ends for outside corners, and having the following typical average properties when tested to the identified standard: 1. Compressive Strength: 6600 psi, to ASTM C 170. 2. Absorption: 8.8 percent, to ASTM C97. 3. Density: 129 Ibs/ft3, to ASTM C97. 4. Modulus of Rupture: 770 psi, to ASTM C99. 5. Nominal sizes: a. 2-3/16 inches, 3-7/16 inches, or 4-11 /16 inches high by various lengths up to 23-5/8 inches. MANUFACTURED MASONRY UNITS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0471 16 - 3 6. Color: Sugarcane/Brown Site Blend 7. Product and Manufacturer's Name: Old Country Building Stone by Arriscraft. 8. Texture: Rugged chiseled finish on exposed surfaces. 9. Pattern: Lay building stone units in random bond pattern, to the following percentage ratio, described from smallest to largest sized units: [40:40:20]. Calcium Silicate Masonry Units (CSMU-2): to ASTM C73, Grade SW; solid units having been pressure formed and autoclaved; 3-5/8 inch bed depth; size as indicated below, smooth finish on exposed faces and ends, and having the following typical average properties when tested to the identified standard: 1. Compressive Strength: 6600 psi, to ASTM C170. 2. Absorption: 8.8 percent, to ASTM C97. 3. Density: 129 Ibs/ft3, to ASTM C97. 4. Modulus of Rupture: 770 psi, to ASTM C99. 5. Nominal sizes: a. 7-5/8 inches high by 23-5/8 inches long. 6. Color: Sunset. 7. Product and Manufacturer's Name: Renaissance@ Masonry Units as manufactured by Arriscraft. 8. Texture: Smooth finish on exposed surfaces. 2.04 RELATED MATERIALS A. Water Resistive Barrier: Vapor permeable flexible sheet water resistive barriers comply with ASTM E2556 / E2556M. B. Install wall ties and anchorages as specified in Section 04 05 19 - Masonry Accessories. C. Mortar: Premixed Type N, Type S or mortar mixed using components and proportions following manufactured masonry manufacturer's installation instructions. Comply with ASTM C 270. 1. Mortar Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. D. Weep screed as required for installation over framed construction. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions are ready to receive work. B. Inspect materials for fit and finish prior to installation. Do not set unacceptable units. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 CUTTING MASONRY UNITS A. Cut masonry units to length with a masonry splitter. B. Dress split end to match face when exposed in wall. MANUFACTURED MASONRY UNITS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0471 16 - 4 3.03 WETTING MASONRY UNITS A. Where the ambient air temperature exceeds 100 degrees F or exceeds 90 degrees F with a wind velocity greater than 8 mph, pre -wet building stone units. B. Lay wetted units when surface dry. 3.04 COURSING A. Place masonry to lines and levels indicated. B. Maintain masonry courses to uniform width. Make vertical and horizontal joints equal and of uniform thickness. C. Lay building stone units in random bond pattern, to the following percentage ratio, described from smallest to largest sized units: [40:40:20]. D. Maintain mortar joint thickness of 3/8-inch. E. Tool joints by compacting the surface when thumbprint hard, to a raked finish. 3.05 PLACING AND BONDING A. Lay masonry in full bed of mortar, properly jointed with other work. Buttering corners of joints, and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints are not permitted. B. Fully bond intersections, and external corners. C. Do not adjust masonry units after laying. Where resetting of masonry is required, remove, clean units and reset in new mortar. D. Install precast concrete watertable as detailed. E. Install wall ties and anchorages as specified in Section 04 05 19. F. Install flashings, vents, and masonry accessories as specified in Section 04 05 31. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection and testing as specified in Section 01 40 00. B. Architect Inspection: Architect will inspect installed masonry and reject masonry that is chipped, cracked, or blemished (streaked, stained or otherwise damaged), as described below. l . Masonry will be inspected to be free of cracks or other blemishes on the finished face or front edges of the masonry units exceeding 3/8 inch or that can be seen from a distance of 10 feet. 2. Units shall exhibit a texture approximately equal to the approved sample when viewed under diffused daylight illumination at a 20-foot distance. 3. Minor chipping resulting from shipment and delivery shall not be grounds for rejection. Minor chips shall not be obvious under diffused daylight illumination from a 20-foot distance. 4. Efflorescence will not be cause for rejection. MANUFACTURED MASONRY UNITS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0471 16 - 5 C. Make Good rejected masonry as directed by Architect. 3.07 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean one-half of mock-up panel as directed below and leave for one week. If no harmful effects appear, all objectionable stains are removed and after mortar has set and cured, clean masonry as follows: l . Protect windows, sills, doors, trim and other work from damage. 2. Remove large particles with stiff fiber brushes without damaging surface. 3. Saturate masonry with clean water and flush off loose mortar and dirt. 4. Dilute cleaning agent with clean water in controlled proportions. 5. Apply solution to pre-soaked wall surface using low pressure acid -resistant sprayer. 6. Thoroughly rinse cleaning solution and residue from wall surface. B. Use alternative cleaning solutions and methods for difficult to clean masonry only after consultation with masonry unit manufacturer. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protect units from damage resulting from subsequent construction operations. B. Use protection materials and methods which will not stain or damage units. C. Remove protection materials upon Substantial Completion, or when risk of damage is no longer present. END OF SECTION MANUFACTURED MASONRY UNITS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0471 16 - 6 SECTION 05 12 00 STRUCTURAL STEEL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install all structural steel columns, beams, purlins, bracing, connections, fasteners and accessories. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): l . A36 - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel. 2. A53 - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc -Coated, Welded and Seamless. 3. A108 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold -Finished. 4. Al 23 - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 5. Al 53 - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot -Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 6. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and Threaded Rod 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. 7. A500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 8. A563 - Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. 9. A992 - Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes. 10. F436 - Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers Inch and Metric Dimensions. 11. F3125 - Standard Specification for High Strength Structural Bolts, Steel and Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 120 ksi (830 MPa) and 150 ksi (1040 MPa) Minimum Tensile Strength, Inch and Metric Dimensions. C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. Structural Welding Code D1.1. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 12 00 - 1 B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners and accessories. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Materials shall all be properly marked to identify the structure for which it is intended. Markings shall correspond to markings indicated on the shop drawings. B. Keep steel members off the ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plate, Bars, S- and M- Shapes: ASTM A36. C. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Where bolts are anchored into concrete ASTM A307, hot dipped galvanized. F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers Connecting Steel to Steel: ASTM A325, 3/4 inch diameter, unless noted otherwise. Washers shall conform to ASTM F436. G. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: Conform to AWS D1.1. H. Headed Stud -Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finish carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC specifications. I. Shop Paint: Conform to Steel Structures Painting Council Paint Specification No. 13. 2.02 HIGH STRENGTH BOLTS A. High strength bolts, nuts, and washers shall conform to ASTM A3125, Grade 325. B. All high strength bolts shall have a twist -off tension indicator device. C. Zinc coated bolts and nuts shall be shipped in the same container. 2.03 ANCHOR BOLTS A. Anchor bolts shall be threaded rod conforming to ASTM A36. B. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A563, Grade A, heavy hex. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-2 C. Washers shall be fabricated from steel plate conforming to ASTM A36. D. All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be galvanized. 2.04 WELDING ELECTRODES A. Welding electrodes shall conform to AWS D1.1. 2.05 NON -SHRINK GROUT A. Non -shrink grout for base plates shall conform to Section 03 60 00. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel members in accordance with AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. 2.07 SHOP PAINTING A. Shop paint all steel fabrications. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. C. Shop Paint: Immediately after surface preparation apply 1 coat of alkyd metal primer accordance with manufacturer's instructions at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mils minimum. 2.08 GALVANIZING A. Galvanize structural shapes, plates, and bars in accordance with ASTM A123. B. Galvanize hardware and miscellaneous items in accordance with ASTM A153. C. All anchor bolts shall be galvanized, unless noted. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Erect steel members in accordance with AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. B. All field welding shall be performed by certified welders in accordance with AWS D1.1. C. Tighten high strength bolts and provide washers in accordance with AISC - Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings. D. Grout base plates in accordance with Section 03 60 00. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 k STRUCTURAL STEEL 051200-3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 05 31 00 STEEL DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install steel roof deck, opening reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A526 - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. 2. A653 - Standard Specification for Steel Bar, Carbon and Alloy, Cold -Finished. 3. Al008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit complete shop drawings. Drawings shall include the following: 1. Deck drawing. 2. Deck profile dimensions. 3. Details for anchorages, supports, projections, openings, and reinforcements. 4. Finishes. C. Submit manufacturer's specification for installation, storage, and handling of decking. D. Submit manufacturer's specifications, published diaphragm shear force values, and fastener layout drawings for fasteners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design, manufacture, and install metal deck in accordance with the "Steel Deck Design Manual," latest edition by the Steel Deck Institute. B. Perform welding by personnel qualified according to Section 5 of the A.W.S. D1-1. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 STEEL DECKING 0531 00-1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, unload, store, and erect decking in a manner to completely protect the deck from damage, including the paint surface. Cover deck and accessories in storage with a waterproof covering and keep off ground. B. Do not place or store metal deck on steel joists or beams until they are permanently anchored and bridged. Avoid excessive concentrated loads during construction by distributing piles of deck to insure that the load carrying capacity of the joists is not exceeded. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL DECK A. Roof Deck Shall Conform to the Following: 1. ASTM A1008, Grade C. 2. ASTM A653, Galvanized, Minimum of 0.9 ounces/sq. ft. Zinc Coating. 3. Deck Configuration: 1-1/2 inches deep, wide 6b cur figuruIiun, 22-guucdc Ininirnurn thickness. B. Sheet metal accessories shall comply with ASTM A526. 2.02 FASTENERS A. Fasteners for fastening steel deck to steel supports 1/8-inch to 3/8-inch thick shall be Hilti X- ENP-19 powder actuated pin fasteners manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems or approved equal. B. Fasteners for fastening steel deck to steel supports greater than 1/4-inch thick shall be Hilti X-ENP-19 powder actuated pin fasteners manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems or approved equal. C. Values of acceptable fastener shear forces shall be published by the Steel Deck Institute. D. Welding of the steel deck will not be permitted. E. Fasteners for fastening steel deck side laps shall be No. 10 screws. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Form deck units in lengths to span 3 or more supports with nested 2-inch minimum laps at the ends and interlocking or nested side laps, unless otherwise indicated. B. Provide deck configurations complying with SDI "Basic Design Specifications," of the gauge, depth, and width shown on the Drawings and specified herein. STEEL DECKING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0531 00 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Place steel deck units on supporting members and adjust to final position with proper bearing dimensions, end and side laps in accordance with approved shop drawings and the manufacturer's specifications and erection layouts. Deck shall be continuous over 3 spans. Do not stretch or contract side lap interlocks. B. Place deck units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells and with close alignment between cells at ends of abutting units. C. Place deck units flat and square, secured to adjacent framing without warp or excessive deflection. Extend each deck section of minimum of 3 supports members, unless otherwise indicated. D. Coordinate and cooperate with structural steel erector in locating decking bundles to prevent overloading of structural members. E. Do not use floor or roof deck units for storage or working platforms until permanently secured. F. When decks rest on masonry walls or steel beams over a partition or at an exterior wall, the hollow space between the webs of the deck shall be closed off with rubber closures secured in place with screws or adhesive or shall be grouted solid. G. All areas of metal decking shall be bounded by steel edge angles, 2 by 2 by 3/16 minimum, securely fastened to roof or wall framing by bolting or welding. 3.02 FASTENING DECK UNITS A. Fasten decking to steel supports using proper mechanical fasteners for base material thickness as listed in the Hilti Product Technical Guide. B. Fastener pattern shall be as shown on the approved shop drawings. C. Fasteners shall be driven into the base material so that the two metal washers are tight together, pressing the deck sheet firmly against the base material, but are not cutting into the deck material. Ensure that all fasteners penetrate steel decking as well as steel base materials, providing secure anchorage. D. Prior to beginning deck fastening, verify that fastener tool settings are correct and that test fasteners are installed within driving depth tolerances. Installation depths shall be measured with a Hilti Standoff Gauge. E. Notify Hilti representative and Engineer of any problems encountered achieving proper fastening depths. F. Fastener installation may proceed when any 20 fasteners, selected at random within a 10-foot by 10-foot area of deck, are measured to be within nail head standoff tolerances. STEEL DECKING 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0531 00 - 3 G. Any and every fastener determined to be outside allowable nail head standoff tolerances shall be left in place and have an additional adjacent fastener properly installed within 2 to 6-inches. H. Sidelap fastener screw spacing shall be as shown on the Drawings, but shall not exceed 36-inches. 3.03 CUTTING, REINFORCEMENTS, AND ACCESSORIES A. Cut and neatly fit deck units and accessories around other work projecting through or adjacent to the decking as shown. B. Provide additional metal reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of decking, and support of other work shown. If not otherwise indicated provide the following: 1. Openings 6 to 18 Inches: 2-inch by 2-inch by 1/4-inch steel angles. 2. Place angles perpendicular to flutes, extend minimum 2 flutes each side of opening and weld to deck. C. Weld to top surface of roof decking acid secure to wood rruileis will gulvurlizeU nails and to steel framing with welds or galvanized self -tapping screws. Space fasteners or welds at 12-inches o.c. Lap end joints not less than 3-inches and secure with galvanized sheet metal screws. 3.04 CLEAN-UP AND PAINTING A. After decking installation, clean and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on top and bottom surfaces of decking units and supporting steel members 1. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with galvanizing repair paint applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Touch-up painted surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. B. Upon completion of erection, promptly remove all tools, equipment, and rubbish caused by or resulting from the roof deck erection work and perform such final cleaning service as may be necessary to leave Site in acceptable condition. END OF SECTION STEEL DECKING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0531 00 - 4 SECTION 05 40 00 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 GENERAL �1 uut: A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install all cold -formed metal framing, including framing members, bracing, fasteners, and related accessories, required for Work. 2. Work includes structural metal stud walls, steel roof, and floor joists. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI) 1. Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. B. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. Structural Welding Code - D1.3. C. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1. Manual of Steel Construction, 9th Edition. D. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. Al 008 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High - Strength Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. 3. Al 01 1 - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability and Ultra -High Strength. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit product data or manufacturer's specifications indicating compliance with requirements specified herein. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating profiles, spacings, sizes, gauges, connection attachments, anchorage, size and type of fasteners and accessories. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. D. Submit engineering calculations for review. E. All submittals must be prepared and signed by an Engineer registered in the State of Minnesota. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 05 40 00 - 1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications 1. The Work shall be fabricated by a manufacturer who has experience producing items of equal quality and type. 2. The intent of this Specification is to establish general guidelines for the design, fabrication, and erection of the light -gauge cold -formed structural steel system on this Project. Specific criteria and certain restrictions are also included herein. B. Installer's Qualifications: The Work shall be installed by specialists in the installation of the specified framing and in the erection of light steel framing. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect metal framing units from rusting and damage. B. Deliver to the Site in manufacturer's unopened containers or bundles, fully identified with name, grade, type, and grade. C. Store off the ground in a dry ventilated space or protect with suitable waterproof coverings. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. All framing members shall be manufactured and supplied by Marino Industries, Dale/Incor, or an approved equal, and be of the type and size as shown on the Drawings. 2.02 MATERIALS A. System Components: With each type of metal framing required, provide manufacturer's standard steel runners (tracks), blocking, clip angles, shoes, reinforcements, fasteners, and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for the applications indicated, as needed to provide a complete metal framing system. B. Materials and Finishes I . I-abricate metal framing components of structural quality steel sheet with a minimum yield point of 50,000 psi; Al008, or A1011. 2. Provide galvanized finish to metal framing components complying with ASTM A525 for minimum G90 coating. 3. "C" Shape Studs: Manufacturer's standard load -bearing steel joists of size, shape, and gauc€e indicated. Minimum structural properties are as follows: Stud Joist A, in ? S, in 3 I, in A 6 Inch, 18 Gauge 0.44 1_1 0.733 12.267 8 Inch, 18 Gauge 0.532 11.108 4.545 4. All members shall have a minimum flange width of 1-5/8 inches. 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000-2 C. Connectors and Fasteners 1. All cold -formed metal framing connectors and fasteners shall be manufactured specifically for cold formed metal framing applications, by manufacturers experienced in such manufacturing such products and have documented quality control programs. 2.03 DESIGN A. Design analysis and computation of section properties and connections shall be in conformance with American Iron & Steel Institute specification referenced. B. Composite action of finished wall or roof and sheathing materials shall not be included in design calculations. Framing shown on Drawings shall be considered minimum. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Framing components may be preassembled into panels prior to erecting. Prefabricated panels shall be square with components attached in a manner as to prevent racking. B. All framing components shall be cut squarely for attachment to perpendicular members or as required for an angular fit against abutting members. Members shall be held positively in place until properly fastened. C. Fastening of components shall be with self -tapping screws or welding of sufficient size to insure the strength of the connection. D. Welds shall be performed by operators qualified in accordance with Section 6.0 of the American Welding Society Structural Welding Code -Sheet Metal (AWS D1.3). All welds shall be touched up with zinc rich paint. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Verify that all such work is complete and accurate to the point where this installation may properly commence in strict accordance with framing shop drawing. 3.02 ERECTION A. Erect framing and panels plumb, level, and square in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings. B. Handling and lifting of prefabricated panels shall be done in a manner as to not cause distortion in any member. C. Track shall be securely anchored to the supporting structure. Track anchors shall not exceed 24 inches o.c. for nail or power driven fasteners, or 16 inches o.c. for other types of attachment. Tracks shall be anchored to steel decking with screws. D. At track butt joints, abutting pieces of track shall be securely anchored to a common structural element, or they shall be butt -welded or spliced together. COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 05 40 00 - 3 E. Studs shall be plumbed, aligned, and securely attached to the flange or webs of both upper and lower tracks. F. Temporary bracing shall be provided until erection is completed. G. Joists shall be located directly over bearing studs or a load distribution member shall be provided at the top track. H. End blocking shall be provided where joist ends are not otherwise restrained from rotation. I. Touch-up shop -applied protective coatings damaged during handling and installation. Use compatible primer for prime coated surface; use galvanized repair paint for galvanized surfaces. END OF SECTION COLD FORMED MErAL FRAMING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 05 40 00 - 4 SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and install all metal fabrications. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Aluminum Association (AA) 1. Specification for Aluminum Structures. B. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 1. Specification for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Building. C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. Structural Welding Code Dl.l . 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit product data or manufacturer's specifications indicating compliance with requirements specified herein. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings indicating profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners and accessories. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Materials shall all be properly marked to identify the structure for which it is intended. Markings shall correspond to markings indicated on the shop drawings. B. Keep steel members off the ground using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. METAL FABRICATIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 05 50 00 - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL MATERIALS A. Structural Steel Wide Flange Shapes: ASTM A992, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Structural Steel Channels, Angles, Plate, Bars, S- and M- Shapes: ASTM A36. C. Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500, Grade B. D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. E. Anchor Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Where bolts are anchored into concrete ASTM A307, hot dipped galvanized. F. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers Connecting Steel to Steel: ASTM A325, 3/4-inch diameter, unless noted otherwise. Washers shall conform to ASTM F436. G. Welding Electrodes and Fluxes: Conform to AWS DI.l. H. Headed Stud -Type Shear Connectors: ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold finish carbon steel with dimensions complying with AISC specifications. I. Shop Paint: Conform to Steel Structures Painting Council Paint Specification No. 13. 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL A. Shapes, Bars, and Rods: ASTM A276, Type 316 or 316L. B. Sheets, Strips, and Plates: ASTM Al 67, Type 316 or 316L. C. Type 316L stainless steel shall be used for welded construction. 2.03 ALUMINUM MATERIAL A. Aluminum Shapes: ASTM B308, Alloy 6061-T6. B. Aluminum Sheet and Plates: ASTM B209, Alloy 6061-T6. C. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: 300 Series stainless steel. D. Welding: Conform to AA -Specification for Aluminum Structures. 2.04 NON -SHRINK GROUT A. Non -shrink grout shall be a ready to use, non -shrink, non-metallic aggregate product requiring only the addition of water at the Site. B. Non -shrink grout shall meet the requirements of Corps of Engineers Specification CRD-C-621. METAL FABRICATIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 05 50 00 - 2 2.05 ANCHORS A. Expansion anchors for fastening to cast -in -place concrete shall be Hilti Type 316 Stainless Steel Kwik Bolts, or approved equal. Size as shown on Drawings. B. Sleeve anchors for fastening to cast -in -place concrete and solid grouted masonry shall be Hilti Sleeve Anchors, or approved equal. Size as shown on Drawings. C. Adhesive anchors for fastening to masonry shall be Hilti Standard HIT Anchor, or approved equal. Size as shown on Drawings. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Verify dimensions on Site prior to shop fabrication. B. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitting and properly secured. All tolerances for built-up and rolled shapes shall meet or exceed ASTM A6. C. Use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled grade names, and roughness. Remove blemishes by grinding, or by welding and grinding prior to cleaning, treating, and application of surface finishes. D. Shop fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Sections shall be full length pieces between connections or splices. E. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces. F. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications. Fabricate anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication, unless otherwise specified in schedule herein. 2.07 SHOP PAINTING A. Shop paint all steel fabrications. B. Surface Preparation: After inspection and before shipping, clean steel to be painted. Remove loose rust, loose mill scale and spatter, slag or flux deposits. Clean steel in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Surface Preparation Specification No. 2 - Hand Tool Cleaning. C. Shop Paint: Immediately after surface preparation, apply shop paint in accordance with manufacturer's instructions at a rate to provide a uniform dry film thickness of 1.5 mils minimum. Maintain minimum coverage at joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. D. In special areas indicated in Section 09 91 00, use primer compatible with painting systems used. 2.08 GALVANIZING A. Galvanize structural shapes, plates, and bars in accordance with ASTM A123. B. Galvanize hardware and miscellaneous items in accordance with ASTM A153. METAL FABRICATIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 05 50 00 - 3 C. All anchor bolts shall be galvanized, unless noted. 2.09 GALVANIZING COATING PAINT A. Wash Primer: Vinyl butyral acid. B. Primer: Converted epoxy, epoxy phenolic, or urethane type, minimum 14-pounds metallic zinc content per gallon. C. Apply in strict accordance with manufacturer's specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Install items square and level, accurately fitting, and free from distortion or defects. Shim and grout as necessary. B. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing. Keep work in alignment. C. Replace items damaged in course of installation. D. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. E. A325 Bolts: Tighten bolts and provide washers in accordance with "Specifications for Structural Joints" for ASTM A325 bolts. F. Aluminum surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete shall be coated with 2 coats of bituminous paint. 3.02 TOUCH-UP PAINTING AND CLEAN-UP A. After installation, clean and touch up field welds, bolt connections, and scratched and damaged prime painted surfaces. Use a primer consistent with shop coat. B. Repair damaged or scratched galvanized coatings. Solvent clean damaged area with a wash primer, 1 coat, 4-mil dry film thickness. Clean by hand tool, power tool, or brush off blast. Apply 3 coats of organic zinc paint with a minimum dry film thickness of 3 mils per coat. END OF SECTION METAL FABRICATIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 05 50 00 - 4 SECTION 06 10 00 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work under this Section Includes: 1. Dimension/framing lumber. 2. Bracing, blocking, sills, nailers and miscellaneous components. 3. Rough framing connection and anchorage hardware. 4. Related accessories and miscellaneous materials. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A307 - Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs. 2. D226 - Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. 3. Forest Stewardship Council: FSC Guidelines - Forest Stewardship Council' Guidelines. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data, including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Materials Resources Certificates: 1. Certify source for regional materials and distance from Project site. 2. Certify lumber is harvested from Forest Stewardship Council Certified well managed forest. D. Shop Drawings: Show dimensioned layout, materials provided, connection details, etc. E. Samples: Submit as requested by the Architect/Engineer. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Lumber Standards: Conforming to Voluntary Product Standard PS20. Mark material with official grade mark of specified agency. Grading rules of the following agencies apply: 1. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB). 2. Western Wood Products Association (WWPA). 3. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB). ROUGH CARPENTRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 10 00 - 1 4. Redwood Inspection Service (RIS). B. Plywood Standards: Conforming to Voluntary Product Standard PSI and identified with appropriate grade and trademark of American Plywood Association (APA). Mark material with official grade mark of specified agency. C. Lumber Certification: Identified with grade stamp of an agency certified by National Forest Product Association (NFPA). 1. Dimensional Work: Conform to NFPA "National Design Specifications for Stress -Grade Lumber and Its Fastenings". 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Store lumber and plywood not less than 6-inches above ground on framework of blocking, and cover with protective waterproof covering providing for adequate air c;irc;ulcaliorrcar verililtaliori. 2. Protect corners of sheet materials from damage while handling. 3. Fire Retardant Materials: Comply with treatment manufacturer's requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Framing Lumber: Nominal and actual dimensions conforming to PS20, not more than 19-percent moisture content, surfaced 4 sides (S4S), unless otherwise indicated. 1. Douglas Fir, Larch, Hem -Fir: Grade WCLIB or WWPA No. 2, or better. 2. Southern Pine: Grade SPIB No. 2, or better. 3. Southern Yellow Pine: Grade SPIB No. 2, or better. 4. Mixed white woods (S-P-F): No. 2, or better. B. Exposed Blocking and Other Miscellaneous Wood Framing: 1. Construction Grade No. 1, or better, Douglas Fir -Larch, Hem -Fir, and Western Hemlock, or mixed white woods (S-P-F). 2. Where Exposed Material: Sound, straight, clean, and smooth (sand if required). C. Concealed Blocking: Standard Grade No. 2, or better, Douglas Fir -Larch, Hem -Fir, Western Hemlock, Southern Pine, or mixed white woods (S-P-F). 2.02 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT (FRT) A. Pressure Impregnated Fire Treatment: Bearing Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label with Fire Hazard Classification of 25 or less, or FRS Classification (Guide BPVV). l . Flame Spread: Not more than 25, with no increase in fire hazard classification when test is extended to 30 minutes in compliance with Uniform Building Code (UBC) Standard No. 42-1. 2. Identification: Mark each piece with performance identification label or mark of UL. Provide identification mark at intervals required by inspection officials having jurisdiction. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and processes for typical applications: a. Hickson Corp.: Dricon. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.: Pyro-Guard. 9) 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-2 B. Moisture Content for Lumber and Plywood: 1. Materials Exposed to View in Finished Work: Kiln dry to not more than 12-percent moisture content after treatment. Concealed Plywood: Dry to not more than treatment. Concealed Lumber: Dry to not more than treatment. 15-percent moisture content after 19-percent moisture content after C. Schedule of Fire -Retardant Treatment: 1. Concealed blocking in walls and/or attic space (dimensional and plywoods). 2. Exposed materials. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Rough Hardware - General: Furnish rough hardware required, including nails, screws, anchor bolts, J-bolts, lag screws, cinch anchors, strap anchors, toggle bolts, shot anchors, and similar items. 1. Select rough hardware of proper size and type for use intended and for materials to be fastened. Furnish sufficient hardware to ensure substantial and positive anchorage. 2. Use hot dip galvanized or aluminum at exterior work. B. Nailing into wood plugs is not acceptable for any Work. Where shot anchors are used, they shall be of type and size recommended by manufacturer for conditions of use. C. Bolts: Course thread, not plated with washers and nuts. D. Anchor Bolts with Nuts and Washers: ASTM A307, 1/2-inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated, threaded 1 end with 1 1/2-inch right angle bend opposite end. Determine bolt length by the following embedment requirements: 1. Not less than 7-inch embedment into concrete or horizontal masonry joints. 2. Not less than 15-inch embedment into vertical masonry joints. E. Expansion Bolts: Hilti Stainless Steel Kwik Bolts, or approved equal. Size as shown on Drawings. F. Adhesive Anchors: Heavy-duty vinylester resin adhesive anchors sized by manufacturer for specific application and substrate. 1. Acceptable manufacturers and products. a. Hilti Corp.: HIT Anchor Series. b. Comparable products by The Rawlplug Company, Inc. G. Nails: Bright finish steel for interior and galvanized steel for exterior. H. Construction Adhesive: Conform to APA Specification AFG-01. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Install all Work plumb, level, true, and square. B. Use appropriate nails and glue for materials to be installed. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000-3 C. Do not notch, bore, or cut members for pipes, ducts, conduits, or other reasons, except as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. D. Provide full bearing for members. Where framing members slope, cut or notch ends to give uniform bearing surface. E. Make all studs single length and unspliced. F. Frame all corners and intersecting walls with 3 or more studs. G. Apply preservative treatment at all field cuts, drilled holes, or other areas where pre- treatment has been damaged. 3.02 FASTENING A. Use common wire nails of the size and quantity specified in the Building Code, unless shown otherwise. B. Remove and replace all split wood. C. Drill bolt holes 1/1 6-inch larger in diameter than the bolts being used. D. Use washers under head and nut of all bolts. E. Pre -bore holes for lag screws the same diameter as the root of the thread. F. Screw all lag screws and wood screws into position. Do not drive. END OF SECTION ROUGH CARPENTRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 10 00 - 4 SECTION 06 15 00 WOOD DECKING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work under this section includes all labor, material, equipment, and related services necessary to furnish and install all wood decking indicated on the drawings or specified herein. B. Related Sections 1. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 2. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 3. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 18 00 - Glue -Laminated Wood Construction. 5. Section 07 61 13 - Sheet Metal Roofing. 6. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Solid Decking: AITC 112-93 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings if required for clarification of deck installation. B. Samples: Prior to manufacture, submit sample of surface texture and stain, if applicable, as selected by Architect. C. Acceptance: Manufacture shall not begin until acceptance is received from the Architect/Engineer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Supplier shall retain and store material under a shelter that will prevent damage due to weather until needed at the jobsite. B. Contractor shall be responsible for protection of the materials after arrival at the project site. C. Use non -marring slings for loading, unloading, and handling deck to minimize damage to surfaces and/or wrapping. WOOD DECKING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 15 00 - 1 D. Unload at site and place on adequate, level, off -ground support. Materials shall be covered and protected from the elements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOLID WOOD DECKING -THREE INCH NOMINAL THICKNESS A. Deck size shall be 2 x 6 Nominal, (1 1 /2 inch x 5 inch Net Douglas Fir/Larch or Eastern Spruce, 2 1 /2 inch x 5 inch Net Southern Yellow Pine). B. Species: 1. Douglas Fir/Larch (minimum M.O.E. 1,800,000 psi). 2. Eastern Spruce (minimum M.O.E. 1,500,000 psi). 3. Southern Yellow Pine (minimum M.O.E. 1,600,000 psi). C. Moisture Content per AITC 112-93 1. 15 percent maximum for Douglas Fir/Larch and Eastern Spruce, 2. 19 percent maximum for Southern Yellow Pine. D. Grade 1. Select Quality per AITC 112-93: (Applicable to Doug Fir Larch and Eastern Spruce).. 2. Commercial Quality. E. Surface Texture 1. Smooth Sanded Surface F. Pattern shall be Standard V-Joint. Edge of deck shall be Tongue and Grooved. G. Lengths/Ends: (check one) 1. Random Lengths 6 feet to 16 feet and End Matched. H. Finish: Pre -finish with W-1 Paint Finish System per Section 09 91 00 - Painting, color as selected by Architect. Required jobsite touch-up shall be by Painting Section. I. Wrapping: Provide water resistant wrapping. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Nails and Spikes shall be supplied by Erector: Hot Dipped galvanized steel for exterior, high humidity and treated wood locations; plain finish elsewhere. Size and type to suit condition and per manufacturer's recommendations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Decking shall be installed in accordance with the applicable reference standards listed herein and the structural drawings. B. Decking shall be laid in the following arrangements: 1. Controlled Random Lay-up with End Matching. WOOD DECKING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 15 00 - 2 3.02 PROTECTION A. Unit wrap with water resistant wrapping. B. Decking is manufactured from kiln dried material. For this reason, it should be dept dry during storage and installation. Care should be taken to protect deck material after installation to prevent moisture absorption and staining. It is recommended that the permanent roof be installed immediately after the wood decking is installed. C. Contractor shall coordinate wood decking installation with Roofing Contractor to assure waterproof covering at the end of each day. END OF SECTION WOOD DECKING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 15 00 - 3 This Paae Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 06 17 30 SHOP -FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design, furnish, and install prefabricated wood trusses, bracing, anchors, connectors and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Forest Products Association (NFPA) 1. National Design Specification for Wood Construction. B. Truss Plate Institute (TPI) 1. Design Specification for Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit shop drawings and placement plans for all wood truss types showing the following information: 1. Truss size, location, and configuration. 2. Fabrication and erection details. 3. Erection plan. 4. Erection and permanent bracing requirements. C. Submit design calculations prepared and signed by a Licensed Professional Engineer registered in the State of Minnesota. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design and fabricate wood trusses in accordance with TPI Design Specification. Conform to allowable tolerances. 1.05 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not drag or drop prefabricated wood trusses. B. Store trusses vertically, properly ventilated, held straight, well drained, and protected from the weather. C. Store wood trusses at points not over 4 feet apart and at least 1-1 /2 inches above ground or concrete. Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 06 17 30-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 TRUSS DESIGN A. Maintain the general design concept as shown on the Drawings without altering profiles or alignment. B. Make necessary provisions in the design to accommodate all stresses, including wind bracing. C. Design for the following minimum design loads indicated below, unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. In no case shall loadings be less than those stated in the Minnesota State Building Code (MSBC). Top chord applied uniform dead load = 10 psf Top chord applied uniform (balanced) snow load = 42 psf Top chord applied uniform (unbalanced) snow load = 55 psf / 9psf Top c;hoid/overfiurig upplied coric:erilruled muvirig live load - 250 Ibs Bottom chord applied uniform dead load = 10 psf Bottom chord applied uniform live load = 0 psf Net Uplift Minimum = 10 psf Snow drift loads = Per ASCE7-10 or as shown on Drawings D. Design trusses components based on combined analysis of MWFRS and C and C methods, utilizing the most severe loading condition. Design truss uplift reactions based on C and C methods. E. Design all truss overhangs to the dimensions shown on the Drawings for the loads listed in 2.01.C, modified as necessary for unheated conditions and a non -concurrent concentrated live load of 250 lbs. Overhangs shall be designed with the top chord cantilevered from the point of truss bearing with no additional support provided by soffit framing, facia, wall veneers, etc. 2.02 TRUSS FABRICATION A. Fabricate trusses to the size and shape shown on the Drawings. B. Accurately cut and fabricate all wood members so that all truss units are uniform. C. All wood members shall be fire -retardant -treated to comply with applicable building codes for roof construction in a Construction Type II-B building or as shown on Architectural drawings. D. All connector plates shall be a minimum thickness of 0.036 inch and shall be manufactured from steel meeting the requirements of ASTM A446, Grade A or higher grade. E. Hot dip galvanize all truss connector plates in accordance with ASTM A525, Coating Designation G60. F. Apply truss connector plates to both faces of truss at each joint and provide firm, even contact between the plate and the wood. Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 06 17 30-2 2.03 FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT A. Pressure Impregnated Fire Treatment: Bearing Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. label with Fire Hazard Classification of 25 or less, or FRS Classification (Guide BPVV). 1. Flame Spread: Not more than 25, with no increase in fire hazard classification when test is extended to 30 minutes in compliance with Uniform Building Code (UBC) Standard No. 42-1. 2. Identification: Mark each piece with performance identification label or mark of UL. Provide identification mark at intervals required by inspection officials having jurisdiction. 3. Acceptable manufacturers and processes for typical applications. a. Hickson Corp.: Dricon. b. Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc.: Pyro-Guard. B. Moisture Content for Lumber and Plywood l . Materials Exposed to View in Finished Work: Kiln dry to not more than 12-percent moisture content after treatment. 2. Concealed Plywood: Dry to not more than 15-percent moisture content after treatment. 3. Concealed Lumber: Dry to not more than 19-percent moisture content after treatment. 2.04 TRUSS CONNECTION HARDWARE A. Truss connector ties shall be model H16S truss anchors manufactured by Simpson Strong - Tie, or equal. Connector finish shall be hot -dipped galvanized after fabrication with a G60 coating (0.60-oz. zinc per square foot). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION AND BRACING A. Place, align, and level all members in final position in the structure on the accepted bearing surface. B. Anchor trusses at all bearing points using metal framing connectors and fasten securely. C. Securely brace all trusses during erection and after permanent installation. D. Erection bracing shall hold trusses straight, plumb, and in a safe condition until decking and permanent truss bracing has been fastened. E. Provide permanent roof truss bracing with continuous or lap -spliced 2 by 4 members, attached with 2-16d nails at each truss location as follows: 1. Diagonal bracing at or near a 45-degree angle in the plane of the truss top chords. Alternate bracing direction. 2. Diagonal cross bracing at or near 45-degree angle in the plane of the bottom chords. Alternate bracing direction. 3. Diagonal cross bracing at or near a 45-degree angle from the end wall top plate up to the roof ridge, perpendicular to end wall. F. Perpendicular to truss web members as shown on truss shop drawings. Each perpendicular brace must be anchored to an end wall or diagonal brace in the plane of web members. Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 06 17 30-3 G. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams. H. All erection and permanent bracing shall be installed and all trusses permanently anchored before application of any loads. I. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses. Anchor trusses to girder trusses. J. Securely connect valley trusses to common trusses with metal framing connectors, either through roof sheathing or directly to common truss top chords. K. Do not cut, modify, or remove truss members or connector plates. L. Remove and replace wood trusses that are damaged or deficient. END OF SECTION Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 06 17 30-4 SECTION 06 18 00 GLUE -LAMINATED WOOD CONSTRUCTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install glued -laminated wood members and accessories. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Institute of Timber Construction (AITC): 1. Inspection Manual. B. American National Standard: 1. ANSI/AITC Al 90.1 -Structural Glued Laminated Timber. C. National Forest Products Association (NFPA): 1. National Design Specification for Wood Construction. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit manufacturer's product data for prefabricated timber connectors. C. Submit complete fabrication and erection shop drawings for all laminated members. D. Submit shop drawings for all fabricated connections and hardware. Show all pertinent dimensions, sizes, weld symbols, finishes, and types of fasteners. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All work shall conform to ANSI/AITC A190.1. B. Members shall be marked with a Quality Mark indicating conformance with American National Standard ANSI/AITC 190.1. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store members so they are properly ventilated, held straight, well drained, and protected from the weather. B. Store members at points not over 4 feet apart and at least 1-1 /2 inches above ground or concrete. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 GLUE -LAMINATED WOOD CONSTRUCTION 061800-1 C. Use non -marring slings for loading, unloading, and handling members to minimize damage to surfaces and wrapping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LAMINATED BEAMS A. Laminated Timber Members Shall Meet the Following Requirements: 1. AITC Combination Symbol: As shown on Drawings. 2. Size: As shown on Drawings. 3. Outer and Core Lamination Species: Douglas Fir -Larch. 4. Adhesive: Waterproof type conforming to the test requirements of ANSI/AITC Al90.1 for wet use adhesive. 5. Appearance Grade: Architectural. 6. Surface Texture: Smooth surface. 7. Surface Protection: Ends of laminated structural members shall have 1 coat of end sealer applied immediately after trimming. All other surfaces shall have 1 coat of clear penetrating sealer suitable to receive the type of finish specified in Section 09 91 00. 8. Wrapping: Provide water-resistant wrapping covering all surfaces of individual members shipped by rail or load wrapped if shipped by truck. 9. Concealed Connections: Manufacturer shall furnish connection steel and hardware for joining structural glued laminated timber members to each other and to their supports. 2.02 ROUGH HARDWARE A. Nails shall be common wire nails, unless noted otherwise. Galvanized for exterior locations. B. Bolts shall conform to ASTM A307. Galvanize for exterior locations. C. Lag screws shall conform to ANSI B18.2.1. Galvanize for exterior locations. D. Expansion anchors for fastening to cast -in -place concrete shall be Hilti Stainless Steel Kwik Bolts, or approved equal. Size as shown on Drawings. E. Sleeve anchors for fastening to cast -in -place concrete and solid grouted masonry shall be Hilti Sleeve Anchors, or approved equal. Size as shown on Drawings. F. Adhesive anchors for fastening to masonry shall be Hilti Standard HIT Anchor, or approved equal. Size as shown on Drawings. G. Powder actuated fasteners for fastening to cast -in -place concrete or masonry shall be Hilti DX Powder Actuated Fasteners, or approved equal. 2.03 TIMBER CONNECTORS A. Exposed connections shall be steel angles and plates, painted black, as shown on Drawings or as designed by supplier for loads shown. B. Prefabricated timber connectors shall be Simpson Timber Connectors as manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie Company, Kant -Sag Timber Connector as manufactured by United Steel Products Company, or approved equal. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 GLUE -LAMINATED WOOD CONSTRUCTION 001800-2 C. The products of the Simpson Strong -Tie Company are referenced on the Drawings. Products of other approved manufacturers may be used provided they are of equal construction and equal load carrying capacity. D. All prefabricated and exterior timber connectors shall be galvanized. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ERECTION A. Install all work plumb, level, true, and square. B. Install temporary bracing as necessary during erection and maintain until permanent stability is provided. C. Do not notch, bore, or cut members for pipes, ducts, conduits or other reasons, except as shown on the Drawings or as approved by the Engineer. D. Provide full bearing for members. Where framing members slope, cut or notch ends to give uniform bearing surface. 3.02 FASTENING A. Use common wire nails of the size and quantity specified in the Building Code, unless shown otherwise. B. Remove and replace all split wood. C. Drill bolt holes 1 /16 inch larger in diameter than the bolts being used. D. Use washers under head and nut of all bolts. E. Pre -bore holes for lag screws the same diameter as the root of the thread. F. Screw all lag screws and wood screws into position. Do not drive. END OF SECTION GLUE -LAMINATED WOOD CONSTRUCTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 18 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 06 20 00 FINISH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work under this Section includes furnishing and/or installing finish carpentry and related work. Items include, but are not limited to: 1. Plastic laminate casework. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall. 4. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Architectural Woodwork Institute, AWI, lumber custom grade or better. B. AWI Quality: Premium grade, unless noted otherwise in this Specification. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit complete working fabrication and installation drawing and catalog cuts of each hardware item, in accordance with Article 3 of the General Conditions and Section 01 33 00. B. Samples: Submit sample of each wood species which is to receive transparent finish at Site, of each finish to be applied at factory and plastic laminates for color selection. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect millwork during transit, delivery, storage, and handling to prevent damage, soiling, and deterioration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BASIC MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the following requirements for architectural millwork not specifically indicated as prefabricated or prefinished standard products. Provide brackets, fasteners, and supports as required or indicated for a complete installation. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-1 B. Wood Moisture Content: Provide Kiln -dried lumber with an average moisture content range of 5 percent to 10 percent. Maintain temperature and relative humidity during fabrication, storage and furnishing operations so that the moisture content doesn't exceed 8 percent. C. Wood for Transparent Finish: Plain sawn, red oak. D. Shelves: Plywood with a hardwood edge. E. Approved Plastic Laminate Manufacturers 1. Nevamar. 2. Wilsonart. 3. Formica. 4. Or other approved equal. F. Particleboard: Medium density (37 to 50 pounds per cubic foot) and conform to ANSI A208.2 as per ASTM D1037, unless otherwise specified. G. Plastic Laminate (PLAM): Facing sheets, minimum thickness 0.05 inch, backer sheets rrlinirnurri lilickness 0.02 inch wilh mulle firiish. H. Hardware: 1. Finishing Nails: Galvanized bright. 2. Adjustable Shelf and Rod Supports: Kant -Sag Model 84-2500. 3. Shelf Supports: Kant -Sag Model 84-3000. 4. Coat Rod: Kant -Sag Model 660SS Stainless Steel 1-1/16 inch O.D. 5. Coat Rod Flanges: Knape and Vogt No. 734 at 1 end and No. 735 at the other end, polish chrome. 6. Shelf Standards: Knape and Vogt Model No. 255 BR, brass finish with 1 set of Model No. 256 BR shelf supports for each 12 inches of standard. I. Adhesives: Highly water-resistant resin type meeting CS 35-61. 2.02 TOPS A. Plastic Laminate Tops, backsplashes, and edges shall be high-pressure laminated tops of AWI quality, custom grade or better. Core shall be plywood or particleboard with a backup sheet. Exterior grade plywood or phenolic resin particleboard (Type 2-M-2) for tops in which sinks.occur. Provide joint connectors at joints. 2.03 CABINETS A. Shelf Support Pin Shelf Support Pin Grommet Box/File Drawer Slides Pulls Hinges Door Locks Drawer Locks KV 331 KV 325 KV 8400 Stanley Class 4484; Finish 26D Grass TEC 864 Taylor C8803 Taylor C8803 B. Shelving: Heavy -Duty Shelf Standards KV 82 Heavy -Duty Shelf Brackets KV 182 FINISH CARPENTRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 20 00 - 2 2.04 FABRICATION A. General: 1. Millwork items shall be sizes and profiles as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Millwork shall be designed and constructed for heavy materials storage in base and wall cabinets. 3. Millwork items shall be fabricated from materials as listed in Paragraph 2.01 and shall be shipped fully assembled to Site whenever practical. 4. All exposed wood surfaces shall be covered with plastic laminate. 5. Provide silencers for doors. All cabinets to be manufactured based on the 1 1/4-inch dowel construction method, using glued 5/16-inch fluted hardwood dowels spaced to provide the greatest joint strength based on the cabinet depth. Cabinets to be assembled and clamped under pressure to secure joints and maintain cabinet squareness. Hot melt glue applied to perimeter of cabinet back and end panel joint and behind hang rails. Fixed interior parts to be installed with dowels or mechanical fasteners. Cabinets over 36 inches wide shall receive a vertical divider. 3/16-inch line boring holes at cabinet end panels and vertical dividers to adapt for adjustable shelves. Adjustable on 1 1/4-inch centers. C. Cabinet components shall be of the following minimum core thickness: l . 1/2-inch material at cabinet backs, drawer body and drawer bottom. 2. 3/4-inch material at base, wall and tall cabinet tops, bottoms, door and drawer face, cabinet sides, spreaders, dividers, cabinet rear hang strips, fixed shelves, adjustable shelves under 30 inches wide, fillers, scribes, pedestals and exposed back panels, horizontal work surfaces 48 inches or higher above the floor. 3. 1-inch material at adjustable shelves 30 inches and wider. D. Cabinet doors, drawer fronts, exposed end panels and other decorative exterior laminate surfaces shall be laminated on the exterior with high pressure laminate and on the interior with high pressure balancing liner. Parts shall be edged with either PVC or polyester edge banding. E. Cabinet backs shall be 1/2-inch material housed on all 4 sides in a dado, inset 7/8-inch from the rear body to accommodate 3/4-inch hang strips. Mechanical fasteners for tight fit and sealed around the perimeter and behind the hang strips with superior strength hot melt adhesive. F. Drawer body, full box design, shall be 1/2-inch material, dowel construction, with a fully captured bottom on all 4 sides, glued and mechanically fastened. Under body stiffeners at wider drawers, rear hood at paper storage drawers. G. Cabinet structural sub -bases shall be water resistant exterior grade plywood, continuous ladder style, separate platform design, leveled and secured in place, unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine substrate and conditions under which work is to be installed and report unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. FINISH CARPENTRY © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 06 20 00 - 3 3.02 FINISH CARPENTRY INSTALLATION A. Erection of Millwork: Millwork cabinet work, doors shown on the Drawings and specified herein shall be erected in a neat, substantial manner. Work shall be left smooth, free from hammer or tool marks, slivers, and open joints. Joints shall be absolutely tight. Work shall be plumb, square, level, and true. Face nails shall be set ready to be puttied. B. Cut holes for countertop sinks. Obtain templates from plumbing contractor. Plastic laminate top joints shall be straight, even, and tight using joint connectors. C. Construct all woodwork according to AWI Specifications for premium quality. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH CARPENTRY 062000-4 SECTION 06 61 16 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following horizontal and trim solid surface product types. 1. Countertops, back and side splashes. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealers. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 DEFINITION A. Solid surface is defined as nonporous, homogeneous material maintaining the same composition throughout the part with a composition of acrylic polymer, aluminum trihydrate filler and pigment. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data 1. For each type of product indicated. Shop drawings 1. Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices and other components. a. Show full-size details, edge details, thermoforming requirements, attachments, etc. b. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. c. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures, faucets, soap dispensers, waste receptacle and other items installed in solid surface. C. Samples 1. For each type of product indicated. a. Submit minimum 6 inch by 6-inch sample in specified gloss. b. Cut sample and seam together for representation of inconspicuous seam. c. Indicate full range of color and pattern variation. d. Approved samples will be retained as a standard for Work. D. Product certificates 1. For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 0661 16 - 1 E. Fabricator/installer qualifications 1. Provide copy of certification number. F. Manufacturer certificates 1. Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance. B. Fabricator/installer qualifications 1. Work of this Section shall be by a certified fabricator/installer, certified in writing by the manufacturer. C. Applicable standards 1. Standards of the following, as referenced herein: a. American National Standards Institute (ANSI). b. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). c. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA). 2. Fire test response characteristics a. Provide with the following Class A (Class 1) surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per UL 723 (ASTM E84) or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1) Flame Spread Index: 25 or less. 2) Smoke Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver no components to Site until areas are ready for installation. B. Store components indoors prior to installation. C. Handle materials to prevent damage to finished surfaces 1. Provide protective coverings to prevent physical damage or staining following installation for duration of Project. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's warranty against defects in materials. 1. Warranty shall provide material and labor to repair or replace defective materials. 2. Damage caused by physical or chemical abuse or damage from excessive heat will not be warranted. 1.08 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance requirements as specified by the manufacturer. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0661 16 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CorianOO surfaces from the DuPont company (basis of design). b. Other manufacturers whose products comply with the requirements herein. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Solid polymer components 1. Cast, nonporous, filled polymer, not coated, laminated or of composite construction with through body colors meeting ANSI Z124.3 or ANSI Z124.6, having minimum physical and performance properties specified. 2. Superficial damage to a depth of 0.010 inch (0.25 mm) shall be repairable by sanding and/or polishing. B. Thickness 1. 1/2-inch minimum. C. Edge treatment 1. As indicated on the Drawings. D. Performance characteristics: Property Typical Result Test Tensile Strength Tensile Modulus Tensile Elongation Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus Hardness Rockwell "M" 56 Barcol Impressor Thermal Expansion Gloss (601 Gardner) Light Resistance Wear and Cleanability Stain Resistance: Sheets 6,000 psi 1.5 by 10-6 psi 0.4 percent min. 10,000 psi 1.2 by 10-6 psi >85 Scale 3.02 by 10-5 in./in./ C 5 to 75 (matte —highly polished) (Xenon Arc) No effect Passes Passes Fungus and Bacteria Resistance Does not support microbial growth Boiling Water Resistance No visible change High Temperature Resistance Izod Impact (Notched Specimen) Ball Impact No change 0.28 ft.-lbs./in. of notch No fracture 1/2-lb. ball: ASTM D638 ASTM D638 ASTM D638 ASTM D790 ASTM D790 ASTM D785 ASTM D2583 ASTM D696 (1.80 by 10-5 in./in./°F) ANSI Z124 NEMA LID 3-2000 Method 3.3 ANSI Z124.3 and Z 124.6 ANSI Z124.3 and Z 124.6 ASTM G21 and G22 NEMA LID 3-2000 Method 3.5 NEMA LID 3-2000 Method 3.6 ASTM D256 (Method A) NEMA LID 3-2000 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 0661 16-3 Property Typical Result Test Resistance: Sheets 1/4-inch slab 36-inch drop Method 3.8 1/2-inch slab 144-inch drop Weatherability AE*94<5 in 1,000 hrs. ASTM G155 Specific Gravity t 1.7 Water Absorption Long-term ASTM D570 0.4 percent (3/4 inch) 0.6 percent (12 inch) 0.8 percent (1/4 inch) Toxicity 99 (solid colors) Pittsburgh Protocol 66 (patterned colors) Test ("LC50"Test) Flammability All colors ASTM E84, (Class I and Class A) NFPA 255 and UL 723 Flame Spread Index <25 Smoke Developed Index <25 t Approximate weight per square foot: 12 inch (12.3 mm) thick material is 4.4 lbs. Shapes meet or exceed the ANSI Z124.3 and ANSI Z124.6 standards for plastic sinks and lavatories. NEMA results based on the NEMA LD 3-2000. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Joint adhesive 1. Manufacturer's standard 1- or 2-part adhesive kit to create inconspicuous, nonporous joints. B. Sealant 1. Manufacturer's standard mildew -resistant, FDA -compliant, NSF 51-compliant (food zone, any type), UL-listed silicone sealant in colors matching components. C. Plastic Laminate 1. Provide plastic laminate on all exposed wood surfaces per Section 06 20 00 -Finish Carpentry. 2.04 FACTORY FABRICATION A. Shop assembly 1. Fabricate components to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical bulletins. 2. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive without conspicuous joints. a. Reinforce with strip of solid polymer material, 2 inches wide. 3. Provide factory cutouts for plumbing fittings and bath accessories as indicated on the Drawings. 4. Rout and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. a. Rout cutouts, radii, and contours to template. b. Smooth edges. SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0661 16 - 4 c. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work. 2.05 FINISHES A. Select from the manufacturer's standard color chart. 1. Color: As selected by the Architect from manufacturers' full range of available colors. B. Finish 1. Provide surfaces with a uniform finish. a. Matte; gloss range of 5 to 20. a. Semi gloss; gloss range of 20 to 50. b. Polished; gloss range of 50 to 80. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with fabricator present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected_ 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install components plumb, level and rigid, scribed to adjacent finishes, in accordance with approved shop drawings and product data. 1. Provide product in the largest pieces available. 2. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. a. Exposed joints/seams shall not be allowed. 3. Reinforce field joints with solid surface strips extending a minimum of 1 inch on either side of the seam with the strip being the same thickness as the top. 4. Cut and finish component edges with clean, sharp returns. 5. Rout radii and contours to template. 6. Anchor securely to base cabinets or other supports. 7. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches and clean entire surface. 3.03 REPAIR A. Repair or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Keep components clean during installation. B. Remove adhesives, sealants, and other stains. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS 0661 16-5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 07 11 13 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cavity wall dampproofing. B. Products installed, but not specified under this Section 1. Cavity Wall Insulation: Refer to Section 07 21 00. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 04 71 16 - Manufactured Masonry Units. 3. Section 07 21 00 - Insulation. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Dampproofing assembly consisting of dampproofing and rigid insulation as indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00, unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data, including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein, including VOC compliance and certification that products do not contain asbestos material. C. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Statement of qualifications for manufacturer and installer. 2. Statement of compliance for regulatory requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years' experience in the actual production of specified products. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years' experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus the following: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. 2. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system. BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 11 13 - 1 3. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with United States Clean Air Act of 1978, Maximum Volatile Organic Content (VOC), and the Maricopa County Bureau of Air Pollution Rules and Regulations, Rule 336. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Store products in a cool, dry place, out of direct sunlight. 2. Protect from the elements and from damage. 3. Store at a temperature of not less than 40 degrees F. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain ambient temperature above 40 degrees F during and 24 hours after installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products for Dampproofing: 1. Sonneborn Building Products: Hydrocide Semi -Mastic 700B. 2. W.R. Grace and Company. 3. Celotex Corporation. 4. Karnak Chemical Corporation: Karnak 83 Fibrated Spray -Solvent Semi -Mastic. 5. Euclid Chemical Company. 6. W.R. Meadows, Inc.: Sealmastic Solvent Type Semi -Mastic. 7. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation: TK-Hydromax 2001 Dampproof Coating. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Bituminous Dampproofing for Cavity Wall Applications (DAMP-1): Fiber -reinforced (non - asbestos) solvent -base, semi -mastic asphaltic coating design for sprayed application and conforming to the following: 1. ASTM D3823. 2. Fed. Spec. SS-A-694D. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION i . Surface Preparation: Surfaces shall be dry, sound, reasonably smooth, and free of projections. a. Fill depressions, holes, and cracks with a material compatible with the dampproofing. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING 0711 13-2 3.03 APPLICATION AT ABOVE GRADE CAVITY WALLS A. Spray apply bituminous dampproofing where indicated as DAMP-1 and on exterior face of interior wythe (within the cavity) of cavity walls. 1. Installer shall protect adjacent areas and surfaces from overspray and shall promptly and completely remove any overspray on surfaces not scheduled to receive DAMP-1. Expansion and Control Joints in Cavity Walls: On exterior face of interior wythe. 1. Install joints before application of dampproofing. 2. Prime substrate which is to receive flashing adhesive as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. 3. Install continuous strip of neoprene flashing centered over joint. Roll into adhesive to ensure bond. a. Ensure that center portion of neoprene flashing over joint (1-inch from each side of joint center line) is not bonded. Do not stretch flashing over joint. b. Trowel flashing adhesive continuously along each edge of neoprene flashing to provide watertight seal. 4. Terminate under horizontal waterproofing above. END OF SECTION BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0711 13 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 07 13 00 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install membrane waterproofing (WP-1). 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's recommendations for installation. B. Applicator's list of previous projects. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Minimum 2 years of experience on projects equivalent in size and complexity. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Handle carefully to prevent damage to materials during loading, transportation, and unloading. B. Store in temperature above 40 degrees F. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Minimum Ambient Application Temperature: 40 degrees F. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Guarantee against defective materials and workmanship for 5 years from completion of Work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. W.R. Grace Co., W.R. Meadows, Polyken 660 Technologies, Miradri, or Mirafi Inc., or approved equal. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING 071300-1 2.02 WATERPROOFING (WP-1) A. W.R. Grace Co., Bituthene Waterproofing System, or approved equal. Insulation protection board furnished and installed under this Section (INSUL-1) is specified in Section 07 21 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check that areas to receive waterproofing are clean, dry, and free of frost. B. Verify that voids and cracks are filled and that ridges and fins are removed leaving a smooth surface. C. Check that pipes, vents, drains, and other penetrations of the waterproofing are completed. D. Do not commence installation of bituminous membrane waterproofing until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Apply coating according to manufacturer's instruction. B. Apply protection board per manufacturer's direction over all waterproofing. C. Perimeter insulation may be used in lieu of protection board. 3.03 AREAS TO BE COVERED A. Below grade wall surfaces where indicated on the Drawings. B. Coverage shall extend from 2 inches below grade down to 12 inches below the lowest floor surface elevation, including all horizontal and footing and base slab surfaces. C. Width of coverage shall extend the horizontal length of each wall surface and shall have a 12-inch overlap at each inward or outward projecting corner. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Watch backfilling process to insure the materials are not damaged. END OF SECTION MEMBRANE WATERPROOFING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 13 00 - 2 SECTION 07 21 00 INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Perimeter Insulation. 2. Cavity Wall Insulation. 3. Unfaced Fiberglass Batt Insulation. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 3. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certification: Insulation manufacturer's approved if any adhesives to be used and their application procedure. B. Literature: Manufacturer's data on all materials to be used. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver to Site in manufacturer's wrapping or individual sheets that clearly identify the manufacturer, contents, brand name, and R-value. B. Storage: Store off the ground and protect against weather, condition, and damage. C. Handling: Remove damaged materials from Site and protect board insulation from prolonged sunlight. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Surfaces shall be dry. B. Temperatures shall meet adhesive recommendations. IIVJULF III-JIN © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0721 00-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INSULATION A. Perimeter insulation (INSUL-1): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Dow Building Solutions StyrofoamTM Square Edge. b. Owens Corning Foamular0 400. c. DiversiFoamTM Products CertiFoam 40. d. Pactiv Building Products, GreenGuard Insulation Board (Type VI 40 PSI). 2. Characteristics: a. ASTM C578-87, Type 4. b. Size: 48-inches by 9- inches. c. Thickness: 2-inches, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. d. Edges: Square. e. Rigid extruded polystyrene: 1.8 pcf typical (ASTM C303), 1.6 pcf minimum. f. Compressive Strength: 40 psi typical (ASTM D1621). g. Comply with ASTM C578, Type IV. Ccavily Wall Insulaliorl (INSUL-2): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Dow Building Solutions StyrofoamTM CavitymateTM b. Owens Corning Foamular® CW25. c. DiversiFoamTM Products CertiFoam 25 SE. d. Pactiv Building Products, GreenGuard Insulation Board (Type IV 25 PSI). 2. Characteristics: a. ASTM C578-87, Type 4. b. Size: 16-inches by 96-inches. c. Thickness: 2-inches: unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. d. Edges: Square. e. Rigid extruded polystyrene: 1.8 pcf typical (ASTM C303), 1.6 pcf minimum. f. Compressive Strength: 40 psi typical (ASTM D1621), 25 psi minimum. g. 5-Year Aged R-Value at 40 Degrees F: 5.4 per inch (ASTM C518). h. Water Vapor Transmission Rate: 0.8 perms (ASTM E96). 3. Joint Sealing Tape: Manufacturer's standard. C. Unfaced Fiber Glass Batt Insulation (INSUL-3): 1. Approved Manufacturers: a. Certainteed - Fiber Glass Building Insulation. b. Owens Corning - Fiber Glass Thermal Batts. c. Johns Manville - Formaldehyde-freeTm Fiber Glass Insulation. 2. Characteristics: a. ASTM C665, Type 1, and ASTM E136 (unfaced fiberglass baits). b. Obtain the R-Value shown on the Drawings. c. Width: To fit framing spacing, 24-inch maximum. 2.02 VAPOR BARRIER (VB) A. FS L-P-375 translucent polyethylene film, Type 1, Class 1, 6 mils thick. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 INSULATION 0721 00 - 2 2.03 ATTACHMENTS A. Adhesive: 1. H.B. Fuller - Max Bond or manufacturer approved materials for conditions encountered. B. Mechanical Fasteners: 1. Galvanized roofing nails with 3/8-inch diameter heads. 2. Crown Staples: 16-gauge galvanized 3/8-inch. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Rigid Board Insulation: 1. Verify that substrate is flat, dry, and free of honeycombs, fins, or foreign materials that will impede adhesive bond or damage. B. Fibrous Insulation: 1. Examine areas scheduled to receive insulation to insure protection against inclement weather and other hazards, and work of preceding trades is complete. C. Beginning installation means installer accepts conditions. 3.02 RIGID BOARD INSULATION INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Tightly fit each board together and stagger joints. 2. Adhesive Application: a. Apply adhesive to insulation in 1 1/2-inch diameter spheres on 12-inch centers. b. Press insulation in place using rocking action. 3. Mechanical Anchors: a. Use with wood framing. b. Fasteners shall be placed not less than 16-inches on center with a 1/2-inch penetration into substrate. 4. Fit insulation tightly around penetrations. B. Furred out walls shall be adhesive applied insulation. C. Perimeter Insulation: 1. Adhesive applied. 2. Remove insulation exposed above grade. 3.03 FIBROUS INSULATION A. General: 1. Fit insulation snugly between framing. 2. Maintain integrity of insulation over entire area to be insulated. 3. Insulate small areas between closely spaced framing members. 4. Carefully cut and fit insulation around pipes, conduits, and other obstructions. 5. Where pipes or conduit are located in stud spaces, place insulation between exterior wall and pipe, compress insulation where necessary. 6. Fit insulation in spaces between rough openings and door frames. 7. Mechanically fasten insulation when friction fitting can not be accomplished. INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0721 00 - 3 3.04 VAPOR BARRIER A. General: 1. Secure vapor barrier to the substrate with tape or a minimal number of staples. 2. Place on the warm side of all exterior wall and roof fibrous insulation and as otherwise required by the Drawings. 3. Patch and seal punctures, tears, or voids in the vapor barrier. 4. All splices shall have a 6-inch minimum lap joint. 3.05 CLEAN UP A. Remove and dispose of excess materials, litter, and debris. B. Leave work areas in a clean condition. END OF SECTION INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0721 00 - 4 SECTION 07 42 13 SHEET METAL SOFFIT PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed, prefinished soffit panels. 2. Fasteners. 3. Underlayment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 07 61 13 - Sheet Metal Roofing Panels. 4. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. D226 - Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00: l . Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for the materials specified. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate thickness and dimension of parts, flashing, and anchoring methods, and detail and location of joints; including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement. 3. Samples: a. 2 samples of each type of panel assembly, 12 inches by 12 inches minimum. b. 6 samples of each finish in color or colors selected, 3 inches by 5 inches minimum. c. Affidavit certifying that the material meets the requirements specified. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SHEET METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213-1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years of experience in manufacturing metal panels similar to those specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to panel manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Site in manufacturer's original crating, properly labeled for identification and installation purposes. Store materials in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage to panels and finishes. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Corilraclor shall warrant the materials to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by paint manufacturer's standard multi -year warranty. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Firestone Building Products Company. B. Peterson Aluminum Corporation. 2.02 SOFFIT PANEL TYPE A. UC-750 Soffit Panels, roll formed aluminum soffit panels. Provide vented panels at soffit locations as indicated on the Drawings. B. Comparable product from other approved manufacturers. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Aluminum Panels: ASTM B209, Aluminum Association Specification sheet 3003-H 14/3105- H 14 for painted finish. 1. Thickness: 0.032 inch. B. Form panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distribution or manufacturing defects. 1. Panel Depth: 0.50 inch. 2. Panel Width: 12 inches. C. Fabricate panels with an interlocking leg (male/female interlocking joint design). 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Concealed, non -corrosive, 5/8-inch self -tapping sheet metal screws for securing to metal substrate. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SHEET METAL SOFFIT PANELS 074213-2 016M9121010 A. Coil -Coated or Spray -Applied Fluorocarbon Resin: 1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Number of Coats: 2 coats. 3. Provide factory applied strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication and installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, free of ice and snow, and free from defects. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Obtain field measurements prior to completion of manufacturing and finishing. When field measurements are not possible, provide method of installation which will allow minor adjustment in the field. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panel system plumb, level, and true in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, final shop drawings, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and standard practices. B. Install perimeter trim before installing panels. C. Completed system shall be free from overbending, deforming, stretching. distortion, waves, and buckles. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair panels with minor damage. B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent undamaged panels. C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers. D. Remove protective film immediately after installation. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL SOFFIT PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 42 13 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 07 42 16 SHEET METAL CEILING PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed, prefinished ceiling panels. 2. Fasteners. 3. Trim. B. Related Sections: l . Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units. 2. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 3. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 06 17 30 - Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses. 5. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. D226 - Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00: l . Product Data: Manufacturer's ,product literature for the materials specified. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate thickness and dimension of parts, flashing, and anchoring methods, and detail and location of joints; including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement. 3. Samples: a. 2 samples of each type of panel assembly, 12 inches by 12 inches minimum. b. 6 samples of each finish in color or colors selected, 3 inches by 5 inches minimum. 4. Affidavit certifying that the material meets the requirements specified. SHEET METAL CEILING PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0742 16 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years' experience in manufacturing metal panels similar to those specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to panel manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Site in manufacturer's original crating, properly labeled for identification and installation purposes. Store materials in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage to panels and finishes. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant the materials to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by paint rrlunuruclurer's slunduid mulli-year wuiiunly. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Firestone Building Products Company. B. Peterson Aluminum Corporation. C. Berridge Industries, Inc. D. Other manufacturers seeking approval of their products must comply with requirements of Section 01 60 00 prior to Bidding. 2.02 PANEL TYPE (SMCP) A. Standard of Quality: UNA-CLAD UC-500 Flush Seam Panels, roll formed aluminum ceiling panels. B. Comparable product from other approved manufacturers listed in paragraph 2.01, 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Aluminum Panels: ASTM B209, Aluminum Association Specification sheet 3003-H14/3105- H14 for painted finish. 1. Thickness: 0.040 inch. B. Form panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distribution or manufacturing defects. 1. Panel Depth: i inch. 2. Panel Width: 12 inches. SHEET METAL CEILING PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0742 16 - 2 C. Fabricate panels with an interlocking leg (male/female interlocking joint design). 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Concealed, non -corrosive, 5/8-inch minimum length metal screws for securing to metal or wood substrate. B. Trim: Provide "J" channels with hemmed exposed edges of same material and color as the ceiling panels around perimeter of rooms scheduled to receive sheet metal ceiling panels. 2.05 FINISHES A. Coil -Coated or Spray -Applied Fluorocarbon Resin: 1. Colors: As selected by Owner from manufacturers standard colors. 2.06 NUMBER OF COATS: 2 COATS. 1. Provide factory applied strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication and installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, free of ice and snow, and free from defects. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Obtain field measurements prior to completion of manufacturing and finishing. When field measurements are not possible, provide method of installation which will allow minor adjustment in the field. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panel system plumb, level, and true in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, final shop drawings, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and standard practices. B. Completed system shall be free from overbending, deforming, stretching. distortion, waves, and buckles. SHEET METAL CEILING PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0742 16 - 3 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair panels with minor damage. B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent undamaged panels. C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers. D. Remove protective film immediately after installation. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL CEILING PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 42 16 - 4 SECTION 07 42 19 SHEET METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed, prefinished wall panels. 2. Fasteners. 3. Underlayment. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. B209 - Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 2. D226 - Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for the materials specified. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate thickness and dimension of parts, flashing, and anchoring methods, and detail and location of joints; including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement. 3. Samples: a. 2 samples of each type of panel assembly, 12 inches by 12 inches minimum. b. 6 samples of each finish in color or colors selected, 3 inches by 5 inches minimum. 4. Affidavit certifying that the material meets the requirements specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years' experience in manufacturing metal panels similar to those specified. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SHEET METAL WALL PANELS 074219-1 B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to panel manufacturer. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Site in manufacturer's original crating, properly labeled for identification and installation purposes. Store materials in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage to panels and finishes. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant the materials to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by paint manufacturer's standard multi -year warranty. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Firestone Building Products Company. B. Peterson Aluminum Corporation. C. Berridge Industries, Inc. D. Other manufacturers seeking approval of their products must comply with requirements of Section 01 60 00 prior to Bidding. 2.02 PANEL TYPE (SMWP-1) A. Standard of Quality: UNA-CLAD UC-500 Flush Seam Panels, roll formed aluminum ceiling/soffit panels. Provide vented panels at exterior soffit locations as indicated on the Drawings. B. Comparable product from other approved manufacturers listed in paragraph 2.01. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Aluminum Panels: ASTM B209, Aluminum Association Specification sheet 3003-H 14/3105- H 14 for painted finish. 1. Thickness: 0.040 inch. B. Form panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distribution or manufacturing defects. 1. Panel Depth: 1 inch. 2. Panel Width: 12 inches. C. Fabricate panels with an interlocking leg (male/female interlocking joint design). SHEET METAL WALL PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0742 19 - 2 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Concealed, non -corrosive, metal screws for securing to wood or metal substrate. B. Underlayment: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 15) asphalt -saturated roofing felt. 2.05 FINISHES A. Coil -Coated or Spray -Applied Fluorocarbon Resin: 1. Colors: As selected by Owner from manufacturers standard colors. 2. Number of Coats: 2 coats. 3. Provide factory applied strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication and installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, free of ice and snow, and free from defects. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Obtain field measurements prior to completion of manufacturing and finishing. When field measurements are not possible, provide method of installation which will allow minor adjustment in the field. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install panel system plumb, level, and true in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, final shop drawings, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and standard practices. B. Install starter and edge strips before underlayment is installed. C. Install underlayment over entire substrate to receive panel system in shingle fashion, lapping ends and edges 6 inches minimum. D. Completed system shall be free from overbending, deforming, stretching. distortion, waves, and buckles. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair panels with minor damage. B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent undamaged panels. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SHEET METAL WALL PANELS 074219-3 C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers. D. Remove protective film immediately after installation. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL WALL PANELS 0 2019 Stnntec 1 193804337 07 42 19 - 4 SECTION 07 61 13 SHEET METAL ROOFING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preformed, prefinished, snap seam roofing system. 2. Fasteners. 3. Underlayment. 4. Slip Sheet. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 07 42 13 - Sheet Metal Soffit Panels. 3. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 4. Section 07 72 53 - Ice and Snow Guards. 5. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. A653 - Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process. 2. D226 - Specification for Asphalt -Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing. B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA): 1. Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00: 1. Product Data: Manufacturer's product literature for the roofing specified. 2. Shop Drawings: Indicate thickness and dimension of parts, flashing, and anchoring methods, and detail and location of joints, including joints necessary to accommodate thermal movement. Indicate location of all roof penetrations, trade responsible for each roof penetration, and details showing extent of work at each penetration covered by this Section. 3. Samples a. 2 samples of each type of panel assembly, 12 inches by 12 inches minimum. b. 6 samples of each finish in color or colors selected, 3 inches by 5 inches minimum. 4. Affidavit certifying that the material meets the requirements specified. SHEET METAL ROOFING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0761 13 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 5 years of experience in manufacturing roofing panels similar to those specified. B. Installer Qualifications: Acceptable to roofing manufacturer. C. System shall meet the structural requirements of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) for Class 90 Wind Uplift Resistance. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original crating, properly labeled for identification and installation purposes. Store materials in accordance with panel manufacturer's recommendations. Handle materials carefully to avoid damage to panels and finishes. 1.07 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant the materials to be free of faults and defects in accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty shall be extended by paint manufacturer's standard multi -year warranty. The warranty shall be in writing and shall be signed by the manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Copper Sales, Inc.: UNA-CLAD UC-4, 1-1/2 inch standing seam panels. B. Peterson Aluminum Corporation: PAC -CLAD Snap -Clad panels. 2.02 ROOFING TYPE A. UNA-CLAD UC-4 Integral Standing Seam Roofing, roll formed steel roofing panels. 2.03 PANEL MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Steel Panels: ASTM A653, G90 (lock -forming quality), extra smooth, tension -leveled, galvanized steel, minimum spangle. 1. Thickness: 22 gauge. B. Form roofing panels in longest practical lengths, true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distribution or manufacturing defects. 1. Seam Height: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Seam Spacing: 18 inches maximum. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Concealed, non -corrosive, 3/4-inch self -tapping screws for plywood substrate. B. Underlayments: 1. Felts: ASTM D226, Type I (No. 30) asphalt -saturated roofing felt. © 2017 Stantec 1 193804337 SHEET METAL ROOFING 0761 13-2 2. Waterproof Membrane: ASTM D1970, self -adhering rubberized sheet membrane. 2.05 FINISHES A. Coil -Coated or Spray -Applied Fluorocarbon Resin: 1. Color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Number of Coats: 2 coats. 3. Provide factory applied strippable plastic film for protection during fabrication and installation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which materials are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Surfaces to receive panels shall be even, smooth, sound, clean, dry, free of ice and snow, and free from defects. C. Verify that roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, vents, and other penetrations through roof substrate are complete. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Obtain field measurements prior to completion of manufacturing and finishing. When field measurements are not possible, provide method of installation which will allow minor adjustment in the field. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install roofing system plumb, level, and true in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, final shop drawings, and SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and standard practices. B. Install starter and edge strips before underlayment is installed. C. Install waterproof membrane in accordance with manufacturer's instructions beginning at the roof edge and extending up roof slope to 24 inches inside of exterior wall interior face line (minimum), measured perpendicular to the floor. Lap ends and edges 6 inches. D. Install felt underlayment over remainder of roof substrate to receive roofing system in shingle fashion, lapping ends 12 inches and edges 6 inches minimum. Install slip sheet over underlayment in a similar fashion. E. Completed system shall be free from overbending, deforming, stretching, distortion, waves, and buckles. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair panels with minor damage. © 2017 Stantec 1 193804337 SHEET METAL ROOFING 0761 13-3 B. Remove panels damaged beyond repair and replace with new panels to match adjacent undamaged panels. C. Clean exposed panel surfaces promptly after installation in accordance with recommendations of panel and coating manufacturers. D. Remove protective film immediately after installation. END OF SECTION 61 ICCT METAL ROOFING © 2017 Stantec 1 193804337 0761 13 - 4 SECTION 07 62 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Sheet metal flashing and trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 07 42 13 - Sheet Metal Soffit Panels. 3. Section 07 61 13 - Sheet Metal Roofing Panels. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Install flashing according to standards of the National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA). B. References on the Drawings to NRCA details refer to "The NRCA Construction Details," published by the NRCA. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual (SMACNA). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Show size and configuration of all items. B. Literature: Manufacturer's data and samples of standard color selection. 1.05 GUARANTEE A. Guarantee materials and workmanship for 2 years as being watertight. B. Guarantee against color fade for 20 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Peterson Aluminum Corporation: PAC -CLAD. B. Firestone Metal Products: UNA-CLAD. SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 62 00 - 1 C. Berridge Industries, Inc. D. Or approved equal. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Panels: ASTM A653, 22 gauge, G90 (lock -forming quality), extra smooth, tension - leveled, galvanized steel, minimum spangle. 1. Thickness: 22 gauge. 2. Exposed Coil -Coated Finishes a. 2 Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70- percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat. b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 MECHANICAL FASTENERS A. All mechanical fasteners shall be of non -corroding material. All exposed fasteners shall match color of adjacent finished materials. 2.04 SEALANTS A. Metal manufacturer's recommended elastomeric sealant or mastic. Exposed sealant color shall match metal color. 2.05 FABRICATIONS A. Drip Edge and Fascia: 1. Provide corrlplele drip edge and fascia system, including riveted mitered corners, field -applied sealant, neoprene spacers, concealed splice plates, and hold-down cleats. 2. System shall conform to dimensions shown on the Drawings. B. Gutters: 1. Shop -fabricated from 22-gauge prefinished galvanized sheet metal. 2. Design: Profile as shown on the Drawings with 20-gauge straps at 3'-0" on center maximum. 3. Fabrication of gutter, joints, end caps, outlet tubes shall meet SMACNA requirements. C. Downspout: l . Shop -fabricated from 22-gauge prefinished galvanized sheet metal. 2. Straps and anchors of matching material 10 feet on center maximum. 3. Fasteners: As required. 4. Style: SMACNA Figure F (open faced). 5. Size: 4 inches by 6 inches. 6. End Condition: Flare out at 45-degree angle at 8-inches above grade. D. Pipe Flashing: 1. Flashing at other than hot pipes shall be molded boot furnished and installed. Boots shall be compatible with roofing system and approved by roofing system manufacturer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-2 L PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install all materials in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations to provide a watertight installation. B. Shop fabricate and install using recognized sheet metal processes. C. Leave a 1/2-inch joint between abutting parts for expansion at metal coping system. D. Seal all metal penetrations, including reglets, cover plates with sealant or mastic. E. Seal along joint between flashing and wall or roofing materials. END OF SECTION SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 62 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 07 72 53 ICE AND SNOW GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Ice and snow guards. B. Related Sections 1. Section 07 61 13 - Sheet Metal Roofing. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be Included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings required showing recommended spacing layout of ice and snow guards. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for 5 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. IceBlox, Inc. d.b.a. SnoBloxTm 1405 Brandton Road Mechanicsburg, PA 17055. B. Pre -approved equals. 2.02 ICE AND SNOW GUARDS A. Adhered to prefinished standing seam metal roof panels. 1. SnoBlox "Ace" snow guard (3 inch by 5 inch base) (Approx. 15 sq. in. bonding surface): a. Injection molded prime virgin grade polycarbonate polymer material construction containing a UV stabilizer to prevent damage from the ultraviolet rays of the sun: 1) Izod impact strength (notched) 17 ft.-lb./in. for a 3.2 mm thick specimen 2) (ASTM TEST D256). 3) Thermal Ratings: deflection temperature 270 degrees F (ASTM TEST D648). 4) Vicat softening temperature (Rate A) 315 degrees F. 5) (ASTM TEST D1525). 6) Brittleness temperature - 150 degrees F (ASTM TEST D746): a) General Electric "Lexan" Prime. ICE AND SNOW GUARDS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 72 53 - 1 b) Dow "Cailbre" Prime. c) Albis Prime. d) Or approved equal of prime quality (No Blends). b. Liquid adhesive 1) Surebond SB-190 sealant adhesive. B. Projected cross -sectional area perpendicular to roof slope with flat front facing toward the ridge: 1. SnoBlox "Ace" snow guard (Minimum 5 inch snow holding area at the TOP of unit). C. Clear or integrally colored per Architect requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Thoroughly clean metal roof surface area with Xylol or isopropyl alcohol where the ice and snow guard is to be installed. B. Contact rrlanufaclurer for rec urrimenclalians on ice and srww guuld luculiuns avid spacings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Spread adhesive evenly across the waffled base of the ice and snow guard by cutting the nozzle end in a broad sideways fashion. Make sure there are no voids, which could cause air pockets. B. Place ice and snow guard in position on the metal surface with the flat face pointing toward the ridge. C. Press down on the ice and snow guard applying light even pressure perpendicular to the roof. D. A squeeze out of adhesive around the entire perimeter should occur. Finger wipe (using a rubber glove) to achieve a clean smooth appearance and water tightness. END OF SECTION ICE AND SNOW GUARDS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 72 53 - 2 SECTION 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL I111;1>111111111INu�IP1VII_1i'1 A. Section Includes 1. Firestopping not specified elsewhere. B. Related Work 1. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 2. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation. 3. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation. 4. Section 26 05 05 - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Firestopping: A material or combination of materials to retain the integrity of time -rated construction by maintaining an effective barrier against the spread of flame, smoke, and gases. It shall be used in specific locations as follows: 1. Duct, cables, conduit, and piping penetrations through floor slab and through time - rated partitions or fire walls. 2. Penetrations of vertical service shafts. 3. Openings and penetrations in time -rated partitions or fire walls containing fire doors. 4. Locations where shown on the Drawings or specified in other Sections of the Specifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Submit manufacturer's product data, letter of certification or certified laboratory test that the material or combination of materials meet the requirements specified in ASTM E814 and are so classified in UL's Building Materials Directory. B. Materials shall meet and be acceptable for use by the state building code. C. Materials shall meet the requirements of NFPA 101-Life Safety Code and NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings, product data, certifications for each condition requiring firestopping, and manufacturer's installation instructions. FIRESTOPPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 84 00 - 1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver in original unopened containers or packaging bearing manufacturer's names, brand designations, and product descriptions. B. Store materials under cover and protected from damage. C. Do not use damaged materials. D. Provide proper ventilation if using solvents. E. Keep flammable materials away from sparks and flames. F. Use safety glasses and protective clothing. G. Comply with manufacturer's temperature requirements. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. 3M - Electrical Products Division. B. DOW Corning Fire Stop System. C. Standard Oil - Fyre Putty. 2.02 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS A. Firestopping materials/constructions shall constitute 1 or more of the following by 3M Brand, or approved equal: 1. Caulk: CP-25. 2. Putty:303. 3. Wrap/Strip: FS-195. 4. Composite Sheet: CS-195. 5. Penetrating Sealing System: 7900 Series. 6. Compatible materials with those above as certified by the manufacturer. B. Firestopping materials shall be asbestos -free and capable of maintaining an effective barrier against flame, smoke, and gases in compliance with the requirements of ASTM E814 and UL 1479. C. Materials shall be compatible with surrounding materials. D. On insulated pipe, the fire -rating classification must not require removal of the insulation. E. The rating of the firestops shall be at least 1 hour, but in no case less than the rating of the time -rated floor or wall assembly. FIRESTOPPIrac © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 84 00 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to be in contact with firestopping materials free of dirt, grease, oil, loose materials, rust, or other substances that may affect proper fitting or the required fire resistance. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install firestopping materials indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an effective smoke barrier. C. Unless protected from possible loading or traffic, install firestopping materials in floors having void openings of 4 inches or more to support the same floor load requirements. D. Fill all holes, penetrations, and sleeves in all fire -rated assemblies, unless included in other Sections of the Specifications. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Examine firestopping areas to ensure proper installation prior to concealing or enclosing firestopped areas. B. Areas of work shall remain accessible until inspection by the applicable code authorities. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Clean up spilled products. B. Cut and trim cured foam with sharp knife. C. Remove equipment, materials, and debris leaving area in undamaged, clean condition. END OF SECTION FIRESTOPPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 84 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 07 92 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior and interior sealants. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. 3. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows. 4. Section 08 56 19 - Pass-Thru Windows. 5. Section 08 91 19 - Metal Wall Louvers. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings Consistent with Section 01 33 00 and Including: 1. Three 6-inch long bead of each color of caulking to be used. 2. Three 6-inch pieces of each size of backing material to be used. 3. Copies of manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and installation instructions for caulking, backer rod, and accessory materials. 4. Manufacturer's published data, letter of certification, or certified test laboratory report that each material complies with requirements and is intended for application shown. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualification: Minimum 2 years of experience in applying sealants and approved by sealant manufacturer. B. Mock -Up 1. Prepare sample application in location directed by Architect. 2. Approval of the mock-up must be obtained from Architect. 3. Accepted mock-up shall constitute standard of acceptance for remaining Work. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, tightly sealed containers or unopened packages with manufacturer's name, labels, product identification, and lot numbers where appropriate. JOINT SEALANTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 92 00 - 1 B. Store materials out of weather in original containers or unopened packages as recommended by manufacturer. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. The compounds shall be applied within an air temperature range of 40 degrees F to 80 degrees F to clean and dry substrate, unless manufacturer's literature and procedure allows for an exception. 1.08 GUARANTEE A. Provide caulking manufacturers standard 10-year material guarantee. B. Guarantee workmanship against leakage for 2 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - CAULKING A. Tremco, Dymeric, Sikaflex-2C NS/SL, or approved equal - Gcncral Applications. B. Mameco Vulkem 116 One -Part High Performance Elastomer - Submersion Service. C. Fire Barrier Caulk: 3M Brand. D. Colors: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. Colors may be different for every type of material receiving caulk. 2.02 MATERIAL A. Sealant Materials 1. Vertical Surfaces a. For Interior Joints Up to 2 Inches Wide: 1-part acrylic terpolymer base type "Mono" conforming to ASTM C834. b. For Exterior Joints and Joints Larger Than 2 Inches Wide: 2-parts polytremdyne base type "Dymeric" conforming to ASTM C920. c. Caulking Compound for All Interior Joints Not Subject to Movement: Acrylic type which does not contain ingredients that will stain masonry or corrode metals conforming to ASTM C834. 2.03 BACKER ROD A. Material: Closed cell polyethylene ethafoam, or approved equal, compatible with sealant. Sof-rod by applied extrusion technology will be accepted for horizontal locations. B. Sized and shaped to control depth of sealant and to provide 20-percent to 50-percent compression upon insertion. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Joint Cleaner: Caulking manufacturer's recommended cleaner for condition encountered. JOINT SEALANTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 07 92 00 - 2 B. Primer: Manufacturer's recommended primer for various substation substrates encountered. C. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive adhesive polyethylene tape. D. Masking Tape: Pressure sensitive adhesive paper tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine joints to be caulked for construction defects which would adversely affect execution of Work. B. Do not start Work until conditions are satisfactory and construction defects have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Wire brush, grind, sandblast, solvent wash, or prime per manufacturer's recommendations any surface containing release agents, water proofing, dust, loose mortar or laitance, paint or finishes. B. Cleaning: Clean joint surfaces using joint cleaner as necessary to be free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, rust, lacquers, laitance, release agents, moisture, or other matter which might adversely affect adhesion of caulking. C. Masking: Mask areas adjacent to joints. D. Priming: Apply primer following manufacturer's instructions. 3.03 APPLICATION A. Install backer rod material in new and existing joints using blunt instrument to avoid puncturing. Do not twist backer rod while installing. Install backer rod so that joint depth is 50 percent of joint width, but a minimum of 1 /4 inch deep. B. Apply caulking in new joints using pressure gun with nozzle cut to fit joint width. Make sure caulking is deposited in uniform, continuous beads without gaps or air pockets. C. Tool joints to required configuration within 10 minutes of caulking application. If masking materials are used, remove immediately after tooling. D. Verify sealant type as required in other Sections. E. Apply sealant as shown on the Drawings and on new or modified areas as follows: l . Perimeter of new sound attenuated partitions. 2. Around the bottom of all interior door frames where metal abuts or contacts concrete. 3. Around openings in walls, ceilings, and floors at conduits, pipes, ducts, and similar items (both sides of walls, ceiling, and floors). Apply Fire Barrier caulk at all such penetrations through rated walls. 4. All areas where dissimilar wall materials abut or adjoin. 5. Any other places shown on the Drawings. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 JOINT SEALANTS 079200-3 F. Caulking is not to be painted. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess materials adjacent to joints by mechanical means or with xylol (xylene) or mineral spirits as work progresses to eliminate evidence of spillage or damage to adjacent surfaces. Note: When using flammable solvents, avoid heat, sparks, and open flames. Always provide adequate ventilation and follow all precautions listed on solvent container label. B. Leave finished work in neat, clean condition with no evidence of spillovers onto adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 JOINT SEALANTS 079200-4 SECTION 08 11 00 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Hollow metal doors and frames. B. Related Sections 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 3. Section 08 70 00 - Finish Hardware. 4. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURE A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector shall have a minimum 2 years' experience installing stock hollow metal work. B. Regulatory Agency Requirements 1. Must comply with applicable Minnesota State Building Code requirements. C. Manufacturer shall be a NAAMM member and shall comply with Standard Steel Door and Frame ANSI/SDI 100 (latest edition) Specifications. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Manufacturer's descriptive literature and installation instructions. C. Shop Drawings: Illustrations and schedule of door and frame sizes, types, materials, construction, finishing, anchoring, accessories, and preparation for installing hardware. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver all products in cartons and palletized. B. Inspect products upon delivery for damage. C. Store products under cover and on wood blocks. D. Provide 1/4-inch space between stacked doors. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081100-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES A. Material: Pressed steel, hot rolled, pickled and annealed steel, hot dipped zinc coated steel complying with ASTM A653 and A60. 1. Exterior Door Frames: 14-gauge. 2. Interior Door Frames: 16-gauge. Reinforcement: l . Hinges: 3/16-inch by 1-1 /2 inch by 9-inch steel plate, drilled and tapped at factory for mortised hinges. See hardware schedule for quantity and size of hinges. 2. Lock Strike: 3/16-inch by 1-1 /2 inch by 3-inch steel plate, drilled and tapped at factory for mortised lock strike plate. 3. Surface Closer: 12-gauge plate, factory welded. 4. Steel Cover Boxes: Provide in back of cutouts for hardware, minimum 28-gauge steel. C. Wall Anchors: 1. Anchors to be a maximum of 30 inches on center or as shown on details. D. Accessories: 1. Floor Clips: Minimum 12-gauge angle clips, drilled for anchor bolts, welded to bottom of each jamb. 2. Silencers: 3 required on stop jamb of single swing frames, 2 required on head of frame for pair of swing doors. Fabrication: l . General: Joints for frames shall be mitered through formed stops and continuously arc - welded for full depth and width of frame. Contact edges shall be closed tight and all welds on exposed surfaces dressed smooth and flush. Finished work shall be strong and rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects. 2. Steel Spreaders: Provide temporary steel spreaders, fastened across bottom of frames. Erector Note: Where construction permits concealment, leave spreaders in place after installation; otherwise, remove after frame is set and anchored. Erector to check opening width at floor line at mid -point and head to hold opening width constant when setting frames. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS A. Material: Commercial quality cold -rolled furniture steel free of scale, pitting, or other surface defects. Face sheets for all doors shall be hot -dipped zinc -coated steel that complies with ASTM A653 and A60. 1. Exterior Doors: Minimum 16-gauge steel with 1-1/2 lbs. density polyurethane. 2. Interior Doors: Minimum 18-gauge steel with full honeycomb core of phenolic resin - impregnated Kraft paper. Hardware Reinforcement: l . General: Door shall be mortised, reinforced, and mortise hardware reinforcements drilled and tapped at factory for templated hardware, all in accordance with approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Where surface mounted hardware is to be applied, door shall have welded on reinforcing plates only; all drilling and tapping for surface -mounted hardware shall be a field operation by installation personnel. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 11 00 - 2 2. Reinforcement Gauges: Hinges - 3/16 inch by 1-1/2 inches by 9 inches; Lock Front - 3/16-inch by 1-1/2 inches by 3 inches; Cylindrical Lock Reinforcement Unit- 14-gauge; Closer - 12-gauge - 3-1/2 inches, Channel 14 inches long. C. Fire Rated Doors: Materials and construction of fire rated doors shall be as required to meet Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label classification for opening. Fire rated doors shall bear U/L label for class and rating required. D. Fabrication: 1. General: Hollow metal doors shall be fully welded of types and sizes shown on Drawings, seamless construction with no visible seams or joints on faces or vertical edges. All doors shall be strong, rigid, and neat in appearance, free from warpage or buckle. All doors shall maintain a flatness tolerance of plus or minus 0.03 inch in a diagonal direction. 2. Construction: Construct doors and panels of cold -rolled steel face sheets. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be closed with a continuous recessed steel channel not less than 16-gauge, extending full width of door and spot-welded to both faces. Exterior doors shall have an additional flush filler channel at top edges and where required for attachment of weather stripping, a flush filler also at their bottom edges. Openings shall be provided in bottom closure of exterior doors to permit escape of entrapped moisture. 2.03 SHOP PAINTING A. Doors and frames shall be leveled and ground smooth. B. Apply mineral filler to eliminate weld scars and other blemishes. C. Give factory coat of rust -inhibitive metal primer. 2.04 SEALANTS A. Joint sealants shall be 1-part acrylic terpolymer based type "Mono" conforming to ASTM C834. B. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall ensure that frame openings correspond to dimensions of frame furnished in all cases. B. Surfaces to contact frame must be smooth and free of debris. C. Do not proceed with installation until dimensions and conditions of openings are satisfactory. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install all doors according to ANSI/SDI A250.1 1. B. Install all hardware as noted on the door schedule or listed in this Specification. METAL DOORS AND FRAMES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 11 00 - 3 C. Install all hardware according to SDI 107. D. Sealant shall be applied where frames abut walls, apply neat even line. 3.03 ANCHORS A. Use anchors as recommended by the manufacturer for the conditions encountered. B. The number and spacing of anchors shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the conditions encountered, but shall not be less than: 1. Frames up to 7-6": 3 anchors per jamb. 2. Frames over 7'-6": 5 anchors per jamb. C. Anchors that pierce the frames shall be countersunk. D. After the frame is properly positioned and tightly anchored, the countersunk anchors shall be covered with auto body filling compound and sanded smooth. When the filling compound has fully cured, the jambs shall be sanded smooth and immediately coated with primer to prevent absorption of moisture into the filling compound. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Attach frames square, plumb, and true to line with adjacent construction. B. Installation of all doors shall meet the following tolerances: 1. Frames shall not deviate from the horizontal and vertical construction by any amount greater than: a. Top to Bottom: 1/4-inch over entire frame height. b. Jamb to Jamb: 1/8-inch over entire width of single leaf door frames. c. 1/4-inch over entire width of double leaf door frames. 2. Doors shall not deviate from the horizontal and vertical planes of the frames in which they are installed by any amount greater than: a. Top to Bottom: 1/8-inch over entire door height. b. Jamb to Jamb (Back edge to front edge): 1/1 6-inch over width of door leaf. 3.05 ADJUSTMENTS A. Adjust all doors to ensure ease of operation before leaving the Site. Adjust moving parts for smooth operation. B. Adjust all door closers to shut doors tight against jambs. 3.06 CLEANING A. Remove dirt and excess sealants or glazing compound from exposed surfaces. B. Touch up marred or abraded surfaces to match original finish. C. Remove debris from Site. END OF SECTION n 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081100-4 SECTION 08 31 00 ACCESS PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Work Includes: 1. Access panels. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include size, type, finish, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. B. Literature: Manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.04 DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Package, handle, deliver, and store access panels at Site in a manner that will avoid damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Access Panel l . AP-1: Equal to Babcock -Davis, a Cierra Products Company, BIW Series for installation in gypsum board ceiling (Standard of Quality). 2. AP-2: Equal to Babcock -Davis, a Cierra Products Company, BXTM Series for installation in concrete block (Standard of Quality). 3. Other Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Elmdor/Stoneman Manufacturing Company. c. Or approved equal. B. Size 1. AP-1: 24 inches by 30 inches with 1-hour minimum fire -resistive rating. 2. AP-2: 24 inches by 24 inches. C. Finish: Phosphate dipped and prime coated. D. Lock: Knurled knob/key operated latch bolt. ACCESS PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0831 00 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that the openings are correctly dimensioned to receive the door. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install per manufacturer's directions. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust lock so it will operate smoothly. B. Remove all related debris. C. Remove and replace panels or frames which are bowed warped or damaged. END OF SECTION ACCESS PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 3100 - 2 SECTION 08 33 23 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOOR PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Electric operated overhead insulated rolling doors. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 2. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 3. Section 04 71 16 - Manufactured Masonry Units. 4. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications. 5. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 6. Section 08 70 00 - Finish Hardware. 7. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. 8. Division 26. Electrical wiring and conduit, fuses, disconnect switches, connection of operator to power supply, and installation of keyed control station and wiring. C. Products That May Be Supplied, But Are Not Installed Under This Section: 1. Control Station. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURE A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Design Requirements: 1. Wind Loading: a. Supply doors to withstand up to 20 psf design wind load. 2. Cycle Life: a. Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per day maximum, and an overall maximum of 50,000 operating cycles for the life of the door. 3. Seismic Performance: a. Provide manufacturer's seismic calculations confirming ASCE7-10 4. Insulated Door Slat Material Requirements: a. Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84. b. Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating up to 30 for the curtain and up to 32 for the entire assembly, as tested per ASTM E90 and based on testing a complete, operable assembly. c. Minimum R-value of 8.0 (U-value of 0.125) as calculated using the ASH RAE Handbook of Fundamentals. d. Insulation to be CFC Free with an Ozone Depletion Potential (ODP) rating of zero. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOOR 083323-1 5. Safety: a. Chain operated doors shall be designed so that the door immediately stops upward or downward travel and is maintained in a stationary position when the hand chain is released by user. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Reference Section 01 33 00; submit the following items: l . Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings: Include special conditions not detailed in Product Data. Show interface with adjacent work. 3. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Provide manufacturer ISO 9001:2008 registration. b. Provide manufacturer and installer qualifications - see below. c. Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. 4. Closeout Submittals: a. Operation and Maintenance Manual. b. Certificate stating that installed materials comply with this Specification. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: ISO 9001:2008 registered and a minimum of 5-years' experience in producing doors of the type specified. 2. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's approval. 1.06 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Reference Section 01 60 00. B. Follow manufacturer's instructions. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Standard Warranty: 2-years from date of shipment against defects in material and workmanship. B. Maintenance: Submit for owner's consideration and acceptance of a maintenance service agreement for installed products. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers and Model Numbers: 1. CornellCookson: Model ESD20. 2. Clopay Building Products: Model CESD20. 3. Overhead Door Company: Model 610. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Curtain: 1. Fabrication: INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOOR © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 33 23 - 2 a. Slat Material: No. 6F, (Listed Exterior/Interior): 1) Aluminum/Aluminum: 0.040-inch (1.016 mm) aluminum. b. Insulation: 7/8-inch (22 mm) foamed -in -place, closed cell urethane. c. Total Slat Thickness: 15/16-inch (24 mm). d. Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84. e. R-value:8.0. f. STC Rating: Up to 32 for the curtain and up to 22 for the entire assembly, as tested per ASTM E90 and based on testing a complete, operable assembly. 2. Exterior Slat Finish: a. 22-gauge galvanized steel prime coat painted to receive field -applied painted finish FM-3. 3. Interior Slat Finish: a. 22-gauge galvanized steel prime coat painted to receive field -applied painted finish FM-1. B. Endlocks: Fabricate interlocking sections with high strength nylon endlocks on alternate slats each secured with two 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) rivets. Provide windlocks as required to meet specified wind load. 1. Nylon: Required up to 21'-5" width (DBG - Distance Between Guides). C. Bottom Bar 1. Configuration: a. Insulated Bottom Bar: Reinforced extruded aluminum interior face with full depth insulation and exterior skin slat to match curtain material and gauge. Minimum fl- inches tall by 1-1/16 inch thickness. 2. Finish: a. Exterior: Match slats. D. Guides: 1. Fabrication: a. Minimum 3/16-inch (4.76 mm) galvanized steel angles. Provide windlock bars of same material when windlocks are required to meet specified wind load. Top of inner and outer guide angles to be flared outwards to form bellmouth for smooth entry of curtain into guides. Provide removable guide stoppers to prevent over travel of curtain and bottom bar. 2. Finish: a. Painted, color as selected by Architect. Counterbalance Shaft Assembly: 1. Barrel: Steel pipe capable of supporting curtain load with maximum deflection of 0.03 inches per foot (2.5 mm per meter) of width. 2. Spring Balance: Oil -tempered, heat -treated steel helical torsion spring assembly designed for proper balance of door to ensure that maximum effort to operate will not exceed 25 Ibs (110 N). Provide wheel for applying and adjusting spring torque. F. Brackets: 1. Fabricate from minimum 3/16-inch (5 mm) steel plate with permanently lubricated ball or roller bearings at rotating support points to support counterbalance shaft assembly and form end closures. a. Finish: INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOOR © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 33 23 - 3 1) Hot -dip Galvanized: ASTM A 123, Grade 85 zinc coating, hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. 1. Minimum 0.040-inch (1.016 mm) aluminum with reinforced top and bottom edges. Provide minimum 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) steel intermediate support brackets as required to prevent excessive sag. a. Finish: 1) Aluminum: Mill finish. H. Weatherstripping: 1. Bottom Bar: a. Bottom Bar, Motor Operated Doors: Sensing/weather edge with neoprene astragal extending full width of door bottom bar. 2. Guides: Replaceable vinyl strip on guides sealing against fascia side of curtain. 3. Hood: Neoprene/rayon baffle to impede air flow above coil. 4. Lintel Seal: Nylon brush seal fitted at door header to impede air flow. 2.03 OPERATION A. Motor - Standard Use - Model MG (Industrial Duty Gear Head) Operator: The operator must not extend above or below the door coil when mounted front -of -coil. Rated for a maximum of 20 cycles per hour (not to be used for consecutive hours) UL listed, Totally Enclosed Non -Ventilated gear head operator(s) rated 1 /3 HP as recommended by door manufacturer for size and type of door, 120Volts, Single -Phase. Provide complete with electric motor and factory pre -wired motor control terminals, maintenance free solenoid actuated brake, emergency manual chain hoist, and control station. Motor shall be high starting torque, industrial type, protected against overload with an auto-lesel thermal sensing device. Primary speed reduction shall be heavy-duty, lubricated gears with mechanical braking to hold the door in any position. Operator shall be equipped with an emergency manual chain hoist assembly that safely cuts operator power when engaged. A disconnect chain shall not be required to engage or release the manual chain hoist. Operator drive and door driven sprockets shall be provided with #50 roller chain. Provide an integral Motor Mounted Interlock system to prevent damage to door and operator when mechanical door locking devices are provided. Operator shall be capable of driving the door at a speed of 8 to 9-inches per second (20 to 23 cm/sec). Fully adjustable, driven linear screw type cam limit switch mechanism shall synchronize the operator with the door. The electrical contractor shall mount the control station and supply the appropriate disconnect switch, all conduit and wiring per the overhead door wiring instructions. B. Control Station: 1. Flush mounted: "Open/Close" key switch with "Stop" push button; NEMA 1 B. C. Control Operation: 1. Constant Contact to Close: Fail-safe, UL325-2010 Compliant Entrapment Protection for Motor Operation. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Locking: 1. None. INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOOR © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 33 23 - 4 I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION r- A. Examine substrates upon which work will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings. rB. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates. C. Commencement of work by installer is acceptance of substrate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: Install door and operating equipment with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers and supports. B. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust doors for ease of operation, free from warp, twist, or distortion. r- 3.04 CLEANING I A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.- B. Remove surplus materials and debris from the site. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative. B. Instruct Owner's Representative in maintenance procedures. END OF SECTION INSULATED ROLLING SERVICE DOOR © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 33 23 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Aluminum windows. B. Related Sections l . Section 03 45 00 - Architectural Precast Concrete. 2. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 3. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 5. Section 08 81 00 - Glazing. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURE A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Exterior Window System: 2-piece low rise framing system with non-metallic thermal isolator designed to accept 1 inch glazing material. 1. Profiles: 1-3/4 inch wide by 6 inches deep. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data, including the following: l . Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Certified test reports clearly indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein. 4. Glass warranty, including manufacturer's written certification of compatibility between glazing material and hermetic seal. 5. Sealant manufacturer's data on surface preparation and application for each type of sealant proposed. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware and installation procedures, plus the following specific requirements: 1. Elevate entire openings of framing system. 2. Indicate jamb, head, and sill conditions and specific anchorage details and spacing for each situation. 3. Large scale details of sills, weep system, meeting rail interlock, sash glazing. ALUMINUM WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0851 13 - 1 4. Custom extrusions. 5. Glazing details. D. Color Samples: 2 sets of samples for color selection of verification for the following: 1. Frame color and finish. E. Quality Control Submittals: 1. Statement of qualifications. 2. Test Reports and Design Data: Laboratory test reports and redlined design charts attached to letter from manufacturer indicating compliance with requirements specified herein. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. B. Product Qualifications: 1. Fixed Units: Performance requirements as outlined in ANSI/AMA GA-001, except for special specified herein: a. Air infiltration Tested at 6.24 PSF 1) Laboratory test data not to exceed 0.06 CFM/square foot. 2) Actual field tests not to exceed 0.09 CFM/square foot. b. Water resistance tested at 8.0 PSF = No leakage. c. Uniform Load Structural Rest 1) Maximum L/175 deflection at design load (30 PSF positive and negative). 2) No permanent set at 150 percent of design load (45 PSF positive and negative). 1.06 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Contractor/Manufacturer/Installer shall stand behind installed system for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against all the conditions indicated below and when notified in writing from the Owner, Contractor/Manufacturer/ Installer shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct said deficiencies: l . Failure of hermetic seal. 2. Stress breakage resulting from improper framing design. 3. Breakage resulting from chipped or damaged edge conditions from original installation or thermal stresses. 4. Faulty material and workmanship. 5. Water and air infiltration in excess of performance requirements specified herein. 6. Sealant failure, both around perimeter and within window frame. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products for the Exterior Window System: 1. Kawneer, an Alcoa Company: EnCOREO. 2. Comparable products from the following manufacturers: a. Arch Aluminum and Glass Co., Inc.: Amarlite NRG Framing System. b. CMI Architectural Products, Inc.: CTS. c. Tubelite, Inc.: VersaThermTm Framing. d. Or approved equal. ALUMINUM WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0851 13 - 2 B. Clarification Note: Drawings and Installation Specifications are based on manufacturer's proprietary literature from Kawneer Company, Inc. Other specified manufacturers shall comply with the minimum levels of material and detailing indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Primary Billet conforming to ASTM B221. 1. Alloy and temper recommended by extrusion manufacturer for strength, corrosion resistances, and application of required finish. B. Thermal Barrier: High density, non-conductive material separating inside and outside portions of both frames and sash sections: 1. Design to provide minimum Condensation Resistance Factor (CRF) specified herein. 2.03 CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS A. Frames: Extrude members in single lengths with pour -in -place thermal barrier and wall thickness as determined by manufacturer to resist loads: l . Join corners using stainless steel fasteners and small joint epoxy adhesive/sealant to form a watertight hairline joint. Reinforce corner construction with aluminum gusset blocks and chemically weld in place. 2. Field assembled corner units and field applied sealants within frame construction is not permitted. 3. Design frames to allow for thermal expansion and contraction within frame construction. Provisions to allow for expansion within glazing material is not acceptable. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners Within Frame Assembly: Series 300 stainless steel. B. Perimeter Anchors: Aluminum, stainless steel, or other materials recommended by manufacturer and compatible with frame members, trim, hardware, and anchors. C. Fasteners: Aluminum, stainless steel, or zinc plated steel complying with ASTM Al 64. D. Glazing Gaskets: EPDM elastomeric extrusions specially designed for application. E. Sealant Within Frame System: As recommended by manufacturer and specially designed for use in framing/window wall applications. F. Sealant for Installation Around Frames: Provide under this Section in compliance with requirements specified under Section 07 92 00: 1. Provide low -modulus silicone unless otherwise indicated. 2. Verify compatibility with sealants used in adjacent construction. G. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat. H. Glass Types: Provide under this Section in compliance with requirements specified under Section 08 81 00. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 0851 13-3 Glazing Gaskets: Resilient closed -cell sponge neoprene. J. Weatherstrip Material: Extruded sponge neoprene complying with ASTM C509. K. Weep Hole Filter Material: 6 inches long, 30 to 40 ppi open cell, reticulated, polyurethane foam block with PVC coating, sized to install at 30-percent to 50-percent compression. L. Foam Insulation: Provide under this Section. M. Anchors: Steel or aluminum size and configuration as determined by manufacturer for design loading and attachment requirements. N. Slip Shim Pads: As recommended by frame manufacturer. O. Fabric Flashing: 30-mil neoprene or EPDM. 2.05 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frames allowing for minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of ussernbly, yet enabling installation. B. Rigidly fit and weld joints and corners. Accurately fit and secure corners tight. Make corner joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Seal corner joints with sealant. C. Develop drainage holes with moisture pattern to exterior. D. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Do not bridge thermal barrier with anchoring devices. E. Provide internal reinforcement in mullions with galvanized steel members to maintain rigidity. 2.06 FACTORY FINISH A. Anodic Coating: Clean exposed surfaces with caustic etch and anodize to an Architectural Class 1 coating: 1. Color Anodic Coating: Clean exposed surfaces with medium matte caustic etch and anodize to an Architectural Class 1 coating (thickness not less than 0.7 mil). a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of available anodic coating colors. B. Furnish manufacturer's matching touch-up anodic coating for touch-up of fasteners and abrasions. C. Thoroughly clean, etch, and give metal surfaces a chromate conversion pretreatment before application of the primer coat. D. Apply a heavy coating of bituminous paint where aluminum contacts masonry, concrete, mortar, plaster, or a dissimilar metal. ALUMINUM WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0851 13 - 4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed, and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion: 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Erect frames plumb, true, and square in a substantial manner with concealed fasteners. Anchor securely without distortion of the frames. C. Install sills and related aluminum trim. Set in bed of mastic. D. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame to structure- E. Apply 1 coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar metal. F. Align frame plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. G. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Install flashings. H. Fill perimeter voids in window frame channel with polyethylene backer material or foam insulation. I. Inject sprayed foam insulation in shim spaces at perimeter to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. Install Related Trim and Closure Panels 1. Perimeter Sealants: Clean and prime joints as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. Install sealant and related backing material around perimeter of windows in compliance with window and sealant manufacturer's instructions and the requirements of Section 07 92 00. 3. Apply sealant completely filling the joint and tool smooth to insure full contact with adjacent surfaces. 4. Strike off excess material. 5. Finished bead shall be flush with the adjoining surfaces. K. Completed installation shall be water and weathertight. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt form corners. Wipe surface clean. ALUMINUM WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0851 13 - 5 C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of'windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Touch up factory finish. E. Clean glass of preglazed units promptly after installation of windows; comply with requirements of Section 08 81 00 for cleaning and maintenance. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required to ensure system will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0851 13 - b SECTION 08 52 13 ALUMINUM SLIDING SERVICE WINDOWS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Aluminum, heavy-duty commercial sliding service windows as indicated in drawings and in sections. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design Wind Loads 1. When tested in accordance with cited test procedures, windows shall meet or exceed the following performance criteria, as well as those indicated in AAMA 101 /I.S.2 for Heavy Commercial (HC) Performance Class windows, Performance Grade 65 (HC65) unless otherwise noted herein. 2. Air Test Performance Requirements a. Air infiltration maximum 0.3 cfm per square foot at 6.24 psf pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. 3. Water Test Performance Requirements a. No uncontrolled water leakage at 10.00 psf static pressure differential, with water application rate of 5 gallons/hr/sq ft when tested in accordance with ASTM E331. 4. Structural Test Performance Requirements a. Uniform Load Deflection Test 1) No deflection of any unsupported span L of test unit (framing rails, muntins, mullions, etc.) in excess of L/175 at both a positive and negative load of 65 psf (design test pressure) when tested in accordance with ASTM E330. 2) Structural reinforcing that is not standard on units being furnished is not allowed. b. Uniform Load Structural Test 1) Unit to be tested at 1.5 x design test pressure (97.5 psf), both positive and negative, acting normal to plane of wall in accordance with ASTM E330. 2) No glass breakage; permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or anchors; damage to make windows inoperable; or permanent deformation of any main frame or ventilator member in excess of 0.2% of its clear span. B. Life Cycle Testing: 1. When tested in accordance with AAMA 910-93, there is to be no damage to fasteners, hardware parts, support arms, activating mechanisms or any other damage that would cause the window to be inoperable at the conclusion of testing. Air infiltration and water resistance tests shall meet the primary performance requirements specified. ALUMINUM SLIDING SERVICE WINDOWS 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 52 13 - 1 C. Thermal Transmittance (U-Value): l . Whole window U-Value based on NFRC 100 test sizes and calculated by using NFRC approved versions of Windows and Therm software. Thermal transmittance (U-Value) shall not exceed 0.49 BTU/hr/sf/degF for Horizontal Sliders when calculated using a COG glass U-value of .24 BTU/hr/sf/degF. Glazing must be supported by Manko Window Systems, Inc. using EdgeTech "TriSeal Superspacer" to meet these requirements. D. Solar Heat Gain (SHGC): 1. Whole window SHGC Value based on NFRC 200 test sizes and calculated by using NFRC approved versions of Windows and Therm software. SHGC shall not exceed 0.21 for Horizontal Sliders when calculated using a Center of Glass (COG) SHGC of .26. E. Condensation Resistance (CR) 1. Condensation resistance (CR) based on NFRC 500 test sizes and calculated by using NFRC approved Windows and Therm software, shall not be less than 35 for Horizontal Sliders when calcula led using a COG glass U- value of .24 BTU/hr/sf/degF. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements 1. Provide all submittals in a timely manner to meet the required construction completion schedule. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings must be prepared wholly by the window manufacturer, or a qualified engineering services firm under the direction of the manufacturer. Shop drawings for pre-engineered configurations may be prepared by installers authorized per 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE. 2. Provide design details along with bid proposals to define system aesthetic and functional characteristics. 3. Provide three photocopied sets of shop drawings, including half size details of all necessary conditions. C. Samples 1. Components: Submit samples of anchors, fasteners, hardware, assembled corner sections and other materials and components as requested by Architect. 2. Finish: Submit color samples for Architect's approval as requested. D. Test Reports and Calculations 1. Submit certified independent laboratory test reports verifying compliance with all test requirements of 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS as requested by Architect. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Upon request, the window manufacturer will provide written confirmation that the installer is authorized to install window products to be used on this project. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading ALUMINUM SLIDING SERVICE WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 52 13 - 2 1. Materials will be packed, loaded, shipped, unloaded, stored and protected in accordance with AAMA CW-10. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field measurements: Check opening by accurate field measurement before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delay of work A. Aluminum Window Warranty 1. Products: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window manufacturer, for a period of 2 years (10 years for insulated glass seal failure) from the date of manufacture, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non- compliance with applicable specification requirements and industry standards, which results in premature failure of the windows, finish, factory -glazed glass, or parts, outside of normal wear. a. In the event that windows or components are found defective, manufacturer will repair or provide replacements without charge at manufacturer's option. b. Warranty for all components must be direct from the manufacturer (non -pass through) and non- prorated for the entire term. Warranty must be assignable to the non-residential owner, and transferable to subsequent owners through its length. 2. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window installer, for a period of 2 years from the date prorated for the entire term. Warranty must be assignable to the non-residential owner, and transferable to subsequent owners through its length. 3. Installation: Submit a written warranty, executed by the window installer, for a period of 2 years from the date of substantial completion, against defective materials or workmanship, including substantial non-compliance with applicable specification requirements, which result in premature failure. a. In the event that installation of windows or components is found to be defective, installer will repair or provide replacements without charge at the installer's option. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer 1. Drawings and specifications are based on: a. C. R. Laurence Co., Inc. (800) 421-6144, Aluminum (DW) series, deluxe sliding service windows. B. Substitutions Other manufacturers' products that meet or exceed specified design requirements may be considered. Submit the following information with request for substitutions at least ten (10) working days prior to bid date. a. Test reports specified in 1.03 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS b. Full proposal details and samples specified in 1.04 SUBMITTALS c. Copy of manufacturer's warranty specified in 1.08 WARRANTY d. Other information as requested for evaluation Substitute products not pre -approved by the Architect via addenda will not be considered. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ALUMINUM SLIDING SERVICE WINDOWS 085213-3 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum Members 1. Frames: 4" Aluminum frame modules shall be constructed of 6063-T5 extruded aluminum. Replacement and servicing of glass shall be from the clerk side of the window by means of an access panel in the top header and does not require the removal of the frame from the opening. Window glides on top -hung heavy-duty ball bearing slides. Poly -pile weather stripping and self -latching handle. Overall frame sizes are to be in accordance with the contract drawings. 2. Glazing: The glazing shall be 1 /2" thick clear tempered insulating glass. 3. Options: Provide keyed locks and burglar bars for all operating sashes. 4. application. Gaskets in continuous contact with structural silicone shall be extruded silicone or compatible material. 2.03 FINISHES A. Finish of Aluminum Componenls B. Anodic Coating: Clean exposed surfaces with caustic etch and anodize to an Architectural Class 1 coating: 1. Color Anodic Coating: Clean exposed surfaces with medium matte caustic etch and anodize to an Architectural Class 1 coating (thickness not less than 0.7 mil). a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of available anodic coating colors. C. Furnish manufacturer's matching touch-up anodic coating for touch-up of fasteners and abrasions. D. Thoroughly clean, etch, and give metal surfaces a chromate conversion pretreatment before application of the primer coat. E. Apply a heavy coating of bituminous paint where aluminum contacts masonry, concrete, mortar, plaster, or a dissimilar metal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions 1. Verify that building substrates permit installation of windows according to the manufacturer's instructions, approved shop drawings, calculations and contract documents. 2. Do not install windows until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install window in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. Repair damaged units as directed (if approved by the manufacturer and the architect) or replace with new units. B. Erect frames plumb, true, and square in a substantial manner with concealed fasteners. Anchor securely without distortion of the frames. C. Use anchorage devices to securely attach frame to structure. ALUMINUM SLIDING SERVICE WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 52 13 - 4 D. Apply 1 coat of bituminous paint to concealed aluminum and steel surfaces in contact with cementitious or dissimilar metal. E. Align frame plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work. F. Coordinate attachment and seal of air and vapor barrier materials. Install flashings. G. Fill perimeter voids in window frame channel with polyethylene backer material or foam insulation. H. Inject sprayed foam insulation in shim spaces at perimeter to maintain continuity of thermal barrier. Install Related Trim and Closure Panels 1. Perimeter Sealants: Clean and prime joints as recommended by the sealant manufacturer. 2. Install sealant and related backing material around perimeter of windows in compliance with window and sealant manufacturer's instructions and the requirements of Section 07 92 00. 3. Apply sealant completely filling the joint and tool smooth to insure full contact with adjacent surfaces. 4. Strike off excess material. 5. Finished bead shall be flush with the adjoining surfaces. J. Completed installation shall be water and weathertight. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove protective material from prefinished aluminum surfaces. B. Wash exposed surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove dirt form corners. Wipe surface clean. C. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits or other solvent acceptable to sealant manufacturer. D. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of windows, exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances. Touch up factory finish. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Initiate and maintain protection and other precautions required to ensure system will be without damage or deterioration (other than normal weathering) at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION ALUMINUM SLIDING SERVICE WINDOWS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 52 13 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 08 62 13 UNIT SKYLIGHTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Performance and product component information for fixed deck mount skylights. B. Related -Sections: 1. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06 15 00 - Wood Decking. 3. Section 07 61 13 - Sheet Metal Roofing. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM E 283 - Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specific Pressure Differences Across the specimen. B. ASTM E 330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, and Doors Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. C. ASTM E 331 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. D. ASTM E 1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missile(s) and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. E. National Fenestration Rating Council, NFRC 100, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors. F. National Fenestration Rating Council, NFRC 200, Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence. G. National Fenestration Rating Council, NFRC 300, Test Method for Determining the Solar Optical Properties of Glazing Materials and Systems. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Skylight: Fixed deck mounted skylight consisting of the following main integrated components - an interior condensation drainage gasket, stain grade wood frame, exterior maintenance -free aluminum cladding/counter flashing, ASA corner keys, and an © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 08 62 13 - 1 insulating thermal pane glass unit with two seals, warm edge spacer system, three coats of LoE3 silver to increase visible light transmittance while reducing solar heat, and a continuous deck seal mounting system with durable foam seal. B. Configuration: Fixed unit, engineered deck seal mounting system with durable foam seal to seal the skylight to the roof deck. Pre -installed accessory mounting brackets. C. Condensation Control: Integral internal condensation collection system and drainage slots. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. The deck mount skylight is independently tested in accordance with listed standards for compliance with the unit skylight provisions of the 2003, 2006 and 2009 IBC, IECC, and IRC as follows: 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101 /I.S.2/A440-08 (NAFS - 08) and/or AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101 /I.S.2/A440-11 (NAFS - 11). 2. Performance Grades must be greater than or equal to: a. Downward design pressure = 150 psf. b. Uplift Design Pressure = 40 psf. B. Air leakage: Maximum of 0.4 I/s/m2 (0.08 CFM/ft2) of total unit area, measured at a pressure of 75 Pa (1.57 psf) in accordance with ASTM E 283, per the NAFS standards in (A) . C. Water infiltration: No water penetration noted as measured in accordance with ASTM E 331 with a test pressure differential of 720 Pa (15.0 psf). Exceeds requirements of NAFS standards in (A). D. Thermal Performance: U-factor = 0.45 Btu/hr*ft2*F° or less, SHGC = 0.26 or less and Vt = 0.52 or greater (clear). Tested and certified in accordance with NFRC 100 and 200 procedures. Applicable to aluminum and copper clad models. 2010 ENERGY STAR qualified in all U.S. zones. Applicable to aluminum clad models. E. Skylights with impact glazing (06): Tested and certified in accordance with ASTM E 1886 and ASTM E 1996, Rated for Wind Zone 3, Missile Level C, Cycle Pressure +50 / -50. F. Limit member deflection to flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials. G. System accommodates, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between frame and perimeter components. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's installation details and product data sheets include; 1. Preparation details and installation instructions. 2. Product Data sheets with storage and handling information. 3. Code compliance information. B. Architectural/Cross Sectional Drawings 1. Mounting details. 2. Frame sizes. 3. Flashing details. UNIT SKYLIGHTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0862 13 - 2 C. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate material types, gauge, finishes, and installation details. D. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights (unit skylight flashing system) . E. Warranty: Sample of warranty or special warranty. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Skylight manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten years' experience in design and fabrication of deck mount glass skylights. 2. Skylights shall be manufactured to the highest standards of quality and craftsmanship in ISO 9001 and ISO 14001-certified facilities. 3. Flashings shall be engineered and manufactured to match up with the roofing material and skylight. 4. Skylight installed with three layers of protection; deck seal mounting system, adhesive underlayment wrapped round the skylight frame and onto the roof deck, and engineered flashing, carries a "No Leak" installation warranty. B. Source Limitations: Obtain unit skylights, flashings, and accessories from a single source and from a single manufacturer. C. Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101 /I.S.2./NAFS, North American Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance specifications for Windows, Skylights and Glass Doors, and all later editions, for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated. 1. Provide third -party certified unit skylight with attached label. D. Thermal Performance - rated per applicable NFRC procedures. 1. Provide NFRC-certified unit skylight ratings on an attached label. 2. Qualify under ENERGY STAR@ criteria in all 50 states and attach verifying label. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Coordinate unit skylight installation requirements with roofing system. 1.09 WARRANTY A. 10-year "NO LEAK" installation warranty. 1.10 DELIVERY, HANDLING, STORAGE A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry and undamaged, with seals and labels intact. B. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086213-3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. VELUX America Inc. (Standard of Quality). 2. Substitutions: Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Wood: Kiln -dried, laminated Ponderosa Pine pre -finished white. B. Maintenance free exterior cladding: Roll formed 0.65 mm aluminum frame coverings, prefinished, production engineered, and fabricated to fit exterior exposed surfaces Alloy AA 3003 H 12. C. Dual sealed Glazing 1. Dual sealed thermal pane with warm edge technology, 95% argon gas fill, and with three layers of LoE° silver Thal inc ceases visible ligill uvei slandard low-e coatings while lowering the solar heat gain. The following glazing options are available: a. 06 - Tempered LoE3 pane with Neat coated exterior over laminated heat strengthened interior pane with 0.090" interlayer. D. Field Fasteners: 1-1/4 inch ring shank nails provided for attaching deck seal mounting flange to roof decking. Ring shank nails are double hot dipped zinc coated. E. Weather stripping: Factory applied neoprene and thermoplastic elastomeric weather stripping throughout entire frame, profiled to effect weather seal. F. Mounting System: Continuous corrosion resistant mounting system with a durable foam seal and rough opening alignment notches. 2.03 FLASHING OPTIONS A. Type EDM Flashing is a prefabricated flashing system designed for use with metal roofing materials and for roof slopes of 14 degrees to 85 degrees. Sill flashing section consists of corrugated apron to allow form fit of roofing material profile. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate frame with slip mortise and tendon corners that are glued and nailed for strength and stability. B. Fabricate frame components with precision tolerances enabling installation and movement of sash and dynamic movement of perimeter weather stripping. C. Provide permanent external drainage channels to manage water flow and drain to the exterior. Provide internal drainage of glazing spaces to exterior through gasketing. D. All units factory glazed with hot melt silicone -based exterior seal. E. No Site fabrication needed. UNIT SKYLIGI ITS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0862 13 - 4 F. Rough opening to be framed per manufacturer's listed dimensions. 2.05 FINISHES A. Exterior surfaces: Exposed exterior wood surfaces to be covered with roll formed maintenance -free aluminum cladding pieces. Aluminum has a neutral gray, Kynar® 500 polyvinylidene fluoride resin finish. B. Maintenance -free flashing: Roll formed aluminum, neutral gray, baked on polyester polyamid primer and finish coats. Copper is roll -formed, mill finish. C. Interior surface: Exposed interior wood surfaces to be stain grade to receive finish to match adjacent wood roof decking. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify rough opening dimension and squareness, proper orientation of skylight, proper roof pitch, and flashing. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install skylight in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and local code requirements. B. Use the alignment notches on the deck seal mounting system to align skylight flush with the rough opening, free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional tolerances. C. Attach and seal the skylight to roof sheathing by nailing through the predrilled holes in the deck seal mounting system. One fastener required in each predrilled hole. D. Apply one layer of skylight adhesive underlayment around the perimeter of the skylight frame. E. Install the manufacturer's engineered perimeter flashing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instruction to achieve a weather tight installation. 3.03 CLEANING A. Clean exposed skylight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damage to metal coatings and finishes. B. Remove excess sealants, dirt, and other substances. C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged during the construction process. D. During the construction process, protect the skylight surfaces from contact with contaminates. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086213-5 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Install skylight, adhesive skylight underlayment, and flashing in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. END OF SECTION UNIT SKYLIGHTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0862 13 - 6 SECTION 08 62 23 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL A. Section Includes: 1. Tubular daylighting devices and accessories. Related Sections: l . Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 06 17 30 - Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses. 3. Section 07 42 13 - Sheet Metal Soffit Panels. 4. Section 07 61 13 - Sheet Metal Roofing. 5. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. B. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. ASTM A 463/A 463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the Hot Dip Process. D. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized), by the Hot Dip Process. E. ASTM A 792/A 792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum -Zinc Alloy - Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. F. ASTM E 547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Difference. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Daylight Reflective Tubes: Spectralight Infinity with Cool Tube Technology combines ultra- high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra -low Infrared (IR) reflectance. Patented spectrally - selective optical surface yields an average total- and specular-reflectance greater than 99.5% percent for the Visible Light spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm) providing maximized visible light transmission and less than 25% reflectance for Infrared (IR) heat wavelengths (750 nm to 2500 nm) for minimized heat transmission, resulting in a spectrally -selective Total Solar Spectrum (250 nm to 2500 nm) reflectance less than 37 percent, as measured using a Perkin Elmer Lambda 1050 spectrophotometer with a Universal Reflectance Accessory. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 0 2019 Stantec 1193804337 08 62 23 - 1 Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308. B. SOLAMASTER 330 DS-O / 330 DS-C (OPEN/CLOSED CEILING) 1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/IS2/A440, Class CW-PG80, size tested 21 inch (533 mm) diameter, Type TDDOC and Type TDDCC. a. Air Infiltration Test: 1) Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. b. Water Resistance Test: 1) Passes water resistance; no uncontrolled water leakage with a pressure differential of 10.7 psf (512 Pa) or 15 percent of the design load (whichever is greater) and a water spray rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf for 24 minutes when tested in accordance with ICC-ES AC-16, ASTM E 547 and ASTM E 331. c. Uniform Load Test: All units tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. 1) No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make daylighting system inoperable or cause excessive permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf (7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 70 psf (3.35 kPa). d. Fire Testing: 1) Fire Rated Roof Assemblies: 2) When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating requirements as described in the International Building Code for Class A, B, and C roof assemblies. 3) Self -Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D-1929. 4) Smoke Density: Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM Standard E 84 in way intended for use. Classification C. 5) Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (62 mm/min) Classification CC-2 per ASTM D 635. 6) Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm) Classification CC-1 per ASTM D 635. e. Fall Protection Performance: 1) Passes fall protection test: No penetration of dome or curb cap when subject to 400 lb (160 Kg)/42 inch (1066 mm) impact drop test when tested in accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.506(c) Safety Net Systems. 2) Passes fall protection test: California State OSHA Fall Protection Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 3212 (e) (1) Skylight Screens. 2. Blast Resistance: ASTM F1642, ASTM F2912, GSA-TS01-2003, and UFC 4-010-01: a. Airblast Loading ASTM Hazard Rating: Passes: No Hazard Rating. b. Airblast Loading UFC Level of Protection: Passes Medium Level of Protection. c. Dynamic Overpressure Loading ASTM Hazard Rating: Passes: No Hazard Rating. d. Dynamic Overpressure Loading UFC Level of Protection: Passes Medium Level of Protection. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 3000. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 62 23 - 2 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes, diffuser assembly, and accessories. 4. Installation requirements. C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components, including rough opening and framing dimensions, anchorage, roof flashings and accessories. D. Electrical wiring diagrams and recommendations for power and control wiring. E. Verification Samples: As requested by Architect. F. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance with specified performance requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engaged in manufacture of tubular daylighting devices for minimum 20 years. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original containers, dry, undamaged, seals and labels intact. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc.; 2210 Oak Ridge Way, Vista, CA 92081. Tel. Toll Free: 888-765-2882. Tel: (760) 477-1120. Fax: (760) 597-4488. Email: commsales@solatube.com. Web: www.solatube.com. B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES @ 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 62 23 - 3 2.02 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Transparent roof -mounted skylight dome and self - flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 330 IDS, 21 inch (530 mm) Daylighting System: 1. Model: a. Solatube Model 330 DS-C Closed (Penetrating) Ceiling. AAMA Type TDDCC. 2. Capture Zone: a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. 1) Dome Glazing: Type DP, 0.115 inch (3 mm) minimum thickness polycarbonate classified as CC material. 2) Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nominal thickness injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. Attached to the base of the dome ring using butyl glazing rope 0.24 inch (6 mm) diameter; to minimize air infiltration. 3) Dome Seul: Adhesive bucked weaniersllip, 0.63 inch (16 mm) tall by 0.28 inch (7 mm) wide. 4) LightTracker Reflector, made of aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch (0.4 mm) with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to capture low angle sunlight. 3. Dome Options: a. Security Bar: Type B Security Bar 0.375 inch (95 mm) stainless steel bar across flashing diameter opening. b. Dome Edge Protection Band: Type PB, for fire rated Class A, B or C roof applications. Galvanized steel. Nominal thickness of 0.039 inch (1 mm). c. Secondary Diffuser: Type SS, Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material. Thickness shall not be less than 0.100 inches. 4. Flashings: a. Roof Flashing Base: 1) Two Piece: Type FSM, two-piece, inverted flange Metal Roof Flashing for Standing Seam Rib roof profile with greater than 14-3/8 inch (365 mm) minimum distance between ribs permitting a required greater than 2 inch (51 mm) clearance between flashing and rib: Aluminum 1060 Alloy, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM B 209, 0.059 inch (1.5 mm) thick. a) Flashing Options: (1) Flashing Insulator: Type Fl, Thermal isolation material is for use under the following flashing types: Type F4, F8, or Fl 1. (2) Curb Insulator: Curb Insulator, Type Cl, Thermal isolation material is for use under flashing Type FC. (3) Curb Cap Insulation: Type CCI, Nominal 1 inch thick thermal insulation pad to reduce thermal conduction between curb -cap and tubing and thermal convection between room air and curb -cap. Rated R-6 (OFxft2xhr/Btu) Insulation is Polyisocyanurate foam utilizing CFC, HCFC, & HFC free blowing agent. Type-1 Class-1 per ASTM C 1289; Passes UL 1715 (15-minute thermal barrier per IBC 2603.4); Attic ventilation may be required per IBC 1203.2(OFxft2xhr/Btu). TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES 0 2019 Stantec 1193804337 08 62 23 - 4 b) Membrane Counter Flashing: Type MCF, one piece, seamless, spun Aluminum Alloy 1 100, functioning as a counter flashing for use with F8 or F1 1 Flashings, only, when applied to membrane roofs. Corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM B 209, 0.059 inch (1.5 mm) thick. 5. Transfer Zone: a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm). 1) Reflective Tubes: a) Reflective extension tube, Type EXX and Type EL with total length of run as indicated on the Drawings. b) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity with Cool Tube Technology combining ultra -high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra -low Infrared (IR) reflectance. 2) Tube Options a) Extension Tube Angle Adapter: Provide manufacturer's standard adapters for applications requiring: (1) Type Al one 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle adapter. b) Top Tube Angle Adapter: Type TA, reflective 45 degree adjustable Top Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm) long. c) Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Tube Angle Adapter Kit: Type AK, reflective 45 degree adjustable top and bottom angle adapters (one each), 16 inches (406 mm) long. d) Bottom Tube Angle Adapter: Type BA, reflective 45 degree adjustable Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches (406 mm) long. e) Reflective Extension Tube: Type EL, 48 inches (1220 mm) long, replaces two normal 24-inch (610mm) extension tubes when long tube runs are required. 6. Delivery Zone: a. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube 23.8 inches by 23.8 inches (605 mm by 605 mm) square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. 1) Polymeric Transition Box: Type TP, round -to -square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.110 inch (2.8 mm) thick. a) Lens: Type L1 OptiView Fresnel lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame and EPDM foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.022 inch (0.6 mm) thick. Classified as CC2. (1) Supplemental Natural Effect Lens: Type LN made of acrylic, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.060 inch (1.5 mm) thick, with open cell foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. (2) Secondary Diffuser: Type SS, Acrylic plastic classified as CC2 material. Thickness shall not be less than 0.100 inches. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non -corrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 08 62 23 - 5 C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions. C. If substrate and rough opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit and wiring. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Coordinate installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly and that finished installation is weather tight. l . Install flashing to produce weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with roofing system termination at top of curb. 2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation. Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers. 3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material. C. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates, including preservative -treated wood, provide permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. D. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances. E. After installation of first unit, field test to determine adequacy of installation. Conduct water test in presence of Owner, Architect, or Contractor, or their designated representative. Correct if needed before proceeding with installation of subsequent units. F. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies. TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 62 23 - 6 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 62 23 - 7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally O Tn A C T I () Fva 6N Mrs CONTRACT ID 0 ' LIN k RAmmm�- Project Manual For New Hope Outdoor Pool VOLUME 2 OF 2 Prepared for: City of New Hope, Minnesota City Project No. 995 (N Stantec February 2019 Stantec Project No. 193804337 SECTION 08 70 00 FINISH HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Finish hardware for Metal doors. B. Related Items 1 Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Division 26 -Conduit and power connections. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURE A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80. 2. NFPA 101. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. Building Materials Directory. C. Warnock Hersey (WH): 1. Building Materials Directory. D. ADA: 1. Americans With Disabilities Act. E. Minnesota State Building Code: 1. 2015 Edition and, International Building Codes 2012 Edition, as adopted by Minnesota State Building Code. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Special Submittal Requirements: Combine submittals of this Section with Sections listed below to ensure the "design intent" of the system/assembly is understood and can be reviewed together. a. Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data, including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instruction. 3. Submit 6 copies of catalog cuts of each hardware item with hardware schedule. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 1 C. Shop Drawings - Hardware Schedule: Submit 1 complete reproducible copy. 1. List groups and suffixes in proper sequence. 2. Completely describe door and list architectural door number. 3. Vertical or horizontal schedules only are acceptable. D. Wiring Diagram: Submit wiring diagrams for each electric product specified: 1. Verify voltage with Electrical Engineer. E. Templates: Submit templates and "Reviewed Hardware Schedule" to door and frame supplier and others as applicable. 1. Templates, wiring schematics, and "Reviewed Hardware Schedule" of electrical items to electrical for coordination and verification of voltages and locations. F. Keying Schedule: Upon review and acceptance of Hardware Schedule, develop Keying Schedule in consultation with Owner. G. Contract Close -Out Submittals: Comply with Section 01 70 00, including specific requirements: 1. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following: a. Maintenance instructions for each item of hardware. b. Catalog pages for each product. c. Name, address, and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. d. Parts list for each product. e. Copy of final hardware schedule. f. Copy of final keying schedule. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years of experience in the actual production of specified products. B. Distributor's Qualifications 1. Firm with 3 years of experience in the distribution of commercial hardware. 2. Distributor to employ full time Architectural Hardwarc Consultants (AHC) for the purpose of scheduling and coordinating hardware and establishing keying schedule. 3. Hardware Schedule shall be prepared and signed by an AHC. C. Installer's Qualifications 1. Firm with 3 years of experience in installation of similar hardware to that required for this Project. 2. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects. D. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide UL label or stamp on hardware required on labeled doors. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping 1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. 2. Package hardware to prevent damage during transit and storage. 3. Mark hardware to correspond with "Reviewed Hardware Schedule." FINISH HARDWARE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 70 00 - 2 B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SCREWS AND FASTENERS A. Fasteners 1. Including but not limited to wood or machine screws, bolts, nuts, anchors, etc. of proper type, size, material, and finish required for installation of hardware. 2. Phillips head for exposed screws. Do not use aluminum screws to attach hardware. 2.02 HINGES A. Butts and Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Listed under Category A in BHMA's "Certified Product Directory." B. Hinge Sizes: Provide the following hinges in widths sufficient to minimally clear trim: Thickness Size 1-3/4 inch Doors 4-1/2 inches by 4-1/2 inches C. Furnish butt hinges for each door leaf as follows: 1. 1 pair per leaf for openings through 60-inches high. 2. 1 additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30-inches in height or fractions thereof. 3. 1 additional hinge for doors 3'-6" wide to 4'-0" wide. 4. 1 additional hinge for exterior and vestibule doors. D. Applications 1. Provide hinges as listed below unless specified otherwise in Hardware Sets: a. Exterior out swinging doors: Type 5 x NRP. b. Exterior in swinging doors and vestibule doors: Type 4. c. Interior doors with closers: Type 2 or 4. d. Interior doors over 40-inches in width: Type 4. e. Interior doors 40-inches or less without closer: Type 2. f. Exterior and reversed beveled interior lockable doors: Non -removable loose pin (NRP) hinges. E. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products Type Bommer Hager McKinney Stanley Type 1 5000 1279 T2714 F179 Type 2 BB5000 BB1279 TA2714 FBB179 Type 3 BB5002 BB1191 TA2314 FBB191 Type 4 BB5004 BB1168 T4A3786 FBB168 Type 5 BB5006 BB1199 T4A3386 FBB199 2.03 LOCKSETS/LATCHSETS A. Provide wrought boxes and curved lip strikes with lip length sufficient to minimally clear trim. B. Mortise Locksets: 1. Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A] 56.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 certified mortise locksets furnished in the functions as specified in the Hardware Sets. Locksets to FINISH HARDWARE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 70 00 - 3 be field -reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. Furnish with standard 2 3/4" backset, 3/4" throw anti -friction stainless steel latchbolt. a. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1) Corbin Russwin Hardware- ML2000 Series PSA. 2) Sargent Manufacturing- 8200 Series LNP. 3) Schlage- L9000 Series 17A. 2.04 ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Standard Electric Strikes: Heavy duty, cylindrical and mortise lock electric strikes conforming to ANSI/BHMA Al 56.31, Grade 1, UL listed for both Burglary Resistance and for use on fire rated door assemblies. Provide strikes with 12 or 24 VDC capability and supplied standard as fail -secure unless otherwise specified. Option available for latchbolt and latchbolt strike monitoring indicating both the position of the latchbolt and locked condition of the strike. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. HES (HS). b. Von Duprin (VD). 2.05 DOOR CLOSERS A. Fully adjustable type with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 through 6; field adjustable per door size and frequency of use. ANSI/BHMA Al 56.4 requirements for Grade 1. B. Provide closers with sweep, latch, and back check features. C. Provide parallel rigid arm for closers mounted on push side of opening. D. Coordinate with door supplier to provide proper blocking for surface mounting. Use of through -bolts is not acceptable. E. Where closers are indicated to be delayed action, provide units designed with an adjustable delay that holds door open before closing cycle. hegins. Consult with Owner for time of delay. F. Provide closers meeting requirements to physically handicapped. Provide units complying with ANSI/ICC Al 17.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. G. Install closers using only manufacturer -furnished template machine screws for metal doors and manufacturer -furnished wood screws for wood doors. H. Use of self -drilling or self -tapping fasteners is not allowed. I. Accessories: Mounting brackets, drop plates, special shoes required by door and frames conditions. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products LCN Norton A040XP Series 7500 Series © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH HARDWARE 087000-4 2.06 FLAT GOODS A. Push Plates: 0.050-inch satin finish stainless steel with countersunk attachment holes and beveled edges. Size: 8 inches by 16 inches. 1. Rockwood specified. Kick Plates: 0.050-inch satin finish stainless steel with countersunk attachment holes and beveled edges (134E) in widths 2 inches less than door width on single doors, 1-inch less than door width on pairs of doors without mullion. Height 10-inches (or 1/2-inch less than height of bottom rail, whichever is less) 1. Hiawatha specified. 2. Acceptable products of the following manufacturers: a. Burns, Hager, Rockwood, or Trimco. 2.07 THRESHOLDS AND WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Thresholds: Provide full -saddle type threshold unless floor conditions dictate or detailed otherwise: 1. Provide flat saddles at fire rated doors where combustible material is indicated on both sides. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products National Guard Pemko Reese 5 inch by 1 /2 inch Saddle 425 171 S205 B. Sweeps: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: National Guard Pemko Reese Neoprene 20ON 315-N 323 C. Weatherstrip: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: National Guard Pemko Reese Polyprene 135NA 303PK DS70 D. Rain Drips: (Finish to match door frame) 1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products National Guard Pemko Reese 16 346 R201 Head and Jamb Gasketing: 1. Coordinate with door manufacturer. Comply with UL-10C for intumescent fire and smoke material. 2. Provide gasket similar to Pemko S88 at: a. Fire and/or smoke labeled doors. b. On overlapping metal astragal for pairs of doors. c. Doors with automatic door bottom. 2.08 FINISHES A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated indoor hardware sets. 1. Hardware on aluminum doors to match finish of doors and frames. 626 / 63Q Hinges- Exterior 630 FINISH HARDWARE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 70 00 - 5 Hinges- Interior 630 Locksets 626 Closers 689 Operating Trim 630 Overhead Stops and Holders 630 Protection Plates 630 Wall Stops 630 2.09 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. Provide locksets prepared to receive interchangeable cylinders keyed into Owners existing master key system. B. Provide temporary keyed construction cores and keys for all doors during the construction period. C. Keys: Furnish keys in the following quantities: 1. 2 each Construction Control keys. 2. 15 each Construction keys. 3. 2 each Permanent Control keys. 4. 3 Permanent keys per cylinder. 2.10 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Push -Button Switches: Industrial grade momentary contact, back -lighted push buttons with stainless -steel switch enclosures. 12/24 VDC bi-color illumination suitable for either flush or surface mounting. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Alarm Controls - CPl Series B. Zone -Light Panels (LED): Provide 1-3/4 inch by 4-1/2 inch, to mount in single -gang box. LED - Green/ Red similar to Alarm Control Products (AC) RP-9L. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers of comparable products: a. Alarm Controls b. Schlage-Electronics c. Security Door Controls d. Securitron C. Request -to -Exit Motion Sensor: Request -to -Exit Sensors motion detectors specifically designed for detecting exiting through a door from the secure area to a non -secure area. Include built-in timers (up to 60 second adjustable timing), door monitor with sounder alert, internal vertical pointability coverage, 12VDC or 24VDC power and selectable relay trigger with fail safe/fail secure modes. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Schlage-Electronics (SE) - SCAN II Series b. Security Door Controls (SD) - MD-31 D Series. c. Securitron (SU) - XMS Series. D. Door Posiliorl Swilc:hes: Duui pusiliui i rnugnetic read contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with optional Rare Earth Magnet installation on steel doors with flush top channels. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing (SA) - 3280 Series. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 6 b. Schlage-Electronics (SE) - 679 Series c. Security Door Controls (SD) - DIPS Series. d. Securitron (SU) - DPS Series. E. Power Supplies: Provide Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory Listed 12VDC or 24VDC (field selectable) filtered and regulated power supplies. Include battery backup option with integral battery charging capability in addition to operating the DC load in event of line voltage failure. Provide the least number of units, at the appropriate amperage level, sufficient to exceed the required total draw for the specified electrified hardware and access control equipment. 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Schlage-Electronics (SE) - PS Series b. Security Door Controls (SD) - 630 Series. c. Securitron Door Controls (SU) - ADQ 12/24 Series. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine doors, frames, related items, and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion: 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Door Hardware: Hang doors with screws inserted and hinges adjusted so doors swing free and do not rattle when closed. Cut holes and mortises in wood doors for locks and other hardware with jig approved or provided by manufacturer of item to be applied. Mount locks so key enters cylinder with smooth edge down. Remove or cover hardware after fitting until final painting and cleaning. Reinstall, adjust, and test after painting and cleaning is completed. Replace items with damaged finish or non-functional. C. Thresholds: Install over full bed of sealant and anchor to substrate with stainless steel countersunk screws in stainless steel expansion shields not more than 4 inches from each end and not more than 12 inches on center. D. Keys: After locks have been reinstalled, seal keys and/or cores in envelopes, door number, change key set or masterkey set and keyway number. Just prior to Substantial Completion and under direction of Owner or his representative, install permanent cores. Ship masterkeys to Owner via registered mail. Mounting Heights/Dimensions: 1. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions to install hardware at specified mounting heights. Supplier to make available jigs for hardware installation. Install and protect hardware until Substantial Completion. 2. Hinges: a. Bottom of frame to center line of bottom hinge up to 13 inches. b. Finish door frame head to center line of top hinge up to 1 1-3/4 inches. c. Others spaced equally. FINISH HARDWARE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 70 00 - 7 d. For hollow metal doors x hollow metal frames, comply with hollow metal manufacturer's standard hinge locations. 3. Lever Locks and Latches: Bottom of frame to center line of strike shall be 40-5/16 inches. 4. Dead locks and mortise night latches: a. Bottom of frame to center line of cylinder on dead locks shall be 48-inches. b. Bottom of frame to center line of cylinder when used with mortise night latch and No. 1456 push and pull plate shall be 50-inches. 5. Closers: a. Mount on corridor side of lobby doors, room side of corridor doors, and stair side of stairways. b. Parallel arm installation where possible on exterior doors. c. Through -bolt installation not permitted, coordinate with door suppliers. 6. Kick Plates: Bottom within 1/8-inch of door bottom, attach with Phillips head screws. 7. Door Stops: a. 234W (to catch knob or pull). b. 272W, 2-1/2 inches below head, backset as required to keep doors from striking. c. 255W, 6'-6" up from finish concrete floor. 8. Door Holders: 6'-6" up from finish floor, backset same as for locks where applicable. F. Mounting heights shall comply with Door and Hardware Institute recommended locations for standard steel doors and frames. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Prior to completion of Project, ascertain that doors closers are in adjustment so closer completes its full closing cycle in less than 4 to 6 seconds without abrupt change of speed between "Sweep" and "Latch" speeds. Adjust "Backcheck" according to manufacturer's instructions. Verify that levers are free from binding. Ensure that latchbolts and deadbolts are engaged into strike and hardware is functioning. Turn over wrenches and adjusting tools provided with hardware to Owner. 3.04 INSTRUCTIONS AND TOOLS A. When Project is complete, deliver to Owner complete set of special tools required for care, maintenance, and adjustment of hardware items specified under this Section, including chanaina of cvlinders. Provide complete information on care, maintenance, and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts, and information on preservation of finishes. Deliver to Owner3 bound copies of catalog pages of hardware supplied. 3.05 HARDWARE GROUPS GROUP 1 Latched Hinges as specified 1 Latchset ND10 RHO Functions: Both sides always by lever. 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop GROUP 4 Locked - Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ND96PD RHO © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH HARDWARE 087000-8 Functions: Outside always by key. Inside always by lever. Outside lever always rigid. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Wall Stop GROUP 5 Locked - Office Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ND53PD RHO Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside by lever, except when outside lever is set by buttons in face of lock, then, outside by key. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop GROUP 6 Privacy Function with Indicator Hinges as specified 1 Privacy Lockset w/ Indicator L9040 17A x L583-363 x L283-722 Functions: Both sides by lever. Deadbolt by inside turnpiece. Outside by emergency key. Inside lever retracts latchbolt and deadbolt. 1 Clothes Hook Trimco 3071 1 Wall Stop GROUP 11 Latched - Closer Hinges as specified 1 Latchset ND10S RHO Functions: Both sides always by lever. 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop 1 Gasket GROUP 12 RESTROOM -TIME LOCK/UNLOCK Hinges as specified 1 Exit Lockset L9080 L.O.S.T. 1 Electric Strike 1600CLB 1 Electric Strike Adapter 2004M 1 Electric Strike Bridge Rectifier 2005M3 1 Electric Strike Latch Guard - HES 150 1 Push Plate Rockwood 82 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop 1 Threshold 1 Weatherstrip 1 Door Sweep Pemko 345CNB 1 Rain Drip 1 Power Supply as required (Powers all exterior doors) (Locate in IT Room) 2 Power Distribution Board - Securitron PDB-8F8R 1 Door Position Switch 1 24/7 Timer - by owners Security vendor Electrical by Div 26. FINISH HARDWARE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 70 00 - 9 Interfacing of access control equipment with hardware specified in this section shall be the responsibility of the access control system supplier. Functions: • Door normally closed, latched and outside is secured. • Day Mode: o A timed event from Access Control System software will shunt the door position switch, then energizes solenoid and unlocks electric strike allowing free passage in both directions. • Niclht Mode: o A timed event from Access Control System software disrupts circuit to solenoid locking electric strike. o Key in outside cylinder retracts the latchbolt, so door can be pulled open. Key can only be removed in locked position. o Rotating inside lever retracts latchbolt at all times allowing free egress. • Loss of power; electric strike is locked (Secured). (Fail Secure) free egress always allowed from room. • Access Control System shall log unsecured violation if door is not closed within a preset time limit (programmed from Card Access System software). GROUP 13.5 Pair -Locked - Closer - Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Set Auto Flush bolts 1 Dustproof strike 1 Lockset ND94PD RHO Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside by lever, except when outside lever is set by outside key, then, outside by key. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Coordinator 2 Closer w/ Spring Stop Hold -Open Arm 2 Kick Plate 2 Wall Stop 1 Gasket Note: Provide metal overlapping astragal with gaskot applied. Group 14 Locked - Closer - Storeroom Function Hinaes as specified 1 Storeroom Lockset L9080 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Surface Hvy Dty Overhead Stop 1 Threshold 1 Gasket S88D Functions: Door normally closed, latched and outside lever is secured. Outside lever always locked. Key in outside cylinder retracts latchbolt for entry. Key can only be removed in locked position. Rotating inside lever retracts latch, allowing free egress at all times. GROUP 15 Locked - Closer - Office Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ND53PD RHO © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 10 Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside by lever, except when outside lever is set by outside key, then outside by key. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Closer w/ Spring Stop Hold -Open Arm 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop 1 Gasket GROUP 16 Privacy Function with Indicator - Closer Hinges as specified 1 Privacy Lockset w/ Indicator L9040 17A x L583-363 x L283-722 Functions: Both sides by lever. Deadbolt by inside turnpiece. Outside by emergency key. Inside lever retracts latchbolt and deadbolt. Closer Kick Plate Wall Stop Threshold Weatherstrip Door Sweep Pemko 345APK GROUP 17 Push and Pull - Deadlock - Classroom Function - Closer Hinges as specified 1 Deadlock (classroom) L463T 1 Permanent Core as specified 1 Push Plate 1 Offset Pull 1 Closer 1 Kick Plate 1 Wall Stop 1 Threshold 1 Weatherstrip 1 Door Sweep Pemko 345APK Functions: Door normally closed, but not latched. Push/Pull operation. Deadbolt thrown or retraced by key outside. Inside turn lever will retract deadbolt, but cannot project it. GROUP 20 Hardware by Others All hardware furnished by door manufacturer as specified elsewhere. GROUP 100 Single - Exit - Lockable Hinges as specified 1 Exit Device Sargent 43-8813 x ETL Functions: Inside always by touchbar. Outside by lever, except when lever is set by key, then outside by key and lever, or when touchbar is dogged down, then outside by lever. 1 Closer Norton 1605 Series 1 Kick Plate 1 Lock Astragal Trimco 5000 or 5002 1 Door Status Switch Sargent 3287 1 Overhead Stop Sargent 690 Series (provide Hager 255W where door swings against wall at 90 degrees) 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Sweep Strip 1 Rain Drip FINISH HARDWARE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 70 00 - 1 1 GROUP 109 Pair - Exterior - Classroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Set Manual Flush Bolts 1 Dust Proof Strike 1 Coordinator 1 Lockset ND94PD RHO Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside by lever except when outside lever is set by outside key, then, outside by key. Deadlocking latch bolt. 2 Closers x PSH Arms 2 Kick Plates 2 Door Status Switches Sargent 3287 1 Lock Astragal Trimco 5000 or 5002 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Set Astragals Reese 95 x 95P; provide Reese 797B self -adhering weatherstripping on door astragal when astragal is specified 2 Sweep Strips 1 Rain Drip GROUP 114 Single - Exterior - Storeroom Function Hinges as specified 1 Lockset ND82PD RHO Functions: Both levers always fixed. Entrance by key in either lever. Deadlocking latch bolt. 1 Kick Plate 1 Door Status Switch Sargent 3287 1 Lock Astragal Trimco 5000 or 5002 1 Threshold 1 Set Weatherstrip 1 Sweep Strip 1 Rain Drip Functions: Inside always by lever. Outside by lever, except when outside lever is set by outside key, then outside by key. Deadlocking latch bolt. FINISH HARDWARE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 08 70 00 - 12 NOTE: The following Elevation Diagram is for reference only. Exact components, conductor requirements and installation requirements shall be verified with supplier, owner and Architect prior to final installation and hook-up. Supplier to provide Elevation Diagrams, Point -to -Point Diagrams and Operation narratives based on material supplied. UNIVERSAL ELECTRONIC HARDWARE PREPS AND CONDUCTOR REQUIREMENTS (Verify exact requirements with electrified hardware manufacturer supplied) Dfriaanyl tdpro"fillstswltr6 Is prior to all power supplies for 'N easy serviceability of electrified 14 Relay contacts from Access Control w ti Hardware, Panel. Verify termination requirements laavac input pptlpEp with Control S llcl '?P • '• k G 760maMAX. WPFL)! 14AWG Has Wire Size r wa ,p p A . See Detailed Point -to O -Point diagrams for O Y A accurate hook up k 9 ro� am op�si q �p7 � q —•A--m log �1— III b °r, m a, +Ieodaot C%ctrDoor Position I echxnical Holded4 Stop I� I� I I Oid 10 Magnetic Lock Switch Ari Closer mounted Opposite side of Door. { 9 ii it II It Magnetic Wall Holder 'I 11 ii Yount on Single Gang box I j ' Power Transfer for Aluminum I I 1 provide by Division 26 - f II Verify Horizontal and and Ron Rated Wood & Hollow I Vertical location with Doorscation I Yagneti Wall Holder 1 [ ! 7 Provide raceway and twelve conductor LED 4J 'I I Manufacturer. common wile$ NNh plug tonuctors at Monitor �I �I woad doors By Section 00-1416 Wood Doors 0 +i Provide raceway and conduit with Electrified O II �J it Yortme Lock 1 II twelve conductor common woes with �-� l ' II plug connectors at Hollow Metal Doors. {J Y_ i II By Section 08-lll3 Hollow Metal Doors madFremer + ,— 4 Electric Transfer Hinge `—.�:��- Key Switch Push Button Il II Eleetrifiedixit 11xti1E d Mount on Single Gang {I box provided f I {I Power Transfer for Fire Rated Electric Strike $ by Division 26 I, Wood and Hollow Metal Doors, 0 16 Go cover box with conduit attched and stubbed 6' above top of frame Cover hot and conduit shall be welded to frame at each location electrified hardware is specified Refer to Section 00.06T1 Finish Hardware - Groups for specific elctrified hardware. Doors and Frames shall be pre.wired with 13- conductor wiring harness with standardized wire colors Wiring harness shall include plug connectors at ech end for attachment of electrified hardware - END OF SECTION p tJ. tf �a 13 Card Reader -Mount onjunctionhox pmvidedhyDivision 26 located 48" AFF, Low Fnergy Operator control switches shallbe mounted on dunctionbox by Division 26, located 30" to 36" above finished floor and at least 30"from the pull an ofthe swinging door, © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FINISH HARDWARE 08 70 00 - 13 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 08 81 00 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Glass for doors and windows. B. Related Sections 1. Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. 2. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURE A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's descriptive data of glass and glazing methods. B. Recommended installation instructions. C. Shop drawings showing details of glass installation at framing members, such as head, mullions, jambs, and sills. D. Two 12-inch by 12-inch pieces of each type of glass specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer/Fabricator's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years' experience in the actual production of the specified products. B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with 3 years of experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus other specified requirements: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. 2. Successfully completed a minimum of 5 comparable scale projects using this system. C. Regulatory Requirements: Glass fabricator is responsible for determining specific glass strengths and thicknesses. Strengths and thicknesses indicated on Drawings and specified in this Section are minimum only. Manufacturer's glass sizing and thickness charts shall take precedence over Drawings only where charts indicate thicker or stronger glass: 1. Tempering: Comply with requirements of CPSC 16, CPR 1201, C 11 applicable to this Project. Locations indicated on Drawings are minimum only. GLAZING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0881 00-1 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver glass with manufacturer's labels intact. B. Do not remove labels until glass has been installed, inspected, and approved by Architect. C. Keep glass free from contamination by materials capable of staining glass. D. Deliver glazing compounds and sealants in manufacturer's unopened, labeled containers.. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Perform glazing when ambient temperature is above 10 degrees F. B. Perform glazing on dry surfaces only. 1.07 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Contractor/manufacturer/installer shall warrant insulated glass for a period of 5 years from Date of Substantial Completion against conditions indicated below. When notified in writing by Owner they shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct said deficiencies in compliance with requirements of A201, 12.2. 1. Failure of the Hermetic Seal (10 years on Glass): a. Condensation, dust collection, or film formation on glass surfaces within the air space. 2. Breakage resulting from chipped or damaged edge conditions from original installation or thermal stresses. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Glass Substrate l . AFG Industries, Inc. 2. Ford Motor Co., Glass Division. 3. Pilkington Group. 4. PPG Industries, Inc., Glass Group. 5. Or approved equal. Acceptable Fabricators for Coated and Laminated Units are limited to: 1. HGP. 2. Viracon, Inc. 3. interpane Glass Company. 4. Guardian Industries Corporation. 5. Oldcastle Glass Group. 6. Or approved equal. C. Acceptable Fabricators for Clear and Tinted Insulated Class Units 1. Any manufacturer/fabricator with a "CBA" classification. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 GLAZING 0881 00-2 2.02 MATERIALS A. Note: Provide tempered or heat strengthened glass as indicated or where required by current applicable building codes. B. Float Glass (GL-1): 1/4-inch thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ASTM C1036, Type 1 (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality q3 (glazing select). C. 1 Inch Insulated Glass (GL-2): Low Emissivity coating, Exterior lite - 1/4-inch thick clear float glass, 1/2-inch air space filled with Argon gas, Interior lite - 1/4-inch thick clear float glass. Provide tempered insulating glass units where necessary to comply with safety code requirements and/or indicated on the Drawings. D. 1 Inch Insulated Frosted Glass (GL-3): Low Emissivity coating, Exterior lite - 1/4-inch thick clear float glass, 1/2-inch air space filled with Argon gas, Interior lite - 1/4-inch thick clear float glass with acid -etched finish to create a uniform translucent appearance. Provide tempered insulating glass units where necessary to comply with safety code requirements and/or indicated on the Drawings. Safety Glass: 1/4-inch thickness, unless otherwise indicated. All tempered glass shall meet the current requirements of the ASTM C1048 "Standard Specification for Heat Treated Flat Glass Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass." All Tempered Glass shall have a permanent logo which signifies Safety Commission 16 CFR-1201 and the safety glass test requirements of ANSI Z-97 (current editions). 2.03 GLAZING TAPE A. Polymerized butyl, rubber tape, coiled on release paper, manufacturer's standard. 2.04 SEALANT A. 1 part silicone rubber, FS TT-S-001543 non -sag type, Class B. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 70-90 Shore "A" durometer hardness, chemically compatible with glazing sealant or compound, length as recommended by glass manufacturer. B. Spacers and Shims: Neoprene, 40-50 Shore "A" durometer hardness, chemically compatible with glazing sealant or compound, length as recommended by glass manufacturer. C. Glazing Points and Wire Spring Clips: Corrosion resistant, manufacturer's standard. D. Filler Rod: Compressible synthetic rubber or foam, chemically compatible with sealant used. E. Primer -Sealers and Cleaners: As recommended by glass manufacturer. GLAZING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0881 00 - 3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check that glazing channels are free of burrs, irregularities, and debris. B. Check that glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections. C. Do not proceed with installation until conditions are satisfactory. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Field Measurements 1. Measure size of frame to receive glass. 2. Compute actual glass size, allowing for edge clearances. B. Preparation of Surfaces 1. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed. 2. Clean glass and glazing surfaces to remove dust, oil, and contaminants, and wipe dry. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install glass in accordance with manufacturer's recommended instructions. 3.04 CLEANING A. Remove excess glazing compound from installed glass. B. Remove labels from glass surface as soon as installation has been inspected. C. Wash and polish both faces of glass. D. Remove debris from Site. 3.05 PROTECTION OF COMPLETED WORK A. Attach crossed streamers away from glass face. B. Do not apply markers to glass surface. C. Replace damaged glass. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 GLAZING 0881 00-4 SECTION 08 91 19 METAL WALL LOUVERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Exterior wall louvers. B. Related Sections 1. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 2. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units. 3. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 5. Dampers and Connections of Mechanical Ductwork: Refer to Division 23. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURE A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Provide louvers and structural support systems to withstand a design wind load of 40-psf positive and negative. B. Performance Requirements 1. Provide louver to permit passage of air velocity of 1,000 feet per minute without blade vibration or noise with static pressure loss of 0.10-inch as measured at 1,000 fpm. 2. Water Penetration: Less than 0.025 ounce of water per square foot of free area at velocity of 1,000 fpm. 3. Pressure Drop: Less than 0.10-inch w.g. (intake or exhaust) at a free area velocity of 1,000 fpm. 4. Free Area: Not less than 50 percent. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with Section 01 33 00, unless otherwise indicated. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data, including the following: 1. Detailed specification of construction and fabrication. 2. Manufacturer's installation instructions. 3. Test data or certification indicating water penetration and free area according to AMCA Standard 500. 4. Certified test reports indicating compliance with specified performance requirements. METAL WALL LOUVERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0891 19 - 1 C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, relationship to adjoining work, hardware, and installation procedures. D. Samples: Submit 2 sets of color samples for color selection. E. Quality Control 1. Statement of qualifications for manufacturers. 2. AMCA certification. 3. Statement of compliance for performance requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years of experience in the actual production of specified products. B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years of experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus the following: 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. 2. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system. C. Product/Material Qualifications: Provide AM( -.A certified rntinq and seal indicating compliance with specified air flow requirements. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Protect from the elements and from damage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers for 4-inch deep Aluminum Wall Louvers 1. The Airolite Company, Model K666. 2. Arrow United Industries, Model EA415D. 3. Industrial Louvers, Inc., Model 458XP. 4. Ruskin Louvers, Inc., Model ELF375DX. 5. American Warming and Ventilating, A Mestek Company, Model LE-23. 6. Or approved equal. B. Acceptable Manufacturers for 6-inch deep Aluminum Wall Louvers 1. The Airolite Company, Model C136776. 2. Arrow United Industries, Model EA-615-D. 3. Industrial Louvers, Inc., Model 653-XP. 4. Ruskin Louvers, Iris;., Mudul ELF6375DX. 5. American Warming and Ventilating, A Mestek Company, Model LE-31. METAL WALL LOUVERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0891 19 - 2 C. Drawings and Specifications are based on manufacturer's proprietary literature from The Airolite Company. Other manufacturers shall comply with the minimum levels of material and detailing indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Comply with the following: 1. Aluminum Shapes: Extruded aluminum, ASTM B221. 2. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B209. 2.03 CONTINUOUS TYPE WALL LOUVERS - DRAINABLE BLADES A. 4 Inch Drainable Blade Wall Louver: Aluminum of continuous type design. Construct of not less than 0.081 inch thick extruded aluminum for frame and blades. 4-inch depth with channel shaped frame. Blades at 30-degree slope. 1. Performance Requirements: Based on 4 foot by 4 foot size unit. a. Approximate Free Area: 8.52 square feet (53 percent). b. Approximate Pressure Drop, Free Area Velocity at 0.10 Inch Water Gauge: 760 fpm. c. Approximate Water Penetration, 0.01 Ounce per Square Foot of Free Area: 6,475 cfm. 6 Inch Drainable Blade Wall Louver: Aluminum of continuous type design. Construct of not less than 0.081-inch thick extruded aluminum for frame and blades. 6-inch depth with channel shaped frame. Blades at 35 degree slope. 1. Performance Requirements: Based on 4 foot by 4 foot size unit. a. Approximate Free Area: 9.10 square feet (57 percent). b. Approximate Pressure Drop, Free Area Velocity at 0.18 Inch Water Gauge: 1,250 fpm. c. Approximate Water Penetration, 0.01 Ounce per Square Foot of Free Area: 1,250 fpm. 2.04 SCREENS A. Provide framed removable screens. Insect screens are to be installed on all intake louvers and bird screens on all exhaust louvers. B. Bird screens shall be galvanized steel mesh with 1/4-inch spacing. C. Insect screens shall be 18 by 16 mesh aluminum. 2.05 ACCESSORIES A. Sill At Aluminum Louvers: Not less than 0.080-inch thick extruded aluminum of shape as indicated or required to accommodate construction conditions. Finish same as louver. B. Insulated Blank -Off Panels: Not less than 0.050-inch thick aluminum plate with louver manufacturer's standard insulation adhered on interior face. Finish exposed exterior surface to match louver finish, unless otherwise indicated. C. Bituminous Coating: Cold -applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil thickness per coat. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 METAL WALL LOUVERS 0891 19-3 D. Fasteners: Type 302 stainless steel. Size and type as recommended by louver manufacturer to resist loads. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Shop/Factory Assembly 1. Fabricate louvers free of visible defects with tight joints. 2. Neatly miter corners and reinforce with brackets. 3. Continuous weld corners and intersections. Grind exposed welds flush and smooth to match original metal before applying finish coating. 4. Use partial blades to achieve even blade spacing. 5. At continuous type louvers, provide structural supports and blade braces located at each vertical mullion and at intermediate intervals not more than 72 inches on center to produce an exterior elevation without vertical mullions over the entire assembly. a. Integral Structural Steel Supports: Designed by louver manufacturer to resist implied wind loads. b. Provide complete with manufacturer's interlocking blade braces. c. Structural angles, either steel or aluminum, is the responsibility of louver manufacturer to size and provide. d. Provide for thermal movement and expansion of louver assembly and supports. 2.07 FINISHES A. Anodic Coating: Clean exposed surfaces with caustic etch and anodize to an Architectural Class 1 coating. 1. Color Anodic Coating: Clean exposed surfaces with medium matte caustic etch and anodize to an Architectural Class 1 coating (thickness not less than 0.7 mil). a. As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of anodic coatings to match existing buildings. B. Furnish manufacturer's matching touch-up anodic coating for touch-up of fasteners and abrasions. C. Thoroughly clean, elc:h, urid give inelal surfaces a chromate conversion pretreatment before application of the primer coat. E) Apply a heavy coating of bituminous paint where aluminum contacts masonry, concrete, mortar, plaster, or a dissimilar metal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate size and location of cutouts in blank -off panels with mechanical installer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 METAL WALL LOUVERS 0891 19-4 B. Protection: Protect aluminum in contact with masonry, concrete, steel, and other dissimilar materials from galvanic and corrosive action with neoprene gaskets or a coat of bituminous paint applied before installation of aluminum product. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Install louvers straight, plumb, level, and in plane of wall at locations indicated. C. Use concealed fasteners of non -corrosive material compatible with materials encountered. 3.04 PROTECTION A. After installation, carefully protect Work against disfiguration or damage from mechanical abuse or harmful materials. 3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust louvers so moving parts operate smoothly. B. Repair damage to louvers to match original or replace. END OF SECTION METAL WALL LOUVERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0891 19 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM DRYWALL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Light gauge metal framing. 2. Gypsum drywall. B. Related Sections: l . Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 2. Section 07 21 00 - Insulation. 3. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 4. Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames. 5. Section 08 51 13 - Aluminum Windows. 6. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Gypsum Board Standard: GA-216 by Gypsum Association. B. Metal Support Standard: ASTM C754. C. Installation Standard: Gypsum Construction Handbook, US Gypsum Company. D. Fire Resistance Rating: Where systems with fire resistance ratings are indicated, provide materials and installations which have been tested and listed by recognized authorities. E. Manufacturer: Obtain products from a single manufacturer or from manufacturers recommended by the prime manufacturer of gypsum board. F. Allowable Tolerances: 1 / 16 inch offset between planes of gypsum base faces, and 1 /8 inch in 8 feet for plumb, level, warp, and bow. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver, identify, store and protect gypsum drywall materials to comply with referenced standards. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Comply with referenced standards. GYPSUM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0 DRYWALL - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL SUPPORT MATERIALS A. Wall Framing Materials: 1. Studs equal to USG 20-gauge galvanized metal studs for walls up to 14 feet in height but limited to deflection of L/360. 2. Runners: 20-gauge galvanized steel. B. Furring Members: ASTM C645; 25-gauge, hat -shaped. Where shown as "Resilient," provide manufacturer's special type designed to reduce sound transmission. ASTM C645; 25- gauge, "C" shaped studs for spans over 4'-0". C. Furring Anchorages: 16-gauge galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire -type clips, bolts, nails, or screws as recommended by furring manufacturers for the conditions encountered or to meet fire test requirements. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. Exposed Gypsum Board: ASTM C588, regular type, unless otherwise indicated: l . Edge Profile: Manufacturer's standard. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch, unless othcrwisc indicatod on tho Drawings. 3. Sheet Size: Maximum length available which will minimize end joints. 4. Type X: Provide special fire -retardant gypsum board where indicated or required for fire -resistance rated assemblies. 5. Tile Backer Board: Silicone -treated core with glass mat moisture protectant coating and embedded glass mats, both sides. The face side is surfaced with heat -cured copolymer water and vapor retardant coating, 1 /2 inch thick; 2 inch wide coated glass fiber tape for joints and corners. 2.03 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated for gypsum drywall, formed of galvanized steel with flanges for concealrrierrl iri joinI curripound, including corner beads, edge trim, control joints, RC-1 resilient channels, etc. B. Wet or Moist Ar-rrC. ChPPt Ctaal galvanized. 2.04 JOINT REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with ASTM C587. B. Joint Tape: Perforated type. C. Joint Compound: Ready -mixed vinyl -type for interior use, single multi -purpose grade for entire application. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Concealed Acoustic Sealant: Mastic type; non -shrinking, non -migrating, and non -staining. B. Water -Resistant Sealant: Type recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. Seal cut edges and penetrations of water-resistant backing board. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 GYPSUM DRYWALL 092900-2 C. Sound Attenuation Insulation: Formaldehyde -free Acoustical Glass Fiber Insulation, ASTM C665 Unfaced Type 1, Class 25 flame -spread, thickness equal to or greater than stud dimension. D. Acoustical Sealant: As recommended by manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Ceiling Anchorages: Coordinate work with structural ceiling work to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers. Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips, and similar devices to other trades for installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Do not bridge building expansion joints with support system, frame both sides of joints with furring and other supports as required. Partition Installation: 1. Stud System Erection: a. Attach steel runners at floor and ceiling to structural elements with suitable fasteners located 2 inches from each end and spaced 16 inches on center. b. Position studs vertically with open side facing in some direction, engaging floor and ceiling runners, and spaced 16 inches on center. When necessary, splice studs with 8 inch nested lap and 2 positive attachments per stud flange. Place studs in direct contact with all door frame jambs, abutting partitions, partition corners, and existing construction elements. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls and a possibility of water penetration through walls exists, install asphalt felt strips between studs and wall surfaces. c. Anchor all studs for shelf -walls and those adjacent to door and window frames, partition intersections, corners, and free-standing furring to ceiling and floor runner flanges with metal lock fastener tool or screws. Securely anchor studs to jamb and head anchors of door or borrowed -light frames by bolt or screw attachment. Over metal door and borrowed -light frames, place horizontally a cut -to -length section of runner with a web -flange bend at each end, and secure to strut -studs with 2 screws in each bent web. Position a cut -to -length stud (extending to ceiling runner) at vertical panel joints over door frame header. When attaching studs to steel grid system, structural adequacy of grid to support end reaction of wall must be determined. C. Ceiling Support Suspension Systems l . Furnish concrete inserts, steel deck hanger clips, and similar devices to other trades for installation well in advance of time needed for coordination with other work. 2. Secure hanger wires to structural support by wire -tying directly to structure where possible, otherwise tie to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners as indicated. Wire -tie hanger wires to main runners. 3. Space main runners 48 inches on center and space hangers 48 inches on center along runners, except as otherwise shown. 4. Level main runners to a tolerance of 1 /4 inch in 12 feet, measured both lengthwise on each runner and transversely between parallel runners. GYPSUM DRYWALL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 29 00 - 3 5. Wire -tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated. 6. Space furring members 16 inches on center maximum, except as otherwise indicated. 7. Install auxiliary framing at termination of drywall work, and at openings for light fixtures and similar work, as required for support of both the drywall construction and other work indicated for support thereon. 3.03 GENERAL GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Locate exposed end -butt joints as far from center of walls and ceilings as possible, and stagger not less than 1'-0" in alternate courses of base. B. Install wall/partition boards vertically to avoid end -butt joints wherever possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. C. Install gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged, or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1 /16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place. D. Attach gypsum board to framing and blocking as required for additional support at openings and cutouts. E. Form control joints and expansion joints with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories. Locate as indicated and as required by reference standards and not to exceed 30 lineal feet. F. Cover both faces of master partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces, except in chase walls which are properly braced internally. Except where concealed application is required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 square feet area and may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage. G. Isolate edges of cdypsuin board from abutment with structure except at floors. Provide 1/4-inch acoustical sealant, coordinated with trim. H. Flnating Cnnstruction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum board with "floating" internal corner construction, unless isolation of the intersecting boards is indicated, unless control or expansion joints are indicated, or unless fire rating is indicated. All interior stud partitions shall receive sound attenuation blankets as specified in Paragraph 2.05.0 above for full height of partition. J. Space fasteners in gypsum boards in accordance with referenced standards and manufacturer's recommendations, except as otherwise indicated. K. Use water-resistant board at all wet locations such as toilets, janitor's closets, bathrooms, etc. L. Extend partition system, including both faces of gypsum board, sound attenuation blankets, etc. to structure above, unless otherwise indicated. GYPSUM DRYWALL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 29 00 - 4 3.04 INSTALLATION OF TRIM AND JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Where feasible, use the same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten gypsum board to the supports. Otherwise, fasten flanges by nailing or stapling to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Install metal corner beads at external corners of gypsum drywall with 9/16 inch galvanized staples at 9 inches on center on both flanges. C. Install metal edge trim wherever edge of gypsum board would otherwise be exposed or semi -exposed, and except where plastic trim is indicated. Provide type with face flanges for embedment in plaster, except where semi -finishing type is indicated. Install L-type where work is tightly abutted to other work and install special Kerf-type where other work is kerfed to receive long leg of L type trim. Install U-type trim where edge is exposed, revealed, gasketed, or sealant -filled (including expansion joints). Conceal all trim in joint compound. D. Install metal control joint (beaded type) where required. Install joint reinforcement on gypsum wallboard joints (including internal corners). Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for attachment and embedment of joint reinforcement in plaster or other joint compound. Provide either mesh -type or paper -type joint reinforcement, at Installer's option, except comply with manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. Comply with Gypsum Construction Handbook for three -coat application on all gypsum board. 3.05 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840, GA-216 or GA-214: l . Locations to receive Level 0 finish (no taping, finishing, or accessories required): Non - fire -rated, non -sound -rated, and non -smoke -rated assemblies in ceiling plenums and concealed areas, and in temporary construction. 2. Locations to receive Level 1 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have tape set in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable): Fire rated, sound rated, and smoke rated assemblies in plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, and in areas where the assembly would generally be concealed. 3. Locations to receive Level 2 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating of joint compound over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound): Surfaces to receive moisture resistant gypsum board as a surfacing. GYPSUM DRYWALL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 29 00 - 5 4. Locations to receive Level 3 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over all joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with two separate coats of joint compound): Areas which are to receive heavy or medium -texture (spray or hand applied) before final painting, or where heavy -grade wallcoverings are to be applied as the final decoration. This level of finish is not recommended where smooth painted surfaces or light to medium wall coverings are specified. 5. Locations to receive Level 4 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints): All flat and eggshell paints, light textures, or wallcoverings. 6. Locations to receive Level 5 finish (all joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and two separate coats of joint compound applied over all flat joints. A thin skim coat of joint compound trowel applied, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose and applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges): Gloss or semi -gloss paints, and areas where severe lighting conditions occur. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL BACKING A. Install continuously wilh no c:ul juinls using adhesive as recommended by manufacturer. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary coverings used to protect other work. B. Remove spillage promptly from door frames, windows, and other adjoining work. Repair surfaces which have been damaged by plastering work. C. Protect gypsum drywall work from damage and deterioration during the remainder of the construction period. END OF SECTION GYPSUM DRYWALL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 29 00 - 6 SECTION 09 31 13 CERAMIC TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide the work indicated on Drawings, as specified and as follows: a. Unglazed Ceramic Floor Tile b. Porcelain Wall Tile c. Porcelain Base Tile 2. Provide transition edge strips where floor the meets a dissimilar floor finish. 3. Provide the trim where noted or specified. 4. Provide mortar setting materials for the installation. 5. Provide the grouting for the installation. 6. Provide waterproof membrane and crack isolation system: a. Continuous under all the flooring; b. Over movement joints (expansion joints, control joints, construction joints, and other movement type joints) in concrete floor slabs -on -grade for a minimum width of 6 feet that is centered on joint; and under the in showers. 7. Provide sealants related to the systems. 8. Provide aluminum the edge and corner protection at exposed edges and outside corners of the installation. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. General Requirements: Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's Product Data and installation instructions for each product provided. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Tile Samples: Submit samples of tiles specified to Architect, as soon as possible, for color selection. 2. Sealant Samples: Submit (2) copies of sealant manufacturer's color samples for each type of sealant, for color selection. D. Warranty: Submit a copy of warranty. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitation Tile: 1. Obtain the of each type and color or finish from one source or producer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CERAMIC TILE 0931 13- 1 2. Obtain the of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Underlayment, waterproofing/crack isolation membrane, setting materials, and grouting materials for tiling shall be by same manufacturer. C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in the installation of the and having the experience in installing the products and work specified within this Section. Installing Contractor shall be prepared to provide documented experience with installations of similar scope, materials, and design. D. Mock -Ups: 1. Before starting installation of the products, provide field sample panels, with grouted joints, for each type of the system specified, for Architect's approval. 2. Sample panel(s) to be not less than 4 feet by 4 feet, using selected colors of the and grout, and using proposed preparation and installation methods. 3. Do not start installation work until Architect has approved sample panel(s). 4. Approved panel(s) will be used for comparison purposes as standard for quality of appearance, materials, and methods of installation. 5. Do not destroy or move panel until a time approved by Architect. Panel may be incorporated into Project work if approvod by Architect. E. Pre -Installation Conference: 1. Prior to commencing tiling work, arrange and conduct a Pre -Installation Conference on -site to discuss conformance with the requirements of the Specification and site conditions. 2. Representatives for the Owner, Architect, Contractor, the installer, tile manufacturer, installation system manufacturer, and other parties who may be affected by tiling work should attend. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Hacking and Shipping: 1. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original sealed containers with labels legible and intact, identifying brand name and contents. 2 Meet requirements of ANSI A137,1 for labeling tile,_nncknge$. B. Storage and Protection: 1. Store the and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, in a dry location, under cover, in a manner to prevent damage or contamination. 2. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protect from freezing. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install the until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions for products being installed. CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 2 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer Warranty: l . Manufacturer of adhesives, mortars, grouts, and other installation materials shall provide a written warranty of minimum 15 years, which covers materials and labor. 2. Manufacturer of installation products shall warrant that installation system, for a minimum period of 15 years (effective from date of Substantial Completion): a. Will not transfer cracks from substrate when subjected to in -plane movement of cracks up to 1/8-inch; b. Will not allow water intrusion to the membrane; and c. Will maintain bond between the and approved substrate, under normal use. 1.08 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. General Requirements: 1. Furnish to Owner, not less than 3 percent of total of each type, size, and color of the and trim units installed. 2. Neatly package and clearly label extra materials for storage. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCTS - GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide the that meets requirements of ANSI Al 37.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide the in accordance with standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials in accordance with ANSI Al 08.02, ANSI standards referenced in this Section, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in the installation schedules, and other requirements specified. C. Factory Blending: For the exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend the in factory and package so the units taken from (1) package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples. D. Mounting: For factory mounted tile, provide back or edge mounted the assemblies as standard with manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated. l . Where the is indicated for installation in swimming pools, on exteriors, or in wet areas, do not use back or edge mounted the assemblies unless the manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance. According to ANSI A137.1, manufacturers must specify whether back- or edge -mounted the assemblies are suitable for these installations because mounting materials will decrease contact area of setting material to tile, and mounting materials may not be as strong or as waterproof as setting materials. 2.02 CERAMIC TILE A. Applicable Standard: ANSI A137.1., Ceramic Tile B. Factory Mounted, Unglazed Ceramic Mosaic Floor Tile (CT-1): © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CERAMIC TILE 0931 13-3 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. American Olean Tile Company. b. Crossville Ceramics Company. c. Dal -Tile Corporation. 2. Edge: Cushion. 3. Modular Size: 2 inches by 2 inches. 4. Thickness: 1/4-inch. 5. Mounting: a. Factory back or edge mount tile, unless otherwise noted. b. Use paper face -mounted the in wet area to include showers, swimming pool tanks, and pool decks. 6. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture. 7. Color Selection: a. Architect shall have option to select from manufacturer's colors within Price Groups 1 and 2. b. Architect shall have option to select up to 3 different colors floor tile, in any quantity required for each color. c. Where accent colors are noted on Drawings, Architect shall have option to select from manufacturer's colors in Price Groups 1, 2, 3, and 4. d. Glaze: Matte glaze. 2.03 PORCELAIN CERAMIC TILE A. General: 1. If porcelain is part of a pattern, make sure when ordering tile that the calibers will work together. B. Applicable Standard: ANSI A137.1, Ceramic Tile C. Porcelain Ceramic Floor Tile (PCT-1): 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. Daltile. b. American Olean. c. Crossville, Inc. 7 Modular Size 19 inrh by 19 inrh 3. Edge: Square. 4. Color Selection: Architect shall choose from colors up through Price Group IV. D. Porcelain Ceramic Base Tile (PCT-2): l . Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. Daltile. b. American Olean. c. Crossville, Inc. 2. Modular Size: 6 inch by 12 inch 3. Edge: Square. 4. Color Selection: Architect shall choose from colors up through Price Group IV. CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 4 Porcelain Ceramic Wall Tile (PCT-3): l . Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. Daltile. b. American Olean. c. Crossville, Inc. 2. Modular Size: 12 inch by 12 inch. 3. Color Selection: Architect shall choose from colors up through Price Group IV. F. Porcelain Tile Trim: Tile manufacturer's standard trim for the to be installed. 2.04 INSTALLATION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: l . Custom Building Products a. Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane, ANSI Al 18.10: RedGard Waterproofing and Crack Prevention Membrane. b. Thin -Set Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4: MegaFlex Crack Prevention Mortar. c. Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4.15: ProLite Tile and Stone Mortar. d. Non -Sag Mortar, Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.15: ProLite Tile and Stone Mortar. e. Polymer Modified Unsanded Grout, ANSI Al 18.7: Prism Grout. f. Epoxy Grout, ANSI Al 18.3: CEG 20001 100 Percent Solids Commercial Epoxy Grout. 2. Laticrete International, Inc. a. Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane, ANSI Al 18.10: Laticrete Hydro Ban. b. Thin -Set Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4: 4-XLT. c. Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4: 4-XLT or 255 MultiMax. d. Non -Sag Mortar, Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.15: 254 Platinum. e. Polymer Modified Unsanded Grout, ANSI Al 18.7: PermaColor. f. Epoxy Grout, ANSI Al 18.3: Spectral-ock 2000 IG. 3. Mapei Corporation a. Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane, ANSI Al 18.10: Mapelastic AquaDefense. b. Thin -Set Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4: Ultraflex 3. c. Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4.15: Kerabond T/Keralastic. d. Non -Sag Mortar, Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.15: Kerabond T/Keralastic. e. Polymer Modified Unsanded Grout, ANSI Al 18.7: Ultracolor Plus. f. Epoxy Grout, ANSI Al 18.3: Kerapoxy IEG. 4. TEC Specialty Products, Inc. a. Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane, ANSI Al 18.10: HydraFlex Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane. b. Thin -Set Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4: 3N1-Performance Mortar or SuperFlex. c. Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.4.15: 3N1-Performance Mortar. d. Non -Sag Mortar, Medium Bed Mortar, ANSI Al 18.15: 3N1-Performance Mortar. e. Polymer Modified Unsanded Grout, ANSI Al 18.7: Power Grout. f. Epoxy Grout, ANSI Al 18.3: AccuColor EFX Epoxy Special Effects Grout. 2.05 SEALANT A. General Requirements: 1. Sealant Colors: As selected by Architect. Architect has option to select from products of all acceptable manufacturers to obtain color(s) desired. 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CERAMIC TILE 0931 13-5 1-Component Polyurethane Sealant: l . Applicable Standard: In accordance with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, O, and with Federal Specification TT-S-00230C, Type II, Class A. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. Bostik, "Chem -Calk 900". b. Pecora Corporation, "Dynatrol 1-XL". c. Sika Corporation, "Sikaflex-1 a". d. Sonneborn Building Products, Division of BASF Building Systems, "NP 1 ". e. Tremco, Inc., Sealant/Weatherproofing Division, "Dymonic" or "Vulkem 116". C. Multi -Component Self -Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: 1. Applicable Standard: In accordance with ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T, M, and O. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. Bostik, Chem -Calk 550. b. Pecora Corporation, Urexpan NR-200. c. Sika Corporation, Sikaflex-2c SL. d. Sonneborn Building Products, Division of BASF Building Systems, SL 2. e. Tremco, Inc., Sealant/Weatherproofing Division, THC-900 or Vulkem 3230. D. Mildew -Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant: 1. Applicable Standard: In accordance with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NIS, Class 25, Use T, I, M and G. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. GE Silicones, "Sanitary 1700 Silicone Sealant". b. Dow Corning Corporation, "786 Mildew -Resistant Silicone Sealant". c. Laticrete International, Inc., "Latasil". d. TEC Specialty Products, Inc., "AccuColor 100 100% Silicone Sealant" e. Custom Building Products, "Commercial 100% Silicone Caulk". f. Mapei Corporation, "Mapesil 100% Silicone Caulk". 3. Description: Silicone rubber based, I -part elastomeric sealant, compounded specifically for mildew resistance and recommended by manufacturer for interior joints in wet areas. ,1 Primer: inr ry 4kJ inn in r Ic and metal to metal In r-aalPr/frPP7PYC a. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: 1) Laticrete International, Inc., "Latasil 9118 Primer". 2) TEC Specialty Products, Inc., "Multipurpose Primer". E. Miscellaneous Caulking/Sealant Related Materials: 1. Joint Cleaner, Joint Primer, Bond Breaker Tape, and/or Sealant Backer Rod (Sealant Back -Up) (Cylindrical Sealant Backings): As recommended/approved by sealant manufacturer. CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 6 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Underlayment: 1. General: If required by manufacturer, provide a factory prepared non -shrinking, fast setting, crack resistant adhesive compound, capable of being brought to a feather edge and containing no ferrous metal or oxides. Provide product which is compatible with substrate surface and with the setting mortar and meet manufactures warranty. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. Custom Building Products, "LevelQuik Rapid Setting Self -Leveling Underlayment with LevelQuik Latex Primer". b. Laticrete International, Inc., "86 Latasil-evel With Laticrete Admix and Primer". c. Mapei Corporation, Ultraplan 1 Plus with Primer L or Primer T (Fast Setting, Self -Leveling Underlayment.) d. TEC Specialty Products, Inc., "EZ Level® Premium Self -Leveling Underlayment With TECO Multipurpose Primer". B. Temporary Protective Coating: Product indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of the against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile. C. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming the and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by the and grout manufacturers. D. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints and that does not change color or appearance of grout. l . Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows or Owner approved equal: a. Custom Building Products, "TileLab Surfaceguard". b. Aqua Mix Grout Sealer. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc., SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer. d. TEC Specialty Products Inc., Subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company, "Grout Guard Plus Penetrating Grout Sealer". 2. Location: Cementitious porous grout joints for ceramic the installations. Cast Plastic Thresholds and Transition Floor Edge Strips: 1. Provide cast plastic/solid surface ("Corian Threshold Program" or Owner approved equal) edge molding. 2. Architect shall have the option to select from manufacturer's standard colors. 3. Bevel and finish threshold or transition strip to be flush with adjacent materials. a. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1 /16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1 /2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface. F. Finishing and Edge Protection Profiles for Wall Tiling: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CERAMIC TILE 0931 13-7 a. Schluter Systems, L.P. 2. Exposed Tile Edge Protection: a. Product: Schluter, "Jolly". b. Description: L-shaped profile with 1/8-inch wide top section, and vertical wall section that together form the visible surface, integrated trapezoid -perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer. c. Material and Finish: Satin nickel anodized aluminum. d. Use: Provide at exposed vertical termination edges of tile. 3. Tiled Corner Protection: a. Product: Schluter, "Rondec". b. Description: Bullnose-type profile with symmetrically rounded visible surface with 1/3-inch radius, integrated trapezoid -perforated anchoring leg, and integrated grout joint spacer. c. Material and Finish: Satin nickel anodized aluminum. d. Use: Provide at outside vertical tiled corners. G. Shrinkage Mesh: Galvanized, 2-inch by 2-inch by 14-gauge welded wire fabric. H. Building Paper/Cleavage Membrane: Asphalt saturated organic felt, 15 pound, non -perforated, in accordance with ASTM D226. 2.07 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. General Requirements: 1. Mix mortars and grouts in accordance with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. 3. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINAIIUN A. Verification of Conditions: 1 Examine substrates, aro=nC and conrlitinn.c whPrP UP_, will he installed. with Contractor present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. a. Verify that substrates for setting the are firm, dry, clean, free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI Al08 Series of the installation standards. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for the floors meet surface finish requirements in ANSI Al 08.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that receive a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding. 3. Verify that items to be installed in or behind the have been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with the joint locations. If not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. 5. Do not commence the installation until satisfactory conditions exist. Installation of the shall indicate Contractor's acceptance of substrate. CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 8 3.02 PREPARATION A. Protection: Protect adjoining work surfaces before the installation work begins. B. Preparation of Existing Surfaces: Prepare existing floor and wall substrate surfaces in accordance with TCNA recommended methods, and as recommended by manufacturers of mortar/adhesive tile setting products and/or leveling compound products to be used, to provide proper adhesion/bonding of tile. C. Preparation of Tile: Clean and remove from the any coatings, including kiln release agent and other substances, soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile -setting materials. D. Preparation of Floors: l . Concrete Substrate: Fill holes and cracks and level surfaces that are out of required plane with leveling compound. 2. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that are incompatible with tile -setting materials. 3. Provide surfaces of substrates for the floors in accordance with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of the installation standards. a. Fill cracks, holes, mortar joints in substrate surface, and other depressions, with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile -setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use products specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer for each installation condition. b. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 4. Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane: Provide waterproofing/crack isolation membrane as full coverage on substrate surface beneath the setting bed. a. Pre -treat cracks, cold joints, control joints, and seams as recommend by waterproofing/crack isolation membrane manufacturer. Provide mesh strips if recommend by waterproofing/crack isolation membrane manufacturer. b. Pre -treat coves, corners, and wall/floor transitions as recommend by waterproofing/crack isolation membrane manufacturer. Provide mesh strips if recommend by waterproofing/crack isolation membrane manufacturer. c. Pre -treat drains and penetrations as recommend by waterproofing/crack isolation membrane manufacturer. Provide mesh strips if recommend by waterproofing/crack isolation membrane manufacturer. d. Do not install the or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. Preparation of Walls: 1. Remove coatings and other substances that are incompatible with tile -setting materials. 2. Provide substrates for wall tile, installed with thin -set mortar that meets flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI Al08 Series of the installation standards. a. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile -setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use products specifically recommended by tile -setting material manufacturer. b. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. 3. Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane: Provide waterproofing crack isolation membrane as full coverage on substrate surface beneath the setting bed at shower room walls. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CERAMIC TILE 0931 13-9 Tile Blending: 1. For the exhibiting color variations within ranges approved during the selection, verify that the has been factory blended and packaged so the taken from any package has same range of colors as those taken from other packages and that they match approved samples. 2. If tiles are not factory blended, either return them to manufacturer for blending or blend tiles at Project site before starting installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF TILE - GENERAL A. Substrate Tolerances: Wall areas are to be level and plumb with no variations exceeding 1/4-inch in 10-feet and 1/1 6-inch in 1-foot for both substrate and finished the surface. In accordance with TCNA Surface Tolerance notes. Tile Installation Standards: l . Meet requirements of applicable parts of ANSI Al08 Series, "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile", which apply to specified types of setting and grouting materials and to methods specified under ceramic the installation paragraphs. 2. Meet requirements of TCNA 'Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for applicable TCNA installation methods specified under ceramic the installation paragraphs. 3. For the following installations, follow procedures in ANSI Al08 Series of the installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile Floors in Wet Areas. b. Tile Floors Composed of Rib -Backed Tiles. C. Manufacturer's Recommendations and Directions: Use products in accordance with recommendations and directions of each manufacturer. D. Cutting and Fitting: l . Keep the cuts to a minimum, never smaller than 1 /2 the the size and always on outer edges of field. 2. Accurately form intersections and returns. 3. Perform cutting and drilling of the without marring visible surfaces. 4. Carefully grind cut edges of the abutting trim, finish, or buill-in ilerrls lul shuiylil aligned joints. 5. Fit the closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlarn, f ih= 6. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Jointing Pattern: 1. Lay the in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated or directed. 2. Lay out the work and center the field in both directions in each space or on each wall, unless otherwise indicated, directed, or approved. 3. Adjust the layout if necessary and approved, to minimize the pieces that are less than 1 /2 of a tile. Align joints when tiles of adjoining floor, base, wall, and trim are same size/length. 4. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated or approved. 5. For the mounted sheets, make joints between tile sheets the same width as joints within the sheets so joints between sheets is not apparent. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 CERAMIC TILE 0931 13-10 F. Joint Width: Install the with joint width that is recommended by manufacturer of the being installed. G. Expansion Joints: l . Provide expansion joints and other sealant -filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, in horizontal and vertical the surfaces in accordance with applicable TCNA Handbook installation method and/or as approved by Architect. 2. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar bed, and tile. 3. Do not saw -cut joints after installing tile. 4. Where joints occur in concrete substrate, locate joints in the surface directly above. 5. Prepare joints and apply sealant as specified in this Section. H. Wall Tile Lippage: Tile lippage to be no more than 1 /32 inch for wall the grout joints. I. Tile Trim: Secure the trim by thoroughly coating back with thin -set bonding material. J. Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane System: 1. Provide membrane system over entire floor area, beneath setting bed. 2. Provide membrane system over entire wall area in shower rooms, beneath setting bed. K. Large Format Tile: Back butter large format the while installing. 3.04 INSTALLATION OF WALL TILE A. General: 1. Tile Over Cement Backer Board: Where wall the is noted to be installed in a wet area over cement backer board, and tile covers the entire wall surface from floor to ceiling, use TCNA Handbook Installation Method W244C as specified. Wet areas shall be defined as spaces, walls, or rooms where plumbing fixtures are present, such as food service areas, toilet rooms, washrooms, showers, and other wet locations within building. Installation of Wall Tile Over Concrete/Masonry Substrate: 1. Install the in accordance with TCNA Handbook Installation Method W2021. 2. Install the using latex Portland cement mortar. a. Mortar Type: 1) Thin Set Mortar: Use with the up to 12-inch by 12-inch nominal size. 2) Non -Sag Medium Bed Mortar: Use with the 12-inch by 12-inch and larger nominal size. 3. Grout joints using polymer modified unsanded cement grout, unless otherwise specified. a. Toilet Rooms: Grout joints with epoxy grout. 4. Install waterproofing/crack isolation membrane beneath the in showers. C. Installation of Wall Tile Over Cement Backer Board on Metal Stud Framing: 1. Install the in accordance with TCNA Handbook Installation Method W244C. 2. Install the using latex Portland cement mortar. a. Mortar Type: 1) Thin Set Mortar: Use with the up to 12-inch by 12-inch nominal size. 2) Non -Sag Medium Bed Mortar: Use with the 12-inch by 12-inch and larger nominal size. 3. Grout joints using polymer modified unsanded cement grout. 4. Grout joints using epoxy grout. CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 1 1 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR TILE A. Installation of Floor Tile, Except at Toilet Rooms, Over Above -Grade Concrete, Structural Concrete Slab or Precast Concrete Plank - Thin -Set With Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane: 1. Install the in accordance with TCNA Handbook Installation Method F122A. 2. Install full coverage of waterproofing/crack isolation membrane as coordinated with membrane manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install tile using latex Portland cement mortar. a. Mortar Type: 1) Thin Set Mortar: Use with the up to 12-inch by 12-inch nominal size. 4. Grout joints using polymer modified unsanded grout. Installation of Floor Tile at Toilet Rooms, Over Above -Grade Concrete, Structural Concrete Slab or Precast Concrete Plank - Thin -Set with Waterproofing/Crack Isolation Membrane: 1. Install the in accordance with TCNA Handbook Installation Method F122A. 2. Install full coverage of waterproofing/crack isolation membrane as coordinated with membrane manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Install the using latex Portland cement mortar. a. Mortar Type: 1) Thin Set Mortar: Use with the up to 12-inch by 12-inch nominal size. 4. Grout joints using epoxy grout. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF BASE TILE A. General Requirements: 1. Thin -set installation using latex Portland cement mortar, in accordance with TCNA Handbook Installation Method W2021. 2. Install tile using mortar same as wall the above. 3. Install the using the same grout as the floor tile. 4. Thoroughly clean wall surface and prime as necessary before applying setting bed. 5. Apply a continuous setting bed over entire surface to receive tile. Dab method or any method producing voids behind tile is not acceptable. 3.07 GROUTING JOINTS A (,rni i+ing Inink- C�rnt it jnints full depth of file down to setting bed and flush to exposed surface edges of tile. B. Grout Joint Widths: As recommended by manufacturer of file being installed. C. Grout Colors: As selected by Architect. 3.08 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT FILLED MOVEMENT JOINTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide appropriate joint types where shown or as recommended in TCNA Handbook Installation Method EJ 171 unless otherwise modified within this Section. 2. Install removable divider strips of same depth as finished lile syslern, including setting bed. 3. Remove strips after grouting and curing operations are complete. CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 12 Location of Sealant Joints: 1. Locate joints not more than 25 feet in each direction. a. Interior Tile Exposed to Direct Sunlight or Moisture: Install joints at not more than 12 feet in each direction. b. Above -Grade Concrete Slab Substrate: Install joints at not more than 12 feet in each direction. 2. Provide joints where the abuts restraining surfaces, such as perimeter walls, dissimilar floors, curbs, columns, pipes, and ceilings and where changes occur in backing materials. 3. Expansion joints, control joints, and construction cold joints in structure should continue through the work. 4. Joints between the walls/base and the floors. C. Sealant Joint Installation: 1. Locate expansion joints in the over all cold joints and saw -cut control joints in substrate, if any. a. Construct joints in the and setting materials to be same width as joints in substrate. 2. To ensure that location of joints in the align with joints in substrate, construct joints in the during installation of mortar beds and tile, rather than saw -cutting joints after installation. 3. Keep expansion joint cavities open and free of dirt, debris, mortar, and grout materials. 4. Set compressible back-up strip when mortar is placed or utilize removable wood strip to provide space for back-up after mortar has cured. 5. Install sealant after grout is dry. Follow sealant manufacturer's recommendations. D. Sealant Type Installation Locations: 1. 1-Component Polyurethane Sealant: Vertical expansion and control joints in tile, unless otherwise indicated. Products must be acceptable to manufacturer providing the systems warranty. 2. Multi -Component Self -Leveling Polyurethane Sealant: Horizontal expansion and control joints in tile, unless otherwise indicated. Products must be acceptable to manufacturer providing the systems warranty. 3. Mildew Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant: Vertical and horizontal expansion and control joints in ceramic the within food service areas, locker rooms, shower rooms, and toilet rooms. 3.09 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic the surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from the as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from the according to the and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by the and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of the and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. 3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to the and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging. CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 13 B. Protecting: 1. Protect installed the work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by the manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed the walls and floors. 2. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. 3. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from the surfaces. END OF SECTION CERAMIC TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0931 13 - 14 SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Ceiling suspension system. 2. Acoustical ceiling panels. Related Sections 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 06 17 30 - Shop -Fabricated Wood Trusses. 3. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall. 4. Division 22 or 23. 5. Division 26. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for the Architect's Review 1. Product data. 2. Record Samples of the Following: a. Each type, color, and pattern of ceiling panel; samples shall be 12 by 12 inches cut from corners of different panels. b. Factory finished metal, exposed in the finished work; samples shall be not less than 8 linear inches. Submit for the Owner's Use/Records 1. Statement of Qualifications from manufacturers. 2. Statement of Qualifications from installer. 3. Certificate of Compliance for installation standards. 4. Certified Copies of test reports for performance requirements. 5. Certified Copies of test reports for regulatory requirements. 6. Manufacturer's Maintenance Instructions. 7. Extra ceiling suspension system components and acoustical tiles equal to 1 percent of the area of the completed system, but not less than 6 full tiles of each type specified. 8. Material Safety Data Sheets. C. Reflected ceiling drawing showing layout of suspended ceiling system, including location of light fixtures, grilles, registers, sprinkler heads, etc. Coordinate this Work with other trades. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 095100-1 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer's Qualifications 1. Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver material in original, unopened, protective packaging with manufacturer's labels indicating brand name, pattern, size, thickness, and fire rating as applicable, legible, and intact. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage, or wetting. C. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. D. Do not begin installation until sufficient materials to complete a room are received, 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Complete installation of dampening materials before beginning work. B. During and after installation, maintain humidity within 5 percentage points of humidity to which space was designed. C. Maintain a uniform temperature in the range of 55 degrees F to 70 degrees F prior to and during installation of materials. D. Do not install acoustical ceilings until work to be performed in plenum space above is completed, tested, and approved. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Suspension Systems 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. Donn@ Brand Suspension Systems. 4. Or approved equal. B. Ceiling Panels 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Celotex Corporation. 3. USG Interiors, Inc. 4. Or approved equal. 2.02 ACOUSTIC CEILING SYSTEM 1 (ACT-1) A. Suspension System: Non -fire rated, 15/16 inch wide exposed flange, tee -grid, single web, intermediate duty ASTM C625, cold rolled electro-galvanized steel system 1. Color: White, low luster, factory finished. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 0951 00 - 2 2. Standard of Quality: Donn@ DX Brand Suspension System. B. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: 24 inches by 24 inches by 3/4 inch thick fissured board with. square edges. 1. Color: White. 2. Standard of Quality: USG VinylRock@ ClimaPIUSTM. 2.03 ACOUSTIC CEILING SYSTEM 2 (ACT-2) A. Suspension System: Non -fire rated, 15/16 inch wide exposed flange, tee -grid, single web, intermediate duty ASTM C625, cold rolled electro-galvanized steel system 1. Color: White, low luster, factory finished. 2. Standard of Quality: Donn@ DX Brand Suspension System. B. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: 24 inches by 24 inches by 3/4 inch thick fissured board with tegular edges. 1. Color: White. 2. Standard of Quality: USG Rock Face@ ClimaPlus-rm 55483. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Wall Moldings: By the same manufacturer as suspension system components. Fabricate from cold -rolled steel. Furnish with fabricated inside and outside corners. Hanger Wire: ASTM A641, Class 1, zinc coating, soft temper for suspended and furred ceilings, not less than 12 gauge. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion 1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations; produce finished ceilings true to lines and levels indicated and free from warped, soiled, or damaged suspension system components or ceiling panels. B. Install ceiling systems to support superimposed loads, with permissible deflection of not more than 1 /360 of span and surface deviation of not more than 1 /8 inch in 10 feet. C. Layout pattern in compliance with reflected ceiling plans. Where not otherwise indicated, layout the work so that margins on opposite sides of rooms are approximately equal and greater than 1 /2 the in width. D. Cooperate with other trades to locate items in ceilings. Fit acoustical materials accurately to all such items. E. Install acoustical materials having a directional pattern with the pattern in a single direction as indicated. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 0951 00 - 3 3.03 INSTALLATION, SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system according to ASTM C636, "Recommended Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels" and according to manufacturer's recommendations. Exposed Suspension System 1. Install main -runners and cross -tees in arrangement indicated, accurately level and tie to hanger wires. 2. Install main -runners and cross -tees to provide framing at entire perimeter of each opening, such as light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, and acoustic panels. 3. Install wall moldings at area perimeters and at columns and similar penetrations. 4. Hang main runners 4 feet on center, then install cross -tees to complete the grid pattern indicated. C. Hanger Wires 1. Securely attach hanger wires to structure above. Hang vertically without kinks or bends. 2. Space hangers along main runners following the manufacturer's recommendations, but not more than 4 feet on center each way. Reinforce the system to support acoustical material, light fixtures, diffusers, registers, grilles, and other equipment. 3. Where provisions have not been made in the structure for attachment of hanger wires, provide special attachment devices that have been certified by test, 4. Do not support suspension system from electrical conduit or mechanical ducts, pipes, or equipment: a. Where ductwork, piping, or other interferences make it impossible to provide direct -to -structure suspension within the allowable spacing, provide trapeze suspension system. b. No swing hangers will be permitted. 5. Provide additional hanger wires at the corners of fixtures supported by the suspension system if the fixtures would cause deflection in excess of the specified performance requirements. 6. Do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4-feet vertical drop; wrap wire a minimum of 3 times and turn ends up. 3.04 INSTALLATION A_ Arn_i stir Pnnek- 1. Set panels flush and level in each opening not otherwise occupied. 2. Cut panels where required to fit panels to perimeter conditions or ceiling penetrations. Make field cuts to provide edge profile that matches factory edge; paint or treat cut surfaces as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Install hold-down clips for each panel where indicated. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean soiled or discolored unit surfaces after installation. Touch-up scratches, abrasions, voids, and other defects in painted surfaces. C. Rernove and replace damaged or improperly installed units. END OF SECTION ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0951 00 - 4 SECTION 09 68 13 CARPET TILE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Carpet the for direct -glued installation. 2. Rubber base. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Carpet and Rug Institute: 1. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. B. Consumer Products Safety Commission: 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1630 - Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpets and Rugs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Samples 1. Submit 2 copies of manufacturer's standard sample kit for color selection by Owner. B. Installation instructions, including allowable temperature range. C. Maintenance and cleaning instructions. D. Maintenance Materials: Single piece of carpet for repair and maintenance equal to 5 percent of carpeted area shall be stored as directed by the Owner. E. Test Report 1. Fire hazard classification. 2. Sound absorption. 3. Static control. 1.05 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Supply minimum of 5 percent of the total of carpet tiles of each color and pattern selected. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CARPET TILE 096813-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CARPET TILE A. Manufacturers 1. Shaw Contract Group (Standard of Quality) 2. Comparable products from the following manufacturers: a. InterfaceFLOR, LLC. b. Mannington Commercial. c. The Mohawk Group. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Carpet Tile (CPT-1) 1. Tile specifications: a. Style name: Bon Jour II tile, Collection: Steppin Out. b. Style number: 5T032. c. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of available colors for the style. d. Construction: Needlebond Rib. e. Fiber: Pet Polyester. f. Dye method: 100 percent Solution Dyed. g. Pullern Repeat: None. h. Tufted weight: 50.5 ounce (1,712.24 g/m2. i. Gauge: 1/ 12 (47.24 per 10 cm). j. Stitches per inch: 11.0 (43.31 per 10 cm). k. Finished pile thickness: 0.344 inch (8.74 mm). I. Total thickness: 0.451 inch (11.46 mm). m. Average density: 5284 (9.84 kilotex). n. Product size: 24 inch x 24 inch (60.96 cm x 60.96 cm). o. Primary backing: Synthetic. p. Secondary backing: EcoWorxOO Tile. 2. Testing: a. Radiant panel: Class I. b. NBS Smoke: Less than 450. c. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kv. 3. Warranties: a. Lifetime Commercial Limited. ited. 4. Installation Method: Quarter turn. 5. Environmental Certification: a. NSF140 Platinum. b. Cradle to Cradle silver certified. Carpet Tile (CPT-2) 1. Tile specifications: a. Style name: Vibrant tile, Collection: Light Series. b. Style number: 5T001. c. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of available colors for the style. d. Construction: Multi -level pattern loop. e. Fiber: Eco Solution Q Nylon. f. Dye method: 100% Solution Dyed. g. Pattern Repeat: None. h. Tufted weight: 20 ounce (678.11 g/m2). CARPET TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0968 13 - 2 i. Gauge: 1/12 (47.24 per 10 cm). j. Stitches per inch: 10.0 (39.37 per 10 cm). k. Finished pile thickness: 0.116 inch (2.95 mm). I. Total thickness: 0.235 inch (5.97 mm). m. Average density: 6207 (11.56 kilotex). n. Product size: 24 inch x 24 inch (60.96 cm x 60.96 cm). o. Primary backing: Synthetic. p. Secondary backing: EcoWorxO Tile. q. Protective Treatments: SSPOO Shaw Soil Protection. r. GSA Approved Product: Yes. 2. Testing: a. Radiant panel: Class I. b. NBS Smoke: Less than 450. c. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.5 kv. 3. Warranties: a. Lifetime Commercial Limited. 4. Installation Method: Random. 5. Environmental Certification: a. NSF140 Platinum. b. Cradle to Cradle silver certified. 2.03 RESILIENT BASE (RB) A. Manufacturers: 1. Johnsonite, A Tarkett Company. 2. Roppe Corporation, USA. 3. VPI Corporation. 4. Or approved equal. B. Base: ASTM F1861 Type TP - Thermoplastic/Rubber coved style: 1. Height: 4 inch. 2. Thickness: 0.080 inch. 3. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of available colors. 4. Finish: Matte. 5. Length: 4 foot sections. 6. Accessories: Premolded external corners and end stops. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Contact Adhesive: As recommended by carpet manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify floor surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps and existing adhesive as necessary. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler as recommended by the carpet manufacturer. CARPET TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0968 13 - 3 B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. C. Clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION -CARPET A. Install carpet the in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Do not mix carpet from different cartons unless from same dye lot. C. Cut carpet the clean. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. D. Install carpet the in square pattern, with pile direction alternating to next unit (quarter -turn), aligned as indicated on shop drawings. E. Carpet tiles shall be laid out whenever possible to provide the edge (cut) tiles area equal to or greater than one half of a full tile. F. Locate change of carpet types between rooms under door centerline. G. Fully adhere carpet the and carpet to substrate. H. Apply adhesives in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. I. Trim carpet the neatly at walls and around interruptions. J. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BASE A. Fit joints tightly and make vertical. Maintain minimum dimension of 18 inches between joints. B. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. C. Install base on solid backing. Bond tightly to wall and floor surfaces. D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove spots and smears of cement from carpet immediately with solvent. B. Remove rubbish, wrapping paper, salvages, and scraps less than 2 square feet or less than 8 inches in least dimension. C. Upon completion, vacuum with a commercial beater bar typo vacuum cleaner. D. After each area of carpet has been installed, protect from soiling and damage. END OF SECTION CARPET TILE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 68 13 - 4 SECTION 09 77 20 DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Prefinished polyester glass reinforced plastic sheets adhered to concrete masonry units or gypsum board partitions. 1. PVC and/or harmonizing trim. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Masonry Units. 2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 07 92 00- Joint Sealants. 4. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials: Standard Specifications (ASTM) 1. D-256 - Izod Impact Strengths (ft #/in). 2. D-570 - Water Absorption (percent). 3. D-638 - Tensile Strengths (psi) & Tensile Modulus (psi). 4. D-790 - Flexural Strengths (psi) & Flexural Modulus (psi). 5. D-2583- Barcol Hardness. 6. D-5319 - Standard Specification for Glass -Fiber Reinforced Polyester Wall and Ceiling Panels. 7. E-84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit sufficient manufacturer's data to indicate compliance with these specifications, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. B. Shop Drawings: Submit elevations of each wall showing location of paneling and trim members with respect to all discontinuities in the wall elevation. C. Selection Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard color pattern selection samples representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 L_ DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS 09 77 20 - 1 D. Samples for Verification: Submit appropriate section of panel for each finish selected indicating the color, texture, and pattern required. 1. Submit complete with specified applied finish. 2. For selected patterns show complete pattern repeat. 3. Exposed Molding and Trim: Provide samples of each type, finish, and color. E. Manufacturers Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) for adhesives and sealants prior to their delivery to the site. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to building code requirements for interior finish for smoke and flame spread requirements as tested in accordance with: 1. ASTM E-84 (Method of test for surface burning characteristics of building Materials) a. Wall Required Rating - Class C. B. Sanitary Standards: System components and finishes to comply with: 1. United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) requirements for food preparation facilities, incidental contact. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials factory packaged on strong pallets. B. Store panels and trim lying flat, under cover and protected from the elements. Allow panels to acclimate to room temperature (70 degrees F) for 48 hours prior to installation_ 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Building are to be fully enclosed prior to installation with sufficient heat (70 degrees F) and ventilation consistent with good working conditions for finish work. B. During installation and for not less than 48 hours Uefuie, muinfain an ambient temperature and relative humidity within limits required by type of adhesive used and recommendation of adhesive manufacturer. 1. Provide ventilation to disperse fumes during application of adhesive as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Furnish one-year guarantee against defects in material and workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER A. Marlite: 202 Harger Street, Dover, OH 44622. 800-377-1221, Fax (330) 343-4668, Email: infoLmarlite.com www.maritte.com. B. Products: 1. Standard FRP (FRP-1) with PVC trim. 2. ArtizanTm FRP (FRP-2) with harmonizing trim. DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 77 20 - 2 3. InduroTm FRP (FRP-3) with harmonizing trim. 4. SymmetrixTm FRP (FRP-4) with harmonizing trim. 2.02 PANELS (FRP) A. Fiberglass reinforced thermosetting polyester resin panel sheets complying with ASTM D 5319. 1. Coating: Multi -layer print, primer and finish coats or applied over -layer. 2. Dimensions: a. Thickness - 0.090 inch (2.29mm) nominal. b. Width - 4'-0" (1.22m) nominal. c. Length- 10'-0" (3.0m) nominal. Tolerance: a. Length and Width: +/-1 /8 inch (3.175mm). b. Square - Not to exceed 5/32 inch (3.96mm) for 10 foot (2.4m) panels. B. Properties: Resistant to rot, corrosion, staining, denting, peeling, and splintering. 1. Flexural Strength - 1.0 x 104 psi per ASTM D 790. (7.0 kilogram-force/square millimeter). 2. Flexural Modulus - 3.1 x 105 psi per ASTM D 790. (217.9 kilogram-force/square millimeter). 3. Tensile Strength - 7.0 x 103 psi per ASTM D 638. (4.9 kilogram-force/square millimeter). 4. Tensile Modulus - 1.6 x 105 psi per ASTM D 638. (112.5 kilogram-force/square millimeter). 5. Water Absorption - 0.72 percent per ASTM D 570. 6. Barcol Hardness (scratch resistance) of 35 55 as per ASTM D 2583. 7. Izod Impact Strength of 72 ft. lbs./in ASTM D 256. C. Back Surface: Smooth. Imperfections which do not affect functional properties are not cause for rejection. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners: Non -staining nylon drive rivets. 1. Match panel colors. 2. Length to suit project conditions. B. Adhesive: 1. Marlite C-551 FRP Adhesive - Water- resistant, non-flammable adhesive. C. Sealant: 1. Marlite Brand MS-250 Clear Silicone Sealant. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine backup surfaces to determine that corners are plumb and straight, surfaces are smooth, uniform, clean and free from foreign matter, nails countersunk, joints and cracks filled flush and smooth with the adjoining surface. 1. Verify that stud spacing does not exceed 24 inch (61 cm) on -center. B. Repair defects prior to installation. 1. Level wall surfaces to panel manufacturer's requirements. Remove protrusions and fill indentations. DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 77 20 - 3 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's recommended procedures and installation sequence. Cut sheets to meet supports allowing 1 /8 inch (3 mm) clearance for every 8 foot (2.43m) of panel. 1. Cut and drill with carbide tipped saw blades or drill bits, or cut with shears. 2. Pre -drill fastener holes 1 /8 inch (3.175mm) oversize with high speed drill bit. a. Space at 8 inches (20.32cm) maximum on center at perimeter, approximately 1 inch from panel edge. b. Space at in field in rows 16 inches (40.64cm) on center, with fasteners spaced at 12 inches (30.48 cm) maximum on center. C. Apply panels to board substrate, above base, vertically oriented with seams plumb and pattern aligned with adjoining panels. 1. Install panels with manufacturer's recommended gap for panel field and corner joints. a. Adhesive trowel and application method to conform to adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. b. Drive fasteners for snug fit. Do not over -tighten. D. Apply panel moldings to all panel edges using silicone sealant providing for required clearances. 1. All moldings must provide for a minimum 1 /8 inch (3.18mm) of panel expansion at joints and edges, to insure proper installation. 2. Apply sealant to all moldings, channels and joints between the system and different materials to assure watertight installation. 3.03 CLEANING A. Remove excess sealant from panels and moldings. Wipe panel down using a damp cloth and mild soap solution or cleaner. B. Refer to manufacturer's specific cleaning recommendations Do not use abrasive cleaners. END OF SECTION DECORATIVE FIBERGLASS REINFORCED WALL PANELS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 77 20 - 4 SECTION 09 88 13 CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Concrete floor sealer. B. Related Sections 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00. B. Submit manufacturer's specification for floor sealer and application requirements. 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Deliver containers to project site in sealed, unopened, and labeled containers. B. Store and handle to prevent damage to product and environment. 1.05 PRODUCT CONDITIONS A. Assure concrete has been cured a minimum of 7 days. B. Assure concrete is clean and free of curing compounds, sealers, laitance, grease, oil, and contaminants. C. Protect adjacent areas from damage due to overspray. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. SL-1: Concrete Sealer Densifier 1. Color: Clear. 2. Acceptable Manufacturers and Products: a. L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.: Seal Hard. b. Sonneborn Building Products. c. Tennant Company: Eco-Hard-N-SealTM. d. Or Equal. CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 88 13 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION A. Apply sealer in accordance with manufacturer's specifications. B. Thoroughly clean concrete surface before applying sealer. C. Apply directly from sealer container onto concrete surface. Do not dilute. D. Use mechanical walk -behind or riding scrubber. E. Apply first application at a minimum rate of 1 gallon per 200 square feet. F. Allow surfaces to remain wet with sealer for a minimum of 60 minutes. G. Remove excess sealer at end of application procedure by water flushing and squeegeing dry. H. Apply second application of sealer just prior to project completion at the rate recommended by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 88 13 - 2 SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation, materials, and application of protective coatings specified herein. 2. Shop applied and field applied coatings. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry 2. Section 05 50 00 - Metals Fabrications 3. Section 08 11 00 - Metal Doors and Frames 4. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. D4414 "Standard Practice for Measurement of Wet Film Thickness by Notched Gauges." 2. D4541 "Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers." 3. E-337 "Test Method for Measuring Humidity by Psychrometer." 4. F1869 "Standard Method of Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission rate of Concrete Subfloor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride." 5. Committee D01.23 "Test Method for Nondestructive Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Applied Organic Coatings Using Ultrasonic Gauge." B. ICRI - International Concrete Repair Institute: 1. Technical Guideline No. 03372, Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers, Coatings and Polymer overlays. C. SSPC- The Society for Protective Coatings and NACE- The National Association of Corrosion Engineers - Surface Preparation Specifications. The current preparation standards are joint standards SSPC/NACE: 1. SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6, Surface Preparation of Concrete. 2. NACE RP0188 "Discontinuity Holiday Testing of Protective Coatings." D. Green Seal: 1. GC-03 - Anti -Corrosive Paints. 2. GS-1 1 - Product Specific Environmental Requirements. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PAINTING 0991 00- 1 E. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America: 1. PDCA - Architectural Painting Specification Manual. F. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1113 - Architectural Coatings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS REQUIRED A. Shop Drawings: Furnish shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include data sheets for each paint system required, as well as color charts. Submit shop drawings of the proposed stencil lettering, arrows, and words to be provided. B. Factory -Applied Coatings: Submit to the Architect for review certified lab testing from manufacturer that the coating system meets or exceeds requirements specified within. Include product data sheets and testing information specified for submittals in Part 2 - Products. C. Warranty: The Contractor and coating manufacturer shall warrant jointly and severally to the Owner and guarantee the Work under this Section against defective workmanship and materials for a period of 2 years commencing on the date of final acceptance of the Work. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The paint products mentioned in the following Specification are set up as a standard of quality. The standard "or equal" clause shall apply. Requests for substitution shall include the name of the specified material for which a substitution is sought, the name of the proposed material, product data sheets, and certified lab testing for each of the criteria referenced below. Additional information may be requested by the Architect. No request for substitution shall be considered which would decrease film thickness or change the generic type of the coating specified. The decision of the Architect regarding approval or disapproval of the proposed substitution shall be final. 1. Performance Criteria to be referenced for each product shall include: a. Abrasion - ASTM D4060, CS-17 Wheel, 1,000-grams load. b. Adhesion - ASTM D4541. c. Hardness - ASTM D3363. rJ Pi iimirlity - ASTM D2247 and D4585. e. Salt (Fog) Spray - ASTM B1 17. f. Corrosion Weathering - ASTM D5894. B. Experience: Contractor must have performed satisfactory installation of protective coatings systems in wastewater treatment facilities and shall have 5 years of practical experience in the application of specified products. Upon request, Contractor shall substantiate this requirement by fumishing a list of references and job completions. In lieu of experience, the Contractor shall provide a guaranty bond or cash deposit equivalent to 100 percent of the Painting Bid Price to guarantee performance. The Contractor shall submit documentation from the manufacturer that he has successfully completed training or obtained certification on the use of the product systems specified herein. C. A minimum of 30 days prior to the slart of any painting, Contractor shall schedule a meeting held at the Site with the manufacturer's representative, painting contractor, General Contractor, the Owner, and the Architect. Items discussed will be application, PAINTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0991 00 - 2 surface preparation, environmental control, coordination, paint properties, safety, quality assurance measures, etc. D. Coating manufacturer shall provide a qualified representative to visit the Site as required for quality assurance and to determine compliance with manufacturer's instructions and this Specification. The Architect may require a manufacturer's representative to resolve field problems pertaining to products furnished under this Contract. E. Inspection by the Architect or the waiver of inspection of any particular portion of the Work shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of his or her responsibility to perform the Work in accordance with these Specifications. Owner reserves the right to hire a third - party inspector if deemed necessary. Inspector(s) shall have full access to all areas of Work. Contractor shall complete documentation of quality assurance for the Project. Documentation shall be available to Owner/Architect for periodic analysis throughout the Project and submitted to Owner/Architect as a complete package prior to construction completion. Among the minimum items that should be included as part of this quality assurance is: 1. Documentation that preparation procedures meet the standard specified for each system. 2. Documentation of mil thickness of each coat as it applies to this Specification. 3. Visually inspect and document coatings especially linings for un-cured resin, bubbles, pinholes, fisheyes, checking and foreign debris. Then mark and repair these areas. 4. Test for holidays in immersion areas by use of a holiday detector system. 5. Note: At contractors' option, he or she may elect to have this done by a third -party inspector at the Contractors expense. 1.06 SURFACES REQUIRED TO BE PAINTED A. It is the intent that all new interior exposed surfaces of metal, precast concrete planks, precast concrete wall panels, concrete, concrete masonry units without integral coloring, gypsum drywall, sheet metal, process equipment, HVAC equipment, electrical equipment, process piping, plumbing, sanitary piping, wood, and other miscellaneous items be painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, unless indicated otherwise. 1.07 SURFACES NOT REQUIRED TO BE PAINTED A. Non-ferrous and corrosion -resistant ferrous alloys, such as copper, bronze, monel, aluminum, chromium plate, stainless steel, factory finished metal roofing, metal facing panels, metal soffits, plus fiberglass, except as noted below. Therefore, paint the following: l . Where required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals. 2. Aluminum in contact with concrete or masonry. 3. All electrical conduit. 4. Vents, grills, and louvers that are not prefinished. 5. Aluminum ductwork. 6. Copper water and drainage piping systems, including accessories. B. The following surfaces shall not be painted: 1. All HVAC machinery, vents, grills, and louvers that are anodized or factory finished with baked enamel. 2. Non-metallic materials, such as glass and porcelain, except as required for architectural painting or color -coding. PAINTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0991 00 - 3 3. Electrical motor control and supervisory panels furnished with baked enamel finish or specified not to be painted. 4. Non -exposed galvanized steel surfaces, such as conduit above suspended ceilings. 5. Anodized aluminum doors, doorframes, and windows. 6. Sprinkler heads. 7. Interior concrete or concrete block walls and ceilings above suspended ceilings. 8. Finish materials with inherent color. 9. Caulking: Pre -colored caulking shall be provided. 10. Surfaces below grade that will be covered with soil. 1.08 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Painting shall be done at such times as agreed upon by the Contractor and Architect in order that neat, dust -free work is obtained. All painting shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions and shall be performed in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. B. Contractor shall strictly adhere to the temperature, dew point, relative humidity, and any other requirements specified on the manufacturer's product data sheets. All heating units shall be indirect fired and explosion proofed. No open flame heaters may be used during application or curing of coatings. All combustion by-products shall be positively vented to the outside. C. Conform to the requirements of Division 01. D. Painting of all steel door tops and bottoms shall be completed prior to hanging of the doors. If this does not occur, all steel doors will be taken off their hinges and laid flat for painting of the tops and bottoms. E. Darrlage to painted surfaces incurred during construction shall be repainted by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. F. General Contractor shall coordinate with painting subcontractor, paint supplier, and equipment and material suppliers that factory applied c oulirrgs ure compatible with final coatings of proposed manufacturers of this Section. G. Protection: Cover or otherwise prntect finished work of nther trades and surfaces not being painted concurrently or not to be painted. 1.09 PAINT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. All materials shall be delivered to the Site in the original sealed and labeled containers and shall be subject to inspection by the Architect. All labels shall show the name of the manufacturer, general type of paint, batch date or number, color name or number, and trade name and number identifying each specific product. B. All materials used on the Project by the Contractor shall be stored in a single place provided by the Contractor or designated by the Architect. Such storage shall comply with OSHA Requirements and the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association. Product data safety sheets shall be kept on Sile at all times. C. Oily or solvent -soaked rags and all waste shall be removed every night and all necessary precautions shall be taken to reduce fire hazard to a minimum. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PAINTING 0991 00 - 4 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS A. Paints, Coatings, Linings, Sealers, and Stains: 1. Tnemec (Standard of Quality). Note, that Series 20 or FC 20 may be substituted for Series N69 or N69F, but Series N69 or N69F shall not be substituted for Series 20 or FC 20. 2. Equivalent products by Sherwin Williams. 3. Bid other manufacturers as Substitute items. Latex Paint: 1. The Sherwin Williams Company (Standard of Quality). 2. Equivalent products by Tnemec, Benjamin Moore, or Ameron. 2.02 COLORS A. All colored products shall be assumed to be tinted, unless stated otherwise. B. Room finish colors shall be selected by Owner. C. The Architect shall select colors from manufacturers' standard and special OHSA safety color guide. D. Interior room colors shall be selected by the Owner and may be a different color in each room. Ceilings may be different colors than walls and there may be up to 2 wall colors in each area. E. The Contractor shall submit color charts to the Architect and Owner and obtain an approved color schedule for all coatings prior to application. F. Equipment bases and pipe supports shall be painted the same color as equipment. In general, equipment shall receive finish coatings of the same color as piping system of which it is a part. Equipment nameplates shall be removed and re -attached after painting or completely protected from coverage by field -applied coatings. 2.03 MATERIALS A. The specified products are the standard of quality. B. All unspecified materials, such as shellac, turpentine, or linseed oil, shall be the "best grade" or "first line" product made by a reputable recognized manufacturer. C. All materials applied to the same surface shall be compatible. D. Materials shall be ready -mixed, except for tinting of under coats and possible thinning (if recommended by the manufacturer). Indoor Environmental Quality Characteristics: 1. [Interior] Flat and Non -Flat Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS-11. 2. [Interior] Anti -Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PAINTING 0991 00 - 5 3. [Interior] Clear Wood Finishes, Floor Coatings, Stains, Primers, and Shellacs: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113. 4. [Interior] Concrete, Wood, Bamboo, and Cork Floor Finishes: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1113, including sealers and stains. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL SURFACE PREPARATION A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared with the objective of obtaining the cleanliness and profile required for the specified coating system and intended service environment. No painting shall be done before the prepared surfaces are approved by the Architect. Approval by the Architect does not relieve the Contractor of responsibility to meet all requirements of Specifications, paint manufacturer requirements/recommendations, rework as required, etc. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on valves and machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring any adjacent surfaces. Protect working parts of all mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. All openings in motors shall be masked to prevent paint and all other materials from entering the motors. C. Perform preparation procedures for each substrate in strict accordance with paint manufacturers written instructions and as outlined in the following schedule. Refer to the subsequent discussions for specific preparation requirements: 1. S1: SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning a. The removal of all visible oil, grease, soil, drawing, and cutting compounds, and other soluble contaminants from surfaces with solvents or commercial cleaners using various methods of cleaning, such as wiping, dipping, steam cleaning, or vapor degreasing. 2. S2: SSPC-SP2 Hand I ool Cleaning a. The removal of all loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by the use of non -power hand tools. QCQ• QCPf--P—Wr Too! Cleaning J1/JJ a. The removal of all loose mill scale, loose rust, loose paint, and other loose detrimental foreign matter by the use of power -assisted hand tools. 4. S4: SSPC-WJ4 Light Waterjetting (Pressure Wash) a. The entire surface shall high pressure washed at a minimum 1,500 psi removing all loose paint, dirt, or foreign matter. Upon completion of pressure washing procedure, rinse all areas with potable water and allow to dry. Dryness of surface shall be verified by use of polyethylene moisture test or a reading of I / percent or less utilizing a moisture meter. 5. S5: Concrete/Gypsum a. Prepare cementitious surfaces of concrete, concrete block, cement plaster, and mineral fiber board to be painted by removing all efflorescence, chalk, dust, laitance, dirt, grease, oils, and by roughening as required to remove glaze. Scrape and grind fins and protrusions flush with surface. Rake mortar joints clean. PAINTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0991 00 - b 6. S6: SSPC-SP6 or NACE 3 Commercial Blast Cleaning a. The removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by compressed air nozzle blasting, centrifugal wheels, or other specified method. Discoloration caused by certain stains shall be limited to no more than 33 percent of each square foot of surface area. The blast profile specified by the coating manufacturer's product requirements shall be achieved. 7. S7: SSPC-SP7 or NACE 4 Brush -Off Blast Cleaning. a. The removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, loose mill scale, loose rust, and loose paint by compressed air nozzle blasting, centrifugal wheels, or other specific method. Tightly adherent mill scale, rust, and paint may remain on the surface. 8. S8: SSPC-WJ4 Light Waterjetting (High Pressure Wash) a. The entire surface shall be high pressure (minimum 2,500 psi) washed with a biodegradable, phosphate, and residue free additive. A stiff bristle brush shall be used to assist in the removal of all dirt, mildew, dust, and other foreign matter. 9. S9: SSPC-SP13 Acid Etching a. Remove residual dust and dirt with water using a high pressure hose. Remove excess water and allow concrete to dry until the surface is damp. Uniformly apply a solution of 1 part Muriatic Acid and 2 to 4 parts fresh water utilizing low pressure spray equipment or sprinkling cans. When bubbling begins to subside, immediately rinse with clean water while scrubbing with a stiff bristle broom. Test with pH paper and continue the rinsing operation until a pH of 7 or higher is obtained. Allow floor to dry thoroughly before coating. 10. S10: SSPC-SP10 or NACE 2 Near -White Metal Blast Cleaning a. The removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, dust, mill scale rust, paint, oxides, corrosion products, and other foreign matter by compressed air nozzle blasting, centrifugal wheels, or other specified method. Discoloration caused by certain stains shall be limited to no more than 5 percent of each square inch of surface area. The blast profile required by the coating manufacturer's product requirements shall be achieved. 11. S1 1: Concrete (Severe Exposure, Including Immersion). a. SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 and ICRI Guideline No. 310.2 according to manufacturer's recommendations: 1) Abrasive blast all surfaces to remove all laitance and solid contaminants. Blasting shall be performed sufficiently close to the surface so as to open up surface voids, bug holes, air pockets, and other subsurface irregularities. 12. SSPC-SP11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal a. Removal of all visible oil, grease, dirt, mill scale, rust, paint, oxide, corrosion products, and other foreign matter. Slight residues of rust and paint may be left in the lower portion of pits if the original surface is pitted. D. Cast -In -Place Concrete, Precast Concrete, and Concrete Block 1. All surfaces shall be cleaned or any loose scale, cement, form oil, curing compounds, dirt, or other deleterious material. 2. Concrete Masonry Units a. Mortar joints cured 28 days. b. Substrate must be clean and dry, and free of all contaminants, including laitance. c. Tooled joints shall be brushed to remove pieces of mortar and other foreign matter. d. Chipped block shall be patched with concrete patching materials prior to application of paint coatings. e. All holes or chips shall be carefully filled and properly repaired prior to painting. 3. Poured -In -Place and Precast Concrete PAINTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0991 00 - 7 a. Allow 28 days for concrete to cure. b. Substrate must be clean and dry, and free of all contaminants, including form release agents and laitance. c. Roughen surface to create a profile capable of supporting the coating system specified. d. All concrete for immersion service shall be prepared per SSPC-SP13/NACE No. 6 or ICRI Guideline 310.2. e. All concrete for immersion service shall have successfully passed the leak testing requirements of this Project prior to application of paint coatings. Wood Surfaces 1. Wood surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned and free of all matter with cracks, nail holes, and other defects properly filled and smoothed or cleaned, smooth and dust free. 2. Prior to the application of any stain, the wood surfaces must be thoroughly sanded to remove all mill marks and scratches. Galvanized Steel 1. Immersion Service - SSPC-SP16 Brush Blast Abrasive sweep blast followed by SSPC-SPI Solvent Cleaning. 2. Non -Immersion Service - Roughen surface to create a profile capable of supporting the specified system. Follow with SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning. G. Copper and Aluminum (Non -Submerged): Sand and follow with SSPC-SP1 Solvent Cleaning, apply coating within 8 hours, or before an oxide layer can form. H. Pipe Insulation, Interior Rigid, and Interior Semi -Rigid Insulation: Substrate must be clean and dry, and free of oil, grease, and other contaminants. I. Valves: All shop primed valves shall be solvent cleaned in accordance with SSPC-SP1 solvent cleaning to remove grease and oil prior to field painting. J. PVC, RTRP and Other Non -Metal Piping: Sand and solvent wash with clean rags and MEK. 3.02 PRIMING A n Qkr Primia: All Steel and iron S:Jrfrurec chrill n-rPIVP thp.. followlnn- �. H I yj 1. Surface Preparation a. NAPF 500-03-04 1) Exterior of submerged and non -submerged ductile iron piping, fittings, and appurtenances: NAPF 500-03-04, surface profile of 2.0 to 3.0 mils. 2. Coating a. Tnemec 161, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646, or equal. 3.0 to 5.0 mils dry film thickness. Color shall be Tnemec 1255 Beige or equivalent. 3. Whenever the shop priming coat has been damaged in transit or during construction, the metal shall be spot cleaned in accordance with the specified surface preparation and touched -up. Where the steel is delivered to the Site unprimed, it shall receive surface preparation and prime coating as required above. Field Priming: Non-ferrous and Galvanized Metals. 1. Surface Preparation a. SSPC-SP16 Brush Off Blast cleaning of Non -Ferrous Metals: Brush blast and clean entire surface to be coated to roughen substrate and remove contaminants. PAINTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0991 00 - 8 2. Coating a. Tnemec 161, Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646, or equal. 3.0 to 5.0 mils dry film thickness. Color shall be Tnemec 1255 Beige or equivalent. 3.03 PAINT APPLICATION A. Apply each coat at the rate specified for application by the manufacturer. All dry film thickness requirements must be met per this specification regardless of brush roll or spray application. Brush and Roller applications may require additional coats to meet the minimum requirement for each coat in each system. B. Stripe coat each coat onto bolts, edges, irregularities, welds, corners, joints, etc. by brush, in addition to spray application. C. Curing time shall not be determined by average curing time under ideal laboratory conditions. Drying time shall be construed to mean "under normal conditions." Temperature, relative humidity, and other environmental factors must be observed. Where conditions are other than normal because of the weather or because painting must be done in confined spaces, longer curing and drying times will be necessary. Additional coats of material shall not be applied over previously applied coats until those coats are adequately cured and thoroughly dried. Units shall not be placed in service until coatings are properly cured and thoroughly dry. D. Where thinning is necessary, only the products of the manufacturer furnishing the paint for that particular purpose shall be accepted and all such thinning shall be done strictly in accordance with the manufacturers' instructions as well as with the full knowledge and approval of the Architect. E. Protection of Materials Not To Be Painted: Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates, aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on machinery, etc. and other surfaces not intended to be painted. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring any adjacent surfaces. Protect working parts of all mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during surface preparation and painting process. All openings in motors shall be masked to prevent paint and all other materials from entering the motors. F. Paint shall not be applied in extreme heat, temperatures below or above manufacturer's recommendation as listed on the product data sheet, nor in dust, smoke -laden atmosphere, and damp or humid weather. Apply paint in strict accordance with all product data sheet recommendations. G. Abrasive blast cleaning shall not be performed whenever the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent, nor whenever the surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point of the ambient air. Coating manufacturer's recommendations are to be strictly adhered to. Blast cleaned surfaces shall be primed prior to any evidence of rust bloom. H. Finish coats shall be uniform in color and sheen without streaks, laps, runs, sags, pinholes, missed areas, etc. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PAINTING 099100-9 In the event heating devices are used, they shall be explosion -proof and of the type that do not exhaust moisture, sooty or oily residues or any other contaminants into the structure, tank, building, etc. Forced air electric heat or heat exchangers with all combustion products positively vented to the exterior is required. J. Yellowing or any other discoloration of paint will be unacceptable and will require repainting at no additional expense to Owner. Contractor shall be responsible to provide all ventilation, heating, etc. to provide proper curing for painting and to prevent discoloration. 3.04 COATING SCHEDULE A. The following surfaces shall receive the surface preparation described in Article 3.01 and the product mentioned below. Prime, intermediate, and finish coats shall be of noticeably different, but compatible colors. Note: For items in the following schedule where immersion service is indicated, it is meant that that the entire interior structure shall be coated from floor to top of the wall, not just the portion of the structure that is immersed. FM-1 Ferrous Metals - Interior exposure, including steel and ductile iron pipe systems, fittings, valves, 1-beams and columns. a. Surface Preparation: S6. b. Shop/Field Primer: Tnemec FC 20 - 1255 or 20 - 155 at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. c. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec Series N69 or N69F polyamide epoxy at 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. d. Finish Coat: Tnemec Series N69 or N69F at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. e. Total DFT: 8.0 to 14.0 mils. FM-2 Ferrous Metals - Exterior Exposure, including Extorior of all Outside Metal Doors and Frames. f. Surface Preparation: Sl thru S4 or S6 as necessary based on condition of metal. g. Shop/Field Primer: Tnemec N69 or N69F at 3.0 to 5.0 mils DFT. h. Intermediate Coat: Tnemec N69 or N69F al 2.0 lu 4.0 mils DFT. i. Finish Coat: Tnemec 73 polyurethane at 2.0 to 4.0 mils DFT. j. Total DFT: 7.0 to 13.0 mils. FM-3 Interior Metal Doors and Frames, and Metal Window Frames. k. Surface Preparation: Sl thru S4 as necessary based on condition of metal. I. Shop/Field Primer: Sherwin Williams - Kern Bond HS at 2.5 to 3.5 mils DFT. m. Intermediate Coat: Sherwin Williams Steel - Master 9500 at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT. n. Finish Coat: Sherwin Williams Steel - Master 9500 at 2.0 to 3.0 mils DFT. o. Total DFT: 6.5 to 9.5 mils. M-1 Concrete Masonry Units - Interior Exposure. a. Surface Preparation: S4 and S5. b. 1 Coat of Tnemec Series 54 - 660 polyamide epoxy masonry filler, 10 mils DFT. c. 2 Coats of Tnemec Series N69 or N69F epoxy at 200 square feet per gallon. M-2 Concrete Masonry Units - Interior Exposure. a. Surface Preparation: S4 and S5. b. 1 Coat of Sherwin Williams Armorseal 1 OOOHS, 2.5 - 4.0 mils DFT (reduced as necessary up to 1 pt/gal with R7K54). © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PAINTING 0991 00 - 10 c. 1 Coat of Sherwin Williams Armorseal 1 OOOHS, 3.0 - 5.0 mils DFT. M-3 Fiber Cement Siding - Exterior Exposure a. Surface Preparation: S4 and S5. b. 2 Coats of Tnemec Series 156 Enviro-Crete at 4.0 to 8.0 mils DFT per coat. M-4 Concrete Masonry Units - Exterior Water Repellent Clear Finish a. Surface Preparation: S4. b. 2 coats of Chemprobe Prime -A -Pell 200 or Hydrozo Clear 40 VOC, first coat at 75 square feet per gallon, second coat at 100 square feet per gallon, OR a. 2 coats of Professional Water Sealant and Anti-Graffitiant Super Strength as manufactured by Professional Products of Kansas, Inc., first coat at 75 square feet per gallon, second coat at 100 square feet per gallon. M-5 Poured -In -Place Concrete - Interior Exposure, including equipment bases, pipe supports, and other non -submerged concrete: a. Surface Preparation: S4 and S5. b. 1 Coat of Tnemec Series 54 - 660 or Sherwin-Williams Loxon Block Surfacer, 10 mils DFT. c. 2 Coats of Tnemec Series N69 or N69F or Sherwin-Williams Macropoxy 646 FCE epoxy at 150 to 200 square feet per gallon. W-1 Wood Surfaces -Interior and Exterior Surfaces a. 1 coat oil -based stain. b. 3 coats Minwax Helmsman 350 VOC Spar Urethane with satin finish. GB-1 Gypsum Board - Paint a. 1 coat of PrepRiteO 200 Latex Primer, B28, 1.2 mils DFT. b. Finish: 2 coats Pro Mar 200 Latex Egg Shell Enamel, B20, 1.5 mils DFT/coat. MP-1 Metal Moving Parts - Chains, plates, gates, valves, and similar submerged and non - submerged moving parts a. 1 coat of Koppers Inertol Grease Coating at 40 sq.ft./gal). B. Ductwork and conduit exposed to view shall receive finish coatings the same color as walls and/or ceilings to which they are adjacent. Color selections to be made by Owner. 3.05 DAMAGED COATINGS A. Damaged coatings and pinholes shall have the edges feathered and repaired in accordance with paint manufacturer's directions. B. All finish coats, including touch-up and damage -repair coats, shall be applied in a manner that will present an appearance of uniform color and texture. 3.06 UNSATISFACTORY APPLICATION A. If the item has an improper finish color or insufficient film thickness, the surface shall be cleaned and topcoated with the specified paint material to obtain the specified color © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PAINTING 0991 00-11 and coverage. Specific surface preparation information shall be obtained from the paint manufacturer and the Architect. 13. All visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint shall be hand or power sanded feathering the edges. The areas shall be primed and finish coated in accordance with the Specifications. Depending on the extent of repair and its appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat may be required by the Architect. C. Work shall be free of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections. Evidence of the conditions is grounds for rejection. D. Any defects in the coating system shall be repaired by the Contractor per written recommendations of the coating manufacturer. 3.07 CLEANUP A. All rags and waste that may be constituted a fire hazard shall be placed in closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon completion of the work all staging, scaffolding, and containers shall be removed from the Site or destroyed in a legal manner. Paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors shall be completely removed and the entire Site left clean and acceptable to the Architect. END OF SECTION PAINTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 0991 00 - 12 SECTION 09 97 27 CONCRETE EPDXY FLOOR COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Special epoxy flooring system materials, including underlayments, waterproofing membranes, primers, fillers, and other applied materials used as underlayments, prime, body coat and finish coats, and the application of these materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete B. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete C. ACI 302.1 R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to commencing work, submit manufacturer's technical information and installation details to describe materials to be used. The same manufacturer shall supply all polymer underlayments, wall and floor finishes. B. Owner and Contractor shall review and mutually agree upon color, grade and final texture of special epoxy floor system before starting installation. C. Before beginning work, samples of the polymer flooring shall be provided for the architect's approval. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall be an established firm regularly engaged in satisfactory installation of similar materials and shall provide a list of 3 projects of similar nature and complexity completed in the last 5 years. Contractor shall provide a letter of certification by manufacturer that Contractor is a current qualified installer. CONCRETE EPDXY FLOOR COATING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 97 27 - 1 B. Single source responsibility: Provide fillers, broadcast media, underlayments, epoxy primer, body coat and Topcoat coat produced by the same manufacturer with no less than 10 years of experience in the manufacture and supply of these principal materials for work in this section. C. Prior to commencing the installation, the Contractor shall install, with Owner's approval, a mutually agreed upon sample ("mock-up") to show final color and texture of the system. This mock-up shall serve as a job standard for the final installation. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Material shall be delivered to project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, product and color. B. Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture, direct sunlight and temperatures below 50 degrees F or above 80 degrees F. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Evaluate the substrate condition, including moisture content and extent of substrate leveling and repairs required, if any. Coordinate flooring work with other trades to ensure adequate illumination, ventilation, and dust free environment during application and curing of flooring. C. Comply with material manufacturer's recommended temperature limitations for flooring application. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. Contractor shall furnish a written warranty covering both material and workmanship for a period of 1 year from date of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER; A. For purpose of defining quality of materials in this Section, BASF Corporation, Shakopee, MN conforms to requirements of this Specification. Substitutions: 1. Alternates to acceptable manufacturer will be considered only on basis of written requests. Include substantiation of product performance as listed in Section 2.02 below. BASF Corporation 889 Valley Park Drive Shakopee, MN 55379 Customer Service: 800- 433-9517 Technical Service: 800-243-6739 Direct Phone: 952-496-6000 Internet: www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE EPDXY FLOOR COATING 099727-2 2.02 MATERIALS - MASTERTOP 1245 CLAD SYSTEM, SELF LEVELING EPDXY FLOOR SYSTEM (SL-2) A. Seamless Polymer Flooring shall be a three -component epoxy floor system consisting of epoxy resin, cure agent and special graded aggregate applied to a minimum finished thickness of 114 inch. Three -component special epoxy flooring system shall be trowel applied to 1 /4 inch thickness in one application and finished with a minimum of two coats pigmented epoxy, polyurethane, or polyaspartic to achieve color and texture selected. 1. System Consists of the following: a. Primer: MasterTop GP 500 Part A / Part B 250 sq.ft./gal. b. Basecoat: MasterTop GP 500 Part A / Part B + MasterTop PGM 500 pigment pack + MasterTop F 50OTG aggregate 50 sq.ft./batch c. Grout Coat: MasterTop TC 504 Part A / Part B 100-120 sq.ft./gal. d. Finish Coat: MasterTop TC 504 Part A / Part B 250 sq.ft./gal. e. Optional Finish Coat: 1) MasterTop TC 493 Polyurethane Top Coat 2) MasterTop TC 683 Polyaspartic Top Coat Physical Properties. Epoxy Flooring Systems shall comply with the following minimum test standards: Compressive Strength, ASTM C 579 Tensile Strength, ASTM D 638 Flexural Strength, ASTM D 790 Impact Resistance, MIL-D-3134 Abrasion Resistance, CS17 Wheel 1000 gram load, 1000 cycles ASTM D-4060 Adhesive Strength, ASTM D-4541 Rate of Burning, ASTM D635 Oil Resistance, MIL-D-3135 Shock Resistance, MIL-D-3135 Hardness Shore D ASTM D-2240 12,900 psi 8,000 psi 4,990 psi No signs of chipping, cracking, or detachment .070 gram loss 350 psi Self -Extinguishing 0.20 No signs of chipping, cracking, or detachment 75 - 85 C. Where chemical resistance is a requirement, add the following, followed by the chemicals and concentrations required: 1. "Special flooring shall show no chemical attack when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1308 for 7 days against the following reagents and concentrations noted." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: A. Concrete must have a curing period of 28 days minimum at 70' F. The surface must be clean and dry, physically sound and free of contamination. Surfaces must be free of holes, voids or defects. Cracks and abrupt changes in surface profile must be corrected. Fins and projections must be removed. All curing compounds and sealers must be removed. B. Verify that moisture content is within range acceptable to flooring manufacturer, using a calcium chloride test kit in accordance with test method ASTM F 1869. CONCRETE EPDXY FLOOR COATING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 97 27 - 3 C. Contractor must report, in writing, surfaces left in improper condition by other trades. Application will constitute acceptance of surfaces by the applicator. 3.02 PREWORK INSPECTION A. Examine all surfaces to be coated with Selby material systems and report to the Owner and/or Engineer any conditions that will adversely affect the appearance or performance of these coating systems and that cannot be put into acceptable condition by the preparatory work specified in Paragraph 3.03. B. Do not proceed with application until the surface is acceptable or authorization to proceed is given by the Engineer. C. In the event that Applicator has employed all acceptable methods of surface preparation and cannot remedy adverse conditions that would lead to failure of the installation, Applicator shall withdraw from the contract and Owner will be financially responsible only for preparation efforts. 3.03 PREPARATION: A. Surface Preparation - General 1. Concrete substrate must be clean and dry. Dislodge dirt, mortar spatter, paint overspray, and other dry surface accumulations and contamination by scraping, brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and/or compressed air blow -down. 2. New concrete: See 1.08 - C for requirements. 3. Surfaces that are heavily contaminated shall be cleaned with the appropriate degreaser, detergent, or other appropriate cleaner/surfactant followed by thoroughly rinsing with fresh water to remove the accumulation prior to mechanical cleaning efforts. Mechanical cleaning without degreasing can drive these deposits further into the subsliale. 4. Concrete shall have a moisture emission rate of no more than 4 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. per 24-hour period as determined by proper Calcium Chloride Testing. B. Mechanical Surface Preparation and Cleaning 1. The MasterTop 1245 CLAD system requires a CSP 3-5 in accordance with ICRI CSP Surface Preparation Standards. All accessible concrete floor surfaces shall be mechanically blast cleaned :sing a mobile cteelthnt; dust recycling machine such as BLASTRAC, as manufactured by Wheelabrator Corp., or approved equivalent. All surface and embedded accumulations of paint, toppings, hardened concrete layers, laitance, power trowel finishes, and other similar surface characteristics shall be completely removed leaving a bare concrete surface having a profile similar to 40 grit sandpaper and exposing the upper fascia of concrete aggregate. 2. Floor areas inaccessible to the mobile blast cleaning machines shall be mechanically abraded to the same degree of cleanliness, soundness, and profile using vertical disc scarifiers, starwheel scarifiers, needle guns, scabblers, or other suitably effective equipment. 3. After blasting, traces or accumulations of spent abrasive, laitance, removed toppings, and other debris shall be removed with brush or vacuum. 4. Application of the respective specified material systems) must be completed before any water or other contamination of the surface occurs. CONCRETE EPDXY FLOOR COATING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 97 27 - 4 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Comply with flooring system manufacturer's recommendation. Materials shall be prepared and mixed in compliance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer as recommended by flooring manufacturer to completely seal substrate. Using a trowel, install body coat at a nominal '/4" thickness or to the specified depth. 3.05 CLEANUP A. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris and dispose of them in accordance with local regulations. Leave work areas in a clean condition. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect the completed work from water, airborne particles or other surface contaminants until cured, tack free, approximately 18-24 hours after application. B. Protect completed system from traffic and physical abuse for approximately 72 hours. Protect completed system from immersion and chemical exposure until thoroughly cured, approximately seven (7) days. END OF SECTION CONCRETE EPDXY FLOOR COATING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 97 27 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 09 97 29 DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOOR COATING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Special heavy-duty decorative epoxy flooring system materials, including underlayments, waterproofing membranes, primers, fillers, and other applied materials used as underlayments, prime, body coat and finish coats, and the application of these materials. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NACE No. 6/SSPC-SP 13 - Surface Preparation of Concrete B. ACI 308 - Standard Practice for Curing Concrete C. ACI 302.1 R-80 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to commencing work, submit manufacturer's technical information and installation details to describe materials to be used. The same manufacturer shall supply all polymer underlayments, wall and floor finishes. B. Owner and Contractor shall review and mutually agree upon color, grade and final texture of special epoxy floor system before starting installation. C. Before beginning work, samples of the polymer flooring shall be provided for the architect's approval. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall bean established firm regularly engaged in satisfactory installation of similar materials and shall provide a list of 3 projects of similar nature and complexity completed in the last 5 years. Contractor shall provide a letter of certification by manufacturer that Contractor is a current qualified installer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOOR COATING 099729-1 B. Single source responsibility: Provide fillers, broadcast media, underlayments, epoxy primer, body coat and Topcoat coat produced by the same manufacturer with no less than 10 years of experience in the manufacture and supply of these principal materials for work in this section. C. Prior to commencing the installation, the Contractor shall install, with Owner's approval, a mutually agreed upon sample ("mock-up") to show final color and texture of the system. This mock-up shall serve as a job standard for the final installation. 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE: A. Material shall be delivered to project site in manufacturer's original unopened containers bearing manufacturer's name, product and color. B. Materials shall be stored indoors, protected from damage, moisture, direct sunlight and temperatures below 50 degrees F or above 80 degrees F. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Evaluate the substrate condition, including moisture content and extent of substrate leveling and repairs required, if any. B. Coordinate flooring work with other trades to ensure adequate illumination, ventilation, and dust free environment during application and curing of flooring. C. Comply with material manufacturer's recommended temperature limitations for flooring application. 1.08 WARRANTY: A. Contractor shall furnish a written warranty covering both material and workmanship for a period of 1 year from date of installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER: A. For purpose of defining quality of materials in this Section, BASF Corporation, Shakopee, MN conforms to requirements of this Specification. B. Substitutions: 1. Alternates to acceptable manufacturer will be considered only on basis of written requests. Include substantiation of product performance as listed in Section 2.02 below. BASF Corporation 889 Valley Park Drive Shakopee, MN 55379 Customer Service: 800- 433-9517 Technical Service: 800-243-6739 Direct Phone: 952-496-6000 Internet: www.master-builders-solutions.basf.us DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOOR COATING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 97 29 - 2 2.02 MATERIALS - MASTERTOP 1244 DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOOR SYSTEM (SQF-1) A. Special heavy duty, decorative flooring shall be a two -component epoxy floor system with colored quartz aggregate applied to a finished thickness of 1 /8 inch to 1 /4" or greater. Heavy duty, decorative special flooring shall be finished with two (2) coat(s) of clear epoxy to achieve the texture selected. Physical Properties - The Special Decorative Flooring Systems shall comply with the following minimum test standards: Compressive Strength, ASTM C-579 12,900 psi Tensile Strength, ASTM D-638 1,160 psi Flexural Strength, ASTM D-790 4,600 psi Indentation, MIL-D-24613 24 hrs. residual, 0.0008 inch Impact Resistance, MIL-D-24613 No chipping, cracking or delamination Fire Resistance, MIL-D-24613 Fire retardant Nonslip properties, MIL-D-2047 Dry => 1.20 Wet = 0.47 Abrasion Resistance, C-17 Wheel 1000 gram load, 1000 cycles < 0.060 g loss PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS: A. Concrete must have a curing period of 28 days minimum at 70' F. The surface must be clean and dry, physically sound and free of contamination. Surfaces must be free of holes, voids or defects. Cracks and abrupt changes in surface profile must be corrected. Fins and projections must be removed. All curing compounds and sealers must be removed. B. Verify that moisture content is within range acceptable to flooring manufacturer, using a calcium chloride test kit in accordance with test method ASTM F 1869. C. Contractor must report, in writing, surfaces left in improper condition by other trades. Application will constitute acceptance of surfaces by the applicator. 3.02 PREPARATION: A. Prepare surfaces as required, per manufacturer's printed instructions. Preferred surface preparation is shotblast or similar mechanical method. B. Patch all depressions, divots, honeycombed or scaled concrete with filler as recommended by manufacturer. C. Level and slope floor, as required, with manufacturer's acrylic or epoxy modified mortar underlayment. D. Fill all non-moving cracks or control joints with joint filler as recommended by manufacturer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOOR COATING 099729-3 E. Fill all moving cracks or joints with a firm but flexible (or non -rigid) sealant material as recommended by manufacturer. Expansion joints should be re -cut in finished floor, if required, and filled with sealant. F. Masking: Mask surfaces that require protection. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with flooring system manufacturer's recommendation. 1. Materials shall be prepared and mixed in compliance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. 2. Apply primer/receiving coat of epoxy resin. 3. Broadcast selected pattern of colored quartz aggregate into wet epoxy to complete saturation, dry appearance. Allow to cure overnight. 4. Vacuum excess aggregate. Apply second broadcast application to achieve necessary thickness of 1 /8" to 1 /4"; per the job requirements. 5. After overnight cure, vacuum excess aggregate and apply clear epoxy grout coat. 6. Apply clear finish to achieve desired finish and texture selected. B. Cove Base: Where specified, install a 4-inch high with a nominal 1-inch radius onto wall surfaces. All cove bases shall terminate into cap strips, unless otherwise noted on drawings. 3.04 CLEANUP A. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris and dispose of them in accordance with local regulations. Leave work areas in a clean condition. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect the completed work from water, airborne particles or other surface contaminants until cured, tack free, approximately 18-24 hours after application. B. Protect completed system from traffic and physical abuse for approximately 72 hours. Protect completed system from immersion and chemical exposure until thoroughly cured, approximately seven (7) days at 701 F. END OF SECTION DECORATIVE QUARTZ FLOOR COATING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 09 97 29 - 4 SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Metal room signs. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. 2 samples of each sign material. B. Complete sample sets of colors and finishes available for selection by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 METAL ROOM SIGNS A. Manufacturers and Products: 1. ADA Sign Factory, MetalGraph Brushed Aluminum signs (Standard of Quality). 2. Best Manufacturing Standard Sign Systems. 3. Sign Solutions SR Series. 4. Comparable products from other approved manufacturers. B. Letters: Raised 1 /32-inch, upper case, sans serif accompanied with Grade 2 braille. C. Mounting: Countersunk stainless steel vandal -resistant screws at each corner into stainless steel expansion shields drilled into wall with 1 inch minimum embedment. D. Color 1. Core color to be selected by the Owner. 2. Face color to be selected by the Owner. E. Size and Quantity of Signs as Listed Below: l . Room Identification Signs - Provide the following room identification signs with 1-inch high letters and sign size (4-3/4-inch and 6-inch minimum): a. CONCESSIONS -STAFF ONLY (Quantity 1 - At Door Al01-1). b. CONCESSIONS (Quantity 1 - At Door A101-2). c. JANITOR (Quantity 1 - At Door Al01 A-1). d. STORAGE (Quantity 2 - At Door Al 02-1 and A102-2). e. MECH/ELEC (Quantity 2 - At Door Al05 and Al 14). f. TICKET OFFICE -STAFF ONLY (Quantity 2 - At Door Al06-1 and Al06-2). g. FIRST AID (Quantity 1 - At Door A107). SIGNS © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 10 14 00 - 1 h. EMPLOYEE LOCKERS (Quantity 1 -Adjacent to opening to Room A109). i. OFFICE (Quantity 1 - At Door Al 12). j. PIPE CHASE (Quantity 3 - At Door Al 18, Al 19, and Al 23). 6 inch by 8 inch international symbol of accessibility and indicates which sex the restroom is in 5/8 inch high raised 1 /32 inch, upper case, sans serif and Grade 2 Braille below the symbol: 1. POOL RESTROOMS SHOWERS (Quantity 1 - At Hallway Al 15). 2. MEN'S RESTROOM SHOWERS (Quantity 2 - At Door Al20-1 and A120-2). 3. WOMEN'S RESTROOM SHOWER (Quantity 2 - At Door Al 24-1 and Al24-2). G. 6 inch by 8 inch international symbol of accessibility and indicates the restroom is gender neutral in 5/8 inch high raised 1 /32 inch, upper case, sans serif and Grade 2 Braille below the symbol: 1. FAMILY RESTROOM (Quantity 2- At Door A103 and A104). 2. EMPLOYEE RESTROOM/SHOWER (Quantity 1 -At Door A108). 3. FAMILY RESTROOM SHOWER (Quantity 2- At Door Al 16 and Al 17). PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Field -verify surface conditions before installing signs. If surfaces are unsuitable for the fastener type specified, notify Architect in writing before proceeding with the installation. B. All signs must be securely installed plumb, level, and in the proper location. C. Review locations with Architect prior to installation. END OF SECTION SIGNS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 10 14 00 - 2 SECTION 10 21 16 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid plastic toilet compartments. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 10 28 13 - Toilet Accessories. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B85 - Standard Specification for Aluminum -Alloy Die Castings. 2. B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes. 3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 286 - Standard Methods of Fire Tests for Evaluating Contribution of Wall and Ceiling Interior Finish to Room Fire Growth. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Compartment Configurations: 1. Toilet partitions: Floor mounted, overhead braced. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned layout, elevations, trim, closures, and accessories. 2. Product Data: Manufacturer's descriptive data for panels, hardware, and accessories. 3. Samples: 2 by 3 inch samples showing available colors. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in manufacture of solid plastic toilet compartments with products in satisfactory use under similar service conditions. B. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years' experience in work of this Section. SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 1021 16 - 1 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's 25-year warranty against breakage, corrosion, and delamination under normal conditions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable manufacturers, 1. Eclipse by Scranton Products (Standard of Quality). 2. Accurate Partitions Corp. 3. Global Partitions. 4. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. 5. Metpar Corp. 6. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 7. Bradley Corp. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 01. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Doors, Panels and Pilasters: 1. High density polyethylene (HDPE), fabricated from extruded polymer resins, forming single thickness panel. 2. Waterproof and nonabsorbent, with self-lubricating surface, resistant to marks by pens, pencils, markers, and other writing instruments. 3. 1 inch thick with edges rounded to 1 /4 inch radius. 4. Fire hazard classification: Pass NFPA 286. 5. Color: To be selected from manufacturer's full color range. B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6463-T5 alloy and temper. C. Aluminum Die Cusliiicgs: ASTM B85, A380 alloy. D. Injection Molded Plastic: High density polyethylene. E. Rubber: Abrasion resistant Styrene Butadiene Rubber, 65 to 80 Shore A durometer, black. 2.03 HARDWARE A. Hinges: 1. Inswing hinges: a. Hidden pivot type fabricated from heavy-duty cast aluminum. b. Auto -close feature, adjustable to 15 degree open position. c. Mounted to doors with stainless steel Torx head screws and through bolted to metal post with tamper proof Torx head sex bolts. d. Hinge pivot point: 6 to 8 inches from edge of door; maintain sufficient clearance to water closet. 2. Outswing hinges: a. Fabricated from extruded aluminum. b. Auto -close feature, adjustable to 15 degree open position. SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1021 16 - 2 c. Surface mounted to doors with stainless steel Torx head screws and fastened to metal posts with countersunk tamper proof screws. 3. Provide for field adjustment of plus or minus 0.125 inch laterally and plus or minus 0.125 inch vertically. B. Door Keeper: 1. 3.5 inches long, fabricated from heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. 2. Mount in gap between dividing panel and door. C. Latch and Housing: 1. Heavy duty extruded aluminum. 2. Latch housing: Clear anodized finish. 3. Slide bolt and button: Black anodized finish. D. Coat Hook/Bumper: Combination type, chrome plated Zamak. E. Door Pulls [and Push Plates]: 1. Heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish. 2. Single component providing door pull capability on outswing doors. 2.04 COMPONENTS A. Doors and Dividing Panels: 1. 55 inches high, mounted 14 inches above finished floor. 2. Doors: 60 degree angle on two opposite edges for enhanced privacy. 3. Dividing panels: Slotted on one edge to accept wall bracket. B. Metal Posts: 82.75 inches high, heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish, fastened to foot with stainless steel tamper resistant screw. C. Hidden Shoe (Foot): 1-piece molded polyethylene invisible shoe inserted into metal post and secured to metal post with stainless steel tamper resistant screw. D. Headrail Cap and Corner Cap: 1-piece molded polyethylene secured to metal post with stainless steel tamper resistant screw; adjustable to level headrail to finished floor. E. Hidden Wall Brackets: 54 inches long, heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish, inserted into slotted panel and fastened to panels with stainless steel tamper resistant screws. F. Headrail: Heavy duty extruded aluminum, designer anti -grip design, clear anodized finish, fastened to headrail bracket with stainless steel tamper resistant screw and to headrail cap or corner cap with stainless steel tamper resistant screw. G. Headrail Brackets: Heavy duty extruded aluminum, clear anodized finish, secured to wall with stainless steel tamper screws. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS 1021 16-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install compartments in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Install rigid, straight, plumb, and level. C. Locate bottom edge of doors and panels 14 inches above finished floor. D. Provide uniform, maximum 3/8-inch vertical clearance at doors. E. Not Acceptable: Evidence of cutting, drilling, or patching. 3.02 ADJUSTING A. Adjust doors and latches to operate correctly. END OF SECTION SOLID PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1021 16 - 4 SECTION 10 28 13 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Toilet accessories. 2. Building accessories. 3. Fasteners, locks and keys, and related accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 06 20 00 - Finish Carpentry. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit for the Architect's review: 1. Product Data. 2. Shop Drawings. 3. Material samples if requested by Architect. 4. Sample Warranties. B. Submit for Owner's Use/Records: 1. Certificate of Compliance for performance requirements. 2. Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 3. Keys. 4. Executed Warranties. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): 1. Standards: Americans with Disabilities Act Architectural Barrier Removal and Compliance Manual, based on Minnesota Accessibility Code Chapter 1341. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mounting heights shall first comply with the applicable building code and secondly comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act, unless it conflicts with the building code for all handicap -related accessories. TOILET ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 10 28 13 - 1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products in original unopened protective packaging with legible manufacturer's identification. B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent soiling, physical damage, or wetting. C. Handle to prevent damage to finished surfaces. D. Protection 1. Maintain protective covers on all units until installation is complete. 2. Remove protective covers at final clean-up of installation. 1.07 SPECIAL WARRANTIES A. Contractor, manufacturer, and installer shall warrant the finish of installed products for a period of 5 years from date of Substantial Completion against the conditions indicated below. Upon written notice from the Owner, they shall promptly and without inconvenience and cost to Owner correct said deficiencies. 1. Warrant mirrors against deterioration of silver coating. 2. Warrant chrome plating against peeling, flaking, or discoloration. 3. Warrant stainless steel against rusting, staining, or discoloration. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. A & J Washroom Accessories. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 4. Bradley Corporation. 5. Or approved equal. B. Standard of Quality: The Construction Documents are based on the proprietary literature from, Bradley corporation. The Contractor may at its option use equivalent materials by one of the other specified acceptable manufacturers. 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Toilet Tissue Holders (TPH): Furnished and installed by Owner. B. Paper Towel Cabinet (PTC): Furnished and installed by Owner. C. Soap Dispenser (SDISP): Furnished and installed by Owner. D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: (SND-1) Surface -mounted napkin disposal shall serve one toilet compartment and be fabricated of 22-gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in satin finish. Self -closing push flap door and stainless steel removable receptacle with tumbler lock. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 4722-15. TOILET ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1028 13 - 2 E. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: (SND-2) Partition -mounted dual napkin disposal shall serve two toilet compartments and be fabricated of 22-gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in satin finish and burr -free beveled edges. Two self -closing push flap doors. Stainless steel receptacle with tumbler locks, removable from one side only. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 4721-15. F. Grab Bars (GB -IX): 1-1/2 inch diameter, stainless steel bars fabricated to have 1-1/2 inch clearance from mounting surface with concealed fastener mounting. Furnish with proper type of anchor for construction conditions and code required loads. 1. Lengths: a. GB-1 A: 18 inches. b. GB-1 B: 36 inches. c. GB-1C: 42 inches. d. GB-1 D: 18-1 /8 inches by 33-1 /8 inches horizontal two -wall shower grab bar. 2. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 812. G. Folding Shower Seat (SS-1): Folding stainless steel shower seat shall be fabricated of 16- gauge stainless steel with exposed surfaces in satin finish. Seat welded to 1 inch diameter, 18-gauge stainless steel tubing. Support leg locks into 16-gauge retaining bracket with bullet -type catch. Shower seat shall meet or exceed ADA guidelines. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 956-30. H. Shower Curtain Rod (SR-1): 1-1/4 inch diameter 18-gauge stainless steel, seamless construction with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish. 22-gauge stainless steel escutcheon plates shall be 1-piece drawn construction with exposed surfaces in architectural satin finish. Snap over flanges to conceal mounting screws. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 9539. I. Shower Curtain (SC-1): Shower curtain shall be of 10-ounce nylon reinforced antimicrobial vinyl fabric, flameproof, stain resistant, self -deodorizing, furnished with aluminum grommets on 6-inch centers. All sides hemmed. Provide stainless steel curtain rings to suspend curtain from rod. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 9537. I Robe Hook (RH-1): Surface mounted hat and coat hook shall be fabricated of heavy gauge No. 4 satin finish stainless steel. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 9134. K. Baby Changing Station (BCS-1): Horizontal wall mounted baby changing station with stainless steel veneer. Unit has built-in liner dispenser for use with 3-ply chemical free biodegradable bed liners, instructional graphics and safety messages in 4 languages. Unit shall be backed by manufacturer's 5-year limited warranty on materials and workmanship and include a provision for replacement caused by vandalism. 1. Standard of Quality: Koala Kare Products KB200-SS. L. Utility Shelf (US-1): Surface mounted utility shelf shall be fabricated of Type 304, 18-gauge stainless steel with satin finish. Hooks shall be of 16-gauge stainless steel. Holders shall be with spring activated rubber cams. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 9933. M. Mirrors Glass: (MIR-1) Channel framed mirrors. 1/4-inch polished plate glass, triple -silvered, electro-plated with baked enamel backing. Guaranteed against silver spoilage for 15 years. Stainless steel channel frame with bright -annealed finish. Mitered corners. TOILET ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 1028 13 - 3 18-gauge steel wall hanger with all -welded construction. Galvanized steel back plate with shock absorbing waterproof filter. Mirror sizes shall be 24 inches wide by 36 inches high unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 1. Standard of Quality: Bradley Corporation: No. 781. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Check with Architect for locations of all units prior to installation. B. Check areas to receive surface mounted units for conditions that would affect quality and execution of work. C. Verify spacing of plumbing fixtures that affect installation of accessories. D. Do not begin installation of washroom accessories until surfaces are acceptable. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations and comply with Barrier -Free requirements. B. Drill holes to correct size and application that so that they are concealed by items, with 1/4-inch tolerance. C. Mount surface mounted accessories to back up with toggle bolts, plumb and align. D. Anchor grab bars to wall in such a way as to support 250 pounds for 5 minutes. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Adjust accessories for proper operation. B. After completion of installation, clean and polish all exposed surfaces. C: Deliver instruction sheets to Owner. END OF SECTION TOILET ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 10 28 13 - 4 SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire Extinguisher cabinets. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 04 22 00 - Concrete Unit Masonry. 2. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 3. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for portable fire extinguishers. B. Fire extinguishers, cabinets, and accessories by single manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer's data and catalog cuts. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. J.L. Industries. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Fire Extinguisher (FE): 10 lb., multi -purpose, dry chemical, UL Rating 4A-60B:C. B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC): Larsen's Gemini Series, Model No. G2409-6R with semi - recessed trim, 2-1/2 inch projection. Black door with white Type A letters. Door material 1/4-inch acrylic. Satin -finish pull handle with self-adjusting roller catch. Continuous piano hinge. Heavy -gauge, white baked -enamel box. C. Wall Bracket: Larsen B-2 Series. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 104400-1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Rough openings for cabinets by General Contractor. Verify size and location of rough openings before starting the work. B. Verify installation locations with Architect before starting the Work. C. Verify servicing, charging, and tagging of all fire extinguishers before leaving Site. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install according to manufacturer's directions. B. Cabinet shall be firmly anchored into opening. C. Handle of door to cabinet shall be 40 inches above finished floor. D. Securely anchor wall brackets 48 inches above floor. END OF SECTION FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 10 44 00 - 2 SECTION 10 51 13 METAL LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: l . Metal Lockers, including the following: a. Four (4) Tier Size: 1) LKR-2: 15 inches wide by 15 inches deep by 18 inches high. 2. Provide fasteners and anchorage devises to install lockers provided under this section. 3. Provide metal filler panels to fill between banks of lockers and adjacent construction. 4. Provide sloped metal tops at banks of lockers. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall. 3. Section 09 31 13 - Ceramic Tile. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of locker and bench. B. Shop Drawings: Show lockers in detail, method of installation, fillers, trim, base, and accessories. Include locker numbering sequence information. C. Samples for verification: Submit one full-size locker sample for evaluation. Adherence to the specification is required. Locker submitted must meet specification regardless of manufacturer's standard product. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for metal locker units. D. Maintenance Data: For adjusting, repairing, and replacing locker doors and latching mechanisms to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity and Single Manufacturer Requirements: Provide each type of metal locker as produced by a single manufacturer, including necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. B. Installers Qualifications: Lockers to be installed by an experienced agent of the manufacturer. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Do not deliver metal lockers until building is enclosed and ready for locker installation. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 L_ METAL LOCKERS 1051 13-1 B. Storage and Protection: Protect materials from damage during delivery, handling, storage, and installation. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Locker manufacturer shall warrant the lockers for the lifetime use of the original purchaser from date of shipment. Warranty shall include all defects in material and workmanship, excluding finish, vandalism, and improper installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents, acceptable manufacturers are as follows: 1. DeBourgh Manufacturing Company. 2. Lyon Angle Iron. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Locker Construction l . Lockers to be welded unibody construction with exposed welds sanded smooth. 2. No bolts, screws or rivets used in assembly of locker units. 3. Ship lockers set-up, ready to be anchored in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 4. Each bank of lockers shall be limited to no more than four columns. Body of Lockers: 1. Exterior sides, Tops, Bottoms, Tier Dividers and Facia: Constructed of 16-gauge domestic cold rolled sheet steel for maximum durability. No gaps between shelf front and interior locker will be accepted. 2. Backs: Solid sheet of 18-gauge cold rolled sheet steel welded to frames of sides and intermediate partitions. 3. Shelves and Intermediate Partitions: Constructed of 18-gauge cold rolled sheet steel welded to sides and intermediate partition construction. Diumorld perruruled intermediate partitions permitting ventilation between lockers. Shelves provided in lockers 60 inches and taller, located to provide a minimum of 12 inches of clearance. C. Continuous Door Strike: 1. Tier dividers, tops and bottoms constructed of 18-gauge to provide four-sided, continuous door strike for a secure, sanitary, and intrusion -free locker while door is in closed position. The locker construction method shall produce a flush bottom condition. D. Doors: 1. Doors are 16-gauge steel, formed outer panel with double bends on both sides and a single bend on top and bottom with 18-gauge steel formed stiffener panel. 2. Door stiffener runs top to bottom on hinge side of door and is securely welded to outer door to form a reinforced channel for additional torque -free strength and sound reduction when closing door. Stiffener to be 4-1/2" wide on 12" wide door. (Inner panel not available on 9-inch wide or box lockers 12 inches high or less). 3. Doors should be fabricated with a full-length piano hinge welded to door and riveted to cabinet at a maximum of 6" intervals. Rivets shall be a minimum of 3/16" diameter. METAL LOCKERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1051 13 - 2 4. 2 rubber silencers per door must be riveted in place with 1 /8" rivet. E. Door Ventilation: Solid doors with 0-percent ventilation. Latching: 1. Sentry III Single Point Latch a. 1 1-gauge unbreakable stationary latch welded to the locker frame extending through no more than 1-1 /4 inches into locker opening. b. Latch protrudes through flush -mounted, recessed stainless steel cup. Recessed stainless cup secured with 4 rivets (1 at each corner) c. Capable of accepting padlock or built-in lock. G. Hinges: 1. 16-gauge continuous piano hinge on the right side of the opening. 2. Hinges welded to door and riveted to locker frame. H. Slope Tops: (Where shown on Drawings) 1. Provide 18-gauge all welded slope top with 25-degree pitch, attached at factory with concealed fasteners. Slope top to be in addition to standard 16-gauge flat top. Reinforced Bottom: 1. Provide 2-1/4" minimum width 16-gauge spacer channel welded to locker bottom from front to back for a more secure installation. J. Filler Panels: Manufacturer's standard fabricated from 18-gauge solid steel finished to match lockers. K. Finish: 1. Complete locker unit to be thoroughly cleaned, phosphatized and sealed. 2. Finish to be baked pure TGIC polyester powder coat with a minimum 2-3 mil thickness. 3. Color of lockers shall be chosen from manufacturer's standard colors. 2.03 LOCKER ACCESSORIES A. Numbering: 1. Furnish each locker with polished aluminum number plate with etched black numbers. 2. Locate number plate near center of each door. 3. Owner to furnish numbering sequence. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Wall Installation: 1. Securely anchor every locker to wall before use. 2. Anchoring to be determined by conditions at time of installation. 3. The adjacent locker units by bolting at 4 points, 2 at top and 2 at bottom, using 1/4-inch cadmium plated bolts. METAL LOCKERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1051 13 - 3 3.02 ADJUSTING A. General Requirements: Upon completion of installation, inspect lockers and adjust for proper door and locking mechanism operation. 3.03 CLEANING A. General Requirements: 1. Clean interior and exposed exterior surfaces, removing debris, dust, dirt, and foreign substances on exposed surfaces. 2. Touch up scratches and abrasions to match original finish. 3. Polish stainless steel and non-ferrous metal surfaces. 4. Replace locker units that cannot be rostorod to factory finished appearance. 5. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by locker manufacturer. END OF SECTION METAL LOCKERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1051 13 - 4 SECTION 10 51 26 HEAVY DUTY PLASTIC LOCKERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Heavy Duty Plastic Lockers. B. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 03 45 00 - Architectural Precast Concrete. 3. Section 04 21 13 - Brick Masonry. 4. Section 04 71 16 - Manufactured Masonry Units. 5. Section 06 10 00 - Rough Carpentry. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM A 666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 2. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. US Federal Government: 1. U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG). 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Prepared specifically for this project; show dimensions of lockers and interface with other products. D. Samples for Selection: Furnish samples of manufacturer's full range of colors for initial selection. HEAVY DUTY PLASTIC LOCKERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1051 26 - 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Approved manufacturer listed in this section, with minimum 5 years' experience in the manufacture of plastic lockers. B. Installers Qualifications: An experienced Installer regularly engaged in the installation of lockers for a minimum of 3 years. C. Source Limitations: Obtain plastic lockers and trim accessories from single manufacturer. D. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with requirements of ADA/ABA and with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Surface -Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Flame -Spread Index: 100 or less. 2. Smoke -Developed Index: 450 or less. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Locker components shall be shipped fully assembled. All finishes shall be protected from soiling and damage during handling. C. Store and dispose of solvent -based materials, and materials used with solvent -based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction. D. Do not deliver plastic lockers to the site until the building is enclosed and HVAC systems are in operation. Deliver plastic lockers in manufacturer's original packaging. Store in an upright condition. Protect plastic lockers from exposure to direct sunlight. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: 20 year against rust, delamination or breakage of plastic parts under normal use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Salsbury Industries. 2. Bradley LENOXLOCKER. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements for substitution requirements. 2.02 LOCKERS (LKR-1) A. Locker Configuration: 1. Six -tier box style. HEAVY DUTY PLASTIC LOCKERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1051 26 - 2 B. Locker Dimensions: 1. Unit Width: 12 inches (305 mm). 2. Unit Height: 72 inches (1,828 mm) without base. 3. Unit Depth: 12 inches (457 mm). C. Material: HDPE plastic, 30 percent recycled material. D. Sides, Tops, Bottoms, Dividers, and Shelves: 3/8 inch (10 mm) thick HDPE plastic with smooth finish. E. Locker Shelves: 3/8 inch (10 mm) HDPE plastic, mortised into sides and back. F. Locker Tops: Slope top. G. Doors: Fabricate from a single piece 1 /2 inch (13 mm) HDPE plastic. l . Doors and Frame: 1 /2 inch (13 mm) thick HDPE plastic with matte texture finish with ventilation slots. 2. Logo on Door: Indicate accessible lockers. 3. Handle: ADA/ABA Compliant handle fabricated from injection molded plastic. 4. Locks: Standard hasp. 5. Hinges: Continuous piano hinges, .05 inch/18 gauge (1.27 mm) thick type 304 stainless steel fabricated to wrap around edges of door and frame and attached with stainless steel tamper -resistant screws. a. Finish: Powder coated to match color of locker. 6. Latch Bar: Full -height latch bar constructed of 1 /2 inch (13 mm) HDPE plastic secured to locker with stainless steel tamper -resistant screws H. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Number Plate: White acrylic with black film coating, laser etched with number specified. Provide one per locker. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Fasteners: Tamper -Resistant Fasteners: Stainless steel torx-head screws. 1. Locker Connectors: No. 10-24 sex bolt. 2. Anchors: Type and size required for secure anchorage. 3. Drilled -in -place Masonry Anchors: Minimum 1 /4 by 1-3/4 inch (6 by 44 mm) screws. 2.05 LOCKER FABRICATION A. Fabricate locker box from a single sheet of HDPE solid plastic with corners fused together. Weld frames and shelves to box assembly. Provide all welded construction of locker parts without dovetail slots or metal fasteners. Add welded gussets in single tier full height lockers. B. Center Dividers: Full -depth, vertical partitions between bottom and shelf; finished to match lockers. C. Hardware Attachment: All hinges, handles, hasps, hooks, latch bars, and locks attached with tamper -resistant screws. HEAVY DUTY PLASTIC LOCKERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1051 26 - 3 D. Provide ventilated panels where indicated. E. Continuous Sloping Tops: Fabricated in lengths indicated, without visible fasteners at splice locations; and finished to match lockers. F. Filler Panels: Fabricated in unequal leg angle shape; finished to match lockers. G. Finished End Panels: Fabricated with 3/8 inch (10 mm) wide edge dimension, configured to conceal fasteners and holes at exposed ends of plastic lockers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. f substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturers' installation instructions. B. Anchor the units to the wall through the locker back and to the concrete base. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION HEAVY DUTY PLASTIC LOCKERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1051 26 - 4 SECTION 10 67 00 STORAGE SHELVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Adjustable wire storage shelf units. B. RELATED SECTIONS 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete. 2. Section 09 29 00 - Gypsum Drywall. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment: 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's catalog data, detail sheets, and specifications. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by a single manufacturer with a minimum of ten years' experience. B. Installer Qualifications: All products listed in this section are to be installed by a single installer with a minimum of five years demonstrated experience in installing products of the same type and scope as specified. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.07 WARRANTY A. At project closeout, provide to Owner or Owner's Representative an executed copy of the manufacturer's standard limited warranty against manufacturing defect, outlining its terms, conditions, and exclusions from coverage. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 STORAGE SHELVING 106700-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1. Eagle Group, woo Industrial Blvd., Clayton, DE B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00. C. Provide all storage shelving from a single manufacturer. 2.02 WIRE SHELVING UNITS A. Eagle RediPakO Chrome Wire Shelving Units. Patented QuadTrussOO design wire shelves, two-piece post assemblies, and tapered split sleeves packaged in one complete box. 1. Five -shelf units. Complete shelving unit in one box includes: a. Five (5) chrome shelves. b. Four (4) two-piece post assemblies. Post have adjustable feet to allow levelling after assembly. c. Four (4) Tapered split sleeves and shelf collars per shelf. 2. Model Numbers: a. 18x48: 1848C74. b. 18x60: 1860074. c. 24x48: 2448C74. d. 24x60: 2460074. PART 3 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Prepared spaces are sized and located in accordance withshopdrawings. 2. Framing, reinforccmcnt, and anchoring devices are correct type and are located in accordance with shop drawings. Installer's Examination: 1. Examine conditions under which installation is to be performed; submit written notification if such conditions are unacceptable. 2. Installation activities started before unacceptable conditions have been corrected is prohibited. 3. Installation indicates installer's acceptance of conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install shelving plumb and level in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's printed installation instructions. STORAGE SHELVING 9) 2019 Stantec 1193804337 10 67 00 - 2 3.03 CLEANING A. As work proceeds, maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris related to this work. B. Upon completion of installation, clean all surfaces that have become soiled during installation. END OF SECTION STORAGE SHELVING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 10 67 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 13 11 13 POOL GENERAL PART 1 GENERAL KI uu�: A. Section Includes 1. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: a. General conditions for all pool system related work. This includes all Division 13 Specification Sections, and Section 22 51 13, Section 22 51 16, and Section 22 51 19. b. Construction and start-up supervision. c. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. B. Related Documents 1. Drawings and General Provisions of the Contract including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Experience: The Pool Contractor (hereafter indicated as Contractor) shall have been engaged in the construction of municipal pools for a period of at least 5 years and shall provide a record of at least 5 successful installations of a similar type and size of construction acceptable to the Owner/Engineer. B. Superintendent: Contractor shall provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the construction of swimming pools, who shall be present at all times during the execution of this portion of the Work and who shall personally direct the Work of this Section. C. Project Manager: Contractor shall have one project manager in addition to a field superintendent who is thoroughly trained and experienced in the construction of swimming pools, with a minimum of 5 years of relevant experience. This person shall be responsible for all submissions, material procurement and project administration. D. Codes and Regulations: Contractor shall have a working knowledge of and shall comply with all State, City, and County Codes and Regulations applicable to the work under this Section, including but not limited to: l . Minnesota Rules Chapter 4717, Parts 4717.0150 to 4717.3975 - Operation and Maintenance, Design, Installation and Construction Standards for Public Pools and Facilities Related to Them (Minnesota Pool Code) administered by the Minnesota Department of Health. 2. American National Standard for Public Swimming Pools, ANSI/NSPI. 3. NSF International/ANSI Standard 50 - Circulation System Components and Related Materials for Swimming Pools, Spas/Hot Tubs. 4. Article 680 and other applicable articles of the National Electrical Code. E. Testing: All testing, including but not limited to the following: concrete testing, density testing for pipe trenching and backfilling of pipes and structures, water tightness and POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 13- 1 clean water testing, pressure testing shall be per the same method and requirements as specified elsewhere in the Project Documents. F. Record of Work: The Contractor shall keep a record of the date and time of placement of all concrete. Such record shall be kept until Project Completion, at which time the record shall be submitted to the Owner and Engineer. The record shall be made available during construction when requested. G. Patented Materials: Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. He shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patient right and save the Owner and Engineer harmless from loss on account thereof. H. Quality of Materials: The materials, products, and equipment specified heroin establish the standard of required function, dimension, appearance, and quality. Complete submittal data must be provided to the Engineer for review and approval or rejection. No substitutes may be made without prior approval. If a substitute is approved, Bidders will be notified by Addendum. I. Quality of Labor: The Contractor shall use only personnel thoroughly trained and experienced in the trade involved in each type of Work required for the swimming pool related construction. In acceptance or rejection of installed work, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of the workmen. J. Signage for facility capacity, safety rules, etc. will be provided by the Owner outside of this contract. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing the layout, dimensions, operating characteristics of each piece of equipment, valves, controls, flow meters, piping, concrete, concrete reinforcement, and all miscellaneous materials and items specified to be furnished. 1. Provide per Division 1. 2. Each shop drawing shall be checked by the Contractor and a signed certification of this checking applied prior to submittal to the. Engineer. 3. Provide plan and elevations drawn to scale showing the size and placement of each item to be installed. Shop drawings shall be submitted prior to fabrication or purchase. B. Project Record Documents: Provide per Division 1, C. Operation and Maintenance Data: See Division 1 and Part 3 of this Specification. D. Warranties: Provide written warranties addressed to the Owner as specified in Division 1 and Section 13 11 13. Warranties shall be submitted prior to Final Payment for the Project. Extended warranties shall be provided where noted. E. Test Reports: Reports of all tests shall be distributed by the testing laboratory after each test with copies sent to the Engineer, Owner and Contractor. F. Contractor shall provide layout drawings of all piping with elevations before Work on piping commence. POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 13-2 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Equipment: All practical precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to equipment and materials on the Site. All items of operating equipment shall be kept covered or stored out of the weather. B. Delivery Time: All concrete delivered in a truck mixer or similar equipment shall be placed as soon as practical after delivery. No concrete shall be used if it has not been placed within 1-1 /2 hours after the mixing water has been added. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Existing Conditions: Contractor use of the Site is limited to the areas designated by the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall provide and maintain access during construction. Any damage to any facilities around the Site shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Any and all damage shall be repaired by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. Protection: Protect all parts of the Project. l . Particular attention shall be given to protect newly placed concrete from inclement weather; such as rainfall, too rapid drying during hot, dry weather, etc. 2. Contractor shall protect structures from damage throughout the Project. Contractor shall protect against uplift by keeping areas dewatered, structures sufficiently filled with water or other method. C. Scheduling: 1. Before commencing any modification or demolition work, submit for review by Engineer and approval by the Owner a schedule showing the commencement, the order, and the completion dates for the various parts of this work. 2. Refer to Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination for further information and requirements. 1.06 WATERTIGHTNESS AND CLEAN WATER TESTING A. Pools, surge tanks and all related structures shall be constructed to be watertight and shall be clean water tested. Clean water testing for the pool shall be completed prior to installing final pool finishes and expansion joint materials (where applicable) as outlined in Section B below. Any evidence of leakage, including but not limited to, visual tank leaks, loss of water, or seepage into surrounding ground or structures, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. B. Clean water testing shall be conducted as follows: l . Structure shall be completely filled with clean water. 2. Clean water shall stand for a period of 48 hours minimum. Restore water level and let stand for 48 additional hours minimum. 3. Water elevation during the 48-hour period will be monitored to determine the volumetric rate of change in the structure. 4. Visual inspections will be made for evidence of any leaks. 5. At the end of the monitoring period, the structures shall be completely drained and visually inspected for evidence of leakage. 6. Contractor shall provide dye and conduct dye testing if necessary, to help identify leaks. 7. Leaks shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Owner and Engineer. POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 13 - 3 B. Major leaks may require rerun(s) of the water test at the discretion of the Owner and Engineer until the leaks have been demonstrated to have been effectively repaired. 9. All clean water testing shall be coordinated with the Owner and Engineer. 10. All costs associated with clean water testing shall be borne solely by the Contractor. The Owner will supply water free of charge for the initial clean water testing. If subsequent clean water testing is required, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for cost of water and any additional Owner expenses. 1.07 WARRANTIES A. Warranty with 2-year correction period from the actual Substantial Completion Date shall apply to all work in Division 13 and applicable sections of Division 22, unless otherwise stated for a longer period for specific items. Warranty papers shall be provided for each of the major items of manufactured equipment when requested. 1.08 EQUIPMENT LAYOUT A. Piping, equipment locations, conduit, or other modifications required because of use of different equipment from that shown on the Drawings shall be the responsibility of the Contractor at no cost to the Owner and shall also include any Design Team review and redesign costs. All changes must be approved by the Engineer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Coordinate with Electrical Sections to Ground and bond all pool, nearby diving stands, inserts, ladders, starting platforms, play features, slides, metal post and rails, shade structures, fencing, etc. in accordance with the most current version of Article 680 of the National Electrical Code and State and local code requirements. 2.02 MOTORS A. Fractional and integral horsepower motors for Division 13 and 22 Swimming Pool related equipment shall comply with the ioiiowing requirernenis. SUBMITTALS 1. Certified outline dimension prints and data sheets which include nameplate information; 1 /2, 3/4, and 4/4 load efficiency; 1 /2, 3/4, and 4/4 load power factor; maximum kVAR rating and speed -torque curve shall be submitted for each motor. 2. Contractor shall provide all data necessary for the Owner to prepare Power Company rebate forms. C. FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS 1. Motors smaller than 1 /2 horsepower shall be 115 volts/single phase, 60 Hz or 208 volts/3 phase, 60 Hz as specified in the driven equipment Section. If not specified otherwise, enclosure shall be TEFC with cast iron or steel housing. Stator windings shall be copper. Motors shall have a 1.15-service factor, adequate torque to accelerate the load, a horsepower rating which will drive the load continuously at all operating conditions without exceeding the nameplate rating and bracing for full voltage starting. Special torque motors shall be provided as determined by the driven equipment. 2. Motors shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with ANSI/NEMA Publication No. MG 1. POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 13-4 D. INTEGRAL HORSPOWER MOTORS l . Motors 1 /2 horsepower and larger shall be 208 volts/3 phase/60 Hz. or 115 volts/single phase, 60 Hz, squirrel cage induction motors as specified in the driven equipment section. NEMA design shall be determined by the torque requirements of the driven load. Motors shall have a 1.15-service factor, adequate torque to accelerate the load continuously at all operating conditions without exceeding the nameplate rating, not including the service factor and shall be braced for full voltage starting. Special torque motors shall be provided as determined by the driven equipment. Inrush current shall not exceed NFPA 70 Code G. 2. Motors shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with ANSI/NEMA Publication No. MG-1 and shall be high efficiency design as determined by IEEE Standard 112, Method B. Motor design shall be for maximum efficiency. Nominal efficiency shall be not less than those listed in Paragraph 2.04, Motor Efficiencies. 3. If not specified otherwise, enclosure shall be TEFC with cast iron housing. Stator windings shall be copper. All motors shall have a 1.15-service factor. An oversize terminal box shall be furnished. 4. Bearings shall be shielded, regreasable, steel anti -friction type. 5. Motor frame shall be drilled and tapped inside the terminal box for a grounding lug. A terminal box lug may be used if it is drilled and tapped into the motor frame and is readily accessible within the terminal box. 6. Insulation system shall be of Class F non -hygroscopic materials and shall be for continuous operation in a 40 degrees C ambient. 7. Motor nameplates shall include motor full load power factor, efficiency, and maximum KVAR rating. 8. If any driven equipment requires special features, such as 2 speed, reversing, wye- delta, or part -winding starters, the Contractor shall confirm the exact type of starter required based on the actual equipment provided. E. INVERTER DUTY MOTORS l . Motors shown on the Drawings as controlled by a VFD, or designated to be inverter duty, shall be designed in accordance with NEMA MG-1, 2006, Revision 1 Part 31 and shall have the following characteristics in addition to those designated elsewhere in this Specification: a. Specifically designed for use with solid state inverter variable frequency drives. b. Minimum service factor of 1.0 when operating from a VFD or 1.15 when operating across -the -line. c. The motor shall be of cast iron construction with copper windings and a fan capable of providing adequate cooling air throughout the operating range of the motor. Auxiliary blower systems, if required due to additional cooling requirements, shall be supplied as needed. d. Winding insulation shall be designed for inverter -duty operation to withstand the voltage spikes characteristic of IGBT drives. Minimum voltage levels for 208-volt rated motors shall be 1,600 volts e. Horizontal Motors <_ 100HP shall be provided with an Aegis shaft grounding ring around the rotor on the drive end or Danfoss common mode cores to prevent shaft currents. f. Horizontal Motors > 100HP shall be provided with an insulated bearing on the non - drive end to eliminate circulating currents and an Aegis shaft grounding ring around the shaft on the drive end or Danfoss common mode cores to eliminate shaft currents. g. Vertical Motors (Solid Shaft): POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 13 - 5 1) Top Bearing: Provide insulated bearing rings, ceramic bearings or insulate shaft with non-conductive coating. Due care must be taken to prevent damage of coating when installing bearing rings. Any damage to the coating shall be repaired before the motor is put into service. 2) Provide an Aegis shaft grounding ring around the shaft on the drive end or Danfoss common mode cores to prevent shaft currents. 3) Ceramic bearings provided shall have a Manufactures rated life equivalent to steel bearings. Ground motor frame to facility grounding electrode system. Where Danfoss common mode cores are used, they shall be installed in the VFD enclosure or other junction box or enclosure near the VFD motor terminals as recommended by the Manufacturer. F. MOTOR EFFICIENCIES 1. Shall conform to the following minimum requirements. Enhanced NEMA Premium Motor Open DP and Protected TEFC HP RPM RPM 1,200 1,800 3,600 1,200 1,800 36,00 1 83.5 86.5 78 83.5 86.5 78 1.5 87.5 87.5 85 88.5 87.5 85 2 88.5 87.5 1 86.5 89.5 87.5 86.5 3 89.5 90.5 86.5 90.5 90.5 87.5 5 90.5 90.5 87.5 90.5 90.5 89.5 7.5 91.2 92 89.5 92 92.7 90.5 10 92.7 92.7 90.5 92 92.7 91.2 15 92.7 94 91.2 92.7 93.4 92 20 93A 9� 92 92.7 94 92 25 94 94.6 92.7 94 94.6 92.7 30 94.6 95.1 92.7 94 94.6 92.7 40 95.1 95.1 93.4 95.1 95.1 93.4 50 95.1 95.5 94 95.1 95.5 94 60 95.5 96 94.6 95.5 96 94.6 75 95.5 96 94.6 95.5 96.4 94.6 100 96 96.4 94.6 96 96.4 95.1 125 96 96.4 95.1 96 96.4 96 150 96.4 96.8 95.1 96.8 96.8 96 200 96.4 96.8 96 96.8 97.2 96.4 250 95.5 96.8 96 96.8 97.2 96.8 300 95.5 96.8 96.4 96.8 97.2 96.8 3_50 95.5 96.8 96.4 96.8 97.2 1 96.8 POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 13 - 6 Enhanced NEMA Premium Motor Open DP and Protected TEFC HP RPM RPM 1,200 1,800 3,600 1,200 1,800 36,00 400 95.9 96.8 96.8 96.8 97.2 96.8 450 96.3 97.2 95.9 96.8 97.2 96.8 500 96.3 97.2 95.9 96.8 97.2 96.8 G. MOTOR CIRCUITS 1. Motor circuits shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NFPA 70. Motor connections shall be made in accordance with the motor nameplate for the proper voltage and other operating characteristics. H. INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST l . All motors shall have an insulation resistance test, commonly referred to as being "megged," before they are energized. 2. A tag shall be attached to each motor, shall be marked "Megged O.K.," and shall be signed and initialed by the electrician making the test. This same tag shall be used to mark the rotation check. NAMEPLATE CURRENT 1. Before any motor is energized, Contractor shall obtain the nameplate information from the motor manufacturer and record the motor nameplate current on the line diagrams in the space marked FLA. Contractor shall size the motor starter overload heaters in accordance with the starter manufacturer's recommendation for the given motor nameplate current, service factor, and power factor correcting capacitors, if provided. J. ROTATION 1. Motor rotation shall be checked before the motor is connected to the driven equipment; that is, before couplings are bolted together or belts are installed. The time for checking rotation shall be arranged with the Contractor responsible for installing the equipment. 2. Before the motor is started to check rotation, determine that the motor is properly lubricated. 3. After correct rotation has been established, the insulation resistance test tags shall be marked "Rotation O.K." and signed or initialed by the electrician and representative of the installing Contractor who check the motor rotation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All of the Contractor's work shall be performed by skilled workmen experienced in pool construction. All cutting and patching of existing materials shall be neatly done. Piping and equipment shall be carefully arranged in an orderly manner for ease of maintenance, operation, and repair. All piping must drain to low points and be provided with convenient drain valves at low points whether or not they are shown on the Drawings. The Contractor POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 13. 7 shall be solely responsible for the condition of all pipes, structures, equipment, etc. throughout the construction period. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. Excavation: The Contractor shall provide all excavations necessary for the construction of all piping, foundations, etc. Machine excavation and hand trimming shall be carried out as one operation to minimize over -excavation. In order to obtain an even wall line, rigid templates shall be used. Floor area shall be fine graded using a screed. Excavation and backfill shall be performed in accordance with requirements specified in the Contract Documents. 1. Excuvuliur i and backfill for pools and structures shall be completed per requirements shown on the project drawings. Granular fill material shall conform Specification Section 31 00 00. 2. Excavation and backfill for piping shall be completed per requirements of Section 22 51 13 Swimming Pool Piping, Valves, Fittings and Specialties. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: Shall comply with requirements specified throughout the Project Manual. 3.04 MANUFACTURER SERVICES AND STARTUP A. Contractor shall be responsible for the initial startup and adjusting of all pool equipment. After completion of installation of all equipment and all that is related, the equipment and installation shall be inspected and approved by a manufacturer trained and approved technician as being in compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations and requirements. After such inspection, the equipment shall be field aligned and given any required adjustment, and when complete the various items of equipment shall be ready to be placed into operation under the supervision of the manufacturer's representative. Manufacturer's representative shall certify to the Engineer that the equipment is installed and operates correctly. B. Owner shall supply chemicals for Contractor's use in balurrcing pool and startup. Contractor shall balance and start-up the pool and conduct all necessary training and testing. C. The Contractor shall schedule a manufacturer trained and approved technician at a time agreeable to the Owner, to train Owner's personnel in the proper operation and preventive maintenance of all equipment, after all equipment has been installed and certified by the respective manufacturers. The following minimum times shall be provided (time does not include travel time to and from Site) for start-up training to instruct the Owner in operation and maintenance procedures, and to certify I lire Engineer that the equipment is operating correctly. 1. Stainless Pool Gutter 4 hours. 2. Pool Filters 8 hours. 3. Pool Heaters 8 hours. 4. Disinfection Feed Systems 4 hours. 5. pH Feed Systems 2 hours. 6. Automatic Chemical Controllers 2 hours. 7. Water Level Controllers 2 hours. 8. Flow Meters 2 hours. POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 13 - 8 9. Centrifugal Pumps 4 hours. 10. Water Play Features 8 hours. 11. Water Slides 8 hours. D. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the condition of all piping, structures, equipment, etc. through Substantial Completion. The Contractor shall provide qualified representatives to supervise the overall pool startup and shall be solely responsible for startup, shutdown, and winterization for the first operating pool season, and for the condition of all pipes and equipment until the beginning of the pool's second operating season. The Contractor shall provide a qualified representative to supervise the installation and startup in first season of operation and shall instruct the maintenance personnel in the care and service of the equipment. The Contractor shall return at the request of the Owner not less than 2 times during the first year of operation for review of the operation and maintenance of the system and shall be available when needed for emergency service throughout the warranty period. The Contractor shall assist during startup in the second season of operation (if requested by the Owner). E. The Contractor shall video record training sessions and provide two (2) copies for Owner to keep for future reference. The Contractor shall coordinate all training to allow this to occur. F. All of these services shall be included in the Project Base Bid. 3.05 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. Contractor shall provide 1 hard copy (and 3 electronic PDF copies) of closeout items for each piece of equipment, valve, materials, etc. and shall provide instructions on the proper draining of each piece of equipment, the piping, and the pool. Manufacturer's data in each manual shall be the printed literature of the manufacturer. Photo copies of such literature are not acceptable. Standard information in the manufacturer's literature that does not apply to the specific model provided shall be crossed out. This material shall be bound in 3 notebooks of 3 ring binders or spiral binder type and transmitted to the Engineer prior to final acceptance of the Project. In addition, provide the following information in each 3-ring binder: l . Copies of all approved shop drawings. 2. Manufacturer's wiring diagrams for electrically powered equipment. 3. Records of tests performed to certify compliance with system requirements. 4. Certificates of inspection by regulatory agencies. 5. Parts lists for manufactured equipment. 6. Exploded drawing for each piece of equipment with field replaceable parts. 7. Valve schedules. 8. Lubrication instructions, including list/frequency of lubrication done during construction. 9. Warranties. 10. Manufacturer's instructions for maintenance and operations for each piece of new equipment. 11. Spare parts list. 12. Narrative on controls. 13. Start-up and shutdown procedures that address specifics to this Project and specific equipment and options provided for this Project. Procedures shall reference valve tags and valve positioning for various modes of operation. 14. Trouble shooting information. POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 13 - 9 15. Written winterization manual, including the proper status and winterization of every valve and pipe in the system, measures to prevent pool uplift, etc. 16. Schematic drawing on the complete installed pool circulation, treatment, play feature and water slide systems. Drawing shall include all valves and valve schedules relating to valve tags installed on the valves. 17. Additional information as indicated in the other Sections of the Project Manual. 18. PDF copies of the final Operation and Maintenance Manual shall be as follows: a. Provide 3 digital copies in a PDF format saved to a CD, flash drive or other format approved by the Owner and Engineer. The saved files shall be clearly identified and organized in a similar manner to the hard copies. 1) Data saved on the disks shall be accessible and neatly organized. 2) Provide a table of contents which utilizes bookmarks. The bookmark shall take the reader to a specific page when the reader clicks on the desired title in the table of contents. A bookmark shall be provided for materials associated with each piece of equipment included in the O&M manual. END OF SECTION POOL GENERAL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 13 - 10 SECTION 13 11 14 POOL SHELL AND STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Layout pool relative to the established location and benchmarks provided on the Drawings. 2. Pool shell. 3. Miscellaneous structures. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EARTHWORK A. Shall meet requirements specified in Section 31 00 00. 2.02 CONCRETE A. Contractor shall use cast -in -place concrete for the base bid construction of the pool shell. Contractor shall meet or exceed all requirements standards set forth in Section 13 11 14.1, unless designated differently in this Specification Section. Concrete shall be damp cured for 7 days after the initial pour. The following are requirements for the shotcrete pool shell construction alternate described in the Bid Proposal: Demonstration of successful performance for shotcreting shall include but not necessarily be limited to demonstration of successful completion of a minimum of 5 years of experience and a minimum of 10 projects similar in size to this Project or larger by both the firm and the lead workers that will complete the work. Determination of adequate past performance shall be determined by the Owner/Engineer. All requirements of cast in place concrete shall be met or exceeded. Any and all shotcreting operations shall be in accordance with ACI 506-66 and its latest revisions. Tests during construction shall be provided from cubes or cores taken from small gunned test panels. Granular fill foundation, backfill of the pool shell, steel reinforcement and wall sections shall meet requirements of Drawings and Specifications, regardless of the method of pool shell construction. Shotcrete construction must be designed to accommodate loads exerted by backfill material. Any costs of any necessary alteration in backfill material to accommodate exerted pressure on pool structure shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Concrete designs for shotcrete must be completed by a licensed Structural Engineer and in accordance to ACI-318 and subject to Engineer approval. Shotcreting shall be against a one-sided form (i.e. shotcreting against earth will not be acceptable). © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 POOL SHELL AND STRUCTURES 1311 14-1 B. All concrete fins shall be ground down and all holes and form -tie holes filled. Contractor shall provide surface preparation for concrete as recommended by final surface coating manufacturers. C. PVC Waterstop for the pool shell and all water containing structures shall meet following requirements: 1. General Walls and Slabs: Waterstops shall be serrated (ribbed) PVC type with center bulb. Waterstops shall be manufactured of Specification Grade Virgin Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), Greenstreak as manufactured by Sika or approved equal. Sizes and styles shall be as follows: a. 6 inches wide, 3/8-inch-thick, with 11 /16-inch O.D. center bulb. Greenstreak Style 705. b. Waterstop may nol be sf owri uI ull joints on the Drawings; however, waterstop shall be placed at all construction joints, unless confirmed by Engineer that it is not required. 2. Pool Expansion Joints: a. Waterstops shall be 9 inches wide serrated (ribbed) PVC type with center bulb. Waterstops shall be manufactured of virgin polyvinyl chloride materials, 3/8-inch minimum thickness, with minimum 7/8-inch ID (1-3/8 inches OD) center bulb. Style 738 PVC Greenstreak as manufactured by Sika or approved equal. See Section 13 11 17 for expansion joint material. 3. Placing Waterstop: a. Place waterstop material at all construction joints, unless shown otherwise and confirmed by the Engineer. b. Center waterstop in the joint (and between each layer of reinforcing sleel where applicable) with each half embedded in concrete. Secure waterstop by tying with wire the end bulb to reinforcing steel at maximum of 12 inches on center prior to placing concrete. c. Thoroughly vibrate concrete around the waterstop to ensure positive contact between concrete and waterstop. When concrete is being placed, take care not to deflect waterstop out of proper position. d. Use prefabricated waterstop fittings or follow proper field splicing procedures for all connections and splices. Miter all intersecting connections at 45 degrees. Use a thermostatically controlled heating iron to heat both ends of waterstop to be connected, then butt splice pieces to be joined with full contact. e. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for proper preparation and installation of waterstop material. D. Repair Areas: Where repair work may be required for water stop related joints, Engineer may consider use of hydrophilic water stop where PVC water stop may not be practical. Hydrophilic water stop shall be Greenstreak Hydrotite as manufactured by Sika or approved equal. Water stop shall be a combination of chloroprene rubber and chloroprene rubber modified to impact hydrophilic properties. The waterstop shall have a delay coating to inhibit initial expansion due to moisture present in fresh concrete. Provide cyanacrylate adhesive (super glue) for all splices. Provide single component hydrophilic sealant, Greenstreak Leakmaster manufactured by Sika or approved equal, to secure Hydrotite to clean dry concrete as well as to supplement cyanacrylate adhesive at splices. Water stop profile style and installation shall be per manufacturer's guidelines and recommendations for service intended. E. Provide water seals on all wall form ties for water containment structures, i.e. pool shell, surge tanks, etc. POOL SHELL AND STRUCTURES U 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 14 - 2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PLACE FITTINGS A. Before commencing the pool shell, the Contractor shall securely cover all piping from the pool structure to prevent the entrance of concrete and other materials into the drains. All other items to be embedded in the concrete shall be placed, protected, and held in position during concrete operation. END OF SECTION POOL SHELL AND STRUCTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1311 14 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 13 11 14.1 POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Furnish and install all cast -in -place concrete and accessories for pools, surge tanks, equipment pads and other miscellaneous related concrete work. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. 301 - Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 2. 305 - Hot Weather Concreting. 3. 306 - Cold Weather Concreting. 4. 309 - Recommended Practice for Consolidation of Concrete. B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): l . C31 - Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field. 2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 3. C39 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens. 4. C143 - Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete. 5. C150 - Standard Specification for Portland Cement. 6. C231 - Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method. 7. C260 - Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. 8. C494 - Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. 9. C618 - Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Division 1. B. Submit manufacturer's data for concrete admixtures, liquid curing material, finishing compounds and bonding agents. C. Submit concrete aggregate test reports and concrete mix designs at least 14 days prior to placement of concrete. D. Submit results of concrete strength tests. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with ACI 301 and Division 3, except as modified in this Section. POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 14.1 - 1 The Contractor shall hire an independent testing laboratory approved by the Owner and Engineer to perform the work listed below. All costs for this testing shall be paid by the Contractor: 1. Test proposed aggregate. 2. Design concrete mix. 3. Cast concrete cylinders for strength tests. 4. Test concrete cylinders. 5. Test slump, air content and temperature. C. Aggregate Tests: 1. Test aggregates for compliance with ASTM C33. D. Conciele Mix Design: 1. Prepare mix design. 2. Design concrete mix in accordance with ACI 301. E. Concrete Strength Tests: l . Mold and cure three (3) specimens from each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Any deviations from the requirements of ASTM C31 shall be recorded in the test report. 2. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two (2) specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one (1) shall be tested at seven (7) days for information. The acceptance test results shall be the average of the strengths of the two (2) specimens tested at 28 days. 3. Make at least 1 strength test for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof of each mixture design of concrete placed in any one (1) day. 4. A copy of the test results shall be furnished to the Owner, Engineer and Contractor as soon as available. 5. All costs of concrete cylinder testing shall be paid by the Contractor. F. Concrete Slump Tests: 1. Determine slump of concrete from each truck in accordance with ASTM C143. 2. If slump does not meet Specifications, remove batch from work and dispose of off Project Site. 3. All costs of slump testing will be paid by the Contractor. G. Concrete Air Content Tests: l . Determine air content of concrete from each truck in accordance with ASTM C231. 2. If air content does not meet Specifications, remove batch from work and dispose of off Project Site. 3. Air content will be tested prior to and after adding superplasticizer. 4. All costs of air content testing will be paid by the Contractor. H. Concrete Temperature: 1. Determine temperature of concrete from each truck. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Do not store forms, shores, reinforcing, equipment, or other material on finished slab surfaces. POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 13 1 1 14.1 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE MATERIAL A. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type I. Provide cement from one (1) source of supply. B. Aggregate: Conform to ASTM C33. Provide aggregate from one (1) source of supply. Aggregate shall be 100% chert free. C. Water: Clean potable and free from deleterious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, or other foreign matter. 2.02 ADMIXTURES A. Air Entraining Admixture: Conform to ASTM C260. B. Water Reducing Admixture: Conform to ASTM C494, Type A. C. High Range Water -Reducing Admixtures (Superplasticizer): Conform to ASTM C494, Type F, and contain no chlorides. D. Fly Ash: Conform to ASTM C618, Class C or F. Loss on ignition shall be limited to three (3) percent maximum. 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Reinforcing Steel: Shall comply with requirements in Division 3. B. Burlap -Polyethylene Sheet: Burlap polyethylene sheeting shall consist of burlap weighing not less than 10 oz./linear yard, 40 inches wide impregnated on one (1) side with white opaque polyethylene 0.006 inch thick. Sheeting shall conform to ASTM C171. C. Liquid Curing Compound: Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1-D, Class B clear or translucent with fugitive dye. Not to be applied to floor slabs. D. Waterstop and Expansion Joint Material: See Sections 13 11 14 and 13 11 17. E. Concrete Finishing Compound: Thoroseal cement -based coating manufactured by Thoro System Products or approved equal. F. Bonding Agent: Acryl 60 by Thoro System Products or approved equal. 2.04 CONCRETE MIX PROPORTIONS A. Concrete for pool shells, decks and other related items shall conform to the following minimum requirements: Coarse aggregate size Minimum compressive strength at 28 days Maximum water -cement + pozzolan ratio ASTM C33 Size No. 67 4000 psi 0.42 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1311 14.1 -3 Minimum cement + pozzolan content 564 Ib./cu.yd. Maximum pozzolan content 25 percent of cement content Slump before adding superplasticizers 2 inches ± 1 inch Slump after adding superplasticizer 6 inches ± 1 inch Entrained air content 6 percent ± 1-1 /2 percent PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONCRETE PRODUCTION A. Ready -mixed concrete shall hp hatched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. B. Concrete shall be mixed only in quantities for immediate use. Concrete which has set shall be discarded and shall not be retempered. C. Discharge concrete from truck within 60 minutes after cement is added to the mix. D. Do not add water at the Project Site without the permission of the independent testing laboratory. E. Add superplasticizer to the concrete at the Project Site. Add superplasticizer and mix concrete in accordance with manufacturer's specification. 3.02 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. All sleeves, inserts, anchors, and embedded items required for adjoining work or for its support shall be placed prior to placing concrete. B. All embedded items shall be positioned accurately and supported against displacement. C. Voids in sleeves, inserts, and anchor slots shall be filled temporarily with readily removable material to prevent the entry of concrete into the voids. 3.03 PREPARATION BEFORE PLACING A. Formwork shall be completed and all reinforcement and embedded items shall be secured in place. B. All snow, ice, and mud shall be removed prior to placing concrete. C. Do not place concrete on frozen ground. D. Do not place concrete on ground with standing water or when upper two (2) inches of ground is saturated. E. Do not place concrete during rain, sleet, or snow. POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 14.1 - 4 3.04 CONCRETE CONVEYING A. Concrete shall be handled from the mixer to the place of final deposit as rapidly as practical by methods, which will prevent segregation or loss of ingredients. 3.05 CONCRETE DEPOSITING A. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. B. Place concrete at such a rate that the concrete which is being integrated with fresh concrete is still plastic. C. Concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by hardened materials shall not be deposited. D. Remove rejected concrete from the Project Site. E. Deposit concrete as nearly as practicable in its final position to avoid segregation due to handling or flowing. F. Free fall of concrete shall not exceed five feet. Use chutes equipped with hopper heads for placing where a drop of more than five feet is required. 3.06 PLACING CONCRETE SLABS A. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation. B. Consolidate concrete placed in slabs by vibrating bridge screeds, roller pipe screeds, or other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straight edge and then strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the surface, leaving it free from bumps and hollows. C. Do not leave screed stakes in concrete. D. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to start of finishing operations. 3.07 COLD WEATHER PLACING A. Do not place concrete when the air temperature is less than 400 F. without the specific approval of the Engineer. B. Cold weather concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 306.1, except as modified by the requirements of these Contract Documents. C. Concrete shall not be placed against any frozen substrate, including subgrade soils and surfaces of formwork. POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 14.1 - 5 D. Concrete shall not be placed around any embedment, including reinforcing steel that is at a temperature below freezing. Minimum Concrete Temperature Air Temperature < 12 Inches Thick 12 - 36 Inches Thick Above 30' F. 600 F. 550 F. 0° to 30' F. 650 F. 600 F. Below 0° F. 700 F. 650 F. E. The temperature of the concrete delivered at the Project Site shall conform to the following limitations: F. If water or aggregate is heated above 1000 F., the water shall be combined with the aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Cement shall not be mixed with water or with mixtures of water and aggregate having a temperature greater than 100' F. G. When the mean daily temperature is less than 40' F., the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 501 and 70' F. for the required curing period. H. Arrangements for heating, covering, insulation, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperalure without injury due to concentration of cold or heat. Protection shall remain in place for a minimum of three (3) days. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hours, unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases. J. Once the cold weather concrete protection is removed, concrete curing must be continued for the remainder of the 10-day curing period. 3.08 HOT WEATHER PLACING A. Comply with ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. B. Maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. C. When the temperature of the steel is greater than 120 degrees F., steel forms and reinforcement shall be sprayed with water prior to placing concrete. D. Keep all surfaces protected from rapid drying. Provide windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, ponding, or wet covering in advance of placement. 3.09 CONSOLIDATION A. Consolidate all concrete in accordance with provisions of ACI 309. B. Consolidate each layer of concrete immediately after placing by use of internal concrete vibrators. Maintain a frequency of not less than 8,000 vibrations per minute for each internal vibrator. POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 14.1 - 6 C. Provide adequate number of units and power source at all times. Use a minimum of two (2) vibrators for all work and maintain spare units to ensure adequacy. D. Insert the vibrator so as to penetrate the lift immediately below the one (1) being placed. Do not insert the vibrator into lower courses, which have begun to set. E. Spacing between insertions of the vibrator shall generally be from 12 inches to 18 inches and shall not exceed twice the radius of action as shown in ACI 309 or 18 inches. F. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside the forms. G. Vibration shall be adequate and properly carried out to minimize entrapped air and surface voids on formed surfaces. 3.10 CONCRETE SLAB FINISHING A. Float Finish: l . Apply float finish to all slab surfaces. 2. After placing and screeding concrete slabs, do not work the surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when the surface water has disappeared and when the concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of a power -driven float. 3. Consolidate the surface with power -driven float or by handfloating if the area is small or inaccessible to power units. 4. Check and level the surface plane to a tolerance not exceeding 1 /4 inch in 10 feet when tested with a 10 foot straight -edge placed on the surface at not less than two (2) different angles. 5. Immediately after leveling, refloat the surfaces to a smooth, uniform, granular texture. B. Pool Floor Broom Finish: Provide broom finish or similar to provide substrate suitable for the placement of aggregate pool finish and other final pool finishes. 3.11 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Smooth Form Finish: Provide a smooth formed surface to all formed surfaces unless otherwise noted in Paragraph B. Smooth formed finish shall consist of the following: 1. Construct formwork in accordance with Division 3. 2. Patch all tie holes and defects. 3. Remove all fins, concrete "buttons," and protrusions completely. Special Wall Finish: Provide a special wall finish to all non -buried surfaces, such as for the water walk support columns: l . Provide a smooth form finish in accordance with Paragraph 3.11.A. 2. Thoroughly clean wall surface and remove all dirt, loose mortar particles, paint, films, protective coatings, efflorescence, and other foreign material. 3. Dampen surface with clean water just prior to application of finishing compound. 4. Mix 1-part bonding agent to three (3) parts clean water for mixing liquid. 5. Mix concrete finishing compound with mixing liquid as specified by the manufacturer. 6. Apply first coat to concrete with brush at two (2) lbs. per sq. yd. after the first coat has set. 7. Apply second coat to concrete with brush at two (2) lbs. per sq. yd. after the first coat has set. 8. When the second coat has set, float it to a uniform texture with a sponge float. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 13 11 14.1 - 7 C. Prepare three (3) test samples of various textures for approval by the Owner and Engineer. 3.12 CURING A. Immediately after placement, all concrete shall be damp cured for a minimum of seven (7) days. B. All slabs and topping shall be covered with approved burlap -polyethylene film and kept in place throughout the curing period. C. Walls, columns, and other formed surfaces shall be covered with burlap -polyethylene film or sprayed with an approved curing compound. Contractor note that removal of curing compound may be required prior to placing final special wall finish, paint or exposed aggregate finish. D. All burlap -polyethylene film shall be adequately anchored at the edges to prevent moisture loss. E. Rewet all slab surfaces at least once a day during the curing period. 3.13 PATCHING A. Repair honeycomb and other defective areas, fill surface voids, and fill form tie holes and similar defects in accordance with Chapter 9 of ACI 301. B. Reinforce or replace deficient work as directed by the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.14 CLEANING A. Upon completion of the walls and prior to final finishing, surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of all concrete spatters, form oil, or other foreign material detrimental to appearance or performance of final finishes. B. All excess concrete debris iemuining after completion of placement and form removal shall be removed from the Site and disposed of in a proper and legal manner. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL CAST -IN -PLACE CONCRETE 1311 14.1 -8 SECTION 13 11 15 POOL AND DECK EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Provide and install all pool deck equipment and accessories shown and/or specified, including all sleeves, anchors, and similar items required in the pool deck. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POOL DECK EQUIPMENT A. Pool Grab Rails and Recessed Steps: Grab rails shall be Paragon Aquatics Figure 4 Style, or approved equal, 1.5 inches OD, 304 low carbon stainless steel with 320 grit finish or smoother, 0.120-inch wall thickness. The Contractor shall provide and install 4-inch deep anchor sockets with bolt -adjusted wedge anchor assemblies similar to Paragon No. 37-005 and escutcheon plates for all sockets. Recessed step assembly shall be Neptune Benson or approved equal, heavy duty, 14-gauge T-304 Stainless steel. Textured bottom tread for added traction with slip resistant tread. 5 inches deep, 5 inches high and 15 inches wide. Rails and recessed steps shall meet all code requirements such as distance between rails and the pool wall; height; step, size, width; spacing; easily cleaned, drain to pool, etc. B. Ramp/Stair Hand Rails: Shall be of 1.5 inches OD, 304 low carbon stainless steel with 320 grit finish or smoother, 0.120-inch wall thickness. Install with anchor sockets. See Drawings. Shop Drawings to be furnished prior to fabrication. C. Sockets: Sockets for rails shall be Recreation Equipment Corp. No. 70 galvanized gray iron socket with bronze wedge and bolt or Recreonics Standard Brass No. 44-302. Provide stainless steel escutcheon plates for all sockets. D. Stanchions: Stanchions for guardrail in recreation pool area, for recall rope and for other areas as shown on the Drawings shall be Paragon Aquatics No. 38105, or approved equal, stainless steel, 1.90 inches O.D., 0.145-inch wall thickness, 4'-6", plus the depth for socket imbed, with closed welded tops and no U-hooks. For each stanchion, install sliding collar(s), Paragon No. 38301, or approved equal, with eyebolts for rope connections. (See Drawings for locations of rope). At rope locations provide 2 ropes each 1/2-inch braided UV -resistant nylon ropes between each stanchion with chrome plated brass clamp -type rope hooks at end of each rope at each post. Contractor shall provide stanchions, sockets, collars, and eye bolts. Contractor shall set sockets and install stanchions and collars. Contractor shall provide recall rope as specified in this Section. E. Stanchions for Backstroke Flags: Stanchions as shown on the Drawings shall be Paragon Aquatics No. 38106, or approved equal, stainless steel, 1.90 inches O.D., 0.145-inch wall POOL AND DECK EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 15 - 1 thickness, 8'-0", plus the depth for socket imbed, with closed welded tops and no Ll-hooks. For each stanchion, install sliding collar(s), Paragon No. 38301, or approved equal, with eyebolts for flag/rope connections. Confirm height of eyebolts with the Engineer. Contractor shall provide stanchions, sockets, collars, and eye bolts. Contractor shall set sockets and install stanchions and collars. F. Stanchion Anchors: Shall be 6 inches bronze as supplied by Recreation Supply Company, Lincoln, Paragon Aquatics, or approved equal. Provide with slip -fit cover cap and with socket or spanner wrench key required to remove cap. Provide hole in base of anchor to allow drainage to sand under concrete deck. G. Depth and No Diving Markers: 1. Furnish and install 8 inch by 8-inch ceramic black on white the with abrasive non -slip finish with 6-inch depth marking letters and the international 'No Diving' symbol as shown on Drawings. Markers shall be Lincoln 46-170, 46-175, and 46-17-180, or approved equal. 2. Furnish and install vinyl depth markers in feet and inches applied to the face of the stainless steel gutter (above the water line) at locations matching the deck pool depth markers shown on the Drawings. Provide with 4-inch high numerals. H. Diving Board and Stands: Furnish and install one 1-meter diving board stand and one 3- meter diving board stand. Diving board stand shall be Durafirm Diving Board Stand manufactured by Duraflex International Corporation, Sparks, Nevada, or approved equal. Diving stand shall consist of heavy aluminum castings dipped in chromic acid solution, followed by a coat of baked epoxy. The roller tube and tracks shall be heat -treated extruded aluminum, processed by Alcoa Duranodic hard anodizing process. The bearings for the roller tube and slide shall be nylon with grease fittings, adjustable, and field replaceable. The diving board anchor hinges shall be heat -treated aluminum forgings with design strength of 35,000 psi and shall receive Alcoa Duranodic hard anodizing. Hinges shall be designed to allow 180-degree rotation of the diving board to the rear of the stand. Hinges shall be mounted on a transverse casting allowing 7 leveling positions in 1-inch increments. The diving board anchor bolts shall be 5/8-inch diameter by3-1 /2 inches long silicon bronze. Diving stand shall be supplied with double guardrails on both sides. The guard rails shall be stainless steel tubing firmly attached to the guardrail supports with stainless steel band fasteners. The rails shall extend to the edge of the pool and the rail ends shall be fitted with rubber safety tips. The stand shall be designed and supplied with 8 bronze deck anchors for mounting on deck/platform. Anchors shall be machined smooth at the top and drilled and tapped to receive the bronze diving stand mounting bolts. Anchors shall be supplied with sealing corks to prevent damage to threads during installation. Diving board and stands shall comply with pool code requirements. Diving boards shall be 16-foot Maxiflex Diving Board manufactured by Duraflex International Corporation, Sparks, Nevada, or approved equal. Safety Float Lines: (To Be Furnished by Owner) Furnish and install safety float lines at locations shown on the Drawings. Safety Float Lines shall be Recreation Supply Handi-Lock Floats or approved equal. Floats shall be polyethylene treated with chlorine inhibitors and ultraviolet stabilizers for durability and long life. Floats shall have self-locking feature to stay on line, three sealed compartments for optimum buoyancy in case of puncture. Floats shall be nominal size 5-inch by 9-inch alternating blue and white color with 3/4-inch polypropylene blue and white rope. All materials shall be suitable for long term exterior usage. POOL AND DECK EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 15 - 2 Backstroke Flags: Furnish and install backstroke flag pennant lines at both ends of the pool and shall comply with USA Swimming standards. Refer to Drawings for exact lengths (approximately 64 feet and 70 feet) and locations. Shall be Recreation Supply, Paragon Aquatics or approved equal. Provide alternating color flags. Colors to be selected by Owner from minimum of 12 manufacturer standard colors. Provide swivel hooks and accessories for fastening to stanchions. All materials shall be suitable for long term exterior usage. K. Recall and False Start Rope: Furnish 1 recall and false start rope and shall comply with USA Swimming standards. Rope shall be constructed of lightweight 1/2-inch yellow polypropylene rope, 2 weights for quick release, complete with floats and hooks. Refer to Drawings for exact length (approximately 64 feet) and location. Shall be Recreation Supply, Paragon Aquatics or approved equal. Provide accessories for fastening to stanchions. All materials shall be suitable for long term exterior usage. Water Basketball: Provide two (2) basketball hoops and anchoring system. Product shall be RockSolid Extended Reach Salt Friendly Basketball Game, manufactured by SR Smith or approved equal. Shall be constructed from a stainless steel post with a durable vinyl coating. Each hoop shall include acrylic backboard, regulation basketball rim, water basketball and needle. All materials shall be designed for use at commercial pools 1. Post: Vertical post made of 2.5" O.D. x .120 wall (63.5mm x 3.05) type 304 stainless steel square tube. Horizontal and diagonal bars made of 1.5" x .065 wall (38.1 mm x 1.65) type 304 stainless steel square tube. Post coated with black vinyl powder for added resistance against corrosion. 2. Backboard, Square Frame and Rim: Backboard made of acrylic and bolted to the post. Regulation basketball rim bolted to backboard and provided with a net. Rim and square frame coated in black vinyl. 3. Anchor Assembly: Constructed with a stainless steel housing, polyurethane sleeve, and a brass wedge assembly. Anchor is 6" (152.4mm) deep. Anchor tapped and provided with a UNC 1 /4-20 UNC brass grounding screw. Provide with a stainless steel cap to mount flush on the deck when the post is removed. 4. Provide a total of four (4) sets of anchors and caps to allow Owner to locate the water either of the supplied basketball hoops at any of the four (4) locations. Confirm locations with Engineer prior to placement. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS POOL EQUIPMENT A. General: The following pool equipment will be provided by the Owner: 1. Portable Lifeguard Chairs. 2. Safety Equipment, such as lifesaving equipment, first aid kit, etc. 3. Pool Testing, Cleaning, and Maintenance Equipment. 4. Pool and Deck Cleaners. 5. Starting Platforms. 6. Timing System and Scoreboard. 7. Racing Lane Lines and Safety Float Lines. 8. Lane Line Storage Reels. 9. Pool Facility Signage for Capacity, Safety Rules, Slide Rules, Chemical Warning, etc. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL AND DECK EQUIPMENT 1311 15-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DECK INSERTS AND EQUIPMENT A. General: Contractor shall be responsible that all anchors or sockets for ladders, steps, rails, and miscellaneous equipment and all other deck inserts are properly placed and held into position during the pouring of the deck slabs. Contractor shall be responsible for the proper placement of all of the deck equipment and inserts. Coordinate locations with the Engineer. B. Contractor shall install Owner supplied inserts for items being provided by the Owner. Confirm locations with Engineer during construction. END OF SECTION POOL AND DECK EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 15 - 4 SECTION 13 11 16 POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Provide and install all pool recreation equipment with piping, valves, and accessory items shown and/or specified, including all sleeves, anchors, and similar items required in the pool deck, pool, etc. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Provide an unconditional warranty against rust and corrosion and a guarantee against all defects in workmanship and material for a period of 5-years from the date of shipment on all components, excluding only normal wear and tear and improper operation or installation. 1.04 COLORS A. All colors to be selected by Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT A. Small Child Slide: Small slide shall be 6'-8" long by 3'-0" wide by 4'-0" tall Jumping Frog Aqua Slide Model No. F1008 manufactured by Water Odyssey, San Marcos, Texas (512) 392-1155. Slide shall have hard foam core with structural elastomeric polymer UV - resistant outer shell. Slide shall operate at a water flow rate of 8 GPM at 7 feet head at base of the slide. Contractor shall be responsible to bolt down slide per manufacturer and regulatory requirements. Provide lockable access door on slide for access to water connection. Contractor shall also provide, install, and hook up piping for the slide plumbing. Slide, including stairs and handrails, shall meet all regulatory requirements. Provide valve on supply line inside of the feature to shutoff flow to feature for maintenance purposes. 1. Safety Padding: Provide and install removable close cell- foam pad encased in UV and chemical resistant, textured slip resistant, strong reinforced outer membrane at base of slide as recommended by slide manufacturer. Minimum size shall be 6-foot- long by 3-foot-wide by 2-inch-thick and larger if recommended by slide manufacturer. Install bolted to pool floor with stainless steel hardware suitable for repeated removal and reinstallation, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Pad shall be resilient and sufficient for several years of use in a commercial pool. Pad shall be manufactured by Zebec, RenoSys, Playtime or approved equal. Color to be selected by Owner. POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 16 - 1 I. . B. Water Play Feature Type "1 ": Geysers located on northeast side of the recreation pool shall be Contractor assembled from standard Schedule 40/80 PVC piping and fittings as shown on the Drawing Details. C. Water Feature Type "2": Water feature (play structure) shall be HydroDek 910 Interactive Water Play System manufactured by Whitewater West Industries, Richmond, British Columbia (604) 273-1068. Contact Sean Barrett (913) 909-5234. Water Play Structure shall operate at a water flow rate of 170 GPM at 35 feet head at base of feature. 1. Supplier shall furnish feature complete with all anchoring and fastening devices, required gaskets, and base skirts, interactive valves, etc. Colors shall be selected by the Owner and shall be ultraviolet stabilized to inhibit fading: 2. Materials: a. All matcrials shall be structurally sound and suitable for safe play. Durability is insured on all stainless steel. Main piping of the structure shall be of schedule 10 stainless steel pipe. b. All parts not required to be structural may be fabricated from PVC or fiberglass and suitably protected from ultraviolet deterioration. c. All nozzles shall be stainless steel, brass, or PVC. 3. Manifold System a. The play system shall integrate into its overall design a manifold system for regulating the water flows and pressures to each individual effect. The manifold shall be constructed of PVC, steel or fiberglass and utilize PVC ball valves. b. The manifold system shall be accessible for adjustment and each valve shall be permanently labeled as to the location it controls. 4. Hardware a. Primary structural fasteners (bolts, nuts, washers and screws) and secondary fasteners shall be stainless steel. 5. Rainbow Arch Jet a. Feature shall create arching effect controlled by patron by use of interactive valve with control of water flow by a polyurethane hand wheel. 6. Arch Jet a. Shall create a 45 degree upward blast of water through pipe with control of water control by interactive valve and polyurethane hand wheel for water control. 7. Water Wheel a. External 3" pipe with stainless steel wheel. 8. Tipping Bucket and splash roof shall be provided with unit. The bucket shall dump a minimum of 80 gallons. a. Manufactured from type 304/316L material with a thickness of .120" inches. 9. Valves a. Main operating valves: All operational wheel valves shall be fabricated of stainless steel and EPDM seat or 100% PVC. b. Wheels and connecting hardware shall be specially fabricated so as to provide minimum opportunity for injury during rotation. c. All rope operated valves shall be self -closing with stainless steel or brass bodies and/or operating parts. The valves as well as the supply pipe shall be capable of withstanding a 175 lb. live load. 10. Mounting and Assembly Hardware: All hardware and anchoring systems shall be 316 stainless steel. 11. Grounding: Bond per NEC (National Electrical Code, Section 680) requirements and manufacturer recommendations. 12. Contractor shall thicken pool concrete under the feature as recommended by the manufacturer. POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 16 - 2 W 13. Manufacturer shall make accommodations to ensure water feature functions for install on an approximately 20:1 floor slope. D. Water Feature Type "Y (Alternate): Water feature (play structure) shall be Aquaform Model AF150TB manufactured by Whitewater West Industries, Richmond, British Columbia (604) 273-1068. Contact Sean Barrett (913) 909-5234. Water Play Structure shall operate at a water flow rate of 630 GPM at 45 feet head at base of feature. 1. AquaFormsTM is a multi -level aquatic play structure that includes Monolithic and or Monopole water conveying structural members, slides, interactive water features, passive water features, and polycarbonate color cast panels. Colors shall be as selected by Owner and shall be ultraviolet stabilized to inhibit fading. 2. Warranty a. Ten (10) years warranty on components including spray nozzles (brass). b. Five (5) years warranty on AquaFormsTM stainless steel play structure products and anchoring system. c. Two (2) years warranty on polymer components: polycarbonate monolith and guardrail panels, ABS enclosure panels, UHMW, PVC, Rubber. d. Two (2) years warranty on color coatings, stainless steel hardware & mechanical play product components, fiberglass components, netting material, plumbing, fittings, ball valves. e. All warranties to be managed by the equipment supplier. 3. Materials a. Structural Frame: Stainless steel structural tubing 304/304L conforming to ASTM designation. b. Fabrication: All steel shall be fabricated in certified shops under American Welding Standards or Canadian Welding Bureau standard 2.1, CSA W47.1. c. Level of Fabrication: All steel provided shall be for bolt -up assembly. All fasteners conform to ASTM F593/F594, F879, and A325 and shall be supplied by the manufacturer. d. Fiber Reinforced Polymer (FRP) Decks, Landings, and Stairs: All walking surfaces shall be constructed from molded FRP. All fiberglass decks and stairs shall have non -slip finish on exposed traffic surfaces. All corners shall be rounded with no exposed square edges. Each Deck component shall be structurally capable of supporting a minimum load of 100 Ib./ft2. e. Finish: All 304/304L Stainless Steel shall be provided, prepared and coated with an Epoxy primer and Polyurethane top coat per manufacturer standards. 1) All exposed 304/304L Stainless Steel shall be first prepped then primed with two coats of catalyzed epoxy primer then painted with two coats of catalyzed polyurethane topcoat that is chemical and ultraviolet resistant. This topcoat shall provide a high gloss finish that is extremely hard and damage resistant. FRP components may alternately use High Quality Gelcoat. 2) Touchup: Touch up finish paint and touch up paint shall be provided. f. Plumbing: 1) Manifold System, the aquatic play structure shall have an integrated manifold system for regulating water flows and pressures to each of the water effects. The manifold is constructed of steel and/or minimum schedule 40 PVC pipe (hard and flexible) that directly feeds the Monoliths and water features. 2) The manifold system shall be accessible for adjustment, and each valve shall be labeled as to the location it controls. 3) Each water feature must be independently controlled by a dedicated adjustable valve to optimize water usage and maximize play value. POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 16 - 3 g. Hardware 1) All anchor bolts and hardware shall be stainless steel and shall be provided by the manufacturer. 2) Primary structural fasteners (bolts, nuts, washers and screws) and secondary fasteners shall be stainless steel. 3) Hardware for slides: All fasteners as required for flume to flume connections shall be stainless steel type 304/304L. 4) Caulking: All caulking necessary for flume to flume connections. Caulking shall be polyurethane "Sikaflex 201 ", or equivalent. h. Slides 1) All fiberglass waterslide parts shall be produced to engineered laminate schedules in variable thickness to be compliant with relevant regulatory requircmcnts including ASTM (F846, F853, Fl 193, F2376, and F2974), ISO 9000-2008 (Manufacturing) and British Standard EN 1069-01. 2) The base layer of isophthalic polyester resin shall be coated with two protective layers. Surfaces exposed to sunlight and back surfaces shall be coated with a polyurethane clear coat protecting them from UV. Riding surface molded and back surfaces shall be coated with an ISO/NPG get coat protecting them against water fading and blistering from osmosis. 3) Drilling: All flanges shall be pre -drilled. i. Enclosure Panels 1) All areas below platforms and stairs less than 6' high shall be blocked off from the public access with solid panels, steel mesh panels or netting. All panels shall be finished with ultra -violet resistant finish. 4. Play Products: a. Splash Bucket: 1) Stainless steel barrel Tipping Bucket (TB), stainless steel shaft and pillow blocks. Tipping Bucket and exposed shaft shall be painted in Whitewater's Standard coatings and/or powder coated. b. Splash Roof Spinner: 1) Translucent or opaque kinetic spinner feature attached to a central stainless steel shaft and associated pillow blocks at the bottom of the Splash Roof creating a unique kinetic and spray effect. c. Aquatube Slide starting heights shall begin at 4' decks heights and adapted up to 8' deck heights. d. Landing/Safety Pads: 1) Landing pads shall be provided to suit the requirement of the slide. The landing pad shall be placed appropriately in the landing zone and affixed to the pool floor to provide a safe exit from the slide. The landing pad shall be constructed of High Density Closed Cell Foam, shall be UV stable, and Chemical Resistant. Owner shall select color. Pad shall be affixed to the pool floor by a mechanical connection. e. Water Distribution System: 1) Main operating valves: All ball valves shall be stainless steel with I=PDM seat. f. Staccato Blasters: 1) Shall be comprised of a stainless steel housing, internal feature chassis and hardware. This feature creates rapid interrupted and aerated water blaster effect that softens the feel, and also provides tactile feedback to the user. The feature shall be activated by the squeezing of a full hand height trigger made up of smooth poly which activated an easy swap -out internal valve releasing the water stream. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT 1311 16-4 2) The water gun shall be mounted on a base that will allow the gun to be aimed by the user. The water gun is mounted so that the gun discharge is at minimum 6' from ground level. g. Hand and Foot Print Activators: 1) Interactive handprint activator shall be made of stainless steel housing with a concentric translucent housing to provide a visual spinning turbine feature. Interactivity achieved by user pushing a round activation button with the symbol of a hand or foot for easy identification. This feature releases a stream of water to various deck and/or monolith -based spray effects. h. View Domes: 1) 3/8" Clear Poly View Dome attached to a Monolith. All Hardware shall be stainless steel. i. Tumble Buckets: 1) Translucent or opaque tipping cone or truncated cone shape suspended along a stainless steel shaft mounted to the monolith. Feature fills and dumps due to water being injected into the vessel from a spray nozzle/opening above. This bucket shall be clear or colorized finish. j. Spill Bowl: 1) Translucent polycarbonate bowl mounted to the top of a support arm extending from a monolith. Bowl fills and water spills through a series of holes in an array pattern that allows water to drain from the bowl as well as allow for the overflow effect. This bowl shall be clear or colorized finish. k. Arch Fall: 1) An arch shaped spilling arm extending from a monolith. This water feature provides a continuous flow through the unique architectural stainless -steel arch. I. Shower Ring: 1) A semi circle ring of stainless steel mounted to the main bucket support monolith with a series of spray nozzles provides a shower curtain effect for kids to hide behind or walk through with the Tipping Bucket looming overhead. This feature is located on the backside of the directional flow of the Tipping Bucket, so there is no risk of getting splashed by the bucket while you are getting soaked by the Shower Ring. m. Deck Geysers: 1) Each Hex -Deck is fixed with six in -deck spray nozzles which are activated by either a Hand Print button located on the deck side of a monolith or by a Foot Print button located in the center of each Hex -Deck. Each of these buttons will activate three of the geysers. Each set of three geysers have variable water flow so the operator can set them to the desired effect. 5. Mounting and Assembly Hardware: All hardware and anchoring systems shall be 316 stainless steel. 6. Grounding: Bond per NEC (National Electrical Code, Section 680) requirements and manufacturer recommendations. 7. Contractor shall thicken pool concrete under the feature as recommended by the manufacturer. 8. Manufacturer shall make accommodations to ensure water feature functions for install on an approximately 20:1 floor slope. E. Water Walk: 1. Floatables: Provide soft close -cell coated foam floatables as shown on the Drawings. Floatables and hardware shall be manufactured by BoMar Soft Playgrounds, Tavares, Florida (352) 742-9193 or approved equal. Floatables shall be durable and chlorine and UV resistant coated to resist pool water and to inhibit fading. Supplier shall furnish POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 16 - 5 floatables with complete tethering system, including 1-inch stainless steel chain provided in a plastic tube provided in size, length and quantity as recommended by the supplier for the location and water depth at the Floatable, all miscellaneous stainless steel fastening devices, cup anchors, swivels, U-bolts, quick links, etc. The bottom anchoring to the pool floor shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendations and each tethering location shall be provided with a plastic insert cap to cover tethering connection flush with the final pool floor surface when the floatables are not in place. Confirm locations and arrangement of floatables and anchors prior to installation with the manufacturer and the engineer. The following floatables shall be provided: a. One (1) 48 inch by 48 inch Butterfly Floatable. b. One (1) 48 inch by 48 inch Frog Slide Floatable. c. Onc (1) 42 inch Lily Pad Floatablo. d. One (1) 60 inch by 48 inch Log Plank Floatable. e. One (1) 42 inch Log Slice Floatable. 2. Wall Edge Safety Pads: Provide and install 4 removable 4 foot by 4 foot closed -cell foam pad on a 1/4-inch fiberglass -reinforced plastic sheet held in place with stainless steel anchor clips and drop anchors. Standard manufacturer padding and hardware shall be modified/reinforced as required to bridge the stainless steel gutter system and shall be manufactured by Playtime, Englewood, Colorado (303) 662-0302 or WaterPark Excitement, Inc., Seguin, Texas (830) 401-4797 or approved equal. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Padding is to be installed at both ends of the water walk as shown on the Drawings. Provide a minimum of 2 stainless steel lock down bolts for each pad. 3. Cargo Netting and Supports: Cargo netting shall be supported by 4 concrete columns as shown on the Drawings. Cargo netting shall be 1-inch with 9-inch reinforced mesh square and lanyards provided at each corner for mounting purposes. Material shall be designed for exterior, pool usage. Colors to be selected by Owner. Cargo netting shall be supported from the concrete columns with corrosion resistant stainless or galvanized steel hardware, including nuts, bolts, washers, couplers, grommets, eyebolts, turnbuckles, etc., to adequately support the cargo netting and provide adjustment of height of netting. Floatable Play Structure: Floatable play structure shall be Aquatrack manufactured by Wibit (Contact: Recreonics (888) 428-1/6/) 1. General: Feature consists of multi -section heavy duty inflatable play structure consisting of the following components: step, base, cliff, bridge, v-connect and slope. Overall size of all features installed is approximately 6.6 feet wide and 55 feet 9 inch long. All features shall be manufacturer approved for use in 5'-6" depth of water or deeper. 2. Materials: Shall be corrosion resistant for long term use in pool water and shall be ultraviolet stabilized to inhibit fading. Inflatables shall be constructed of minimum 32 oz. PVC vinyl with double welded seams. 3. Install Location: Shall fit in general location of the 50 M pool as shown on the drawings. Feature shall fit within the third northerly lane of the pool. To allow for proper safety fall zones in the pool, one component (other than the ramp section) shall be left out of into fit within the area shown on the drawings. The intent is that the Owner can rotate one component as desired. Manufacturer shall certify that installed location provides acceptable safety fall zones in all directions around the structure. Individual components of the structure shall weigh approximately between 50 and 100 pounds. Adjacent components shall be secured on underside with seatbelt like material with a POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 16 - 6 one-way stainless steel turnbuckle. Top side shall be easily installed safety connection flaps that cover crack between adjacent components. 4. Anchoring: The eastern end of the feature shall be tethered to the cup anchors installed in the stainless steel gutter along the east wall of the pool. In addition, the west end of the structure shall be tethered to 4 cup anchors embedded in the floor of the pool, similar to those described for the water walk floatables and as detailed on the drawings. Tethering device shall be as approved by the manufacturer and in general consists of bungee cords, rope and carabineers. Anchor locations and length of tethering ropes shall be coordinated by Contractor between Manufacturer, Owner and Engineer. 5. Accessories: Provide manufacturer recommended and supplied accessories such as WIBIT tool box (1), manometer (1), tethering straps (4), hand pump (1), bungees (4), safety flaps, connector straps (2), Velcro loop adapters(2), double buck straps (2), shackles (4), electric blowers (2), commercial pool product manual (1), etc. Time to inflate largest component shall not exceed 10 minutes. G. Climbing Wall: Provide AquaClimb Classic Plus - Ice 3D Model, three section wide, 5H standard height, for minimum pool depth of 9 feet, reconfigurable climbing wall manufactured by Pyramide USA, Inc., P.O. Box 830, Frederick, MD (800) 956-6692 or approved equal 1. Quality Assurance: a. Modular artificial climbing wall for swimming pools designed and installed to CEN/AFNOR Standards, manufactured off site. b. Panel manufacturer shall be as specified and have a minimum of 10-years experience in the manufacturing of artificial climbing walls. c. Fabricator / Installer shall be acceptable to the panel manufacturer. Installer shall have a minimum of 2-years' experience with manufacturer's materials or be supervised by manufacturer's representative. Erection of the aquatics climbing wall system shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Erection shall be accomplished by a fully trained, factory authorized erector. d. Submit sample at least 6 inches by 6 inches, showing texture and finish. e. Manufacturer shall include certification with shop drawing that that wall installation in proposed pool shell as shown on the drawings is acceptable. f. Manufacturer shall visit the site at periodic intervals as necessary during construction to assure compliance with design. g. Completed wall shall comply with specified tolerances and shop drawing requirements. The completed climbing wall shall undergo a full complete final inspection by a duly trained representative of the manufacturer and shall be certified by the manufacturer that the finished product has been manufactured and erected in accordance with the manufacturer's approved installation drawings and these contract documents. 2. System Description a. Deck -mounted artificial aquatic climbing wall features clear polycarbonate panel system, manufactured off site and designed to withstand chlorinated environments. 3. Components: a. Base: 1) The aquatic climbing wall base shall be fabricated from 1 -'/2" square tube with 0.125" (lower frame) and 0.063" (all other frames) wall thickness, grade 316 stainless steel with an epoxy texture powder coating, chemically resistant - developed for coating buried in -ground pool components. The maximum footprint of the base will be 51 " from the pool wall onto the deck for 5H walls. POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 16 - 7 b. Frame: 1) The aquatic climbing wall frame shall be fabricated of 1 -1/2" square tube with 0.064" wall thickness, grade 304L stainless steel with an epoxy texture powder coating, chemically resistant- developed for coating buried in -ground pool components. The main frame shall be vertical for the bottom 39" before extending at a 13 degree angle over the water for the remaining climbing area. The frame will then be vertical for a minimum of 29" at the top for the safety panel area. The bottom climbing panel(s) of the main frame shall be partially submerged and drops below the deck level by approximately29". The main frame with panels attached extends approximately V/4" to 3-'/2" from the pool wall (no aquatic climbing wall materials may touch pool wall). The maximum gap between the pool wall and the backside of the AquaClimb frame nlust be no greater than 1-�A". Total width of each base section is approximately 40". An unlimited number of sections may be attached together to form a single wall. c. Panels: 1) Fully modular 1 meter x 1 meter (approx 39.3" x 39.3") climbing panels are made of 3/8" thick clear polycarbonate shaped from hand -sculpted molds featuring various 3D climbing contours. Top safety panel(s) are flat clear polycarbonate plastic. All panels are bevel cut and polished on all edges, able to withstand UV and chlorinated environments. Panel color selection from Ice or Glacier models, offering translucent with or without blue tint. d. Holds: 1) Climbing holds are non-abrasive polyester resin with UV inhibitors, with soft backing to prevent rotation, in aquatic colors. Hand holds are modular and can be rotated and/or moved to predrilled locations. e. Anchors: 1) Provide anchor system as recommended by manufacturer for pool gutter provided. f. Fasteners: 1) Climbing panels and holds are attached using a patented load dissipation assembly to prevent panel cracking and grade 18-8 stainless steel button head bolts. 4. Warranty: a. AquaClimb Classic Plus Ice 3D is warranted to the original purchaser to be free from defects in material and workmanship from the date of installation: 1) Frame - Limited 2-Year Warranty. 2) Panels - Limited 2-Year Warranty. 5. Drawings: Provide signed and stamped engineering drawings certified by a Minnesota registered Structural Engineer. 6. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Provide Operation and maintenance documentation, related specifically to product provided in conformance to Sections 01 78 23 and 13 11 13. POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 16 - 8 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall install features per manufacturer requirements and recommendations. B. Provide custom water tight winterization plugs for all play feature piping, equipment, etc. C. Upon Substantial Completion of the work, provide Owner's selected personnel hands-on training on the proper removal, storage and reinstallation of the climbing wall. END OF SECTION POOL RECREATION EQUIPMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 16 - 9 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 13 11 17 POOL SURFACE TREATMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work shall include but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Exposed aggregate pool finish. 2. Pool joints in floor and walls. 3. Ceramic tile. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Reference Specifications and Standards: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and the following, unless otherwise noted in this Section. In case of conflict, comply with the most stringent: 1. "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" latest edition published by the Tile Council of America, Inc. (TCA). 2. "Specification for the Installation of Ceramic Tile" latest edition published by the American National Standard Institute (ANSI). 3. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). B. Work shall be performed by a single entity with unit responsibility for field measurements, submittals, field installation, and warranty. C. Tiling materials, i.e., tile, setting materials, grout, etc. shall be from one source. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions for use of all products, i.e. sealants, expansion material, exposed aggregate finish, ceramic tile, mortars, concrete surface restoration materials, grouts, etc. B. 2 standard manufacturer sample kits for each product. C. 1 extra carton of each the color at Project Closeout. D. Maintenance instructions. E. Manufacturer's technical data and MSDS sheets. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original sealed containers with legible labels and hallmarks certifying compliance with reference standards. POOL SURFACE TREATMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 17 - 1 B. Deliver mastic grout ready for use. C. Deliver mortar in sealed, moisture -proof containers. D. Store materials under cover so as to prevent damage or contamination. 1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain environmental conditions; protect work during and after installation to comply with referenced standards and manufacturer's instructions. B. Maintain temperatures at not less than 50 degrees during installation and for 7 days after cnmpletinn, sinless higher temperatures are required by manufacturer's instructions. C. Protect adjoining work surfaces before work begins. D. Do not apply in rain, when temperatures are below 50 degrees F, etc. unless otherwise permitted by the manufacturer's printed instructions. E. All finishes shall be applied to pool shell in accordance with manufacturers recommended conditions. 1.07 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. Contractors shall have at least 3-years of experience with applying these materials in commercial and/or municipal swimming pools and shall provide locations and contact names for at least 5 swimming pool projects they have completed successfully in the past 3-years. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPOSED AGGREGATE POOL FINISH A. Provide and install exposed aggregate pool finish on floor and walls of pool. Provide with 3/8" to'/z" final thickness, unless indicated otherwise elsewhere to be thicker. Provide 2- inch radius at wall/floor intersections, unless regulatory requirements require a different radius, confirm with engineer. Installation and curing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and procedures. Contractor shall be responsible for keeping the exposed aggregate pool finish wet during the cure period. Color shall be selected by the Owner. B. Contractor shall take special precautions to modify and install exposed aggregate pool finish at play features, gutters, etc. as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Materials shall be Diamond Brite manufactured by Southern Grouts and Mortars, Inc., Sunstone Select manufactured by C.L. Industries, Inc., equivalent by AGSCO Corporation or approved equal. 2.02 POOL EXPANSION JOINTS A. Joint sealant/caulk for the swimming pool shall be Boss 801 Pool & Spa Silicone manufactured by Boss Products (800) 928-2677, or approved equal. Product shall be © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL SURFACE TREATMENTS 1311 17-2 certified by manufacturer for long-term reliable use as expansion joint sealant material for municipal pool swimming applications. Color options shall include white. B. Expansion Material: Highly resilient, UV stable, impermeable, non -absorbing, low density, closed cell, flexible expansion joint material, Sealtight Ceramar manufactured by WR Meadows or approved equal. 2.03 CERAMIC TILE A. General: Provide and install 2 inch by 2-inch unglazed Keystones tiles, manufactured by Dal -Tile Corp., Dallas, TX, or approved equal. Owner shall select colors from price group 1, 2, 3, or 4. Owner may choose multiple colors for different the locations. Installation and curing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and procedures. Tile shall be suitable for long term, exterior pool application with slip resistant texture. B. Tile shall meet ANSI Al37.1 and certified by manufacturer for use in pools C. Provide bill nose tile, trim pieces and accessories where applicable. D. Mortar Bond Coat: ANSI Al 18.4. Mega Flex Crack Prevention Mortar by Custom Building Products, Kerabond/Keralastic or Granirapid Mortar by MAPEI Corporation, or equal. E. Grout: ANSI Al 18.6, Chemical resistant grout, 2 component, 100 percent solids, non - sagging epoxy grout. Kerapoxy epoxy grout by MAPEI Corporation, or equal. Color to be selected by Owner. F. All products shall be suitable for swimming pool application. Follow mortar and grout manufacturer requirement regarding concrete and product cure times, minimum time before water submersion & exposure to pool chemicals, etc. Alternative acceptable products and/or additives may be used subject to manufacturer certification for use for the swimming pool application and subject to Engineer review. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION/EXAMINATION A. Surfaces shall be free from coating, curing membranes, oil, grease, wax, and dust. Finish subcontractor shall examine the surfaces and conditions under which the ceramic the and aggregate pool finish is to be applied and notify the engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work: 1. Concrete pool shell surface shall be cured, patched, repaired, prepared, finished, roughened, etc. as required to receive the ceramic the or exposed aggregate as recommended by the manufacturer. All surfaces shall be clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, chalk, and other contaminants. 2. At the locations, concrete shall be finished with medium -rough bush hammer finish, exposed aggregate or similar method approved by the the manufacturer. 3. Do not proceed with the work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. 4. Starting of the work will be construed as the finish subcontractor's acceptance of the surfaces and conditions for any particular area. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL SURFACE TREATMENTS 1311 17-3 5. Concrete pool shell shall be successfully tested for water tightness prior to the installation of the pool finishes and expansion joint material (See Specification Section 13 11 13). 6. During installation provide at minimum the following notifications relative to procedures required in exposed aggregate pool finish's installation instructions: a. During preparation of the pool shell, notify the engineer 48 hours before the test for oil and grease will be done. b. Record all tests of water balance and provide test records to engineer. c. Notify engineer 48 hours before the brushing of the surface will be done. 3.02 LAYOUT A. Determine locations of all movement joints before starting work and prepare as required. B. Lay out all the work so as to minimize cuts less than 1 /2 the in size. C. Locate the cuts in both walls and floors so as to be least conspicuous. D. Align all floors and wall joints to give straight uniform grout lines, parallel with walls. F. All the joints shall be the some width. 3.03 WORKMANSHIP A. Supply first class workmanship in all work. B. Install all products in strict accordance with recommendations and directions of manufacturer. C. Proportion all mixes in accordance with latest ANSI Standard Specifications. D. Be sure all the work is free of grout film upon completion. E. Be sure cut the edges are clean before installing. F. Fit the carefully against trim, accessories, pipe, electrical boxes, lights, and other built-in fixtures so that escutcheons, plates, and collars will completely overlap cut edges. G. Be sure the work is free of grout film upon completion. H. Finished pool dimensions in pool shall be as shown on the plans. All dimensions shall be +/- 1 /2 inch. I. Swimming Pool Tile: Install in accordance with Tile Council of America Installation Guide and TCA method P601. J. Install in accordance with ANSI A108. 3.04 SETTING METHODS A. For exposed aggregate pool finish, install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL SURFACE TREATMENTS 1311 17-4 B. For ceramic tiles, install in accordance with Tile Council of America Installation Guide. 3.05 GROUTING A. Follow grout manufacturer's recommendations as to grouting procedures and precautions. Install in accordance with Tile Council of America Installation Guide. B. Remove all grout haze, observing grout manufacturer's recommendations as to use of acid and chemical cleaners. C. Rinse the work thoroughly with clean water before and after chemical cleaners. D. Polish surface of wall tiles with a soft cloth. E. Install in accordance with ANSI A108.10. 3.06 PROTECTION FROM TRAFFIC A. Protect areas from all foot and wheel traffic from floors as recommended by manufacturer. B. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways for 7 days where use of newly tiled floors with cement type grout is unavoidable. 3.07 EXPANSION JOINT CLEANING, INSTALLATION AND ONSITE MANUFACTURER SERVICES A. Clean all joints by grinding, sandblasting, or wire brushing to expose a sound surface free of contamination and laitance. Prepare the surfaces as per the expansion joint manufacturer's recommendations. Mix, apply, and cure all materials as per the manufacturer's recommendations. 3.08 POOL STARTUP A. After pool surface treatment work has been completed, Contractor shall oversee startup of the pools, coordinating with Owner's staff, to ensure that all manufacturer requirements and recommendations are followed related to the pool surface treatments. END OF SECTION POOL SURFACE TREATMENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 17 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 13 11 43 POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Stainless steel perimeter recirculation system for the 50M Pool and the Recreation Pool. 2. Concrete overflow gutters. 3. Pool filter systems and accessories. 4. Pool water heater systems and accessories. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z21.56/CSA 4.7. B. ASME, BPV Section IV. C. 2006 UMC, Section 1107.6. D. ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994, Section 8.13.6. E. National Fuel Gas Code, ANSI Z 223.1 /NFPA 54. F. National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70. G. CSD-12012 1.04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Project documents depict general equipment for the proposed recirculation systems. Contractor note that the drawing documents, materials and components are based on one or more of the approved manufacturers. Contractor is responsible to provide a complete coordinated, functioning and operating system. Changes to equipment, piping, electrical, mechanical, structural elements, etc. may be required and will vary somewhat depending upon the specific new equipment that is provided. Contractor shall confirm all dimensions, configurations, etc. and shall be responsible for any modifications required to install equipment and accessories being provided as well as modifications to piping, electrical, mechanical, structural elements, etc. at no additional cost to the Owner. Submittals shall be coordinated by the contractor and submitted to the Engineer for review and approval. B. Equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, Engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer, unless the Engineer notes exceptions. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 13 1 1 43 - 1 C. Equipment materials, construction features, and performance specified herein are considered minimum requirements. Manufacturer shall incorporate specified requirements into standard products to fully conform to Specifications. D. Contractors are advised that because of manufacturer's variation in equipment design, changes from drawings in arrangement and layout, electrical and control circuitry, and related dimensions of equipment foundation and anchorage details may be required for equipment installations. E. Equipment requiring minor deviations in the system layout such as minor anchoring revisions, will be acceptable, however, the Contractor shall include all costs associated with the deviation in the bid. Should the deviation require revisions in the design, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of redesign, F. In cases where equipment specifications require patented processes or features, Contractor shall include in the Bid any patent royalty or license fees, to cover patent rights. G. Provide equipment furnished by a single manufacturer qualified and experienced in the production of similar equipment. 1.05 SUBMITT.AI S A. Shop Drawings in accordance with Division 1: 1. Submit for review Shop Drawings showing the following: a. Complete description in sufficient detail to permit an item comparison with the Specification. b. Dimensions, installation and detail requirements. c. Descriptive information including catalog cuts and manufacturers specifications for all components. 2. Electrical schematics, wiring diagrams and layouts. B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Division 1 and Section 13 11 13. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Consideration will be given only to products of manufacturers who can demonstrate that their equipment fully complies with all requirements of the specifications and contract documents. The equipment shall be supplied by a firm which has been regularly engaged in the design, fabrication, assembly, testing, start-up and service of recirculation systems, with a minimum of 5-years of operating history prior to the bid date of this contract of the type of recirculation system provided. B. Equipment shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal for Standard 50. C. Assurance that each item of apparatus is properly sized to perform in conjunction with each other. D. Equipment and accessories shall be approved for use by the State. E. Regulatory Requirements 1. ANSI Z21.56/CSA 4.7. 2. Local and national air quality regulations for low NOx (<20 PPM NOx emissions) pool heaters. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 43 - 2 1.07 PATENTS A. The manufacturer warrants that the use of this system and its equipment, in the process for which the system has been expressly designed, will not infringe any U.S. or foreign patents or patents pending. In the event of any claim of infringement the manufacturer shall defend and indemnify the Owner free from any liabilities associated with the use of the patented equipment or process. B. The manufacturer hereby grants to the Owner, in perpetuity, a paid -up license to use any inventions covered by patent or patents pending, owned, or controlled by the manufacturer in the operation of the facility being constructed in conjunction with the equipment supplied under this contract, but without the right to grant sublicenses. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty per section 13 11 13 as amended to the following minimum requirements. Filter: The filter manufacturer shall guarantee that all equipment furnished is of the correct capacity, that the various parts are designed to operate correctly and in conjunction with each other, that if the installation is made in accordance with the Project Drawings and operated in accordance with the suppliers instructions, the system will perform the prescribed functions correctly, the water entering the pool will be clear, bright, free from suspended matter visible to the unaided eye, and will be sanitary to the satisfaction of all authorities having jurisdiction. l . Tank and liner shall carry a 10-year non -prorated warranty. 2. Internal components, including tube elements, shall carry a 10-year non -prorated warranty. 3. Valves including bodies, operators and system accessories including the controller, quick exhaust valve, solenoid valve and bump mechanisms shall carry a 2-year warranty. 4. Unless otherwise specified, workmanship is to be guaranteed first class and carry a 2- year warranty. C. The stainless steel gutter system shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer for workmanship and material for a period of 3-years. The guarantee shall include all labor and material for the replacement of any defective part, but shall not include abusive or improper treatment of the system during operation. D. Heaters shall be provided with a 5-year product and a 20-year thermal shock warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 STAINLESS STEEL PERIMETER RECIRCULATING SYSTEM A. 50M Pool and Recreation Pool - Stainless Steel Perimeter Recirculating System: The approved stainless steel perimeter recirculation gutter system manufacturers are: 1. Evoqua Water Technologies - Neptune -Benson, Inc., West Warwick, Rhode Island. 2. Recreation Supply Company, Bismarck, North Dakota. 3. Paddock Pool Equipment, Rock Hill, South Carolina. 4. Whitten (Aquatic Development Group), Cohoes, New York. 5. Natare Corporation, Indianapolis, Indiana. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 43 - 3 k- B. Manufacturers and installers shall have a minimum of 10-years of fabrication experience and have a minimum of 10 installations of similar type currently in satisfactory operation. C. The gutter system shall comply with the following Specifications and provide each of the features included herein. Each manufacturer may request an exception for some minor part of the Specification to conform to its standard manufactured product provided: 1. The product meets or exceeds the intent of these Specifications. 2. Prior approval is received from the Engineer of the exception not less than 7 days before Bids are to be received. D. The gutter shall be manufactured of 12-gauge, 304 low carbon stainless steel with a #3 polished finish or smoother. All gutter supply and return connections shall be provided with convertors to connect the gutter system to the recirculation piping using proper watertight fittings and adaptors. The perimeter overflow system channel shall be covered by extruded PVC grating or DuraDek grating with maximum 1/2-inch openings. Grating and supports shall be designed for a 100 pound per square foot load The filtered water return tube shall be fitted with variable -sized jet inlet nozzles not over 36 inches on center, except that inlets at the end of lap lanes shall be installed only under the lap float lane locations. Inlets shall comply with all regulatory requirements. E. The filtered water supply conduit shall be welded by the installer. All angle anchors and all stiffener brackets shall be stainless steel. The stainless steel overflow gutter system shall be sized for the following areas of the pools: 1. 50M Pool: 1,589 GPM Flow Rate: a. Medium -Depth Water (3.5 Feet to 5 Feet) 1) 5.0 Hour Turnover Rate. 2) 666 GPM Flow Rate. b. Deep Water (> 5 Feet) 1) 6.0 Hour Turnover Rate. 2) 923 GPM Flow Rate. 2. Recreation Pool: 1,404 GPM Flow Rate: (Note that there is no integral supply tube for this pool - combination of floor inlets and wall inlets are used to supply water to the pool) a. Shallow -Depth Water (0 Feet to 3 Feet) - Flour Inlels 1) 2.0 Hour Turnover Rate. 2) 504 GPM Flow Rate. b. Vortex Pool (3 Feet to 4 Feet) - Floor Inlets 1) 2.0 Hour Turnover Rate. 2) 154 GPM Flow Rate. c. Current Channel (3 Feet to 4 Feet) - Wall Inlets 1) 2.0 Hour Turnover Rate. 2) 482 GPM Flow Rate. d. Plunge Pool Water (3 Feet to 4 Feet) - Floor Inlets 1) 2.0 Hour Turnover Rate. 2) 264 GPM Flow Rate. G. The filtered water supply system for the 50M Pool gutter shall be designed to deliver the appropriate amount of water to each area using a varying sizing, number, and spacing of inlets in the conduit. The manufacturer shall provide calculations with the Shop Drawings indicating that the design meets these criteria. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 1311 43-4 H. Hydraulic calculations shall be performed to assure compliance with code requirements as well as guarantee the proper circulation rates. The gutter system shall be designed to handle l2� of the total flow rate. The hydraulic calculations shall be included with the submittal Drawings. Gutter anchorage shall be provided in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and shall include zinc plated drop -in expansion anchors as shown on the Drawings or commercial quality V bolts anchors as made from reinforcing steel and fastened to the pool reinforcing steel. Anchors shall be placed within 6 inches of all corners and expansion joints and on maximum 4-foot centers around the pool (unless closer spacing is recommended by the manufacturer). The gutter shall be level within a tolerance of ± 3/32 inch around the entire perimeter of the pool. The gutter system shall be checked and signed off by an independent surveyor hired by the Contractor. Grouting the gutter system shall not proceed until all documentation of gutter level certification has been submitted to and approved by the Engineer. K. The gutter shall be provided with the proper number of expansion joints, if recommended by the manufacturer, for a gutter of this size and length. Provision for expansion and contraction of the gutter system shall be reviewed with the Engineer prior to installation. Manufacturer shall coordinate joint locations with pool expansion joint locations shown on the Drawings. L. All welded joints shall be pressure tested for leakage at a minimum of 5 psi for not less than 4 hours. All joints shall be soap tested. After the chamber has passed the required test, the jet inlet orifices can be installed. Engineer shall be notified a minimum of 72 hours prior to the pressure test. Contractor shall provide certification results of the pressure test to the Engineer prior to commencing grouting. Grouting of the gutter system shall be done using a non -shrink, non-metallic, waterproof grout as recommended by the gutter manufacturer. Contractor shall install sealant (caulk) between gutter and pool wall, and gutter and deck as shown on the Drawings. Sealant shall be suitable for swimming pool installation and as recommended by gutter manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide grounding and bonding of all gutters and deck equipment to meet all electrical codes. M. Fill metal shall be used on all weld joints, whether the sections butt together or not, so as to result in a uniform appearing raised weld at each joint. Raised welds shall not be ground. After the weld is cooled, a second pass may be made with the arc, puddling, and smoothing the original weld if required. All longitudinal welds shall be visible for inspection. All installation is to be performed by a welder with at least 5-years experience in the field welding stainless steel recirculating systems. The Contractor shall submit the welder's experience in writing to the Engineer for approval prior to installing the system. All work is to be performed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and technical bulletins. N. The stainless steel components shall be cleaned and polished as required to present a uniform finish. Each weld seam as completed shall be vigorously brushed with a stainless steel brush after it cools to approximately 300 degrees. Blending of all surfaces shall be done with a Scotch Brite Flap Wheel. Those areas requiring blending that are inaccessible with the power wheel shall be hand blended. Welded areas shall be treated as recommended by the manufacturer to limit future staining. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 43 - 5 O. The Contractor shall provide the services of a competent and experienced field technician to test and inspect the completed system, place it in operation, and provide instruction to the Owner's personnel on operation and maintenance of the system as per Section 13 11 13. P. The termination ends of the stainless steel gutter shall have no exposed metal edges that could be hazards to patrons. Q. Inverts of the return lines (at the pool gutter) to the surge tank shall be set no lower than Elevation 914.67 (50M Pool) (2 feet - 4 inches below deck level elevation) and 914.42 (Recreation Pool) (2 feet - 7 inches below deck level elevation) to provide adequate slope. Higher elevations may be allowed but shall not conflict with other piping and provide adequate pipe flow capacity. R. Recessed Rope Anchors/Hooks: Stainless steel recessed rope anchors/hooks shall be provided and installed at locations shown on the Drawings. All anchors/hooks shall be factory welded, constructed of 3/8-inch stainless steel rod, and adequately designed for line stresses. Shop Drawings of the gutter shall show locations and details of the rope anchors. S. Jet Wash Fittings; Provide quantity of jet wash fittings as recommended by manufacturer installed into the trough side of the supply tube. The fittings shall provide a constant stream of filtered and chemically treated water in the gutter trough to prevent water stagnation and dirt build up. T. The stainless steel gutter shall be provided with water surface agitator fittings at each diving board location. Water agitator system shall be adjustable and be able to be manually shut off when not in use. System shall be centered on each board, 2 feet wide and extend 5 feet beyond the front edge of the board as recommended by National Federation of State High School Associations (NFSHSA). U. At pool stair locations, supply the gutter with step cover consisting of grating similar to other gutter grating at elevation that matches pool deck height. Provide square stainless steel tubing supports and vertical grating to allow pool skimming. 2.02 CURRENT CHANNEL AND VORTEX POOL OVERFLOW WEIRS AND ZERO EDGE TRENCH CONCRETE OVERFLOW GUTTERS A. Systems shall comply with the Drawings and Specifications. B. The perimeter concrete overflow systems shall be covered by grating with maximum 1/2- inch openings complying with requirements of Section 22 51 13. Grating and supports shall be designed for 100 pounds per square foot load. C. The zero -edge trench shall be level within a tolerance of ±3/32 inch and trench shall be checked and signed off by an independent surveyor hired by the Contractor. 2.03 REGENERATIVE MEDIA FILTER SYSTEMS A. General: 1. Provide complete automatic regenerative media filter system for the 50M Pool and the Recreation Pool complying with all Local, State and NSF Standard 50 requirements. The primary components of the system consist of the main filter tank, filter elements, POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 43 - 6 element assembly, bump mechanism, vacuum transfer system, sight glass, pressure gauges and panel, inspection (viewing) window, valves and automatic filter controller. All components and related subassemblies shall be factory assembled and tested prior to shipment. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide as follows: a. 50M Pool: 1) Evoqua Water Technologies/Neptune Benson Defender Model No. SP-49-48- 1548 (Phone Number: 800-832-8002). b. Leisure Pool: 1) Evoqua Water Technologies/Neptune Benson Defender Model No. SP-49-48- 1548 (Phone Number: 800-832-8002). 3. Filter for the system shall meet the following requirements: Recirc. Maximum Flow Rate Minimum Total Rate No. of Minimum GPM/ft2 Filter Filter Surface Pool System GPM Filters Diameter (inl Media Surface Area K) 50M 1,589 1 49" 1.31 1,211 Recreation 1,404 1 49" 1.16 1,211 4. Contractor is to provide a complete functional operating system with sufficient access for maintenance and operation and shall coordinate installation with other building systems. 5. Project documents depict general equipment for the proposed filtration system. Contractor note that the drawing documents, materials, and components are based on the Evoqua Water Technologies/Neptune Benson Defender Filter. Contractor is responsible to provide a complete coordinated, functioning and operating system. Changes to equipment, piping, electrical, mechanical, structural elements, etc. may be required and will vary somewhat depending upon the new equipment that is provided. Contractor shall confirm all dimensions, configurations, etc. and shall be responsible for any modifications required to install equipment and accessories being provided at no additional cost to the Owner. Submittals shall be coordinated by the contractor and submitted for review and approval. 6. Equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall be fabricated, assembled, erected and placed in proper operating condition in full conformity with the drawings, specifications, Engineering data, instructions, and recommendations of the equipment manufacturer. 7. Equipment materials, construction features, and performance specified herein are considered minimum requirements. Manufacturer shall incorporate specified requirements into standard products to fully conform to Specifications. 8. Contractors are advised that because of manufacturer's variation in equipment design, changes from drawings in arrangement and layout, electrical and control circuitry, and related dimensions of equipment foundation and anchorage details may be required for equipment installations. 9. Equipment requiring minor deviations in the system layout such as minor anchoring revisions, will be acceptable, however, the Contractor shall include all costs associated with the deviation in the bid. Should the deviation require revisions in the design, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the cost of redesign. 10. In cases where equipment specifications require patented processes or features, Contractor shall include in the Bid any patent royalty or license fees, to cover patent rights. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 1311 43-7 11. Provide equipment furnished by a single manufacturer qualified and experienced in the production of similar equipment. Quality Assurance 1. Consideration will be given only to products of manufacturers who can demonstrate that their equipment fully complies with all requirements of the specifications and contract documents. The equipment shall be supplied by a firm which has been regularly engaged in the design, fabrication, assembly, testing, start-up, and service of filtration systems, with a minimum of 5-years of operating history prior to the bid date of this contract of the type of filter system provided. 2. Filters shall bear the National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) seal for Standard 50. 3. Assurance that each item of apparatus is properly sized to perform in conjunction with each other, the owner requires bidders to use the filter manufacturer as a single source of supply for the items of equipment as listed and described herewith. 4. Filter and accessories shall be approved for use by the State. C. Patents 1. The manufacturer warrants that the use of this system and its equipment, in the process for which the system has been expressly designed, will not infringe any U.S. or foreign patents or patents pending. In the event of any claim of infringement the manufacturer shall defend and indemnify the Owner free from any liabilities associated with the use of the patented equipment or process. 2. The manufacturer hereby grants to the owner, in perpetuity, a paid -up license to use any inventions covered by patent or patents pending, owned, or controlled by the manufacturer in the operation of the facility being constructed in conjunction with the equipment supplied under this contract, but without the right to grant sublicenses. D. Warranty 1. The filter manufacturer shall guarantee that all equipment furnished is of the correct capacity, that the various parts are designed to operate correctly and in conjunction with each other, that if the installation is made in accordance with the Project Drawings and operated in accordance with the suppliers instructions, the system will perform the prescribed functions correctly, the water entering the splash pad will be clear, bright, free from suspended matter visible to the unaided eye, and will be sanitary to the satisfaction of all authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide warranty per Section 13 11 13 as amended to following minimum requirements: a. Tank and liner shall carry a 10-year non -prorated warranty. b. Internal components, including tube elements, shall carry a 10-year non -prorated warranty. c. Valve bodies shall carry a 5-year fully rated warranty. d. Valve operators and system accessories including the controller, quick exhaust valve, solenoid valve and bump mechanisms shall carry a 2-year warranty. e. Unless otherwise specified, workmanship is to be guaranteed first class and carry a 2-year warranty. E. Filter Tank: 1. Suitable for 50 psi working pressure and hydrostatically tested to 75 psi. General tank materials and construction shall be one of the following: a. Tank shell shall be not less than '/4" thick. Bottom dished head shall be not less than 1 /4 inch thick. Top flat head shall be not less than 1-1 /4 inch thick. All material shall be Type A-36 carbon steel. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1311 43 - 8 2. Qualified operators shall perform all welding. Joints shall be butt or fillet welded inside and out by manual or automatic process. Welded joints shall have complete penetration and fusion with little or no reduction of the thickness of the base metal. Welds shall be free of coarse ripples, grooves, overlaps, abrupt ridges or valleys. All welded surfaces shall be chipped and brushed clean, when necessary, leaving no slag or splatter. 3. Tank legs shall be per manufacturer requirements and shall utilize stainless steel concrete anchors. 4. The tank head shall be provided per recommendations of the manufacturer and shall be either bolted to the shell with 7/8-inch diameter T304 stainless steel threaded rods and nuts, 9 inches on center around the tank perimeter or ASME Code type flanged and dished. 5. Tank shall be equipped with a UL listed grounding lug. 6. Tank shall incorporate connections as follows: a. 50M Pool: 1) 10-inch influent 2) 10-inch effluent 3) 4-inch drain 4) 1-1 /2-inch minimum vacuum transfer piping 5) 4-inch viewing window 6) Lift shaft gland b. Recreation Pool: 1) 10-inch influent 2) 10-inch effluent 3) 4-inch drain 4) 1-1 /2-inch minimum vacuum transfer piping 5) 4-inch viewing window 6) Lift shaft gland 7. Tank shall include brackets for mounting of automatic controller, gauge panel, filter/regulator, vacuum transfer blower and vacuum hose rack. 8. Tank shall include an integrally mounted hydraulic lifting device (davit). The davit assembly shall be designed to lift the filter head and include a pivot mechanism allowing the head to rotate 180 degrees, for access to the tube sheet. Alternative methods of tank removal are subject to Engineer approval. F. Interior Lining: l . Shall be provided for filters not constructed from stainless steel. 2. All interior surfaces shall be grit blasted to white metal condition with a 3-4 mil profile. Blasted surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust or blast residue and primed as soon as is practical on the same day blasting is done. 3. Liner shall be a urethane, 100 percent solid plural component lining, Evoqua Water Technologies -Neptune Benson Flexsol 300000 or approved equal. Hardness shall be 75 durometer on the shore D scale. Break tensile strength shall be 4000 psi with elongation of less than 10 percent. Adhesion shall be greater than 2500 psi. 4. Application of lining shall be done by experienced applicators using a high pressure, high temperature plural component system. All wetted surfaces including flange faces, manway rings and manway covers shall be lined to 100 mils +/- 10 mils DFT. 5. Hardness shall be verified after curing to ASTM D 2240 standard. 6. Manufacturer shall submit for approval a sample piece of coated steel to determine flexibility, abrasion tolerance and adhesion integrity. 7. Lining shall meet the NSF toxicity standard unconditionally and shall be approved for use with the NSF approved filter. M POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 13 11 43-9 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 W 8. Flexsol 30008 lined vessels shall carry a 10-year limited non -prorated warranty. 9. The filter manufacturer shall bear the responsibility for suitability of lining and shall be the sole source for the specified warranty. G. Exterior Coatings: 1. Shall be provided for filters not constructed from stainless steel. 2. All exterior surfaces shall be grit blasted to white metal condition with a 2-3 mil profile. Blasted surfaces shall be cleaned of all dust or blast residue and primed as soon as is practical on the same day blasting is done. 3. When priming has dried the coating process will begin. If prime has sat for over 24 hours, a refresher coat will be applied. 4. 2 coats of high solids enamel shall be applied for a total developed film thickness of 5- 8 mils. 5. Contractor shall repair damage coatings as required. 6. Manufacturer is to supply min. 16 oz of high solids enamel touch-up paint to be available for future Owner's use. H. Internal Components: 1. The filter shall consist of flexible filter elements, filter tube sheet, stainless steel lift shaft and internal flow diversion assembly. 2. The filter elements shall be flexible tubes that provide the support structure for the media. The outer wall of each element shall be fabricated of multi -filament high strength polyester braid. Each element shall have an internal T304 stainless steel spring/core, which acts a support structure for the braided filament. 3. The filter element tube sheet shall be fabricated of T304 stainless steel and provide both support for the top of the element assembly as well as water tight seal to prevent media from escaping the filter tank. 4. The lift shaft shall be fabricated from T304 stainless steel and provide the internal connection between the filter element tube sheet and the external bump mechanism. 5. The filter influent connection shall be fitted with a T304 stainless steel flow diversion assembly to eliminate disturbance to the filter elements during operation. 6. All stainless steel wetted fasteners shall be Type 304. Bump Mechanism: I . I he bump mechanism shall include a pneumatically operated tire mounted externally on the filter tank head. The tire is alternately pressurized then depressurized causing the connected filter element assembly to move in a downward then upward fashion. This movement shall provide the means of dislodging the media and accumulated solids, which then recoat the filter element. Vacuum Transfer System: 1. The vacuum transfer system shall be provided to allow the recharging of media into the filter for either bag or bulk media. 2. The vacuum blower shall include a peak 5 HP I I UV, single phase motor 60 Hz, UL listed. 3. A GFI protected receptacle shall be provided for field installation on the vacuum mounting bracket and field wired to the RMF controller. 4. Provide three 1-1 /2inch SCH 80 PVC ball valves: for the vacuum drain line, the blower inlet and the vacuum hose. 5. The manufacturer shall provide all necessary pipe, fittings and hardware for field plumbing of the vacuum transfer system. 6. Provide 10 feet of 1-1 /2-inch vacuum hose with required fittings. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 43 - 10 K. RMF Programmer 1. The automatic controller shall provide total control of the system's filtration and regeneration cycles and provide all necessary equipment interlocks and timing mechanisms to execute the filter program. 2. The controller shall contain at least two (2) microprocessors that will monitor all functions of the system. 3. The controller shall control the operation of the following functions: a. Bump cycle / manual or automatic; with or without security interlock for data logging. b. Precoating of the filter elements. c. Stopping and starting of the recirculation pump. d. Opening and closing of pneumatically operated valves. e. Vacuum transfer system. f. Heater cool down delay. g. Auxiliary contacts to interlock UV lamps, chemical control, or other equipment. h. 7-inch Hi -Res LCD Screen with Tactile Feedback Membrane. i. Last BumpTm and Bump-n-GOTM features. j. Remote operation via browser or phone. k. Off -site real-time status. I. Email on change of condition. m. Data logging of process. n. Differential pressure monitoring and bump control. o. Automatic maintenance reminders. p. Exploring of process data logs to .csv ExcelTM files. q. Modbus communications for PLC connectivity. 4. The controller panel shall display the following functions: a. Filter status. b. Precoat status. c. Recirculating pump status. d. Vacuum transfer pump status. e. System power. f. Step by step animated graphics. 5. The controller enclosure shall be NEMA 4x/IP66 approved system. 6. The RMF controller will provide signal power to the main recirculation pump variable frequency drive (VFD) and is to be installed with control wiring by the splash pad contractor. 7. The RMF shall be 120V, 1 phase, 15 amp rated and shall be UL labeled. L. Filter/Regulator: 1. Filter shall include a combination filter/regulator. The regulator shall be adjustable from 0 - 120 p.s.i. 1/2-inch F.P.T. connections shall be provided for field installation of air lines. Furnish and install shutoff ball valve prior to the filter/regulator. M. Air Compressor System: 1. The system will require 1 common air compressor used for all pool filter systems, with the following minimum requirements or larger if deemed necessary by the manufacturer: a. 20-gallon tank, 2 HP 1 15V, 1 phase, 15-amp, 5.2 CFM @ 90 psi, air pressure gauge, pressure relief valve, belt guard, pressure switch, air filter, tank drain, etc. b. Contractor shall coordinate with filter manufacturer to provide lines/tubing/piping between compressor, pneumatic actuators, accessories, etc. in size, material and location as recommended by the filter manufacturer. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM @ 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 43 - 1 1 c. One water separator with automatic drain shall be included for air compressor. 1/2-inch F.P.T. connections shall be provided for field installation of air lines. N. Pneumatic Actuators: 1. Filter shall include pneumatic actuators for 1 effluent valve and 1 precoat valve. 2. The actuators shall be double acting with valve mounted drilling to ISO 5211. 3. The actuators shall include two 1/4-inch FPT ports for open / close connections. Flow control valves with quick connect fittings shall be provided at each port to allow speed control adjustment for the open / close function of the actuators. 4. Materials of Construction a. Body: aluminum alloy, extruded acc. to ASTM 6063, anodized acc. To UNI 4522. b. Ends: Die-cast in aluminum alloy acc. To ASTM B179, epoxy -polyester coated. c. Pistons: Die-cast in aluminum alloy acc. To ASTM B179. d. Pinion: Nickel -plated steel. e. Slideways: Acetal resin (LAT LUB 731320T). f. Fasteners: AISI 304 Stainless steel. g. Springs: Epoxy coated steel, pre -compressed. h. Seals: NBR Nitrile rubber i. Lubricant: MoS2. 5. The actuators shall be factory lubricated to allow for 1,000,000 maneuvers. 6. The actuators shall have adjustable travel stops for both directions. 7. Working temperature limits: 4 degrees F to 186 degrees F. 8. A tool kit for adjustment of pneumatic actuators shall be provided by the filter manufacturer. O. Solenoid Valves: l . Filter shall include 3-single solenoid, 4-way valves mounted on a multi -station manifold for operation of the pneumatic actuators and bump mechanism. 2. The solenoids valves shall include lighted DIN connectors. 3. The solenoid valves shall be factory lubricated and shall not require any field lubrication. 4. The solenoid valves with multi -station manifold shall be located on the bottom of the automatic controller, factory wired and include quick connect fittings for attachment to the pneumatic actuators and bump mechanism. 5. The solenoid valves shall be SMC Series SY 7000. P. Valves: 1. All valves 3 inches to 12 inches shall be constructed with cast aluminum ASTM S12A housing and fully coated with Rilsan on all interior and exterior surfaces. Internal components include EPDM resilient lining, Rilsan coated ductile iron disc and T304 stainless steel shaft. Valves 14 inches and larger shall be constructed with cast iron housing epoxy coated and with nylon coated ductile iron disc. 2. Valves shall be butterfly valves and shall be provided for the influent, effluent and precoat lines. Q. System Valves: l . Each filter shall include 5 system valves to facilitate system fill after media recharge, precoat/regeneration, influent & effluent for filtering and media dump/drain valve. 2. The precoat/regeneration and effluent valves shall be butterfly type with pneumatic actuators per 2.03.N. 3. The system fill valve shall be butterfly type with lever operator and shall be the same size as the precoat/regeneration valve. POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 43 - 12 4. The influent valve shall be a check valve, meeting requirements of Section 22 51 13, 5. The dump/rinse valve shall be butterfly type, lever operated with SS extension to facilitate operation. Media: 1. Media shall be as follows: a. Perlite: 1) Media shall be expanded perlite with a median particle size of 37 microns. Percentage retained on a 150 Mesh Screen Analysis shall not be less than 8 percent or more than 25 percent. Darcy permeability shall be between 1.2- 1.85. 2) The media shall contain no more than 1 tenth of 1 percent (.001) of crystalline silicate. 3) The media shall be AquaPerl (Harborlite) as supplied by World Minerals. 4) The media shall be certified by the Manufacturer for use in the filter. The media shall be NSF Std. 50 listed. 5) Filter shall be furnished with a supply of perlite media to last the entire pool season (i.e. Memorial Day through Labor Day). Filter Cleaner: 1. Filter shall be furnished with 1 charge of chemicals for cleaning and degreasing of filter tube elements. 2.04 POOL HEATERS A. General Requirements: Provide complete sealed combustion heaters, fan assisted heaters. Comply with all State and Federal Requirements including International Energy Code. Heaters shall be specifically designed for the heating of swimming pool water and designed for use with natural gas. l . The water containing section shall be of a "Fin Tube" design with cupro nickel heat exchanger with cupro nickel tubes having extruded integral fins. The tubes shall terminate into a one piece, lined, cast iron header. There shall be no bolts or O-rings in the head configuration. There shall be access to the front header of the heat exchanger for the purposes of inspection, cleaning, or repair. The heat exchanger shall be mounted in a stress -free jacket assembly in order to provide a "free floating design" able to withstand the effects of thermal shock. Features shall include: l . Hot surface ignition, stainless steel burners, redundant gas valves, heat exchanger, ceramic tiled sealed combustion chamber, ASME 160# W.P., temperature and pressure relief valve, Nox rating of 20 ppm, 24v controls, pressure/temperature gauge, low water cutout switch, flow switch, air pressure switch, 5-year warranty, diagnostic control panel, factory installed pump bypass and piping, hot surface ignition system (or dual ignition), blower(s), built-in sequencer, temperature control, manual reset high limit. Pressure relief valve shall have a maximum pressure rating of 75 pounds per square inch, have a thermal capacity at least equal to the heat input rating of the heater, with the discharge piped to within 6 inches of the floor and shall fully comply with State requirements. 2. Heaters shall draw fresh combustion air directly from the outside through ducts to the units and then vent by-products to the exterior through ducts as shown on Mechanical Drawings. Pool heater manufacturer shall supply properly sized air inlet caps/air inlet/flue terminations for installation by mechanical contractor. Ductwork from the air © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 1311 43-13 inlet caps/air inlet terminations to the heaters and ductwork from the heaters to the wall shall be furnished and installed by mechanical contractor All work shall meet heater manufacturer requirements and comply with Federal, State and Local requirements. 3. Heaters shall be furnished with a factory supplied pumped bypass assembly to insure proper operation without condensation. The bypass assembly shall include a sealed all -bronze pump. The bypass assembly shall be constructed with all -copper piping and fully ported ball valves. Instructions for proper setup and operation of the bypass will be supplied by heater manufacturer. Heaters shall be provided with pump relays to control pump operation and shut down the pumps if the heaters are not running. 4. Provide complete programmable controls. Provide Versa IC temperature controller by Raypak or equal. Setpoint range of 66 °F to 106 °F with LCD display that incorporates an adjustable energy saving pump control relay and freeze protection and is factory mounted and wired to improve system efficiency; water sensors provided. 5. Provide adjustable lead/lag pool heater control. 6. Heaters shall have adjustable pool water set and high limit temperatures with +/- 1 degree Fahrenheit accuracy. The control panel shall have a master switch with an indicating light, and sequential and diagnostic indicator lights. The standard control system shall include a Hot Surface Ignition System with full flame monitoring capability (or shall have redundant ignition systems with each able to function independently in the event of the other system.) Multiple main gas valves with redundant valve seats and a built-in low gas pressure regulator shall be supplied as standard. Additional standard controls shall include a flow switch, a combination low air and blocked flue pressure switch to monitor fan operation, low voltage transformer for the control circuit, and an ASME pressure relief valve. 7. Contractor shall provide devices and controls so that heaters are shutdown when there is no recirculation flow. 8. The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burners, all controls, and the heat exchanger by connection to water and venting for a factory fire test prior to shipping. A quality test report shall be shipped with each unit. A 24 VAC control circuit and components shall be used. All components shall be easily accessed and serviceable. 9. Rack (for 50M Pool Heaters): Heater manufacturer provided rack to allow vertical stacking of heaters. Raypak Hi -Delta Sure Rack or equal. 10. Cold Water Run System a. The pool heaters shall be contigured with a Cold Water Run automatic proportional by-pass system that ensures the pool heater will experience inlet temperatures in excess of 1050F in less than seven (7) minutes to avoid damaging condensation. The unit can automatically shut down if the inlet temperature is not achieved within the seven (7) minute time frame. b. The Cold Water Run system shall be configured with a variable -speed pump that is controlled by the VERSA IC software that injects the correct amount of cold water directly into the pool heater loop to maintain a minimum inlet temperature. The factory -installed pool heater inlet temperature sensor shall be utilized for the cold water run system. c. The control shall have a temperature setting adjustment located in the Setup menu of the VERSA IC. The inlet temperature range shall be 105°F to 120°F. The PID Logic shall be capable of limiting system overshoot to a maximum of 10°F on initial start- up or call -for -heat. d. The Cold Water Run system shall be completely wired and mounted at the factory. e. The control shall have alarm contacts. 11. Provide Type K hard copper piping or Schedule 80 CPVC piping from the heater to the pool recirculation system piping. Pipe to and from the water heater shall be sized as © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 1311 43-14 recommended by heater manufacturer. Provide and install a bypass line and valves to control flow between the input and output lines for the water heater. Valves and thermometers shall be provided and installed as recommended by heater manufacturer and to comply with all applicable codes. The heaters are to be installed on a level concrete pad, which is to be provided by the Contractor. 12. Install heater and accessories in conformance to heater manufacturer requirements and recommendations and as required by applicable regulatory codes. 13. Heaters shall comply with International Energy Conservation Code, including but not limited to the following: a. Heaters shall be equipped with a readily accessible on -off switch to allow shutting off the heater without adjusting the thermostat setting. b. Heaters shall not have continuously burning pilot lights. c. Time switches that can automatically turn off and on the heaters and pumps to a preset schedule are not required as the State requires 24-hour pool recirculation pump operation. C. Design Conditions: 1. 50M Pool: a. Provide 2 heaters (stacked), minimum heater input for each heater shall be 1,530,000 BTUH and minimum heater output for each heater shall be 1,301,400 BTUH. b. Manufacturer Model Number: Raypak Hi Delta Sealed Combustion Pool Heater Model No. P-1532C or approved equal. 2. Recreation Pool: a. Minimum heater input shall be 1,530,000 BTUH and minimum heater output shall be 1,301,400 BTUH. b. Manufacturer Model Number: Raypak Hi Delta Sealed Combustion Pool Heater Model. No. P-1532C or approved equal. 3. CSA tested and certified with a minimum thermal efficiency of 83% at full fire. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer services and startup per Section 13 11 13. All equipment and piping shall be neatly arranged in an orderly manner for ease of operation and maintenance. Arrangement shall be as shown on the Drawings with minor deviations allowed where required for the size and configuration of the specific items of equipment to be used. C. Workmanship: All work shall be performed by skilled workmen experienced in swimming pool construction. All piping shall be neatly laid out and installed in accordance with the best construction practices. All piping must drain to low points and be provided with convenient drain valves. Each valve and system component shall be clearly labeled using permanent tags and/or permanent tape labels properly secured in place. D. Contractor shall furnish and install miscellaneous accessory materials as required to provide complete functioning system. This shall include but is not limited to such things as pressure gauge tubing, miscellaneous piping, tubing, valves, couplings, etc. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM 1311 43-15 3.02 FILTER DRAIN A. Spent media and rinse water from tube elements shall be piped to the sanitary sewer as shown on the Drawings. 3.03 GROUNDING AND BONDING A. Ground and bond equipment in accordance with the most current version of Article 680 of the National Electrical Code and State and local code requirements. END OF SECTION POOL RECIRCULATION SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 43 - 16 SECTION 13 11 46 POOL MISCELLANEOUS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Fiberglass access ladders. 2. Aluminum hatches. 3. Paint. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBERGLASS ACCESS LADDERS A. Surge tank access ladders shall be custom constructed of fiberglass tube, angle, and plate components as shown on the Drawings. B. All connection and anchoring hardware shall be stainless steel bolts and expansion anchors. 2.02 FABRICATED ALUMINUM HATCHES A. Furnish and install aluminum hatch as located on the Drawings. B. Manufacturers: Bilco Type J, equivalent by Halliday Products or approved equal. C. Provide channel style frame to divert water from entering thru hatch, D. Angle frame of minimum 1/4-inch welded aluminum with anchor flange around the perimeter. E. Door leaves shall be 1/4-inch aluminum diamond plate reinforced with aluminum stiffeners. F. Door leaves shall be equipped with heavy forged brass hinges, stainless steel pins, totally enclosed spring operators, or torsion bars as necessary for easy operation. G. Stainless steel fasteners throughout. All components, including springs or torsion bars, shall be corrosion resistant, suited for intended service. H. The door shall open to 90 degrees and lock automatically in that position. A vinyl grip handle shall be provided to release the cover for closing. Locate hold open arm release handle such that it can be easily operated without endangering personnel. I. Doors shall be built to withstand a live load of 300 pounds per square foot. POOL MISCELLANEOUS 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 11 46 - 1 J. Double leaf hatches shall be provided without center support. K. Each door leaf secured with snap lock with removable handle and padlock hasp welded to each leaf and frame or locking stud thru aluminum hatch to allow hatches to be locked with Owner provided padlock. Provide one spare handle for each hatch. L. Aluminum surfaces mil finished with bituminous coating applied to the exterior of the frame exposed to concrete. 2.03 PAINT A. General: Use painting material from one manufacturer to ensure compatibility. Perform surface preparation and application consistent with the paint manufacturer's written instructions. Aluminum Access Hatch Painting 1. Paint top of aluminum hatch located in sidewalk in color to be confirmed by Owner. A shade of white is most likely to be chosen. 2. Surface Preparation: Sandblast/power tool clean to 1-1 /2 mil profile. 3. Primer: Tnemec Series 66 Hi -Build Epoxyline, 2-3 mil dry film thickness (DFT) or approved equal. 4. Finish Coat: Tnemec Series 1075 Endura-Shield, 2-3 mil dry film thickness (DFT) or approved equal. C. General Painting 1. Painting Materials: a. Basis of Design Rust Inhibiting Primer: Kop-Coat 622-LCF Primer. b. Basis of Design Bitumastic Paint: Kop-Coat Bitumastic 300M. 2. Paint all non -stainless steel metal surfaces inside tanks/manholes/etc. with 2 coats of bitumastic paint. Paint all items with 1 coat before installation in tanks. PART 3 EXECUTION Not Uscd. END OF SECTION POOL MISCELLANEOUS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 1 1 46 - 2 SECTION 13 14 13 WATER SLIDES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Scope of Work: Work shall include the furnishing of all labor, materials, equipment, expertise, and other incidentals to include: 1. Furnish and install a mechanical building supported single tower, double water slide complex with tower platform 22.98 feet above plunge pool water level. The water slide shall include 1 Poolsider Slide (36-inch wide open body flume) x 162.4 feet long and 1 Speedslide Combination - Aquatube/Open Flume Slide x 113.1 feet long that includes a water curtain over the transition point on the Speedslide from the enclosed to open section (Note: Contractor shall provide and install 3 inch diameter Schedule 80 piping from supply piping to the water curtain, as well as supports and all other necessary accessories) and all other items as Specified in this Section. a. Fiberglass flume components. b. Painted over hot -dip galvanized components, i.e.: 1) Steel tower, platform, supports, structural members, access stairs, safety railing, etc. c. Flume and stair support system. d. Labor, materials and equipment to complete the installation. e. Concrete footings and foundations. f. All necessary earthwork. g. All electrical grounding and bonding for the slide system in accordance with the most current version of Article 680 of the National Electrical Code, state requirements, and all local requirements. h. General and Product Liability Insurance. i. Manufacturer's supervision, installation, ride testing, and certification. j. Operation and Maintenance Manuals. k. Manufacturer's onsite training of Owner staff on proper use. 2. Furnish and install one 32-inch diameter, straight path, enclosed drop slide at 19.4 feet in length, platform height of 10.0 feet above 50-meter pool water level, to include: a. Fiberglass tube components. b. Tube support system. c. Painted over hot -dip galvanized components, i.e.: 1) Steel tower, platform, supports, structural members, access stairs, safety railing, etc. d. Flume and stair support system. e. Labor, materials and equipment to complete the installation. f. Concrete footings and foundations. g. All necessary earthwork. h. All electrical grounding and bonding for the slide system in accordance with the most current version of Article 680 of the National Electrical Code, state requirements, and all local requirements. i. General and Product Liability Insurance. j. Manufacturer's supervision, installation, ride testing, and certification. k. Operation and maintenance manuals. I. Manufacturer's onsite training of swimming pool staff on proper use. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 WATER SLIDES 13 14 13- 1 B. Work Provided by Other Sections: l . Furnish and install pumps for water supply to slides and all necessary circulation piping. 2. Cut-outs in pool wall as required for slide water entry sections and waterproofing. 3. Pool and deck structure around slide foundations and columns. 4. Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions - Slide manufacturer/installer shall be bound by the General and Supplementary Conditions. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.03 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The water slide, support systems, starting platforms, stairways, and railings shall be designed and installed to conform to all requirements of: 1. Applicable State and local codes. 2. Minnesota Rules Chapter 4717, Parts 4717.0150 to 4717.3975 - Operation and Maintenance, Design, Installation and Construction Standards for Public Pools and Facilities Related to Them (Minnesota Pool Code) administered by the Minnesota Department of Health. 3. "WWA Considerations for Operating Safety," latest edition, published by the World Waterpark Association. 4. Suggested Health and Safety Guidelines for Recreational Water Slide Flumes, published by U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. 5. ASTM. F1487-93: Standard Consumer Safety Performance Specification for Playground Equipment for Public Use. 6. Consumer Product Safety Commission, 16 CFR Part 1207, Safety Standard for Swimming Pool Slides. Slide shall be provided with permanent label or separate certification indicating conformance with the rules of the Consumer Product Safety Commission as required by state and local code. 7. "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication, and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" of the American Institute of Building Construction. 8. "Code for Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society. 9. "Specification for Architecturally Exposed Slruc:luiul Steel" of the American Institute of Steel Construction. 10. "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures," Publication ACI 315-92 of the American Concrete Institute. 11. "Structural Concrete for Buildings," Publication ACI 301-96 of the American Concrete Institute. 12. "ASTM" requirements for all steel components of the American Society for Testing and Materials. B. Where provisions of pertinent codes and standards conflict with this Specification, the more stringent shall govern. 1.04 SITE CONDITIONS A. Topography - The Drawings indicate location information pertaining to the Site for the Water Slides. B. Soils - Refer to the Soil Borings included with these Specifications. WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 14 13-2 1.05 USE OF SITE A. General: 1. Access and egress shall be coordinated with the Owner and Engineer and controlled so as not to conflict with the normal operations of the Project and other subcontractors. B. Design: 1. The schematic design, shown on the Drawings, shows the intend d use and desired locations of the. Water Slide elements in relation to the adjacent deck uses. Schematic design is based on Slides by Whifewater West Industries, LTD. Final design shall be coordinated between the slide manufacturer and the Engineer. No Work on the slide, foundation—s-gigjIng and all other related amenities shall commence until the final design is determined and agproyed. 2. Alternative arrangements may be considered, but only with Engineer's Pre -Bid approval. Additional costs due to changes in design parameters shall be considered incidental to the Base Bid and shall be factored into the Base Bid. Contractor shall be res onsible for any and all cost changes to piping. pumping,vaults deck electrical mechanical fencing, rope and post barriersgrading, state gpproyaLs, etc. In addition Contractor shall reimburse Owner for en in erin costs necessary to modify Drawings. 1.06 PERMITS AND FEES A. The manufacturer and/or the Contractor shall provide sufficiently detailed information on all items furnished to secure all necessary permits, including but not limited to: 1. Building Permit. 2. State Construction and Operating Permit. B. All applicable fees and permits for construction of the slides shall be obtained and paid for by the Contractor. Note: the main pool construction permit from the State for the pool itself will be obtained and paid for by the Owner. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: 1. Use all means necessary to protect existing Work and, in the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary, subject to approval of the Owner and Engineer and at no additional costs to the Owner. B. Store Products: 1. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection and safe keeping of products under this Contract, stored on or off the Site. C. Lines, Levels, and Layout of Work: 1. The Contractor shall establish and guarantee all lines, levels, etc. called for on the Drawings or necessary to construct the Work. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Requirements at the Time of Bidding: To enable the adequate evaluation of Bids received, Bidders are required to submit with their Bids a minimum of the following: WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 14 13 - 3 1. Product information in the form of brochures, drawings, photographs, client lists, and samples of sufficient detail to show the quality, materials, colors, finish, and any other feature important to the description of their product line. Additional information may be requested. 2. Course layout drawn to scale on the Site plan in the form of a plan view showing the configuration of the slide entries, flume ride, tower platforms, access stairs, railings, and locations of support posts. No adjustments to the orientation of the pool or decking will be allowed. Note: The above information is not intended to be a complete shop drawing submittal, but should contain sufficient detail to depict the character and design of the product. B. Submit under provisions of Division 01. C. Construction Schedule: This Contractor shall cooperate with scheduling determined for the complete Project so as not to create any delays or slowdown of other contractors. D. Shop Drawings: 1. Within 45 days after award of the Contract, the Contractor shall submit complete shop drawings to include, but not be limited to: a. Slide path design with X, Y, Z (elevation) coordinates. b. Slide details, including interface at slide entry and exit. c. Slide structural support system details. d. Below grade foundation plans and details as required for flume structural support. e. Tower platform and stair details, including foundations, structural supports, bracing, and starting chutes, as indicated on the Drawings. f. Modifications to the plunge area, pool deck, slide pump, piping, and accessories, grading, rope and post barriers, retaining walls, etc., if any, required for the manufacturer's slide path design. g. Slide system mechanical schematic. h. Schematic for slide and pool wall interface. i. Show all welds, both shop and field, by the currently recommended symbols of the American Welding Society. j. All shop drawings shall be certified and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the State the slides are to be installed. k. The manufacturer shall certity that the depth, width, and length of the receiving pool is acceptable and compatible with safety standards for the supplier's designed product. 2. All shop drawings shall be certified and sealed by the Manufacturer's Structural Engineer, registered and licensed in the State the slides are to be installed. E. Certification: Manufacturer shall provide written certification to the Owner and Engineer when the slides are ready for use. 1.09 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Approved Manufacturer: 1. The following manufacturers are pre -qualified as a source of water flume equipment provide<j their design meets these Technical Specifications and layouts sh wn an the Drawings. No other manufacturer shall be acceptable, unless pre -qualified. Alternate products shall be considered only if rides commence and terminate at the same points and elevations as shown on the Drawings and all features of the ride configurations and the Specifications are met. WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 1314 13 - 4 WHITEWATER WEST INDUSTRIES, LTD. 6700 McMillan Way Richmond, BC Canada V6W 1 J7 (604- 273-1068) PROSLIDE TECHNOLOGY INC. 150-2650 St. Queensview Drive Ottawa, Ontario Canada K2B 8H6 2. Water supply requirements designed for the slides is as follows: a. Flume Slide Complex 1) 36-Inch-Wide Open Body Flume Slide: 800 GPM 2) Combination 32 Inch Enclosed Tube/Open Flume Slide 450 GPM b. Drop Slide 200 GPM 3. Provide fittings and reducers as required and flexible connections as recommended by manufacturer at connection between supply piping and the slides to allow for any potential movement. B. Manufacturer shall have not less than 10-years' experience in the design and fabrication of similarly designed fiberglass water slides. C. The water slide erection supervisor shall have not less than 5-years' experience in the erection of manufacturer's fiberglass water slides and shall be present at all times during the construction to direct the Work. D. The water slide manufacturer shall carry a minimum of $2,000,000 in General Liability and Product Liability Insurance and must show evidence of such coverage with their Bid. E. The manufacturer shall submit evidence of a written Quality Assurance Program with ISO-9001 Certification with their Bid. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FIBERGLASS FLUME COMPONENTS A. General: The fiberglass flume components are those various elements that compose the water flume and shall include: l . Starting Section. 2. Curved Sections, including built-up splashout/safety risers. 3. Straight Sections. 4. Drop or Accelerating Section and Deceleration Sections. 5. Built-up Sections, including Lead-ins and Lead -outs. 6. Pool entry end pieces. 7. All other incidental fiberglass components necessary for a complete system. 8. All joints shall be factory pre -drilled for precision. 9. Water curtain at transition point on Flume Slide Complex at transition from closed tube to open section on speed slide. WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 14 13 - 5 Fiberglass Laminate Materials: Shall be 1 of the 2 following methods: 1. Injected Molded Type: Silktek by Whitewater West Industries: a. Finish: All RFP waterslide parts are to have a smooth surface finish. 600 grit or better inside the riding surface and 400 grit or better outside the riding surface. b. Process: All FRP waterslide parts are to be manufactured using a Resin Transfer Molding (RTM) System or Vacuum Assisted Resin Transfer Molding (VARTM) System where possible. Both A -side and B-side molds shall have a 600-grit surface finish or better, where possible. c. Gelcoat: Interior and exterior gelcoat shall be high quality isophthalic polyester with U.V. inhibitors. 20 wet mils applied to ride surface, 20 mils applied to exterior coating. d. Resins: All resin matrix systems shall be thixotropic promoted isophthalic polyester resin. Na fillers ure ulluwed along the riding surface. e. Glass Reinforcement: All glass reinforcement shall be E-Glass type or better. 2. Smooth Interior Surface, Opaque Exterior: a. Gel Coat: Interior gel coat shall be high -quality isophtalic polyester with UV inhibitors. 18 to 20 mils thick ride surface, 20 mils exterior coating and clear coat. b. Resins: Thixotopic promoted low profile polyester resin with alternate layers of continuous roving chop and 18 oz. woven roving. No fillers of any kind in the laminate materials. c. Structure: Fiberglass lamination with sandwich panel centerline reinforcement. Standard flume section shall be minimum weight of 20 oz. per square foot. Flanges shall be minimum 7/16-inch thick and extend at least 4-3/4 inch from the slide surface, "L" type. Slides shall be constructed under an ISO-9001 certified program. C. Joints, Connections, and Seams: 1. Flume to flume joints shall be fastened with 3/8-inch ASTM approved stainless steel bolts, washers (2 per bolt), and self-locking nuts. 2. Flume to support system connections shall be made with ASTM approved stainless steel hardware and shall be connected separately from water slide section connections to the exterior flange of the flume. 3. All connections shall be external to the flume interior. No connection, hardware, or penetration shall be made to the flume interior. 4. Fiberglass joint connections shall be made using waterproof non -shrink caulking with suitable adhesion to fiberglass or a neoprene gasket. If caulking is provided it shall be completed by the slide manufacturer. 5. Fiberglassing over seams within the riding surface is not permitted. Sanding within the slide surface should be minimized to maintain adequate gel coat thickness and gloss. Any sanded areas shall be polished to a high -gloss until undetectable. D. Color: Shall be integral to the fiberglass. The color shall be selected by the Owner from all available standard colors provided by manufacturer (minimum of 40 color choices). Opaque colors may be two-tone, different colors on interior and exterior of slide. Owner may select 2 tone colors with different colors on interior and exterior of slide and different colors for each individual slide. Ride Configurations: 1. The slide lengths and configurations shall be as indicated in the Drawings. 2. The slide layouts have been developed utilizing slide path designs provided by Whitewater West Industries Ltd. WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 M 13 - 6 3. Alternate products may be considered if rides fit the same footprint as shown on the Drawings and fit with other Site related amenities, are of the same length and configuration, and all other features of the Specifications are met. F. Required Components: All slides shall be furnished with the following components: 1. Entry tray shall be pre -plumbed for water injection downstream of the rider entry point. Rider entry area shall be a non-skid surface and shall be flush with the deck with no steps permitted. 2. Drop slide shall terminate no more than 42 inched above the normal pool water level. 3. Flume slides shall be perpendicular to the pool wall for a distance of a least 10 feet from the exit of the slide. Last 10 feet of the slides shall have a slope that is not steeper than 1 foot in 10. 4. Flume slides shall terminate no more than 2 inches above the normal pool water level. Cut-outs in the pool wall shall be provided at the entrance of the water slide into the pool in order to terminate the slide per state requirements. Modify pool wall at these locations as required and so as to not adversely affect gutter flow. 5. Splash/safety guards are required for ride safety and to control water loss and shall be integral to the slide. Bolt -on sections will not be permitted. 6. Splash/safety guard ends to provide smooth transition at the beginning and end shall be integral to the slide. 7. Pool entry section shall provide a smooth finished end piece to provide a safe pool entry and to mask the connection to the pool wall. 8. Pre -drill all flume sections at factory for exact fit. 9. Waterproof, non -shrink caulking as specified. 10. ASTM approved stainless steel assembly hardware as specified. 11. Slides shall meet all regulatory requirements. 2.02 SLIDE STRUCTURAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS A. Components: 1. Structural steel support arms and cross bracing as required by the design. 2. All steel components shall be hot dip galvanized and designed for bolt -up installation. 3. Connecting hardware and yokes as required by the design. Connection hardware to attach the slide to structural support components shall be 1/2-inch ASTM approved stainless steel nuts, bolts, and washers. Yokes for connection flumes to structural elements shall be 1/4-inch thick, 3 inch by 3 inch galvanized steel angle bent to match the exterior flume flange as a minimum standard. 4. Concrete support columns and below grade foundations shall be as designed by the slide supplier. Slide supplier shall submit a foundation layout plan showing quantities, dimensions, and typical details. 5. Concrete Footings and Piers: a. Shall be designed and constructed to support the design loads. b. All footings shall have minimum depths as noted on the Drawings. c. Excavation, backfill, and compaction shall meet requirements specified elsewhere in the project manual and the requirements of the slide manufacturer. Where conflicts arise, the more stringent standards shall apply. 2.03 TOWER AND STAIRWAY SYSTEM A. General: 1. Tower shall be supported from flat pool mechanical precast plank located with bottom of plank elevation approximately 12' above finished floor. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 WATER SLIDES 13 14 13-7 2. Tower columns, cross bracing, tension rods, stairway supports, stairway sections, handrails, guardrails, and stairway stringers shall be hot dip galvanized steel, designed and supplied by the slide manufacturer and prefabricated for bolt -up construction. Design shall be approved by Engineer. Contractor shall coordinate that slide manufacturer provides and confirms loadings with Engineer prior to submission of building precast shop drawings. Guardrails, balustrades and handrails shall be galvanized steel tubing. 3. Prefabricated stairway section shall include stringers and stair treads. All items hot dip galvanized. 4. Stair treads and platforms shall be Deck Lok vinyl. Incorporate drainage at each tread/section to prevent water from ponding on surface. Material shall be impact resistant, UV stabilized and non -slip. Risers shall be closed. Stair treads and platforms shall be countersunk or similar so no fasteners are exposed above the surface. 5. Safety signage shall be provided. 6. Shade canopy shall be provided. 7. Concrete foundations designed and provided by slide supplier. B. Stairs and Railings: l . Provide 48-inch clear width between handrails for stairs. 2. Provide and install handrails on both sides of stairway. Rail system shall be a minimum of 42 inches high at any point, non -climbable, and designed to prevent accidental exit. A lockable gate shall be provided at bottom of steps. Gate shall be provided with reinforced hardware to fully support gate. Gate shall swing a full 270 degrees minimum for gate to be completely out of the way in the open position and be held open when slide is in use. 3. Provide balusters and rail extensions to meet all state and ADA requirements. 2.04 STRUCTURAL SYSTEMS A. Design: Structural supports, tower and platform systems shall be designed to meet current applicable Local and State Pool and Building Codes and other criteria as may be required by local regulatory authorities. The structural design shall be certified by a licensed Structural Engineer in the State the slides are to be installed. Structure shall be sized to handle the user volumes, stresses generated by the slides during use, the height required by the slide lengths, and the location on the proposed topography: 1. Concrete: All concrete/foundations shall comply with requirements of Section 13 11 14-1. a. All exposed concrete vertical surface shall receive special wall finish as specified in Section 13 11 14-1. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Shall comply with the requirements of Division 3. 3. Piping: All pipe columns shall meet the requirements of ASTM A53, seamless, Grade B, minimum Fy=35,000 psi. 4. Tubing: All rectangular or square tubing shall meet the requirements of ASTM A500, Grade B. 5. Bolts and Nuts: a. All high strength bolts shall meet the requirements of ASTM A325. b. Use high strength friction bolts for all bolted connections, unless otherwise indicated. c. Make bolt holes 1 /16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter. 6. Anchor Bolts: All anchor bolts shall be galvanized steel (stainless steel if recommended by slide manufacturer) and meet the requirements of ASTM A36. WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 14 13-8 7. Grout: Masterflow 713, or approved equal, non -shrink, non-metallic grout. Use as recommended by manufacturer. B. Steel Protection: 1. All steel shall be hot dip galvanized for corrosion protection. Apply field touch-up to all broken areas of shop applied galvanization when installation is complete. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The installation of this Work shall comply with the following governing and regulatory authorities: 1. U.S. Department of Labor (OSHA). 2. State of Minnesota. 3. All State and Local Codes. 4. Any other agency that has legal jurisdiction. 3.02 FLUME CONSTRUCTION A. All construction shall conform to the recommendations of the approved manufacturer selected through this Bidding process. B. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the quality of the flume material and equipment. C. The slide manufacturer shall be responsible for the layout, assembly, and erection of the flume products in a workmanlike manner. D. Flume joints shall be properly connected so as to avoid abrupt edges that may cause irritation. E. Flume flanges shall be bolted together with 3/8-inch diameter bolts. All bolts shall be stainless steel. F. Polyurethane sealant or any other approved sealant shall be provided on each flange connection. G. All flumes shall be properly cleaned and surfaces smooth finished and complete with all the necessary sections prior to use of the slide. H. Flumes shall be inspected by the representative of the slide manufacturer to ensure a smooth finish to acceptance of Work. 3.03 SURFACE CONDITIONS A. Inspection: Prior to installation of the Work of this Section, carefully inspect the installed Work of other trades and verify that all such Work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence: 1. Verify that fiberglass slide and structural support systems are fabricated and erected in strict accordance with the original design, the approved manufacturer's engineered drawings, and the referenced standards. WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 14-9 B. Discrepancies: 1. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Engineer. 2. Do not proceed with fabrication or installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies are fully resolved. 3.04 FABRICATION A. Fabricate all water slides and structural support systems in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's engineered drawings and the referenced standards. B. Use of dissimilar metals shall not be permitted. C. Fabrication and erection shall conform to the latest editions of the ASTM Specifications and Code of Practice. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF FOUNDATIONS A. Below grade foundations shall be installed in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's engineered drawings. B. Exposed threads of water slide support anchor bolts shall be covered as required to prevent injury and to meet regulatory requirements where applicable. 3.06 WELDING A. For details of joints, comply with requirements for AWS joints accepted without qualification tests. Field welds will not be permitted. B. Use ASTM A233, E-70XX Series electrodes. C. Follow applicable sections of AWS Specifications. D. Unless Otherwise Noted: Make all fillel welds 1 /4 inch minimum. E. Unless Otherwise Noted: Make all butt welds full penetration welds. F. Welding shall be done by welders certified with AWS D-1.1. G. Surface to be welded shall be free from loose scale, rust, paint, or other foreign matter. Care shall be taken to minimize stresses due to heat expansion, contraction, and distortion by using proper sequence in welding and by other approved methods. 3.07 ERECTION A. General: Erect all fiberglass water slides and structural support systems in strict accordance with the approved manufacturer's engineered drawings and all pertinent regulations and standards. B. Fiberglass Joints: All flange to flange connections shall be made utilizing the waterproof caulking supplied by the water slide manufacturer and shall be joined in such a way as to provide for a safe and matless ride. All joints shall be aligned for a completely smooth © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 WATER SLIDES 1311 13-10 riding surface, that is, alignment must be within 1 /64 inch and in no case shall the downstream side of the joint be above the upstream side of the joint. C. Tolerance: Align all structural steel straight, plumb and level with a tolerance of 1 in 500. D. Steel Finishes: Any field welds or scarred surfaces shall be cleaned and cold -galvanized with zinc rich paint. E. All hollow structural sections shall be closed airtight with end plates sealed with welds. F. All steel shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose mil scale, loose rust, oil, and dirt. G. Contractor shall supply temporary bracing to take care of all loads on the structure during erection to ensure the safety of the structure, leave as long as is required, remove when safety is assured. H. All flumes and support arms shall be properly set and installed prior to installation of permanent column bracing. Additional column bracing as required by Waterslide Structural Engineer shall be provided upon Site inspection. 3.08 PROJECT COMPLETION A. Water slide installer shall clean, wax, and buff the fiberglass riding surfaces prior to first use. B. Manufacturer's supervisor shall perform full inspection and certify to the Owner and Engineer in writing that the slide is ready for use. Under no circumstances shall the slides be used until this written certification is complete. C. Manufacturer's supervisor shall train the pool staff on proper usage and maintenance of the slides. D. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, immediately remove all fiberglass, debris, and rubbish occasioned by this Work to the approval of the Owner and at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Slide manufacturer shall return to the site to address to address issues with the slide during the full 2- year project correction period. END OF SECTION WATER SLIDES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 14 13- 11 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 13 31 00 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Furnish and installation of fabric shade structure systems consisting of cantilever shade canopy, hip shade canopy, support posts, support frame, concrete pads, foundations and hardware. B. Related sections 1. Section 03 10 00 -Concrete Formwork 2. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement 3. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -in Place Concrete 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTAL A. Qualifications of shade structure manufacturer. B. Qualifications of shade structure installer as specified herein. C. Detailed fabrication and erection drawings showing all structural heights, vertical clearances, connections, fabric type and grade, slope of structure, dimensions, and gauge of structural steel. D. Manufacturer to supply engineer's certified shop drawings for footings, foundations, reinforcement, mounting hardware at column base plates and other shade structure systems as required. Engineer must be a licensed professional engineer in the State of Minnesota. E. Certification that shade fabric meets or exceeds Class A fire retardant per NFPA 701. F. Certification that fabric contains lead-free pigment(s). G. Provide manufacturer's standard color palette for fabric and metal work powder -coatings for selection and approval. H. Provide two 12 inch by 12 inch pieces of shade fabric following color selection for approval. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 133100-1 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install shade structure support posts and foundations prior to concrete pad installation. B. Locate support footings and foundations outside of concrete pad area. Final location to be approved by Landscape Architect or Engineer. C. Coordinate work with other trades. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall provide a non -prorated manufacturer's warranty for the entire shade structure assembly for materials and installation. Warranty shall include all labor, materials, equipment necessary to repair/replace defective work and/or materials. Warranty shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Replacement of defective fabric and stitching showing signs of stretching, tearing, mold, mildew, shrinkage or significant color change. 2. Repair/replacement of foundation supports and steel structures showing signs of deterioration, embrittlement, excessive rusting, or corrosion. C. Warranty period for the work shall be as follows: 1. Fabric materials including thread and stitching: 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion. 2. Steel structure: 10 years from the date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Approved manufacturers 1. USA Shade and Fabric Structures, local representative, Ultimate Playgrounds, Andrew Pudwill, Tel. 952-465-5138. 2. Shade Systems, Inc., local representative, Commercial Recreation Specialists, Jeff Corniea, Tel. 608-333-1654. 3. Superior Shade. 4. Or approved equal. B. Approved shade assemblies l . Full Cantilever Hip - Single, 12' wide x 24' long, 8' entry height. a. Qty. - 5 b. Color -To be selected c. Footing - Buried pier mount 2. ALTERNATE - Fabric Picnic Canopy - 4-post hip rectangular canopy, 10' wide x 20' long, 8' entry height, concrete pad. a. Qty. - 2 b. Color - to be selected c. Footing - Buried pier mount 2.02 SHADE FABRIC FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 31 00 - 2 A. Shade fabric shall be knitted of monofilament and high -density polyethylene (HDPE) UV stabilized cloth manufactured by ALNET or approved equal. B. Fabric shall be manufactured from 100-percent high -density monofilament. No tape is permitted. C. Fabric shall provide minimum 94-percent UV protection/block and shall meet NFPA 701, 99 Test Method 2 and ASTM E-84 Class A Fire Ratings. D. All hems and seams shall be double rowlock stitched using exterior grade UV -stabilized polyethylene (PTFE) GORE Tenara sewing thread or approved equal. E. All fabric panel corners/attachment points and cable exit points (if present) shall be reinforced with a double layer of heavy duty 2-inch webbing. Shade panels shall incorporate a quick release system capable of de -mounting the canopy fabrics for winter storage or adverse weather conditions. F. Structural Posts, Frame Tubing and Fastening Hardware: 1. Use cold -formed and milled tubing meeting ASTM A]35/A135M and ASTM A500/A500M requirements. Minimum yield shall be 40,000 psi with a minimum tensile strength of 45,000 psi on all posts. 2. Weldments: Factory -weld all tubing members using Certified Welders meeting American Welding Society (AWS) specifications. All welded areas shall be prepped and shop coated with a zinc -rich galvanized coating. 3. All steel components shall be hot -dipped galvanized per ASTM A-123 and powder coated with a minimum 4 mils thickness. Powder -coating shall meet or exceed ASTM standards for Adhesion, Hardness, Impact, Flexibility, Overbake Resistance, and Salt Spray Resistance. 4. All fastening hardware shall be stainless steel. 5. Color to be selected from manufacturer's standard color palette. 6. All shop welds shall be executed in accordance with the latest edition of the American Welding Society Specifications. Welding procedures shall comply in accordance with the AWS D1.1-AWS Structural Welding Code -Steel. 7. No on -site welding of any component is allowed. 2.03 POWDER COATING A. All non -galvanized steel shall be sandblasted and primed prior to powder coating using brown fused aluminum oxide grit and the following primer. B. All non -galvanized steel must be coated with rust inhibiting primer prior to applying the powder coat. Primer shall be marine grade epoxy powder coating semi -gloss smooth zinc rich primer. C. Welds shall be primed with rust inhibiting primer prior to applying the powder coat. Primer shall be marine grade epoxy powder coating semi -gloss smooth zinc rich primer. D. All steel parts shall be coated for rust protection and finished with a minimum 3.5 mil thick UV -inhibited weather resistant powder coating. 2.04 HARDWARE A. Bolt and fastening hardware shall be determined based on calculated engineering loads. © 2019 Stantec l 193804337 FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES 133100-3 B. Support columns will be plated mounted on concrete foundations. All stainless -steel bolts and hardware shall comply with ASTM A-304. Utilize Hilti bolt anchors and injectable mortar epoxy system for column base plate connection to footings as required. C. 1 /4 inch dia. stainless steel wire rope shall be 7/19 strand with a breaking strength of 6,400 lbs. 5/16 inch dia. stainless steel wire rope shall be 7/19 strand with a breaking strength of 9,000 lbs. D. All fittings required for proper securing of the cable shall be stainless steel. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installations of shade structure(s) by an installer who shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions for assembly, installation, and erection, per approved shop drawings. B. The site shall be free of construction debris upon the completion of the Project. 3.02 TRAINING A. Upon substantial completion of the work, provide Owner selected personnel, hands-on training on the proper removal and reinstallation of the shade fabric. END OF SECTION FABRIC SHADE STRUCTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 13 31 00 - 4 SECTION 21 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative requirements: a. Submittals. b. Quality Assurance. c. Delivery, storage and handling. 2. Hydraulic design of fire suppression piping for sprinkler system. 3. Pipe and pipe fittings. 4. Valves. 5. Pipe hangers and supports. 6. Sleeves and sleeve seals. 7. Firestopping for fire suppression work. 8. Fire suppression piping installation. 9. Pipe and equipment identification. 10. Piping tests. 11. Selective demolition. Related Sections: 1. Division 00 and 01 Sections: a. Administrative procedures and requirements. b. Environmental conditions affecting products. 2. Section 09 91 00 - Painting: Execution requirements for piping painting specified by this Section. 3. Section 21 13 16 - Dry -Pipe Sprinkler Systems: sprinklers to be used for various spaces and additional installation requirements. 4. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Connections to fire alarm system. 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK A. Provide complete sprinkler coverage with a dry pipe system for the pool mechanical building and the bathhouse. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 2. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. 5. ASME B36.10M - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 9) 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 1 2. ASTM Al35 - Standard Specification for Electric -Resistance -Welded Steel Pipe. 3. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 4. ASTM A795/A795M - Standard Specification for Black and Hot -Dipped Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe for Fire Protection Use. C. American Welding Society: 1. AWS A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. American Water Works Association: 1. AWWA C1 10 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron and Grey -Iron Fittings, 3 iri. Ihrough 48 in. (75 nim through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 2. AWWA C1 1 1 - American National Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3. AWWA C151 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. AWWA C600 - AWWA Standard for Installation of Ductile -Iron Mains and Their Appurtenances. E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe, Private Hydrants and Hose Systems. 3. NFPA 24 - Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances. F. Underwriter Laboratories, Inc.: 1. UL 1887 - Fire Tests of Plastic Sprinkler Pipe for Visible Flame and Smoke Characteristics. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. B. Design Calculations: 1. Fire Hydrant Flow test data. 2. Hydraulic calculations. a. Signed by Professional Engineer with fire suppression system design expertise. C. Shop Drawings; indicate the following: 1. Dimensioned piping layout with sprinkler types located and designated. 2. Remote areas for hydraulic calculations. 3. Sprinkler riser detail including controls. 4. Pipe support details. 5. Floor and wall penetration seals. D. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: 1. Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. E. Product Data; Submit manufacturer's catalog information: 1. Pipe materials. 2. Valve data and ratings, pressure gages. 3. Sprinklers. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 2 4. Fire Department Connection. 5. Backflow prevention devices. Closeout Submittals: l . Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Closeout procedures. 2. Project Record Drawings: a. Indicate actual locations of components and tag numbering. b. Indicate drain and test locations. 3. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Submit one copy of the latest edition of NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water -Based Fire Protection Systems. b. Provide maintenance instructions for components with moving parts. c. Submit spare parts lists and indicate local source for replacement components. 1.05 SYSTEM DESIGN A. Provide fire sprinkler coverage for entire building [including exterior eaves and soffits]. B. Provide hydraulically designed system to NFPA 13 requirements. l . Determine volume and pressure of incoming water supply from water flow test data. 2. Lay out piping based on review of the Contract Documents, including civil, architectural, structural, fire sprinkler, plumbing, HVAC and electrical drawings. 3. Locate piping to maintain clearances and not interfere with indicated ceiling heights and other systems. C. Refer to Section 21 13 16 for criteria to locate sprinklers in lay -in ceiling tiles. D. Interface fire sprinkler system with building fire alarm system. E. Fire Hydrant flow Test 1. Perform fire -hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291 2. Available fire -hydrant flow test records indicate the following conditions: a. Date: July 8, 2002. b. Location of Fire Hydrant: 4310 Zealand Avenue North, New Hope, MN. c. Static Pressure at Fire Hydrant: 65 psig. d. Residual Pressure Fire Hydrant: 51 psig. e. Measured Flow at Flow Fire Hydrant: 1 175 gpm. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NFPA 13 and requirements specified herein. B. Pressure rating for materials: 175 PSIG minimum. C. Comply with local fire marshal requirements. D. Verify local requirements prior to bidding and include work associated with incorporating the local requirements into the design. E. Designer requirement: Licensed Professional Engineer with fire sprinkler design expertise. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 3 F. Certification: Shop drawings and hydraulic calculation report signed by Licensed Professional Engineer. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Companies specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Ssection with minimum 3 year experience. B. Products: UL listed for fire suppression service. C. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 3 year experience. D. Designer qualifications: NICET Level 2 designer working under the direct supervision of a Licensed Professional Engineer. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Deliver to jobsite and store products in original packaging until installation. C. Furnish cast iron and steel valves with temporary protective coating. D. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Product warranties and product bonds. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution Requirements: Spare parts and maintenance products. B. Furnish extra sprinklers and metal storage cabinet under provisions of NFPA 13. C. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Crane. 2. Grinnell. 3. Jenkins. 4. Kitz. 5. Stockham. 6. Watts. B. Gate Valves: COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 4 l . Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and trim, rising stem, hand wheel, solid wedge or disc, threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem pre -grooved for mounting tamper switch, hand wheel, OS&Y, solid bronze or cast iron wedge, flanged or grooved ends. 3. Over 4 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, non -rising stem with bolted bonnet, solid bronze wedge, flanged ends, iron body indicator post assembly. C. Globe and Angle Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem and hand wheel, inside screw, renewable rubber disc, threaded ends, with back seating capacity packable under pressure. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, hand wheel, OS&Y, plug -type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat and disc. D. Ball Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze two piece body, brass, chrome plated bronze, or stainless steel ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle, threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Manufacturers: Cast steel body, chrome plated steel ball, teflon seat and stuffing box seals, lever handle or gear drive hand wheel for sizes 10 inches and over, flanged. E. Butterfly Valves: 1. Bronze Body: Stainless steel disc, resilient replaceable seat, threaded or grooved ends, extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and built- in tamper proof switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. 2. Cast or Ductile Iron Body: Cast or ductile iron, chrome or nickel plated ductile iron or aluminum bronze disc, resilient replaceable EPDM seat, wafer, lug, or grooved ends. With extended neck, hand wheel and gear drive and integral indicating device, and external tamper switch rated 10 amp at 115 volt AC. Check Valves: 1. Up to and including 2 inches: Bronze body and swing disc, rubber seat, threaded ends. 2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, swing check with rubber disc, renewable disc and seat, flanged ends. 3. 4 inches and over: Iron body, bronze disc with stainless steel spring, resilient seal, flanged ends. G. Drain Valves: 1. Compression Stop: Bronze with hose thread nipple and cap. 2. Ball Valve: Brass with cap and chain, 3/4 inch hose thread. 2.02 BURIED PIPING A. Ductile Iron Pipe: AWWA C151. 1. Fittings: AWWA C110, standard thickness. 2. Joints: AWWA C11 1, rubber gasket. 3. Mechanical Couplings: Shaped composition sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 5 2.03 ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M UL listed, threadable, Schedule 40 black. 1. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel. 2. Malleable Iron Fittings: AS ME B16.3, threaded fittings. 3. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. Steel Pipe: ASTM Al35/135M UL listed, threadable, light wall; Schedule 10 black or galvanized. 1. Steel Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought carbon steel and alloy steel. 2. Mechanical Grooved Couplings: Malleable iron housing clamps to engage and lock, "C" shaped elastomeric sealing gasket, steel bolts, nuts, and washers; galvanized for galvanized pipe. 2.04 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION A. Flush mounted, brass, two-way connection with 4" outlet and two 2-1/2" spring check inlet butts, complete with caps and chains. B. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type. 1. Escutcheon Plale Marking: Similar to "AUTO SPKR." 2. Finish: [Polished chrome plated] [Rough brass or bronze] [Rough chrome plated]. 2.05 DETECTOR CHECK A. In accordance with Municipal requirements. 2.06 BACKFLOW A. Double check a. Double -Check, Backflow-Prevention Assemblies: 1) Standard: ASSE 1015. 2) Operation: Continuous -pressure applications unless otherwise indicated. 3) Pressure Loss: 5 psig maximum, through middle third of flow range. 4) Body: steel with interior lining that complies with AWWA C550 or that is FDA approved for NPS 2-1/2 and larger. 5) Configuration: Designed for horizontal or vertical flow. 6) Accessories: a) Valves NPS 2-1/2 and Larger: Outside -screw and yoke -gate type with flanged ends on inlet and outlet. 2.07 PRESSURE GAUGES A. Underwriters Laboratories Listed, 4-1/2" dial type 200 to 300 psi range. 2.08 WATER FLOW SWITCH A. Wet Systems: 1. Paddle type with two (2) single pole double throw switches and adjusIable ieIuiU. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 6 2.09 ELECTRICALLY OPERATED ALARM BELL: A. Standard: UL 464. B. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. C. Size: 10-inch diameter. D. Finish: Red -enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use. E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2.10 ZONE CONTROL MODULE A. Integrated test and drain valve, test orifice, flow switch, and pressure gauge. 2.11 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Manufacturers: 1. Advance Products & Systems, Inc. 2. Calpico, Inc. 3. Link -Seal, Inc. 4. Metraflex Co. B. Description: l . Modular sealing system designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. 2. Sealing Elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of pipe. Provide quantity required to seal opening based on pipe and sleeve sizing. 3. Pressure Plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. 4. Connecting Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel with corrosion -resistant coating of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. 2.12 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Conform to NFPA 13 [and NFPA 141. B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 /2 to 1-1 /2 inch: Malleable iron or Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 inch and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. D. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. E. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 inches: Cast iron hook. F. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 7 G. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp or angle ring. H. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. 2.13 IDENTIFICATION A. Provide a list of spare sprinklers, including Sprinkler Identification (SIN), General Description, Temperature Rating and Quantity to be maintained within the spare sprinkler cabinet(s). B. Provide Hydraulic Design Information Sign and locate on beaded chain at fire sprinkler riser. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DESIGN A. Design the entire fire protection system and coordinate work with other trades using the most stringent design criteria: indicated on the Drawings, fire marshal's requirements and NFPA 13. 3.02 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION A. Coordinate shut -down of services with Owner prior to performing removal of piping. 1. Fire sprinkler water service. B. Remove piping and equipment indicated for removal while protecting materials and equipment that is not indicated to be removed. C. Provide temporary caps covering the ends of remaining piping to prevent entry of foreign materials and debris. D. Materials removed are to be prorripiiy disposed of or recycled, off -site. E. Contact the engineer for clarification in areas where the scope of work cannot be readily determined from the drawings. F. Reinstate remaining services promptly following the demolition work and notify the Owner when service has been restored. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and foreign material, from inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare pipe for grooving including cleaning, in accordance with coupling manufacturer's pipe preparation standards. 1. Pipe: a. Verify pipe is sufficiently free of indentations, projections, weld seams and roll marks on the exterior of the pipe over the entire gasket seating area. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 8 b. Verify that pipe ends are square cut. 2. Gaskets: a. Check gasket to verify it is suited for the intended service. b. Lubricate the gasket exterior including the lips and/or pipe ends and housing interiors. c. Brush lubricant around the entire pipe and coupling circumference. 3.04 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Layout: 1. Coordinate underground piping locations with structural footings. 2. Establish elevations of buried water piping with not less than 7 ft of cover outside of building. 3. Establish minimum separation of 10 feet from water piping or sanitary sewer piping in accordance with Minnesota Plumbing Code. B. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Division 31. C. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C600. D. Install PVC piping on a continuous granular bed in accordance with ASTM D2321. 1. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping. 2. Level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted loose depth. 3. Compact to 95 percent maximum density. E. Install pipe on prepared bedding. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Division 31. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 6 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density. 4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material. 5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. G. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe. Buried 6 inches below finish grade, above pipe line. 3.05 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Install piping in accordance with NFPA 13 for sprinkler systems, NFPA 24 for service mains. B. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. C. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. D. Install pipe sleeve at piping penetrations through footings, walls, and floors. 1. Seal footing penetrations with mechanical sleeve seals. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 9 2. Seal pipe and sleeve penetrations to maintain fire resistance equivalent to fire separation. E. Install control valves to isolate each riser and each floor including drains, water flow devices, test connections and tamper switches. F. Grooved Pipe Assembly: 1. Assemble couplings, fittings, valves and pipe in accordance with the latest published instructions from the manufacturer. G. Install fire department connection where indicated on the Drawings subject to approval by authority having jurisdiction. 1. Provide a ball drip at bottom of pipe at the fire department connection. H. Mount the detector check meter on 24" high pipe supports [ or concrete base]. Install a tamper switch on each manual shut-off valve to alarm when the valve is two (2) turns from fully open. J. Install a tamper switch on the post or wall indicator valve (WIV) to alarm when the valve is two (2) turns from fully open. K. Pitch branch piping, cross mains and mains to drainage points. L. Provide alarm test modules and/ or inspector's test connections and gauges in accordance with NFPA 13. 1. Extend inspector's test pipe down to within 6-0" of floor with globe valve and with discharge piped as approved. M. Provide drain connection for each sprinkler riser, including an angle valve, pressure gauge and inspector's test plug. N. Provide chrome plated escutcheons on exposed pipes passing through walls and ceilings iri [misled areas. O. Provide pipe sleeve at cast -in -place concrete floor penetrations. P. Pipe Hangers and Supports: l . Install in accordance with NFPA 13. 2. Install hangers with minimum 1 /2 inch space to adjacent work. 3. Use hangers with 1-1 /2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. 4. Support vertical piping at every floor. 5. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. Q. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting. l . Refer to Section 09 90 00. 2. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 3. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. a. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. R. Do not penetrate building structural members unless indicated. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 21 05 00 - 10 S. Where more than one piping system material is specified, install compatible system components and joints. T. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. U. Install gate, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off or isolating service. V. Install drain valves at main shut-off valves, low points of piping and apparatus. W. Install dry -type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. Do not install pendent or sidewall, wet -type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. 3.06 COORDINATION A. Install the work to avoid conflicts with other trades. B. Notify the Architect/ Engineer of conflicts between fire suppression work and that of other trades that cannot be resolved through adjustments to fire suppression pipe locations. C. Remove Work installed by this Contractor which interferes with the work of other trades. 3.07 PRESSURE TESTS A. Test fire suppression piping systems under a 200 PSIG hydrostatic pressure for two (2) hours. B. Air test the dry piping system at 40 PSIG for 24 hours with no greater than 1-1 /2 PSIG pressure loss. 3.08 FIRE STOPPING A. Firestop pipe penetrations of masonry walls, rated walls and partitions and above grade floors. B. Refer to Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping for acceptable products and procedures. 3.09 WELDING A. Perform welding using certified welders. 1. ASME "Qualification Standard for Welding Procedures, Welders and Welding Operations." a. Certification: For the type of work being performed. 2. Submit copies of the welder's certification to the superintendent prior to welding. 3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Perform cutting and patching necessary for the installation of the fire suppression system. 1. Review complete drawing set to determine if cutting and patching is covered by other trades. 2. Do not cut structural members. 3. Core drill concrete openings up to 10 inches in diameter. B. Perform cutting in a manner directed by the cut materials trade or the General Contractor. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 1 1 C. Patching: Match adjacent surfaces to the satisfaction of the Architect. 3.11 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Inserts: 1. Attach inserts to concrete forms, flush with slab surface. 2. Install hooked rod extended to concrete reinforcement for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 3.12 CLEANING A. Section 0l 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Remove protective coatings from valves and accessories. C. Clean entire system after other construction is complete. D. Notify painter of masking materials not removed after painting is complete. END OF SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 05 00 - 12 SECTION 21 13 16 DRY -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes dry -pipe sprinklers and piping for fire suppression. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 21 05 00 — Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: a. Design and submittal requirements. b. Requirements for piping, valves, hangers and specialties. C. Select sprinkler orifice and temperature rating to match application. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 1.03 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra sprinklers in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13. B. Furnish suitable wrenches for each sprinkler type. C. Furnish metal storage cabinet adjacent to alarm valve. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Automatic. 2. Central. 3. Gem. 4. Grinnell. 5. Reliable. 6. Star. 7. Viking. B. Exposed Area Type: 1. Type: Quick response, Standard upright type. 2. Finish: Brass. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. C. Side wall Type: 1. Type: Quick response, semi recessed horizontal side wall type with matching escutcheon. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 DRY -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 16- 1 2. Finish: Chrome plated. 3. Fusible Link: Glass bulb type temperature rated for specific area hazard. D. Guards: Metallic; match sprinkler finish. 2.02 PIPING AND SPECIALTIES A. Dry Pipe Sprinkler Alarm Valve: Check type valve with divided seat ring, rubber faced clapper to automatically actuate electric alarm, with accelerator; with test and drain. B. Electric Alarm: Electrically operated aural and visual alarm with pressure alarm switch. C. Water Flow Switch: Vane type switch for mounting horizontal or vertical, with two contacts; rated 10 amp at 125 volt AC and 2.5 amp at 24 volt DC. D. Fire Department Connection: 1. Y Pattern Siamese valve with wall flange. 2. Flush mounted wall type with brass finish. 3. Flush mounted wall type with chrome plated finish. 4. Free standing type with ductile iron pedestal; [brass] [chrome plated] [red enamel] finish. 5. Connections: Two way with caps and chains; threads to match local requirements. 6. Drain: 3/4 inch ball drip outlet, match finish of hose connections. 7. Placard: "Sprinkler- Fire Department Connection". 2.03 AIR COMPRESSOR A. Compressor: Single unit, electric motor driven, motor, motor starter, safety valves, check valves, air maintenance device incorporating electric pressure switch and unloading valve. B. Electrical Characteristics: Not to exceed 10 amps, 120 V, single phase, 60 Hz. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Refer to Section 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression; installation of piping and specialties. B. Install in accordance with NFPA 13. 3.02 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Verify signal devices are installed and connected to fire alarm system. 3.03 CLEANING A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Final cleaning. B. Notify superintendent of any remaining tape or covering on sprinklers protected from painting. DRY -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 13 16 - 2 3.04 SCHEDULES A. System Hazard Areas: Location System Type Hazard Offices Dry -Pipe Light Hazard Vestibules, exterior soffits, Dry -Pipe, use dry sprinkler Light Hazard and similar areas subject to freezing Mechanical and Dry -Pipe Ordinary Hazard, Group 2 Electrical Rooms, Warehouse, Retail spaces, Storage Rooms, Commercial Kitchen area. END OF SECTION DRY -PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 21 13 16 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative and procedural requirements for plumbing systems and Division 22 Sections: a. References to standards. b. Submittals. c. Quality Assurance. d. Delivery, storage and handling. 2. Pipe, pipe fittings and installation requirements common to multiple Sections: a. Facility water distribution. b. Facility sanitary sewerage. 3. General duty valves common to multiple Sections. 4. Pipe hangers and supports common to multiple Sections. 5. Firestopping relating to plumbing work. 6. Pipe and equipment identification. 7. Cleaning. 8. Selective demolition. B. Related Sections: l . Division 00 and 01 Sections: a. Administrative procedures and requirements. b. Environmental conditions affecting products. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this Section. 3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product and execution requirements for firestopping for placement by this Division. 4. Section 09 91 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this Section. 5. Section 21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression: Administrative and procedural requirements for HVAC ductwork, piping and equipment. 6. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Insulation requirements related to sizing pipe hangers to encompass insulation. 7. Section 22 11 00 Facility Water Distribution: Specialty valves and plumbing specialties. 8. Section 22 13 00 Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Floor drains and cleanouts. 9. Section 23 05 00 Common Work results for HVAC: Administrative and procedural requirements for HVAC ductwork, piping and equipment. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. 1316.3 -Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 1 3. B 16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 6. B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes 7. B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. A74 - Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 3. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 4. A674 - Standard practice for polyethylene encasement for ductile iron pipe for water or other liquids. 5. A 888 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, And Vent Piping Applications. 6. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 7. C564 - Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 8. C1277 - Standard Specification for Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 9. C1540 - Standard Specification for Heavy Duty Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. 10. C 1563 - Standard Test Method for Gaskets for Use in Conjunction With Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary Drain, Waste, Vent, and Storm Piping Applications. 1 1. D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. 12. D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure Rated Pipe (SDR Series). 13. D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity -Flow Applications. 14. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 15. D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems. 16. D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings. 17. D2729 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. 18. D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 19. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 20. El 19 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 21. E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. 22. E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire -Resistive Joint Systems. 23. F492 - Standard Specification for Propylene and Polypropylene (PP) Plastic -Lined Ferrous Metal Pipe and Fittings 24. F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 25. F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications. 26. F1866 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Schedule 40 Drainage and DWV Fabricated Fittings. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-2 C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel. D. American Water Works Association (AWWA): l . C110 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron and Grey -Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 2. C111 - American National Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3. C151 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. 4. C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. E. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 1. 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 2. 310 -Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. F. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. PS 117 - Copper and Copper Alloy Tubing System Incorporating Press -Type or Nail -Type Connections. G. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 4. SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 6. SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 7. SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. H. National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): l . 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 4. 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. Fire Resistance Directory. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Firestopping: Conform to applicable code for fire resistance ratings and surface burning characteristics. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00 for: 1. Electronic Submittal requirements. 2. Transmittal requirements. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 3 3. Submittals regarding color selections. 4. Substitutions. 5. Coordination with other trades. 6. Coordination and approval from public agencies. 7. Deviations from Contract Documents. B. Product Data: 1. Submit data on pipe materials and fittings. 2. Submit manufacturers catalog information: a. Valves. b. Pipe identification. c. Equipment Identification. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit certification of water disinfection and chlorination. 2. Submit copies of plumbing inspector acceptance of air and water column tests. 3. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals in accordance with closeout procedures. D. Project Record Documents: 1. Provide dimensioned drawings indicating installed location of underground piping. 2. Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems. B. Use joint grooving tools and materials provided from a single manufacturer. C. For domestic water piping and valves, use products certified to meet NSF 61. D. Dezincification resistant: Bronze valve chemical make-up for components in the waterway to not exceed 15 percent zinc. 1. Certify valves to be dezincification resistant to the criteria listed above. E. Perform Work to comply with the latest edition of the Minnesota State Building Code including Chapter 4714, the Minnesota Plumbing Code. F. Perform Work to comply with the latest edition of The Wisconsin Administrative Code. G. Perform Work to comply with the latest edition of Iowa State Building Code. H. Conform to ASME A13.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Explanation of manufacturer listings for Part 2 - Products of Division 22 Sections: 1. Select equipment from the listed manufacturers where a list of manufacturers are under the heading "Manufacturers": a. Manufacturers not listed must submit for and be granted approval prior to the end of the bidding period for use on this Project. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 4 b. The list of manufacturers is provided as a convenience to the Contractor, indicating manufacturers that may be able to meet the indicated requirements. c. Being listed does not indicate the availability of any product or approval of a product not containing the indicated features. 2. Use products meeting the indicated requirements where a list of manufacturers are under the heading "Acceptable Manufacturers": a. Approval to use products from manufacturers not listed is not a bid requirement. b. The list of manufacturers is provided as a convenience to the Contractor, indicating manufacturers that may be able to meet the indicated requirements. c. Being listed does not indicate the availability of any product or approval of a product not containing the indicated features. 3. Use products meeting the indicated requirements where manufacturers are not listed for products: a. Approval to use products from manufacturers not listed is not a pre -bid requirement. B. Manufacturers: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Division with minimum 3 years experience. C. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Division with minimum 3 years experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Provide temporary caps on fittings and valves removed from shipping containers and not immediately installed. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on pipes stored on site, but not installed. D. Protect installed piping from entry of foreign materials using temporary covers for idle sections of the Work. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00: Environmental conditions affecting products on site. B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.09 COORDINATION A. Section 01 31 00: Requirements for Coordination. B. Coordinate installation of buried piping with trenching and footing installation. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Section 01 07 00: Product warranties and product bonds. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 5 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Ductile iron pipe conforming to AWWA C151 /ANSI 21.51. 1. Joints conforming to AWWA C111. 2. Provide anchor rods for bends, tees and plugs. 3. Use thrust blocks for 45 degree or greater elbows. 4. Cast iron mechanical joint fittings: AWWA C110 5. Joint restraints: MJ FIELD-LOK as manufactured by U.S. Pipe or equivalent. B. Copper Tubing conforming to ASTM B88: 1. 2-1/2 inches and smaller, Type K, soft copper, seamless. 2. No underground fittings except at connection to site utility- C. Match Civil for water service entrance. 2.02 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L seamless, hard temper: 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, wrought copper. 2. Joints: 95/5 solder or brazing. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type L, seamless, hard temper: 1. Press Fitting Systems: a. ASME B16.18 cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. b. IAPMO PS 117 performance criteria. c. EPDM sealing elements. d. Viega - ProPress, up to 4 inch. e. Victaulic - Permalynx up to 1-1 /2 inch. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. PVC Pipe: Schedule 40, ASTM D2665 with mechanical ring, or fusion or solvent cement. 1. Fittings: PVC, ASTM F1866. 2. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 3. Provide contrasting color primer for solvent weld joints. 2.04 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE (WASTE AND VENT) A. Hubless Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. 1. Fittings: Cast iron, CISPI 301. 2. Couplings: ASTM C1277 and CISPI 310, shielded. B. Pressurized waste discharge (i.e. sump pumps, sewage ejectors, etc.): 1. Pipe: Schedule 40 galvanized steel. 2. Fittings: ASME B16.3 Malleable iron galvanized steel, threaded. 3. Fittings: ASME B16.4 Grey iron, threaded. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 220500-6 C. PVC Pipe: 1. Schedule 40, ASTM D2665 with solvent welded joints. 2. Fittings: PVC, ASTM D1866. 3. Joints: Solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 4. Do not use plastic piping in the following locations: a. Ceiling cavities above rooms served by transfer grilles (air plenums). b. Commercial kitchen drains, boiler room drains. c. Locker rooms or shower areas where piping is exposed. d. Within 8 feet of the floor where piping is exposed. 2.05 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASME B16.4, cast iron. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inch and smaller. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, hard temper. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast brass, or ASME B 16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM B32, Alloy Grade Sb5 tin -antimony, or Alloy Grade Sn95 tin -silver, lead free solder. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or 26, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.06 GATE VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Crane. 2. Grinnell. 3. Hammond. 4. Milwaukee. 5. Nibco, Inc. 6. Stockham. 2-1/2 inch and larger: 1. MSS SP-70, 200 psi CWP, bolted bonnet, non -rising stem. 2. Cast iron body, bonnet, stuffing box, handwheel and wedge; ASTM A 126 Class B. 3. Stem: Steel, ASTM A 108. 4. Non -asbestos packing. 5. Flanged ends. 2.07 BALL VALVE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Apollo Valve. 2. Grinnell. 3. Milwaukee. 4. Nibco, Inc. 5. Watts. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 7 B. 2 Inches and Smaller: NSF 61. MSS SP 110. 1. 600 WOG, 2-piece, full port, forged brass body. 2. Chrome plated brass or stainless steel ball. 3. Reinforced PTFE seats. 4. Extended stems for insulation. 5. Threaded or sweat ends. 2.08 HORIZONTAL SWING CHECK VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Crane 2. Grinnell. 3. Hammond. 4. Milwaukee. 5. Nibco, Inc. 6. Stockham. B. 2 inch and smaller: 1. 200 pound CWP, bronze body, bronze disc. 2. Buna-N coated bronze seat disc. 3. Threaded ends. C. 2-1/2 inch and larger: 1. 200 pound CWP, iron body, bolted cast iron bonnet, flanged ends. 2. Bronze disc to 4 inch site, ductile iron disc with bronze face ring over 4 inch. 2.09 BALANCING VALVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong. 2. Bell & Gossett. 3. Taco. 4. Tour Andersson. 5. Victaulic. 6. Watts. B. Features: 1. Multi -turn globe style or brass ball with glass and carbon filled TFE seat rings. 2. Differential pressure readout ports with EPT insert and check valve. 3. Multi -turn indicator or memory stop allowing closure and return to balanced position. 4. Calibrated nameplate. C. 1 /2 inch to 2 inch size: 1. Bronze body, threaded connections. 2.10 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Ferrous Piping: Class 150, malleable iron, threaded. 2. Copper Piping: Class 150, bronze unions with soldered ends. B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and larger: 1. Ferrous piping: Class 150 forged steel slip-on flanges. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 8 2. Copper piping: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 4. Grooved mechanical couplings for grooved piping systems. C. Dielectric Connections: Union or waterway fitting with galvanized or plated steel or ductile iron casing, with threaded end, grooved end, copper solder end, water impervious isolation barrier. NSF 61, ASTM F-492; Victaulic Style 47 or acceptable substitute. 2.11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Anvil (Grinnell). 2. B-Line - Cooper. 3. Elcen. 4. Erico - Caddy System. 5. Fee and Mason. 6. Michigan Hanger Co. 7. PHD Manufacturing. Plumbing Piping - DWV: 1. Conform to ASME 1331.9. 2. Grinnell Fig. 69 Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 3. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 4. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Grinnell Fig. 126 Cast iron hook. 5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Grinnell Fig. 194 or 15 Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 6. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 7. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 8. Copper Pipe Support: Copper -plated, carbon -steel adjustable, ring. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME 631.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 /2 to 1-1 /2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. 6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3 inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. 9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4 inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 9 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Copper Pipe Support: Copper -plated, Carbon -steel ring. 2.12 BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS. A. Similar to above, but fabricated from stainless steel type 304. 2.13 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.14 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26 gage galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22 gage galvanized steel. C. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. D. Caps: Steel, 22 gage minimum; 16 gage at fire resistant elements. 2.15 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Floors: 18 gage thick galvanized steel. B. Sleeves for Pipes Through Non -fire Rated Beams, Walls, Footings, and Potentially Wet Floors: Steel pipe or 18 gage thick galvanized steel. 2.16 MECHANICAL SLEEVE SEALS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Thunderline Link -Seal, Inc. 2. NMP Corporation. B. Product Description: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between object and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates causing rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation. 2.17 ESCUTCHEONS A. Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2.18 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Elcen. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Hilti. 4. Powerstrut, Inc. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 10 5. Unistrut Corp. 6. Fee and Mason. B. Product Description: Galvanized 12 gage thick steel. With holes 1-1 /2 inches on center. 2.19 FIRESTOPPING A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products. 6. Specified Technology, Inc. B. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only 1 type for each similar application: l . Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non -asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. 5. Mechanical Firestopping Device With Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. 6. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. 7. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. 2.20 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by Firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material - Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 1 1 2.21 VALVE TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. W.H. Brady. b. Marketing Systems, Inc. c. MSI. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Laminated 3-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1 /2 inches diameter. 2.22 PIPE MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1, B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: l . Acceptable Manufacturers: a. W.H. Brady. b. Marketing Systems, Inc. c. MSI. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. C. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. W.H. Brady. b. Marketing Systems, Inc. c. MSI. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6 inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 2.23 LABELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. W.H. Brady. 2. Champion. 3. MSI. 4. Ready Made. 5. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: Laminated 3-layer rigid plastic with engraved black letters on light colored background. 1.9 inch by 0.75 inch minimum size, adhesive backed. Comply with ASME Al3.1 standard for colors and locations. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 12 B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. C. Verify trenches are ready to receive piping. D. The Contractor is responsible for verifying invert elevations with respect to building finished floor elevations and site provisions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel or groove plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Make piping connections to equipment with flanges, grooved joint couplings, or unions. D. Protect open ends of installed pipe with temporary plugs or caps. E. Select hangers to surround insulation, shield and piping on insulated pipe. 3.03 INSTALLATION - FLASHING A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counter -flashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs. B. Flash vent pipes projecting above roof surface with flexible flashing and secure with stainless steel bands or other method approved by roofing contractor. C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with flexible flashing, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 by 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device. D. Seal floor, shower and drains watertight to adjacent materials. E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb. 3.04 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior watertight entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1 inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing or firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 13 3.05 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Support piping from structural above, where located below buildings. B. Coordinate underground piping locations with structural footings. C. Establish elevations of buried domestic water piping with not less than 7 ft of cover outside of building. D. Install, support and restrain cast iron pipe, fittings and couplings in compliance with procedures detailed in ASTM C 1540. E. Establish minimum separation of 10 feet from water piping or sanitary sewer piping in accordance with Minnesota code. F. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Division 31. G. Install ductile iron piping in accordance with AWWA C600. H. Install pipe on prepared bedding. 1 Install PVC piping on a continuous granular bed in accordance with ASTM D2321. 2. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping. 3. Level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches depth. 4. Compact to 95 percent modified Proctor density. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: 1. Backfill trench in accordance with Division 31. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 6 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density. 4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material. 5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. 6. Install plastic ribbon tape continuous over top of pipe. a. Bury ribbon tape 6 inches below finished grade, directly above pipe. 3.06 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Install piping to conserve building space, to not interfere with use of space and other work. 1. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. 2. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. 3. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. B. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. C. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 14 E. Provide shut-off valves: 1. Required by Code. 2. At branch lines serving more than one fixture. 3. With extended valve stems for insulated piping applications. 4. With screwed connections for piping 2-1/2 inch and smaller. 5. With flanged connections for piping 3 inch and larger. 6. With hose end caps on low point drains. F. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. G. Where pipe support members are welded, clean, and apply 1 coat of zinc rich primer to welding. H. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. Hubless fittings and couplings: Use the procedures described in ASTM C1277. Cleanouts: 1. Provide cleanouts at the base of sanitary waste and storm drain risers. 2. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to be flush with finished floor. 3. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. 4. Locate cleanouts to allow clearance for snaking drainage system. 5. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete, flush with grade. K. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. 1. Install vent piping penetrating roofed areas with frost proof jackets having airspace of at least 1 inch between outside surface of pipe and inside surface of frost proof jacket. L. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. 3.07 INSTALLATION - DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install domestic water piping to allow for insulation. Refer to Section 22 07 00, B. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. C. Provide swing joint offsets for branch piping penetrating adjacent walls and floors. D. Install non -conducting dielectric unions for domestic water piping joining dissimilar metals. E. Install press type and grooved joints in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. Select gaskets of an elastomer grade suitable for the intended service, produced by the coupling manufacturer. 3.08 INSTALLATION - SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING SYSTEMS A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1 /8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 15 B. Cast iron pipe, fittings & standard couplings: Installed, supported & restrained using the installation procedures detailed in ASTM C1277. C. Cast iron pipe, fittings & heavy-duty couplings: Installed, supported and restrained using the installation procedures detailed in ASTM C1540. D. Terminate vent pipes passing through roofs at least 12 inches above the roof line. 1. Support at increments not to exceed those allowed by the Minnesota Plumbing Code. E. Provide contrasting color primer for solvent weld joints. 3.09 VALVE INSTALLATION A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install uniform length nipple and threaded fittings on both sides of solder end valves. Install union on one side of valve if union or flange is not located within 5 feet for other service reasons. C. Install 3/4-inch hose -end ball valves with threaded cap for drains at low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. D. Install branch isolation valves where the branch piping is equal to or larger than half the upstream main pipe size. This does not apply to mains smaller than 1-1 /2 inch. E. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation. F. Locate valve to be accessible through access panels where valves are installed above gypsum or plaster ceilings and chases. Coordinate size and location of access doors. G. Refer to Section 22 07 00 for insulation requirements for valves. 3.10 FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE _ I- lies: III 11479 A �!1 �. A (`TA A CO 1 A .:+1, (\ l nl A. Tnrough Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rafcd Assen iblies: UL 1479 Vrr\,)IIVI LUI•t VV I I I I %J I inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings not less than 1 hour: 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings not less than 1 hour. 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings not less than 1 hour: a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required. B. Through Penetration Firestopping of Non -Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion: 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of 3 stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of 2 stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve one hour fire resistant rating for assembly in which joint is installed. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 16 D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM E1 19 with 0.10-inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve one hour fire resistant rating for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3.11 HANGER SCHEDULE PIPE HANGER SPACING PIPE MATERIAL MAXIMUM HANGER SPACING Feet HANGER ROD DIAMETER Inches Cast Iron (All Sizes) 5 5/8 Cast Iron (All Sizes) w/10 foot pipe length 10 5/8 Copper Tube, 1-1 /4 inches and smaller 6 1 /2 Copper Tube, 1-1 /2 inches and larger 10 1 /2 PVC (All Sizes) Per Plumbing Code 3/8 Steel, 3 inches and smaller 12 1 /2 Steel, 4 inches and larger 12 5/8 A. Note for Cast Iron Pipe: Locate a hanger within 18 inches of each joint. Also provide hanger at each change of direction and each branch connection. B. Select hangers for insulated piping to surround the insulation and pipe saddle. 3.12 HANGER AND SUPPOR INSTALLATION A. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. B. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, [NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65)] <Insert size> and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. C. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder -actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder -actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder -actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical -expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6 inches beyond supported equipment. Refer to Section 03 30 00. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 05 00 - 17 B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports using steel members, formed steel channel, angle iron or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. 3.14 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Install gate valves in domestic water systems to isolate branch piping 2-1/2 inch and larger. B. Install ball valves for shut-off service and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. C. Install ball valves in domestic water systems to isolate branch piping 2 inch and smaller. D. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings and/or specified herein. E. Install spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps. F. Install check valves on discharge of pumps in pumped sanitary piping. G. Install balancing valves downstream of domestic hot water circulating pumps. 1. Up to 3 size: Install with 3 pipe diameters straight pipe at inlet and 1 at outlet. 2. Follow manufacturer's recommendations if more stringent than stated above. 3.15 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 4 copies of a typewritten list identifying numbered valves. Include valve number, service, location and area served. B. Plumbing stop valves at fixtures are exempt from valve tagging and inclusion on the valve list. C. Include a copy of the valve identification list in each maintenance manual. 3.16 PIPE IDENTIFICATION A. Use pressure sensitive labels, pre -formed markers or stenciling. B. Include labeling of service, direction of flow and tape bands at each end of labels with approved colors. C. Stencils: Black letters on a yellow background using stenciling brushes. Provide stencils for pipe service and direction of flow. One inch minimum height. D. Provide pipe identification for exposed piping within the building and in accessible concealed spaces, such as above lay -in ceilings and at access panels. Minimum locations: 1. At not more than 30 foot intervals on straight runs of pipes. 2. Wherever a pipe turns 90 degrees. 3. Wherever a pipe passes through a wall, on both sides. 4. At other locations deemed necessary for ease of maintenance, e.g. access panels. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 18 Piping that does not require identification: 1. Fixture supplies. 2. Below grade piping. 3. Inaccessible piping concealed in chase walls. 4. P-traps. 5. Indirect waste piping from kitchen equipment. 6. Fire sprinkler piping. Abbreviations: label the piping as follows: 1. Condensate Drain CD 2. Domestic Cold Water (Softened) CW 3. Domestic Hot Water HW 4. Domestic Circulating Hot Water CHW 5. Hard Water HARD W 6. Non -Potable Water NON -POT WTR 7. Storm Drainage RWL 3.17 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification labels for scheduled equipment (except drains and plumbing fixtures) permanently affixed to equipment with mechanical fasteners (rivets, screws, bolts or other approved methods) in a prominent location. B. Install labels level and drawn tight to the equipment surface. Provide backing or back-up plates where required by the fastening devices. On pumps and similar small equipment, the label may be located on the wall adjacent to the equipment. C. Spell out the description of each piece of equipment (Water Heater #1, for example). 3.18 CHLORINATION OF DOMESTIC WATER LINES A. Chlorination of Domestic Water Lines: Clean domestic water system in building, disinfect system in accordance with governing codes and State Health Department Requirements, and flush entire system clean with potable water: 1. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until no dirty water appears at the points of outlet. 2. Isolate portion of system to be chlorinated. a. Fill with a water -chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine and allow to stand for 24 hours or b. Fill with a water -chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and allow to stand for 3 hours. 3. Following the standing time, flush with clean potable water until no chlorine remains in the water coming from the system. 4. Provide written certification to Architect/Engineer that chlorination and flushing of domestic water system has been completed. 3.19 CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 19 C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash from site periodically and dispose off -site; do not burn or bury. E. Refer to Section Ol 70 00: Requirements for cleaning. END OF SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 05 00 - 20 SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Plumbing piping insulation, jackets and accessories. 2. Plumbing equipment insulation, jackets and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing: a. Hanger sizes for insulated pipes. b. Pipe identification. c. General material and installation requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): I. C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 2. C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 3. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 4. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 5. C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 6. C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 7. C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NIPS System). 8. C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 9. C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 10. D1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 11. E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 12. E2231 - Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics. B. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. PLUMBING INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 22 07 00 - 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Product description, thermal characteristics, ASTM standards compliance. 1. List specific materials for each service, and location. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certify insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, UL-723, and NFPA 255. 1. Follow mounting procedures of ASTM E2231. 2. Provide accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tapes and glass cloth to retain the indicated index rating of the assembly. B. Manufacture pipe insulation inner and outer diameters in accordance with ASTM C585. C. Manufacture factory fabricated fitting covers in accordance with ASTM C450. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. C. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original wrapping. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Johns Manville. PLUMBING INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 07 00 - 2 4. Owens-Corning. B. Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products: 1. Aeroflex, Aerocell. 2. Armacell, LLC, Armaflex. 3. Nomaco; FlexTherm. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. Type P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation with integral all-purpose jacket: 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F. 3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: ASTM C 1136, Type I, factory applied reinforced foil Kraft with self- sealing adhesive joints. 4. Jacket Temperature Limit: Minus 20 to 150 degrees F. B. Type P-2: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular: 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Operating Temperature Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F. 2.03 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, white kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms. B. PVC Fitting Covers: 1. Rated 25/50 for flame spread and smoke developed, tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Match adjacent PVC jacket thickness where applicable, 20 mil minimum thickness. 3. 30 mil thickness for outdoor applications and indoor applications within 6 feet of the floor. 4. White. C. Aluminum Fitting Covers: 1. Fabricated from 1100 aluminum alloy, two piece assembly. 2. 0.032-inch thickness, 2-1/2 inch size and larger. D. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 1. Material compounds in accordance with ASTM D1784. White. 2. Thickness: 20 mil. 30 mil minimum for outdoor applications. E. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive or pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape. 2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives and mastic: Compatible with insulation and jacket materials. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. PLUMBING INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 07 00 - 3 C. Piping 1-1/2 Inches Diameter and Smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. D. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum jacket single piece construction with self adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify piping and equipment has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION AND JACKET A. Pipe and cylindrical fittings: 1. Verify that insulation is correct size to snugly fit around specific piping. 2. Apply insulation to clean piping. 3. Apply mastic to piping to temporarily secure insulation to pipes when jacket is not permanently affixed to outside of insulation system. 4. Seal exposed ends of insulation with a full coat of mastic. Fittings: l . Apply pre-cut insulation to fittings to provide a snug fit. 2. Insulate other fittings with 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket compressed to the same thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. a. Secure fitting insulation with fiberglass tape or 18 gauge stainless steel wire. b. Finish with a smooth coat of mineral fiber cement. c. After the cement is dry, finish with 4 oz. canvas adhered with permanent adhesive. C. Jacket and fitting covers: 1. Seal jackets and end laps with mastic applied to 2 surfaces or wiih self-sealing type lop system. 2. Secure fitting covers by stapling and taping the ends to the adjacent pipe insulation. 3. For piping systems required to have a vapor barrier, seal seam edges with vapor barrier adhesive and wrap ends with vapor barrier tape overlapping the adjacent jacket. 3.03 INSTALLATION - PIPING SYSTEMS A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate seams in least visible locations. B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of 1 hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than 1 hour. C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. PLUMBING INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 07 00 - 4 2. Furnish factory -applied or field -applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory -applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field -applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F: 1. Furnish factory -applied or field -applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory -applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Insulate unions and flanges at equipment with removable insulation bands held in place with aluminum straps. E. Inserts and Shields: 1. Piping 1-1 /2 Inches Diameter and Smaller: Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and insulation. 2. Piping 2 Inches Diameter and Larger: Install insert between support shield and piping and under finish jacket: a. Insert Configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of thickness and contour matching adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. b. Insert Material: Compression resistant insulating material suitable for planned temperature range and service. 3. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: Install galvanized steel shield between roller and inserts. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: l . Push insulation on to piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered. 5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces less than 8 feet above finished floor: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers. H. Piping Exterior to Building (or unconditioned spaces, such as attic or crawlspace): Provide vapor retarder jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor retarder cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located at 3 or 9 o'clock position on side of horizontal piping with overlap facing down to shed water or on bottom side of horizontal piping. Buried Piping: Insulate only where insulation manufacturer recommends insulation product may be installed in trench, tunnel or direct buried. Install factory fabricated assembly with inner all-purpose service jacket with self-sealing lap, and asphalt impregnated open mesh glass fabric, with 1 mil thick aluminum foil sandwiched between three layers of bituminous compound; outer surface faced with polyester film. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PLUMBING INSULATION 220700-5 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Pipinq Insulation Schedule: INSULATION INSULATION JACKET PIPING SYSTEM TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS REQUIREMENT Domestic Hot AP -concealed Water Supply 1-1 /4 inches and 1 /2 INCH locations, and P-1 smaller PVC Where Recirculation 1-1/2 inches and 1 INCH exposed to larger finished spaces Domestic Cold 1-1 /4 inches and AP -concealed Water 1 /2 INCH locations, smaller (Hard and Soft P-1 1-1/2 inches and PVC Where Water) larger 1 INCH exposed to finished spaces Buried Domestic 1-1 /4 inches and 1 /2 INCH Hot Water smaller Supply and P-2 1-1/2 inches and 1 INCH Recirculation larger END OF SECTION PLUMBING INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 07 00 - b SECTION 22 11 00 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Hose bibs. 2. Wall Hydrants. 3. Backflow preventers and vacuum breakers. 4. Water hammer arrestors. 5. Domestic hot water circulating pumps. 6. Balancing valves. 7. Thermometers. 8. Thermostatic mixing valves. 9. Water meter. Related Sections: l . Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete house keeping pads specified by this Section. 2. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this Section. 3. Section 08 31 00 - Access Panels: Product requirements for access doors for placement by this Section. 4. Section 09 91 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this Section. 5. Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing: a. Administrative procedures: 1) Submittals. 2) Quality Assurance. 3) Delivery Storage and Handling. b. Hangers and supports. c. Flashing and Sleeves. d. Firestopping. e. Pipe and equipment identification. f. Installation requirements for piping materials applying to various systems. g. Chlorination. In. Cleaning. 6. Section 22 07 00 - Plumbing Insulation: Execution requirements for insulated pipes. 7. Division 26 - Wiring Devices: Execution requirements for electric connections to equipment specified by this Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z358.1 - Emergency Eyewash and Shower Equipment. B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.3 -Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 2211 00-1 2. B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 4. B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. B16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 6. B31.9 - Building Services Piping. 7. B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element. C. American Society of Sanitary Engineering (ASSE): 1. 1010 - Performance Requirements for Water Hammer Arresters. 2. 1011 - Performance Requirements for Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers. 3. 1012 - Performance Requirements for Backflow Preventer with Intermediate Atmospheric Vent. 4. 1013 - Performance Requirements for Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection Principle Backflow Preventers. 5. 1019 - Performance Requirements for Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant, Automatic Draining Type. 6. 1069 - Performance Requirements for Automatic Temperature Control Mixing Valves. 7. 1070 - Performance Requirements for Water Temperature Limiting Devices. D. ASTM International (ASTM): l . A53i A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 3. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 4. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Caslings for General Applications. 5. D1785 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 6. D2235 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. 7. D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40. 8. D2467 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. 9. D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent -Cemented Joints With Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. 10. F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 11. F 891 _ Standard Specification for Coextruded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe With a Cellular Core. 12. F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications. E. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. American Water Works Association (AWWA): l . Cl 10 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron and Grey -Iron Fittings, 3 in. through 48 in. (75 mm through 1200 mm), for Water and Other Liquids. 2. C11 1 - American National Standard for Rubber -Gasket Joints for Ductile -Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings. 3. C151 - American National Standard for Ductile -Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water. 4. C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile -Iron Water Mains and their Appurtenances. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00 - 2 5. C900 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe, 4 inches through 12 inches, for Water Distribution. 6. C901 - Polyethylene (PE) Pressure Pipe and Tubing, 1 /2 inches through 3 inches, for Water Service. 7. C950 - Fiberglass Pressure Pipe. 8. M6 - Water Meters - Selection, Installation, Testing, and Maintenance. G. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry: l . SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. SP 67 - Butterfly Valves. 3. SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 4. SP 70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 5. SP 71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 6. SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. 7. SP 80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. 8. SP 85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded. 9. SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 10. SP 110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket -Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends. H. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). National Sanitation Foundation International (NSF): 1. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 2. NSF/ANSI 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content. J. Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI): 1. WH2O1 - Water Hammer Arrester Standard. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Piping: Submit catalog information on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. 2. Valves: a. Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for each service. b. Identify valve application in the submittal. 3. Domestic Water Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 4. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for pumps, valves and accessories. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves and equipment. 1. Submit certification of water disinfection and chlorination. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 2211 00-3 B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts list, exploded assembly views and recommended maintenance intervals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For drinking water service, provide valves complying with NSF 61. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3-years' experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3-years' experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept valves and equipment on Site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. C. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. D. Provide temporary end caps and closuros on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with Section 1417 of the Safe Drinking Water Act. 1. Comply with the Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act (January 4; 201-1). B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTERIOR HOSE BIBBS A. Manufacturers: 1. Chicago Faucet. 2. Josam. 3. Nibco. 4. Smith. 5. Woodford. 6. Zurn. B. 3/4 inch: 125 psi, CWP, copper to hose, bronze body, angle type, vacuum breaker on hose outlet. NIBCO Fig. 72VB, or approved equal. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00 - 4 2.02 EXTERIOR WALL HYDRANTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Chicago Faucet. 2. Josam. 3. Nibco. 4. Smith. 5. Woodford. 6. Zurn. B. ASSE 1019; non -freeze, self -draining type with polished bronze wall plate hose thread spout, and removable key operator, vacuum breaker. Woodford Model 67. 2.03 HOT & COLD WALL HYDRANT- HOT & COLD A. Manufacturers: 1. Chicago Faucet. 2. Josam. 3. MiFab 4. Nibco. 5. Smith. 6. Woodford. 7. Zurn. B. Combination hot and cold water, non -freeze, encased wall hydrant with lockable cover for flush installation. Complete with bronze casing, all bronze interior parts, non -turning operating rods with free-floating compression closure valves, replacable bronze seat and seat washer, and combination 3/4" female or 1" male straight IP inlet. Zurn Model Z1325 2.04 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Conbraco. 2. Febco. 3. Watts. 4. Wilkins. B. Reduced Pressure Zone Principal (RPZ) Backflow Preventers: 1. Comply with ASSE 1013. 2. 2 Inch and Smaller: NPT threaded connections and quarter -turn, full port, resilient seated, bronze ball valve shut -offs, with drain connection. 3. 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: Flange connecting, wedge gate valves with non -rising stem and resilient seats, FDA approved epoxy coated check and relief valves, replaceable bronze check seats and stainless steel relief valve seat. 4. Accessories: Air gap funnel. 2.05 VACUUM BREAKERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Febco. 2. Watts. 3. Zurn. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00 - 5 B. Atmospheric: 1. Comply with Size to match water inlet pipe size. 2. Basis of Design: Watts model S8C with polished chrome finish, 1/2-inch MPT outlet for hand held shower applications. ASSE approved. 2.06 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam. 2. Precision Plumbing Products 3. Sioux Chief. 4. Smith. 5. Zurn. B. Basis of Design: Josam Series 75000. 1. Stainless steel body with nitrogen filled stainless bellows, sized in accordance with PDI W H-201. C. Basis of Design: Josam 75000S Series. l . Barrel -piston type water hammer arresters with hard drawn copper barrel, HHPP piston, multiple "O" ring seal, lubricant, pre -charged permanently sealed air cushion and male IPS plug. 150 PSI working pressure and sized in accordance with PDI WH-201. 2.07 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMP A. Manufacturers and Models: 1. Armstrong. 2. Bell and Gossett. 3. Grundfos. 4. Taco. Construction: 1. Body: stainless steel or lead-free bronze (NSF 61 G), inline design, with flange piping connections; 150-psi workir7g pressure. 2. Shaft: Horizontal, carbon steel, alloy steel or stainless steel. 3. Impeller: 30 percent glass filled Noryl or similar polymer. 4. Bearings: Permanently oil lubricated, maintenance free. 5. 120 volt, single phase motor with overload protection. 2.08 BALANCING VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Armstrong. 2. Bell & Gossett - Circuit Setter Plus. 3. Taco - Accu-Flo. B. Description: 1. ANSI/NSF-61 Annex G compliant (lead free). 2. Calibrated ball style balance valve. 3. Two pressure taps with threaded caps. 4. Indexed flow adjustment dial. 5. Memory stop. 6. Calibration chart. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00 - 6 7. Sweat or threaded ends. 2.09 THERMOMETERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Trerice. 2. U. S. Gauge. 3. Weiss. 4. Weksler. 5. Winters. B. Description: 1. 9-inch minimum height, mercury free medium in metallic case and clear display window. 2. Adjustable angle pivot joint. 3. Brass socket; 2-1/2 inch minimum length. 4. High conductivity paste. 5. Display in Fahrenheit and Celsius scales. 6. Basis of Design: a. 30 to 240 degrees F for conventional water heating applications. Weiss Model 9VU35-240. b. Brass well, length to match element. Weiss model E35-75BS thermowell. 2.10 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 22 05 00. 2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVE A. Manufacturers: 1. Bradley. 2. Lawler. 3. Leonard. 4. Powers. Serving Building 1. ASSE 1017 2. Pressure Rating: 125 psig minimum unless otherwise indicated. 3. Material: Bronze body with corrosion -resistant interior components. 4. Threaded union inlets and outlet. 5. Accessories: Manual temperature control, check stops on hot- and cold -water supplies, and adjustable, temperature -control handle. 6. Valve Finish: Rough bronze. 7. Piping Finish: Copper. 8. 48 GPM at 5 psi pressure drop,95 GPM at 20 psi pressure drop. 9. 1.0 GPM minimum flow rate. 10. Basis of Design: Leonard TM- 520B-LF-DT C. Serving Tempered Lavatory Faucet: 1. ASSE 1069. 2. Adjustable outlet temperature up to 120 degrees F. 3. 140 degree hot water supply temperature. 4. 1/2-inch inlet connections, 1 /2 inch outlet. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION 2211 00-7 5. Dial thermometer and shut-off valve on outlet. 6. 2.5 GPM at 5 psi pressure drop, 5.5 GPM at 20 psi pressure drop. 7. 0.5 GPM minimum flow rate. 8. Basis of Design: Lawler Series 61, Valve No. 61-10, Unit No. 84008. Chrome finish if exposed. D. Serving Outdoor Shower: l . Adjustable outlet temperature 85 degrees F to 135 degrees F. 2. Union end stop and check inlets with removable stainless steel strainers. 3. 9 gpm at 5 psi pressure drop. Factory set for 110 degree outlet temperature. 4. Dial thermometer and shut-off valve on outlet. 5. Lawler Model 66-25 Unit No. 83008. E. Serving Emergency Eyewash: 1. ASSE 1069. 2. Positive shut-off upon failure of cold water supply. 3. Integral cold water bypass. 139 degree hot water inlet temperature (maximum). 4. Two to 7.0 gpm capability at 30 psi to serve eyewash or eye/facewash flow. 5. Inlet thermometers and outlet thermometer. 85 degree F. leaving water setting. 6. Basis of Design: Lawler model 911 Unit No. E/F. Chrome finish if exposed. 2.12 WATER METER A. Main service meter: Furnished by the City. Coordinate and pay associated fees to obtain city water meter for installation under this secliun. B. Provide deduct meter for lawn irrigation flow measurement. Comply with City water department requirements for deduct meter applications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01-30 00: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Pipe and fittings: Refer to Section 22 05 00. B. Valves: Refer to Section 22 05 00. C. Hose bibs: Provide vacuum breakers where directed by the Plumbing Inspector. D. Wall Hydrants: 1. Insulate piping through the wall and maintain the integrity of the vapor barrier. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00-8 2. Apply sealant to wall surface behind the wall hydrant. E. Yard Hydrants: 1. Provide 12-inch x 12-inch concrete pad. Isolate hydrant riser from concrete with tight fitting sleeve. Backflow preventers: l . Register installation with the Department of Labor and Industry. 2. Extend drain piping from funnel to floor drain. 3. Provide double check backflow preventer for water connections to: a. Vending machines. b. Coffee makers with direct water supply connections. c. Commercial Dishwashers. G. Vacuum breakers: 1. Provide vacuum breakers at hose connections, downstream of valve. 2. Provide vacuum breakers for hand-held shower fixtures, mounted 84" above floor. H. Water hammer arrestors: Install with shut-off valve and threaded fitting. Domestic hot water circulating pumps: Install in accordance with detail. Control pump through 7-day timer and line voltage aquastat unless indicated otherwise. J. Balancing valves: Refer to Section 22 05 00. K. Thermostatic mixing valves: Set outlet temperature limit to not exceed 115 degrees F. Water meter: l . Install water meter furnished by the Utility. Pay the meter charge if there is one. 2. Provide meter support and other equipment and materials required by the Utility. 3. Install upstream and downstream isolation valves. Provide union fitting or flange fitting between the isolation valves. 4. Install remote reader in accordance with City requirements. M. Chlorination: Refer to Section 22 05 00. N. Thermometers and Gages: l . Install thermometers in piping systems where indicated on Drawings. 2. Install one pressure gage for each pump, locate taps before strainers and on suction and discharge of pump; pipe to gage. Omit tap upstream of strainer for in -line pumps. 3. Install gage taps in piping. 4. Install pressure gages with snubbers. Provide needle valve or ball valve to isolate each gage. 5. Install thermometers in piping systems in sockets in short couplings. Enlarge pipes smaller than 2-1/2 inches for installation of thermometer sockets. Allow clearance from insulation. 6. Provide instruments with scale ranges selected according to service with largest appropriate scale. 7. Install gages and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from normal operating level. Install vertical to 45 degrees off vertical. 8. Adjust gages and thermometers to final angle, clean windows and lenses, and calibrate. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00 - 9 O. Hangers and Supports: 1. Install hangers and supports in accordance with Section 22 05 00. Above Ground Piping: 1. Refer to Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing for additional requirements. 2. Install non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. 3. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. 4. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. 5. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. 6. Install piping level, or slope piping and arrange to drain at low points. 7. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 00. 8. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. 9. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. 10. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies. 11. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 91 00. 12. Install domestic water piping in accordance with ASME 1331.9. 13. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. Refer to Section 22 05 00. 14. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 07 84 00. 15. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. 16. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. 17. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 18. Provide flow controls in water circulating systems as indicated on Drawings. 19. Install potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, irrigation systems. 20. Pipe relief from valves, back -flow preventers and drains to nearest floor drain. 21. Test backflow preventers in accordance with ASSE 5013. 22. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on hot and cold water supply piping. Q. Service Connections: 1. Provide mechanical sleeve seal for wall penetrations. Anchor service main to concrete. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Test domestic water piping system in accordance with applicable code or local authority having jurisdiction. 3.05 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of wasto materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00 - 10 r B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. (� D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash from site periodically and dispose off -site; do not burn or bury. 3.06 CLEANING r 11 A. Refer to Section 01 70 00. B. Refer to Section 22 05 00. END OF SECTION FACILITY WATER DISTRIBUTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2211 00 - 11 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 22 13 00 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: a. Floor drains. b. Trench drains. c. Cleanouts. d. Sumps. 2. Sump pump. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for placement of concrete specified by this section. 2. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 3. Section 08 31 00 - Access Panels: Product requirements for access doors for placement by this section. 4. Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing: Product and installation requirements for piping materials applying to various systems. 5. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Execution requirements for electric connections to equipment specified by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. Al 12.21.1 -Floor Drains. 2. B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM): 1. A74 - Standard specification for cast iron soil pipe and fittings. 2. C564 - Standard specification for rubber gaskets for joining cast iron soil pipe and fittings. C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI): 1. 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 2. 310 -Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes for sewage -ejectors, and manholes. C 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300-1 C. Product Data: 1. Sanitary Drainage Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog information, component sizes, rough -in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. 2. Pumps: Submit pump type, capacity, certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation instructions for material and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00: Closeout procedures. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and clean -outs. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit frequency of treatment required for interceptors. Include, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views for pumps and equipment. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Minnesota standards. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years experience. -B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 60 00. B. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FLOOR DRAINS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith. 2. Josam. 3. Wade. 4. Watts. 5. Zurn. Construction: 1. ASME Al 12.21.1. 2. Coated cast iron body. 3. Flashing collar with threaded strainer connection. 4. Drainage flange. C. Basis of Design: 1. Floor Drain (FD-1): Josam 30000-A series, with 4-inch satin finish bronze strainer, invertible flashing collar, bottom outlet, vandal -proof screws. 2. Floor Drain (FD-2): Josam 30000-E series, with 4-inch round Nikaloy strainer, invertible flashing collar, bottom outlet. 3. Floor Drain (FD-3): Josam 30000-E series with 6-inch heavy duty tractor grate, invertible flashing collar, bottom outlet. 2.02 TRENCH DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. JR Smith/ACO (9814). 2. Polycast (600 Series with DG0647 grate and DA05425 hold down device). 3. Watts (Dead Level D-SS-FS). 4. Zurn (Z806-HDS-U4-RFS-VP). B. Trench Drain (TD-1): 1. Trench: 6 inches wide by 48 inches long, pre -sloped. 2. Channel: UV stabilized, fiberglass reinforced polymer, polymer concrete or polypropylene. 3. Frame: Stainless steel or ductile iron with Stainless Steel Frame Guard. 4. Outlet: Integral 4 inch bottom outlet. 5. Grate: Slotted stainless steel; DIN Class A load rating. 6. Accessories: Provide frame anchors, vandal -proof grate lockdowns and construction covers. 2.03 CLEANOUTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith. 2. Josam. 3. Wade. 4. Watts. 5. Zurn. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 13 00 - 3 B. Floor Cleanout (CO): Provide Josam Series 58580-1 series, or equal, with satin finish bronze top and carpet cleanout marker where appropriate. Provide chrome cover when located in a wall. 2.04 SUMPS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Brown Minneapolis Tank. 2. Jackel. 3. Midwest Tank. 4. Topp Industries. B. Wet Well Cover: Sized for sump diameter with perimeter bolting. 3/8 inch thick steel. Include inspection opening with hinged or bolted cover plate Provide companion ring if not furnished with sump basin. Weil model 8805 and 8816 curb ring. C. Sump Basin: 1. Description: 30 inch diameter by 84 inch deep fiberglass or polyethylene sump. 2. Provide anti -float flange or encase in concrete. 2.05 SUMP PUMP A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Bell & Gossett. 2. Gould. 3. Hydromatic. 4. Little Giant Model ES40W1-10. 5. Weil. 6. Zoeller. Description: 1. Floor mounted epoxy coated cast iron housing and volute. 2. Composite impeller. 3. Cold rolled steel shaft, Nitrile shaft seal with carbon and ceramic faces. 4. Upper and lower ball bearings. 5. Stainless steel fasteners, 6. Pre wired float valve control, 10 foot long, 16/3 SJTW-A power cord. 7. Provide alarm system with floats, wiring, contacts and alarm horn. 120V connection. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify elevations with site utility work prior to commencing work. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside of pipe before assembly. Remove burrs. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 13 00 - 4 C. Protect open ends of pipe from dirt and debris using temporary plugs or caps. 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Pitch drain, waste, and vent piping 1 /4 inch per foot minimum for 3 inch pipe and smaller and 1 /8 inch per foot minimum for 4 inches and larger. Do not slope more than 1 /2 inch per foot. B. Pitch above grade vent pipe to drain, 1/ 16 inch per foot minimum, and below grade vent pipe slope to match drain and waste requirements. C. Support piping so it will not sag. D. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions for neoprene gasket connections to specialties. E. Install top of hubs below finish floor when masonry partition wall thickness is insufficient to conceal hub and/or outside diameter of hub is greater than stud width. F. Do not exceed 35 feet horizontal length for above grade plastic waste and vent piping. G. Install an approved expansion joint at intervals not to exceed 35 feet for vertical plastic piping. H. Floor Drains: Install accurately where indicated on the drawings: 1. Install with top set level with finished floor, unless indicated otherwise. 2. Trap and vent as required by local code authority. Cleanouts: Install full size at the following locations: l . Base of waste stacks. 2. Ninety degree turns in mains. 3. Point where sewer leaves building. 4. All other necessary points as indicated and required to permit easy system rodding: a. Every 50 feet on lines 3 inches or less in size. b. Every 100 feet on lines 4 inches or more in size. J. Encase exterior cleanouts in concrete flush with grade. K. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. 3.04 INSTALLATION - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 22 05 00. 3.05 INSTALLATION - BURIED PIPING SYSTEMS A. Verify connection size, location, and inverts are as indicated on Drawings. B. Coordinate underground piping locations with structural footings. C. Establish elevations of buried piping with not less than 5 feet of cover. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 13 00 - 5 D. Establish minimum separation of 10 feet from water piping in accordance with Minnesota code. E. Remove scale and dirt on inside of piping before assembly. F. Excavate pipe trench in accordance with Division 31. G. Install pipe to elevation as indicated on Drawings. H. Place bedding material at trench bottom to provide uniform bedding for piping, level bedding materials in one continuous layer not exceeding 4 inches compacted loose depth; compact to 95 percent maximum density. I. Install pipe on prepared bedding. J. Route pipe in straight line. K. Pipe Cover and Backfilling: l . Backfill trench in accordance with Division 31. 2. Maintain optimum moisture content of fill material to attain required compaction density. 3. After hydrostatic test, evenly backfill entire trench width by hand placing backfill material and hand tamping in 6 inches compacted layers to 12 inches minimum cover over top of jacket. Compact to 95 percent maximum density. 4. Evenly and continuously backfill remaining trench depth in uniform layers with backfill material. 5. Do not use wheeled or tracked vehicles for tamping. 3.06 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING A. Establish invert elevations, slopes for drainage to 1 /8 inch per foot minimum. Maintain gradients. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall -surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed ail. Provide clearances a clear lout for snukling uIalnage system. C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. D. Install piping to maintain headroom. Do not spread piping, conserve space. E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. F. Provide access where valves and fittings are not accessible. G. Increase vent stacks to 3 inches in diameter (minimum) for vents extending through the roof. H. Install vent piping penetrating roof with frost proof jackets having air space of at least f- inch between outside surface of pipe and inside surface of frost proof jacket. I. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 13 00 - 6 J. Construct the roof jacket with a roof flange of 16 ounce copper or sheet lead of not less than 4 pounds per square foot. Maintain separation from fresh air intakes indicated on the drawings but not less than 10 feet horizontal. K. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. L. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 91 00. M. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream. N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. O. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. Refer to Section 07 84 00. P. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Section 01 40 00: Field inspecting, testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Test sanitary waste and vent piping system in accordance with the Sate of Minnesota Rules and Regulations, and local authority having jurisdiction. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash from site periodically and dispose off -site; do not burn or bury. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FACILITY SANITARY SEWERAGE 221300-7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 22 33 00 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial electric water heaters. 2. Diaphragm -type expansion tanks. B. Related Sections: l . Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 2. Section: 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to domestic water heaters. 3. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. PTC 25 - Pressure Relief Devices. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Shop drawings: Indicate size of taps and performance data. Indicate dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points, taps, and drains. C. Product Data: Submit dimensioned drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. Submit electrical characteristics and connection locations. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit replacement part numbers and availability. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Minnesota standard. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years experience. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 33 00 - 1 B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00: Products storage and handling requirements. B. Accept water heaters on site in original labeled cartons. Inspect for damage. C. Protect tanks with temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Section 01 70 00: Product warranties and product bonds. B. Provide 3 years or longer written guarantee. Tankless type water heaters to have a 1-year warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRIC WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith 2. American Water Heater Group 3. Bradford -White 4. State 5. Or approved equal B. Capacity -and characteristics as indicated on Drawings. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel; thermally insulated with glass fiber; encased in corrosion - resistant steel jacket with baked -on enamel finish. D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with externally adjustable temperature range from 120 to 170 degrees F, flanged or screw -in nichrome elements, enclosed controls and electrical junction box, operating light and high temperature limit thermostat. E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.02 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Electrical Characteristics: In accordance with Division 26 and as indicated on Drawirgs. B. Disconnect Switch: Factory mount disconnect switch in on equipment. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 223300-2 2.03 DIAPHRAGM -TYPE EXPANSION TANKS A. Provide diaphragm type pressure tanks of the size and capacity shown on the drawings. Precharge to 40 PSI. B. Provide suitable inlet and outlet tappings. C. Construct tank of galvanized steel and provide a 100 percent corrosion free NSF approved lining. Provide permanently sealed heavy-duty butyl diaphragm with five year written warranty for entire assembly. Test for 125 psig working pressure. D. Manufacturer: Amtrol Therm-X-Trol, Bell & Gossett, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over water heaters. B. Connect domestic hot water and domestic cold water piping to supply and return water heater connections. C. Install the following piping accessories. Refer to Section 22 11 00. 1. On supply: a. Thermometer well and thermometer b. Strainer c. Pressure gage d. Shutoff valve 2. On return: a. Thermometer well and thermometer b. Pressure gage c. Shutoff valve D. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain. E. Install water heater trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting. F. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. G. Install control wiring between water heater control panel and field mounted control devices. H. Install Work in accordance with State of Minnesota standards. 3.02 SCHEDULES A. Water heaters: Refer to schedule on Drawings. END OF SECTION ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 33 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 22 34 00 FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Commercial gas -fired water heaters. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Execution requirements for concrete housekeeping pads specified by this Section. 2. Section: 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to domestic water heaters. 3. Section 23 11 23 - Facility Natural -Gas Piping: Execution requirements for gas piping connections specified by this Section. 4. Division 26 - Electrical: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.10.3 - Gas Water Heaters - Vol. III Storage, with Input Ratings Above 75,000 Btu per Hour, Circulating and Instantaneous Water Heaters. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers: 1. ASME PTC 25 - Pressure Relief Devices. 2. ASME Section VIII - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Pressure Vessels. D. International Code Commission: 1. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC). E. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Water Heaters: Submit dimensioned drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections to other equipment and piping. Indicate pump type, capacity and power requirements. Submit electrical characteristics and connection locations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit mounting and support requirements. FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 34 00 - 1 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit replacement part numbers and availability. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3-years' experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 3-years' experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements: Products storage and handling requirements. B. Accept water heaters on site in original labeled cartons. Inspect for damage. C. Protect tanks with temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Furnish 3-year manufacturer warranty for commercial domestic water heaters. B. Furnish 5-year manufacturer warranty for domestic hot water storage tanks. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 COMMERCIAL GAS FIRED WATER HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. A.O. Smith. 2. Bock. 3, Bradford -White. 4. PVI. 5. State. B. Type: Vertical storage, tank type, natural gas fired domestic hot water heater. C. Tank: Glass lined welded steel ASME labeled; multiple flue passages, 4-inch diameter inspection port, thermally insulated with minimum 2-inches glass fiber, encased in corrosion -resistant steel jacket; baked -on enamel finish; floor shield and legs. D. Controls: Automatic water thermostat with adjustable temperature range from 120 to 180 degrees F. Automatic reset high temperature limiting thermostat factory set at 195 degrees F, gas pressure regulator, multi -ribbon or tubular burner, 100 percent safety shut-off pilot and thermocouple, flue baffle and draft hood. FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 34 00 - 2 E. Accessories: Brass water connections and dip tube, drain valve, magnesium anode, and ASME temperature and pressure relief valve. 2.02 DIAPHRAGM -TYPE EXPANSION TANKS A. Provide diaphragm type pressure tanks of the size and capacity shown on the drawings. Precharge to 40 PSI. B. Provide suitable inlet and outlet tappings. C. Construct tank of galvanized steel and provide a 100 percent corrosion free NSF approved lining. Provide permanently sealed heavy-duty butyl diaphragm with 5-year written warranty for entire assembly. Test for 125 psig working pressure. D. Manufacturer: Amtrol Therm-X-Trol, Bell & Gossett, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over water heaters. B. Install water heater on concrete housekeeping pad, minimum 3-1/2 inches high and 6-inches larger than water heater base on each side. Refer to Section 03 30 00. C. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with IFGC. D. Connect natural gas piping to water heater, full size of water heater gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner removal and service. E. Connect domestic hot water and domestic cold water piping to water heater- F. Connect domestic circulating hot water line to cold water inlet piping. G. Install the following piping accessories. Refer to Section 22 11 00. 1. On cold water inlet piping, downstream of the circulating line connection: a. Thermometer well and thermometer. b. Strainer. c. Pressure gage. d. Shutoff valve. e. Union. 2. On hot water piping: a. Union. b. Shutoff valve. c. Thermometer well and thermometer. H. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 23 11 23. 1. Dirt leg. 2. Shutoff valve. 3. Pressure regulator suitable for water heater inlet pressure. FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 34 00 - 3 I. Install discharge piping from relief valves and drain valves to nearest floor drain. J. Install water heater trim and accessories furnished loose for field mounting. K. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. L. Connect flue and combustion air piping to water heater, full size of outlet or larger. Refer to Section 23 51 00. END OF SECTION FUEL -FIRED DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 34 00 - 4 SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Water closets. 2. Urinals. 3. Lavatories. 4. Mop sinks. 5. Sinks. 6. Showers. 7. Water coolers. 8. Emergency Eyewash. Related Sections: l . Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Product requirements for calking between fixtures and building components for placement by this section. 2. Section 22 05 00 - Common Work Results for Plumbing: Administrative procedures and execution requirements. Explanation of approved manufacturers and prior approvals. 3. Section 22 11 00 - Facility Water Distribution: Supply connections to plumbing fixtures. 4. Section 22 13 00 - Facility Sanitary Sewerage: Waste connections to plumbing fixtures. 5. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Execution requirements for electric connections to sensor valves and faucets specified by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Al 17.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. B. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): 1. 1010 - Self -Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking -Water Coolers. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): l . Al 12.6.1 - Floor -Affixed Supports for Off -the -Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use. 2. Al 12.18.1 - Plumbing Fixture Fittings. 3. Al 12.19.1 - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures. 4. Al 12.19.2 - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures. 5. Al 12.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures. 6. Al 12.19.5 - Trim for Water -Closet Bowls, Tanks and Urinals. D. American Society of Safety Engineers (ASSE): 1. 1016 -Performance Requirements for Automatic Compensating Valves for Individual Showers and Tub/Shower Combinations. PLUMBING FIXTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 40 00 - 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. In accordance with Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit catalog illustrations of fixtures, sizes, rough -in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes. Include water surface area for water closet fixtures. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation methods and procedures. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00: Closeout procedures. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit fixture, trim, exploded view and replacement parts lists. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specified fixtures identify the basis of design and establish the standard of quality for this project. Comparable fixtures from other listed manufacturers are acceptable, providing they meet or exceed the indicated requiroments. B. Water surface area for the water closet fixtures is a salient feature. Fixtures with smaller areas will not be accepted. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum three years experience. B. instaiier: Company specializing in pefiOrliig vV/U.1K. of this section with minimum t1h1rc %\/DIY YC r..a., experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept fixtures on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. C. Protect installed fixtures from damage by securing areas and by leaving factory packaging in place to protect fixtures and prevent use. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Vitreous China Fixtures: Water Closets, Urinals, Lavatories and Sinks 1. American Standard. 2. Crane. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-2 3. Kohler Co. 4. Sloan. 5. Zurn. B. Fixture Carriers: 1. Josam. 2. Smith. 3. Wade. 4. Watts. 5. Zurn. C. Stainless Fixtures: Sinks 1. Advance Tabco. 2. Elkay. 3. Just. 4. Kindred Commercial. D. Faucets and Trim 1. American Standard. 2. Chicago. 3. Delta. 4. Kohler Co. 5. Speakman. 6. T & S Brass. 7. Zurn. E. Flush Valves 1. American Standard. 2. Sloan. 3. Toto. 4. Zurn. F. SHOWER VALVES 1. Acorn 2. Bradley 3. Delta 4. Powers. G. Molded Stone Fixtures: Mop Sinks 1. Fiat. 2. Florestone. 3. Mustee. 4. Pro Flo. 5. Stern Williams. 6. Zurn. H. Water Coolers 1. Elkay. 2. Halsey Taylor. 3. Haws. 4. Oasis. PLUMBING FIXTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 40 00 - 3 2.02 WATER CLOSET (WC-1 AND WC-1 A) A. American Standard, wall mounted, Afwall FloWise Elongated 1.28 GPF water closet model 3351.101.020; 10 inch by 12 inch water surface. B. Bowl: ASME Al 12.19.2M; wall hung, siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1 /2 inch inlet spud, white bolt caps. C. Concealed Sensor Operated Flush Valve: ASME Al 12.18.1; High efficiency chrome plated brass valve with hard wired solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over -ride button. Screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.28 gallon flush volume. Sloan 152-1.25 ES. D. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, corrosion resistant bolts, less cover. E. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME Al 12.6.1; adjustable cast iron frame, integral drain hub and vent, adjustable spud, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs with nuts and washers. 2.03 WATER CLOSET (WC-3A) A. American Standard, floor mounted, Madera model 3043.001 elongated 1.6 GPF water closet. 10 inch by 12 inch water surface. 17 inch high. B. Bowl: ASME Al 12.19.2M; siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch inlet spud, white bolt caps. C. Sensor Operated Flush Valve: ASSE 1037; High efficiency valve with hard wired solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over -ride button in chrome plated plate, screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.6 gallon flush volume. Sloan Model 1 11-1.6 ES-S TMO. D. Seat: Solid white plastic, open tront, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, corrosion resistant bolts, less cover. E. Mount fixture and rough -ins at accessible height. 2.04 WATER CLOSET (WC-2A) A. American Standard, floor mounted, Madera model 3043.001 elongated 1.6 GPF water closet. 10 inch by 12 inch water surface. 17 inch high. B. Bowl: ASME Al 12.19.2M; siphon jet, vitreous china closet bowl, with elongated rim, 1-1/2 inch inlet spud, white bolt caps. C. Sensor Operated Flush Valve: ASSE 1037; High efficiency valve with hard wired solenoid operator, infrared sensor and over -ride button in chrome plated plate, screwdriver stop and vacuum breaker; maximum 1.6 gallon flush volume. Sloan Model 111-1.6 ES-S TMO. D. Seat: Solid white plastic, open front, extended back, self-sustaining hinge, corrosion resistant bolts, less cover. PLUMBING FIXTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 40 00 - 4 E. Mount fixture and rough -ins at accessible height 2.05 URINALS (UR-1 & UR-1 A) A. Urinal: ASME Al 12.19.2 vitreous china, wall hung, washout urinal with side shields, flushing rim, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud, 0.5 gallon per flush design, hanger(s). 1. American Standard Washbrook FloWise High Efficiency, model 6590.005. 2. Kohler Bardon Superior, model K-4960-ET 3. Sloan model SU-1005-0.5. 4. Zurn EcoVantage model Z5758.205. 2.06 URINALS (UR-1 & UR-IA) A. Urinal: ASME Al 12.19.2 vitreous china, wall hung, American Standard Allbrook FlowWise 0.5 model 6550.005 siphon jet urinal with flushing rim, integral trap, 3/4 inch top spud, 0.5 gallon per flush. B. Flush Valve: ASSE 1037; Hard wired infrared sensor operated valve for top spud washout urinal. Mechanical over -ride button, chrome plated brass construction, screw driver stop and vacuum breaker; 0.5 gallon per flush. Sloan Optima model 186-0.5 ES-S TMO High Efficiency. C. Wall Mounted Carrier: ASME Al 12.6.1; cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, threaded fixture studs for fixture hanger, bearing studs. D. Provide elastomeric gasket complying with ASME Al 12.4.3, or approved setting compound, for fixture to flange connection. 2.07 WALL HUNG LAVATORY (L-1 AND L- 1 A) A. Basin: ASME Al 12.19.2, American Standard Lucerne 0355.012, vitreous china, faucet holes 4 inches on center, 20x18 inch nominal with 15 inch by 10 inch by 6-1/2 inch deep bowl, 4 inch raised back, tapered side splash shields, drilled for concealed arm support, front overflow, self draining deck area. B. Sensor Activated Faucet: ANSI Al 12.18.1 M; American Standard Selectronic electronic proximity faucet, model 6056.105. Chrome plated, brass construction, metered mixing faucet with wired solenoid, transformer and infrared sensor, inlet strainer, 0.5 gpm aerator. Provide model 605XTMV thermostatic mixing valve below lavatory. C. Mixing valve: American Standard Model 605XTMV thermostatic mixing valve mounted below sink. ASSE 1016 performance. D. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean -out plug and wall escutcheon. 2. Open grid strainer with tailpiece. 3. Flexible supplies. 4. Trap and waste insulated and offset to meet ADA compliance for A suffix fixtures. E. Floor Mounted Carrier: Josam 17100 Series, cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-5 2.08 WALL HUNG LAVATORY (L- 2A) A. Basin: ASME Al 12.19.2, American Standard Lucerne 0355.012, vitreous china, faucet holes 4 inches on center, 20xl8 inch nominal with 15 inch by 10 inch by 6-1/2 inch deep bowl, 4 inch raised back, tapered side splash shields, drilled for concealed arm support, front overflow, self -draining deck area. B. Sensor Activated Faucet: ANSI Al 12.18.1 M; American Standard Selectronic electronic proximity faucet, model 6056.105. Chrome plated, brass construction, metered mixing faucet with wired solenoid, transformer and infrared sensor, inlet strainer, 0.5 gpm aerator. Provide model 605XTMV thermostatic mixing valve below lavatory. C. Mixing valve: American Standard Model 605XTMV thermostatic mixing valve mounted below sink. ASSE 1016 performance. D. Accessories: 1. Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean -out plug and wall escutcheon. 2. Open grid strainer with tailpiece. 3. Flexible supplies. 4. Trap and waste insulated and offset to meet ADA compliance for A suffix fixtures. E. Floor Mounted Carrier: Josam 17100 Series, cast iron and steel frame with tubular legs, lugs for floor and wall attachment, concealed arm supports, bearing plate and studs. 2.09 HANDWASH SINK (SK-1) A. Advance Tabco model 7-PS-68. NSF listed. B. Bowl: 20 gage 304 stainless steel with integral backsplash. 10 inch by 14 inch by 5 inch deep, polished to a satin finish. 2-inch radius corners. 1-1/2 inch drain with basket strainer C. Trim: Wrist blade -handles on gooseneck faucet. Chrome plated tailpiece and-P-trap. D. Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with escutcheon, loose key stops, flexible supplies. 2.10 THREE COMPARTMENT SINK (SK-2) A. Sink: ANSI Standard Al 12.19.3. Advance Tabco Model T9-3-54-18RL, three 16 inch long by 20 inch wide (front -to -back) by 12 inch deep bowls, 3 inch rim, 16 gauge 304 stainless steel construction, two 18 inch long drainboards (refer to architectural drawings for drainboard side), full length 8-inch high backsplash, drilled for faucets. 3 inch radius corners, 3-1/2 inch drain holes, 8 holes, 4 inches on center. 1-5/8 inch diameter galvanized steel legs with 1 inch adjustable bullet feet. Provide undercoating if not factory applied. B. Sink Faucet: Chicago Faucets Model 540-LDDJ I 3CP, 8 inch centers, back mount, DJ13 double-jointed swing spout, E3 2.2 GPM aerator, 369-PR Indexed Lever Handles, QuaturnTM Operating Cartridges, 1 /2" NPSM Coupling Nut for 3/8 inch or 1 /2 inch flexible riser. PLUMBING FIXTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 40 00 - 6 C. Spray Faucet: Chicago Faucets Model 510-GCLCP, 8 inch centers, back mount, hot and cold water faucet, #369 indexed handles, 23 inch riser with spring guide, 44 inch hose spray with 90L lever control insulated sprayer with wall hook, 1.0 GPM at 60 psi. D. Provide rotary lever operated drain outlet for each compartment, Elkay Model LK25RT twist drain stopper with 2 inch tailpiece, 2 inch 17 gage chrome plated P-trap, wheel handle stops and flexible faucet supplies. 2.11 MOP SINKS (SK-3) A. Fiat model MSB2424, floor set mop service basin. 24 inch by 24 inch by 10 inch high, 1- piece molded stone construction with 1 inch wide shoulders, integral molded center drain outlet with dome strainer and lint basket, 3 inch outlet. B. Faucet: Fiat model 830 AA, wall mounted, chrome plated brass construction with vacuum breaker, integral stops, adjustable wall brace, pail hook and 3/4 inch hose thread on spout cross or lever handles on 8 inch centers. C. Accessories: 1. Hose: Provide 30 inch length of 3/4 inch rubber hose threaded to connect to faucet. 2. Mop Bracket: 24 inch long, 3 inch high, stainless steel bracket with 3 rubber grips. 2.12 STAINLESS STEEL SINK (SK-4) A. Elkay Model LR2219, single compartment sink. B. Bowl: ASME Al 12.19.3; 22 x 19 inch outside dimensions, 18 gage, stainless steel. Self - rimming, 18 inch by 14 inch basin size, 7-5/8 inch deep. 3-5/8 inch drain hole, 3 hole ledge back drilled for trim. C. Trim: ASME Al 12.18.1; Chicago Model 201-AGN2AE3-317CP. Chrome plated brass faucet with 5-1/4 inch chrome plated brass gooseneck swing spout, quarter turn, 4 inch wrist blade faucet handles, economy aerator with maximum 2.2 gpm flow. D. Accessories: Chrome plated 17 gage brass P-trap with clean -out plug and arm with escutcheon, loose key stops, flexible supplies. Provide undercoating if not factory applied. SS strainer. 2.13 SHOWERS (SH-1) A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects," for shower materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Wall Cover: 1. Type 304 stainless steel, 0.050 inch thick (minimum) 2. Removable with vandal resistant screws 3. Integral soap dish. C. Faucet: 1. Standards: ASME Al 12.18.1/CSA B125.1 and ASSE 1016. 2. Body Material: Solid brass. 3. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PLUMBING FIXTURES 224000-7 4. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm unless otherwise indicated. 5. Mounting: Concealed. 6. Operation: Electronically metered push button control. 60-second operation per push. Hard wired transformer. D. Shower Head: 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 2. Type: Ball joint with arm and flange. 3. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome -plated finish. 4. Spray Pattern: Fixed. E. Basis of Design: Bradley HN200. 2.14 SHOWERS (SH-1A) A. NSF Standard: Comply with NSF 61, "Drinking Water System Components -Health Effects," for shower materials that will be in contact with potable water. B. Wall Cover: 1. Type 304 stainless steel, 0.050 inch thick (minimum) 2. Removable with vandal resistant screws 3. Integral soap dish. C. Faucet: 1. Standards: ASME Al 12.18.1/CSA 13125.1 and ASSE 1016. 2. Body Material: Solid brass. 3. Finish: Polished chrome plate. 4. Maximum Flow Rate: 2.5 gpm unless otherwise indicated.\ 5. Mounting: Concealed. 6. Operation: Electronically metered push button control. 60-second operation per push. Hard wired transformer. D. Shower Head Assembly (Accessible): 1. Standard: ASME A1-12.-18.1 M/CSA B125.1.- - - 2. Type: Hand-held shower head with on -off control. 3. Diverter valve: Lever handle for transfer of water between fixed showerhead and hand-held spray. 4. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome -plated finish. 5. Hose: 60 inch chrome plated flexible metallic hose. E. Shower Head: 1. Standard: ASME A112.18.1/CSA B125.1. 2. Type: Ball joint with arm and flange. 3. Shower Head Material: Metallic with chrome -plated finish. 4. Spray Pattern: Fixed. F. Basis of Design: Bradley WS-1. 2.15 SHOWERS (SH-2) A. Trim and Valve Assembly and Accessories: ASME Al 12.18.1. 1. ADA Compliant. PLUMBING FIXTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 40 00 - 8 2. Shower Valve with Diverter: Delta T13H382 pressure balanced mixing valve with 3.3 inch chrome plated metal handle, integral checks, screwdriver stops, temperature limit stop and R10700-UNWS chrome plated brass diverting valve. 3. Showerhead: Delta H2O1(inetic Technology 1.6 gpm flow, with arm and wall flange. 4. Slide Bar Kit: 1.5 gpm VB (ASSE) handshower with double check backflow prevention, white plastic with 70 inch white vinyl flexible hose, wall elbow and 24 inch stainless steel slide bar. 5. Hand Shower Hose and Holder: 1.5 gpm VB (ASSE) handshower with double check backflow prevention, white plastic with 70 inch white vinyl flexible hose, wall elbow and 2 wall hooks. 2.16 DRINKLING FOUNTAIN (DF-1) A. Most Dependable Fountain, Model 10485 WMSS dual height, wall hung, exterior drinking fountain with bottle filler. One-piece welded construction, schedule 10 type 304 stainless steel with receptor bowl, tamper -proof anti -squirt stainless steel bubbler head, mushroom style push bar activation, 5 lbs. max force control valve activation, NSF-61 certified reinforced nylobraid tubing and fittings, "Y" drain waste, easily accessible components, easily winterized. Unit shall be assembled with lead free components. Provide all necessary mounting plates, brackets, and hardware. Color to be selected by Architect. 1. Waste: Removable, chrome plated brass strainer, 1-1/4-inch O.D. trap connection with 1-1/4-inch tail piece. 2. Trap: adjustable "P" chrome plated brass trap with 1-1/2-inch, 17-gauge tubing, drain to wall, ground swivel joints, clean -out, wall flange. Trap to be concealed within cabinet. 3. Supply: 3/8-inch I.P.S. connection with 3/8-inch chrome plated angle valve with loose key stop and 3/8-inch copper flexible tube riser. 4. Cover: manufacturer's seasonal cover. B. Bottle Filler: 1.1 gpm flow rate, laminar flow, automatic 20 second shut-off. 2.17 LAVATORY INSULATION KIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Handi Lav Guard. 2. Truebro. B. Product Description: Where Lavatories are noted to be insulated for ADA compliance, furnish the following: Safety Covers conforming to ANSI Al 17.1 and consisting of insulation kit of molded closed cell vinyl construction, 3/16 inch thick, white color, for insulating tailpiece, P-trap, valves, and supply piping. Furnish with weep hole and angle valve access covers. 2.18 EMERGENCY EYE -FACE WASH (EEW-1) A. Manufacturers: 1. Acorn model SO440-PT1. 2. Bradley Corp. model S19224TPT. 3. Haws Co. model 7360BT-746OBT. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 40 00 - 9 B. Fixture: 1. Eye/Face Wash: a. ANSI Z358.1, Wall mounted, stainless steel receptor bowl with multiple spray heads. b. Automatic operation flip open dust caps, corrosion resistant construction. c. Push handle attached to 1/2-inch full port stay open ball valve. 5.1 GPM flow rate. d. 1-1 /2"or 1-1 /4 inch chrome plated brass or stainless steel drain, tailpiece and P-trap. e. Universal emergency sign. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00: Coordination and project conditions. B. Verify walls and floor finishes are prepared and ready for installation of fixtures. C. Verify electric power is available and of correct characteristics. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Rough -in fixture piping connections in accordance with minimum sizes indicated in fixture rough -in schedule for particular fixtures. B. Install fixture and rough -ins with A suffix at accessible height. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install Work in accordance with Minnesota Plumbing Code. B. Install each fixture with trap, easily removable for servicing and cleaning. C. Provide 17 gauge, chrome -plated brass adjustable p-trap with cleanout on fixtures reducing traps. Traps for mop sinks shall be casi iruri. D. Provide chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies to fixtures with loose key stops, reducers, and escutcheons. E. Provide water temperature limiting valve on lavatories. Set temperature to 110 deg. F. F. Install components level and plumb. G. Install and secure fixtures in place with wall supports, wall carriers, and bolts. H. Seal fixtures to wall and floor surfaces with sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00, color to match fixture. I. Solidly attach water closets to floor with lag screws. Lead flashing is not intended hold fixture in place. J. For ADA accessible water closets, install flush valve with handle to wide side of stall. PLUMBING FIXTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 40 00 - 10 K. Refer to Architectural Drawings for fixture locations and mounting heights. L. Emergency fixtures: Extend discharge piping to floor and terminate with elbow discharging towards nearest floor drain. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Section Ol 70 00: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise, or overflow. 3.05 CLEANING A. Section Ol 70 00: Final cleaning. B. Clean plumbing fixtures and equipment. 3.06 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Section Ol 70 00: Protecting installed construction. B. Do not permit use of fixtures before final acceptance. END OF SECTION PLUMBING FIXTURES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 40 00 - 1 1 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 22 51 13 POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to: 1. Piping, fittings, valves, etc. All items shall be constructed of materials compatible for long term use with chlorinated water and other chemicals being used. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.03 WARRANTY A. Warranty with 2-year correction period from the actual Substantial Completion Date shall apply to all work in this Section, unless otherwise stated for a longer period for specific items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING, VALVES, AND FITTINGS A. Pool Piping and Fittings: All pool supply, return, and other piping shall be Schedule 80 PVC, unless designated otherwise and shall conform to state requirements for pool recirculation piping. All pipes shall be graded to drain and shall be provided with drain valves at low points for convenient draining for winterizing. All PVC piping fiftin s for nominal i e diameter shall be Schedule 80 injection molded. Schedule 80-fabricated fittings for Piping larger than 12 inch diameter will be,acceptable if injection molded fittings are not available. Piping and fittings shall be listed for potable water service by the National Sanitation foundation (NSF) and manufactured in compliance with ASTM D2467 and ANSI/NSF Standard 61. 1. Fitting bolts, nuts, hardware, etc. shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant materials. In wet locations such as surge tanks, separation tanks, sumps, etc. and in exterior areas, provide stainless steel materials. 2. Provide full size reducers (i.e. no bushing reducers) at all locations, except if noted otherwise in the Drawings. B. Custom Manifold: Provide custom single piece Schedule 80 PVC manifold where shown on the project Drawings. Manifold shall be manufactured by Spears Manufacturing of Sylmar, California (818) 364-1611 www.spearsmfrc.carr3 or approved equal. C. Valves: Valves and fittings shall be NSF approved. l . Basis of Design Butterfly Valves: Spears, Asahi, Hayward and Thermoplastic Valves, Inc. (TVI). Thermoplastic Butterfly Valves shall be lug style with stainless steel lugs, wafer style with ANSI B16.5 Class 150 flanges. Disc shall be smooth and contoured for lowest possible pressure drop (highest Cv). Shaft shall be 410 S.S. and of 1 piece, through shaft design, with square drive through entire length of blade. Valves shall have epoxy POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 13 - 1 coated gear actuators with hand wheel. Chains shall be installed for valves located in buildings greater than 6 feet above grade. Seat liners shall be full faced with integral, ribbed flanges. No auxiliary gaskets shall be required for installation. Seat liners shall effectively isolate the body and shaft from the flow media. Seat liners shall also thermally insulate the body from the internal operating temperature. Valve liner and seals are replaceable. Materials of construction shall be: Body - PVC, ASTM D1784, (Standard 2 to 14 inch), Disc - PP, ASTM D4101 (Standard), Shaft - ASTM A240, Type 410 S.S. (Standard), Seals/Seat - EPDM, Ethylene Propylene Diene Monomer, Hardware - 4 inches through 24 inches 304 S.S. 8-inch size positioner plate 410 S.S. Chrome Plated, Lever - ABS, ASTM D 1788, Gear Box, cast iron housing ASTM A53, Epoxy coated. Provide gear operators on all butterfly valves 8 inches and larger and lever operators on butterfly valves 6 inches and smaller, unless specifically designated otherwise. Lever operated valves where provided shall be complete with a spring loaded 15 position latch lever. Provide additional bracing, supports, etc. for valve extensions in storage tanks. Valves and accessories located in tanks, sumps, manholes, or similar structures shall be suitable for submersible service. 2. Ball valves shall be Hayward PVC true -union valves, or approved equal. Provide with extension stems and handwheel actuators where shown on the Drawings. 3. Gate Valves: Approved Manufacturers: Clow, American, Mueller, M & H, or approved equal. Materials and Construction: Valves shall be suitable for long-term use with chlorinated pool water. Bronze mounted, ductile iron body, epoxy -coated valves. Resilient wedge type conforming to AWWA C515. Cast iron wedge shall have sealing surfaces of the wedge permanently bonded with resilient material to meet ASTM tests for rubber to metal bond ASTM D429-73. 4. Buried Gate Valves: Mechanical joints, ductile iron body, mounted with o-ring seals, non -rising stem, provide adjustable valve boxes with extension stems and operating nuts. Boxes shall be 3 piece, ductile iron, screw type. "Stay put," type drop covers with extended skirts. 5. Diversion valves (float valves) for surge tank control shall have dual float arms and designed to modulate recirculation flow through the main drain at all times. When floats are in the up position, the valve disc is 80 percent closed. Diversion valve shall be Recreation Supply Company II-360009-16 or approved equal. Diversion valves shall be installed at height to allow full range of arm motion. Operation height shall be approximately 1 foot above pipe centerline and 2 feet below pipe centerline. Valves shall be reinforced with heavy-duty stainless steel hardware. Valves shall be provided with full 5-year unconditional non -prorated warranty covering all materials and labor for repairs and/or replacement. 6. Check valves shall be Check Rite Model 210 Series all stainless steel wafer style check valves manufactured by Ritepro Corporation, or approved equal. 7. Hydrostatic Relief Valves: Provide and install a hydrostatic relief valve assembly in each of the pool main drains. Valve assemblies shall be fabricated of 2 inch Schedule 80 PVC pipe with a 12 inch long vertical section and a 26 inch long horizontal section perforated with 3/16 inch holes and assembled with a heavy machined brass poppet style check valve. Perforated pipe shall be completely encased in not less than 1 /2 cu.yd. of pea gravel wrapped with geotextile fabric per assembly prior to placing the granular fill under the pool bottom slab. Hydrostatic relief valve assembly shall be Paddock 8703B, or approved equal. 8. Provide T-wrench handles for all valves supplied with extension stems. D. Zero -Edge Trench and Current Channel/Vortex Pool Overflow Weir Chamber Grating: Provide grating as shown on Drawings with extruded PVC grating with 35 percent clear opening and with rTICIArnurn upening of 1 /2 inch and PVC curb angles embedded into POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 13 2 concrete trenches with UV resistant additive and non-skid surface. On curved sections, embedded curb angles shall be notched on the back side as necessary to follow the required radius and shall be done to meet manufacturer recommendations. Install tie downs as recommended by the manufacturer which shall not be removable without the use of tools. Attachment hardware shall be stainless steel. At least 4 tie downs per individual piece of FRP shall be provided. Spacing for clips shall be as per manufacturer's recommendations. Manufacturer shall be Evoqua Water Technologies/Neptune Benson or approved equal. Available colors shall include white. E. Wall Fitting at Weir Chamber Winterization Drain Valves shall be Hayward SP 1022 receptacle with Hayward SP1026 Grate cover, or approved equal. Suction Outlet Covers: Provide covers and frames that comply with all Federal (Virginia Graeme Baker (VGBA) Pool & Spa Safety Act) and State requirements for pool suction outlet covers. Covers and frames shall be PVC, Evoqua Water Technologies/Neptune Benson/Lawson Aquatics MLD-FG-18361`2 and MLD-FG-I854. Install covers and frames to fully comply with all regulatory and manufacturer requirements. Covers shall be rated for a minimum flow rate of 2,401 GPM each (MLD-FG-1836F2) and 4,269 GPM each (MLD-FG- 1854) when installed as floor suction outlets. Covers shall be stamped as VGB compliant. Provide manufacturers certificates of compliance to Owner. G. Pool Floor Inlets: Shall be located and installed as shown in the Drawings. Floor inlets shall be fully adjustable, cycolac. Floor inlets shall be Sta-Rite #08417, or approved equal. Provide each inlet with a plug and O-ring for use in winterization. H. Pool Wall Inlets: Provide filtered water of cycolac construction with a minimum of a 1-1 /2 inch diameter pipe connection and removable, direction flow eyeball inner fittings. Provide Pentair #542405 Inlet bodies with #542087 directional flow nozzles or approved equal. Provide inlets at locations shown on the Drawings. I. Anti -Vortex Plate 1. Shall be as detailed on Drawings. Manufacturer: Recreation Supply Company or approved equal. Pipe Penetrations: All pipe penetrations through concrete walls shall be provided with HDPE Century Line wall sleeve with Link -Seal Modular seals manufactured by Pipeline Seal and Insulator (PSI), Advance Products & Systems - Infinity HDPE Wall Sleeve with Innerlynx Modular Seal, or approved equal. Area between pipe and sleeve shall be made watertight with mechanical seal with stainless steel nuts and bolts. On buried walls, seal shall be installed so that they can be removed/tightened on water side of wall. K. Pipe Identification: l . Non -buried piping shall receive pipe markers as specified below: a. Shall comply with State and other regulatory requirements. b. Shall identify conveyed fluid; identify where flow is going and direction of flow. c_ Shall be rolled, plastic -coated type markers. d. Markers shall snap around entire circumference of pipe. e. Markers shall be removable. f. Markers requiring bonding, taping, adhesives, or other fastening devices shall not be allowed. g. Markers shall conform to ANSI and OSHA requirements for marker size, marker color. and legend size and color. POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 13 - 3 2. All exposed piping having diameter greater than 6 inches shall receive either pipe markers as specified above or stencil type painted identification as identified below. Paint shall be suited for piping and environment being applied: a. Stencils shall be constructed of flexible plastic and shall be re -usable. b. Stencil letters shall be upper case, 2 inches in height, and proportional in width. c. Stencils shall identify process or fluid conveyed and direction of flow. d. Each pipe identification stencil shall be constructed so that all letters and words contained in the identifying label are entirely complete and properly spaced. No combination of differently worded stencils shall be allowed to identify any 1 pipe. e. Each stencil shall have a 6-inch long by 1-inch wide direction of flow arrow included before and after the identifying words. The arrow on the left shall point' left and the arrow on the right shall point right. When the stencil is painted on the pipe, the arrow indicating proper direction of flow shall also be painted while the other arrow shall be covered up. f. Stencils shall be cleaned and turned over to the Owner after all painting is complete. g. A drawing and description of a typical stencil shall be submitted to the Lngineer for approval and at that time, a list will be provided of all stencils required. L. Pipe Hangers, Supports, Brackets, Etc: l . Approved Manufacturers: Grinnell, Crane, Uni-Strut or approved equal. 2. Piping supports shall be located to minimize impact to access of equipment and suitable for the structural systems they are supported from. 3. Piping in the building shall be supported from precast concrete ceiling wherever possible. 4. Hangers, supports, brackets, etc. shall be manufactured from corrosion resistant materials and or painted/galvanized to provide corrosion resistance. In wet locations such as surge tanks, manholes, vaults, etc. and in exterior areas, provide stainless steel supports and accessories. In addition to piping supports, provide additional supports as required for valves, valve extension stems, gauges, equipment, etc. 5. Additional cross bracing shall be provided to securely support piping, prevent sway, vibration transmission, etc. M. Valve Tags: All valves shall be tagged with brdss, non-ferrous metal or plastic laminated tags wired to the valve stem or otherwise attached to the valve being tagged. Fasteners shall be non-ferrous or otherwise corrosion -proof. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All equipment and piping shall be neatly arranged in an orderly manner for ease of operation and maintenance. Arrangement shall be as shown on the Drawings with minor deviations allowed where required for the size and configuration of the specific items of equipment to be used. All equipment shall be set level on concrete pads and nonferrous shims where necessary to correct for floor slope. B. Care shall be taken to place all piping true to line and grade. All piping shall be graded to drain for winterization. Provide drain valves as necessary to allow for complete winterization whether shown on the Drawings or not. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES 225113-4 C. Pressure Testing: 1. PVC piping shall be pressure tested to not less than twice its operating pressure (with a minimum of 30 psi) for a minimum of 30 minutes with no drop in pressure and shall be totally without leakage. Contractor shall give Owner/Engineer adequate notice when pipe testing will be done so that the Owner or Engineer can witness the testing. Written certification of pipe testing shall be submitted to the Owner/Engineer. Pool piping under pool and deck shall be pressure tested with pressure maintained during pool and deck concrete pours. D. Workmanship: All work shall be performed by skilled workmen experienced in swimming pool construction. All piping shall be neatly laid out and installed in accordance with the best construction practices. All piping must drain to low points and be provided with convenient drain valves. Chemical feed equipment shall be installed by factory trained personnel experienced in chemical feed and equipment operation and maintenance. E. Piping Support: Non -buried P.V.C. piping shall be installed with or supports according to the pipe size and spacing chart below. Provide additional supports near equipment to support piping. All piping shall be supported in such a way to eliminate swaying and vibration transmission. Provide cross -bracing supports as required. SUPPORT SPACING (IN FEET) FOR PVC PIPE Pipe Size inches Schedule 40 Schedule 80 1/4 3.5 4 3/8 4 4.5 1 /2 4.5 4.5 3/4 4.5 5 1 5 5.5 1-1/4 5.5 6 1-1/2 5.5 6 2 5.5 6.5 2-1/2 6.5 7.5 3 7 7.5 3-1/2 7 8 4 7 8.5 5 7.5 9 6 8 9.5 8 8.5 10.5 10 9 11 12 10.5 12 14 11 I 13 16 11.5 13.5 Pipe Identification: Place flow direction arrows at each pipe identification point. Pipe identification shall be placed as follows: 1. Interior and exterior. 2. Each pipe shall be labeled with a minimum of 2 pipe identifications in each room,, 3. Pipe identification shall be provided on all branch lines of all header pipes and at each change of direction. 4. Pipe identification shall be provided on all header lines between branches. POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 13 - 5 5. Where the same pipe goes through a wall, ceiling, roof, or piece of equipment, provide pipe identification on each side. b. Pipe identification provided for chemical piping shall in no case exceed a 10-foot spacing. 7. In no case, on all other piping, shall pipe identification exceed a 20-foot spacing. G. Identify valves with tags bearing a system identification and a valve sequence number. Provide a typewritten valve schedule indicating the valve number and the equipment or areas supplied by each valve. Locate the schedule in the mechanical room and in each Operation and Maintenance Manual. Schedules in pool mechanical area shall be framed in clear plastic and be conspicuously posted. H. The Contractor shall install all necessary piping in general accordance with the Drawings. I. All piping shall be pitched to provide positive gravity drainage of the entire system for winterization. J. Pipe bedding shall be as shown on the Drawings. The bedding shall be such that a uniform bearing and support is provided at the required line and grade on a solid bottom at every point along the pipe. K. Special care shall be taken to ensure that all backfill material be free of debris which could damage piping. L. The pipe interior must be kept clean before being installed M. Pipe openings shall be closed with caps or plugs during installation. Equipment and features shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water and chemical or mochanical injury. At the completion of work the fittings, materials and equipment shall be thoroughly clean and adjusted for proper operation. N. All piping must be properly supported. 3.02 BURIED PIPING A. Trench Excavation: 1. Contractor shall dig the trench to the alignment shown on the Drawings. The trench shall be sufficiently straight to permit the pipe to be laid true to line in the approximate location of the trench as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Contractor shall excavate, brace, sheet, and drain the trench so that workmen may work safely and efficiently therein as required by OSHA Regulations. 3. Contractor shall discharge dewatering pumps to the natural drainage channels. 4. The trench width may vary and will depend upon the depth the trench, the diameter and number of pipes to be laid, and the nature of the material to be excavated. Trench widths, side slopes, and trench bracing and sheeting shall conform to the regulations of OSHA and appropriate state and local agencies. Preparation of Trench Bottom: 1. The trench shall not have standing water when trench bottom is prepared or when pipe is laid. 2. Excavate bell or flange holes if so required, so that after placement only the barrel of the pipe receives bearing pressure from the trench hnttnm and the. pipe is tree to line and grade. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES 225113-6 C. Pipe Bedding Material shall be granular material complying with the following: 1. Material shall consist of sand and sand -gravel, free of debris, salvaged concrete, salvaged bituminous mixture, large boulders, clay, or silt. All material shall pass the f- inch sieve and shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing #4 35 to 100 # 10 20 to 80 #40 5 to 35 #200 0-5 D. Pipe Laying: 1. Pipe shall be carefully lowered into trench piece by piece in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings. Under no circumstances shall pipe materials be dumped into the trench. 2. Before lowering and while suspended, inspect the pipe for defects and coating damage. Any defective, damaged, or unsound pipe shall be rejected and removed from the Project Site. 3. Remove all foreign matter or dirt from the inside of the pipe before it is lowered into its position in the trench and keep the pipe clean by approved means during and after laying. 4. Bed every pipe uniformly throughout its entire length. Backfill at and above Pipe Zone: 1. Contractor shall place granular backfill the trench simultaneously on both sides of the pipe for the full width of the trench in 6 inch lifts to the surface. 2. Compact bedding and backfill materials to a density equal to or greater than 98 percent of maximum density, Standard Proctor Test, except to 100 percent of Standard Proctor Density in the upper 3-feet from the surface. END OF SECTION POOL PIPING, VALVES, FITTINGS, AND SPECIALTIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 13 - 7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 22 51 16 POOL PUMPS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Section Includes: 1. 50M Pool Recirculation Pump. 2. 50M Pool Drop Slide Pump. 3. Recreation Pool Recirculation Pump. 4. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump. 5. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump (Alternate). 6. Recreation Pool Flume Slides Pump. 7. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 1. 8. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 2. 9. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 3. 10. Recreation Pool Vortex Motion Pump. B. Related Requirements: 1. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor shall arrange for the pump manufacturer to provide a factory -trained representative for the purpose of supervising installation, start-up, final field acceptance testing, and providing instruction to the Owner's operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment in this Section. B. Local authorized pump representative with their own full-time repair service available on 24-hour call. Have available on short notice a factory technician and service vehicle equipped with tools to make all necessary repairs, as well as component parts required to maintain satisfactory operation of the equipment outlined in these Specifications. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Provide pumping systems complete with the pumps, motors, mounting bases, appurtenances, etc. as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as herein specified. 1.04 RESPONSIBILITY A. To assure a properly integrated and compatible system, the pool contractor shall assume full responsibility for the proper operation of the pumps and associated equipment. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. The work in this Section is subject to the requirements of applicable portions of the following standards: 1. Hydraulic Institute Standards. 2. IEEE Standards. POOL PUMPS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 16 - 1 3. NEMA Standards. 4. OSHA Rules and Regulations. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Warranty with 2-year correction period from the actual Substantial Completion Date shall apply to all work in this Section, unless otherwise stated for a longer period for specific items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED MANUFACTURER AND MODELS A. Pumps shall be Aurora Pump, equivalent by PACOS/Goulds, or approved equal. The following model numbers have been pre -approved and are listed here to specify a standard of performance: 1. 50M Pool Recirculation Pump. Aurora 341 A Series Model 6x6x11 2. 50M Pool Drop Slide Pump. Aurora 341 A Series Model 4x4x7A 3. Recreation Pool Recirculation Pump. Aurora 341 A Series Model 6x6x1 1 4. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump. Aurora 341 A Series Model 4x5x9A 5. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump (Alternate). Aurora 341 A Series Model 6x6x9 6. Recreation Pool Flume Slides Pump. Aurora 341A Series Model 6x6x11 7. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 1.Aurora 341 A Series Mode16x6x11 8. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 2.Aurora 341 A Series Mode16x6x1 1 9. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 3.Aurora 341 A Series Mode16x6x11 10. Recreation Pool Vortex Motion Pump. Aurora 341 A Series Model6x6x12B Note: Aurora 341 A Model is a Horizontal Close Coupled End Suction Pump. 2.02 CENTRIFUGAL PUMPS A. General Description: Pumps shall be horizontal close -coupled, end suction pumps and shall be a National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pool pump. B. Materials of Construction: 1. Casing Cast Iron (ASTM A48). 2. Impeller Bronze (ASTM B584). 3. Shaft Steel (AISI C1045). 4. Case Wear Ring Bronze (ASTM B62). 5. Shaft Sleeve Bronze (ASTM B62). C. Casing: The casing shall be of the end suction design with tangential discharge outlet orientation as shown on the Drawings. For suction piping diameters of 2 inches or less and discharge piping diameters of 1-1 /2 inches or less, the suction and discharge connections shall be NPT threaded. For suction piping diameters of 2 inches or greater, the suction inlet shall be a flat -faced flange connection and the discharge outlet shall be a bolt through flange connection. Flange connections shall be ANSI 125# rated. The casing shall have tapped and plugged holes for priming and draining. The casing bore shall be large enough to allow "back pullout" of the impeller without disturbing the casing or suction and discharge piping. The casing shall be supported by the driving unit. POOL PUMPS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 16 - 2 D. Impeller: The impeller shall be of the enclosed type, vacuum cast in 1 piece. It shall be finished all over the exterior being turned and the interior being finished smooth and cleaned of all burrs, trimmings, and irregularities. The impeller shall be dynamically balanced. The impeller will be keyed to the shaft and fastened with a washer, gasket, and cap screw. Each impeller shall be coated with 3M Brand Scotchkote 134 fusion -bonded epoxy coating. Coating to be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Case Wearing Ring: The pump casing shall be fitted with a case wear ring to minimize abrasive and corrosive wear to the casing. The case wear ring shall be of the radial type, press fitted into the casing. F. Stuffing Box: The stuffing box shall be integrally cast with a mounting bracket. Flushing of the seal chamber shall be accomplished by means of an external line with fittings between the stuffing box and pump casing. G. Mechanical Seal: Shaft sealing shall be accomplished by means of a mechanical seal with a Ni-Resist seat, carbon washer, Buna-N elastomers, and stainless steel metal parts. H. Shaft: The impeller shall be direct -coupled to the motor shaft. The motor shaft shall be machined to provide a keyway and drilled and tapped to accept the impeller fastener. Stub shafts are not acceptable. Shaft Sleeve: The pump shaft shall be fitted with a shaft sleeve to minimize shaft wear. The sleeve shall be sealed to the impeller hub by an 0-ring and shall be positively driven by a pin to the keyway. The use of adhesive compounds to fasten the sleeve to the shaft shall not be accepted. J. Base: Mount base on concrete pad. Bases shall be designed to resist torsional movement and support the combined weight of both pump and motor without deflection while at rest or under load. K. Motor: The motor shall be in accordance with the latest NEMA Standards and shall have the following characteristics: 1. Enclosure TEFC. 2. Number of Phases, Cycles, Voltage 3,60,460. 3. Speed See Conditions of Service. L. Each motor shall have a sufficient horsepower rating to operate the pump at any point on the pump's head -capacity curve without overloading the nameplate horsepower rating of the motor, regardless of service factor. The motor shall have a service factor of at least 1.15. The service factor is reserved for variations in voltage and frequency. Provide inverter duty type motors for pumps having variable speed drives. Variable speed drives being provided by Division 26. Motors shall meet NEMA standard MGA, Part 31.4.4.2 for inverter duty service. Motors shall be premium efficiency and comply with all requirements of Section 13 11 13 and Division 26. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL PUMPS 2251 16-3 2.03 CONDITIONS OF SERVICE The following conditions of service shall be strictly adhered to: A. 50M Pool Recirculation Pump: Number of Units ............................... :.................... 1 Type of Drive ........................................................ Variable frequency drive Discharge Size.......................................................6 inch SuctionSize...........................................................6 inch Design Capacity.................................................1,589 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................85 feet Efficiency at Design.............................................88 percent, minimum Motor Speed........................................................1800 RPM Shut -Off Head......................................................114 feet, minimum Motor Horsepower..............................................40 HP NPSHR at Design..................................................18 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 500 gpm @ 110 feet TDH and 2000 gpm @ 70 feet TDH. B. 50M Pool Drop Slide Pump: Number of Units....................................................1 Type of Drive........................................................Variable frequency drive Discharge Size.....................................................4 inch Suction Size...........................................................4 inch Design Capacity.................................................200 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................27 feet Efficiency at Design.............................................67 percent, minimum Motor Speed........................................................1800 RPM Shut -Off Head......................................................34 feet, minimum Motor Horsepower..............................................3 HP NPSHR at Design..................................................4 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 100 gpm @ 30 feet TDH arid 300 gprrl @ 20 feel TDH. C. Recreation Pool Recirculation Pump: Number of Units....................................................1 Type of Drive ,.... .........................•••.•••........••••.Variable frequency drive Discharge Size.......................................................6 inch Suction Size...........................................................6 inch Design Capacity.................................................1,404 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................88 feet Efficiency at Design.............................................88 percent, minimum Motor Speed.........................................................1800 RPM Shut -Off Head......................................................111 feet, minimum. Motor Horsepower..............................................40 HP NPSHR at Design..................................................16 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 500 gpm @ 105 feet TDH and 1900 gpm @ 70 feet TDH. 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL PUMPS 2251 16-4 D. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump: Number of Units....................................................1 Type of Drive........................................................Variable frequency drive Discharge Size.......................................................4 inch Suction Size...........................................................5 inch Design Capacity.................................................450 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................49 feet Efficiency at Design.............................................77 percent, minimum Motor Speed........................................................1800 RPM Shut -Off Head......................................................67 feet, minimum Motor Horsepower..............................................7.5 HP NPSHR at Design ................................... .._............ 9 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 150 gpm @ 65 feet TDH and 500 gpm @ 40 feet TDH. E. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump (Alternate): Number of Units....................................................1 Type of Drive ........................................................ Variable frequency drive Discharge Size .................................................... _6 inch Suction Size...........................................................6 inch Design Capacity .............................. :................. .925 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................60 feet Efficiency at Design.............................................86 percent, minimum Motor Speed........................................................1800 RPM Shut -Off Head......................................................71 feet, minimum Motor Horsepower..............................................20 HP NPSHR at Design..................................................10 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 300 gpm @ 70 feet TDH and 1200 gpm @ 45 feet TDH. F. Recreation Pool Flume Slides Pump: Number of Units .................................................... l Type of Drive ........................................................ Variable frequency drive Discharge Size.......................................................6 inch Suction Size...........................................................6 inch Design Capacity ........... ...................................... 1,250 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................42 feet Efficiency at Design ........................................ MotorSpeed ................................................... Shut -Off Head ................................................. Motor Horsepower ......................................... NPSHR at Design ............................ 80 percent, minimum 1800 RPM 63 feet, minimum 20 HP 17 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 500 gpm @ 60 feet TDH and 1600 gpm @ 27 feet TDH. @ 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL PUMPS 2251 16-5 G. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pumps (3 Total): Numberof Units ........ ............................................ l Type of Drive........................................................Variable frequency drive Discharge Size.......................................................6 inch Suction Size...........................................................6 inch. Design Capacity.................................................1,500 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................39 feet Efficiency at Design.............................................83 percent, minimum Motor Speed........................................................1800 RPM Shut -Off Head......................................................51 feet, minimum Motor Horsepower..............................................20 HP NPSHR at Design..................................................14 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 300 gpm @ 48 feet TDH and 1800 gpm @ 28 feet TDH. H. Recreation Pool Vortex Motion Pump: Number of Units.....................................................1 Type of Drive........................................................Variable frequency drive Discharge Size.......................................................6 inch Suction Size...........................................................6 inch Design Capacity .................................... ............. 1,500 gpm Design Total Dynamic Head .............................39 feet Efficiency at Design.............................................83 percent, minimum Motor Speed........................................................1800 RPM Shut -Off Head......................................................51 feet, minimum Motor Horsepower..............................................20 HP NPSHR at Design...................................................14 feet, maximum Pump shall also be able to pump 300 gpm @ 48 feet TDH and 1800 gpm @ 28 feet TDH. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Gauges: 1. Provide gauges and assemblies on the suction and discharge sides or all centrifugal pumps as shown on the drawings. Verify locations with the engineer. Gauges and assemblies shall be suitable for service with chlorinated water. Gauges shall be interchangeable between pumps. Gauges shall be manufactured by United Instrument, Inc., McDaniel, Crosby, Ashcroft, US Gauge, Wika, or approved equal, and shall conform as follows: a. 2-1 /2" inch diameter dial size, 304 stainless steel turret style case, internal threaded bezel, 1 /4 inch minimum connection size, 316 stainless steel connection material, standard bottom connection mounting, plexiglass window, aluminum with white background dial, black aluminum - micro adjustable pointer, phosphor bronze Bourdon tube, 316 stainless steel movement, 1.0 percent of full scale accuracy, black mat finish, glycerin filled, solid front/blow-out back, restrictive type 316 stainless steel snubber using tiny needle valve orifice or metallic porous sponge type, gauge assembly shall be glycerin -filled. POOL PUMPS @ 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 16 - 6 b. Diaphragm seal shall be constructed of neoprene or any other equally flexible, fatigue resistant material with stainless steel housing and equipped with bleed screw on pumped water side of diaphragm seal. c. Valves on gauge assemblies shall be quarter turn ball valves constructed with bronze body, stainless steel ball, and teflon seat. Approved Manufacturers: "Apollo" ball valves by Conbraco Industries, Inc., or approved equal. d. Pipe Connection: Connected to pipe with male portion of quick coupler. 2. Provide gauges as follows: Location Calibration Pump Suction Feet H2O Pump Discharge Feet H2O Pressure Range (feet of water) -30 To 0 To 30 0 To 100 3. If gauges with PSI calibration are proposed (i.e. PSI, Hg mercury), they shall be of similar equivalent pressure range. In addition, Contractor shall provide typed, laminated conversion chart between proposed units and feet H2O and PSI and place conversion chart in pool mechanical room at location selected by the Owner. B. Hair and Lint Strainers: l . Hair and lint strainers shall be provided for each centrifugal pump and shall be constructed of T304 stainless steel with a transparent lid, sealed with a neoprene gasket that can be opened without the use of tools. Reducing strainers shall be eccentric style. Provide 2 stainless steel baskets (i.e. one spare) per strainer. The baskets shall have a surface area at least 5 times the area of the connecting pipes. The strainers shall be designed for 50 psi working pressure. Provide drain line with shut-off valve to allow strainer to be completely drained for winterization. Strainers physically larger than those shown on the Drawings are subject to engineer approval and may be rejected based on size alone and/or require changes to pipe system design. Strainers shall meet all regulatory requirements. Any changes shall be done at no additional cost to the Owner. Basis of Design Strainer Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements provide Evoqua Water Technologies/Neptune-Benson - Guardian Series or approved equal. Provide strainers sized as follows: a. 50M Pool Recirculation Pump Size: 12"x12" b. 50M Pool Drop Slide Pump Size: 6"x4" c. Recreation Pool Recirculation Pump Size: 12"x12" d. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump Size: 8"x5" e. Recreation Pool Water Feature Pump (Alternate) Size: 10"x6" f. Recreation Pool Flume Slides Pump Size: 12"x6" g. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 1 Size: 12"x6" h. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 2 Size: 12"x6" i. Recreation Pool Current Channel Motion Pump No. 3 Size: 12"x6" j. Recreation Pool Vortex Motion Pump Size: 12"x6" POOL PUMPS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 16 - 7 C. Flexible Couplings: 1. Provide a flexible coupling before and after each centrifugal pump. Coupling shall be single arch standard spool type expansion joint. Fabricated of natural or synthetic elastomers, reinforced with fabric and metal internal rings for strength. Provide all stainless hardware, i.e. stainless steel flanges and stainless steel retaining ring, control rod gussets, etc. The flexible couplings shall be as manufactured by Twin City Hose, Inc., Rogers, MN (800) 670-9475 - MS 1 Series, or approved equal. D. Reducers: 1. Provide eccentric reducing strainer on pump suction and concentric reducer after the pump if applicable to match system pipe size. 2. Provide full size reducers (i.e. no bushing reducers) at all locations. 3. Provide fiberglass eccentric reducing pre -coat tees manufactured by Evoqua Water Technologies - Neptune -Benson on the recirculation pump assemblies with regenerative media filters. E. Valves: 1. Butterfly and check valves shall be supplied by Section 22 51 13. 2.05 SPARE PARTS A. Centrifugal Pumps: 1. 1 complete replacement for each mechanical seal assembly for each size seal. 2. 1 spare volute gasket for each pump. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer services and startup per Section 13 11 13. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The pumping units shall be installed in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer and as shown on the Drawings by the Carltraclar. B. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. C. The Contractor shall insure that the pumps and motors are properly installed with no pipe strain transmitted to the pump casing. D. Neatly secure all cables to support and lift chains. E. Coat aluminum surfaces in contact with or embedded in concrete with 2 coats of bituminous paint. POOL PUMPS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 16 - 8 3.03 FIELD TESTING A. Pump manufacturer shall submit a final start-up report which identifies the work conducted at each start-up. B. The pump manufacturer representative shall perform the following installation and start-up services on each pump: 1. Observe and record general operation of pumps and motors to ensure there is no excessive vibration. 2. Record motor amperage readings. 3. Record suction and discharge pressure readings. 4. Properly adjust impeller clearance. 5. Train maintenance personnel on proper operation and maintenance of pumps and motor. END OF SECTION POOL PUMPS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 16 - 9 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 22 51 19 POOL CONTROLS AND WATER TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Work shall include but is not necessarily limited to: a. Provide and install flow meters. b. Provide and install automatic water level controller. c. Provide and install chemical feed systems. 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. All requirements of Section 13 11 13 - Swimming Pool General shall apply to this Section. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall be responsible for requesting the equipment manufacturer's fabrication and installation shop drawing copies in the quantity specified in Division 1 and Section 13 11 13. B. Material Safety Data Sheets: The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner current copies of material safety data sheets for all chemicals and products brought onto the Site by the Contractor. 1.04 WARRANTY A. Warranty with 2-year correction period from the actual Substantial Completion Date shall apply to all Work in this Section, unless otherwise stated for a longer period for specific items. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PRODUCT DESCRIPTION A. All piping, equipment, etc. shall be suitable for use with the chemicals that it is supplying. 2.02 RECIRCULATION SYSTEM A. Flow Meter Type 1: l . Flow meter for measuring the Recirculation System Flow as shown on Drawings and shall be equipped with hot tap feature equipped with an isolation ball valve to allow access and removal of the meter for servicing without having to shut down the recirculation system and drain the piping. 2. Flow meter shall be provided as follows: 3. SeaMetrics EX 15B Magmeter or approved equal. 4. Accuracy +/- two (2) percen f. POOL CONTROLS AND WATER TREATMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 51 19 - 1 5. Flow Range: a. 50M Pool Recirculation System Flow 0 - 2,000 GPM b. Recreation Pool Recirculation System Flow 0 - 2,000 GPM 6. Flow meter shall be provided with saddle fitting and accessories for installation on Schedule 80 PVC piping. Install meter in horizontal configuration recommended by the manufacturer. 7. Rate indicator shall be remote wall mounted. Confirm location with Owner and Engineer. 8. Provide manufacturer recommended dual power supply accessories. 9. Equip flow meter with manufacturer recommended potting suitable for installation in a potentially hot and humid environment. 10. All meter component materials shall be per manufacturer recommendation for use in the pool application. 11. Wire and ground meter and accessories per manufacturer recommendations. 12. 4-20mA signal from flow meter shall be used to control speed of recirculation pump to maintain the recirculation rate by adjusting for varying tolcal clyrrurriic: Iieud conditions. B. Flow Meter Type 2: Flow meters shall be installed as shown in Drawings and fabricated for use on Schedule 80 PVC. Flow meters shall be provided as follows: 1. 112flow Controls, FloVis FV-6 or approved equal: Accuracy +/- 5 percent a. Recreation Pool Shallow Water Area 0 to 600 GPM b. Recreation Pool Plunge Pool/Vortex Pool 0 to 600 GPM c. Current Channel Area 0 to 600 GPM C. Automatic Level Control 1. Provide a complete automatic water level control system for each Pool System. 2. The system shall be capable of maintaining the pool water level within plus or minus 1 /16 inch. System shall control make-up water by measuring the level of the water in the surge tanks. Provide all piping, fittings, valves and other equipment necessary for a complete system, including stilling well piping. Controller shall be Neptune Benson WLC-100 or approved equal. Vent as necessary if recommended by manufacturer. Vent as necessary if recommended by manufacturer. Standard models shall be modified to work for layout shown on the Drawings. Controller shall control solenoid - operated valve to allow make-up water to be added as shown on the Drawings. Confirm length of probes in the field so as to measure operating level of the surge tank. Contractor shall coordinate installation with make-up water supply line, valves, etc. Contractor shall conduct tests to demonstrate to engineer that controller maintains pool water level as specified. Detailed proposed arrangement of components shall be submitted for approval. Alternative methods of water level control may be submitted by the Contractor but are subject to Engineer approval. No additional cost will be allowed for alternative arrangements. 3. Make -Up Water Supply: The Contractor shall provide and install make-up water fill lines as shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall provide and install manual isolation valves and a solenoid valve controlled by the automatic water level controller. The Contractor shall also provide and install a pipe with oversized funnel to prevent splashing and an air gap to the make-up water supply line as shown on the Drawings. POOL CONTROLS AND WATER TREATMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 19 -2 D. Thermometers and Controls: 1. Shall be supplied per requirements of the pool heater manufacturer and the State regulatory requirements. Shall be installed by the Contractor as recommended by the pool heater manufacturer. 2. Shall comply with regulatory requirements. 2.03 CHEMICAL FEED SYSTEM A. General: Provide chemical feed system for pool as follows to automatically monitor and maintain proper chlorine and pH levels within pre-set ranges in the pool. System components shall be NSF approved. Provide venting and bird screens to building exterior to comply with chemical supplier recommendations and regulatory requirements. 1. 50M Pool: a. Automatic Chemical Controller. b. Disinfection System. c. pH Control System. 2. Recreation Pool: a. Automatic Chemical Controller. b. Disinfection System. c. pH Control System. B. Automatic Controller: Furnish and install an automatic chemical controller. 1. Basis of Design Controller: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide BECSys5 as manufactured by BECS Technology. 2. The controller shall be capable of accurately and reliably sensing the pH and chlorine values in the pool water and controlling the operation of the chemical additive equipment to maintain the preset values. 3. The controller shall have two 120 VAC outlets and shall be equipped with interlock device to stop all chemical feed when the pool recirculation pump is not running. Contractor shall provide, install and wire device to accomplish this chemical feed stop capability. System shall comply with applicable regulatory codes. 4. Controller shall be provided in a wall mounted cabinet with key lockable, windowed door, and with a baked enamel finish. Face panel set -level controls shall provide operator selection of control points within the range of 7.0 to 8.0 pH and 0 to 4.0 ppm chlorine. 5. The Contractor shall provide power to and connect the controller. Controller shall have proper electrical protection within the controller for the equipment operated by it. 6. Provide with controller, wireless communication module to connect controller to building Wi-Fi network to enable remote access of monitoring, data acquisition and operation capability and receive email and text message alarm notifications. All operating functions that can be done at the control panel shall be able to be done remotely, including: reading current chemistry levels, alarm settings, obtaining controller history, adjusting settings, etc. Provisions shall be made to provide a separate security password for adjustment settings to prevent unauthorized use. Contractor shall install software on an Owner's selected computer. POOL CONTROLS AND WATER TREATMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2251 19 - 3 C. Disinfection System: Chlorine feed system shall be sized to provide: 1. 50M Pool: Accu-Tab System Model Power Base 3500 calcium hypochlorite tablet system by Axiall a Westlake Company. Feeder provides an NFS certified delivery rate of 0-36.4 pounds chlorine per hour and holds 500 pounds of tablets. 2. Recreation Pool: Accu-Tab System Model Power Base 3140 AT calcium hypochlorite tablet system by Axiall a Westlake Company. Feeder provides an NFS certified delivery rate of 0-22 pounds chlorine per hour and holds 140 pounds of tablets. 3. Each System: a. NSF listed as complying with Standard 50. System is pre -piped (PVC piping) and pre -wired for final installation and hook-up by the Contractor, on a custom -welded aluminum frame including chlorinator, electrical box, centrifugal pump, balance tank, float assembly, flow meter, solenoid valve, check and ball valves, pipe adapters and fittings. b. A side stream, erosion type feeder, NSF International Standard 50 certified and UL listed. c. Operates with Calcium Hypochlorite tablets with 65% minimum available chlorine and EPA registered for swimming pool use. d. Chlorine delivery to pool controlled by adjusting flow of side stream water from the pool return line through the feeder. e. Chlorinated side stream water pumped back to the pool water return line. Injection pump pumps the water flow to the pool return line. Pump is 1-1 /2 HP constructed of corrosion resistant materials and operates on 120V, 1 phase, 60 Hz. power. f. Flow Meter is a rotameter (flow through) flow meter, measuring the flow of the water -dissolving stream to the chlorinator. g. Pump shall be installed with: 1) A chock valvo on tho pump discharge to prevent backflow of pool water. 2) A ball valve on the pump discharge near the pump to allow discharge flow regulation in the event pool circulation hydraulics allow the pump to flow more water than can be fed to the treatment system. 3) A corrosion resistant balance tank with internal PVC float valve between the chlorine feeder and the pump. Additional water from the return line supplies water to the float valve to maintain sufficient water level for the proper pump operation. Tank equipped with a high limit safety switch. h. A solenoid valve shall be supplied to shut-off flow to the chlorine feeder. The solenoid valve shall be controlled by the automatic controller. Controller shall also control operation of the chlorine pump. i. Contractor shall install Schedule 80 PVC piping between unit and recirculation line and provide all power and control wiring to unit. j. Contractor shall furnish and install miscellaneous accessories as necessary for functional and operating system. D. pH Control Feed System : Shall be sized to provide: 1. 50M Pool: Acid -Rite pH Adjustment System 2500 by Axiall, a Westlake Company. System shall be NSF listed as complying with Standard 50. Feeder provides an NFS certified delivery rate of 0-37.5 pounds per hour and holds 250 pounds of tablets. 2. Recreation Pool: Acid -Rite pH Adjustment System 450 by Axiall, a Westlake Company. System shall be NSF listed as complying with Standard 50. Feeder provides an NFS certified delivery rate of 0-14.5 pounds per hour and holds 45 pounds of tablets. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 POOL CONTROLS AND WATER TREATMENT 225119-4 3. Each System: a. Description: The system shall be designed to erode Acid -Rite (sodium bisulfate) tablets, creating an acid solution, and feeding the solution intermittently or continuously as required for pool applications. The system shall be a single pre - assembled, package unit with a welded aluminum frame consisting of a feeder, balance tank, electrical box and centrifugal pump for ease of installation and operation and shall provide a complete, properly automated system. Only Acid - Rite Tablets by Axiall shall be used with a red colorant added for safety (to help prevent accidental mixing with other chemicals). b. System Features: 1) Delivery shall be by erosion feed technology for accurate control of acid addition. 2) The acid feed system shall automatically and continuously feed a limited quantity of acid solution as needed. When the system is not running, no more acid solution than that amount which can be fed in 2 minutes or less shall be left in the tank to prevent dilution. 3) A centrifugal pump wired to the system electrical box shall feed freshly mixed acid solution only as required for maximum efficiency. 4) All piping in the feed system shall be Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. c. System Components: 1) Acid Feeder. Tablets are placed on a sieve plate inside the feeder; as water flows across the plate, the tablets erode at a rate proportional to the flow rate. The lid color shall be red, matching the pail lid color to avoid mixing chemicals. 2) Inlet Filter. A filter shall be included to prevent debris from entering the float valve. 3) Inlet Water Supply Connection. 1 " Socket. Water supply of 10 GPM required. 4) Solution Tank. PVC or polyethylene. Capacity: 6 gallons (AR450) 22 gallons (AR2500). 5) Primary Solution Tank Level Control. Made from Schedule 80 PVC and 316L stainless steel, a 1/4" (AR50), 1 " (AR2500) float valve meters the flow through the feed system. The float valve opens or closes to maintain the pump rate as it is manually throttled. 6) Solution Delivery Pump. Delivers acid solution to the aquatic system return line. Single -stage centrifugal pump, 1 HP, single phase. Pump shall be installed with: a) A check valve on the pump discharge to prevent backflow of pool water. b) A ball valve on the pump discharge near the pump to allow discharge flow regulation in the event pool circulation hydraulics allow the pump to flow more water than can be fed to the treatment system. 7) Solution Injection Pump Air Bleed. Used to prime the pump at start-up, or at any time, if necessary. 8) Flow Meter. A flow meter, measuring the flow of the water -dissolving stream through the feed system. 9) Primary Backflow Prevention. A PVC check valve prevents reverse flow of water into the system. 10) Discharge Flow Control Valve (manual). PVC gate valve allows operator to adjust flow of solution to the pool system. 1 1) Overflow port. A 1 " port shall be located on the back side of the feeder solution tank and plumbed to drain. 12) Stacking cartridge (AR450). A stacking cartridge is included that allows 1-7 stacks of tablets to permit control of lower delivery rates. POOL CONTROLS AND WATER TREATMENT © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 22 51 19 - 5 13) Divider Plates (AR2500). Plates are provided to make various size compartments to permit control of lower delivery rates. 14) Outlet Connection. 1 " Socket. 15) NEMA 4X Electrical Enclosure. 16) Aluminum Frame, Type 6061-T. 17) A solenoid valve shall be supplied to shut-off flow to the pH feeder. The solenoid valve shall be controlled by the automatic controller. 18) Two electrical circuits: (1) 11 Ov 20 amp (AR450) 20 (AR2500) amp power, and (1) 11 Ov control circuit from a pool controller. 19) Contractor shall install Schedule 80 PVC piping between unit and recirculation line and provide all power and control wiring to unit. 20) pH feed system shall not feed chemical when the recirculation system is not running. 2.04 SAFETY WARNING SIGNS A. Contractor shall provide chemical safety warning signage in compliance with applicable local, state and federal requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer services and startup per Section 13 11 13. B. All equipment and piping shall be neatly arranged in an orderly manner for ease of operation and maintenance. Arrangement shall be as shown on the Drawings with minor deviations allowed where required for the size and configuration of the equiprTienl used. C. Workmanship: All work shall be performed by skilled workers experienced in pool construction. All piping shall be neatly laid out and installed in accordance with the best construction practices. All piping must drain to low points and be provided with convenient drain valves. Each valve and system component shall be clearly labeled using permanent tags and/or permanent tape labels properly secured in place. D. Contractor shall furnish and install miscellaneous accessory materials as required to provide complete functioning system. This shall include but is not limited to such things as pressure gauge tubing, miscellaneous piping, tubing, valves, couplings, etc. E. Ground and bond equipment in accordance with the most current version of Article 680 of the National Electrical Code and State and local code requirements. F. Position air relief valves to safely direct water drainage and purged air or water away from all electrical building components. END OF SECTION POOL CONTROLS AND WATER TREATMENT © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 22 51 19 - 6 SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Administrative requirements for HVAC systems: a. Submittals. b. Quality Assurance. c. Delivery, storage and handling. 2. Pipe and pipe fittings: a. Heating water and chilled water piping. b. Core water (heat pump) piping. c. In -slab radiant heating pipe. d. Equipment drains. e. Installation requirements. 3. General duty valves. 4. Pipe hangers and supports. a. Hanger rods. b. Inserts. c. Flashing. d. Sleeves. e. Formed steel channel. f. Equipment bases and supports. 5. Firestopping relating to HVAC work. a. Firestopping accessories. 6. Pipe and equipment identification. a. Tags. 7. Field Wiring B. Related Sections: 1. Division 00 and 01 Sections: a. Administrative procedures and requirements. b. Environmental conditions affecting products. 2. Section 03 30 00 - Cast -In -Place Concrete: Product and execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 3. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product and execution requirements for firestopping for placement by this division. 4. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants: Product requirements for sealant materials for placement by this Section. 5. Section 09 91 00 - Painting and Coating: Product and execution requirements for painting specified by this Section. 6. Section 22 05 00 Common Work results for Plumbing: Administrative, and procedural requirements for plumbing piping, fixtures and equipment. 7. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Insulation requirements related to sizing pipe hangers to encompass insulation. 8. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 1 Section 23 11 23 - Facility Natural -Gas Piping: Materials and installation. 9. Section 23 23 00 - Refrigerant Piping: Materials, specialties and installation. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. Al 3.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems. 2. 1316.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 3. B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. 4. B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 5. B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. 6. B31.9 - Building Services Piping. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. 4. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. 5. B584 - Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General Applications. 6. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 7. E1 19 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 8. E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through Penetration Fire Stops. 9. E 1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire -Resistive Joint Systems. 10. F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers. 11. F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications. C. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Brazo Wolding. 2. D1.1 -Structural Welding Code -Steel. D. International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO): 1. PS 117 - Copper, Copper Alloy, Carbon Steel, and Stainless Steel Piping Systems with Press -Type or Nail -Type Connections. E. International Code Council (ICC): 1. International Building Code (IBC). 2. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC). 3. International Mechanical Code (IMC). F. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. 1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 4. 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Rt ii1dinso .Inint Systems. 5. Fire Resistance Directory. C;UMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 2 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: 1. Identify specific products to be used on the project. 2. Submit data on pipe materials and fittings including project application. 3. Submit data on general duty valves. 4. Catalog data for equipment labels, valve tags and pipe identification. C. Closeout Submittals: 1. Submit copies of inspector acceptance of gas piping and mechanical work. 2. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals in accordance with closeout procedures. D. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual locations of tagged valves; include valve tag numbers. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems. B. Use joint grooving tools and materials provided from a single manufacturer. C. Furnish date stamped castings for couplings, fittings and valve bodies. D. Perform Work in accordance with Minnesota State Building Code. Conform to ASME Al 3.1 for color scheme for identification of piping systems and accessories. 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Explanation of manufacturer listings for Part 2 of Division 23 Sections: l . Select equipment from the listed manufacturers where a list of manufacturers are listed under the heading "Manufacturers." a. Manufacturers not listed must submit for and be granted approval prior to the end of the bidding period for use on this Project. b. The list of manufacturers is provided as a convenience to the Contractor, indicating manufacturers that may be able to meet the indicated requirements. c. Being listed does not indicate the availability of any product or approval of a product not containing the indicated features. 2. Use products meeting the indicated requirements where a list of manufacturers are listed under the heading "Acceptable Manufacturers." a. Approval to use products from manufacturers not listed is not a requirement. b. The list of manufacturers is provided as a convenience to the Contractor, indicating manufacturers that may be able to meet the indicated requirements. c. Being listed does not indicate the availability of any product or approval of a product not containing the indicated features. 3. Use products meeting the indicated requirements where manufacturers are not listed for products. a. Approval to use products from manufacturers not listed is not a requirement. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 3 B. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Division with minimum 3-years' experience. C. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this Division with minimum 3-years' experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00: Requirements for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products. B. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on pipes. C. Provide temporary caps on fittings and valves removed from shipping containers and not immediately installed. D. Protect piping from entry of foreign materials using temporary covers for idle sections of Me Wuik. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT DRAINS AND OVERFLOWS A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron or ASME B16.4, cast iron. 2. Joints: Threaded. B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, hard temper. 1. Fittings: ASME B 16.18, cast brass, or ASME B 16.22 solder wrought copper. 2. Joints: ASTM 1332, Alloy Grade Shy tin -antimony, or Alloy Grade Sn95 tin -silver, lead free solder. C. PVC Pipe: ASTM DI 785, Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241, SDR 21 or 26, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, Schedule 40, PVC. 2. Joints: ASTM D2855, solvent weld with ASTM D2564 solvent cement. 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Anvil (Grinnell). 2. B-Line - Coopers. 3. Carpenter & Paterson Inc. 4. Erico - Caddy System. 5. PHD Manufacturing. B. Applications: l . Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1 /2 to 1-1 /2 inch: Carbon steel, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2-inches and Larger: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 to 4-inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. 6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 3-inches and Smaller: Cast iron hook. COMMON WORK RESULIS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 4 7. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4-inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp. 8. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp. 9. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 10. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 4-inches and Smaller: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or steel support. 11. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6-inches and Larger: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll. 12. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6-inches and Larger: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll. 13. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6-inches and Larger: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger. 14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6-inches and Larger: Adjustable cast iron roll and stand, steel screws, and concrete pier or steel support. 15. Roof Support: a. Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic or stainless steel unit with integral -rod roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration. b. High -Type, Multiple -Pipe Stand: 1) Description: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration. 2) Bases: One or more; plastic. 3) Vertical Members: Two or more protective -coated -steel channels. 4) Horizontal Member: Protective -coated -steel channel. 5) Pipe Supports: Galvanized -steel, clevis-type pipe hangers. c. Curb -Mounted -Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field -fabricated pipe supports made from structural -steel shapes, continuous -thread rods, and rollers, for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded on one end, or continuous threaded. 2.04 INSERTS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Cooper B-Line. 2. Hilti. 3. Simpson Strong Tie Company. 4. Unistrut Corp. B. Inserts: Galvanized steel shell and expander plug with threaded connection and lateral adjustment. Top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms. Size inserts to suit threaded hanger rod loading. 2.05 FLASHING A. Metal Flashing: 26-gauge thick galvanized steel. B. Metal Counterflashing: 22-gauge thick galvanized steel. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 5 C. Lead Flashing: 1. Waterproofing: 5 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. 2. Soundproofing: 1 lb./sq. ft sheet lead. D. Flexible Flashing: 47 mil thick sheet butyl; compatible with roofing. E. Caps: Steel, 22-gauge minimum; 16-gauge at fire resistant elements. 2.06 SLEEVES A. Sleeves for Pipes through Floors: Schedule 10 steel pipe or 18-gauge galvanized steel sheet metal. B. Sleeves for pipes through beams and masonry walls: Schedule 10 steel pipe or 18-gauge galvanized steel sheet metal. 24-gauge galvanized sheet metal for gypsum wall board sleeves. 2.07 FORMED STEEL CHANNEL A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Elcen. 2. B-Line Systems. 3. Hilti. 4. Powerstrut, Inc. 5. Unistrut Corp. 6. Fee and Mason. B. Product Description: Galvanized 12-gauge thick steel. With holes 1-1 /2 inches on center. 2.08 FIRESTOPPING A. Refer to Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: l . Dow Corning Corp. 2. Fire Trak Corp. 3. Hilti Corp. 4. International Protective Coating Corp. 5. 3M fire Protection Products. 6. Specified Technology, Inc. C. Product Description: Different types of products by multiple manufacturers are acceptable as required to meet specified system description and performance requirements; provide only 1 type for each similar application: 1. Silicone Firestopping Elastomeric Firestopping: Multiple component silicone elastomeric compound and compatible silicone sealant. 2. Foam Firestopping Compounds: Multiple component foam compound. 3. Formulated Firestopping Compound of Incombustible Fibers: Formulated compound mixed with incombustible non -asbestos fibers. 4. Fiber Stuffing and Sealant Firestopping: Composite of mineral fiber stuffing insulation with silicone elastomer for smoke stopping. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 6 Mechanical Firestopping Device With Fillers: Mechanical device with incombustible fillers and silicone elastomer, covered with sheet stainless steel jacket, joined with collars, penetration sealed with flanged stops. Intumescent Firestopping: Intumescent putty compound which expands on exposure to surface heat gain. Firestop Pillows: Formed mineral fiber pillows. 2.09 FIRESTOPPING ACCESSORIES A. Primer: Type recommended by firestopping manufacturer for specific substrate surfaces and suitable for required fire ratings. B. Dam Material: Permanent: 1. Mineral fiberboard. 2. Mineral fiber matting. 3. Sheet metal. 4. Plywood or particle board. 5. Alumina silicate fire board. C. Installation Accessories: Provide clips, collars, fasteners, temporary stops or dams, and other devices required to position and retain materials in place. D. General: 1. Furnish UL listed products or products tested by independent testing laboratory. 2. Select products with rating not less than rating of wall or floor being penetrated. E. Non -Rated Surfaces: l . Stamped steel, chrome plated, hinged, split ring escutcheons or floor plates or ceiling plates for covering openings in occupied areas where piping is exposed. 2. For exterior wall openings below grade, furnish mechanical sealing device to continuously fill annular space between piping and cored opening or water -stop type wall sleeve. 2.10 VALVE TAGS A. Plastic Tags: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. W.H. Brady. b. Marketing Systems, Inc. c. MSI. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Laminated 3-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inches diameter. 2.11 PIPE AND DUCT MARKERS A. Color and Lettering: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Tape Pipe Markers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. W.H. Brady. b. Marketing Systems, Inc. c. MSI. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 7 d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Flexible, vinyl film tape with pressure sensitive adhesive backing and printed markings. C. Plastic Underground Pipe Markers: 1. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. W.H. Brady. b. Marketing Systems, Inc. c. MSI. d. Seton Identification Products. 2. Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6-inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service. 3. Trace Wire: Magnetic detectable conductor, brightly colored plastic covering, imprinted with "Natural Gas Service" in large letters. 2.12 LABELS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. W.H. Brady. 2. Champion. 3. MSI. 4. Ready Made. 5. Seton Identification Products. B. Description: Laminated 3-layer rigid plastic with engraved black letters on light colored background. 1.9-inch by 0.75-inch minimum size, adhesive backed. Comply with ASME Al3.1 standard for colors and locations. C. Control Device Labels: Pressure sensitive machine printed labels, black print on white field. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 30 00: Acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over -excavated. C. Verify trenches are ready to receive piping. D. The Contractor is responsible for verifying invert elevations with respect to building finished floor elevations and site provisions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end pipe for welding. B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges, grooved joint couplings, or unions, D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-8 E. Select hangers to surround insulation, shield and piping on insulated pipe. F. Review equipment installation and operation manuals prior to installing equipment. 3.03 INSTALLATION - INSERTS A. Install inserts for placement in concrete forms. B. Install inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. C. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe 4-inches and larger. D. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. E. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through -bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above flush with top of slab. 3.04 INSTALLATION - PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Install in accordance with ASME 31.9. B. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. C. Install hangers with minimum 1/2-inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. D. Place hangers within 12-inches of each horizontal elbow. E. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. F. Support vertical piping at every floor. G. Where piping is installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple pipe or trapeze hangers. H. Support riser piping independently of connected horizontal piping. I. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. J. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed. K. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation. 3.05 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 6-inches beyond supported equipment. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 230500-9 B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment. C. Construct supports of steel members, formed steel channel, or steel pipe and fittings. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure. D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. 3.06 INSTALLATION - SLEEVES A. Exterior Watertight Entries: Seal with mechanical sleeve seals. B. Set sleeves in position in forms. Provide reinforcing around sleeves. C. Size sleeves large enough to allow for movement due to expansion and contraction. Provide for continuous insulation wrapping. D. Extend sleeves through floors 1-inch above finished floor level. Caulk sleeves. E. Where piping or ductwork penetrates floor, ceiling, or wall, close off space between pipe or duct and adjacent work with stuffing or firestopping insulation and caulk airtight. Provide close fitting metal collar or escutcheon covers at both sides of penetration. F. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons at finished surfaces. 3.07 INSTALLATION - FIRESTOPPING A. Inslall material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items, requiring firestopping. B. Install material at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves, piping, ductwork, and other items requiring firestopping. 3.08 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. B. Install piping to maintain headroom without interfering with use of space or taking more space than necessary. C. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. E. Slope piping and arrange systems to drain at low points. F. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. G. Install piping penetrating roofed areas to maintain integrity of roof assembly. H. Provide sleeves for piping through footings, foundation walls and floors. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 23 05 00 - 10 L- Provide shut-off valves: 1. As required by Code. 2. At branch lines serving more than one terminal device. 3. With extended valve stems for insulated piping applications. 4. With screwed connections for piping 2-1/2 inch and smaller. 5. With flanged connections for piping 3-inch and larger. 6. With hose end caps on low point drains. J. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding. K. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. L. Prepare exposed, unfinished pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories ready for finish painting. M. Install grooved joints in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. 1. Clean joint surfaces, rejecting defects such as indentations, projections, and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. 2. Use elastomer grade gaskets suitable for the intended service, molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer. N. Install firestopping at fire rated construction perimeters and openings containing penetrating sleeves and piping. 3.09 INSTALLATION - VALVES A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted. B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe. C. Install 3/4-inch ball valves with cap for drains at main shut-off valves, low points of piping, bases of vertical risers, and at equipment. D. Install valves with clearance for installation of insulation and allowing access. E. Locate valve to be accessible through access panels where valves are installed above gypsum or plaster ceilings and chases. Coordinate size and location of access doors. F. Refer to Section 22 07 00 for insulation requirements for valves. G. Applications: 1. Install gate valves in hydronic system piping over 2-inch for shut-off service. 2. Install ball valves in hydronic system piping up to 2-inch for shut-off service. 3. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 4. Install shutoff and drain valves at locations indicated on Drawings and/or specified herein. 5. Install spring loaded check valves on discharge of pumps. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 1 1 6. Install balancing valves downstream of boiler pumps, circulating pumps and terminal devices. a. Up to 3 size: Install with 3 pipe diameters straight pipe at inlet and 1 at outlet. b. 4-inch and larger: Install with 5 pipe diameters straight pipe at inlet and 2 at outlet. c. Follow manufacturer's recommendations if more stringent than stated above. 3.10 INSTALLATION - HVAC EQUIPMENT A. Follow manufacturer's published installation instructions. 3.11 HANGER SCHEDULE A. C o er ana Yeei i-i e Han er 3 acing: COPPER PEX-A PIPE PEX-A TUBING COPPER STEEL PIPE STEEL PIPE w/PIPE- PIPE MAXIMU TUBING MAXIMUM HANGER Support w/PIPE- PIPE M HANGER HANGER ROD MAXIMUM Support SIZE HANGER ROD SPACING DIAMETER HANGER Rod Inches SPACING DIAMETER Feet Inches SPACING Diameter Feet Inches Feet Inches 1/2 5 3/8 7 3/8 6 3/8 3/4 5 3/8 7 3/8 6 3/8 1 6 3/8 7 3/8 8 3/8 1-1/4 7 3/8 7 3/8 8 3/8 1-1/2 8 3/8 9 3/8 8 3/8 2 8 3/8 10 3/8 8 3/8 2-1/2 9 1/2 11 1/2 8 1/2 3 10 1/2 12 1/2 8 1/2 4 12 1/2 14 5/8 8 1/2 5 13 1/2 16 5/8 N/A N/A 6 14 5/8 17 3/4 N/A N/A 8 16 3/4 19 3/4 N/A N/A B. Note 1: Refer to manufacturer's recommendations for grooved end piping systems. C. Note 2: Pex-A Pipe Support shall contain an E84 assembly listing with the pipe and be by same manufacturer to maintain warranty 3.12 FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE A. Through Penetration Firestopping of Fire Rated Assemblies: UL 1479 or ASTM E814 with 0.10- inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings not less than 1 hour: 1. Wall Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings not less than 1 hour. 2. Floor and Roof Penetrations: Fire F-Ratings and temperature T-Ratings not less than 1 hour: a. Floor Penetrations Within Wall Cavities: T-Rating is not required. COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC; © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 12 Through Penetration Firestopping of Non -Fire Rated Floor and Roof Assemblies: Materials to resist free passage of flame and products of combustion: 1. Noncombustible Penetrating Items: Noncombustible materials for penetrating items connecting maximum of 3 stories. 2. Penetrating Items: Materials approved by authorities having jurisdiction for penetrating items connecting maximum of 2 stories. C. Fire Resistant Joints in Fire Rated Floor, Roof, and Wall Assemblies: ASTM E1966 or UL 2079 to achieve 1-hour fire resistant rating for assembly in which joint is installed. D. Fire Resistant Joints Between Floor Slabs and Exterior Walls: ASTM El 19 with 0.10-inch water gage minimum positive pressure differential to achieve 1-hour fire resistant rating for floor assembly. E. Surface Burning Characteristics: Maximum 25/50 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 3.13 VALVE IDENTIFICATION A. Provide 4 copies of a typewritten list identifying numbered valves. Identification shall include valve number, service, location and area served. B. 3 copies shall be incorporated in maintenance manuals. 3.14 PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 22 05 00 for additional pipe identification requirements. B. Use pressure sensitive labels, pre -formed markers or stenciling. C. Include labeling of service, direction of flow and tape bands at each end of labels with approved colors. D. Stencils: Black letters on a yellow background using stenciling brushes. Provide stencils for pipe service and direction of flow 1-inch minimum height. Provide identification for exposed systems within the building and in accessible concealed spaces, such as above lay -in ceilings and at access panels. Minimum locations: 1. At not more than 30-foot intervals on straight runs. 2. Turns of 90 degrees. 3. Passing through a wall, on both sides. 4. At other locations deemed necessary for ease of maintenance, e.g. access panels. F. Piping that does not require identification: 1. Below grade piping. 2. Inaccessible piping concealed in chase walls, G. Abbreviations: label as follows: 1. Condensate Drain or CD 2. Natural Gas or GAS 3. Refrigeration Liquid or REF LIQ 4. Refrigeration Suction or REF SUC 5. Supply Air or SA COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 13 6. Return Air or RA 7. Outside Air or OA 8. Exhaust Air or EA 3.15 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Provide identification labels for scheduled equipment permanently affixed to equipment with mechanical fasteners (rivets, screws, bolts or other approved methods) in a prominent location. B. Install labels level and drawn tight to the equipment surface. Provide backing or back-up plates where required by the fastening devices. On pumps and similar small equipment, the label may be located on the wall adjacent to the equipment. C. Equipment labeling shall spell out the description of each piece of equipment (Water Heater # 1, for example). D. Control Device Labels: Install adhesive backed labels inside thermostat and sensor covers to indicate the controlled device. For potentiometers, locate label next to the adjustment knob. 3.16 FIELD WIRING A. Provide field wiring for mechanical equipment, thermostats, sensors, and controls. See Division 26 for wire requirements. B. Wire motors and controls so only external connections are required during installation. C. Wiring Method: Install control wiring in conduit. Install control wiring inaccessible ceiling spaces and in gypsum board partitions where unenclosed wiring method may be used. Conceal control wiring except in unfinished spaces. END OF SECTION COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 00 - 14 SECTION 23 05 93 HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems. 2. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of hydronic systems. 3. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC: Administrative requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): 1. MN=l - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Building Heating, Ventilation, Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Systems. C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): 1. Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems. D. Testing Adjusting and Balancing Bureau (TABB): 1. International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Prior to commencing Work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. Include detailed procedures, agenda and sample report forms. B. Prior to commencing Work, submit proof of latest calibration date of each instrument. C. Test Reports: Indicate data on national organization approved forms. D. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems. E. Submit draft copies of report data for review prior to final acceptance of Project- F. Furnish reports in bound, letter size manuals, complete with table of contents page and indexing tabs. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 - 1 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Furnish final copy of testing, adjusting, and balancing report for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with 1 of the following: 1. AABC MN-1 National Standards for Field Measurement and Instrumentation. 2. Total System Balance. 3. NEBB Quality Assurance Program - Conformance Certification. 4. TABB Quality Assurance Program for Environmental Systems Balance. B. Verify and certify that measuring devices have been calibrated within the past 12 months. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Agency: Company specializing in testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this Section with minimum 3-years experience certified by AABC, NEBB or TABB. B. Perform Work under supervision of one of the following: 1. AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer. 2. NEBB Certified Testing, Balancing, and Adjusting Supervisor. 3. TABB Certified Professional. 1.07 INSTRUMENTATION A. Provide instrumentation, such as pitot tubes, inclined gauge or U-tube manometers, magnehelic gages, velometer, direct reading hood, tachometer or rpm rnunter, insertion thermometers, clamp -on ammeter for motor voltage and ampere readings, and other instruments, required to completely analyze and balance the HVAC systems. 1.08 SEQUENCING A. Section 0l 10 00: Work sequence. B. Sequence balancing between system installation and Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 BELTS AND DRIVES A. Where factory furnished belts and drives cannot achieve design airflows, replace belts and drives to attain indicated performance. B. Reimbursement from Contractor responsible for furnishing equipment: 1. Return unused belts and drives. 2. Submit labor and material costs associated with drive replacement. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 -2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Section 01 31 00: Coordination and Project conditions. B. Review drawings to verify locations of balancing devices for proper balancing and accessibility. C. Notify Architect/Engineer of component locations that will inhibit balancing and can be remedied with field modifications to balancing device locations. D. Verify systems are complete and operable before commencing Work: 1. Piping and duct systems are flushed clean. 2. Systems are started and operating in safe and normal condition. 3. Temperature control systems are installed and operable. 4. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 5. Air filters and strainers are clean and in place. 6. Start-up strainers have been removed. 7. Fans and pumps are rotating correctly. 8. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 9. Valves are in operating position. 10. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 11. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 12. Air outlets are installed and connected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Furnish properly operating instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: With clean filters installed, adjust to plus 15 percent, minus 5 percent of scheduled airflow. B. Exhaust Fans: Adjust to within plus 10 and minus 0 percent of design. C. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust outlets and inlets to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. D. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to plus or minus 10 percent of design flow. E. Hydronic Terminal Units: Adjust to plus or minus 10 percent of design flow. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Refer to Section 01 70 00: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Verify recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. C. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services, preventing system balance. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING 23 05 93 -3 D. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. E. Under Direction of the Commissioning Authority, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted. If disrupted, balance to the satisfaction of the Commissioning Authority. F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 3.05 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to obtain indicated supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. B. Measure and document airflow in main ducts by Pitot tube traverse. C. Measure and document air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to minimize objectionable drafts. E. Use terminal volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by using volume dampers located in ducts. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide sheave drive changes to vary fan speed. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including fan, coil, heat wheel and filter pressure drops. H. Adjust automatic damper stop positions to balance outside air, return air, and exhaust airflows. Measure the amperes of fan and pump motors before adjusting and balancing. Throttle dampers or valves or reduce equipment speed to correct overload conditions. J. Discontinue adjusting and balancing if hazardous or dangerous conditions are observed. Follow jobsite safety procedures. K. Verify outlets for compliance with design requirements and report variations before starting the adjusting and balancing process. L. At modulating damper locations, take measurements and balance damper end position through software settings or installation of a physical stop where actuator is designed to stall under normal operating conditions. 3.06 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems after air balancing, to obtain design quantities. B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow -metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on catalog pressure difference across heat transfer elements in system. HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 93 - 4 C. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. D. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing, unless indexed for balance point. E. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, simulate full flow in one part by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. 3.07 BALANCING STANDARDS A. Instruments used for testing and balancing of air systems must have been calibrated within the past 12 months prior to balancing. Include a letter of certification listing instrumentation used and most recent date of calibration. B. Include 1 plan review prior to start of construction and 1 on Site inspection during the construction, together with a report on recommended modifications and compliance with requirements of the Specification. 3.08 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING A. Following Substantial Completion, return to the Site, for up to 4 balancing/ commissioning sessions. B. Commissioning consists of demonstrating both air and waterside systems to the extent required to verify proper operation of system components and controls. C. Coordinate with automatic temperature controls contractor to make required adjustments. 3.09 SCHEDULES A. Submit a schedule to the Architect for approval containing the information listed below in tabular form. B. Equipment requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 1. Circulator Pumps (HVAC and Plumbing). 2. Exhaust and transfer fans. 3. Air inlets and outlets. 4. Unit heaters and cabinet unit heaters. 5. Furnaces. b. Air handling units. C. Report Forms 1. Title Page a. Name, address, telephone and facsimile numbers of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Project name, location, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and report date. 2. Summary Comments a. Design versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of system. c. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate building pressurization. d. Nomenclature used throughout report. e. Test conditions. 3. Balancing Instrument List HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 93 - 5 a. Instrument; Manufacturer, model number, serial number, measurement range and calibration date. 4. Electric Motors a. Manufacturer. b. Model/Frame. c. HP/BHP and kW. d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load. e. RPM. f. Service factor. g. Starter size, rating, heater elements. h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. 5. V-Belt Drive a. Identification/location. b. Required driven RPM. c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM. d. Belt, size and quantity. e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM. f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual. 6. Pump Data a. Identification/number. b. Manufacturer. c. Size/model. d. Impeller. e. Service. f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW. g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP and kW. h. Discharge pressure. i. Suction pressure. j. Total operating head pressure. k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures. I. Shul off, lotal (lead pressure. 7. Heat Exchanger a. Identification/number. b. Location. c. Service. d Mnni ifnc-ti irPr. e. Model number. f. Serial number. g. Primary water flow, design and actual. h. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual. i. Secondary water flow, design and actual. j. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual. 8. Air Moving Equipment a. Location. b. Manufacturer. c. Model number. d. Serial number. e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge. f. Air flow, specified and actual. cg. Return air flow, specified and actual. h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. i. Number of Bclts/Make/Sizo. j. Fan RPM. 9. Return Air/Outside Air Data HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 93 - 6 a. Identification/location. b. Design air flow. c. Actual air flow. d. Design return air flow. e. Actual return air flow. f. Design outside air flow. g. Actual outside air flow. h. Design outside/return air ratio. i. Actual outside/return air ratio. 10. Exhaust Fan Data a. Location. b. Manufacturer. c. Model number. d. Serial number. e. Air flow, specified and actual. f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual. g. Inlet pressure. h. Discharge pressure. i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore. j. Number of Belts/Make/Size. k. Fan RPM. 11. Duct Traverse a. System zone/branch. b. Duct size. c. Area. d. Design velocity. e. Design air flow. f. Test velocity. g. Test air flow. h. Duct static pressure. 12. Air Distribution Test Sheet a. Air terminal number. b. Room number/location. c. Design air flow. d. Test (final) air flow. e. Percent of design air flow. END OF SECTION HVAC TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 05 93 - 7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 23 07 00 HVAC INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes HVAC Insulation for equipment, piping and ductwork. Related Sections: l . Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC: a. Hanger sizes for insulated pipes. b. Pipe identification. c. Extended valve stems for insulated valves. d. General material and installation requirements. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. ASTM C165 - "Test Method for Measuring Compressive Properties of Thermal Insulations" 2. C450 Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 3. C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 4. C552 - Specification for Cellular Glass Thermal Insulation. 5. C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NIPS System). 6. C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation. 7. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 8. B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. 9. C450 - Standard Practice for Fabrication of Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers for NPS Piping, and Vessel Lagging. 10. C533 - "Specification for Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation" 11. C534 - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form. 12. C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation. 13. C585 - Standard Practice for Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System). 14. C921 - Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. 15. C1071 - Standard Specification for Thermal and Acoustical Insulation (Glass Fiber, Duct Lining Material). 16. C1136 - Standard Specification for Flexible, Low Permeance Vapor Retarders for Thermal Insulation. 17. C1639 - Standard Specification for Fabrication of Cellular Glass Piping and Tubing Insulation. 18. D 1784 - Standard Specification for Rigid Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 19. E96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. 20. E2231 - Standard Practice for Specimen Preparation and Mounting of Pipe and Duct Insulation Materials to Assess Surface Burning Characteristics. HVAC INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 07 00 - 1 B. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors (SMACNA): 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 0133 00 for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Product description, thermal characteristics, ASTM standards compliance. 1. List specific materials for each service, and location. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Certify insulation for maximum flame spread index of 25 and maximum smoke developed index of 50 when tested in accordance wills ASTM E84, UL-723, and NFPA 255. 1. Follow mounting procedures of ASTM E2231. 2. Provide accessories, such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tapes and glass cloth to retain the indicated index rating of the assembly. B. Manufacture pipe insulation inner and outer diameters in accordance with ASTM C585. C. Manufacture factory fabricated fitting covers in accordance with ASTM C450. 1.05 QLIAIIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years of experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification, including product density and thickness. B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemicals, and damage by storing in original wrapping. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install insulation only when ambient temperature and humidity conditions are within range recommended by manufacturer. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC INSULATION 230700-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Glass Fiber and Mineral Fiber Insulation Products: 1. CertainTeed. 2. Knauf. 3. Johns Manville. 4. Owens Corning. B. Acceptable Manufacturers for Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Products: 1. Aeroflex. Aerocell. 2. Armacell, LLC. Armaflex. 3. Nomaco; FlexTherm. C. Acceptable Manufacturers for Cellular Glass Insulation Products: 1. Pittsburg - Corning Foamglas One. D. Acceptable Manufacturers for Calcium Silicate Insulation Products: 1. Johns Manville, Thermo-12 Gold. E. Acceptable Manufacturers for Insulation Saddles and Protection Shields: 1. Anvil (Grinnell). 2. B-Line - Coopers. 3. Carpenter and Patterson. 4. PHD Manufacturing. F. Acceptable Manufacturers for Insulation Fitting Covers: 1. Insulated Pipe Shields, LLC (Aluminum). 2. Johns Manville (Zeston). 3. Proto. 4. Speedline. 5. ITW Insulations Systems (Aluminum). 2.02 PIPE INSULATION A. TYPE P-1: ASTM C547, molded glass fiber pipe insulation with integral all-purpose jacket. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.23 at 75 degrees F. 2. Operating Temperature Range: 0 to 850 degrees F. 3. Vapor Barrier Jacket: Factory applied reinforced foil kraft with self-sealing adhesive joints. 4. Jacket Temperature Limit: ASTM C1 136: minus 20 to 150 degrees F. B. TYPE P-2: ASTM C534, Type I, flexible, closed cell elastomeric insulation, tubular. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Operating Temperature Range: Range: Minus 70 to 180 degrees F. 3. Refer to special insert requirements below. HVAC INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 07 00 - 3 2.03 PIPE INSULATION JACKETS A. Vapor Retarder Jacket: 1. ASTM C921, white Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96/E96M; 0.02 perms. B. PVC Fitting Covers: 1. Rated 25/50 for flame spread and smoke developed, tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Match adjacent PVC jacket thickness where applicable, 20 mil minimum thickness. 3. 30 mil thickness for outdoor applications and indoor applications within 6 feet of the floor. 4. White. C. Aluminum Fitting Covers: 1. Fabricated from 1 100 aluminum alloy, two-piece assembly. 2. 0.032-inch thickness, 2-1/2 inch size and larger. D. PVC Plastic Pipe Jacket: 1. Material compounds in accordance with ASTM D1784. White. 2. 20 mil sheet material, 30 mil minimum thickness for outdoor applications. 3. Pressure sensitive color matching vinyl tape joints for hot systems. 4. Solvent weld seams for outdoor use and systems operating below ambient temperatures. E. Aluminum jacket: 1. Type T-3003 H-14 sheet. 2. 0.016 inch minimum thickness, smooth or embossed pattern. 3. Secured with'/1-inch wido 0.020-inch thick typo 304 stainloss stool bands. 2.04 INSULATION ACCESSORIES A. Adhesives and mastic: Compatible with insulation and jacket materials. 1. Adhesive for cellular glass: Pittseal Cw. 2. Mastic for cellular glass: Pittcote 404 coating. B. Vapor Retarder Tape: 1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive. C. Piping 1-1 /2 Inches Diameter and Smaller: Galvanized steel insulation protection shield. MSS SP-69, Type 40. Length: Based on pipe size and insulation thickness. D. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Pipe Hanger: Polyurethane insert with aluminum jacket single piece construction with self-adhesive closure. Thickness to match pipe insulation. 2.05 SHEET METAL BLANK OFFS A. Wall louvers: 1. Double wall anodized or galvanized sheet metal panels. 2. Insulated with 2 inch thick, 3-pound density glass fiber insulation. HVAC INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 07 00 - 4 3. Duct gage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for 1 /2 inch pressure classification; no cross -breaking. 4. Surfaces visible through the louver: Painted or anodized black. 2.06 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. TYPE D-1: ASTM C1290, Type III, flexible glass fiber, commercial grade with factory applied FSK jacket meeting ASTM C1136, Type II: 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F. 3. Density: 0.75 pound per cubic foot. B. Type D-2: ASTM C612, Type IA or IB, rigid glass fiber, with factory applied jacket meeting ASTM C 1136, Type II: 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Density: 3.0 pound per cubic foot. C. TYPE D-3: ASTM C 1071, Type I, flexible, glass fiber duct liner with coated air side. 1. Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Density: 1.5 pound per cubic foot. 3. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 degrees F. 4. Maximum Air Velocity: 6,000 feet per minute. 2.07 DUCTWORK INSULATION JACKETS (FIELD APPLIED) A. Aluminum Duct Jacket: l . ASTM B209. 2. Thickness: 0.016 inch thick sheet. 3. Finish: Smooth or diamond pattern. 4. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps. 5. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner. 6. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum. B. Vapor Retarder AP Jacket: 1. White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film. 2. Water Vapor Permeance: ASTM E96; 0.02 perms. 3. Secure with pressure sensitive tape. A. FLEXIBLE SELF-ADHESIVE CLADDING l . Manufacturers and trade names: a. Polyguard - Alumaguard. b. VentureClad - 1577CW. 2. Description: a. Thickness: 5.5 to 6 mil. b. Density: 0.3 pounds per square foot. c. Water Vapor Permeability (ASTM E96): 0.00 perms. d. Puncture Resistance (ASTM D 1000): 35.4 pounds. e. Tear Strength (ASTM D 624): 8.5 pounds. HVAC INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 07 00 - 5 2.08 INSULATION SHIELDS, SADDLES AND INSERTS A. Insulation protection shields at hangers: 1. Galvanized steel, minimum length: 12 inches. 2. MSS SP-69, Type 40. 3. Thickness: a. 5.7 inch diameter and smaller: 18 gage galvanized steel. b. 5.7 inch to 11 inch diameter: 16 gage galvanized steel. c. Larger than 11 inch diameter: 14 gage galvanized steel. Pipe Saddles for Pipes 4 inch and larger: 1. Exposed and non -plenum locations: Wood insulation saddle, hard maple. Inserts length: not less than insulation shield length, matching thickness and contour of adjoining insulation. 2. Plenum locations and where roll hangers are used: Carbon steel saddle with glass fiber or calcium silicate insert shaped to match pipe and saddle contours. C. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation Insert: 1. Polyurethane insert to fully surround pipe. 2. Thickness to match pipe insulation. 3. Tyco PUN series or Tyco KS series; or equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Coordinate sleeved openings with pipe and duct installers prior to setting sleeves to ensure adequate openings for insulation through floor and wall penetrations. B. Verify piping, equipment, and ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials. C. Verify surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION - GLASS FIBER PIPE INSULATION AND JACKET A. Pipe and cylindrical fittings: 1. Verify that insulation is correct size to snugly fit around specific piping. 2. Apply insulation to clean piping. 3. Apply mastic to piping to temporarily secure insulation to pipes when jacket is not permanently affixed to outside of insulation system. 4. Seal exposed ends of insulation with a full coat of mastic. B. Fittings: 1. Apply pre-cut insulation to fittings to provide a snug fit. 2. Insulate other fittings with 3/4 lb. density fiberglass blanket compressed to the same thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. a. Secure fitting insulation with fiberglass tape or 18 gauge stainless steel wire. b. Finish with a smooth coat of mineral fiber cement. c. After the cement is dry, finish with 4 oz. canvas adhered with permanent adhesive. HVAC INSULATION 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 07 00 - 6 C. Jacket and fitting covers: 1. Seal jackets and end laps with mastic applied to 2 surfaces or with self-sealing type lap system. 2. Secure fitting covers by stapling and taping the ends to the adjacent pipe insulation. 3. For piping systems required to have a vapor barrier, seal seam edges with vapor barrier adhesive and wrap ends with vapor barrier tape overlapping the adjacent jacket. 3.03 INSTALLATION - ELASTOMERIC FOAM A. Pipe and Fittings: 1. Slip insulation over pipe before assembly. 2. Insulate fittings with matching insulation. 3. Insulate at hangers with polyurethane inserts. 4. Paint insulation exposed to weather with alkydchorinated -rubber paint. 3.04 INSTALLATION - CALCIUM SILICATE A. For piping and equipment operating at or above 600OF or insulation thicknesses above 3" (75mm), use double layer insulation. l . Stagger both longitudinal and circumferential joints to reduce the impact of the thermal expansion and contraction. 2. Where long unbroken stretches of insulation are encountered, expansion joints may be required as noted on the Contract Drawings. 3. Fasten in place with longitudinal and circumferential joints butted tightly and mechanically held in place using the following materials: a. 18 gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel wire: outside diameters less than 12-inches. b. 16 gauge Type 304 stainless steel wire for 12" diameter and larger. c. 0.5" x 0.020" (13 x 0.5mm) Type 304 stainless steel bands and clips. d. Wire and bands placed 12" on center, maximum spacing. B. Provide metal jacketing for generator exhaust piping systems and piping systems up to 10' above the floor in mechanical equipment rooms. a. Place all jacket seams so water incursion cannot occur. C. Cover flanges with an oversized pipe insulation section sized to provide the same insulation thickness as the surrounding pipe sections. 3.05 INSTALLATION - PIPING A. Piping Exposed to View in Finished Spaces: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. B. Continue insulation through penetrations of building assemblies or portions of assemblies having fire resistance rating of 1 hour or less. Provide intumescent firestopping when continuing insulation through assembly. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. Refer to Section 07 84 00 for penetrations of assemblies with fire resistance rating greater than 1 hour. C. Piping Systems Conveying Fluids Below Ambient Temperature: 1. Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. HVAC INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 07 00 - 7 2. Furnish factory -applied or field -applied vapor retarder jackets. Secure factory -applied jackets with pressure sensitive adhesive self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips. Secure field -applied jackets with outward clinch expanding staples and seal staple penetrations with vapor retarder mastic. 3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor retarder adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. Glass Fiber Board Insulation: 1. Apply insulation close to equipment by grooving, scoring, and beveling insulation. Fasten insulation to equipment with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands. 2. Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor retarder cement. 3. Cover wire mesh or bands with cement to a thickness to remove surface irregularities. E. Hot Piping Systems less than 140 degrees F: l . Furnish factory -applied or field -applied standard jackets. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples or pressure sensitive adhesive system on standard factory -applied jacket and butt strips or both. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 3. Insulate unions and flanges at equipment with removable insulation bands held in place with aluminum straps. Hot Piping Systems greater than 140 degrees F (excluding generator exhaust): 1. Install factory -applied or field -applied jackets. 2. Secure with outward clinch staples and/or pressure sensitive adhesive system. 3. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. 4. Insulate flanges and unions at equipment with removable insulation bands held in place Willi alurninurn straps. G. Insulation jacket protection shields: 1. Install galvanized steel shield between pipe hanger and insulation jacket. 2. Piping Supported by Roller Type Pipe Hangers: a. Install galvanized steel shield between roller and inserts. H. Saddles and Inserts For piping 3" and larger: 1. Tack weld or otherwise secure saddle to bottom of piping. 2. Install insert to completely fill the void between the pipe and the saddle. a. Insert Configuration: Thickness and contour matching pipe and interior of saddle. Closed Cell Elastomeric Insulation: 1. Push insulation on to piping. 2. Miter joints at elbows for copper piping systems with sweat fittings. 3. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 4. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered. 5. Insulate fittings and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces less than 8 feet above finished floor: Finish with PVC jacket and fitting covers or aluminum jacket and alumint im fitting covers. HVAC INSULATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 07 00 - 8 K. Aluminum jacket: 1. Provide minimum 2-inch lap at longitudinal and tangential seams. 2. Secure jacket with two metal bands per section. 3. For systems requiring a vapor barrier, seal joints with vapor barrier mastic. L. Refer to insulation schedule for applicable types and thicknesses. 3.06 INSTALLATION - DUCTWORK A. Duct dimensions indicated on Drawings are free area dimensions. Insulated ductwork conveying air below ambient temperature: 1. Provide insulation with vapor retarder jackets. 2. Finish with tape and vapor retarder jacket. 3. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, hangers, and other duct penetrations. 4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire damper sleeves and flexible connections. C. Insulated ductwork conveying air above ambient temperature: 1. Provide with or without vapor retarder jacket, but provide insulation jacket. 2. Insulate fittings and joints. Bevel and seal exposed ends of insulation. D. Ductwork Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 8 feet above finished floor): Finish with aluminum jacket. 1. Jacket entire duct if bottom is within 8 feet of floor. E. External Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: l . Secure insulation with vapor retarder with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor retarder adhesive or tape to match jacket. 2. Secure insulation without vapor retarder with staples, tape, or wires. 3. Install without sag on underside of ductwork. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to prevent sagging. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. 4. Seal vapor retarder penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor retarder adhesive. 5. Taper and seal insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without interference. External Elastomeric Duct Insulation: 1. Adhere to clean oil -free surfaces with full coverage of adhesive. 2. Seal seams and butt joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 3. When application requires multiple layers, apply with joints staggered. 4. Insulate standing metal duct seams with insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent duct surface. Apply adhesive at joints with flat duct surfaces. 5. Lift ductwork off trapeze hangers and insert spacers. G. Insert high density spacers of equal thickness as insulation at trapeze hanger locations. H. Prepare duct insulation for finish painting. Refer to Section 09 91 00. I. Apply insulation in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC INSULATION 230700-9 Exterior Duct Insulation (Rigid): 1. Apply with edges tightly butted and impaled over welded pins and secured with clips. Place pins to hold insulation securely, but not over 18 inches on center. Seal joints with FSK tape. 2. Apply roll type aluminum corner bead at corners. Apply canvas or glass fabric as finish over FSK embedding the fabric in a coat of adhesive. Apply a finish brush coat of adhesive over fabric. K. Outside Air, Combustion Air and Exhaust Air Duct Insulation: 1. Apply insulation to extend to and contact wall or roof deck. a. Secure insulation jacket to metal with pressure sensitive vapor barrier tape leaving no voids at edges. 2. Seal butt joints with 3 inches wide joint sealing tape and seal corner joints with 4-inch wide tape. Seal pin clip locations with tape patches. L. Exposed Air Conditioned Supply and Return Duct Insulation: l . Apply insulation to supply and return air ducts exposed in non -air conditioned mechanical rooms and unfinished spaces. 2. Secure insulation to metal with welded pins and mechanical fasteners on not over 18- inch centers leaving no voids at edges. Seal butt joints with 3 inches wide joint sealing tape and seal corner joints with 4-inch wide tape. Seal over pin clips with tape patches. M. Concealed Air Conditioned Supply and Return Duct Insulation: l . Apply insulation to supply and return air ducts. 2. Secure insulation to metal with strips of insulation adhesive leaving no voids at edges. Further secure the bottom side insulation on ducts over 24 inches wide with welded pins and mechanical fasteners on not over 18-inch centers. Lap joints 2 inches, seal with lap adhesive and staple 6 inches on center. Seal over staples and fasteners with matching tape patch. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Cooling Services P[pin g Insulation Schedule: INSULATION INSULATION JACKET PIPING SYSTEM TYPE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS REQUIREMENT Condensate Piping P-2 All sizes 0.5 inch None from Cooling Coils Refrigerant Suction P-2 All sizes 0.5 inch PVC (Exterior only) (VB) Requires vapor barrier jacket and sealed joints. B. Heating Services Piping in Insulation Schedule: INSULATION INSULATION PIPING SYSTEM AND JACKET PIPE SIZE THICKNESS TYPE inches Combustion Air Pipe P-1, All sizes Ll AP © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC INSULATION 23 07 00 - 10 C. Ductwork Insulation Schedule: INSULATION INSULATION DUCTWORK SYSTEM AND JACKET THICKNESS** TYPE (inches) Combustion Air (lined) D-3 Optional Insulation for Combustion Air D-2, FSK 2.5 Outside Air Intake D-2, FSK 2.5 Supply Air Ducts exposed to view D-2, FSK 1.5 Supply Air Ducts concealed above ceiling D-1, FSK 1.5* Supply and Return Air Ducts within 10 feet of air D-3 1.0 handler (lined) Exhaust and Relief Air Ducts within 10 feet of D-2, FSK 2.5 exterior openings, exposed to view Exhaust and Relief Air Ducts within 10 feet of D-1, FSK 2,5* exterior openings, concealed above ceiling Transfer Air Ducts (lined) D-3 1.0 Ductwork outside of heated envelope but not D-1, FSK exposed to weather 2.5 Ductwork outside of heated envelope and D-2, aluminum 2.5 exposed to weather jacket * Uncompressed thickness. **External insulation thickness may be reduced by thickness of internal duct lining. END OF SECTION f© 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 L. HVAC INSULATION 230700- 11 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 23 08 00 COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. HVAC commissioning description. 2. HVAC contractor responsibilities related to commissioning. Related Sections: l . Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC: Administrative requirements. 2. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC: For requirements and procedures concerning testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical systems. 3. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Submittal and training requirements. 4. Section 23 09 93 - Sequences of Operation: sequences to be verified and tested by the commissioning authority. 5. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Product requirements for ductwork test holes. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): 1. AABC Commissioning Guideline. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. Guideline 1 - The HVAC Commissioning Process. C. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB): 1. Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning. 1.03 COMMISSIONING DESCRIPTION A. The HVAC Commissioning Authority will perform the following tasks: 1. Review submittals for constructability and conformance with the design intent. 2. Expand upon the manufacturers start-up checklists to include coordination items and work sequencing concerns. 3. Observe construction to confirm compliance with the requirements of the contract documents and the design intent. 4. Witness HVAC equipment startup. 5. Perform verification checks of systems and controls. 6. Create test procedures to verify functionality of controls and equipment and to confirm installation is in compliance with the design intent. 7. Witness HVAC equipment functional performance testing. 8. Witness testing and balancing work or confirm system balancing by spot-checking and TAB contractor demonstrations. COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 08 00 - 1 1.04 COMMISSIONING OBLIGATIONS OF THE INSTALLING CONTRACTOR A. The installing contractor will perform the following tasks: 1. Provide copies of HVAC equipment installation manuals to the Commissioning Authority with equipment submittals or at least prior to equipment installation. 2. Provide copies of HVAC product specific start-up checklists to the Commissioning Authority with equipment submittals or at least prior to equipment installation. 3. Demonstrate compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Commissioning Authority. 4. Perform equipment start-up and fill out the start-up checklists as developed by the Commissioning Authority. 5. Demonstrate system operation and control sequences as directed by the Commissioning Authority to ensure compliance with Contract requirements. 6. Perform HVAC equipment functional performance testing. 7. Perform testing and balancing work and confirm system balancing by demonstrating balanced airflows as directed in spot-checking a sample of air inlets and outlets. 8. Complete and endorse functional performance test checklists provided by Commissioning Authority to assure equipment and systems are fully operational and ready for functional performance testing. 9. Provide equipment, materials, and labor necessary to correct deficiencies found during commissioning process to fulfill contract and warranty requirements. 10. Provide operation and maintenance information and record drawings to Commissioning Authority for review verification and organization, prior to distribution. 11. Provide assistance to Commissioning Authority to develop, edit, and document system operation descriptions. 12. Provide training for systems specified in this Section with coordination by Commissioning Authority. Equipment and Systems to Be Commissioned: 1. Pumps. 2. Piping systems. 3. Ductwork. 4. Variable frequency drives. 5. Air handling units. 6. Split system air cooled condensing units. 7. Unit heaters. 8. Fans. 9. Specialty fans. 10. Fire dampers. 11. Radiant Ceiling Panel systems. 12. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work. 13. HVAC Controls, control software and operator interface. 1.05 COMMISSIONING SUBMITTALS A. Draft Forms: Submit draft of system verification forms and functional performance test checklist. B. Test Reports: Indicate data on system verification form for each piece of equipment and system as specified. COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 08 00 - 2 C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies preventing completion of equipment or system verification checks equipment or system to achieve specified performance. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 70 00: Requirements for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record revisions to equipment and system documentation necessitated by commissioning. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit revisions to operation and maintenance manuals when necessary revisions are discovered during commissioning. 1.07 COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES A. Equipment or System Installer Responsibilities: l . Attend commissioning meetings. 2. Ensure temperature controls installer performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as specified below. 3. Ensure testing, adjusting, and balancing agency performs assigned commissioning responsibilities as specified. 4. Provide instructions and demonstrations for Owner's personnel. 5. Ensure subcontractors perform assigned commissioning responsibilities. 6. Ensure participation of equipment manufacturers in appropriate startup, testing, and training activities when required by individual equipment specifications. 7. Develop startup and initial checkout plan using manufacturer's startup procedures and functional performance checklists for equipment and systems to be commissioned. 8. During verification check and startup process, execute HVAC related portions of checklists for equipment and systems to be commissioned. 9. Perform and document completed startup and system operational checkout procedures, providing copy to Commissioning Authority. 10. Provide manufacturer's representatives to execute starting of equipment. Ensure representatives are available and present during agreed upon schedules and are in attendance for duration to complete tests, adjustments and problem -solving. 11. Coordinate with equipment manufacturers to determine specific requirements to maintain validity of warranties. 12. Provide personnel to assist Commissioning Authority during equipment or system verification checks and functional performance tests. 13. Prior to functional performance tests, review test procedures to ensure feasibility, safety and equipment protection and provide necessary written alarm limits to be used during tests. 14. Prior to startup, inspect, check, and verify correct and complete installation of equipment and system components for verification checks included in commissioning plan. When deficient or incomplete work is discovered, ensure corrective action is taken and re -check until equipment or system is ready for startup. 15. Provide factory supervised startup services for equipment and systems specified. Coordinate work with manufacturer and Commissioning Authority. 16. Perform verification checks and startup on equipment and systems as specified. 17. Assist Commissioning Authority in performing functional performance tests on equipment and systems as specified. 18. Perform operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning Authority. COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 08 00 - 3 19. Conduct HVAC system orientation and inspection. Temperature Controls Installer Commissioning Responsibilities: l . Attend commissioning meetings. 2. Review design for ability of systems to be controlled including the following: a. Confirm proper hardware requirements exists to perform functional performance testing. b. Confirm proper safeties and interlocks are included in design. c. Confirm proper sizing of system control valves and actuators and control valve operation will result capacity control identified in Contract Documents. d. Confirm proper sizing of system control dampers and actuators and damper operation will result in proper damper positioning. e. Confirm sensors selected are within device ranges. f. Review sequences of operation and obtain clarification from Architect/Engineer. g,. Indicate delineation of control between packaged controls and building automation system, listing BAS monitor points and BAS adjustable control points. h. Provide written sequences of operation for packaged controlled equipment. Equipment manufacturers' stock sequences may be included, when accompanied by additional narrative to reflect Project conditions. 3. Inspect, check, and confirm proper operation and performance of control hardware and software provided in other HVAC sections. 4. Submit proposed procedures for performing automatic temperature control system point-to-point checks to Commissioning Authority and Architect/Engineer. 5. Inspect check and confirm correct installation and operation of automatic temperature control system input and output device operation through point-to-point checks. 6. Perform training sessions to instruct Owner's personnel in hardware operation, software operation, programming, and application in accordance with commissioning plan and requirements of Section 23 09 00 and 23 09 23. 7. Demonstrate system performance and operation to Commissioning Authority during functional performance tests including each mode of operation. 8. Provide control system technician to assist during Commissioning Authority verification check and functional performance testing. 9. Provide control system technician to assist testing, adjusting, and balancing agency during performance of testing, adjusting, and balancing work. 10. Assist in performing operation and maintenance. training sessions scheduled by Commissioning Authority. C. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency Commissioning Responsibilities: 1. Attend commissioning meetings. 2. Participate in verification of testing, adjusting, and balancing report for verification or diagnostic purposes. Repeat sample of 20 percent of measurements identified in testing, adjusting, and balancing specification and as selected by Commissioning Authority. 3. Assist in performing operation and maintenance training sessions scheduled by Commissioning Authority. 1.08 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS A. Attend initial commissioning meeting and progress commissioning meetings as required by Commissioning Authority. COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC; © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 08 00 - 4 1.09 SCHEDULING A. Prepare schedule indicating anticipated start dates for the following: 1. Piping system flushing and cleaning. 2. Ductwork cleaning. 3. Equipment and system startups. 4. Automatic temperature control system checkout. 5. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 6. HVAC system orientation and inspections. 7. Operation and maintenance manual submittals. 8. Training sessions. B. Schedule seasonal tests of equipment and systems during peak weather conditions to observe full -load performance. C. Schedule occupancy sensitive tests of equipment and systems during conditions of both minimum and maximum occupancy or use. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Notify Commissioning Authority minimum of four weeks in advance of the following: 1. Scheduled equipment and system startups. 2. Scheduled automatic temperature control system checkout. 3. Scheduled start of testing, adjusting, and balancing work. B. Coordinate programming of automatic temperature control system with construction and commissioning schedules. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install additional balancing dampers, balancing valves, access doors, test ports, and pressure and temperature taps required by Commissioning Authority. B. Place HVAC systems and equipment into full operation and continue operation during each working day of commissioning. C. Install replacement sheaves and belts to obtain system performance, as requested by Commissioning Authority. D. Install test holes in ductwork and plenums as requested by Commissioning Authority for taking air measurements. E. Prior to start of functional performance test, install replacement filters in equipment. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC 230800-5 3.02 COMMISSIONING A. Seasonal Sensitive Functional Performance Tests: 1. Test heating equipment at winter design temperatures. 2. Test cooling equipment at summer design temperatures. 3. Participate in testing delayed beyond Final Completion to test performance at peak seasonal conditions. B. Participate in initial and alternate peak season test of systems required to demonstrate performance. END OF SECTION COMMISSIONING FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 08 00 - 6 SECTION 23 09 00 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Coordinate control requirements with Building Owner. B. Section Includes: 1. Control Devices a. Control panel enclosures and controllers. b. Thermostats and temperature sensors. c. Electronic damper actuators. 2. LAN and device communication wiring. C. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC: Administrative requirements. 2. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC: Sequences of operation implemented using products specified in this section. 3. Division 26- Electrical: Products and execution requirements for electric connections specified by this Section. 4. Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security: Smoke and heat detectors. 1.02 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. DDC: Direct -digital controls. B. LAN: Local area network. C. MS/TP: Master-slave/token-passing. D. PICS: Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. E. PLC: Programmable Logic Controller. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Control system consists of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements, interface equipment, other apparatus, accessories, and software connected to distributed controllers operating in multiuser, multitasking environment on token -passing network and programmed to control mechanical systems. 1.04 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. 62 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 23 09 00 - 1 2. 135 - BACnet - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. Al 26 - Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. 2. A536 - Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. DC 3 - Residential Controls - Electrical Wall Mounted Room Thermostats. 2. 250 -Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 72 - National Fire Alarm Code. 2. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01 33 00: Submittal procedures. B. Shop Drawings: l . System configuration drawings showing controller connections to peripheral devices, batteries, power supplies, unitary devices, sensors, switches, modems, and interconnections. 2. Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, and control devices. 3. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. Differentiate between manufacturer -installed and field -installed wiring. 4. Written sequence of operation. Coordinate submittals with information in Section 23 09 93. 5. ASHRAE BACnet Statement: PICS for each DDC system component (panel, zone controller, field devices, and operator workstation) proposed. 6. Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics. 7. Schedule of valves including leakage and flow characteristics. C. Product Data: Submit description and engineering data for each control system component. 1. Environmental limits for storage and operation. 2. Operational (output) range. 3. Input requirements. 4. Power consumption and requirements. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit installation requirements for each control component. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 70 00: Closeout procedures. 1. Record Documents: Record actual locations of control components, including panels, thermostats, and sensors. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Refer to Section: Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 1) Model numbers and serial numbers of control devices. 2) Testing and diagnostic procedures for each type of control device. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAU © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 00 - 2 3) Interconnection wiring diagrams with numbered system components and devices. 4) Approved shop drawings and product data. 5) Warranties. 3. Submit inspection period, cleaning methods, recommended cleaning materials. 4. Calibration records, calibration tolerances and list of point settings. B. Field Test Reports: 1. Submit trend logs demonstrating stable control of points with modulating control output. a. 10 percent of analog control points (minimum) recorded during functional testing. b. Specific points will be identified by the Engineer or Commissioning Authority. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with ASH RAE 135 for DDC system control components operating on the LAN. C. Control Air Damper Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3-years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 5 years of experience. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01 60 00: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Accept controls on site in original factory packaging Inspect for damage. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Section 01 30 00: Requirements for coordination. B. Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation. C. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 Section Fire Alarm System to achieve compatibility with equipment that interfaces with that system. D. Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical circuits for control units and operator workstation. E. Coordinate equipment with Division 26 specifications to achieve compatibility with motor starters, starter coils and annunciation devices. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 00 - 3 1.1 1 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of control system for 1 year from Date of Substantial Completion. B. Perform work without removing units from service during building normal occupied hours. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Component Manufacturers: l . DDC manufacturers listed below. 2. Allen Bradley. 3. Belimo. 4. KMC. 5. Veris Industries. DDC Manufacturers (BACnet compliance required): l . Alerton Technologies, Inc. 2. American Automatrix. 3. Andover Controls Corporation. 4. Delta Controls, Inc. 5. Honeywell. 6. Invensys. 7. Johnson Controls. 8. Siemens. 9. Trane. 10. Tridium. 2.02 DDC EQUIPMENT A. Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. l . Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator station. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator station. 4. BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN in Ethernet IEEE 802.3, Class 3, minimum, with routers between LAN and other panels, with at least one communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following areas: a. Network. b. Functional groups. c. Standard application services supported. INSTRUMENTATION AND CON IROL FOR FIVAU © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 00 - 4 d. Standard objects supported. B. Local Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. Units monitor or control each input/output point; process information; and download from or upload to operator station. 2. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse input/output. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 3. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to mobile operator station. 4. BACnet Conformance: Reside on BACnet LAN using MS/TP, Class 2, minimum, with at least one communication port, and have minimum capabilities defined in PICS for the following areas: a. Network. b. Functional groups. c. Standard application services supported. d. Standard objects supported. C. LANs: Capacity for a minimum of 5 workstations connected to multiuser, multitasking environment with concurrent capability to access DDC network or control units. 1. Media: Ethernet, peer -to -peer CMA/CD, operating at 10/100 MBps. Plenum rated, category 5e or higher. D. Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion. Include and implement the following capabilities from the control units: 1. Units of Measure: Inch -pound and SI (metric). 2. HVAC Control Programs: Start/stop scheduling, start/stop time optimization, night setback/setup, DDC with fine tuning, supply -air reset, and enthalpy switchover. 3. HVAC Control Programs: Optimal run time. 4. Programming Application Features: a. High and low limit alarm messages. b. Scheduling by day, week, month and interlocking. c. Trend logs for mixed air and outside air temperatures, supply air temperatures, damper and valve positions. 1) Damper and valve position. 2) Status for each exhaust fan. 2.03 CONTROL PANELS A. Central (Master) Control Panels: Fully enclosed, steel -rack -type cabinet with locking doors or locking removable backs. Match finish of panels and provide multicolor graphic displays, schematically showing system being controlled. B. Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting, located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all panels. 1. Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch thick, furniture -quality steel, or extruded -aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop -painted finish. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-5 2. Panel -Mounted Equipment: Temperature and humidity controllers, relays, and automatic switches; except safety devices. Mount devices with adjustments accessible through front of panel. 3. Door -Mounted Equipment: Flush -mount (on hinged door) manual switches, including damper -positioning switches, changeover switches, thermometers, and gages. 4. Graphics: Color -coded graphic, laminated -plastic displays on doors, schematically showing system being controlled, with protective, clear plastic sheet bonded to entire door. 2.04 THERMOSTATS A. Thermostat: 1. Line voltage On/Off thermostats: bi-metal actuated contacts or bellows actuated snap switch, U.L. Listed, locking metal cover, and visible thermometer. a. Rated for current draw of controlled device. b. Adjustable. 2. Low voltage with transformer: control range suitable for the specific application, U.L. Listed, locking metal cover, and visible thermometer. a. Factory calibrated. b. Adjustable heat anticipator. c. Integral 24 hour timeclock with programmable occupied and unoccupied sequencing. d. Provide correct steps/stages to accomplish the specified sequences. B. Smart Thermostat: 1. Low voltage with transformer: control range suitable for the specific application. a. 32 bit processor, internal RAM and flash memory. b. Sub base with wiring terminals; Functional faceplate snaps onto sub base. c. Internal 7 day 24 hour timeclock function for scheduling occupied hours. d. Analog temperature sensor and output signal. e. Analog humidity sensor urid uulpul signal. f. Digital output to activate gas furnace burner. g. Digital output to activate air cooled condensing unit. h. Digital output to open motor operated ventilation damper. i. Digital output to activate furnace blower for continuous (occupied) operation. j. Provide correct steps/stages to accomplish the specified sequences. 2. Basis of Design: Alerton VLD series. 3. Provide vented, opaque, metallic, locking cover. 2.05 TEMPERATURE SENSORS A. Thermistor temperature sensors as follows: 1. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: a. Brass well, length to match element. b. High conductivity paste. c. Brass socket; 2-1/2 inch minimum length. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAU © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 00 - 6 Room Sensors: Match room thermostats or plain stainless steel wall plate. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. B. Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum. l . Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point. 2. Wire: Twisted, shielded -pair cable. 3. Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point, 8 inches long; use where not affected by temperature stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft. 4. Averaging Elements in Ducts: 36 inches long, flexible; use where prone to temperature stratification or where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft. 5. Insertion Elements for Liquids: a. Brass well, length to match element. b. High conductivity paste. c. Brass socket; 2-1/2 inch minimum length. 6. Room Sensors: Match room thermostats, locking cover. 7. Outside -Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight. C. Room Temperature Sensor: 1. Mode indicator (Occupied/Unoccupied). 2. Manual adjustment with programmable range. 3. Basis of Design: Schneider Electric model STIR 502. 2.06 PRESSURE AND FLOW SENSORS A. Static -Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected input, and temperature compensated. 1. Sensor Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent. 2. Output: 4 to 20 mA. 3. Building Static -Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25 inch wg. 4. Duct Static -Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg. B. Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: 1. Visual scale for valves 1 inch and smaller. 2. 2 to 10 V do feedback signal to DDC for valves larger than 1 inch. 2.07 DAMPER ACTUATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Belimo. 2. Honeywell. 3. Johnson. Description : l . Electronic modulating damper actuator. 2. UL listed and protected from overload at all angles of rotation. 3. Direct coupled type, with shaft clamp and selectable direction of rotation. 4. Power: 5.5 VA at 24V AC. 5. Torque: 44 pound -inches. 6. Run time: 150 seconds for 90 degree rotation. 7. Basis of Design: Belimo model LM24A-V. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-7 2.08 RELAYS AND SWITCHES A. Furnish relays and switches required for the successful operation of the system. Include suitable indicating plates. Include positive positioning devices on operators where sequencing is specified. 2.09 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Perform wiring necessary for the temperature control system unless specifically indicated otherwise. B. Provide conduit, electrical wiring and junction boxes in accordance with Division 26 and in accordance with conduit types and electrical classifications as shown on the Electrical Drawings. C. Install HVAC control circuitry within its own conduit systems provided under this Section. Do not install HVAC control circuitry within conduit systems that are shown on the Electrical Drawings. D. Electrical Characteristics: In accordance with Division 26. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that conditioned power is available to control units and operator workstations. B. Verify location of thermostats and humidistats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings before installation. C. Verify building systems to be controlled are ready to operate. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install thermostats, space temperature sensors, after locations are coordinated with other Work. B. Install thermostats 48 inches above floor (ADA front access only) or at indicated height. Coordinate installation with light switches. C. Install room temperature and humidity sensors 60 inches above the floor or at indicated height. Align with light switches. Do not install temperature sensors directly above dimmers. D. Install control valves with 5 pipe diameter straight pipe at inlets, 2 pipe diameter straight pipe at outlets (minimum). E. Provide isolation valves on each connection to control valves. F. Provide flanged connections or unions on control valve piping. G. Install guards on thermostats humidity and temperature sensors located in public areas. INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 00 - 8 H. Mount thermostats located on cold walls on an insulated backplate. Seal penetrations through wall airtight. Refer to Division 28 for installation of smoke and heat detectors. J. Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation. K. Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified. L. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas, not in locations exposed to outdoor temperatures. M. Label visible sensors as to function and controlled device. Conceal labels behind device cover. N. Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 23 05 00. O. Install conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Division 26. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory -authorized service representative to inspect field -assembled components, equipment installation and electrical connections. Report results in writing. B. Verify DDC as follows: 1. Verify operation of operator workstation and remote Internet access. 2. Verify local control unit functionality including self -diagnostics. 3. Verify software programming including, but not limited to: a. Automatic restart. b. Control sequences. c. Scheduling. d. Reset controls. e. Occupied/unoccupied and seasonal modes. 4. Provide commissioning report indicating that each point has been tested for proper wiring termination and functionality. C. Testing and Adjusting: 1. Test control functionality at the device and system levels prior to Owner training. 2. Calibrate and adjust control settings to achieve stable output signals. 3. Adjust PID loop inputs to minimize hunting and overshooting the control settings. D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate room temperature and humidity sensor calibration to the satisfaction of the commissioning authority. B. Demonstrate control sequences to the commissioning authority- 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 M INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 230900-9 3.05 TRAINING A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain control systems and components, including: l . Adjusting equipment operational schedules, including occupancy and seasonal modes. 2. Data display options (graphic and tabular). 3. Review data in maintenance manuals. 4. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect/Engineer, with seven days' advance notice. 3.06 ON -SITE ASSISTANCE A. Occupancy Adjustments: Within one year of date of Substantial Completion, provide up to three Project site visits, when requested by Owner for the following: 1. Adjust and calibrate components identified by the Owner as out of calibration. 2. Assist Owner's personnel in making program changes to suit actual condilions. 3.07 EQUIPMENT A. Provide insulated backplate where thermostats and temperature sensors are on exterior walls. B. Seal thermostat subbase and sensor backs to prevent airflow from wall cavity to the space. C. Furnish motor operated dampers that are not furnished with louvers, gravity vents and fans. Refer to those sections for dampers to be provided with equipment. D. Label thermostats and sensors to identify controlled device and initial temperature setting 3.08 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. Refer to Section 23 09 93: Sequence of Operations for HVAC. END OF SECTION INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 00 - 10 SECTION 23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: l . Abbreviations used in this section. 2. Operational modes. 3. Adjustable variables and global settings. 4. Monitoring and trend logs. 5. Sequence of operation for: a. Control Dampers. b. Pumps c. HVAC Fans. d. Furnaces e. Split System AC Units f. Electric heaters. g. Fuel Fired Heaters. B. Related Sections - Control equipment: 1. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC- C. Related Sections - Equipment furnished with integral controls: 1. Section 23 34 00 - HVAC Fans (Green heck vari-green motor speed control) . 2. Section 23 54 00 - Furnaces (burner safety and firing controls). 1.02 CONTROL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Complete digital energy management system controlling equipment using programmed scheduling, control logic and user interface at the central station as well as occupant override capability at the zone level. DDC monitoring and control by building automation system: 1. Programmed Occupied /Unoccupied mode with operator override. 2. Programmed Summer/Winter mode with operator override. 3. Outdoor reset of heating water temperatures to match conduction and ventilation loads. 4. Data logging and trend reporting of control points. 5. Cumulative energy consumption calculations based on accumulated data and flow conditions. 6. Alarm generation for temperature/pressure/operating parameters beyond the control settings. C. Settings and control parameters including temperatures, pressures and start/stop times are to be adjustable from the control system operator interface with password clearance. D. Provide (1 minute; minimum) time delay on checking alarm conditions after commanding a change of state. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 93 - 1 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. "Throttling range": used herein to establish a general responsiveness for P-1 and PID control. 1. Tune the P-1 and PID settings to respond similar to proportional control with the specified throttling range. 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS A. For this Section, a number followed by an "F" means temperature in degrees Fahrenheit. B. AHU - air handling unit (includes energy recovery units and roof mounted air conditioning units). C. CO2 - carbon dioxide. D. DAT - discharge air temperature (usually supply duct temperature). E. LAT - leaving air temperature (usually after passing through heating or cooling coil). F. MA/MAT - mixed air / mixed air temperature (leaving filter section). G. NOx- mono -nitrogen oxides (NO -nitric oxide and NO2-nitrogen dioxide). H. OA/OAT - outside (ambient) air / outside air temperature. I. P-1 - proportional and integral control algorithm, controls to setting with zero offset. J. PID - proportional, integral and derivative control algorithm; controls to setting with zero offset including a response time component. K. PPM - parts per million. L. % rh - percent relative humidity. M. RA/RAT - return air / return air temperature. N. rh - relative humidity. 0. SA/SAT - supply air / supply air temperature. P. VFD - Electronic motor speed controller, modulating output. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SYSTEM MONITORING REQUIREMENTS A. Monitor and log the input data, output signals and status of the listed devices and the HVAC: equipment where sequences of operation are specified. 1. Create trend logs for representative equipment to demonstrate this functionality. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 93 - 2 2. Log the data with side -by side comparisons to the settings to be maintained. 3. Display the results graphically for user programmable time periods. 4. Provide memory and storage capability to save two weeks of complete trend data. 5. Delete oldest data to save new data upon reaching capacity of the available memory. B. Record in non-volatile memory, a record of alarms generated during system commissioning. C. Maintain in non-volatile memory, a record of alarms generated after Date of Substantial Completion. 3.02 CONTROL VALVE SEQUENCES A. Gas Appliance Control Valves: 1. Solenoid and modulating gas valves are controlled by the appliance they serve. 3.03 PUMPS: A. Domestic Hot Water Circulator: 1. Inputs: Schedule 2. Sequence: a. Pump runs in occupied mode. b. Pump is off in unoccupied mode. 3.04 FURNACES (GF-1, 2) A. Operational Modes 1. Unoccupied. 2. Occupied - Heating. 3. Occupied - Cooling. 4. Occupied - Economizer. B. Inputs: Schedule Outside air temperature, Space Temperature, Mixed air temperature, Discharge air temperature, C. Sequence: 1. Unoccupied a. Outside air damper is closed, Return damper is open Relief damper is closed. b. Furnace burner and condenser cycle to maintain space temperature setpoint. Fan runs on call for heating/cooling. 2. Occupied - Heating. a. Outside air damper is opened to minimum, return damper is open, relief damper is opened to minimum. (Relief damper tracks outside air with offset) b. Furnace fan runs continuously and burner cycles to maintain space temperature setpoint. 3. Occupied - Cooling. a. Outside air damper is opened to minimum, return damper is open, relief damper is opened to minimum. (Relief damper tracks outside air with offset) b. Furnace fan runs continuously and condenser cycles to maintain space temperature setpoint. SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 93 - 3 4. Occupied - Economizer. a. Enabled when outdoor temperature is between 45 and 65 degrees F dry bulb (adj). b. Furnace fan runs continuously, and condenser is off. c. Outdoor and return dampers modulate to maintain mixed air temperature, relief damper tracks outdoor air with offset. 5. Zone (VAV) Dampers a. Section 23 54 00 factory controls interface with thermostat to increase/decrease damper position to maintain room setpoint. b. Section 23 54 00 factory controls modulate bypass damper. D. Status and Alarms l . Furnace status. 2. Space temperature setpoint. 3. Space Temperature. 4. Outside air temperature. 5. Mixed air temperature setpoint. 6. Mixed air temperature. 7. Discharge air temperature. 8. Return air temperature. 9. Alarm: low discharge air temperature. 10. Alarm: low space temperature. 11. Alarm: high space temperature. 12. Alarm: furnace failure. 3.05 FURNACES (GF-3) A. Thermostat has Heat -Off switch: 1. Subbase switch in Heat position: a. Packed controls cycle furnace to maintain temperature setting. 2. Subbase switch in Off position: Systerrl is disabled. B. Status and Alarms 1. Furnace status. 2. Space Temperature. 3. Alarm: low space temperature. 3.06 HVAC FANS: A. Central Exhaust Fan (EF-1): l . Inputs: Schedule 2. Sequence: a. Fan starts and motor operated damper opens when Showers in occupied mode. b. Fan stops and motor operated damper closes when Showers in unoccupied mode. 3. Monitor operation with current sensor on fan motor wiring. 4. Alarm: Fan off and Showers in occupied mode. B. Individual Bath/Shower Rooms Exhaust Fan (EF-2, 3, 4, 6, 7): 1. Inputs: Occupancy sensor a. Fan starts when room is occupied. b. Fan stops when room is unoccupied after timed delay of 5 minutes (adj.) SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 09 93 - 4 C. First Aid Exhaust Fan (EF-5): 1. Inputs: manual wall switch. D. Supply Fan (SF-1) 1. Input: Room Temperature. Sub base ON -OFF -AUTO switch. 2. Devices: Reverse acting thermostat with switching sub base. Fan contactor. 3. Sequence a. Activate fan and dampers if sub base switch is in the ON position. b. Deactivate fan and dampers when sub base switch is in OFF position. c. Sequence with sub base in AUTO position: 1) Activate fan and open inlet and exhaust dampers when room temperature exceeds thermostat temperature setting. 2) Deactivate fan and close dampers when temperature falls below thermostat setting. 4. Status and Alarms a. Fan status b. Alarm: high space temperature 3.07 SPLIT SYSTEM AC UNIT (ACI-1, ACO-1) A. Packaged controls cycle fans and condenser to maintain space temperature setpoint. No interface with DDC. B. Status and Alarms 1. Space Temperature. 2. Alarm: High space temperature. 3.08 ELECTRIC HEATERS A. Input: Zone temperature. B. Devices: Space temperature sensor. 1. Sequence: Operate through relay when temperature sensor is below zone temperature setting. C. Status and Alarms 1. Space Temperature. 2. Alarm: High space temperature. 3. Alarm: Low Space temperature 3.09 FUEL FIRED UNIT HEATER A. Unit Heater 1. Input: Room temperature. 2. Device: Wall thermostat. 3. Sequence: a. Operate on a call for heat through factory controls provided with unit. 4. Status and Alarms a. Space Temperature. b. Alarm: Low Space temperature END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 �w SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS FOR HVAC CONTROLS 230993-5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Natural gas piping above grade. 2. Unions and flanges. 3. Valves. 4. Pipe hangers and supports. 5. Natural gas pressure regulators. Related Sections: l . Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 08 31 00 - Access Panels: Access doors for concealed valves and accessories. 3. Section 09 91 00 - Painting and Coating: Product requirements for painting for placement by this section. 4. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC: a. Pipe hangers and supports for placement by this section. b. Additional pipe installation requirements. c. Valve and pipe identification for placement by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z21.15 - Manually Operated Gas Valves for Appliances, Appliance Connector Valves and Hose End Valves. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. 2. B 16.26 - Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. 3. B16.33 - Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems Up to 125 psig (sizes 1 /2 - 2). 4. B16.44 - Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Above Ground Piping Systems Up to 5 psig (sizes 1 /2 - 2). 5. B31.9 - Building Services Piping. C. ASTM International (ASTM): l . A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot -Dipped, Zinc - Coated, Welded and Seamless. 2. A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service. 3. B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube. D. International Code Council (ICC): 1. International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC), and State amendments. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2311 23-1 E. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than 1 piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non -conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89 and State of Minnesota Standards. C. Use plug, ball, or butterfly valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Catalog Product Data: 1. Submit information demonstrating compliance with the specifications for: a. Pipe materials, fittings, gas pressure regulators and valves. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: 1. Record actual locations of valves, piping and system components. 2. Include gas valves in the valve tag list. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for valves and gas pressure regulators installation instructions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform natural gas work in accordance with IFGC and local gas company requirements. B. Furnish shutoff valves complying with ASME B16.33 or ANSI Z21.15. 1.07 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum 3 years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 3 years experience. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. See Section 01 60 00. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2311 23 - 2 C. Protect piping and fittings from soil and debris with temporary end caps and closures. Maintain in place until installation. Furnish temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black: 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.9, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half -lapped 10-mil polyethylene tape. 2.02 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black: 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M forged steel welding type. 2. Joints: Threaded for pipe 2 inches and smaller. 2.03 REGULATOR VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Indoors: Same as natural gas piping, above grade. B. Outdoors: PVC pipe, tubing, and fittings, UL 651. 2.04 UNIONS AND FLANGES A. Unions for Pipe 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Galvanized Steel Piping: Screwed galvanized malleable iron ground joint union, brass iron seat. 2. Black Steel Piping: Class 150, screwed malleable black iron ground union, brass to iron seat. B. Flanges for Pipe 2-1/2 inches and Larger: 1. Galvanized Steel Piping: Flanged, threaded, galvanized cast iron union, gasket and carbon steel bolts. 2. Black Steel Piping: Class 150, welded neck forged black steel or slip-on flanges. 3. Gaskets: 1/16 inch thick preformed neoprene gaskets. 2.05 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Apollo. 2. Crane Valve, North America. 3. Hammond Valve. 4. Kitz. 5. Milwaukee Valve Company. 6. Nibco, Inc. 7. Stockham Valves & Fittings. 8. Watts. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 2311 23-3 B. Upstream of meter: Furnish shut off valves complying with ASME B16.33. C. Inside building: Furnish shut off valves complying with ASME B16.44 or ANSI Z21.15. 2.06 PLUG VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Flow Control Equipment, Inc. 2. Homestead Valve. 3. Milliken. B. Upstream of meter: Furnish shut off valves complying with ASME B16.33. C. Inside building: Furnish shut off valves complying with ASME B16.44 or ANSI Z21.15. 2.07 NATURAL GAS PRESSURE REGULATORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Fischer. 2. Maxitrol. B. Product Description: 1. Spring loaded, general purpose, self-operating service regulator including internal relief type diaphragm assembly and vent valve. 2. Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 3. Operating temperatures: Minus 20 degrees F to 150 degrees F. 4. Body: Metallic casting. 5. Spring case, lower diaphragm casing, union ring, seat ring and disk holder: Aluminum. 6. Disk, diaphragm, and O-Ring: Nitrile. 7. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 150 psig. 8. Furnish sizes 2 inches and smaller with threaded ends. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install natural gas piping in accordance with IFGC. B. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for general pipe installation requirements. C. Provide non -conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. D. Install gas pressure regulator with independent vent full size opening on regulator and terminate outdoors. E. Install gas piping to provide sufficient gas to supply maximum appliance demand at pressure higher than appliance minimum inlet pressure. F. Provide connection to new gas service. Make arrangements with Gas Utility for installation of new gas meter and service to building. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING 2311 23-4 G. Gas service distribution piping to have initial minimum pressure of 2 psi. Provide regulators on each branch serving appliances designed for lower inlet pressures. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. Pressure test natural gas piping at not less than 25 psig for one-half hour minimum duration, in accordance with IFGC and State amendments. Record test results. a. Where gas appliance will be damaged by test pressure, disconnect appliance and cap piping during pressure test. Reconnect appliance after pressure test and leak test connection. b. Where gas appliance is designed for operating pressures equal to or greater than piping test pressure, close gas valve to isolate appliance or equipment from gas test pressure. 2. If leakage is detected, shut off gas supply until repairs are complete. 3. When pressure tests do not meet specified requirements, remove defective work, replace, and retest. 4. Where new branch piping is extended from existing system, pressure test new branch piping only. Leak test joint between new and existing piping with noncorrosive leak detection fluid or other approved method. B. Do not place appliances in service until piping system has passed leak tests. END OF SECTION FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 11 23 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Refrigerant piping. 2. Unions, flanges, and couplings. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Refrigerant specialties. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section. 2. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC: Product and installation requirements: a. Administrative requirements. b. Pipe hangers and supports, sleeves and accessories for placement by this section. c. General piping installation requirements. d. Pipe labeling and identification requirements. 3. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Product requirements for Piping Insulation for placement by this section. 4. Section 23 81 26 - Split -System Air -Conditioners: Connections to indoor and outdoor equipment. 5. Division 26 - Electrical: Execution requirements for electric connections specified by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning, Heating & Refrigeration Institute (AHRI): 1. ANSI/AHRI Standard 495 - Standard for Performance Rating of Refrigerant Liquid Receivers. 2. ANSI/AHRI 710 - Performance Rating of Liquid -Line Driers. 3. 730 - Flow -Capacity Rating and Application of Suction -Line Filters and Filter Dryers. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): 1. B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. D. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B280 -Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. E. American Welding Society (AWS): 1. A5.8 - Specification for Filler Metals for Brazing and Braze Welding. 2. D1.1 -Structural Welding Code -Steel. REFRIGERANT PIPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 23 00 - 1 F. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry: 1. SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 429 - Electrically Operated Valves. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Where more than one piping system material is specified, provide compatible system components and joints. Use non -conducting dielectric connections when joining dissimilar metals in systems. B. Provide unions, or couplings at locations requiring servicing. Install unions or couplings downstream of valves and at equipment connections. C. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.5, ASTM F708, MSS SP 58, MSS SP 69, and MSS SP 89. D. Flexible Connectors: Use at or near compressors where piping configuration does not absorb vibration. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: l . Piping: Submit data on pipe materials, fittings, and accessories. 2. Valves: manufacturers catalog data with valve data and ratings for each service. 3. Refrigerant Specialties: Submit manufacturers catalog data including capacity, component sizes, rough -in requirements, and service sizes for the following: a. Refrigerant moisture and liquid indicators. b. Refrigerant filter -driers. c. Refrigerant solenoid valves. d. Refrigerant expansion valves. e. Refrigerant pressure relief valves. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging and support methods, joining procedures and isolation. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for replacing filter media. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.5 code for installation of refrigerant piping systems. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Dehydrate and charge refrigeration components including piping and receivers, seal prior to shipment. Maintain seal until connected into system. B. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. REFRIGERANT PIPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 23 00 - 2 C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B280, drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.22 wrought copper. 2. Joints: Braze, AWS A5.8 BCuP silver/phosphorus/copper alloy with melting range 1 190 to 1480 degrees F. B. In lieu of field constructing brazed components and piping it is acceptable to install factory furnished pre -charged line sets and accessories to accomplish the work. 2.02 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS A. 2 inches and Smaller: 1. Copper Pipe: Bronze, soldered joints. 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Refer to Section 22 05 00. 2.04 REFRIGERATION SPECIALTIES A. Provide specialties associated with operational control and servicing of refrigeration circuits and systems. 1. Moisture and liquid indicators (sight glass). 2. Filter -driers and service valves: as recommended by condensing unit manufacturer. 3. Thermal expansion valves - selected for evaporator coil tonnage. 4. Pressure relief valves (if not furnished with condensing unit). 5. Strainers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify pipe size with refrigeration equipment supplier. B. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. C. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly. D. Prepare piping connections to equipment with unions. E. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 REFRIGERANT PIPING 232300-3 3.02 INSTALLATION - ABOVE GROUND PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install refrigeration piping as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 23 05 00. 1. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls and floors. 2. Install pipe identification. 3. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected equipment. 4. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. 5. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal. B. Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME B31.5. C. Arrange refrigerant piping to return oil to compressor. Provide traps and loops in piping. D. Slope horizontal piping 0.40 percent in direction of flow. E. Flood refrigerant piping system with nitrogen when brazing. F. Insulate suction piping and equipment; refer to Section 23 07 00. G. Provide replaceable cartridge filter -dryers, with isolation valves and bypass with valve. H. Locate expansion valve sensing bulb immediately downstream of evaporator on suction line. I. Provide external equalizer piping on expansion valves with refrigerant distributor connected to evaporator. J. Install flexible connectors at right angles to axial movement of compressor, parallel to crankshaft. K. Provide electrical connection to solenoid valves. Refer to Division 26 for wiring requirements. L. Fully charge completed system with refrigerant after testing. M. Follow ASHRAE 15 procedures for charging and purging of systems and for disposal of refrigerant. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test refrigeration system in accordance with ASME B31.5. B. Pressure test refrigeration system with dry nitrogen to 200 psig. Perform final tests at 27 inches vacuum and 200 psig using electronic leak detector. C. Repair leaks. D. Retest until no leaks are detected. END OF SECTION REFRIGERANT PIPING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 23 00 - 4 SECTION 23 31 00 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Duct Materials. 2. Insulated flexible ducts. 3. Single wall spiral round ducts. 4. Ductwork fabrication. B. Related Sections: l . Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC: a. Administrative procedures. b. Identification and labeling requirements. 2. Section 23 07 00 - HVAC Insulation: Duct insulation requirements. 3. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Connections to ductwork and accessories. 1.02 REFERENCES A. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A276 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes. 2. A480 - Specification for General Requirements for Flat -Rolled Stainless And Heat -Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. 3. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 4. Al008/A1008M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy and High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability. 5. B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. 6. D1784 Standard Specification for Rigid Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Compounds and Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Compounds. 7. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 181 - Factory -Made Air Ducts and Connectors. 2. 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): 1. HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. 2. HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Third Edition - 2005. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Duct configurations resulting in higher friction or increased sound level are not permitted. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 2331 00-1 B. Insulated flexible ducts: Flame spread/smoke developed ratings not exceeding 25/50 (UL 723) when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible. 1.05 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store PVC materials in shaded areas, away from direct sunlight. B. Do not install duct sealant when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. C. Maintain temperatures during and after installation of duct sealant. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Ducts: ASTM A653/A653M galvanized steel sheet, lock -forming quality, having G90 zinc coating of in conformance with ASTM A90/A90M for extension of existing systems. B. Aluminum: 3003 alloy H 14 temper in accordance with ASTM B209. C. Fasteners: Cadmium plated rivets, bolts, or sheet metal screws for new duct systems. D. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, ul continuously threaded. 2.02 INSULATED FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexmaster, Model Type 5M. 2. Thermaflex, Model M-KE. B. Product Description: Polymer film supported by helical -wound spring steel wire; fiberglass insulation; aluminized vapor barrier film. 1. Rated as Class 1 Air Duct. 2. Pressure Rating: 4 inches w.g. positive and 0.5 inches w.g. negative. 3. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 4. Temperature Range: -20 degrees F to 175 degrees F. 5. Thermal Resistance: 4.2 square feet -hour -degree F per BTU. 2.03 SPIRAL DUCT A. G-90 galvanized steel, SMACNA lock seam standard RL-1: 1. Size 3 inch through 12 inch: 26 gage. 2. Size 14 inch through 24 inch: 24 gage. 3. Size 26 inch through 42 inch: 22 gage; Flange Pnd reinforcing over 24 inch - Class A. 4. Sizes over 42 inch: 20 gage with flange end reinforcing - Class C. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2331 00 - 2 B. Lock formed spiral seams, rated for leakage Class 3. 2.04 SHEET METAL BLANK OFFS A. Wall louvers: 1. Double wall anodized or galvanized sheet metal panels. 2. Duct gage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for 1 /2 inch pressure classification; no cross -breaking. 3. Surfaces visible through the louver: Painted or anodized black. B. Existing Duct: 1. Match pressure and seal class of existing duct: minimum 1.0 inch pressure classification, seal Class B. 2.05 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support ducts in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. Construct to 1.0 inch pressure classification unless otherwise indicated to use higher classification. Construct AHU-1 and AHU-2 supply ducts to 2.0 inch pressure classification. B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with centerline radius equal to the duct width. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used, provide turning vanes. C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence where possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence. D. Provide 45-degree lateral wye takeoffs with balancing dampers. When space does not allow 45-degree lateral wye takeoff, use 90-degree conical tee connections with balancing dampers. E. Seal joints between duct sections and duct seams. 1. Sealants, Mastics and Tapes: Conform to UL 181 A. Provide products bearing appropriate UL 181 A markings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 01 3000. B. Verify sizes of equipment connections before fabricating transitions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Duct Sealing: 1. Supply Air Ducts: Class B: Transverse and longitudinal joints, up to 3-inch water gage. Exceptions: Exposed ductwork in conditioned area served by the duct. No sealing required. 2. Return Ducts: No sealing required. Exceptions: Ducts located in unconditioned spaces such as attics. Class C. 3. Outside Air Ducts: Class C: Transverse joints, up to 2-inch water gage. 4. Exhaust Ducts: Class C: Transverse joints, up to 2-inch water gage. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2331 00 - 3 5. Combustion Air Ducts: Class B. B. Pressure Classification: In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Construction Standards - Standard and Standard VAV construction requirements. C. Provide manual balancing dampers at branch duct connections to the trunk duct and provide balancing dampers on trunk ducts serving a single inlet or outlet. D. Protect installed ductwork from construction dust by installing temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ends of ductwork. E. Wipe construction dust and debris from duct interior immediately prior to installation. F. Install duct hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 00. G. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. H. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive and draw bands. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Connect diffuser boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet minimum length of flexible duct. B. Connect air outlets and inlets directly to sheet metal ductwork. C. Provide 2 inch wide flexible connectors at equipment inlets and outlets. 3.04 CLEANING A. Protection and Cleaning: Adequately protect equipment and materials against physical damage. Place equipment in first class operating condition, or return to source of supply for repair or replacement, as determined by RE/COTR. Protect equipment and ducts during construction against entry of foreign matter to the inside and clean both inside and outside before operation and painting. When new ducts are connected to existing ductwork, clean both new and existing ductwork by mopping and vacuum cleaning inside and outside before operation. 3.05 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Paint interior of metal duct for a minimum of 12 inches from registers and grilles. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized -steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." B. Paint exterior of exposed metal ducts. Apply two coats of latex paint over a compatible galvanized -steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Section 09 91 00 "Painting." See architect for color schedule. HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2331 00-4 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Material Schedule: AIR SYSTEM MATERIAL Supply and Return Steel, galvanized Relief, Toilet Exhaust and Transfer Steel, galvanized Outside Air, General Exhaust Steel, galvanized Combustion Air Steel, galvanized Shower Exhaust Aluminum END OF SECTION HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2331 00 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Motorized dampers. 2. Back -draft dampers. 3. Duct access doors. 4. Volume control dampers. 5. Flexible duct connections. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Execution and Product requirements for connection and control of Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers for placement by this section. 2. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Requirements for duct construction and pressure classifications. 3. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Execution requirements for connection of electrical Combination Smoke and Fire Dampers specified by this Section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. El -Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 2. 92A - Recommended Practice for Smoke -Control Systems. D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors (SMACNA): 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 555 - Standard for Safety for Fire Dampers. 2. 555C - Standard for Safety for Ceiling Dampers. 3. 555S -Standard for Safety for Smoke Dampers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 33 00 - 1 B. Product Data: For fire dampers submit the following: 1. UL ratings, pressure drop and maximum pressure data. 2. Indicate materials, construction, dimensions, and installation details. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit for Fire Dampers. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 70 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of access doors. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit for motorized darrlpers and fire dampers. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Dampers tested, rated and labeled in accordance with the latest UL requirements. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years of experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00. B. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades. C. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly indicating manufacturer and material. D. Storage: Store materials in a dry area indoor, protected from damage. E. Handling: Handle and lift dampers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Protect materials and finishes during handling and installation to prevent damage. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Refer to Section 01 30 00. B. Coordinate Work where appropriate with building control Work and fire alarm system installation. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORIZED DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrow. 2. Cesco. 3. Greenheck. 4. Ruskin. 5. Titus. Description: 1. Frames: 6 inch wide 16 gauge. 2. Blades: Maximum spacing 6 inches, 16 gauge, 48 inches maximum length. 3. Linkage: 12 gauge plated steel brackets riveted to the blades wit aluminum rod locked pivots. 4. Bearings: Oilite bronze. 5. Axles: Extendable from motor actuator attachment. 6. Seals: Blade and jamb of polyurethane. 7. Motors: Heavy duty 24 volt with spring return. 8. Dampers shall be suitable for velocities up to 2000 FPM and low leakage construction. 9. Dampers shall be louver size, wall opening size, roof opening size or duct size as scheduled on Drawings. C. Outside air/exhaust dampers to outside are to be low leak type: No more than 6 CFM/S.F. leakage at 4 inches w.c. static pressure, with operator exerting 6 inch - lbs. of torque. D. Furnish and install Belimo, or approved equal, 24V electric actuators with spring return for each damper above of ample output for actuation and shut-off: 1. Each damper shall be normally fully closed and shall fully open whenever associated fan is energized. E. Power and control wiring shall be provided by Section 23 09 00. 2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Arrow. 2. Cesco. 3. Greenheck. 4. Ruskin. 5. Titus. Description: 1. Multi -blade, parallel -action; start -to -open (STO) at 0.01 inch water gage static pressure. 2. Galvanized steel or extruded aluminum frame. 3. Blades: a. Maximum 6 inch width. b. With felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges. c. Linked together in rattle -free manner with 90-degree stop. d. Steel ball bearings and axles. AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 33 00 - 3 C. Basis of Design: 1. Greenheck WD-100 series for horizontal mounting under relief gravity hood. 2. Greenheck WD-400 series for vertical mounting (STO at 0.026-inch w.g. pressure). 2.03 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. 2.04 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. Single Blade Dampers: 1. Material: Same gauge as duct to 24 inches size in both dimensions, and 2 gauges heavier for sizes over 24 inches. 2. Blade: Fabricate of single thickness sheet metal to streamline shape, secured with continuous hinge or rod. 3. Operator: Minimum 1 /4 inch diameter rod in self aligning, universal joint action, flanged bushing with set screw. 4. Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 inches by 30 inches. C. Multi -Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 inches by 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized frame channel with suitable hardware. D. End Bearings: Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, furnish end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, furnish oil -impregnated nylon or sintered bronze bearings. Furnish closed end bearings on ducts having pressure classification over 2 inches wg. E. Quadrants: 1. Furnish locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi -blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on standoff mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches furnish regulator at both ends. Remote Damper Operators l . Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment. 2. Tubing: Aluminum. 3. Cable: Stainless steel. 4. Wall -Box Mounting: Recessed. 5. Wall -Box Cover -Plate Material: Stainless steel. 2.05 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and as indicated on Drawings. B. Metal -Edged Connectors: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. Comply with UL 181, Class 1. Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips galvanized shcot stool or aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connPc-ted ducts. 9) 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 233300-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 01 30 00. B. Verify ducts and equipment installations are ready for accessories. C. Check location of air outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. 3.02 INSTALLATION. A. Install in accordance with NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible. B. Install back -draft dampers on gravity relief hoods. C. Where finish construction will make volume dampers inaccessible, provide remote damper operators. D. Access Doors: Install access doors at the following locations: 1. Before and after each duct mounted coil. 2. At each fire damper. 3. Before and after each automatic control damper. E. Access Door Sizes: Install minimum 8 by 8 inch size for hand access, 18 by 18 inch size for shoulder access. Review locations prior to fabrication. 1. Mark access doors for fire dampers on outside surface, with minimum 1 /2 inch high letters reading: FIRE DAMPER. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section 01 7000 B. Demonstrate re -setting of fire dampers to Owner's representative. END OF SECTION AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 33 00 - 5 1 i_. This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 23 34 00 HVAC FANS PART 1 GENERAL I[IIM 1VAUVAG\3'1 A. Section Includes: 1. Cabinet and ceiling fans. 2. Inline transfer fans. 3. Propeller wall fans. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 2. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 210 -Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating. 2. 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. B. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA) 1. Standard 9 - Load Rating and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings. C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 705 - Power Ventilators. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 3300. B. Product Data: Submit data on each type of fan and include accessories, fan curves with specified operating point plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit fan manufacturer's instructions. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 70 00. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and wiring diagrams. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal. B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300, and bear AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal. HVAC FANS © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 23 34 00 - 1 C. UL Compliance: UL listed and labeled, designed, manufactured, and tested in accordance with UL 705. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3-years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 3-years experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00. B. Protect motors, shafts, and bearings from weather and construction dust. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING AND CABINET FANS: A. Manufacturers: 1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Penn Ventilator. 3. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. 4. Greenheck Corp. 5. Twin City Fan. Description: l . Direct drive with galvanized steel housing. 2. Outlet duct collar with gravity backdraft damper in discharge. 3. Fan wheel construction: Polymeric or metallic. 4. Fan type: Backward inclined or forward curved centrifugal type. 5. Motor: Permanently lubricated, with thermal overload protection. 6. Disconnect switch: internal cord and plug. 7. 1 /2 inch acoustic insulation and integral grille for ceiling fans. 2.02 INLINE FAN A. Manufacturers: 1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Penn Ventilator. 3. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. 4. Greenheck Corp. 5. Twin City Fan. B. Description: 1. Belt drive with galvanized steel housing, integral inlet cone, removable access doors on three sides, inlet and outlet duct collar, gravity backdraft damper in discharge, horizontal hanging brackets. 2. Fan wheel: Backward inclined centrifugal type, aluminum construction. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HVAC FANS 233400-2 3. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable pitch motor sheaves selected so required RPM is obtained with sheaves at mid -position; fan shaft with self aligning pre -lubricated ball bearings. 4. Motor and Drive Mounting: Out of the airstream. 5. Motor: Open drip -proof or totally enclosed fan cooled. 6. Bearings: ABMA 9 L10 life of 100,000 hours. 7. Accessories: a. Belt guard. b. Flexible duct connections. c. Filter box with throw away type filter. d. Disconnect switch: NEMA 3R toggle switch. 2.03 SIDEWALL PROPELLER FANS A. Manufacturers: 1. Loren Cook Company. 2. Penn Ventilator. 3. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp. 4. Greenheck Corp. 5. Twin City Fan. B. UL 705 listed, wall mounted, propeller fan. C. Construction: 1. Direct Drive Propellers: a. Fabricated steel [aluminum], [Cast aluminum] blades and hubs. b. Square key and set screw or tapered bushing lock propeller to motor shaft. c. Statically and dynamically balanced to AMCA Standard 204-05. 2. Motors: a. Permanently lubricated, heavy duty, matched to fan load. b. Furnished at scheduled RPM, voltage, phase and enclosure. 3. Level 1 Construction: a. 18 gauge, zinc plated, welded wire guard/support structure. b. Blades riveted to hub. D. Accessories: 1. Factory mounted NEMA 1 electrical disconnect. 2. Insulated, motor operated damper. Refer to Section 23 33 00 for specifications. 3. 120 volt, 2-position damper actuator, powered open, spring return closed. 4. Galvanized steel wall housing with guard located on air inlet. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify exterior louvers are installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate roof curb flashing and installation with Architect and Roofing Contractor. B. Refer to drawings for curb installation detail. HVAC FANS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 34 00 - 3 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install dampers on inlet to fans. B. Install dampers on discharge of propeller exhaust fans within wall housing, close to exterior louver, unless specifically indicated otherwise. C. Install exhaust fan with clearance between fan blades and damper linkage. 3.04 DEMONSTRATION A. Refer to Section Ol 7000. B. Demonstrate fan operation and maintenance procedures. END OF SECTION HVAC FANS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 34 00 - 4 SECTION 23 37 00 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Diffusers. 2. Registers 3. Grilles. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 09 91 00 - Painting. 2. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 3. Section 23 09 00 - Instrumentation and Control for HVAC: Power to VAV diffusers. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (AMCA): 1. 500 - Test Methods for Louvers, Dampers, and Shutters. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets. C. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors (SMACNA): 1. HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit sizes, finish, and type of mounting. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and NC rating ant design flow. C. Catalog data indicating scheduled performance. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Outlets: l . Outlets to be selected to provide throw and distribution required for their respective location without objectionable drafts. 2. Maximum pressure drop through outlet to be 0.10 inches of water. 3. Unless otherwise noted, outlets to be selected on the basis of maintaining a maximum sound level of NC 30. B. Test and rate diffuser, register, and grille performance in accordance with ASHRAE 70. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 37 00 - 1 1.05 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3 years of experience. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat Air Products. 2. E. H Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. B. Type: Square, stamped, diffuser to discharge air in 360-degree pattern with sector baffles where indicated. C. Frame: Surface mount type. In plaster ceilings, furnish plaster frame and ceiling frame. D. Fabrication: Aluminum with off white, baked enamel or powder coat finish. E. Accessories: Radial opposed -blade damper and multi -louvered equalizing grid with damper adjustable from diffuser face. 2.02 CEILING SLOT DIFFUSERS A. Manufacturers: l . Anemostat Air Products. 2. E.H. Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. B. Type: Continuous wide slots as scheduled, with adjustable vanes for left, right or vertical discharge. C. Fabrication: Steel with off white, baked enamel or powder coat finish. D. Frame: 1 inch margin with clips for gypsum ceiling mounting and perimeter gasket. E. Plenum: Integral, galvanized steel, insulated, with round or oval duct inlet. AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 37 00 - 2 2.03 SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: l . Anemostat Air Products. 2. E.H. Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. B. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille with double deflection. C. Frame: 1-1 /4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. D. Fabrication: 1. Steel with 20 gauge minimum frames and 22 gauge minimum blades, with off white factory baked enamel finish. 2. Provide aluminum registers and grilles for use in showers, laundry rooms. Off white factory baked enamel or powder coat finish. 3. Stainless steel with 20 gauge frames and 22 gauge blades, satin finish for wet well. E. Damper: Integral, gang -operated, opposed blade type with removable key operator, operable from face. Provide aluminum dampers where they are serving aluminum grilles. 2.04 TRANSFER AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Anemostat Air Products. 2. E.H. Price Company. 3. Krueger. 4. Nailor Industries, Inc. 5. Titus. 6. Tuttle and Bailey. B. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, horizontal face. C. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. D. Fabrication: 1. Steel with 20 gauge minimum frames and 22 gauge minimum blades, with off white factory baked enamel finish. 2. Provide aluminum registers and grilles for use in showers, laundry rooms. Off white factory baked enamel or powder coat finish. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 W AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 233700-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 01 3000. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Paint visible portion of ductwork behind air outlets and inlets matte black. B. Install diffusers to ductwork with airtight connection. 3.03 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Check location of oullels and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. END OF SECTION AIR OUTLETS AND INLEFS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 37 00 - 4 SECTION 23 51 23 GAS VENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Type B Double wall gas vents. 2. Gas vents for condensing type appliances. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 22 34 00 - Fuel -Fired Domestic Water Heaters. 2. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. Z21.66 - Automatic Vent Damper Devices for Use with Gas -Fired Appliances. 2. Z21.67 - Mechanically Actuated Automatic Vent Damper Device. 3. Z21.68 - Thermatically Actuated Automatic Vent Damper Devices. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. A167 - Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat -Resisting Chromium -Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, Strip. 2. A666 - Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold -Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. 3. A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -Iron Alloy -Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot -Dip Process. 4. A924/A924M - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic -Coated by the Hot -Dip Process. 5. Al 011 /Al01 1 M-07 Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot -Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High -Strength Low -Alloy, High -Strength Low -Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra -High Strength. C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 2. 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances. D. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors (SMACNA): 1. Guide for Steel Stack Construction. 2. HVAC Duct Construction Standard - Metal and Flexible. E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): 1. 103 - Factory -Built Chimneys for Residential Type and Building Heating Appliances. 2. 378 - Draft Equipment. 3. 441 - Gas Vents. 4. 641 - Type L Low -Temperature Venting Systems. 5. 959 - Medium Heat Appliance Factory Built Chimneys. GAS VENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2351 23-1 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Breeching: Vent Connector. B. Chimney: Primarily vertical shaft enclosing at least one vent for conducting flue gases outdoors. C. Smoke Pipe: Round, single wall vent connector. D. Vent: Portion of a venting system designed to convey flue gases directly outdoors from a vent connector or from an appliance when a vent connector is not used. E. Vent Connector: Part of a venting system that conducts the flue gases from the flue collar of an appliance to a chimney or vent, and may include a draft control device. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit data indicating factory built chimneys, including dimensional details of components and flue caps, dimensions and weights, electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide factory built vents and chimneys used for venting natural draft appliances complying with NFPA 211 and UL listed and labeled. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3-years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this Section with minimum 3-years documented experience. 1.07 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Section 01 60 00. B. Maintain water integrity of roof during and after installation of chimney or vent. 1.08 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 01 70 00. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 GAS VENTS 2351 23 - 2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS: A. Vent pipe approved for a Category IV appliance is required between the condensing equipment and the terminus. 2.02 TYPE B DOUBLE WALL GAS VENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Metal Products. 2. Metal -Fab, Inc. 3. Selkirk Metalbestos. B. Fabrication: Inner pipe of sheet aluminum, outer pipe of galvanized sheet steel, tested in compliance with UL 441. C. Vent Dampers: Electrically actuated, same size as draft hood collar, constructed of stainless steel or galvanized steel, with corrosion resistant components, in compliance with ANSI Z21.66. 2.03 CONDENSING APPLIANCE GAS VENTS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Metal Products. 2. Metal -Fab, Inc. 3. Selkirk Metalbestos. 4. As recommended by appliance manufacturer_ B. Fabrication: Stainless steel vent pipe specifically designed for use with condensing gas - fired appliances. Approved for use by the appliance manufacturer and installed in accordance with appliance manufacturer requirements regarding length, number of elbows allowed, termination methods and accessories and relationship to appliance combustion air piping. C. Vent Dampers: Provide only if suitable for operation on selected appliances. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Combustion air intakes shall be galvanized steel or schedule 40 PVC with solvent weld fittings. B. Support horizontal gas vents in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install vertical gas vents with suitable means for drainage of condensate. D. Support breeching from building structure, rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors to hold to shape and prevent buckling. Support vertical breeching, chimneys, and stacks at 12 foot spacing, to adjacent structural surfaces, or at floor penetrations. GAS VENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2351 23 - 3 Refer to SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible for equivalent duct support configuration and size. E. Pitch breeching with positive slope up from fuel -fired equipment to chimney or stack. F. Coordinate installation of dampers, and induced draft fans. G. For Type B double wall gas vents, maintain UL listed minimum clearances from combustibles. Assemble pipe and accessories for complete installation. H. Install vent dampers, locating close to draft hood collar, and secured to breeching. I. Level and plumb chimney and stacks. J. Clean breeching, chimneys, and stacks during installation, removing dust and debris. K. Install slip joints allowing removal of appliances without removal or dismantling of breeching, breeching insulation, chimneys, or stacks. L. Provide Type B chimney continuously from appliances. M. Extend vent above roof in accordance with applicable code. N. Maximum Vent Horizontal Distance: 75 percent of vent vertical distance. O. Where appliance requires draft hood or barometric control device, install manufacturer furnished listed devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable code. END OF SECTION GAS VENTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2351 23 - 4 SECTION 23 54 00 FURNACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: l . Gas Fired Furnaces. 2. Condensing Units. 3. Zone Dampers 4. Thermostats. 5. Condenser Security Enclosures. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 11 23 - Facility Natural -Gas Piping: Execution requirements for natural gas piping specified in this section. 2. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Execution requirements for ductwork and duct liner specified by this section. 3. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories: Execution requirements for flexible duct connections specified by this section. 4. Division 26 - Electrical Requirements for electric connections specified by this section. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute: 1. ANSI Z21.47 - Gas -Fired Central Furnaces. B. Air -Conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute: 1. AHRI 210/240 - Unitary Air -Conditioning and Air -Source Heat Pump Equipment. 2. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 3. AHRI 520 - Positive Displacement Condensing Units. 4. AHRI 610 - Central System Humidifiers for Residential Applications. C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers: 1. ASHRAE 15 - Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 2. ASHRAE 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air -Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 3. ASHRAE 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. 4. ASHRAE 103 - Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of Residential Central Furnaces and Boilers. D. International Code Council: 1. ICC IFGC - International Fuel Gas Code. E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association: 1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators. F. National Fire Protection Association: 1. NFPA 31 - Standard for the Installation of Oil -Burning Equipment. FURNACES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 54 00 - 1 2. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. 3. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 4. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems. 5. NFPA 211 - Standard for Chimneys, Fireplaces, Vents, and Solid Fuel Burning Appliances. G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.: 1. UL 207 - Refrigerant -Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical. 2. UL 726 - UL Standard for Safety for Oil -Fired Boiler Assemblies. 3. UL 727 - Oil -Fired Central Furnaces. 4. UL 729 - UL Standard for Safety for Oil -Fired Floor Furnaces. H. United States Department of Energy: 1. DOE 10 CFR - Uniform Test Method for Measuring the Energy Consumption of Furnaces. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit rated capacities, efficiencies, weights, required clearances, and location and size of field connections, accessories, electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams. B. Design Data: Indicate refrigerant pipe sizing. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit rigging, assembly, and installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and connections. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, service instructions, installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listing. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnace Performance Requirements: Conform to minimum efficiency prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with ANSI Z21.47 and ASHRAE Standard 103. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum of three years of experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum of three years of experience. FURNACES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 54 00 - 2 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept furnaces, humidifiers, electronic air cleaners, condensing units and thermostats on site in factory packaging. Inspect for damage. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install condensing unit foundation pad when ground is frozen or muddy. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for heat exchangers. B. Furnish five-year manufacturer's warranty for condensing unit compressors. 1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Furnish service and maintenance of furnace and accessories during warranty period. B. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication. Repair or replace parts whenever required. Use parts produced by manufacturer of original equipment. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish two replacement filter sets for each furnace. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GAS FIRED FURNACES A. Acceptable Manufacturers; 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Lennox. 3. Trane. B. Description: 1. Self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre -wired unit consisting of cabinet, supply fan, heating element, controls, air filter and accessories; wired for single power connection with control transformer. a. Air Flow Configuration: Upflow. b. Fuel: Natural Gas fired. c. Electric Refrigeration: Refrigerant cooling coil and outdoor package containing compressor, condenser coil and condenser fan. d. Accessories: Roof termination kit, filter rack, motorized zone dampers, twinning kit. C. Provide equipment that is UL listed as suitable for clearance space available in installed location. FURNACES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 54 00 - 3 D. Cabinet: Steel with baked enamel finish, easily removed and secured access panels with safety interlock switches for furnaces installed indoors, insulation. 1. For downflow units, furnish base for combustible floors. E. Supply Fan: Centrifugal type rubber mounted with direct or belt drive. F. Motor: EPACT minimum efficiency when tested according to NEMA MG 1; 1750 rpm multiple speed, permanently lubricated. G. Heat Exchanger: Aluminized steel crimped or welded construction. H. Gas Burner: 1. Atmospheric type with adjustable combustion air supply. 2. Gas valve provides 100 percent safety gas shut-off; 24 volt combining pressure regulation, safety ignition system, manual On -Off valve, pilot filtration, automatic electric valves. 3. Electronic or pilot ignition, with hot surface igniter. 4. Automatic vent damper with synchronous spring return damper motor. 5. Corrosion resistant combustion air blower with permanently lubricated motor. Gas Burner Safety Controls: 1. Ignition and flame- sensing safety controls to prove adequate combustion air supply and stop gas flow on ignition failure. 2. Flame rollout switch: Installed on burner box and prevents unsafe operation. 3. Blocked Vent shutoff system: Temperature sensor installed on draft hood and prevents operation, manual reset. 4. Limit Control: Fixed stop at maximum permissible setting de -energizes burner on excessive outlet air temperature, automatic resets. Operating Controls: 1. Room Thermostat: Cycles furnace syslern on and off to maintain room temperature setting. 2. Supply Fan Control: Energize from outlet air temperature or timer device independent of burner controls, with adjustable timed off delay and fixed timed on delay, with manual switch for continuous fan operation. Provide continuous low or high speed fan operation. 3. Twinning kit for operation of multiple furnaces. K. Air Filters: 1 inch thick glass fiber, disposable type arranged for easy replacement. 2.02 EVAPORATOR COIL UNITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Dornback Furnaces. 3. The Trane Company. B. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240. C. Evaporator Coil: Copper tube aluminum fin assembly, galvanized or polymeric drain pan, drain connection, refrigerant piping connections, restricted distributor or thermostatic expansion valve, steel cabinet with baked enamel finish and insulation. FURNACES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 54 00 4 2.03 CONDENSING UNITS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Dornback Furnaces. 3. The Trane Company. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with ARI 210/240. Testing: ASHRAE 15. C. Compressor: hermetic, 3600 rpm, resiliently mounted integral with condenser, with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high pressure control, motor overload protection, service valves and drier. Furnish time delay control to prevent short cycling. D. Refrigeration Accessories: Filter Drier, high-pressure switch (manual reset), low-pressure switch (automatic reset), service valves and gage ports and thermometer well (in liquid line). Furnish thermostatic expansion valves. E. Air Cooled Condenser: ARI 520; aluminum fin and copper tube coil, with direct drive axial propeller fan resiliently mounted, galvanized fan guard. Refrigeration Operating Controls: 1. Room Thermostat: Cycles condensing unit and supply fan to maintain room temperature setting. 2. Low Ambient Kit: Furnish refrigerant pressure or temperature switch to cycle condenser fan motor on when condenser refrigerant pressure is above 285 psig and off when pressure drops below 140 psig for operation to 0 degrees F. 2.04 ZONE DAMPERS & CONTROLS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp. - Infinty. 2. The Trane Company - VariTrac. Dampers 1. Description: a. Frames: 6 inch wide 18 gauge. b. Blades: galvanized, 2 gauge. c. Linkage: 12 gauge plated steel brackets riveted to the blades wit aluminum rod locked pivots. d. Bearings: Oilite bronze. e. Axles: Extendable from motor actuator attachment. f. Actuator: 24V electric. C. System Controller 1. System level controller coordinates and monitors system operation, including HVAC system supply pressure and airflow, heating/cooling mode, supply air temperature, all zone temperatures and setpoints, fan mode, economizer position, time -of -day scheduling, and zone grouping logic. D. Bypass Controller 1. Package duct temperature sensor, static pressure sensor, and communicating controller which mounts on the supply ductwork. Provides power to drive the bypass damper actuator. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FURNACES 23 54 00 - 5 2.05 THERMOSTATS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Carrier Corp. 2. Dornback Furnaces. 3. The Trane Company. B. Electric solid state microcomputer based room thermostat with remote sensor: l . Automatic switching from heating to cooling. 2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from setpoint. 3. Set-up for four separate temperatures for each day. 4. Instant override of setpoint for continuous or timed period from one hour to 31 days. 5. Short cycle protection. 6. Programming based on [weekdays, Saturday and Sunday] [every day of week]. 7. Selection features including degree F or degree C display, 12 or 24-hour clock, remote sensor, fan on -auto. 8. Battery replacement without program loss. 9. Thermostat display: a. Time of day. b. Actual room tcmperaturc. c. Programmed temperature. d. Programmed time. e. Duration of timed override. f. Day of week. g. System mode indication: heating, [cooling,] [auto,] [off,] [fan auto,] [fan on]. C. Disconnect Switch: Mount switch on or near equipment. 2.06 CONDENSER SECURITY ENCLOSURE A. Manufacturers 1. AC Guard. 2. Property Armor. 3. Safe Guard A/C. B. Product 1. Frame: one inch, 16 gauge tubular steel. 2. Panels: 1/4 - #9 expanded metal sheet, 9 gauge steel, 0.6 inch x 1.5 inch openings, 50 percent minimum open area. 3. Finish: powder coated. 4. Trim: removable panels with welded hasp and eye for padlocks. Welded feet predrilled for anchor bolts. 5. Basis of Design: AC -Guard model ACMS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify building is ready for installation of units and openings are as indicated on Drawings. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install gas fired furnaces in accordance with NFPA 54. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FURNACES 23 54 00 - 6 B. Install vent connections in accordance with NFPA 211 and NFPA 54. C. Install refrigeration systems in accordance with ASHRAE 15. D. Mount air cooled condenser -compressor package on concrete pads. E. Installation - Natural Gas Piping: 1. Connect natural gas piping in accordance with NFPA 54. 2. Connect natural gas piping to unit, full size of unit gas train inlet. Arrange piping with clearances for burner service. 3. Install the following piping accessories on natural gas piping connections. Refer to Section 23 11 23. a. Shutoff valve. b. Pressure reducing valve. F. Pipe drain from cooling coils and Category III and IV gas -fired furnaces heat exchanger and vent condensate disposal to nearest floor drain. G. Connect units to electric supply and connect controls remote from units. H. Install control components supplied with equipment and provide control wiring. I. Install control wiring between thermostat, indoor unit, and outdoor unit. J. Install evaporator unit in section of lined ductwork fastened to furnace. Connect return air and evaporator unit duct to system ductwork with flexible duct connection. Refer to Section 23 33 00. END OF SECTION FURNACES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 23 54 00 - 7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air handling unit.. 2. Condensing unit. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 00 - Common Work Results for HVAC. 2. Section 23 09 93 - Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls. 3. Division 26: Equipment Wiring Connections. 1.02 REFERENCES A. Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI): 1. 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment. 2. 365 - Commercial and Industrial Unitary Air -Conditioning Condensing Units. B. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE): 1. 52.1 - Gravimetric and Dust -Spot Procedures for Testing Air -Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. 2. 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low -Rise Residential Buildings. C. ASTM International (ASTM): 1. B 117 - Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus. D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA): 1. MG 1 - Motors and Generators. E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 33 00. B. Product Data: Submit data indicating: 1. Cooling and heating capacities. 2. Dimensions. 3. Weights. 4. Rough -in connections and connection requirements. 5. Electrical requirements with electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 6. Controls. 7. Accessories. SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2381 26-1 C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit assembly, support details, connection requirements, and include start-up instructions. D. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit start-up report for each unit. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 01 70 00. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of controls installed remotely from units. C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation instructions, and maintenance and repair data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER) not less than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when used in combination with compressors and evaporator coils when tested in accordancc with ACHRI 210/240. B. Cooling Capacity: Rate in accordance with ARI 365. C. Sound Rating: Measure in accordance with ARI 270. D. Insulation and adhesives: Meet requirements of NFPA 90A. E. Perform Work in accordance with State of Minnesota standard. 1.06 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum 3-years experience. B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 3-years experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Refer to Section 01 60 00. B. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage. C. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading and transporting units. D. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Refer to Section 01 30 00. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS 2381 26 - 2 B. Coordinate installation of condensing units with concrete pad. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Refer to Section 01 7000. B. Furnish five year manufacturers warranty for compressors. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Refer to Section 01 70 00. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS A. Manufacturers: l . Carrier Corp. 2. Lennox International. 3. McQuay International. 4. Mitsubishi Electric. 5. Rheem Manufacturing. 6. The Trane Company. 7. York International. 8. Or approved equal. B. Product Description: Split system consisting of indoor unit and condensing unit including cabinet, evaporator fan, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor, refrigeration circuit, condenser, air filters, controls, air handling unit accessories, condensing unit accessories, and refrigeration specialties. 2.02 INDOOR UNIT A. Configuration: Horizontal air delivery. B. Cabinet: 1. Panels: Constructed of galvanized steel with baked enamel finish. Access Panels: Located on both sides of unit. Furnish with duct collars on inlets and outlets. 2. Insulation: Factory applied to each surface to insulate entire cabinet. 1 /2 inch thick neoprene coated or aluminum foil faced glass fiber with edges protected from erosion. C. Evaporator Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with direct drive motor. Motor permanently lubricated with built-in thermal overload protection. D. Evaporator Coil: Constructed of copper tubes expanded onto aluminum fins. Factory leak tested under water. Removable, PVC construction, double -sloped drain pan with piping connections on both sides. E. Refrigeration System: Single refrigeration circuits controlled by factory installed thermal expansion valve. F. Air Filters: Factory standard glass fiber disposable media in metal frame. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS 2381 26-3 G. Air Handling Unit Accessories: 1. Discharge Louver: Construction and finish matching unit casing. Integral grille. 2. Return Air Grille: mounted in return air opening, fixed louvers. 3. Mounting Sub -base with construction and finish matching unit casing. 2.03 CONDENSING UNIT A. General: Factory assembled and tested air cooled condensing units, consisting of casing, compressors, condensers, coils, condenser fans and motors, and unit controls. B. Unit Casings: Exposed casing surfaces constructed of galvanized steel with manufacturer's standard baked enamel finish. Designed for outdoor installation and complete with weather protection for components and controls, and complete with removable panels for required access to compressors, controls, condenser fans, motors, and drives. C. Compressor: Single refrigeration circuit with rotary type compressors, resiliently mounted, with positive lubrication, and internal motor overload protection. D. Condenser Coil: Constructed of copper tubing mechanically bonded to aluminum fins, factory leak and pressure tcstcd. E. Controls: Furnish operating and safety controls including high and low pressure cutouts. Control transformer. Furnish magnetic contactors for compressor and condenser fan motors. F. Condenser Fans and Drives: Direct drive propeller fans statically and dynamically balanced. Wired to operate with compressor. Permanently lubricated ball bearing type motors with built-in thermal overload protection. G. Condensing Unit Accessories: Furnish the following accessories: 1. Low ambient kit with manufacturer recommend controls and accessories to provide low ambient cooling to [+40] [01-20 degrees F. 2. Disconnect switch. 3. Condenser Coil Guard: Condenser fan openings furnished with PVC coated steel wire safety guards. H. Refrigeration specialties: Furnish the following: l . Charge of compressor oil. 2. Holding charge of refrigerant. 3. Replaceable core type filter drier. 4. Liquid line sight glass and moisture indicator. 5. Shut-off valves on suction and liquid piping. 6. Liquid line solenoid valve. 7. Charging valve. 8. Crankcase heater. 9. Pressure relief device. Refrigerant: Furnish charge of refrigerant R410a, © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS 2381 26 - 4 2.04 REFRIGERANT LINE SET A. In lieu of field constructing brazed components and piping as specified in Section 23 05 00 it is acceptable to install factory furnished pre -charged line sets and accessories to accomplish the work. 2.05 CONTROLS A. Thermostat: Remote space thermostat with single stage cooling. Furnish system selector switch off -cool and fan control switch auto -on. B. Disconnect Switch: Non -fused type, accessible from outside unit, with power lockout capability. 2.06 AIR CONDITIONER ENCLOSURE A. Manufacturers 1. AC Guard. 2. Property Armor. 3. Safe Guard A/C. B. Product l . Frame: one inch, 16 gauge tubular steel. 2. Panels: 3/4 - #9 expanded metal sheet, 9 gauge steel, 0.6 inch x 1.5 inch openings, 50 percent minimum open area. 3. Finish: powder coated. 4. Trim: removable panels with welded hasp and eye for padlocks. Welded feet predrilled for anchor bolts. 5. Basis of Design: AC -Guard model ACMS. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Section 01 3000. 3.02 INSTALLATION - AIR HANDLING UNIT A. Mount indoor unit on resilient vibration isolators. B. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to condensate drainage system. C. Install components furnished loose for field mounting. D. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26. 3.03 INSTALLATION - CONDENSING UNIT A. Install condensing units on concrete pads [treated wood blocks] [24 inch high metal stands] [wall hangers] and vibration isolators. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS 2381 26 - 5 B. Install refrigerant piping from unit to condensing unit. Install refrigerant specialties furnished with unit. C. Evacuate refrigerant piping and install initial charge of refrigerant. D. Insulate the refrigerant piping as specified in Section 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation. E. Insulate the refrigerant suction piping with 1 /2 inch thick elastomeric foam insulation. Paint insulation exposed to weather with alkydchorinated - rubber paint. F. Install electrical devices furnished loose for field mounting. G. Install control wiring between air handling unit, condensing unit, and field installed accessories. H. Install connection to electrical power wiring in accordance with Division 26. 3.04 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Refer to Section Ol 40 00. B. Furnish initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation, including routine servicing and checkout. 3.05 CLEANING A. Refer to Section 01 7000. B. Vacuum clean coils and inside of unit cabinet. C. Inslull new Iluuwaway filters in units at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SPLIT -SYSTEM AIR -CONDITIONERS 2381 26-6 SECTION 23 83 33 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Low -intensity Electric Radiant Heaters. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product data sheets. B. Dimension sheet with weights. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOW -INTENSITY ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Berko. 2. Markel. 3. Qmark. 4. Thermazone. B. UL Listed. C. Steel housing. D. Mount 4 inches from combustibles and in accordance with UL listing, with mounting brackets. E. Provide wiring diagram with unit. F. Provide nameplate data required to comply with NFPA 70. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install heaters where indicated on Drawings. B. Provide manufacturer's recommended mounting hardware. C. Mount heater per manufacturer's recommendations, but not less than 10 feet above finished floor. D. Locate remote thermostat to prevent short cycling of heater operation. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATERS 23 83 33 - 1 This Page Lett Blank Intentionally SECTION 26 05 05 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. References used in electrical and control Specifications. 2. Regulatory requirements for electrical construction. 3. Requirements of equipment and materials. 4. Workmanship. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid 1.03 REFERENCES A. ANSI - American National Standards Institute 1. C2 - National Electrical Safety Code. 2. C62.41-IEEE -Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low -Voltage AC Power Circuits. B. EPA -Environmental Protection Agency C. ICEA - Insulated Cable Engineers Association 1. S-95-658 - Thermoplastic -Insulated Wire and Cable. D. IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers 1. 112 -Standard Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators. 2. 519 - Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control In Electric Power Systems. E. LPI - Lightning Protection Institute 1. LP1175 - Lightning Protection System Installation Standard. F. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association 1. NECA 1 - Standard Practices for Good Workmanship In Electrical Contracting. G. NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association 1. TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Tubing and Conduit. 2. MG 1 - Motors and Generators. 3. PB 2 - Deadfront Distribution Switchboards. 4. ICS 2 - Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and Overload Relays, Rated Not More Than 2,000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC. 5. 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 Volts Maximum). BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 05 - 1 H. NFPA - National Fire Protection Association 1. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. I. OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration 1. 29 CFR 1910 -Occupational Safety and Health Standards. UL - Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. l . UL-6 - Rigid Metal Conduit. 2. UL-83 - Thermoplastic - Insulated Wires and Cables. 3. UL-96 - Lightning Protection Components. 4. UL-360 - Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit. 5. UL-467 - Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment. 6. UL 486D - Insulated Wire Connector Systems for Underground Use or In Damp or Wet Locations. 7. UL-508 - Industrial Control Equipment. 8. UL-651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit. 9. UL-797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing. 10. UL-810 - Capacitors. 11. UL-891 - Dead -Front Switchboards. 12. UL-913 - Intrinsically Safe Apparatus and Associated Apparatus for Use In Class I, II, and III, Division 1, Hazardous (Classified) Locations. 13. UL-935 - Fluorescent -Lamp Ballasts. 14. UL-1008 - Transfer Switch Equipment. 15. UL-1012 - Power Units Other Than Class 2. 16. UL-1029 - High -Intensity -Discharge Lamp Ballasts. 17. UL-1449 - Surge Protection Devices. 18. UL-1479 - Fire Tests of Through -Penetration Firestops. 19. UL-1572 - High Intensity Discharge Lighting Fixtures. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All Work performed under this Contract shall conform to the latest editions of the National Electrical Code (NFPA70), the National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C2), and the Minnesota State Building Code. 1.05 INSTRUCTIONS AND PARTS LITERATURE A. Instruction and parts literature are generally packed with electrical equipment and devices. Contractor shall remove this literature from the packing container or equipment enclosure, identify the literature with the equipment to which it applies, and file the literature in loose-leaf binders with index tabs. Each binder shall have an index which lists each piece of equipment and the literature which applies to it. An index tab shall be provided for each piece of equipment. B. Contractor shall establish a procedure with the other trades for receiving, identifying, and filing literature for devices which are removed from their packaging and installed by other trades. Literature shall be provided as outlined above. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260505-2 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals for equipment provided by the Electrical Contractor shall bear a stamp or specific written certification from the Electrical Contractor, certifying the submittals have been reviewed. B. Submit the following items consistent with Section 01 33 00. Refer to each Section under Division 26 for additional submittal requirements particular to that Section. C. Shop Drawings and Manufacturer's Information: 1. Product Data Sheets a. Product and component data sheets which describe all equipment and devices to be provided. b. Include all features specified. c. Provide dimensioned prints with weights. d. Highlight or otherwise accentuate on each data sheet the specified product features and product numbers. 2. Composite Drawing a. Include power and control wiring for all systems and equipment. b. Show basic systems on composite drawing. c. Use terminal numbers on drawings and schematics. d. Use separate drawings to show details of sub -systems. e. Identify sub -system drawing interface points on composite drawing and sub -system drawings; terminal numbers of interface points shall be the same on both drawings. f. Revise or redraw manufacturer's standard drawings to meet above requirements. 3. Programmable Systems a. Description of programmable system operation, including but not limited to input/output functions, control capabilities, configuration procedures, starting setpoints, etc. D. Operating and Maintenance Manuals 1. Include all the information provided with the shop drawings and manufacturer's information. a. Update and complete control system drawings and descriptions for all equipment. b. All documentation shall include modifications made which reflect the final installation. 2. Date the manuals with the day, month, and year they are provided to the Owner/Engineer. 3. Provide manufacturers' user manuals and installation instructions. 4. Provide 3 hard (paper) copies in a 3-ring binder. Provide a table of contents and each piece of equipment or sub -system shall be tabbed. 5. Provide 2 digital copies in a PDF format saved to a compact disk. The saved files shall be clearly identified and organized in a similar manner to the hard copies a. Data saved on the disks shall be accessible and neatly organized. b. Provide a table of contents which utilizes bookmarks. The bookmark shall take the reader to a specific page when the reader clicks on the desired title in the table of contents. A bookmark shall be provided for materials associated with each piece 1. of equipment included in the O&M manual. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 260505-3 M PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS A. All electrical and control equipment and materials shall be provided as specified in the Contract Documents. B. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall bear the Underwriters Laboratories (UL) label if such products are listed by UL. C. Where applicable, equipment and materials shall conform to ANSI, ICEA, IEEE, and NEMA Standards. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WORKMANSHIP A. All Work shall be performed in a neat and workmanlike manner consistent with the high quality standards of the electrical trade. A neat and workmanlike manner" shall be as required by NFPA 70 and shall conform to NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting. Each electrician shall be knowledgeable and well - trained in the particular tasks to be performed. 3.02 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING A. Unless noted otherwise, equipment which is not free-standing shall not be mounted on wood panels, but shall be attached to concrete or masonry walls, support channels, or building structural steel. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Nameplates shall be used to identify all field devices. B. All nameplates shall be engraved phenolic nameplates attached with stainless steel screws or a permanent stamped brass tag. 3.04 RECEIVING AND STORING EQUIPMENT A. All equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. In general, equipment packaging is not designed to protect the contents for outdoor storage. As a minimum, Contractor shall store the equipment prior to installation in a clean, dry location free from excessive temperatures, humidity, or foreign materials normally encountered at a Site. If the storage facility is unheated, Contractor shall provide heating to protect equipment from condensation, which could cause components to corrode or to be otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 05 - 4 SECTION 26 05 10 MOTORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Fractional horsepower motors. 2. Integral horsepower motors. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Certified outline dimension prints and data sheets which include nameplate information; 1 /2, 3/4, and 4/4 load efficiency; 1 /2, 3/4, and 4/4 load power factor; maximum kVAR rating and speed -torque curve shall be submitted for each motor. Contractor shall provide all data necessary for the Owner to prepare Xcel Energy rebate forms. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS A. Motors smaller than 1 /2 horsepower shall be 115 volts or 200 volts, single phase, 60 Hz or 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz as specified in the driven equipment Section. If not specified otherwise, enclosure shall be open drip -proof with cast iron or steel housing. Stator windings shall be copper. Motors shall have a 1.15-service factor, adequate torque to accelerate the load, a horsepower rating which will drive the load continuously at all operating conditions without exceeding the nameplate rating and bracing for full voltage starting. Special torque motors shall be provided as determined by the driven equipment. B. Motors shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with ANSI/NEMA Publication No. MG 1. 2.02 INTEGRAL HORSPOWER MOTORS A. Motors 1 /2 horsepower and larger shall be 460 volts, 3 phase, 60 Hz, squirrel cage induction motors. NEMA design shall be determined by the torque requirements of the driven load. Motors shall have a 1.15-service factor, adequate torque to accelerate the load continuously at all operating conditions without exceeding the nameplate rating, not including the service factor and shall be braced for full voltage starting. Special torque motors shall be provided as determined by the driven equipment. Inrush current shall not exceed NFPA 70 Code G. MOTORS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 10 - 1 B. Motors shall be designed, constructed, and tested in accordance with ANSI/NEMA Publication No. MG-1 and shall be high efficiency design as determined by IEEE Standard 112, Method B. Motor design shall be for maximum efficiency. Nominal efficiency shall be not less than those listed in Paragraph 2.04, Motor Efficiencies. C. If not specified otherwise, enclosure shall be open drip -proof with cast iron housing. Stator windings shall be copper. All motors shall have a ].I 5-service factor. An oversize terminal box shall be furnished. D. Bearings shall be shielded, regreasable, steel anti -friction type. E. Motor frame shall be drilled and tapped inside the terminal box for a grounding lug. A terminal box lug may be used if it is drilled and tapped into the motor frame and is readily accessible within the terminal box. F. Insulation system shall be of Class F non -hygroscopic materials and shall be for continuous operation in a 40 degrees C ambient. G. Motor nameplates shall include motor full load power factor, efficiency, and maximum KVAR rating. H. If any driven equipment requires special features, such as 2 speed, reversing, wye-delta, or part -winding starters, the Contractor shall confirm the exact type of starter required based on the actual equipment provided. 2.03 INVERTER DUTY MOTORS A. Motors shown on the Drawings as controlled by a VFD, or designated to be inverter duty, shall be designed in accordance with NEMA MG-1, 2006, Revision 1 Part 31 and shall have the following characteristics in addition to those designated elsewhere in this Specification: 1. Specifically designed for use with solid state inverter variable frequency drives. 2. Minimum service factor of 1.0 when operating from a VFD or 1.15 when operating across -the -line. 3. The motor shall be of cast iron construction with copper windings and a fan capable of providing adequate cooling air throughout the operating range of the motor. Auxiliary blower systems, if required due to additional cooling requirements, shall be supplied as needed. 4. Winding insulation shall be designed for inverter -duty operation to withstand the voltage spikes characteristic of IGBT drives. Minimum voltage levels for 460-volt rated motors shall be 1,600 volts. 5. Horizontal Motors!- 100HP shall be provided with an Aegis shaft grounding ring around the rotor on the drive end or Danfoss common mode cores to prevent shaft currents. 6. Horizontal Motors > 100HP shall be provided with an insulated bearing on the non -drive end to eliminate circulating currents and an Aegis shaft grounding ring around the shaft on the drive end or Danfoss common mode cores to eliminate shaft currents. 7. Ground motor frame to facility grounding electrode system. 8. Where Danfoss common mode cores are used, they shall be installed in the VFD enclosure or other junction box or enclosure near the VFD motor terminals as recommended by the Manufacturer. MOTORS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2605 10 - 2 2.04 MOTOR EFFICIENCIES • 11 :11 0 •11 m 11 Mc nog ff. 11 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MOTORS 260510-3 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 MOTOR CIRCUITS A. Motor circuits shall be provided as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NFPA 70. The circuit shall include a motor grounding conductor sized per NFPA 70, Table 250.122. B. Motor connections shall be made in accordance with the motor nameplate for the proper voltage and other operating characteristics. 3.02 NAMEPLATE CURRENT A. Before any motor is energized, Contractor shall obtain the nameplate information from the motor manufacturer and record the motor nameplate current on the line diagrams in the space marked FLA_Contractor shall size the motor starter overload heaters in accordance with the starter manufacturer's recommendation for the given motor nameplate current, service factor, and power factor correcting capacitors, if provided. 3.03 ROTATION A. Motor rotation shall be checked before the motor is connected to the driven equipment; that is, before couplings are bolted together or belts are installed. The time for checking rotation shall be arranged with the Contractor responsible for installing the equipment. B. Before the motor is started to check rotation, electrician shall determine that the motor is properly lubricated. C. After correct rotation has been established, the insulation resistance test tags shall be marked "Rotation O.K." and signed or initialed by the electrician and representative of the it islalling Contractor who check the motor rotation. END OF SECTION MOTORS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 10 - 4 SECTION 26 05 19 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. 600-volt wire and cable. 2. Variable frequency drive cable. 3. Terminals and connectors. 4. Installation. 5. Splices and terminations. 6. Identification. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product data sheets shall be submitted for all wire and cable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 600-VOLT WIRE AND CABLE A. Feeder and Branch Circuit Wire 1. Stranded copper conductor, solid copper for lighting and convenience receptacle circuits only. 2. THWN insulated for conductor sizes #4 AWG and smaller. 3. XHHW or THWN insulation for conductor sizes #3 AWG and larger. B. Control Wire 1. # 14 AWG, 7 or 9 strand copper. 2. THWN or XHHW insulation. 3. Solid color. C. Insulation of all wire shall conform to ICEA S-95-658, NFPA 70, and UL-83. D. All Wire and Cable Shall Be 1. New and coiled or on reels. 2. Each coil and/or reel shall have a label with the manufacturer's name, trade name of wire, size of wire, and UL label. LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 19 - 1 2.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE CABLE A. 2 AWG Cables and smaller: 1. Designed to withstand high voltage spikes, high noise levels and adverse environmental conditions. 2. 600V, UL-1277 listed. 3. Copper braid/aluminum foil combination shield and tinned copper drain wire. 4. 4-tinned copper conductors. 5. Drain wire and ground wire are the same gauge size as power conductors. 6. Conductors provided with a cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation. 7. Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket. 8. Cable shall be Belden 29500 Series, AlphaWire V16000 Series, OLFLEX VFD Series, or equal. Cables larger than 2AWG: 1. Designed to withstand high voltage spikes, high noise levels and adverse environmental conditions. 2. 600V, UL-1277 listed. 3. 3-symmetrical bare stranded ground conductors and longitudinal corrugated copper tape shield. 4. Bare stranded current carrying conductors with a cross linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulation. 5. Black sunlight resistant PVC jacket. 6. Cable shall be OLFLEX VFD Symmetrical Series, or equal. 2.03 MULTI -CONDUCTOR INSTRUMENT CABLE A. 2-conductor, 3-conductor, or 4-conductor # 16 shielded. B. Stranded tinned copper conductors. C. Polyethylene color -coded insulation. D. Aluminum foil shield and drain wire. E. Overall PVC or neoprene jacket which is resistant to oil, ozone, moisture, and sunlight. F. General Cable Corp. VNTC Series, or equal. G. Special instrument and signal cable shall be provided with the equipment which requires them. 2.04 TERMINALS AND CONNECTORS A. Tool compressed terminals and connectors shall be made of 1 piece seamless highly conductive copper with a uniform tin-plate coating to minimize corrosion. B. Step-down adapters shall be copper compression type. C, Electrical spring connectors: 1. Manufacturer: 3M "Scotchlok" or "Ranger," Ideal "Wing -Nut". © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-2 D. Fork Terminals: 1. Vinyl or nylon self -insulated locking type. 2. Terminal insulation that supports wire insulation. 3. Manufacturer: Thomas & Betts Type FL, Burndy Type TP-LF, Panduit Type PNF, 3M Type MNG. Electrical Tape: 1. UL Listed. 2. Weather resistant. 3. Moisture resistant vinyl. 4. Rated for the voltage system which it is applied. 5. Temperature rating suitable for the application on which it is applied. Motor Connection Kit: l . UL Listed. 2. Qualified to ANSI standards. 3. Rated to withstand 1000V. 4. For use on in -line or stub motor lead splices. 5. Resistant to abrasion. 6. Installed per manufacturer's recommendations. G. Waterproof kits shall be utilized for all outdoor below -grade splices and connections as follows 1. Heavy wall, heat shrinkable with interior coating of hot melt adhesive - sealant. Tubing shall be chemically cross linked, thermally stabilized polyolefin. 2. UL listed (UL-486D). 3. Manufacturer: 3M - ITCSN, or equal. 2.05 WIRE COLOR CODING A. Contractor may use color coding at his discretion, except for the following colors, which shall be used only as designated below for both power and control circuits. 1. Control Circuits a. Dark Blue - Direct current circuits. b. Light Blue - Intrinsically safe conductors. c. Green - Grounding conductor. d. White - Neutral conductor. 2. Power Circuits (Use solid colors through Size No. 8 AWG. Use black conductors with tape color identification No. 6 AWG and laraer). Voltage 120/240 208Y/120 480Y/277 a. Phase A Black Black Brown b. Phase B Red Red Orange C. Phase C Blue Yellow d. Neutral White White Gray e. Ground Green Green Green 2.06 CONDUCTOR PULLING COMPOUND A. Rated for use with the conductor insulation and conduit material. LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2605 19 - 3 B. Non-conductive. C. Non -cementing. D. Dry to a fine lubricating powder or a thin film which does not harden in conduit. E. UL Listed. F. Rated for repeated exposure to high heat or freezing temperatures. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All wire shall be installed in the specified raceways. B. Wire pulling shall be performed through the system in such a manner as to not exceed the maximum tensile strength of the cable being pulled as allowed by the NFPA 70 and/or cable manufacturer. All handling and installation of wire and cables shall be done by competent and skilled workmen who shall use methods which will prevent damage to the wire and cable. C. Pulling compound shall be approved by the cable manufacturer. D. Adequate measures shall be employed to determine that the raceways are free of foreign material and moisture before pulling wire or cable. E. Any conductor used for equipment grounding purposes shall be green in color, unless it is bare. Conductors with white or green covering shall not be used to indicate other than neutral or grounding. This limitation applies to all power and control circuits. F. Conductors shall be without splice from termination to termination, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. G. Conductors for ac and do circuits shall be installed in separate conduits. H. All 4-20mA signal circuits shall be multi -conductor instrument cable. VFD motor power supply cable shall be installed in a manner to prevent RF noise radiation into the electrical system. Preventive measures shall be taken so that RF interference with other electrical and digital equipment is prevented or minimized. Refer to the plan sheets for detailed installation instructions. 3.02 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. All splices, taps, and terminations shall be made with tool compressed connectors. Contractor shall provide all wire connectors, lugs, and terminals, unless indicated otherwise. B. Bolted compression lugs furnished as an integral part of the equipment shall be used to terminate the conductors to that equipment. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 260519-4 C. Motor leads shall be connected with tool -compressed ring terminals which are bolted together, insulated with varnished cambric tape, and protected with an over -wrap electrical tape, or protected with an approved motor connection kit. 1. Electrical spring connectors maybe used to connect motor leads to #12 or #10 AWG branch circuit conductors. D. Electrical spring connectors shall be used for splices and taps in lighting and 120-volt receptacle circuits. E. All control wiring shall be terminated to terminal strips at both ends with fork terminals. Spare wires in control panels shall be terminated to spare terminals. Spare wires in motor control centers shall be coiled by respective conduit, labeled, and shall be long enough to reach the compartment furthest from conduit. F. Every bolt, lug, and screw termination shall be tightened with a torque wrench or torque screwdriver to the torque values specified in UL Standards and/or as specified by the device manufacturer. END OF SECTION LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 19 - 5 This Page Leff Blank Intentionally SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Grounding Electrode System. B. System and Equipment Grounding. C. Installation. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRE A. Class B stranded copper; either bare or with green insulation. B. Size shall be as specified herein and as indicated in the Contract Documents. 2.02 GROUND RODS A. Grounding Electrode System: 1. 5/8 inch by 10-feet copperweld. B. Luminare Concrete Bases: 1. 3/4 inch by 15-feet copperweld, unless noted otherwise. 2.03 WALL -MOUNTED GROUND BUSS BAR A. Copper plate. B. Manufacturer pre -drilled holes, minimum of 16. C. Wall mounting brackets with buss isolators. D. Buss bar shall be approved by Owner's voice/data service provider(s). Contractor shall coordinate equipment with the service provider and provide quantity of holes and accessory equipment as required by the service provider. E. Manufacturer: Hutton, Alltec, or equal. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 26 - 1 2.04 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATORS A. Tool -compressed connectors and lugs which are UL listed (UL-467). 1. Manufacturer: Burndy "Hyground", Thomas & Betts "Blackburn" Series, or equal. B. Bar taps for connection to bus bars which are UL listed (UL-467). 1. Manufacturer: Burndy, Thomas & Betts "Blackburn" Series, or equal. C. Exothermic welding components. 1. Manufacturer: Continental Industries "Thermoweld", Erico Products "Cadweld," or equal. D. Ground clamps shall be UL listed (UL-E10661) cast high strength corrosion resistant copper alloy. 1. Manufacturer: Burndy, Thomas & Betts "Blackburn" Series, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Power Company will provide grounding electrodes at the transformer and make the connections from the grounding electrode to the transformer neutral. B. The Power Company's transformer neutral shall be connected to the service entrance switchboard ground bus with the grounded (neutral) conductors provided with the service entrance phase conductors. C. Contractor shall provide a grounding electrode system as required per NFPA 70 and as indicated the Contract Documents. D. The grounding bushings on conduits entering distribution equipment, such as service entrance, shall be connected to the ground bus in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70. E. Raceways provided for groundinq electrode conductors shall be rigid nonmetallic. F. An equipment grounding conductor shall be installed with each circuit, included but not limited to feeder circuits, motor circuits, lighting circuits, and control circuits. Conductor shall be connected to the equipment ground bus or to the enclosure if there is no ground bus. G. The ground buss bar shall be connected directly to the grounding electrode system with a #6 AWG conductor. 1. A wall mounted ground buss bar shall be provided at the telephone service backboard. 2. A wall mounted ground buss bar shall be provided at the service entrance. 3. A wall mounted ground buss bui sl lull be provided in each data room. H. Separately derived systems shall be grounded in accordance with NFPA 70. GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 26 - 2 3.02 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS A. Flow meters shall be grounded in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. B. Contractor shall determine if there are any other special grounding requirements for equipment furnished on this Project and shall provide grounding as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.03 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. In general, splices and terminations of the grounding electrode system shall be brazed, shall be exothermic welded, or shall be made with tool -compressed fittings. B. Connections to bus bars or equipment enclosures shall be made with tool -compressed lugs which are bolted to the equipment or with bar taps. C. Connections to ground rods shall be exothermic welded. Provide adapter sleeves as required for #6 AWG conductors or smaller. D. Connections to copper water piping shall be made with ground clamps. END OF SECTION GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 26 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL K1 uul: A. Section Includes 1. Conduit. 2. Conduit fittings. 3. Conduit accessories 4. Underground warning tape. 5. Pull and junction boxes. 6. Fire stop material. 7. Handholes. 8. Conduit Identification. 9. Execution/Installation. B. Related Sections 1. Section 33 05 05 - Trenching and Backfilling. 2. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following items consistent with Section 01 33 00: 1. Product data sheets for each type of conduit. 2. If the Contractor elects to use HPDE conduit, provide the manufacturer's recommend procedures, instructions, materials and equipment for splicing/coupling the conduit. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 RIGID METAL CONDUIT A. Steel 1. Galvanized inside and outside. 2. NFPA 70, Article 344. 3. UL Listed. 2.02 RIGID METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Threaded couplings and fittings only; no set screw, gland type, or split fittings. B. Grounding type insulated bushings; O-Z/Gedney Type BLG, or equal. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 33 - 1 C. Insulated bushings; Midwest Electrical Mfg. Co., O-Z/Gedney Type B, or equal. D. Sealing locknuts; Midwest Electrical Mfg. Co., RACO, or equal. E. Expansion Fittings 1. 4-inches conduit movement. 2. External bonding jumper. F. Pull Fittings (C, LB, etc.): Clamp type, stamped covers with gaskets and stainless steel screws and clamps. G. Conduit Hubs 1. Full contact type with sealing "O" ring. 2. Myers "Scru-tite," or equal. H. Material: Fittings, hubs, etc. shall be galvanized steel for galvanized steel conduit and copper free aluminum for aluminum conduit. 2.03 CORROSION RESISTANT COATINGS: A. Pretreatment: 1. Carboline Carbocrylilc 120 (for both steel and aluminum conduit), or equal B. Coating: 1. Carboline Bitumastic 300M. 2. 3M Scotchrap Pipe Primer and wrapped with 3M Scotchrap Corrosion Protection Tape. 2.04 PVC -COATED RIGID STEEL CONDUIT A. Meet requirements of NEMA RN 1. B. Galvanized steel with bonded PVC coating. ._i_ _c ALIS! inn i ...� in i C. Meer requlrernel IIJ UI /11VJ1 1 OU. I and UL O. D. PVC Coating: 40 mils nominal thickness, bonded to metal. E. Manufacturers: Robroy Industries, Thomas & Betts-Ocal, or equal. 2.05 RIGID NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. EPC-40-PVC and EPC-80-PVC. B. Sunlight resistant. C. NEMA TC2. D. NFPA 70, Article 352. E. UL Listed. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-2 F. Manufacturer: Carlon, CertainTeed, or equal. 2.06 HIGH DENSITY POLYETHYLENE CONDUIT (HDPE) A. Meets requirements of NFPA70. B. Thermoplastic polymer material. C. Smooth interior and smooth exterior wall. D. UL listed. E. NEMA -TC-7. F. Manufacturer: Carlon or equal. 2.07 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Galvanized exterior. B. Corrosion resistant, lubricating interior coating. C. Galvanized or Zinc Plated Finish Steel Fittings 1. Set screw, concrete -tight type, except raintight/concrete-tight gland compression type in wet locations. 2. Insulated throat connectors. 3. Appleton, Midwest Electric, O-Z/Gedney, or equal. D. NFPA 70, Article 358. E. UL Listed. 2.08 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Galvanized steel core. B. Built-in continuous copper ground in 1/2-inch through 1-1 /4 inches. C. PVC jacket. D. NFPA 70, Article 350. E. UL listed. F. Manufacturer: Amer -Tice Type UL, Anamet Anaconda Sealtite Type U.A., Electri-Flex Liquatite Type L.A., or equal. G. Connectors 1. Grounding ferrule and insulated throat. 2. Manufacturer: Appleton STB, Crouse -Hinds LTB, Midwest Electric LTB, or equal. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-3 H. Grounding liquid tight connectors: 1. Grounding ferrule and insulated throat. 2. Ground lug cast as integral part of iron gland nut. 3. Manufacturer: Appleton, Efcor Brand, O-Z/Gedney, or equal. 2.09 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Aluminum or galvanized steel. B. NFPA 70, Article 348. C. UL listed. 2.10 COPPER MC (METAL CLAD) CABLE A. Cable shall be UL listed Type MC. B. Suitable for operation at 600 volts. C. Rated 90 degrees C. D. Conductors shall be THWN Stranded. E. Aluminum interlocked armor. F. Insulated ground. 2.11 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. 6-inches wide, 4-mil polyethylene film. B. Vivid, opaque, long-lasting red color with bold, black letters. �- I ++ .I ng �.. letteri 1. Top line - "...CAUTION CAUTION CAUTION..." 2. Bottom line - "...ELECTRIC LINE BURIED BELOW..." D. Seton Name Plate Corp. No. 210 ELE, EMED Co. Stock No. UT27737-6, or equal 2.12 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Covers attached with hinges and stainless steel screws located within 1/2-inch of each corner opposite the hinges and spaced not more than 12-inches apart. B. Neoprene gasketed covers. C. Sized per NFPA 70 with enough capacity to add to each side at least 2 conduits of the samo size as the largest conduit entering the box. D. Square cornered masonry type boxes, 2-1/2 inches minimum depth, shall be used for all flush switches and receptacles in glazed tile, face brick, and unfinished block walls. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 33 - 4 L E. Weatherproof die-cast aluminum boxes with threaded outlets for all surface mounted outlets; Bell (Raco), or approved equal. F. Galvanized fittings and boxes for EMT conduit. 2.13 FIRE RETARDANT MATERIAL A. Fire stop foam. B. Fire stop sealant. C. 3-hour fire rating. D. UL Classified per UL-1479. E. Chase Technology Corp., Dow Corning, General Electric, 3M, or equal. 2.14 DUCT SEALING COMPOUND A. Soft, fibrous, slightly tacky, non -hardening, and easily applied by hand at all working temperatures. B. Clean and non -staining. C. J.M. Clipper Corp. Duxseal, O-Z/Gedney DUX, or equal. 2.15 CONDUIT CLAMPS A. Conduit clamps for rigid metal conduit shall be malleable iron, 1-hole clamp with malleable iron clamp backs; Crouse -Hinds MW500 Series, Raco 1303/1324, Appleton CL75M/600M, or equal. 2.16 HANDHOLES A. Precast concrete box and cover or fiber reinforced polyester box and polymer concrete cover. 1. Covers and boxes design/test load rating (Ibs): a. 22,500/33,750 - ANSI Tier 22. B. Minimum of 2 stainless steel bolts to secure cover to the box. C. Sized as Required Per Code: 1. Minimum Size 13-inches wide, 24-inches long, and 36-inches deep. D. For fiber optic conduit runs, the word "FIBER" shall formed on the cover. E. Manufacturer: CDR Systems Corp., Quazite "Composite," or equal. 2.17 CONDUIT SEALS A. Conduit seals shall be provided wherever conduits penetrate exterior concrete walls below grade, or cross hazardous location boundaries 1. For conduits less than 60-inches below grade; OZ/Gedney Type FSK, or equal. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 260533-5 2. For conduits more than 60-inches below grade; OZ/Gedney Type WSK, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT INSTALLATION A. All raceways shall be installed in accordance with NECA 1, Standard Practices for Good Workmanship in Electrical Contracting, and as specified herein. B. Conduit size shall be as shown on the Drawings or as required by the NFPA 70 with a minimum size of 3/4-inch, except that 1/2-inch may be used to connect to devices which have a knock -out or fitting for only 1/2-inch conduit. C. Pull boxes or fittings shall be installed as Site and pulling requirements dictate. D. All raceways in the mechanical building shall be installed exposed. All exposed raceways in the mechanical building shall be rigid nonmetallic PVC conduit. E. All raceways in the concessions building shall be EMT, except where noted otherwise. 1. All raceways shall be installed concealed in walls, below floor slabs, or above suspended ceilings where possible, except where noted otherwise. 2. Raceways in Mechanical or electrical rooms may be exposed. F. All exposed conduit outdoors shall be rigid metal. G. Raceways shown on the Drawings to be installed under floor slabs shall be rigid nonmetallic as specified above. H. Conduits or groups of conduits shall run parallel to or perpendicular to building lines. Grouped conduits shall be supported at proper intervals with trapeze or bracket type hangers constructed of galvanized Unistrut, Power -Strut, or equal. All hangers, fasteners, nuts, etc. shall be galvanized steel or stainless steel. Support fasteners shall be preset inserts, beam clamps, expansion shields, or gun -driven studs. 1. Any conduit run which goes through an exterior building wall or between rooms of more than 30 degrees F difference in temperature shall be sealed internally with duct sealing compound at the point where they leave the room. 2. All penetrations thru fire rated walls shall be sealed according to NFPA 70, Article 300,21. Refer to Specification Section 07270 for materials and methods. J. No raceways, fittings, outlets, junction boxes, or pull boxes shall be attached to grating; they shall be connected to supports which are attached to structural members. K. All pull and outlet boxes shall be set plumb. Boxes for concealed wiring shall be flush with the finished surface. All boxes shall be UL listed for the location in which they are installed. L. Expansion fittings shall be installed at building expansion joints and where the length of straight run requires it. M. All conduits shall be kept dry and free of water or debris with pipe plugs or caps. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 33 - 6 N. Conduit and boxes shall not be attached to or suspended from equipment or mechanical ductwork. Where box or conduit must be mounted below ductwork, provide a structural channel support which is suspended from the ceiling or bracketed from a wall. Attachments to equipment shall be directly to the electrical devices associated with it. O. Conduit terminations to terminal boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall have double locknuts and insulated bushings. External locknuts shall be sealing locknuts. P. All conduits which enter major equipment, such as the service entrance switchboard and motor control centers, shall have grounding type insulating bushings. Q. Conduit terminations to outdoor or below ground NEMA 3R, 4, and 4X terminal boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall use full contact hubs. R. Flexible conduit connections shall be used to connect from conduit system to equipment and devices if a rigid connection is improper or impractical. l . Liquidtight flexible metal conduit shall be used for flexible connections where the conduit system is rigid metal conduit. 2. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for flexible connections where the conduit system is EMT. 3. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit 1-1 /2 inches and larger shall have an external bonding jumper sized in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Grounding liquidtight connectors may be used in lieu of the grounding clamp on the conduit. Underground conduit runs shall have a minimum cover of 2 feet, and shall be rigid nonmetallic conduit, unless noted otherwise. l . Conduit shall be sloped to drain to handholes or pull boxes. 2. Rigid metal conduit shall be used for the vertical elbow and riser out of the ground. 3. Rigid metal conduit installed underground or in contact with concrete shall have a corrosion resistant coating or covering. 4. HPDE conduit may be used for underground conduit runs longer than 50 feet. T. Contractor shall do all trenching for underground conduit with a minimum size trench. 3- inches of sand shall be placed below and above buried conduit in trench. All fill material shall be placed in 12-inch lifts and compacted to 90-Percent Standard Proctor Density. Underground warning tape shall be laid in the trench approximately 9-inches below the surface. 1. Excavating, backfilling, and grading shall comply with Division 31. U. A nylon pull cord shall be installed in each empty conduit. V. Only raceway types which are specified in this Section shall be used. W. The roadway, sidewalk, or grade beneath which conduit is routed shall be restored to its original or better condition. 1. Provide grading, soil, and seeding or sod to restore turf to original or better conditions. 2. Coordinate type of soil, seeding and/or sod with Owner to match existing. X. All splices performed on the HDPE conduit shall use equipment and procedures recommended by the manufacturer and which meet NFPA 70. RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 33 - 7 3.02 COPPER MC (METAL CLAD) CABLE A. Copper MC (Metal Clad) Cable shall be allowed as follows: 1. Fixture whips. 2. Receptacle wiring in walls. All ceiling wiring shall be in a rigid conduit system. Copper MC (Metal Clad) Cable may be used to feed isolated ground type receptacles by the following means: 1. Hospital Grade MC cable that contains 2 grounding conductors in it. 1 bare conductor shall be used for the equipment ground and the second conductor shall be an insulated conductor used for the isolated ground. 2. Provide a 3 conductor MC cable and strip the red conductor as for back as possible to be used for the equipment ground. The green insulated conductor shall be used for the isolated ground. 3.03 OPENINGS A. Contractor shall review the size and location of all openings to be sure they meet the requirements of the equipment that is furnished and/or installed as a part of this Contract. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all required openings necessary for a complete installation. All required openings are not shnwn on the Drnwings. B. All openings shall be filled with an approved sealant, caulking, or grout after the conduit or cable installation is complete. 3.04 HANDHOLE INSTALLATION A. All handholes shall have a drain opening in bottom. Excavating for handholes shall be dug at least 24-inches deeper than the depth of the bottom of the handhole and the area below the handhole shall be filled with pea gravel. B. Handhole covers shall be bolted in place when Work is complete. CNU vF aE ►iIUN RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 05 33 - 8 SECTION 26 08 00 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. All equipment checks, adjustments, tests, and system energization shall be performed as specified below. If any test specified will void the warranty of any equipment to be tested, the Engineer shall be notified and further instructions received before proceeding with the test. 2. The following items shall be tested a. Grounding system resistance. b. Receptacle outlets. c. Control circuits and systems. 3. When the Work is complete, a final inspection will be made and the Contractor shall demonstrate that all equipment and systems conform to the Drawings and Specifications. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF PERSONNEL A. All personnel responsible for testing and commissioning equipment as a part of this Project shall be specially trained for the tasks they are to perform. B. Personnel operating test equipment shall have had previous training and experience in using the equipment and shall be thoroughly familiar with the equipment capabilities and limitations. C. All tests shall be made by or under the direct supervision of service personnel who are factory -trained in the application and operation of the device being tested. D. Evidence of the experience of test personnel in the form of certificates of training or other acceptable documentation shall be made available upon request of the Engineer. E. The Engineer reserves the right to require the Contractor to provide different test personnel if those performing the tests do not demonstrate competency in their work. 1.04 SCHEDULING AND REPORTING A. All tests shall be scheduled 48 hours in advance with the Engineer and shall be conducted in his presence or the presence of his representative. Test results shall be tabulated neatly and legibly on the test forms, which are included at the end of this Section and which are available from the Engineer. Any other report forms shall be submitted for approval at COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 08 00 - 1 least 4 weeks before tests are made. Test reports shall include the pertinent readings or observations, a description of the method used, and a list of the equipment employed. If the materials or equipment fail under test, the test reports shall include the following: l . Pertinent readings or observations made up to the point of failure. 2. Any abnormal readings. 3. Any data which might indicate the cause of failure. 4. The cause of the failure, if determined. 5. Corrective measures taken. C. In all cases of test failure, the Contractor shall demonstrate that the corrective measures proposed are adequate before making any repairs, adjustments, or replacements. D. 6 copies of all test reports shall be submitted to the Engineer within 24 hours after completion of the test. In addition, 1 complete set of test reports shall be included in each Operation and Maintenance Manual. 1.05 TESTING EQUIPMENT A. Testing equipment used for a given test shall be recommended by the manufacturer for that particular test and shall be approved by the Engineer. B. Ground resistance measurements shall be made with a 3 terminal, null balance instrument that has an accuracy of +/- 2 percent of full scale reading of selected range, and which providos dircct reading down to 0.5 ohm; AEMC Model 3640, AVO (Megger) Catalog No. DET62D, or approved equal. Approved Alternates are the AEMC Model 3711 and the AMPROBE Catalog No. AMPDGC1000 clamp -on ground testers. C. Voltage and current measurements shall be made with a true RMS instrument, which has an accuracy of ± 1 percent of full scale. Scale shall be selected so that the reading is not less than one-half scale. D. All test equipment shall be provided by the Contractor. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. All equipment shall be given a thorough visual inspection by the installer to detect insofar as possible any loose or erroneous connections, damaged components, the presence of foreign objects or materials, poor workmanship, incorrect rating of protective devices, or other abnormal conditions. B. Every bolted or screwed connection or terminal with a torque rating shall have a torque wrench or torque screwdriver applied to assure tightness before any equipmcnt is energized. This shall apply to both factory made an field made connections and terminations. Any problem or damage resulting from a faulty connection or termination shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 08 00 - 2 C. Covers shall be installed on all pull boxes, junction boxes, and raceway fittings before the final inspection. 3.02 GROUND RESISTANCE MEASUREMENTS A. The resistance of each ground rod shall be measured' with a 3 terminal connection. Another measurement shall be made after all ground connections are made. 3.03 RECEPTACLE TESTS A. After the system is energized, each receptacle shall be checked with a receptacle tester to verify proper connection of the hot, neutral, and grounding conductors. 3.04 COMMISSIONING A. Contractor shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Engineer that all control and alarm systems are functioning as specified. This shall include but is not limited to motor control circuits, heating controls, and alarms. Contractor shall make all adjustments necessary to obtain the proper operation of the specified systems. END OF SECTION COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 08 00 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally GROUND RESISTANCE TEST REPORT Project: Project Number: Date: I J Q rV LU z LU Contractor: Inspector: Tested By: O Equipment Name: Location: Manufactured By: Serial Number: Auxiliary Device: Manufacture Check: Test Method _3-Terminal Connection Other (Specify) Potential Electrode Current Electrode z w M Type: Type: Distance: Distance: Measured Resistance Ohms: Manufacturer: Type: w w V) Acceptance Criteria (Spec. Standard) V) I Q w This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 26 22 00 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Lighting transformers. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data sheets, complete descriptive materials, and dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL PURPOSE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS A. Indoor dry type for wall mounting. B. 480 volts, 60 Hz, 3 phase or single phase primary as required with a minimum of four 2-1/2 degree fully rated taps; 2 above and 2 below normal. C. Secondary voltage and kVA rating as noted on the Drawings. D. 220 degrees C insulation system, 115 degrees C rise under full load. E. Comply with Federal Register as 10 CFR Part 431 "Energy Conservation Program: Energy Conservation Standards for Distribution Transformers. LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 22 00 - 1 Three-1ihase transformer efficiencies shall be equal or greater than the following kVA Minimum Required Efficiency% 15 97.89 30 98.23 45 98.40 75 98.60 112.5 98.740 150 98.83 225 98.94 300 99.02 500 99.14 750 99.23 1000 99.28 f G. Manufar_turer: Acme, Ci jtler-HnmmPr, Genernl FIPc-tri(-., Square D, Sold/Hevi-Duty, Powersmiths or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Transformers shall be installed where shown on the Drawings. B. Contractor shall provide all supporting channel, fasteners, anchors, and connectors required for installation. All fasteners, anchors, and mounting hardware shall be galvanized steel. All supporting channels shall be aluminum or galvanized steel. END OF SECTION LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 22 00 - 2 SECTION 26 24 13 SWITCHBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes l . Equipment Ratings. 2. Meter Socket. 3. Current Transformer Enclosure. 4. Installation. 5. Testing and Commissioning. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Data sheets shall be submitted which describe the meter socket and current transformer enclosure, give electrical ratings, and give dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT RATINGS (APPLICABLE TO ALL PRODUCTS SPECIFIED HEREIN, UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE) A. Voltage: 480Y/277 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 Hz. B. Amperage:400amp. C. Fault Current Available: 42,000 amps, RMS symmetrical fault at rated voltage. 2.02 METER SOCKET A. Power Company approved meter socket. 2.03 CURRENT TRANSFORMER ENCLOSURE A. NEMA 3R enclosure constructed of 14-gauge steel. B. Hinged door with hasp and meter seal provisions. C. Dimensions which comply with NFPA 70 and Power Company requirements. D. ANSI 61 gray polyester powder coating finish inside and outside over phosphatized surfaces. SWITCHBOARDS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 24 13 - 1 E. Copper landing pads as required to mount Power Company's current transformers to terminate a single service entrance cable per phase and to terminate 3 cables per phase on the load side sized as shown on the Drawings. F. Neutral bar for service entrance cables, grounding electrode conductor, and load cables. G. American Midwest Power, Inc., Electro-Mechanical Industries, Inc., States Electric Mfg. Co., or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install service entrance equipment as shown on the Drawings. B. The neutral leads from the service transformer shall be connected to the service entrance panel ground bus. C. Enclosures shall be secured with stainless steel hardware. 3.02 COORDINATION OF WORK WITH THE UTILITY A. The power company serving this Project is Xcel Energy. B. Power company will be responsible for the following: 1. Furnishing and installing the primary conductors and related primary equipment. 2. Furnishing and installing a utility transformer. 3. Termination of underground primary cables. 4. Termination of secondary conductors at the transformer. 5. Furnish and Install a utility transformer concrete pad. C. Contractor will be responsible for the following: 1. Make all arrangements with the power company for obtaining electrical service, obtaining and complcting all forms required by the utility, and furnish all labor and materiUi reyuirea I or rna eiac:irrc:ui service wr uc11 1 his uiwiy uoeS ilvi Nrv'viuc. 2. Verifying locations of power company equipment with the power company. 3. Furnish secondary conduits and cables. 4. Furnish and install conduits as shown on the Drawings for primary cables and coordinate installation of cable with the utility. 5. Furnish and install a current transformer enclosure. 6. Furnish and install a power company approved metering enclosures. 7. Terminating all secondary conductors at the service entrance equipment. 8. Terminating and providing conductors required for the metering cabinet. 9. Installing equipment which is supplied but not installed by the power company. D. Contractor shall obtain and complete all forms to apply for all applicable equipment rebates available from the power company serving the project. E. The cost or the wo1k it, wlriclr the power company provides shall not be included in the Bid Price. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SWITCHBOARDS 262413-2 SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Panelboards. 2. Installation. 3. Identification. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Data sheets shall be submitted which describe the panelboards, give electrical ratings, give dimensions, and list the breakers. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PANELBOARDS A. Hardware 1. Surface or flush mounted as indicated on the Drawings. 2. Door in door front, complete with trim, doors, flush chrome plated cylinder lock, catch, and directory with clear plastic cover. 3. 2 keys. 4. Copper bus which includes all current carrying parts such as phase buses, ground and neutral buses/bars, bus fingers, etc. 5. All spaces indicated shall have bus fully extended and drilled for the future installation of breakers. 6. Gray baked enamel finish. 7. Trim attached directly to the box with screws; trim clamps shall not be used. Ratings l . Panelboard rating, main breaker, and branch breakers as specified on the Drawings. Branch mounted main breakers shall not be allowed. 2. Service entrance ratings as required. 3. Thermal -magnetic, quick make, quick -break, switching rated plug on circuit breakers. 4. Circuit breaker rating and number of poles as specified on the Drawings. 5. Multi -pole breakers with a common trip. 6. Handle padlock attachments where required. 7. Ampere Interrupting Ratings: 42,000 RMS symmetrical for 277 or 480 volt breakers, 22,000 RMS symmetrical for 240 volts or under. PANELBOARDS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 24 16 - 1 C. Surge Protection Device (SPD) 1. LED status indication of individual phases. 2. Direct bus bar connection. 3. Maximum continuous operating voltage shall be 115 percent of nominal system operating voltage. 4. UL-1449 Suppressed Voltage Rating a. 800 volts for 480Y/277-volt panelboards. b. 400 volts for 208Y/ I 20-volt panelboards. 5. Protection modes shall be L-L, L-N, L-G, N-G. 6. Minimum rated surge current capacity a. 160kA per phase, 80kA per mode for 480Y/277-volt panelboards. b. 80kA per phase, 40kA per mode for 208Y/120-volt panelboards. 7. 10 year replacement warranty minimum. 8. UL-1449, third edition. 9. SPD shall be same manufacturer as panelboard. D. Manufacturer: Cutler -Hammer, Square D, Siemens, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Panelboards shall be located where shown on the Drawings with the top approximately 6 feet above the floor. Box shall be set plumb. Breaker assemblies shall be set plumb and in continuous contact with the panel trim piece. B. Panelboard schedule designations are as follows: 1.. Blank: Not intended for use. 2. Space: Contains necessary bus and hardware for future addition of breakers. 3. Spare: Contains a complete breaker installed, size as shown on schedule. C. Provide Surge Protection Device integral to panelboard where noted on the schedules. D, Provide HACR, GFCI and AFCI rated breakers which meet the requirements of NFPA 70 n h.aWhere noted on the paieIboa.d chiIes . 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. All panelboards shall be identified with laminated plastic name plates which have 1 /2 inch high white letters on a black background. Nameplates shall be attached with screws. B. Circuit directory shall be neatly machine typed with the number of the circuit, description of the circuit, the area served, and the size of the protective device. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference at any panelboard between phases exceed 10 percent, rearrange circuits in the panolboard to balance the phase loads within 10 percent. Take care to maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. PANELBOARDS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2624 16 - 2 B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. END OF SECTION PANELBOARDS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 24 16 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally. SECTION 26 24 19 MOTOR CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Variable frequency drives. 2. Wall mounted starters. 3. Manual motor starters. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Product data sheets with a bill of material. 2. Dimension sheets with weights. 3. NEMA Class I B wiring diagram for each starter/drive. 4. System description. 5. Parts lists. 6. Local sources of service and supply. B. Spare Parts: List of recommended spare parts with unit prices shall be submitted with shop drawings. C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Shall meet the requirements of Division 01. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall verify that the equipment being furnished can be installed in the available space. If available space is not adequate for the proposed equipment, Contractor shall notify the Engineer before releasing the equipment for manufacturing. Contractor shall be responsible for correcting equipment spacing conflicts which were not identified and coordinated with Engineer prior to releasing the equipment for manufacturing. 1.05 SERVICE AND REPLACEMENT PARTS A. Manufacturers of the variable frequency drives shall have factory -trained service personnel, test equipment, and a distributor which stocks replacement parts all located within the Minneapolis -St. Paul metropolitan area. MOTOR CONTROL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2624 19 - 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES A. Application 1. Variable torque load. B. Power Source 1. Electric utility. 2. Potential: 480 volts plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Frequency: 60 Hz plus or minus 2 Hz. 4. Type: 3 phase, 3 wire. C. Output 1. Pulse width modulated (PWM) voltage waveform. (Third generation IGBT power electronics). 2. Potential: 480 volts maxirrlurrl al 60 HL. 3. Frequency: 0.1 to 60 Hz. D. Equipment Requirements 1. NEMA 1, wall mount, cnnstrl_lctinn Pnnlnsi ire. 2. UL listed. 3. Main disconnect with handle position that indicates ON, OFF, and TRIPPED condition. The handle shall have provisions for padlocking. 4. Fast -acting, semi -conductor power line input fuses. 5. 3-percent input reactance. 6. All cooling fans shall be thermostatically controlled including fans integral to VFD and enclosure cooling fans if applicable. 7. Manual speed adjustment potentiometer. 8. Dry contact outputs for "Run" and "Fail" indication. 9. Operator interface with alpha -numeric LCD or LED display and keypad. Interface shall allow the operator to view all operating parameters, including but not limited to output voltage, current, power, and frequency. Interface shall also allow the operator to adjust all application, protection, programming, and curitral purarrielers. Operalo interface shall be mounted on front door. 10. Over-voltaae and under -voltage protection. 11. Loss of phase and phase reversal protection. 12. AC line transient protection to meet ANSI C62.41 (MOV or LC Filter). 13. Over -current protection. 14. Over -temperature protection. 15. Adjustable electronic overload protection. 16. Microprocessor fault protection. 17. Ground fault protection. 18. Adjustable voltage boost. 19. Phase -to -phase short circuit protection at 460 volts plus 10 percent. 20. Integrated equipment fault current rating shall be 42,000 amp. RMS symmetrical. 21. Independent low and high speed limit adjustments. 22. Acceleration and deceleration rates Independently adjustable: Up 10 1,000 sec:ur ids. 23. Adjuslable carrier frequency. 24. Stop Mode: Ramp to stop. 25. Field programmable "Critical Frequency Avoidance" (minimum of 3 bands). © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MOTOR CONTROL 262419-2 26. Field programmable "Preset Speeds" (minimum of 3). 27. Relays to interface with controls as specified herein. 28. Storage Temperature: -4 degrees F to 150 degrees F. 29. Operating Ambient Temperature: 32 degrees F to 104 degrees F. 30. Altitude: Less than 3,300 feet. 31. Maximum Relative Humidity: 95-percent non -condensing. 32. Low voltage controls isolated from high voltage components. 33. Automatic restart after power interruption. 34. The drive panel shall include a drive isolation contactor, a drive output contactor and a drive bypass starter with motor overload relays where shown on the drawings. The output and bypass contactors shall be mechanically/electrically interlocked to prevent operating at the same time. The drive isolation contactor shall allow for removal of line power to the drive while running the motor with line voltage. a. Overload relays shall be solid state overloads with the following features: 1) Self -Powered. 2) Minimum of 2:1 adjustment range. 3) Phase loss protection. 4) Class 20 protection. E. Performance Requirements l . Rated Continuous Current: a. 100 percent of motor nameplate current for VFDs with 3 phase input and 3 phase output. 2. Overload Current Capability: a. 110 percent of rated current for 1 minute for variable torque loads where VFD has 3 phase input and 3 phase output. 3. Current Limit. 4. Frequency Stability: Plus or minus 0.6 Hz. 5. Speed Regulation: 3 percent from no load to full load. 6. Control Power Ride -Through: 50 milliseconds. 7. Minimum Efficiency: 97 percent at 100 percent speed and rated load. 8. Minimum Apparent Power Factor: 95 percent. 9. Speed Control a. Manual via speed potentiometer when local H-O-A switch is in the "Hand" position. F. A complete set of spare air filters for each variable frequency drive. G. Variable Torque Variable Frequency Drives shall be Allen-Bradley Power Flex 753, ABB ACH550, ABB ACQ-550, Cutler -Hammer SVX9000, Square D ATV630, or Danfoss FC202. H. Harmonic Distortion 1. Drives shall be designed to limit the harmonic currents which are generated on the AC service and which would produce electromagnetic interference (EMI) or radio frequency interference (RFI). Individual current harmonic distortion and the total demand distortion expressed as percent of maximum demand load current shall not exceed the values specified in IEEE 519 - Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electric Power Systems, Table 10.3. 2. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) shall not exceed 5 percent, and individual voltage harmonic distortion shall not exceed 3 percent per IEEE 519. MOTOR CONTROL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 24 19 - 3 3. If the drives generate objectionable interference, EMI or RFI drive manufacturer shall provide the specifications for the equipment required to reduce it to acceptable levels. The VFD supplier shall have in possession filters to alleviate interference if encountered. 4. The Owner will provide the equipment specified to correct the problem through a direct purchase or a Change Order to the Contract. 2.02 WALL MOUNTED MAGNETIC STARTERS A. Full voltage, non -reversing. B. Combination type with non -fusible disconnect switch. C. Suitable for use on for operation on 480 volt, 3-phase system or 208 Volt, 3-phase systems as shown on the Drawings. D. 120 volt control from control power transformer which has 50-volt ampere extra capacity, 2 primary fuses, and u single secondary fuse. E. Overload relays shall be solid state overloads with the following features: 1. Self -Powered. ?. Minimilm of?: I ndjclstment range. 3. Phase loss protection. 4. Class 20 protection. F. NEMA horsepower rating as required for the motor served. G. Heavy duty, oil tight, starter -mounted pushbuttons, selector switches, and indicating lights as shown on the Drawings 1. Devices shall be 30 mm. 2. Key -operated selector switches shall be keyed alike. Contact blocks shall be NEMA A600. 3. Lights shall be push -to -test transformer type. Color of lens and type of light (LED or incandescent) shall match lens/light type designated in the contra,l system spec iilcatfons. H. Auxiliary contacts as required for the specified control scheme. I. Auxiliary relays for the specified control scheme. J. NEMA 1 enclosure. K. UL listed. L. Allen-Bradley, Cutler -Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, Square-D, or equal. 2.03 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS A. Manual starters shall be provided to control and protect 120 volt, single phase motors. They are identified on the Drawings as "M." © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MOTOR CONTROL 262419-4 Starters shall be 120-volt, single pole with overload heater sized for the motor nameplate current; General Electric CR 101 Y, Cutler -Hammer MS, Square D FG5, or equal. Starter shall be mounted in a 2-gang FD box with single gang openings. Starter shall be mounted on 1 side with a cast ON -OFF operator cover, Appleton FSK-1 VS, Crouse -Hinds DS199, or equal; and other side shall have a pilot light, cast cover and green jewel, Appleton FSK-1 J- C, or equal, or a receptacle outlet as specified in these Specifications or as indicated on the Drawings. Starter shall be identified with an engraved phenolic nameplate. C. Manual motor starters in corrosive areas shall have non-metallic enclosure, toggle lever operator, and threaded hubs; Crouse Hinds NFSC2, or equal. 2.04 SPARE PARTS A. Spare fuses equal to 10 percent of those installed in all starters and VFDs but not less than 2 of each type used. B. All of the above spare parts shall be delivered to the Owner: 1. Parts shall be appropriately packed and labeled for storage in 1 box. 2. Each component shall be labeled to clearly identify the component and control panel which it is to be used. 3. Box's label shall identify all the part(s) and shall be labeled with the project name. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Equipment shall be installed where shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall verify that the space allocated in the facility is adequate for the equipment which is furnished. Manual motor starters shall be mounted near the equipment they serve where shown on the Drawings. C. Where motor overload protection is provided by the equipment supplier, specification grade, horsepower -rated toggle switches may be used instead of manual motor starters. 3.02 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE INSTALLATION A. Variable Frequency Drive(s) (VFD) shall be installed where shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall verify that the space allocated in the facility is adequate for the equipment furnished. B. The conduits containing feeders to and from the VFDs shall be run perpendicular to other conduits wherever possible. VFD conduits shall be separate from 1. Other conduits. 2. Sensitive equipment/instrumentation such as flow meters, well level monitor, etc. 3. Supervisory control equipment. 3.03 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE FIELD SERVICE A. An authorized service person of the variable frequency drive manufacturer shall check the units for correct installation and field connections, and shall make the preliminary settings of devices before the equipment is energized. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MOTOR CONTROL 262419-5 B. After the drives have been energized, devices shall be calibrated, final settings shall be made, and fine tuning shall be done in cooperation with the personnel servicing the supervisory control systems equipment. C. After the system is operating as specified, the service person shall instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation, maintenance, and trouble -shooting of the drives. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided prior to training. Quantity of manuals shall be as designated in Division 01 Sections. 3.04 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE TESTING A. Each drive shall be operated at rated load. Duration of the load test shall be as directed by the Engineer and as determined by the operating conditions of the installation. B. Motor current, motor speed, system pressure, electrical service voltage, and motor voltage shall be recorded during the load test. See LOAD TEST REPORT form included at the end of this Section. 3.05 OVERLOAD PROTECTION A. Before any motor is energized, Contractor shall obtain the nameplate information from the motor supplier. Nameplate current of all motors shall be recorded on the Drawings. B. Overload relays shall be checked for correct class and setting in accordance with motor manufacturer's recommendations. Class 10 overload relays shall be provided, unless motor manufacturer specifies otherwise. C. Motor overload settings shall be in accordance with the starter manufacturer's recommendation for the given motor nameplate current, service factor and power factor correction capacitors, if provided. Contractor shall be responsible for all damage that results from improper overload protection. D. Settings of adjustable trip circuit breakers and overload relays shall be adjusted to provide proper protection actual equipment fed by the associated starter. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MOTOR CONTROL 262419-6 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE - LOAD TEST REPORT PROJECT LOCATION: PROJECT NUMBER: CONTRACTOR: REPRESENTED BY: ENGINEER/BONESTROO REP: PUMP DATA: DATE: RATED HP: VOLTAGE/PHASE: RATED FLA: MOTOR CURRENT AT FULL LOAD: MOTOR SPEED AT FULL RATED LOAD: MOTOR CURRENT AT CHECK VALVE OPENING: MOTOR SPEED AT CHECK VALVE OPENING: POWER DATA: ELECTRICAL SERVICE VOLTAGE AT TEST: PHASE A: PHASE B: PHASE C: MOTOR VOLTAGE: PHASE A: PHASE B: PHASE C: END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 MOTOR CONTROL 262419-7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Switches. 2. Convenience receptacles. 3. Wall plates. 4. Outlet boxes. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 QUALITY A. All wiring devices shall be products of the same manufacturer, unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product data sheets shall be submitted for all materials specified herein. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES A. Switches: 1. Heavy-duty, specification grade. 2. Quiet, toggle type. 3. Side and back wired. 4. Rated 20 amperes under all loads, 1 HP at 120 volts, 2 HP at 240 volts. 5. Gray color. 6. Single -pole, 2-pole, 3-way and/or 4-way as shown on the Drawings. 7. Manufacturer: Eagle 2221 Series, General Electric GE 5930 Series, Hubbell 1220 Series, Leviton 1200 Series, Pass & Seymour 20 AC Series, or equal. 2.02 CONVENIENCE RECEPTACLES A. Duplex Receptacles 1. Specification grade, 3-wire grounding type, NEMA 5-20R. 2. Side wired. 3. Rated 20 amperes, 125 volts. 4. Gray color. 5. Manufacturer: Eagle 5362, Hubbell 5362, Leviton 5362, or equal. WIRING DEVICES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 27 26 - 1 B. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles l . Specification grade, 3-wire grounding type, NEMA 5-20R. 2. Side wired. 3. Rated 20 amperes, 125 volts. 4. Gray color. 5. Manufacturer: Eagle 9569, Hubbell GF-5362, Leviton 7899, or equal. C. Weather Resistant Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles 1. Specification grade, 3-wire grounding type, NEMA 5-20R. 2. Weather Resistant 3. Side wired. 4. Rated 20 amperes, 125 volts. 5. Gray color. 6. Manufacturer: Eagle, Hubbell, Leviton, or equal. 2.03 WALL PLATES A. All flush rrlounled swilches cane iec:epluc:les skull be pluvided with brushed stainless steel color wall plates 1. Manufacturer: Eagle, Hubbell, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, or equal. B. Surfnce mounted Switches in cnst nk iminl lm hoxes shall have stainless steel coverplates with dimensions which match the box dimensions 1. Manufacturer: "Sierra," or equal. C. Weatherproof covers for switches shall be weatherproof gray cast aluminum lift cover plates 1. Manufacturer: Hubbell 7420, or equal. D. Weatherproof covers for receptacles shall be hinged, Specification grade, weather proof while in use, cast aluminum, UL listed, gray, completely gasketed 1. Manufacturer: TayMac, Red Dot, or equal. E. Wall plates for switches or manual startors which serve exhaust fans shall be engraved "EXHAUSI FAIV Wllfl I/0IfIC:f1111CJ.fI1JIUC:KICIICIJ. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Switches and convenience outlets shall be provided where shown on the Drawings. B. Switches shall be on the latch side of doors, located 4-feet above floor, unless noted otherwise. Note: Door swing shall be verified with door installer before installing switch outlet boxes. C. Indicating lights shall be provided with switches where shown on the Drawings and manual motor starters. Switches or manual starters with indicating lights shall be installed in 2 gang or multiple gang boxes with 2 gang or multiple gang wall plates. D. Receptacle outlets in finished area shall be mounted 18 inches above floor, unless noted otherwise. 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 WIRING DEVICES 262726-2 E. Interior surface mounted receptacles shall be mounted at 2-feet above floor level, unless noted otherwise. F. Exterior receptacles shall be mounted at 2-feet above grade level, unless noted otherwise. G. Flush wall receptacles installed above counters or work tables shall be mounted with long dimension parallel to the floor. Contractor shall verify countertop heights before installing boxes for convenience receptacles. H. All receptacle outlets shall be grounded to a separate grounding conductor that has green insulation. All switches, convenience receptacles, telephone outlets, manual starters, etc. in the finished areas shall be flush mounted. Flush boxes shall fit flush with the final finished wall in every case. Install metal box extenders and bond to the box where necessary. J. All boxes shall be plumb. K. All receptacles on a GFCI breaker shall be identified with laminated plastic nameplates which read: "GFCI PROTECTED." Letters shall be 1 /4 inch high white on a red background. Feed through type GFCI receptacles which feed non-GFCI type receptacles where shown as GFCI type receptacles on the Drawing are not allowed. L. Where indicated on the Drawings as WP, switches and receptacles shall have weatherproof cover plates. M. Where indicated on the Drawings as WP, receptacles shall be weather resistant type. N. Wall mounted thermostats shall be mounted 4 feet above the floor. O. Label inside of all receptacle wall plates with panel and circuit number from which they are fed. Labeling shall be with permanent marker. END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 27 26 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 26 28 19 DISCONNECTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Local disconnects. 2. Corrosion inhibitors. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Data sheets which describe the switches, give electrical ratings, and give dimensions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LOCAL DISCONNECTS A. UL listed, heavy duty, 600 volts, 3-pole safety switches. B. Fusible or non -fusible as identified in the Contract Documents. C. Ampere and horsepower rating required for the connected load. D. Quick -make, quick -break operating mechanism. E. Provisions for padlocking in the open and closed positions. F. NEMA 1 enclosure for indoor switches. G. NEMA 3R enclosure for outdoor switches. H. Include an auxiliary control contact when used on the load side of a VFD. 1. Auxiliary control contact shall be wired to the VFD. 2. Auxiliary control contact shall disable the VFD when the disconnect is open. I. Each fusible switches shall have 2 sets of fuses. J. Manufacturer: Cutler Hammer, General Electric, Siemens, Square D, or equal. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 DISCONNECTS 262819-1 2.02 CORROSION INHIBITOR A. Vapor phase corrosion inhibitor: 1. Provide 1 year of protection for the enclosure in which it is installed. 2. Manufacturer: Crouse -Hinds CID 101, Hoffman A-HCI, Zerust VC2, or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Disconnect switches shall be installed in a readily accessible location where indicated on the Drawings. Centerline of the switch shall be mounted 4 feet above the ground. B. Each switch shall be identified with a laminated plastic nameplate. C. All disconnect switches mounted outside shall contain a corrosion inhibitor device. D. Disconnects for single-phase motors shall be manual motor starters or manual motor starting switches specified in Section 26 24 19. END OF SECTION DISCONNECTS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 2628 19 - 2 SECTION 26 50 00 LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Luminaires. 2. Lamps. 3. Control devices. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals as specified in Division 1, Division 26 and as specified herein. 1. Product cut sheets with specified features highlighted for each luminaire. 2. Shop drawings shall include manufacturer's specification sheets with photographic depiction of all system components. Specification and descriptive data to include dimension, weight, appearance, connection provisions, materials, metal gauges and operating specification, characteristics, features and controls. Where specification sheets include more than one model or device the Contractor shall provide clear indication which model or device is included. 3. All information included in submittals to show conformance with the Contract Documents shall be highlighted or otherwise identified on each individual sheet of the shop drawings. 4. Provide a complete proposed system description. 5. Provide single line riser diagram and floor plan depicting location of every device in the proposed system. 6. Provide diagram(s) depicting equipment mounting racks and the location of all equipment and devices to be mounted therein. 7. Provide diagram(s) depicting wall mounted equipment including the associated cable routing and power requirements. 8. Contractor shall provide equipment panel elevations for each panel or panel group. Elevations to indicate component layouts, cable routing and terminal blocks. 9. Contractor shall provide complete engineering drawings of all custom made components indicating all materials, gauges, dimensions, finishes and wiring diagrams. B. Shop drawings which are submitted incomplete will be returned to Contractor without review. C. Review of shop drawings does not vacate responsibility of Contractor to provide a functioning system meeting the Owner's requirements. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 LIGHTING 26 50 00 - 1 1.04 DESIGN CRITERIA A. Wireless control systems will not be allowed. All controls, modules, switches, etc. shall be hardwired. B. Multiple lighting control zones in a shared space are identified in the Contract Documents with the use of switch designations. C. Where switching circuit designations are not identified in the Contract Documents, the area lighting system shall be controlled by the device(s) shown in the space. D. Contractor shall provide all equipment and programing required to perform the lighting control as described in the Contract Documents. 1.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS A. The following sequence of operations corresponds with the lighting control schedule found in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall provide a lighting control system consisting of low voltage controls, luminaires, control panel(s) and other equipment required to perform the specified operations. Occupancy Detection: 1. When an occupant enters the space, an occupancy sensor will automatically turn the lighting on. If an occupant is not detected after a preset time delay the lighting control system shall turn the lights off. A manual push button shall be provided on the wall mounted occupancy sensor to allow the occupant to manually turn the lights on in the event the sensor does not sense occupancy. Where noted in the control schedule, pressing the button will turn the lights off if the lights are already on. 2. Time delay off shall be initially set at 30 minutes, unless noted otherwise. 3. Time delay off in janitor closets shall be initially set to 2 minutes. 4. Time delay off in storage closets shall be initially set to 5 minutes. 5. Time- delay -off -in-Admin-Workroom-Rm-104-shall-be-initially set -to-60-minutes.---- - -- -- C. Manual Control and Occupancy Detection: 1. The occupant will use a switch/button on the wall mount occupancy sensor to turn the lighting on for the associated space. The occupancy sensor(s) in the space will turn the lighting off if an occupant is not detected after a preset time delay. 2. Occupant may turn the lighting off before the occupancy sensor time delay off expires by using the same switch/button used to turn on the lights. 3. Time delay off shall be initially set at 30 minutes, unless noted otherwise. D. Time of Day and Occupancy Detection: l . Lighting control system shall automatically turn the lights on to 100% during scheduled facility operating hours. 2. At the end of the scheduled building operating hours the lighting system shall be controlled by the local occupancy sensors. 3. During non-opercalincd hours when un occupant enters the space, an occupancy sensor shall automatically turn the lighting on. If occupancy is sensed after scheduled operating hours and an occupant is not detected after a preset time delay the lighting control system shall turn the lights off. a. Time delay off shall be initially set at 30 minutes, unless noted otherwise. LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 2 E. Line Voltage Switching: 1. A line voltage switch is to be provided to allow manual on/off control of the lighting circuit. 2. Control of the lighting shall be independent of the lighting control system controls. F. Exterior Photocontrol & Time of Day: l . Luminaires shall be controlled by a combination of outdoor light level and time of day. The following shall occur in the order described below: 2. When exterior light levels drop to a pre-programmed set point the luminaires shall turn on. 3. At a preprogrammed time of day (night), the luminaires shall turn off. 4. At a preprogrammed time of day (night), the luminaires shall turn back on. 5. As the daylight levels rise to a pre-programmed set point, the luminaires shall turn off. 1.06 COMMON CONTROL REQUIREMENTS: A. The Owner shall provide the system programmer the desired hours of operation for the facility. B. Where multiple occupancy sensors are used to for control in a common control zone, activity sensed by any sensor shall reset the off time delay. C. In zones where an occupancy sensor and manual push button is provided, the time delay off for the occupancy sensor shall turn the lights off when manual pushbutton is used to turn the lights on. D. Where the lighting control system is to automatically turn the lights off at the end of programmed business hours, the automatic shutoff feature is to automatically disable during the scheduled building operating hours. E. Each control zone's timer and/or time of day setting shall be provided with a separate Owner programmable timer. Each time of day setting shall be Owner settable using the control panel and lighting control software. G. Each time delay shall be Owner settable using the control panel and lighting control software. H. If the lighting control device loses communication with the lighting control system or if the device fails, the lights in the zone shall fail on to 100 percent. I. Contractor shall coordinate the light levels, time delays, time of day and all other Owner adjustable and non-adjustable preset set points with the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 LUMINAIRES A. See Drawings for fixture schedule. B. See Specifications for additional requirements. LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 3 2.02 DRIVERS A. LED Drivers: 1. UL Class 2 power unit as per UL1310. It is also listed in the UL Sign Accessory Manual (UL SAM). 2. Class A sound rating. 3. Minimum operating ambient temperature of -40 degrees C. 4. Life expectancy of 50,000 hours or greater at an average ambient temperature of <_ 40 degrees C with use of the fixture it is supplied with. 5. Self rise of 25 degrees C at maximum load in open air without heat sink. 6. Certified by UL for use in a dry or damp location (Outdoor Type 1). 7. Tolerates sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage. 8. Allowable case temperature up to 85 degrees C. 9. Reduce output power to LEDs if maximum allowable case temperature is exceeded. 10. Driver complies with governing FCC rules and regulations. 11. Tolerate sustained open circuit and short circuit output conditions without damage and need of external fusing or trip devices. 12. Dimmable, controlled by 0-1 OV low voltage controller or other means compatible with lighting system controls. 13. Manufacturer shall have a 5 year history of producing LED lighting drivers for the North American market. 2.03 CONTROL DEVICES A. The lighting control system shall be a networked system. The system must be able to communicate with fully digital centralized relay panels, small distributed relay panels fully distributed fixture level control by bus connected relays or dimmers, smart breaker panels, digital switches, photocells, various interfaces and operational software. The intent of the specification is to integrate all lighting control into one system. Lighting control system shall include all hardware, software and programming. System shall provide local access to all programming functions at the master LCP and remote access to all programming functions via dial up modem and through any standard computer workstation. Lighting control system shall have the capability to be remotely controlled via the internet, building wide Ethernet LAN, and/or building management system. B. System shall be capable of performing the controls as specified in the Contract Documents. C. Lighting system master control panel: 1. UL Listed. 2. NEMA 250 Type 1 enclosure with hinged and locking door. 3. Provide relay quantities and/or control modules as required for a complete functioning lighting system with minimum of 5 percent provided as spares. 4. Furnish true on -off indication of relay/module status through LEDs mounted on circuit board. 5. Power Supply: Transformers/power supplies used to power relays, switches, sensors shall be separate from transformers/power supplies used to power LED's and control circuitry. Transformers/power supplies shall include internal overcurrent protection with automatic reset and metal oxide varistor protection againsl power line spikes. 6. Provided with means to manually switch relay states without being exposed to live parts. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 LIGHTING 265000-4 7. Shall be provided with means to communicate with the supplied Building Management System. 8. Lighting control panel shall be operable via the system computers using the buildings Ethernet or backnet network. 9. Operator Interface: a. An operator interface shall be mounted on the master control panel. b. The control panel programming interface resides in firmware in the control panel. The programming interface shall consist of a circuit board mounted touch screen capable of linking switch inputs to relay outputs and schedule assignments. c. The integral touch screen shall provide access to the main programming features. The touch screen shall permit the user to manually command any or all relays individually. Each panel shall control its own loads from internal memory. d. A control system that relies on a central control computer/processor or external time clocks will not be permitted. e. At a minimum operator interface shall provide: 1) On/Off status of each relay. 2) System clock and date. 3) Programming confirmation. 4) Manual overrides. 5) Ability to adjust set points and programming. 10. Operator shall be able to program the controller through the operator interface and through PC programming software. 11. All panels and hardware shall communicate via networking between the equipment. D. Addressable modules: 1. Provide remote modules as required. 2. Modules shall communicate and be controlled by the master control panel. 3. Contractor is responsible for coordinating and providing power and communication conduit and wire for each supplied module. E. Lighting control devices: l . Each lighting control device i.e. switch, occupancy sensor, photocell, etc. shall communicate directly with the lighting control system. 2. Occupancy sensors: a. Networks with lighting control panel system. Capable of being wired directly without auxiliary components or devices. b. Dual technology; Ultrasonic and IR detection. Device shall be provided with dials to adjust the sensitivity level of each detection method as well as have the ability to disable either detection method. c. Silent operation. d. 360 degree detection range. e. Contractor shall coordinate with the supplied lighting control system and provide the sensor type which is best suited for the area of which it is installed in: 1) Standard Range. 2) Extended Range. 3) Hallway Sensor. 4) High Bay Sensor. f. Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with button where identified in the Contract Documents. 3. Digital Switch a. Networks with lighting control panel system. Capable of being wired directly without auxiliary components or devices. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 LIGHTING 265000-5 b. Status LED for each button. c. Number of buttons and sliders at each switch or control station shall be provided as identified in the Contract Documents. d. Additional features, such as dimming and programing set points shall be provided as identified in the Contract Documents. 4. Digital Photocell a. Each sensor employs photo diode technology to allow linear response to daylight within footcandle range. b. Outdoor sensor: 1) Provide hood as required. 2) Working range: 10-100 footcandles. c. Indoor sensor: 1) Provide fresnel lens. 2) Offices: 60 degree cone shaped response area. 3) Arena, atriums, other open spaces: 180 degree cone shaped response area. 4) Working rage: 100-1000 footcandles. d. Provide device which is compatible and communicates with the supplied master lighting control panel system. e. System shall be provided to allow Owner to adjust photocell sensitivity triggers by using the control panel and controls software. F. Graphical interface software: l . System software shall provide real time status of each relay, each zone and each group. 2. The software shall be loaded on up to three computers. 3. Graphical representation of the facility's lighting system shall be programmed. 4. Provide all licensing required for the software. G. General Requirements: 1. Provide all communication cabling for a complete and operating system. Contractor to coordinate cabling requirements with supplied equipment manufacturer. 2. Refer to Section 23 09 00 - HVAC Controls and Instrumentation for further information on the building automation system. 3.— Lighting -control -system -shall -be -able -to -be monitored -by -and-take-commands-from-a remote IJC. At any time, should the remote PC go off-line all system programming uploaded to the lighting control system shall continue to operate as intended. Systems rep_ uirina an online PC or server for normal operation are not acceptable. 4. All programs, schedules, time of day, etc, shall be held in non-volatile memory for an indefinite time exceeding 10 years in the event of power failure. At restoration of power, lighting control system shall implement programs required by current time and date. Time of day shall be battery backed for at least 10 years. 5. Wall plates for control of multiple zones shall be engraved to identify the zone and function of each button. Contractor shall propose terminology to be used on the plate to meet manufacturer's character limits. Owner and Engineer will review the engraved terminology during shop drawing review. 6. Multiple zone control station buttons shall have LED lights to show the selected or active zone. LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 6 3.01 INSTALLATION A. In general, luminaires shall be located where shown on the Drawings; however, Contractor shall check equipment locations and install luminaires so that piping, duct work, and other devices or equipment shall not interfere with the luminaire components or its performance. B. In general, conduit and wire for luminaire power, control and switching circuits are not shown on the Drawings. Contractor shall provide all conduit and wire as required to achieve the power and control distribution as specified in the Contract Documents. 1. All low voltage and power circuit cabling shall be in conduit. C. All suspended luminaires shall be mounted using supports at both ends of the fixture [as detailed on the Drawings]. D. Galvanized or stainless steel bolts, nuts, washers, and screws shall be used for mounting luminaries or luminaire outlets. E. Lenses, refractors, and glassware shall be clean and free from cracks or chips. All reflectors, shades, luminaire bodies, etc. shall be free from dents and scratches, thoroughly cleaned, and properly aligned before installation is accepted by the Owner. All exposed tags and labels other than UL and emergency ballast identifiers shall be removed. F. All luminaries, other than troffers, shall be firmly supported by major structural members, by structural slab, or channels in the ceiling construction. G. Type of ceilings shall be verified so proper mounting hardware is furnished with each luminaire. H. Location of insulation above ceilings shall be verified where recessed fixtures are located. If insulation is present, Contractor shall install barrier to separate fixtures from insulation per manufacturer's recommendations. 1. Luminaires with emergency lighting drivers shall be switched as indicated on the Drawings. A separate unswitched conductor shall provide power to the emergency lighting pack. J. Intermediate framing shall be provided between structural members to support both ends of fluorescent luminaires mounted below gypsum board ceilings. K. Provide a neutral (grounded) conductor with each switching circuit 120V (L-G) or greater. L. Terminate communication conductors and associated conduits external to factory supplied equipment. M. Test relays and switches after installation to confirm proper operation. N. Locations and quantities of daylight sensors to be used for daylight harvesting controls is not specified in the Contract Documents. Contractor is to coordinate and provide the quantity of sensors as required for the supplied control system to achieve the specified control scheme. Contractor shall be responsible for providing the sensors in locations as LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 7 required for the supplied control system to achieve the specified control scheme. Contractor shall provide all conduit and conductors for the sensors. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Lighting control components shall be identified by laminated plastic nameplates with 1/4- inch white lettering on a black background. Identify each lighting contactor based on the loads served. In addition, identify the lighting control panels as such. B. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks, and terminals shall be identified by labels, tags, or other permanent markings. The markings shall indicate the function, source, and destination of all cabling, wiring, and terminals. C. Color coded cables shall have an identifying legend posted at the termination point. D. Provide cable log. E. Label each low voltage wire wilh relay number ul euc h swilc h ur serisur. F. Label each low voltage wire clearly indicating connecting relay panel. G. Install wiring schedulP directory card affixed to rear of panel cover to identify circuits, relays, and loads controlled. 3.03 GRAPHICAL SOFTWARE A. A link, icon or similar means shall be provided on the building management system computers to allow User to quickly access, view and control the lighting system software. B. All programming for the lighting control system shall be provided by the Contractor. Programming shall be done in such a manner as to allow complete access to the program in the future by the Owner for changes and or additions. Program locks shall not be used. Complete program documentation shall be provided within the program. A complete, fully commented-hard-c-opy-(p(nt out) -of -the program -plus -a -complete fully -documented copy on cornpacl disk s idn be provided. C. A preliminary submittal of graphics screens and reports shall be provided for review by the Owner and Engineer. Modifications to control sequences, displays, set points, trends, reports, maintenance logs, and related features shall be expected during the review, acceptance testing, and startup tasks. These modifications shall be considered incidental to the Project. Programming shall include but is not limited to the following: 1. Complete data base building all 1/0 in the Contract Documents. 2. Real time display of input data. 3. Graphics. 4. Alarm logging. 5. Trending for each analog input. 6. Printouts. 7. Daily, weekly, monthly, and yearly reports. The start and stop times for all reports shall be uperulur udjusluble. 8. Event logging (On times, off times, etc.). LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 8 D. Graphic Displays: l . Main screen shall be a graphical representation of the facility's floor and Site plans. a. Autocad or Revit drawings of architectural floor plans will be made available to Contractor. 2. User shall be able to pan and zoom through the floor and site plans without distorting or pixilation of the backgrounds. 3. Software shall program to demonstrate zones and associated relays, control modules and control devices. 4. Each lighting zone status shall be represented by a color to indicate lighting on/off. 5. User may use the software and screens to remote control the lighting for each zone and to set timers, time clock settings, and control delays. 6. 10 hours of Owner selected menu items and screens shall be provided and shall be created in conjunction with the Owner during training. E. Alarms: 1. Zones and devices shall flash red if in an alarm condition occurs in the associated area such as loss of communication or a device in the zone has failed. F. Complete documentation shall be provided for all software. G. Owner shall be provided with an operating license for installation on [3] computers. A minimum of [3] sessions shall be licensed to access the system simultaneously. 3.04 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY A. The Contractor shall initiate system operation. Competent start-up personnel shall be provided on each consecutive working day until the system is fully functional and ready to start the testing phase. B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Any equipment damaged due to improper ground shall be replaced by the Electrical Contractor at their expense. C. Properly ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground. D. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation and properly labeled and identified. E. All materials shall be neat, clean, and unmarred and parts securely attached. F. All surfaces shall be restored to their original appearance and condition after installation. G. Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative when the start-up phase is complete and the system is functioning as required per specifications. The Owner's Representative will then notify the Contractor that the testing phase is ready to begin. 3.05 TESTING A. A factory -trained technician shall be present when the system is put into service and shall certify to the Engineer/Owner that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 9 B. Technician shall make all modifications necessary to obtain proper operation of the system. C. A factory authorized service engineer of the security system manufacturer shall: l . Verify that all wiring connections are complete and correct. 2. After installation and before termination, all wiring and cabling shall be checked and tested to ensure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors or shields. 3. Test for and eliminate ground loops that may result from use of different power sources for various components. 4. Complete system software programming. 5. All functions and features to be tested as a complete system and corrections made at no cost to the Owner. 6. Test relays and switches after installation to confirm proper operation and confirm correct loads are recorded on directory card in each panel. D. All devices shall be calibrated to obtain the specified function and to reach the specified footcandle level. Where daylight harvesting is used, Contractor shall calibrate the associated photocell signal in relation the footcandle delivered to the surface being lit. E. Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative when testing is complete and the system is functioning as required per specifications. The Contractor shall then coordinate with the Owner's Representative a time for the Owner's Review phase, Contractor shall meet with the Owner's Representatives to review the programmed control schemes for the basic operations. At this time, the Owner may desire to alter the system programming after reviewing the system. Contractor shall revise the lighting system controls as directed by the Owner's Representatives. Base bid shall include all changes to the proposed system shown on the Drawings; Owner shall not be charged additional costs for modifying the system controls or Contractor's attendance at meetings. G. Once the lighting control system revisions have been completed, Contractor shall test the system as described above. After the testing, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative when testing is complete and the system is functioning as required per specifications. The Contractor shall then coordinate with the Owner's Representative a time for Engineer to walk through the system and deveiop a punch list. H. Upon completion of the punch list and verification that all punch items have been resolved by the Contractor the Owner's Representative will notify that the testing phase of the Project has been completed and that the Contractor is ready to start the record drawings phase of the Project. 3.06 RECORD DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall submit the complete Record Drawings. These Drawings shall include: l . Installer prepared wiring diagrams, including terminal strip layout and identification, and wire termination and tagging for all conductors. 2. Locations for all major equipment components installed under this Specification. 3. Complete Riser diagrams. 4. As-builts on originals provided in AutoCAD formal on CD-ROM. 5. Cable logs. 6. Contractor shall deliver the record plans to the Engineer. Upon receipt of the record plans by the Engineer and verification of the compliance with the above requirements for the record plans the Engineer will notify the Contractor that the record plans phase LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 10 of the Project has been completed and the Contractor is ready to start the system acceptance requirements phase of the Project. 3.07 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Before final acceptance of work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the following in the order. B. Contractor shall return the sites 30 days after the substantial completion date and when the lighting control system is operational and after training has been completed. At this time Contractor shall meet with the Owner's representatives to review the programmed control schemes for the basic operations and fire paging system operations. Contractor shall also revise the programming and adjust device level setpoints as requested by the Owner. Base bid shall include all modifications to the; Owner shall not be charged additional costs for modifying the system controls or attendance at meetings. C. The Contractor shall deliver 2 complete "Systems Operation and Maintenance Manuals". Each manual shall contain but not be limited to: l . Documentation of the Startup Phase. 2. Documentation of the Testing Phase. 3. Documentation of the Record Plan Phase. 4. A Statement of Guarantee, including date of termination and the name and phone number of the person to be called in the event of equipment failure. Advertising brochures (cut sheets) for each piece of equipment. 5. A set of operational procedures for the overall system that includes all required Owner activities and allows for Owner operation of all system capabilities. This procedure shall fully address all Owner established system operating objectives. 6. A list of every device by manufacturer, model, and serial number shall be provided. This list shall include IP addresses, User Name, Make and Model number, Serial Numbers, Passwords, etc. 3.08 OPERATOR TRAINING A. A minimum of 6 hours of training shall be provided. All training shall be at the Project site. B. Training periods shall be a maximum duration of 2 hours in a given day. Final day of training may occur up to 6 months after the final completion date. C. All training hours shall be logged and signed by Contractor and Owner. D. Items to be covered in training shall include but not be limited to: 1. Devices. 2. Software. 3. Operation. 4. Maintenance. 5. Trouble Shooting. 6. Equipment specifications. E. Contractor shall provide 3 copies of a custom, Project specific training manual before each type of training session. The manuals shall be bound in 3 ring binders to allow the Owner to make additional copies as required. The manual shall provide a brief Project specific outline of each of the above items with basic startup and/or troubleshooting LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 11 procedures for each item. Manual shall also include detailed description of operation of each piece of equipment or system in the facility. F. Training dates shall be coordinated with the Owner. Training dates may be extended up to 6 months beyond the final completion date if the Owner desires. G. Training time shall not be used for equipment start-up, testing and commissioning. All equipment shall be fully programmed and tested before training begins. H. Training dates shall be coordinated with the Owner. Signed copies of the training log, shall be completed and submitted to the Engineer after each training session. 3.09 COMMISSIONING A. Contractor shall return the sites 6 months after the final completion date. At this time Contractor shall meet with the Owner's representatives to review the programmed control schemes for the basic operations. Contractor shall revise the programming and adjust device level setpoints as requested by [lie Ownei. Buse bid sliull it all modifications to the lighting control system; Owner shall not be charged additional costs for modifying the system controls or attendance at such meetings. END OF SECTION LIGHTING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 26 50 00 - 12 SECTION 27 10 00 NETWORK CABLING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies the furnishing, installation, and connection of the network cabling system to provide a comprehensive telecommunications infrastructure. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section "Submittals". B. Submit a complete list of all proposed equipment and materials, including manufacturer's specifications and product cut sheets. C. Labeling Scheme 1. Submit Terminal Labeling of cross -connections made for each MDF/TC, each fiber plant cable, and each system as a condition of the cabling system. Coordinate specific labeling criteria with the Architect/Engineer/Owner. 2. Cable ends and information outlet locations shall have consistent labeling. 3. Provide cable listing of cable runs, terminations, and interconnections. This information shall include identification of terminations of each cable segment, terminations within each closet/termination area, and the terminations at the MDF/TC, and equipment rooms. 4. Information shall be presented on clear and precise schedules, and clean, scaled prints of drawings. Supplemental identification lists shall be on computer disc as appropriate. D. As defined in Part 3 of this Section, the Division 27 Contractor shall provide additional conduit sleeves and pathways as required for data cabling. This Contractor shall provide conduit sleeve and pathways rough -in for proper cabling routing of horizontal and backbone cabling. As part of the shop drawing submittal the Contractor shall provide conduit sleeve requirements for review and approval. Sleeves shown'/2 tone have been provided by the Electrical Contractor for Combined Construct Contract. Cabling Administration Drawings: 1. Show building floor Plans with cable administration point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in the software and format selected by Owner. 2. Submit final cabling administration drawings to Engineer for review prior to posting on wall in Main IT equipment room (Head -End). F. Telecommunications Maintenance Manual: Include the following: 1. Descriptions of network cabling equipment and normal operating procedures. 2. Parts list. 3. Riser Diagrams showing complete installed UTP and Fiber cabling. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 L., NEMORK CABLING 27 10 00 - 1 4. Proof of Performance Report outlining the operating parameters tested, complete test results, and a summary of industry standards used for each parameter. 5. Service information. 6. Labeling scheme. 7. Warranty information. 1.03 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS A. ANSI/EIA/TIA Standard 56813.1, 56813.2, AND 5686.3 B. ANSI/EIA/TIA Standard 569 C. ANSI/EIA/TIA Standard 606 D. ANSI/EIA/TIA Standard 607 Technical Service Bulletins TSB-36, TSB-40, TSB 67 F. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code G. STANDARDS, UL LISTING 1. Comply with applicable prnvisinns and of the following: a. Fiber optic cables shall meet the following criteria, in addition to specifications described in other sections: 1) Cables shall be Listed by UL as Optical Fiber Conductive Plenum (OFCP) or Optical Fiber Non -Conductive Plenum (OFNP). 2) Materials used for fiber optic cable shall present no environmental or toxicological hazards as defined by current industry standards, and shall comply with OSHA and EPA standards or applicable federal or state laws or regulations. 3) Passive fiber optic physical equipment and apparatus used in interconnecting and cross -connecting fiber optic cables shall have a fire resistant minimum rating of UL 94V-1. 4) Equipment, apparatus, and materials for backbone fiber cabling shall conform to OSHA Health and Safety Laws. The equipment and uppurutus snail riuve provisions for application of safety levels such as LASER identification or warning labels as required by system considerations. H. Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The terms "listed" and "labeled": as defined in the "National Electrical Code", Article 100.GUARANTEES AND WARRANTIES. I_ Guarantee system, in writing, against defects in workmanship and associated material not covered by cabling system warranty, for one year after final acceptance. During this time, the entire system shall be kept in proper operating condition at no additional labor or material cost to the Owner. J. Service: Manufacturer / installer shall respond to calls for maintenance and repair within 4 hours. The Installer must be able to perform adds, rnuves urid c huriyes wilirin 24 Flours. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 NETWORK CABLING 271000-2 K. The manufacturer of the major components shall maintain a replacement parts department and provide test equipment when needed. The parts department shall be located in a geographical proximity consistent with rendering service within the stated period of time. An ample stock of individual components and equivalent unit replacement shall be carried for as long a period as demand warrants. This period shall extend beyond the normal life expectancy of the equipment. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Contractor shall provide evidence of successful completion of other operational systems of similar scope and complexity with the bid. Indicate the following: 1. Names and locations of two previously installed systems and two most recently installed systems. 2. Area of coverage for each system. 3. Building engineer and telephone number at each installation. 4. Previous installation experiences. 5. At least two personal references for similar UTP and Fiber installations. B. Contractor shall provide training documentation of assigned staff corresponding to the type of cabling and equipment specified. C. Contractor shall be currently licensed to install low -voltage cabling systems in the State of Minnesota. D. Contractor shall meet manufacturer's requirements for the provision and installation of specified equipment. E. Contractor shall provide proof of certification as a structured cabling system installer for the system provided under this Bid. Testing Equipment: Contractor shall utilize and have prior training with, test equipment specifically suited to and designed for link testing of the cabling and connecting hardware specified. Unless approved otherwise, Contractor shall utilize the following: 1. Fluke DTX series or approved equal. 2. Provide proof of factory calibration of test meter within 6 months of beginning test date. Include this documentation with recorded test results. 1.05 PHYSICAL ROUTING CONSIDERATIONS A. Each respective Backbone Voice Communications Cable shall be routed continuously vertically and horizontally between closets indicated. 1.06 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Examine areas and conditions under which the system is to be installed, and notify Owner's Representative in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with that portion of the work affected until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 NETWORK CABLING 271000-3 1.07 MANUFACTURER A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide specified materials from the same manufacturer as the referenced products included for the design of the Local Area Network Cabling system. 1.08 UPGRADED PRODUCTS A. Due to the fast -changing technology, products shall be the most current and up-to-date quality and labor-saving versions available for the application, unless otherwise restricted. B. Prior to bidding, provide written notification of any discrepancies in model or part numbers specified. Corrections will be clarified by Addendum. C. Prior to bidding, provide written notification of announced discontinuation or upgrade replacements of specified materials. D. Provide necessary supplies, mounting hardware and accessories required to install specified materials. 1.09 UTP (OPPFR (:ABI F I FNGTHS, TERMINATIONS, MARKINGS A. Copper Cable runs shall be compliant with EIA/TIA recommended lengths: 1. Horizontal cables shall not exceed 295 feet (90 meters). Cable runs shall be continuous with no allowance for splicing. B. Copper cable Eight -Position Jack Pin/Pair Assignments shall match EIA/TIA T568B cabling standards. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 JOINT -USE INSIDE/OUTSIDE PLANT FIBER CABLE Jingle I IVFiltCI \J �.JIII. \..V VIC 1. Outside Diameter: 0.359 inches. 2. Suitable for Indoor/Outdoor, underground conduit installations. 3. Thermoplastic Non -unitized, PVDF-Copolymer Unitized Jacket Material. 4. Thermoplastic buffer tube. 5. E-Glass and Aramid Yarn Strength Member. 6. Unjacketed central strength member. 7. Color code (fiber): Per TIA/EIA 598-B. 8. UV resistant black Jacket. 9. No grounding required. 10. Plenum UL type OJNP, flame resistance NFPA 262. 11. Temperature range: a. Storage: -40 degree C to 80 degree C. b. Operating: -40 degree C to 70 degree C. c. Inslallation: 0 degree C to 60 degree C. 12. Cyclic Flexing (EIA-455-104) 2000 cycles, minute. 13. Compliance: a. TIA/EIA 568-C.3. b. ICEA S-104-696. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 NETWORK CABLING 271000-4 14. Functional Requirements: a. GR-20-CORE. b. GR-409-CORE. 15. Attenuation not greater than 0.8dB/Km @ 1310nm. not greater than 0.5dB/Km @ 1550nm. 16. Maximum Gigabit Ethernet Length 5000 meters @ 1300nm. 17. Termination: All Single -mode terminations shall be made with SC ultra polished connectors. 2.02 BACKBONE FIBER TERMINATION UNITS A. Furnish and install rack mounted fiber enclosures capable of terminations and splices noted on drawings. Equip with SC connectors and cover plate. Units shall provide top or bottom cable entry, fiber termination, cross connection, interconnection, routing, fiber identification labels, fiber storage and radius organizers. 2.03 BACKBONE FIBER TERMINATION CONNECTORS A. Provide SC connectors for all fiber terminations. Coordinate with owner electronics and provide duplex SC connectors where possible. 2.04 BACKBONE FIBER PATCH CORDS (JUMPER) A. The fiber patch cord shall consist of buffered, SM fiber to match backbone fiber and the fiber cladding shall be covered by aramid yarn and a jacket of flame-retardant PVC. 1. Number of single -mode patch cords shall be 110% of the total SM fiber terminations. 2. Lengths shall be: as determined by owner. Coordinate with Owner prior to ordering. 3. Assume: 50% 3 meters, 25% 5 meters, 25% 10 meters. 2.05 BACKBONE COPPER CABLE - VOICE A. Furnish and install copper Unshielded Twisted -Pair (UTP) backbone cable as follows: 1. Copper Backbone Cabling Intra-Building: Furnish and install copper Unshielded Twisted -Pair (UTP) cable as follows: a. Cat 3, or equal, 24 AWG bare solid copper conductor, pair count as indicated on the risers. b. The cables shall meet the requirements of: 1) EIA/TIA 56813.2 Commercial Building Wiring Standard Horizontal Cable Section for Category 3. 2) CSA Certified Type PCC FT4 FT6. 3) Plenum- UL910, CMP. 2. This Contractor shall make connection to 66 / 110 / patch panels as required or noted on the Drawings in the network rack. 2.06 HORIZONTAL UTP MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a certified structured cabling system by one of the following: 1. Uniprise (Ultra Media). 2. Panduit (TX-6) / General Cable (Genspeed 6500). 3. Leviton (Extreme 6) / Berk-Tek (Lanmark 2000). 4. Commscope Systimax GigaSPEED XL7. 5. Hubbel Nextspeed / Hitachi Supra 660. NETWORK CABLING @ 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 10 00 - 5 6. Belden DataTwist 3600. 7. TE Connectivity 630 series. B. Products defined in this Section set the standard for the product defined. Manufacturers approved above shall meet the standards defined by these products. 2.07 HORIZONTAL UTP CATEGORY 6A PERMANENT LINK A. Furnish and install copper Unshielded Twisted -Pair (UTP) horizontal cable as follows: 1. Plenum rated, 24 AWG bare solid copper conductor. The cable shall conform to UL Type CMP listing for plenum and riser applications. 2. Each cable sheath shall contain 4 pairs of unshielded copper twisted -pairs with each pair having a different twist ratio of 12 to 24 twists per foot and cable shall have a pair isolator. 3. The cables shall exceed the requirements of: a. EIA/TIA 568A Commercial Building Wiring Standard Horizontal Cable Section for category 6A. b. Plenum - UL 910, CMP. 4. Where indicated on Plans, provide indoor / outdoor rated cable. B. The Category 6A 4 pair UTP channel consists of all cable and components with up to four connections that comprise the full 100-meter circuit from the. I AN Flectrnnic-s to the workstation device. The channel shall support applications such as 1 OBase-T, 10013ase-T, 155 Mbs ATM, 77 channel broadband video, 1.0 Gbps Ethernet, 1.2 Gbps, and proposed 2.4 Gbps ATM technologies. C. The Category 6A permanent link (4-pair UTP) consists of a maximum of 90 meters of horizontal cable from the telecommunications room and will connect patch panels to the workstation faceplate/ RJ45 jack in the work area. The permanent link/channel shall support applications such as 1 OBase-T, 10OBase-T, 155 Mbs ATM, 77 channel broadband video, 1.0 Gbps Ethernet, 1.2 Gbps, and 2.4 Gbps ATM technologies. D. The channel shall include the patch cord, patch panels, horizontal cabling, and the station cord, and shall have a positive 1 OdB PSACR across the full frequoncy range of 1 MHz - 250MHz. E. All components shall be backward compatible with existing Category 3, 4, 5, 5e, and 6 networks. F. The cabling permanent link with specified manufacturers above shall exceed Category 6A requirements. 2.08 HORIZONTAL UTP INFORMATION OUTLETS A. Activations: The numbers adjacent to data information outlets as shown on the Plans indicate the number of data cables terminated to jacks at each information outlet. If no number is shown on the Plans provide two data cables terminated at that location. Provide a minimum of a 6-position faceplate and provide blanks as required for the unused spaces. B. Modular Faceplates: Office White, smooth nylon, UL rated 94V-0 high impact, flame- retardant, thermoplastic, integral label card and cover, sized as follows: NETWORK CABLING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 10 00 - 6 1. Data / Telephone information outlets: Devices shown on Plans, as data information outlets shall be six position faceplates with integral label holders. The number next to each outlet indicates the number of data activations at that location (ie. "1" indicates one data cable installed, with blank inserts over the five remaining faceplate positions). If no number is shown on the Plans provide two data cables terminated at that location. Provide a minimum of a 6-position faceplate and provide blanks as required for the unused spaces. 2. Wall mounted telephone outlets: Stainless steel faceplate suitable for wall mounted telephone. Provide CAT 6A cable at each location unless noted otherwise. Coordinate final phone faceplate with telephone manufacturer. Provide plate to mate with phone. The number next to each outlet indicates the number of telephone activations at that location (example, "1" indicates one telephone cable installed, with blank inserts over the five remaining faceplate positions). If no number is shown on the Plans provide two telephone cables terminated at that location. Provide a minimum of a 6- position faceplate and provide blanks as required for the unused spaces. C. Modular jacks: Modular jack designed for high-performance networking applications. l . Workstation outlet color, jack 1: Black. 2. Workstation outlet color, jack 2: White. 3. Workstation outlet color, jack 3: Black. 4. Workstation outlet color, jack 4: Grey. 5. Backbone voice cabling patch panel outlet color: White. 6. CCTV camera outlet color: Green. 7. Contractor shall coordinate color standard during shop drawings. D. Minimum electrical requirements: l . Insulation resistance: 500 MO minimum. 2. Dielectric withstand voltage 1,000 VAC RMS, 60 Hz, minimum contact -to -contact and 1,500 VAC RMS, 60 Hz minimum from any contact to exposed conductive surface. 3. Contact resistance: 20 MO maximum. 4. Current rating: 1.5A at 68 degrees F per IEC Publication 512-3, Test 5b. E. Blank: Contractor shall provide dust covers for each outlet as required to close all faceplate openings. 2.09 HORIZONTAL UTP MODULAR PATCH PANELS A. Furnish and install Modular Patch Panels. The panels shall be 19-in. wide for rack mounting. The panels shall have jacks wired to 110 IDC terminals via a printed wiring board on the rear of the distribution modules. The front distribution modules shall be equipped with 8- pin/8-conductor outlets providing continuous interconnection to the 1 10 IDC terminals. Provide labeling strip above each jack. Contractor shall be responsible for sizing the modular patch panels according to the following specifications: 1. Number of Modular Patch Panel Ports shall be 125 percent of the total number of terminated information outlets at each closet. 2.10 HORIZONTAL UTP PATCH CORDS A. Provide Patch Cords, 24 AWG, polyfin, twisted, jacketed, with 8-position Modular Plug at each end. 1. Colors: a. White (voice): Match quantity of devices shown on Plans. (X 120%) b. Purple (wireless): Match quantity of devices shown on Plans. (X 120%) NETWORK CABLING 271000-7 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 c. Green (ccty & security): Match quantity of devices shown on Plans. (X 120%) d. Black: Provide Remaining quantity. e. Contractor shall coordinate color standards during shop drawings. Lengths of patch cords in data closets shall comply with EIA/TIA 568A recommended lengths: Data Closet and Head End patch cords shall not exceed 7 meters (20 feet). Provide varying lengths to suit data closet installation and as noted below. Coordinate final length selection prior to ordering. Submit documentation of this coordination effort to for approval. 1. Lengths: Assume 20% 3 ft., 60% 6 ft., 10% 10 ft, 10% 15' of each color. C. Number of Patch Cords shall be 120 percent of the total number of terminated jacks/ports- Turn over the 20 percent spares to the Owner. 2.11 HORIZONTAL UTP STATION CORD A. Provide UTP Station Cord interconnection between the work location equipment and the data outlet. Cord shall be 24 AWG tinned copper stranded conductors insulated with solid polyfin, tightly twisted into individual pairs and jacketed with flame retardant PVC. An 8- position modular plug will be terminated to each end of the cords. These cords will match the installed Patch Cords in order to maintain the integrity of the CAT 6A Local Area Network UTP cabling system. 1. Color shall be black. B. Provide UTP Station Cords of the following lengths: 50% 10 feet, 50% 15 feet. Coordinate final length selection with Owner. Submit documentation of this coordination effort for approval. 1. Station cord lengths for wall -mounted phones shall not meet this requirement. Provide minimum suitable length of phone cord for connection to phone. 2. Station cord length for wireless, CCTV, and security applications are not required to meet this requirement. Provide minimum suitable standard lengths for devices served. C. Number of Station Cords shall be 115 percent of the total number of terminated jacks. Turn over the 15 percent spares to the Owner. 2.12 WIRE LUBRICATING COMPOUND A. Suitable for the wire insulation and conduit it is used with, and shall not harden or become adhesive. B. Shall not be used on wire for isolated type electrical power systems. 2.13 FIREPROOFING TAPE A. The tape shall consist of a flexible, conformable fabric of organic composition coated 1 side with flame-retardant elastomer. B. The tape shall be self -extinguishing and shall not support combustion. It shall be arc -proof and filepiuuf. C. The tape shall not deteriorate when subjected to water, gases, salt water, sewage, or fungus and be resistant to sunlight and ultraviolet light. NETWORK CABLING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 10 00 - 8 D. The finished application shall withstand a 200-ampere arc for not less than 30 seconds. Securing tape: Glass cloth electrical tape not less than 0.18 mm (7 mils) thick, and 19 mm (3/4 inch) wide. 2.14 COLOR COORDINATION A. General Cable shall be: 1. Yellow - Card Access. 2. Orage - CCTV Cameras. 3. White - Burglary System. 4. Blue - Voice/Data. Network Cabe shall be: 1. Firewall/Router - Red. 2. Maagement/ILO - Blue. 3. Server - Yellow. 4. Storage - Orange. 5. Network interconnect - Purple, 6. Video - White. 7. Workstation - Black. 8. Tl_Phone - Gray. 9. Printer -Green. 10. Temporary -Pink. C. Contractor shall coordinate color standards during shop drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Install equipment and components in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, in compliance with NEC, and with recognized industry practices. Ensure that all work complies with specifications and serves the intent of the construction documents. Cabling and equipment shall be installed in accordance with good engineering practices as established by the EIA/TIA and the NEC. 3.02 COORDINATION MEETING A. Provide a 2-hour coordination meeting with the owner prior to installation and ordering of any materials to determine final owner requirements. Items requiring further coordination include, but are not limited to: 1. Final rack layouts and elevations. 2. Copper and fiber patch cord lengths and colors. 3. Labeling. 4. Owner furniture selection and corresponding cabling coordination. 3.03 CABLING INSTALLATION A. Install cable without damaging conductors or jacket. Do not bend cable to a smaller radius than minimum recommended by manufacturer. Do not exceed manufacturers recommended pulling tensions. NETWORK CABLING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 10 00 - 9 B. Wiring in Wire Closets and Cabinets: Install conductors parallel to and at right angles to walls. Bundle, lace, and train the conductors to terminal points and terminate using manufacturer's installation procedures. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted to terminal blocks. C. Conduit Sleeves: Provide additional conduit sleeve rough -in through fire -rated and block walls, where required for all fiber and copper backbone cabling. Sizing of conduit sleeves shall be based on NEC 40% fill capacity and industry standard recommendations. Sizing of conduit sleeves shall take into account all backbone cable routing. Provide insulating bushing to prevent cable damage. D. Conduit Pathways: Where conduit is required for cable routing, provide EMT rough in as required or shown on the Drawings. Where installed in finished locations as shown on the Drawings, the conduits shall be concealed in walls below floors, or above the ceiling where possible. Sizing of conduit shall be as indicated or if not indicated then based on NEC 40% fill capacity and industry standard recommendations. E. Fire Stopping: Provide fire stopping for all conduit sleeves shown on the Plans and as added as required at all fire rated walls. Firewalls are indicated on the architectural drawings and are available for review at the Construction Manager's office. F. Grounding: Ground all racks and cable runway to the grounding bus located ndjncent tn the rack. The ground bus is provided by the Electrical Contractor for Combined Construct Contract. This Contractor shall provide #6 CU conductors from each rack / runway to the ground bus. Ground equipment per manufacturers' instructions and NEC requirements. If no ground bus is present, ground to structure. 3.04 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE A. Backbone Fiber Distribution System described under this Section shall be required to exhibit stable performance in a building, environmental fluctuations, installation, or under aging conditions. 3.05 SIGNAL TRANSMISSION A. The overall design, installation, and testing of the Backbone Fiber distribution system is based upon the efficient transmission of digital data siqnals from the Owner's electronic provisions in the ER and TC equipment to the Modular Information Outlets. 3.06 UTP CABLING - GENERAL: A. Provide dedicated horizontal cable runs from TC rooms to all "terminated" data information and phone outlets as described above and indicated on the Drawings. Provide Faceplates for all data, voice. C. Where outlets are shown on Plans, this Contractor shall provide jack termination, faceplate, and cabling. D. Provide Modular Information Outlets in Outlet Boxes for all "terminated" data information outlets. NETWORK CABLING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 10 00 - 10 E. Excess cable behind faceplate connections shall be pulled back into ceiling spaces and secured in such a manner as to prevent damage to cabling or connections. F. A minimum 15-foot loop of extra horizontal cable shall be secured above the data rack. G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. H. Avoid excessive and sharp bends that may damage cabling. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions for backbone and horizontal cables. I. Allow sufficient slack (15 feet) in cable to prevent premature deterioration of cable system components and to assist in the maintenance and servicing of cable and/or other building systems and components. J. At camera and WAP locations, install surface biscuit style data box above accessible ceiling location and provide 25-foot coil of cable to allow for location adjustments. K. Provide Cable Distribution J-Hooks as necessary to route and support cables. All cables shall be routed within cable tray/conduit where provided. Where no conduit is available, support cabling from the building structure via j-hooks. J-hooks shall be spaced no more than five feet on center. L. Provide Velcro straps to bundle and organize cabling for a quality and professional installation. Vinyl cable straps are prohibited. M. Fittings or connections are allowed only at the input and output of devices. Splicing shall not be accepted in cable runs. Spliced cable runs shall be rejected and replaced with continuous cables, prior to acceptance. N. Separation of Wires: Comply with EIA/TIA-569 rules for separation of UTP cables from potential EMI sources. O. Cable and wiring routed through inaccessible spaces or spaces where there is a risk of damage to conductors shall be installed in conduit, conduit provided by this Contractor. P. All fiber cable shall be single -mode fiber. 3.07 GENERAL TEST REQUIREMENTS A. Optical fibers shall be individually tested with connectors attached. A FIBER TRANSMISSION LOSS TEST shall be performed after connectorization and interconnection have been completed. B. Testing shall include: attenuation, attenuation uniformity, end -to -end continuity, transmission loss tests to assure decibel (dB) losses are within budget levels, and other cabling tests normally performed. Each cable span shall be tested individually. Tests shall be conducted selectively after cross -connection of the cable spans. C. The Contractor's technical representative performing these tests shall demonstrate familiarity with details of the system. The test team must include the field supervisor in charge during the course of the installation work. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 NETWORK CABLING 27 10 00 - 11 3.08 FIBER TEST PROCEDURES A. Fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end to end system. There shall be no splices. Testing shall consist of bidirectional end to end OTDR trace performed per EIA/TIA 455-61 and a bidirectional end to end power meter test performed per EIA/TIA 455-53A. The system loss measurements shall be provided at 850 and 1310 nanometers for multimode fibers and 1310 and 1550 for single mode fibers. 1. Fiber links shall have a maximum loss of: (allowable cable loss per km) (km of fiber in link) + (AdB) (number of connectors) = maximum allowable loss. a. Loss numbers for the installed link shall be calculated by taking the sum of the bidirectional measurements and dividing that sum by 2. 2. Any link not meeting the requirements of the standard shall be brought into compliance by the Contractor, at no charge to the customer. B. Each measured and calculated loss shall be recorded in an OPTICAL FIBER TRANSMISSION LOSS MEASUREMENT TABLE. The table shall be provided to owner in. pdf format. 3.09 FIBER TRANSMISSION LOSS TEST REPORT A. Upon completion of tests, two copies of a FIBER TRANSMISSION LOSS TEST REPORT shall be submitted for review. 3.10 FIBER RANDOM SAMPLING TEST AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. In ordor to verify conformance to the specifications, perform a witnessed Random Sampling Test. B. Prior to cutover, and after acceptance of the submitted FIBER TRANSMISSION LOSS TEST REPORT, at a time set by the owners representative, perform a witnessed Random Sampling Test on one random 12-Strand cable and/or 6-Strand cable selected by the Representative. C. Demonstrate to the designated Representative the final system installation meets the perform ance-requirements. D. Provide labor, materials, tools, and measurement equipment for the RANDOM SAMPLING TEST and necessary adjustments. E. The Contractor shall be responsible for additional costs incurred to satisfy the criteria requirements. 3.11 CAT 3 COPPER CABLE TESTING A. Cables shall include, but are not limited to, tests for: polarity reversals, wire transpositions, continuity, AC and DC voltages, opens, shorts, power and ground faults. Tests shall include mutual capacitance, impedance, attenuation and near end crosstalk (NEXT). B. Cable lengths shall be recorded as part of the testing. C. Faults shall be corrected and retested. NETWORK CABLING © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 27 10 00 - 12 D. Test information along with manufacturer and model number of test equipment shall be recorded and provided to Owners Representative as part of the Project Telecommunications Manual. 3.12 UTP CAT6A COPPER CABLE TESTING A. Notify and schedule with Owners Representative the final testing. B. Testing of all copper wiring shall be performed prior to system cutover. C. Cables shall be tested for all Category 6A 100% link parameters using the specified level 3 tester. Test all Category 6A link parameters, including attenuation, NEXT, PS NEXT, FEXT, ELFEXT, return loss, and delay skew. D. Patch cord, workstation cord, and cable lengths shall be recorded as part of the testing. E. Faults shall be corrected and retested. F. Test information along with manufacturer and model number of test equipment shall be recorded and provided to Representative as part of the Project Telecommunications Manual. G. Provide proof of factory calibration of test meter within 6 months of the beginning of testing. H. The "* pass" option on the test meter must be set to the "on" state. The "* pass" symbol indicates a channel that is within 1 db of failing. I. Provide test data in electronic format with corresponding software for viewing of testing documentation on CD-ROM provided from the test meter. Contractor shall provided 2 CD- ROM to Representative. 3.13 TRAINING A. Provide on -site, hands-on training for a minimum of two (2) individuals on cabling -related equipment specified herein. A minimum of two (2) hours of training shall be provided for UTP and Fiber Cabling. Tasks necessary to perform on -going management of the cabling system shall be addressed as part of the training. The following topics shall be included as part of the training for the Cabling System: 1. Labeling Conventions. 2. Moves, Adds & Changes. 3. Reading and updating Record Drawings. 4. Proper cable management in accordance with EIA/TIA 568A. 3.14 LABELING A. Labeling, in accordance with TIA/EIA-606: l . Confirm room numbers with Owner's Representative prior to labeling. The room numbers shown on the Plans may not be the final room numbers. 2. Use the following format for Data Outlet and Patch Panel labeling: Closet -Room- Jack ID. The Jack ID shall be A, B, C, or D for each jack. For example, the first jack of Outlet #1 in Room 114 served from data closet Al shall be labeled as Al- 114-1A. Coordinate with owner. Obtain Owner approval in writing. NETWORK CABLING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 10 00 - 13 3. Utilize manufacturer designed labeling method at Patch Panels. Labeling method shall be permanent and minimally susceptible to vandalism. Labels shall be permanent, and Contractor shall replace fallen labels as part of the warranty. 4. Label patch panel terminations with the identical numbers used at the outlets. 5. Label both ends of each cabling run within b inches of termination points with Panduit Pan -Ty, or equal. b. Final labeling shall include: face of patch panel, cable end behind patch panel, cable end within data j-box, and data faceplate. 7. Labeling shall be in accordance with owner requirements. END OF SECTION NEMORK CABLING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 10 00 - 14 SECTION 27 11 00 COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This Section specifies the furnishing, installing, certification, testing, and guaranty of a complete and operating Voice and Digital Cable Distribution System (here -in -after referred to as "the System"), and associated equipment and hardware to be installed in the Facility. The System shall include, but not be limited to: equipment cabinets, interface enclosures, and relay racks; necessary combiners, traps, and filters; and necessary passive devices such as: splitters, couplers, cable "patch", "punch down", and cross -connector blocks or devices, voice and data distribution sub -systems, and associated hardware. The System shall additionally include, but not be limited to: telecommunication closets (TC); telecommunications outlets (TCO); copper distribution cables, connectors, "patch" cables and other devices for a complete and operable system. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Cable management system. 5. Telecommunications cabling pathways. 6. Grounding. 7. PDUs and power strips. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 271000 "Network Cabline" for data/VoIP cabling associated with system panels and devices. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. Cable Runway: A fabricated structure consisting of a one-piece, ventilated -bottom or solid -bottom channel. C. LAN: Local area network. D. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. E. LEC: Local Exchange Carrier. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment Error! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 11 00 - 1 racks and cabinets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. 1. Submit data for each of the following components: a. Equipment racks. b. Cable runway. c. Horizontal and vertical wire management. d. J-hooks, D-rings, lacing bars, tie -wraps. e. UPS units. f. Maintenance bypass panel. g. PDUs and power strips. B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Cable runway layout in equipment rooms, showing routing to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following: a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to the sides of cable runway. c. Vertical elevation of cable runways above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding the manufacturer's ratings for the cable runway and its support elements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of a Registered Technician or Level 2 Inslaller, who shall L)e presenl ul all limes when Work of this Section is pertormed at Project site. 3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as RCDD to perform the on -site inspection. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. D. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. E. No Equipment shall be installed in the LAN rooms until the room has been thoroughly cleaned, the cooling system for the room has been made operations and has been shown to be able to maintain the temperature at 70 degrees F at all times, and the CAR verifies the cleanliness and cooling system capabilities and approves the installation of the equipment. (2) Error! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 11 00 - 2 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install equipment frames and cable trays until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and work above ceilings is complete. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with LEC. l . Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, LEC representatives, and Owners Representative to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross -connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross - connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room. B. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 PATHWAYS A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A. J-hooks: Steel, UL listed, ultimate static load limit 50 lbs. minimum. Wide base, beveled edges. Rated to support Category 6 cables, and optical fiber cables. Integral Velcro strap. If required, assemble to manufacturer recommended specialty fasteners including beam clips, flange clips, drop wire/rod, C and Z purlin clips. 1. Provide products manufactured by one of the following: a. Chatsworth Products (CPI) # 31422-801 series. b. Caddy by Erico, Inc. c. Or Equal. C. Provide plenum rated velcro straps, length and strength as required to properly organize and bundle cables. Vinyl tie straps are prohibited throughout. Do not use vinyl to temporarily organize cables. D. Existing building structure may be used to support cabling, if the structural members are smooth, free of burs, and have adequate surface area to prevent deforming of cable jacket. Bundle cables with Velcro when utilizing existing structure for support. Coordinate with other trades for locations. E. Cable Runways in Equipment Rooms: 1. Overhead cable management must be installed by the vendor to connect to the walls and to support cabling. It must be installed according to the supplied diagram, with Error! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 11 00 - 3 appropriate interconnect and bend radius protection accessories. Cable management units should be Panduit WG12BL10 or substantially similar with approval of project manager. F. Conduit and Boxes: Provided under Division 26 (by electrical contractor), unless specifically noted otherwise. Where additional conduit and boxes are needed to comply with these specifications and drawings, this Contractor shall comply with requirements in Division 26 Section 'Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Flexible metal conduit shall not be used. 2.02 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards (Terminal Boards): Provided under Division 26 (by electrical contractor), unless specifically noted otherwise. 2.03 EQUIPMENT FRAMES/RACKS/CABINETS A. The contractor shall supply loc:kiricd c ubinels with the power distribution, patch panels, and wire management installed as shown on the drawings. B. 1-rack unit cable horizontal cable management units should be installed as shown in the dingrnm IT Room Rnc,.k Front View. Cable management units should be Panduit WMPLFSE horizontal cable management or substantially similar with approval of project manager. C. Cabinets should be Panduit N8212BE 42U tall lockable cabinet with side panels and internal vertical cable management, or substantially similar with approval of Owners Representative. 2.04 POWER DISTRIBUTION STRIPS A. Circuit breaker protected power distribution units shall be provided and installed in an A/B configuration on separate circuits (provided above the cabinets by the electrical contractor) at the rear of each locking cabinet, and a single unit attached to the rear of the-open-rack,.— B. Power distribution units for the rack and the cabinets shall be Panduit P221305M or substantially similar with approval of Owners Representative. 2.05 GROUNDING A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems." for grounding conductors and connectors. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A 2.06 LABELING A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 Errorl Reference source not found. 271100-4 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT AND PATHWAYS A. Entrance pathways shall comply with Division 26 Section 'Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." B. Comply with NECA 1. C. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms. D. Cable Runways in Equipment Rooms: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7. E. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. ic?[IRA e3Zi19M-01N1CeJ A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A. C. Refer to Division 27 Section "Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems" for additional requirements. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, cabling, and equipment complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. B. Label each equipment rack with its technology closet number at top (TC1, TC2, TC3, etc. —depending upon its location.). C. Labels shall be preprinted or computer -printed type. END OF SECTION Error! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 27 it 00 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 28 13 00 ACCESS CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Regulatory Requirements. B. System Description. C. Card Access and Door Hardware Equipment. D. Installation and Testing. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product bulletin, descriptive data, and shop drawings. B. Provide a line diagram which illustrates the interconnection of the controllers, and typical door connections. C. System installer shall be responsible for determining submittal requirements and for providing to local government agencies and authorities the required submittals, if any. D. System components shall be UL listed. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The following services shall be provided: 1. Furnish and install card readers, door hardware, (electric operators), request -to -exit devices, and miscellaneous equipment as required for the proper operation of the doors. 2. Prepare shop drawings including wiring diagrams for each door. 3. Install software and program the system controllers. 4. Test and terminate the cable at the equipment locations. 5. Start-up and debug the system until it is fully functional. 6. Provide training as specified in Section 3. 7. Provide cable, and equipment racks as necessary for a complete system. B. The new card access system for the New Hope Pool building shall be provided to match the existing S2 FX50-128 system at the New Hope City Hall and Police building. The new card access system shall be integrated into the New Hope networked card access system. C. The card access system shall provide regulated access through the building doors. The system shall be capable of producing computer generated color employee and visitor credentials for use with the card access system equipment. The system shall also record and store activities occurring in the facility as well as manage and track card reader activity. The card access system shall be integrated with the security system via output contacts to disable the security upon valid entry. ACCESS CONTROL © 2019 Stantec 1 193803447 28 13 00 - 1 D. Provide door hardware, (electric operators, request -to -exit devices), and on all doors shown on the plans to have electric strikes. Refer to drawings for doorways with electric strikes. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CARD ACCESS SYSTEM A. Card Access system shall be provided to match the existing system in operation in the New Hope City Hall and Police Building and as follows: 1. New Hope City Hall and Police building existing Card Access System is as follows: a. S2 Security S2 Netbox Enterprise FX50-128 as provided by Brothers Fire and Security (contact Greg Evans at 763-441-2290) B. The new Access Control system at the Pool Concessions Building shall be provided to match and be networked with the existing S2 Security S2 Netbox Enterprise FX50-128 as provided by Brothers Fire and Security (contact Greg Evans at 763-441-2290): 1. S2 Network Node a. Houses up to 7 S2 applications blades for access control, inputs, outputs and temperature probes. b. Support up to 14 doors or other access points. c. Interfaces with Wiegand, magnetic stripe and keypad readers. 2. S2 Access Control Application Blade a. Provides connections for up to two doors or other access points. b. Supports REX, DSM, door controller, alarms, card readers and other devices. c. Interfaces with Wiegand, magnetic stripe and keypad readers. C. Power supplies as required. D. Proximity Device Readers to match existing and as follows: 1. Indoor/outdoor construction, -22 degrees F to 150 degrees F operating range. 2. Lifetime warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. 3. Mounting holes to allow attachment directly to a single gang electrical box. 4. UL 294 lisIed 5. Audiovisual indication. 6. 5.5 inch to 9-inch typical read range. E. Proximity Devices to match existing and as follows: 1. Provide pricing for the following devices, actual number will be determined during construction: a. 25 Clamshell. b. 25 Graphic. c. 10 key fobs. 2. Compatible with proximity with card reader device. F. Voice dialout capabilities and dry contact, (rated 3A at 120VAC minimum), for future security alarm notification. G. SECURITY DOOR CONTACTS to match existing and as follows: 1. Recessed mounted, magnetic contacts, which are UL listed. 2. Contacts shall be rhoduim plated, SPDT rated 0.3 amp at 30 Vdc with screw terminals. H. Request to Exit Motion Detector to match existing and as follows: ACCESS CONTROL © 2019 Stantec 1 193803447 28 13 00 - 2 1. Motion detector as required for door access system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install equipment in locations shown on the Drawing. B. Provide all necessary appurtenances, including necessary cables, mounting brackets etc., for a complete and proper installation. C. Installation shall conform to manufacturers recommendations. D. All electric door hardware shall be furnished and installed by the card access system supplier and wired under this contract. Necessary power supplies with battery backup furnished with the door strikes shall be installed by the card access system supplier. E. Provide interface between the security system and the handicap door operators to allow the doors to open when the internal pushbutton is pressed at any time. The outside pushbutton shall only be allowed to operate either during business hours when the security on the door is disabled or the security system allows the door to open. 3.02 START-UP AND OPERATOR TRAINING A. A factory -trained technician shall be present when the system is put into service and shall certify to the Owners Representative that all equipment has been installed correctly and is operating properly. Technician shall make all modifications necessary to obtain proper operation of the system. C. The factory -trained technician shall instruct the Owners Representative personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the system. A minimum of 2 hours of training shall be provided l . 3 copies of a custom, Project specific training manual shall be provided before training. The manuals shall be bound in 3-ring binders to allow the CAR to make additional copies as required. The manual shall provide a detailed description of the system and instructions for troubleshooting the system. 2. Training date shall be coordinated with the CAR. Signed copies of the training log (included at the end of this Section), shall be completed and submitted to the Engineer for each training session. D. Record all Changes 1. Revise all wiring diagrams and schematic diagrams to show final installation. 2. Provide software CD's and licensing documents for all software in the system to the Owners Representative a. Complete documentation shall be provided for all software. b. Owners Representative shall be provided with an operating license for installation on 3 computers. A minimum of 3 sessions shall be licensed to access the system simultaneously. At least 1 license shall be a "development" package, allowing full access to programming and modifications. ACCESS CONTROL © 2019 Stantec 1 193803447 28 13 00 - 3 c. Installation of hardware and software on the Owners Representative's existing computers shall be coordinated with the Owners Representative to minimize interruption of the staff. 3.03 WARRANTY A. The system shall include a warranty 1 year from the date of acceptance or from first beneficial use. The warranty, excluding acts of nature, includes labor and materials for 1 year. ACCESS CONTROL O 2019 Stantec 1 193803447 28 13 00 - 4 TRAINING LOG Project: Card Access System Date: Training topic: Attendees: END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193803447 ACCESS CONTROL 281300-5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 28 16 11 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Intrusion Detection System. 1.02 REFERENCES A. National Electric Code, Article 760. B. National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72). C. Administrative Council for Terminal Attachments (ACTA): 1. ANSI/TIA-968-A-2002 Technical Requirements for Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network. D. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI C63.4 Methods of Measurement of Radio -Noise Emissions from Low -Voltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the Range of 9 kHz to 40 GHz. E. California State Fire Marshal (CSFM): 1. Title 19, California Code of Regulations, Building Material Listing Program (BML). F. Federal Communications Commission (FCC): 1. Title 47 C.F.R. Part 15; Class B - Radiated and Conducted Emissions. 2. Title 47 C.F.R. Part 68; rules governing the connection of Terminal Equipment (TE) to the Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN). G. The National Institute of Standards and Technology of the United States of America (NIST): 1. Federal Information Processing Standards Publications 197 (FIPS 197) -Advanced Encryption Standard (AES). H. International Organization For Standardization (ISO): 1. 9001 - Quality System. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment. 2. UL 294 - Access Control System Units. 3. UL 365 - Police Station Connected Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. 4. UL 609 - Local Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. 5. UL864 - Control Units and Accessories for fie Alarm Systems (Commercial Fire) . 6. UL 985 - Household Fire Warning System Units. 7. UL 1023 - Household Burglar Alarm System Units. 8. UL 1076 - Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. 9. UL 1610 - Central Station Burglar -Alarm Units. 10. UL 60950-1 - Information Technology Equipment - Safety. 11. UL 636 - Hold up alarms. Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. 9) 2019 Stantec 1193804337 28 16 11 -1 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit below items in conjunction with Master Specification Sections 01 33 00, Submittal Procedures. B. Provide certificates of compliance with Section 1.3, Quality Assurance. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's data, user and installation manuals for all equipment and software programs including computer equipment and other equipment required for complete Digital Alarm including: 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. D. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall provide details of proposed system and the work to be provided. Include point-to-point drawings of systems and wiring diagrams of individual devices. l . Detailed wiring diagrams and system description. 2. System device locations on architectural floor plans. 3. Full Schematic of system, including wiring information for all devices. E. Documentation to be submitted by the C ontraCtor upon completion of system installation: 1. "As-builts": Upon completion of installation, the Contractor shall prepare "as -built" drawings of the system. These "As-builts" shall be 30 inches by 42 inches (76 cm by 107 cm) format mylar roproducible drawings of each floor plan indicating exact device locations, panel terminations, cable routes and wire numbers as tagged and color - coded on the cable tag. a. Additionally, final point-to-point wiring diagrams of each type of device (on 30 inches by 42 inches (76 cm by 107 cm) format) shall be included in the "as-builts." b. "As-builts" shall be submitted to the Owner for approval prior to the system acceptance walk-through. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals: Three sets of operating manuals shall be provided explaining the operation and maintenance of the system. 3. Parts list. 4. Maintenance required and maintenance schedule. F. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. G. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and patterns. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualification: 1. The system shall be the standard product of one manufacturer, and the manufacturer shall have been in business manufacturing similar products for at least 5 years. 2. Manufacturer's Quality System: Registered to ISO 9001:2000 Quality Standard. B. Installer Qualification: 1. Minimum of five years experience installing access control, surveillance and security systems and devices. Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 2816 11 -2 2. After -sales support: The Contractor shall be a factory -authorized and trained dealer of the system and shall be factory -trained and certified to maintain/repair the system after system acceptance. C. System Requirements: 1. All equipment, systems, and materials furnished and installed under this Section shall be installed in accordance with the applicable standards of: a. National Codes: NEC, NFPA, UBC, BOCA, SBCCI, IBC, as applicable. b. Approvals and listings: UL, ULC, FM, ANSI SIA CP-01, CSFM, NYC-CoA, as applicable. c. Local Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ). 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers; and unharmed original identification labels. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. C. Protect store materials from environmental and temperature conditions following manufacturer's instructions. D. Handle and operate products and systems according to manufacturer's instructions. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 1.07 WARRANTY A. All components, parts, and assemblies supplied by the manufacturers and installed by the Contractor shall be warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of at least 12 months (parts and labor), commencing upon date of acceptance by Owner. A qualified factory -trained service representative shall provide warranty service. Service/Maintenance: l . System maintenance and repair of system or workmanship defects during the warranty period shall be provided by the Contractor free of charge (parts and labor). 2. Periodic testing of the system shall be carried out on a monthly or quarterly basis to ensure the integrity of the control panel, the sensing devices, and the telephone lines. 3. The installer shall correct any system defect within six hours of receipt of call from the Owner. 4. Extended service/maintenance agreements shall be offered by the Contractor for up to four years after the warranty expires. The agreement shall be renewable monthly, quarterly, or yearly. Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 28 16 11 - 3 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The intrusion detection system shall be Digital Monitoring Products, incorporated (DMP) XR150 Panel as provided by Brothers Fire and Security (contact Greg Evans at 763-441- 2290) : 2.02 COMPONENT ENCLOSURE A. Housings; power supply enclosures, terminal cabinets, control units, and other component housings, collectively referred to as enclosures shall be so formed and assembled as to be sturdy and rigid. 18 gauge steel door with a 20 gauge steel box frame for use with the X R 150. 2.03 ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS A. All system electronic components shall be solid-state type, mounted on printed circuit boards. Light duty relays and similar switching devices shall be solid-state type or electromechanical. The panel shall have an over current notification LED that lights when devices connected to the Keypad Bus and Loop Expansion LX-Bus(es) draw more current than the panel is rated for. When the over current LED lights, the Loop Expansion LX-Bus(es) and Keypad bus are shut down. 2.04 CONTROL UNIT A. A battery test shall be automatically performed to test the integrity of the standby battery. The test shall disconnect the standby battery from the charging circuit and place a load on the battery. This test shall be performed no more than every 180 seconds. —B.--The-control-unit-shall-be-cam. pable of -operating -and -supervising -notification— appliance--- - - -1- -.1-._I.J___-I_I.-. _:J.:...+:- _j-.4--4.:.. -4 -A .-.+.-. .•+..A r.r4 UCVIUtis us wCll U. ) UUUHCbbu UM: II Il Ilu II[ Ig UCIGl.1 Iul 1I UuVI-_u3 al lu Ul I IIII U&UIGIA �iipci vi7cu dual line digital communicator. C. Control unit must be "Flash ROM" updatable, and program must be held in non-volatile RAM. The panel shall be able to function while the update is in process. D. Control unit shall be capable of operating using an optional built in Encrypted Alarm Router for SCIF (Sensitive Compartmented Information Facility) application that is certified by NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) for 128-bit or 256-bit AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) Encryption communications. E. The optional built-in Encrypted Alarm Router shall be capable of compliance with ICD 705 Chapter 7 Intrusion Detection Systems (IDS) and UL 2050 standards. 2.05 REMOTE ANNUNCIATORS A. The system shall support a maximum of sixteen (16) supervised remote annunciators with the identical capabilities, functions and display layout. Operation of the remote annunciators shall be limited to authorized users by the use of a code or key. Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 28 16 11 - 4 B. The remote annunciators shall be capable of operating at a maximum wiring distance of 15,000 feet from the control unit on unshielded, non -twisted cable. 2.06 POWER SUPPLIES A. Power supplies for the control unit shall operate from 120 Vac, supplied at the respective protected areas. Standby batteries shall be supplied to power the system in the event of a utility power failure. Batteries shall be sized to provide 105 percent capacity for eight hours.. Standby batteries shall be sealed lead -acid. Power supplies shall be all Solid State. B. Controls shall be designed to maintain full battery charge when alternating current is available. Batteries shall be recharged to 85 percent capacity within 24 hours from battery use. The system shall be automatically transferred to battery power upon loss of alternating current power and return to alternating current power upon restoration. Intrusion alarms shall not be initiated during switch over; a signal shall be initiated upon failure of battery or alternating current power. C. Approved power supplies shall meet or exceed the following power supply model specifications: D. UL Listed DMP 505-12: 12Vdc 5 Amp with transformer and enclosure. 2.07 SOFTWARE A. A. The system shall interface with computer software with the capability to fully program the panel by connecting to the panel through: 1. Direct cable connection interface card 2. Receiver phone line connection 3. Standard phone line connection 4. Ethernet network connection 5. Network connection across the Internet 6. Cellular network connection using the 263C or 263H Cellular Communicators B. The system shall interface with computer software capable of locking down all controlled doors. C. C. The system shall interface with computer software capable of monitoring and logging all events. D. D. The system shall interface with computer software capable of exporting reports in the following file formats: Excelspreadsheet *.xls Text *.txt Rich Text *.rtf Comma -separated *.csv Windows Metafile *.wmf HTML document *.htm QuickRe ort *. rp E. E. The system shall interface with computer software capable of printing custom, filtered reports including: Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 2816 11 -5 All Events Door Access Granted Zone Action Door Access Denied Arming/Disarming Opening/Closing Schedule Changes Area Late to Close System Monitors User Code Changes System Events 2.08 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) A. Entre LiteTM: Shall have 16 doors included, and a maximum of four XR150/XR350/XR550 Series panels, personnel management, full reports, and event management. B. Shall have simple user management, with the ability to import users from existing databases. C. Shall be able to assign user access by group, facility or other parameters. D. Shall have drop down lists for devices, user data and other information to facilitate fast and accurate searches. E. Shall be able to view system status in one of a variety of views for simplified alarm monitoring management. F. Shall have the capability to customize reports for added flexibility. G. Alarm Keypads: 1. Provide alarm keypad as required. 2.09 SYSTEM INTERFACE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding: The Contractor shall properly earth ground the DACS to prevent electrostatic charges and other transient electrical surges from damaging the DACS panel. B. Primary power: The Contractor shall provide a dedicated 120 VAC power circuit to the Intrusion Detection System. C. Secondary power (standby battery): The Contractor shall provide adequate battery power as defined by the relevant application criteria, (UL 864 and UL 985 for alarm installations or NFPA 72 chapters for fire applications). Appropriate battery chargers shall be provided consistent with the battery back-up capacity. The most current accepted version of NFPA 72 and any applicable local codes or AHJ requirements must be met accordingly. D. Telephone interface: The control panel in the system shall be equipped with an optional phone line monitor and shall interface with the phone lines via RJ-31 X jacks for supervision of the telephone line connection. E. Ethernet Interface: The system shall include an integrated Ethernet interface module as the primary, or back-up means of communicating. Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMErrorl Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 2816 11 - 6 Wiring: The Contractor shall provide cables consistent with the manufacturer's recommendations. The following general guidelines shall be followed for wiring installation: 1. Wiring shall be appropriately color -coded with permanent wire markers. Copper conductors shall be used. 2. All signal cables provided under this contract shall be Class II, plenum -rated cable where required. Where subject to mechanical damage, wiring shall be enclosed in metal conduits or surface metallic raceway. 3. Data wires shall not be enclosed in conduit or raceways containing AC power wires. 4. Where EMI may interfere with the proper operation of the DACS circuits, twisted/shielded cable shall be used. 2.10 MOTION DETECTION A. Provide motion detection as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.11 DOOR CONTACTS A. Provide door contacts as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.12 ACCESSORIES A. Provide all accessories necessary for a complete and operable system. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Examine areas to receive devices and notify adverse conditions affecting installation or subsequent operation. B. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions are corrected. C. If preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. D. Ensure selected location is secure and offers protection from accidental damage. E. Location shall provide reasonable temperature and humidity conditions, free from sources of electrical and electromagnetic interference. F. Ensure power source is protected against accidental shutoff. G. Install all equipment and materials in accordance with the "current" recommendations of the manufacturer. The work shall also be in accordance with: 1. Installation criteria defined in these specifications and in the construction documents. 2. Factory Representative can be the Bosch Security Systems Inc Security Dealer. 3. Approved submittals. 4. Applicable requirements of referenced standards. H. The Contractor shall provide the following services as part of the contract: 1. Supervision of sub -contractors. 2. Coordination of other contractors for system -related work (electrical contractor, finish hardware contractor, architect, and general contractor). Error! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. 281611 -7 3. Attending site construction/coordination meetings. 4. Keeping updated construction drawings at the construction site. 5. Meeting construction deadlines per the construction schedule. Programming of the system shall include the following tasks: l . Programming system configuration parameters (hardware and software, zone/circuit numbers, communication parameters). 2. Programming operational parameters such as opening/closing reports and windows, system response text (custom English) displays of events, activation of relays that drive auxiliary devices, and identifying types of zones/loops. 3. Programming passcodes according to the authorities and functions defined by the owner. 4. Other system programming tasks required by the owner. These additional programming requirements shall be coordinated between the owner and the Contractor. 5. Operational Testing: The Contractor shall perform thorough operational testing and verify that all system components are fully operational. 6. Hard -copy System Printout: The Contractor shall submit a hard -copy system printout of all components tested and certify 100 percent operation indicating all devices/panels/units have passed the test criteria set forth by the manufacturer. 7. Acceptance Test Plan Form: An acceptance test plan form shall be prepared/provided by the Contractor prior to the ncceptnnce wnik-through. 8. This form shall include separate sections for each device/panel/unit as well as a column indicating the manufacturer's performance allowance/margin, a column indicating the result of the testing performed by the Contractor (pass/fail), and an empty column for recording findings during the walk-through. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Installation contractor shall submit a written test report that the system has been 100 percent tested and approved. Final test shall be witnessed by the Owner, Engineer, electrical contractor, chief security officer, and performed by the installation contractor. Final test report shall be received and acknowledged by the owner prior to request for final payment. B. Provide instruction to the owner's satisfaction with regard to proper use and operation of the system. C. Determine and report all problems to the manufacturer's customer service department. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. System maintenance and repair of system or workmanship defects during the warranty period shall be provided by the Contractor free of charge (parts and labor). B. Periodic testing of the system shall be carried out on a monthly or quarterly basis to ensure the integrity of the control panel, the sensing devices, and the telephone lines. C. The inslcallei skull uuneul uny syslern defect within six hours of receipt of call from the Owner. Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 2816 11 - 8 KKIMMICOMA 6 BU7c� 0 6, A. Demonstrate at final inspection that surveillance system and devices functions properly. 1. The Contractor upon completion of installation shall furnish training in the complete operation of the systems. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before substantial completion. END OF SECTION Error! Reference source not found. INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEMError! Reference source not found. © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 2816 11 - 9 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 28 23 00 CCTV SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This Section includes labor, material, equipment, and related services necessary to furnish, install, and connect digital cameras for the closed-circuit television system to an existing recording system in the New Hope City Hall and Police Building, complete with required devices and wiring connections as shown on the Drawings and as further specified herein. 1.02 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. Video surveillance equipment standard: Electronic industries association (EIA) standards, IEEE. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the Following: 1. Shop Drawings: a. Marked blueprints confirming locations of all system components. b. System drawings, diagrams, rack layouts and termination drawings. c. Materials list and backbox schedule (including any unique backboxes). d. Supply templates to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cut outs and mounting of equipment. 2. Product Data: a. Technical Data Sheets on each product, including finishes and dimensions. b. Description of system operation. 3. After operation of the equipment has been proved in the field, the Drawings shall be revised to show the "as installed" connections and copies shall be submitted for the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. 4. Contractor shall be responsible for determining submittal requirements and for providing to local government agencies and authorities the required submittals, if any. 1.04 INDOOR/OUTDOOR DAY/NIGHT NETWORK CAMERA A. The cameras shall be a Samsung PNO-9080R to match existing system in the New Hope City Hall / Police Building. B. 12 Megapixel. C. Max. 20fps @ 12M. D. Color: 0.3Lux@F1.6, B/W: OLux (IR LED on). E. 4.5 to 10mm (2.2x) motorized varifocal lens. F. H.265, H.264, MJPEG Support. CCTV SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 23 00 - 1 G. Day & Night (ICR), WDR (120dB), Simple focus, P-Iris. H. Motion detection, Defocus detection, Tampering. I. SD/SDHC/SDXC memory slot (Max, 120GB), NAS, Local PC support. J. Hallway view (Rotate 90 Degree / 270 Degree). K. WiseStream support, Digital auto tracking. L. -40 Degree C + 55 Degree C (-40 Degree F + 131 Degree F) Startup shall be done at above -35 Degree C (-31 Degree F). M. Ingress Protection: IP66. N. The power source for the camera shall be PoE. O. Provide all mounting hardware required for either wall mounting or pole mounting and maintain the IP66 rating. 1.05 INDOOR/OUTDOOR DAY/NIGHT 360-DEGREE CAMERA A. The cameras shall be Samsung PNF-901 ORV to match existing system in the New Hope City Hall / Police Building. B. 12 Megapixel. C. H.265, H.264, MJPEG Codec. D. Variable View Mode (Fisheye, Single Panorama, Double Panorama, Quad View ETC). E. On Board Dewarping, Digital PTZ (16X) / Bi-Directional Audio. F. True WDR (120dB), WiseStream. G. People Counting, Heatpad, Defocus Detection. H. Micro SD/ SDHC/ SDXXC (Max 128 GB, PoE. I. -40 Degree C + 55 Degree C (-40 Degree F + 131 Degree F) Startup shall be done at above -35 Degree C (-31 Degree F). J. Ingress Protection: IP66. K. The power source for the camera shall be PoE. L. Provide all mounting hardware required for ceiling stem mounted and to maintain IP66 rating. 1.06 MID -SPAN ENCLOSURE A. NEMA 4 pole mounted enclosure. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CCTV SYSTEM 282300-2 B. Fabricated from 14-gauge carbon steel. C. Continuously welded seams ground smooth, no holes or knockouts. D. External mounting feet top and bottom for mounting to a pole. E. Continuous -hinge cover secured on three sides with stainless steel screws and clamps to ensure a watertight seal. F. Cover shall be removable by pulling stainless steel hinge pin. G. Grounding provisions provided. H. Lockable enclosure. I. Sized for equipment provided in the enclosure as follows: 1. Rugged Managed Ethernet Switch and power supply. 2. 20A, 120V Receptacle Fiber Optic Breakout box. 3. Provide the required separation for control voltage and 120V. J. Provide wiring required per manufacturer's recommendation. 1.07 RUGGED MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH A. 8 Ethernet Ports (10/100BaseTX) all External 802.3af / 802.3at compliant PoE. Ports (5) 1. 8 Ethernet Port (10/10013ase TX) all External 802.3af / 802.3at compliant PoE. (5). 2. Fiber optic gigabit port. (5). Cyber Security Features l . Multi -level user passwords. 2. SSH/SSL (128-bit encryption). 3. Enable/disable ports, MAC based port security. 4. Port based network access control (802.1 x). 5. VLAN (802.1 Q) to segregate and secure network traffic. 6. RADIUS centralized password management. 7. SNMPv3 authentication and 56-bit encryption. C. Rugged for Reliability in Harsh Environments 1. Immunity to EMI and heavy electrical surges. 2. Meets IEEE 1613 (electric utility substations). 3. Exceeds IEC 61850-3 (electric utility substations). 4. Exceeds IEC 61800-3 (variable speed drive systems). 5. Exceeds IEC 61000-6-2 (generic industrial). 6. Exceeds NEMA TS-2 (traffic control equipment). 7. 40 to +85°C operating temperature (no fans). D. Power supply 1. Provide power supply (supplies) as required. E. Panel mounted as shown on the drawings. F. Cast aluminum enclosure. CCTV SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 23 00 - 3 G. RuggedSwitch RS900GP, or equal. PART 2 EXECUTION 2.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Install all CCTV system wiring in a separate conduit system. Wiring shall be as required by the manufacturer and color coded as recommended by the manufacturer. 1. This shall include the wiring in the light poles. Provide a conduit system in each light pole to separate the CCTV system wiring from the lighting wiring. B. Low voltage transformers, relays, enclosures, and all other components required for a complete installation shall be provided. C. Visually inspect wire and cable for faulty insulation prior to installation. termination. Protect wire and cable from kinks. D. Provlde grommets and strain relief fittings where riec;essury lu uvuid ubrasion of wire and excess tension on wire and cable. E. Video test shots shall be used to determine the optimum location of all cameras. This shall be done with the Owners Representntive. F. All non -operator, control equipment shall be rack -mounted with sufficient clearance to meet all applicable codes and to facilitate observation and testing. Securely fasten with appropriate fittings to ensure positive grounding, free of ground loops throughout the entire system. Units shall be installed parallel and square to building lines, unless otherwise indicated. All wires shall be gathered and tied up to create an orderly installation. G. Install components per manufacturer's recommendations. Components installed in a false ceiling shall include appropriate mounting hardware and shall have 4 individual support strands attached to deck and shall not rest on the grid or grid support structures. 11. Programming shall be included for each of the equipment listed in this specification to meet the performurnce rec luirernents lisle In II -le sysiei n descriplion of thus specili allul I section and for a complete an operable system. 2.02 IDENTIFICATION A. All cables, wires, wiring forms, terminal blocks, and terminals shall be identified by labels, tags, or other permanent markings. The markings shall indicate the function, source, and destination of all cabling, wiring, and terminals. B. Color coded cables shall have an identifying legend posted at the termination point. Provide cable log. 2.03 START-UP RESPONSIBILITY PHASE A. The Cunlractor shall initiate system operation. Competent start-up personnel shall be provided on each consecutive working day until the system is fully functional and ready to start the testing phase. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CCTV SYSTEM 282300-4 B. Properly ground each piece of electronic equipment prior to applying power. Any equipment damaged due to improper ground shall be replaced by the Electrical Contractor at their expense. C. Properly ground all shielded wire shields to the appropriate earth ground at the head end only, not at the remote device end. D. All systems, equipment, and devices shall be in full and proper adjustment and operation and properly labeled and identified. E. All materials shall be neat, clean, and unmarred and parts securely attached. F. All surfaces shall be restored to their original appearance and condition after installation. G. Contractor shall notify the Owners Representative when the start-up phase is complete and the system is functioning as required per specifications. The CAR will then notify the contractor that the aiming phase is ready to begin. 2.04 AIMING PHASE A. The contractor shall notify the Owners Representative when all cameras are operating. B. The Owners Representative will review final camera views, and approve or provide changes to camera views to be made by the contractor. C. The contractor shall aim the cameras as directed by the Owners Representative. D. Contractor shall notify the Owners Representative when the aiming phase is complete and the system is functioning as required per specifications. The Owners Representative will then notify the contractor that the testing phase is ready to begin. 2.05 TESTING PHASE A. A factory authorized service engineer of the security system manufacturer shall: 1. Verify that all wiring connections are complete and correct. 2. After installation and before termination, all wiring and cabling shall be checked and tested to ensure there are no grounds, opens, or shorts on any conductors or shields. 3. Test for and eliminate ground loops that may result from use of different power sources for various components. 4. Test for and eliminate any picture roll during video switching. 5. All functions and features to be tested as a complete system and corrections made at no cost to the Owners Representative. B. Contractor shall notify the Owners Representative when testing phase is complete and the system is functioning as required per specifications. C. The contractor shall then coordinate with the Owners Representative a time for a testing phase punch list. D. Upon completion of the punch list and verification that all punch items have been resolved by the contractor the Owners Representative will notify the contractor that the testing phase of the project has been completed and that the contractor is ready to start the record drawings phase of the project. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CCTV SYSTEM 282300-5 2.06 RECORD DRAWINGS PHASE A. The Contractor shall submit the complete Record Drawings. These Drawings shall include: l . Installer prepared wiring diagrams, including terminal strip layout and identification, and wire termination and tagging for all conductors. 2. Locations for all major equipment components installed under this Specification. 3. Complete Riser diagrams. 4. As-builts on originals provided in AutoCAD format on CD-ROM. B. Contractor shall deliver the record plans to the Owners Representative. Upon receipt of the record plans by the Owners Representative and verification of the compliance with the above requirements for the record plans the Owners Representative will notify the contractor that the record plans phase of the project has been completed and the contractor is ready to start the system acceptance requirements phase of the project. 2.07 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS PHASE A. Before final acceplance of Work, the Contractor shall perform and/or deliver each of the following in the order. B. The Contractor shall deliver 3 complete "Systems Operation and Maintenance Manuals" in 3 ring binders, Si7f-d to hold the material below plus 50 percent excess. Each manual shall contain but not be limited to: l . Documentation of the startup phase. 2. Documentation of the testing phase. 3. Documentation of the record plan phase. 4. A Statement of Guarantee, including date of termination and the name and phone number of the person to be called in the event of equipment failure. Advertising brochures (cut sheets) for each piece of equipment. 5. A set of operational procedures for the overall system that includes all required Owners Representative activities and allows for Owners Representative operation of all system capabilities. This procedure shall fully address all Owners Representative established system operating objectives. 6. A list of every device by manufacturer, model, and sorial number shall be provided. This list shall include IP uddiesses, User Name, Make and Model number, Serial Numbers, Passwords, etc. C. Upon receipt of the above items by the Owners Representative the contractor shall schedule a system acceptance punch list with the Owners Representative for final acceptance. D. Upon completion of the punch list and verification that all punch items have been resolved by the contractor the Owners Representative will notify that the system acceptance requirements phase of the project has been completed and the contractor is ready to start the Operating and Maintenance Manuals phase of the project. 2.08 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS PHASE A. Operating cane Muir ilenarice Manuals 1. Include all the information provided with the submittal packages a. Shop drawings. b. Start-up documentation. c. Testing documentation. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CCTV SYSTFM 282300-6 d. Record drawing documentation. e. System acceptance documentation. f. All documentation shall include modifications made which reflect the final installation. 2. Date the manuals with the day, month, and year they are provided to the Owners Representative /Engineer. 3. Provide manufacturers' user manuals. 4. Provide 3 hard (paper) copies in a 3-ring binder. Provide a table of contents and each piece of equipment or sub -system shall be tabbed. 5. Provide 2 digital copies in a PDF format saved to a compact disk. The saved files shall be clearly identified and organized in a similar manner to the hard copies a. Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owners Representative the data saved on the disks is accessible and neatly organized. b. Provide a table of contents which utilizes bookmarks. The bookmark shall take the reader to a specific page when the reader clicks on the desired title in the table of contents. 2.09 WARRANTY SERVICE A. The Contractor shall employ a factory trained service organization. This organization shall have a minimum of 5 years' experience in servicing Video Surveillance Systems and equipment of the type installed under this Project. B. Fully qualified repair and maintenance personnel shall be available on a 24 hour a day basis, 365 days a year with 4-hour maximum response time for emergency service. C. Normal service shall be defined as minor repairs and/or adjustments. Service of this nature shall be provided at no cost to the Owners Representative during normal business hours, which are between 7 A.M. and 4 P.M., Monday through Friday. D. Emergency service shall be available for emergencies defined as critical equipment not being functional. Emergency service shall respond within a 4-hour period 24 hours per day, 7 days per week. A list of critical equipment will be developed and coordinated by the Contractor for the Owners Representative. E. The system shall include a warranty for 2 years from the date of acceptance. The warranty, excluding acts of nature, includes labor and materials for 2 years for normal and emergency services. END OF SECTION CCTV SYSTEM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 23 00 - 7 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 28 31 00 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire Detection System 1. Control panel. 2. Photoelectric smoke detectors. 3. Remote annunciator. B. Signaling devices. C. Installation. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NFPA 71 - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Signaling Systems for Central Station Service. C. NFPA 72A - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Local Protective Signaling Systems for Guard's Tour, Fire Alarm and Supervisory Service. D. NFPA 72B - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Auxiliary Protective Signaling Systems for Fire Alarm Service. E. NFPA 72C - Installation, Maintenance, and Use of Remote Station Protective Signaling Systems. F. NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product bulletin, descriptive data, and shop drawings as specified in Division 01. B. Complete schematic (elementary) and wiring diagrams shall be provided for the interconnection of all electrical components furnished 1. Diagrams shall apply to the actual equipment furnished; typical diagrams are not acceptable. If standard diagrams are provided, all items which do not apply to the equipment shall be crossed out. 2. All internal and external connection points shall be numbered on the diagrams and on the components. A given number shall be used for only 1 connection point which may preclude the use of component terminal numbers. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 1 3. After operation of the equipment has been proved in the field, the Drawings shall be revised to show the "as installed" connections; and copies shall be submitted for the Operation and Maintenance Manuals. C. Contractor shall be responsible for determining submittal requirements and for providing to local government agencies and authorities the required submittals, if any. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The Fire Alarm System shall be Siemens Building Technologies FC901-U3 as provided by Brothers Fire and Security (contact Greg Evans at 763-441-2290) to match existing fire alarm control panels. 2.02 CONTROL PANEL A. The fire alarm control panel shall be microprocessor based using multiple microprocessors throughout the system providing rapid processing of smoke detector and other initiation device information to control system output functions. B. There shall be a watchdog circuit, which shall verify the system processors and the software program. Problems with either the processors or the system program within the panel shall activate a trouble signal. C. The system shall have a capacity of 50 addressable devices, which may be divided in any ratio on two separate, isolated Class B circuits or on one Class A circuit. D. The system shall be capable of supporting unshielded wiring applications. E. System Components: l . The on board microprocessor provides the system with the ability to function even if the main microprocessor fails. LEDs on the board shall provide annunciation for the following; Power, Ground Fault, Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory, and Audibles On/Silenced. 2. The Signaling Line Circulls (SLC) slIUII be lesledfor opens, shorts and oiiiiiiviiicuiivn$ with all addressable devices installed before connection to the control panel. Systems without this capability shall have a test panel installed for initial testing to eliminate any possible damage short term or long term to the control panel. After initial testing replace the test panel and proceed with complete testing. 3. The Main Operator Interface shall have the ability to view events, acknowledge, silence, and reset the system. Also, front panel programming shall be allowed at the main operator interface. 4. The Remote Operator Interface shall have the ability to view events, acknowledge, silence, and reset the system. 5. The Main System Board shall contain 2 Class B NAC circuits or 1 Class A NAC circuit rated at 2.5 amps combined, with power -limited outputs. The circuits shall be isolated and independently supervised. There shall be at least 6 unique codes/signals for each circuit based on system logic. These signals shall be Temporal Code 3 (Evacuation), Temporal Code 4 (CO alarrrl), Sleudy, Muiul i Tirne 120ppm, March Time 60ppn'l, and March Time 30ppm. 6. The control panel shall be equipped with four Form C relays for alarm, trouble, supervisory, and programmable output. All power limited field wiring shall be separated from all non -power limited internal wiring per NEC requirements. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 2 F. System response time from alarm to output shall be an average of three (3) seconds. G. The main system processor shall have Flash memory for downloading the latest firmware. H. Passwords: 1. Technician Level Password - There shall be a 4 character password that a user must enter into the control panel in order to perform such maintenance- and control - related functions at the panel as: a. Arming and disarming devices. b. Activating, deactivating or modifying detector ASD and sensitivity settings. c. Activating and deactivating the History Log function, and deleting obsolete entries. d. Changing the system time and date. 2. Maintenance Level Password - There shall be a 4 character password that a user must enter into the control panel in order to access the panel's reporting functions and walk -test functions. 3. Acknowledge, Silence/Unsilence, and Reset Access - There shall be a key required to open a locked cabinet that a system user must use in order to acknowledge events, turn silenceable audibles and visuals on and off, and perform panel resets. Software Modifications: The system structure and software shall place no limit on the type or extent of software modifications on -site. Modification of software shall not require power -down of the system or loss of system fire protection while modifications are being made. Systems that require the use of external programmers or change of EPROMs are not acceptable. Logic: The fire alarm system shall support generic functions that deal with binary states (True/False, high/low), and produce desired outputs from one or more binary inputs (for example, alarm outputs from detector or manual station inputs). AND, OR, NOT, Any N, Latches, Activation Delay, and Deactivation Delay are generic functions. Generic functions can be used as inputs to other functions. The system shall support 500 logic functions. K. History: The system shall store 1000 events in history. The history buffer shall incorporate FIFO (first in -first out) event management. L. Reports: l . The system shall have the ability to provide a system history report. 2. History reports shall provide Address, History Type, Description, Time & Date and Custom Message. The following event types shall be reported: a. Alarm events b. Supervisory events. c. Trouble events. d. Status changes. e. Alarm verification. f. System Reset. g. Event Acknowledgements. h. Sensitivity Changes. i. Time Changes. j. Menu Logins. k. ASD Changes. I. Walktest. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 3 2.03 POWER SUPPLY A. The system Power Supply shall be 170 Watt, 6-amp that provides 24 VDC power for system operation. The power supply shall be filtered and regulated. The power supply provides power for all system operation, including signaling line circuits, notification appliance circuits, auxiliary power, battery charger, and all optional modules The power supply shall be rated for 120/240 VAC 50/60 Hz. The module shall be model number FP2011-U1. B. The battery charger shall be able to charge the system batteries up to 18 AH batteries. C. Transfer from AC to battery power shall be instantaneous when AC voltage drops to a point where it is not sufficient for normal operation. 2.04 SYSTEM ENCLOSURE A. Shall be located where shown on the drawings. B. Indoor wall mounted. C. Size as required for equipment provided. 2,05 INTELLIGENT INITIATING DEVICES A. General 1. All initiation devices shall be insensitive to initiating loop polarity. Specifically, the devices shall be insensitive to plus/minus voltage connections. B. Smoke Detectors - Standard Addressable H-Series 1. The detector shall be guaranteed in writing not to false alarm when configured by the factory trained certified technician. The detector must provide up to 11 different environmental algorithms that allow the detector to provide superior false alarm immunity without the need for additional alarm verification delays. 2. The detector shall have a multicolor LED to streamline system maintenance/inspection ---by-plainly-indicating-detectorstatus -as-follows: green -for -normal -operation, -amber -for - maintenance required, red for alarm. 3. The multi -criteria smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector with a r)roarammable heat detector. Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation and sampling assembly installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. The detector communications shall allow the detector to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4) seconds. So as to minimize the effort required by the installing and maintenance technician to appropriately configure the detector to ensure optimal system design, the detectors shall be programmable as application specific. Application settings shall be selected in software for a minimum of eleven environmental fire profiles unique to the devices installed location. 4. The detector shall be designed to eliminate the possibility of false indications caused by dust, moisture, RFI/EMI, chemical fumes and air movement while factoring in conditions of ambient temperature rise, obscuration rate changes and hot/cold smoke phenomenon into the alarm decision to give the earliest possible real ul arrrl condition report. 5. The intelligent smoke detector shall be capable of providing three distinct outputs from the control panel. The outputs shall be from an input of smoke obscuration, a thermal condition or a combination of obscuration and thermal conditions. The detector shall © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-4 be designed to eliminate calibration errors associated with field cleaning of the chamber. 6. The detector shall support the use of a relay, or LED remote indicator without requiring an additional software address. Low profile, white case shall not exceed 2.5 inches of extension below the finish ceiling. 7. For the detector where required, there shall be available a locking kit and detector guard to prevent unauthorized detector removal. 8. The smoke detector shall be model number HFP-11. 9. Where required, there shall be available a programmable remote lamp configurable to remotely duplicate the on -board LED status of another system device. It shall be model ILED-H. C. Smoke Detectors - Standard Addressable Detectors: 1. The smoke detectors must provide at least 3 environmental parameter sets to assist ien device sensitivity configuration. 2. The detectors shall have a tri-color LED to streamline system maintenance/inspection by plainly indicating detector status as follows: green for normal operation, amber for maintenance required, red for alarm. 3. The detector shall be RoHS-compliant: it shall meet standards for Reduction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) by reduction in lead content and other restricted substances. 4. The detectors shall be UL listed for operation in a 95 percent relative humidity (RH) environment. 5. The detectors shall be designed to eliminate calibration errors associated with field cleaning of the chamber. 6. The detectors shall support the use of a relay, or LED remote indicator without requiring an additional software address. Low profile, white case shall not exceed 2.5 inches of extension below the finish ceiling. 7. For the detectors where required, there shall be available a locking kit and detector guard to prevent unauthorized detector removal. 8. Available models: 9. OH921. Multi -Criteria incorporating 1 Optical sensor and 1 Thermal sensor with an operating temperature range of 3 degrees F to 100 degrees F. Available in four parameter sets. Polarity insensitive installation wiring. Three color LED. 10. OP921. Photoelectric Smoke detector with an operating temperature range of 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F. Available in three parameter sets. Polarity insensitive installation wiring. Three color LED. D. Heat Detectors - Addressable 1. Thermal Detectors shall be rated at 135 degrees fixed temperature and 15 degrees per minute rate of rise. Detectors shall be constructed to compensate for the thermal lag inherent in conventional type detectors due to the thermal mass, and alarm at the set point of 135 degrees Fahrenheit. The choice of alarm reporting as a fixed temperature detector or a combination of fixed and rate of rise shall be made in system software and be changeable at any time without the necessity of hardware replacement. 2. The detectors furnished shall have a listed spacing for coverage up to 2,500 square feet and shall be installed according to the requirements of NFPA 72 for open area coverage. The thermal detector shall be model number HFPT-1 1. 3. Model H1921 heat detector shall have the following temperature settings: a. Fixed temperature at 13 degrees F, 145 degrees F, 155 degrees F, 165 degrees F, 174 degrees F. b. Rate of Rise at 15 degrees F/ min (8.3 degrees C) at 135 degrees F (57 degrees C). FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 5 c. Rate of Rise at 15 degrees F/ min (8.3 degrees C) at 174 degrees F (79 degrees C). d. Low temperature warning at 40 degrees F (4.4 degrees C). E. Duct Smoke Detectors - Addressable 1. For duct detector applications, the smoke detector shall be an intelligent digital photoelectric detector. Detectors shall be listed for use as open area protective coverage, in duct installation and sampling assembly installation and shall be insensitive to air velocity changes. 2. The detector communications shall allow the detector to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within four (4) seconds. The detector shall be mounted in a duct detector housing listed for that purpose. The duct detector shall support the use of a remote test switch, relay or LED remote indicator. The duct detector shall be supplied with the appropriate sampling tubes to fit the installation. 3. Where duct detectors are exposed to the weather a weatherproof enclosure shall be available. A NEMA-3R and NEMA-4X option shall be available. The duct housing cover shall include a test port for functional testing of the detector without cover removal. The duct housing shall include a cover removal switch capable of indicating cover removal status to the fire alarm control panel. 4. The intelligent duct detector shall have a model number from the FDBZ-Series. Where required there shall be available a duct housing with an on -board relay. Also where required, there shall be a standalone housing available with its own power supply and tost/roset switch that does not require connection to a fire alarm control panel. It shall be model FBZ492-PR. 5. Duct smoke detector housing shall allow use in duct systems with air velocity ranging morn 100 to 4,000 feet per minute, within temperature ranges of 3 degrees F to 120 degrees F per minute, and with relative humidity ranging from 0 to 95 percent. 6. Duct Housings and Accessories: a. FDBZ492 Global Air Duct Housing for Conventional and Addressable Detectors b. FDBZ492-R Global Air Duct Housing for Addressable P2 Detectors with Relay Application c. FDBZ492-R Global Air Duct Housing for Conventional Detectors with Relay Application d. FDBZ492-PR Global Air Duct Housing for Conventional Detectors with Relay Application and Built-in Power Source e. FDBZ-WP Weather-Proot housing to accommodate all versions of Global Air Duct Housings. f Fr1R7-RTI RamntP TPct I mmn fnr (-nnvPntinnal Detectors. Detector Bases - Addressable 1. Detector bases shall be low profile twist lock type with screw clamp terminals and self - wiping contacts. Bases shall be installed on an industry standard, 4 inch square or octagonal electrical outlet box. 2. Multi -Criteria Fire Detector Model OOHC941 shall be listed as providing CO detection in duct application. 3. The model number for the standard base shall be DB-1 1 - 6 inch Version. 4. The model number for the standard base shall be DB-1 1 E - 4 inch Version. G. Manual Pull Stations - Addressable 1. Provide addressable manual stations where shown on the drawings, to be flush or surface mounted as required. Manual stations shall contain the intelligence for reporting address, identity, alarm and trouble to the fire alarm control panel. The © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-6 manual station communications shall allow the station to provide alarm input to the system and alarm output from the system within less than four (4) seconds. 2. The manual station shall be equipped with terminal strip and pressure style screw terminals for the connection of field wiring. Surface mounted stations where indicated on the drawings shall be mounted using a manufacturer's prescribed matching red enamel outlet box. 3. The double action pull station shall be model number HMS-D. 4. Where required, there shall also be available pull stations with break glass, capable of explosion proof installation, capable of weatherproof installation, reset key operation, and metal housings. H. Addressable Interface Devices 1. Addressable Interface Devices shall be provided to monitor contacts for such items as water -flow, tamper, and PIV switches connected to the fire alarm system. These interface devices shall be able to monitor a single or dual contacts. An address will be provided for each contact. Where remote supervised relay is required the interface shall be equipped with a SPDT relay rated for 4 amps resistive and 3.5 amps inductive. The addressable interface modules shall be model number HTRI or FDCIO Series. 2. Where needed, a Conventional Zone Module shall connect to the Signal Line Circuit, which will allow the use of conventional initiation devices. This module shall have the ability to support up to 15 conventional smoke detectors and an unlimited number of contact devices. This module shall also be capable of monitoring Linear Beam detectors and conventional Flame detectors. Where required, there shall be an intrinsically safe detection solution for NEMA defined intrinsically safe installations (model DI-31S with ISI-1) compatible with the conventional zone module. The module shall be model HZM. 3. Single Device Damper Monitoring and Control: A single HTRI switch input shall be able to monitor all 3 states of a damper- open, closed, and in transit. A single HTRI-R shall be able to fully control a damper (through the relay connected to the motor control) while also using its switch input for monitoring all 3 states of the damper. 4. Model FDC10422 addressable input/output module shall be insensitive to polarity and shall have capability for up to 4 separate inputs (Class B) or 2 separate Class A inputs and 4 separate outputs (Class B). 5. Model HCP addressable control point shall provide remote, independent control of any of the following: a. A notification appliance circuit (NAC). 2.06 DEVICE PROGRAMMING UNIT A. Device Programming Unit: The programming tool shall program the intelligent devices with addresses. The unit shall test the device to respond to its address. Dipswitches and rotary switches shall not be acceptable. The programmer shall be model DPU with carrying case. The programmer shall also be capable of testing the loop for ground fault prior to connection to the panel. An optional printer shall be available to print device labels for each device as it is programmed. 2.07 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES A. Series LFS - Low Frequency Sounders 1. Notification appliances shall be Siemens Series LFS sounders. 2. Sounders shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 to meet the NFPA 72 (Fire) and NFPA 720 (CO Life Safety) requirements for sleeping rooms. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 M FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 283100-7 3. Low profile sounder -only design. 4. Selectable Tones (Temporal 3, Temporal 4, or Continuous). 5. Sounders capable of synchronized coded output from fire alarm control panel (FRCP) notification appliance circuit when set to "Continuous" Series MH115 AC Horn l . AC horns shall be Series MH115, or approved equal. 2. Models shall be UL 464 Listed for Fire Protective Service, and shall include a die-cast metal housing to protect the horn mechanism. 3. Sound output shall be 95 dBA minimum at 10 feet. 4. Mounting options shall include surface mounting for indoor or outdoor applications and semi -flush for indoor applications. 5. All models shall have screw terminal inputs for in / out field wiring. 6. The finish shall be textured enamel. 7. All notification appliances shall be listed for "Special Applications." C. Series MH - Mini Horn Appliances 1. Notification appliance shall be a Series MH, or approved equal. 2. Notification appliance shall be electronic, and shall have field -selectable settings for Temporal (Code 3) or continuous horn and support coded -systems operation. 3. The anechoic sound pressure measurement on Temporal (Code 3) and Continuous Horn settings shall each be 87 dBA minimum at 24 VDC, 4. All models shall have provision for standard reverse polarity -type supervision and IN / OUT wiring using terminals that accept # 12 to # 18 AWG wiring. 5. The appliances shall be mounted indoors, and mount on standard, single -gang electrical back boxes requiring no additional trim plates or adapters. 6. All notification appliances shall be listed for "Special Applications." D. Series HIS - Horn and Horn Strobe Appliances 1. Audible / visual notification appliance shall be Series HS Horn Strobe and standalone Horn Appliances or approved equals. 2. Series HS Horn Strobe and standalone Horn Appliances shall meet and be listed for: 3. UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing -Impaired for Indoor Fire Protection -Service) . 4. Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signalingj. 5. Horn strobe shall be listed for indoor use and shall meet the requirement of FCC Part 15 - ( ass B. 6. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). 7. Series HS Horn Strobe and standalone Horn Appliances shall have a minimum of three (3) field selectable setting for dBA levels, and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs. 8. Series HS shall be of low -current design. 9. Strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated Input Voltage Range, and shall incorporate a Xenon flashcube enclosed in a rugged LexanO lens. 10. Strobe intensity, where Multi -Candela appliances are specified, shall have field - selectable settings, and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 for: a. 15/30/75/ 110cd. b. 135/ 185cd. 11. The selector switch for selecting the candela setting shall be tamper resistant FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 8 12. Synchronization is possible when using the DSC sync modules, Siemens Cerberus0 PRO FC901, PAD-3 or PAD-4 power supply with built-in sync protocol. 13. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. 14. The strobes shall revert to a non -synchronized flash -rate, if the sync module or Power Supply should fail to operate (i.e. - contacts remain closed). 15. All notification appliances shall listed for Special Applications: a. Strobes are designed to flash at 1-flash-per-second minimum over their "Regulated Input Voltage Range." 16. All candela ratings represent minimum -effective Strobe intensity, based on UL Standard 1971. E. Series NS / NH - NS Horn Strobes and NH Horns 1. Series NS appliances shall meet and be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing -Impaired for Indoor Fire Protection Service). 2. Series NH Horn shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). 3. Horn strobe shall be listed for indoor use, and shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 - Class B. 4. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). 5. Audible portion of the appliance shall have a minimum of two (2) field -selectable settings for dBA levels (90 and 95 dBA), and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible output. 6. Strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated Input Voltage Range, and shall incorporate a Xenon flashcube enclosed in a rugged LexanO lens. 7. Series NS shall be of low -current design. 8. Strobe intensity - where ceiling mount, Multi -Candela appliances are specified - shall have field -selectable settings, and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 for: a. 15/30/75/95cd. b. 115/117cd. 9. The selector switch for selecting the candela setting shall be tamper resistant. 10. Synchronization is possible when using the DSC sync modules, Siemens Cerberus0 PRO FC901, PAD-3 or PAD-4 power supply with built-in sync protocol. 11. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. 12. The strobes shall revert to a non -synchronized flash -rate, if the sync module or Power Supply should fail to operate (i.e. - contacts remain closed). 13. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation. 14. Series NS Horn Strobes and NH horn shall incorporate a Universal Mounting Plate that shall allow mounting to a single -gang, double -gang, 4-inch square, 100mm European type back boxes, or the SHBBS surface back box. 15. If required, an NATP (Notification Appliance Trim Plate) shall be provided. 16. All notification appliances shall listed for Special Applications: a. Strobes are designed to flash at 1-flash-per-second minimum over their "Regulated Input Voltage Range." 17. All candela ratings represent minimum -effective Strobe intensity, based on UL Standard 1971. 18. Series NS Strobe products are listed under UL Standard 1971 for indoor use with a temperature range of 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F (0 degrees C to 49 degreesC) and maximum humidity of 93 percent (± 2 percent). 19. Series NH horns are listed under UL Standard 464 for audible signal appliances (Indoor use only) FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 9 M F. Series AS / AH - Audible Strobe Appliances and AH Audibles 1. Notification appliances shall be Siemens CerberusOO PRO Series AS Audible Strobe appliances and Series AH Audible appliances or approved equals 2. Series AS Audible be listed for UL Standard 1971 (Emergency Devices for the Hearing - Impaired for Indoor Fire Protection Service). 3. Series AH Audible shall be UL Listed under Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). 4. AS Audible and AH audible shall both meet the requirement of FCC Part 15 - Class B. 5. All inputs shall be compatible with standard reverse polarity supervision of circuit wiring by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). 6. The audible portion of the appliance shall have a minimum of three (3) field -selectable settings for dBA levels, and shall have a choice of continuous or temporal (Code 3) audible outputs. 7. Strobe portion of the appliance shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second over the Regulated Input Voltage Range, and shall incorporate a Xenon flashcube enclosed in a rugged Lexan@ lens. 8. Series AS shall be of low -current design. 9. Strobe intensity, where Multi -Candela appliances are specified, shall have field - selectable settings, and shall be rated per UL Standard 1971 for: a. 15/30/75/110cd. b. 135/185cd. 10. Synchronization is possible when using the DSC sync modules, Siemens Cerberus0 PRO FC901, PAD 3 or PAD 4 power supply with built-in sync protocol. 11. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. 12. The strobes shall revert to a non -synchronized flash -rate, if the sync module or Power Supply should rail to operate (i.e. - contacts remain closed). 13. The appliance shall also be designed so that the audible signal may be silenced while maintaining strobe activation when used with Siemens Cerberus0 PRO synchronization, 14. The Series AS Audible Strobe and Series AH Audible shall incorporate a Patented Universal Mounting Plate that shall allow mounting to a single -gang, double -gang, 4- inch square, 100mm European type back boxes, or the SHBBS surface back box 15. All notification appliances shall listed for Special Applications. 16. Strobes are designed to flash at 1-flash-per-second minimum over their "Regulated Input Voltage Range." -17. All candela ratings represent -minimum -effective Strobe-intensity,-based-on-UL - Standard 1971. G. CPriP¢ 7H R_ 7R — StrnhPc Hnrnc Hnrn/.Wr)hPe 1. Audible/Visual notification appliances shall be listed for indoor use, and shall meet the requirements of FCC Part 15 - Class B. 2. Appliances shall be listed under UL Standard 1971 (Standard for Safety Signaling Devices for Hearing Impaired) and UL Standard 464 (Fire Protective Signaling). 3. Appliances shall use a universal back plate, which shall allow mounting to a single - gang, double -gang, 4-inch-square, 4 inch -octal, or a 3-1/2 inch -octal back box. 4. Two -wire appliance wiring shall be capable of directly connecting to the mounting back plate. 5. Continuity check shall occur for entire NAC circuit prior to attaching any audible / visual -notification appliances. 6. Dust cover shall fit and protect the mounting plate. 7. Dust cover shall be easily removed when the appliance is installed over the back plate. 8. Removal of an appliance shall result in a trouble condition by the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 10 9. Strobe appliances shall produce a minimum flash rate of 60 flashes per minute (1 flash per second) over the Regulated Input Voltage Range, and shall incorporate a Xenon flashcube enclosed in a rugged LexanO lens. 10. Strobes shall be available with two or four field -selectable settings in one unit, and shall be rated - per UL 1971 - for up to: a. 185cd for wall mounting. b. 177cd for ceiling mounting. 11. Strobes shall operate over an extended temperature range of 32 degrees F to 120 degrees F (0 degrees C to 49 degrees C), and be listed for maximum humidity of 95 percent RH. 12. Strobe inputs shall be polarized for compatibility with standard reverse -polarity supervision of circuit wiring by a Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP). 13. Audibles and Audible/Strobe Combinations a. Horns and horn / strobes shall be listed for Indoor use under UL Standard 464. b. Horns shall be able to produce continuous synchronized output or a temporal code-3 synchronized output. c. Horns shall have at least 2 sound -level settings of 90 and 95 dBA. 14. Synchronization is possible when using the DSC sync modules, Siemens CerberusOO PRO FC901, PAD-3 or PAD-4 power supply with built-in sync protocol. 15. The strobes shall not drift out of synchronization at any time during operation. 16. Audibles and strobes shall be able to synchronize on a 2-wire circuit with the capability to silence the audible, if required. 17. Strobes shall revert to a non -synchronized flash -rate, if the sync module or Power Supply should fail to operate (i.e. - contacts remain closed). 18. All notification appliances shall be listed for Special Applications: Strobes are designed to flash at 1-flash-per-second minimum over their "Regulated Input Voltage Range." PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Contractor shall provide and install all fire alarm system wiring complete from termination to termination. All wiring shall be installed in conduit from termination to termination. Wire color coded as recommended by the manufacturer. Where wire is installed in conduit, contractor shall provide and install junction boxes and outlet boxes. C. Conduit and conductor type and installation shall meet the requirements of Division 26. D. Power supplies, low voltage transformers, relays, enclosures, and all other components required for a complete installation shall be provided to accommodate the quantity of strobes, horns/strobes and smoke detectors shown on the Drawings. Provide all control, monitoring, and relay modules as required for a complete and functional system. E. The fire detection system shall be connected to 2 telephone lines. 3.02 FIRE ALARM SYSTEM INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Wiring associated with the fire alarm control panel shall be Class B per NEMA S134-1985. B. Smoke detectors shall be ceiling or wall mounted as shown on the Drawings. FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 11 C. Installation shall conform to NFPA 70 and code and standards. D. The digital alarm communication transmitter shall transmit the following alarm conditions to the central station monitoring facility: 1. Selection and initiation of a contract with a central station monitoring facility is not required in this contract. 3.03 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING A. Fire System Supplier shall provide a factory authorized service engineer or certified factory trained individual of the fire detection system manufacturer to perform the following: 1. Verify that all wiring connections are complete and correct. 2. Make final adjustments of all sensing devices. 3. Calibrate all equipment to obtain optimum performance. 4. Instruct Owner's personnel in the proper maintenance of the systems and in the methods of making periodic checks and adjustments. B. Contractor shall deliver to the Owner: 1. All other devices and tools provided with the equipment for installation and adjustment. END OF SECTION FIRE DETECTIQN AND ALARM © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 28 31 00 - 12 SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Building and other structure excavation, backfill, and grading. 2. Pool and pool deck excavation, backfill, and grading. 3. Topsoil salvage and replacement. Related Sections 1. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. 2. Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Fill. 3. Section 32 92 00 - Turf and Grasses. 4. Section 33 05 05 - Trenching and Backfilling. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following items consistent with DIVISION 01: 1. Product data for each borrow material, include the following: a. Name and location of source. b. Laboratory Classification (ASTM D2487). c. Results of Gradation Tests (ASTM D422 or ASTM C136). d. Compaction Curve (ASTM D698 or ASTM D1557). 2. Field quality control test results consistent with Section 01 40 00 and as described herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A Soil Testing Consultant/Geotechnical Engineer will be designated by the Owner to provide field density tests. B. Costs of initial testing will be paid by the Owner. Any retesting required because of failure to meet density requirements shall be paid for by the Contractor. C. The Soil Testing Consultant shall inspect and evaluate soils at the bottom of all excavations prior to placing fill or installing footing formwork. The Contractor shall notify the Owner and Soils Testing Consultant when these inspections are required and shall allow a minimum of 72 hours for the inspections to take place. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 EARTH WORK 31 00 00 - 1 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. All erosion control measures must be in place prior to commencement of excavation operations. B. Do not commence construction of structure foundations until Geotechnical Engineer has inspected the existing subsoil and granular any compaction test results are confirmed by the engineer. C. Backfill against concrete structures only after concrete has attained 100 percent of its design strength. 1.06 SITE CONDITIONS A. Soil borings and a geotechnical report have been completed for the Site. The Boring Logs are included in a Geotechnical Report that is included in this Project Manual. B. Contractors shall make Site visits prior to Bidding to current site conditions and to determine the level of work required. C. Protect existing pavements, lawns, trees, sidewalks, trails, structures, utilities, and other features to remain from dmmnge by Work of this Section. In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary subject to the approval of the Owner and Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL FILL A. Material shall be sound soil material free of debris, boulders, organics, or other material which may prevent required compaction. B. Onsite excavated material shall be used for general fill provided it does not contain significant organic contont, oversized materials, or other deleterious materials. C. These materials may be used for the following: 1. General fill at locations outside the building and away from the pools, concrete decks and other structures/hard surfaces. 2.02 GRANULAR FILL A. Material shall consist of sand and sand -gravel, free of debris, salvaged concrete, salvaged bituminous mixture, large boulders, clay, or silt. All material shall pass the 1-inch sieve and shall conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing #4 35 to 100 # 10 20 to 80 #40 5 to 35 #200 0-5 © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 EARTHWORK. 31 00 00 - 2 2.03 STRUCTURAL FILL A. Non -organic excavated materials that can be properly placed and compacted to specified densities free of deleterious material such as metal scraps or wood. Non -organic material shall contain less than 2 percent organic material by weight. B. Imported material shall be coarse -grained mineral soil with less than 20% of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. 2.04 SAND FILL A. Sand fill shall be sand free of debris, crushed quarry rock, crushed concrete, salvaged bituminous mixture, clay, or silt. Material shall conform to MnDOT Spec. 3149.2.J.2, Fine Filter Aggregate. 2.05 COARSE FILTER AGGREGATE A. Conform to the requirements of Section 33 46 00 - Subdrainage. 2.06 GENERAL TOPSOIL A. The best quality existing topsoil from the Site can be used but shall meet the requirements of Section 32 92 00. B. If additional topsoil is required, it shall be obtained from an off -Site source and shall comply to the requirements of Section 32 92 00. 2.07 PREMIUM TOPSOIL BORROW FOR PLANTING BEDS A. Conform to the requirements of 32 92 00. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 SITE PREPARATION A. Strip and stockpile existing topsoil from all areas that are to be excavated. Contractor shall visit the site to confirm in conjunction with review of soil borings to gauge the general depth of existing topsoil, some variation is to be expected. Stockpile sufficient quantity of the best available topsoil that the Contractor may wish to utilize at turf. Topsoil may also be used to construct the berms and sloped areas outside the proposed pavement limits. The topsoil stockpiles shall not interfere with the work and shall not block necessary drainage routes. B. Install silt fence and any other erosion control devices necessary to prevent eroded materials from entering storm sewer system or adjacent areas. See Section 01 57 13 for additional erosion and sediment control requirements. C. Provide protection around trees as indicated elsewhere in the project documents. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 EARTHWORK 31 0000-3 3.02 GENERAL A. Cut, fill, and grade Site to elevations and contours indicated on the Drawings with allowances for structures, concrete decking, finish grading, topsoil, turf establishment, etc. Slope grades to insure temporary and permanent Site drainage. B. Excavation of unstable material below grade shall be done under the direction of the Engineer as the subsurface conditions are disclosed. C. Do not use frozen soil as fill material and fill material shall not be placed on frozen soils. D. Spread minimum depth topsoil for turf areas per Section 32 92 00. E. Remove all construction debris and cleanup Site prior to fine grading. F. Fine grade Site for seeding and sodding operations. Hand shaping is required adjacent to the buildings, decks, fences, and other structures. Allow for thickness of sod and keep sod 1-inch below paved surfaces. G. Silty and clayey soils may be moisture and disturbance sensitive and could become unstable if allowed to increase in moisture content or are disturbed (rutted) by construction traffic_. Sr_arification and drying or rise, of specialized equipment may become necessary. Proper drainage should be maintained during construction. 11. Native soils underlying pools buildings and other structures that are disturbed shall be compacted to 98 Percent Standard Proctor Density or removed and replaced with granular fill compacted to 98 Percent Standard Proctor Density. I. Compact native soil at bottom of excavation prior to placement of fill or footings. Scarify and moisture condition the existing sub -grade material as deemed necessary by the Geotechnical Engineer/Soil Testing Firm and/or the Engineer. 3.03 GENERAL BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. Conform t0 Ilrle$ C7riC,7 grades Snuwil on IIIC Drawings.Slope grades toinsure i✓vih temporary and permanent drainage away from the structures. B. Backfill beneath concrete floor slabs and aprons shall be graded to a tolerance of 1/4-inch prior to placing concrete. Low areas may be filled with concrete at no additional cost to the Owner. C. Keep placement surfaces free of debris, foreign materials, or frozen soil. Do not place fill in temperatures below 25 degrees F. D. Excavation around the foundation concrete shall be backfilled as soon as possible after the concrete has cured. E. Backfill walls after forms are removed and concrete has cured sufficiently to support the backfilling and compaction operation. Material shall be placed in maximum 8-inch lifts. F. Hand -operated compaction equipment only shall be used within 10 feet of below grade walls. Heavy compaction machinery shall not travel or operate within this distance. EARTHWORK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 00 00 - 4 G. Over excavated footing and structure areas shall be backfilled with granular fill and compacted per following table. H. Granular fill shall be placed as shown on the Drawing details and as specified herein. 3.04 UTILITY EXCAVATION AND FILL A. Conform to the requirements of Sections 22 51 13, 33 05 05 and other applicable sections of the Project Manual. 3.05 BUILDING AND STRUCTURE EXCAVATION A. Excavate and remove all existing foundations, slabs, utilities, pavements, vegetation, topsoil, and any other deleterious materials from building pads. B. Excavate and remove fill, topsoil, organic deposits, and any soft soils from building areas, exposing the underlying competent soils. C. Footing Oversize: where excavations extend below foundation grades, oversize excavations 1 foot horizontally beyond the outer edges of the foundations footings for each foot the excavation extends below the bottom of the footing (1:1 lateral oversize). D. Footings shall be placed to depths shown on the Drawings and judged adequate by on - site Geotechnical Engineer. Excavation widths shall be adequate to allow form construction and placement of footing concrete and drain tile, but no less than 1 foot wider than the form width on each side. No excavation shall have side slopes steeper than 1:1 slope or as required by OSHA. E. Footing excavation shall be surface compacted with vibratory plate or roller compactors prior to the placement of footing formwork. F. Footing excavations, lower level subgrades and slab on grade subgrades shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer and the Geotechnical Engineer/Soil Testing Firm prior to the placement of any footing concrete. G. Protect excavation from frost. Do not place foundations, footings, slabs, structures, or fill on frozen soil. H. Do not allow standing water to accumulate in excavated areas to receive fill. 3.06 BUILDING AND STRUCTURE BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. Excavations that extend below foundation grade shall be backfilled with Structural Fill. B. Granular fill shall be placed below building floors to minimum depths as indicated on the Drawings. EARTHWORK © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 00 00 - 5 C. Backfill and compaction requirements: Relative Compaction, Percent (ASTM D698 - Standard Moisture Content Maximum Lift Proctor Maximum Dry Variance from Location Density) Optimum (%) (Inches) Below structures Coarse Grained: +/- 3 12 and exterior 95 Percent flatwork Fine Grained: -1 to +3 8 1 Below landscaped 90 Percent 12 areas * Coarse grained soils are defined as sands with a SP, SP-SM and SM classification D. Backfill walls after forms are removed and concrete has cured sufficiently to support the backfilling and compaction operation. Material shall be placed in mnximiim lifts and meet compaction requirements as indicated in above table for granular fill. 3.07 POOLS EXCAVATION A. Excavate and remove all existing foundations, slabs, utilities, pavements, vegetation, topsoil, and any other deleterious materials from pool areas. B. Excavate and remove fill, topsoil, organic deposits, and any soft soils from pool areas, exposing the underlying competent soils. C. Excavate the soil beneath the pool slab and deck area to elevations indicated on the Drawings. D. The underlying soils shall be inspected and approved by the Geotechnical Engineer/Soil Testing Firm and the Engineer prior to fine grading. nA Pnnl S ANn nF(-X/ )FWAI K/SIMII AR - BACKFILL AND COMPACTION A. Excavations that extend below foundation grade shall be backfilled with Structural Fill. B. Place fill material to minimum fill depths, maximum lifts, and relative compaction percentages as specified below. C. Backfill and compaction requirements: Refer to Table 3.06.C. D. Backfill pool walls after forms are removed and concrete has cured sufficiently to support the backfilling and compaction operation. A minimum of 3 feet of granular fill material shall be placed as Backfill immediately adjacent to all pool walls. Material shall be placed in maximum lifts and meet compaction requirements as indicated in above table for granular fill. 3.09 GROUNDWATER CONTROL A. Fluctuations in the level of the groundwater can occur due to variations in rainfall, temperature, spring thaw, and many other factors. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FARTHWnRK 31 00 00 - 6 B. The Contractor shall include in the Base Bid the costs of pumping water including permitting, including but not limited to natural groundwater, perched water zones, and surface runoff. C. Location of dewatering discharge shall be approved by the regulatory authorities, Owner and Engineer prior to dewatering operations. D. Refer to Geotechnical Report for additional information. 3.10 MATERIAL BALANCE A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the import or export and disposal off -site of soil, topsoil, or granular material as necessary to achieve the final grades as shown on the Drawings. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 EARTHWORK 31 00 00 - 7 This Page Lett Blank Intentionally SECTION 31 23 00 EXCAVATION AND FILL PART 1 GENERAL [K1 uuI: A. Section Includes 1. Excavation and fill for parking lots and turf areas. B. Related Sections 1. Section 01 57 13 - Temporary Erosion and Sediment Control. 2. Section 31 23 13 - Subgrade Preparation. 3. Section 32 92 00 - Turf and Grasses. 4. Section 33 05 05 - Trenching and Backfilling. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment l . Bid Items have been provided for various excavation materials, borrow materials, and salvage materials as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10. Measurement and payment shall be at the Bid Unit Price consistent with MnDOT Spec. 2105.4 and 2105.5, except as modified in the following. 2. A Bid Item has been provided for Common Excavation (P). Measurement will be by volume of material in its original position, based on pre -construction cross sections and the design grading grade profile as shown in the Drawings as performed by the Engineer. Quantity shall be calculated and computed as indicated in the Drawings. Payment will include placing and compacting suitable material on Site and disposal of excess material off Site. 3. A Bid Item has been provided for Subgrade Excavation (CV). Measurement will be by compacted volume in cubic yards of actual material excavated below the Grading Grade. Payment will include placing and compacting suitable material on Site and disposal of excess material off Site. 4. A Bid Item has been provided for Select Granular Borrow (Modified). Measurement will be by the Ton of material compacted in place as determined from weight tickets delivered to the Engineer. Payment will include all costs related to furnishing and installing the material complete in place as specified. a. If the granular material is being wasted or placed excessively thick, the Owner reserves the right to deduct quantities that are in excess of plan thickness. Said quantities shall be based on material weighing 1 10 pounds per square yard of area per inch of thickness. 5. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2105 - Excavation and Embankment. 2. 3149 - Granular Material. EXCAVATION AND FILL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 23 00 - 1 3. 3877 - Topsoil Material. 4. 3890 - Compost. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following items consistent with Section 01 33 00: 1. Gradation tests for borrow materials. 2. Topsoil Borrow test indicating material content, organic content, and pH levels. 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. The definitions of the different classifications of excavation and borrow material shall conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.2, or as modified herein. 1. Grading Grade: Bottom of the fully excavated design section as shown on the Drawings. 2. Common Excavation: Excavation above the grading grade that has not been classified as another form of excavation in this Section. 3. Subyiude Excavation: Excavation below the grading grade that has not been classified as another form of excavation in this Section. 4. Exploratory Digging: Excavation to find under underground utilities or examination of site conditions as directed by the Engineer. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Assist testing laboratory by excavating for density tests. Assist testing laboratory with obtaining material samples. 1.07 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform excavation as soon as possible after sewer and water construction. B. Complete subgrade for streets, driveways, walks, and parking lots immediately after trench backfill and compaction. C l..V111pie[C 111 IIJ11 glUUll g of IVII area) within I I)l.Ulcl lour VVY.7 l..lllcl A.J IA �.nnu. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Select Granular Borrow (modified]: Conform to the following gradation requirements: Sieve Size Percent Passing #40 0 to 40 #200 0 to 5 A. Common Borrow: 1. Non -organic excavated materials that can be properly placed and compacted to specified densities free of deleterious material such as metal scraps or wood. Non - organic material shall contain less than 2 percent organic material by weight. 2. Imported material shall be coarse -grained mineral soil with less than 20 percent of the particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. EXCAVATION AND FII I © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 23 00 - 2 B. Topsoil Material: Refer to Specification 32 92 00, Turf and Grasses. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.3A, or modified herein. 1. Establish traffic control prior to excavations. 2. Establish the specified erosion control devices according to Section 01 57 13 prior to all excavations. 3. Notify utility companies of progress schedule so they can accomplish relocations, removals, and holding of lines. 4. Perform removals consistent with Section 02 41 13. 5. Strip topsoil consistent with Section 31 10 00. 3.02 PREPARATION OF EMBANKMENT A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.3C, or as modified herein. 1. Engineer's approval is required of all areas where preparation works has been performed prior to the placement of the embankment or fill material. 3.03 EXCAVATION OPERATIONS A. Strip vegetation and organic soils within the upper 3 feet of the proposed pavement elevations. B. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.3D, or as modified herein. l . Excavation of unstable material below grade shall be done under the direction of the Engineer as the subsurface conditions are disclosed. 2. Remove muck excavation material to minimize disruption to the bottom of the excavation. 3. No solid rock will be allowed within 12 inches of the subgrade. 4. Provide and maintain temporary drainage facilities until permanent facilities are completed. 3.04 DISPOSITION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.31, or as modified herein. 1. Reclaim and milled materials may only be used as specified in the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 2. No disposition of bituminous will be permitted within the Project limits except as specified in the Drawings. 3.05 PLACING EMBANKMENT MATERIALS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.3E. 3.06 COMPACTING EMBANKMENTS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.3F, or as modified herein. 1. Compaction required for embankment materials shall conform to the Specified Density Method with the testing location and rates being determined by the Engineer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 L. EXCAVATION AND FILL 31 2300-3 2. Clayey or silty soil used as fill will need to be placed at a water content sufficient to attain compaction (near the "optimum water content" defined in ASTM D698). It is the Contractor's responsibility to moisture condition the soil (wet or dry) to a uniform condition. Some on Site soils will be wet (or could be dry) and the Contractor shall not claim that this is a changed condition. 3. Backfilling of embankments shall be performed using on Site materials: If the Contractor is unable to meet the specified density requirements using that material due to excess moisture content, they shall immediately notify the Engineer of this condition. 4. The Contractor shall recognize that inclement weather (sometimes heavy) occurs during the construction season and the Contractor shall be responsible for protecting the moisture condition of soils during the construction phase. Such protection rneusures include sloping of exposed surfaces to promote runoff (avoid ponding) and compacting exposed surfaces prior to rain events to minimize infiltration. 3.07 FINISHING OPERATIONS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.31-1, or as modified herein. 1. Finish grading of subgrade prior to placement of an aggregate base course shall conform to the following tolerances: a. Not vary by more than 0.05 feet above or below the prescribed elevation at any point where a measurement is made. 2. Finish grading of subgrade prior to placement of a granular borrow shall conform to the following tolerances: a. Not vary by more than 0.10 feet above or below the prescribed elevation at any point where a measurement is made. 3. Finish grading of granular borrow prior to placement of an aggregate base shall conform to tho following tolerances: a. Not vary by more than 0.10 feet above or below the prescribed elevation at any point where a measurement is made. 4. Grading of the soils beneath the proposed topsoil shall be reviewed and approved by the Engineer prior to the start of the topsoil placement. END OF SECTION EXCAVATION AND FILL © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 23 00 - 4 SECTION 31 23 13 SUBGRADE PREPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Grading, shaping, and compacting subgrade prior to placing a base or surface course. B. Related Sections 1. Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Fill. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. No Bid Item has been provided for subgrade preparation. Subgrade preparation and all related Work shall be considered incidental to the Project with no direct compensation made therefore. Subgrade preparation shall be completed in accordance with these Specifications, including shaping, grading, compacting, tolerancing, and test rolling. 2. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2105 - Excavation and Embankment. 2. 2111 -Test Rolling. 3. 2112 - Subgrade Preparation. 1.04 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Subgrade preparation shall be performed prior to placement of the geotextile fabric, salvaged millings, sand subbase, aggregate backfill material, concrete curb and gutter, and bituminous pavement. B. Complete subgrade for streets, driveways, walks, and parking lots immediately after installation of pipe as part of trench backfill and compaction. PART 2 PRODUCTS NOT USED. SUBGRADE PREPARATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 23 13 - 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Subgrade preparations shall be performed to produce the required density, grade, and cross-section. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Inspection of subgrade by test rolling conforming to MnDOT Spec. 2111, or as modified herein. 1. The equipment used for test rolling shall be a Tandom Truck with a gross weight of 45,000 pounds. 2. The road bed will be considered unstable if yielding and rutting is greater than 1-1 /2 inches. 3.03 COMPACTION A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.31', or as modified herein. 1. For the Specified Density Method, the Engineer will sample and test the soils to determine the Maximum Density and Optimum Moisture. 2. Density and moisture tests will be taken on the compacted subgrade at the location and testing rates designated by the Engineer. Nuclear density testing shall be considered an approved method. 3.04 FINISH OPERATIONS A. Subgrade tolerance shall conform to MnDOT Spec. 2105.3H, or as modified below. 1. Not vary by more than 0.05 feet above or below the prescribed elevation at any 1 point where a measurement is made. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SUBGRADE PREPARATION 312313-2 SECTION 31 32 19 GEOSYNTHETIC SOIL STABILIZATION AND LAYER SEPARATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Geotextile fabric used for street construction. B. Related Sections 1. Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Fill. 2. Section 31 23 13 - Subgrade Preparation. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. A Bid Item as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, has been provided for Geotextile Fabric, Type V. Measurement will be based on units of square yards of actual surface area covered by Geotextile Fabric. Payment at the Bid Unit Price shall include all materials, installation, and protection of installed Geotextile Fabric as specified. The required overlap joint or joint sewing shall be incidental to this fabric item with no direct payment being made. 2. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 3733 - Geotextiles. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturers Certificate of Compliance which includes the following information: 1. Full product name by trademark and style number. 2. Geotextile polymer type(s). 3. Geotextile physical properties. B. Samples of the Geotextile 1. The geotextile machine direction shall be marked on each sample submitted for testing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC A. Conform to the requirements of MnDOT Spec. 3733, Type 5 (non - woven), except as modified below: GEOSYNTHETIC SOIL STABILIZATION AND LAYER SEPARATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 32 19 - 1 I . For use above the subgrade as shown on the Drawings for the parking lot/road, bituminous trail, and skate pad. Also used for the Rain Garden and Rock Trench. 2. Materials: The fabric shall consist of a polypropylene or polyester filament or yarn, non- woven, needle punched. The fabric shall be inert to commonly encountered chemicals, resistant to ultraviolet radiation, and conform to meet the following minimum Specifications: Geatextile Spec. Grab Tensile Strength either principal direction, lbs. Grab Tensile Elongation, Percent, Max. Ultra Violet Light Stability Burst Strength p.s.i., min. Trapezoid Shear Strength, lbs. min. (any direction) Puncture Strength lbs., min. Permittivity (sec-1) Flow Rnte Gal./Min./ft.2 Minimum Fabric Weight Test Method Value ASTM D4632 200 ASTM D4632 50 ASTM D4355 70-Percent Retained* ASTM D3786 400 (Diaphragm Method) ASTM D4553 80 ASTM D4833 130 ASTM D4491 1.5 ASTM D4491 95 8 oz/sy AOS (U.S. Sieve) ASTM D4751 70 to 100 TPercent retained of specified fabric strength as determined by ASTM D4632 (Grab Tensile) when exposed for 150 hours as per ASTM D4355. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Excavation: Conform to Section 31 2300. B. Subgrade Preparation: Conform to the requirements of Section 31 23 13. Subgrade shall be toleranced and approved before geotextile placement. 3.02 INSTALLATION - ROADWAY FABRIC A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3733.2A except as modified below. B. Place geotextile immediately ahead of the covering operation. 1. No geotextiles shall be left exposed to sunlight during installation for a total of more than 7 calendar days. GEOSYNTHETIC SOIL STABILIZATION AND LAYER SEPARATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 32 19 - 2 2. The geotextile shall be laid smooth without excessive wrinkles. 3. The geotextile shall not be dragged through mud or over sharp objects which could damage the geotextile. C. All adjoining sections of the geotextile shall be overlapped a minimum of 18 inches or sewn using mechanical machine. D. Secure fabric in place by means of stone weights to prevent displacement. E. If geotextile is torn or punctured, the damaged area shall be repaired or replaced 1. The patch shall overlap the existing geotextile a minimum of 3 feet from the edge of any part of the damaged area. 3.03 FILL PLACEMENT A. Only granular spreading methods that will not tear the fabric shall be used. Granular borrow shall not be dropped on the fabric from a height greater than 3 feet 1. Place a minimum of 8 inches of granular borrow on the geotextile prior to the movement of construction equipment. Carefully monitor turning movements. 2. Tracked or wheeled equipment shall not be permitted to drive directly on the fabric. 3. Any ruts occurring during construction shall be filled with additional granular borrow and compacted to the specified density. C. Compaction of first lift above the geotextile shall be limited to routing of placement and spreading equipment only. No vibratory compaction will be allowed on the first lift. END OF SECTION GEOSYNTHETIC SOIL STABILIZATION AND LAYER SEPARATION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 32 19 - 3 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 31 63 16 HELICAL PILES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Design, furnish and install helical piles and accessories, including helical bearing plates, pile shaft, and cap assembly. For the purposes of this specification, the terms helical "piles" and helical "piers" may be used interchangeably. 1.02 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 1. A500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 2. A513 - Standard Specification for Electric -Resistance -Welded Carbon and Alloy Steel Mechanical Tubing. 3. D1143 Method of Testing Piles Under Static Axial Compressive Load. 4. D3689 Method of Testing Piles Under Static Axial Tensile Load. B. International Conference of Building Officials (ICBO) C. International Code Council (ICC) 1. Acceptance Criteria 358 (AC358) - Acceptance Criteria for Helical Pile Systems and Devices 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit 5 hard copies or 1 electronic copy of manufacturer's design calculations, signed by an engineer licensed in the State of Minnesota, with specifications and product data for helical piles. Product data shall include a copy of the Evaluation Report, prepared by the ICBO/ICC-Evaluation Service, indicating approval by the ICBO/ICC. Submit 5 hard copies or 1 electronic copy of shop drawings indicating locations, types and estimated depths of helical piles, and pile components and materials, including plates, caps, and other accessories. Design calculations / shop drawings shall include the following information: l . Helical Pile/Anchor number, location, and pattern by assigned identification number. 2. Helical Pile/Anchor design load. 3. Assumed geotechnical resistance factor. 4. Type and Size of Helical Pile/Anchor shaft. 5. Helical configuration (number and diameter of helical plates). 6. Minimum effective torque requirement. 7. Grout column diameter and length, if required. 8. Connection details. C. Following installation, submit 5 hard copies or 1 electronic copy of a Pile Installation Summary, indicating the final location, the embedded tip elevation, raw installation torque recordings and corresponding load capacities for 1-foot lengths, at 5-foot intervals, © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 HELICAL PILES 31 63 16- 1 for the first 50 feet of depth, and then for each 1-foot of length to termination. Indicate overall conformance of the installation with the submitted design. D. Calibration reports for installation equipment utilized on the project. The calibration tests shall have been completed within one year of the date submitted. E. The Contractor shall submit plans for pre -production test(s) for the helical piles/anchors to the Owner for review and acceptance prior to beginning load tests, as specified elsewhere within this specification. The purpose of the test is to determine the load versus displacement response of the helical pile/anchor in general conformance with ASTM D1143 Quick Test Method and provide an estimation of ultimate capacity. F. After completion of the test(s) piles/anchors the Contractor shall submit the results to the Owner for approval to begin production helical pile/anchor installation. 1.04 HELICAL PILE DESIGN A. The enclosed Geotechnical Evaluation Report, including logs of soil borings, shall be considered to be representative of the in -situ subsurface condition likely to be encountered on the project site, and shall be used as the basis for the helical pile design using generally accepted engineering judgment and methods. Helical piles shall be fabricated and supplied per the design, and installed to the depth necessary to obtain the minimum allowable bearing capacity. B. Minimum working (un-factored) load design capacities shall be as shown on the Drawings. C. Where the installed pile lengths required to achieve the design load capacity vary significantly from the lengths as -designed, pile design shall be modified to increase the capacity at the anticipated depth, at the Contractor's expense. 1.05 QUALITY CONTROL A. Design and installation requirements for helical piers shall be determined by the �fcct� r to of ih _. , im r�orfrrmr-vri�o ri= ri iiromcnfc cr�crifiarl nr chn�nin nn f_ Drawings. Information shown or specified is considered to be a minimum for this application, and may not necessarily be the product provided. B. The helical pile contractor shall be experienced in performing design and construction of helical piles and shall furnish all materials, labor, and supervision to perform the Work. The Contractor shall be trained and certified in the proper methods of design and installation of helical piles. C. Any pile that does not have adequate installed capacity documentation may subjected to a field load test for verification. Such field testing shall be conducted at the Contractor's expense. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING AND STORAGE A. All products shall be transported, handled, and stored carefully to prevent distortion or damage. Store materials on pallets or other means above the ground and protect from dirt, mud and other contamination. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HELICAL PILES 31 6316-2 B. Repair or replace any and all helical pile components or accessories damaged during shipping, storage, installation, etc. 1.07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. All work of this section, including designing, furnishing, installing and testing Helical Piles shall be included in the Lump Sum Base Bid for the Project. Measurement shall be Plan Quantity, based upon number of piles shown, furnished and installed to 35-foot (total) depth. Lump Sum Base Bid will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Section, including, but not limited to design, furnishing and installing helical piles and accessories, including a starter section and top -of -pile adaptors, and one (1) passing load test. A Unit Price Bid Item has been provided on the Bid Form for "Additional Helical Pile Extensions". Measurement shall be based upon Units of Linear Feet (LF) of ADDITIONAL pile extensions furnished and installed. Unit Price will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Item, including, but not limited to furnishing and installing helical pile shaft extensions beyond the total base length of 35-feet, as necessary to achieve design capacity soil depth. The actual length quantity, beyond 35-feet, installed, multiplied by the appropriate Unit Price, will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Item. C. Three Helical Pile Load Tests (two compression and one tensile) shall be included as a line item in the bid form and will be considered payment in full for all work and costs of this Item, including, but not limited to setup of test assembly, reaction pile installation and production of load versus deflection curves for the load test. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HELICAL COMPRESSION PILES (2-7/8 INCH DIAMETER PIPE) A. Helical piles shall consist of steel starter section and extension sections, complete with helical -shaped steel plates as required to obtain the minimum working capacity shown, pile cap assembly, and all accessories necessary for a complete installation. Helical piles shall be as manufactured by Atlas Systems, AB Chance, Innovative Foundation SupportWorks or approved equal. Other manufacturers may be considered for approval, upon submittal of an ICC-ES Report for the pile product proposed. B. Starter section shall be minimum 2-7/8 inch diameter by 0.18 inch wall thickness tubular steel pipe, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A500B or A513. A minimum of three (3) helical steel plates shall be welded directly to the starter section, sized according to the submitted design. End of each starter section shall be prepared for coupling with compatible extension sections. C. Extension sections shall be minimum 2-7/8 inch diameter by 0.18 inch wall thickness tubular steel pipe, conforming to the requirements of ASTM A500B or A513. Helical steel plates shall be attached directly to the extension sections, according to the submitted design. Ends of extension sections shall be prepared for coupling with compatible extension sections or pile cap assemblies. D. Pile cap assembly shall consist of a minimum of a steel plate welded to a steel tube section and securely fastened to the pile shaft. Assembly shall be suitable for transmitting HELICAL PILES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 31 63 16 - 3 bending, compression and tensile forces from the concrete foundation pile to the helical pile. 2.02 SQUARE SHAFT GROUTED PULLDOWN PILES A. SS150 1-1/2 inch Material: Hot rolled Round -Cornered -Square (RCS) solid steel bars meeting dimensional and workmanship requirements of ASTM A29. The bar is a modified medium carbon steel grade (similar to AISI 1044) with improved strength due to fine grain size. Torque strength rating = 5,700 ft-lb; Minimum yield strength = 70 ksi. B. SS175 1-3/4 inch; SS200 2 inch; SS225 2-1/4 inch Material: Hot rolled Round -Cornered - Square (RCS) solid steel bars meeting the dimensional and workmanship requirements of ASTM A29. Tho bar is a High Strength Low Alloy (HSLA), low to medium carbon steel grade with improved strength due to fine grain size. Torque strength rating: SS175 = 11,000 ft-lb; SS200 = 16,000 ft-lb; SS225 = 21,000 ft-lb; Minimum yield strength = 90 ksi. C. Grouting Material: Cement for Helical Pulldown Micropile grout shall be Type G Portland cement conforming to CSA A3000 Cementitious Material Compendium. Water for mixing grout shall be potable, clean and free from impurities, which may be detrimental to grout or steel. Potable water shall be available in quantities sufficient to mix grout and for equipment clean-up. Sand fillers may be used in the grout mix as an extender with large diameter grout columns, subject to the approval of the engineer. Use fine sand only. Medium or coarse sand shall not be permitted. Small diameter grout columns shall not include aggregate. 2.03 CORROSION PROTECTION A. All helical pile shafts, helices and accessories shall be hot -dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM Al 53 after fabrication. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. LocuTe piles us si ium i ur 1 I i it- Cun 11 uc i DI uvviri s. B. Remove large rocks, demolition debris or other materials that may impede pile installation. If an obstruction is encountered that prohibits installation, cease installation to prevent damage to the pile. Remove, relocate and reinstall the pile at a new location as directed by the Architect/Engineer. 3.02 HELICAL PILE INSTAI I ATION A. Provide all necessary preparations and precautions to obtain adequate Site access for pile installation equipment and protect surrounding area from damage due to pile installation operations. Damaged areas shall be repaired or replaced to the Engineer's satisfaction at the contractor's expense. B. A torque indicator shall be used during helical pile/anchor installation. The torque indicator can be an integral part of the installation equipment or externally mounted inline with the installation tooling. Torque indicators shall meet requirements set forth by helical pile/anchor manufacturer. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HELICAL PILES 31 6316-4 M C. If the helical pile/anchor is refused or deflected by a subsurface obstruction, the installation shall be terminated and the pile removed. The obstruction shall be removed, if feasible, and the helical pile/anchor re -installed. If the obstruction cannot be removed, the helical pile/anchor shall be installed at an adjacent location, subject to review and acceptance of the owner. D. If the torsional strength rating of the central steel shaft and/or installation equipment has been reached prior to proper positioning of the last plain extension section relative to the final elevation, the contractor may remove the last plain extension and replace it with a shorter length extension. If it is not feasible to remove the last plain extension, the Contractor may cut said extension shaft to the correct elevation. The Contractor shall not reverse (back -out) the helical pile/anchor to facilitate extension removal. E. The Contractor shall record the torque values for each individual helical pile/anchor at 1- foot increments during installation. These records shall be available to the Owner at their request. F. Drive pile in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Continue installation until the specified minimum bearing capacity is obtained. G. Cut off helical pile shaft sufficient to provide a minimum 0'-6" shaft embedment into the concrete beam/slab. H. Place pile cap assembly over pier shaft and install anchorage to concrete. 3.03 TERMINATION CRITERIA A. The torque as measured during the installation shall not exceed the torsional strength rating of the central steel shaft. B. The minimum installation torque, as provided by the manufacturer, shall be satisfied prior to terminating the helical pile installation. The average torque for the last three feet of penetration shall be used as the basis of comparison with the manufacturer's minimum installation torque 3.04 HELICAL PILE LOAD TESTS A. The Contractor shall perform three production pile load tests, minimum, (one compression test at the Bath House, one compression test and one tensile test at the 50M Pool), as selected by the Owner. Piles shall be compression load tested in accordance to ASTM D1143 to two times the Design Compression Service Load (2.0*DL). Piles shall be tensile load tested in accordance to ASTM D3689 to one and a half times the Design Compression Service Load (1.5*DL). B. The helical pile shall sustain the compression design capacity (1.0*DL) with no more than 1 inch total vertical movement of the pile -head relative to the top of the helical pile prior to the start of testing and no more than 1 1 /2 inch total movement when loaded to ultimate resistance capacity (2.0*DL). Elastic shortening of the pile shaft shall be omitted from the vertical movement. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HELICAL PILES 31 6316-5 C. The failure load of the compression test pile shall not be less than two times the Design Service Load (2.0*DL). The failure load shall be defined by one of the following definitions - whichever results in the lesser load: a. The point at which movement of the helical pile tip exceeds the elastic compression of the pile by 0.1013, where B is defined as the diameter of the largest helix. b. The point at which the slope of the load versus deflection curve exceeds 0.05 inches/kip. D. If a production helical pile fails to meet the acceptance criteria, the Contractor shall be directed to proof test another helical pile in the vicinity. For failed helical piles, the Contractor shall modify the design, the construction procedures, or both. These modifications include, but are not limited to, installing replacement helical piles, modifying the installation methods and equipment, increasing the minimum effective installation torque, changing the helix configuration, or changing the helical pile central shrift. Modifications that require changes to the structure shall have prior review and acceptance of the Owner. Any modifications of design or construction procedures shall be at the Contractor's expense. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Centerline of helical pile/anchor shall not be more than 3 inches from indicated plan location. B. Helical pile/anchor plumbness shall be within 2° of design alignment. C. Top elevation of helical pile/anchor shall be within 2 inches of the design vertical elevation. 3.06 CLEAN UP A. Remove all equipment, debris and excess materials from Site and restore areas surrounding piies io o6ginui yiUUe of ub ieyuiieu iu piepuie ioi Concrete slob/becilII installation. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 HELICAL PILES 31 63 16-6 SECTION 32 11 23 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Requirements for aggregate base course on a prepared subgrade. B. Related Sections 1. Section 31 23 13 - Subgrade Preparation. 2. Section 32 12 01 - Flexible Paving (Municipal Projects). 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment l . A Bid Item as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, has been provided for Aggregate Base, Class 5. Measurement will be by the ton of material compacted in place as determined from weight tickets delivered to the Engineer. a. If the aggregate base course material is being wasted or placed excessively thick, the Owner reserves the right to deduct quantities that are in excess of Drawing thickness. Said quantities shall be based on material weighing 110 pounds per square yard of area per inch of thickness. 2. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2211 -Aggregate Base. 2. 3138 - Aggregate for Surface and Base Courses. 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Submit gradation report on sample of aggregate base to be used. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construct aggregate base only after all of the following have been completed: 1. Subgrade has been corrected for instability problems and successfully passed a test rolling test performed by the Contractor and witnessed by the Engineer. 2. Subgrade has been checked for conformance to line and grade tolerances (stringline). AGGREGATE BASE COURSES © 2019 Stantec 1193804337 32 11 23-1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Aggregate Base: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3138, Class 5 aggregate, except as modified herein: 1. For any failing aggregate tests, the Engineer, at his/her discretion, may require corrective action or allow for monetary price adjustments per MnDOT Spec. 2211.5. 2. Corrective action for failing aggregate tests may include removal and replacement of all non -conforming materials. 3. On -Site recycled materials shall not be used unless directed by the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare the subgrade in accordance with Section 31 23 13. B. Subgrade to be completed and approved by the Engineer prior to installation of aggregate base. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2211.3 1. Compaction shall be done by the Specified Density Method. Compact by mechanical means to 100-Percent Standard Proctor Density. 2. Compaction for aggregate base on driveways and sidewalks shall be done by the Quality Compaction Method. 3. Install aggregate base in accordance with details on Drawings. 4. Deliver weight tickets to Engineer daily. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner shall have an independent testing laboratory sample the aggregate base iliulcriuia, determine the ai iu gruuuuon, an iu per fvri �, ui.,..n moisture/density tests at locations determined by Engineer. B. Line and Grade Tolerance: The final aggregate base surface will be checked for conformance to specified tolerances by the "stringline" method prior to approval to pave the surface. Grade shall be ± 0.03 feet of grade. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect aggregate base until it is covered by surface pavement. B. Keep aggregate base free, of ruts and irregularities until covered by surface paving. C. Place water on aggregate base for dust control as required to eliminate nuisance conditions for adjacent properties. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 AGGREGATE BASE COURSES 3211 23-2 SECTION 32 12 01 FLEXIBLE PAVING (MUNICIPAL PROJECTS) PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Hot plant mixed asphalt -aggregate mixtures for wearing and non -wearing pavement courses. 2. Bituminous tack coat. 3. Mastic. B. Related Sections 1. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses. 2. Section 32 16 13 - Concrete Curbs and Gutters. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment l . Method of Measurement and Payment shall conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.4 and 2360.5, except as modified herein. 2. A Bid Item has been provided for Bituminous Material for Tack Coat. a. Measured by volume in gallons at 60 degrees F. b. Payment for bituminous material used for Tack Coat includes compensation in full for all costs incidental to the furnishing and application at the Bid Unit Price per gallon. c. Cleaning of all debris and dirt from the previous bituminous surfaces prior to placement of Tack Coat is included in the Bid Unit Price for Tack Coat. d. Payment for tacking exposed edges of existing bituminous surfaces and concrete curb and gutter in conjunction with non -wearing course placement is considered incidental to the placement of the non -wearing course. 3. A Bid Item has been provided for Mastic on Lip of Curb. a. Measured by lineal foot. b. Cleaning of all debris and dirt from the previous bituminous surfaces prior to placement of mastic is included in the Bid Unit Price for mastic on Lip of Curb. c. Mastic shall be placed on lip of curb in all reconstruct areas only, prior to wear course paving in 2018. 4. Bid Items have been provided for Type SP 12.5 Non Wearing Course Mixture (2,C) and Type SP 9.5 Wearing Course Mixture (2,C). a. Measured by the weight in tons of material placed and accepted for each specified Bid Item as stated in the Bid Form. Payment shall be made in accordance with the acceptance and payment schedules provided in the MnDOT 2360 Plant Mixed Asphalt Pavement, MnDOT 2018. b. The Bid Unit Price includes both the bituminous course mixture and asphalt binder material. c. Partial payment will not exceed 70 percent of the total calculated payment until the required testing and product documentation is received and found to be acceptable to the Engineer. FLEXIBLE PAVING (MUNICIPAL PROJECTS) © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 12 01 -1 d. The Contractor shall note that all bituminous non wearing course is to be constructed in 2020 and all bituminous wear course on the reconstruct streets is to be constructed in 2019. 5. Preparation of Bituminous Non Wearing: Measurement and Payment shall be considered incidental and shall include the following: a. Final clean-up of the bituminous non wearing course with a power pickup broom. b. Final adjustment of the structures to conform to Section 33 05 17. 6. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) l . 2018 MnDOT Specification 2360 Plant Mixed Asphalt Pavement dated June 9, 2017. A copy can be found at hit P:/Iwww.r-iot.ste-ite.rnn.us/r-)re--Ie. t tin . s . er 901 AM 18-ser-, book-final.odl . a. Within this document replace the words "Department Bituminous Engineer" or "District Materials Engineer" with the word "Engineer." 2. 2357 - Bituminous Tack Coat. 3. 2535 - Bituminous Curb. 4. 3139 - Graded Aggregate For Bituminous Mixtures. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit mixture design report to the Engineer. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.2.F and 2360.2.G.8, and Division 01. B. Contractors shall submit mix design report for all projects, regardless of the size of the project. C. Contractor shall submit Q/C results in accordance with MnDOT Spec. 2360.2.G.8 and MnDOT's most recent Materials Control Schedule. 1 .05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Aggregate base and concrete curb and gutter to be completed and approved by the Engineer prior to placement of bituminous surfaces. B. The Contractor shall provide a 48-hour notice for scheduling and noticing of the residents prior to paving operations. C. Adjust structures prior to placement of bituminous wearing course as specified in Section 3305 17. D. Bituminous cores for testing shall be taken 12 to 48 hours after paving operations. E. Bituminous wearing course shall be completed in 2020 as indicated on the Drawings and by the Final Completion Date. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 FLEXIBLE PAVING (MUNICIPAL PROJECTS) 321201 -2 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Mixture Designation: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.1.A, except as modified in the typical section Detail Drawing and Bid Form.Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.2, except as modified herein. 1. Recycled Asphalt Shingles are not allowed in wear or non -wear course pavements. 2. Sewage Sludge Ash (SSA) is not allowed in wear or non -wear course pavements. C. Bituminous Tack Coat 1. Bituminous Material: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2357. a. Emulsified Asphalt, Cationic, CSS-1 or CSS-1 H. D. Mastic on Lip of Curb 1. Joint and Crack Sealer (Hot -Poured elastic Type): Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3723. E. Mixture Quality Management (Quality Control/Quality Assurance): Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.2G, except as modified herein. 1. Quality Control (QC) Testing: The Contractor will be allowed to provide historical testing data from the previous 3 days of production for each mixture type to meet the Production Sampling and Testing Rates indicated in Table 2360.11 for Course Aggregate Angularity and Fine Aggregate Angularity. The Contractor will be allowed to provide historical testing data from the previous 10 days of Contractor production for each mixture type to meet the Production Sampling and Testing Rates indicated in Table 2360.11 for TSR, Aggregate Specific Gravity, and Asphalt Binder Content. 2. Quality Assurance testing will be completed at the discretion of the Engineer, testing rates will not exceed Table 2360.10 and 2360.11. a. A verification sample will be taken by the Engineer. The Contractor will be required to use the verification companion sample as part of the QC testing program. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Conform to the requirements of MnDOT Spec 2360.3, except as modified herein. B. The Contractor to review the proposed paving sequence with the Engineer prior to placement of each bituminous course (lift). C. The proposed sequence shall address the: longitudinal seams, compaction, traffic control, hauling routes, and placement of pavement markings. D. Preparation of Bituminous Non Wear Course 1. Final clean-up of the bituminous surface with the use of a power pickup broom and front end loader. 2. Adjust structures conforming to the requirements of Section 33 05 17. E. Joints: Where new construction meets existing bituminous surfacing, the existing surface shall be uniformly milled or saw -cut straight and bituminous tack coat applied prior to placement of each bituminous course (lift). 1. For joint construction, an existing bituminous surface shall be considered to include any bituminous surface not paved on the same day as the new construction. The Owner © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 W FLEXIBLE PAVING (MUNICIPAL PROJECTS) 321201-3 may require milling or saw cutting on surfaces paved the same day, if, in the opinion of the Owner, the mix has cooled to a point where a new milled or sawed edge is necessary. 2. Construct 2-foot wide (min.) ramp where new construction does not match existing construction (i.e. wearing course to non -wearing course). 3.02 RESTRICTIONS A. Conform to MnDOT Section 2360.3.A, except as modified herein. B. All street surfaces checked and approved by the Engineer prior to paving. C. Existing bituminous surfaces must be dry prior and during placement of nny hituminni is pavements. D. Wearing course shall not be placed when the air temperature in the shade and away from artificial heat is 50 degrees F or less, unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 3.03 EQUIPMENT A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.3.B. 3.04 TREATMENT OF SURFACE A. Bituminous Tack coat shall conform to MnDOT Spec, 2357, except as modified herein. Restrictions 1. The tack coat shall not be applied when the road surface is wet or when the weather conditions are unsuitable. 2. The area for tack coat application shall be limited as directed by the Engineer. 3. The Contractor shall have sole responsibility of claims of tack coat on personal property due to lack of notification or signage of the area being tack coated. C. Equipment: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.3.B. D. Road Surface Preparation: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2357.3.C. E. Application 1. At a uniform rate conforming to MnDOT Spec. 2357.3.D (Table 2357-2). 2. Along the front edge of the concrete curb and gutter, prior to placement of both bituminous base and wearing course. 3.05 PAVEMENT DENSITY A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.3.D, except as modified herein. 1. Pathways, Driveways, Small Parking Lots, Leveling Courses, and Patching shall conform to Section 2360.3.D.2 - Ordinary Compaction Method. 2. All other Pavement Density shall conform to Section 2360.3.D.1 - Maximum Density Method. 3. M dify Table 2360-21 Lot Determination as indicated below: Daily Production (Tons) Lots 200 to 1,000 1 FLEXIBLE PAVING (MUNICIPAL PROJECTS) © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 12 01 - 4 1,001 to 2,000 2 2,001 to 3,600 3 3,601 to 5,000 4 5,001 + 6 Daily production 0 to 200 tons is at the discretion of the Engineer. B. Vibrating steel drum roller and a pneumatic tired roller employed in conjunction with each other during compaction of all wear courses. 3.01 THICKNESS AND SURFACE SMOOTHNESS REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2360.3.E, except as modified herein. 1. Table 2360-26, Final wear adjacent to fixed structures for manholes and valves shall conform to Section 33 05 17. 2. The sentence "In addition to the list the above the pavement surface must meet requirements of 2399 (Pavement Surface Smoothness) requirements." is deleted from 2360.3.E Surface Requirements. Pavement Smoothness will not apply to this Project. 3. Structure Adjustment - Conform to Section 33 05 17 for tolerances. END OF SECTION FLEXIBLE PAVING (MUNICIPAL PROJECTS) © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 12 01 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 32 13 13 CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1911> 10 1 A. Section includes: 1. Construction of cast -in -place for pool: concrete decks, sidewalks, curbs, pads, etc. 2. Curing and sealing of concrete. 3. All necessary formwork, reinforcing, accessories and backfilling. 1.02 REFERENCE A. Codes and Reference Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except as otherwise specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI): a. 301 "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings." b. 302 IR "Recommended Practice for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction." c. 303.1 "Standard Specification for Cast -In -Place Architectural Concrete." d. 304 "Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing of Concrete." e. 305R "Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting." f. 306R "Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting." 2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): a. C33 "Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates." b. C94 "Standard Specification for Ready -Mixed Concrete." c. C150 "Standard Specification for Portland Cement" d. C260 "Standard Specification for Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete." e. C309 "Liquid Membrane -Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete." f. C494 "Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." g. C618 "Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete" h. C979 "Standard Specification for Pigments for Integrally Colored Concrete." 3. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): a. M194 "Chemical Admixtures." b. Comply with requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit concrete mix designs at least 14 days prior to placement of concrete. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's complete technical data sheets for all products and materials furnished under this Section such as concrete admixtures, curing materials, expansion joint materials, adhesive anchoring material, etc. C. Qualification Data: For items in Quality Assurance Article, including list of completed projects. D. Reinforcement shop drawings. CONCRETE PAVING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 13 13 - 1 E. Submit concrete test results. F. Submit manufacturer's certification that materials comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. G. Submit manufacturer's standard warranty. H. Submit samples of colored concrete for approval. I. Submit proposed curing materials and methods. Submittal shall include at a minimum- 1. Curing materials. 2. Timing and application. 3. Methods to control evaporation. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturers with 5-years' experience in the production of specified products. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer with 5-years' experience with work of similar scope and quality. Contractor shall provide information regarding 5 similar projects. C. Comply with the requirements of ACI 301. D. Obtain each specified material from same source and maintain high degree of consistency in workmanship throughout Project. E. The Contractor shall hire an independent testing laboratory to perform the Work listed below: 1. Test proposed aggregate for compliance with ASTM C33. 2. Design concrete mixes in accordance with ACI 301. 3. Cast and test concrete cylinder for all concrete in accordance with ASTM C31 and C39. 4. Determine slump of concrete from each truck in accordance with ASTM C143. r -_ —1-7- _ - Z VNIIIA C T A A r") q IVI1lIG, .V.Gal, aILV.UV,IGJUelt,IIIIIIIc U11 l.VI ICI II VI lI I11VI IIJIIVI Vwi. Site Sample Slabs: 1. Prior to installation of concrete deck, pour sample 4 feet by 4 feet, 4-inch-thick slab for approval of broomed surface texture. 2. Pads will establish acceptable finish texture, workmanship, curing, sealing, etc. to be expected for the Project. The Engineer shall have 2 working days to review and approve or reject the test panel. 3. Obtain acceptance of qualities by Owner before start of Work. Provide additional sample slab(s) as necessary to obtain acceptance. Retain accepted slabs until end of Project for comparative reference. At end of the Project, demolish and remove sample pads from the Site. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Do not pour concrete until base has been approved. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE PAVING 321313-2 Concrete Environmental Requirements: 1. Schedule placement to minimize exposure to wind and hot sun before curing materials are applied. 2. Avoid placing concrete if rain, snow, or frost is forecast within 24 hours. Protect fresh concrete from moisture and freezing. 3. Comply with professional practices described in ACI 305R and ACI 306R. Schedule delivery of concrete to provide consistent mix times from batching until discharge. Mix times shall meet manufacturer's written recommendations. 1.06 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Store reinforcement, supports and accessories at the Site in a manner to prevent damage from water, accumulation of dirt or construction activities. B. Do not store reinforcing, equipment or other materials on finished slab surfaces. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Forms: 1. Either steel or wood, size and strengths to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use forms that are straight and free of distortion and defects. 2. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated plywood/boards to form radius bends as required. 3. Coat forms with a non -staining form release agent that will not discolor or deface the surface of the concrete. B. Reinforcing: 1. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60. C. Adhesive Anchor: Adhesive for anchoring steel reinforcement dowels and threaded rods in concrete shall be a 2-component injected epoxy structural adhesive. Approved products include Hilti RE-500 Adhesive as manufactured by Hilti Fastening Systems, Epoxy - Tie Adhesive as manufactured by Simpson Strong -Tie, or Epogel as manufactured by Sonneborn. D. Concrete Materials: l . Concrete materials shall conform to the following minimum requirements: a. Cement: ASTM C150 Type I - Single source of supply. b. Aggregate: ASTM C33 - Single source of supply. 100% crushed material, 100% chert-free. c. Water: Clean, potable, with no deleterious substances. d. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260. e. Water Reducing Admixture: ASTM C494, Type A. f. Fly Ash (Pozzolan): ASTM C618, Class C or F. 2. Concrete shall conform to the following mix requirements: a. Course aggregate: ASTM C33 Size No. 67. b. Min. 28-day compressive strength: 4,000 psi. c. Max. water/(cement + pozzolan)ratio: 0.44 d. Min. cement + pozzolan content: As required to meet 28-day strength. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE PAVING 321313-3 e. Max. pozzolan content: 25 percent of cement content. f. Slump: 3 inches +/- 1 inch. g. Entrained air content: 6 percent +/- 1-1 /2 percent. 3. If super plasticizers or mid -range water reducers are used, slump shall not exceed 6 inches. 4. Do not add calcium chloride to mix as it causes mottling and surface discoloration. 5. Do not add water to the mix in the field. 6. Colors: a. Cement: Color shall be standard gray. b. Sand: Color shall be locally available natural sand. c. Aggregate: Concrete producer's standard aggregate complying with specifications. E. Expansion Joint Material: Closed cell expanded polyethylene sheet, 3/8 inch thick. Expansion joint shall be full depth of concrete slab. F. Expansion Joint Polypropylene Sleeves 1. Greenstreak Speed Load Dowels or Approved Equal. Size as required to match dowels shown on the Drawings. G. Expansion Joint Dowel Bars: 1. Smooth dowel bars, sawn ends, conforming to ASTM A36. H. Subgrade Base Material: 1. Granular material conforming to Section 31 00 00 Earthwork. I. Moisture -Retaining Cover - Use one of the following: 1. Polyethylene Sheeting: AASHP M171. 2. Polyethylene - Coated Burlap. J. Membrane Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, clear, non -yellowing type for exposed sunlight condition use. K. Bonding Agent: 1. Acryi 60 rTiuriuiuciureU rJy -guru SysierTr Pruuucis (.)r uppruvtju eyuui. L. Joint Sealant: 1. General Use: Shall be a single component, gun grade polyurethane joint sealant conforming to ASTM C920-86, TT-S-00230C. Vulkem 116 or approved equal. Light gray color to match concrete color. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The completed concrete work shall give the appearance of uniformity in surface contour and texture and shall be accurately constructed to line and grade. The required joints, edges, and flow lines shall show neat workmanship. B. Materials thicknesses shall be per the Drawings. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE PAVING 321313-4 C. Provide slip -resistant broom finish, conforming to ADA recommendations for slip resistance, except where alternative finish is noted on drawings. Brooming shall be at a 90-degree angle to normal traffic flow direction. D. Retempering of the concrete, which has partially hardened, with or without additional materials or water, is prohibited. 3.02 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support loads. B. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast -in - place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials. C. Install sufficient lengths of forms to allow continuous progress of the work and so that forms can remain in place at least 48 hours after concrete placement. D. Check completed formwork for grade and alignment to the following tolerance: 1. Top of Form Units: Not more than 1 /8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical Face: Longitudinal axis, not more than 1 /4 inch in 10 feet. E. Clean forms after each use and coat with form oil as often as required to insure separation from concrete without damage. 3.03 PLACING REINFORCEMENT A. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. B. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcements against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. C. Properly position reinforcing steel and wire it together at intersections and supports to ensure against displacement during concrete placing. D. All reinforcing steel, including dowels and embedded items, must be placed and tied securely with wire before concrete is placed. E. Place reinforcing steel in accordance with the Drawings, approved shop drawings, and as specified herein. F. Reinforcing steel shall have the following concrete cover, unless specifically noted differently on the Drawings: 1. Concrete cast against earth 3 inches. 2. All other concrete 2 inches. G. Provide reinforcement splices by lapping ends, placing bars in contact, and tightly wire tying. H. Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances: 1. Clear distance to formed surface ± 1 /4 inch. 2. Spacing dimensions ± 1 /2 inch. CONCRETE PAVING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3213 13 - 5 3.04 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: 1. Do not place concrete until subgrade and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten under bed as required to provide a uniform, dampened condition at the time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around structures until they have been brought to the required grade and alignment. 2. Place concrete using methods which prevent segregation of the mix and with as little rehandling as possible. Consolidate concrete along the face of the forms and adjacent to transverse joints with an internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcements, or side forms. Use only square faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation, Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. 3. Deposit spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints, as far as possible, If intern 1ptpd far more than 1 /2 hour, place a construction joint, Sections less than 15 feet in length between transverse joints will not be permitted. 4. Any deviation in the design curvature of concrete edges in excess of 3/8 of an inch measured with a 10-foot straight edge will be considered unacceptable. 5. Any surface area allowing the entrapment of water at a depth of 1 /8 inch or greater will be considered unacceptable. b. Unacceptable work shall be removed and replaced with acceptable work as directed by the Engineer. 7. All reinforcement and embedded items shall be secured in place. 8. All snow, ice, and mud shall be removed prior to placing concrete. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or ground with either standing water or when upper 2 inches of ground is saturated. 9. Do not place r:ancrete during rain, sleet, or snow. 10. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be deposited on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness within the section. 11. Concrete which has partially hardened or has been contaminated by hardened materials shall not be deposited. 12. Remove rejected concrete from the Site. 13. Deposit concrete as neariy as practicabie in its final pusikun iu uvuld segreguiiun due to handling or flowing. B. Placing Concrete Slabs: 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation. 2. Consolidate concrete placed in slabs by mechanical vibration or other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Bring slab surfaces to the correct level with a straight edge and then strike off. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth the sl Irfnr:e, leaving it free from bumps and hollows. 3. Do not leave screed stakes in concrete. 4. Do not sprinkle water on the plastic surface. Do not disturb the slab surfaces prior to start of finishing operations. 3.05 COLD WEATHER PLACING A. Do not place concrete when the air temperature is less than 40 degrees F without the specific approval of the Engineer. CONCRETE PAVING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 13 13 - b B. Cold weather concrete work shall conform to all requirements of ACI 306.1, except as modified the requirements of these Contract Documents. C. Concrete shall not be placed against any frozen substrate, including subgrade soils. D. Concrete shall not be placed around any embedment, including reinforcing steel that is at a temperature below freezing. E. The temperature of the concrete delivered at the site shall conform to the following limitations: Air Temperature Minimum Concrete Temperature Above 30 degrees F 60 degrees F 0° to 30 degrees F 65 degrees F Below 0 degrees F 70 degrees F F. If water or aggregate is heated above 100 degrees F, the water shall be combined with the aggregate in the mixer before cement is added. Cement shall not be mixed with water or with mixtures of water and aggregate having a temperature greater than 100 degrees F. G. When the mean daily temperature is less than 40 degrees F, the temperature of the concrete shall be maintained between 50 degrees and 70 degrees F for the required curing period. H. Arrangements for heating, covering, insulation, or housing the concrete work shall be made in advance of placement and shall be adequate to maintain the required temperature without injury due to concentration of cold or heat. Protection shall remain in place for a minimum of 3 days. I. Combustion heaters shall not be used during the first 24 hours, unless precautions are taken to prevent exposure of the concrete to exhaust gases. J. Once the cold weather concrete protection is removed, concrete curing must be continued for the remainder of the 10-day curing period. K. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strengths, which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306. L. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, and other materials containing anti -freeze agents or chemical hardeners. 3.06 HOT WEATHER PLACING A. Comply with ACI 305 when hot weather conditions exist. B. Maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 90 degrees F. C. When the temperature of the steel is greater than 120 degrees F, steel forms and reinforcement shall be sprayed with water prior to placing concrete. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE PAVING 321313-7 D. Keep all surfaces protected from rapid drying. Provide windbreaks, shading, fog spraying, sprinkling, pending, or wet covering in advance of placement. E. Do not use retarding admixtures. 3.07 JOINTS A. General: Construct joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of the concrete, unless otherwise shown. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless otherwise required. B. Weakened -Plane (Control) Joints: Provide weakened -plane (control) joints, sectioning concrete into areas shown on the Drawings. Construct weakened -plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1-1/2 inches: 1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened -plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion to provide a 1 /8-iinch radius by 1/4-inch wide joint (with tooled joint depth of approximately 3/4-inch). Within 12 hours, saw cut joint with a "soft -cut" blade to achieve a 1-1 /2 inch depth. C. Expansion Joints: l . Provide pre -molded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, storm inlets, manholes, structures, pools, walls, buildings, and other fixed objects. 2. Locate additional expansion joints at locations shown on the Drawings. 3. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint. Furnish joint fillers in 1-piece lengths for the full width being placed, wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler section together. Form top edge of filler to conform to top profile of concrete, except where sealing is indicated. 4. Protect the top edge of the joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after both sides of joint are in place. 3.08 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth the surface by screeding and floating. Adjust the floating to compact the surface and produce a uniform texture. B. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10-foot straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous, smooth finish. C. Work edges of slabs and formed joints with an edging tool and round to 1/2-inch radius, unless otherwise shown. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces. D. After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete surface finishing as follows: 1. Provide broom finish by drawing a broom across concrete surface, perpendicular to line of traffic. Repeat operation if required to provide a slip resistant fine line texture acceptable to the Engineer. CONCRETE PAVING © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 13 13 - 8 3.09 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. General: 1. Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for a period of time necessary for hydration of cement and proper hardening. 2. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting; keep continuously moist for not less than 72 hours. 3. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 168 cumulative hours (not necessarily consecutive) during which concrete has been exposed to air temperatures above 50 degrees F. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. Use moisture -retaining cover or membrane -forming curing compound. 3.10 REMOVAL OF FORMS AND FINISHING A. Formwork may be removed 12 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard not to be damaged by form removal operations and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. At vertical faces or curbs, slabs, and retaining walls that will be exposed to view, grind form joint lines, fill the holes with concrete, repair honeycombed areas, and apply rubbed cement finish. 3.11 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. All panels which are not finished to the satisfaction of the Engineer shall be removed and replaced at no cost to the Owner. B. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of Work. Exclude traffic from pavement for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. END SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE PAVING 321313-9 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 32 13 14 CONCRETE WALKS, MEDIANS, AND DRIVEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Cast -in -place concrete walkways and paving. Related Sections l . Section 31 23 00 - Excavation and Fill. 2. Section 31 23 13 - Subgrade Preparation. 3. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses. 4. Section 32 12 01 - Flexible Paving (Municipal Project). 5. Section 32 16 13 - Concrete Curbs and Gutters. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. A Bid Item as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, for 7 Inch Concrete Pavement has been included in the Bid Form. Measurement shall be on the basis of in -place square yard for each type of walk. a. Payment of the Bid Item shall include the following: 1) Concrete materials. 2) Subgrade and base preparation. 3) Placement of materials. 4) Finishing. 5) Curing and protection. 6) Reinforcement. 7) Backfilling. b. Excavation is considered incidental. c. Aggregate base beneath concrete sidewalk shall be measured and compensated per Section 32 11 23. 2. Bid Item for 4 Inch Concrete Walk has been included in the Bid Form. Measurement shall be on the basis of in -place square foot for each type of walk. a. Payment of the Bid Item shall include the following: 1) Concrete materials. 2) Subgrade and base preparation. 3) Placement of materials. 4) Finishing. 5j Curing and protection. 6j Reinforcement. 7) Backfilling. b. Excavation for concrete sidewalk is considered incidental. c. Aggregate base beneath concrete sidewalk shall be measured and compensated per Section 32 11 23. 3. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. CONCRETE WALKS, MEDIANS, AND DRIVEWAYS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 13 14 - 1 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 1. C260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2211 -Aggregate Base. 2. 2461 - Structural Concrete. 3. 2521 - Walks. 4. 2531 - Concrete Curbing. 5. 3702 - Preformed Joint Filers. 6. 3753 -Type 1-D Membrane Curing Compound. 7. 3754 - Poly -Alpha Methylstyrene (AMS) Membrane Curing Compound. 8. 3755 - Linseed Oil Membrane Curing Compound. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit one 7-day and two 28-day concrete test results for all concrete pours in any given day. B. Submit MnDOT approved design mix for each concrete mix designation used. If a MnDOT approved mix design is unavailable, the Engineer will establish the job mix proportions. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Construction of pedestrian curb ramps shall be completed prior to the placement of the bituminous walk or pathway. B. Construction of the concrete driveway apron shall begin no sooner than 24 hours after placement of the adjacent concrete curb and gutter with completion within 5 days of curb placement. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete to conform to MnDOT Spec. 2461, except as modified herein. 1. Portland Cement: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3101. a. Type 3 air -entraining concrete produced by using Type I Portland Cement. 2. Air -Entraining Admixtures: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3113. a. Conforming to ASTM C260. b. Not to be added to the concrete mixtures in the field without approval from Engineer. 3. Mix Designation and Classification a. Sidewalk, Pedestrian Ramps, Pad, and Driveways: Mix No. 31`52A. B. Preformed Joint Filler: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3702. C. Curing Compound: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3754. 1. Curing compound shall contain a fugitive dye. 2. Only MnDOT approved membrane curing compounds will be allowed for use. MnDOT shall pre -approve all curing compounds. The most current approved lots and batches CONCRETE WALKS, MEDIANS, AND DRIVEWAYS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 13 14 - 2 with product expiration dates are available from the MnDOT Products website. All curing compounds shall comply with the requirements of the MnDOT Curing Compound Manufacturer Approval Program, including pre -testing of all materials by the manufacturer. D. Sub -Grade Base Material 1. Select Granular Material: Conform to Section 31 23 00. 2. Aggregated Base: Conforming to Section 32 11 23. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide copies of batch tickets for concrete mix at the time of material delivery. B. Construct concrete walkway and driveways at the locations and elevations indicated on the Drawings. C. Construct walkways and paving to conform to the typical section shown on the Drawings. D. Verify locations with Engineer in the field prior to construction. E. The completed concrete work shall give the appearance of uniformity in surface contour and texture and shall be accurately constructed to line and grade. The required joints, edges, and flow lines shall show neat workmanship. F. Retempering of concrete which has partially hardened with or without additional materials or water is prohibited. G. Concrete washout locations shall conform to the requirements of the NPDES. 3.02 FOUNDATION PREPARATIONS A. Placement of the aggregate base or granular material to support the concrete work shall conform to Section 32 11 23 or Section 31 23 13. Compaction of subgrade base shall conform to MnDOT Spec. 2211.3C. B. The foundation shall be approved by the Engineer prior to placement of concrete material. 3.03 FORMS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2521.3C. 3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2521.3D.2, except as modified herein. 1. Maximum spacing of expansion joints for walkways shall be 60 feet. 2. Match joints of adjacent concrete work. 3.05 METAL REINFORCEMENT A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.3F, except as modified herein. CONCRETE WALKS, MEDIANS, AND DRIVEWAYS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 13 14 - 3 1. Install four No. 4 steel reinforcing rods in lower portion of the valley gutter section with minimum 2-inches coverage on all sides. 3.06 PLACING AND FINISHING A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2521.3D and 2531.3D for slip form or 2531.31 for manual placement, except as modified herein. l . Any deviation in the design curvature of concrete edges in excess of 3/8 of an inch, measured with a 10-foot straight edge, will be considered unacceptable. 2. Any surface area allowing the entrapment of water at a depth 1 /8 inch or greater will be considered unacceptable. 3. Unacceptable work shall be removed and replaced with acceptable Work as diroctod by tho Engineer. Acceptance of Work by price reduction will not be allowed. Pedestrian Curb Ramp - Truncated Dome l . Truncated Dome Panels - Conform to the manufacturer's recommendations for placement. 2. Truncated dome panels shall be placed (wet set) on a minimum of 6-inches concrete and prior to finishing the adjacent concrete surface of the pedestrian ramp. The joint between the panel and concrete shall be finished with 1/2-inch radius edging tool. 3. Conform to MnDOT Standard Detail Plate No. 7038A or current revision for specified truncated dome surface pattern dimensions. Refer to the Drawings for actual ramp size, shape, and slopes. 4. Multiple Truncated Dome panels shall be of equal size. 5. Joint space between truncated dome panels shall be no greater than 1 /4 inch in width. 3.07 CONCRETE CURING AND PRnTFCTInN A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2521.3E and 2521.3E.1.a (Membrane Curing Method), except as modified herein. l . Coat all surfaces with membrane curing compound within 30 minutes after finishing at the specified rate. 2. The membrane -curing compound must contain a fugitive dye and be applied at 2 different directions perpendicuiar to each o1hei. 3. A second application of membrane curing compound shall be applied 4 to 8 hours after the first application at the specified rate. 4. Cold weather curing, when temperatures fall below 40 degrees F during placement or within the following 24 hours, shall conform to MnDOT Spec. 2521.3E.1.b curing blanket method, except as modified below: a. If temperatures are projected to fall below 32 degrees F within 24 hours of concrete placement, insulated blankets shall be using for curing, b. All costs associated with blanket curing shall be incurred by the Contractor. 5. The freshly finished surface shall be protected, surfaces pitted by rain will be considered unacceptable. 6. Removal and replacement of any concrete section damaged by traffic, rain, cold weather, or other causes occurring prior to final acceptance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.08 HIGH EARLY CONCRETE A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2461.2F.1.1b, except as modified herein. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CONCRETE WALKS, MEDIANS, AND DRIVEWAYS 321314-4 High early concrete shall be designed to provide a maximum water/cementitous ratio of 0.38. High early concrete shall be designed to provide a minimum flexural strength of 500 psi and a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi in 48 hours. High early concrete may be included as a separate Bid Item or as an Engineer ordered material. In absence of a separate Bid Item for high early strength concrete, compensation will be at an agreed upon price not to exceed 20 percent above the Contract cubic yard price for standard strength concrete for the quantity ordered by the Engineer. The price shall be agreed upon prior to placement. 3.09 BACKFILLING A. Conform to MnDOT Spec.2521.3G, except as modified herein. 1. Perform backfilling to protect the concrete no sooner than 72 hours after placement of the concrete. END OF SECTION CONCRETE WALKS, MEDIANS, AND DRIVEWAYS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3213 14 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 32 16 13 CURBS AND GUTTERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Cast -in -place concrete curbs, and concrete curb and gutter. B. Related Sections 1. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses. 2. Section 32 12 01 - Flexible Paving (Municipal Projects). 3. Section 32 13 14 - Concrete Walks, Medians, and Driveways. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. Bid Items as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, have been provided for Concrete Curb and Gutter. Measurement of curb and gutter shall be by the lineal foot for each type measured along the face of the curb at the gutter line. Payment shall include materials, preparation, placement, finishing, curing, protection, reinforcement, and backfilling. Measurement shall not include frames/ castings that are located along the face of curb. a. All water service locations shall be marked with "W" stamp approved by Owner at the time of curb placement. This Work is incidental to installation of the Concrete Curb and Gutter. b. All drain the clean outs and filtration clean outs shall be marked with "CO" stamp at the time of curb placement. The City/Engineer will supply the "CO" stamp. This Work is incidental to installation of the Concrete Curb and Gutter. 2. No separate measurement or payment for modifications at curb ramps, transition sections, or curb depressions at driveway aprons. 3. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM) 1. C260 - Air -Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. B. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2461 - Structural Concrete. 2. 2531 - Concrete Curbing. 3. 3101 -Portland Cement. 4. 3113 - Admixtures for Concrete. 5. 3702 - Preformed Joint Fillers. 6. 3754 - Poly -Alpha Methylstyrene (AMS) Membrane Curing Compound. 7. 3755 - Linseed Oil Membrane Curing Compound. © 2017 Stantec 1 193804337 CURBS AND GUTrERS 321613-1 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit one 7-day and two 28-day concrete cylinder test results for all concrete pours in any given day. B. Submit MnDOT approved design mix for each concrete mix designation used. If a MnDOT approved mix design is unavailable, the Engineer will establish the job mix proportions. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Install concrete curb and gutter within 1 week after aggregate base has been completed and approved. B. Concrete curb and gutter construction precedes installation of pavement. Allow for sufficient curing time. C. Coordinate notifications of restricted driveway access with Engineer and property owners. Minimizing inconvenience to businesses and residents is a necessity to the success of the project. D. Spot replacement of curb and gutter should be completed prior to any bituminous paving in the mill and overlay and full pavement removal areas. 1. Install new curb and gutter within 3 days of removal in these areas. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Concrete to Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2461, except as modified herein. 1. Portland Cement: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3101. a. Type 3 air -entraining concrete produced by using Type I Portland Cement. 2. Air -Entraining Admixtures: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3113. a. Conforming to ASTM C260. b. Not to be added to the concrete mixtures in the field without approval from L-� �1 191122r. 3. Mix Designation and Classification for Concrete Curb and Gutter. a. Manual Placement Mix No. 31`52C. b. Slip Form Placement Mix No. 3F32C. B. Pre -Formed Joint Filler: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3702. C. Curing Compound: Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3754. 1. Curing compound shall contain a fugitive dye. 2. Only MnDOT approved membrane curing compounds will be allowed for use. MnDOT shall pre -approve all curing compounds. The most current approved lots and batches with product expiration dates are available from the MnDOT Products website. All curing compounds shall comply with the requirements of the MnDOT Curing Compound Manufacturer Approval Program, including pre -testing of all materials by the manufacturer. © 2017 Stantec 1193804337 CURBS AND GUTTERS 32 16 13-2 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Provide copies of batch tickets for concrete mix at the time of material delivery to Site. B. Construct concrete curb and gutter at the locations and elevations indicated on the Drawings. C. Construct the style or type of curb and gutter as shown on the Drawings. D. Construct intersection curb radii and transitions sections to conform to the detail on the Drawings. E. Construct transition sections at inlet structures to conform to the detail on the Drawings. F. Construct concrete curb ramp depressions to conform to the detail on the Drawings. G. Construct curb transitions for driveways to conform to the detail on the Drawings. Locations to be verified by Engineer at the time of construction. H. The completed concrete work shall give the appearance of uniformity in surface contour and texture, and shall be accurately constructed to line and grade. The required joints, edges, and flow lines shall show neat workmanship. I. Retempering of the concrete which has partially hardened with or without additional materials or water is prohibited. J. Contractor shall confirm locations of application of curing compound to existing curb and gutter with the Engineer prior to application. K. Contractor shall take care during cure application to protect existing driveways and street surfaces from cure material. L. Concrete washout locations shall conform to the requirements of the NPDES. 3.02 FOUNDATION PREPARATIONS A. Support on a compacted aggregate base 1. Conform to typical sections as shown on the Drawings. 2. Conform to Section 32 11 23. 3. Aggregate base shall be approved by Engineer prior to curb and gutter placement. 3.03 FORMS A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.313. 3.04 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.3E, except as modified herein. 1. Maximum spacing of expansion joints for slip formed shall be 200 feet. © 2017 Stantec 1 193804337 CURBS AND GUTTERS 32 16 13-3 3.05 METAL REINFORCEMENT A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.3F, except as modified herein. 1. Where required, install two No. 4 steel reinforcing rods in lower portion of the curb section with a minimum of 2-inch coverage on all sides. a. Placement at catch basins conform to the details on the Drawings. 3.06 PLACING AND FINISHING A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.3C, except as modified herein. 1. The top surface of the curb and gutter shall have a brush finish at right angles to the curb line. 3.07 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.3G and 2531.3G.1.n (Me.mhrnne. Curing Method), except as modified herein. 1. All surfaces shall be coated with membrane curing compound within 30 minutes after finishing at the specified rate. 2. The membrane -curing compound must be applied in 2 different directions perpendicular to each other. 3. A second application of membrane curing compound shall be applied 4 to 8 hours after the first application at the specified rate. 4. Cold weather curing when temperatures fall below 40 degrees F during placement or within the following 24 hours shall conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.3G.1.b curing blanket method, except as modified below: a. If temperatures are projected to fall below 32 degrees F within 24 hours of concrete placement, insulated blankets shall be using for ci iring. b. All costs associated with blanket curing shall be incurred by the Contractor. 5. The freshly finished surface shall be protected, surfaces pitted by rain will be considered unacceptable. 6. Removal and replacement of any curb section damaged by traffic, rain, cold weather, or other causes occurring prior to final acceptance shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.08 BACKFILLING A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.3H, except as modified herein. 1. Initial Backfilling a. Follow the 72-hours curing period with completion within 6 days of original placement. b. Tolerance within 0.3 feet to the top of curb elevation. 2. Final Grading a. Following completion of private utility work by others. 3. Curb damaged during Backfilling is the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.09 HIGH EARLY CONCRETE A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2461.2F.1.b, except as modified herein. 1. High early concrete shall be designed to provide a maximum water/cementitous ratio of 0.38. 2. High early concrete shall be designed to provide a minimum flexural strength of 500 psi and a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi in 48 hours. CURBS AND GUTTERS © 2017 Stantec 1 193804337 32 16 13 - 4 3. High early concrete may be included as a separate Bid Item or as an Engineer ordered material. In absence of a separate Bid Item for high early strength concrete, compensation will be at an agreed upon price not to exceed 20 percent above the Contract cubic yard price for standard strength concrete for the quantity ordered by the Engineer. The price shall be agreed upon prior to placement. 3.10 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISH A. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 2531.31, except as modified herein. 1. Any deviation in the design curvature of concrete edges in excess of 3/8 of an inch, measured with a 10-foot straight edge, will be considered unacceptable. 2. Acceptance of Work by price reduction will not be allowed. END OF SECTION CURBS AND GUTTERS © 2017 Stantec 1 193804337 32 16 13 - 5 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Pavement markings for control and guidance of traffic. B. Related Sections 1. Section 32 12 01 - Flexible Paving (Municipal Projects). 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment l . Bid Items for pavement markings of each type are provided. Payment of each Bid Item shall be compensation in full for all costs incidental thereto, including but not limited to surface preparation, traffic control measures, maintaining the Work, removal of temporary pavement markers, together with any other expenses incurred in completing the Work that are not specifically included for payment under the Contract Bid Items. a. A Bid Item has been provided for 4 inch Solid White Line - Paint. 1) Shall be measured by the lineal foot on the basis of length of lines actually applied, at a 4-inch width. 2) The second application shall be considered incidental to the payment of the first application. 3) Temporary striping on non -wear shall be incidental. 2. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Minnesota Department of Transportation "Standard Specifications for Construction," 2018 Edition (MnDOT Spec.) 1. 2582 - Permanent Pavement Markings. 2. 3354 - Preformed Pavement Marking Tape for Permanent Traffic Lane Delineation and Legends. 3. 3590 - Epoxy Resin Pavement Markings. 4. 3591 - High Solids Water Based Traffic Paint. 5. 3592 - Drop -On Glass Beads. b. Improved Patterned Polymer Pavement Marking Tape for Lines and Selected Symbols and Legends. 7. High Durability Preformed Pavement Markings. 8. The Application Specification for Conventional Pavement Marking Materials. 9. 3-Minute Dry Alkyd and High Solids Latex. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. 1 copy of the chosen paint/epoxy lot or batch formulation. PAVEMENT MARKINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 17 23 - 1 B. Pavement Marking Contractor Qualifications/Certifications. C. MnDOT Certification approvals. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Conform to the requirements of MnDOT Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Paint 1. High Solids Water Based. a. Free of toxic heavy metals, including lead, mercury, and cadmium. b. Track Free Time - 3 minutes or less. c. Yellow Prime Pigment - Colour Index Pigment Yellow No. 65 or No. 75. d. White Color - Flat white. e. Yellow Color - Color No. 33538 of Federal Standard 595. 2. 3-Minute Dry Alkyd. a. Free of toxic heavy metals, including lead, mercury, and cadmium. b. Track Free Time - 3 minutes or less. c. Yellow Prime Pigment - Color Index Pigment Yellow No. 65 or No. 75. d. White Color - Flat white. e. Yellow Color - Color No. 33538 of Federal Standard 595. B. Glass Beads 1. Conform to MnDOT Spec. 3592. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. General 1. Vehicles used shall be deployed and equipped with traffic control devices set forth in the "Minnesota Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices, Field Manual." 2. Shadow vehicie wiih ituuk-inuu Iled ul ICI Iuuloi s loll be Used VI I str 'IS ,VVlll I pos IGI! speed equal to or greater than 40 m.p.h. or ADT greater than 1,500 vehicles per day. 3. Equipment used for spray applications shall be capable of applying glass beads by a pressurized system at a rate of at least 25 Ibs/gal. 4. Capable of accumulating footage applied per gun. 5. Stainless steel components in the delivery system required for water -based materials. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The pavement marking crew shall include at least 1 technical expert knowledgeable in each of the following areas: 1. Equipment operation. 2. Application techniques. 3. Traffic control. 4. Safety regulations. PAVEMENT MARKINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 17 23 - 2 B. The filling of tanks, pouring of materials, or cleaning of equipment shall not be performed on unprotected pavement surfaces, unless adequate provisions are made to prevent spillage of material. 3.02 SCHEDULE A. Paint/Epoxy Pavement Markings 1. Place following completion of bituminous wear course: a. No sooner than 24 hours after placement of bituminous. b. Within 5 working days of completion of bituminous placement. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Locations 1. In general accordance with the Drawings. a. Location of marking designating no passing zones to be coordinated with corresponding traffic signs. 2. The Engineer will place necessary "Spotting" at appropriate points. a. Horizontal control. b. Starting and stopping points. c. Broken line intervals will not be marked. d. Longitudinal joints, pavement edges, and existing markings shall serve as horizontal control when so directed. e. Contractor shall notify Engineer at least 48 hours in advance when requesting spotting locations. 3. Edge lines and lane lines are to be broken only at intersections with public roads and at private entrances if they are controlled by a yield sign, stop sign, or traffic signal. 4. The break point is to be at the start of the radius for the intersection or at marked stop lines or crosswalks. Street Surface l . Engineer may direct cleaning of surface as necessary immediately prior to marking application. a. Brushing with non-metallic rotary broom. b. Other cleaning method approved by Engineer. c. Air blast following cleaning. 2. Surface must be dry. 3. Minimum surface temperature is 50 degrees F. 3.04 APPLICATION A. General 1. Tolerance a. Width: A tolerance of 1 /4 inch under or 1 /4 inch over the specified width will be allowed for striping provided the variation is gradual and does not detract from the general appearance. b. Length: Broken line segments may vary up to 2-3/4 inches from the specified lengths provided the over and under variations are reasonably compensatory. c. Alignment: Deviations from the control guide shall not exceed 2 inches. d. Establishment of application tolerances shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to comply as closely as practicable with the planned dimensions. 2. Material shall not be applied over longitudinal joints. 3. 4-inch broken line consists of 10 feet of paint and 40 feet space (1 cycle). PAVEMENT MARKINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 17 23 - 3 4. If same equipment used for different color material with change in color, an amount of material equal to 15 ten -foot long stripes shall be wasted prior to beginning application with the new color. 5. Conditions a. Markings shall not be applied when wind or other conditions cause a film of dust to be deposited on the pavement surface after cleaning and before the marking material can be applied. b. Except when used as a temporary marking, pavement markings shall only be applied in seasonable weather when air temperature is 50 degrees F or higher. B. Paint 1. Minimum thickness 15 mil. 2. In accnrdnncP with the appropriate MnDOT Spec. 3. Painted lines on the bituminous base course shall be applied once. 4. Painted lines on the bituminous wearing course shall be applied twice. C. Glass Beads 1. Shall be applied immediately after application of paint or epoxy markings. 2. Rate of application shall be 8 lbs. per gallon. 3.05 CORRECTION OF DEFECTS A. All pavement markings not conforming to the requirements of the Specifications shall be removed and replaced, or otherwise repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. B. Where yield computations show a deficiency in material usage of not more than 20 percent, Owner may require satisfactory repair or may accept the Work at a reduced Bid Unit Price that is in direct proportion to the percent of the deficiency. C. Where yield computations show a deficiency in material usage in excess of 20 percent, Owner will require removal and replacement to the satisfaction of the Engineer, unless other means are approved by the Engineer. D. If removal and replacement is required, at least 90 percent of the deficient line shall be .� rciiivwcu. E. Width of removal shall be 1 inch wider on all sides than the nominal width of the marking to be removed. F. Removal of unacceptable Work shall be accomplished with suitable blasting or grinding equipment, unless other means are authorized by the Engineer. Bituminous street surfacing shall not be damaged by the removal operation. END OF SECTION PAVEMENT MARKINGS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 17 23 - 4 SECTION 32 31 13 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. New industrial heavy-duty chain link fence, footings, swing gates, black, galvanized with thermally fused PVC and powder -coated finishes and necessary and associated materials and Work. 2. Provide concrete maintenance strip at fence line as shown on Drawings. B. Related Sections 1. Section 32 11 23 - Aggregate Base Courses. 2. Section 32 13 13 - Concrete Paving. 3. Section 32 13 14 - Concrete Walks, Medians & Driveways. 1.02 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Measurement and Payment 1. All Work and costs of this Section shall be included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. Should conflicting information be discovered between the referenced standards, the Specifications, Drawings, or industry standards, the standard that will produce the higher quality or quantity of product shall be utilized. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). l . A] 23/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot -Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. 2. A392 - Zinc -Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence. 3. A500 - Standard Specification for Cold -Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. 4. A525 - Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dipped Process. 5. A817 - Metallic -Coated Steel Wire for Chain -Link Fence Fabric and Marcelled Tension Wire. 6. C94/C94M - Ready Mix Concrete. 7. F567 - Installation of Chain -Link Fence. 8. F626 - Fence Fittings. 9. F668 - Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Other Organic Polymer - Coated Steel Chain -Link Fence Fabric. 10. F883 - Standard Performance Specification for Padlocks. 11. F900 - Industrial and Commercial Swing Gates. 12. F934 - Standard Specification for Standard Colors for Polymer -Coated Chain Link Fence Materials. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13-1 13. F1043 - Strength and Protective Coatings on Metal Industrial Chain -Link Fence Framework. 14. F1083 - Pipe, Steel, Hot -Dipped (Galvanized) Welded, for Fence Structures. 15. F1664 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) -Coated Steel Tension Wire Used with Chain -Link Fence. 16. F2200 - Standard Specification for Automated Vehicular Gate Construction. C. Federal Specifications (Fed. Spec.): 1. FF-P-110J -Padlock, Changeable Combination. D. Minnesota Department of Transportation, Standard Specification for Construction, 2018 edition, (MnDOT Spec.). 1. 3376 For Chain Link Fence. 2. 3379- For Chain Link Fence Gates. 3. 3403- Rolled Steel Fence Posts. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings showing fence and gate layouts, dimensions, elevation, details, accessories, foundations and finishes for fences and gates. Show installation details for all end, corner, and line posts. B. Manufacturers Data: Chain -link fencing, gates and all accessories. 1. Manufacturer's catalog cut sheets indicating materials compliance and specified options. 2. Operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Standard limited warranty. C. Manufacturers Certificates: 1. Zinc -coating compliance with Drawings and Specifications. 2. Chain -link fence, gates, materials, components, and accessories comply with Drawings and Specifications. D. Product Data/Sample: i. Cornrnercicai Uuiy �UUiock urru securiiy ciluiir. 2. Samples for Powder -coat and PVC color finishes and materials, fabric, wires, and accessories) shall be provided to the Engineer. E. Provide manufacturers written standard limited warranty covering fencing systems installed. F. Permits ns reclr tired G. If "or approved equal" alternative products or manufacturers' are proposed, contractor shall provide complete product and manufacturer data, information sheets and samples of proposed and pre -approved product and manufacturer for review and approval by Engineer. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13 - 2 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Manufacturer with minimum 5 years of experience manufacturing chain -link fencing conforming to the Drawings and Specifications. B. Obtain chain link fencing, gates, fittings, fastenings, and accessories from a single source. C. Approved Manufacturers or approved equal subject to review and approval of the Engineer. 1. Master Halco. 2. Ameristar Fence (Permacoat). 3. Stephens Pipe & Steel (SPSV Color Fencing System). 4. Wheatland Tube - WT ColorCoat. D. Installer: Qualified Contractor with demonstrated experience and capabilities and a minimum of 5 years of experience erecting chain -link fencing and gates of similar design, size and installation as shown in the Drawings and Specifications. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Materials shall conform to ASTM F1043, and ASTM A392 ferrous metals, zinc -coated; and detailed specifications forming the various parts thereto; and other requirements specified herein. Zinc -coat metal members (including fabric, gates, posts, rails, hardware and other ferrous metal items) after fabrication shall be reasonably free of excessive roughness, blisters and sal -ammoniac spots. B. All chain link fence fabric, braces, rods, hardware and accessories shall be black thermally fused PVC. Posts and rails shall be powder coated finish, black. 2.02 CHAIN LINK FABRIC A. Commercial grade hot -dip galvanized steel fabric shall meet requirements of ASTM A392. Submit samples of fence fabric to the Engineer for approval prior to installation. Wire shall be 9-gauge (0.148 inch), and shall be hot -dip galvanized to meet a minimum weight of zinc coating of 2.00 oz./SF. B. Polyolefin elastomer coating, 10 mil (0.25mm) thickness, thermally fused to zinc -coated steel core wire: Per ASTM F668 Class 2b. Core wire tensile strength 75,000 psi (517 MPa). C. Size: Helically wound and woven to height of 4-8 feet (as indicated on Drawings) with 2- inch diamond mesh, 9-gauge, with a core wire diameter of 0.148 inches and a minimum breaking strength of 1290 Ibf. Color ASTM F 934. Black as indicated on the Drawings. D. Furnish 1-piece fabric widths for all chain -link fencing. There shall be no splices in the fabric between the posts. E. 9-gauge steel wire. F. 2-inch mesh. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13 - 3 G. Tensile Strength: Minimum 80,000 psi. H. Fabric shall have knuckled top and bottom edges, unless otherwise noted. Fabric Width: 4-feet and 8-feet. 2.03 RAILS AND POSTS A. Top Rails, Brace Rails and Bottom Rails 1. 1-5/8 inches O.D. SS 40 pipe, 2.27 lb./ft or 1-5/8 inches by 1-1/4 inches roll form section with a minimum bending strength of 192 Ibs, W/T-.140 inches. 2. Zinc coating of minimum 2.0 oz./sq. ft. coated surface area. 3. Securely fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations. B. Line Posts 1. 2-1/2 inches O.D. SS 40 pipe weighing not less than 3.65 lb/ft or 1-7/8 inches by 1-5/8 inches roll form section with a minimum theoretical bending strength of 201 lbs. under a 6-foot cantilever load. W/T-.154 inches. 2. Zinc coating of minimum 2.0 oz./sq. ft. coated surface area. 3. Minimum Length: Air -driven posts - 156-inches (8 feet above grade, 5 feet below). C. End, Corner, and Pull Posts 1. 3 inches O.D., SS 40 pipe with a weight of 5.79 lb/ft, or 3-1/2 inches by 2-1/2 inches roll form shape of equal strength. W/T-.203 inches. 2. Zinc coating of minimum 2.0 oz./sq. ft. coated surface area. 3. Minimum Length: Concrete set posts - 144-inches (8 feet above grade, 4 feet below). D. Post braces, truss rods at each gate, corner, pull or end post. E. Truss rods with turnbuckles or equivalent provisions for adjustment as approved by the Engineer. F. Provide larger gate posts as required by Specifications. G. Aii i er icir iy shuii l iciude but h lop uilu u0l l0i 7 i r uu5. H. Center rails shall be provided as brace rails across first fence sections adjoining all terminal posts or corner posts. Center rails shall be provided between line or pull posts as recommended in the referenced Specifications or according to industry standards, whichever are more stringent, as approved by the Engineer. I. Where color coated fencing is called for in the Drawings and Specifications, all posts, braces, rails and visible hardware shall have the same supplemental color coating. J. Steel square sections. 7ASTM A 500, Grade B, Steel having minimum yield strength of 40,000 psi (275 MPa); sizes as indicated. Hot -dipped galvanized with minimum 2.0 oz./ft2 (610 g/m2) of coated surface area. K. Polyolefin Coated finish 1. In accordance with ASTM F1043, color coating of chain link fabric shall be minimum 10 mils (0.254mm) of thermally fused polyolefin in black color. Coating shall be applied after fabrication. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 0 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13 - 4 l Polyester powder coated rails and posts shall be in accordance with ASTM F1043. The material used for the base coat shall be a (gray color) thermosetting epoxy; the minimum thickness of the base coat shall be two (2) mils. The material used for the finish coat shall be a thermosetting TGIC polyester powder; the minimum thickness of the finish coat shall be 2 mils. The coated pipe shall demonstrate the ability to endure a salt -spray resistance test in accordance with ASTM 13117 without loss of adhesion for a minimum exposure time of 3,500 hours. The polyester finish coat shall not crack, blister or split under normal use. 2.04 CHAIN LINK SWING GATES A. Commercial/Industrial Grade Gate Frames: Fabricate chain -link gate frames in accordance with ASTM F 900 using galvanized steel tubular components, 2-inch square, weighing 2.60 Ib/ft, with welded connections forming a rigid 1-piece unit. Galvanizing prior to fabrication will not be allowed. B. For gates 6-feet high or higher or 12-feet wide or wider, provide minimum 1-1 /2 inch square horizontal and/or vertical interior galvanized steel members welded to frame as shown in the Drawings to form a rigid 1-piece unit. Galvanizing prior to fabrication will not be allowed. C. Chain link gate fabric: Commercial grade hot -dip galvanized steel fabric shall meet requirements of ASTM A392. Wire shall be 9-gauge (0.148 inch) and shall be hot -dip galvanized to meet a minimum weight of zinc coating of 2.00 oz./s.f. All fabric shall have both top and bottom selvages knuckled. Polyester PVC coating shall be as called out in Article 2.03. D. Install fabric to gate frame with hook bolts and tension bars at all four sides (no substitution) at no more than 15-inches on center spacing. E. Hardware materials: Hot dipped galvanized steel or malleable iron shapes as required for gate size to match adjacent materials and finish as approved by Engineer. F. Hinges: commercial or industrial quality sized for and structurally designed to support the gate and provide non -binding operation for extended service life of the gate. G. Latch: Forked type with operation from either side, capable of securing gate in closed position and with provision for padlock. H. Keeper: Provide keeper for each gate leaf over 5-feet in width. Gate keep shall consist of a mechanical device for securing the free end of the gate in the full open position. Gate Posts: Type I; Steel Pipe ASTM F 1043, SS 40, minimum yield strength of 25,000 psi. Hot dipped galvanized with minimum of 2.0 oz./ft2 of zinc or respective material, finished in accordance with ASTM F 1043 to match fence. Gate Leaf Single Width I Post Size (Round) Weight 5-foot to 12-foot 4.00 in OD 9.11 Ib/ft I. Gate Hardware 1. Double gates shall have center hold-down socket, lift rod, and padlocking bar. 2. All gates shall be equipped with positive self -latching latches at 4 feet above the ground and provided with padlock provisions. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 3231 13-5 3. Gate openings shall be equipped with a padlock conforming to ASTM F883, type POI, Grade 2, size 2-inch, as approved by the Engineer. Each gate shall be provided with 2 sets of matching padlocks. All padlocks shall be provided with 2 sets of keys and keyed as directed by the Engineer. 4. Pedestrian gates shall be self -closing with positive self -latching latches at 4 feet above the ground and provided with padlock provisions. Polyolefin Coated finish 1. In accordance with ASTM F1043, color coating of chain link fabric shall be minimum 10 mils (0.254mm) of thermally fused polyolefin in black color. Coating shall be applied after fabrication. K. Polyester powder coated rails and posts shall be in accordance with ASTM F1043. The material used for the base coat shall be a (gray color) thermosetting epoxy; the minimum thickness of the base coat shall be 2 mils. The material used for the finish coat shall be a thermosetting TGIC polyester powder; the minimum thickness of the finish coat shall be 2 mils. The coated pipe shall demonstrate the ability to endure a salt -spray resistance test in accordance with ASTM B1 17 without loss of adhesion for a minimum exposure time of 3,500 hours. The polyester finish coat shall not crack, blister or split under normal use. 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS A. Chain link fence accessories as required: ASTM F 626, Provide items required to complete fence system. Galvanize each ferrous metal item and finish to match adjacent framing and fencing. B. Post caps: Formed steel, cast malleable iron, or aluminum alloy weathertight closure cap for tubular posts. Provide 1 cap fnr ench pnst. Where top rail is used, provide tops to permit passage of top rail. C. Top rail and brace rail ends: Pressed steel per ASTM F626, for connection of rail and brace to terminal posts. D. Top rail sleeves: 7-inch (178 mm) expansion sleeve with spring, allowing for expansion and contraction of 'top raii. E. Truss rods and tighteners: Steel rods with minimum diameter of 5/16 inches (7.9 mm). Capable of withstanding a tension of minimum 2,000 lbs. F. Nuts and bolts are galvanized but not polyolefin coated. Field spray color coat nuts and bolts, as approved by Engineer. G. Brace and tension (stretcher bar) bands: Pressed steel. At square post provide tension bar clips. l . Tension (stretcher) bars: 1-piece lengths equal to 2 inches (50 mm) less than full height of fabric with a minimum cross-section of 3/16-inch by 3/4-inch (4.76 mm x 19 mm) or equivalent fiber glass rod. Provide tension (stretcher) bars where chain link fabric meets terminal posts. 2. Tension wire: Thermally fused polyolefin applied to metallic coated steel wire: Per ASTM F1664 Class 2 b, 6-gauge, [0.192 inches (4.88 mm)] diameter core wire with tensile strength of 75,000 psi (517 MPa). © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 3231 13-6 H. Ties 1. 9-gauge aluminum wire at 2 feet on center on top and bottom rod and 12 inches on center posts. Thermally fused PVC coated with color to match fence. Double wrap 13- gauge [0.092 inch (2.324 mm)] for rails and braces. Hog ring ties of 12.5-gauge [0.0985 inches (2.502 mm)] for attachment of fabric to tension wire. I. Fittings 1. Necessary fittings shall be of malleable iron hot dipped galvanized after fabrication. 2. Provide caps on pipe posts and pipe gate stiles. Thermally fused PVC coated with color to match fence. J. Concrete Mix 1. Conform to ASTM C94 Portland Cement Concrete with maximum 3/4-inch aggregate having a minimum compressive strength of 3,000 psi at 28 days. 2. Dry setting fence posts using dry concrete mixes and in -situ in -place hydration will not be allowed. K. Gates 1. Size and location as shown on Drawings. 2. Gate shall have positive type latching devices with padlock provisions. 3. Fabric: Same as required in Article 2.01 - Chain Link Fabric. 4. Provide gate supports as recommended by the manufacturer. L. Galvanizing 1. All fencing components, including gates, posts, and all accessories, are to be hot dipped galvanized (2 oz./sq.ft. surface). 2. Color coated fencing called for in the Drawings shall be constructed as a complete color coated chain link fence system of the uniform specified color. All fencing and materials shall be black thermally fused PVC or powder coated material. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Verify field conditions prior to installing fencing. If locations, surfaces or other conditions are unsuitable for the fencing indicated, notify Engineer immediately and in writing for review and direction prior to proceeding with the installation. B. Contractor shall ensure buffer zones, property lines, and legal boundaries of work are clearly established. Verify permits are in -place prior to working in MnDOT Right of Way. C. Contractor shall be responsible verifying permit requirements and for obtaining required permits prior to commencing work. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for verifying that no utility lines or other structures will be affected by the installation of the fencing. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any damage/s to or from any utilities or underground structures resulting from the installation of the fencing. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13 - 7 E. The Contractor shall inspect the soil conditions at all post locations. In the event unstable soil conditions are encountered, concrete footing size and depth may be adjusted as directed by the Engineer. F. Locate fencing as shown on the Drawings unless directed otherwise by the Engineer in response to field conditions. G. Review locations with Engineer prior to installation- H. Contractor shall coordinate installation with demolition and site clearing work. Tree and brush removal and trimming needed to install the fencing shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. I. Install fencing, gates and accessories in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and code requirements. Test for proper operation and adjust until satisfactory results are nintained. J. Install fencing and gates with bottom clearances shown in the Drawings or as approved by Engineer. K. Protect adjacent site improvements, landscaping and construction to prevent damage during sign installation. 3.02 WORKMANSHIP A. All posts shall be set plumb, true to line and grade and at a uniform height and spacing as shown on the Drawings to provide a neat appearance. B. All fabric shall be tightly stretched and neatly secured to posts and rails per manufacturer's instructions. C. Fence shall be complete in every respect, including items recommended by the manufacturer for first quality construction. nnn rn A A AIA Ir A Air, r)/\CT IAICT A I I ATI/NKI J.IJJ I 1\/\IVIIIVV IIIVV I \.JJI IPAJI/ILLIIIIVIV A. Install chain link fence in accordance with ASTM F567 and manufacturer's instructions. Install fence by properly trained crew, on previously prepared surtaces, to line and grade as shown. B. Maintain all equipment, tools, and machinery while on the project in sufficient quantities and capacities for proper execution of the Work. C. Locate terminal post at each fence termination and change in horizontal or vertical direction of 30 degrees or more. D. Space line posts uniformly at 10 feet (3048 mm) on center maximum spacing or as indicated in the Drawings. E. All end, corner, and pull posts shall be set in concrete minimum 12 inches diameter by 48-inches deep. © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 3231 13-8 F. Gate and other posts larger than 3 inches in diameter shall be set in concrete footing with the diameter 4 times the diameter of the post by 60-inches deep. G. All gate, end, corner and pull post footings shall be formed and wrapped with polyethylene. H. Dig holes in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall have a diameter 4 times the diameter of the post and depth approximately 6-inches deeper than the post bottom. Excavate post holes deeper as required for adequate support in soft of loose soils and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Set post bottoms minimum 60-inches below surface when in firm undisturbed soils. Remove loose material from post holes. Dry setting fence posts using dry concrete mixes and in -situ in -place hydration will not be allowed. Unformed and unwrapped footings will not be allowed. I. Place concrete around posts in a continuous pour and consolidate/vibrate to eliminate voids. Grade area around finished footings as indicated in the drawings and remove and dispose of excess earth and debris as directed by Engineer. J. Where exposed, trowel finish footing tops to slope to direct water away from posts. K. Check each post for plumb, and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations. L. Cure concrete and grout a minimum of 72 hours before additional work is performed on the posts. M. Line posts shall be set in formed concrete footings 12-inches diameter by 48-inches deep and wrapped in polyethylene. N. Drive anchor (line) post: Using protective cap, drive line post 72-inches into ground. Slightly below ground level install galvanized drive anchor shoe fitting and 2 galvanized diagonal drive anchors and tighten the shoe per manufacturer's instructions. O. Line posts shall be evenly spaced on maximum 10-foot centers. P. End, corner, pull, and gate posts shall have braces of the same material as top rail and trussed to line posts with 3/8-inch rods and tighteners. Q. Fit all exposed ends of post with caps. Provide caps that fit snugly and are weather tight. Where top rail is used, provide caps to accommodate the top rail. Install post caps as recommended by the manufacturer and as shown in the Drawings. R. Install rails and bracing before installing chain link fabric. Provide suitable means for securing rail ends to terminal and intermediate post. Rails shall have expansion couplings (rail sleeves) located and spaced as recommended by the manufacturer. S. Top rail: Install lengths, 21-feet (6400 mm). Connect joints with rail sleeves for rigid connections for expansion/contraction. T. Bottom and Center Rails and Bracing. Install center/mid rails at mid -height for fences 6- feet (1829 mm) and over, on each side of corner, pull, and end posts. Firmly attach with fittings. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13 - 9 Bottom Rails Bracing. Install bottom rails between all posts. Firmly attach with fittings prior to installing the chain -link fabric. Adjust truss rod, ensuring posts remain plumb. 3.04 CONCRETE MAINTENANCE STRIP A. Check each post for plumb, and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and finishing operations. B. Install concrete maintenance strip as shown in Drawings following setting of posts and prior to installation of fence rails. C. Provide bond breaker and protect fence posts from concrete splash with polyethylene film wrap prior to pour. Wrap post to minimum 4' height. D. Trowel top to slope to direct water away from posts. Provide light broom finish to top of maintenance strip perpendicular to fence line. Provide tooled contraction joint at each post location as shown on Drawings. Provide construction joint where needed between cold pours by extending rebar or dowel for physical connection to adjacent pour as required. Provide'/2" expansion foam at construction joints. E. Cure concrete and grout a minimum of 72 hours before additional work is performed on the posts. 3.05 FABRIC INSTALLATION A. Fabric: Install fabric on security side and attach so that fabric remains in tension after pulling force is released. Leave approximately 2-inches (50 mm) between finish grade and bottom selvage. Attach fabric with wire ties to line posts at 15-inches (381 mm) on center and to rails, braces, and tension wire at 24-inches (600 mm) on center. B. Tension (stretcher) bars: Pull fabric taut; thread tension bar through fabric and attach to terminal posts with bands or clips spaced maximum of 15 inches (381 mm) on center. 3.06 ACCESSORIES A. Tie wires: Bend ends of wire to minimize hazard to persons and clothing. B. Fasteners: Install nuts on side offence opposite fabric side for added security. 3.07 REPAIR OF POWDER -COATED OR PVC COATED SURFACES A. Use matching color Epoxy paint or PVC repair compound, stick form, or other method, where PVC surfaces need field or shop repair. Repair surfaces in accordance with the manufacturer's printed directions. 3.08 CLEAN UP A. Keep work areas clean during operations. Protect new work and existing landscaped and turf areas to remain and remove soil, materials and debris at the end of the work day. B. At completion of fencing installation, clean fencing, repair and restore adjoining surfaces and landscaping soiled or damaged as a result of the work to original or new condition. CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13 - 10 C. Clean area and remove debris, rubbish and excess materials and properly dispose of off - site. 3.09 MANUFACTURER'S WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written standard limited warranty covering fencing systems installed. END OF SECTION CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 3231 13 - 1 1 This Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 32 31 29 ROPE/NET/POST BARRIERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Rope/Net/Post Barriers and accessories. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide at least 1 person who shall be thoroughly trained and experienced in the skill required, who shall be completely familiar with the design and application of the Work described for this Section and who shall be present at all times during progress of the work of this Section and shall direct all work performed under this Section. 1.03 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials before, during, and after installation and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs or replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Division 01. B. Submit sample of netting, rope and staples for approval. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ROPE A. Shall be 1-1 /4 inch diameter polypropylene, black in color, and secured to the wood posts with 1-1/2 inch by 3 inch galvanized staples (1 source of staples is Redmore Products of Addison, IL 847-359-5544). 2.02 NETTING A. Shall be SINCO Net Model No. 375, 2-1/2 inch by 2-1/2 inch mesh with Weather Kot Finish as distributed by SINCO, Inc., East Hampton, Connecticut 06424, (800) 243-6753, or approved equal. 2.03 TIMBER POSTS A. Shall be 8 inches diameter Southern Yellow Pine or Ponderosa Pine with chamfered top and pressure treated in accordance with the American Wood Preserver's Association, Standard C5 - Soil Contact (Non -Agricultural Use). © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 ROPE/NET/POST BARRIERS 323129-1 B. If posts use a preservative that is corrosive to steel, such as ACQ, copper azole, etc., Contractor shall provide all stainless steel hardware (staples, rope cleats, etc.) rather than galvanized steel. C. Install posts off deck or within the deck as shown on the Drawings. 2.04 METAL STANCHION POSTS A. Shall comply with requirements of Section 13 11 15. 2.05 CONCRETE FOOTINGS A. Concrete shall conform to standard ASTM C794, 3,000 PSI at 28 days. B. Post footing diameter and depth shall be as shown on the Drawings. To prevent post rotting, concrete shall not encase bottom of post. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Installation shall be made in a workmanlike manner by skilled installers. All posts shall be set in the ground in concrete foundations as detailed on the Drawings. Tops of all foundations shall slope away from the post to assure proper drainage. 3.02 SPACING A. Posts shall be of a maximum of 8 feet on center, unless designated otherwise. Wider spacing is acceptable in areas to avoid damage to piping or other buried items but should be as close to 8 feet as possible. B. Where posts are located in concrete deck, install posts on joints to aid in the prevention of cracking. Post spacing may be less than 8 feet to provide installation at joint locations. Separate posts from deck with 1/2-inch expansion joint material and caulking. 3.03 HEIGHT A. Timber posts to stand 48 inches high above the adjacent deck elevation as indicated on the Drawings for both the post and rope barriers and for the post and net barriers. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Install posts to line and grade as indicated on the Drawings. B. Where indicated on Drawings, install net material and secure to posts with staples, then install top and bottom rope weaving through the top and bottom mesh to secure to fabric. C. Install rope taking care not to exceed sag dimension shown on the Drawings. D. Hand -dig to install post and footings in areas near piping, conduits, etc. to prevent damage to buried items. ROPE/NET/POST BARRIERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 31 29 - 2 E. Where posts are required to differ from installation requirements to avoid conflicts with buried piping and other utilities notify Engineer for approval prior to installing. END OF SECTION ROPE/NET/POST BARRIERS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 31 29 - 3 I his Page Left Blank Intentionally SECTION 32 32 23 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. This work shall consist of furnishing and installing a Segmental Retaining Wall (SRW) System in accordance with the following Specifications and in close conformity with the lines, grades, design, and dimensions shown on the Drawings. The Engineer reserves the right to alter the alignment to improve constructability and aesthetics. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT A. A Bid Item as identified in the Drawings and as Part 3 of the Bid Form, Section 00 41 10, has been provided for Segmental Block Retaining Wall. Measurement shall be on the basis of square feet of surface area constructed: l . Buried courses shall be included in the area measurement. 2. Payment at the Bid Unit Price shall include: a. Masonry units. b. Aggregate base and backfill materials. c. Filter fabric. d. Geogrid reinforcement. e. All other labor and materials necessary to completely construct the wall in accordance with the Drawings and Specifications. B. All other Work and costs of this Section shall be incidental to the Project and included in the Total Base Bid. 1.03 REFERENCES A. Engineering Design: 1. NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls, Second Edition-1997. 2. ASTM 6638-01 Determination of Connection Strength Between Geosynthetics and Segmental Concrete Units. 3. NCMA SRWU-2 Determination of Shear Strength Between Segmental Concrete Units. B. Segmental Retaining Wall Units: 1. ASTM C140 - Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units. 2. ASTM C1262 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Freeze -Thaw Durability of Manufactured Concrete Masonry Units and Related Concrete Units. 3. ASTM C1372 -Standard Specification for Segmental Masonry Retaining Wall Units. C. Geosynthetic Reinforcement: 1. ASTM D4595 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Geotextiles by the Wide - Width Strip Method. 2. ASTM D5262 - Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Unconfined Tension Creep Behavior of Geosynthetics. 3. Geosynthetic Research Institute (GRI): a. GRI - GG4 Determination of Long Term Design Strength of Geogrids. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 32 23 - 1 b. GRI - GG5 Determination of Geogrid (soil) Pullout. D. Drainage Pipe: 1. ASTM 3034 - Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe. 2. ASTM D 1248 -Specification for Corrugated Plastic Pipe. Soils: 1. ASTM 698 - Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort. 2. ASTM 448 - Standard Classification for Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction. 3. ASTM 422 - Particle Size Analysis. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittals shall conform to Section 01 33 00, B. Submit wall unit manufacturer's information, including wall unit sizes, shapes, materials, colors, patterns, etc. Include standard design information for proposed units, including allowable heights for various soil types, back slope conditions and surcharge conditions. Indicate which design sections are applicable for each location proposed. C. Material Submittals - Submit manufacturers' certifications, prior to the start of work, stating the SRW units, backfill, and the drainage aggregate meet the requirement of Part 2 - Products. Provide a list of successful projects with references showing that the installer for the segmental retaining wall is qualified and has a record of successful performance. D. Samples - Color of wall units and cap units shall be determined by the Owner prior to design. Submit standard color pallets and facing choices to the Engineer for final selection. Furnish 1 unit in the color and face pattern selected, if requested. Furnish one 12 inch square or larger piece of the geosynthetic reinforcement to be used on the Project, if requested. E. Submit Surface Sealer manufacturers' data. 1.05 WALL DESIGN CRITERIA A. Retaining walls shall be designed in accordance with recommendations of the NCMA Design Manual for Segmental Retaining Walls, Third Edition - 2014. The design provided by the Contractor shall consider the internal stability, including pullout, tensile overstress and internal sliding. The design shall also include external stability of the reinforced soil mass, including base sliding, overturning, and bearing. Analysis of the global stability or general mass movement of the SRW and adjacent soil mass, bearing capacity, and settlement estimates shall be determined by the Engineer employed by the Owner. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PRODUCT HANDLING A. The Contractor shall inspect the material upon delivery to assure that the proper type and grade material has been received. B. The Contractor shall store and handle all materials in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and in a manner to prevent deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, corrosion, breaking, chipping, or other causes. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 32 23 - 2 1.07 APPROVED SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL SYSTEMS A. Suppliers of segmental retaining wall systems shall have demonstrated experience in the construction of similar size and types of segmental retaining walls on previous projects. Block used on the project shall meet the special compressive strength and durability requirements specified below in Part 2 - Products. Suppliers currently approved for this work are: 1. Anchor Block Wall Systems. 2. Keystone Retaining Wall Systems. 3. Rockwood Retaining Walls, Inc. 4. Versa-Lok Retaining Wall Systems. 5. Allan Block Retaining Wall Systems. 6. Oran approved equal. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALL UNITS A. Color and face pattern of wall units and cap units shall be determined by Owner prior to design. B. Retaining wall units shall be approximately 18 inches wide x 8 inches high with a straight face and split rock textured surface. C. Cap units shall be compatible with wall units and shall be sloped: to shed water. 2.02 DRAINAGE PIPE A. The drainage collection pipe shall be perforated or slotted, PVC or corrugated HDPE pipe. The pipe may be covered with a geotextile sock that will function as a filter. B. Drainage pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ASTM D3034 and/or ASTM D 1248. 2.03 DRAINAGE AGGREGATE A. Drainage aggregate shall be clean crushed stone or granular fill meeting the following gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM D422: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 3/4 inch 100-75 No. 4 60-0 No. 40 50-0 No. 200 5-0 2.04 REINFORCED BACKFILL A. Reinforced backfill shall be free of debris and consist of 1 off the following inorganic USCS soil types: GP, GW, SW, SP, SM meeting the following gradation as determined in accordance with ASTM D422: Sieve Size Percent Passing 2 inch 100-75 3/4 inch 100-75 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 32 23 - 3 Sieve Size Percent Passing No. 4 100-20 No. 40 60-0 N o . 200 35-0 The plasticity of the fine fraction of the reinforced soil shall be less than 6. B. The maximum aggregate size shall be limited to 3/4 inch unless field tests have been performed to evaluate potential strength reductions to the geogrid design due to damage during construction. C. Material can be site excavated soils where the above requirements can be met and whose soil properties meet the soil design properties. Unsuitable soils for backfill (high plastic clays or organic soils) shall not be used in the backfill or in the reinforced soil moss. D. Contractor shall submit reinforced fill sample and laboratory test results to the Architect/Engineer for approvnl {prior to the use of any proposed reinforced fill material 2.05 LEVELING BASE A. Leveling base material shall consist of a compacted crushed stone base or non -reinforced concrete as shown on the Drawings: 1. Aggregate Base: Crushed stone or granular fill meeting the following tradition as determined in accordance with ASTM D448: Sieve Size Percent Passing 1 inch 100 No. 4 70-35 No. 40 35-10 No. 200 10-3 Base thickness shall be 6 inches (minimum compacted thickness). B. Concrete Base: Nonreinforced lean concrete base: 1. Compressive Strength: 500 psi (maximum). 2. Base thickness shall be 6 inches. 2.06 SURFACE SEALER A. Approved surface sealers are: 1. TK Products 1140 West 47'h Street Minnetonka, MN 55343 Product Name: TK-590-40 TK-290-19 TK-290 W B 20 2. ChemRex, Inc. 889 Valley Park Drive Shakopee, MN 55379 Product Name: Hydrozo Enviroseal 40 Hydrozo Enviroseal 20 3. 4. Prosoco 3741 Greenway Circle Lawrence, KS 66046 Product Name: Sure Klean Weather Seal SL40 Sure Klean Weather Seal Siloxane WB Other products approved by the Engineer © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 323223-4 2.07 ADHESIVE A. Adhesive for anchoring cap unit to the course below shall be Sta-Stuck SS400 construction adhesive, or equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions under which the retaining wall system is to be erected and notify the Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Promptly notify the wall design Engineer of Project Site conditions which may affect wall performance, soil conditions observed other than those assumed, or other condition that may requires a reevaluation of the wall design. C. Verify the location of existing structures and utilities prior to excavation. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Ensure surrounding structures are protected from the effects of wall excavation. B. Excavation support, if required, is the responsibility of the Contractor, including the stability of the excavation and its influence on adjacent properties and structures. 3.03 EXCAVATION A. Contractor shall excavate to the lines and grades shown on the Construction Drawings. Owner's representative shall inspect the excavation and approve prior to placement of leveling material or fill soils. Proof roll foundation area as directed to determine if remedial work is required. B. All excavations shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations. C. Over -excavation and replacement of unsuitable foundation soils and replacement with approved compacted fill will be compensated as agreed upon with the Owner. 3.04 BASE LEVELING PAD A. Leveling pad material shall be placed to the lines and grades shown on the Construction Drawings, to a minimum thickness of 6 inches and extend laterally a minimum of 6 inches in front and behind the modular wall unit. B. Soil leveling pad materials shall be compacted to 98 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 - Standard Proctor density. C. Leveling pad shall be prepared to insure full contact to the base surface of the concrete units. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 32 23 - 5 3.05 MODULAR UNIT INSTALLATION A. First course of units shall be placed on the leveling pad at the appropriate line and grade,. Alignment and level shall be checked in all directions and insure that all units are in full contact with the base and properly seated. Place the front of units side -by -side. Do not leave gaps between adjacent units. Layout of corners and curves shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Install shear/connecting devices per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Place and compnc-t drainage fill within and behind wall units. Place and compact backfill soil behind drainage fill. Follow wall erection and drainage fill closely with structure backfill. E. Maximum stacked vertical height of wall units, prior to unit drainage fill and backfill placement and compaction, shall not exceed 2 courses. 3.06 BACKFILL PLACEMENT A. Backfill shall be placed, spread, and compacted in such a manner that minimizes installation damage. B. Backfill shall be placed and compacted in lifts not to exceed 6 inches where hand compaction is used or 8 inches where heavy compaction equipment is used. Lift thickness shall be decreased to achieve the required density as required. C. Backfill shall be compacted to 95 percent of maximum density as determined by ASTM D698 - Standard Proctor density. The moisture content of the backfill material prior to and during compaction shall be uniformly distributed throughout each layer and shall be dry of optimum, +/- 2 percent of optimum. D. Only lightweight hand -operated equipment shall be allowed within 3 feet from the back of the modular concrete unit. E. At the end of each day's operation, the Contractor shall slope the last lift of backfill away from the wall units to direct runoff away from wall face. The Contractor shall not allow surface runoff from adjacent areas to enter the wall construction site. 3.07 CAP INSTALLATION A. Cap units shall be glued to underlying units with an all-weather adhesive recommended by the manufacturer. B. Adjacent cap units shall have a gap of no greater than 1 /4 inch. 3.08 AS -BUILT CONSTRUCIION IOLERANCES A. Vertical Alignment: ± 1.5 inch over any 10 foot distance. B. Wall Batter: Within 2 degrees of design batter. C. Horizontal Alignment: ± 1.5 inch over any 10 foot distance. Corners, bends, curves ± I foot to theoretical location. SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 32 32 23 - 6 D. Maximum horizontal gap between erected units shall be 1 /2 inch. 3.09 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Adequately brace work to prevent damage of any kind. B. Protect installed material to prevent staining or damage from the elements. C. At a time near completion of work, clean all exposed surfaces to provide a uniform appearing job. D. Apply surface sealer at manufacturer's recommendations. 3.10 WALL SEALER A. All units shall have their surfaces sealed. B. Surface sealing shall consist of preparation, furnishing and applying the surface sealer to the top, exposed front face, and backside of the upper 3 courses. C. The Contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's written instruction for preparing, handling, and applying the surface sealer. D. The surface to be treated shall receive a light water -blast to the extent that the surface is clean and free of oils. E. Before the surface sealer is applied, the surface to be sealed shall be dry and free of all dust, debris, and frost. F. Surface sealer shall be applied at the heaviest application rate specified by the sealer manufacturer. END OF SECTION © 2019 Stantec 1 193804337 SEGMENTAL RETAINING WALLS 32 32 23 - 7 This Page Lett Blank Intentionally Request for Action May 23, 2022 Approved by: Kirk McDonald, City Manager Originating Department: Parks & Recreation By: Susan Rader, Director Agenda Title Agenda Section Consent Item Number 6.13 Resolution approving final payment to Donlar Construction Company in the amount of $18,482.70 for the construction of the New Hope Aquatic Park facility (Improvement Project No. 995) Requested Action Staff recommends that the City Council accept the construction of the aquatic park project (improvement project no. 995) and authorize final payment to Donlar Construction Company in the amount of $18,482.70. All of the necessary paperwork has been provided by the contractor. Background The city began discussing the police department and city hall space needs issue in 2013. Following citizen task force reports, the City Council approved a contract for design and construction services with Wold Architects and Engineers in January 2017.On December 11, 2017, the Council awarded a contract for the construction of a new police station/city hall facility on the site of the 50-year-old outdoor pool. In June 2018, the Council approved an agreement with Stantec for the engineering and planning of the city hall landscaping, parking lots, pool and Civic Center Park improvements. On December 10, 2018, the City Council approved the plans and specifications and authorized the advertisement of bids for each of the projects: Demolition; City Hall Landscaping, Parking Lots, Trails, Stormwater, and Park Landscaping; Theater; Skatepark; and Pool. The aquatic park construction contract for $11,350,275 was awarded to Donlar Construction Company on March 25, 2019. Eleven change orders were approved for the contract, bringing the revised contract amount to $11,472,765.89. The final Contract Value is $11,771,728.17 or $298,962.28 over the revised contract amount, which is due to additional earthwork costs. Construction started in the early spring of 2019 and the majority of the facility was completed by mid -summer 2020. The remaining punchlist items were completed in 2021 and early 2022. Funding The aquatic park construction project will be paid for with the park/pool bonds issued in December 2018 and July 2019. In addition, three facility grants were awarded to the project, including $2m from the State of Minnesota, $250,000 from the Hennepin County Youth Sports program and $40,000 from Minnesota Swimming. Between all five of the Civic Center Park project contracts (pool, park and city hall landscaping, performance center, skate park, and city hall demolition), in the fall of 2020, staff estimated that there would be a shortfall of approximately $300,000 due primarily to the additional $270,000 that was spent on the removal of poor soils and importing of sand for the pool area. Staff is still anticipating a shortfall, but is should be much less than the 2020 estimate. I: \ RFA \ P&R \ Pool and Civic Center Pk Projects \ 2022 \ d 995 Donlar Closeout \ Q -Closeout aquatic park project contract.docx Request for Action, Page 2 In November 2019, Vicki Holthaus provided a memo outlining various funding options for project overages. At the time, her recommendation was to record a one-time transfer from the Temporary Financing Fund to cover any overage on the projects. But she advised that the project overage should be recalculated at the end of all of the projects and the transfer recorded at that time. The recommendation remains unchanged. Staff is hopeful that the remaining park and city hall landscaping contract will be closed out later this year. Attachments • Resolution • Letter from Dan Boyum, City Engineer • Donlar Construction Company invoice in the amount of $18,482.70 City of New Hope Resolution No. 2022-70 Resolution approving final payment to Donlar Construction Company in the amount of $18,482.70 for the construction of the New Hope Aquatic Park facility (Improvement Project No. 995) WHEREAS, the city entered into a contract with Donlar Construction Company to complete the construction of the New Hope Aquatic Park facility; and, WHEREAS, staff is recommending that the Council adopt a resolution to accept the completion of work for the New Hope Aquatic Park facility (Improvement Project No. 995) and approve final payment to Donlar Construction Company in the amount of $18,482.70; and, WHEREAS, staff has reported that all work has been satisfactorily completed and recommends that final payment be made to Donlar Construction Company; and, WHEREAS, the funding source for this project is the park/pool bonds issued in December 2018 and July 2019. NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT RESOLVED, by the City Council of the city of New Hope, Hennepin County, Minnesota: 1. That the City Council accepts the work for the construction of the New Hope Aquatic Park facility, Improvement Project No. 995, from Donlar Construction Company. 2. That the city manager is hereby directed to authorize the final payment of $18,482.70 to Donlar Construction Company. Adopted by the City Council of the city of New Hope, Hennepin County, Minnesota this 23rd day of May 2022. { Mayor Attest:Lza- lam_ City Clerk I:\RFA\P&R\Pool and Civic Center Pk Projects\2022\#995 Donlar Closeout\6.13a1 R - Closeout aquatic park project.docx Stantec Consulting Services Inc. Stantec 733 Marquette Avenue Suite 1000, Minneapolis MN 55402-2309 May 17, 2022 File: 193804337 Attention: Susan Rader, Director of Parks and Recreation City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Dear Susan, Reference: Final Payment Request 19 & Final - New Hope Outdoor Pool City Project No. 995 Enclosed find Payment Request No. 19 & Final for the above referenced project. The contractor, Donlar Construction Company has completed the work in accordance with the contract plans and specifications and supplied final closeout forms. Therefore, it is recommended that the City of New Hope accepts the project and approves final payment of $18,482.70. The original contract amount was $11,350,275.00. Various changer orders approved on the project resulted in a revised contract amount of $11,472,765.89. The final Contract Value is $1 1,771,728.17, or $298,962.28 higher than the revised contract amount due to additional bid item costs associated with the poor soils in the area of the pool. If you have any questions or require further information, please call me at (612) 712-2021. Regards, Stantec Consulting Services Inc. Dan D. Boyum, P.E. City Engineer Phone: 612 712 2021 dan.boyum@stantec.com Attachments: Pay Request 19 & Final c. Kirk McDonald, Valerie Leone, Jeff Sargent, Bernie Weber— New Hope; Stacy Woods —City Attorney; Jeff Ehleringer — Stantec. Desi;n wit'i-) community in rn iiIGI Sta B ec Contractor: Donlar Construction Company 550 Shoreview Park Road Shoreview, MN 55126 Contract Amounts Original Contract ? 11,350,275.00 Contract Changes ` $122,490.89 Revised Contract I $11,472,765.89 Work Certified To Date Base Bid Items $11,649,237.28 Backsheet $0.00 Change Order $122,290.89 Supplemental Agreement $0.00 Work Order $0.00 Material On Hand $0.00 Total $11,771,728.17 NEW HOPE, CITY OF 4401 Xylon Avenue N New Hope, MN 55428 Project 995 - New Hope Outdoor Pool Request for Payment No. 19 & FINAL City Project No.: 995 Stantec Project No.: 193804337 For Period: 11/1/2021 - 5/17/2022 Work Certified Work Certified Less Amount I Less Previous Amount Paid I Total Amount This Request for Payment To Date Retained Pa ments This Re uest for Pa ment Paid To Date 995 $3,111.00 $11.771,728.171 $0.00 $111753,245.471 $18,482.70 $11,771,728.17 Percent Retained: 0.00% Percent Complete: 102.60% Amount Paid This Request for Pay! ent N $18,482.70 I hereby certify that all items and amounts shown are correct for the work completed to date. Contractor: Q AR ONS COMPANY By. +nF� Date_ The Work on this project and application has been reviewed and the amount shown is recommended far payment. Enginee TAN CONSULTING LTD By: Dale: I� Approved for Paymd a,/ Owner: CITY ❑KINEW HOPE By:� �.1-�� Dater Request for Payment NEW HOPE, CITY OF 4401 Xylon Avenue N New Hope, MN 55428 Project No. 995 Request for Payment No. 19 & FINAL 995 Pavment Summa No. From Date To date Work Certified Amount Retained Amount Paid Per Request for Payment Per Request for Pay ment Per Request for Pa ment 1 05/01/2019 05/31/2019 $724,282.95 $36,214.15 $688,068.80 2 06/01/2019 07/01/2019 $1,019,540.42 $50,977.02 $968,563.39 3 07/02/2019 07/31/2019 $643,250.39 $32,162.53 $611,087.87 4 08/01/2019 08/31/2019 $1,182,020.08 $59,101.00 $1,122,919.08 5 09/01/2019 09/30/2019 $1,220,798.01 $61,039.90 $1,169,758.11 6 10/01 /2019 10/31 /2019 $1, 588,254.34 $79,412.72 $1,508, 841.62 7 11 /01 /2019 11 /30/2019 $1, 071,261.34 $53,563.07 $1,017,698.27 8 12/01 /2019 12/31 /2019 $640,793.31 $32, 039.67 $608,753.64 9 1 /01 /2020 1 /31 /2020 $405,307.15 $20, 265.35 $385,041.79 10 2/01/2020 2/29/2020 $459,147.93 $22,957.40 $436,190.53 11 3/01/2020 3/31/2020 $931,025.02 $46,551.24 $884,473.78 12 4/01/2020 4/30/2020 $774,768.89 $38,738.44 $736,030.45 13 5/01/2020 5/31/2020 $454,392.33 $22,719.62 $431,672.71 14 6/01/2020 6/30/2020 $424,686.26 $21,234.31 $403,451.95 15 7/01/2020 8/05/2020 $165,487.00 ($342,876.12) $508,363.12 16 8/06/2020 8/31/2020 $52,394.63 $1,047.89 $51,346.74 17 9/01/2020 11/30/2020 $8,434.98 ($188,148.20) $196,583.18 18 12/01 /2020 10/31 /2021 $2,772.14 ($31,628.30) $34,400.44 19/Final 11 /01 /2021 5/17/2022 $3,111.00 ($15,371.70) $18,482.70 Totals: $11,771,728.17 $0.00 $11,771,728.17 995 Funding Category Report Funding Work Less Less Amount Paid Total Category Certified Amount Previous This Amount Paid No. To Date Retained Payments Request for Payment To Date State Funds 2,705,276.50 0.00 2,705,276.50 0.00 2,705,276.50 City Funds 9,066,451.67 0.00 9,047,968.97 18,482.70 9,066,451.67 Totals: $11,771,728.17 $0.00 $11,753,245.47 $18,482.70 $11,771,728.17 995 Funding Source Report Accounting Funding Amount Paid Revised Funds Paid To No. Source This Contract Encumbered Contractor Request for Payment Amount To Date To Date 01 State Funds 0.00 2,576,775.00 2,576,775.00 2,705,276.50 02 City Funds 18,482.70 8,895,990.89 8,773,500.00 9,066,451.67 Totals: $18,482.70 $11,472,765.89 $11,350,275.00 $11,771,728.17 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT trivoice4: 637-19 to CITY OF NEW HOPE Project: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool Application No-! 19 Distribution to Owner: 4401 XYLON AVE N 0 Owner Q Architect NEW HOPE, MN 55428 Period To: 5/31 /2022 0 Contractor From Contracto Donlar Construction Company Via Architect. Stantec Consulting Services 0 550 Shoreview Park Road Project Nos: 193804337 Shoreview, MN 55126 Contract For: CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Applicatrcn is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. Continuation Sheet is attached 1 Original Contract Sum 2. Net Change By Change Order/ Overrun/1lndenrun 3. Contract Sum To Date .. . • . 4, Total Completed and Stored To Date 5. Retainage: .I- 0.00% of Completed Work $0.00 h o oo°/ of Stored Material $0.00 Total Retainage 6. Total Earned Less Retainage 7- Less Previous Certificates For Payments 8 Current Payment Due .. ..... 9. Balance To Finish, Plus Retainage $11,350,275.00 $421,453 17 $11.771,728.17 $11,771,728.17 $0,00 Contract 3/26/2019 The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information, and belief, the work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents- That all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due. CONTRACTOR: Donlar Conslructior ' pany By. ate. �� ?� �27 State of: � �� Cour.tvoi Publile Subscribed and sworn to ❑e`ore me this day MEUN�JHNCRICl4SONNotary Public: �My Commission expires: NOfw MV rr„ff aj n EBXO*w in at, llaxls $11,771,728-17 ARCHITEt,T'S CERTIFIC E FOR PAYMENT In accordance with the Con ct Documents, based on on -site observations and the data comprising the above appt alton, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the $11 ,753,245.47 Archdecrs knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed as indicated, $18,482.70 the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. $0.00 , CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY j Additions Deductions Total changes approved in previous months by Owner $146.109,89 $26.730.00 Total Approved this Month $302,073 28 $0.00 TOTALS $448,183.17 $26,730.00 Net Changes By Change Order $421,453.17 AMOUNT CERTIFIED $ 18,482.70 (Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied Initial all figures on this Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform with the amount certified ) ARCHITECT By Dale % M _4?;20— This Certificate is not 410111igle The AMOUNT CERTIFIED -is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment, and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. CONTINUATION SHEET Page 2of13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date : 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05/31/22 Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C �^ D E F G H I Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed i Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G f C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 5 PART 1-BASE BID: 50 M POOL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 STATE GRANT FUNDING ' ELEMENTS 10 SUPERVISION 20,000.00, 20,000.00 0.00 0.00 20,000.00 100.00% D.00 0.00 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS 30,716.00 30,716.00 0.00 0.00, 30,716.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 20 Div 03 20 00 Decking/Grade Beam 46.000.00 46,000.00 0.00 D.00 46,000.00 I 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Reinforcement - Labor 25 Div 03 20 00 Decking/Grade Beam 59,342.00 59,342 00 0.00 0.00 59,342.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 Reinforcement - Material 30 Div 03 30 00 Concrete Decking/Grade 48,000.00 48,000,00 0.00 0,00 48,000.00 100-00% 0.00 0.00 Beam - Labor 35 Div 03 30 00 Concrete Decking/Grade 65,000.00 65,000-00 0.00 0.00 65,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Beam - Material 1 40 50 M Pool GC's - Mob/PM/Layout/Site 75,000.00 75,000 00 0.00, 0.00 75,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 - Labor 45 50 M Pool GC's - 50,000:00 50,000 001 0.00 0.00 50.000 00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Mob/PM/Layouts/Site - Material 50 50 M Pool Formwork and Reinforce - 205,000.00 205,000:00 0.00 0 00 ; 205,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Labor 55 50 M Pool Formwork and Reinforce - 223,000.00 223,000.00 0.00 000 223,000 00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material 60 50 M Pool Exterior Field Piping - 55,000,00 55,000.00 0.00 0.00 55,000,00 100-000/0 0.00 ' 0.00 Labor 65 50 M Pool Exterior Field Piping - 155.000.00 155,000-00 0.00 0.00 155,000-00 100.00%. 0.00 0.00 Material 70 50 M Pool Concrete - Labor 155,000-00 155,000.001 0.00 0.00 • 155,000.00 100.000/6 0.00 0.00 75 50 M Pool Concrete - Material 205,000.00 205,000.00 0.00 0.00 205,000.00 100.0D% 0.00 0.00 80 50 M Pool Finishes - Labor 105,000.00 105,000.00 0.00 D.00 105,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 85 50 M Pool Finishes - Material 80,000.0.0 80,000 00 0.00 0.00 80,000:00 100-000/0 0.00 0.00 90 50 M Pool Gutter System - Labor 80,000.00 80,000,00 0.00 0.00 80,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 000 95 50 M Pool Gutter System - Material 185,000.00 185,000.00 0:..00 j 0.00 185,000-00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 100 50 M Pool Deck Equipment - Labor 22,000.00 22,000.00 0.00 000 22,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 105 50 M Pool Deck Equipment - Material 70,000.00 70. 0:00 0.00 70,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 110 50 M Pool Drop Slide - Labor 15.000.00 15,000.00 000 000 15,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 115 50 M Pool Drop Slide - Material 65,000.00 65,000 00 000 0.00, 65;000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 i 120 50 M Pool Wibit Play Feature - Labor 8,000:00 8,000.0.01 0.00 0.00 8,000.00 100.00% 0.00 , 0.00 125 50 M Pool Wibit Play Feature - 12..000.00 12,000.00 000 0.00 12,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Material CONTINUATION SHEET Pave 3 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date : 05/12122 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05131/22 Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A _ B C D E F G H Item Description of Work • Scheduled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish Application In Place Stored (D+E) 130 Div 26 Bond inglGrounding - Labor 135 Div 26 Bonding/Grounding - Material 140 Div 26 Equipment/Pumps - Labor 145 Div 26 Equipment/Pumps - Material 150 Div 33 Drain Tile - Labor 155 Div 33 Drain Tile - Material 160 Helical Piles 653 Each at $795 165 Helical Pile Extensions 2000 LF 30 length at $33,50 LF 170 Load Tests 4 total at $6910 Each 175 PART 2 - BASF_ BID: POOUBUILDINGS/FENCE 180 MOBILIZATION 185 SUPERVISION 190 GENERAL CONDITIONS 195 BONDS 200 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork - Labor 205 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork - I Material 210 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement - Labor 211 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Mech Pump House- Labor 212 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Sidewalk/Trash Enclosure - L 215 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement - Material 216 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Mech Pump House - Material 217 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Sidewalk/Trash-Enclosure - M 220 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete - Labor 221 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete Mech Pump House - Labor 222 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete Sidewalk/Trash Enclosure - L 8,725.00 4,725.00 8,250.00 6,450.00 15,255:00 6,537.00 519,135.00 67,000.0.0 27,640.00 0.00 215, 000.00 176,000.00 329,600.00 113, 503.00 . 98,964.001 112,273.00 20,364,40 8,000.00 2,600.00 34,0001001 13,086-29 5,900.00 75,000-00 40,000,00 1 OMO0 00 8,725.90 4,725.00 8,250.00 6,450.00 15,255.00 6,537.00 522, 315.00 71,321.50 27,640.00 - 0.00 215,000.00 176,000.00 329,600-00 113, 503.00 98,964.00 112, 273.00 20,364.40 8,000.00 2,600-00� 34,000.00 13,08629 5,900.00 75,000-00 40,000.00 10,000-00� otinDorE) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.004 000 0.00 I 0:00 0.00 0-00 0.00 0-00 0.00 =3,180 00 0.00 -4 321-50 0.00 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0.00 y 0.00 0_0o 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 I 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0:00 I 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 a.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00 and Stored (C-G) To Date (D+E+F) _ 8,72500 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 4,725.00 100-00°/a 0 00 0.00 8,250.00 100,00% 0.00 0.00 6,450.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 15,255.00 100.00% 0-00 0.00 6,537.00 100-00% 0-00 0.00 519,135.001 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 67,000.001 100.00% 0-00 0.00 27,640.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% I 0.00 0.00 215.000.00- 100.00% 0.00 0.00 176,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 329,600.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 113,503.00 100.00% ` 0,00 , 000 98,964.00 100 00% fy 0.00 0.00 112,273.00 100.00% 0.00 . 0.00 20,364 40 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 8,000.00 100.00% 0.00 , 0.00 2,600.00 100.000/0 0-00 000 34,000:00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 13,086.29 100.00%. 0.00 0.00 5,900.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 75,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 40,000.00 100.000/0 0,00 0.00 10,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 CONTINUATION SHEET Page 4of13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date : 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. To: 05131122 Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C D ---.. E- F G _.�. H Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed _ Materials Total 1 % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date i (Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 225 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete - 86,000.00 8:i a 0 0 00 _ 0.00 0.00 86,000:0.0 100.00% 000 0.00 Material 226 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 47,800.00 47,800.U0 0.00 0.00 47,800.00 100.00°/o 000 0.00 Mech Pump House - Material 1 227 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 12,000 00 12.000.00 0.00 0.00 12,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Sidewalk/Trash Enclosure - M 230 03 40 00 Hollow core Precast 1 9,530.00 9,530.00 0.00 0.00 9,530,00 100.000/0 0.00 , 0.00 Concrete Plank - Labor 235 03 40 00 Hollow core Precast 22,238.00 22,238.00' 0.00 0.00 22,238.00 100.001/o : 0.00 O.DO Concrete Plank - Material 240 03 45 00 Architectural Precast 25,761,00 25.761.001 0.00 i 0.001 25,761.00 100.00% 0.00 , 0.00 Concrete- Labor 245 03 45 00 Architectural Precast 26,817.00. 26,817.001 0.00 0.00 ° 26.817.00 100,000/0 O.OG 0.00 Concrete - Material 250 04 21 13 Brick Masonry - Labor 62,607.00 62,607.00 0.00 0.00 62,607.00 100.0T% 0.00 0.00 255 04 21 13 Brick Masonry - Material 1 67.825.00 67,825.00 0.00 0.00 67,825.00 100.000% O.OD 0-00 260 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry - 210,890.00 210,890.00i 0.00 0,00 210,890.00 100.001/0 0.00 0.00 Labor 265 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry - 140,594.00 140,594.00 0.00 0,00 140,594.00 100.00% 0.00 D.GO Material 270 04 71 16 Manufactured Masonry 68,837 00 68,837:00 0.00 0.00 68,837.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Units - Labor 275 04 71 16 Manufactured Masonry 107,669.00 107.669.00. 000 0.00 107,669.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Units - Material 280 05 12 00 Structural Steel - Labor 26,000.00 26,000.00 0.00 0.001 26,000.00 100 00% 0.00 0,00 285 05 12 00 Structural Steel - Material 42,425.00 42,425.00 0.00 0.00 42,425.00 100 00% D.00 0.00 290 05 40 00 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 1,500.00 1.500,001 0.00 0.00 1,500.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 - Labor 11 295 05 40 00 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 925.00 925.001 0.00 0:00 925.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 - Material 300 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications - Labor 14,000.00 14,000 00 coo 0.00 14;000.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00- 305 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications - Material 12,000.00 , 12,000.00 0,00 0.00 12,000.00 100,000/0 0.00 ' 0.00 310 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry - Labor 16,800.00 16,800 00 0.00 0.00 16,800.00 100.00% 000 000 315 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry - Material 45,000.00' 45,000.00 0.00 0:00,I 45,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 320 06 17 30 Shop -Fabricated Wood 22,045.00' 22,045.00� 000 000 22,045.00 100.00%. 000 0.00 Trusses - Labor 325 06 17 30 Shop -Fabricated Wood 44,066.00 44,066:00 0.00 0.00 44,066:00: 100.00% 0.00 000 Trusses - Material CONTINUATION SHEET Page 5 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date: 05112122 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. To: 5131122 Architect's Project No.: 1938043 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C D _ E F G H I Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G I C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 330 06 18 00 Glue -Laminated Wood 11.400.00 11,400.00 0.00 0.D0 11,400.00 100.001;c 0 00 000 Trusses - Labor 335 06 18 00 Glue -Laminated Wood 28,264.00 28,264.00 0 00 0.00 28,264.00 100.000/c 0.00 0.00 Trusses - Material 340 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry - Labor 1 10.000.00 10,000 00 0.00 0.00 10,000.00 100.00% . 0.00 000 345 06 20 00 Finsh Carpentry - Material 12,000,00 12,000.00 0.00 0.00 12,000.00 100.000/0 • 0.00 0.00 350 06 61 16 Solid Surface Fabrications - 5,200,00 5,200.00, 0.00 000 5,200.00 100.000/0 0.00 0,00 Labor I 355 0661 16 Solid Surface Fabrications - 4,000.00 4,000.001 0.00 0 00 4,000,00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 i Material 360 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing - 13,326.00 13,326.00, 0.00 0.00 13,326.00 100.00% 0.00 0 00 Labor 365 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing - 2,600.00 2,600.00 0.00 0.00 2,600:00 100,00% 0.00 0.00 Material 370 07 13 00 Membrane Waterproofing - 4,700.00 4,700.00i 0.00 0.00 4,700.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Labor 375 07 13 00 Membrane Waterproofing 3,700.00 3,700.00 0 00 0.00 34700.00 100,000/0 0.00 0.00 Material 1 380 07 21 00 Insulation - Labor 4 14,828.00 14,828.061 0.00 0:00 14,828.00 100.00% 0.00 ' 0.00 385 07 21 00 Insulation - Material 4.000.00 4.000.001 0.00 0.00 4,000:00 100.000/0 1 0.00 000 390 07 42 13 Sheet Metal Soffit Panels - 26,900.00 26,900.00 •0.00 0.00 26,900.00 100"00% 0,00 0.00 395 Labor 07 42 13 Sheet Metal Soffit Panels - 4,500.00 4,500.001 0.00 ' 0.00 4,500.00 100,00% 0.00 000 Material 400 07 42 16 Sheet Metal Ceiling Panels - 12,000.00 12,000.00 0.0D 0.00 121000..00 100.000/0 0.00. 0.00 Labor I 405 07 42 16 Sheet Metal Ceiling Panels - 8,000.00 8,000,00 0.00 1 0.00 8,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material I 410 07 42 19 Sheet Metal Wall Panels - 34,671.15 34,671 A 5 0.00 0.00 34,671.15 100.00% 0.001 000 Labor ! 1 415 07 42 19 Sheet Metal Wall Panels - 26,000.00, 26.000 00 0.00 0.00 26,000.00 100.0011/0 0.00 0.00 Material 420 07 61 13 Sheet Metal Roofing - Labor 24,000.001 24,000.00 0.00 0.00 24,000.00 100.00% 000 0.00 425 07 61 13 Sheet Metal Roofing - 33,000.00 I 33,000.001 0.00 0.00 33,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material 1 430 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and 8.50000 8,500.00 0.00 000 8.500.00 100.00% 0.00 0 00 Trim - Labor 435 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and 6,500.00 6,500.00 0.00 000 6.500.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 ! Trim - Material CONTINUATION SHEET Paee 6 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached_ Application Date: 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05/31/22 Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items- may apply. Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B _ C D E F G -- - --- H I Item Description of Work Sche.duled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish } Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or F.) (D+E+F) 440 07 92 00 Joint Sealants - Labor 18,052 00 18,052.00 0-00 Goo 18.052.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 445 07 92 00 Joint Sealants - Material 3.200.00 3,200.00 0.00 0.00 3,200.00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 450 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames - 2,043.00 1 2,043.00 0.00 0.00 2,043.00 100.00% 000 0-00 Labor 1 455 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames - 19,624.00. 19,624.00 0.00 0.00 19,624.00 100.000/0 0.00 om Material 460 08 31 00 Access Panels - Labor 500.00 500.00 0-00 0.00 500.00 100-00% 0.00 0-00 465 08 31 00 Access Panels - Material 80o-00 800ml 0-00 0.00 800.00 100.D0y/o 0.00 0.00 470 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows -Labor 7,390.00 7,390.00 0-00 0.00 7,390.00 , 100.00% ) 0.00 475 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows - 22,000.00 22,000.001 0.00 000 22,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material 480 08 52 13 Aluminum Sliding Service 10,000-00. 10.000.00 0.00 000 10,000.00 100.00%y 0.00 0.00 Windows -Labor 485 08 52 13 Aluminum Sliding Service 2.700.00 2,700-00 0.00 0.00 2,700.00 100-000/0 0.00 000 Windows - Material 490 08 62 13 Unit Skylights - Labor 864,00 864.00 0.00 0*00 864.00 100.00% 0,00 0.00 495 08 62 13 Unit Skylights - Material 3,462,00 3,462.00 0.00 0.00 3,462.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 500 08 62 23 Tubular Daylighting Devices 2,300-00 2,30000 0.00 0.00 2,300.00 100.00% ; 0.00 0.00 - Labor 505 08 62 23 Tubular Daylighting Devices 6,212.00, 6,212.00 0.00I 0.00 6;212.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00i - Material 510 08 70 00 Finish Hardware - Labor 7,000.00 7,000.00 0-00 0-00 7,000.00 100_00%y 0.00 0.00 515 08 70 00 Finish Hardware - Material 19,611.00 19,611.00' 0.00 0.001 19,611.00 100,00% 0.00 0.00 520 08 81 00 Glazing - Labor 5,000.00 5,000-00 0.00 0.00 5,000.00 100.0(P/y 0.00 , 0.00 525 08 81 00 Glazing - Material 7,800.00 7,800.00 0-00 0.00 7,800.00 100 0( y/o 0.00 000 530 08 91 19 Metal Wall Louvers - Labor 1,200,00 1,200-00 0.00 0.00 1,200.00 100.00D/0 0.001 0.00 535 08 91 19 Metal Wall Louvers - 3,500-00 31500.00 0-00 0:00 3,500-00 100.000/a 0.00 0.00 Material 540 08 29 00 Gypsum Drywall - Labor 1 19,950.00 19,950.00 0.00 0.00 19,950.00 100.000/0 0.00 , 0.00 545 08 29 00 Gypsum Drywall - Material 1 7,055.00 7,055.00 0.00 0.00 7,055.00 100.000/0 0.00 0-00 550 09 31 13 Ceramic Tile - Labor 6,340.00 6,340-00 0.00 0.00 6,340-00 100.000/0 1 0.00 0.00 555 09 31 13 Ceramic Tile - Material 3,130-00 3,130.00 0,00 0.001 3.13D.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 560 09 51 00 Acoustical Treatment - 2,495.00 2,495.00 0.00 0.00 2,495.00 -; 100.000/a 0.00 0.00 Labor 565 09 51 00 Acoustical Treatment - 3,525-00 3,525.00 0.00 0.002 3,525,00 100.00'Iy 0.00 I 0.00 Material 570 09 68 13 Carpet Tile - Labor 1,860-00 1,860 00 000 _ •0.00 1,860.00 100.00%n 0,00 0,Q0� CONTINUATION SHEET Page 7 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date: 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use'Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply To: 05/31/22 Architect's Project No.. 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A_ B C D E F. G H i Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed I Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish Application in Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date {.Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 575 09 68 13 Carpet Tile - Material 5,580.00 5,58000 0.00 000 5,580.00 100 DO% 0.00 0,00 580 09 77 20 Decorative FRP Panels - 1.216.00 1,21600 0.00 0.00 1 ,216.00 100.00% 0.00 0,00 Labor 585 09 77 20 Decorative FRP Panels - 8,640.00 8,640.00 0.00 0.00 8,640.00 100.001/0 000 0,00 Material 590 09 88 13 Concrete Floor Sealer - 1.20000 1,200 00 0.00 0.00 1,200.00 100.00% 000 0.00 Labor 595 09 88 13 Concrete Floor Sealer - 800.00 800.00 0.00 0.00 800.00 100.00% 000 0.00 Material . 600 09 91 00 Painting - Labor 42,082 00 42,082.00 0.00 0.00 42,082.001 100.00% 0.00 0.00 605 09 91 00 Painting - Material 18,100.00 18,100.001 0.00 0.001 18,100.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 610 09 97 27 Concrete Epoxy Floor 10,308.00 10,308.00 0.00 0.00 10,308.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Coating- Labor 615 09 97 27 Concrete Epoxy Floor 4.187.00 4,187.00 0.00 0.001 4,187.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Coating - Material 1 620 09 97 27 Decorative Quartz Floor 15,462.00 15,462.00 0.00 0.00 15,462.00 100.000/0 000 0.00 Coating - Labor 625 09 97 27 Decorative Quartz Floor 6,00000 6,000.00 0.00 000 6.000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Coating - Material 630 10 14 00 Signs - Labor 500.00 500.00 0.00 0.00 500.00 100.00% 0.00 000 635 10 14 00 Signs - Material 1,000.00 1,000.00 0.00 0.00 1,000.00 100.000/. 0.00 000 640 10 21 16 Solid Plastic Toilet 3,277.00 3,277.00 0.00 0.00 3,277.00 100.00% 0.00 , 000 Compartments- Labor 645 10 21 16 Solid Plastic Toilet 9,671.00 9,671.00 0.00 000 9,671.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Compartments - Material 650 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories - Labor J 5,032.00 5,032.00 0.00 000 5.032.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 655 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories - Material 7.298.00 7,299-00'; 0.00 0.00 7,298.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 660 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties - I 800.00 800.00 0.00 0:00 800.00 100.00% 0.00 000 Labor 665 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties - 320,001 320.00� 0.00 0.00 320.001 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material , 670 10 51 13 Metal Lockers - Labor 14,042.00 14,042 00 0.00 0.00 14,042.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 675 10 51 13 Metal Lockers - Material 38,144.00 38,144.00 0.00 0.00 38,144.00 100.00% 0.00 000 680 10 51 26 Heavy Duty Plastic Lockers 14,042.181 14,042 18 0.00 0.00 14,042.18 100.00% 0.00 0.00 - Labor 685 10 51 26 Heavy Duty Plastic Lockers 38,144.00 38,144 00 0.00 0,00 38,144.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 - Material 690 10 67 00 Storage Shelving - Labor 1,290.001 1,290 00, 000 0.00 1,290.00 i 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 APPLICATION AND CERTIFICATE FOR PAYMENT trivoice4: 637-19 to CITY OF NEW HOPE Project: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool Application No-! 19 Distribution to Owner: 4401 XYLON AVE N 0 Owner Q Architect NEW HOPE, MN 55428 Period To: 5/31 /2022 0 Contractor From Contracto Donlar Construction Company Via Architect. Stantec Consulting Services 0 550 Shoreview Park Road Project Nos: 193804337 Shoreview, MN 55126 Contract For: CONTRACTOR'S APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT Applicatrcn is made for payment, as shown below, in connection with the Contract. Continuation Sheet is attached 1 Original Contract Sum 2. Net Change By Change Order/ Overrun/1lndenrun 3. Contract Sum To Date .. . • . 4, Total Completed and Stored To Date 5. Retainage: .I- 0.00% of Completed Work $0.00 h o oo°/ of Stored Material $0.00 Total Retainage 6. Total Earned Less Retainage 7- Less Previous Certificates For Payments 8 Current Payment Due .. ..... 9. Balance To Finish, Plus Retainage $11,350,275.00 $421,453 17 $11.771,728.17 $11,771,728.17 $0,00 Contract 3/26/2019 The undersigned Contractor certifies that to the best of the Contractor's knowledge, information, and belief, the work covered by this Application for Payment has been completed in accordance with the Contract Documents- That all amounts have been paid by the Contractor for Work for which previous Certificates for Payment were issued and payments received from the Owner, and that current payment shown herein is now due. CONTRACTOR: Donlar Conslructior ' pany By. ate. �� ?� �27 State of: � �� Cour.tvoi Publile Subscribed and sworn to ❑e`ore me this day MEUN�JHNCRICl4SONNotary Public: �My Commission expires: NOfw MV rr„ff aj n EBXO*w in at, llaxls $11,771,728-17 ARCHITEt,T'S CERTIFIC E FOR PAYMENT In accordance with the Con ct Documents, based on on -site observations and the data comprising the above appt alton, the Architect certifies to the Owner that to the best of the $11 ,753,245.47 Archdecrs knowledge, information, and belief, the Work has progressed as indicated, $18,482.70 the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, and the Contractor is entitled to payment of the AMOUNT CERTIFIED. $0.00 , CHANGE ORDER SUMMARY j Additions Deductions Total changes approved in previous months by Owner $146.109,89 $26.730.00 Total Approved this Month $302,073 28 $0.00 TOTALS $448,183.17 $26,730.00 Net Changes By Change Order $421,453.17 AMOUNT CERTIFIED $ 18,482.70 (Attach explanation if amount certified differs from the amount applied Initial all figures on this Application and on the Continuation Sheet that are changed to conform with the amount certified ) ARCHITECT By Dale % M _4?;20— This Certificate is not 410111igle The AMOUNT CERTIFIED -is payable only to the Contractor named herein. Issuance, payment, and acceptance of payment are without prejudice to any rights of the Owner or Contractor under this Contract. CONTINUATION SHEET Page 2of13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date : 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05/31/22 Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C �^ D E F G H I Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed i Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G f C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 5 PART 1-BASE BID: 50 M POOL 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 STATE GRANT FUNDING ' ELEMENTS 10 SUPERVISION 20,000.00, 20,000.00 0.00 0.00 20,000.00 100.00% D.00 0.00 15 GENERAL CONDITIONS 30,716.00 30,716.00 0.00 0.00, 30,716.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 20 Div 03 20 00 Decking/Grade Beam 46.000.00 46,000.00 0.00 D.00 46,000.00 I 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Reinforcement - Labor 25 Div 03 20 00 Decking/Grade Beam 59,342.00 59,342 00 0.00 0.00 59,342.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 Reinforcement - Material 30 Div 03 30 00 Concrete Decking/Grade 48,000.00 48,000,00 0.00 0,00 48,000.00 100-00% 0.00 0.00 Beam - Labor 35 Div 03 30 00 Concrete Decking/Grade 65,000.00 65,000-00 0.00 0.00 65,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Beam - Material 1 40 50 M Pool GC's - Mob/PM/Layout/Site 75,000.00 75,000 00 0.00, 0.00 75,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 - Labor 45 50 M Pool GC's - 50,000:00 50,000 001 0.00 0.00 50.000 00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Mob/PM/Layouts/Site - Material 50 50 M Pool Formwork and Reinforce - 205,000.00 205,000:00 0.00 0 00 ; 205,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Labor 55 50 M Pool Formwork and Reinforce - 223,000.00 223,000.00 0.00 000 223,000 00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material 60 50 M Pool Exterior Field Piping - 55,000,00 55,000.00 0.00 0.00 55,000,00 100-000/0 0.00 ' 0.00 Labor 65 50 M Pool Exterior Field Piping - 155.000.00 155,000-00 0.00 0.00 155,000-00 100.00%. 0.00 0.00 Material 70 50 M Pool Concrete - Labor 155,000-00 155,000.001 0.00 0.00 • 155,000.00 100.000/6 0.00 0.00 75 50 M Pool Concrete - Material 205,000.00 205,000.00 0.00 0.00 205,000.00 100.0D% 0.00 0.00 80 50 M Pool Finishes - Labor 105,000.00 105,000.00 0.00 D.00 105,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 85 50 M Pool Finishes - Material 80,000.0.0 80,000 00 0.00 0.00 80,000:00 100-000/0 0.00 0.00 90 50 M Pool Gutter System - Labor 80,000.00 80,000,00 0.00 0.00 80,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 000 95 50 M Pool Gutter System - Material 185,000.00 185,000.00 0:..00 j 0.00 185,000-00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 100 50 M Pool Deck Equipment - Labor 22,000.00 22,000.00 0.00 000 22,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 105 50 M Pool Deck Equipment - Material 70,000.00 70. 0:00 0.00 70,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 110 50 M Pool Drop Slide - Labor 15.000.00 15,000.00 000 000 15,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 115 50 M Pool Drop Slide - Material 65,000.00 65,000 00 000 0.00, 65;000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 i 120 50 M Pool Wibit Play Feature - Labor 8,000:00 8,000.0.01 0.00 0.00 8,000.00 100.00% 0.00 , 0.00 125 50 M Pool Wibit Play Feature - 12..000.00 12,000.00 000 0.00 12,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Material CONTINUATION SHEET Pave 3 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date : 05/12122 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05131/22 Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A _ B C D E F G H Item Description of Work • Scheduled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish Application In Place Stored (D+E) 130 Div 26 Bond inglGrounding - Labor 135 Div 26 Bonding/Grounding - Material 140 Div 26 Equipment/Pumps - Labor 145 Div 26 Equipment/Pumps - Material 150 Div 33 Drain Tile - Labor 155 Div 33 Drain Tile - Material 160 Helical Piles 653 Each at $795 165 Helical Pile Extensions 2000 LF 30 length at $33,50 LF 170 Load Tests 4 total at $6910 Each 175 PART 2 - BASF_ BID: POOUBUILDINGS/FENCE 180 MOBILIZATION 185 SUPERVISION 190 GENERAL CONDITIONS 195 BONDS 200 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork - Labor 205 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork - I Material 210 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement - Labor 211 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Mech Pump House- Labor 212 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Sidewalk/Trash Enclosure - L 215 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement - Material 216 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Mech Pump House - Material 217 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement Sidewalk/Trash-Enclosure - M 220 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete - Labor 221 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete Mech Pump House - Labor 222 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete Sidewalk/Trash Enclosure - L 8,725.00 4,725.00 8,250.00 6,450.00 15,255:00 6,537.00 519,135.00 67,000.0.0 27,640.00 0.00 215, 000.00 176,000.00 329,600.00 113, 503.00 . 98,964.001 112,273.00 20,364,40 8,000.00 2,600.00 34,0001001 13,086-29 5,900.00 75,000-00 40,000,00 1 OMO0 00 8,725.90 4,725.00 8,250.00 6,450.00 15,255.00 6,537.00 522, 315.00 71,321.50 27,640.00 - 0.00 215,000.00 176,000.00 329,600-00 113, 503.00 98,964.00 112, 273.00 20,364.40 8,000.00 2,600-00� 34,000.00 13,08629 5,900.00 75,000-00 40,000.00 10,000-00� otinDorE) 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.004 000 0.00 I 0:00 0.00 0-00 0.00 0-00 0.00 =3,180 00 0.00 -4 321-50 0.00 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0.00 y 0.00 0_0o 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 I 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00' 0.00 0:00 I 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 a.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.001 0.00 0.00 and Stored (C-G) To Date (D+E+F) _ 8,72500 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 4,725.00 100-00°/a 0 00 0.00 8,250.00 100,00% 0.00 0.00 6,450.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 15,255.00 100.00% 0-00 0.00 6,537.00 100-00% 0-00 0.00 519,135.001 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 67,000.001 100.00% 0-00 0.00 27,640.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00% I 0.00 0.00 215.000.00- 100.00% 0.00 0.00 176,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 329,600.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 113,503.00 100.00% ` 0,00 , 000 98,964.00 100 00% fy 0.00 0.00 112,273.00 100.00% 0.00 . 0.00 20,364 40 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 8,000.00 100.00% 0.00 , 0.00 2,600.00 100.000/0 0-00 000 34,000:00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 13,086.29 100.00%. 0.00 0.00 5,900.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 75,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 40,000.00 100.000/0 0,00 0.00 10,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 CONTINUATION SHEET Page 4of13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date : 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. To: 05131122 Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C D ---.. E- F G _.�. H Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed _ Materials Total 1 % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date i (Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 225 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete - 86,000.00 8:i a 0 0 00 _ 0.00 0.00 86,000:0.0 100.00% 000 0.00 Material 226 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 47,800.00 47,800.U0 0.00 0.00 47,800.00 100.00°/o 000 0.00 Mech Pump House - Material 1 227 03 30 00 Cast -In -Place Concrete 12,000 00 12.000.00 0.00 0.00 12,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Sidewalk/Trash Enclosure - M 230 03 40 00 Hollow core Precast 1 9,530.00 9,530.00 0.00 0.00 9,530,00 100.000/0 0.00 , 0.00 Concrete Plank - Labor 235 03 40 00 Hollow core Precast 22,238.00 22,238.00' 0.00 0.00 22,238.00 100.001/o : 0.00 O.DO Concrete Plank - Material 240 03 45 00 Architectural Precast 25,761,00 25.761.001 0.00 i 0.001 25,761.00 100.00% 0.00 , 0.00 Concrete- Labor 245 03 45 00 Architectural Precast 26,817.00. 26,817.001 0.00 0.00 ! 26.817.00 100,000/0 O.OG 0.00 Concrete - Material 250 04 21 13 Brick Masonry - Labor 62,607.00 62,607.00 0.00 0.00 62,607.00 100.0T% 0.00 0.00 255 04 21 13 Brick Masonry - Material 1 67.825.00 67,825.00 0.00 0.00 67,825.00 100.000% O.OD 0-00 260 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry - 210,890.00 210,890.00i 0.00 0,00 210,890.00 100.001/0 0.00 0.00 Labor 265 04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry - 140,594.00 140,594.00 0.00 0,00 140,594.00 100.00% 0.00 D.GO Material 270 04 71 16 Manufactured Masonry 68,837 00 68,837:00 0.00 0.00 68,837.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Units - Labor 275 04 71 16 Manufactured Masonry 107,669.00 107.669.00. 000 0.00 107,669.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Units - Material 280 05 12 00 Structural Steel - Labor 26,000.00 26,000.00 0.00 0.001 26,000.00 100 00% 0.00 0,00 285 05 12 00 Structural Steel - Material 42,425.00 42,425.00 0.00 0.00 42,425.00 100 00% D.00 0.00 290 05 40 00 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 1,500.00 1.500,001 0.00 0.00 1,500.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 - Labor 11 295 05 40 00 Cold -Formed Metal Framing 925.00 925.001 0.00 0:00 925.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 - Material 300 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications - Labor 14,000.00 14,000 00 coo 0.00 14;000.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00- 305 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications - Material 12,000.00 , 12,000.00 0,00 0.00 12,000.00 100,000/0 0.00 ' 0.00 310 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry - Labor 16,800.00 16,800 00 0.00 0.00 16,800.00 100.00% 000 000 315 06 10 00 Rough Carpentry - Material 45,000.00' 45,000.00 0.00 0:00,I 45,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 320 06 17 30 Shop -Fabricated Wood 22,045.00' 22,045.00� 000 000 22,045.00 100.00%. 000 0.00 Trusses - Labor 325 06 17 30 Shop -Fabricated Wood 44,066.00 44,066:00 0.00 0.00 44,066:00: 100.00% 0.00 000 Trusses - Material CONTINUATION SHEET Page 5 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date: 05112122 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. To: 5131122 Architect's Project No.: 1938043 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C D _ E F G H I Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G I C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 330 06 18 00 Glue -Laminated Wood 11.400.00 11,400.00 0.00 0.D0 11,400.00 100.001;c 0 00 000 Trusses - Labor 335 06 18 00 Glue -Laminated Wood 28,264.00 28,264.00 0 00 0.00 28,264.00 100.000/c 0.00 0.00 Trusses - Material 340 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry - Labor 1 10.000.00 10,000 00 0.00 0.00 10,000.00 100.00% . 0.00 000 345 06 20 00 Finsh Carpentry - Material 12,000,00 12,000.00 0.00 0.00 12,000.00 100.000/0 • 0.00 0.00 350 06 61 16 Solid Surface Fabrications - 5,200,00 5,200.00, 0.00 000 5,200.00 100.000/0 0.00 0,00 Labor I 355 0661 16 Solid Surface Fabrications - 4,000.00 4,000.001 0.00 0 00 4,000,00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 i Material 360 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing - 13,326.00 13,326.00, 0.00 0.00 13,326.00 100.00% 0.00 0 00 Labor 365 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing - 2,600.00 2,600.00 0.00 0.00 2,600:00 100,00% 0.00 0.00 Material 370 07 13 00 Membrane Waterproofing - 4,700.00 4,700.00i 0.00 0.00 4,700.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Labor 375 07 13 00 Membrane Waterproofing 3,700.00 3,700.00 0 00 0.00 34700.00 100,000/0 0.00 0.00 Material 1 380 07 21 00 Insulation - Labor 4 14,828.00 14,828.061 0.00 0:00 14,828.00 100.00% 0.00 ' 0.00 385 07 21 00 Insulation - Material 4.000.00 4.000.001 0.00 0.00 4,000:00 100.000/0 1 0.00 000 390 07 42 13 Sheet Metal Soffit Panels - 26,900.00 26,900.00 •0.00 0.00 26,900.00 100"00% 0,00 0.00 395 Labor 07 42 13 Sheet Metal Soffit Panels - 4,500.00 4,500.001 0.00 ' 0.00 4,500.00 100,00% 0.00 000 Material 400 07 42 16 Sheet Metal Ceiling Panels - 12,000.00 12,000.00 0.0D 0.00 121000..00 100.000/0 0.00. 0.00 Labor I 405 07 42 16 Sheet Metal Ceiling Panels - 8,000.00 8,000,00 0.00 1 0.00 8,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material I 410 07 42 19 Sheet Metal Wall Panels - 34,671.15 34,671 A 5 0.00 0.00 34,671.15 100.00% 0.001 000 Labor ! 1 415 07 42 19 Sheet Metal Wall Panels - 26,000.00, 26.000 00 0.00 0.00 26,000.00 100.0011/0 0.00 0.00 Material 420 07 61 13 Sheet Metal Roofing - Labor 24,000.001 24,000.00 0.00 0.00 24,000.00 100.00% 000 0.00 425 07 61 13 Sheet Metal Roofing - 33,000.00 I 33,000.001 0.00 0.00 33,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material 1 430 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and 8.50000 8,500.00 0.00 000 8.500.00 100.00% 0.00 0 00 Trim - Labor 435 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and 6,500.00 6,500.00 0.00 000 6.500.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 ! Trim - Material CONTINUATION SHEET Paee 6 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached_ Application Date: 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05/31/22 Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items- may apply. Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B _ C D E F G -- - --- H I Item Description of Work Sche.duled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish } Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or F.) (D+E+F) 440 07 92 00 Joint Sealants - Labor 18,052 00 18,052.00 0-00 Goo 18.052.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 445 07 92 00 Joint Sealants - Material 3.200.00 3,200.00 0.00 0.00 3,200.00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 450 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames - 2,043.00 1 2,043.00 0.00 0.00 2,043.00 100.00% 000 0-00 Labor 1 455 08 11 00 Metal Doors and Frames - 19,624.00. 19,624.00 0.00 0.00 19,624.00 100.000/0 0.00 om Material 460 08 31 00 Access Panels - Labor 500.00 500.00 0-00 0.00 500.00 100-00% 0.00 0-00 465 08 31 00 Access Panels - Material 80o-00 800ml 0-00 0.00 800.00 100.D0y/o 0.00 0.00 470 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows -Labor 7,390.00 7,390.00 0-00 0.00 7,390.00 , 100.00% ) 0.00 475 08 51 13 Aluminum Windows - 22,000.00 22,000.001 0.00 000 22,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material 480 08 52 13 Aluminum Sliding Service 10,000-00. 10.000.00 0.00 000 10,000.00 100.00%y 0.00 0.00 Windows -Labor 485 08 52 13 Aluminum Sliding Service 2.700.00 2,700-00 0.00 0.00 2,700.00 100-000/0 0.00 000 Windows - Material 490 08 62 13 Unit Skylights - Labor 864,00 864.00 0.00 0*00 864.00 100.00% 0,00 0.00 495 08 62 13 Unit Skylights - Material 3,462,00 3,462.00 0.00 0.00 3,462.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 500 08 62 23 Tubular Daylighting Devices 2,300-00 2,30000 0.00 0.00 2,300.00 100.00% ; 0.00 0.00 - Labor 505 08 62 23 Tubular Daylighting Devices 6,212.00, 6,212.00 0.00I 0.00 6;212.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00i - Material 510 08 70 00 Finish Hardware - Labor 7,000.00 7,000.00 0-00 0-00 7,000.00 100_00%y 0.00 0.00 515 08 70 00 Finish Hardware - Material 19,611.00 19,611.00' 0.00 0.001 19,611.00 100,00% 0.00 0.00 520 08 81 00 Glazing - Labor 5,000.00 5,000-00 0.00 0.00 5,000.00 100.0(P/y 0.00 , 0.00 525 08 81 00 Glazing - Material 7,800.00 7,800.00 0-00 0.00 7,800.00 100 0( y/o 0.00 000 530 08 91 19 Metal Wall Louvers - Labor 1,200,00 1,200-00 0.00 0.00 1,200.00 100.00D/0 0.001 0.00 535 08 91 19 Metal Wall Louvers - 3,500-00 31500.00 0-00 0:00 3,500-00 100.000/a 0.00 0.00 Material 540 08 29 00 Gypsum Drywall - Labor 1 19,950.00 19,950.00 0.00 0.00 19,950.00 100.000/0 0.00 , 0.00 545 08 29 00 Gypsum Drywall - Material 1 7,055.00 7,055.00 0.00 0.00 7,055.00 100.000/0 0.00 0-00 550 09 31 13 Ceramic Tile - Labor 6,340.00 6,340-00 0.00 0.00 6,340-00 100.000/0 1 0.00 0.00 555 09 31 13 Ceramic Tile - Material 3,130-00 3,130.00 0,00 0.001 3.13D.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 560 09 51 00 Acoustical Treatment - 2,495.00 2,495.00 0.00 0.00 2,495.00 -; 100.000/a 0.00 0.00 Labor 565 09 51 00 Acoustical Treatment - 3,525-00 3,525.00 0.00 0.002 3,525,00 100.00'Iy 0.00 I 0.00 Material 570 09 68 13 Carpet Tile - Labor 1,860-00 1,860 00 000 _ •0.00 1,860.00 100.00%n 0,00 0,Q0� CONTINUATION SHEET Page 7 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date: 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use'Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply To: 05/31/22 Architect's Project No.. 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A_ B C D E F. G H i Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed I Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G / C) To Finish Application in Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date {.Not in D or E) (D+E+F) 575 09 68 13 Carpet Tile - Material 5,580.00 5,58000 0.00 000 5,580.00 100 DO% 0.00 0,00 580 09 77 20 Decorative FRP Panels - 1.216.00 1,21600 0.00 0.00 1 ,216.00 100.00% 0.00 0,00 Labor 585 09 77 20 Decorative FRP Panels - 8,640.00 8,640.00 0.00 0.00 8,640.00 100.001/0 000 0,00 Material 590 09 88 13 Concrete Floor Sealer - 1.20000 1,200 00 0.00 0.00 1,200.00 100.00% 000 0.00 Labor 595 09 88 13 Concrete Floor Sealer - 800.00 800.00 0.00 0.00 800.00 100.00% 000 0.00 Material . 600 09 91 00 Painting - Labor 42,082 00 42,082.00 0.00 0.00 42,082.001 100.00% 0.00 0.00 605 09 91 00 Painting - Material 18,100.00 18,100.001 0.00 0.001 18,100.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 610 09 97 27 Concrete Epoxy Floor 10,308.00 10,308.00 0.00 0.00 10,308.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Coating- Labor 615 09 97 27 Concrete Epoxy Floor 4.187.00 4,187.00 0.00 0.001 4,187.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Coating - Material 1 620 09 97 27 Decorative Quartz Floor 15,462.00 15,462.00 0.00 0.00 15,462.00 100.000/0 000 0.00 Coating - Labor 625 09 97 27 Decorative Quartz Floor 6,00000 6,000.00 0.00 000 6.000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Coating - Material 630 10 14 00 Signs - Labor 500.00 500.00 0.00 0.00 500.00 100.00% 0.00 000 635 10 14 00 Signs - Material 1,000.00 1,000.00 0.00 0.00 1,000.00 100.000/. 0.00 000 640 10 21 16 Solid Plastic Toilet 3,277.00 3,277.00 0.00 0.00 3,277.00 100.00% 0.00 , 000 Compartments- Labor 645 10 21 16 Solid Plastic Toilet 9,671.00 9,671.00 0.00 000 9,671.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Compartments - Material 650 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories - Labor J 5,032.00 5,032.00 0.00 000 5.032.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 655 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories - Material 7.298.00 7,299-00'; 0.00 0.00 7,298.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 660 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties - I 800.00 800.00 0.00 0:00 800.00 100.00% 0.00 000 Labor 665 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties - 320,001 320.00� 0.00 0.00 320.001 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Material , 670 10 51 13 Metal Lockers - Labor 14,042.00 14,042 00 0.00 0.00 14,042.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 675 10 51 13 Metal Lockers - Material 38,144.00 38,144.00 0.00 0.00 38,144.00 100.00% 0.00 000 680 10 51 26 Heavy Duty Plastic Lockers 14,042.181 14,042 18 0.00 0.00 14,042.18 100.00% 0.00 0.00 - Labor 685 10 51 26 Heavy Duty Plastic Lockers 38,144.00 38,144 00 0.00 0,00 38,144.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 - Material 690 10 67 00 Storage Shelving - Labor 1,290.001 1,290 00, 000 0.00 1,290.00 i 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 CONTINUATION SHEET Pace 8 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date : 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. 5/31122 Use Column 1 on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. To: Architect's Project No.: 1938043 193804337 Invoice # _ 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool - A Item No. B Description of Work C Scheduled Value D- E Work Completed _ From Previous This Period Application In Place (D+E) i F _. Materials Presently Stored (Not in D or E) G Total Completed and Stored To Date (D+E+F) % (G f C) l i H Balance To Finish (C-G) I Retainage 695 10 67 00 Storage Shelving - Material 80000 800.00' 0.00 0.00 800.00 100.00% 0.00 000 700 Activity Pool - General Conditions - l 60,000.00 60,000.00 0.00 0.00 60,000 00 100.00% 0-00 0.00 Labor 1 705 Activity Pool - General Conditions - 30,000.00 : 30,000.00 0.00 0.00 30,000.00 100-00% 0.00 0.00 Material 710 Activity Pool - Formwork and 80,000.00 80,000.00 0.00 0:00 80,000.00 100,000/0 0.00 D-00 Reinforce - Labor 715 Activity Pool - Formwork and 80,000-00 80,000.00 0.00 0-00 80,000-00 100.000/0 i 0,00 0-00 Reinforce- Material 720 Activity Pool - Field Piping Exterior - 35,000.00 35,000.00 0-00 000 35,000-00 100-00°/. 000 0-00 Labor 725 Activity Pool - Field Piping Exterior - 185,000.00 i 185.000-00 0-00 0.00 185,000.00 100.000/6 0.00 0.00 Material 730 Activity Pool - Concrete - Labor 80,000,001 80,000.E 0.00 0.00 80,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 735 Activity Pool - Concrete - Material 75,000-00 75,000.00 0.00 0.00 75,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 740 Activity Pool - Finishes - Labor 55,000.00 55,000.00 0.00 0.00 55,000.00 100.000/0 0-00 0.00 745 Activity Pool - Finishes - Material 45,000.00 45,000.00; 0.00 000 45,000-00 100.000/0 0-00 0.00 750 Activity Pool - Gutter System - Labor 55,00000 55,000.001 0.00 0.00 55,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 755 Activity Pool - Gutter System - ^I 85,000.00 85,000.001 0.00 0.00 85,000.00 100.000/0 4 0.00 0.00 Material I I { 760 Acivity Pool - Deck Equipment - Labor 35.000.00 35,000.00 0.00 000 35,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 765 Activity Pool - Deck Equipment - 90,000,001 90.000.00 0.00 0.00 90,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Material ' 770 Activity Pool - Play Features - Labor 35,000.001 35,000:00 0-00 0-00 35,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 775 Activity Pool - Play Features - 205,000.00 205.000.00 000 0.00 205,000.OD 100.000/0 000 0.00 Material 780 Vortex Pool - Formwork and 20,000.00 20,000 00 0-00 0.00 20,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Reinforce - Labor I 785 Vortex Pool - Formwork and 30,000.00 i 30.000.00 0-00 0.00 30,000.00 100.00% 000 0-00 Reinforce - Material I 790 Vortex Pool - Field Piping Exterior - 8,000-00 8,000-00 0.00 0-00I 8,000.00 100 00% 000 0-00 Labor 795 Vortex Pool - Field Piping Exterior - 8,000.00 8.000-00 0.00 0-00 81000.00 100.00% 000 0.00 Material 800 Vortex Pool - Concrete - Labor 15,000.00 15,000.00 000 0.00 15,000,00 100.000/0 000 0.00 805 Vortex Pool - Concrete - Material 20,000.00' 20,000.00 000 0.00 20,000,00 100.00°Iu 0-00 0.00 810 Vortex Pool - Finishes - Labor 5,000.00 5,000-00 0.00 0.00 5.WiD.00 10D.Cv/c 0.00 0.00 815 Vortex Pool - Finishes - Material 13.000-00 13,000 00 0.00 0.00 13.000-00 100.00% 000 0.00 CONTINUATION SHEET Page of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached- Application Date: 05/12/22 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply To: 05131122 Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C D_ E_ F G H I Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed -Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous i This Period Presently Completed (G i C) To Finish Application I In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or E) (D+E+Ft 820 Vortex Pool - Deck Equipment - Labor 5,000.00 5,000.00 0.00 0.00 5.000-00 10D.00% 0.00 000 825 Vortex Pool - Deck Equipment - 7,000.00 7,000.00 0.00 000 7,000.00 100.0011/0 0.00 0.00 Material 830 Mechanical Room - Filtration 30,000.00 30,000-00 0.00 0.00 30,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 Equipment - Labor 835 Mechanical Room- Filtration 255,000.001 255,000.001 0.00 0.00 255.000.00 100-00% 0.00 0.00 Equipment - Material 840 Div 22 Pool Equipment - Labor 50,000.00 i 50,000.00 0.00 0.00 50,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 845 Div 22 Pool Equipment - Material 150,000.001 150,000,001 0.00 0.00 150,000:00 100.000/0 0,00 0.00 850 Div 22 Pool Piping Interior - Labor 100,000.00 100,000.00 0.00 0.00 100,000.00 100.00% 0.00 000 855 Div 22 Pool Piping Interior - Material 180,000.00 180,000.00 0.00 0.00 180,000.00 100.00% 0,00 000 860 Waterslide Footings - Labor 25,000.00 25,000.00 0.00 0.00 25,000.00 100.00% 0.00. 0.00 865 Waterslide Footings - Material 15,000.00 15,000.00 0.00 0.00 15,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 870 Flume Waterslides - Labor 43,000.00 43,000.001 0,00 0.00 43,000.00 100.00%1 0.00 0.00 875 Flume Waterslides - Material 315,000.00 315,000.001 0.00 0.00 315,000.00 100.001/0 0.00 0.00 880 Lap Shade Structures - Labor 15,000.00. 15,000.00 0.00 0.00 15,000.00 100.00% 0.00' 0.00 885 Lap Shade Structures - Material 55,000.00 55,000-00 0.00 0.00 55,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 j 0.00 890 Project Closeout and Turnover - 25,834.98 i 25,834.98 000 0.00 25834.98 100.009/0 0-00 0.00 Labor 895 Project Closeout and Turnover - 30,000.00 30,000.00 0.00 0.00 30,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Material 900 Div 21 Fire Suppression - Labor 25,650.00 25,650-00' 0.00 0.00 25,650 00 100-00% 0.00 0.00 905 Div 21 Fire Suppression - Material 23,197.00 23,197.00 0.00 000 23,197.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 910 Div 21 General Administration 9.374.00 9,374.00 0.00 0.00 9,374.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 915 Div 22 Plumbing - Labor 283,186.00 • 283,186.00; 0.00 : 000 283,186.00 100 00% 000 0.00. 920 Div 22 Plumbing - Material 99,538.00 i 99,538.00� 0.00 0.00 99,538.00 100.000.q 0.00 0.00 925 Div 22 Plumbing FixturesMater 119,310.00: 119.310.00 0.00 0.00 119;310.00 100-OMIO 0 00 0.00 Heaters 930 Div 22 Plumbing Insulation I 27,816-001 27,816.001 0.00 4 0.00 27.816.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 935 Div 22 Underground/Excavation 20,000.00 20,000.00 0.00 000 20,000.00 100,000/0 0.00 a00 940 Div 22 Pip Fitting - Labor 9,000.00 9,000.00 0.00 000 9,000.00 100,000/0 0.00 0,00 945 Div 22 Pipe Fitting - Material 2,500.00 2.500.00 0.00 0.00 2,500.00 100-001/0 0.00 0.00 950 Div 22 Core Drilling 500.00 500.00 0.00 0.00 50.0.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 955 Div 23 HVAC Labor 44.575.00 44,575.00 0.00 0.00 44,575.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 960 Div 23 HVAC -Material ! 9,294.00 9,294.00 OAO 0.00 9,294.0.0 100.000/01 0.00 0_00 965 Div 23 HVAC - Equipment 32,316.00 32,316.DOI 0.00 0.00 32,316.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 CONTINUATION SHEET Application and Certification for Payment, containing Contractor's signed certification is attached. In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A _ B C T D E F Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed Materials No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Application In Place Stored (D+E) 975 980 985 990 995 1000 1005 1010 1015 1020 1025 1030 1035 1040 1045 1050 1055 1060 1065 1070 1075 1080 1085 1090 1095 (Not in D or F) Div 23 Temp Controls 33,780.00 33,780 00 000 0.00 Div 23 Test and Balance 3,800.00 3,80000 0.00 0-00 Div 23 Crane and Rigging 500.00 500.00 0.00 0,00 Div 23 Refrigeration - Labor 7,102-00 7,102.00 0.00 0.00 Div 23 Refrigeration - Material 4,857.00 4,857.00 0.00 0-00 Div 22/23 General Administration 46,926.00 46,926.00 0.00 0-00 Div 26 General Administration 32,000 00 32,000.00 0.00 0.00 Div 26 Site Plan Innerduct - Labor I 12,000 00 12,000-00 0-00 0-00 Div 26 Site Plan Innerduct - Material 13,000.00 -131000:00i 0-00 0-00 Div 26 Site Plan Power/Device - 11,000.00 11,000.00 j 0.00 0.00 Labor Div 26 Site Plan Power/Device - 9,000.00 9-1000.00 0-00 0.00 Material Div 26 Switchgear General Material 52.000.00 52,000-00.' 0.00 0.00 Pkg Div 26 Switchgear Mech Building - 12,000.00 12,000.00, 0.00 0.00 Labor Div 26 Switchgear 18,000-00 18,000.00 0.00 0.001 Div 26 Switchgear Bath House - 10,000.00 10,000.00 0-00 000 Labor Div 26 Switchgear Bath House - 22,000.00 22,000.00 0.00 0:00 Material Div 26 Recreational Pool 6,875.00 6,875.00 0.00 0.00 Boning/Grounding- Labor Div 26 Recreational Pool 3,900.00 3,900.00 0.00 0-00 Bonding/Grounding- Material Div 26 Recreational Pool 16,750.00 16,750.00 0.00 0-00 f Equipment/Pumps - Labor Div 26 Recreational Pool 11,950.0.0 11,950.00 0.00 .0.00 Equipment/Pumps - Material Light Fixture General Material 51,000,00 51,000-001 0-00 0.00 Package Light Fixture Mech Building - Labor 3,100-0.0 3,100:00 0.00 0-00 Light Fixture Mech Building - Material 1,800.00 1,800:00 0.00 0.00 Light Fixture Bath House - Labor 18.000.00 18.000,00 0-00 0.00 Light Fixture Bath House - Material 4,800.00 4,800-00 0-00 0-00 Power Devices Mech Building - Labor 2,500.00 2,500.00 0.00 D-00 Page 10 of 13 Application No.: 19 Application Date: 05/12/22 To: 05/31/22 Architect's Project No.: 193804337 G Total Completed (G 1 C) and Stored To Date (D+E+F 33,780.00 100 UU'I 3,800.00 100 00% 500.00 100.000/0 71102.00 100.00% 4,857.00 100.00% 46,926-00 1 100-00% 32,000:00 100-00% 12,000.00 100.00% 13,000 00 100.00% 11,000.00 100.00% 9,000.00• 100.000/0 52,000.00 100.000% 12,000.00 100-00% 18,000.00' 100-00% 10,000.00 100.000/0 22,000-00 100 00% 6,875.00 100.000/0 3,900.00 100.00% 16,750.00 i 100 00% 11, 950.00 100.000% 51, 000.00 100.000/0 3.100-00 100.000/0 , 1,800,00 ' 100.000/0:4 18;000.00 100.00%' 4,80.0.00 100.00% 2.500-00 100.00% H Balance To Finish (C-G) tl.an 0.00 0-00 0.00 0-00 0-00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0-00 0.00 000 000 0.00 0-00 0.00 0.00 0-00 0.00 000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 I Retainage 0.00 0.00 0.00 0-00 0.00 0.00 000 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0-00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0-00 0-00 0-00 0.00 0.00 0.00 CONTINUATION SHEET Yaye 11 of ] 3 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No_ : 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date: 05112122 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05/31/22 Use Column 1 on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply Architect's Project No.: 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract : 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool B C D - - E - F - G - H -- [ _A _ Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G I C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or El (D+E+F) 11001 Power Devices Mech Building - 1,70000 1.700.00 000 0.00 1,700.00 100.000/c 0.00 0.00 Material 1105 Power Devices Bath House - Labor 7,500.00 7,500-00 0 00 0.00 7.500.00 100-000/0 0.00 0.00 1110 Power Devices Bath House - Material 5,000.00' 5,000.00 000 0.00 5,000-00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 1115 Wire Equipment Mech Building - 2.000.00 2,000.00 0.00 0.00 2,000-00 100.000/0 ; 0.00 000 Labor 1120 Wire Equipment Mech Building - 800.00 800-00 0-00 0.001 800.00 100.00% 0.00 0 00 Material 1125 Wire Equipment Bath House - Labor 7,700.00 7,700.00 0.00 0.00 7,700-00 100.000/0 000 000 1130 Wire Equipment Bath House - 3,000-00 3,000.00 000 0-00 3,000.00 100.00% 0.001 000 Material 1135 Div 27 Data -Communications General : 36,600.00 36,600 00 0-00 0.00 36,600-00 100.00% 000 000 Package 1140 Div 27 Data -Communications Bath 1.700.00 1,700.00 000 0.00 1,700.00 100.00°/0 0.00 0.00 House - Labor 1145 Div 27 Data -Communications Bath 1,300.00 1,30000 0,00 0.00 1,300.00 100.000/0 000 0.00 House - Material 1150 Div 28 Fire Alarm General Package 52,500.00 52,500-00 0-00 0.00 52,500-00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 1155 Div 28 Mech Building Fire Alarm - 80000 800.00 0.00 0.00 800.00 100.000/0 000 0.00 Labor 1160 Div 28 Mech Building Fire Alarm - 300-00 300 00 0,00 0.00 300.00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 Material 1165 Div 28 Bath House Fire Alarm - Labor 2,000-00, 2,000.00 0.00 ••0:00 2,000.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 1170 Div 28 Bath House Fire Alarm - 900.00 900.00' 0.00 0.001 900.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Material 1175 Div 28 Bath House Access - Labor 2,000,00 2,000.00 000 000 2,000.00 100,00% 1 0.00 0-00 1180 Div 28 Bath House Access - Material 400.00 400.00 0.00 0.00 400-00 100.000/0 1 0.00 000 1185 Pole Camera - Labor 1,400.00 1,400:00 0.00 0-00, 1,400-00. 100.00% 0-00 0.00 1190 Pole Camera - Material 900.00, 900.00 0.00 0.00 900.00 100.00%/u 0.00 0.00 1195 Building Camera - Labor 900.00 900.00 0-00 0.00 900.00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 1200 Building Camera - Material 300:00' 300-00 0.00 0.00 300-00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 1205 Div 32 Chain Link Fences/Gates - 34,680.00 34,680.00 0.00 0.00 34,680.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 Labor 1210 Div 32 Chain Link•Fences/Gates - 23.120.00 23,120.00 0.00 0.00 23,120-00 100.00% 000 000 Material 1215 Div 23 Post/Rope/Net Barrier- Labor I 37,200-00 37,200-00' 0.00 0.00 37.200.00 100.000/0 0.00 000 1220 Div 32 Post/Rope/Net Barrier - 24,800-00 24.800.001 0.00 0.00 24.800.00 100.00% 000 0-00 Material J �� CONTINUATION SHEET Page 12 of 13 Application and Certification for Payment, containing Application No.: 19 Contractor's signed certification is attached. Application Date: 05112122 In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. To: 05131122 Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply. Architect's Project No.. 193804337 Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C _ D_ _ __ E F G H I Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed Materials Total % Balance Retainage No. Value From Previous This Period Presently Completed (G 1 C) To Finish Application In Place Stored and Stored (C-G) (D+E) To Date (Not in D or E) (U+E+F) 1225 Div 32 Irrigation - Labor 21,896,00' 21,896-00 0.00 0.00 21,896.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 1230 Div 32 Irrigation - Material 13,239.00 13,239.00 0.00 0.00 13,239-00 100.000/0 000 0.00 1235 Div 32 Turf and Grass - Labor 13,194.00 13,194.00 0.00 0.00; 13,194.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 1240 Div 32 Turf and Grass - Material 7,036.00 7,036,01) 0 00 0.00 7,036.00 100.00% 0-00 0,00 1245 Div 32 Plants Labor 49,017.00 49,017:00 0.00 0,00 49,017.001 100-00% 0.00 0-00 1250 Div 32 Plants - Material 45,938.00 45,938.00 0.00 0.00 45,938.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 1255 Div 32 Concrete Paving/Decking - 60,000,00 60,000-00 0-00 0.00 60,000.00 100-000/0 0.00 0-00 Labor I 1260 Div 32 Concrere Paving/Decking - 40.000.00 40,000-00 0-00 000 40,000 00 100.00% 0.001 0.00 Material s 1265 Div 33 Drain Tile - Labor 24,000-00 24,000,00 0.00 0.00 24,000-00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 1270 Div 33 Drain Tile - Material 6,000-00I 6,000.00 0.00 0.00 6,000.00 100.0011/0 0.00 0.00 1275 Div 33 Water Pipes Labor 5,100.00 5,100.00 0.00 1100, 5,100-00 100,000/6 0-00 0,00 1280 Div 33 Water Pipes Material 900.00 900.00 0.00 0.00 900.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 1285 Div 33 Force Main - Labor 8,550.00 8,55000 000 0.00 8,550.00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 1290 Div 33 Force Man - Material 950.00 950.00 0.00 0-00 950.001 100.009% 0.00 0.00 1295 Div 33 Lift Station - Labor 30,621.00 30,621.00 0.00 ' 0.00 30,621.00 100.00% 0.00 0-00 1300 Div 33 Lift Station - Material 23,131.00 23,131.00 0.00 0.00 23,131.00 100.000/0 0.00 0-00 1305 Div 33 Main Drainage Dig Labor Only 19,253.00 19,253.00 0.00 0.00 19,253.00 100 00% 0.00 0.00 1310 Div 33 Storm Drainage - Labor 35,000.00 35,000-00. 0.00 0.00 35,000.00 ' 100.00% 0.00 0.00 1315 Div 33 Storm Drainage - Material 15,000.00 15,000-00 0,00 0.001 15,000.00 100.00% 0.00 000 1320 Div 33 Area/Trench Drains - Labor 1 20,000.00 20.000,00 0.00 0.00 20,000.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 1325 Div 33 Area/Trench Drains - Material 20,000,00 20,000.00 0.00 0.00 20,000.00. 100.001/0 0.00 0.00 1330 PART 3 1 •0.00 0.001 0.00 r 0.00 0.00 0.00% 0.00 0.00 1335 UnitPrices- seeattachment 1,078.187,00 1,369,647-78-291,460.78 0.00 1,078,187.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 2301 Change Order#1 11,618.00--11,618.00 0,00 !! 0.00 11,618.00 100.00% 0.00 0,00 2302 Change Order #2 6.297.00 6,297.00 0.00 0-00 6,297,00 100,00016 0.00 0.00 2303 Change Order #3 11.866,00 11,866-00 0.00 0.00 i 11 ,866.00 100.000/0 0.00 0.00 2304 Change Order#4 24,431.00-24.431.00 0-00 0-001 24,431-00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 2305 Change Order #5 8,535:00 8,535.00 0.00 0:00 8,535,00 100.00% 0.00 0.00 2306 Change Order#6 4,827 35 i 41827.35• 0.00 '0.00 4,82-7 35 100-003/0 000 000 2307 Change Order #7 54,106.49 94,106.49. 0 00 0.00 54,106.4.9 100.00% 0-00 0 00 2308 Change Order #8 1,685.00 1,685.00; coo 0-001 1,68600 100.00% 0.00 0.00 2309 Change Order #9 _ 26,730.001,-26,730.001 000 0.00-26.730.00 100.00% 000 _ ` 0.00 CONTINUATION SHEET Application and Certification for Payment, containing Contractor's signed certification is attached. In tabulations below, amounts are stated to the nearest dollar. Use Column I on Contracts where variable retainage for line items may apply Invoice # : 637-19 Contract: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool A B C D _E F Item Description of Work Scheduled Work Completed Materials No. Value From Previous This Period Presently j Application In Place Stored (D+E) I (Not in D or E) 2310 Change Order #10 22,744,051 22,744 05 000 000 2311 Change Order #11 3,111.00 0.00 3,111-00 0.00 2312 Overrrun/Underrun 298,962.28 0.00 298,962 28 000 Page 13 of 13 Application No.: 19 Application Date: 05/12/22 To: 05131 /22 Architect's Project No. 193804337 G Total Completed (G ! C) and Stored To Date (D+E+F) 22, /44 05 100 000/0 3,111 00 100.000/0 298,962 28 100.000/0 H Balance To Finish (C-G) _ I Retainage 0.00 000 0.00 0.00 000 0.00 Grand Totals 11,771,728.17 11,768,617.17 3,111-00 0,00 11,771,728,17 100.00% 0.00 0.00 PART 3-BASE BID: CIVIL SITE UTILITIES AND PARKING LOT IMPROVEMENTS Thursday, May 12, 2022 SLle O111iILtll Plleea- - - }I b?_ $1net 5-We WP<kap Bnem wSepnP Sesa+iny tar[ to Sturm Sewer Pipe Pr i,I ■ Fence, Type Machine Sliced YWnp yprpn EeWiaerLe Jeri CmJSW OYnkal Cats Sew]r Ik rt PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe PVC Sanitary Sewer Pipe PVC $chetlM Sanitary Service a 5x-Vlyn YLenaea Wye mrecl to Exi6hng San Sewer Pipe 'pVC WIYrl m "G16e Valve 4 Bw ate ken F M p ml V Gate Valve A Bax [ b Emkaq WaletmdP " Di. Sturm Sewer CBMh wl 3"Sump Y RCP CL 6 Sturm Sewer Pipe "Pe[IaalM Oram T.iNSetl -type prabl "Orals Ti CYa[gVt uONM Stem sewer pw ennnel In EaSRtlq Sfarm Sewer $Iruct Segrlwrutl Rylanieg WW CPrnvvn Excavaliun(Parking Let) rack Excavation hipla iatup iyW $ •- �-1 OlarruW Bomow-aaad.hheal W 3 aF0 II 2,500 30 300 2 114 219 53 I f 1 1 in 1 S f 370 370 9 2 1 1,725 1,370 50 675 6B0 PR EA LF EA LF TN SV EA LF LF LF EA EA EA LF EA LB EA EA EA LF LF LF EA EA EA SF CY CY SY TR 3150 $49n 150 S}, M Ui SM ?M 1<] $1 32W i117T. $i6 $1.736 %IS '$A.6m, 32500 $5,6] !46 Lt3 fZdi $.711y $1 AOD S21 120 M. $J S2Ss ]/PIO.40 9pW FR EA LF EA LF TN SY EA LF LF LF EA EA EA LF EA LB EA EA EA LF LF LF EA EA EA SF CV CV SY TN 35:, D.W rR- 30.W- EA LF EA LF TN SY EA LF LF LF E4 EA EA LF EA LS E4 EA EA LF LF LF EA EA EA SF CY CY SV TN Sri 00 - RAICA0 ]AO S2.Or000 Ex 30A0 GiY 00 37.pe2Ap OA6 7-3 O.4 jmm 361im 179 00 1 IF 49.00 _ 51 019 W S4250.00 M om 50.0p E4 SOM _ W.W 30D0 SS202M 17,00 sn'SmAn 105eA0 LF 1441.60 _ L413<-1,7Ei 30. }i. it pm 1 fi 715.�s+.�e TN Wm Sf f.iB _157.fi4 iS1550 Sam SY ism $Gm ]00.W S52S00 (54.531.001 S-S 10. SYA XA 3 n0 1535noo 5300 .W -- $9.918.00 -FA0 LIO 1,bAp Y 75nA0 - -11 00 l514i6uM, ,y10 ]•11. 927 211 B0 11.9f9W LF $9.918 �0 4200 M R1/fAa d3.U3 tO0 LF 10.00 Ip.lo i 0 s0.06 1 $Om 2.12. 3, 3. i1$IA6 Im 51W fOAn 1 OAn IA6 sq0 12010n -- - O80 e_ moo Yta Ys alA 51,V7,11 a DO S1. ROO EA 50.00 Till 0.00 Jig 1 .-m LF SOW SM OW xM IIJ2/A6 il,3M.00 h %0b S1 Moo 3-17. WD] I•S000U JTMOM 1s p0 00 L1 f0.00 .23A9 'a 3-if" 311,SOn,nn 1.00 MAMOD EA SOW Se1WA0 ODD 1.7D 1 AO S] W EA1000 F2SIC.nn 9iq iOBt7 saw ]•N. ].tI N 4.CQ 14Yw1.T.t0 FA SOAO S&W2.00 am H.17L6n 14x$ a. LE lOdN $B,igJO ;i,4a 53 Za2 3e 1MMO.M ]-21 3-M Holm311 AIDOOAO Lf SOM ssjow.00 3ASA0 $a,J91m 1SM $6eA0 LF s0.m SISISM 3MM YIAB500 $661,00 YYA 1.75 S1.Jp•SO 400 $5 TY2B0 EA I AO 11-7=2.00 ___ M$A1 2.00 Mulm I low Sill -1-00 1S26900 ---- •so Y ]•:i. S1AGOAD 300 ST GT]W FJ, SO DO 0004100 -2W J]9 JO1.W 1 0 5]1,WS.DD1 SO AD S]1 .,* am DO S0D0 ]�]I ]•29. 127./O 11lO.ad 1-AW.W CY SO -OD vriciam 000 $F L00 SOAn $1,Dp9 00 I CY SO W Sf OtE W nAO ]om [ 50.00 ].3C 12 SS" 475A0 52 W $Y 10 W 12,n25.Jp Do $l1,1FAci 329113.00 WAO ya1.1s2W ]•]2 ]a]. 3: OINI Prl�a N»K, Ctacs3 n lkalnnal lvr Tac 6 Caa1 kul wr Lqe of Cwb Tyw Sp S3.$ Neni .," Loom 4P NA We., Court/ 3BO 30 600 55 fig TN GL LF TN TN S3201 $500 $20 $130 0 51390 _ _ 11561 .. TN GL LF TN $10100,6 _ _ ...... _ _ TN SO DO $1010016 6 7 TN GL LF TN TN 420594a 11"Jo ]_.0C S150W OL Joao Msom ON Sam $1240m SUM $1+0e.p9 No S1564.00 1EA0 3. i35-fi'i i1�0f W 5Wb V.111.n0 V 1 W Sr.CTO.W DA S9 ,O5 1.00� iJA3LkO e4.By $9pY6A0 b1i Ora <� Calcrela PaWrnrry @G1n Cenenit CwL 'Cen[nle Wall - $NW vvh4e Lvre -- 600 610 25 - LF SF LF Ss1 b;f. SS V. W. Le M" Ss}11s0 21T-91 LF SF LF iS.VkS44 D] i1 .MS.3[ -1 SY LF SF LF •.'Sx 7a 1J 3� IIJAWAJ 55L'10 112 OD $122'aW t 1B1p 13AHM 24rT.sd 31T.]IS90 - SIi565m - .li . 1_0 $19.04 A M 550 00 W 360 D'yO 1.IIM1B Y ugF-TI - - 55390.00 29 009 CV SY EA CV LF LS - W.-I - - - _ m $1411A.14 -17509 E52.00 CV BY EA CV LF LS 66.Os41a y<I 34 aPra[0-ANOOT son 0eeltluo_ i Everlyay[1 T_ Mukh ndlCape Steel Edger rNM1 Eecloevn 115 600 73 50 25 CY SY EA CV LF S2ADDA0 125200 55.00600 _ SY $000 SS OOB OD 142.6DSDOi ]•a3 5.44 $ $ '93 W Sti.IlS.W EA IDAa 512 71b-P3 0-00 177J4AA SSm $225000 5 - - --- 345 ]�A SOW aS0.00 AD o00 8000 LF SO-OO $0_00 25D0 2.040.06 Sy7,OCQ00 SOAO 537 ow to OAO ]•17 Pllol#1fpgYptll 11[Cemrslen EY[avallOn (1lwtha[gal Common Excavation(Otifiite) IGeelexlile Fabric Infiula1-(a"Thick) Subgrade Rock(1.5"Clean Rock) P-1 General Fit trom Surcharge P1i Mill AinantY[ Bermw[Mid) -- 1040 'f Iq0 6,700 1,330 1,400 4,500 19500 CY BY BY C"WWF. TN CY TN S Ssol 1O 600700 CV CV BY SY TN CV TN - .. f3a.DO7.Q - - Gv 4040 .00$AO .A157A0 CY CV SV 5Y TN Cy TN i3a.^f -0RI 3i6 • 750 1@!]iN Wl AIM Ll' m JOp6a18% 3iYF.Ea S32MW 57-I'MM 0 200000 S].SMW SY 34A0 13 A] a]0090 9 1IW 0 $36,3Wmi SY 70.W M. W 361. IWAa '9s s�+15r J6n736.t0 ill Spp3 Kt.]]5.16 _I07A 787 ]W3]6 3173e1.40 CY J10 SIr 6N.ky lilBSa •s']-. : Mfi T 5543. 5e N jA,W A6OQA� PrarglR Blgfp OA 11.3bOE4T-78 ✓ jun p1 IMI amr W Total Billed la Oale S1,369,647 7 - 1. s' 7 'F May 12, 2022 Dan Boyum Stantec Consulting Services 733 Marquette Ave. Suite 1000 Minneapolis, MN 55402 RE: 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428 Dear Mr. Boyum: We are writing to inform you of the following changes described below: DONLAR PCO NO. 129: Unit Pricing Overrun/Underrun Analysis - Part 1 and Part 3 of Contract Total Add (Deduct) $ 298,962.28 Due to the above changes, we require the contract time to be increased by: Zero (0) Days THIS CHANGE ORDER REQUEST SUPERCEDES ALL OTHER SUBMITTED TO DATE FOR THIS ISSUE. The above change in scope has additional costs. The attached cost breakdown has been included to allow review of the change and any additional information has been attached for reference. We would appreciate the incorporation of this item into the next change order processed by your office. Only the items and quantities listed within our breakdown will become part of any accepted change order. If approved, please sign and return this form at the earliest possible date to avoid project delays. If you have any questions regarding this item, please contact me. Sincerely, DONLAR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY Jon Polzin Project Manager Encl: Donlar PCO Recap Sheet Subcontractor Quote(s) APPROVED BY: Nan Date CC: Eric Goebel, Project Superintendent Kevin Bohrer, Senior Project Manager PCO File LAJZ TWIN CITIES SAINT CLOUD 550 Shoreview Park Road, Shoreview, MN 55126 601 281h Avenue South, Waite Park, MN 56387 CONSTRUCTION 651-227-0631 Fax651-227-0132 320-253-3354 Fax320-253-3795 PENDING CHANGE ORDER RECAPITULATION SHEET PROJECT 637- New Hope Outdoor Pool DONLAR PCO NO. 129 _LOCATION _ 4401 Nylon Avenue North, New Hope, MN 55428 SHEET NO. 1 SUBJECT Unit Pricing Overrun/Underrun Analysis - Part 1 and Part 3 of Contract DATE 12-May-22 PR/CCD/ASI SUMMARY BY JP PRICES BY JP CHECKED BY KA DESCRIPTION QTY UoMWPRICE LABOR MAT'L EQUIP SUBS TOTALS 1Project Manager HR - - 2 !Superintendent HR 100.00 - _ 3 Cement Finisher HR 95.78 4 Carpenter HR 97.95 - - 5 (Laborer HR 89.42 6 7 Pay Application Line Item 8 Part 1 _ 9 _ 10 ;4160 - Helical Piles 3,180.00 3,180.00 11 _ 12 9165 - Helical Pile Extensions 4,321.50 4,321.50 13 _ 14 _ 15 .Part 3 - Per last pay request 637-18R on 11/9/21 16 17 91335 - Unit Prices - See breakdown attached 291,460.78 291,460.78 18 _ 19 _ 20 _ 21 (pool heater wirin now under CO 11) _ 22 _ 23 _ 24 _ 25 _ 26 _ 27 - 28 _ 29 _ 30 _ 31 _ 32 _ 33 _ 34 SUBTOTALS - - - 298,962.28 298,962.28 35 Donlar Cosntruction OH&P rates 36 Donlar Construction OH&P values 37 -- - - 298,962.28 298,962.28 38 Bond _ 39 -j40 TOTAL NET CHANGE 298 962.28 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 a o O O cc O O O O O O O O O o fA 69 69 69 fA v3 V3 fA R 69 FA fAR (A669 •W a+ �i o O oo O O O O O O O p eo O w U1 O 1� O O O O O O S S S O 0 N O y F, •-- O O O O O O O O Cl O O O O N O V •�j O V3 69 fA fA 69 fA fA fA 69 69 69 fA 6A [� 69 Q GO O4 Y � N 69 v e e o e e e o op m e e e e ep e N 8 O 8 S S 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 S m S O N 8 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 4 O 1l O O O O O M 7 8 CD O O CD �D en t` M n b ••-i kn 1l O O o0 O\ �D M M N O w 69 000 ay ao } L}4 N ;; 1 M �--� N N oo vl m �D l� t\ .-• t` F iL O Vl CD l� 7 it V1 Ch iD M M V •-• �D N M 69 .-. N 69 69 V1 fig N N 69 l- 69 FA b9 fA 69 69 l� 6N9 69 69 ~ O a0+ L' U v7 69 CD O 8 O 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 S A C C O V3 O 69 O 69 O O O O OO O O O O O O O O fA 69 69 6-3 Vi 69 fA 69 69 fA 69 69 fA Cp dGi � !/' a C w o x 0 8 8 088800090008 S S 0 o O o000000000-.0 9 69 fA 69 69 69 69 fA 69 61 69 fA V, 69 •-+ fA y •WO 6M9 � da m u CD Y n n 7 m r b vi n vl O 7 oo O t� Ot M M N O GO M V3 69 O� N M lD of 'O N oo � h W •s O n .-• 10 69 '6A N fA fA Vl fA N N �D 9 V3 69 69 V3 1l L n. 6' N V3 t- E ._ n 69 E CL o 01 S S S O S O � O O O O M V O O N •--� A > Vl l� .M-+ M n e0 oo [� �O �. vi 1� �p vi O 7 •-� cJ ao D\ b M M N O o0 M N �D N oD � V1 ao �D t� � •-� T n y Ol l- l- .+ 6A •� N 69 69 kn 69 N N fA � t` 7 lD N O fA 69 69 69 69 69 N l- yq y L 6N9 6n9 fA V Cn :5 a m J V p 6 y .4 wo Z � c F uuotauyeoeye�e'W W W W W W W W W W W W O QQ z 0¢ Z i O O C O C o Oo�� 0 0 0 cc a 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 m u N M W W W W uj W ( W(UJ { W{�� W W { W{U� 6719t7192�2Y�2C aaaa aaaaaa r o~e o~e a a x x x x x x x x x x o IL ILu u u u u u u u u u F ��DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE July 6, 2021 ID: Letter ID: #BWBBMRR #0000 0010 4755 4884# DONLAR CONSTRUCTION CO 550 SHOREVIEW PARK RD SHOREVIEW MN 55126-7046 XX-XXX1753 L0104755488 Certificate of Compliance for Form IC134, Contractor Affidavit The Minnesota Department of Revenue certifies that DONLAR CONSTRUCTION CO fulfilled their Minnesota Withholding Tax requirements for the following project: Project Location: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: NEW HOPE POOL CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 April, 2019 July, 2020 What do I do with this certificate? If you are a contractor, provide this certificate to the governmental unit or prime contractor who hired you for the project. If you are the project owner, verify that the project location, owner, begin date, and end date are correct. If not, have the contractor resubmit Form IC134 to us with the correct information. What if I have questions? For details on Contractor Affidavit requirements, go to www.revenue.state.mn.us and type Withholding Fact Sheet 13 into the Search box. You may also contact us. Income Tax and Withholding Division Phone: 651-282-9999 or 1-800-657-3594 (toll -free) Email: withholding.tax@state.mn.us WNIMMF �Mlf Daniel Getschel, Director Income Tax and Withholding Division 600 N. Robert St., St. Paul, VIN 55101 An equal opportunity employer www.revenue.state.mn.us This material is available in alternate formats. MIDEPARTMENT IC134 OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit This Contractor Affidavit must be certified by the Minnesota Department of Revenue before the state of Minnesota or any of its subdi- visions can make final payment to contractors. For more detailed information, see the instructions on the back of this form. Please type or print clearly. This Information will be used for returning the completed form. Company name F T y Daytime phone Minnesota tax ID number DONLAR CONSTRUCTION COMPANY 1651-227-0631 6274346 Address Total contract amount Month/year work began I� 550 SHOREVIEW PARK ROAD {� , If `� �_ 04/0812019 L City - State ZIP code J Ammm�liII due Month/year work ended SHOREVIEW _ Y MN^ __ 55126 _ J] $2 0712020- Project number Project location 637 NEW HOPE POOL 4401 XYLON AVE N NEW HOPE MN 55428 Project owner Address City State ZIP code . CITY OF NEW HOPE 4401 XYLON AVE N NEW HOPE MN 55428 Did you have employees work on this prolect? KI Yes ❑ No. IF,., who did the work? Check the box that describes your involvement in the project and fill in all information requested, ❑ Sole contractor ❑ Subcontractor Name of contractor who hired you Address L Prime contractor —If you subcontracted out any work on this project, all of your subcontractors must submit their own Contractor Affidavits and have them certified by the Department of Revenue before you can submit your Contractor Affidavit. For each subcontractor you had, -fill in the information below and attach a copy of each subcontractor's certified Contractor Affidavit. If you need more space, attach a separate sheet, Business name Address Owner/Officer SEE ATTACHED LIST I declare that ofl information I have fifled In on rhA far true information relating to thisp roject, inrluding send' copies of to the contracting oyency� _11' Contractor' i4a r 8il nnesota Revenue, i 5ta on 6 Phone: 651-282-9999 or 1-800-657-3594 Certificate of Compliance to the best of my knowledge and belief. I authorize the Department of Revenue to disclose pertinent re prime contractor if I am a subcontractor, and to any subcontractors If I am a prime contractor, and Title ul, MN 55146-6610 CFO Date 06/08/2021 Based on records of the Minnesota Department of Revenue, I certify that the contractor who has signed this Contractor Affidavit has fulfilled all the requirements of Minnesota Statutes 290.92 and 270C.66 concerning the withholding of Minnesota income tax from wages paid to employees relating to contract services with the state of Minnesota and/or its subdivisions. Department of Revenue approval Date (Rev. 12/17) ACTION FENCE INC ADVANCE TERRAllO & TILE CO INC ATLAS FOUNDATION CO LLC C AND S MANAGEMENT COMPANY INC CAULKERS CO INC THE COMMERCIAL FLOORING SERVICES LLC CURB MASTERS INC D G WELDING & MFG INC GLOBAL SPECIALTY CONTRACTORS INC HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS INC JOHN FOLEY MASONRY INC JSH CONSTRUCTION LLC KLEIN ELECTRIC INC MARGOLIS CO METRO MFG INC MIDLAND GLASS CO INC MIDWEST FIRE PROTECTION INC NORTHERN AIR CORP OMANN CONTRACTING QUAD E COMPANIES INC SIEWERT CABINET & FIXTURE MNFCTG CO SOLAR MIDWEST INC SUNDE LAND SURVEYING LLC TRI-STATE PUMP & CONTROL TRITON STEEL LLC TWIN CITY ACOUSTICS INC WELLS CONCRETE PRODUCTS 8/27/2020 https://www.mndor.state.mn.us/tp/eservices/_/Retrieve/O/c-/taX3ZIOD_aMvcG47LZzkGg_?FILE_=Print2&PARAMS_=708586741675. DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has bean approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: ' Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number, Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date; Project End Dale: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 1-451-866-400 27-Aug-2020 12:20:43 PM ACTION FENCE INC 20-8284334 actionfence Contractor Affidavit 925196288 8771387 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 25-Mar-2020 20-Aug-2020 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL $128,756.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or govemment agency that hired you, Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651.282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) wilhholding,tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8.00 a.m. - 4;30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please prin �hi� g8gs for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. https://www:mndor.state.mn. us/lpleservices/_lReldeve/O/o-/taX3ZIOD_aMvcG47lZzkGg_?FILE_=Print2&PARAMS_=708586741675370199 1 /1 6/25/2020 Mips:l/www.mndorstate.mn.usftpleservicest /Retrieve/O/c-Iy6zD41JAuEgava7DOSUxFg_?FILE_ =Prinl2&PARAMS_=445509958605.. DEPARTMENT _.: OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number - Submitted Dale and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner. Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 2-143402-912 25-Jun-2020 3:02:51 PM ADVANCE TERRAZZO & TILE CO INC 41-0837174 riley328 Contractor Affidavit 555245568 9022318 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 19-Nov-2019 25-Nov-2019 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL NEW HOPE MN $9,470.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or govemment agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (loll -free) 800-657-3594. or (email) withholding. tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please pr'n lh'� egg for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. Mips:ltwww.mndor.stele, mn.usllpleservicesl lRetrieve/0!c•ly6zD4iJAuEgave7OOSUxFg_?FILE_-Print2&PARAMS._ _=44 55099586050936973 Ili DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-929-560.808 24-Oc1-2019 10:52:64 AM ATLAS FOUNDATION CO LLC 20-1766679 atlas foundation Contractor Affidavit 2121850880 7576910 CITY OF NEW HOPE 995 24-Apr-2019 30-Sep-2019 NEW HOPE POOL 4401 XYLON AVE N NEW HOPE MN 55428 $574.500.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (loll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withholding. tax®state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please rin lhte for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. Page 1 of 1 otDEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Dale and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affldavk Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number. Project Begin Date: Project' End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-448-940-320 27-JUI-2020 10:15:56 AM C AND S MANAGEMENT COMPANY INC 45-2515281 june181961 Contractor Affidavit 1115316224 2825706 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 30-Jul-2019 24-Mar-2020 4401 XYLON AVENUE NORTH, NEW HOPE, MN 56428 $24,326.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 851.282-9999, (loll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withhoiding.tax®state.mn.us, Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p,m, Monday - Friday. Please pron�lni ?34 for your records using the print or save functionality bulk Into your browser. https;//www,mndor,state.mn.us/tp/eservices/ /Retrieve/0/c-IInHLrTdILDbA3zd8xiVoJg^... 7/27/2020 7/14/2020 hitps://www.mndor.state.mn.us/tp/eservices/_/Retrieve/0/c-/f8twaJ13Bh1VByt6W1VLGw_?FILE__=Print2&PARAMS= 8653262382909... DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 1-658-638-624 14-Jul-2020 2:40:37 PM CAULKERS COMPANY INC THE 41-1606047 howard Contractor Affidavit 1694654464 2315186 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 14-Aug-2019 02-Jul-2020 NEW HOPE, MN $21,252, 00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (loll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withholding. tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please Qrint this_gagg for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. https:/lwww.mndor.state.mn.us/tp/eservices/ /Retrleve/0/c-/f8twaJi3BhlVByt6W1VLGw_?FILE_=Print2&PARAMS= 8653262382909261583 1l1 Page 1 of 1 DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confhmatlon Number. Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Subrrdtled: Affidav[t Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: ProJecl Number Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Locatlon: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 1-0"9-M 10-Mer-2020 12:03:18 PM COMMERCIAL FLOORING SERVICES LLC 204952204 IC134S Contractor AMdavft 1847959552 7836004 CITY OF NEW HOPE 63T 13,Jun-M19 02-Mar-2020 NEW HOPE $7,440.00 No Subcontrauiors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you, Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax DlvWon at 651-282-9999, (ton -five) 800-657-3694, or (emeiQ wlthholding.taxtjQatete.mmus. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please Dnm Uus y (! for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser hops://www.condor,state.mn.us/tp/eservices/ lRetrievel0/c-/4peeZZyJX,nZW9FgsflI®Q_... 3/10/2020 DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 1.928.317-216 30-Jul-2020 11:21:57 AM CURB MASTERS INC 41-1606037 C Davis Contractor Affidavit 248209408 2207114 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 O6-May-2020 30-Jul-2020 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL $13,588.75 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withholding.tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please mChl this Pete for your records using the print or save functionality built Into your browser. 8/3/2020 haps:llwww.mndor.state,mn.us/tplesarvicesl_/Retrieve/0/c-/RxLmoFJWtw6bztXBmcu4jA_?FILE_=Print2&PARAMS—= 1536386755086... r DEPARTMENT Iwo, OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date; Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 2-143-643-936 3-Aug-2020 4:35:37 PM D G WELDING & MFG INC 41-1297046 DGW3265 Contractor Affidavit 1303732224 5121263 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 27-Feb-2020 05-Jun-2020 4401 XYLON AVENUE NORTH NEW HOPE MN 55428 $20,075.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll4ree) 800-657-3594, or (emall) withhold Ing,tax o@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a,m, - 4:30 p.m, Monday - Friday, Please print this pggg for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. https://www.mndor.stato,mn,usltpleservicesI. /RetrievelO/c-tRxLmoFJWtw6bztXBmcu4jA_?FILE_=Print2&PARAMS= 1536386755086597558 ill R"', MDEPARTMENT OF REVENUE May 10, 2021 #BWBBMRR ##0000 0084 0417 5682# GLOBAL SPECIALTY CONTRACTORS INC 3220 TERMINAL DR EAGAN MN 55121-1609 ID: XX-XXX6450 Letter ID: L0840417568 �RKEIVED Certificate of Compliance for Form IC134, Contractor Affidavit The Minnesota Department of Revenue certifies that GLOBAL SPECIALTY CONTRACTORS INC fulfilled their Minnesota.Withholding Tax requirements for the following project: Project Location: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: NEW HOPE CITY OF NEW HOPE 219401 May, 2019 November, 2020 What do I do with this certificate? 11f, you are a contractors provide this certificate to the governmental unit or prime contractor wo hired you for the project. If you. are the project owner, verify that the project location, owner, begin date, and end date are correct, If not, have the contractor resubmit Form IC134 to us with the correct information. What if I have questions? For details on Contractor Affidavit requirements, go to www.revenue.state,mn.us and type Withholding Fact Sheet 13 into the Search box. You may also contact us. Income Tax and Withholding Division Phone: 651-282-9999 or 1-800-657-3594 (toll -free) Email: withholding. tax@state.mn.us Daniel Getschel, Director Income Tax and Withholding Division 600 N. Robert St., St. Paul, MN 55101 www.revenue.statemn.us An equal opportunity employer This material is available in alternate formats, MIDEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit IC134 This Contractor Affidavit must be certified by the Minnesota Department of Revenue before the state of Minnesota or any of its subdi- visions can make final payment to contractors. For more detailed information, see the instructions on the back of this form, Please type or print clearly. Thls information will be used for returning the completed form. Company name — — — — ~ 1 Daytime phone Minnesota tax ID number I Global Specialty Contractors, Inc. j 651-406-8232 29-22939 Address Total contract amount Month/year work began + 3220 Terminal Dr $ 4375882.15 05/2019 City State ZIP code I Amount stiff due Month/year work ended Eagan MN 55121 1 $ 218089.66 11/2020 Project number Project location GSC 219401 / Donlar 63 New Hope Outdoor Pool New Hope, MN Project owner Address City of New Hope — 4401 Xylon Ave N Did you have employees work on this project? KI yes ❑ No, It no, who did the work? City State ZIP code New Hope MN 55428 Check the box that describes your Involvement in the project and fill in all information requested. ❑ Sole contractor ❑ Subcontractor Name of contractor who hired you Address 0 Prime contractor —If you subcontracted out any work on this project, all of your subcontractors must submit their own Contractor Affidavits and have them certified by the Department of Revenue before you can submit your Contractor Affidavit. For each subcontractor you had, fill in the Information below and attach a copy of each subcontractor's certified Contractor Affidavit. If you need more space, attach a separate sheet. Business name Address Owner/Officer WhlteWater West Industries Ltd 180 - 6651 Fraserwood PI Richmond, BC Northern Pool Restorations, LLC 1491 92nd Lane NE Blaine, MN 55449 Quad E Companies 23130 Woodland Ridge Lakeville, MN I declare that maton v4f+7itd in on this arm is true and complete to the best of my knowledge and belief, I authorize the Department of Revenue to disclose pertinent Informs r tadap to this ding set ing es of this form, to the prime contractor if l am a subcontractor, and to any subcontroctars l o n prime contractor, and ro the eonrractinp I t I I ), ?-ca -- Contractor's lure Title oat Mail . Minnesot avenue, Ma on 6610, St. Paul, MN 55146-6610 Phone; 65 - 999 or 1. 657-3594 Certificate of Compliance Based on records of the Minnesota Department of Revenue, I certify that the contractor who has signed this Contractor Affidavit has fulfilled all the requirements of Minnesota Statutes 290,92 and 270C.66 concerning the withholding of Minnesota income tax from wages paid to employees relating to contract services with the state of Minnesota and/or its subdivisions, Department of Revenue approval Date (Rev.12/t71 M1DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE February 3, 2021 ID: Letter ID: #BWBBMRR #0000 0064 4494 8803# WHITEWATER WEST INDUSTRIES INC 1110 BOSTON AVE STE 100 LONGMONT CO 80501-5882 XX-XXX2300 L0644494880 Certificate of Compliance for Form IC134, Contractor Affidavit The Minnesota Department of Revenue certifies that WHITEWATER WEST INDUSTRIES INC fulfilled their Minnesota Withholding Tax requirements for the following project: Project Location: NEW HOPE MN Project Owner: CITY OF NEW HOPE Project Number: GCS 219401/DONLAR 637 Project Begin Date: June, 2019 Project End Date: August, 2020 What do I do with this certificate? If you are a contractor, provide this certificate to the governmental unit or prime contractor who hired you for the project. If you are the project owner, verify that the project location, owner, begin date, and end date are correct. If not, have the contractor resubmit Form IC 134 to us with the correct information. What if I have questions? For details on Contractor Affidavit requirements, go to www.revenue.state.mn.us and type Withholding Fact Sheet 13 into the Search box. You may also contact us. Income Tax and Withholding Division Phone: 651-282-9999 or 1-800-657-3594 (toll -free) Email: withholding.tax@state.mn.us Daniel Getschel, Director Income Tax and Withholding Division 600 N. Robert St., St. Paul, MN 55101 An equal opportunity employer www.mwnue,state.=.us This material rs available in alternate formats. �IDEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit IC134 This Contractor Affidavit must be certified by the Minnesota Department of Revenue before the state of Minnesota or any of its subdi- visions can make final payment to contractors. For more detailed information, see the instructions an the back of this form, Please type or print clearly. This Information will be used for returning the completed form. r Companii name T — ~ i Daytime phone Minnesota tax ID numb ,n White Water West Industries Ltd, 604-273-1068 98 01267542Il/ Address Total contract amount month/year work began 180-6651 Fraserwood PI I $ 461.310.00 June/2019 City State ZIP code I Amount still duc Mvnthtlearwork ended Richmond BC V6W1 J3 1 $ 0 Aug12020 Project number Project location GCS 219401/Donlar 6 _ New Hope, MN Project owner Address City State ZIP code City of New Hope 4401 Won Ave N New Hope MN 55428 Did you have employees work on this project? RJ Yes ❑ No If na, who did the work? Check the box that describes your involvement in the project and fill in all information requested. ❑ Sole contractor Subcontractor _ Name of contractor who hired you Global Specialty Contractors Inc. Address 3220 Terminal Dr Eagan, MN 55121 ❑ Prime contractor —if you subcontracted out any work on this project, all of your subcontractors must submit their own Contractor Affidavits and have them certified by the Department of Revenue before you can submit your Contractor Affidavit, For each subcontractor you had, fill in the information below and attach a copy of each subcontractor's certified Contractor Affidavit. If you need more space, attach a separate sheet. Business name Address ownerlotBcer 1 declare that oll information 1 hove f led In on this form is true and complete to the best of my knowledge and belief. l authorize the Department of Revenue to disclose pertinent information relating to this pro/ect including sending copies of this form, to the prime contractor if I am a subcontractor, and to any subcontractors if l am o prime contractor, and to the contracting agency. Contractor's signature Title Date Project Manager October 19, � Mail to: Minnesota Revenue, Mail Station 6610, St, Paul, MN 55146-6610 Phone; 651-282-9999 or 1-800-657-3594 Certificate of Compliance Based on records of the Minnesota Department of Revenue, I certify that the contractor who has signed this Contractor Affidavit has fulfilled all the requirements of Minnesota Statutes 290.92 and 270C.66 concerning the withholding of Minnesota income tax from wages paid to employees relatingto contract services with the state of Minnesota and/or its subdivisions. Deportment of Revenue approval Dote 10/21 /2020 fllii Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: .User Who Submitted: . Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: New Hope IC134,html 0-499-944-736 20-Oct 2020 9:36:53 AM NORTHERN POOL RESTORATION, LLC 45-4587822 northernpool Contractor Affidavit 914677760 2429270 CITY OF NEW HOPE 219401 08-May-2020 24-Jul-2020 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL $155,429.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you, Contact Us if you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (emall) withholding.tax@state.mn.us, Business hours are 8:00 a.m, - 4:30 p,m. Monday - Friday. Please print this page, for your records using the print or save functionality built Into your browser. ai,.•flit-•rr:iMw 3$1,a...rrIr%0&I anr+l 1..6..rnl..k—Cha ..1-F%4n114^AAt ri...$..---.-J---r,I,..F DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0.769-291-552 19-Oct-2020 1:01:07 PM QUAD E COMPANIES INC 47-1839622 QuadECompanies Contractor Affidavit 900653056 4134254 CITY OF NEW HOPE GSC219401lDONLAR637 06-Aug-2019 21-Apr-2020 4401 XYLON AVE, NEW HOPE MN $60, 599.34 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or govemment agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-262-9999, (toll -free) 600-657-3594, or (email) withholding.tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 6:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday, Please pant lhis,page for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. 6/26/2020 https://www,mndor.state.mn.us/tpfeservices/_/Retrieve/O/c-/Xlg656wNMVkSRcpPy2g7_g_?FILE—= Print2&PARAMS= 756410156249... CAE PARTM E NT OF REVENUE ,PFp1-ovY.'l:'I' l el��f�4��rt4 a f.9�1?6f61btt�lj Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner. Project Number, Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-450-093-344 26-Jun-2020 9:03:32 AM HIGH PERFORMANCE COATINGS INC 27-3481187 HPCSAM Contractor Affidavit 1550819328 1756863 CITY OF NEW HOPE 367 24-Jun-2019 26-Jun-2020 4401 XYLON AVENUE N NEW HOPE, MN 55428 $101,639.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 661-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withholding.tax@state.mn,us, Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m, Monday - Friday. Please print this Ragg for your records using the print or save functionality built Into your browser. https://www.mndor.state.mn.usltpleservlcas/ /Retrieve/Ole-iXlg656wNMVkSRcpPy2g7g ?FILE, Print2&PARAMS_=7564101552497665067 1A 5/12/2020 https://www.mndor.state.mn.usltpleservices/_/Retrieve/0/c-/j_JhLJnv_CBomwm6fK1hvA_?FILE__=Print2&PARAMS= 200147035140... DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-680-287-776 12-May-2020 3:35:57 PM JOHN FOLEY MASONRY, INC. 82-2905913 jfmasonry Contractor Affidavit 1430593636 5255842 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 09-Jun-2019 22-Mar-2020 4401 XYLON AVE N NEW HOPE MN $766,382.05 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you, Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) wllhholding.tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please print this pggp. for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. htips:/lwww.mndor.state.mn.us/lp/eservicesl_/Retrieve/0/c-/j_JhLJnv_CBomwm6fK1hvA_?FILE= Print2&PARAMS-__=2001470351406221743 111 n1.1 .... ft. VEPAK-I-'MtN I 11friliOF REVENUE ,ontractor Affidavit Submitted lank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved onfirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: ffidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-464-281-888 30-Jun-2020 12:13:27 PM JSH CONSTRUCTION, LLC 27-2801249 jshconstructionllc Contractor Affidavit 1226334208 1642790 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 04-Sep-2019 17-Dec-2019 4401 XYLON AVE N, NEW HOPE, MN 55428 $32,200.00 No Subcontractors nportant Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. ontact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651.282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) Nithholding.tax@state,mn,us. Business hours are 8:00 a,m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. ease •nt this pggg for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. RECEI VE> 6 2020 ®onlar Const, Co. 8/5/2020 hhps://www,mndor.state.mn.us/tp/eservices/ /Retrleve/0/c-AoaCasjHw8Zn6At40016dQ_?FILE—=Print2&PARAMS_=123803705958145... i DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank youi your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date; Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractor Summary 1-960-536-352 5-Aug-2020 1:23:18 PM KLEIN ELECTRIC INC 41-0957918 k13904 Contractor Affidavit 434790400 7473904 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 15-Apr-2019 31-Jul-2020 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL, 4401 XYLON AV N, NEW HOPE, MN 55428 $470,947.37 Name ID Affidavit Number ALL STATE COMMUNICATIONS 2728312 1064280064 BROTHERS FIRE & SECURITY 1783707 2038784000 Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800.657-3594, or (email) withholding.tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please print this Ragg for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser https://www,mndor.state.mn.usltp/eservices/ lRetrieve/0tc-lioaCasjHwBZn6At40016dQ,_?FILET=Print2&PARAMS___=1238037059581457793 1/1 DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation' Number: Submitted Date and Time. Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota 0: Project Owner: Project Number: - Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractor Summary 0-693-187-872 5-Oct-2020 5:42:12 PM MARGOLIS CO 41-0662175 MargoTax Contractor Affidavit 2114248704 8259877 CITY OF NEW HOPE 995 19-Apr-2020 31-Jul-2020 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL $224,915.00 Name ID Affidavit Number DAVID HARRIS CONSTRUCTION 4219901 882663424 IRRIGATION BY DESIGN 2562720 904552448 MINNESOTA SODDING 5990486 549019648 Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Divislon at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withhold] ng.tax@state.mn.us, Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please print this p_agp for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. UhFAKIMENI rn OF REVENUE '.ontractor Affidavit Submitted hank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. :onfirmation Summary Confirmation Number: 1-363-075-360 Submitted Date and Time: 25-Jun-2020 1:16:17 PM Legal Name: METRO MFG INC Federal Employer ID: 41-0989133 User Who Submitted: metro-mfg Type of Request Submitted: Contractor Affidavit ►ffidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 713842688 6179510 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637178650 14-Oct-2019 11-May-2020 4401 XYLON AVE N. NEW HOPE, MN 55428 $23,164.00 No Subcontractors nportant Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you, :ontact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withholding.tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. lease ant this age for your records using the print or save functionality built Into your browser. DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number 0-313-772-320 Submitted Date and Time: 30-Jul-2020 11:11:26 AM Legal Name: MIDLAND GLASS CO INC Federal Employer ID: 41-1626233 User Who Submitted: midlandglassco Type of Request Submitted: Contractor Affidavit Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: 99377152 2398627 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 15-Apr-2020 10-Jul-2020 4401 XYLON AVE N NEW HOPE MN 55428 $56,613.00 Subcontractor Summary Name ID Affidavit Number STATE GLASS 6260174 348479488 Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) with holding, tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please ;nt�this pegg for your records using the print or save functionality built Into your browser. DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-707-369-248 17-Aug-2020 7:58:56 AM MIDWEST FIRE PROTECT INC 41-1111871 MidweslFire Contractor Affidavit 404250624 6340710 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 19-Sep-2019 05-Aug-2020 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL $55,438.87 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us It you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toil -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withholdIng.tax@atate.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p,m. Monday - Friday. Please 'print this p.@gp for your records using the print or save functionality built Into your browser. DEPARTMENT .. OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your'Gontractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: 0-914-123-040 Submitted Date and Time: 4-Aug-2020 9:55:11 AM Legal Name: NORTHERN AIR CORP 'Federal Employer ID: 41-1508221 -,User Who Submitted: NBishop Type of Request Submitted: Contractor Affidavit Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: 108355584 Minnesota 10: 3287106 Project Owner: CITY OF NEW HOPE Project Number: 637 Project Begin Date: 10-Apr-2019 Project End Date: 03-Aug-2020 Project Location: 4401 XYLON AVE N Project Amount: $772,665.00 Subcontractor.Summary Name ID Affidavit Number BUTLER CORING INC 5020187 17981440 NYCO INC 2272846 737828864 MARCUS GLOBAL INC 9431984 1978376192 Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withholding. tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday- Friday. Please print thtS papa for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. M�DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Your Contractor Affidavit request is Approved. A copy of this page MUST be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Submitted Date and Time 7-Jun-2021 2:0316 PM Confirmation Number: 0-631-526-536 Name: OMANN CONTRACTING COMPANIES INC ID: 4319297 Affidavit Number: 1631680416 Project Owner: CITY OF NEW HOPE Project Number: 637 Project Begin Date: 5/1/2020 Project End Date: 5/25/2021 Project Location: NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL Project Amount: $23,818.31 Subcontractors: No Subcontractors Please print this pag.@ for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser, DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-336-638-240 14-Jul-2020 8:52:43 AM QUAD E COMPANIES INC 47-1839622 QuadECompanies Contractor Affidavit 907173888 4134254 CITY OF NEW HOPE 995 06-May-2019 30-Jun-2020 4401 XYLON AVE, NEW HOPE, MN $1,400,000,00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) withhold Ing.tax a@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please Qdnt this pggp for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. Jon Polzin From: Sent: To: Subject: Please remit retention, Helmel, Deb <DHelmel@SiewertCabinet.com> Thursday, July 30, 2020 4:02 PM Jon Polzin IC-134 for New Hope Pool From: MN Revenue e-Services <eservices.mdor@state.mn.us> Sent: Thursday, July 30, 2020 4:01 PM To: Helmel, Deb <DHelmel@SiewertCabinet,com> Subject: Your Recent Contractor Affidavit Request This email is an automated notification and is unable to receive replies. Contractor Affidavit Completed Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: 1-082-059-040 Submitted Date and Time: 30-Jul-2020 4:00:36 PM Legal Name: SIEWERT CABINET & FIXTURE MNFCTG CO Federal Employer ID: 41-1362595 User Who Submitted: dhelmel Type of Request Submitted: Contractor Affidavit Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: 594173952 Minnesota ID: 5717058 Project Owner: NEW HOPE CITY HALL Project Number: 637 Project Begin Date: 24-Jul-2019 Project End Date: 16-Dec-2019 Project Location: NEW HOPE POOL 4401 XYLON AVE N NEW HOPE MN Project Amount: $27,598.02 Subcontractor Summary Name ID Affidavit Number KEYSTONE CONTRACTING INC 6873690 741957632 A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 8DD-657-3594, or (email) withholding.tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. 1 DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date andTime: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number. Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-347-640-096 8-Jul-2020 12:42:39 PM SOLAR MIDWEST INC 41-1772207 solarmidwest Contractor Affidavit 1701470208 1498801 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 26-Dec-2019 27-Dec-2019 eslgner Specialty Products NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL, NEW HOPE IAN $11.974.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594. or (email) wlthholding,tax@state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m, - 4.30 p.m Monday - Friday. Please printthis Ugg for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser, DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Colitractor Affidavit Completed Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Data: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-211-636-768 31-Jan-2020 10:45:04 AM SUNDE LAND SURVEYING LLC 41-1023510 slsllc Contractor Affidavit 1730306048 4008201 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637273930 19-Apr-2019 23-Apr-2019 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL $920 10 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us It you need furtriar assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (loll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) wilhholding.tax@state.mn,us, Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please i,i ,y:�g for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser het}is://www.nindor.state.nm.us/tp/eservices/ _/Retrieve/0/c-1PbkNB1JQijcwo0h_NigyJi+._,_... 1/31/2020 712712020 hllps:/Iwww.mndor,stale,mn.us/ip/eserviceslJRetrieve/0/c-/XrOu_Zl(cOB_XJJzboIPVdW_?FILE.._=Piinl2&PARAMS_=6974750701585, . DEPARTMENT 11 OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Dale and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Mlnnesola ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-948-291-872 27-Jul-2020 4:06:26 PM TRI STATE PUMP & CONTROL INC 41-1591915 MargteNsmec Contractor Aflldavll 731996160 2037478 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 01-Apr-2020 30-Apr-2020 4401 XYLON AVE $18,443.11 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 600-657-3594, or (email) withholding.tax@slale.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please print this page for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. https://www.rnndor.state.mn.us/tpleservlcesL IRetdovelO/c-/Xr8u ZKcOB_XJJzbolPVdw_?FILE= Print2&PARAMS_=6974750701585437224 1/1 8/12/2020 https://www.mndor,state.mn.us/tp/eservices/_[Retrieve/0/c-/7_n6O9bpig2ENg33j]wkTA_?FILE_=Print2&PARAMS_=8836978299777984355 DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Numb0: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner: Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 0-380-385.568 12-Aug-2020 3:52:48 PM TRITON STEEL LLC 81-4351231 tritonsteel Contractor Affidavit 1957650432 4930349 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 13-May-2019 06-Apr-2020 4401 XYLON AVE N, NEW HOPE MN 55428 $72,372.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you. Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-657-3594, or (email) with holding.taxQa state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m, Monday - Friday. Please grint thisp_agg for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser. hops;//www.mndnr state,mn.us/tp/cscrviccs? IRctricvcVc•17_n609bpig2EPig33jlwkTA.'?PI1..E_-Prim2&PARAMS--=8836978299777984355 111 Page 1 of l DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner; Project Number: Project Begin Date; Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 1-032-741-152 25-Jun-2020 2:25:00 PM TWIN CITY ACOUSTICS INC 41-0992645 TwinCllyAcousllcs Contractor Affidavit 1862213632 6235068 CITY OF NEW HOPE 637 16-Nov-2019 11-May-2020 NEW HOPE OUTDOOR POOL 4401 XYLON AVE N, NEW HOPE, ,MN 65428 $8,020.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A ropy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you, Contact Us If you need furlher assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9990, (loll -free) 600-657-3694, or (small) withholding,tax®state.mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please print f. patiFr for your records using Iho print or save functionality built Into your browser https://www:condor.state.fnn.us/tp/eservices/ /Retrieve/0/c-/eoD_XdXL8ES3eAlOvEf3gw... 6/25/2020 DEPARTMENT OF REVENUE Contractor Affidavit Submitted Thank you, your Contractor Affidavit has been approved. Confirmation Summary Confirmation Number: Submitted Date and Time: Legal Name: Federal Employer ID: User Who Submitted: Type of Request Submitted: Affidavit Summary Affidavit Number: Minnesota ID: Project Owner. Project Number: Project Begin Date: Project End Date: Project Location: Project Amount: Subcontractors: 1-396-924-704 26-Jun-2020 1,56:28 PM WELLS CONCRETE PRODUCTS CO 41-0778596 wc8536685 Contractor Affidavit 1189896192 8536685 CITY OF NEW HOPE 7047 01-Sep-2019 30-Nov-2019 4401 XYLON AVENUE NORTH, NEW HOPE MN 55428 $31,768.00 No Subcontractors Important Messages A copy of this page must be provided to the contractor or government agency that hired you, Contact Us If you need further assistance, contact our Withholding Tax Division at 651-282-9999, (toll -free) 800-667-3594, or (email) withholding.tax®state,mn.us. Business hours are 8:00 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Monday - Friday. Please punt 1nn1s oage for your records using the print or save functionality built into your browser 041,Document G704' -2017 Certificate of Substantial Completion PROJECT: (name and address) New Hope Outdoor Pool 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, Minnesota 55428 OWNER: (name and address) City of New Hope 4401 Xylon Avenue North New Hope, MN 55428-4898 CONTRACT INFORMATION: Contract For: General Construction Date: March 26, 2019 ARCHITECT: (name and address) Stantee Consulting Services Inc. 733 Marquette Avenue South Suite 1000 Mirlrieanolis. MN 55402 CERTIFICATE INFORMATION: Certificate Number: 001 Date: August 18, 2020 CONTRACTOR: (name and address) Donlar Construction Co. 550 Shoreview Park Road Shoreview, MN 55126 The Work identified below has been reviewed and found, to the Architect's best ksiowledgc, iufonmlion, and belief, to be substanu;tlly complete. 5ubstanlial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Doc umcnis so that rile Owner can occupy or uUlixe the Work For its intended use. 'i'he daze of Substantial Completion of the Project or portion dcsigrinted below is the date established by this Certificate. (Identify the Fgork, orlmrlion thereof, that is srr6sta?W01iy compleNe,) Stantec Consulting I ! �P Services Inc Bruce P. Paulson. PM Jul 10 2020 ARCHITECT (Firm Name) 1GINATU PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION WARRANTIES The date of Subslantial Completion of the Project or portion designated above is also the date of commencement of applicable w—niies required by the Contract Documents, except as stated below: (Idem 6fy warranries ihar do riot commenre an the dare of Srr6srantial Camplelion, if -any. and indicate iheir date of ommenceme"O Warranties will start July 31, 2020 WORK TO 9E COMPLETED OR CORRECTED A list of items to be completed or wrrecled is attached hereto, or transmitted as agreed upon by the parties, and identified as follows: (IdcnrJfy the list of Work to he completed or corrected) See attached punch]ist The failure to include any items on such list dons not alter the responsibility orthe Contractor to complete ail Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Unless ntherwise agreed to in wrid rig, she dale of commencement of warranties for items on the. amichcd Iist will be the date of issuance of the final Certificate of Payment or the date of ftnaI payment, whichcvcr occurs first. The Contractor will complete or oorrt:el the Work on idle list of items attached herein within { ) days from Pie above date of Substantial Completion. Cost estimate of Work to be completed or corrected: $234,000.00 The responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work, insurance, and other items identified below shall be as follows: (Note: Dsvner's and Comracror's legal and insurance caunsel should review insurance requirernents and coverage.) Effective August 7, 2020, the City of New Hope has added the buildings in this project to their insurance policy. The Owner and Contractor hereby pt the responsibi lilies assigned to them in this Certificate of Substantial Completion: Donlar Construction Co. SOY► ?vlt+ k AsyL PM 8 " 1 1 " 2 0 CONTRACTOR (fi7rnr NATU PRINTED !NAME AND TITLE DATE Name) City of New Hope OWNER (Firm Name) SIGNATURE PRINTED NAME AND TITLE DATE l.( •N r AIA Document 0704" - 2017. Copyright m 1963. 1978, 1992, 2000 and 2017 by The Amadum Institute of Architects. All dghls reserved. The ArrlericsV r - Ir1sYiLUte of Alchliecis;' "AIA; tho AIA Logo, acrid "AIA t,ontrad, 00cumenis o • P c! n.:ry fiot be u!,'Qd withoW perrnisvton This document was produced by AIA software at 10:49:07 ET on 06l1812020 under Order No,3664291797 which expires on 0210512021, is not for resale, Is licensed for one-time use only, and may only be used in accordance with the AIA Contract Documents° Terms of Service. To report copyright vloladons, e-mail copydghr ,14Y"3.rr.ar0 User Notes: [aBs:t]Asr j